tttH-vi.', r .V " . .<v



^'v-0*$v '■'■'''.■
w		7 ■'./'■."."-»'."
	"^••"•^r '\-	
		
	''v-2v^	{v\ ;\V/-'
	-* v^>	.v ■' xT-
	'*,v.	~viv^-
		
		
 
 
 
 
I.

DICTIONARY
OF
DENTAL  SCIENCE. 
 
A
DICTIONARY
DENTAL    SCIENCE,
BIOGRAPHY, BIBLIOGRAPHY,
MEDICAL  TERMINOLOGY.
BY
     CHAPIN A. HARRIS, M. D.-D. D. S.,


PROFESSOR OF THE PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF DENTAL SURGERY IN THE BALTIMORE

  COLLEGE—AUTHOR OF PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE OF DENTAL SURGERY, ETC.. ETC.
   LIBRARY
SURGlGN GENERAL'S OFFICE

    SEP,"1;m.8D8
     PHILADELPHIA:

LINDSAY  & BLAKISTON

             1849. 
H3l3d
I g. ;<j
  Entered, according to the act of Congrebs, in the year one thousand eight hundred
and forty-nine, by Lindsay & Blakiston, in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of
the Eastern District of Pennsylvania.
J. VT. "WOODB, PRINTER,
     Baltimore. 
                       TO







   ELEAZAR PARMLY,M. D.-D. D. S.,






      Provost of the Baltimore College of Dental Snrgery,




                   AS A TOKEN





OF ESTEEM  FOR GREAT PROFESSIONAL AND  PRIVATE WORTH




                       AND




       AS  A TRIBUTE OF AFFECTIONATE REGARD,





               THIS  WORK





        IS  RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED,





                       BY HIS FRIEND,





                              THE  AUTHOR. 
 
PREFACE.
  The scheme of the present work suggested itself to the
author several years ago, but it was not until the commence-
ment of 1846, that he determined to attempt its prepara-
tion, as he was fearful that the leisure which he might ob-
tain from  arduous professional  duties would  not be suffi-
cient to enable him to accomplish so great an undertaking.
To a profession already  existing  as an important branch of
Surgery,  and rapidly extending, some  Cyclopedia, em-
bracing satisfactory definitions of its technicalities, and a
compendium of necessary, important, and curious collateral
information, seems indispensable.  The several Medical and
Surgical  Dictionaries, however well adapted to  the wants
of the student and practitioner of general medical  science,
contain no information on the subject of practical dentistry.
Operations of every kind except those upon the teeth, are
there carefully described, and all manner of pathological
affections  examined  and illustrated, except those  peculiar
to the  organs of mastication.   Though  abounding with
words, they are deficient in those terms which are the com-
mon technicalities of Dental Surgery. 
viii
PREFACE.
   While  the necessity for  a Dictionary was thus urgent, it
 occurred to the author, that much interest would be given
 to  the work by inserting in it some brief account of the
 men who  have been the pioneers to the advancement of this
 part of surgery, and whose genius, industry, and self-devo-
 tion are worthy of the grateful remembrance of the profes-
 sion.  In order to obtain materials for such memoirs, as well
 as other information proper to be recorded in a work like the
 one proposed, a circular, setting forth the design and scope
 of the projected undertaking, and asking  contributions of
 the kind above stated, was sent to  every dentist in Europe
 and America, whose address could be procured.  But un-
 fortunately for the author and for those into  whose hands
 the work may fall, the information contained in most of the
 responses  which he received, was not sufficiently definite
 to be rendered available; yet, for the willingness manifested
 by those of his professional brethren who  did respond, to
 assist him  in carrying out the plan of the work, he takes
this first public opportunity to return his grateful acknow-
ledgments.  To  Dr. E.  B. Gardette, of Philadelphia, he
is indebted  for a well written biographical notice  of his
 father, the late Dr. James Gardette.   He  is also indebted
to Professor Paul F. Eve, of the Georgia Medical College,
 Drs. S. P. Hullihen, of Wheeling, Va., W. H. Elliot, of
 Montreal, and N. H. Fisher, of Providence, R. I., for much
valuable information, and to Dr. E. Townsend, of Phila-
delphia, for  a  biographical  notice of the late  Dr. Edward
Hudson.

  The author  has of course made free use of the Medical
and Surgical Dictionaries of the  day;  among  which he
/*---- 
PREFACE.
IX
would  particularly mention, Dunglison's, Hooper's, Palm-
er's, Gardner's, and  Cooper's.  It was  his  intention  to
have given due credit to each author for all original matter
taken from his pages, but this was soon found to be im-
practicable, inasmuch as a very superficial comparison of
the several works of the  kind, in our own  and other lan-
guages, served to show that definitions had been considered
common property, and transferred from one work to an-
other without acknowledgment, until the paternity was be-
yond satisfactory ascertainment.  He has, therefore, avail-
ed himself of the common privilege which seems to have
been claimed by all the lexicographers who have preced-
ed  him.  For the definitions of medical terms, he claims
no originality, although where alterations seemed necessary,
he has not hesitated  to make them, and in  all instances  he
has endeavored  to be as concise as possible.  In  this de-
partment of the  work he has confined himself, for the most
part, to mere definitions, but  upon  all subjects connected
with Dental Surgery  proper, as well as with the  anatomi-
cal  structures, diseases, treatment, and  operations on the
mouth  and adjacent  parts, this Dictionary will be  found
very full,  and  for all matter, not original, obtained from
other  sources than his own productions, proper credit is
given.

   In introducing the various formulae of dentifrices, mouth
washes, elixirs, and pastes, given  by different writers  on
dental hygiene and therapeutics, the author does not wish
to  be considered as recommending  their  employment.
Some of them  may be used with  impunity, and  perhaps
advantage, but most of them are objectionable. 
X
PREFACE.
   For the introduction of medical terms into the work, the
 author does not deem any apology necessary.   Dental Sur-
 gery is now  an  acknowledged specialty of general medi-
 cine, and a knowledge of the latter is certainly as necessary
 to the dentist, as to the aurist, the oculist, the obstetrician, or
 the  practitioner of any other branch  of the curative art.

   Owing to the difficulties which the author has  experi-
 enced in  procuring accurate reliable information, the bio-
 graphical department is not as full as he could  have desir-
 ed.   He  has, in  consequence,  been compelled  to  pass  in
 silence the names of many eminent  writers and practition-
 ers,  who  once occupied conspicuous places in  the dental
 profession, and to whom many of its  members are indebted
 for much of the  knowledge  they possess; while some  of
 the notices which he has introduced, were prepared  from
 very scanty and indefinite information.

   In the  bibliographical department, he has, in most in-
 stances, confined  himself to  the title or  name of the  pub-
lication noticed, and each will be found  under the name of
its author.   To have given a critical  analysis of each work
or paper, would have required more  space than could  con-
sistently have been devoted to this class of subjects.   He
has also, unintentionally, omitted to notice several publica-
tions—an  oversight which he did not discover until it was
too late for correction.

   The work, as it now appears, is the result of much labor
and patient effort to procure and furnish to the profession
to which he is ardently attached, a  compendium of infor- 
PREFACE.
xi
mation such as it  seemed to want.   The undertaking has
been accomplished—with what exertion and self-denial can
never be known to any who may look into these pages, nor
will the difficulties be remembered by  the author, if  he
shall have contributed something of value to the  literature
of the profession of  his choice, and removed any obstacles
from the path of the student.
                               CHAPIN A. HARRIS.
North East Corner of Charles and )
   Lexington streets.          5
Baltimore, March, 1849. 
 
DICTIONARY
DENTAL    SCIENCE
MEDICAL   TERMINOLOGY.
A.
ABB
ABB
   A. a I. owa, ana, of each.  See Ab-
 breviation.
   ABAL'IENATED. Abalienatus. Be-
 numbed;  rendered useless; separated;
 cut off.                    ,
   ABAPTIS'TON.  Abaptista.   The
 name by which the old trepan was de-
 signated.
   ABAREMO-TEMO.  A tree which
 grows in the mountains of Brazil, sup-
 posed to be a mimosa.
   ABARTICULA'TION, from ah and
 articulus, a joint.  That species of ar-
 ticulation which admits of manifest mo-
 tion.  See Diarthrosis and  Synarthro-
 sis.
   ABBREVIATION.   Abbreviatio;
 from brevis, short.  Abbreviations were
 formerly much used in medical prescrip-
 tions.  They consist of parts of words
 or certain symbols  by which the thing
 meant is designated.  Thus,
  A.  Jla.  Ana, of each.
  Abdom.  Abdomen, the belly.
  Jibs. febr.  Absente febre, in the ab-
sence of fever.
     2
   Add. Adde et addantur, add, let there
 be added.
   Ad lib.   Ad libitum, at pleasure.
   Admov.   Admoveatur,  let it be ap-
 plied.
   Adst. febre. Adstante febre, when the
 fever is on.
   Aggred.  febre.  Aggrediente  febre,
 while the fever is coming on.
   Altera, horis.   Alternis  horis, every
 other hour.
   Applic.   Applicetur, let there be ap-
 plied.
   Aq.  Aqua, water.
   Aq. bull.   Aqua bulliens, boiling wa-
 ter.
   Aq.  dest.  Aqua destillata,  distilled
water.
  Aq. marin.  Aqua marina, sea water.
  B. A.  Balneum arensc, a sand bath.
  Bain. tep. Balneum tepidum, a warm
bath.
  Bib.   Bibe, drink.
  Bis ind.   Bis indies, twice a day.
  Bol.  Bolus, a  bolus.
  Bull.  Bulliat,  let it boil. 
**
ABB
14
ABB
  B. V.   Balneum vaporis,  a vapor
bath.
  Cap.   Capiat, let him take.
  Cat.   Cataplasma, a cataplasm.
  Cath.   Catharticus, a cathartic.
  C. C.   Cornu cervi, hartshorn.
  C. M.  Cras mane, to-morrow morn-
ing.
  C. C. U.   Cornu cervi ustum, burnt
hartshorn.
   Cochl.  Cochleare, a spoonful.
   Cochl. inf. Cochleare infantis, a child's
spoon.
   Cochl. nutgn.  Cochleare magnum, a
large spoon.
   Cochl.  mod.  M'ochleare modicum, a
dessert spoon.
   Col.   Colatus, strained.
   Pomp.  Compositus, compound.
   Cunf.  Confectio, a confection.
   Cont. Continuetur, let it be continued.
   Cort.   Cortex, bark.
   C. V.  Cras vespere, to-morrow even-
 ing.
   Ctij.   Cujus, of which.
   Cujusl.   Cujuslibet, of any.
   Deb. spiss.  Debita spissitudo, a pro-
 per consistence.
   Dec.   Decanta, decanted.
   Decub. Decubitus, lying down, going
 to bed.
   De d. in d. De die in diem, from day
 to day.
    Dej. alvi.  Dejectiones  alvi,  alvine
 evacuations.
   Det.   Detur, let it be given.
   Dext. lat. Dextra lateralis,  right side.
   Dieb. alt. Diebus alternis, every other
 day.
    Dieb. tert.  Diebus tertiis, every third
 day.
    Dig.  Digeratur, let it be digested.
    Dil.   Dilutus,  diluted.
    Dim.  Dimidium, one-halS.
    Dist.  Distillata, distilled.
    Div.  Divide,  divide.
    Donee ah. sol. fuer. Donee alvus so-
  luta fuer it, until the bowels are opened,
    Drach.  Drachma, a drachm.
    Enem.  Enema, a clyster.
    Exhib. Exhibeatur, let it be exhibited
  F.  Fiat, let it be made.
  F. PH.  Fiat pilula, make into a pill.
  F. V. S.   Fiat venassectio, bleed.
  Filt.  Filtra, filter.
  Flor.   Flores, flowers.
  gr.  Granum, a grain.
  Gtt.  Gutta, a drop.
  Gum.  Gummi, gum.
  H. D.  Hora decubitus, at bed time.
  H. S. Hora somni, on retiring to rest.
  hid.  Indies, daily.
  Inf.   Infusum, infusion.
  Lat. dol. Lateri dolenti, to the pained
side.
  lb. Libra, a pound weight.
  Lim.   Limones, lemons.
  Liq.  Liquor, liquor.
  Lot.  Lotio, lotion.
  M.  Misce, mix.
  Mac.  Macera, macerate.
  Man.  Manipulus, a handful.
  Min.  Minimum, the 60th  part of a
drachm, by measure.
  Mist.  Mistura, a mixture.
  Mitt.  Sang.   Mittatur  sanguis,  let
blood be drawn.
  Mod. prces.   Modo  prascriptio,  in
the manner directed.
  Mm: sol. More solito, in the usual way,.
  Muc.  Mucilago, mucilage.      ':■«
  N.  Nocte, at night.              ?
  O.  Octarius, a pint. *   * -*   $.
   01.  Oleum, oil.       " „sj^~
   Omn. alt.  hot9.   Omnibus alferriis  ho-
ris, every other hour.
   Omn. Iwr.  Omni hora, every  hour.
   Omn. man.  Omni mane, every morn-
 ing.
    Omn. noct.  Omni nocte, every night.
   O. O.  O.   Oleum olivse  optimum,
 best olive oil.
    Ov.   Ovum, an egg.
    Ox.   Oxymel, a syrup of honey  and
 vinegar.
    Oz.   Unca, an ounce.
    P. JE.   Partes sequales, equal  parts.
    Part. vie.  Partitis vicibus, in divided
 doses.
    PH.  Pilula, a pill.
    P. r.  n.  Pro  re  nata, as  circum-
 stances may require.
:*: 
ABD
15
ABR
   P. rat. cet.  Pro ratione setatis, ac-
 cording to the age of the patient.
   Pirtv.   Pulvis, powder.
   Q,. P.   Quantum placet, as much as
 you please.
   Q,. S.   Quantum sufficiat, as much
 as is sufficient.
   Yfy,  Recipe, take.
   Rad.   Radix, root.
   Rect.   Rectificatus, rectified.
   Red. in pidv.  Redactus in pulverem,
 powdered.
   S. A.  Secundum  artem, according
 to art.
 • Scm.  Semen, seed.
   Semi-dr.    Semi-drachma,  half a
 drachm.
   Semi-h.   Semi-hora, half an hour.
   Serv.   Serva, keep; preserve.
   Si op. sit.  Si opus sit, if there be oc-
 casion.
   Sivir.perm.  Si vires permittant; if
 the strength will permit.
   Sol.  Solutio, solution.
   Soh.  Solve, dissolve.
   Sp.  Spiritus, spirit.
   Sq.  Squama, scale.
   Ss.  Semis, a half.
   St.  Stet, let it stand.
   Subtep.   Subtepidis, lukewarm.
   S. V.  Spiritus vinosus, spirit of wine.
   S. V. R. Spiritus vinosus rectificatus,
•rectified  spirits of wine.
   Syr.  Syrupus, syrup.
   T. O. Tinctura opii, tincture of opium.
   T. O.  C.   Tinctura  opii camphorata.
 Paregoric elixir.
   TV. or tinct.  Tinctura, tincture.
   Tril.   Tritura, triturate.
   Ung.   Unguentum, ointment.
   V. S.   Venaesectio, venaesection.
   Zz.  Zingiber, ginger.
  V[.  Minimum, a minim.
   9 .  Scrupulum, a scruple.
   5 .  Drachma, a drachm, troy.
   § .  Unca, an ounce, troy.
  lb •  Libra, a pound.
  ss.  Semissis, half.
  j.  one; ij. two; iij.  three; iv. four,
&.c.  See Prescription.
  ABDO'MEN.  From abdere, to hide,
 because it conceals the viscera.  The
 largest cavity in the body.   Superiorly,
 it is bounded by the diaphragm;  infe-
 riorly, by the pelvis; laterally and ante-
 riorly, by an expansion of muscles, and
 posteriorly, by the lumbar vertebras.
   ABDOM'INAL. Pertaining to the
 abdomen.
   ABDUCTOR.   From abducere, to
 separate.  A muscle  which separates
 the part or member to which  it is at-
 tached from some other part.
   Abductor Auricularis.  A portion
 of the posterior auris.
   Abductor Indicis Manus.  An in-
 terosseous muscle of the fore-finger.
   Abductor Indicis Pedis.  A muscle
 of the fore-toe.
   Abductor Medii Digiti Pedis.  A
 muscle of the foot.
   Abductor Minimi  Digiti  Manus.
 A muscle of the little finger.
   Abductor Minimi Digiti Pedis.  A
 muscle of the little toe.
   Abductor  Pollicis   Manus.  A
 muscle of the thumb.
   Abductor Pollicis Pedis.   A mus-
 cle of  the great toe.
   Abductor Tertii Digiti Pedis.  A
 muscle of the foot.
   ABERRATION. Aberralio; fromafc
 and errare,  to  stray; to wander from.
 To deviate  from that  which is natu-
 ral.
   ABLATION.  From avfero to take
 away.  The taking from the body that
 which is hurtful.
   ABLUTION. Ablutio; from abluere,
 to wash away.  The act cf cleansing
 or purifying with water.
   ABNORMAL.  From ah, from, and
 norma, rule.  Not conformable  to rule;
 irregular.
  ABORTION.  Abortio. Miscarriage;
 expulsion of the fetus before the sixth
 month.
  ABRA'SION.  Abrasio;  from abro-
 dere, to wear or rasp off.  In Medicine, the
word as generally employed, signifies
an excoriation of the mucous membrane
of the stomach, intestines, bladder,  &c. 
ABR
16
ABR
  Abrasion of the Teeth.  The wear-
ing away of the teeth, or gradual loss of
a portion of their substance.   It is pro-
duced both by mechanical and chemical
causes. When by the former, it is called
mechanical, and when by  the  latter,
spontaneous abrasion,
   Mechanical Abrasion of the Teeth.
  When the  incisores and cuspidati of
the upper jaw shut over the correspond-
ing teeth of the lower, the teeth rarely
suffer much loss of substance from me-
chanical causes; it is only in those cases
where the former fall plumb upon the
latter, that mechanical abrasion, in any
very  considerable  degree, takes  place,
but when  they  come together in this
manner,  their  crowns  sometimes be-
come entirely worn down to the gums,
or at least, those occupying the  ante-
rior  part  of the alveolar arch.  The
reason of this is obvious.   When the
upper and lower front teeth strike plumb
upon each other, the lateral  motions of
the jaw are not in the least restricted,
consequently the cutting edges  of the
incisores and points of the cuspidati,
as well as the cusps of the  bicuspides
and molares, though not as  much,  are
subjected  to an amount of friction to
which they are not exposed in any of
the other relationships which the upper
and lower teeth sustain to each other.
   It is thought by Mr. Bell, that certain
kinds of diet,  contribute  more to  the
abrasion of the teeth, than  others, and
this, to some extent, is, doubtless, true.
   The wearing away of the crowns of
the teeth would expose the lining mem-
brane, but for a most curious and sin-
gular provision of nature  which con-
sists  in the gradual obliteration of  the
pulp cayities, by a deposition of osseous
matter.  By this wise  provision of  na-
 ture, an event, from which the most
 painful  consequences  would result, is
 prevented,  so  that but little inconve-
 nience  results  from it, or, at any rate,
 not until the crowns  of the teeth  are
 worn down to the gums.
Spontaneous  Abrasion of the  Cutting
      Edges of the Front Teeth.

  Spontaneous abrasion  of the cutting
edges of the front teeth, is an affection
of rare  occurrence.  It commences on
the central  incisores of both  jaws at
the same  time, and from thence pro-
ceeds to the lateral incisores, the cuspi-
dati, and sometimes,  though not  very
often, to the first bicuspides.  Teeth that
are affected by it, have, when the jaws
are closed, a truncated appearance, do
not come closely together, and are rather
more than ordinarily susceptible to the
action  of acids,- heat, and cold.  In
other respects, little  or  no  inconveni-
ence  is experienced  from it until the
crowns  of the affected teeth are nearly
destroyed.
  Its progress is exceedingly variable.
It sometimes destroys half or two-thirds
of the crowns of the central incisores in
two or three years; at other times seven
or eight years are required for the same
effect to result from, it.  In one case
which came under the author's  observa-
tion the abrasion had extended to the bi-
cuspides; and the central incisores of
both jaws were so much wasted, that, on
closing  the  mouth they did not come
together by nearly three-eighths of an
inch, and but two  years had elapsed
since its commencement. In  another
case, where it  had been going on for
seven years, it had not  extended to the
cuspidati, and the space between the
upper and lower incisores, did not ex-
ceed  an eighth of an inch.  The sub-
jects  of both were gentlemen—the first
aged about,  twenty-eight,  the  other,
twenty-one.
  Mr. Bell gives an interesting case of
a gentleman whose teeth were affected
with this  disease:—"About  fourteen
months since, 1831, this gentleman,"
he says, "perceived that the edges of the
incisores, both above and below, had
become slightly worn down, and, as it
were, truncated, so  that they  could no
| longer  be placed in contact  with each 
ABR
17
ABR
other.  This continued to increase and
extend to the lateral incisores, and after-
wards, successively, to the cuspidati and
bicuspides.   There has been  no pain,
and only a trifling degree of uneasiness,
on taking acids, or any very hot or cold
fluids, into the mouth.  When I first
saw these  teeth, they had exactly  the
appearance of having been most accu-
rately filed down at the edges, and then
perfectly and beautifully polished; and
it has now extended so far, that  when
the mouth  is closed, the anterior edges,
of the incisores of the upper and lower
jaws are nearly a quarter of  an inch
asunder.  The cavities of those of the
upper jaw must have been exposed, but
for a very curious and beautiful provi-
sion, by  which they have become grad-
ually filled by a deposit  of new bony
matter, perfectly  solid and hard, but so
transparent that  nothing but examina-
tion by actual  contact, could  convince
an observer that they were  perfectly
closed.  This appearance is exceedingly
remarkable,  and  exactly  resembles the
transparent layers which are  seen in
agatose pebbles, surrounded by a more
opaque mass.  The surface is uniform,
even, and highly polished, and continu-
ous, without the least break, from one
tooth to another.   It extends, at present,
to the bicuspides, is perfectly  equal on
both sides, and when the molares are
closed, the opening, by this loss of sub-
stance in front, is observed to be Avidest
in the centre, diminishing gradually and
equally  on both  sides to the last bicus-
pides."
   Dr. J. D. McCabe, a dentist of Rich-
mond, Virginia, described to the author
in  1837, a  case he had seen a short time
before, very similar to the one mention-
ed by  Mr.  B.  He also gave  him the
name  and  age  of the individual and the
length of time the abrasion had contin-
ued; but these,  he does not  recollect
with sufficient accuracy to repeat.
   "On the cause of this very extraordi-
nary occurrence," says Mr. Bell, "I con-
fess myself wholly at a loss to offer even
a conjecture.   It cannot have been pro-
duced by the friction of mastication, for
these teeth have never been in contact
since the first commencement of the af-
fection; nor does it arise from any ap-
parent mechanical  cause;  for nothing
is employed to  clean the teeth, except-
ing a soft brush. Absorption will equal-
ly fail to account for it; for not only
would this cause operate, as it always
does, irregularly, but  we find that, in-
stead of these teeth being the subjects of
absorption, a new deposition  of bony
matter is, in fact, going on, to fill  the
cavities which would  otherwise be ex-
posed."
  Mr. Bell is correct in supposing that
it is not the result either of mechanical
action or absorption.   If, then, neither
of these agencies are  concerned in its
production, it must be the result of some
chemical action, though not of the sali-
vary fluid of the mouth, for if it was,
every part of the exterior surfaces of the
teeth would be acted on alike.  This
affection, the author believes, is produced
by  an acidulated condition of  the mu-
cous fluid of the mouth. The  anterior
surfaces of the upper  front teeth  not
being so frequently washed by  the sali-
va, the mucous secretions of the upper
lip, are  often  permitted to remain  on
these portions of the teeth for a consid-
erable length  of time, and to the pres-
ence of this, when in an acidulated con-
dition, the author believes the denuding
process to be attributable, while the abra-
sion of the cutting edges of the incisores
and cuspidati is caused by  acid mucus,
secreted by the mucous follicles of the
end of the tongue, which is brought in
contact with  the cutting extremities of
the front  teeth almost  constantly,  and
he  believes that it is  in this way  that
their loss of substance is effected.
   Dr. Niihn, a German physician, des-
cribes a gland  which he has recently dis-
covered in the interior of the tip of the
tongue.   It is  represented  as  having a
number of ducts opening through the
mucous membrane over it.  It is thought 
ABS
18
ACA
 to be a mucous gland, and it may be,
 that this gland in peculiar idiosyncrasies,
 or habits of body, secretes the acidulated
 mucus which is concerned in the pro-
 duction of the affection under considera-
 tion.  But, whether this hypothesis be
 correct or not, it is evidently the result
 of the action  of a chemical agent, and
 that this is furnished by the end  of the
 tongue is rendered more  than  probable
 from the fact, that it is brought in con-
 tact with the  cutting edges of the teeth,
 every time the mouth is opened.
  This, like some of the other affections
 of the teeth,  cannot  be  cured.   If the
 tendency to an acidulated  condition of
 the  mucous  secretions of the  mouth
 could be overcome or counteracted, its
 progress, perhaps, might  be  arrested.
 But, this is a branch of practice that
 comes rather within the province of the
 medical than  the dental practitioner, so
 that any directions upon the subject
 here, are unnecessary.
  ABRUS.  The name  of a genus of
 leguminous plants.
  Abrus Precato'rius.   Wild  or Ja-
maica liquorice.
  AB'SCESS. Abscessus; from abscedo,
I separate from,  or depart.  A  collec-
tion of pus in the cellular tissue, or
some other part, resulting from inflam-
mation and suppuration.  Abscesses are
designated  according to  the part in
 which they are situated.  See Alveolar
 Abscess.
  ABSCESSUS. Abscess.
  Abscessus Lumborum.  Lumbar ab-
scess.
  Abscessus  Mammje.  Mammary ab-
 scess.
  Abscessus  Pectoris.  Empyema.
  Abscessus  Pulmonum.  Empyema.
  Abscessus  Oculi.  Hypopion.
  Abscessus  Gangrjenosus.  Anthrax.
  Abscessus Capitis Sanguineus Neo-
 natorum.  Cephalasmatoma.
  ABSCIS'SION. Abscissio; from ab-
 scindcre, to cut off.  The excision of a
 morbid  or  superfluous part, especially
 of a soft part.
  ABSCISSIO   PR^EPUTII.   Cir-
cumcision.
  ABSINTHIUM.  Wormwood. See
Artemisia.
  ABSORBENT.  Absorbens ;  from
absorbere, to suck up.  A delicate trans-
parent vessel, which exercises the func-
tion of absorption ; also, any medicine
which destroys acidity in the stomach
and bowels, as magnesia, chalk, &c.
  Absorbent System.    The  vessels
and glands of the body which exercise
the function of absorption.
  ABSORPTION.  Absorptio;  from
absorbere, to suck, or drink up.  An or-
ganic function which  consists in the
taking up of substances by the absorbent
vessels.  In Chemistry, the word is used
to signify the conversion  of a gaseous
fluid, by a union with some other sub-
stances, into a fluid or solid.
  ABSTE'MIOUS.  Abstemius;  from
abs, without, and temetvm, wine.  Ab-
staining  from the use of wine.   The
word is  also used to signify temperate
living, with regard to diet, &c.
  ABSTERGENT. From abstergere,
to  cleanse.  Any application  which
cleanses the part to which it is applied;
a detergent.
  AB'STINENCE. Abstinentia;  from
abs, from, and tenere, to hold.  The act
of voluntarily refraining from any indul-
gence, as from the use of certain articles
of food, or drinks.
  ABSTRACTION.  From abstraho,
I  draw off.   In Chemistry, a word  used
to denote the separation  of  the  fluid
from the solid which it had dissolved.
  ACA'CIA.   Acacia;  from axq,  a
point, so called  because  of its spines.
The name  of  a  genus  of leguminous
trees and shrubs with pinnated leaves.
The Egyptian thorn.
  Acacia Catechu.  See Catechu.
  Acacia Gum.  Gum  arabic,  which
is colorless or of a pale  yellow; it is
hard, brittle, soluble in water, but not
in alcohol,  it is mucilaginous, and used
as a demulcent and for suspending oily
medicines. 
ACC                19                ACE
  Acacia Vera. The name of the tree
from which gum arabic is obtained.
  ACALE'PH^E.   Acalephans.   A
class of radiated animals.
  AC'ARUS.  The name of a numer-
ous genus of insects.  The tick.
  Acarus Domesticus.  Domestic tick,
found in the head, and near gangrenous
sores, and on dead bodies.
  Acarus Scabiei.  The itch tick.
  Acarus Autumna'lis.  The harvest
bug, or wheel insect. There are also
several other species.
  ACCELERATION.  Acceleratio.—
Increase of motion.
  ACCELERATOR URI'NJE.  A
muscle of the penis.
  ACCENT. Inflection  of the voice.
  ACCES'SION.   Accessio; from  ac-
cedere, I approach. The commencement
of a disease.
  ACCESSORY.  From accedere,  I
approach. Connected with, or depend-
ent upon any thing; helping to produce
an effect.  It is also a name  given to
several muscles and nerves.
  ACCIDENT.   Accidens; from ac-
cidere, to happen.  Literally, the occur-
rence of an  event not foreseen  or ex-
pected. In Pathology, the unexpected oc-
currence of any thing in the course of a
disease  not  essentially connected with
it, and hence differing from an inherent
symptom or phenomenon. In Surgery,
hemorrhage, erysipelas and severe pain,
constitute the accidents  of a wound.
In Dental Surgeiy, an injury inflicted
upon any part of the mouth in the per-
formance of an operation, or from the
application of a remedy.  See Fractures
of the Teeth, and of the Alveolar  Pro-
cesses ;  also,  Hemorrhage after the Ex-
traction of Teeth.   The term is applied,
too,  by  French dentists, to the mor-
bid  phenomena which develop  them-
selves during dentition.
  ACCIP'ITER.   From accipere, to
take.  A name given  to a bandage  ap-
plied over the nose, from its likeness to
the claw of a hawk.
  ACCLI'MATED.  Climali assuelus;
from ad, and clima,  climate.  Accus-
tomed to a climate.
  ACCOUCHEMENT. Parturition.
  ACCOUCHEUR. A man who prac-
tices midwifery,
  ACCRETION. Accretio; from ad,
and crescere, to increase.  Growth; also,
a growing together of parts.
  Accretion of the Jaws.  See Den-
tition, second,
  ACEPHALUS.  From a, priv. and
xsfyaty, a head.   A monster without a
head.
  ACER.  Acrid, sharp.
  Acer Sacchari'num.   Maple; su-
gar maple.
  ACERB'. Acerbus; from acer, sharp.
A sour, bitter and astringent taste, prop-
erties met with in some kinds of unripe
fruit.
  ACE'RIDES.   From a,  priv. and
swypoj, wax.  A plaster without wax.
  ACES'CENT.  Acescens; from aces-
cere, to grow sour.  Turning sour; a
tendency to acidity.
  ACETAB'ULUM.   From acetum,
vinegar, because it resembles the old
saucer in which vinegar was held.   A
name  given to  the  cavity  which re-
ceives the  head of the  os femoris,  or
thigh bone.
  ACE'TAS.   From acetum, vinegar.
A salt formed by the union of acetic acid
with an earthy, alkaline, or metallic base.
An acetate.  The medicinal acetates are
those of ammonia, potassa, zinc and lead.
  Acetas Ammonle.  Acetate of am-
monia.
  Acetas  Plumbi.  Acetate of lead ;
sugar of lead.
  Acetas Potassje.  Acetate of potas-
sa; a salt formed by the  union of sub-
carbonate of potassa and acetic acid.
  Acetas  Zinci.  Acetate of zinc, a
salt  formed by the union  of zinc and
acetic acid.
  ACETIC ACID.  Acidum aceticum,
vinegar; distilled vinegar.   This  acid
when  in an impure and dilute state, is
railed vinegar. There are four varieties
of acetic acid, viz. wine vinegar, malt 
ACH
20
ACI
vinegar, sugar vinegar, and wood vine-
gar.  This acid unites readily with most
of the earths;  it acts slowly upon the
teeth, increases  their  sensibility, and
puts them on edge.  In Medicine, it is
used as a rubefacient.
  ACETIMETER.   An instrument
for ascertaining the strength of vinegar.
  ACETONE. From acetum, vinegar.
Pyro-acetic spirit.
  ACEOTO'SA.  From acesccre, to be
sour.  Sorrel.
  ACETOSEL'LA.   From  acetosa,
sorrel,  because  of the acidity  of its
leaves.  The wood sorrel, on account of
the grateful taste of  its leaves, is some-
times used in salads, but  the oxalic
acid which it contains, is  exceedingly
hurtful to the teeth, inasmuch as it has
a much stronger affinity for the lime of
these organs than the  phosphoric acid
with which it is united.   The teeth of
persons in the country where sorrel
abounds, are often injured by being fre-
quently rubbed with its leaves for the
purpose of removing stains  and discol-
orations from them.
  ACETUM.  From acer, sour.  Vin-
egar; a sour liquid, produced by fermen-
tation.
  Acetum Aromaticum.  Aromatic
vinegar.
  Acetum Cantharidis.  Vinegar of
cantharides.
  Acetum Colchici.  Vinegar of mea-
dow saffron.
  Acetum Destillatum. Distilled vin-
egar.
  Acetum Opii.  Vinegar of opium.
  Acetum Scill^;.  Vinegar of squills.
  ACHEI'LIA.  From a, priv.  and
^fiXoj, lip.  A malformation, consisting
in a deficiency of one or both lips.
  A'CHEIR.   From <*, priv. and x"p,
hand.  Without hands.
  ACHILLE'A.  The name of a genus
of composite plants.  Milfoil; yarrow.
  Achillea Age'ratum.  A plant pos-
sessing the qualities  of tansy.
   Achillea Atra'ta.   A plant pos-
sessing the same or similar properties.
  Achillea  Millefolium.    The
common yarrow, or milfoil.
  Achillea Ptar'mica.  Sneezewort,
or bastard pillitory.
  ACHIL'LES.  The name of a Gre-
cian  hero, after whom a tendon  and
plant have been named.
  Achillis Tendo.   The strong round
tendon of the gastrocnemii muscles.
  A'CHOLUS.   From a, priv.  and
Z<&*i> bile.  Deficiency of bile.
  ACHRAS.   The sapota plumb-tree.
  Achras Sapota. The name of a tree
in South  America, bearing a delicious
fruit, and having a very astringent bark.
  ACHROMAT'IC.   From a,  priv.
and *p«|ua, color.  A lens constructed
so as to correct the refrangibility of the
common lenses.
  ACID.  Any liquid, solid, or gaseous
body, imparting to the organs of taste a
sour sensation.  The  acids constitute a
very numerous class of chemical  sub-
stances.  When combined with the al-
kaline and other bases, they form a class
of bodies called  salts.
  ACID'IFIABLE.  Capable of being
converted into an acid, by uniting with
an acidifying principle.
  ACIDIFICATION. The act of being
changed into an acid.
  ACI DIT Y.  Sourness of the stomach.
  ACIDULOUS.  Slightly acid.
  ACIDUM.   From  acer,  sour.  An
acid.
  Acidum  Aceticum.   See  Acetic
Acid.
  Acidum Aceticum Dilutum.  Dilute
acetic acid.
  Acidum Aceticum Concentratum.
Concentrated acid of vinegar; vinegar
deprived of its water.
  Acidum Acetosum.  Acetum.
  Acidum Arsenicum.  See Arseni-
ous Acid.
  Acidum Benzoicum.  See Benzoic
Acid.
  Acidum  Boracicum.  See  Boracic
Acid.
  Acidum Carbonicum.  See Carbonic
Acid. 
ACO               21               ACR
  Acidum   Aluminosum.  Sulphuric
acid.
  Acidum Citricum.  See Citric Acid.
  Acidum Muriaticum.  See Muriatic
Acid.
  Acidum Muriaticum Oxygenatum.
See Oxygenated Muriatic Acid.
  Acidum Nitricum.  See Nitric Acid.
  Acidum  Nitrosum.  See  Nitrous
Acid.
  Acidum Phosphoricum.  See Phos-
phoric Acid.
  Acidum Succinicum.  See Succinic
Acid.
  Acidum Sulphureum.  See Sulphu-
reous Acid.
   Acidum Sulphuricum.  See Sul-
phuric Acid.
  Acidum Tartaricum.  See Tartaric
Acid.
  Acidum Vitriolicum. See Sulphuric
Acid.
  ACINE'SIA.   From a priv.  and
xwtjavi, immobility.  Loss of motion.
  ACINUS.  A grape stone.  In Anat-
omy, the ultimate secreting follicles of
glands.   The granulations of conglom-
erate glands, as in  the liver, &c. are
called acini.
  ACIPEN'SOR. The name of a genus
of  fish of the order  chondropterygii.
The sturgeon.
   ACMASTICOS.  From axfirj, the
top, and tj-raw, I remain.  A species
of  fever which preserves a uniform in-
 tensity to the end.
   ACME.   From  ax^,  vigor.   The
height of a disease.
   ACNE.   Acna.   A small pimple on
the face.
  ACOL'OGY.  Acohgia; from axoj,
a remedy,  and toyoj,  a discourse.  A
treatise on remedies.
  ACONITINA. From aconitum; the
name of a plant.  A poisonous alkaloid
extracted from the  aconitum napellus.
  ACONITUM. Aconite.  Monkshood;
wolf's-bane.  Also,  the name of a genus
of plants, of which the  aconitum na-
pellus is the most important.
  Aconitum Antho'ra.  A plant pos-
sessing virtues similar to  those of the
aconitum napellus.
  Aconitum Napel'lus.  Aconite; the
common monkshood, or wolf's-bane.
  ACONU'SI.   From axo*/, audition,
and vovoos, disease.  Diseases  of the
ears and audition.
  A'COR.   From aceo,  to  be  sour.
Acidity; acrimony.
  ACO'RIA.  Canine appetite.
  A'CORUS. The name of a genus of
plants.
  Acorus Calamus.   Sweet flag.
  ACOTYLE'DON.  Without a coty-
ledon.
  ACOU'STIC. Acusticus; fromaxoixa,
I hear.   Belonging to the ear, as the
acoustic nerve, acoustic medicine, &c.
  ACOUSTICS.  The science of the
cause, nature, and phenomena of sounds.
  ACRA'LEA.   From asepoj, extreme.
The extremities, as the hands, feet, head,
ears, nose, &c.
  ACRID.   From axpo$, a point or
summit.   Things  which have a hot,
pungent taste.
  ACRIMONY. Acrimonia; from acris,
acrid.  A quality in  substances which
irritates, corrodes, or dissolves others.
  ACRIS'IA. From a priv.  and xptvw,
to judge.   A state  of disease,  with
regard to which no  correct  judgment
can be formed.
  ACROCHORDON.   From <xxPo?,
extreme, and x°?ty> a string. A small,
dense tumor, attached by a narrow base
or pedicle.
  ACROMA'NIA.  From axpoj, ex-
treme, and /xavia, madness.   Incurable
madness.
  ACRO'MIAL.  Acromialis. Pertain-
ing to the acromion.
  Acromial Artery.  The external
scapular artery.
  Acromio-Coracoid.   Belonging or
relating to  the acromion  and coracoid
processes.
  ACRO'MION. From axpoj, extreme
and  (0,1105,  the shoulder.   A  process
of the shoulder blade; the one termina-
ting the spine of the scapula. 
ACU
90
ADA
   A'CROPIS.   From axpor,  the  ex-
 tremity, and 04, the voice.  Faulty ar-
 ticulation, from a defect in the tongue.
   ACROT'ICA.   From axpoj,  sum-
 mit.   Diseases affecting the  external
 surface of the body.
   ACROTE'REA.  The extremities of
 the body.
   ACROTISMUS.  From a, priv. and
 xpo-toi, pulse.   Defect of pulse;  as-
 phyxia.
   ACTION.  Actio; from agere, to act.
 The exertion of  power or force;  the
 operation of an active power.  In Physi-
 ology,  the functions  of the body may
 be  divided into voluntary,  involuntary
 and mixed.   The voluntary are  those
 which are produced by acts of the will:
 the involuntary, are those excited either
 mediately, through the nerves and spinal
 marrow, or immediately, as those of ir-
 ritability ; and to the mixed, belong the
 acts of respiration.
  Action, Morbid.  A derangement of
 the ordinary functions of the body.
  ACTIVE.  Actimis.  Acting with en-
 ergy. Applied to medicines and diseases.
  ACTUAL  CAUTERY.  A heated
 iron.   This was once much used by sur-
 geons  for the extirpation  and cure of
 diseases.
  ACUPUNCTURE.   Acupunctura;
 From  acus, a needle, and punctura, a
 puncture.  The  puncturing  of parts
 with a small needle.
  ACUS.  A needle.
  ACUTE.   Sharp.   In Pathology a
 sharp pain; a disease characterised by a
 certain degree of  severity, or which is
 attended by violent symptoms, and runs
its course in a few days.
  ACUTENACULUM. Porte-aiguil-
le.  A  needle-holder.
  Acuten^culum,  Dr.  Hullihen's.
An instrument  invented by  Dr. S. P.
 Hullihen, of Wheeling, Va. to be used
in passing the needle through the cleft
edges of the soft palate  in the operation
of staphyloraphy.  This instrument is
composed of two parts, a stafl'and a slide.
The staff is a  small steel bar, six inches
 in length,  two-eighths of an  inch in
 breadth, and one-eighth of an inch in
 thickness,  with an  arm  at  the supe-
 rior end, rising at a curved  right angle
 from the staff, and half an inch long.
 On the external or superior  side of this
 arm, a duplicate  arm  is  retained  by
 a steel spring attachment, which brings
 the two arms in close  contact,  forming
 the  jaws   of  the  instrument.   Be-
 tween  these two arms,  and   on  the
 duplicature is a small  groove formed to
 receive the ligature, and when  the liga-
 ture is pressed between the jaws of the
 instrument, they open, and it  slides to
 the point designed for its reception, and
 immediately below which, the jaws are
 perforated with a hole for  the introduc-
 tion of the needle during the  employ-
 ment  of the instrument in the opera-
 eration.  Two inches from the inferior
 end of the staff, a pair of rings are affixed
 to receive the thumb and  index finger,
 the rings standing  parallel with  the
 staff, and sideways to the direction of the
 arms of the instrument. A slide formed
 of steel, equal in length, thickness, and
 breadth to the staff, and made to  fit to the
 upper surface of the  staff, and  to move
 with ease up and down on guides placed
 on the same.  From the  superior end
 of the slide is a short straight spear-
 shaped needle, constructed with an eye
just back of its point, with a small notch
 opening to it from the upper surface.
  When the ligature has been  fitted in
 its place of reception in the jaws of the
 instrument, and the slide adjusted to the
 staff; the slide is forced upwards, the
 needle and  jaws approach each other,
 and the needle passes through the hole
 in the latter just under the ligature,
 which is caught in the notch of the nee-
 dle, and as the slide is drawn backwards,
the eye of the needle is threaded  and the
ligature drawn through the velum, and
 the introduction of the stitch complet-
ed.                             *
  ADAM'S  APPLE.   See  Pomum
Adami.
  ADAMANTINE  CEMENT.   A 
ADH               23                 MT
nostrum used for filling teeth, consisting
of finely pulverized silex or pumice-
stone, mixed with an amalgam of mer-
cury and silver.  See Amalgam.
  ADDUCTOR.   From ad, and  du-
cere, to  draw.  A  name given to those
muscles that draw together the parts of
the body to which they are attached.
  Adductor Brevis Femoris. A mus-
cle of the thigh.
  Adductor Indicis Pedis.  A mus-
cle of the foot.
  Adductor Longus  Femoris.    A
muscle of the thigh.
  Adductor Magnus Femoris.  Also,
a muscle of the thigh.
  Adductor Minimi Digiti Pedis.  A
muscle of the foot.
  Adductor  Pollicis  Manus.   A
muscle of the thumb.
  Add.uctor Pollicis Pedis.  A mus-
cle of the great toe.
  Adductor Tertii Digiti Pedis.  A
muscle of the foot.
   ADECTA.  Sedatives.
  A'DEN.   A gland.
  ADEN'iFORMIS.  From aden, a
gland, and forma, resemblance. Resem-
bling a  gland.
   ADEN'ITIS. From aden, a gland,
 and it is action, but used to denote in-
 flammation.  Glandular inflammation.
   ADENOG'RAPHY.    From  aSyv,
 a gland, and ypa^co, I describe.   A de-
 scription of the glands.
   ADENOL'OGY.  Adenologia; from
 aSriv, a gland, and xoyoj, a discourse.  A
 treatise on the glands.
   ADENO'SUS. Adenoma. From afyv,
 a gland.  Gland-like.
   ADEPS.  Lard; the fat of the hog.
   A'deps Prjeparata. Prepared hog's
 lard.
   ADHE'SION.   Adhcesio; from ad-
 hcereo, to stick to. The sticking or grow-
 ing together of parts.
   ADHESIVE INFLAMMATION.
 Inflammation which terminates by an
 adhesion of the inflamed and separated
 surfaces.
   Adhesive Plaster.  A  plaster pos-
sessed of adhesive qualities used by sur-
geons.
  ADIANTUM. The name of a genus
of ferns.  Maidenhair. See Asplenium.
  ADIPOCIRE. Adipocera, homadeps,
fat, and cera, wax.  The base of bil-
liary  calculi,  sometimes  called   cho-
lesterine.  Also, a  fat like substance
formed from animal matter uflder cer-
tain circumstances.
  AD'IPOSE.  From adeps, fat. Fatty.
  AD'JUVANT.  From  ajuvare,  to
aid.  A medicine added to a  prescrip-
tion to assist the operation of the princi-
pal ingredient.
  ADNATA TUNICA. Conjunctivia.
  ADOLES'CENCE. From adolescere,
to grow.  Growing ; applied to the hu-
man race ; the period between puberty
and the full development of the body.
  ADULA'RIA.  A mineral, the most
perfect variety of feldspar.
  ADULT AGE.  The age succeed-
ing adolescence.
  ADVENTITIOUS.     Adventitius;
from advenio, I come to.    Accidental;
not inherent.   In Medicine,  acquired
diseases.
  ADYNA'MIA.   Impotentia; from a
priv. Swa/jiis, power.  A defect of vital
power; debility.
  ^EROL'OGY. A^rologia;  fromc^p,
air, and %oyos, a discourse.  A treatise
on the nature and properties of air.
  iEROM'ETER.   An instrument for
ascertaining the  weight of  air, or bulk
of gases.
  ^S'CULUS.  From esca, food. The
name  of a genus  of plants.  Horse-
chesnut.
  tEsculus   Hippocas'tanum.   The
horse-chesnut tree.
  J5TAS.  Age.
  AETHER.  Ether; from atfyp, air.
A volatile liquor, obtained by distilla-
tion, from alcohol and a  concentrated
acid.
  ./Ether   Rectificatus.   Rectified
ether.
  ^Ether  Sulphuricus.   Sulphuric
ether. 
AGE
24
AGE
   ^ETHEREA.  The ethers.
   /Etheiual Oil.  OleumiEtherium.
   ^ETHMOID.  Ethmoid.
   ^ETIOL'OGY.   Mtiologia;   from
 tuna, a cause,  and  a.oyoj; a discourse.
 The doctrine of the causes of disease.
   AFFECTION. Affectio; from officio
 or qffectare, I move or influence.  The
 word as used, is synonymous with dis-
 ease.
   AFFINITY.  Attraction, or that ten-
 dency which different substances have
 to unite.
   Affinity, Compound.   Affinity is
 called compound, when three or more
 bodies, by their mutual attraction, unite
 and form one homogeneous body.
   Affinity, Double.  Double  elective
 attraction.   "When two bodies,  each
 consisting of two elementary parts, come
 in contact, and are decomposed, so that
 their elements become reciprocally unit-
 ed and  produce two  new compound
 bodies, the decomposition is then term-
 ed decomposition by double affinity."
   AFFUSION. Affusio; from affun-
 dere, to pour upon.  The pouring of any
 liquid upon any body.
   AGACEMENT  DES  DENTS.—
 Teeth set on edge.
   AGARICUS MINERALIS.   One
 of the purest of the native carbonates of
 lime.
   Agaricus Piperatus.  The pepper
 mushroom,  or pepper  agaric.
   Agaricus Violaceus.  Violetmush-
 room.
   AGATE. A mineral  consisting  of
 chalcedony, blended  with jaspar, ame-
 thyst, quartz, opal, heliotrope, and cor-
 nelian, in variable proportions.
   AGE.   In Human  Physiology, the
 duration of the life of man: also, a cer-
 tain period of life marked by a difference
 of sjate.  The ancients divided life into
 six stages:  1.  Infantia  vel  pueritia,
 reckoned from birth to the fifth year  of
 age.  2. Adolescentia, oztas bona; youth,
 reckoned to  the eighteenth, and youth,
 properly so  called, to the  twenty-fifth
year. 3. Juventus, from the  twenty-
 fifth to the thirty-fifth year.  4.  Virilis
 oztas,  cetas frmata, thirty  years;  oztas
 constans, forty years; cetas matuera, fifty
 years; manhood, from the thirty-fifth to
 the fifty-fifth year.  5.  Sencclus,  oztas
 provecta, oztas mala; old age,  from fifty
 to sixty.  6. Crepita oztas,  oztas  ingra-
 vescent, cetas decrepita, oztas qffecta, oztas
 exacta, oztas extrema: decrepid age, end-
 ing in death.
   The most common division of life is
 into four stages, or ages; namely, infan-
 cy, youth, manhood, and old age.  But
 the division of Halle seems  to be more
 distinctly marked by changes in the econ-
 omy than any other.  He divides life into,
   1. Infancy, extending  from birth to
 the seventh year of age.   To this, three
 subdivisions have  been  proposed.  1.
 The period of the commencement of the
 eruption of the  temporary teeth, which
 is usually about the seventh month from
 birth.   2. The period of the completion
 of  first  dentition, which is ordinarily
 about  two-and-a-half years after birth.
 3. When the temporary teeth begin to
 be  replaced by the permanent teeth.
   2. Childhood, from the seventh to the
 fifteenth year, during which period the
 whole contour of the face and expres-
 sion of the countenance is changed by
 the elongation of the jaws, development
 of the alveolar borders, and dentition of
 all the permanent teeth, except the den-
 tes sapientise, or last molares.
  3.  Adolescence, or  adolescentia,  ex-
 tending from the fifteenth to the twenty-
 fifth year of age, during which period,
 the jaws elongate sufficiently  to  admit
 the last molares, the eruption of which
 completes the dentition of the perma-
 nent teeth.
  4. Adult age, or virilitas, a period of
 life extending in man from the twenty-
 fifth to the sixtieth year of age, and in
 woman from the twenty-first to the fif-
 tieth.  This period is divided again, in-
 to increasing, established, and decreasing
 virihty, during which, the teeth undergo
no change except that  which  they  ex-
perience from disease. 
AGR
25
AL^E
    5.  Old age,  or senectus,  embracing
 that period when the powers of the body
 are declining, ending in death.   During
 this time, the alveolar processes often
 waste away, causing the teeth to loosen
 and drop  out.
    AGEUSTIA. From  »,  neg.  and
 ysvofiai,,  gusto,  to  taste.  A  loss or
 diminution of taste.
    AGGLOM'ERATE. From agglom-
 erare, to wind up yarn into a ball, to
 collect together.  Applied to humors or
 glands in aggregation.
   AGGLUTINATION.  From Agglu-
 tinare, to glue together.   The  sticking
 together of divided parts, as the lips of
 a wound.
   AG'GREGATE. Aggregatus; from
 aggregare, to assemble together.  Bod-
 ies  of the  same kind  when  united
 together,  are called  an  aggregate.
 Glands which are in clusters are called
 aggregatse.
   AGITATION. Agitatio; from agere,
 to act.  Restlessness; constant move-
 ment of a patient; inquietude.  It often
 arises  from the irritation attending den-
 tition.  See Dentition, Morbid.
   AGLOS'SIA.  From a, priv. and y%u-
 oau, the tongue. Absence of the tongue.
   AGLIUM. A glossy tubercle on the
 face;  also, a white speck on the eye.
   AGNATHIA. From  a, priv. and
 yfo&oj, jaw.  A malformation consisting
 in the want of the jaw.
   AGNOIA.  From a, priv. and ywo-
 axa>, I  know.  Want of memory; forget-
 fulness.
   AGOMPHI'ASIS.^gomj)/iosis; from
 a  priv. and yo^ou, I  nail.   Looseness
 of the teeth.  See Gomphiasis.
   AGRI'FOLIUM.  From omj, a pric-
 kle, and (pv%%ov, a leaf.  The holly tree.
   AG'RIMONIA EUPATORIA. The
 common agrimony.
   Agrimony Hemp. Eupatorium can-
nabinum.
  AGRIOTHYM'IA.  From  oypwj,
wild, and $vfios,  disposition.  Furious
insanity.
  AGRIPAL'MA.  From oypioj, wild,
  and rtaXfia, a palm tree. Motherwort, or
  wild palm.
    AGRYP'NIA.  From a, priv. and
  vrtvos, sleep. Sleeplessness, watchfulness.
    AGUE.  See Intermittent Fever.
    Ague and Fever. Intermittent fever.
    Ague, Dead. Ague, Dumb.   An ir-
  regular or masked intermittent.
    Ague Drop.  A solution of arseniate
  of potassa in water.
    Ague, Free. Laurus sassafras.
    Ague Weed.  Eupatorium perfolia-
  tum.
    Ague Cake.  A  hard tumor on the
  left side below the false ribs, caused by
  a  visceral obstruction,  generally of the
  spleen, which may be felt externally. It
  is  the effect of intermittent fever.
    AIMA.  Blood.  SeeHcema.
    AIR.  Aer;  from ao, I breathe. At-
  mospheric air.  This is an elastic in-
  visible fluid.  It surrounds the earth to
  the height, it is said, of fifteen or six-
  teen leagues, and can be formed of the
  various  bodies which compose its sur-
  face.
   Air Cells of the  Lungs.  Bron-
  chial cells.
   Air Passages.  The  larynx, trachea,
 bronchia, &c.
   A'LA. Pinna; pleryx. A wing.  Parts
 projecting like a Aving  from the  me-
 dian line are designated by  anatomists
 by this name, as the ala? nasi, &c.
   Ala Auris.  The wing of the ear.
 This is the upper part of the external ear.
   Ala Nasi. The cartilage which forms
 the outer part of the nostril.
   ALABASTER.  A variety of com-
 pact gypsum;  it has a white or greyish
 color.  It was at one time much used in
 dentifrices, but at present ^ seldom em-
 ployed for this purpose.  When  used
 upon the teeth, no matter how finely it
 may be pulverised, it  gets between the
 free edges of the gum and necks of these
 organs, where  its mechanical action is
 often productive of much injury.   .
  ALiEFORM. Alceformis.  From ula,
a wing, and forma, a resemblance.  Re-
sembling a wing; wing-shaped. 
ALB
26
ALI
  ALBERTI. Dissertation on the Late-
ness of the Wisdom Teeth, by.   Halle,
1737.  Although this dissertation fails to
explain satisfactorily the  cause of the
tardiness which the dentition of the wis-
dom teeth sometimes exhibit, it contains
some  ingenious hypotheses upon the
subject.
  ALBI'NO.  From albus,  white.  A
Spanish word applied to the white pro-
geny of negro parents.  The skin has a
pallid hue; the hair on every part of the
body is white; the iris has a pale red-
dish color, and is so sensitive that it can
scarcely bear the light of day. The term
is also applied to all persons who have
these characteristics.
  AL'BORA. A species of leprosy.
  ALBRECHT.  Expedient cure  for
tooth-ache, by.  Hamburg, 1809.
  ALBUGIN'EA OCULI.  The white
fibrous membrane of the eye,  situated
immediately under the conjunctiva. The
white of the eye.
  Albuginea Testis.  The thick, white
membrane, which immediately  invests
the testicle.
   ALBUGIN'EOUS.    From  albus,
white. A term applied by anatomists
to  textures  and  humors which  are
white.
  ALBU'GO.  From albus, white.   A
white opacity of the cornea of the eye.
  Album Grjecum. Album canis. The
white faeces  of dogs.
  ALBU'MEN. Albumine; from albus,
white. Coagulable lymph. It constitutes
the principal part of the white of an egg;
it abounds in the cerum of the blood, and
is  one of the chief constituents of all
animal solids.  It is also found in vege-
tables.
   Albumen Ovi. The white of an egg.
   ALBUMINOUS.  Of the nature of,
 or  containing albumen.
   ALBUMINURIA. Urine containing
 albumen.
   ALBUR'NUM. The soft white sub-
 stance found between the inner bark and
 wood of trees, which, in time, becomes
 wood.
  AL'CEA.  The name of a genus of
malvaceous plants. The hollyhock.
  Alcea Rosea.   The common holly-
hock.
  AL'CHEMIST.  One who practices
alchemy.
  AL'CHEMY.   The mysterious art
which pretends to transmute the baser
metals into gold, and to find a panacea
for all diseases.
  AL'CHITRON.   The  oil of juni-
per; also  the  name of the dentifrice
of Mesue, an ancient Arabian physi-
cian.
  AL'COHOL. Pure, or highly recti-
fied spirits of wine.
   ALCYO'NIUM.   Bastard sponge;
the ashes of which were formerly used
as a dentifrice.
  ALDER.  Betula alnus.
  ALE.  A fermented liquor.
  ALEFPHA.   From axsitya, to  a-
noint.   Medicated oil.
  ALE'MA.  From a, priv. and U/xo;,
hunger. Any thing which satisfies hun-
ger.
   ALEM'BEC.   Alembicus;  a vessel
made of glass, metal, or earthenware,
for the reception  of volatile products
from a retort.
  ALEM'BROTH.  According to the
explanation of some, an alkaline salt.
  ALEXITE'RIUM.  From atefa, to
expel, and tqpta, to preserve.  An an-
cient medicine used as a prophylactic
against poison.
   ALGA.  Meergrass;  a sea-weed.
  ALGiE.   Plants which vegetate ex-
clusively under water, and are destitute
of sexual organs.
  ALGA'ROTH.  From Algaroth, the
name of a physician of Verona, its in-
ventor.  The  submuriate  of  protoxide
of antimony, separated from the muriate
of antimony, by  washing away  some
of its acid.
   ALGE'DO. From a^yoj, pain.  Pain
in the region of the neck of the  blad-
der and anus.
   ALGOR.   Chilliness, rigor
   ALIENATION.  Alienatio;  from 
               ALL               S

alieno, to estrange.  Applied to a wan-
dering of the mind; insanity.
  AL'IMENT.  Alimentum;  from alo,
to nourish.  Food.   Any substance,
which when taken into the system, is
capable of  nourishing it.
  ALIMENT'ARY. Pertaining to food,
or aliment.
  Alimentary  Canal.  The conduit
through which the food passes from the
mouth to the anus.
  Alimentary Duct. Alimentary ca-
nal.
  ALTMENTATION.   The act  of
nourishing.
  ALIPTiE.  From casino, I anoint.
Those who anointed  the Atheltse after
bathing.
   ALIS'MA  PLANTAGO.  Water
plantain.
  ALKALES'CENT. Any substance
containing  manifest alkaline properties,
or in which these properties are becom-
ing developed or predominate.
  ALKALI.  A term  applied to all
chemical substances which possess the
power of neutralizing acids, so  as to
form a saline compound.
  Alkali Causticum.  Caustic alkali.
  Alkali Fixum. Fixed alkali.
  AL'KALINE.   Substances which
contain, or partake of the nature of an
alkali.
  ALKALIZATION. The impregna-
tion of any thing with an alkaline salt.
  AL'KALOID. A salifiable base  ex-
isting as a  proximate  principle in some
vegetables, and possessing the proper-
ties of an  alkali only in a slight de-
gree.
  ALKALOM'ETER.  An instrument
for determining the purity of the alka-
lies of commerce.
  ALKERM'ES. A celebrated electua-
ry, in which kermes is the basis.
  ALLANITE. A mineral of a brown-
ish black color, having associated with
it mica and feldspar.
  ALLEN, C.  C.   Author of a Re-
view of an  Article  on Resolutions of
the  American Society of Dental Sur-
                ALL

geons, in relation to amalgams for fill-
ing teeth, published in American Jour-
nal of Dental Science,  volume  sixth.
—Editor of the New York Dental Re-
corder, a monthly periodical, devoted to
the theory and practice of  Surgical,
Medical and Mechanical Dentistry, be-
ginning with volume second.
  ALLEN, JOHN.  Author of a Dis-
sertation on Dental  Professional Excel-
lence, published in the American Jour-
nal of Dental Science, volume sixth.
  AL'LIUM.  From aleo, I smell; gar-
lick.  Also, the name of a genus  of
plants.
  Allium  Cepa. The common onion.
  Allium  Porrum. The leek or porret.
  ALLCEO'SIS.  Alloiosis;  from ajaoj,
another.  Alteration in the character of
a disease, or in the constitution.
  All(eot'ica.  From aioos, another.
Alterative medicines.
   ALLOGNO'SIS.  From omu>s, an-
other, and yivugxu,  to know.   Perver-
sion of mind;  incapability of  distin-
guishing persons.
  ALLOPHANE.   The name of a
mineral, of a blue, and sometimes of a
green or brown color.
  ALLOPATHIC. Allopathicus. Per-
taining to allopathy.
  ALLO'PATHIST.  One who prac-
tices or advocates allopathy.
  ALLO'PATHY.  Allopathia; from
aM-oj, another, and rto&oj, disease.  The
ordinary practice of medicine, in con-
tradistinction  to the homoeopathic,  or
that system of medical practice  which
proposes the  cure of disease by estab-
lishing in the system a condition oppo-
site to, or different from, the disease to
be cured.
  ALLOTRIODONTIA. From a%%ot-
pwj, foreign, and oSov;,  a tooth.  The
transplantation of teeth.   See Trans-
planting Teeth.
  ALLOY.  A  compound  of two or
more  metals.  See  Gold Plate; also,
Gold Solder.
  ALLSPICE.  See Myrtus Pimenta.
  ALLVEY.  Author of a Dissertation
7 
ALU
28
ALV
 on Dentition, and the diseases attending
 it. Edinburg, 1788.
   ALMOND.  See Amygdala.
   ALOE.   The name of a genus of
 plants.
   AloePerfo'Liata. Aloe Succotorina.
 Socotrine aloes is obtained  from a va-
 riety of the aloe perfoliata.
   AL'OES.  The  inspissated juice of
 different species of aloe.
   Aloes, Caballi'na.  Horse aloes.
   Aloes, Hepat'ica. Barbadoes aloes.
   Aloes, Socotorina. Socotrine aloes.
 Turkey aloes.
   ALOET'IC.   A medicinal prepara-
 tion containing  aloes.
   ALOGOTROPH'IA.  From aXoyof,
 disproportionate, and ■tpifyo, to nourish.
 Unequal nutrition,  especially  of  the
 bones in rickets.
   ALOUCHT.  A gum obtained from
 the canella alba tree.
   ALPHON'SIN.   An instrument for
 the removal  of  bullets,  so called from
 the name of the inventor.
   AL'PHUS.   Alphos; from aX^aivu,
 to change; because it changes the color
 of the skin.  Lepra alphoides.
   ALTERATION.   Alteratio; from
alter,  other.   In General Pathology, a
change  in the  structure of an  organ,
or  in the nature  of excreted  fluids.
In Dental Pathology; applied to  the
changes which occur in the structure of
the enamel of the teeth,  or the dentinal
tissue of these organs, from the action
of morbific influences. Also, to changes
which take place in the gums.
  ALTERATIVE.  Alterans;  from
altcro, to change.  A medicine given
for the purpose of restoring the healthy
functions of the body without causing
any sensible  evacuation.
  ALTUM'A.   The name  of a genus
of plants.  Marsh-mallow.
  Althaea Officinalis.  The syste-
matic name of marsh-mallow.
  ALUM.   A  double sulphate  of po-
tassa and alumina.
  Alum Earth. A massive mineral of
a blackish brown color.
   Alum Curd.  A coagulum made of
 alum with the white of an egg.
   Alum Root.  Heuchera cortusa.
   Alum Whey.  A  whey made by
 boiling alum with milk.
   ALU'MEN.  Alum.
   Alumen Catinum.   Potash of com-
 merce.
   Alumen Commu'ne.  Common alum.
   Alumen Exsicca'tum. Burnt alum:
 Alum melted until ebullition ceases.
   Alumen Fixum. Potash.
   Alumen Roma'num.  Roman alum.
 Red alum.
   Alumen Rupeum.  Native alum.
   ALUMINA.  Alumine; alum earth.
 Pure clay.
   Alumina Pura. Alumina.
   ALUMINA  SULPHAS FUSUS.
 Alumen exsiccatum.
   A LUMINOUS.  Pertaining to, or of
 the nature of, alum.
   ALUMINITE.  An opaque,  dull-
 white mineral.
   ALU'SIA.   Illusion;  hallucination.
   ALVEA'RIUM.  The  external au-
 ditory canal.
   ALVE'OLAR. . Alveolaris; from al-
 veus, a cavity. Pertaining to the alveoli.
   Alve'olar Abscess.   Gum-bile. A
 collection of  pus in a  sac formed in
 the socket  of a tooth at the extremity
 of  the  root, which generally escapes
 through  the  gum.  This disease  has
 usually been designated by the appella-
 tion of gum-bile, a name that by  no
 means conveys a correct idea of its true
 character; inasmuch as the gums are
 only secondarily affected, while the seat
 of the disease is always within  the al-
 veolus.   Hence, Mr. Bell has given it
 the more appropriate name of alveolar
 abscess.
  Abscess is one of the most common
 affections to which the alveolar cavities
 are liable.  Its effects are always ex-
ceedingly pernicious, not  only  to  the
 socket in which  it  is seated!/"and  the
gums covering it, but, also, often to the
general health.
  Whenever severe inflammation of the 
               ALV               2!

periosteum of the root of the tooth, or
of that of the alveolus is excited, an ef-
fusion of coagulable lymph takes place,
which, hardening, attaches itself to the
root, around its apex, and in this man-
ner a sac is formed.   This, as suppura-
tion takes place, distends, and  presses
against the surrounding wall  of the
alveolus, causing an opening to be form-
ed through the socket and gums for the
escape of the matter.
  A direct lateral passage, however, is
not always  effected through the alveo-
lus  and gums for the escape of the mat-
ter.  It is sometimes made through the
roof of the  mouth, the cheek, or lower
part of the  face;  at other times the
matter traverses the jaw for a considera-
ble  distance, divesting  it  of  its  perios-
teum,  and causing  necrosis and  ex-
foliation ;  and at other times again, it
is discharged into the maxillary sinus.
  The formation of an  abscess in the
alveolus of a dens sapientia of the low-
er jaw, is sometimes attended with se-
vere inflammation and swelling of the
tonsils, so as not  unfrequently  to ren-
der  deglutition  exceedingly difficult.
At other times, it induces inflammation
and rigidity of the muscles of the cheek.
  The immediate cause of alveolar ab-
scess is, inflammation  of the lining or
investing  membrane of  a  tooth, and
whatever tends to produce this,  may be
regarded as its exciting cause.   It often
happens that the plugging of a tooth in
which the lining membrane has been
destroyed, gives  rise  to the formation of
abscess by preventing the escape of the
matter that forms at the apex of its root.
Its  egress being thus prevented, it ac-
cumulates, and becomes a source of ir-
ritation to the investing  membrane in
its immediate vicinity, which, in conse-
quence, thickens, forms a tubercle, and
ultimately  suppurates.  The roots of
teeth, too, on which artificial  crowns
are  placed, for  the  same reason, often
give rise to abscess.   Inflammation of
the  lining membrane of a tooth, caused
by exposure to cold,  or from other inju-
                ALV

ry, not unfrequently gives rise to  this
disease.
  After an abscess has formed, it seldom
happens that the integrity of the parts
is so perfectly restored as to prevent a
recurrence of the disease. Although the
opening through the socket and gums
closes, and the formation of matter for a
time ceases, yet the tooth being deprived
of vitality, is a constant source of irrita-
tion to  the  surrounding parts, which
will, in most  cases, sooner or later, in-
duce a recurrence of the disease.
  The effects of alveolor abscess being
such as have been described, every  pos-
sible means should be employed to  pre-
vent its occurrence; for, after  it  has
formed, it can seldom be radically cured
except  by the removal  of the tooth.
The treatment, therefore, should be  pre-
ventive, rather than curative;  for the
latter to be effectual, calls for  the re-
moval of the organ.  When, therefore,
the formation of abscess is apprehended,
leeches should be promptly applied to
the gum  over the  affected alveolus.
Should this fail to  check the inflamma-
tion,  the  aching tooth should be ex-
tracted.  This practice, it is true, is ob-
jected to by some, under the supposition
that it is unsafe to remove a tooth, when
the*gums around it are  inflamed  and
swollen.  But such  apprehension is
groundless.   A tooth may be removed
with as much impunity at such time as
at any other.  The operation,  we ad-
mit, is somewhat more painful, but this
need never deter any one from  having
it performed.  When the  tooth occu-
pying the affected alveolus is removed,
the sac  often  comes  away with it,
and  thus  the  formation  of an exterior
opening for the escape of the matter is
prevented.
  But there  are  circumstances which
sometimes render  the performance of
this operation  inadvisable.  For exam-
ple, certain states of the constitutional
health, as well as that of the mind of
the patient.   In such cases, the escape
of the matter through the  face or cheek,
9 
ALV
30
ALV
 should be carefully guarded against, by
 the application of fomentations to the
 gums, and  by opening the tumor as
 soon as it becomes soft, with a lancet or
 other suitable instrument.
  The application of fomentations and
 emollient  poultices  to the face, is not,
 perhaps, under hardly any circumstan-
 ces,  advisable;  unless  the  disease is
 seated in  the  socket of a front tooth,
 where there is no danger of  the forma-
 tion of an external opening, and even
 then,  it is very questionable whether
 they are productive of any advantage.
 When the disease is seated in the socket
 of a molar tooth, external fomentations,
 tend, in a  greater or less degree, to pro-
 mote  the  escape of the matter through
 the cheek.
  When an opening of this kind forms,
 it is apt to become fistulous, if the tooth
 be not extracted.   Examples  of this
 sort are of  frequent occurrence, and
during the continuance of the opening,
 the patient experiences very great an-
 noyance, and, even after the discharge of
 matter has ceased and the opening heal-
 ed, there generally remains a deep scar.
  The following case  is described by
 Mr. Thos. Bell: Two years before he
saw it, an external  fistulous  opening
had been formed, through which matter
 was  continually discharged:  "At this
 time," says he, "a  funnel-shaped de-
 pression  existed  in  the  skin, which
 could be  seen  to the depth of nearly
 three-quarters  of an inch, and a small
 probe could be passed through it into the
 sac of the  abscess, underneath  the root
 of the tooth.   The abscess had now re-
 mained open for two years, during the
latter  of which, the  parts had  been in
the state I have described.  I removed
 the tooth,  and, as I  anticipated, no fur-
 ther secretion of pus took place, but so
 perfectly had the communication been
 established, that when the gum healed,
 it left by its contraction a fistulous open-
 ing,  through  which a portion of any
 fluid  received  into the mouth, passed
 readily to  the outside of the cheek; and
 I  could,  with care, introduce a  fine
 probe completely through  the passage.
 So free in fact was the communication,
 that some of the hairs of the whiskers,
 with which the external portion of the
 depression was filled, grew through the
 internal opening, and appeared in the
 mouth.
   "I passed a very fine knife, resembling
 the couching needle, through it, and re-
 moved, as perfectly as possible, a circu-
 lar portion of the parietes of the  tube
 towards the gum; but failed in this, and
 several other attempts,  to produce  a
 union.  It was, therefore, resolved that
 the  whole parietes  of  the depression
 should be  removed, extending the in-
 cision as far internally as possible;  and
 the integuments thus brought together
 as a simple wound.  In consequence,
 however, of the suppuration of a small
 gland in the immediate neighborhood,
 the  operation was deferred  until that
 should  have  been  dispersed, and it,
 therefore,  remains  at present, in  the
 state in which I have described it."
   It is scarcely ever necessary,  how-
 ever, in cases of this sort,  to  resort to
 any  other means than such  as are re-
 quired for the cure of the  abscess; for
 when this is effected, the external open-
 ing usually closes of itself.  But should
 this  not happen, the practice adopted by
 Mr.  Bell, should be resorted to.
   The irritation produced by an abscess
 in the alveolus of a dens  sapientias is
greater than that produced by one in the
 socket of  any other tooth.  Its  effects
 are sometimes of a most alarming char-
 acter.
   In 1832, the author was  requested to
 see a medical gentleman, Dr.  E.,  who
 resided thirty miles in the country.   He
 received the  message at 9, P. M., and
 arrived early next morning,  after having
 rode nearly the whole night.  After ex-
 amining the case, he was informed that
 Dr.  E. had been attacked, two weeks
 before, with a severe pain in the left dens
sapientiae of the lower jaw.  After hav-
ing  suffered  severely for three or four 
ALV
31
ALV
days, he called in a neighboring physi-
cian,  who,  after several fruitless  at-
tempts to extract the tooth, pronounced
its removal impracticable.
  The inflammation extended rapidly to
the gums, fauces, tonsils and muscles of
the jaws and face. To these symptoms,
high and intractable fever, and obstruct-
ed deglutition soon supervened.   Fo-
mentations to the face, free and repeat-
ed blood-letting, and cathartics had been
employed  for the purpose of subduing
the inflammation, but without  effect,
and the muscles of his jaws soon became
so rigid and firmly contracted, that his
mouth could not be opened. His breath-
ing also was difficult.
  Such was his  situation  in which  the
author found him. It was impossible
to  introduce  an  instrument into   his
mouth for the removal of the tooth, and
under  these  circumstances,  it was
deemed advisable to continue the prac-
tice that had been previously pursued,
and in addition, to administer an enema
with two grains of tartarized antimony.
At about 7 o'clock in the evening,  the
fever was succeeded  by alternate par-
oxysms of cold  and heat, an  indication
that suppuration  had  taken place, and
from  the  obstruction  of deglutition, it
was supposed to be in the throat.
  An effort was now  made to pry open
his mouth with a wooden wedge, which
was partially successful, but his jaws
could not  be forced sufficiently asunder
to admit of the introduction of the small-
est tooth  forceps between  his teeth.
While his jaws were  thus partially
separated,  he  attempted  to swallow
some warm tea, but in the effort,  the
tumor  in the throat bursted, and nearly
a table-spoonful of pus was discharged
from his mouth, and  it was supposed
that double that quantity passed down
into his stomach. He now obtained im-
mediate relief, but it was  not until  the
next day that his mouth could be open-
ed sufficiently for the removal of the af-
fected  tooth, and  upon  the roots of
which  there was a sac about the size of
a large pea.  The cause being now re-
moved, he was soon restored to health.
  Dr. I.  I. Greenwood, of New York,
describes a very interesting case of alve-
olar abscess, caused by a diseased dens
sapientiae.  A passage for the escape of
the matter had  been effected through
the base of the alveolus, perforating the
levator, effecting the rotary muscle op-
posite  the  orifice, and  making way
through the anterior surface of the skin,
immediately  under the  centre  of the
belly of the digastricus, and escaped into
the meatus auditories externus, through
a large orifice, which the patient had
been in the habit of probing with a sil-
ver instrument  about  six  inches in
length, and cleansing  with  lint.  The
irritation occasioned by the  fistulous
opening  and the frequent introduction
of this instrument, had caused so great
a rigidity of the muscles of the jaw that
the patient could not open  his mouth
more  than  half an  inch.  The probe
passed readily in to the roots of the
affected tooth.
  Dr. G. believing that the removal of
this tooth constituted the proper reme-
dial indication,  at once  performed the
operation, and in a short time had the
satisfaction of seeing his patient entirely
restored.
  Inflammation, simply, of the perios-
teum of a dens sapientiae often gives
rise to very  serious effects.  The den-
tition, too, of these teeth is  frequently
productive of the most alarming conse-
quences. Dr. Moberly, of New Market,
Md., communicated to the author a case
which gave rise to phthisis pulmonalis,
and ultimately caused the death of the
patient.
  After the  matter has effected a pas-
sage through the alveolus, and a fluctua-
tion is felt in the  gum, when pressure is
applied,  an  opening should  be made
with a lancet for its immediate escape.
  The occurrence  of alveolar abscess,
previously to the shedding of the tem-
porary teeth, very frequently causes ne-
crosis and exfoUation of the  alveoli of 
               ALV                 <

several  of the adjoining  organs,  and
sometimes of considerable portions of
the jaw, often injuring, and  occasion-
ally carrying  away  the rudiments of
several of the  permanent  teeth.  Two
examples of this sort have fallen under
the observation of the author.
  Alve'olar  Arches. The margins
of the two jaws in which  the teeth
are implanted.  They are  more or less
elliptical in their shape—the lower more
so  than  the  upper.   The number of
cavities which they contain correspond
with the number and shape of the roots
of the teeth.   They consist of two bony
plates, an external and an internal, with
transverse septa which form the alveoli.
  At  first, the growth of  the alveolar
arches keep pace with,  and for a time,
outstrip that of the teeth, enclosing them
in cells,  by which  admirable provision
of nature, a firm support is given to the
gums previously to the eruption of the
teeth.
  The structure of the  outer and inner
plates of these  arches is compact, while
interiorly, it is cellular.   Each alveolus
is pierced at the bottom with one or
more minute foramina for the transmis-
sion of the vessels and nerves which go
to the lining membrane of  the tooth.
  Alve'olar  Artery.   This  artery
arises from the internal maxillary,  and
winds around the maxillary tuberos-
ity  from behind forwards, sending  off
twigs through the  posterior dental ca-
nals which supply the molar teeth,  and
go  to the maxillary  sinus—while  the
main branch passes forward, furnishing
the gums and alveolo-dental periosteum.
  Alve'olar  Cavities.  The cavities
which receive the roots of  the teeth.
  Alve'olar  Exosto'sis.   See  Exos-
tosis of the Alveoli.
  Alveo'lar Necro'sis. See Necrosis
of the Alveoli.
  Alve'olar  Vein.    The  distribu-
tion of  this is similar to  that  of  the
artery.
  ALVEOLO-DENTAL  PERIOS'-
TEUM.  The membrane  which lines
                ALV

the alveoli and  invests the roots of the
teeth.  It is attached to the gums at the
necks of the teeth, and Mr. Thos. Bell
is of the opinion that it  also forms the
lining membrane of these organs. "The
periosteum of the maxillary bones," says
he, "after covering the alveolar  pro-
cesses, dips down into each alveolar cav-
ity, the parietes of which it lines. From
the bottom of the cavity, where the ves-
sels and nerve of the internal membrane
enter, it appears to be reflected over the
root of the tooth, which it entirely  cov-
ers as far as the neck, at which part it
becomes intimately  connected with the
gum."
  In enumerating the membranes of the
teeth, he divides them into deciduous and
persistent. The former consists of two la-
mellae which form the sac, and which,
after performing the functions assigned
them, are absorbed—the  latter  derived
from the periosteum of the maxillary
bones,  consists of the periosteum of the
internal dental cavity, which, during the
formation of the tooth, had performed
the office of secreting the bone, the pe-
riosteum of the root, and the periosteum
of the  alveolus, of which the last men-
tioned is a reflection.
  Delabarre, and other writers, are of
the opinion that the alveolo-dental peri-
osteum is derived from the membranes of
the sac, especially the outer, of the tooth,
and that it is continuous with the gums.
  But, it is not a matter  of  much  con-
sequence, whether it be a continuation
of the  gums, a production  of the pulp
sac, or an extension of the  periosteum
of the maxillary bones, since the great
practical fact remains the  same,  that
such a membrane does exist—that this
membrane is fibrous, and that it consti-
tutes the bond of union between the
alveoli and the teeth.
  ALVE'OLUS.   A diminutive of ah
veus, a cavity. The socket of a tooth.
  ALVEUS.   A cavity.
  Alveus Ampullas'cens.  The en-
larged part of the thoracic duct.
  Alveus Communis.  The common
12 
AMA
33
AMB
 duct of the ampullae of the semi-circular
 canals of the internal ear.
   ALVIDU'CA.  From alvus, the belly,
 and duco,  to  draw.   Purging  medi-
 cines.
   ALVI'FLUXUS.   From alvus,  and
fluo, to flow.  A diarrhoea.
   AL'VINE.   From alvus,  the  belly.
 Relating to the belly or bowels.
   ALVUS.  The abdomen, stomach
 and entrails.
   Alvus Astricta. Constipation; cos-
 tiveness.
   Alvus Renum.  The  pelvis of the
 kidney.
   ALYCE. From a%vu, to be anxious.
 Morbid restlessness.
   ALYS'MUS. From aXva, to be rest-
 lesSi Anxiety; restlessness arising from
 disease.
   ALYS'SUM.  Madwort.
   AMALGAM. Amalgama ; from 0,11a,
 and yafitiv, to marry.  A  compound of
 mercury with another metal is called an
 amalgam. Within the last few years an
 amalgam of mercury and silver, either
 alone,  or  in combination with finely
pulverised silver, glass or pumice-^tone,
has been  much used by many dentists
for fining teeth, but, it is thought by
eminent practitioners  to  be the most
objectionable material that has ever been
employed for this purpose.  In the first
place,  being introduced in a soft state,
it shrinks from the walls  of  the cavity
in hardening, so as- to admit  the secre-
tions of the mouth;  consequently, in-
stead of arresting the decay of the tooth,
it often  accelerates it.  Secondly,  the
exposed surface soon oxydizes,  turns
black, and gives to the tooth an exceed-
ingly  disagreeable  appearance;  and
thirdly,  in  the mouths of individuals
very susceptible to the action of mer-
cury, it is  liable to produce  salivation,
and  even in the  best constitutions, it
seldom  fails to  exert  a morbid effect
upon the  alveolo-dental  periosteum,
gums, and mucous membrane of the
mouth.
  The  above objections, it is thought,
 should, under all circumstances, and in
 all cases, preclude the use of this article.
 Any tooth that can be substantially and
 permanently filled  with any substance,
 and remain  in  the mouth with impu-
 nity, can be filled  with  gold,  which is
 the best material that can be employed
 in this operation.
   Some practitioners contend, who at
 the same time admit that it is the worst
 article that can, in ordinary cases, be
 employed  for fining  teeth, that it may
 be  used with  advantage  in   "certain
 cases," but from the objectionable prop-
 erties of the material, it would  seem,
 that the opinions of such are erroneous.
   AMARA  DULCIS.  Bitter-sweet.
   Amara  Medicamenta.   Bitters;  to-
 nics.
   AMARINE.  The bitter principle of
 vegetables.
   AMA'RUS.  Bitter.   The principal
 bitters used for medicinal purposes, are,
 gentian, quassia,  calumba,  cinchona,
 &c.
   AMASE'SIS.  Amassesis;   from a,
 priv. fiasriGis, mastication.  Impaired or
 imperfect mastication.
   AMAURO'SIS.  From afwvpoa, to
 darken or obscure.   Gutta serena.   Par-
 tial or total  loss of sight, without any
 apparent alteration in the eye, arising
 from paralysis of the optic nerve.
  AMAUROTIC.  Affected with amau-
 rosis.
  AMBER.   Succinum; a hard, brit-
 tle,  tasteless,  bituminous  substance,
 sometimes transparent, butoftener semi-
 transparent or opaque.  It is met with
 of  all colors, but  is most  frequently
 yellow or orange.
  AM'BERGRIS.   A  concrete  sub-
 stance,  exhaling a pleasant aromatic
 odor, found in irregular masses  floating
 on  the sea, near the  Molucca  islands,
 Madagascar, Sumatra, on the  coast of
 Coromandel,  Brazil,  America, China
and Japan.   It is thought by  some to
be  produced  in  the  intestines of  the
whale.
  AMBIDEXTER.    Amphidexios; 
               AMM              c

from ambo, both, and dexter, right. One
who uses both hands with equal facility.
  AMBLYO'PIA.  From apfavs, dull,
and u$, the eye. Dimness of sight.
   Amblyopia  Dissitorum.   Short-
sightedness.
  Amblyopia   Proximorum.   Long-
sightedness.
  AMBOR. Ambergris.
  AMBUSTUM.  A burn or scald.
  AMENORRHCE'A.  From a, priv.
/jirjv, a mouth, and ptu, to flow.   A par-
tial or totally obstructed menstruation.
   AMENTIA.  From a,  priv. and
mens,  the mind. Imbecility of mind.
  AMERICAN CENTAURY.  Sab-
batia angularis.
   American Dittany.   Cunila ma-
riana.
  American Hellebore.  Veratrum
album.
  American Ipecacuanha.  Euphor-
bia ipecacuanha, and gillenia trifoliata.
  American Sanicle. Heuchera Ame-
ricana.
  American Senna.  Cassia marilan-
dica.
  American Spikenard.  Aralia race-
mosa.
  AMETRIA.  Intemperance.
  AMMA. A truss.
  AMMI. Bishop's-weed.
  AMMO'NIA.  A volatile alkali, ob-
tained from sal ammoniac.
  AMMONIA'CUM. Gum-ammoniac.
The inspissated juice of the dorema am-
moniacum, a plant which grows in Per-
sia.  It is brought to  this country  in
small white globules, clustered together,
or in lumps of a brownish color.
  AMMONIA  ACETATIS   LIQ,-
UOR.   Aqua  ammonia  acetatae.   A
solution of acetate of ammonia.
  Ammonle Carbonas.  Subcarbonate
of ammonia.
  Ammonia Liquor.  Liquor  of am-
monia.
  Ammonle Murias.  Muriate  of am-
monia.
  Ammonue Nitras.  Nitrate of am-
monia.
                AMP

  Ammonije Subcarbonas. Subcarbo-
nate of ammonia.
  Ammonle  Subcarbonatis  Liq.uor.
A solution of subcarbonate of ammonia.
  Ammonle  Tartras.   A salt  com-
posed of tartaric acid and ammonia.
  AMMONIURET.  A compound of
ammonia and a metallic oxyd.
   AMNESIA.  From  a, priv. and
fivtjaij, memory.  Loss of memory; for-
getfulness.
  AM'NION.  Amnios. The innermost
membrane which surrounds the fetus.
  AMO'MUM  CARDAMO'MUM.—
Cardamomum minus.   The  seeds of
this plant, when chewed, impart to the
mouth a grateful aromatic warmth.
  Amo'mum Granum  Paradisi.  Car-
damomum majus. The plant which af-
fords the  grains of paradise, or the
greater cardamomum seeds.
  Amomum  Verum.  The true stony
parsley.
  Amomum Zingiber. The plant which
affords ginger.
  AMOR.  Love.
  AMORPHA. The  name of a genus
of plants, of which only  one species is
known. The bruised root of this is said
to possess anti-odpntalgic virtues.
  AMORPH'OUS.   Of an  irregular
shape; without a determinate form.
   AMPHARISTEROS.  Awkward
with the hands; opposed to ambidexter.
  AMPHIARTHRO'SIS. From apt*,
both, and ap£pw<jtj, an  articulation.  A
mixed articulation, in which the articu-
lar surfaces of bones are united by an
intermediate substance,  which admits
of but little motion, as the vertebra?  by
the intervertebral cartilages.
  AMPHIBIA.   A  class of animals
so formed as to be capable of living on
land, and for a long time under water.
  AMPHIBIOL'OGY. Amphibiologui;
from a^i, on both sides; j3(.o5,  fife, and
xoyoj, a discourse.  A  treatise on am-
phibious animals.
  AMPHIBIOUS.  Capable of living
in two  elements, air and  water, as the
crocodile, beaver, frog, &c.
4 
              AMY              3

   AMPHIBLESTROI'DES.   From
a/jLfyiGxsapov, a net,  and stSoj, a resem-
blance.  Reticular; like a net.
   AMPHIDIARTHRO'SIS.   From
a/A<3>i, both, and Stap^pwutj, a movable
articulation.  The temporo-maxillary ar-
ticulation is so designated by Winslow,
because it partakes both of ginglymus
and arthrodia.
   AMPHIMERI'NA.   From a^i,
about, and «7/wpa, a day. A fever which
continues but one day.
  AMPULLES'CENS.   See  Alveus
Ampullescens.
  AMPUTATION.  Amputatio; from
amputo, to cut  off.  The removal of
a limb, or  finger, or any  projecting
part of the body by means of a  cutting
instrument.
  AM'ULET. Amuletum. Fromaufm,
a bond, because it  was tied round the
person's neck.  Any image or substance
worn around the neck for the prevention
of disease or evil.
   AMYE'LIA.  From a, priv.  and
fwstos, marrow. A monstrosity, in which
there is a partial or  complete absence of
the spinal marrow.
  AMYGDALA.   From afweaa, to
lancinate, because there appear fissures
in the shell. The almond,  of which
there are two kinds; the amygdala ama-
ra, and amygdala dulcis. The first is the
bitter and the second the sweet almond.
   Amyg'dale Oleum. Oil of almonds.
   AMYG'DALUS.  The common al-
mond tree.
   Amyg'dalus Communis.  The syste-
matic name of the plant from which the
common almond is procured.
  Amvgdalus Per'sica.   The com-
mon peach-tree.
  A'MYLUM. Amyleon.  Starch.
  Amylum Marantje.  Arrow-root.
  AMYO'SIS.  Imperforate iris.
  AMY'RIS ELEMIF'ERA.   The
name of the plant from which the gum-
elemi is obtained.
  Amyris Gileadensis.   The name of
the plant from which the opobalsamum
is obtained.  The balm of Gilead tree.
5              ANA

  AMYXTA. From a, priv. and fw%a.,
 mucus. Deficiency of mucus.
  ANAB'ASIS. From avofiawa, I as-
 cend.  An augmentation or paroxysm
 of disease.
  ANABEX'IS.  From twaJSritta, to
 cough up.  Expectoration.
  ANABLEP'SIS.   From ma, again,
 and  fifortu, to see again.  Recovery of
 sight.
  ANAB'OLE.  From owa,  upwards,
 and /3aM.«, I cast. Vomiting; expecto-
 ration.
  ANABROCHE'SIS.   From  am,
 again, and ppoxsa, to re-absorb. Re-
 absorption of matter.
  ANACARDIUM.  From Wa, with-
 out,  and xapSia, a heart. Without heart.
 Fruit, which, instead of having the seed
 in the inside, have the nut growing out
 of the end.
   Anacardium Occidentale.  The
 cashew nut.
  Anacardium Orientale.  The Ma-
 lacca bean.
  ANACATHAR'SIS. From *v<x, up-
 wards, and xa^aipofuu, to  purge up.
 Purgation upwards; expectoration.
  ANACATHARTIC.  An expecto-
 rant or emetic.
  ANACLI'SIS.  From  waxtevo, to
 recline.  A couch.
  ANACOLLE'MA.   From ava, to-
 gether, and xowiaw, I glue.  A collyrium
 composed of agglutinating  substances,
 and  stuck on the forehead; also,  healing
 medicines.
   ANACONCHOLIS'MOS.   From
 wvaxoyxoXc^ij, to sound as a shell. A gar-
 garism; so called, because it makes  a
 a noise in the throat like the sound of a
 shell.
  ANACTE'SIS. From ara*tfaopou, to
 recover. Recovery of strength; recovery
 from sickness.
  ANACY'CLEON.   Anacycleus.  A
 mountebank; a charlatan.
  ANADIPLCSIS.  From ava, again,
 and fortJiow, I double.   A redoubling or
 frequent return of paroxysms,  or dis-
 ease. 
ANA               36               ANC
     AXiE'MlA. Privation of blood.
     AN^ESTHE'SIA.   From a, priv.
  and aieSavopat, I feel  Deprived of the
  sense of touch. Insensibility.
    ANAESTHETIC.  Belonging to in-
  sensibility.  See Chloroform.
    ANAESTHISIA.  Loss of sensation.
    ANA'GRAPHE. A prescription.
    ANALCINE. Cubic zeolite.
    ANALEP'SIS.  From avaXafiSava, to
  restore.  A recovery of strength after
  disease.
    ANALEPTIC.   Restorative  medi-
  cines or food.
    ANALO'SIS. From avaXitsxu, to con-
  sume. Atrophy; wasting.
    ANALYSIS.  From awO/ina, to re-
  solve.  The resolution of any compound
  substance into  its primary and constit-
  uent parts.
    Analysis of Ashes.  See Washing.
    Analysis of Alloy.   See  Gold, re-
  fining of.
    ANAMNESTIC. Fromomuip^tfxtt,
  to remember. A remedy  for  strength-
 ening or improving the memory.
   ANANAS.   Bromelia ananas.  The
 egg-shaped pine apple.
   ANAPHALANTFASIS. From ava-
 $atowr,tas, bald.   Loss of the hair of the
 eyebrows, and baldness in general.
   ANAPHORYX'IS.   From wfo-
 pvcfffw, to grind down.  The reduction of
 any thing to a very fine powder.
   ANAPLERO'SIS.  From owarttypoco,
 to fill again.  The restitution of wasted
 parts.
   ANAPLEU'SIS.   From  amrttau,
 to float upon.  Looseness of an exfoliat-
 ed bone, or of a  tooth. For the latter,
 see Gomphiasis.
   ANAPNEU'SIS.  From  avartvivu,
 to respire.  Respiration.
  ANAPTO'SIS.  From avartirtta, to
 fall back.  A relapse.
  ANARRHCE'A.   From  ova,  up-
 wards, and /j«o, to flow.  An afflux of
fluid to the head or towards the upper
part of the body.
  ANASAR'CA.  From ova, through,
and oapi, flesh.  General dropsy, or an
  accumulation of lymph in the  cellular
  membrane.
    ANASTAL TICA.   From avaaeXKu,
  to contract.   Styptic medicines.
    ANASTOMOSIS.   From ava, with.
  and (stofxa, a mouth.  The communica-
  tion of vessels with each other.
    ANASTOMOTIC.   Anastomoticus.
  Medicines which open  the pores and
  mouths of vessels.
    ANAT'OM Y.  From am, and tsuvu,
  to cut.   The dissection of organized
  bodies so as to expose the structure, sit-
  uation, and use of parts.  The  word,
  also, as at present used, has reference to
 the study of the parts, and their uses, of
 organized bodies.  In a word, it may be
 properly called the science of organiza-
 tion, and in its abstract sense, that of the
 human body.
   Anatomy, Comparative.  Zootomy.
 The comparative study of the organs of
 animals generally.
   ANATRE'SIS.   From  ava,  and
 •titpau, to perforate.  A  perforation like
 that made by trepanning.
   ANATRI'BE.   From avatpiSu,, to
 rub.  Friction upon the body.
   ANAU'DIA.  From a, priv. andavSjj,
 the speech. Privation of  speech.  Cata-
 lepsy.
   ANCHORA'LIS. From ay*wr, the
 elbow.  The  olecranon,  or  projecting
 part of the elbow.
  ANCHYLO'SIS.  From oy^opoi,
 to bend.   A stiff-joint.
  ANCONE'US.  From ayxw*, the el-
bow.  The name of a muscle situated
on the back of  the elbow.
  Ancone'us Externus.  Triceps ex-
 tensor cubiti.
   ANCONOID. Belongingtothe elbow.
   ANGUS.  From ayx«»/, the elbow.
 A distorted or stiff elbow.
   ANCYLOBLEPH'ARON.   From
 oyxt^, a hook, and /3te<j>apcw, an eyelid.
 A disease of the eye, by which the eye-
 lids are closed.
  ANCYLOGLOS'SUM. From ay*-
vxri, a hook,  and y^acra, the tongue.
Tongue-tied. 
ANE
37
ANG
    ANCYLO'SIS.  Anchylosis.
    ANDA. The name of atree of Brazil.
    ANDRfiE.   Dissertation on the  In-
  struments necessary for the Extraction
  of Teeth, and their mechanical force and
  application,  by.  Leipsic,  1784.—Dis-
  sertation on First Dentition, by.  Leip-
  sic, 1790.
    ANDROG'YNUS.   From o^p, a
  man, ywrj, a woman.   An  hermaphro-
  dite. An effeminate person.
    ANEBIUM.  From ava8awu, to  as-
  cend.  The alkanet is so called because
  of its quick growth.
    ANEMIA. Anaemia.
    ANEMO'NE. The wind-flower.
    Anemone Hepat'ica.  The hepatica
  nobilis, or herb trinity.
    Anemone  Nemoro'sa.   The syste-
  matic name of ranunculus albus.
    Anemone  Praten'sis.   The syste-
  matic name of the Pulsatilla nigricans.
    ANENCEPHALUS. From a, priv.
  tyxcfatos, the brain. A monster without
  brains.
    ANETHUM. The name of a genus
  of plants.
    Anethum Fo]:niculum.  The fcenic-
 ulum of the shops; sweet fennel.
   Anethum Grav'eolens.  The syste-
 matic name of anethum.  Dill.
   ANET'ICA.  From okm?^, to relax.
 Assuaging medicines.
   AN'EURISM.   Aneurisma;   from
 avEvptwtw, to dilate or distend.  A tumor
 formed by  the dilatation of an artery,  or
 of the heart.  There are three varieties
 of aneurism.  1. When the blood in the
 dilated artery does not escape, it is called
 true  aneurism.  2.  When there  is an
 opening in the artery, and the blood es-
 capes into the cellular tissue, it is called
false or spurious aneurism. 3. When, in
 opening a vein an artery is  wounded,
 and the blood escapes into the vein, and
 causes it to become varicose, it is called
 varicose aneurism.
  ANEURIS'MAL. Belonging to an
 aneurism.
  Aneurismal Sac or Cyst. The sac or
pouch formed by thedilation of an artery.
    ANGEIOL'OGY.  From ayy«or, a
  vessel, and jioyoj, a discourse. A descrip-
  tion of the vessels of the body.
    ANGEIOT'OMY.  From ayysiov, a
  vessel, and tefivtiv, to cut. The dissec-
  tion of the blood vessels.
    ANGEIOPATHI'A.  From ayysiov,
  a vessel, and rta^otj,  a disease. Disease
  of the vessels.
    ANGEIOSTEO'SIS.  From oyyawv,
  a vessel, and otri-fwcrtj, ossification.  Os-
  sification of vessels.
   ANGEL'ICA.  So  called from  its
  supposed  angelic virtues.  The  name
  of the garden angelica.
    Angelica Archangeli'ca.   The
  name for the angelica of the  shops.
   Angelica  Sylves'tris.   Wild an-
  gelica.
   ANGELI'NA.  A tree of great size
  of Malabar East Indies.
   Angelina Cortex.  The  bark of a
  tree of Grenada, called by that name.
   ANGERMANN.  The name  of a
  dentist of  Leipsic,  and  author  of a
  German translation from the  French, of
  a work by Laforgue,  entitled,  "The
  Theory and Practice of the Art of the
  Dentist."   The  German  translation of
 this work was published at Leipsic,  in
  1803,  one year  after the publication  of
 the original in Paris.
   ANGI'NA. From angere, to strangle.
 Inflammation of the throat and air pas-
 sages.
   Angina  Maligna.   Malignant sore
 throat.
   Angina Porotidea. The mumps.
   Angina Pec'toris. A disease charac-
 terised by severe  pain about the lower
 part of  the sternum, accompanied  with
 difficult breathing, palpitation  of the
 heart, and great anxiety.
  Angina Tonsillaris. Cynanche ton-
 silaris.
  Angina Trachealis.  Cynanche tra-
 chealis.
  ANGIOL'OGY.  From oyy«o„,  a
vessel, and toyoj, a discourse.   The doc-
trine of  the vessels.
  ANGLE,  FA'CIAL.  The facial an- 
ANI
38
ANK
 gle, according to Camper, is formed by
 the union of two lines; one drawn from
 the most prominent  part  of the fore-
 head to the edge of the  alveolar border
 of the upper jaw, opposite the incisores;
 the other, from  the meatus auditorius
 externus  to the  same  point.   By the
 size of this angle it is said the  relative
 proportions of the cranium  and face
 may be ascertained, and to a certain ex-
 tent, it is thought  by some,  but with
 how much probability of truth the au-
 thor is unable to say, the amount of in-
 telligence possessed by  individuals and
 animals.  These lines form an angle, in
 the white varieties  of the human spe-
 cies, of about 80°; in the negro, of from
 65 to 70°.  In descending  in the scale
 of animals the angle grows less and less
 until it almost entirely disappears.
   AN'GLICUS.  From  Anglia, Eng-
 land.  A  sweating disease, once very
 prevalent and fatal in England.
   AN'GONE. From oyz<o, to strangle.
 A nervous constriction of the fauces, in
 hysterical women, attended with a feel-
 ing of suffocation.
   ANGOR.  Intense pain about the
 epigastrium, attended with great anxie-
 ty, and often with palpitation.
  ANGULO'SUS.  Angular.
  ANHELATION.  From anheh, to
breathe  with difficulty.  Shortness  of
breath.
   ANHEL'ITUS.  Breath.
  ANHYDRITE. Anhydrous gypsum.
  ANHYDROUS. From a, neg. and
vSwp, water.  Without water.
  ANTMA.   From  avEfioi,  wind or
breath.  A  word used  to  denote the
principle of life.  Also,  a soul, or the
intellectual manifestations of man.
  Anima Aloes.   Refined aloes.
  Anima  Hepatis.  Sal  martis; sul-
 phate of iron.
  Anima Pulmonum.  The soul of the
lungs.  A name which has been given
to saffron, on account of its being used
in asthmas.
  Anima Rhabarbak.   The best rhu-
barb.
   Anima  Saturni.  A preparation of
 lead.
   Anima  Veneris.  A preparation of
 copper.
   ANIMAL.  An organized animated
 being, endowed with the power of loco-
 motion.   The term according to its com-
 mon acceptation, is restricted to irrational
 creatures.   Animals are  divided into
 four classes, viz.   The  vertebrated,
 mollusca, articulated, and radiated. The
 vertebrated animals  are  those which
 have a spinal column, composed of ver-
 tebrae; the mollusca, are those which
 have soft bodies, with no osseous frame '
 work, as the shell fish;  the articulated,
 are those, whose bodies are supported,
 by a hard  external envelop, divided in-
 to numerous pieces, articulated together
 by a membrane in such a  manner as to
 admit of free motion, and which  are
 moved by means of muscles attached to
 them interiorly; the  radiated, have all
 their parts attached in a circular man-
 ner, with their mouth in the centre.
   Animal. Adjective.  That which be-
 longs to or concerns animals.
   Animal Heat.   The heat or caloric
 of the body of a living animal resulting
 from, and  necessary to, its vitality, and
 which enables it  to preserve nearly a
 uniform temperature, whatever may be
 the external changes.
   ANIMAL'CULE.   A   very small
 animal, invisible to the naked eye.
  ANIMAL'CULIST. One who makes
 the science of animalcules a study.
  AN'IMALIZATION.  The transfor-
 mation of the nutritive parts of food into
 the living structures of the body.
  ANIMAL ECONOMY.  The con-
 duct of nature in the preservation of the
 organism.
  AN'IME GUMMI. A resinous sub-
 stance obtained from  the  trunk of hy-
 mcnaza courbaril, or locust-tree
  ANTMUS.  See Anima.
  ANI'SUM.  Pimpinella  anisum, or
 anise plant.
  ANKYLOGLOS'SUM.   Fromoy*-
w>s, crooked, or contracted, andywoa, 
ANN                39                ANN
the tongue.  Restricted or impaired mo-
tion of the  tongue.
  ANKYLOMERIS'MUS.  Fromoyx-
\fkH,  a contraction,  and ptpoj, a  part.
Morbid adhesion between parts.
  ANKYLOSIS.  See Anchylosis.
  ANKYLOT'OMUS.  From ayxVkoi,
crooked, and tifivtiv, to cut.  A curved
knife.
   ANNEAL.   A  process by  which
glass is rendered less frangible, and met-
als, which have become hard and brittle,
soft  and  malleable.   In many of the
arts, the  process of annealing is a mat-
ter of great importance, and in  none
more  so,  than that  of   the  dentist's.
The gold  employed  for fining  teeth,
unless thoroughly  and  uniformly an-
nealed, cannot be introduced into the
cavity so as to fill it in a sufficiently
thorough and  substantial manner, to
prevent its liability  of coming out, and
at the same time, to  secure the perfect
preservation of the organ.  So difficult
indeed is it, to properly anneal the gold
which is employed for this purpose that
not more than one manufacturer of gold
foil in twenty,  has attained a sufficient-
ly high degree  of skill in this nice and
difficult  process, to  enable him to ac-
complish it in a manner  satisfactory to
dentists who have acquired a high de-
gree of  excellence  in the art of filling
teeth.
   During the process of  manufacturing
gold into foil, it is necessary  frequently
to subject it to the process of  annealing,
which consists, after  it  is reduced to
leaves, in heating each leaf separately to
a cherry-red heat, either over the flame
of a spirit lamp, or on a  plate of stone
or metal, over a furnace.  But  in anneal-
ing gold  foil, different  methods  are
adopted  by different  manufacturers.
See Gold Foil.  In annealing gold dur-
ing its preparation for plate, less nicety
is  required than during  its preparation
for foil,  and simply  consists  in bring-
ing the  metal,  after it  has  been cast
into  ingots, before it be  planished, and
also frequently during its lamination, to
a cherry-red, by putting the gold upon
charcoal or rather peats, which have a
more equal and lively flame, and cover-
ing it quite up and taking care  that the
thin parts of the gold  do not become
hotter than the thick.  When the gold
has by this process acquired its  proper
heat as indicated by  its color, it should
be removed to hot ashes to cool, with-
out coining in  contact more than pos-
sible with the cold air, by which its tem-
perature would be too suddenly changed.
But gold and even sdver are not so much
affected by a sudden transition from heat
to cold as are many of the other metals,
yet it does, to some extent, increase their
brittleness.
  Why it is that the hammering and ex-
tension of metals increases their brittle-
ness, has  never been satisfactorily ex-
plained, but it is supposed to be owing
to the destruction of the peculiar arrange-
ment which the particles  of the metal
had, previously to being subjected to
such operation.  By annealing, the me-
tal is softened, and the original arrange-
ment of its particles seems to be restored.
   AN'NULAR.  Annularis; from an-
nulus, a ring.  Shaped like a ring.
   Annular Bone.   Circulisosseus.  A
circular bone, situated before the cavity
of the tympanum in  the fetus.
   Annular  Cartilage.   The cricoid
cartilage of the  larynx is so called from
its resemblance to a ring.
   Annular Ligaments.  A name giv-
en  to  certain  ligamentous bands,  as
the  annular  ligament  of the  radius,
which is of a fibro-cartilaginous struc-
ture, and which, with the lesser sigmoid
cavity of the cubitus,  forms  a  ring
around the head of the radius;  and the
annular ligaments of  the cairpus and tar-
sus, to each of which there are two.
  Annular Vein.   The name of a vein
situated between the annular,  or ring
finger, and little finger.
  AN'NULARIS.  The finger between
the little and middle fingers is so called,
because this  is the one on which the
wedding ring is worn. 
               ANT               4i

  AN'NULUS.  A ring.  In Botany,
the name of the membrane which sur-
rounds the stem of the fungi.
  An'nulus Abdominis.  The abdomi-
nal ring.
  ANOCHEILUM.   The upper lip.
  AN'ODYNE.  Anodynus;  from a,
priv. and oSwr;, pain. A medicine which
relieves pain; as opium and belladonna.
  An'odynum Martiale.  Ferum am-
moniatum,  precipitated from  water by
potassa.
  Anodynum  Minerale.    Potassae
nitras sulphatis paucillo mixtus.
  ANOM'ALOUS.  From a, priv. and
vo/jlos, a law.   Irregularity,  deviation
from that which is natural.   In Medi-
cine, something unusual in the  symp-
toms which properly  belong to a dis-
ease.  In  Odontology, something  un-
natural in the conformation or growth of
a tooth, or of the  alveolar arches, and
in Dental Pathology,  in the  phenom-
ena of the  diseases to  which the teeth
are liable.
  ANOMALOTROPHIES.  From av,
priv. 0^0^05, regular, andtfpo^, nourish-
ment.  Irregular nutrition of organs.
  ANOMOCEPHALUS.   From a,
priv. vofno^, rule, and xttyahq,  head.  A
deformed head.
  ANOM'PHALOS.   From av, priv,
opfaVios", the navel.  Without  a navel.
  ANONYMOUS. From av, priv. and
ovoy.a, name.  Without a name.
  ANOPTHAL'MUS.   Anommatus;
from ov, priv. and (xf^afyios*, an  eye.
A monster without eyes.
  ANOPSIA.  From av, priv. and 04,
the eye.  A case of monstrosity, in
which the eye and orbit are wanting.
  ANOR'CHIDES.   From  av, priv.
and opxij", a testicle.   Such as are born
without testicles are so termed.
  ANOREXIA.   From av,  priv. and
optl;^, appetite.  A  want of appetite,
without loathing of food.
  ANOS"MIA. From a, priv, and oaptj,
odor.   Loss of the sense of smelling.
  ANTACIDS.  From cmti, against,
and acxda, acids.  Medicines which re-
                ANT

move acidity in the stomach, as the car-
bonates of soda, magnesia, &c.
  ANTAGONIST. Antagonistas; coun-
ter-acting.  A name given to muscles
which act in opposition  to each other,
as the flexors and extensors of a limb.
  ANTAL'GIC.  From avti,  against,
and akyoj, pain.  Medicines which re-
lieve pain.
   ANT ALKALINE.    From  avti,
against, and  alkali,  an  alcali.   That
which neutralizes alkalies.
  ANTAPOD'OSIS. From avtartofo-
Suifii, I return in exchange. Succession
and return of febrile paroxysms.
  ANTECENDENTIA.   The  pre-
monitory symptoms of disease.
  ANTELA'BIA.  From ante, before
and labia, the lips. The  extremity of
the lips.
  ANTEM'BASIS.  From avti, mu-
tually, and tfiSaivu, I enter.  The mu-
tual reception of bones.
  ANTENEAS'MUS.    From  avti,
against, and  i,«n/f<jpoj, implacable.  A
description of madness, in which the pa-
tient attempts his own life.
  ANTE'RIOR.  Before.
  Aterior Au'ris.   The name of a
muscle of the ear.
  ANT'HELIX.  Antihelix.
  ANTHELMINTIC.   Anthelminti-
cus;  from avfi, against,  and  eXuiv;, a
worm.  A remedy for the destruction
or expulsion of worms.
  ANTHEMIS.  From av$su>, fkero;
because it bears an abundance of flow-
ers.  The chamomile.
  Anthemis Cotula. The systematic
name of the plant called  cotula foztida.
Mayweed, or stinking chamomile.
  An'themis Nobilis.  The systematic
name of the common  chamomile.
  Anthemis Py'rethrum.  The plant
from which the pyrethrum is  obtained.
The Spanish chamomile, or pellitory  of
Spain.
  ANTHE'RA.  From  ov^p0J, florid,
so called from its having  this  color.
The name of  an ancient  remedy, com-
pounded  of  myrrh,  sandarac, alum,
0 
I
ANT               41                ANT
 saffron, Sec.  Also, the male part of the
 fructification of plants.
   ANTHORA.   Avti^opa, from avti,
 against, and $opa, monkshood; so called,
 because it is supposed to counteract the
 effects  of monkshood.   A species  of
 wolfsbane.
   ANTHRA'CIA.  From ew£pag, coal.
 Carbuncular exanthem.  An eruption
 of imperfectly suppurating tumors, with
 indurated edges.
   ANTHRACO'SIS.  Anthracia, carbo
 palpebrarum, from  oi£pa|,  coal.   A
 species of carbuncle, which attacks the
 eyelids and eyeballs.
   ANTHRAKOK'ALI. From a^paf,
 coal, and  kali, potassa.  A remedy of
 recent introduction  in the treatment  of
 cutaneous diseases.
   ANTHRAX.  From ai^pof, a eoal.
 A hard, circumscribed, inflammatory tu-
 mor, resembling a boil, seated in the cel-
 lular membrane and skin on the back,
 which  soon becomes gangrenous, and
 discharges an exceedingly fetid sanies.
   ANTHROPOGRA'PHY.     From
 aj£owrto$, a man,  and ypa<j>w, to write.
 A description of the human organism.
   ANTHROPOL'OGY.   Anthropolo-
 gia, from ai^pwrtoj, a man, and Xoyos, a
 discourse.  A treatise on man.
   ANTHROPOMETRY.  From  av-
 ^pwrtoj, a man, and fist pop, measure.   A
 knowledge of the  size of the different
 parts of the organism of man.
   ANTHYPNOTTC.  Anthypnoticus;
 from avti, against, and vttvutixo;, stupe-
 fying.   A remedy against sleep or drow-
 siness.
   ANTHYPOCHON'DRIAC.   An-
 thypochondriacus;  from avti,  against,
 and  vrto'xovSpia,  hypochondria.  A re-
 medy for hypochondriasis, or low-spirit-
 edness.
  ANTI.  Avti, against, opposed to, op-
 position.  It is used as a prefix to many
 words,  as antiodontalgic, opposed to,
or remedy  for odontalgia or tooth-
ache ; antiscorbutic, or remedy for scor-
butus.
  ANTIAG'RA.   From avtia5, a ton-
          4»
 sil, and ay pa, a prey.  A swelling of the
 tonsils.
   ANTIARTHRIT'IC.   Antiarthriti-
 cus; from avti, against, and  ap^pttfij,
 the gout.  A remedy for the gout.
   ANTIASTHMATIC.  Antiasthma-
 ticus;  from  avti,  against, and aaSpa,
 asthma.  A remedy for the asthma.
   ANTIATROPHIC.  Antiatrophicus;
 from avti, against, and a-fptx^a, an atro-
 phy.  A remedy for atrophy or wasting
 away.
   ANTIBRACHIAL  APONEURO-
 SIS.   A portion  of the aponeurotic
 sheath,  which envelops  the  whole of
 the upper limb, is so termed.
   ANTICACHECTIC.  Anticachecti-
 cus; from avti, against, and xa^lta, a
 cachexy.  A  remedy for cachexy  or a
 bad habit of body.
   ANTICAN'CEROUS.  Anticancer-
 osus, from avti, against, and xapxivwfia,
 cancer. •Opposed to cancer.
   ANTICAR'DIUM.   From    avti,
 against, and  xapSta,  the heart   The
 scrobiculus cordis, or pit of the stomach.
   ANTICATARRH'AL. Anticatatr-
 halis; from avti, against, and  xarappoj,
 a catarrh. Opposed to, or a remedy for,
 catarrh.
   ANTICOL'IC.  From avti, against,
 and xcuUxoj, the  colic.  A remedy for
 the colic.
   ANTIDIARRHCE'IC.  A   remedy
 for diarrhoea.
   ANTIDI'NIC.   From avti, against,
. and Sivo j, vertigo. Medicines used against
 vertigo.
   ANTIDOTE.  Antidotum, from avth
 against, and SiSufii, I give.  A remedy
 for combating or counteracting  the ef-
 fects of poison.
   ANTIDYSENTERIC. Antidysen-
 tericus, from avti, against,and Svasvtepia,
 a flux.  Opposed to, or remedy for, dys-
 entery.
   ANTIEMETIC. Antiemeticus, from
 avti, against, and  f/*£W, to vomit.   That
 which prevents vomiting.
   ANTIEPHIALTIC.    Antiephialli-
 cus,  from avti, against, and ityitiktr^, 
               ANT               4

the nightmare.  That which is opposed
to nightmare.
   ANTIEPILEPTIC. Antiepilepticus,
from  avti, against,  and  mckri^ia, the
epilepsy.  That  which is opposed to
epilepsy.
   ANTIFEBRILE.  Antifebrilis; from
avti,  against,  and febris, a fever.   A
febrifuge, or that which opposes fever.
   ANTIHECTIC. Antihecticus; from
avti, against, txtixo^, hectic fever.   A
remedy for hectic fever.
   ANTIHELIX.  From avti, against,
and s%£, the helix.  The inner circle of
the ear is so named from  its opposition
to the outer, which is called the helix.
   ANTIHEMORRHOID'AL.   Anti-
htmorrhoidalis; from  avti, against,  and
atjitoppoiSsj, hemorrhoids.   Opposed to
hemorrhoids.
   ANTIHERPET'IC.  Antiherpeticus;
from avti, against, and *prt*j, herpes.
That which is opposed to herpes.
   ANTIHYDROPHOB'IC.     Anti-
hydrophobicus ; from avti, against, v8u>p,
water, and $o/3o$,  dread.  Opposed to
hydrophobia.
   ANTIHYDROP'IC.   Antihydropi-
eus;   from avti, against, and  uSpw^,
dropsy.  A remedy for dropsy.
   ANTI-ICTERIC.   From  avti, a-
gainst, and ixtipos, jaundice.  A reme-
dy against jaundice.
   ANTILITH'ICS.  Antilithica; from
avti, against, ?u£o$, a stone.  A medi-
cine to prevent the  formation of urinary
calculi.
   ANTILO'BIUM. Fromoj>*t, against,
and toffos, the bottom  of the ear.  That
part of the ear which is opposite the lobe.
   ANTILOI'MIC.  Antiloimicus; from
avti,  against,  and a.ot/*oj, the plague.
Opposed to the plague.
   ANTIMO'NIAL. Antimonialis; from
antimonium, antimony.   A preparation
in which antimony is an ingredient.
   Antimonial Powder.  A peroxyd
of antimony combined with phosphate
of lime.
   Antimoniale  Causticum.    Anti-
monium muriatum.
                ANT

  Antimonii et  Potassa  Tartras.
Tartrate of antimony and potash.
  Antimonii Oxydum.  Oxyd of anti-
mony.
  Antimonii Sulphure'tum Pracipi-
ta'tum.  Precipitated sulphuret of an-
timony.
  Antimonii Sulphure'tum Rubrum.
Red sulphuret of antimony.
  Antimonii   Tartarizati  Vinum.
Wine of tartarized antimony.
  Antimonii Vitrum.  Glass  of anti-
mony.
  ANTIMO'NIUM.  Antimony.
  Antimonium  Diaphoret'icum.  An
oxyd of antimony.
  ANTIMONY.  From avti,  against,
and povos, alone, because it is not found
alone; or according to others, from avti,
against, and moine, a monk, because as
some affirm, Valentine, by a careless ad-
ministration of it, poisoned  his brother
monks. Antimony  is a heavy, solid,
brittle metallic substance, seldom found
in a pure  state.  It has a metallic lus-
tre, and a  lead-gray  color, inclining to a
steel-gray.
  ANTINEPHRIT'IC.   Anlinephriti-
cus; from avti, against, and vttypitis, a
disease of the kidneys.  A  remedy for
inflammation of the kidney.
  ANTIODONTAL'GIC. Antiodontal-
gicus ; from avti, against and oSovtaXyia,
tooth-ache.  See Odontalgia.
  ANTIODONTAL'GICUS.     The
name of an insect, so called from its sup-
posed  antiodontalgic properties.   It is
described by Germi, in a work published
at Florence, 1794.   It is a sort of curcu-
lio, found on a species of thistle, carduus
spinosissimus. The manner recommend-
ed for using these  insects is,  to rub a
number of them between the thumb and
fore-finger, until they lose  their mois-
ture and then to touch the decayed part
of the painful tooth.   In some instances
it was said to have produced immediate
relief, except when the gums around it
were inflamed, in which case,  it failed
to produce the desired effect. Other in-
sects are also said to possess theproper-
2 
ANT
43
ANT
ty of relieving the tooth-ache, as  the
scarahcus ferrugincus of Fabricius;  the
coccinella septempunctata, or lady-bird;
the chrysomela populi, &c. These insects,
at one time, were quite  popular as a
remedy for tooth-ache in Germany,  but
their anti-odontalgic  virtues have  not
proved so great as represented by those
who recommended them, and to be re-
alized, in any sensible degree, requires
a larger amount of credulity than most
persons  possess,  consequently, they
have fallen into disrepute.   It is possi-
ble,  by  exciting the  gum, they might
sometimes procure temporary relief.
  ANTIPARALYT'IC.  Antiparalyti-
cus; from avti, against,  and rcapa%vai$,
the palsy.  Opposed to palsy.
  ANTIPATHY.  Antipathia;  from
avti, against, and rta^oj, passion, affec-
tion.  Aversion to particular objects or
things.
  ANTIPERISTALTIC.   Antiperis-
talticus;  from avti, against, and ftepiot-
£M,w, I  compress or contract.  Any
thing which  obstructs  the peristaltic
motion of the intestinal tube.
  ANTIPHAR'MIC.  Antipharmicus ;
from avti, against, and fyapuaxov, a poi-
son.  Preservatives against, or remedies
for, poison.  A counter-poison.
  ANTIPHLOGISTIC.  Antiphlogis-
ticus; from avti, against, and $a,tyw, I
burn.  That which  opposes inflamma-
tion.
  ANTIPHTHIS'ICAL.   Antiphthis-
icus; from avti, against, and $to«$, con-
sumption.  Opposed to consumption.
  ANTIPHYS'IC. Antiphyskus; from
avti against, and $w<jaw, to blow.  A
carminative or  remedy against flatu-
lence.
  ANTIPLEURIT'IC.    Antipleuriti-
cus; from avti, against,  and ?fk£vpiti$,
pleurisy.  A remedy, against pleurisy.
  ANTIPODAG'RIC.   Antipodagri-
cus;  from  avti, against, and rtofiaypa,
the  gout.  Opposed to the gout.
  ANTIPRAX'IS.  From avti, against,
and Tipotsu, I work.   A  contrary state
of different parts in the same individual.
  ANTIPYRETIC.   Antipyreticus ;
from avti,  against, and rtvpetos, fever.
Opposed to fever; a febrifuge.
  ANTiaUARTANATRIUM.  From
avti, against, and quartana, a quartan
fever.  A remedy for quartan fever.
  ANTIRHACHIT'IC.   Antirhachi-
ticus; from avti, against, and rachitis,
the rickets.  Opposed to the rickets.
  ANTIRHI'NUM ELATI'NE.  The
systematic name of the plant called flu-
ellen, or female speedwell.  The elatine
of the shops.
  Antirhinum Lina'ria.   The  com-
mon toad flax, a perennial indigenous
plant.
  ANTISCOL'IC  Antiscolicus; from
avti, against, and crxwTuji, a worm.  Op-
posed to worms.  Anthelmintic.
  ANTISCORBUTIC.   Antiscorbuti-
cus;  from avti, against, and scorbutus,
the scurvy.   Remedies for the scurvy.
  ANTISCROF'ULOUS.   Antistru-
mosus.   Opposed to scrofula.
  ANTISEPTIC.  Antisepticus; from
avti, against,  and  c^rfw, to putrefy.
That which is  opposed to putrefaction.
  ANTISPASMODIC.   Antispasmo-
dicus;  from avti, against, and oitaapos,
a  spasm.   That which possesses the
power  of allaying or removing spasms.
  ANTISTRUMOSUS.   Antiscrofu
lous.
  ANTPTHENAR.  Adductor pollices
pedis, a muscle of the foot.
  ANTITRAGTCUS. Antitragus; a
small muscle of the ear.
  ANTITRAG'US. From avti, against,
and fpoyoj, the tragus.  An eminence
opposite the tragus of the outer ear.
  ANTIVENE'REAL.   From  avti,
against,  and  venereus,  venereal.   A
remedy for the venereal disease.
  ANTODONTAL'GIC.  See Antio-
dontalgic.
  ANTO'NII  SANCTI IGNIS.   St.
Anthony's fire.  Erysipelas.
  ANTRUM.  A cave or cavern.  A
cavity which has a small opening into it.
 1 An'trum Auris.  The cochlea of the
ear. 
APA
44
APH
   Antrum Dentale.  The pulp cavity
 of a tooth.  See Dental Cavity.
   Antrum  Highmoriamm.  Antrum
 of Highmore, called so, after the name
 of the anatomist who gave the first cor-
 rect description of it.   See Maxillary
 rtinus.
   Antrum   Maxillare.   Maxillary
 sinus.
   Antrum  Pylori.  A cavity  of the
 stomach near the pylorus.
   ANUS.   The opening at the inferior
 extremity of the rectum. The term anus
 is also  applied  to  an  opening  of the
 third ventricle of the brain which com-
 municates with the fourth.
   Anus, Artificial. An artificial open-
 ing, made to supply the natural anus.
   Anus, Imperforate.  A malforma-
 tion in which the anus  is wanting. Im-
 perforation of the anus.
   ANVIL.  A  mass of iron with one
 smooth surface, on which metals are
 hammered  and shaped.  It is used by
 smiths, jewellers and mechanical den-
 tists.
   AN'VILED.  Shaped or wrought on
 an anvil.
   ANXI'ETY.   Restlessness;  agita-
 tion; general indisposition, with  a dis-
 tressing sense of oppression about the
 epigastric region.
   AOCHLE'SIA.  From a, priv. and
 o^oj,  disturbance.   Calmness;  tran-
 quillity.
   AORTA.  From ar^p, air, and trjpca,
 I keep, because it was supposed by the
 ancients  that only air was kept  in  it.
 The great trunk of the  arterial system.
 It arises  from  the left ventricle of the
heart,  passes upward,  forms a  curve
and descends in front, but rather on the
 left side of the spine, into the abdomen.
   AORTITIS.   From aorta, and itis.
 Inflammation of  the aorta.
   AOTUS.  From a, priv. and owj, an
 ear.  A monster  without ears.
   APALOT'ICA. From artaxot^s, soft-
 ness, tenderness.   Accidental lesions, or
 deformities of soft parts.
   APARI'NE.  From  pivr,, a file,  so
 called, because its bark is rough like a
 file.  Galium aparine, or goose-grass.
   APARTHRO'SIS.  From ano, and
 ap^tpov, a joint.  Diarthrosis.
   APEL'LA. From a, priv. and pellis,
 skin.  Shortness of the prepuce.
   APE'RIENT.  Aperiens;  from ape-
 rire, to open.  A medicine which gently
 opens the bowels.
   APERTOR  OCULI.  The levator
 palpebrae superioris.
   APEX.  The point or extremity of
 a part, as the apex of the tongue, nose,
 root of a tooth, &c.
   APHELX'IA.    From  a^Tixw,  I
 separate or abstract.  A  disease which
 induces absence or abstraction of mind.
   APH'ESIS.  From  a^/n, I relax.
 The remission or cessation of a disease.
   APHO'NIA.   From  a, priv.  and
 $u>vri, the voice. A loss or privation of
 voice.
   APH'ORISM.   Aphorismus;   from
 a^optf«, to distinguish.   A principle or
 maxim set forth in few words, or in a
 short sentence.
   APHTHvE.  From <***«, I inflame.
 A disease which consists of roundish,
 pearl-colored ulcers or vesicles upon  the
 tongue, gums, inner walls of the mouth,
 sometimes extending through the whole
 of the alimentary  canal, and generally
 terminating in curd-like sloughs.
   Aphthous   ulcers are supposed  by
 professor Wood, to be the result of ves-
 icular  eruption  of the mouth, and  in
 treating of the disease, he  says, "The
 vesicle  is small,  oval  or  roundish,
 white or pearl-colored, and  consists of a
 transparent serous fluid under the ele-
 vated epitheleum.  In a few  days the
 epitheleum breaks, the serum escapes,
 and a small ulcer forms, more or less
 painful,  with a whitish  bottom, and
usually a red  circle  of inflammation
around it. The vesicles are sometimes
distinct and  scattered, sometimes nu-
merous and  confluent.  The distinct
variety, though painful, is a light affec-
tion, continuing  in general only a few
days or a week, and is usually confined 
APH                45                API
to the mouth. It produces little or no
constitutional disorder, though it may
be associated with fever and gastric irri-
tation as an effect.   It attacks  equally
children and  adults; but it is said not to
be very common in  early infancy.  In
adults it is frequently occasioned by the
irritation of decayed teeth.   The con-
fluent variety is much more severe and
obstinate.  This frequently  extends  to
the fauces and pharynx, and  is even
said to reach the intestinal canal, though
it may be doubted whether the affection
of the stomach and bowels is identical
with that of the mouth.   When it oc-
cupies the fauces, it  renders deglutition
painful. It is, sometimes, attended with
gastric uneasiness, vomiting, and intes-
tinal pains, and diarrhoea.  Fever occa-
sionally  precedes it,  and  moderates
without  entirely  ceasing upon the ap-
pearance  of  the  eruption.  The  fever
sometimes assumes a typhoid  charac-
ter."  The cause  of the  disease is ob-
scure, though it is, probably, dependent
upon a vitiated state of the humors of
the body and acidity  of  the  gastric
juices.
   In the treatment of the disease, pro-
fessor Wood  says, " Magnesia  may be
given to correct  acidity, and  the diet
regulated by the state of the stomach.
In the severer cases, fever should be ob-
viated by refrigerent cathartics and dia-
phoretics, and by a  liquid farinaceous
or demulcent diet.  When the disease
attacks  the  fauces or pharynx,  occa-
sions painful swallowing, and is  at-
tended with  much fever and a strong
pulse, general bleeding may become ne-
cessary, and, subsequently, the applica-
tion of leeches to the throat.   Diarrhoea
must be counteracted by the usual reme-
dies calculated to relieve  intestinal irri-
tation, among which  may be mentioned
as especially  useful,  emollient applica-
tions to the  abdomen, and  the warm
bath.  When the  fever assumes the ty-
phoid form,  a tonic and  supporting
treatment may be required.
  "In the early stages, the local treat-1
ment should consist of demulcent ap-
plications, as flaxseed  tea, mucilage of
gum arabic, or almond emulsion, with
or without a little laudanum, or some
preparation of morphia.  But after the
inflammation has  somewhat subsided,
and  ulcers are left indisposed to heal, as-
tringent washes may be resorted to. So-
lutions  of acetate  of lead, sulphate of
zinc, and alum; water acidulated with
sulphuric or muriatic  acid, and sweet-
ened with the honey  of  roses;  and
various vegetable astringent  and  tonic
infusions have been recommended.  The
author usually employs a strong solu-
tion  of sulphate of zinc, in the propor-
tion  of fifteen or twenty grains to the
ounce  of water; which he  applies by
means of a  camel's-hair pencil, exclu-
sively  to the ulcers, with the almost
uniform effect of disposing them to heal;
and, even in the eruptive stage, this ap-
plication will often be found to effect
an almost immediate cure."  Professor
Dungleson  recommends touching the
ulcers  with the nitrate of silver.  He
has found it the most effectual remedy.
The sulphate of copper might also be
used in the same  way with advantage.
   When it occurs in females during
lactation, weaning the child will  often
be found necessary.  In obstinate cases,
the author last mentioned recommends
a  change of the physical  influences to
which the patient is subjected, by trav-
elling, exercise, &c.
   APHTHOUS.  Relating to aphtha;.
   APHYL'LUS.   From a, priv. and
$vX%ov, a leaf.  Leafless.  A plant with-
out leaves.
   APIS.  The name of a genus of in-
sects.  The bee.
   Apis Mellif'ica.  The honey-bee.
   A'PIUM  GRAV'EOLENS.   The
pharmacopoeial name of the herb smal-
lage.
   Apium Petroseli'num.   The phar-
macopoeial name of the common pars-
ley.
  APIUS.  The name of an author of
a  Latin Dissertation upon  Difficult 
APO
46
APO
 Dentition in Children, published 1751,
 at Ellangiae.
   APLO'ME. The name of a very rare
 mineral. A variety of crystallized garnet.
   APLONiE.  A mineral supposed to
 be  a variety of garnet; it is of a deep
 orange-brown color.
  APNEUSTIA.  Apncea.
   APNCE'A.  From a, priv. and rtvcu,
 1 respire.  Difficult respiration.
  APOCENO'SIS. From arto, out, and
 xsvou, to evacuate. A morbid flux.
  APO'COPE.  From arto, and xorttfo,
 to cut from.  In Medicine,  the  cutting
 off of a part.  Abscission.
  APOLEP'SIS.  From arto, and Xaa-
 6avu, to take  from.   A suppression  or
 retention of any of the natural evacua-
 tions.
  APOLEX'IS.   From  arto^yo,  I
 cease. Old age;  decrepitude.
  APOM'ELI. From arto, from, and
 fisu, honey.  An oxymel, or decoction
 made of honey.
  APOMYLE'NAS.  From artouvXka-
 ivu, I make a wry mouth.  Projection of
 the lips  by pressing them against each
 other; sometimes a symptom of disease.
  APONEURO'SIS.  From arto, and
vBvpov, a nerve.  A tendonous expan-
sion, but the  ancients regarding every
white part as a nerve, supposed an apo-
neurosis to be a nervous expansion, and,
hence, gave it that name.
  APONEUROTIC. Relating to apo-
neuroses.
  APO'NIA. From a, priv. and ftovos,
pain.  Without pain.
  APOPEDA'SIS.   From arto, and
xrjSaa, to jump from.  A luxation.
  APOPHLEGMA'SIA.   From arto,
and ttey^a, phlegm.  A discharge of
mucus.
  APOPHLEGMAT'IC.   ApopMeg-
maticus ; from arto, and $\iy/jia, phlegm.
Apophlegnuttizantia.   Medicines  which
excite mucous   secretions  from  the
mouth and nose.
  APOPHYLLITE.   A  crystallized
mineral, composed of silex, potassa and
water.
    APOPHYSIS.   From artotpvu,  to
 proceed from.  In  Anatomy, a projec-
 tion, or process of a bone.  In Botany,
 the enlarged base of the capsule adhe-
 ring to the frondose mosses.
   APOPLECTIC.  'From  artort^U,
 apoplexy.  Belonging to apoplexy.
    APOPLEXY.   Apoplexia;  from
 arto,  and  rt^crtjo,  to strike  or  knock
 down; because when  a person is at-
 tacked by this disease, he suddenly falls
 down.  A disease  characterised  by  a
 sudden loss of sense, motion, and ster-
' torous breathing.  The  term is used by
 some  to denote  a sudden effusion of
 blood  into the substance  of organs or
 tissues, but it is usually  restricted to the
 brain, and  the above  are among the
 phenomena which characterise cerebral
 apoplexy.
   APOPNIXTS.   From artortnyw, to
 suffocate.  Suffocation.
   APOPTO'SIS.  From artort«t*«, to
 fall down.  The  falling down of any
 part from relaxation; the relaxation of
 bandages.
   APO'RIA.  From a, priv. and rtopoj,
 a  duct.   Restlessness  caused by  the
 stoppage of any  of the natural secre-
 tions.
   APOSPTIA.  From arto, from, and
 oitos, food.  Aversion .to food.
   APOSPAS'MA.  From artotjrtoto, to
tear off.  A violent severance of a liga-
ment or tendon.
   APOSPHACELE'SIS. Mortification
resulting from bandaging wounds and
fractures too  tightly.
   APOSTE'MA. From arto, from, and
taty/xi, I settle, or from,  a^ioty/ii, I re-
cede.  A term used by the ancients to
denote abscesses in general.
  APOTHE'CA.  From artoti^ui, to
place. A place where medicines are kept.
   APOTH'ECARY.   Apothecarius;
from arto, and ti^fii, pono, to put; so
called, because his employ is to prepare
and keep the various articles of medi-
cine, and  to  compound  them  for the
physician's use.  In  every country ex-
cept Great Britain, one who sells drugs, 
APP                47               AGIU
and puts up prescriptions.  In addition
to this, apothecaries  in England exer-
cise in certain cases,  and under certain
restrictions, the duties of the physician.
   APPARATUS.  From appareo, to
appear, or be ready at hand.  A collec-
tion of instruments or means for any
business or operation whatever.   The
term  is  also apphed to  the  different
methods of operating for the stone, and
in Anatomy,  to a collection of organs
which work for the accomplishment of
the same  end, or a system of organs
formed of a similar texture, or that have
analogous functions.
   Apparatus, Dental.   See Dental
Apparatus.
   Apparatus, Pneumatic    Instru-
ments by which aeriform  fluids may, in
distillations, solutions, and other opera-
tions, be caught, collected, and properly
managed.
   APPAREIL.  Apparatus.
   APPENDI'CULA. A small append-
age.
   Appendicula Caci Vermiformis.
A vermicular process, about four inches
long,  of the size of a goose-quill, which
hangs from the intestinum coecum of
the human body.
   Appendicula Eppiloica. The adi-
pose appendices of the colon and rectum,
which are filled with  adipose matter.
   APPENDICULATUS. A  term ap-
phed  to leaves, leaf-stalks, &c, that are
furnished with an additional organ for
some  purpose not essential to it.
   APPEN'DIX. An appendage; some-
thing  appended.   Any part which ad-
heres  to an  organ or is continuous
with it,
  AP'PETITE.   From  appetere, (ad
and petere,) to desire.   An internal de-
sire, which warns us of the necessity of
exerting  our  digestion or generative
functions; a relish for food; a desire for
sensual pleasures.
  APPLE,  ADAM'S.   See  Pomum
Adami.
  APPLICATION.  Applicatio; from
applicare, to apply.  In  Therapeutics,
external remedies, as  opposed to medi-
cines designed to be given internally.
  APPOSITION.  Adding to,  sitting
to, addition, accretion.  In Dental Pros-
thesis, it is sometimes employed synony-
mously with coaptation.
  APTYSTOS.  From a,  priv.  and
rttvu, I spit.  Without expectoration.
  APYRETTC.  Apyreticus; from a,
priv. and rti>p, fire,  Without  fever.  A
word apphed  to  those days in which
there is no paroxysms of disease.
  APYREX'IA.   From a,  priv. and
7tvps%ia, fever.  Absence of fever.  In-
termission between  the febrile  parox-
ysms.
  A'QJJA.  Water.
  Aq.ua  Acidi Carbonici.  Carbonic
acid water.  Artificial seltzer  water.
  A qua Amygdala'rum Concentra'ta .
Water of bitter almonds.
  Aqua Anethi.  Dill water.
  Aq.ua   Brocchiari.   A  supposed
styptic, which at one time attracted con-
siderable attention in France, but which
is said to possess no efficacy.
  Aqua Calcis.  Lime water.
  Aqua Camphora.  Camphor water.
  Aqua Carui.   Caraway water.
  A qua Cassia .  Water of cassia.
  Aqua Chlorinii.  Chlorine water.
  Aqua Cinnamomi. Cinnamon water.
  Aqua Distillata.  Distilled water.
  Aqua  Florum Aurantii.  Orange
flower water.
  Aqua Fortis.  Weak and impure
nitric acid.
  Aqua Funiculi.   Fennel water.
  Aqua Lauro-cerasi.  Cherry-laurel
water.
  Aqua Marine.  Beryl.
  Aqua  Metha  Piperita.  Pepper-
mint water.
  Aqua Mentha Pulegii.    Penny-
royal water.
  Aqua Mentha  Viridis.  Spearmint
water.
  Aqua Picis Liquida.  Tar water.
  Aqua Pimenta.  Pimento water.
  A qua Regia  A mixture of nitric and
muriatic acids. 
AQ,U
48
ARB
  Aqua Rosa.   Rose water.
  AhuaSambuci.  Elder water.
  A qua Styptic a.  A powerful astring-
ent,  composed  of sulphate of copper,
sulphate of alum, and sulphuric acid.
  Aqua Vita.   Brandy.
  Aqua Distillata. Distilled waters,
made by putting mint, penny-royal, &c,
into a still with water, and drawing off
as much  as are impregnated with the
properties  of the plants.
  Aqua Minerales. Mineral waters.
  Aqua Stillati'tia Simplices. Sim-
ple distilled waters.
  Aqua   Stillatitia   Spirituosa.
Spirituous distilled waters.
  ACULEDUCT.    Aquceductus.  A
canal or duct, so called because it was
supposed to carry water.
  Aqueduct of Fallopius. Acanalin
the petrous portion of the  temporal bone,
first accurately described  by Fallopius.
  Aquaduct of Sylvius.   A  canal
communicating  between  the third and
fourth ventricles of the brain.
  Aquaduc'tus Cerebri.  See Infun-
dibulum of the Brain.
  Aquaductus Coch'lea.   A narrow
canal proceeding from  the tympanic
scala of the cochlea, to the posterior edge
of the pars petrosa.
  Aqueductus  Vestib'uli.  A  canal
proceeding from the vestibule near the
common orifice  of the two semicircular
canals, and opening at the posterior sur-
face of the pars petrosa.
  AQJJEOUS.   Watery.
  Aqueous Humor of the Eye.   The
limpid fluid which fills both chambers
of the eye.
  Aquetta.  The name of  a poison
used by the Roman women, under the
Pontificate of Alexander  VII.
  AaUIFO'LIUM.  From acus, a nee-
dle, and folium,  a leaf; so called, because
it has a prickly leaf.  Ilex  aquifolium.
Holly.
   AQJJILA.  Aitos, the eagle.   An
alchemical  name  for  sal  ammoniac,
mercurius precipitatus, arsenic, sulphur,
and the philosopher's stone.
   Aquila Alba.  One of the names by
which calomel was  designated among
the ancients. See  Hydrargyri Submu-
reas.
   Aquila Alba  Philosophorum.—
Aquila  alba ganymodis.   Sublimated
sal ammoniac.
   Aquila Coslestis.  A panacea, or
universal cure; of which mercury was
a constituent.
   Aquila Veneris.  An ancient pre-
paration made of verdigris,  and subli-
mated sal ammoniac.
   Aquila Lignum.  Eagle-wood. See
Lignum Aloes.
   Aquila Vena.  The temporal veins.
   AQJJILE'GIA VULGARIS.  The
systematic name of the common colum-
bine.
   AQJJU'LA.   Diminutive  of aqua.
A small quantity of limpid water.   It
is apphed to the small portion of pellu-
cid water that distends the  capsule of
the crystalline lens, and the lens itself.
   A'RACA MIRA.   A shrub found in
the Brazils, the roots of which are said
to be  diuretic and anti-dysenteric.
   ARACHNOID  MEMBRANE.—
Membrana  arachnoides;  arachnoides;
from  apaxvr[, a  spider, and  eiSoj, like-
ness,  from its resemblance to a spider's
web.   The name of a thin membrane,
without vessels and nerves, between the
the dura and pia mater, and  surround-
ing the cerebrum, cerebellum, medulla
oblongata and medulla spinalis.  The
term has, also, been applied to the tunic
of the crystalline lens and vitreous humoT
of the eye.
   ARAC. The name of an East In-
dian spirituous liquor.
   ARiEOTICA.  From apaioca, to rar-
efy. Medicines supposed  to possesss the
quality of rarefying the fluids of the body.
   ARA'LIA.  From or a, a bank in the
sea, because it is found  on  banks near
the sea.  The berry bearing angelica.
   ARBOR.  A  tree. In Botany, it sig-
nifies  a plant having but  one trunk,
which rises to a great height,  is dura-
I ble, woody, and divided  at  its top into 
ARC
49
ARG
  many branches which do not perish in
  winter.  In Anatomy, the word  is ap-
  plied to parts which ramify like  a tree,
  as the arbor vitae of the cerebellum; and
  in Chemistry it is apphed to crystalliza-
  tions, which ramify like the branches of
  a tree.
    AR'BUTUS UVA  URSI.   Uva
  ursi; bear's berry; bear's whortle-ber-
  ry;  bear's whorts, or bear's bilberries.
    Arc.  From arcus; anarch.   Arch.
  See Arches, Alveolar.
    AR'CA ARCANORUM. The mer-
  cury of the philosophers.
    Arca Cordis.   The pericardium.
    ARCA'NUM. A secret. A nostrum,
  the preparation of which  is kept a se-
  cret  to enhance its supposed value.
    Arcanum Duplex.   Arcanum du-
 plicatum;  a name  formerly given to
  sulphate of potassa.
    Arcanum Tartari.  Acetate of po-
 tassa.
    ARCH, ANASTOMOTIC.  The
 union of  two  vessels,  which  anasta-
 mose by describing a curved line.
   ARCHES, ALVEOLAR.  See Al-
 veolar Arches.
   ARCHES, DENTAL.   See Dental
 Arches.
   ARCHiE'US. Archeus;  from ap^,
 commencement.  A word  adopted  by
 Van  Helmont, and used  to designate
 the active principle  of  the material
 world.   This universal archaeus, ac-
 cording to Van Helmont, is an immate-
 rial principle, which exists  in the seed
 prior  to fecundation, and presides  over
 the growth and  development of the
 body, and over  all organic phenomena.
  ARCHE. From apxrj, the beginning.
 The beginning or first manifestations of
 a disease.
  ARCTATIO.  From arcto, I make
 narrow. Contraction of a natural open-
ing, as of a canal.  A constipation of
the  intestines from inflammation.
  ARCTIUM LAPPA.  Clit-bur, or
common burdock.
  Arctizite. The foliated scapolite.
  ARCTU'RA. From arcto, I straight-
  en.  Inflammation of the finger caused
  by a nail grown into the flesh.
    ARCUATIO.  From arcus, a  bow.
  An anterior gibbosity  of the sternum.
    ARCUL^E.  A diminutive of arca, a
  chest.  The orbits of the eyes.
    ARDENT.  Ardens ; from ardere, to
  burn. Burning or ardent fever.
    ARDOR.  From ardere, to burn. A
  burning heat.
    Ardor Febrilis.  Feverish heat.
    Ardor Urina. A scalding sensation
  produced by the urine in the urethra.
    Ardor Ventriculi.  Heartburn.
    ARE'CA. The name of a genus of
  palms.
    Areca  Catechu.    Areca Indica.
  From the nut of this plant two kinds of
  catechu are extracted, the cuttacamboo
  and cashcutti.
    Areca Oleracea. Areca Americana.
  The cabbage-tree palm.
    AREFACTION.   The process  of
  drying substances previously  to  pul-
  verizing them.
    ARENAMEN.  Armenian bole.
    ARENA'TIO.   From arena, sand.
  A sand bath, or the application of hot
  sand to the body.
    ARE'OLA.  A diminutive of area, a
  void space. The  brown circle which
  surrounds  the nipples of  females.
   AREOM'ETER. An instrument for
 ascertaining the specific gravity of fluids
 lighter than water.
   AR'GEMA.  From apyoy, white.  A
 small white ulcer of the eye.
   ARGENTI NITRAS.   Argentum
 nitratum;  causticum lunare.  Nitrate of
 silver.
   ARGENTUM. Argyrus; fromapyos,
 white; because it is of a white color.
 Silver.
   Argentum  Folia'tum.  Silver leaf.
 This, when not too thin, is sometimes
 used for filling teeth, but in consequence
 of its hardness and great  liability to be
 acted  upon  by the secretions of  the
 mouth, it should  never  be employed
for this purpose.  Tin  is, by far, pre-
ferable. 
ARN
50
ARS
  Argentum  Nitratum.   Nitrate of
silver.
  ARGIL'LA.   From apyoj, white.
Argil;  white clay.   See Alumina.
  Argilla Pura.   Pure argil, or alu-
mina.
  ARGILLACEOUS.  Of, or belong-
ing  to argilla, or aluminous earth.
  Argillaceous   Tooth  Polisher.
See Tooth Polisher, Argillaceous.
  Apgilolite. Clay-stone.
  ARHEUMATISTOS. Froma,neg.
and  ptvuatt^n,  to be  afflicted  with
rheums.  Without rheums or gout.
  ARIL'LUS. From arere, to be dry
or parched.  The tunic of the perma-
nent husk investing a seed, which falls
off  spontaneously as it becomes dry.
  ARISTALTHvE'A.  Althoza.  The
common marsh-mallow.
  ARISTOLOCHPA.  From apiatoi}
good, and to^io, or xoxiia,  parturition;
because it was supposed to aid in par-
turition.  Birthwort.
  Aristolochia    Anguicida.   The
snake- killing birthwort.
  Aristolochia   Clematitis.  Aris-
tilochia vulgaris. Upright birthwort.
  Aristolochia  Fabacea.   Fumarea
bulbosa.
  Aristolochia Longa and Aristolo-
 chia Rotunda.  The  long and  round
 birthwort.
   Aristolochia  Serpenta'ria.  Vir-
 ginia snake-root, or snake-root birthwort.
   Aristolochia  Trilobata.  Three-
 lobed birthwort.
   ARME.   From apw, I adapt.  Any
 mechanical or natural union of parts.
   ARMENIAN  STONE. Calcareous
 substances penetrated by the azure car-
 bonate of copper.  A variety of the
 azure carbonate of copper.
   ARMILL.3E MANUS MEMBRA-
 NOS^E. The annular ligament of the
 carpus.
    ARMORA'CIA.   See  Cochlearia
 Armoracia.
    ARNICA MONTA'NA. The syste-
 matic name for the arnica of the phar-
 macopoeias.
  ARNICA SPURIA.  Inula dysente-
rica.
  ARO'MA. Ap&yta, perfume, from apt,
intensely, and ofw, to smell.  Spiritis
rector.  The odorous part of plants and
other substances.
  AROMAT'IC.   Aromaticus, from
apwjua, an odor. Any thing which has a
grateful spicy scent, and  an agreeable
pungent taste, as  cinnamon,  ginger,
cardamoms, mint, &c.
  AROMATOPO'LA.   From apu/ia,
an  odor, and  rtwtao, I sell.  One who
sells drugs and spices.
  ARRACHEMENT.  From arracher;
to tear out. The separation of a part of the
body, tearing it from the part with which
it was  connected.  The term is some-
times applied to the extraction of a tooth.
  ARRACK. Arack.
  ARRAGONITE.  A mineral of a
greenish pearly-gray color.
  ARRAPHON.  From a, priv. and
pa<j>»7, a suture. Without suture.  A term
apphed to the cranium when it has no
sutures.
   ARRH^'A.  From a, priv. and psu,
 I flow.  The  suppression of  any natural
 flux.   Amenorrhoea.
   ARRIERE-DENT.   Densscrotium.
 A wisdom tooth.
   ARROWROOT.  Thefeculaofthe
 root of the  maranta  arundinacea, a
 plant which  grows in the West Indies.
 See Maranta.
   ARSEN'IATE.  From  arsenkvm,
 arsenic. A salt formed by a combination
 of arsenic acid with salifiable bases, as
 arseniate of ammonia, &c.
   ARSENIC. Arsenicum. The name of
 a metal of a blackish or steel-gray color.
 It is found native in a state of oxyd, and
 also combined with sulphur, under the
 improper name of yellow and  red arse-
 nic.  Arsenic and its various prepara-
 tions, are the most active of all poisons.
    Arsenic Acid.  Acidum arsenicum.
    Arsenic, Oxyd of.  White arsenic.
  Arsenious acid.
    Arsenic, White.   Oxyd of arsenic,
  or arsenious acid. 
ART                51                ART
   ARSENICAL CAUSTIC.   A  pre-
paration composed of two parts of levi-
gated antimony and one of white arsenic.
   ARSENICUM ALBUM.   White
 arsenic.
   ARSE'NIOUS ACID.   White  ar-
 senic.  Oxyd of arsenic.   Ratsbane.
   This powerful agent has been exten-
 sively employed, both in  America and
 Europe, during the last few years, for
 destroying the pulps  of  decayed teeth,
 but in consequence of the great liability
 of a  tooth, after the  destruction of its
 lining membrane, to give rise to inflam-
 mation of the alveolo-dental membrane,
 and abscess, the practice is rapidly fall-
 ing into  disrepute.   Dr. Maynard of
 Washington city, however, has proposed
 a plan of treatment, by  which  it is
 thought these effects may, in the majority
 of cases, be prevented.  SeeFillingTeeth.
   Dr. Spooner, of Montreal, was the
 first to use arsenious acid for the de-
 struction  of  an exposed  dental pulp,
 but the discovery was first made known
 to the dental  profession,  by his brother,
 Dr. S. Spooner, of New York, through
 the medium of a popular treatise on the
teeth, published in 1836.
   The application of a fortieth or fifti-
eth part of a grain, with an equal quan-
tity of the sulphate of morphia, to an ex-
posed dental  pulp, will destroy its vital-
ity in from three to  seven hours,  and
often  without causing any unpleasant
sensation, but  in most  instances, it is
productive of more  or  less pain.  It
should always be used with great care,
to prevent it from coming  in  contact
with  the  mucous membrane  of  the
mouth, or from becoming displaced, and
being swallowed. To prevent any acci-
dent of this sort, the cavity in the tooth
should be tightly and securely sealed up
with yellow or white wax.
  ART.  The application of a system of
rules to the performance of certain ac-
tions.
  Art, Healing. The application of
the rules of medicine in the treatment of
disease.
   Art,  Dental.   The  application  of
 the rules of dental surgery, to the treat-
 ment of the diseases of the teeth, and the
 replacement of the loss of these organs.
   ARTEMISIA.  So called because it
 was first used by a  queen of that name,
 or from Aptfsfnj, Diana, because it was
 formerly employed in  the  diseases  of
 women, over whom she presided.  Also
 the name of a genus of plants.
   Artemisia   Abrot'anum.   Abrota-
 num.  Common southernwood.
   Artemisia Absin'thium. Absinthium.
 vulgare.   Common  wormwood.
   Artemisia Chinensis.  Moxajapon-
 ica.  Mugwort of China.
   Artemisia  Glacia'lis.   Mountain
 wormwood.
   Artemisia  Judaica.   Santonicum.
 See Artemisia Santonica.
   Artemisia  Marit'ima.  Absinthium
 maritimum.  Sea wormwood.
   Artemisia  Pon'tica.   Absinthium
 ponticum.   Roman  wormwood.
   Artemisia  Rupes'tris.   Creeping
 wormwood.
   Artemisia  Santon'ica.  The Tarta-
 rian southernwood,  or wormseed.
   Artemisia Vulga'ris.  Mugwort.
   ARTERIA.   From  a^p, air,  and
 trjpsiv, to keep, because it was supposed
 by the ancients that they contained air.
 See Artery.
   ARTE'RIAC. A medicine formerly
 prescribed for diseases of the trachea.
   ARTE'RLE ADIPO'SjE.  The ar-
 teries which secrete the fat  about the
 kidneys.
   ARTE'RIAL.  Arteriosus;  Belong-
 ing to the arteries.
   Arterial Blood.  The red blood  is
 so called, because it is contained in the
 arteries.   The pulmonary veins also
 contain red blood, and on which account
 have been called arterial veins.
   Arterial System.   All of the arte-
 ries of the body.
  ARTERIOGRAPHY.  Arteriogra-
phia;  from optrjpia,  artery, and ypa^, a
 description. A description of the arteries.
  ARTERIOLA.   A small artery. 
ART
52
ART
   ARTERIOL'OGY.    Arteriologia;
 from  aptrjpia, artery, and koyoj  a dis-
 course.   A treatise on the arteries.
   ARTERIOSTEIE.   From  optr;pia,
 artery, and oateov, a bone.  Ossification
 of an artery.
   ARTERIOT'OMY.   Arteriotomia;
 from apT^pio, an artery, and te/xvu, I cut.
 The opening of an artery to draw blood.
   ARTERITIS.  From apr^a, an ar-
 tery, and itis, inflammation.  Inflamma-
 tion of an artery.
   ARTERY.  Arteria.  A firm  and
 elastic  cylindrical tube,  composed of
 three membranes, a common or exter-
 nal, a  muscular, and  an  internal, for
 conveying  the  blood  from the  heart.
 There are but two main  arteries, the
 pulmonary and the aorta; all  the  rest
 are branches.  The first originates from
 the right ventricle of the heart,  and the
 second from the left. It is by means of
 fiv arteries that the blood is  conveyed
 to every part of the body.  The pulsa-
 tion of the arteries corresponds with that
 of the heart.
   The principal arteries of the body are
 mentioned in the following table:
       Table of the Arteries.
   1. The pulmonary artery.
  The  pulmonary  artery, soon  after
 emerging from the right ventricle of the
 heart, divides into  two branches, a right
 and a left, which are distributed to  the
 lungs.
  2. The aorta.
  The aorta arises from  the left ventri-
 cle of the heart, and is the  great trunk
 from which the other  arteries of the
 body are derived.  These are  given off
 in the following order.   At  its origin it
 gives off,
  1. The anterim' cardiac, or right coro-
nary artery.
  2. The posterior cardiac,  or left coro-
nary artery. At the arch it  gives  off
three branches,
  1. The arteria innominata, which di-
vides  into the right carotid and right
subclavian.
   2. The left carotid.
   3. The left subclavian.
   The carotids are divided into external
 and internal.
   The external gives off,
   1. The superior thyroid.
   2. The lingual.
   3. The labial or facial.
   4. The inferior pharyngeal.
   5. The occipital.
   6. The posterior auris.
   7. The internal maxillary, which gives
 off the spinous artery of the dura mater,
 the   maxillary,  and  several  branches
 which go to the palate and orbit.
   8. The temporal.
   The following branches are given off
 from the internal carotids,
   1. The ophthalmic:
   2. The middle cerebral.
   3. The communicans.
   The following are the branches given
 off by the subclavian arteries,
   1. The  internal mammary,  which
 sends off the thymic, comes phrenici, peri-
 cardiac, and phrenico-pericardiac arteries.
   2. The inferior  thyroid, from which
 the  tracheal,   ascending  thyroid,  and
 tramversalis humeri are derived.
   3. The vertebral, which forms within
 the cranium the  basilary artery, which
 gives off the anterior cerebelli, the poste-
 rior cerebri and many other branches.
   4. The cervicalis profunda.
   5. The cervicalis superficialis.
   6. The superior intercostal.
   7. The supra scapular.
   When the subclavian arrives at  the
 axilla, it receives the name of the axilla-
 ry artery, and the latter when it reaches
 the arm is called  the brachial.
  The following  are the branches given
 off by the axillary artery,
   1.  Four mammary  arteries.
  2.  The sub-scapular.
  3.  The posterior circumflex.
  4.  The anterior circumflex.
  The following  branches  are given off
by the brachial  artery,
  1.  Many lateral brandies.
  2.  The profundi humeri superior. 
ART                53               ART
  3. The profundi humeri inferior.
  4. The great anastomosing artery.
  At the bend of the arm, the brachial
artery  divides into the ulnar and radial
arteries.
  The ulnar gives off,
  1. Several recurrent branches.
  2. The  common interosseal,  which
sends off the dorsal ulnar, palmaris pro-
funda, the palmary arch, and the digital.
  The radial artery gives off the follow-
ing branches,
  1. The radial recurrent.
  2. The superficialis voloz, after which
it divides into the palmaris profunda,
and the digitals.
  The arteries given off by the descend-
ing aorta in the thorax are,
  1. The bronchial.
  2. The oesophageal.
  3. The inferior intercostals.
  4. The inferior diaphragmatic.
  In the abdomen the aorta gives off,
  1. The cozliac, which at the distance
of half an inch from its  origin, divides
into three branches: 1. the gastric or
coronary artery,  2. the  hepatic, and 3.
the splenic.   The hepatic artery, before
it reaches the liver  gives  off,  1.  the
right gastro-epiploic, and 2. the cystic ar-
tery.  The  splenic artery gives oft'  the
pancreaticus  magnus, the left  gastro-
epiploic, and the vasa brevia.
  2. The  superior  mesenteric,  which
gives off,  1. the colica media, 2.  the
colica dextra, and 3. the ileo colica.
  3. The inferior mesenteric
  4. The emulgent or renal arteries.
  5. The spermatics.
  6. The lumbar arteries.
  7. The middle  sacral.
  After giving off the foregoing, the aorta
divides into  two  branches, called the
internal and external iliac arteries.
  The internal iliac or hypogastric arte-
ry gives off,
  1. The ilio lumbalis.
  2. The lateral sacrals.
  3. The obturator.
  4. The middle hemorrhoidal.
  5. The gluteal or posterior iliac     '
  6. The ischiatic.
  7. The pudica interna,  from which
the inferior hemorrhoidals, the transverse
perineal, and the dorsalis penis arise.
  The external  iliac or great artery of
the lower extremity gives off,
  1. The epigastric.
  2. The circumflexus iliaca.
  After  passing under Poupart's liga-
ment, the artery of the lower extremity
takes the name  of femoral artery, and
gives off,
  1. The profunda.
  2. The anastomotica.
  When it reaches the ham, it is called
the popliteal artery.  It here  gives off
articular branches, and below the joint
divides  into  the anterior and posterior
tibial.
  The anterior tibial gives  off,
  1. The recurrent.
  2. The internal malleolar.
  3. The external malleolar.
  4. The tarsal.
  5. The metatarsal.
  6. The dorsalis hattucis.
  The posterior  tibial gives off the  fol-
lowing,
  1. The peroneal or fibular.
  2. The nutritia tibioz.
  3. The internal plantar.
  4. The external planter which makes
a curvature across the metatarsal bones,
where it gives off four digital  arteries^
which,  after reaching  the base of the
toes, divides into the digital arteries.
  Artery,  Angular.    See  Facial
Artery.
  ARTESTI'CUS.   From artm,  a
limb.  One deprived of a limb.
  ARTHANITA.  From apros, bread.
The herb sowbread.   See Cyclamen
Europaeum.
  ARTHRALGIA.    Arthronalgia,
from op$pov, a  joint, and  atyoj, pain.
Pain in the joints.
  ARTHREM'BOLUS.   From aP£o„,
a joint, and  s/iSaxx^, to impel.  An in-
strument employed by the ancients for
the reduction of dislocations.
  ARTHRITIC.   Arthrilicus, from 
ART
54
ART
 ap^pittf, the gout.   Pertaining to the
 gout.
   ARTHRITIS.  From op^por, a joint,
 The gout.  See Podagra.
   ARTHROCACE.  From ap$pov, a
 joint, and  xaxr;, a disease.  Disease of
 the joints, and especially caries of the
 articular surfaces.  The term is also ap-
 phed to an ulcer of the cavity of a bone.
   ARTHRO'DIA.   From  ap^pov,  a
 joint. A moveable articulation or con-
 nection of bones, in which the head
 of one is applied to a superficial cavity
 of another, so that it can be moved in
 every direction.
   ARTHRODYN'IA.  From ap^ptw,
 a joint, and oSwj?, pain.   Pain in a joint,
 chronic rheumatism.  See Rheumatism.
   ARTHROL'OGY.^rt/wofog-ia; from
 ap^pov, a joint, and a.oyoj, a description.
 A description of the joints.
   ARTHROPUO'SIS.  From ap^pov,
 a joint, and tvov, pus.   Suppuration  or
 collection of pus in a joint.
   ARTHRON.  A joint
   ARTHRO'SIA.  From aP£pow, to ar-
 ticulate.   Arthrosis,  arthritis.   Inflam-
 mation of the joints.  The  name of a
 genus of diseases in  Good's Nosology,
 embracing rheumatism, gout and white
 swelling.
   ARTHRO'SIS. From ap^pow, to ar-
 ticulate.  An articulation.
  ARTHROSPON'GUS.  From  op£-
 pov, a joint, and crtoyyoj, a sponge.   A
white fungous tumor of the joints.
  ARTICULAR.   Articularis;  from
articulus, a joint.  Pertaining to a joint.
  Articular Arteries of the Knee.
Several small branches  are given  off
from  the  popliteal  artery which  sur-
round the tibio-femoral articulation, and,
from their situation, are  designated by
this name.  They are divided into supe-
rior and inferior, and there are generally,
three of the former, and two of the latter.
  Articular  Veins of the  Knee.
These generally follow the course of the
arteries.
  ARTICULATION.    Articuhtio;
from articulus, a joint.  The connection
 of bones with each other.   Articulations
 are generally divided by anatomists into
 three kinds ;  namely, diarthrosis, synar-
 throsis, and amphiarthrosis. Articulation
 means also distinct utterance.
   Articulation of  Dental  Substi-
 tutes.  The adjustment and arrange-
 ment of one or more artificial teeth, so
 that  it or they, if there  be more than
 when placed in the mouth, shall sustain
 the same relationship to the organs with
 which  they antagonize, when the jaws
 are closed, as did the natural teeth pre-
 viously to their loss.
   Articulation of the  Teeth.  See
 Teeth, Articulation of.
   Articulation, Tempo-Maxillary.
 See Temporo-Maxillary Articulation.
   Articulation  of  Models.  See
 Models, antagonizing for artificial teeth.
   Articulation, False.   A false joint
 formed between the united extremities
 of a fractured  bone, or between  the
 articular extremity of a luxated bone and
 the parts with which it is in contact.
   ARTICULATUS.  Articulate. Joint-
 ed.
   ARTIFICIAL.   Artificial.  That
 which is formed by art.
   Artificial Eye.  A sort  of hollow
 hemisphere, painted so as to represent
 the anterior part of the globe of the eye
 and  enameled, apphed beneath the eye-
 lid.  The manufacture of artificial eyes
 has been brought to such perfection  in
 Paris, that it is difficult for a common
 observer to distinguish the difference be-
 tween them and the natural organs.
   Artificial Lower Lip and Chin.
 It sometimes happens, that persons are
 deprived of  the  lower tip and chin by
 wounds or other causes, so as greatly to
 interfere with the utterance of speech
 and the retention of the saliva.  To re-
medy such  loss, various  contrivances
 have been invented, varied in their con-
 struction to suit the peculiarity of the
cases to which they have been applied.
  In the construction of an appliance of
this sort, the first thing to be done, is to
take an impression of the lip and chin of 
ART
               ART                5!

a person, resembling, as near as possible,
in these parts of the face, the individual
requiring such substitute.  From  this
impression, suitable plaster and metallic
models and  counter-models should be
obtained. Between these, a platina plate
may be stamped, which, after being fitted
to the parts to which it is to be applied,
should be enameled and properly colored.
   But the best  substitute of this  sort
which  has ever  been  invented, is  des-
cribed by M. Delabarre in his Traitc de
la Partie Mecanique  de VArt du Chirur-
gien Dentiste. It consists in  a thin layer
of gum-elastic in solution, apphed to a
plaster model.    After this  has become
dry, another and another is apphed, then
a piece of hempen cloth, after which,
three more layers of a  solution of gum-
elastic are put on.  Upon these a piece of
fine linen spread, and over the whole, a
piece of kid, properly colored, is glued.
   This  substitute is kept in place by
means of two straps  of cloth, covered
with kid, properly painted.  If the sub-
ject be a man, false whiskers are apphed,
which will more  effectually conceal the
mode  of attachment.    To the end of
each strap, a piece of metal maybe fixed,
and bent, so as to be secured to the ear,
or the straps  may be fastened behind the
head.  For greater security, it is recom-
mended that metallic  plates be fixed to
the sides of the artificial chin, which may
be made fast, and concealed in the folds
of the cravat.
   Artificial Upper  Lip.  In the  con-
struction of an upper lip, the method of
procedure, is very similar to that for
supplying the loss of the lower; the only
difference consisting in the method of at-
tachment.  Besides,  the  straps covered
with beard, two plates  are fastened to it,
which pass up along the nose and secur-
ed to a pair of preservers, whose branch-
es  serve as  a  means of  attachment.
We should think the best method of re-
taining an artificial upper lip in its place,
would be to fix means of attachment on
the under side, which might be fixed to
the teeth.                            I
  But a substitute for either the upper or
lower lip, cannot be so constructed as to
be worn without inconvenience, and it
is fortunate  that they are not often re-
quired.
  Artificial Nose.   Although, as in
the case of the lips,  it is impossible to
construct a  substitute  for the nose that
can be worn without inconvenience, it is
by far  more frequently called for, and
happily it  can be made to  subserve a
much better purpose, for the  reason that
after being applied it may remain station-
ary.
  In France, the construction and appli-
cation   of  artificial  noses  have  been
brought to quite a high state of perfec-
tion. The method of procedure is, first
to take an impression of the  void, occa-
sioned by the destruction of the natural
organ, then to make a model  to fit the in-
equalities of the parts ; after which, to
obtain  a metallic  model and counter-
model, between which,  a thin plate of
gold  or  platina  should be swadged.
After fitting this accurately to the parts,
it  should be enameled, and painted to
correspond with the rest of the face.
  The  methods of attachment are vari-
ous. The simplest, is by means of a slip
of leather,  painted  flesh  color, pass-
ing up over the middle  of the  forehead,
and made fast under  the hair.  But this
method is objectionable.  The leather is
visible, and  it does not afford a firm and
secure support to the artificial appliance.
Another method consists in attaching to
the interior of the nose, a superior and
two lateral wings, which are made to act
above and on each side in such a way as
to retain the piece in  its place, but it has
been found that these cause  not  only a
loss of the  soft tissues against which
they are made to act, but that they are
liable to give rise to a diseased action in
them.   Mr. Ballif, however, reports the
case of  a woman who had lost her nose
in consequence of a syphilitic disease,
for  whom he constructed an artificial
nose, with three wings, which he mov-
ed by means of a spring made to work 
ART
56
ART
 by means of a button fixed in one of the
 nostrils.  Although it caused a  little
 pain at first, he states that this did not
 last long and that she did not ultimately
 suffer any serious inconvenience from it.
   The following description  of an arti-
 ficial nose,  complicated with a  substi-
 tute for a portion of the palatine organs,
 was communicated to  the author at his
 request, by  his brother, Dr.  John Har-
 ris.  The subject, a young lady, he had
 an opportunity of seeing some months
 after the operation had been performed,
 and so neatly were the appurtenances
 constructed  and  applied, that none but
 a close observer would have suspected
 it to have been the work of art.
   "When but little past infancy, the
 subject, Miss  A. C, lost her nose and
 the central portion of the soft and bony
 palate, about three-fourths of an inch in
 length and three-eighths in width, com-
 mencing about five-eighths  of an inch
 in rear of the front teeth, and extending
 backwards.
  "I have no knowledge of the cause
 that led to the affliction, only that it was
 preceded by inflammation,  ulceration,
 and general  constitutional derangement.
  "When about twelve  years of age
 she submitted herself to be operated on
for an artificial nose in Cincinnati, Ohio,
 by Dr. M. The design of which was to
supply the defect by the transfer of in-
tegument from the arm, over the deltoid
muscle, called the rhinoplastic or talia-
cotian operation.
  "To say nothing of the expense, pain
and suffering consequent upon the op
eration, and  the  jeopardy  her life was
placed in, as soon as her health would
permit,  she  returned home  in a much
worse condition than when she left.
  "To add to her misfortune, before she
left the city,  or had fairly recovered
from the effects of the first  operation,
mortified with her now aggravated con-
dition,  as a last alternative, she had a
nose manufactured of  wood by Mr.
Rostang, resident dentist  of the same
city, and  confined  in  its position by
 means of spectacles, and  an artificial
 palate, to which the nose was connected
 by intermediate fixtures, passing through
 the palatine fissure.
   "As might have been expected, the
 subsequent development of the maxilla
 and other parts soon rendered the whole
 apparatus useless, though  not until it
 had destroyed the three teeth which had
 been selected as a support to the palate,
 by means of as many rough, badly con-
 structed and arranged clasps.
   "About four  years ago, at which time
 I was consulted in her case, her  teeth
 and their relative parts exhibited the fol-
 lowing appearance, viz.  several of her
 teeth, besides the three  irrecoverably  in-
 jured by the clasps, were more or less
 decayed; some of  which  were  quite
 loose; the gums and adjacent soft parts
 much inflamed, tumefied and spongy,
 the  dental arch  and  general dimensions
 of the mouth  (whatever  they might
 have been)  was evidently  very much
 collapsed or contracted, say  to nearly
 one-half of the usual size,  as was evi-
 denced by the position  of the superior
 cuspidati, now standing parallel to each
 other  and nearly  in! contact, between
 which there had been the usual number
 of incisores and of the ordinary dimen-
 sions,  and which  were lost when she
 was about ten or eleven years of age.
   "Although the design and plan of the
 apparatus was  a good  one, for the ac-
 complishment of the purpose for which
 it was intended, its premature applica-
 tion was unquestionably  productive of
 the worst of consequences, and to which
 the contraction  of the mouth may prin-
 cipally be ascribed.
   "Her timidity, arising no  doubt from
 the recollection  of her  previous suffer-
 ing, gave me no little trouble in obtain-
 ing her consent  to the course  of proce-
 dure which I recommended,  but  after
 explaining what must soon be her con-
 dition, she reluctantly yielded her assent,
 and permitted me the full exercise of my
judgment in the management  of her
 case. 
ART                57               ART
   "The removal of the three teeth  re-
 ferred to was immediately effected, as
 was, also, all deposits of salivary cal-
 culus.
   "In about eight weeks, with the usual
 treatment, the soft parts of her mouth
 were restored to health.  The diseases of
 her teeth were next attended to, and, in
 some four weeks, thirteen carious places
 were, after the usual preparatory treat-
 ment, filled with gold foil.
   "With the mouth thus  restored to
 health, but  one question could arise as
 to the  propriety  of supplying my pa-
 tient With another palate.  If the max-
 illary organs had not attained their full
 development, might not the  same de-
 structive consequences follow, as  did
 from the other palate?
   "From the circumstance of her ad-
 vanced age, I did  not much fear that this
 would be the case, though, had I been
 governed entirely by my  own  judg-
 ment, I should have deferred further pro-
 ceedings to a more remote period, but in
 this I was overruled, by not only my fair
 patient herself, but by all her family con-
 nections, and as yet I have not had cause
 to regret the course I took.
   "I,  therefore,  constructed  a  palate
 of fine  gold upon the usual plan, with
 only two clasps, made broad and heavy,
 one on the left,  and one on  the right
 margins of the palate, to embrace two of
 the  soundest and most suitable of the
 molar teeth.
   "To the convex or superior surface of
 the palate one end  of a piece of gold
 wire three-fourths of an inch long, was
 soldered at a point corresponding with
 the  fissure, from  front to rear, and on a
 line extending between the two teeth
 embraced by the  clasps, describing the
 centre of action; the wire  or  upright
 was then bent forward and upwards  so
 as to pass through  the fissure and pre-
 sent the upper end parallel with, and at
a convenient distance from, the  exterior
opening of the naries.  This place of at-
tachment I found necessary, that no un-
equal or undue pressure might result
 from the weight and action of the super-
 incumbent parts upon the palate.
   "A screw was now cut on  a platina
 wire, for one-half inch, made to fit in a
 corresponding  one through the upper
 end of the upright wire, on a level with
 the external opening of the nose.  Upon
 the other, or anterior extremity of the
 horizontal platina  wire, a hook was
 made to act as a support to the nose by
 means of a gold loop  attached to the
 septum.of the artificial  nose, the tight-
 ness of which to be regulated by screw-
 ing the horizontal wire in or out, and
 its position, by  bending  the upright
 backwards or forwards.
   "The length of the horizontal wire is
 one inch, the size or  strength needs no
 further description.
   "It is now about four years since the
 operation was completed, and  thus far,
 I have heard no complaint."
   Artificial  Palate.  A variety  of
 contrivances have been invented to sup-
 ply the loss of the palate, but art has
 failed to produce any appliance capable
 of subserving all  the  purposes of the
 natural organs.  To a considerable  ex-
 tent, however,  her  resources have been
 made available in remedying the loss of
 a  considerable  portion  of them.   The
 simplest description of substitute that is
 employed for the loss of the palatine or-
 gans consists  of  a thin plate  of gold,
 fitted to the gums covering the palatine
 portion of the  alveolar  border, behind
 the dental arch, concave inferiorly, and
 convex superiorly, and  confined  by
 means of  clasps fitted to  one  or  more
 teeth on each side of the mouth.   But
 this, while it prevents, to  some extent,
 the passage of fluids and food from the
 mouth into the nose, remedies, but very
 partially,  the  defective  utterance  of
 speech, while  the  sharp edge of the
 plate posteriorly, if it be extended suffi-
 ciently far back to separate the buccal
from the nasal cavities, is apt to interfere
 with and irritate the tongue.  But what-
ever may be the description of the sub-
stitute which may be employed, the ad- 
ART                58                ART
vantages that will be derived from it, will
greatly depend upon the accuracy of its
fit to the parts with which it will be in
contact, and upon  the extent of its sur-
face.
  In the application of an artificial pal-
ate, it often becomes necessary to con-
nect with it, one or more artificial teeth,
which  can easily be done by extending
the plate over so much of the alveolar
ridge as  may be required by the last
named substitute.
  M.  Delabarre has invented a very
complicated and ingenious contrivance
for supplying the loss of the palatine or-
gans.  He says, "The most serious case
which  can be presented is that which I
am about to relate.  An individual had
lost, in consequence of syphilis, all the
bony and  membraneous  arch  of the
mouth, and also the greater part of the
upper teeth, amongst which were the
lateral ones, which would have been the
most favorable to be embraced by the
clasps.  I thought of constructing a min-
eral set of teeth, surmounted  by an arch
and velum of platinum, bearing upon the
sides of the cavities a circle surrounding
the parts to be supplied.  Inside of this
circle was encased  a  very light-box,
though representing the thickness and
figure of the naso-palatine floor, so that,
by this means, I restored to each of the
cavities the form it originally had. This
being done, I supported the obturator by
springs, which took their insertion upon
a metallic case which enclosed the lower
dental arch.
  "The machine subserved a  part of
the object;  that is to say, the nose and
the mouth were separated by it; the pa-
tient, however, still spoke through his
nose, because the  soft portion of the
palate was wanting.   It was then ne-
cessary to replace  this.  I could have
constructed a cover and a moveable plate
from metal, as did the goldsmith Cadot,
of whom Cullerier speaks.   But I pre-
ferred gum-elastic,  as I wished  to em-
ploy the mechanism of deglutition for
my purposes, so that the artificial cover
I should raise and fall every time the pas-
 sage of food, and  even that of saliva,
 should be  effected  from the  mouth into
 the pharynx. Consequently, the tongue
 became the means of putting the me-
 chanism in motion, and this latter was
 disposed of to this effect, in the follow-
 ing manner.
   I made an oval window in the fore-
 part of the plate; I then placed a valve
 which  closed  itself hermetically,  and
 which was held in place by means of
 an axis and a small very soft  spring.  To
 this plate  was soldered a lever, which,
 passing backwards, rested on another,
 held in a see-saw position by  an axis.
 This last lever was long enough to reach
 the extremity of the principal plate, and
 it was flattened, so as to fasten  to the
 moveable velum, which was attached to
 the pharyngeal border  of  the instru-
 ment.
   "During deglutition, the point of the
 tongue, applying itself, pressed upon the
 valve, which transmitted to all the other
 parts the movement impressed upon it.
 Thus the velum was raised,  and from a
 vertical, assumed  nearly a  horizontal
 position, in such a way that neither sohd
 food  nor  drinks could escape into the
 nasal cavities.   This plate, comphcated
 with the artificial teeth, was yet by  no
 means heavy, for the plates were of very
 thin  platina, soldered with  fine gold.
 The  patient  derived  great  advantage
 from it, both in mastication and degluti-
 tion, and in the articulation of words."
   It is possible that a piece of mechan-
 ism, like the one just  described, might
 be made to answer a very good purpose,
 as this seems to have done, but it would
 certainly be too cumbersome to be worn
 with either comfort or  ease.
   Mr. C. H. Stearns,  surgeon, of Lon-
 don,  has  recently  devoted much time
 and attention to the construction of ap-
 pliances for remedying the imperfections
 of speech consequent  upon a fissure of
 the soft palate, and we are happy to be-
 lieve that his labors have been crowned
 with a degree of success  heretofore 
ART
59
ART
thought to be unattainable by  art.   The
following is  the description which he
gives of the  instrument which he has
invented for this purpose, but it may be
well to premise, that  the subject of the
first case to which he had occasion to
apply his invention was a near relative
of his, who had previously twice sub-
mitted to the operation of staphyloraphy,
 and several times to the hands of den-
 tists who had endeavored  to close the
 fissure with mechanical  contrivances,
 but that none of these efforts had proved
 in the shghtest degree successful.   But,
 notwithstanding all these  failures, Mr.
 Stearns was induced to  undertake the
 case, and it was not  until  he had con-
 structed a number of contrivances, which
 failed  to accomplished  the object  at
 which he aimed, that he conceived the
 plan of the following  :
   He says, "a gold plate is fitted to the
 roof of the mouth, in the manner prac-
 ticed by dentists, which is to serve as the
 foundation or support of the mechanism
 intended to supply the want of the natu-
 ral soft palate.  To the upper  and pos-
 terior margin of this plate, a flat spiral
 spring is attached, which, with the deli-
 cate and permanent elasticity peculiar to
 that kind of spring, admits of easy and
 constant vibrations backwards and for-
 wards.  To the other and posterior ex-
 tremity of this spring, an artificial flexi-
 ble velum is attached.  This part of the
 instrument is constructed of Mr. Good-
 yeare's  preparation of  caoutchouc,
 which, having the property  to resist the
 action of both oils and acids, and at the
 same time of sustaining a high degree of
 heat,  has proved well adapted  to the
 purpose.   In attempting to describe the
 artificial velum, we  must, for the want
 of better terms at present, designate its
 principal parts as its body and wings.
 The body  of the velum consists of a
 lamina of the caoutchouc,  of a some-
 what triangular form, and  of the same
 size and shape as  the vacant space it is
 intended to occupy,  that being the plane
 which would be indicated by imaginary
fines connecting the opposite sides or
columns, and subtending the vertical an-
gle of the fissure, at which point the
velum is connected to the  posterior ex-
tremity of the spiral spring.  This lami-
na, constituting the body of the velum,
is divided into three pieces, which over-
lap each other.   The wings  project ob-
liquely forwards and outwards   from
each  lateral margin of the body, and
being made to conform to the shape of
the columns or sides of the fissure, are
seen to rest upon their inner and  ante-
rior surfaces, thus covering a portion of
the soft parts  which  constitute  the
boundaries of the posterior  fauces.  In
like manner, along each lateral margin
of  the body, there is  (in  mechanical
phrase) a  flange, projecting  obliquely
backwards and outwards, and extend-
ing along down the  posterior surface of
the column, it terminates  at the interior
angle of the velum.  In  this way the
wing and the flange, on the same side
 together, form a groove fitted to receive
 the fleshy sides of the  fissure.  As the
 preparation of caoutchouc made use  of
 presents  a smooth surface, and   yields
 readily to the  shghtest pressure, it is
 found to permit the contact and muscu-
 lar motion of the surrounding soft parts,
 without causing any irritation.  When,"
 therefore, the sides of the fissure tend to
 approximate, as in deglutition, gargling
 the throat, or the utterance of some of the
 short vowel  sounds,  the three parts of
 the body of  the velum slide readily by
 each other, thus diminishing the extent
 of exposed  surface, and  thereby irrita-
 ting, to  some  extent, muscular con-
 tractile action, the force  being derived
 from without, and not, of course, con-
 tained within  the  instrument.  During
  the  effort made  in speaking, the sur-
  rounding muscular parts embrace and
  close upon the  artificial  velum, and
  press it back against the concave surface
  of the pharynx.  The  passage  to the
  nares being, therefore, temporarily clos-
  ed,  the  occlusion of sound is accom-
  plished, and articulation made attainable, 
ARS
60
ARS
 as the voice or  sound, as it issues from
 the glottis, is thereby directed  into the
 cavity of the fauces, and confined there
 long enough to receive the impressions
 made upon it by  the  tongue, lips, &c.
 in the formations of the  consonant let-
 ters.
   "Though the instrument, after having
 been adapted in the way above described,
 was found materially to improve the
 speech, yet it was still considered defec-
 tive, and not admitting of general appli-
 cation, until other important requisites
 had also been attained; for it was neces-
 sary to make it so yielding as not to irri-
 tate the sensitive and restless parts with
 which it must come in contact, so that
 it might at all times be retained in place
 without  inconvenience,  while  eating,
 drinking, or during sleep.  At the same
 time, it was required to possess a degree
 of strength and firmness sufficient to sus-
 tain the  force  of any sudden  shock,
 as in coughing,  sneezing, or laughing,
 without the risk of being displaced, or in
 any way  deranged.  Durability of the
 substance composing the velum was also
 regarded as a point of the first import-
 ance to insure its usefulness.  The ma-
 terial made use of, as prepared by Mr.
 Goodyeare, and managed  according to
 his  instructions, was found (after some
 practice in the manipulation  necessary
 to bring it to the shape  required) to re-
 sist the combined action of all the decom-
 posing agents, to which it must become
 subjected, viz. motion, animal heat, the
 moisture and acids  of  the mouth, and
 the oils of the food.  The means  after-
 wards devised to keep  it in order, free-
 ing it from deposits, and thus prevent-
 ing fetor, consists in the occasional use of
 some alkaline or aromatic preparation."
   While it is necessary to suit the shape
 of the metallic part  of an  appliance of
 this sort to the peculiarities of the fissure
in each individual case, Mr. Stearns
says, the same method of constructmg
the artificial velum, is applicable to all
the varieties which he has met with.
   In a subsequent paper, published in
 the London Lancet, the same periodical
 from which the preceding quotations are
 made,  Mr. Stearns  gives  some further
 details  of his method of procedure in the
 construction of the artificial palate which
 he invented.
   After alluding  to  the various pieces
 of mechanicsm which he successively
 planned and constructed, and was obliged
 to discard, previously to having conceiv-
 ed the design of the one which he ulti-
 mately adopted, he  says,  "After this
 fortunate acquisition, (Mr. Goodyeare'?
 preparation of caoutchouc,) I  did not
 immediately hit upon the form  or plan
 best suited to the purpose, and it  was
 several months before I brought the in-
 strument  to  its present  shape,  with
 which, however, I have every reason to
 be content. The  present  plan  of con-
 struction  may be best explained  by a
 notice of the steps that have led to it.
 I first moulded a simple triangular and
 somewhat concave lamina of the mate-
 rial, of the same shape and size as the fis-
 sure.  This I attached to the gold roof,
 so that it would descend obliquely down-
 wards and backwards, until its  inferior
 margin approached within  about two
 fines of the concave  surface   of  the
 pharynx.  This method seemed to pro-
 duce a  decided improvement,  though
 not so great as any one, I  think, would
 have expected from seeing the  position
 and action of the instrument, and that it
 did not, in the least, embarrass the mus-
 cular motion  of the surrounding  soft
 parts.   Though the impediment still
 continued in a great degree, yet some im-
 provement was manifest when  the pa-
 tient made a louder effort of the voice
 than usual, whereas, formerly, and with
 the instrument removed, the imperfec-
 tion of  the voice was observed to in-
 crease in proportion to the effort made.
 It seemed desirable to render the  closure
 more complete. With  this  invention,
 the size of the velum was increased, by
adding to the lower margin, and  attach-
ing a sort of wing to each wire, which,
projecting obliquely  forwards and out- 
ART
61
ART
 wards, laid upon the anterior surface of
 the columns or sides of the fissure. Their
 wings, upon both the right and left sides,
 together with  a corresponding  flange,
 projecting obliquely backwards and out-
 wards behind the fissure, formed a sort
 of groove, fitted to receive the columns.
 The result of this arrangement was, that
 upon the least contraction of the sur-
 rounding soft parts, the  passage  to the
 nares became completely closed, and the
 voice was necessarily compelled to find its
 exit through the mouth,  in consequence
 of which its general character became
 considerably improved.
   "It was, however, the tone and volume
 of the  voice that were  improved, and
 not the  articulation, to any remarkable
 extent.  This was demonstrated  by the
 fact, that the patient was able to make
 himself heard and understood from  a
 greater  distance than before,  and his
 voice did not appear to be so completely
 dissipated in the nasal passages. Still
 it must  be confessed that  the difficult
 consonant sounds, when  taken by them-
 selves, remained much the same as be-
 fore, and some, in particular, seemed as
 completely out of his power as ever—
 e, g, g hard, as in gig, ugly,  sugar, and
 the hke; also k, as in kick, &c. But
 certain combinations of the palatal con-
 sonants were, doubtless,  facilitated, as st
 in stand, instance, &c; dr, as in dread;
 double palatals, as d in madder, t in ut-
 ter, r in mirror,  and the simple  mutes
 and palatals  generally.
   "The patient  was, moreover, con-
 scious of a general increased physical ex-
 citement or accession of animal spirits,
 affording more confidence in the effort to
 articulate, which caused  him to express
 a belief, that  by  attention and practice,
 with the aid of the instrument, he  could
 make still further improvement.  This
 accession of  animal spirits was, proba-
bly, not wholly imaginary, as ascribable
to the cheering prospect of obtaining re-
lief from a most unfortunate infirmity;
for it is likely that  the presence of the
artificial velum operated to obstruct and
  set back the current of air, issuing from
  the glottis, and hence, the supply hereto-
  fore expended in the production of sound
  no longer finding its accustomed free ex-
  it, now became more economically hus-
  banded than formetly.   Hence, the ex-
  pulsive efforts of the  diaphragm, mus-
  cles of the chest,  &c, during the  act of
  speaking, tended  to bring the air  into
  more intimate contact with the  blood,
  rendering it, therefore, more highly oxy-
  ginated,  and,  in  effect, increasing its
  stimulant and vital properties.   This
  absolute  increased fullness of the lungs
  was further, demonstrated by some novel
  sensations along the margin of the ribs,
  at the attachments of the diaphragm in
 front; and, moreover, by a sensation of
 giddiness, after continuing for some little
 time,  the effort of speaking or reading,
 which indicate an impeded  return of
 blood from the head.
   "But still  another most serious imper-
 fection of the instrument soon develop-
 ed itself, which seemed likely to prove
 an insurmountable obstacle  to further
 progress.  After exercising the voice for
 a few moments, it very soon became
 sufflated, like that of a person with a bad
 cold,  or  similar  to that produced by
 pinching together  the  nostrils.   This
 was alike disagreeable to the hearer, and
 inconvenient to the speaker, and seemed,
 indeed, to constitute almost as serious
 an impediment to the speech, as that
 which it was sought to relieve.  It was
 caused by the action of the surrounding
 soft parts, together with the current of
 sound, forcing  the  velum too far back-
 wards and upwards into the pharynx,
 producing not only a complete, but too
 long continued  a closure of the posterior
 passage, and  presenting, also,  a nearly
 horizontal surface  to the  column  of
 sound, issuing from the glottis.
   "The idea at length occurred of divid-
ing the velum into  three parts, and this
I regard as the foundation of all subse-
quent success, and without which, noth-
ing would  have  been  accomplished
worth  the trouble  of making public. 
ART
62
ART
This plan admitted of the  extension  of
the velum further downwards, gave it a
more nearly vertical position, and obvia-
ted its liability of being forced upwards,
and then retained as before.  This ac-
tion of the  muscles now carried it back
far enough to meet the concave surface
of the  pharynx, and then, contracting
upon it more closely, caused the three
pieces to slide easily and  quickly  over
each other, thus closing and opening the
passage just at the intervals of time, ne-
cessary for the purposes of articulation
and modulation.
   "As  the preparation of caoutchouc
made use of, presents a smooth surface,
and yields readily to the slightest pres-
sure, it is  found to permit  the contact
and muscular motion of the surrounding
soft parts,  without causing  any irrita-
tion.  When, therefore, the sides of the
fissure tend to approximate, as in deglu-
tition, gargling the throat, or the utter-
ance of some of the short vowel sounds,
the extent of exposed surface is  thus di-
minished, thereby imitating, to some eX-
tpnt, muscular  contractile  action, the
force being derived from without, and
not, of course, contained within the in-
strument.  During the effort of speech,
the surrounding muscular parts embrace
and close upon the artificial velum, and
press it back against the concave surface
of  the  pharynx.  The passage to the
nares being therefore, temporarily closed,
the occlusion of sound is accomplished,
and articulation made attainable, as the
voice,  or sound, as it issues from the
glottis, is thereby directed into  the cavi-
ty of the fauces, and there  confined long
enough to receive  the impressions re-
quired to be made upon it by the tongue,
tips, &c. in the formation of the  con-
sonant letters.
   "After this last essential improvement
in the plan of construction, the patient
began  to improve rapidly in facility of
articulation, and  he required  no other
stimulus to constant practice, than the
evidence, that the  disadvantages of  an
infirmity, which he had endured all his
life,  were daily disappearing;  a new
world seemed opening to his enjoyment,
and he constantly had the satisfaction of
meeting with old acquaintances, who
happened not to know  what had been
done, and of witnessing their expressions
of surprise at the change  which had
taken place.
  "It will not be supposed by any one
who duly considers the  force of natural
laws, and the obstinacy  of fife-long
habits, that this change was instantane-
ous, or that it was brought about, in a
miraculously short space of time. Al-
though the benefit which followed from
the grand alteration of  the instrument,
(dividing  the velum into three pieces,)
was sufficiently obvious at  the outset to
warrant the expectation of continued im-
provement of the speech, it did not, at
once, impress every person who hap-
pened to hear the voice, without his at-
tention being called to notice the change.
Indeed, the  alteration  seemed now to
have been quite trifling, compared with
the entire change, which has since taken
place,  as the result of practice  of the
voice, and getting accustomed to the use
of an artificial substitute, for an impor-
tant natural organ.   This may suggest
an inquiry as to how far the relief ob-
tained, in the case, should be ascribed to
local practice pursued,  and what share
belongs to the merit of  the instrument'?
But that question is at once answered
by seeing the substitute removed, when
the original impediment at  once returns
with a suddenness that  does not  fad to
startle all present."
  Subsequently to  the publication in
the London Lancet, of  a description of
Mr.  Stearns' invention—an invention
which cost him so much time and labor,
and has been crowned with such happy
and  gratifying results, Dr.  Tucker, of
Boston, has constructed an artificial pal-
ate upon the same or a very similar plan,
which proved  eminently successful in
the accomplishment of the object,  for
which it was intended.
  ARTIFICIAL TEETH. Contribut- 
ART
63
ART
 ing  as the teeth do, to the beauty and
 pleasing expression of the countenance;
 to correct enunciation, and by the func-
 tion of mastication which they are the
 chief agents in performing, to the health
 of the  whole organism, it is not  sur-
 prising that their loss should be consid-
 ered a serious  affliction, and  that art
 should be invoked to replace such loss
 with artificial substitutes.   So great, in-
 deed, is the liability of the human teeth
 to decay, and so much neglected are the
 means  of their preservation,  that  few
 persons reach even adult age, without
 losing one or more of these invaluable
 organs.  But happily for suffering  hu-
 manity, they can now  be replaced with
 artificial substitutes so closely resemb-
 ling those  planted in  the jaws  by the
 hand of nature, as almost to elude  de-
 tection, even by the most  critical  and
 practiced observers.  But, though there is
 a perfection in the works of nature that
 can  never  be  equalled by art, artificial
 teeth,  can, nevertheless,   be  so con-
 structed and apphed as to  subserve, in
 the majority of cases,  the purposes of
 the natural organs, though  not  as per-
 fectly, nor with the  same convenience
 to the person wearing them.
   As great as have been the  achieve-
 ments in other branches of dental sur-
 gery, during the last ten or fifteen years,
 they have  been fully  equalled, if  not
 surpassed, by those of the one on which
 the author  is at present treating.  Me-
 chanical dentistry has arrived nearer to
 perfection,  than its most sanguine and
 zealous  cultivators dared, fifteen  years
 ago, in the  most  ardent flights of their
 imagination, to anticipate it could ever
 be  brought.   And, judging from  the
 past, the ne plus  ultra of achievement
 has not even yet been attained.
  The insertion of artificial  teeth, is  an
 operation, which, though acknowledged
 to be of great importance, and performed
 by every one having any pretensions to
 a knowledge of dentistry, it is, unfortu-
 nately, but little understood  by the ma-
jority of  practitioners.  By its improper
 performance, the mouth may be irrep-
 arably injured.  A single artificial tooth,
 badly inserted, may  cause  the destruc-
 tion of the  two adjacent natural teeth,
 and,  if the  deficiency  thus occasioned
 be  unskilfully supplied, it may cause
 the loss of two more, and in this way a
 whole set of teeth may be, and often is,
 destroyed.
   The utility of artificial teeth depends
 upon their  being properly constructed
 and correctly apphed.  An enlightened
 judgment and great practical skill, there-
 fore, are required by those who practice
 this, as well as the other branches of the
 art.  A knowledge of the anatomy and
 physiology  of the mouth—its various
 pathological conditions  and therapeuti-
 cal indications, is essentially  necessary
 to the dental practitioner;  and as im-
 portant as is correct information to him
 upon these points, it is even more so,
 that he should be thoroughly skilled in
 the  various  mechanical  manipulations
 that pertain to the prosthesis of these or-
 gans.  As great mechanical nicety and
 as perfect accuracy of execution  are re-
 quired in the construction  of an artifi-
 cial substitute for the natural teeth, as
 in the manufacture of the various parts
 of a watch  or  any  other complicated
 piece of mechanism.  In fact, more in-
 genuity  and tact are required in the
 former than  in the latter, for  there are
 no  two  cases requiring artificial teeth
 precisely alike—consequently, the artist
 must be governed by  the circumstances
 pecuhar to each, which will often be
 found to differ from those of any  other;
 whereas, in making  a  watch, he only
 copies what  he  has  done,  perhaps, a
 thousand times before.
  There are difficulties  connected with
 the  insertion of  artificial teeth which
 none but  an experienced practitioner
 has any idea of.   Besides those of prop-
 erly  constructing and  applying them in
 such a manner,  as  that they may be
easily removed and replaced by the pa-
tient, and at the same time be securely
fixed in the mouth, and productive of no 
ART
64
ART
injury to the parts with which they are
connected or associated, there are some-
times  others equally difficult to over-
come.  For example: the loss of a tooth
in one jaw is generally  followed by the
gradual protrusion  from its socket of
the one with  which it antagonized in
the other,  so  that  if that  be replaced
with an artificial one of equal  size, it
will strike against this at each occlusion
of the  mouth, and prevent  the other
teeth from coming together.  This ten-
dency  of the teeth  in one jaw to pro-
trude,  is always in proportion  to  the
number lost in  the other; and if not soon
counteracted by the replacement of the
latter  with  artificial substitutes, often
gives rise  to an obstacle to their proper
application, which will  require no little
ingenuity and  tact  to overcome.  If it
were necessary,  the author could men-
tion other difficulties connected with this
branch of practice, equally great, but will
let it suffice to state, that there are few, as
formidable as they oftentimes are, which
the well informed and skilful dentist can-
not successfully  overcome.
   But, notwithstanding the triumphs of
mechanical dentistry—the high state of
excellence to which it has arrived, there
never was a time, when so much injury
was inflicted,  and suffering occasioned
by artificial teeth, as at  present,  and re-
sulting, too, from their bad construction
and incorrect  application.  That such
should be the  case, when there are so
many  scientific,  skilful  practitioners in
every city, and in many of the towns in
the country, may seem strange, but the
fact is, nevertheless, undeniable,  and
will continue  to be  so, as long as  the
public are willing to receive a newspa-
per advertisement  of cheap dentistry, as
sufficient evidence of competency on the
part of those who practice the art.
   Many have  chosen dentistry as a pro-
fession, under the belief that a  knowl-
edge of it could be more easily acquired
than  that of any other honorable and
profitable calling, and some,  after hav-
ing followed it for two  or  three years,
finding, that to obtain respectability and
usefulness, greater difficulties were to
be  surmounted  than they  had antici-
pated, have   abandoned  the  pursuit,
rather than bring disgrace both upon it
and themselves.  Let no one, therefore,
be deceived into the belief, that he can
become master of the art in a few weeks
or months, for, should he commence the
study under such an impression, he will
be disappointed, and  find, after having
devoted to it what he had been led to
suppos e sufficient time for its thorough
acquisition, that he has then scarcely at-
tained a knowledge of its  elementary
principles.
   The   information obtainable   from
works on mechanical  dentistry,  was,
until recently, exceedingly limited; and
it is surprising,  that, from the number
who have  written on  the  surgery of
the teeth, this subject should have re-
ceived so  little attention.  Fauchard,
Bourdet, Angermann,  Maury,  Dela-
barre, Koecker, Lefoulon, Brown and a
few others, are  all who have given it
any thing more than a passing notice;
and the works  of  but few  of   these
writers  contain  any thing like explicit
directions upon the subject.  Delabarre's
Mechanical Dentistry was,  at the time
of  its publication, a work of much
merit. The various methods adopted at
that period, for the construction and ap-
plication of artificial teeth,  are accurately
and minutely  described in it—together
with the advantages and  disadvantages
of each.  But, however perfect the work
may then have been, it does not furnish
the information required upon the sub-
ject at the present  day.  And  still  more
deficient in correct information are near-
ly all the other French works.
  Among the English writers, Koecker
is almost the  only one, except Robin-
son, a more recent author, who has de-
scribed  correctly  the principles  upon
which artificial teeth should be apphed.
His "Essay on  Artificial Teeth, Obtu-
rators and  Palates,"  contains  much
useful and  valuable information.   It 
ART
65
ART
 does not, however, contain a description
 of the  various manipulations through
 which  a dental substitute should pass,
 preparatory to its application; yet to one
 having a knowledge of them, it is very
 serviceable.  As the abihty  to properly
 execute  a  piece of dental  mechanism
 can only be  acquired  by a regular ap-
 prenticeship, Dr.  K. perhaps thought
 that a more minute description  than
 that which he has  given, was unneces-
 sary ;  but there are many practitioners,
 who are, in other  respects,  competent,
 that have not enjoyed this advantage, or
 at least, not in  the mechanical depart-
 ment, and, consequently, it  is to be re-
 gretted that he  has not entered more
 into detail upon the subject.
    But  most of the deficiencies that ex-
 ist in the last named work, are supplied
 by Dr. Solyman Brown, in his series of
 papers on  Mechanical  Dentistry, pub-
 lished in  the American  Journal of Den-
 tal Science These papers are illustrated
 with numerous cuts, and constitute the
 best treatise upon  the  subject that had
 appeared up  to  the time of their pub-
 lication. Most of the manipulations con-
 nected with this branch  of the art, are
 here very accurately described.

 Substances Employed for Artificial Teeth.

   There  are  certain qualities  which it
 is highly  important that artificial teeth
 should  possess.   They  should be dura-
 ble in their nature,  and  in their appear-
 ance resemble the  natural organs with
 which they have oftentimes to be asso-
 ciated.
   The kinds of teeth employed, are
   1. Human teeth.
   2. Teeth of neat  cattle,  sheep, &c.
   3. Those carved from the ivory of the
 elephant's tusk, and the  tooth of the
 hippopotamus.
   4. Mineral teeth.

            Human Teeth.
   As far as it  regards appearance, and
in a dental substitute this is an impor-
tant consideration,   human   teeth  are'
     6*
 preferable to any other, and when used
 for this  purpose, they should be of the
 same class as those  whose place they
 are designed to supply.   The  crowns
 only are employed, and if well selected,
 and properly inserted, the artificial con-
 nection  with the alveolar ridge cannot
 easily be detected.
    The  durability of  these teeth when
 thus employed, depends on the density
 of their  structure, the soundness of their
 enamel, and the condition of the mouth
 in which they are placed.  If they are
 of a close texture, and have a sound and
 perfect  enamel,  and  are inserted  in a
 healthy  mouth, they  will last from eight
 to twelve or a greater number of years.
 The  difficulty, however,  of procuring
 these teeth, is generally so great, that it is
 seldom that such as the author has just
 described, can be obtained, and even if
 they  could be, the mouth in four cases out
 of every five, in which artificial teeth are
 placed, is not in a healthy  condition, its
 secretions are vitiated and of so corro-
 sive a nature, that they  often  destroy
 them in less  than four  years.   He has
 even known them to be destroyed by
 decay in two, and in  one case in fifteen
 months.
   A  human tooth, fixed in the mouth
 by art, is more liable  to decay than one
 of equal density having a vital connec-
 tion  with the general system,  for the
 reason, that its osseous structure is more
 exposed to the  action of  deleterious
 chemical agents.   But of all the animal
 substances employed  for this  purpose,
 human teeth are unquestionably the best.
 They are harder than other bone, more
 perfectly protected by  enamel, and con-
 sequently more capable of  resisting the
 action of the corrosive agents to which
 all artificial as well as the natural teeth,
 are exposed.  Many  object to having
 these  teeth placed in their mouth, under
 the belief that infectious diseases may
 be communicated by them.  But there
 is no good foundation  for such fear, for
the purifying process  to which they are
previously submitted, precludes the pos- 
ART
                ART

sibility of the communication of disease
through their agency.  When the prac-
tice of transplanting teeth was in vogue,
occurrences of this sort were not unfre-
quent, but since that  has been discon-
tinued, it has never happened.  But, not-
withstanding this, the prejudices of some
against having human teeth placed in
their  mouths  are so strong, that it is
impossible to overcome them.
  It would, however, be  impossible to
meet the demands for artificial teeth, if
these  were  the only  kind used.   The
difficulty  of procuring them, and  the
high price they command, have induced
many practitioners to profit by the popu-
lar prejudice against them, and to em-
ploy other substances in their stead.
           Teeth of Cattle.
  Of the various kinds of bone employ-
ed for dental  substitutes, the teeth of
neat cattle, are,  perhaps,  after the  hu-
man teeth, the best.  By  slightly alter-
ing their shape, they may be made to
resemble very closely, the incisores of
some persons, but a configuration simi-
lar to  the cuspidati  cannot be given to
them; and in the majority of cases they
are too white and glossy  to match any
of the human teeth.    The  contrast,
therefore, which they form with the
natural organs should constitute, if they
were in all other respects unexceptiona-
ble, an insuperable objection to  their
use.   This has been too much disregard-
ed, both by  dentists and  patients.  In-
deed,  many of those who wish artificial,
believe they cannot have them too white
or too brilliant.
  There are other objections than those
which the author has just mentioned, to
the use of these teeth. In the first place,
they are only covered anteriorly with en-
amel, and, in the second place, their bony
structure is less dense than that Of the
human  teeth,  and  consequently  are
more easily acted on by chemical agents.
They are, therefore, less durable, seldom
lasting  more  than from  two  to  four
years. Another objection to their use is,
they can only be employed in very few
cases, for their nerve cavities are so large,
that by the time they are reduced to the
size of the incisores, they become ex-
posed, and  by  the  time these fill up
with ossific  matter, their crowns are so
much worn away that they are too short,
except in cases where such teeth are re-
quired.  It is  seldom, therefore,  that
they can be  used as  substitutes for the
natural teeth, except for the central in-
cisores, and  here, only  in the fewest
number of cases.
Ivory of the Tusks of the Elepliant  and
           Hippopotamus.
  The employment of these substances
for artificial teeth, has been sanctioned
by usage from the earliest periods of the
existence of this branch of the healing
art; but we  must not hence  conclude
that it has been approved by experience.
On  the contrary, of all the substances
that have  been used for this  purpose,
this is certainly the most objectionable.
  The ivory of the  elephant's tusk ia
decidedly more permeable than that ob-
tained from the tooth of the hippopota-
mus.   So  readily does  it  absorb  the
fluids of  the  mouth, that,  in three or
four hours after being  placed there, it
becomes  completely  penetrated with
them.   Consequently,  it is  not only
liable to  chemical changes, but also to
become offensive, and  when several
teeth, formed  from  it, are worn,  they
affect the breath so much, that it is ex-
ceedingly  disagreeable to come within
its influence.  Teeth, on account of its
softness, are easily shaped from it, but
not being covered with an enamel, they
soon become  dark,  and give  to  the
mouth a most filthy  and disgusting ap-
pearance.   Fortunately, however,  this
article  is, at present, but rarely used for
the  purpose.
  The ivory of the  tusk of the hippo-
potamus is much firmer in its  texture
than that  obtained from the elephant;
and, as it is  covered with a hard, thick
enamel, teeth may be cut from it, which 
ART
67
ART
will, at first, very much resemble those
given us  by nature.  There  is, how-
ever, a peculiar animation about  the
natural  teeth which those made from
this substance do not possess.   These,
moreover, soon  change their color, as-
suming first a yellow and then a dingy
or dark bluish hue.   They are also, like
those just mentioned, very liable to de-
cay.  The author has in his possession a
number of blocks of this sort, taken from
the mouths of different individuals, some
of which  are nearly half destroyed.
   But there is another objection to teeth
made of  this article, which, even were
there no  other, would be sufficient to
condemn  its use.  It is, that  they, like
those formed from elephant's ivory, give
to the air, returned from the  lungs, an
insufferably offensive odor, which can-
not  be  corrected or prevented.  They
may be washed half a dozen times  a
day, and  taken out  and  cleansed again
at night, but it will still  be grossly per-
ceptible ;  and, although it may be much
worse in some mouths than others, none
who wear teeth formed from this. sub-
stance are entirely free from it.
  To one, whose attention has never
been directed to the subject, it would be
astonishing to observe  the effects  pro-
duced upon the breath, from wearing
two or three of these teeth.
  But objectionable as  this substance is,
for a dental substitute,  it is still employ-
ed  by a few  practitioners, and  fifteen
years ago it was used by one-half of the
dentists in  the country.  Influenced,
however,  by the discovery of its tenden-
cy to vitiate the secretions of the mouth,
to impart  a fetor to the breath, and other
objections which have  been mentioned,
the author has never used it, except dur-
ing  the first two or three years of  his
practice, and he would not then have em-
ployed it,  had he been aware of the per-
nicious consequences that result from it.
           Mineral Teeth.

  The manufacture of  porcelain teeth,
did not for a long time promise to be of
much  advantage to dentistry.  But by
the ingenuity and indefatigable exertions
of a few, they have, within the last fifteen
years, almost entirely  superceded every
other kind of artificial  teeth.
  The French, with whom  the  inven-
tion of these teeth originated, encouraged
their manufacture by favorable notices ;
and the rewards offered  by some of the
learned, and scientific societies of Paris,
contributed much to bring it to perfec-
tion.  They were still, however,  defi-
cient in so  many • particulars, that  they
received the approbation of very few of
the profession, and that only in some
special cases.
  It is principally to American dentists,
that we are indebted for that, which the
French so long  labored  in vain to ac-
complish.
  A want of resemblance to  natural
teeth, in color, transparency, and  ani-
mation, was the great  objection  that
was urged  against the porcelain;  and,
had it not been obviated, it would have
prevented their  ever being extensively
employed.   Until recently, all that were
manufactured had  a  dead opaque ap-
pearance, which rendered them easy of
detection, when placed along  side of the
natural teeth, and gave to the mouth an
unanimated and sickly aspect.  But  so
great have  been the improvements,  in
their manufacture, that few can now dis-
tinguish any difference between them
and the natural organs.  During the last
twelve years, the author has used, almost
exclusively, the  teeth manufactured by
Mr. Stockton, of Philadelphia, and he has
no hesitation in recommending them,  as
unsurpassed by any he has  ever used.
The ingenuity  and indefatigable  exer-
tions of Mr. S. in bringing  the manu-
facture of these teeth to such perfection,
entitle him  to the warmest thanks of the
profession,  and of the public.  The ex-
tensive manner in which he  carries on
the business, enables him to  furnish at
all times, teeth of every variety of shade
and  size.  He would also mention the
names of Mr. Alcock, and Messrs. Jones, 
ART
68
ART
 White & Co., who also  manufacture
 verv beautiful teeth.
   Very good teeth are manufactured,
 too, by several other  individuals in this
 country;  but, in order to excel in their
 manufacture, it is necessary, as has been
 before stated, to devote to it one's whole
 attention.  Of those who have engaged
 in their fabrication, not  more than one
 in fifteen has succeeded;  and many, after
 having spent much time and labor, have
 abandoned  the  attempt, and  supplied
 themselves from others, with a far better
 article, and at a much less expense.
   It is  only by  repeated  experiments
 that any thing like a satisfactory  result
 can be arrived at,  and to make which,
 requires more leisure than  most practi-
 tioners, attending  both to surgical and
 mechanical  dentistry,  can command.
 Still it would be well for every one who
 has a large practice in mechanical den-
 tistry  to  be supplied with  an  assist-
 ant  capable  of manufacturing mineral
 teeth, as cases  occasionally occur, pre-
 senting peculiarities which call for teeth
 that cannot  be appropriately supplied
 from any assortment  which  he  may
 happen to  have.   But  such cases are
 rare, and on the score of economy, no
 sufficient inducement  is  offered to the
 dentist to justify him in attempting their
 manufacture.
   The advantages which these  teeth
 possess over  every sort of animal sub-
 stance,  are  numerous.  They can  be
 more nicely  fitted to the  mouth, and
 worn with greater convenience.   They
 do not absorb its secretions, and, conse-
 quently, when proper attention is paid to
 their cleanliness, they do not contaminate
the breath, or  become, in any  way, of-
fensive. They never change their color.
They are not acted on by the chemical
 agents found in the mouth; and hence
the name incorruptible, which has been
given them.
   Such are the considerations that have
 induced the  author to prefer  them  to
 every other kind of artificial teeth.  The
 objections that have been urged to  their |
 use, are: a  want  of congeniality be-
 tween  them and the mouth, they being
 better conductors of caloric than bone,
 and, consequently,  more liable to be-
 come cold when exposed to the air, &c;
 but these have so little foundation, that,
 if compared with the advantages these
 teeth  confessedly  possess, they must
 be regarded as  unworthy of considera-
 tion.   See Mineral Teeth.

 Different Methods of Applying Artificial
                 Teeth.
   It has been  already stated, that  the
 utility of artificial teeth measurably de-
 pends on the manner in which they are
 apphed, and  in noticing  the  different
 methods employed in their application,
 it may  be well to point out the peculiar
 advantages and disadvantages of the
 various principles upon which they are
 constructed and secured in the mouth.
   In determining the particular mode of
 securing  artificial teeth in the mouth,
 much ingenuity and practical judgment
 are often necessary; but there are cer-
 tain  principles  which,  if well under-
 stood, will enable the practitioner, in
 almost  every variety of case, to apply
 them in such a way, as to secure to his
 patient the greatest  possible amount of
 benefit  that can be  derived from such
 substitutes.
   The  methods  of  inserting  artificial
 teeth are, first,  on the  roots of the nat-
 ural teeth; second,  on  a plate  with
 clasps;   third,  with  spiral  springs;
 fourth, by atmospheric  pressure.  The
 peculiar advantages  of each  of these
 methods we shall now proceed to point
 out,  and the  cases  in  which  they are
 particularly applicable.

 Artificial Teeth placed on Natural Roots.
  This  method  of  inserting  artificial
 teeth, has, on  account of its simplicity,
been  more extensively  practiced than
 any other, and under favorable circum-
stances, is unquestionably  the best that
can be adopted.   If the roots on which
they are placed, be sound  and  healthy, 
               art                 e

and the back part of the jaws supplied
with  natural teeth, so as to prevent
those with  which the artificial antago-
nize from striking  them  too directly,
they will subserve the purposes of the
natural organs more perfectly and  ef-
fectually  than any other description of
dental substitute.  When they are thus
placed, they rest on a firm basis,  and if
they  are  properly  fitted and secured,
their connection with the natural roots
cannot easily be detected.   But, unfor-
tunately,  the incisores  and cuspidati of
the upper jaw, are the only teeth which
it is proper to replace in this way.
  And the insertion of an artificial tooth
on a diseased root, or on a root having a
diseased socket, is always followed  by
injurious  effects.  The  morbid action
already existing in the root, or its sock-
et, is aggravated by the operation, and
often caused to extend to the contiguous
parts,  and,  sometimes,  even to  the
whole mouth.  Nor is it always proper
to apply a tooth immediately after hav-
ing prepared the root.   If any irritation
is produced by this preparatory process,
the tooth  should not be  inserted until it
has wholly  subsided.   The neglect of
this precaution not unfrequently gives
rise  to inflammation  of the  alveolo-
dental periosteum and alveolar abscess.
  Although this method of inserting ar-
tificial teeth has received the sanction of
the most eminent  dental practitioners
the world has ever produced, and is cer-
tainly  the best that  can be adopted for
replacing the loss of the six upper front
teeth;  yet on account  of  the facility
with which the operation  can be per-
formed, it is often resorted to under the
most unfavorable circumstances, and in
consequence of which, has been, unde-
servedly, brought into discredit.
  The efforts of the economy for the
expulsion of the roots  of the bicuspid
and molar teeth, after the destruction of
their lining membrane, are rarely exhib-
ited in  the case of roots of teeth occupy-
ing the anterior part of the mouth. This
circumstance has led the author to  be-
                ART

lieve, that  the  roots of these  teeth re-
ceive a greater  amount of vitality from
their investing  membrane, than do the
roots of those  situated  farther back in
the mouth, and that, though the amount
of living principle, with which they are
supplied, is inconsiderable, yet it is suf-
ficient to prevent  them from becoming
obnoxious  to their sockets.
  The admission of this hypothesis can
alone account  for the fact to which we
have just  alluded, for it is well known
that a dead root is  always productive of
jnjury to  the  surrounding  parts, and
that nature  calls  into action  certain
agents for its expulsion.  Therefore, the
insertion of a tooth on a completely dead
root, is highly  improper;  but  the fangs
of the front teeth are rarely  entirely de-
prived of vitality, and  hence,  after the
destruction of  their lining  membrane,
they often  remain ten, fifteen, and some-
times twenty years, without very obvi-
ously affecting the adjacent parts.
  Were the doctrines advocated by Mr.
Bew and Dr. Koecker correct, the death
of a tooth  would be simultaneous with
the destruction of  its lining membrane,
and the pivoting method, as it is com-
monly called, of fastening teeth, opposed
to  every  correct principle  of surgery.
But that the views of these gentlemen
are erroneous, may be proven by boring
into the cavity  of the root of a tooth, to-
wards its external  surface, commencing
within the  alveolus.  Before the instru-
ment shall have passed three-fourths of
the  way through, the root will become
so sensitive as  to  incontrovertibly evi-
dence the  existence  of vitality./  In
fact, the remaining of the  root in  its
socket, without occasioning disease, is,
of itself, sufficient proof that its vascu-
lar  and  nervous  connection  with the
general system  is still kept up.
  It is somewhat singular that these
facts should  have  escaped the observa-
tion of these gentlemen; but that they
have, is clearly manifest from what they
say.  Dr. Koecker tells us,  that the vi-
tality of the teeth is entirely dependent
9 
ART
70
ART
 on their lining membrane, and that its
 destruction is followed by their imme-
 diate death.  Mr. Charles Bew, in treat-
 ing on the circulation of  these organs,
 after  adverting to  that of the general
 system, remarks : "It is just to take for
 granted, that through each rubefied fang
 of the teeth, which the most sceptical
 observer,  anatomist or  not  anatomist,
 may distinctly discern, the blood  is an-
 teriorly  thrown  to  the  interior of the
 tooth, and there, following a due course
 of  beautifully  organised  circulation
 through the  osseous part,  is (si interim
 nihil interferat) quietly returned by the
 periosteum of the exterior."
   Dr. Fitch, in  noticing  the  views of
 these  gentlemen, observes, they  "are
 both incorrect and contrary to facts, and
 the most correct  analogical  observa-
 tions.  We find that, in all hollow bones,
 of which the fangs  of the teeth are  a
 good example, that they have an exter-
 nal and an internal periosteum, and that
 the bone has an internal and  an exter-
 nal periosteum, which, in  their circula-
 tion, depend  mostly upon  these mem-
 branes; if the external dies, a part of the
 external bone dies, but no  farther  than
 the  circulation  depended  on  the dead
 membrane, and vice versa, when the in-
 ternal periosteum is  diseased or loses its
 vitality."  This is  a pathological fact
 that does not admit  of cavil  or doubt,
 and, so far as the teeth are concerned,
 especially those in the anterior part  of
 the mouth, may be fully verified by bor-
 ing in the root, as in the manner before
 described.
   On the death, therefore,  of  the inter-
 nal membrane of a tooth, the crown and
 internal  part only  of the root,  dies.
 This necrosis, so  far as the author has
 been able to ascertain, extends  but little
 more than half way through  the  root,
 and in this state it often remains, not be-
ing possessed of any  powers of exfolia-
tion, for years.  So fully convinced has
he been of this fact, that he has not hes-
itated,  whenever he found a suitable
root, to insert on it an artificial crown;
  and the success that has  attended  the
  practice,  proves the  principles  upon
  which it is founded to be correct.
   The observations of Mr. John Hunter,
  on  the vitality of the  roots of  teeth,
  although he did not believe these organs
  to be vascular, are doubtless true.  He
  infers, inasmuch as the roots of teeth do
  not decay as readily as the crowns, that
  they are  endowed with gi-eater living
 powers.
   The vitality of the crowns of the teeth,
 being  wholly  derived from the lining
 membrane, ceases with  its destruction;
 but the fangs, being supplied with a liv-
 ing principle, from an external, as well
 as from an internal-membrane, retain a
 portion of their vitality as long as the ex-
 ternal continues to exist, which,  with
 those of the  incisores and  cuspidati, is
 not unfrequently for  from  fifteen  to
 twenty years.
   Thus it will be seen, that the death of
 the  root of a  tooth, is  not simultaneous
 with that of  its lining membrane; con-
 sequently, the objections of Dr. Koecker,
 based upon this supposition, to the piv-
 oting method of inserting artificial teeth,
 is without foundation.  We shall, there-
 fore, conclude  our  remarks  upon this
 subject, after briefly noticing one other
 objection, urged by the same gentleman.
   "By the insertion of the pivot," says
 he,  ''into the  canal  of the root, the
 natural curative process,  in the decom-
 position and absorption of the  fang, is
 either prevented or  retarded;  while on
 the  other  hand, the  most  convenient
 outlet for a  constant  and regular dis-
 charge of the matter, which is always
 produced by the carious root in the sur-
 rounding soft parts, is obstructed; the
 matter, thus confined  by this artificial
 obstruction at the point of the root,  pen-
 etrates  through the socket and gums,
 and forms  gum-biles, or small fistulous
 abscesses,  in  the neighborhood of the
 root."
  This objection, although applicable to
some cases, but not to  all, may be obvi-
ated, by forming a groove on the side of 
ART                71                ART
the pivot sufficiently large for the ready
escape of any matter that may form at
the apex of the  root.   This method of
giving egress to the matter thus formed,
was suggested to the author about eigh-
teen years ago, by Dr. L. S. Parmly, of
New Orleans, and by adopting it when-
ever he had reason to apprehend the for-
mation of matter, he has avoided the con-
sequences  mentioned by Dr. Koecker,
as resulting from it.  It is, however, in
the fewest number of cases  that matter
forms, if the root be in a suitable  condi-
tion for the reception  of a tooth, and if
it is not, it would unquestionably be bet-
ter to remove it and  apply a  tooth on
another principle.   As  a general rule,
no root should be used that has  been de-
prived of its lining membrane by inflam-
mation and suppuration, as in this case
there  will generally  be a formation of
matter at its apex, which rarelyhappens,
 when it is destroyed by mechanical or
 chemical means.
   The manner of preparing  a root and
applying a tooth to it will be described
in another article.
Artificial Teeth Attached to a Plate with
                Clasps.
   This  method  of applying  artificial
teeth, is,  perhaps, in  favorable cases,
with the exception of the one just notic-
ed, the best that can  be adopted;  and,
on account of its more extensive appli-
 cability, may be considered as more val-
 uable even than that.   By  this means,
 the loss of a single tooth, or of  several
 teeth, in either or both jaws, may be sup-
plied.  A plate may be so  fitted to an
aperture in the dental circle, and secur-
ed with clasps to the other teeth, as  to
afford a firm support to six, eight, ten,
or even twelve artificial teeth.
   Teeth   applied  in  this  way, when
 properly constructed, will last for many
 years, and sometimes during the life of
the individual.   But it is necessary  to
 their durability, that they should be cor-
 rectly arranged, accurately fitted, and
 substantially  secured to the plate, and
that the plate itself be properly adapted
to the gums, and attached to teeth that
are firmly fixed in their sockets.
  Gold is the only metal  that should be
employed for making   the  plate and
clasps; and this, for the  former, should
be  from twenty  to  twenty-one carats
fine, and from  eighteen  to nineteen for
the latter.  If gold of an inferior quality
be  used, it will be liable  to be acted on
by the secretions of the mouth.  Platina
would, perhaps, answer the  purpose as
well as gold; but  there  are so few  in
the United States who understand work-
ing it, that the getting of it out into plate,
and such  other forms, as are required,
would be attended with much difficulty
and inconvenience.
  The plate should be thick enough to
afford the necessary support to the teeth;
but not so thick as to be clumsy, or in-
convenient from its weight.  The clasps
generally  require to be about one-third
or one-half  thicker than  the plate, and
sometimes  double its thickness.   The
gold used for this purpose, is sometimes
prepared in the form of half round wire;
but, in the  majority of  cases, it is  far
preferable, that it should be flat;  as such
clasps  afford a much firmer  and more
secure support to artificial  teeth, than
those that are half round; they also oc-
casion less inconvenience to the patient,
and are productive of less injury to the
teeth to which they are attached.
   Artificial teeth, apphed in this way,
may be worn with the greatest comfort,
and can be taken out  and  replaced, at
the pleasure of the person wearing them;
which, as  it is  important that they
should be very frequently  cleansed, in
order to prevent the secretions  of  the
mouth that get between the plate  and
gum, and the clasps and teeth to which
they are attached from becoming vitiated
and irritating the soft parts, corroding
the teeth  and  tainting  the  breath, it
should, on no account whatever, be ne-
glected.  Great care,  therefore,  should
be taken to fit the clasps in such a man-
ner as will admit of their being easily re- 
ART               72                ART
moved  and replaced; and,  also, that
they may not exert any undue pressure
upon the teeth to which they are fasten-
ed.  If they press too hard upon them,
they will occasion inflammation of their
periosteal and alveolar membranes, and
the gradual destruction of their sockets.
 Artificial  Teeth with Spiral Springs.
  When attached to plates, the only
difference between the method last no-
ticed, of applying artificial teeth, and the
one  now to be considered, consists in
the manner of confining  them in the
mouth.   The  former is  apphcable  in
cases where there are other teeth in the
mouth to which clasps may be apphed—
the latter is designed for confining whole
sets, and parts of sets, where clasps, or
other means, cannot be  convenient-
ly employed  for their retention in the
mouth.
  When plates are employed, the teeth
are attached to them in the  same man-
ner as they are when clasps are used";
but  instead of being fastened in the
mouth to the other teeth, they are kept
in by means of spiral springs,  one on
each side of the artificial denture, be-
tween it and  the  cheeks, passing from
one piece to the other.
  Spiral springs are often employed for
confining only a lower set in the mouth,
and sometimes for only  parts  of sets.
When a number of teeth  in the  back
part  of the jaws are required, and, there
are no teeth in the mouth to which clasps
can  be apphed, capable  of affording a
sufficient support, resort to spiral springs
sometimes becomes necessary.  Various
other kinds of springs have been used,
but none that have  been tried, seem to
answer  the purpose  as  well as these.
When they are of the right size, and at-
tached in the proper manner, they afford
a very  secure and convenient support.
They exert a constant pressure upon the
artificial pieces, whether the mouth be
opened or closed.   They  do not in the
least interfere with the motions of the
jaw; and, although they may  at  first
seem awkward, a person will soon be-
come so accustomed to them,  as  to  be
almost unconscious of their presence.
Atmospheric Pressure, or Suction Method
     of Applying Artificial Teeth.
  The method last described, of confin-
ing artificial teeth in the mouth, is often
inapphcable, inefficient and troublesome,
especially for the upper jaw, and it is in
such cases,  more particularly, that the
atmospheric pressure, or suction method,
is valuable.   It was for a long  time
thought to be applicable only for an en-
tire upper set, because  it was thought
that a plate  sufficiently  large  to afford
the necessary amount of surface for the
atmosphere to act upon could not be fur-
nished by a piece containing a smaller
number of  teeth.    Experience,  how-
ever, has proven this opinion to be in-
correct. A single tooth may be mounted
upon a plate presenting a surface  large
enough for the atmosphere to act upon
for its retention in the mouth, but as a
general rule when only a part of an up-
per set is required, it is  better to secure
the piece by means of clasps, if it can
be done without endangering the dura-
bility of the teeth  to which  they are
applied.   For a  like  reason, it  was
thought that the narrowness of the infe-
rior alveolar ridge would preclude the
apphcation  of a plate to it upon this
principle, and in this opinion the author
participated, but he has succeeded so
perfectly in  confining lower pieces by
this means,  that he  rarely finds it neces-
sary to employ spiral springs for double
sets.
  The practicability of confining teeth in
the mouth by  this means, was formerly
very much questioned, and even at the
present day it is doubted by many.   The
principle on which  the plan is founded,
may be simply illustrated by taking two
small blocks of smooth flat  marble, and
exhausting the air from between them—
the pressure of the atmosphere on  their
external surfaces, will enable a person
to raise the  under block, by lifting the 
ART
73
ART
 upper.  In  a similar  manner, a  gold
 plate, or any other substance, impervious
 to the atmosphere, and perfectly adapt-
 ed to the gums, may be made to adhere
 to them.
   The firmness of the  adhesion of the
 plate, or base to which the teeth are at-
 tached to the gums, depends on the size
 or depth of the alveolar ridge.  If this
 is full and  prominent, it will adhere
 with great tenacity, but if it is so shal-
 low  as to admit  of being moved hori-
 zontally, its retention will often be at-
 tended with difficulty.  It is also  im-
 portant that the teeth should be so ar-
 ranged and antagonized, that they shall
 strike those in the other jaw all the way
 around at the same  instant.  This is  a
 matter that should never be overlooked,
 for if they meet on one side, before they
 come together on the other, the part of
 the plate or base not pressed on, will be
 detached, and by admitting the air be-
 tween it and the gums, it will cause it
 to drop.
   The  application of artificial teeth on
 this principle, has been practiced for  a
 long time; but the plates formerly used
 were ivory instead of gold, and  could
 seldom be fitted with sufficient accuracy
 to the mouth to exclude the air; so that,
 in fact, it could hardly be said that they
 were retained by its pressure. Unless
 fitted in the  most perfect manner,  the
 piece is constantly  liable to drop, and
 the amount of substance which it is ne-
 cessary to leave in it, renders it so awk-
 ward and  clumsy,  that  a set of teeth
 mounted upon a base of this material
 can seldom be worn with much comfort
 or satisfaction;  and, besides,  ivory ab-
 sorbs the fluids of the mouth so readily,
 that, after being worn for a few weeks
 it becomes exceedingly offensive.
   We have seen may sets of teeth fixed
on plates, or rather blocks, of ivory, and
many that were composed altogether of
this substance; and, in one instance, pre-
pared  a  set ourself;  but the objections
above stated  were so palpably mani-
fest,  that we determined never again
 to attempt the insertion of artificial teeth
 upon this principle.  Having, however,
 been  called upon about thirteen years
 ago, by a lady whom we highly esteem-
 ed, for an upper set of teeth, and, finding
 that they could not be confined in the
 mouth by any other means, we were re-
 luctantly induced, after having stated to
 her all the objections, to undertake their
 insertion.   Instead, however, of using,
 as formerly,  a plate  carved from the
 ivory of the hippopotamus' tooth, we de-
 termined to employ one of gold, and ac-
 cordingly, made it so as to fit all the in-
 equalities of the gums; and, after hav-
 ing fastened  the teeth to  it,  in  the
 manner to be hereafter described, placed
 it in the mouth;  and having exhausted
 the air from between it  and the gums,
 had the satisfaction to find that it firmly
 adhered, and that the teeth enabled  the
 lady, (to use her own words,) to "speak
 and eat with perfect ease."  These teeth
 still continue to answer all the purposes
 that can be expected from artificial teeth
 under the most favorable circumstances.
   The firmness with which teeth, ap-
 plied upon this principle, can be made
 to adhere to the gums, and the facility
 with which they can be removed and re-
 placed, renders them, in many respects,
 more desirable than those fixed in the
 mouth with clasps.  But, unless judg-
 ment and  proper  skill be exercised in
 their preparation, a total failure may be
 expected, or, at least, they will never be
 worn with satisfaction and advantage.
   Many, in attempting to insert artificial
 teeth in this way, have failed of success,
 and, in consequence, have condemned
 the principle, when, in reality, the fault
 was attributable to some defect in the
 preparation of the teeth or of the fixtures
 with which  they  were  connected.
 Many of the failures are owing to their
 premature insertion, for,  however well
 the plate, upon which the teeth are fix-
ed, may fit  the gums at the time of its
application, it will  soon lose its adapta-
tion, if it be applied previously to the
completion  of the changes in the alveo- 
ART
74
ARY
lar ridge, that follow the removal of the
natural teeth.  When this happens, the
air gets between the plate and gums, and
the whole apparatus, as a natural con-
sequence, drops; whereas, if a sufficient
time is allowed for the completion of the
changes just alluded to, it will continue
to adhere to the gums.   Another very
frequent cause  of failure is, a want of
proper adaptation in the  first instance.
Unless the plate be made to fit the gums
with the most perfect accuracy, the pres-
sure of the atmosphere  cannot be ex-
pected to confine it to them.
  It has not, until recently, been thought
expedient to apply  parts of sets upon
this principle,nor did we,for along time,
believe the pressure of the atmosphere
and capillary attraction would give to a
lower set, because of  the narrowness of
the alveolar ridge of the inferior max-
illary, sufficient  stability  to render  it
at all serviceable,  but experience has
fully demonstrated its practicability.
   The application of artificial teeth upon
this principle, originated with  the late
Dr.  Gardette, of Philadelphia,  and we
believe, that, soon after he made his
first successful experiment, Mr. John
Wooffendale, of New York, constructed
a dental  substitute for the upper jaw
which were retained in the mouth by suc-
tion, and at the time he did it,  was not
aware that it had ever been done by any
one else.  The first  set applied upon
this principle by  Dr. Gardette, was, we
believe, near the close of the last century,
but it was not until within a few years
that the practice  become common with
dentists,  and  Drs. L. S. Parmly and
Koecker are  among the  first writers to
recommend it.  But at the  time of the
publication of the work of the former of
these gentlemen, in which he alludes to
this method of applying artificial teeth,
metallic bases had not  been used for
this purpose.   The  latter, however,
 says, the teeth may be mounted  either
on gold  or the ivory of  the hippopota-
mus'  tooth.  We  believe it has only
been within the last ten or twelve years
that the use of metallic bases has be-
come common.
  The adhesion may be greatly increas-
ed by the  formation of  an air chamber
in the  plate, opening next the gum or
roof of the mouth.
  Other methods, as the ligature and
transplanting, have  been employed in
the application of artificial teeth, but as
they have long since been abandoned,
a description of them in this place is not
deemed  necessary.   See Mechanical
Dentistry; Pivot Teeth, Manner of In-
serting;  Metallic  Base for  Artificial
Teeth; Models,  Plaster;  Model and
Counter-model;   Mounting  Artificial
Teeth  upon a Metallic Base,  and other
articles on dental prosthesis.
   ARTHUR, ROBERT.  Author of
a popular treatise on the Diseases of the
Teeth, including a description of their
Structure and Modes of Treatment; to-
gether with the usual mode of inserting
Artificial Teeth.  Philadelphia, 1846.
   ARUM  DRACUNCULUS.   The
systematic name of dragon's-wort.
   Arum Maculatum.  Common arum,
or wake-robin.
   ARUNDINA'CEOUS. From arun-
do; a reed.  Reed-like.
   ARUNDO BAMBOS. The bamboo
plant.
   Arundo  Saccharifera.   The sugar
cane.
   ARYT^E'NO.   Belonging  to  the
arytaenoid cartilage.
   Arytano-Epiglottideus.  A mus-
cle of the epiglottis.
   ARYTENOID, Arytaznoideus, and
arytoznoides;  from apvtaiva,  a funnel,
and siSos, shape.  Some parts  are  so call-
ed because they have a funnel shape.
   Arytenoid Cartilages.  The name
of two cartilages of  the larynx.
   Arytanoid Glands.  Small glan-
dular, whitish bodies, anterior to the
arytenoid cartilages.
   ARYT^ENOIDE'US. A name given
to some muscles, nerves, vessels, &c.
   Arytanoideus Major. See  Aryts-
noideus transversus. 
ASB
75
ASP
  Arytanoideus Minor.  See Arytse-
noideus Obliquus.
  Arytanoideus Obliquus, The name
of a muscle of the glottis.
  Arytanoideus Transversus.  An
azgos, or single muscle of the glottis.
  ASAFCETIDA. From the Hebrew
word  asa, to heal.  A gum  resin—
the  concrete juice of the ferula  asa-
foetida.
  ASAPH'ATUM. From a, priv. and
aafrfi,  clear.  An intercutaneous affec-
tion, consisting  of collections in the
pores of the skin, which, when pressed
out, look like small black-headed worms.
  ASAPHI'A. From a, priv. and <ja<j»7$,
clear.  Defective utterance or  articula-
tion, resulting from disease of the pal-
ate.
  ASARABACCA. See Asarum Eu-
ropceum.
  AS'ARUM.   From a,  priv.  and
aaipnv, to adorn; so called  because  it
was not admitted  into  ancient coronal
wreaths.  The name of a  plant—the
asarabacca.
  As'arum Europo2um.  The asara-
bacca of the shops.
  As'arum Canaden'se. Asarum caro-
linianum.  Canada snake-root; wild gin-
ger.
  ASBESTOS.   Asbestus.  A  mineral
more or less flexible and fibrous.  The
ancients manufactured cloth  from  it
for  wrapping up dead bodies when ex-
posed on  the funeral  pile.  In  conse-
quence of its being a non-conductor of
caloric, it was recommended by Dr. S.
Brown, a few years since, in the Amer-
ican Journal of Dental Science, to be
placed  in the bottom of cavities in very
sensitive teeth, previously to the intro-
duction of gold,  to prevent the painful
sensation sometimes produced  in cases
of this sort, by cold or hot fluids when
taken into  the mouth.  To what extent
these effects may be prevented by the
employment of this article, we are una-
ble to say,  never having had occasion
to try it, and its use for this purpose, if
employed  for it  at all, is exceedingly
 limited.  Cases, however, may  occur,
 in which it may, perhaps, be advan-
 tageously used.
   AS'CARIS.  The name of a genus
 of intestinal worms.
   Ascaris Vermicula'ris. The thread
 or maw-worm; it is found in the rec-
 tum.
   Ascaris  Lumbricoi'des.    A long
 round worm.
  ASCEN'DENS. From ad and scan-
 do, to ascend.  Ascending. Apphed to
 parts which have  their  origin lower
 than their termination.
  ASCITES. From auxoj, a sack or
 bottle; called so,  because of its bottle-
 like protuberance.  Dropsy of the abdo-
 men, or  rather  of the  peritoneum,
 characterized by fluctuation, increased
 size  of the abdomen, &c.
  ASCLE'PIAS  ASTHMATTCA. A
 creeping plant  of the  Isle of France,
 supposed to be a specific in asthma.
  Asclepias Syriaca.   Syrian dogs-
 bane.
  Asclepias Vincetox'icum.   Vince-
 toxicum.  Swallow-wort.
  ASCO'MA.  From  aaxos, a bottle.
 The eminence of the pubes of females
 at the age of puberty, is so called from
 its shape.
   ASITTA.  From a,  priv. and oitos,
 food. Abstinence from food;  want of
 appetite.
  ASO'DES.  From a5w, to nauseate.
 A fever attended with a sense of nausea,
 loathing, and great internal heat.
  ASPER'ITY.  Roughness.
  ASPHALTUM. A bituminous sub-
 stance found in a soft liquid state on the
 surface of the Dead sea, which, by age,
 becomes dry and hard.
  ASPHOD'ELUS RAMO'SUS. The
 name for the officinal, or branched as-
 phodel.
  ASPHYX'IA.   From  a, priv. and
 afyvtis, pulse. Suspended animation;  an
 apparent privation  of  pulse.   From
whatever cause this may be produced,
its effects upon the teeth, when it results
in death are  very  singular.  It causes 
AST
76
ATE
 their bony or osseous tissue to be slight-
 ly injected  with red blood, giving to
 them a faint red or purplish tinge. This
 is particularly observable in the teeth of
 persons who have been drowned, hung,
 or have died  from the Asiatic  cholera,
 and  demonstrates, beyond  doubt,  the
 vascularity of these  organs.  The  au-
 thor has a number of specimens of teeth
 thus injected, in his cabinet.
  ASPHIX'IED.   In a  state of as-
 phyxia.
  ASPLE'NIUM. The name of a genus
 of plants.
  Asplenium Cet'erach. The syste-
 matic name of spleenwort. Miltwaste.
  Asplenium Filex Fos'mina.  Female
 fern.
  Asplenium Ruta  Mura'ria. Wall-
 rue ; white maiden-hair.
  Asplenium Scolopen'drium.   The
 systematic  name of  scolopendrium.—
 Hart's tongue.
  Asplenium Trichom'anes. The sys-
 tematic name of trichomanes.  Com-
 mon maiden-hair, or spleenwort.
  ASSABA.  The name of a Guinea
 shrub.
  ASSAFCETIDA.   Asafoetida.
  ASSARABACCA. Asarum  Eu-
 ropoeum.
  ASSAY.   Essay.  A process, the ob-
ject of which is to determine the quanti-
 ty of valuable or precious metal contain-
 ed in any mineral, or  metallic mixture,
 by analyzing a small part  of it.
  ASSIMILATION. Assimilatio; from
 as and similare, to make like to, or simi-
 lar.  The conversion of food into nutri-
 ment.  Nutrition.
  ASTHENI'A.  From  a, priv.  and
 o&vos, force, strength. Debility. Want
 of strength.
  ASTHENO'PIA.   From  a, priv.
 a&vos, strength,  and  u<j>,  the  eye.
 Weakness of sight.
  ASTH'MA.  From  a^M<w,   to
breathe with difficulty.  Difficult respi-
ration, recurring at intervals, attended
with a sense of stricture across the breast,
and  in the lungs,  with  a wheezing
 cough.  It is placed by Dr. Cullen in the
 class neurosis, and order spasmi.
   ASTHMAT'IC. Affected with,  or
 relating to, asthma.
   AS'TOMUS.  Astofioi, from o, priv.
 and eto/m, a mouth.  Without a mouth.
   ASTRAG'ALUS.  From aafpoyaTioj,
 a dye; so called because of its supposed
 resemblance to the dye used  in the an-
 cient games.  A short bone of the Tar-
 sus.
   Astragalus  Exs'capus.  Stemless
 milk-vetch.
   Astragalus  Tragacantha.   The
 plant which affords the gum tragacanth.
 See Astragalus Verus.
   Astragalus Verus.   Goat's-thorn;
 milk-vetch.  Astragalus tragacantha.
   ASTRANTIA.  See Imperatoria.
   Astrantia Major. Astrantia vulga-
 ris.  Astrantia nigra.
   Astrantia Nigra.  The herb sanicle
 master-wort.  Black master-wort.
   ASTRICTUS.   From astringo, to
 bind.  When applied  to the abdomen,
 it signifies costiveness.
   ASTRIN'GENT.   Astringens; from
 astringo, to constringe. That  which has
 the property of contracting and render-
 ing more solid the organic textures.
   ASTROL'OGY.  Astrologia;  from
 aatpov, a star, and a.oyo$, a discourse.
 The art of divining by  inspecting the
 stars.
   ATAVISM.  From  atoms, an old
 grandsire or ancestor, indefinitely.   The
 reappearance of an anomaly  or disease,
 after it had been lost in  one or  more
 generations.
   ATAXTA.  From a, priv. and taaeu,
 to order.  Irregularity in the functions of
 the body, or the symptoms of a disease.
  AT'ELES.  AtcXrji, imperfect; de-
fective.
  ATELECTASIS   PULMO'NUM.
Pneumonatelectasis.  Imperfect dillita-
tion of the lungs at birth.
  ATELOCHEI'LIA.  From ata^,
imperfect, and  ^«xoj, hp.  Imperfect
development of the hp.
  ATELOENCEPHALTA.    From 
ATM
77
ATR
ateXris, imperfect, and syxtfyaXov, the en-
cephalon.   Imperfect  development of
the brain.
   ATELOGLOS'SIA. From ataw,
imperfect, and yjuocuja,  tongue. Imper-
fect development of the tongue.
   ATELOGNATHIA.  From ate%v<,
imperfect, and yra^oj, the jaw. Imper-
fect development of the jaw.
   ATELOMYEL'IA.  From attr^t,
imperfect, and pviXos, marrow. Imper-
fect development of the spinal marrow.
   ATELOPROSO'PIA.  From atara,
imperfect, and rtpouwrtoj>, the face.  Im-
perfect development of the face.
   ATELOSTOM'IA.   From ats%rj$,
imperfect, and atopa,  mouth. Imper-
fect development of the mouth.
   ATHAMANTA.   From  Athamas
in Thessaly.  The name of a genus of
 plants.
   Athamanta Creten'sis.    The sys-
tematic name for  the  daucus  creticus.
 Candy carrot.
   Athamanta  Oreoseli'num.   The
systematic name for the officinal orcose-
linum.  Black mountain parsley.
   ATHANA'SIA.    From  a,  priv.
and §avato$, death, because  its flowers
do not  easily wither.  The  immortal
plant.  Tansey.  It also means immor-
tality.
   ATHERO'MA.   From  a^pa, pap
or pulp.  An incisted tumor, containing
a soft substance of the consistence of a
poultice.
   ATHLETA.  From a$?joS, combat.
The men who exercised themselves in
combat at the public festivals were call-
ed Athletae.
   ATHLETIC.  Athleticus.   Possess-
ing great muscular strength.
   ATHYM'IA.    From a, priv. and
^dwoj, courage.   Pusillanimity, despon-
dency, melancholy.
  ATLAS.   From Araaw,  I  sustain,
because it sustains the head, or from the
fable of Atlas, who  was supposed to
sustain the world upon his  shoulders.
The name of the first vertebra.
  ATMOSPHERE.  From araoj, va-
     7*
 por, and enfatpa, a globe.  The elastic in-
 visible fluid which surrounds the earth.
   ATON'IC.  Atonicus. Diminution of
 strength.   Weak.
   AT'ONY. Atonia; from a, priv. and
 tovos, tone.  Debility.  Want  of mus-
 cular power.
   ATRABIL'IARY.    From   ater,
 black, and bills,  bile.  Black bile.  An
 epithet applied  by the ancients to mel-
 ancholic  and hypochondriac  disposi-
 tions, because it was believed  that the
 atrabilis predominated in them.
   Atrabiliary  Capsules,  The supra-
 renal glands.
   ATRACHE'LUS.   From  a, priv.
 and tpaxrix°s> the neck.  Short-necked.
   ATRESIA.   Imperforation.
   ATRETUS.    From  a,  priv.  and
 tfpatt, I perforate.  Imperforation of the
 anus or parts of generation.
   ATRICES.   Small  tubercles which
 sometimes appear about the anus.
   ATRICI.  Small sinuses  about  the
 anus, but which do  not  perforate  the
 rectum.
   ATRIPLEX  FCETIDA.  Chenopo-
 dium vulvaria.
   Atriplex Horten'sis.   Atriplex sa-
 tiva; grass-leaved, sea orache.
   AT'ROPA.  From Atfportoj, the god-
 dess of destiny, so  called  from its fatal
 effects.  The name of a genus of plants.
   Atropa Belladon'na.   Belladonna.
 Deadly nightshade or dwale.
   Atropa Mandragora.   Mandrake.
   AT'ROPHY.  Atrophia.   From a,
 priv. and tpsfu, to nourish. Marasmus.
 Atrophy.   A gradual wasting of  the
 body, usually unattended  by  fever,  but
 by a loss of appetite, and impaired di-
 gestion.   Any organ of the body thus
 affected  is said  to be atrophied.  See
 Atrophy of the Teeth.
   Atrophy of the Teeth.   This af-
 fection was formely treated of, and even
 is  at present by some  French writers,
 under the name of erosion.  The former
 appellation was substituted by M. Du-
val, for the latter,  and for the disease
which it is intended to designate, it cer- 
ATR
78
ATR
tainly seems to be the most appropriate.
By erosion is  usually understood,  the
gradual destruction of a  tooth by  the
action  of an acrimonious humor.   It
consists in the decomposition of the* en-
amel, and is  seldom attended with any
discoloration of the affected part.  It is
identical in every respect  with caries;
and is produced by the same cause, but
atrophy is characterized  by a  white,
brown or yellow spot  upon the enamel,
or a number of small holes in it, which
have the appearance of being partially
cicatrized, and this  last variety  is more
common than the first.  Two, four, six,
and even eight of  the  front teeth, in
each jaw, are,  sometimes, encircled  by
these perforations, which, by their par-
tial union, form a sort of rough groove.
It is not uncommon to  see teeth with
two or even three horizontal grooves of
this sort running round them,  and the
partially united holes of which they are
formed, sometimes extend only a short
distance into the enamel; at other times,
they penetrate entirely through it. They
usually have a brown appearance, and
in the majority of cases, their walls are
rough  and  uneven,  though they  are
sometimes quite smooth.
  The bone as well as the  enamel of the
teeth is often affected with the disease.
The crowns of atrophied teeth are some-
times not more than half or one-third of
their usual size, presenting a shrivelled
appearance.  In this  case, the  enamel
in some places is entirely wanting, while
in others, it is more or less perfect, ex-
cept that it usually has a  brownish ap-
pearance, and is less hard.
  In the variety first spoken of, the en-
amel is often  so soft as readdy to crum-
ble under the pressure of an instrument.
This description may be  congenital or
accidental; the other varieties  are al-
ways  congenital, as they never occur
after the birth of a tooth.
   The first variety  rarely affects more
than one or two teeth—the other varie-
ties, except that which is  characterized
by a diminution of the size of teeth,
always affects two, and sometimes four,
six or even eight.  It  rarely, however,
appears upon more than six teeth in the
same jaw.
   The incisores are more liable to be af-
fected by it than any of the other teeth,
though  the  cuspidati, bicuspides and
even the molares  are sometimes  attack-
ed witil the disease.  The crowns of the
teeth are the parts most frequently af-
fected by it, yet, nevertheless,  it some-
times appears upon the roots, giving them
a*shrivelled and uneven appearance.
   Causes.—The description of atrophy,
first noticed, is evidently the result of the
destruction of the bond of union between
the enamel and the osseous tissue of the
tooth, but what causes this destruction,
especially when it occurs previously to
dentition,  is a question that has never
been  satisfactorily answered.    Subse-
quently to this  period,  it may result
from  a blow, but while  the  teeth are
imbedded  in the  jaws, it could  not be
produced in this  way.  It may, how-
ever, and very likely does, result either
from  inflammation of, or  some other
diseased action in the pulp, whereby
some portion of this intermediary sub-
stance is  prevented   from being de-
veloped, or from becoming  united in
every part  to  the  animal framework
of the  enamel.   The other descrip-
tions  of atrophy are  supposed to be
the result of vicious nutrition, whereby
the development of one or more of the
enamel fibres is prevented, or caused by
eruptive and other febrile diseases.  Bu-
non ascribes it to  an acrid humor, insin-
uating itself into the  alveolus.    The
fluids of the  dental capsules may be-
come acidulated and  produce erosion,
the name by which  he  designates the
affection in question, but not this disease.
M. Delabarre seems, also, to  have con-
founded atrophy with erosion, although
he endeavors to point out the distinction
that exists  between  the  two  diseases,
but most  of the drawings which he
gives of teeth  affected by the   latter,
are evidently marked with the  former. 
ATR
79
ATT
The most probable cause  is, a diseased
action in the cells of the  enamel mem-
brane, induced by some pecuhar form
of constitutional derangement, whereby
the deposit of earthy matter is wholly or
partially  prevented, and,  hence,  the
want of development of the correspond-
ing enamel fibres, and the perforations
by which the affection is characterized.
It will be recollected that the formation
of the enamel commences on the cutting
edges of the incisores, cuspidati and bi-
cuspides, the cusps and protuberances of
the grinding surfaces of the molares, and
from thence proceeds towards the neck,
gradually enveloping the whole crown,
so that the occurrence of  constitutional
disease capable of thus affecting the cells
of the enamel membrane, whde  in the
 act of  being filled  with  earthy salts,
 would act upon a circular series passing
 all the way round the tooth.  The  part
 of the  enamel previously  formed,  as a
 matter of course, could not be affected
 by such diseased action in the cells of
 the enamel membrane.   It is only such
 of the fibres of the  enamel that are, at
 the time, in  the  act of formation, that
 are affected.  When the cause of  this
 diseased action of the cells of this mem-
 brane ceases, or is removed, the process
 of the formation of the enamel is resum-
 ed, and the balance of the crown of the
 tooth will be covered with perfect en-
 amel, unless the child should relapse, or
 be attacked with some other form of
 constitutional  disease capable of  thus
 affecting the formative process of this
 tissue.   In this case, the tooth will be
 encircled by  another series of perfora-
 tions, or rough  grooves, and  still an-
 other, if it be again attacked.
    This seems to be  the only rational or
 philosophical  explanation  that can be
 given of the cause of this particular de-
 scription of atrophy, and the constitu-
 tional diseases upon which it is suppos-
 ed to be dependent, are measles  and
 small-pox.  But cases have  been met
with in individuals who have never been
 affected with either of these diseases—
and, hence, it is evident that  it may re-
sult from some other form of constitu-
tional disturbance.
  Atrophy, characterized by an imper-
fect development of the osseous part of
the crown of a tooth, discoloration, &c.
is, doubtless, the result of diseased  ac-
tion in the pulp, at the time of ossifica-
tion.
   Treatment.—The nature of this affec-
tion  is  such as not  to admit of cure.
The treatment, therefore, must be  pre-
ventive rather than curative.  All that
can be done is to mitigate  the severity
of such diseases as are supposed to pro-
duce it, by the administration of  proper
remedies.  By this means, the effects,
may, perhaps, be  partially  or wholly
counteracted.
   It seldom happens that atrophied teeth
decay more  readily than others, so that
the only evil resulting from the affection,
is a disfiguration of the organs.  When
the cutting edges of the incisores  only
are  affected,  the   diseased part  may
sometimes be removed with a file with-
out inflicting the slightest injury on the
teeth.
   ATROPINE.   The active principle
of atropa belladonna.
   ATTENDANTS.  Attenuans; from
attenuo, to make thin.  Medicines which
increase the fluidity of the blood.
   ATTOL'LENS AUREM.  A mus-
cle of the ear.
   Attollens Occuli." A muscle of the
eye.
   ATTRACTION.   Attractio; from
attraho, to attract.  Affinity ;  tendency
of bodies or particles of matter  to  ap-
proach one another and adhere together.
See Affinity.
   Attraction of  Cohesion.  Cohe-
sion; the force which unites  similar par-
ticles into masses.
   Attraction, Elective.  Chemical
attraction.   The tendency of those sub-
stances in a mixture which  have the
strongest affinity for each other to unite.
Thus, if  sulphuric acid be  poured into
a solution containing baryta, magnesia 
               AUR               80

 and soda, it elects the baryta, and forms
 by its union with it, sulphate of baryta.
   Attraction, Electrical.  The ap-
 proach of bodies dissimilarly electrified.
   Attraction of Gravitation.  The
 mutual tendency of bodies to each other.
   ATTRAHENT.  From ad, to, and
 traho, I draw.  Remedies which attract
 fluids to the parts to which they are ap-
 phed.
   ATTRITION.  From ad, and terere,
 to bruise.   Friction; bruising.
   AUD'ITION.  From audire, to hear.
 Hearing.
   AUDITORY.  Auditorious; from
 audire, to hear.  Belonging to the organ
 of hearing.
   Auditory Arteries and Veins. The
 vessels which enter the auditory canals.
   Auditory Canals.  See Meatus Au-
 ditorius  Externus, and Meatus Audito-
 rius Internus.
   Auditory Nerve.  Portio mollis  of
 the seventh pair.
   AUGITE.   A green, black, or brown
 mineral,  found in volcanic rock and
 basaltes.
   AURA.  From aw, to breathe.  Any
 subtile vapor or emanation.
   Aura Sanguines.  The odor exhaled
 from blood  immediately  after being
 drawn.
  AURANTIUM.  The orange.
  Aurantium  Curassavente.    The
 Curassoa apples or oranges.  Immature
 oranges.
  AURANTII BACCE.  See Citrus
 Aurantium.
  Aurantii Cortex.  See Citrus Au-
 rantium.
  AURICHALCUM.  Brass.
  AURICULA.  Diminutive of auris,
the ear.  The auricle of the ear.
  Auricula Juda.   See Peziza Auri-
cula.
  Auricula Muris. Hieracium; hawk-
 weed.
  Auricles of the Heart.  The two
 cavities of the  heart which receive the
blood frtfm every part of the body, the
right from  the two  venae  cavae and
                AVE

 coronary vein, and the left from the four
 pulmonary veins.
   AURICULAR.  Auricularis;  from
 auris, the ear.  Pertaining to the ear.
   AURIS.   From   aura,  air.   The
 organ of hearing.  The ear.
   AURISCAL'PIUM. From ovra.the
 ear,  and scalpo, to  scrape.   An ear
 scraper.
   AURIST.   From auris,  the ear.
 One  who occupies  himself with the
 treatment of the diseases of the ear.
   AURUM.  Gold.
   Aurum  Foliatum. See Gold Foil.
   Aurum Fulminans. The  precipitate
 formed by  putting ammonia into a solu-
 tion of gold.
   Aurum Graphicum.  A gold ore.
   Aurum Horizontale.  Oil of cinna-
 mon and sugar.
   Aurum Leprosum.  Antimony.
   Aurum  Musivum.  Mosaic  gold; a
 preparation used as a pigment  for giv-
 ing to plaster figures a golden color. It
 is a combination of  tin, mercury and
 sulphur.
   Aurum  Potabile.   Dissolved  gold
 mixed with oil of rosemary.
  AUSCULTATION. Auscultatio; the
 act of listening.  It is now  used as a
 means of diagnosis in diseases of the lungs
 and heart, which is supposed to be deter-
 mined by the sounds heard in the chest.
 For this purpose an instrument  called a
 stethoscope is employed.
   AUTOP'SIA.  From avtos,  himself,
 and o^ij, vision. Ocular  examination
 Dissection of a dead body.
  AUXILIARY.   Assisting.  That
 from which assistance is obtained.
  AVANTURINE.   A  variety  of
 quartz, found in Scotland and Spain.
  AVELLANA  CATHARTICA.-
 See Jatropha Curcas.
  AVENIUS.  Veinless. In Botany, a
 term apphed  to  leaves which  have no
 veins.
  AVERY, SAMUEL, surgeon  den-
tist, was born in East Lynn, Connecti-
cut, January, 1805, but left his native
place,  while a youth, and soon  after 
               BAC                8

commenced the study of medicine and
dental surgery; in both of which he was
regularly  educated, but confined him-
self exclusively to  the  practice of the
latter.  After  practicing  sometime in
one or more of the New England states,
he moved to Brooklyn, N. Y.  But he
remained there only  about one year,
when he removed to N.  Orleans, where
he exercised the duties of his profession
until near the time of  his death,  which
occurred in Jan. 1839.  During the brief
period of his  professional  career, Dr.
Avery acquired the reputation of a sci-
entific and skilful  practitioner.   But it
was to surgical dentistry that he devoted
most of his time, and  it was in this de-
partment of practice that  he  acquired
most  eminence.    By  his premature
death, the dental profession lost a valua-
ble member.
   AVUL'SION.  Avulsio; from a, and
vello, to pull.   Pulling or tearing from;
a rending or forcible separation.
   AXE-STONE.   A species  of ne-
phrite.
   AXIL'LA.   The arm-pit,  or  cavity
under the  arm.
   AXIL'LARY. Axillaris; from axilla,
the arm-pit. Belonging  to the axilla.
   Axillary Artery. Arteria axillaris.
The axillary artery is  a continuation of
the subclavian,  extending from the pas-
sage of the latter between the scaleni
muscles to the insertion of the pictoralis
major.
  Axillary Nerve.  Nervus axillaris.
  BACCA.   A  berry.  Fruit having
seeds;  a pulpy pericarpium enclosing
seeds, connected  by a  dehcate  mem-
brane, dispersed through the pulp.
  BACCATED.  Bearing berries; set
or adorned with pearls.
  BACCHI'A.  From  bacchus, wine.
1               BAK

 Articular nerve. A branch  of the bra-
 chial plexus, and sometimes of the ra-
 dial nerve.
   Axillary Vein.  Vena axillaris.  A
 continuation of the brachial veins, which
 terminate in the subclavian.
   AXTS.  From ago, to act.  A  right
 fine passing through the centre of a
 body.  In Anatomy, the second vertebra.
   AXUNGIA. From axis, an axletree,
 and unguo,-to anoint.   Hog's lard.
   AZOODYNA'MIA.   From a, priv
 £wrj, life, and Swapis,  strength. Priva-
 tion or diminution of the vital powers.
   AZOTE.  From a, priv.  and ^«, to
 hve, because it  is not  fit for respiration.
 One of the constituents of atmospheric
 air,  and  a  distinguishing principle  of
 animals.  See Nitrogen.
   Azote, Protoxyd of.  A gaseous
 oxyd of nitrogen.
   AZURITE.    Prismatic azure spar.
 A mineral of a fine blue color, composed
 of alumina, magnesia, silica,  oxyd  of
 iron and time.
   AZYGOS.  From a, priv. and £uyos,
 a yoke, because it has no fellow.  Ap-
 phed to single muscles,  veins, bones,
 &c.
   Azygos Uvula.   A  small muscle
 of the uvula.
   Azygos Vein.   Vena sine pari.  A
 vein situated in the right cavity of the
 thorax, receiving its blood from the ver-
 tebral,  intercostal, bronchial,  pericar-
 diac, and diaphragmatic veins, and dis-
 charging it into the vena cava superior.
A red or pimpled face resulting from in-
temperance.
   BACCIF'ERUS. From bacca, a ber-
ry.  Berry-bearing.  Plants which bear
berries are called by this name.
  BAKER, E.   Author of an Essay
on Ulceration of the Roots of the Teeth.
B. 
BAL
82
BAL
pubhshed in New York, 1842.—Also,
of a Report of a Case of Osseous Union
of the  Fractured  Extremities  of  the
Tooth of a Child, pubhshed in vol. 1, of
American Journal Dental Science, and
of one or two articles on the  use of
Amalgam for Filling Teeth,  published
in the  New York Dental Recorder.—
Dr. B. is also the author of several other
papers on the teeth, one of which is on
the Treatment of the Nerves of these
organs.
  Beside the above, Dr. B. is  the  au-
thor of a paper on the Diseases of  the
Gums, pubhshed in the American Jour-
nal of Dental  Science, vol. 6.—Also, of
a paper on the use of India Rubber  in
Regulating the Teeth, pubhshed in  the
New York Dental Recorder, vol. 1.
  BALANCE.   Bilanx;  from  bis,
twice, and lanx, a dish. Literally, the dou-
ble dish.  A pair of scales for weighing
bodies, consisting of a beam suspended
exactly in the middle with a scale or  ba-
sin attached to each extremity of equal
weight.
  BALBUTIES.   From  balbutio, to
stammer.   Stammering; a  defect  of
speech.
  BALM.  The name of several plants
or shrubs; any thing which soothes or
mitigates pain.
  BALNEUM.   A  bath, or  bathing
house.
  BAL'SAM.  Balsamum ;  from baal
samen,  Hebrew.    The name  of any
natural vegetable  resin, concrete   or
liquid,  having a strong odor, inflamma-
ble, not soluble in water, but readfly dis-
solved in volatile  oil, alcohol, or ether.
There are five natural balsams; namely,
those of Peru, and Tolu, Benzoin, solid
styrax, and liquid styrax. Besides these,
there are a number of pharmaceutical
preparations and   resinous substances
which  have a balsamic odor,  that have
received the name of balsam.  But these
last are termed artificial balsams.
  Balsam Apple.  Momordica balsa-
rnina.
  Balsam, Canada.  Canada  turpen-
tine;  balsam of fir; the product of the
abies  balsamea.  It is transparent when
fresh, of a slightly yellowish color, of
the consistence of honey; has an acrid
bitterish taste,  and a strong agreeable
odor.
  Balsam, Carpathian.  The product
of the pinus cembra, or Siberian stone-
pine of the Alps and Carpathian moun-
tains.
  Balsam, Hungarian.  A product of
the pinus pumilio, growing in the moun-
tains of Switzerland,  Austria and Hun-
gary.
  Balsam of  Copaiva.  The juice of
the copaifera officinalis and other spe-
cies of copaifera.
  Balsam of Fir.  Balsam of Canada.
Canada turpentine.
  Balsam of Gilead.  Balm of Gilead.
A resinous juice of the amyris gikad-
ensis, which, by exposure, becomes solid.
  Balsam of  Peru.  The juice  of
myroxylon peruiferum.
  Balsam of  Sulphur.   Oleum sul-
phuratum.  An extremely fetid, acrid,
viscid fluid, resulting  from the reaction
of sulphur upon olive oil at a high tem-
perature.
  Balsam of Tolu.  The juice of the
myroxylon toluiferum.
  Balsam, Riga.  Balsamum carpati-
cum.  The juice of the  young twigs  of
the pinus cembra.
  Balsam Weed. Jewel-weed;  touch-
me-not.
  BALSAMIC.    Balsamicus;   from
fiaxoapov, balsam.   Having the qualities
of balsams.
  BALSAMINA.  Balsam  apple.
  BALSAMODEN'DRON  MYRR-
HA.   The systematic name of the tree
which yields myrrh.
  BALSAMUM.  A balsam.
  Balsamum Canadense. Canada bal-
sam.
  Balsamum Carpaticum.  Riga bal-
sam.
  Balsamum Gileadense.  Balsam of
Gflead.
  Balsamum Libani,  Riga balsam, 
BAR               83                BAS
  Balsamum Peruvianum.  Balsam of
Peru.
  Balsamum Tolutanum.  Balsam of
Tolu.
  Balsamum Traumaticum.  Vulner-
ary balsam.   Compound  tincture of
benzoin.
  BAMBALIA.  Stammering.
  BAMBA'LIO.   From j3aii*j3an>w, I
speak inarticulately.  One who stam-
mers or lisps.
  BAMBOO.  A plant of the reed kind,
growing in India and other warm cli-
mates.
  BANANA.  Musa sapientum.
  BAN'DAGE.   A piece of linen or
flannel for surrounding parts of  the
body  for surgical operations,  or bind-
ing up a wound.  A  bandage may
be simple or compound.  The first con-
sists of a simple piece of linen or flan-
nel intended to encircle a limb or part.
The second consists of two  or more
pieces united.  Names expressive of the
manner of  its application  have been
given to the simple bandage; as the cir-
cular,  the  spiral, the  creeping,  &c.
The names apphed  to the compound,
are expressive of its shape or the parts to
which it is applied.
  Bandage, Fox's. See Fox's Bandage.
  BANILLA.  Epidendrum vanilla.
  BAPTICA COCCUS.  The kermes
insect.
  BAPTISIA TINCTORIA.  Wild in-
digo.
  BARAS. An Arabic name for white
leprosy.
  BARBADOES LEG. Elephantiasis
Arabum.  A  disease  characterized by
great distention of the  cellular tissue of
the leg, and dark color.
  Barbadoes Tar.   Petroleum barba-
dense.
  BARBA'RIA.  Rhubarb.
  BARBARY GUM.  A  variety of
Senegal gum.
  BARBATUS. From barba, a beard.
A term apphed in Zoology, to animals
which have a beard or an appendage re-
sembling a beard.  In Botany, the hair-
like appendage on the leaves or other
parts of some plants, as the mesembry-
anthemum barbatum, &c.
  BARBELS.  Small cylindrical ver-
miform  processes,  appended  to  the
mouth of certain fishes.
  BARBIERS.  A  term applied to a
paralytic affection of the tropics, follow-
ed by  loss of voice, emaciation, and
prostration of strength.
  BARDANA.  Burdock.
  BARIUM. From barytes,from which
it is obtained.  The metallic basis of the
earth barytes.
  BARK.  See Cinchona.
  BAROM'ETER.     From    j3apoS,
weight and uitpov, measure. An instru-
ment for ascertaining the weight of air.
  BAR'RAS.   The resin which ex-
udes from wounds made in the bark of
fir trees.
  BARREES, DENTS.  See  Barred
Teeth.
  BARRED TEETH.   Teeth, the
roots of which, after separating, come to-
gether, embracing a greater or less por-
tion of the maxillary bone, and which
cannot be extracted  without bringing
away the part thus enclosed.
  BARYECOI'A. FromjSopuj, heavy,
and axova, to hear.   Deafness.
  BARYPHO'NIA.   From   j3apvS,
heavy, and <j>tov»?, the voice.  Difficulty
of speech.
  BARYTA.  From jSapuj, heavy, so
called because of its ponderosity.  An
oxyd  of barium.   A simple  alkaline
earth, of a gray color, very ponderous
and not easily fused.
  Baryta, Carbonate.  Barytae car-
bonas.
  Baryta, Hydriodate.  Iodide of ba-
rium.
  Baryta, Muriate of.  Baryta hy-
drochlorate.  Chloride of barium.
  BARYTES.   Baryta.
  BASE. Basis, from j8an/w, I go, 1
rest, I support myself.  The foundation
or support of anything; the principal
ingredient of a compound.  In Chemis-
try, it is apphed to alkalies, earths, and 
BAS
84
BAT
 metals, in their relations to acids and
 salts.  In Dental Surgery, it is apphed to
 a metallic, ivory, or hippopotamus plate
 or cuvette, used as a support or attach-
 ment for artificial teeth.  It is sometimes
 made  of  porcelain  paste  and baked.
 See Bases for Artificial Teeth.
   Bases  for Artificial Teeth.  In
 the construction of a base for artificial
 teeth, a transfer or model of plaster  of
 Paris is first obtained. Then a metallic
 model and counter-model, if the base is
 to be of metal, is procured, and between
 these, a plate of suitable size and thick-
 ness is swadged.   In this way it is made
 to fit accurately the parts upon which
 it is to rest.   If the base is to  be con-
 structed from the  ivory of the elephant
 or hippopotamus'  tusk,  the   plaster
 model alone is sufficient.   The ivory
 is cut to the proper size and then carved
 until it fits  the  model.   But  ivory
 is little used at present for this purpose.
 See Metallic Base; Osseous Base, and
 Mineral Base.
   BASIATOR.   Orbicularis oris,
   BAS'ILARY.  Basilaris;  A name
 given to several parts of the body, which
 serve as bases to others.
   Basilary Artery.  An artery of the
 brain, formed by the union of two verte-
 bral arteries, within the cranium.
   Basilary Fossa.  A fossa in the up-
 per surface of the basilary process of the
 occipital bone.
   Basilary  Process.   The  inferior
 angle of the occipital bone.
   Basilary  Surface.  Inferior  sur-
 face of the basilary process.
  Basilary Vertebra.  The last lum-
 ber vertebra.
  BASIL'IC.  Basilicus; from jSatfat-
xoj,  royal.  A name  given by  the an-
cients to parts which were supposed to
play an important part in the  animal
economy.
  Basilic Vein.  A large vein running
along the internal part of the arm; at
the fold of the elbow it lies over  the hu-
meral artery.   The  median basilic vein
crosses at the head of the  arm and joins
 this.   Either of these veins may be
 opened in the operation of bleeding.
    Basilicus Pulvis.  A name  given
 to a powder, formerly composed of cal-
 omel, rhubarb and  jalap; it was  called
 the royal powder.
    Basic  Muscles originating from the
 basilary process of the  occipital bone
 are so called.
    Basio-Cerato-Chondro-Glossus.—
 Hyoglossus.
    Basio-Glossum.   Hyoglossus.
    Basio-Pharyngaus. The constrictor
 pharyngis medius.
    BASIS.  Abase.
    Basis Cordis. The base of the heart.
   BATE, C. SPENCER.   Author of
 a paper on the Effects  of Camphor on
 the Teeth,  pubhshed  in the London
 Lancet.
   BATH.  BaXavetov, balneum. A  bath.
 A receptacle of water, in which, for per-
 sons to wash or plunge;  a bathing place.
 Baths are either hot or  cold, natural or
 artificial.
   Bath,  Dry.   A  bath  used by the
 ancients, composed of ashes, salt, sand,
 &c.
   Bath, Electric. An electric  bath
 consists in placing a person upon an in-
 sulated stool,  connected by  a metallic
 wire with the principal  conductor of an
 electric  machine in action.
   Bath, Foot.  Pediluvium.  A  bath
 for the feet.
   Bath, Half.  Semicupium. A bath
 adapted for only half of the  body, as
 for the hips or extremities.
   Bath, Hand.   Manuluvium. A  bath
 for the hands.
   Bath, Head.  Capitiluvium.  A bath
 for the head.
   Bath, Hot.  Balneum calidum.  A
 bath having a temperature of 98° and
 upwards.
   Bath, Medicated.   Balneum medi-
 catum.  A bath consisting of decoctions
 or infusions of certain vegetable substan-
 ces, or any medicinal ingredients.
  Bath, Nitro-Muriatic Acid.   A
bath consisting of dilute aqua regia, em- 
BEC
85
BEL
  ployed by Dr. Scott, of India, in hepatic
  diseases.
    Bath,  Sand.  Balneum Arenoz.   A
  vessel filled with sand and placed over a
  fire; into this another is placed contain-
  ing the substance to be evaporated.
    Bath, Shower.  Impluvium.  A bath
  where the water falls like a shower on
  the body.
    Bath, Steam.  The  introduction of
  steam into a closed vessel  or room, in
  place of water.
    BATHMIS.  From Paivu, to enter.
  Bathmus.  The seat or base; the cavity
  of a bone which receives the head or
  protuberance of another.
    BAUHIN, VALVE  OF.  A name
  given  to a  transverse valve, situated
  where the ileum opens into the coecum.
   BAUHINUS.  Author of a Disserta-
  tion on Odontalgia,  pubhshed in 1660.
   BAUMES, M.   Author  of a well
  written and elaborate treatise on First
  Dentition,  and  the serious disorders
  which frequently depend upon it, pub-
  lished in  Paris, 1806.  This work, the
  result of great research and careful ob-
  servation, embodies much  useful and
 valuable information. A Translation of
 it into Enghsh, by Professor T. E. Bond,
 M. D., was  pubhshed in the Library
 part of the second volume of the Ameri-
 can Journal of Dental Science.
   BDEL'LIUM. A gum resin, resemb-
 ling impure myrrh.
   BEAK.  The bill of a bird; a point;
 the jaws  of  forceps employed for the
 extraction of teeth are  sometimes  so
 called.
   BEARD.   The hair growing on the
 chin, I'p  and cheeks in adults of the
 male sex.
   BEAUPREAU.   Author of a Dis-
 sertation on the Properties and Preserva-
 tion of the  Teeth, published  in Paris,
 1764;—also  of a  Letter  on the Dis-
eases of the Maxillary Sinus, pubhshed
in Paris, 1769.
  BEC.  A  French  word, signifying
beak.
  Bec-de-corbin.   A surgical instru-1
  ment; forceps for the extraction of teeth.
  See Extraction of Teeth.
    Bec-de-cuiller.  A surgical instru-
  ment for the extraction of balls from
  gun-shot wounds.
    Bec-de-Lievre.  Hare-lip.
    BE'CHIC.  Bechica,  bechicus, from
  J397!, a cough. Medicines for relieving a
  cough.
    BECKER.  Author of a Small Trea-
  tise on the Teeth, pubhshed at Leipsic,
  1807 and 1810.
    BEGMA. From fiqGtssiv,  to cough
  up, to expectorate,  to spit.  Expecto-
  rated matter.
    BELEMNOI'DES.  From /tos/ttw,
  a dart, and nSos, form. Having the form
  of a dart.
    BELEMNOIDES  PROCESSUS.
  The styloid processes.
    BELL, THOMAS.  Lecturer on the
  anatomy and diseases  of the  teeth  at
  Guy's Hospital,  London, and author
  of an ably written work on the Anato-
  my, Physiology and Diseases of the
  Teeth, pubhshed  in  London,  1831.
  This is one of the best works  upon the
  teeth ever issued from the English press.
  It  has passed through three editions  in
  the United States, has been extensively
  read and  quoted  from, both in Europe
  and America, and  will always hold a
  high place in the  literature of dental
 surgery. If all of the opinions advanced
 in  this work are not  strictly true, most
 of  them  are  worthy of consideration.
 Mr. Bell is also the author of Notes and
 Annotations to a  recent edition of Mr.
 Hunter's work on the Natural History
 and Diseases of the Teeth.
  BELL  METAL.   An alloy  of cop-
 per, zinc, tin and antimony.
  BELLADON'NA.   See   Atropa
 Belladonna.
  BEL'LOWS.   An instrument  for
 propelling air through a tube or small
 orifice.  It is  variously constructed ac-
 cording to  the purpose for which it is
 designed to be used.    In the laboratory
of the dentist, it is used for blowing the
fire  of a furnace for melting gold or other 
BET
86
BEZ
metals.  The air being permitted to es-
cape only by a small  orifice,  rushes
out with great velocity.
  BELUL'CUM.  From fcxos, a dart,
iXxu, I draw out.  An instrument used
by surgeons  for the extraction of darts
and thorns.
  BEN.   See Guilandina Moringa.
  BENEOLENTIA. From bene, well,
and olere, to smell. Sweet-scented medi-
cines.
  BEN'JAMIN,  or  BENZOIN.  A
dry, resinous, brittle substance, obtained
from  the  styrax benzoin.  See  Styrax
Benzoin.
  Benjamin  Flowers.   See Benzoic
Acid.
  BENNETT.   Author of a Disser-
tation  on  the Teeth, pubhshed in Lon-
don, 1779.
  BENZOIC ACID.  Acidum  benzol-
cum.   An acid obtamed from a resin of
this  name by  sublimation.  It exists,
however,  in  nearly all the balsams.
  BENZOIN.  Benjamin.  See Styrax
Benzoin.
  BENZULE.   From  benzoin,  and
vXy, principle.  A compound of carbon,
hydrogen  and oxygen, supposed to be
the base of benzoic acid.
  BERDMORE, THOMAS.   Au-
thor of a  treatise  on the Disorders and
Deformities  of the  Teeth and Gums,
illustrated with cases  and experiments,
published, London, 1770.  This was the
first English work of merit ever pubhsh-
ed upon  the subject on which it treats.
   BERGAMOTE.  A species of citron
or small orange, of an agreeable  taste
and pleasant odor.  An oil is obtained
from its bark, which is much used as  a
perfume.
   BERIBERI.  Beriberia.  A disease
characterized by debility and tremor;  a
species of Indian palsy.
   BERRY.   See Bacca.
   BERS. An exhilirating electuary.
   BERYL.  Aqua  marine.  A valua-
ble mineral of a greenish yellow color.
   BETA.   The name of  a genus of
plants. The beet.
  Beta Rubra.  The red beet.
  Beta Vulgaris.  The common beet
root.
  BETEL.   Piper  betel.  An Indian
plant, which, when chewed, blackens
the teeth.  Its  properties  are said to
be tonic and astringent.
  BETON'ICA OFFICINALIS. Be-
tony, betonica purpurea; betonica vul-
garis.  The leaves of this plant are said
to possess aperient, and the root, emetic
properties.
  BETONY.  Betonica officinalis.
  BETULA.  The  name of a genus of
plants.
  Betula Alba.   White birch.
  Betula Alnus.  The alnus of the
pharmacopoeias.  The common alder.
  BEX,  From pqoou, to cough.  A
cough.
  BEZAHAN.  Fossil bezoar.
  BEZ'OAR. From pa-zahar, Persian;
a destroyer of poison.  Lapis bezoardi-
cus; an earthy  concretion found in the
stomach, intestines and bladder of ani-
mals.   These  bezoars were  formerly
supposed  to  possess  wonderful  alexi-
pharmic virtues.
  Bezoar Bovi'num.  The  bezoar of
the ox.
  Bezoar German'icum. Bezoar from
the Alpine goat.
  Bezoar Histricis.   Lapis porninus;
lapis malacensis; petro del porco.  Be-
zoar of the Indian porcupine.
  Bezoar Microcos'micum.  The cal-
culi found in the human bladder.
  Bezoar Orientale.  Oriental be-
zoar stone.
  Bezoar Simia.   Bezoar of the mon-
key.
  Bezoar'dicum Joviale.  A  green-
ish powder,  composed of tin, antimo-
ny, mercury and nitric  acid,  used as a
diaphoretic.
  Bezoardicum Lunare.  A prepara-
tion of silver  and antimony.
  Bezoardicum Martia'le.  A prepa-
ration of iron and antimony.
  Bezoardicum   Minera'le   Deu-
toxyd of antimony. 
BIC
87
BIL
   Bezoardicum  Saturni.  A prepa-
 ration of antimony and lead.
   Bezoardicum Sola're.  A prepara-
 tion of gold filings, nitric acid and butter
 of antimony,  possessing  diaphoretic
 properties.
   Bezoardicus Pulvis.   Pulverized
 oriental bezoar stone.
   BEURLIN.  Author of a dissertation
 on Difficult  Dentition,  published  at
 Altel, 1779.
   BEW, CHARLES.   Author  of a
 treatise on the  Causes and Effects  of
 Diseases in the  Teeth, Gums, &c.  pub-
 lished in London, 1819.
   BI.   From  bis,  twice;  frequently
 attached to words in  anatomy, chem-
 istry, and botany, as biceps, having two
 heads; bicuspides, two points; bilocular,
 two cells; bivalve, two valves, &c.
   BIBITO'RIUS.   Bibitorious,  from
 bibo to drink, for the reason that when
 the eye is drawn inwards towards the
 nose, it causes those who drink to  look
 into  the cup.   See  Rectus Internus
 Oculi.
   BIBLIOGRAPHY.   From j5ip%o?,
 a book,  and ypa^co, I describe.  Skilled
 in the knowledge of books, their authors,
 subjects, editions and history.  Among
 the most distinguished dental bibliogra-
 phers, are Duval, Laforgue, Delabarre,
 Maury,  Desirabode, Nasmyth, Owen,
 Miiller, Fitch, Hayden, Bell and God-
 dard.
   BICEPS.   From   bis, twice,  and
 caput, head. Two-headed.  A term ap-
 phed to muscles which have two heads.
   Biceps Externus.  See Triceps Ex-
 tensor Cubiti.
   Biceps Flexor  Cruris.  A muscle
 situated on the back part of the thigh.
   Biceps Flexor Cubiti. A muscle
 of the forearm on the forepart of the os
 humeri.
  BICUS'PID.  Bicuspidatus, from bis,
twice, and cuspis, a spear.  Having  two
points.
  Bicus'pid  Teeth.   Dentes bicuspi-
dati.   Bicuspides,  or  bicuspidati,  the
plural of  bicuspis, which is derived from
 bis,  twice, and  cuspis,  a point.  The
 two teeth on each side of each jaw, be-
 tween the  cuspidati and first molares.
 They are so called from their  having
 two distinct tubercles or  cusps on  their
 friction surfaces, one outer and  one in-
 ner.   Their crowns are shghtly  flatten-
 ed from  before  backwards,  and  their
 transverse  diameter  is  greater  than
 their anterio-posterior. The cusps upon
 their  friction  or grinding surfaces are
 separated from each other by a  furrow
 running  in the direction of the alveo-
 lar arch.  The  external cusp is more
 prominent  than  the internal.   In the
 lower jaw  the cusps  are smaller than
 in the  upper,  as  are also  the teeth
 themselves, and the groove which sepa-
 rates them is not so deep.  The inner
 tubercle of a first bicuspis in  the lower
 jaw is sometimes wanting.  The roots
 of the bicuspides are generally simple,
 but  have a vertical groove on their an-
 terior and posterior  surfaces which fre-
 quently unite in the upper jaw, forming
 two roots,  each having  an  opening
 for the vessels and nerves to enter.
   The bicuspid teeth belong to  second
 dentition, and replace the temporary or
 milk molares.   They  are  sometimes
 termed small molares.
   BI'DENS.  The name of a genus of
 plants.
   Bidens Tripartita. Hemp agrimo-
 ny.
   BIEN'NIS.   Biennial.  A  plant of
 two years' duration.
   BIFURCATION.  Bifurcatio, from
 bis, twice, and furca, a fork.  Division
 into two branches,  as  of a tooth  into
 two roots, th&  trachea, and aorta  into
 two branches.
   BIGNO'NIA.   The name of a genus
 of plants.
   Bignonia  Catalpa.   The  catalpa
 tree.
  BILAMELLATUS.   Having  two
 lamina
  BILE.   Bilis.    A  bitter,  yellow,
greenish  fluid, secreted by  the  liver.
The gall. 
BIS
88
BLA
  BILIARY.  Biliaris, from bilis, the
bile.  Pertaining or belonging to the bile.
  Biliary  Apparatus.   The  parts
concerned in the secretion and excretion
of bile.
  Biliary Concre'tions.   Earthy or
calculous  concretions found  in some
parts  of the biliary apparatus.
  BIL'IOUS.   Biliosus; from Mis, bile.
Pertaining to, containing, or produced
by, bile.  A term applied to certain con-
stitutions and  diseases, supposed  to be
produced by too great a secretion of bile.
  BI'LOCULARIS.  From bis, twice,
and locidus,  a little cell.  Having two
cells;  two-celled.
  BI'MANUS.  From bis, twice, and
manus, a hand.  A  term applied solely
to man, because he is the only animal
that has two perfect hands.
  BINERVIUS.   Having two nerves
or ribs very apparent.
  BINOCULUS.  From binus, double,
and oculus, the eye.  A bandage applied
to both eyes.
  BIN'SICA.  A disordered mind.
  BIOCHYMIA.   Chemistry, vital.
  BIOTE.  From j3io£, life.  Life.  Also
that which is necessary for its preserva-
tion.
  BIOTHAN'ATI.   From pm, vio-
lence, or |3toj, life, and  §avatos, death.
A violent or sudden  death,  as if  there
were  no space between life and death.
  BIRTHWORT. Aristolochia. Birth-
wort snakeroot, aristolochia serpentaria.
  BISCHE.   Biecho.  Dysentery of a
mahgnant character, which  often pre-
vails in the Island of Trinidad.
  BISCUIT.   From  bis,  twice and
cuit,baked. A name applied to porcelain
paste, which, after having been  mould-
ed or carved into teeth, has been subject-
ed to a red heat in a charcoal fire, for the
purpose of hardening them sufficiently
to receive the enamel.   This process is
termed biscuiting porcelain.
  BISMUTH.   Bismuthum;  wismu-
thum; regulus  of  bismuth;  marcasita.
Tin glass. A metal of a yellowish white
color, somewhat different from lead, pos-
sessing but little malleability, and fusi-
ble at 400° Fahrenheit. When combined
in the proper proportion with tin and lead,
the alloy is known by the name of D'
Arcet's metal, fusible at the temperature
of boiling water, and was at one time used
for filling teeth.  See D'Arcet's Metal.
  BISTOURY.  A small knife, used
in surgery.
  BIT NOBEN.  Salt of bitumen; a
white saline substance.
  BITTER.   Amarus;  See Amarus.
  BITTERN. The mother water which
remains after the crystalhzation of the
salt in sea or salt spring water.
  BITTER SALT.  Sulphate of mag-
nesia.
  BITTER SPAR.  A term  apphed
to certain crystallized varieties of dolo-
mite, or double carbonates of lime and
magnesia.
  BITU'MEN.  Asphaltum; of which
there are several varieties.  See Asphal-
tum, Naphtha and Petroleum.
  BIVALVIS.  Two-valved.
  BIVENTER   From bis, twice, and
venter, a belly.  A name applied to mus-
cles which have two bellies, as thedigas-
tricus and biventer cervicis of the lower
jaw.
  BIX A ORELLANA.  The name of
the plant affording the  terra orellana or
anotto, a substance used in Jamaica, in
dysentery.
  BLACCIiE.  Rubeola; measles.
  BLACKBERRY.   See Rubus Fru-
ticosus.
  BLACK DRAUGHT. An infusion
of senna with salts.
  BLACK DROP.  A fermented  aro-
matic vinegar of opium.
  BLACK LEAD.   Plumbago.
  BLACK WADD.   One of the  ores
of manganese.
  BLACK WASH.  A lotion of calo-
mel and time water.
  Black Vomit. One of the fatal symp-
toms of yellow fever; also, a name by
which a disease that sometimes prevails
during the months of August and Sep-
tember, in some of the  western and 
BLE
89
BLO
southern parts of the United States, is
designated.
   BLADDER.   See Urinary-bladder
and Gall-bladder.
   BLAKE,  ROBERT.  Author of a
Latin  dissertation on  the  Formation
and Structure of the Teeth in Man and
in Various Animals, pubhshed in Edin-
burgh, 1798.   "The  hints of Hunter,"
to use the language of Mr. T.  Bell,
"served as the outlines of the plan in
that field of investigation, in which Dr.
Blake so efficiently labored.  The errors
of Hunter—and it is, I trust, no sacrilege
to couple any mortal name with error—
were discovered and corrected, his in-
congruities harmonized, and his opin-
ions, after being submitted to the test of
experiment and  of  rigid observation,
either modestly rejected, or placed upon
a still broader, and more confirmed basis
than before." A few years subsequently
to its first publication, it was very consid-
erably enlarged, improved, translated into
Enghsh, and  repubhshed, constituting
one  of the best physiological works on
the teeth that had, up to that time, been
issued from the press. Later researches,
however, have discovered some of the
views of Dr.  Blake  to be erroneous—
and particularly those with regard to the
origin  of  the sacs  and pulps of the
teeth of replacement. But his work has,
and  will continue to hold a high place in
the literature of odontology.  It has re-
cently been republished, with Notes, by
Dr.  C. O. Cone, in the  Library part of
the  American Journal  of Dental Sci-
ence.
  BLANDIN, PH.  Fr.  A celebrated
French surgeon, and author  of an ably
written work, entitled, Anatomy of the
Dental System, Human and Compara-
tive.  A translation of this work, by Dr.
Robert Arthur, has recently  been pub-
lished in the Library  part of the Ameri-
can Journal of Dental Science.
  BLASTE'MA.  From pxaotavu, to
germinate.  A bud  or shoot; a germ;
the matrix or  general formative element
of tissues; also used by some of the an-
     8*
 cients to  signify  a bud-like cutaneous
 pimple.
   BLEN'NA.  Btavi/a. Elena. Mucus.
   Blenna Narium.  Mucus from the
 nose.
   BLENNOPHTHALMIA. Purulent
 ophthalmia.
   BLENNOPTYSIS.   From jStevva,
 and fttvu, I spit.  Expectoration of mu-
 cus.  Catarrh.
   BLENNORRHAGIA. Gonorrhoea.
   BLENNORRHCE'A.  From puvva,
 mucus, and  p?w, I flow.  Discharge of
 mucus from  the  urethra.  Gonorrhoea.
  BLEPHAROPHTHAL'MIA. From
 pxsfyapov,  the eyehd,  and o$$aXftia, a
 disease of the eye. Inflammation of the
 eyelid.
   BLEPHAROPTO'SIS.  From pw*-
 apov, the eyelid, and ntuais, fall.  Pro-
 lapse, or  falling of the upper eyelid.
    BLEPHAROSPAS'MUS.   From
 Pta^apov, the eyelid, and urtaffjuoj, spasm.
 A spasmodic action of the eyehd.
   BLEPHAROTIS. Inflammation of
 the eyehds.
   BLISTER  Vesicatorium;  emplas-
 trum vesicatorium; emplastrum  lyttoz;
 epispasticum.   Any substance which,
 when put on  the skin, raises  the cuticle
 in the form of a vesicle, and occasions a
 serous secretion.   The cantharides, or
 bhstering  fly is  most frequently em-
 ployed for this  purpose, but there are
 other substances  which  will produce
 this effect on the cuticle.
   BLISTERING FLY.  See Cantha-
 ris.
   BLOCK TEETH.  Two or more
 artificial teeth carved  from a piece of
 ivory, or from a mass of porcelain paste
 and afterwards baked and  enameled.
 The former substance,  at present, is sel-
 dom used  for this  purpose.  The latter
 has, within  the last few years, been
 brought to a very  high state  of perfec-
 tion.  But a dental substitute of this de-
 scription, unless of the most perfect con-
 struction,  is  not worn with as much
 comfort  as single teeth when properly
mounted on a gold base, and,  moreover, 
               BLO

it is more liable, from a fall or other ac-
cident, to break, and when broken, can-
not be as easily repaired.   Many den-
tists,  however, notwithstanding,  use
them,  and when well adapted to the
inequalities of  the parts against which
they are  placed, they often subserve a
very good purpose.  But it is more diffi-
cult  to fit  a piece of this description
than single teeth to a metallic base. See
Mineral Teeth.
  BLOOD.  Sanguis   A  red homo-
genous fluid, formed chiefly from chyle,
of a  saltish taste, and glutinous  con-
sistence,  circulating in  the cavities of
the heart, arteries and veins.   The av-
erage quantity of  this fluid in an adult
is  estimated  at twenty-eight  pounds,
and the veins are supposed to  contain
nearly four times the quantity that the
arteries do.  The blood in the arteries is
of a florid red; in the veins it is of a
dark brownish red, except in the pulmo-
nary vessels.  Here the color is reversed,
the arteries containing the dark and the
veins the red blood.
  Blood  is  composed  of water,  albu-
men, fibrin, an animal coloring, a little
fatty matter, and several salts.
  BLOOD-LETTING.  Every artifi-
cial discharge of blood procured for the
prevention or cure of disease.   An op-
eration which consists in opening a ves-
sel for the extraction of blood.   It is di-
vided into general and topical.  Venae-
section and arteriotomy are examples of
the first, and the apphcation of leeches,
or cupping glasses, after scarification, of
the latter.
  BLOOD-ROOT.  Sanguinaria cana-
densis.
  BLOOD-VESSEL.   A vessel con-
taining and conveying blood.
  BLOW-PIPE.  A cylindrical tube of
from twelve to eighteen inches in length,
half or five-eighths of an inch in diame-
ter at one end,  gradually tapering to a
fine  point or nozzle, which  may be
straight or bent at nearly right angles,
according to  the purposes for which  it
is to be used.   With an instrument of
3                BLO

 this sort, "a jet of air may be injected
 into the flame of a lamp or candle, so as
 to divert it in  a long and  slender cone
 upon a piece of charcoal or other sub-
 stance  placed  to  receive  it."   The
 greatest heat of a flame when thus urged
 is at the  extremity of the outer or white
 flame, for the reason that the greatest
 amount of combustion is at this point.
 To the mechanical dentist, as well as to
 the jeweller and chemist, the blow-pipe
 is of great importance. It is used for sol-
 dering and uniting the different metallic
 portions of a piece of dental mechanism.
   Blow-pipe,   Elliot's   Compounb
 Self-acting.  A combination  of the
 common with the self-acting blow-pipe.
   Blow-pipe, Hook's Self-acting.—
 A brass globe composed of two hemis-
 pheres firmly fastened together, having
 an orifice at the top for the purpose  of
 introducing alcohol, and a tube leading
 from the upper  to the flame of  a spirit
 lamp placed underneath the brass globe.
 When this is partly filled with alcohol,
 and a lamp placed underneath it, the
 alcohol is soon converted into vapor,
 which finding no vent excepting through
 a small tube leading to the upper hemis-
 phere of the globe, is forced  from the
 orifice of the tube directly against the
 flame of the lamp which ignites it and
 forms a  jet of flame of great  intensity.
   Blow-pipe,  Parmly's  Self-act-
 ing.   An apparatus invented by Dr.
 Jahial Parmly of New York, consisting
 of a copper globe, about five inches and
 a half in diameter,  and two  alcoholic
 reservoirs, arranged in a small portable
 japanned tin  case.  One of the reser-
 voirs is placed beneath the globe on the
 floor of the case, which it completely
 covers.  This is about an inch and a
 half deep, and in the centre of which,
 immediately beneath the globe, a burner
 is placed.  The other reservoir is of the
 same  size,  and  placed  immediately
 above the globe.   In the top  of one
 side of this, one extremity of a curved
 tube  or  siphon, provided with  a stop-
 cock, enters, while the other  extremity
9 
BOL
91
BON
passes  down through a  protuberance
on the top  of the globe, to near  the
bottom of the globe. Through this tube
alcohol is introduced from the upper re-
servoir into the globe, and when a suffi-
cient supply has been let in, the stop-
cock is closed, and the communication
between  the two cut off.  In the top of
the other side of the upper reservoir, a
burner is fixed.   A  little  above  this, a
tube, communicating with the protuber-
ance in the top of the globe, terminates.
When both burners  are lighted,  the
vapor, generated in the globe from  the
alcohol by  the  heat  from the lower
burner, rushes through the tube last de-
scribed,  into the  flame from the upper
burner, ignites, and throws off a jet of
flame  laterally five or  six  inches in
length.  Each burner is provided with
an extinguisher, which can be so man-
aged as to increase or diminish  the vol-
ume of flame projected off laterally by
the blow-pipe or vapor tube.
   Accompanying the blow-pipe, is a
small  sheet-iron furnace, for heating a
piece of  work before soldering, and  also
for melting metals for casting models.
   Blow-pipe  and  Furnace,  Somer-
by's.  An apparatus invented by Dr. R.
Somerby of Louisville, Ky., consisting
of a furnace and blow-pipe, arranged in
an iron frame, supplied with air from a
bellows.
   BLUE   STONE.   Cupri sulphas;
sulphate of copper.
   BLUMENTHAL, C. A.  Author of
a Short  Treatise on the Natural History
of the Teeth, pubhshed at Stendal, 1810.
   BODY.  When apphed to man, the
collection of organs which compose his
frame. It is, sometimes, used as synony-
mous  with trunk, as the body of the
humerous; but any thing capable of act-
ing on our senses, may be denominated
a body.
   BOETHE'MA.  A medicine;  aid;
succor.
   BOLE.  Bwjloj, a mass.  An argilla-
ceous earth, used as an absorbent  and
alexipharmic.   See Bole, Armenian.
  Bole, Armenian.   Bolus  Armeniaz.
A  pale, bright red-colored earth, sup-
posed to possess astringent and styptic
properties.  It constitutes a principal in-
gredient in  many of the tooth-powders
vended in the shops.
  BOLETUS IGNIARIUS.  The sys-
tematic  name of  the  agaricus of  the
pharmacopoeias.   Agaric of  the oak;
touchwood boletus; female agaric.  It
was formerly  much used as a styptic
by surgeons.
  Boletus Purgans.   The boletus la-
ricis.
  BOLUS.   B<«kos, a bole.  A bolus.
Any medicine having the shape of a pill,
but larger, and not too large to be swal-
lowed.
  Bolus Armena.  Bole, armenian.
  Bolus Armena Albus.  The white
armenian bole.
  Bolus Gallicus.  French bole. Bo-
lar earth, of a pale red color, with irreg-
ular variegated veins  of white and yel-
low,  possessing absorbent and antacid
qualities.
   BOM'BUS.  Bongos.  A  ringing or
buzzing in the ears, sometimes accom-
panied by a sensation  like what might
be supposed to be produced by blows
repeated at certain intervals.  See Tin-
nitus Aurium.
   BONE.    Os, osteon, 9atcov.  Bones
are hard insensible organized parts of the
body, of a whitish color, and a spongy
compact structure.  They constitute the
sohd frame work of the bodies of animals
of the superior classes.  They serve as a
support and protection to other organs,
and give attachment to muscles.   With
the exception of the crowns of the teeth,
they are covered with  a fibrous and vas-
cular membrane, called the periosteum,
and from which they  are liberally sup-
plied with vessels  for their  nutrition.
The bones of an animal united, constitute
the skeleton;  artificial, when united by
artificial means, such as wires, &c. and
natural, when connected by their own
ligaments.
  The texture of bones varies.  The mid- 
BON
92
BON
die portion of long bones is compact, with
a cavity in their center: their extremities
are spongy "and  the central cavity is oc-
cupied by a long net-work, formed of thin
plates and fibres, called the reticulated
tissue of the  bones."*    The  greater
number of bones have several processes
and  cavities, which are  distinguished
from their  figure, situation, use, &c.
Thus,  processes extend  from the end
of a  bone, if smooth and round, are call-
ed heads,  and  condyles, when flattened
either above  or laterally.  That  part
which is  beneath the head, and which
exceeds the rest of the bone in smallness
and  levity, is called the neck.  Rough,
unequal processes are called tuberosities,
or tubercles, but the  longer and more
acute, spinous or styloid processes, from
their resemblance  to a thorn.   Their
broad processes,  with sharp extremities,
are known by the name of cristoz or sharp
edges.  Other processes are distinguish-
ed by their form, and called alar, ox ptery-
goid, maxillary, or mastoid, dentiform, or
odontoid,  &c.  Others, from their situa-
tion, are  called  superior, inferior, exte-
rior  and  interior.   Some have  their
names from  their direction;  as oblique,
straight, transverse, &c, and some from
their use, as trocliantors,  rotators, &c.
Furrows,  depressions  and  cavities, are
destined either for the reception of con-
tiguous bones  to form an articulation
with them, when they are called articu-
lar cavities, which are sometimes deeper,
sometimes shallower; or  they  receive
hard parts, but do not constitute a joint
with them," &c.f
  According to  Berzelius, every  one
hundred parts of bone in man, contain,
   Cartilage, (gelatine,) completely
      soluble in water........... 32.171
   Vessels.....................  1.13 \
   Neutral pbosphate of lime... 51.04
   Carbonaie of lime........... 11.30
   Fluateoflime...............  2.00
   Phosphate of Magnesia......  1.16
   Soda, with a small proportion
     of chloride of sodium......  1.20

                             100.00
         * Wistar's Anatomy.
         | Hooper's Med. Diet.
  According to some anatomists, there
are two hundred and forty bones in the
human adult, namely,
Bones of the cranium
  or skull...........
           No.
Frontal......  1
Parietal......  2
             1
             2
             1
             1
             2
             2
                    Occipital....
                    Temporal. ..
                    Ethmoid.....
                   [Sphenoid....
                   :Sup'r maxil..
                    Jugal........
                    Nasal........  2
Bones of the face....  Lachrymal....  2
                   "j Palatine.....  2
                    Infe'r spongy  2
                   | Vomer.......  l
                   L Infe'r maxil..  ]
                   i Incisores.....  ,S
Dentes or teeth.......5 Cuspidati....  4
                   ( Molares.....20
Bone of the tongue...  Hyoides os..  1
Bones  of  the  ear,  [Malleus.....  2
  within the tempor- i Incus.......  *
al bones..........    StaJ?es:
                 {Orbiculare os

                     C Cervical
  Vertebrae...........< Dorsal
                     ( Lumbar
Sacrum.
j5  [ Coccygis os.
Theth orax.......
                       5 Sternum
                       \ Ribs........24
;§  [ The pelvis..........Innominata ossa 2
The shoulder.
The fore-arm.
' Carpus or wrist

                    (Clavicle.....  2
                    I Scapula.....  2
 The arm............  Humeri os...  2
                    tUlna........  2
                    $ Radius...... 2
                     Naviculare os 2
                     Lunare os...  2
                     Cuneiforme os 2
                     Orbiculare os 2
                     Trapezium os 2
                     Trapezoidesos2
                    I Magnum os.. 2
                    {Unciforme os 2
    Metacarpus....................10
    Phalanges.....................28
' The thigh.............Femur....... 2
                    C Patella......  2
 The leg.............1 Tibia.......  2
                    {Fibula....... 2
                    rCalcaneus.... 2
                    I Astragalus... 2
                    .j Cuboides os.. 2
                    I Naviculare os 2
                    [ Cuneiformiaos 6

Tarsus or instep
c   £   Metatarsus...................10
cq  lH [Phalanges........'.'............28
Sesamoid bones of the thumb and great)  fi
  toe, occasionally found.............I

                             Total, 248
  Bone, Tooth. See Tooth-bone.
  Bone Nippers.  Forceps with cutting
edges that  come together  and strong 
BOT
93
BOW
handles, used by surgeons for cutting off
splinters of bone.
  BONESET.   Eupatorium perfolia-
tum;  thoroughwort.
  BOND, THOMAS E. Author of a
dissertation on the Morbid Sympathies of
the Mouth, pubhshed in 4th vol. Amer-
ican Journal Dental Science.—Professor
Bond is also the Author of an  English
Translation of two French works.  The
first is entitled, a Treatise on First Den-
tition, and the Frequently Serious Dis-
orders  which depend upon  it,  by M.
Baumes.—The   other  is   entitled,  a
New Treatise on the  Theory and Prac-
tice of Dental Surgery, by L. Lefoulon.
Both of these translations are pubhshed
in the Library  part  of the  American
Journal of Dental Seience.
  BONY.   Osseous.  Pertaining to, of,
or resembhng bone.
  BORA'CIC ACID.  Acidum bora-
cicum.  Acid of borax.
  BORACITE.  Borate of magnesia.
  BO'RAX.  Boras sodae; sodae bibo-
ras.   A saline compound of boracic
acid and soda found in  a native state in
Thibet and South  America.   When
purified,  borax  is  white,  transparent,
presenting in its fracture a greasy appear-
ance, and affecting the form of six-sid-
ed prisms, terminating in three-sided, or
six-sided pyramids.   It is used as  a
flux in metallurgy.    In  soldering or
uniting pieces of gold or silver, it is the
principal one employed.  It is  seldom
used as a medicine, except as a lotion in
aphthae.
  BORBORYG'MUS. From /3oP/3oP-
u£u, I make a  dull  noise.   Rumbling
noise in the  intestines caused by flatus.
  BORDER, ALVEOLAR. Alveolar
arch.
  BOTAL  FORAMEN.   The fora-
men ovale of the heart.
  BOTANIST.  Botanicus. One who
understands the nature and  history of
plants; one  skilled in every  thing per-
taining to plants.
  BOT'A NY.   Botanica.  Botavixtj,
from fiotavri, an herb or grass, which is
derived from )3ow, or jSocxw, to feed, be-
cause grass is the chief food of animals
most useful  to man.  The  science of
plants; a knowledge of every thing re-
lating to the natural history of the vege-
table kingdom, embracing the terminol-
ogy, classification, synonymes, sensible
quahties, anatomy,  physiology, &c. of
plants.
  BOTOT.  Author  of a small work
on the Preservation of the Teeth, pub-
hshed at Paris, 1802.
  BOTH'RION. From po^piov, a little
pit.  A  small cavity;  the  socket of
a tooth; an ulceration of the  cornia.
  BOUGIE.  A wax candle; candela
cerea; candela medicata; catheter es of
Swediaur;  cereolus  chirurgorum.   A
slender, flexible instrument, to be intro-
duced into the bladder through the ure-
thra.
  BOU'LIMUS.   From j3ov, greatly,
and Xipos, hunger.  A canine  or vora-
cious appetite; insatiable hunger.
  BOURDET,M. A celebrated French
dentist, and  author of  several valua-
ble  works   upon  the  teeth;  among
which are,  Researches and Observa-
tions on every Branch of the  Art of the
Dentist,  pubhshed  in   two  volumes
in Paris,  1757.—Easy  Means  for the
care of the Mouth and  Preservation of
the Teeth, published in 1759.—Disser-
tation  on the  Depositions of the Max-
illary  Sinus,  pubhshed in  1764.—
Easy Method to keep the Mouth Clean
and  the  Teeth Healthy, published at
Leipsic, 1766.  As a writer and dentist
of the eighteenth century, Bourdet rank-
ed deservedly high.  He was a man of
an enlightened mind and extensive ob-
servation.
  BOW-DRILL.   A drill turned by a
stock with a bow and string or cord.
  Bow-Drill,  Elliot's  Improved.
An improvement made by Dr. W. H.
Elliot, of Montreal, which consists in
using two  cords instead of one. This
prevents them from slipping upon the
pully, and at the same  time, prevents
any friction of the cord. The drill stock 
BRA
94
BRA
is also furnished with a universal joint,
which enables  the  operator to drill the
fangs of the back teeth.
  BOX  PLATE.   A  metallic  plate
with  an  air-tight chamber, used as an
obturator, or in connection with artifi-
cial teeth, for the replacement of the loss
of natural structure.  See Raised Plate
  BRACHLE'US. Brachial. Belong-
ing to the arm.
  BRA'CHIAL.    Brachialis.    That
which belongs to the arm.
  Brachial Aponeurosis. An aponeu-
rosis enveloping the muscles of the arm.
  Brachial Artery.  Arteria brachia-
lis.   A continuation of the axillary ar-
tery,  running  down on  the  inside of
the arm to the bend of the elbow, where
it divides into the radial and cubital ar-
teries.
  Brachial Muscle,  Anterior.  A
muscle situated on the anterior and in-
ferior part of the arm.
  Brachial Plexus. Plexus brachiales.
A nervous plexus,  seated deeply in the
hollow of the axilla, extending to the in-
ferior and lateral part of the neck.
  Brachial Veins. Two veins, which
frequently anastomose with each other,
and accompany the artery.
  BRACHIALE.  A bracelet, but ana-
tomists have apphed the term to the car-
pus, the part on which a bracelet is worn.
  BRACHIALIS  EXTERNUS.  See
Triceps Extensor Cubiti.
  Brachialis  Internus.   A muscle of
the forearm.
  BRACHIO-RADIAL.  Brachio ra-
dialis. Belonging to the brachium and
radius.
  BRACHIUM.   Bpa^tcot/,  the  arm.
The arm from  the shoulder to the wrist.
  BRACHIUM MOVENS  QJJAR-
TUS.  See Latissimus Dorsi.
  BRACHYCHRO'NIUS. From /3Po^
xv^, short, and xp°v°S, time.  A disease
of short duration.
  BRACHYPNffi'A   From ppazvs,
short, and itvcu, to  breathe.  Difficulty
of breathing.
  BRADYMASE'SIS. Bradymassesis;
from j3paSt)j, difficult, and /xaa^an, mas-
tication.   Difficult mastication.  Dyn-
masesis.
  BRADYPEPSIA.   From |3patyf,
slow, initio, to concoct.   Weak diges-
tion.
  BRADYSU'RIA.    From fyatyj,
difficult,  and ovpsir, to pass the urine.
Painful evacuation of urine; dysuria.
  BRACHMAEND. Author of a small
Treatise  on Gum Boils, pubhshed at
Leipsic, 1735.
  BRAIN.   Cerebrum.
  Brain, Little.   Cerebellum.
  BRANCH.  From jSpa^nov, an arm,
because branches of a tree, &c. go  off
hke an arm.  Generally applied  to the
principal division of an artery or nerve.
It is usually employed as synonymous
with ramus.
  BRANCHY.  From j3pe*o, to mois-
ten.   Swelling  of the  tonsils and thy-
roid gland.
  BRANCHUS.  From j3pe*w, to mois-
ten.   A defluxion of humors from the
mucous membrane of the  fauces, tra-
chea,  &c.
  BRANDY.   Spiritus  gallicus.  A
powerful and diffusible stimulant, ob-
tained by distilling wine.
  BRANKS.  Cynanche  parotide;
mumps.
  BRASMA.  Brasmos. From /3paw>
to boil.  Fermentation.
  BRASS.   A yellow metal, formed
by mixing copper and zinc.
  BRAS'SICA.  Cabbage, or colewort.
Also,  the name of a genus of plants.
  Brassica Alba.  White cabbage.
  Brassica Apiana.  Jagged or crim-
pled colewort.
  Brassica Congylodes.  Turnip cab-
bage.
  Brassica Cuma'na.  Red colewort.
  Brassica Eru'ca.  Garden rocket.
  Brassica Florida.  The cauliflower.
  Brassica Lacuturria.  The Savoy
plant.
  Brassica  Napus.  Wild navew, or
rape.
  Brassica Rapa.   The turnip. 
               BRO

  Brassica Rubra.  Red cabbage.  It
is used as a test for acids  and alkalies.
For this purpose it is superior to litmus ;
alkahes turn it  green, and acids turn it
red.  There  are several other varieties
of this plant.
  BRA'THU.  Juniperus sabina.
  BREAST.  Thorax; mamma.
  BREATH.   The air  expelled from
the lungs at each expiration.
  BREGMA.   From %*«, to mois-
ten, because the top was supposed to be
moist in infants. A name formerly ap-
phed to the parietal bones.
  BRENDEL.  Author of a disserta-
tion on Odontalgia, published, 1697.
  BRE'VIA  VASA.  Short  vessels.
Apphed  to  several  branches  of  the
splenic arteries and veins.
  BREWSTER, C. S.    Author of a
paper  on  the   Treatment of  Irregu-
larity of the  Teeth, pubhshed  in  the
French Lancet, Paris,  1840, and  sub-
sequently  translated into English, and
republished in the  first vol.  American
Journal of Dental Science.
   BREWSTER, G. G.  Author of a
paper on the Galvanic Action supposed
to result from the presence of Artificial
Teeth  in  the mouth secured to a Gold
Base with  Solder, pubhshed in the 2d
vol. American  Journal of Dental Sci-
ence.
   BRIER, WILD.  Rosa canina.
   BRICUMUM.  Artemisia.
   BRIMSTONE.   Sulphur.
   BRING.  Author of  a  small  trea-
tise on the Modern Doctrine of the Teeth,
especially those of  man.  Pubhshed in
London, 1793.
   BROACH, WATCHMAKER'S.—
A quinquangular steel stem, three or four
inches long, with a flattened point, very
gradually increasing in size towards the
extremity intended for the handle. This
instrument is sometimes  used  by den-
tists for enlarging the canal in the root,
and the opening into a decayed cavity
in the crown, of a tooth.
   BROCKETT, L. P.  Author of a
paper on Nervous Debility, induced by
5               BRO

 Decayed Teeth, published in American
 Journal of Dental Science, vol. fifth.
   BROCKWAY, JOSEPHUS.  Au-
 thor of a paper on the Galvanic Action
 of Metals in  the  Mouth,  pubhshed in
 American Journal of Dental Science,
 vol. first.
   BROMATOG'RAPHY.    Broma-
 tographia.  From  j3pufia,    food,  and
 ypafyrj, a description.   A description of
 aliments.
   BROMATOL'OGY. Bromatologia,
 siliology.    From /3pc>jua,  food,  and
 xoyo$, a discourse.  A treatise on food.
   BROMINE. From ^pu^oj, a strong
 odor.  An undecomposed substance, of
 a very volatile nature, offensive  smell,
 and suffocating odor, resembling chlo-
 rine and iodine.  With oxygen it forms
 the bromic acid, and with hydrogen, the
 hydrobromic acid.
   BRONCHIA.   Bronchice; bronchi;
 from  /3poy#o$, the  throat.   The  two
 tubes, which arise from the bifurcations
 of the trachea, with their ramifications.
   BRON'CHIAL.   Bronchialis.  Be-
 longing to the bronchia.
   Bronchial Arteries.   The arteries
 given off by the thoracic aorta which go
 to the lungs and accompany the bron-
 chia in their ramifications.
   Bronchial Cells.  The air-cells at
 the termination of the bronchia.
   Bronchial  Glands.    Numerous
 blackish glands, seated in  the course of
 the bronchia, and trachea.
   Bronchial Nerves.  The nerves of
 the bronchia, furnished by the two pul-
 monary plexuses.
   Bronchial  Veins.    The   veins
 which arise from the left division of the
 bronchial arteries.
   BRONCHITIS.  Inflammation of
 the lining membrane  of the bronchial
 tubes.
   BRONCHOCE'LE. From /3Poy*os,
 the windpipe, and xyXq, a tumor.  The
 Derbyshire neck; wen; goitre. A tumor
 on the forepart of the neck, resulting
 from  an enlargement  of  the  thyroid
 gland.
ft 
BRO
96
BUB
   BRONCHOPNEUMO'NIA.  From
 gpoyxos, bronchus, and pneumonia.  In-
 flammation of the bronchia and lungs.
   BRONCHORRHCEA.  From /3py-
 Xo<, bronchus, and pew, I flow.   Increas-
 ed secretion of mucus from the air-pas-
 sages.
   BRONCHOT'OMY. Bronchotomia;
 from fipoyxof, the windpipe, and tsfiva,
 to  cut.   Tracheotomy;  an operation
 which  consists in making an opening
 into the larynx or trachea for the remov-
 al of foreign bodies, or the admission of
 air to the lungs.
   BRONCHUS.   The  trachea,   or
 windpipe.
   BROOKLIME.   Veronica   becca-
 bunga.
   BROUWER.   Author  of  a  Latin
 dissertation on Tooth-ache, published at
 Leyden, 1692.
   BROWN, SOLYMAN. Author of
 Dentologia, a poem on the diseases of
 the  teeth,  and their proper remedies;
 with notes, practical,  historical,  illus-
 trative  and explanatory,  by   Eleazar
 Parmly.  The science and art of dental
 surgery, are exhibited  in  this  work in
 their most fascinating aspects.   Take it
 altogether, it is  one of the most unique
 and beautiful productions upon the teeth
 that has ever  issued from the press.
 The author evinces not only a scientific
 knowledge of the subject upon which
 he treats, but also  a highly cultivated
 mind and rich poetic imagination. The
 above work has been much admired.
   Dental  Hygiene,   is  the  title  of
 another work, from the pen of the same
 able writer, and besides  these, Dr.  S.
 Brown,  is the author  of a series  of
 papers, on Mechanical Dentistry, pub-
 lished in the American Journal of Den-
 tal Science, as well as of several popu-
 lar dissertations upon dental surgery and
 the dental profession.
   BROWN, B. B.,  Author of a well
 written article  on Artificial   Obtura-
 tors  and Palates,  pubhshed in the 6th
 vol. of the American Journal of Dental
Science.—Also, one of the editors of the
 Dental Register of the West, pubhshed
 quarterly, at Cincinnati, Ohio.
   BROWN, C.   Author of a paper on
 the Vascularity of the Teeth, pubhshed
 in the 2d vol. of the American Journal
 of Dental Science.
   BROWN SPAR.  Pearl spar. Side-
 roculcite. A white, red, brown or black
 spar, harder than the calcareous.
   BRUCIA.   Brucinc.  A  vegetable
 alkali, extracted from the bark of the
 false angustura, or brucia antidysentcrica.
   BRUCINE.  Brucia.
   BRUNNER,  J. B.   Author of  a
 work entitled, Introduction to the Ne-
 cessary Science  of a Dentist, published
 at Vienna and Leipsic, 1766.—Also of a
 treatise on First  Dentition, pubhshed at
 same place, 1771.
  BRUNNER'S GLANDS. Brunneri
glanduloz. The muciparious follicles sit-
uated between the villous and  cellular
coats of the  intestinal canal.
  BRUSH.  An instrument for cleans-
ing the teeth; for finishing metallic ap-
pliances for  the mouth, and for the ap-
plication of a solution of borax to piec^
of metal that are to be united by soldering.
See Tooth Brush, Polishing Brush, and
Pencillus.  Brushes  are also used for
other purposes, as rubbing the  surface
of the body, painting, &c.
  BRUT A.  Juniperus sabina. Savin.
  BRUTIA.  A resinous pitch, obtain-
ed from Brutia in Italy, and used to make
the oleum piciuum.
  BRUT1NO.   Terebinthina; turpen-
tine.
  BRUXANELI.  A tall malabar tree.
  BRYGMUS.   Bdvy/ioj, stridor deit-
tium.   Grinding of the teeth.
  BRYO'NIA.  From /3pvw, to abound,
from its abundance.  Bryony.
  Bryonia Alba.   White bryony.
  Bryonia Mechoacanna, Nigricans.
Convolvulus jalapa; jalap root.
  BUBASTECOR'DIUM.  Artemisia
vulgaris; mugwort.
  BUBO.   From /3ou6W,  the  groin.
A tumor of the glands of the groin, and
also of the axilla, resulting from local 
BUC
97
BUC
absorption of irritating matter, such as
venereal poison, or it may be symptoma-
tic of constitutional disease.
  BUBON GAL'BANUM. The name
of the  plant  from which  the  officinal
galbanum,  at  first a  gummy-resinous
juice, but which soon becomes concrete,
is obtained.
  Bubon Macedon'icum.   The  name
of the  plant  which  affords the  semen
petroselini Maccdonici of the shops. Ma-
cedonian parsley.
  BUBONOCE'LE. From @ov8w, the
groin, and xrjX^, a tumor. Inguinal her-
nia, or rupture of the groin.
  BUCHANAN,  ANDREW.   Au-
thor of a Report of a Case of Suppura-
tion in the Maxillary Sinus, pubhshed
in the London Forceps.
  BUCCA. Gnathos. The mouth. The
hollow of the cheeks.
  BUCCAL.   Buccalis,  from bucca;
the mouth, or rather cheek.   Belong-
ing  to the mouth, and especially the
cheeks.
  Buccal Artery.  The sub-maxillary
artery.
  Buccal  Membrane.  The  mucous
membrane which fines the cavity of the
the mouth.
  BUCCEA. Fromiwccrt, the cheek.
A polypus of the  nose, because  it was
supposed to come from the mouth; a
morsel, a mouthful.
  BUCCINATOR.  From /3owaiw, a
trumpet; so named from  its agency in
forcing the wind into the trumpet. The
buccinator,   or  trumpeter's   muscle,
which is broad and flat, forming a large
portion of the walls of the cheek.
  BUCCO-LABIAL NERVE.   The
buccal nerve.
  BUCCO-FACIAL OBTURATOR.
An instrument for closing  an opening,
caused by a wound or disease, through
the cheek into the cavity of the mouth.
The inconvenience resulting from a very
considerable opening  from the mouth
through the wall of the cheek, is a very
serious one, and the closure, on replace-
ment of it with an  artificial substitute
     9
that can be worn with convenience, be-
comes  an object of great  importance.
When  it can be done with natural in-
tegument, by means of a plastic opera-
tion, it is certainly better than any mere
mechanical appliance, but inasmuch as
it cannot always be closed by means of
a surgical operation, an artificial obtu-
rator sometimes becomes indispensable,
and in France, it has been successfully
applied.
  In treating upon bucco-facial obtura-
tors, M.  Delabarre says, "In order to
construct a proper and capable instru-
ment for filling this indication, it is only
necessary to  take an impression of  the
wound with  soft wax.  From the model
procured from  this,  a gold or platina
cap is formed, composed of two parrs.
entering the  one within the other, cov-
ered with a  shield or plate. That for
the mouth should be slightly concave,
whilst  that  for the face  should  be
shghtly convex.  If  the loss of sub-
stance embraces the duct from the gland,
it will  be necessary, for the escape of
the saliva in the mouth, to form a new
channel, by  making  it  pass through a
pipe formed  in the machine, and open-
ing through  the buccal plate.  Finally,
the surface  of the  facial plate  may be
rendered unequal by cutting it with a
knife, and afterwards covering  it with
enamel,"  of a pale  rose color, slightly
tinged with yellow, so as to make it re-
semble the natural skin.
  BUCCO-PHARYNGEAL. Belong-
ing to the mouth and pharynx.
  BUC'CULA. From bucca,the mouth.
A small mouth; the  fleshy part under
the chin.
  BUCCELLA'TIO.  A   method of
arresting hemorrhage, by  the applica-
tion of small pieces of lint  to the bleed-
ing vessels.
  BUCHNER.  Author of a Disserta-
tion on the Care of the Teeth, and  the
Preservation  of their  Health, published
at Halle, 1752.
  BUCKING.  Author of a work  en-
titled, Complete Treatise on the Extrac- 
BUR
98
BYR
tion of Teeth, pubhshed at Hendal, 1782
and in 1805.
  BUGANTIA.   Chilblain.
  BULB.   Parts  of the  body which
have a bulbous shape, as the bulb  of a
tooth;  the bulb of the urethra; the bulb
or root of the hair, the bulb or globe of
the eye, ^cc.
  BULBIF'ERUS.  From bulhus, and
fcro,  to  bear.  Bulb-bearing.  Having
one or more bulbs.
   BULBO-CAVERNOSUS.  So  call-
ed from its origin and insertion.   The
accelerator urinae.
   BULGA.   The vulva.
   BULITHOS.  From/3ouj, anox,and
Xi§o$, a stone.  A bezoar, or stone found
in the kidneys, gall bladder, or urinary
bladder of an ox or cow.
   BUL'LA.   A  clear vesicle arising
 from burns, scalds or other causes.
   BUNON.  An ingenius French den-
 tist, and author of a dissertation on the
 Prejudices, concerning the Diseases of
 the Teeth of Pregnant Women, publish-
 ed at Paris, 1759.—Also, of an essay on
 the Diseases of the  Teeth, pubhshed at
 same place as early  as  1743, as well as
 of one or two other papers upon the
 teeth.
   BUN'YON.  Bunion;  from #>woj,
 an eminence.  Inflammation and swell-
 ing of the bursa mucosa at the inside of
 the ball of the great toe.
   BUPHTHAL'MUS.   From 0ovs, an
 ox, and oij^afytoj, an eye.  Hydropthal-
 mia.   Dropsy of the eye.
   BURDELL,  JOHN.   Author of a
 Popular Treatise on the Teeth, their
 Structure,  Diseases and  Treatment,
 New York, 1817.
    BURDELL,  HARVY.  Author of
 a paper on First Dentition, and another
  on Dental  Hygiene, published in  the
  New  York Dental Recorder,  volume
  first.
    Burdell, Harvey and John.   Ob-
  servations on the Structure, Physiology,
  Anatomy and Diseases of the Teeth,
  by, in two parts, New York, 1838.
    BURDOCK.  Arctium lappa.
  BURGUNDY PITCH.  Pinusabiet.
The prepared resin of the pinus abies.
  BURIS.  A scirrhous hernia, or hard
abscess.
  BURLIN.  Author of a Latin Dis-
sertation on  Difficult  Dentition, &c,
published at Altdorf, 1720.
  BURN.  Ambuslio.  An  injury  or
lesion produced by  the action or appli-
cation of too great heat.
  BURNEA.  Pinus sylvestris; pitch.
  BURN'ISHER.   One who pohshes.
Also, an instrument used in  polishing
different kinds  of metals,  and in the
laboratory of the dentist, for finishing
pieces of dental mechanism.  The bur-
nishers  used by dentists, are generally
made of steel, and have differently shap-
ed, rounded, and highly polished points,
so that  they may be readily  applied to
any part  of the piece.   Burnishers are
also sometimes made of firm, fine-grain-
ed wood, bone, agate, or other stone.
   BURIl, HUDSON S.  Author of an
 Essay on the Use of Arsenic in Teeth,
 published in American Journal of Dental
 Science, volume fifth.
   BURSA TESTIUM.   The scrotum.
   BURS^E MUCOSiE.  Small mem-
 branous bags or sacs, situated about ar-
 ticular  cavities, filled with an oily mu-
 cus for lubricating the tendons, muscles
 and bones.
   BURSiE SYNOVIALES.  Bursa:
 mucosae.
   BURSAL'OGY.  Bursabgia; from
 fivpaa,  a bag,  and xoyos, a discourse.
 The doctrine of the bursae mucosae.
   BUTTER.   Butyrinn;  from |3«nij, a
 cow, and tvpos, coagulum or cream.  A
 concrete oil, obtained from the cream of
 milk.
    BUTTER-BUR. Tussilago petasi-
 tes.  Pestilent-wort.
    BUTY'RUM.   Butter.
    Butyrum Antimonii.  Murias anil
 monii.   Butter of antimony.
    BUX'US.  From TivxaJC, to, to become
 hard.   The box-tree.
    BYRETH'RUM.   A sort of cap fill-
 ed with cephalic substances. 
CAC
99
CAC
  BYSAU'CHEN. From fan, to hide,
and avxrjv, the neck.  Morbid stiffness
of the neck.
  BYSSOS.  Vulva.
  BYTHOS.   Bi&oj, deep.  Applied
by Hippocrates to the bottom of the
stomach.
   CAA-AP'IA. Dorstenia braziliensis.
   CAA-ATAYA.  A Brazilian plant,
 possessing bitter and cathartic properties.
   CAACICA.  Euphorbia capitata.
   CABAL.  Traditionary knowledge.
   CAB'ALIST.   Cabalista.  One in-
 structed in traditionary knowledge.
   CABBAGE.   Brassica.
   Cabbage Tree.   Geoffraeya  jamai-
 censis.
   CABUREIBA.   Myroxylon peruif-
 erum.
   CACiE'MIA.    Cachozmia;  from
 xcueoj, bad, and ayta, blood.  A bad con-
 dition of the blood.
   CACHALOT.     The  spermaceti
 whale.
   CACHEX'IA.    From  xaxoj,  bad,
 and «f t$,  a habit.  A  depraved habit or
 condition of body, as a scorbutic, can-
 cerous, &c.
   CACHINNATION.  Fromcachinno,
 I laugh.   Excessive  laughter, a symp-
 tom of hysterical, and other affections.
   CACHOLONG. A species of quartz.
   CACHO'RE.  Catechu.
   CACHUN'DE.   A medicine com-
 posed of  a number of aromatic ingredi-
 ents,  perfumes, earths, &c, supposed,
 in India,  to possess  wonderful  thera-
 peutical virtues.
  CACOCHO'LIA.   From xaxo<, bad,
 and xo%V> m^e-   A vitiated or depraved
 condition of the bile.
  CACOCHROI.   From xaxoj, bad,
and #poa, color.  Diseases in which the
complexion is changed.
  CACOCHYLTA.   From xaxoj, bad,
and 2t)ko$, chyle. Depraved chylification.
   CACOCHYM'IA.  From xa*oj, bad,
 and xvt^°i> juice, humor.  A morbid or
 depraved condition of the humors.
   CACOCNE'MOS.  From xaxoj, bad,
 xvrj/^tj, the leg.  A defect in the legs.
   CACOCORE'MA.    From  *a*oj,
 bad, xopso, I purge or cleanse.  A med-
 icine which purges off morbid, or vitiat-
 ed humors.
   CACODiE'MON.  From*a*o5, bad,
 and Scujiicoi/,  a spirit. An evil spirit, sup-
 posed to preside over the bodies^ of men,
 and to afflict them with many disorders.
 The nightmare.
   CACO'DIA.   From xaxo<;, bad, and
 io£«, to smell.    Anosmia, or defect in
 the sense of smelling.
   CACOPATHFA.
 and rta^oj,  affection.
 state of mind.
   CACOPHO'NIA.
 lation.
   CACOPRA'GIA.  From *<wos, bad,
 and ripattu, I perform.  A morbid con-
 dition of the chylopoietic organs.
   CACOSIT'IA.   From  *a*oj, bad,
 and csitiov, aliment. An aversion to food.
   CACOSPHYX'IA.    From  *<**«*,
 bad, and tf<j>t>£t$, pulse.  A bad condition
 of the pulse.
   CACOSTOMUS.
 and  gtoua, a mouth.
 diseased condition of the mouth.
  CACOTHYM'IA. From xaxo;, bad,
 and §v/jios, the mind.  A vitious, or dis-
 eased condition of mind.
  CACOTROPH'IA.   From  xaxo;,
bad, and tpotyq, nutriment.  Bad  nutri-
 tion.
From xcueoj, bad,
   A disordered

Defective articu-
From xaxo j, bad,
A deformity, or 
30               CAL
               CAL                1(

  CACTUS  OPUNTIA.    Opuntia.
The Indian fig.
  CADA'VER.  From cadere, to fall.
A body deprived of life; a dead body.
  CADI A.   A leguminous  plant of
Egypt.
  CADMI'UM.  A metal found  in
carbonate of zinc, of a compact texture,
and a bluish-grey color, approaching tin.
  CADTCHU. Catechu.
  CECAL.  Belonging to the caecum.
  C^'CITAS.   From cozcus, blind.
Blindness.   See  Caligo  and Amau-
rosis.
  CECUM.  From cozcus, blind. The
caecum or blind  gut is so called from its
being perforated only at one end.
  CECUS.  Blind.  A term applied,
in Anatomy, to  cavities or holes which
have but one  opening.
  Cecum Foramen.   A small cavity
in the frontal bone at the inferior extremi-
ty of the external coronal crest.
  C^TCHU.  Catechu.
  CAJEPUT  OIL.   Cajuputi oleum.
The volatile oil of the leaves of nulaleuca
cajaputi.
  CAIGNE,  FRANCOIS.  Author of
a Dissertation on the Teething of Infants
of the First Year, published at Paris,
1802.
  CALA'BA.   The  Indian  mastich-
tree,
  CAL'AMINE.  A native carbonate
of zinc.  It is used in the manufacture
of brass.
  CALAMINT.  Milissa calamintha.
  CALAMINTHA. Common calamit.
  CALAMITA. Dry styrax.
  CAL/AMUS. The name of a genus
of plants.
  Calamus Aromaticus.  Acorus cala-
mus ; sweet flag-root.
  Calamus Draco.  The plant which
yields dragon's blood.
  Calamus Saccharinus.  Calamus hv-
dicus. The common sugar-cane.
  Calamus Scripto'rius. A small cav-
ity, or furrow, at the bottom  of the
fourth ventricle of the brain,  so called
from its resemblance to a pen.
  CALCA'NEUM.   From calx,  the
heel.  The os calcis.
  CALCA'REOUS.  From calx, lime.
Containing lime;  of the nature of lime.
  Calcareous Spar.  Crystallized car-
bonate of lime.
  CALCARIUS  LAPIS.   Limestone.
  CALCEDONY.  A mineral, so call-
ed from having been found by the  an-
cients in Calcedon, in Asia Minor, sup-
posed to be pure silica with a little wa-
ter.
  CALCIG'EROUS  CELLS.   The
cells of the  bony  or dentinal part of a
tooth  are so called by .professor Owen.
  CALCINATION.  Oxydation. The
act of submitting  to a strong heat any
infusible mineral substance  for the pur-
pose of depriving  it, either of its water,
or any other volatilizable substance  en-
tering into its composition, and thus re-
ducing it to ashes  or cinders.
  CALCINATUM MAJUS  POTE-
RII.   Mercury dissolved in nitric acid,
and precipitated with salt and water.
  CALCIS  AQJJA.    Calcis  liquor.
Lime-water.
  Calcis  Chloridum.   Chloride  of
lime.
  Calcis Murias.  Muriate of  lime;
chloride of lime.
  Calcis Os. The bone of the tarsus
which forms the heel.
  Calcis Oxoiurias. Chloride of lime.
  Calcis Sulphure'tum.  Hepar cal-
cis; sulphuret of  lime.
  CALCIUM. The  metallic basis of
lime.
  CALC  SPAR.  Crystallized carbo-
nate of lime.  Calcareous spar.
  CALCULIF'RAGUS.  From calcu-
lus, a stone, and frango, to break.  A
stone-breaker; an instrument for break-
ing a stone in the  human body—a lith-
ontriptic instrument.
  CAL'CULI,  ARTICULAR.  Cal-
culi arthritic.
  Calculi, Arthrit'ic.  Concretions
formed in the ligaments, and within  the
capsules of the joints of persons affected
with gout. 
CAL
101
CAL
  Calculi, Bil'iary.   Bihary concre-
tions ; gall-stones.
  Calculi in the Ears.  Hard con-
cretions formed in the meatus audito-
rius externus.
  Calculi, Lach'rymal.  Concretions
formed in the lachrymal ducts.
  Calculi, Pan'creatic  Concretions
formed in the pancreas.
  Calculi of the  Pine'al  Gland.
Concretions formed in the pineal gland.
  Calculi, Salivary.  Concretions of
a calcareous  kind  formed in the sub-
stance of the sahvary glands, or in their
excretory ducts, or  upon the teeth.  See
Odontolithos;  and  Salivary Calculus.
  Calculi of the Stomach and In-
testines.  Concretions formed in  the
stomach and intestines.
  Calculi of the Tonsils.   Concre-
tions formed in the tonsils.
  Calculi, Urinary.  Concretions of
an earthy nature formed in  the bladder.
  CALCULUS.  Diminutive of calx, a
limestone. An earthy concretion formed
in the bladder, kidneys, mouth, or some
other part of the body.
  CALEFA'CIENT. Calefaciens; from
calidus, warm, and facio,  I make.  To
excite warmth. Any substance, as mus-
tard, pepper, &c, capable of-exciting
warmth in the part to which it is ap-
phed.
  CALENTU'RA.  From calere, to be
 warm.  Applied to a species of dehrium
 to which sailors are subject in the torrid
 zone; a kind of phrenitis.
   CAL'IBER.  The diameter of  any
 cylindrical body.
   CALIDUM ANTMALE.  Animal
 heat.
   CALI'GO.  A  mist.   Obscurity of
 vision, caused by a speck on the cornea;
 also, the speck itself.
   Caligo Lentis.  Cataract.
   CALIX. Infundibulum; from xaa.il;,
 a cup. Small membranous canals which
 surround the papillae of the kidneys, and
 open into the pelvis.
   CALLIDONTIA. From xaa.05, beau-
 tiful, and oSovi, a tooth. The art of pre-
      9«
serving  the beauty of the teeth.   See
Dental Hygiene.
  CALLOSITY.  Calbsitas.  Preter-
natural hardness.
  CALLOSUS. Hard.
  CALLOUS.   Callosus.  Hardened;
indurated, as the edges of an ulcer.
  CALLUS.  The bony matter thrown
out between, and uniting the fractured
extremities of a bone.  It is also applied
to induration of a soft or fleshy part.
  CALOMEL.  Calomelas; from xatoj,
good, and y.eXa;, black.   A term origin-
ally applied to black sulphuret of mer-
cury, but now  to hydrargyri chloridum
mite.
  CALOR.  Heat.
  CALORTC.  Caloricum;  horn color,
heat.  The matter, cause, or  principle
of heat.
  CALORIFICATION. Calorificatio;
from color, heat, and fieri,  to become.
The function of producing heat.
  Calorim'eter.  An  instrument, by
which the whole quantity  of absolute
heat  existing  in a body in  chemical
union, can be ascertained.
  CAL'THA.   Kotf£a, corrupted from
xaXxa,  yellow. The wild marigold is
so  called from its color.
  Caltha Palustris.  Populago.  The
common single marsh marigold.
  CALUM'BA. Calumbo; a root hav-
ing an  aromatic smell, bitter, pungent
taste, and tonic and  antiseptic proper-
ties.
   CALVA.  From calvus,  bald.  The
scalp or upper part of the cranium is so
called,  because it often becomes bald;
calviatuni, baldness.   The loss  or ab-
sence of hair upon the top of the head.
   CALX. From kalah, to burn. Chalk,
lime.  Also, an oxyd.
  Calx Antimonii. Oxyd of antimony.
  Calx Cum Kali Puro. Potash with
hme.
  Calx Hydrargyri Alba.  Ammo-
niated mercury.
  Calx,  Metallic.   A metal which
has undergone  calcination, combustion,
or some other equivalent process. 
CAN
102
CAN
   CALYX.  KaJiuf, from xaXvttfui, to
 cover.  The outermost of the enveloping
 organs of a flower.   The flower cup.
   CAMBO'GIA.  From  Cambodia, in
 the  East Indies, where it is  obtained.
 Gamboge.
   CAM'BUI.   The wild American
 myrtle of Piso and Margrave.
   CAMERA.  A  chamber or  cavity.
 Applied to the chambers of the eye.
   CAMERA LU'CIDA.  An  instru-
 ment making  the image of any object
 appear on a wall in a light room.
   CAMERA OBSCURA.  An opti-
 cal apparatus for throwing the images
 of external objects on a  white surface,
 and representing them in their  proper
 colors and shapes.
   CAMINGA.  Canella  alba.
   CAMPANI, A.  An Itahan dentist,
 and  author of a small work on Tooth-
 ache, the Diseases of the Teeth and the
 manner of Curing  them, pubhshed at
 Florrinza, 1789.
   CAMPEACHY   WOOD.    Log-
 wood ; so called, because it is brought
 from Campeachy.
   CAMPHINE.  Re-distilled oil of tur-
 pentine, used for lighting.
   CAMPHIRE.  Camphor.
   CAMPHOR.   From  the  Arabian
 caphur or kamphur.   A  concrete sub-
 stance, prepared by distillation, of a crys-
 talline texture, strong fragrant odor, and
 possessing  narcotic   and  diaphoretic
 properties.
   CAM'PHOROSMA MONSPELIA-
 CA.  From camplwra, and oopy, smell.
The  systematic name of the plant called
 camphorata.  The stinking ground-pine.
   CAMPYLO'TIS.   From xa^xvXos, |
bent. A preternatural incurvation of a
part; also, a distortion of the eyelids.
   CANADENSIS.    Canadian; the
name of a balsam.
  CANAL.   Canalis; ductus; meatus.
A  channel or passage for fluids or solids.
   Canal, Alimen'tary.    The  canal
leading from the mouth to the anus.
   Canal, Arachnoi'dian.   A canal,
supposed to have been discovered by
 Bichat, formed by  the  extension of the
 arachnoid over the transverse and long-
 itudinal fissure of the brain, and which
 surrounds the vena magna galeni. Cru-
 veilhier denies  the existence of this canal.
   Canal, Intestinal.   That portion of
 the alimentary canal formed by the in-
 testines.
   CANALIS  ARTERIOSUS.  Ar-
 terial duct; ^ vessel through which the
 blood  passes in the fetus from the pul-
 monary artery into the aorta, but which
 is obliterated after birth.
   Canalis Semicircularis.  The sem-
 icircular canal.  There are three in the
 posterior portion of the labyrinth of each
 ear, which open by five orifices into the
 vestibulum.
   Canalis Venosus.  A canal which
 conveys the blood in the fetus from the
 porta of the liver, to the ascending vena
 cava, but it ceases to exist afterbirth.
   CANCEL'LI.   Lattice-work.   The
 reticular or spongy texture of bones.
   CANCEL'LUS.    From  cancer,  a
 crab.  A species of crayfish, called Ber-
 nard the hermit,  and  the  wrong heir,
 which is supposed to cure rheumatism,
 when rubbed on the affected part.
   CANCER.   Kapxwo$, carcinos, lupus
 cancrosus, ulcus cancrosum, a crab.  A
 disease so called, either because it exhib-
 ited large veins  like the claws of a crab,
 or on account of the hideous appearance
 which the ulcerated parts present.  It is
 a  scirrhous tumor, which  terminates,
 generally, in a fatal ulcer.
  Cancer  Munditorum.    Chimney
 sweeper's cancer.  An irregular super-
 ficial, painful ulceration, occurring in the
 scrotum of chimney sweepers.
  CANCEROUS.  Pertaining to can-
 cer.
  CAN'CROID.   Cancroidem;  from
cancer, and siSos, form.   Having the ap-
pearance of a cancer.
  CANCRO'RUM CHELAE.  Crab's
stones or claws, consisting of carbonate
and phosphate of lime.
  CANCROSUS.  Cancerous.
  CANCRUM  ORIS.  Canker of the 
CAN               103               CAN
mouth;  a spreading  ulceration of the
gums.    "Any  inflammation  of the
inouthmay be attended with ulceration;
but the complaint here referred to,  is es-
sentially ulceration, appearing  in this
form at the commencement, and present-
ing characters which entitle it to rank as
a distinct affection.  Dr. Symonds con-
siders cancrum oris as a synonyme of
gangrene of the muuth; but such is not
the ordinary application of the term.  It
is true that the  ulcers,  usually called
canker, may, in constitutions predispos-
ed to gangrene, terminate in that affec-
tion, but in the great majority of  cases
they do not appear to  have such a ten-
dency, and are a comparatively innocent
disease.
   "The complaint usually makes its ap-
pearance in the  gums or inside of the
cheeks or lips; though it may occur in
any part of the mouth, or in the fauces.
When first noticed it  is  always in the
form of an ulcer, often of considerable
size, with a yellowish  white or  greyish
surface, and an inflamed border.  The
neighboring parts are also inflamed and
swollen, and when the ulcer is in the
cheeks or lips, the tumefaction is observ-
ed externally, the cheek  of the side af-
fected being red,  shining and prominent.
The swelling in the mouth is sometimes
so considerable as to render an examina-
tion of the sore  difficult.  There is a
very copious flow of saliva;  and. the
breath is very offensive, though the fetor
is distinct from that  of gangrene.   The
ulcer is generally painful, and is usually
attended  with fever and constipation.
It may continue for weeks  or  even
months without very serious consequen-
ces ; though, when upon the gums, it
sometimes lays bare the alveolar process-
es.  I have never known it to penetrate
through the cheek, nor to end  fatally;
though what might be the ultimate con-
sequences of continued   neglect,  I am
unable to say.  I have always found it
to yield to treatment.
   "Patches of pseudo-membranous in-
flammation now  and then occur in the
mouth, bearing much resemblance to the
ulcerative affection above described, and
possibly constituting, in many instances,
its first stage.  The patches coveredwith
the plastic effusion are  whitish at first,
then greyish, and sometimes at last livid
or blackish.   In consequence of the in-
flammation around them, they appear set
in the membrane, and hence, bear a close
resemblance to ulcers.  They end either
in a  gradual absorption of the pseudo-
membranous matter, or by a destruction
of a portion of the mucous tissue, when
an ulcer results.
   "The causes of the cancrum oris, are
obscure.  It generally occurs in children
from two to six years old;  has been as-
cribed to a debilitated habit of body, aris-
ing from deficient or improper food, bad
air, want of cleanliness, &c, and is said
to prevail most among the poor.   I have
seen it, however, in children otherwise
apparently healthy, well fed, and well
provided for in all respects," &,c*
   The disease evidently has some of the
characteristics of grangrenous inflamma-
tion of the gums, as well as of other af-
fections, which consist of ulceration of
the gums, and exfoliation  of the alveo-
lar processes ; yet it differs from both of
these, in many particulars,  and, there-
fore,  should not be confounded with
either. The last named affection, we be-
lieve, never occurs among the wealthy,
but seems always 1o be confined to chil-
dren of  the poor, and to  be dependent
upon defective nutrition, bad air, and
a  cachectic  habit of body.  Cancrum
oris is met with among children of the
wealthier classes of society, and in other
respectsin the enjoyment of health. Prof.
Wood is of the  opinion that it  results
from some inappreciable disturbance  of
the digestive organs.  The differences
between it and grangrenous inflamma-
tion of the mouth have been very clearly
pointed out above, by this eminent phy-
sician, and able medical writer.
  In the treatment of the disease, Prof.

      ♦Wood's Practice of Medicine. 
CAN               104                CAN
 Wood says, "from two to six grains of
 calomel may be given at the commence-
 ment, either associated with some other
 cathartic, such as rhubarb or jalap, in
 order to insure its operation upon the
 bowels, or followed, should it not ope-
 rate in six or eight  hours, by a dose of
 castor oil.  The bowels may afterwards
 be kept open by the occasional adminis-
 tration of castor oil, magnesia or its car-
 bonate, or the sulphate of magnesia 5
 small doses of the neutral mixture, or of
 antimonial wine should be given when the
 fever is considerable; and, if the breath
 should be sour, a few grains of the bicar-
 bonate of soda in carbonic acid water, re-
 peated three or four times a day, will be
 found useful.   In protracted cases, at-
 tended  with debility, it may be found
 advisable to have recourse to the min-
 eral acids, and infusion of bark or sul-
 phate of  quinia.  In the  febrile state,
 the diet should  consist exclusively  of
 farinaceous liquids.  In the absence of
 fever, milk may  be allowed; and, in
 cases of debility, animal broth, jelly, &c.
 Sour  and ascescent food  should be
 avoided.
  "But the local treatment is chiefly to
be relied on.  Various apphcations have
 been recommended.  Among these, are
 mouth waters of tincture of myrrh, and
 with Peruvian bark, dilute mineral acids
 with  honey, and  solution of alum.   I
 have found nothing so useful as a solu-
 tion of sulphate of zinc, in the propor-
tion of fifteen  or  twenty grains to the
 fluid ounce of water, apphed twice or
 three times a day to the ulcer, by means
of a camel's-hair pencil, and continued
 until the yellowish  white exudation is
removed, and the surface  assumes the
healthy reddish hue.  With this appli-
cation I have in no instance failed to ef-
fect a cure."  Prof.  W. is also of the
 opinion that a strong solution of the sul-
 phate of  copper, or  nitrate of silver,
might prove equally efficacious, though
 he does not seem to  speak from experi-
 ence.
  For the purpose of  correcting  the
 fetor of the breath, the mouth should be
 gargled six or  eight  times  a day  with
 some aromatic lotion  or wash.
   CANDELA FUMALIS.   A per-
 fumed  or medicated candle, used for
 purifying the air.
   CANDELARIA.   From candela, a
 candle.  Mullen is so called from the
 resemblance of its  stalk to a candle. See
 Verbascum.
   CANEL'LA.    The  name  of  a
 genus of plants.
   Canella  Alba.     Winteria  aro-
 matica.  The laurel-leaved  canella, the
 bark of which  is a stimulant and pun-
 gent aromatic.
   CANINE.   Pertaining to, or partak-
 ing of the nature of, a dog.
   Canine  Fossa.  A depression in the
 outer surface of the superior maxillary
 bone,  above   the  canine  or  cuspid
 tooth.
   Canine  Teeth.  Dentes canini, cy-
 nodontes,  dentes laniarii, dentes angu-
 lares, cuspidati,  conoides, eye-teeth.  See
 Cuspid Teeth.
   CANI'NUS.   From canis, a dog. A
 cuspid tooth is so  called, because it re-
 sembles that of a dog.  See  Cuspid
 Teeth.  It is also the name of a muscle,
 the levator anguli oris, because it is sit-
 uated near the canine tooth.
   CANIRAM. Strychnos nux vomica.
   CANKER.  A  corroding ulcer in the
 mouth.   See Cancrum Oris.
   CANNA.  A reed or hollow  cane.
 The fibula has  been so called from its
 resemblance to  a reed.
   Canna Fistula. See Cassia Fistula.
   Canna Indica.  See Sagittaria Alexi-
 pharmica.
   Canna Major.  The tibia.
   Canna Minor Cruris.  The fibula.
   CANNULA. A surgical instrument.
 See Canula.
   CANTHARIS.   From xcu^apoj, a
 beetle, to which tribe it belongs; Musca
Hispanica; lytlavesicatoria; cantharides.
The blistering fly, and Spanish fly.
   Cantharis Vittata.   The  potato
fly. 
CAP
105
CAP
   CANTHUS.  Ka»>s.   The angle or
 corner of the eye.
   CANULA.  Diminutive of canna, a
 reed.  Cannula.   A small tube used in
 surgery.
   CAOUTCHOUC.   Indian  rubber;
 gum elastic.  The concrete juice of the
 luvvea  (sew  heved) guianensis; jatropha
 elastica; siphonia elastica; ficus indica;
 South American trees.  It is remarkable
 for its  elasticity, and being insoluble in
 water  and alcohol, is apphed to  va-
 rious valuable purposes.  It  is  used in
 the manufacture of cathetors, bougies,
 pessaries, and, recently, in the prosthe-
 sis of the velum palati.  It did not, how-
 ever, answer very well at first for this
 latter purpose, as  the secretions of the
 mouth and nasal cavities soon destroyed
 it.  But this objection has, within a few
 years, been completely obviated by  the
 discovery of a peculiar method of pre-
 paring it, made by Mr. Goodyeare, a
 celebrated manufacturer of New Haven,
 Connecticut.  Mr.  Stearns,  a surgeon
 of London,  who has employed a pre-
 paration of it made by this gentleman,
 commends it very  highly.  Its value in
 the  construction of artificial  palates,
 with a velum, has also been tested by
 by others.  See Artificial Palates.
  CAPHORA.  Camphor.
  CAPFBARA.  A rodent quadrupid
 of the  largest size, found along the riv-
 ers of South America.  The water-hog.
  CAPILLARY.   Capillaris;  from
 capillus, a httle hair. Resembhng a hair;
 hair-ldte; small.  It is apphed to the ex-
 treme radicals of the arteries and veins.
 Also, to parts of plants  which bear a
 resembance to hairs.
  CAPIL'LUS. The hair.
  CAPITAL.  Capitalis.  Belonging to
 the head.
  CAPITALIA REMEDIA.  Reme-
 dies for the head.
  CAPITILU'VIUM. From caput, the
 head, and lavare, to wash. A lotion or
 bath for the head.
  CAP'NOMAN'CY.   From  xartvo<,
smoke, and (navtiia, prophecy. Divina-
tion by  smoke.  Among the  ancients
this was done  by' burning the seed of
poppy and other herbs, and observing
the fancied figures which the smoke as-
sumed.
  CAP'PA. The monk's-hood has been
so called from its supposed resemblance
to the head.
  CAPPING THE NERVE  OF A
TOOTH.  An operation recommended
by Dr. Koecker for the purpose of pro-
tecting an exposed dental pulp from in-
jury  in  filling  a tooth.  See  Filhng
Teeth.
  CAPREOLA'RIS.  From capreolus,
a tendril, Capreolatus. Twisted; contort-
ed; applied by some to the spermatic
vessels.
  CAP'ROMYS. From xarfpoj, a boar,
and nvs, a mouse. A genus of rodent
mammalia, exclusively confined to the
island of Cuba.  They have four molar
teeth on each side of each jaw, with
three outer, and one inner cusp in the
upper  teeth,  and in  the lower this ar-
rangement is  reversed.
  CAPSICUM.  From xantu, to bite;
because of its effect on the mouth. The
name of a genus of plants.
  Capsicum Annum. Cayenne pepper;
Guinea pepper.
  CAPSULA.  Diminutive of capsa, a
chest or case.  A capsule.   A membra-
neous bag enclosing a part of the body,
as the capsular ligament, the capsule of
the crystalline lens, &c.  The matrices
or sacs of the teeth are sometimes called
capsules.  In Botany,  it is applied to
the membraneous pericarpium  or  seed-
vessel of a plant.
  CAPSULAR. Capstdaris.  Having
the form, or partaking of the nature, of
a capsule.
  CAPSULE.   Capsula.
  Capsule of Glisson.  A dense cel-
lular membrane surrounding the  vena
portae in its most minute ramifications
in the liver, described by Glisson.
  CAPURON.  Author of an Essay
upon the Luxation of the  Lower Jaw,
published at Paris, in the year 9. 
CAR
106
CAR
  CAPUT.   The head,  cranium, or
scull; the upper extremity of a bone,
as the head of the femur.  Also, the
origin of a muscle, as the long head of
the biceps; and it is sometimes apphed
to a protuberance resembling a head, as
also to the beginning of a part.
  Caput  Gallinag'inis.   Perumonta-
num.  A protuberance in the urethra in
men, before the neck of the bladder.
  Caput Monachi.  Leontodon tarax-
acum.
  Caput Obstipum.   Wry neck.
  Caput  Purgum. A  remedy  which
causes a defluxion  from the head, as an
errhine, sialogogue, &c.
  Caput  Succeda'neum.  A  swelling
of the head of the fetus, which occurs
in certain cases of  labor.
  Caput Testis.  The epydidymus.
  CARABAC'CIUM.  The name of a
a yellowish  aromatic wood of India,
supposed to possess stomachic and anti-
scorbutic properties.
   CAR'ABUS,  A genus of coleopter-
ous insects.  Two species, the crysoce-
phalus and ferrugincus, were at one time
much vaunted as a remedy  for tooth-
ache, and even quite recently they were
highly  recommended in  Germany for
this purpose.  They  were first rubbed
between the thumb and finger, and then
applied to the  affected tooth  and gum.
See Coccinella Septempunctata.
   CARAN'NA.  Carolina: gummi, ca-
ragna.   A concrete resinous substance,
 having an  aromatic  smell,  and bitter
 taste, formerly used as an ingredient in
 vulnerary balsams, and in discutent and
 strengthening plasters.
   CA'RAT.  From the  Arab kyrat, a
 weight, or from xepatiov, a small weight.
 A weight of four grains, used in weigh-
 ing diamonds.   It is  also used in refer-
 ence to the fineness of gold.  For ex-
 ample, suppose the mass  spoken off,
 "to weigh  24  carats, of  twelve grains
 each;  and  the  pure  gold  is  called
flne.  Thus, if gold  be said to be  22
 carats  fine, or standard, it is implied
 that f fths  are pure gold, and /jths
alloy.  In the process of assaying gold,
the real quantity taken is very  small,
generally from six to twelve grains; and
this  is termed the assay pound.  It is
sub-divided  into  24  carats, and each
carat into four assay grains, and each
grain into quarters;  so that there are
three hundred  and eighty-four separate
reports for gold.   When the gold assay
pound  is  only six grains, the quarter
assay grain only weighs ^'Tth  of a
grain.  This will give  some idea of the
accuracy  required in  the weights and
scales  used for  such  delicate  opera-
tions."*
   CARAWAY. Carum.
   CARBO.  Carbo ligni. Charcoal.
   Carbo Anima'lis. Carbo carnis. Ani-
mal charcoal.  Ivory black.
   CAR'BON.  From  carbo, coal.  In
 Chemistry, this term is used to signify a
pure combustible base of the varieties of
charcoal and  other  carbonaceous  sub-
stances.   The diamond is  the  purest
form of crystallized  carbon.
   CAR'BONAS. A carbonate.
   CARBONATE.  A salt  formed by
 the union of carbonic  acid,  with a sali-
 fiable base.
   Carbonate of Lime.   Calcis car-
 bonas.
   Carbonate of Magnesia. Magnesia:
 carbonas.
   Carbonate of Potass.se.   Potassae
 carbonas.
   Carbonate of Soda. Sodae carbonas.
   CAR'BONATED.   Carbonatus, Ae-
 ratus.   That which is combined  with
 carbonic acid.
   CARBONIC ACID.   Acidum carbo-
 nicum.  Fixed air;  carbonaceous acid;
 mephitic acid.  A transparent, colorless,
 gaseous substance, without smell, irre-
 spirable,  and incapable  of supporting
 combustion.  It is a  compound of car-
 bon and oxygen.
   CARBUNCLE.  See Anthrax.
   CARBUNCULUS.  Diminutive of
 carbo, a burning coal.   A carbuncle.
   CARBURET. Carburetum. A com-
         * Brand's Encyclopaedia. 
CAR
107
CAR
pound of carbon with  any simple com-
bustible substance.   For example, car-
buretted hydrogen, is hydrogen holding
carbon in solution.   Steel is a carburet
of iron.
  Carburet of Sulphur.   A liquid
compound  of  carbon  and sulphur.  It
was formerly called  alcohol of sulphur,
and is now obtained by passing the va-
por of sulphur over ignited charcoal.
  CARBURETTED HYDROGEN.
 Carbon and hydrogen ;  light inflammable
air; olefiant gas. Hydroguret of carbon.
There are  two gaseous  compounds of
posed to strengthen the heart.  The car-
damom. See Amomum Cardamomum.
  Cardamoms,  Ceylon.  The grains
of Paradise.
  CARDAMOMUM  PIPERATUM.
The common cardamom.
  CAR'DIA. KapSia, the heart. Also,
the upper orifice of the stomach.
  CAR'DIAC.  Cardiacus, from xapSta,
the heart.  The superior opening of the
stomach.  Pertaining to the heart.
  Cardiac Arteries.  Coronary arte-
ries. Two arteries given off by the aorta
above the free edge of the sigmoid valves,
carbon and hydrogen, olefiant gas,  or oil and  distributed to both surfaces of the
making gas, so caUed because it forms-
an oily  compound with chlorine, and
heart.
  Cardiac Nerves.
The nerves of the
light  carburetted  hydrogen,  found  in, heart.   They are distinguished  into
some coal mines, which is known by the J right and left, and arise from the cervi-
name of fire damp, and is  the cause of
the explosions which  sometimes took
place previously to the invention by Sir
Humphrey Davy, of the safety lamp.  It
is also evolved from the mud of stagnant
pools and ditches. Olefiant gas is ob-
tained by distilling a mixture of one part
of alcohol and two in bulk of sulphuric
acid, and collected  over  water, which
is  said to absorb more than one-seventh
of its volume of the gas.
   CAR'CAROS.  From  xapxcupw,  to
resound.  A fever in which the patient
is  affected with  tremor and  unceasing
noise in his ears.
   CARCINO'MA.   From xapxivo;, a
crab, a cancer.   See Cancer.
   Carcinoma Hjematodes.  Hozmato-
des fungus.  Fungus hazmatodes.  Most
authors use the term in the same sense
as cancer.   Some apply it to incipient
cancer, and some  to that species  of
cancer which resembles  cerebral  sub-
stance.
   CARCINOMATOUS. Relating to,
or having the nature of, a  cancer.
   CARDAMI'NE.   The name  of a
genus of plants.
   Cardamine Praten'sis. The cuckoo-
flower, or ladies' smock.
   CAR'DAMOM. Cardamomum; from
xapSia, the heart, because it was sup-
cal gangha.
  Cardiac Plexus.  A network form-
ed by the cardiac nerves at the back part
of the aorta, near the heart.
  Cardiac Veins.  The coronary veins.
They are four in number, two anterior,
and two posterior, and open by one ori-
fice into the right auricle of the heart.
  CARDIA GRAPH Y.    Cardiogra-
phia, from xapSta, the heart, and ypa^,
a description. A description of the heart.
  CARDIAL'GIA.  From xapSw, the
cardia,  and  a%yo$, pain.   Pain of the
stomach.  Heartburn.
  CARDIALO'GIA.   From  xapSia,
the  heart, and Xoyo$, a  discourse.  A
treatise on the heart.
  CARDIATOM'IA.   From  xap&a,
the heart, and ttpvsiv, to cut.  Dissec-
tion of the heart.
  CARDIATROPH'IA.  Atrophy of
the heart.
  CARDIELCO'SIS.    From xap&a,
the heart, and  eXxos, an ulcer.  Ulcera-
tion of the heart.
  CARDIOCE'LE.  From xap&m, the
heart, and xt]X^, rupture.  Rupture  of
the heart.
  CARDION'CHUS.    From xapSia,
the heart, and oyxoj, a tumor.  An aneu-
rism of the heart, or aorta near it.
  CARDIOT'ROMUS.   From xapSia, 
CAR
108
CAR
 the heart, and  tpo/ioi, tremor.  Feeble
 palpitation, or fluttering of the heart.
   CARDITIS.  From xapfiia, the heart,
 and itis,  inflammation.   Inflammation
 of the heart.
   CARDO.  A hinge.   The articula-
 tion called ginglymus.
   CAREBA'RIA.    From  xapj?,  the
 head, and /3apoj, weight.   Heaviness of
 the head.
   CARTCUM.  Named so after its in-
 ventor, Caricus.   Carycum.  A deter-
 gent ointment for ulcers.
   CARIES.  Angiitis osium.   Ulcera-
 tion of bone.
   Caries Dentium.    See Caries  of
 the Teeth.
   Caries  of the Teeth.   Decay  of
 the teeth.  A chemical decomposition of
 the earthy part of any portion of a tooth,
 accompanied by partial or complete dis-
 organization of the animal framework
 of the affected part.
   Believing the disease to be  the result
 of inflammation,   Mr.  Thomas  Bell
 has substituted for caries, the term gan-
 grene, supposing the latter to convey a
 more correct idea of the true  nature of
 the affection; and Mr. Hunder, in treat-
 ing of the disease, says, "It appears to
 deserve  the  name  of mortification."
 Mr. Fox, also, speaks of  it as a disorder
 which terminates in mortification, but
 at the same time designates it  by the
 name of caries.  This latter term, if its
 meaning be restricted to ulceration, does
 not convey a correct idea of the exact
 nature of the disease, nor do the words
 nigritis osium, black bone, from which
 some writers derive the word, as the
 decayed part of a tooth is not always
 of this color.  Still, as  it  has been gen-
 erally sanctioned, and for want of a bet-
 ter term, it may be well to continue its
 use.  Mr. Cooper  derives the word
 caries, from xnpm, to abrade—a defini-
tion which seems equally inapplicable.
The term caries, however, is  certainly
more appropriate than gangrene or mor-
tification, as either of the latter might be
apphed to another affection of the teeth;
 namely, necrosis, with quite  as  much
 propriety, as to the one now under con-
 sideration.    Besides, according to the
 usual medical acceptation of the two for-
 mer of these terms, their use is restrict-
 ed to the death of a soft part, and not to
 a like  condition of an  osseous tissue,
 which is designated by the latter.
   In  his explanation  of  the nature of
 dental caries, Mr. Bell is equally  incor-
 rect.  He defines it "mortification of any
 part of a tooth, producing gradual decom-
 position of its substance.''   The defini-
 tion would  have been  more correct, if
 he had said, mortification of any por-
 tion of a tooth, preceded or accompanied
 by partial or complete decomposition of
 its substance, for this always precedes,
 or is, at  least, simultaneous with the
 death of the part.
   There is no disease to which the'feeth
 are liable, more frequent in  its occur-
 rence, or fatal in  its tendency, than ca-
 ries.  It is often so insidious in its attacks,
 and rapid in its  progress,  that every
 tooth in the mouth  is involved in  ir-
 reparable ruin, before  its  existence is
 scarcely suspected.
   Its presence is usually first indicated
 by an  opaque or dark  spot on the
 enamel; and, if this be removed, the
 subjacent bone will exhibit a black dark-
 brown, or whitish appearance.  It usu-
 ally commences on the  outer surface of
 the bone of the crown of the tooth, un-
 der the enamel; from thence it proceeds
 towards the centre, until it  reaches the
 pulp cavity.
   If the diseased part is  of a soft  and
 humid  character,  the enamel,  after a
 time, usually breaks in, disclosing the
 ravages which it has made on the sub-
jacent bone.   But this does not always
 happen; the  tooth sometimes remains
 nearly perfect, until its whole interior
 structure is destroyed.
  There is no portion of the crown or
 neck of a tooth exempt from the disease;
 yet, some parts are more hable to be first
 attacked by it than others; as, for exam-
ple, the depressions on the grinding sur- 
CAR
109
CAR
faces of the molares and bicuspides, the
approximal sides  of all the teeth—the
posterior or palatine  surfaces of the later-
al incisores;  and,  in short, wherever an
imperfection exists in the enamel.
   The outer portion of a  tooth, as has
been stated in a preceding place,  is
much harder than the inner or osseous
part, and by far  less  easily acted on
by the causes that produce the disease.
It is, however, notwithstanding, occa-
sionally affected by it, and when it does
attack it,  it develops  itself more  fre-
quently on the anterior or labial surface
near the gum, than on any other part—
sometimes commencing at a single point,
and at other times at a number of points.
When the enamel is first attacked,  it is
usually called erosion; but as the enam-
el does not  contain so much  animal
matter as  the subjacent osseous  struc-
ture, the diseased part is washed away
by the saliva of the mouth, while in the
bony part of the  tooth, it, in most in-
stances, remains, and may be removed
in distinct lamina, after the  calcareous
molecules have been decomposed.
   In teeth that are very hard, the decay-
ed part is of a much firmer consistence,
and of a  darker  color, than  in  soft
teeth.   Sometimes it is black; at other
times it is of a dark or light brown;  and
at other times again, it is nearly white.
As a general rule, the softer the tooth,
the  lighter,  softer,  and  more  humid
the decay.  The color  of  the decayed
part, however, may be, and doubtless is,
in some cases, influenced by other cir-
cumstances—perhaps by some pecuhar
modification of the  agents, upon the pres-
ence of which, the disease is dependent.
  Commencing externally beneath  the
enamel, the disease proceeds, as we have
before stated, towards the centre of  the
tooth, destroying layer after layer, until
it reaches the fining membrane, and leav-
ing each outer stratum softer, and of  a
darker color than the subjacent one.
  The appellations, deep seated, super-
ficial, external and  internal, simple and
comphcated, have been apphed by some
       10
 writers to this disease.   These distinc-
 tions are unnecessary, since they only
 designate  the different  stages  of  the
 disease.   By complicated  decay, is
 meant a caries that has penetrated to the
 pulp cavity of the tooth, and is  accom-
 panied by an inflammation and suppu-
 ration of the lining membrane, and  the
 death of the  organ.  The fining mem-
 brane,  however, is not always  inflam-
 ed by exposure, nor suppurated by  in-
 flammation.
   Equally unnecessary is the classifica-
 tion adopted by M. Duval, to designate
 the differences of color and consistence
 exhibited by the decayed part.    He
 enumerates seven varieties or  species,
 which are as follows : calcareous, peel-
 ing, perforating, black,  deruptive, sta-
 tionary and wasting.
   The first, he employs to designate that
 affection of the teeth which is character-
 ized by the appearance of a white opaque
 spot on the enamel, whereby it is rend-
 ered brittle,  and oftentimes caused to
 break.   The second, if not identical
 with, is at least analogous to the first—
 the difference only consisting in the color
 of the enamel.  The third, from a  de-
 fect in almost every  part of the  enamel
 covering the crowns of the teeth, attacks
 the molares and sometimes the bicuspi-
 des, at a number of points simultaneous-
 ly, causing the speedy destruction of the
 organs.  The  fourth, he  describes  as
 not occurring until from the fifteenth to
 the thirtieth year, and as being  princi-
 pally confined to persons of a consump-
 tive habit, and those disposed to rachitis.
 The color of the decayed part of a tooth
 in individuals of these habits of body, is
 sometimes black, but  more frequently
 white.  Black caries, as  it is called, is
 oftener met with in the teeth of persons
 of good constitutions, and,  as has  pre-
 viously  been remarked, in hard than  in
 soft teeth.
  The fifth species, or deruptive, he re-
presents as that, which attacks the fron*
teeth of individuals of consumptive hab-
its near the necks of the organs, extend- 
CAR
110
CAR
ing downwards towards their roots, and i
forming a brownish semicircular groove.
The sixth is that description which, after
having penetrated a certain distance in-
to the substance of the tooth, becomes
stationary.   The seventh and last  spe-
cies, is that which is  characterized by
the gradual wasting of the grinding sur-
faces of the molares, dipping down in
some places to a considerable depth, and
leaving a smooth polished surface  of a
brown or yellowish color.
   Finally, the roots of the teeth frequent-
ly remain firm in their sockets for years
after  their  crowns and necks have been
destroyed.  They are  less liable to de-
cay than the crowns, but nature, after
the destruction of the last, as if conscious
that the former are of no further use, ex-
erts herself for their expulsion, which is
effected by the gradual wasting and fill-
ing up of their sockets.  It often  hap-
pens, that after this  operation  of the
economy has been accomplished,  they
are retained  in  the mouth for months,
and oftentimes for years, by their perios-
tial connection  with  the gums.  But
 this effort  of nature, for the removal of
 the roots of the teeth, after their crowns
 have been destroyed by caries, is confin-
 ed more to  the back than to the front
 teeth, for it often happens that these last
 remain for a great number of years, and
 seemingly without much injury to the
 parts within which they are contained,
 after the destruction of their crowns.
    Causes of Caries.—Caries of the teeth
 has been attributed to a great variety of
 causes, and to notice, in detail, the vari-
 ous  opinions advanced by  American,
 English, French, and German  writers
 upon this subject, would be both incon-
 sistent with the plan of a work like this,
 and unprofitable to  the  reader;  the fol-
 lowing brief exposition of a few of the
 most prominent writers will, therefore,
 have to suffice.
    Fauchard, Auzebe, Bourdet, Lecluse,
 Jourdain, and most of the  French wri-
  ters of  the eighteenth century, on the
  diseases of the teeth, as well as nearly
all of the more modern French authors,
though their views with regard  to the
causes of dental caries are exceedingly
vague and  confused,  express  the belief
that the disease is, for the most part, the
result of the action of chemical agents;
such, for example, as vitiated saliva, the
putrescent  remains of particles  of food
lodged between the teeth, or in their inter-
stices, acids, and a corrupted state of the
fluids conveyed to these organs for their
nourishment.  They also mention cer-
tain states of the general health, me-
chanical injuries, sudden transitions of
temperature, &.c. &c, as being condu-
cive to the disease.   A similar explana-
tion, too, of the cause of dental caries, is
given by Salmon, the author of a Com-
pendium of Surgery, pubhshed in Lon-
don, 1644.
  The foregoing is a general  summary
of the views entertained by most of the
older writers with regard to the cause of
the disease under consideration, and, if
they are not strictly correct, we think we
shall presently be able to show that they
are not altogether erroneous.
   In the Enghsh school of dental sur-
gery, since the time of the publication of
Mr. Fox's celebrated  treatise  on the
Natural History and Diseases of the
Teeth, and until quite recently, inflam-
mation of the bony structure of  these
organs has been regarded as the proxi-
mate or immediate cause of the disease
in question. Having discovered  an iden-
tity of  structure between the teeth and
the other bones of the body, this author
immediately concluded that the  diseases
of the one were identical with  those of
the other.   This inference, it must be
 confessed, to one who has not made the
 diseases of the former a subject of close
 and critical investigation, would seem to
 be irresistible.    But  observation  has
 proven it, so far as most of the diseases
 of the teeth are concerned, to be incor-
 rect.  By instituting a comparison be-
 tween  caries of the teeth  and that of
 other bone, it will at once be perceived
 that there is not the slightest analogy 
               CAR                1;

between the disease, as it occurs  in the
one, and  manifests itself in the  other.
In the former it consists simply in a de-
composition of the earthy basis of the
organs, whereas, in the latter, it is analo-
gous to ulceration in soft parts, and con-
stantly discharges a fetid sanies, and fre-
quently throws out granulations of fun-
gous  flesh.   These   are phenomena
which dental caries  never exhibit, and
they establish a wide difference of char-
acter  between it and the disease  as oc-
curring in the other osseous structures of
the body.
  But the promulgation  of the doctrine
of the vascularity of the teeth, not only
led to the behef that caries of these or-
gans was  identical with  caries of  other
bones, but it soon gave rise to the sup-
position, that,  inasmuch  as  inflamma-
tion was the cause which determined it
in the latter, it, also, produced it in the
forme:.*  Among the  ablest advocates
of this theory is Mr.  Thomas BeU, but,
notwii .standing,  the support which it
has received from his pen, it is opposed
by  facts which  prove it, most conclu-
sively, to be erroneous.
  If inflammation of the bony structure
of the teeth were the cause of caries, the
disease  would be as  likely  to develop
itself in one part of a tooth as another.
The root,  the  interior of the crown be-
tween the pulp-cavity and the enamel,
would as frequently be the part first at-
tacked as  the  external surface.   Now
what are  the facts  in relation to this
matter'?  Does caries ever  commence
on  the  root of a  tooth, or, between the
pulp-cavity and the • external surface of

  * The  doctrine of the  vascularity  of the
teeth, as maintained by Fox, was the  origin
of the theory in England, that caries of these
organs resulted from inflammation of their
bony structure, but  this theory had been ad-
vanced at a much  earlier period in  France.
The celebrated  French  surgeon, Ambrose
Par£, in  treating on tooth-ache, says, "these
organs, after the manner of other bones, suf-
fer  inflammation,"  and "quickly suppurate,
become  rotten," &c. &c.   Book xvii, chap.
xxv, page 3S7; published, 1579.
                CAR

the dentinal part of  the crown?  Most
assuredly not.
  Again, among the  causes  which
would be most likely to  excite inflam-
mation in these organs, are many of the
operations performed for arresting the
progress of the disease in question.   For
example, it  is well  known that filing
and plugging, two of the most valuable
operations in dental  surgery, augment,
for a time at least, the sensibility of the
teeth, and increase their susceptibility to
the action of heat  and  cold—agents
which are regarded as among the most
frequent and  powerful of the exciting
causes of inflammation.   Now, if caries
of the teeth were the result of inflamma-
tion, these operations, instead of arrest-
ing the progress of the disease, would
cause a recurrence of it, and thus hasten
the destruction of those upon which they
had been performed.
  Inflammation of the lining membrane
of a tooth, may end in suppuration, but
inflammation  of  its  osseous  structure
alone, cannot cause a decomposition of
any portion of its substance.   For were
such a change produced by any vital
action, the part thus deprived of vitality,
would be exfoliated,  and  its loss repair-
ed by the formation of new bone, which
never happens ;  and, hence, the author
is led to conclude  that the  vital powers
of the teeth are too weak to  set  up an
action capable of effecting the decom-
position, exfohation,  or  restoration of
any portion  of their substance.   Were
their  living powers  more active, it is
probable that  their diseases  would be
more analogous to those of other bone.
  If inflammation of their bony struc-
ture, then, is not the cause of the decay
of these organs, how is the disease pro-
duced 1  This question can only be an-
swered in one way.   It is the result of
the action of external chemical agents,
and this explanation  of the cause is not
based upon mere hypotheses.   It is sup-
ported by facts which cannot be suc-
cessfully controverted. It is well known,
that the fluids of the mouth, especially
 
CAR                112               CAR
the mucous, when in a vitiated condi- i
tion,  are capable of  decomposing the
enamel of teeth  not possessed of more
than  ordinary density.  The truth of
this  assertion is demonstrated by the
fact that dead teeth, and  the crowns of
human teeth, or those of animals, when
employed as substitutes for  the loss of
the natural organs, are as liable to decay
 as living teeth, and the decayed part in
 the one, exhibits about the same charac-
 teristics that  it does in the other.  The
 same is true, too, with regard to all ar-
 tificial  teeth  constructed from bone of
 any sort or ivory.  If the disease was
 dependent  upon any vital  operation,
 neither  dead  teeth nor  dental substi-
 tutes, composed of bone, would ever de-
 cay.   But  inasmuch  as they do, it is
 reasonable  to suppose that  the  cause
 which produces  it in the one case, is
 capable of producing it in the other.
    Inflammation may influence the sus-
 ceptibility of a tooth to the action of the
 causes which produce decay, and even
 the appearance of the decayed part, but
 it is not the immediate cause of the dis-
 ease.
   But, it may be /asked, if caries be pro-
 duced by the action of external  corro-
sive agents, how is it that the disease
sometimes commences within the bony
structure of a tooth, and makes consid-
erable progress there, before any indica-
tions of its existence are observed ex-
ternally?  We answer,  it never  does j
commence internally; it always attacks
the external surface, sometimes the ena-
mel first, but most frequently the bone
beneath the indentations on the grinding
surfaces  of the bicuspides and molares,
and on the approximal sides of the teeth,
where this outer covering is frequently
so  fractured  by the  pressure of the or-
gans against each other, that the fluids
of the mouth find ready  access to the
subjacent osseous tissue.   Decay  may
be gradually going on  here for months
and even years without  any manifest
signs  of its existence; and the com-
mencement of the disease in these places
 has led many to suppose that it had its
 origin within the osseous structure.
   A thorough investigation of this sub-
 ject,  would, we  should suppose, con-
 vince any one, that caries always com-
 mences externally.  If it commenced in
 the interior  or within the bony tissue,
 as is asserted by some English writers,
 "the sphere of usefulness," as is very
 justly remarked by Dr.  Fitch, "on the
 part of the surgeon dentist," would be,
 "to say the least of it, extremely limited.
 For if their observations," alluding to
 those of  Hunter, Fox, Koecker and
 other  European  writers, "are true, this
 disease, in its commencement, in one-
 half of the cases, is entirely out of the
 reach of medical aid."
    But a still more absurd and ridiculous
 theory in regard to the cause of the dis-
 ease is advanced  by Mr. Charles Bew.
 He attributes it to the stoppage of the
 circulation in the organs, by the lateral
 pressure of the teeth against each other."
    The  exposure  of the teeth, too, to
 sudden changes of temperature, as from
 heat to cold, or cold  to heat, has been
 regarded almost from time immemorial
 as a cause of caries.  The popular be-
 lief that cold is a cause of dental caries,
 is traced back to Hippocrates, who, in
 mentioning  the parts of the body that
 are injuriously affected by it, includes
 the teeth.*
   M.  Ribe endeavors  to prove that hot
 food is a cause of caries; because "man
 is  the only  animal accustomed to  hot
 food, and almost the only animal affected
 with carious teeth." Had he instituted a
 comparison  between  the teeth of man
 and of brutes, and between the solvent
 agents  to which they are respectively
 exposed, he  might,  doubtless, have
 traced  the decay of the human teeth to
 its proper cause.
  'The Indians of North America," re-
marks  M.  Tillaeus, "knew  nothing of
the inconvenience of carious teeth  and
  * Frigidum
            inirnicum ossibus,  denlibus,
nereis,  cerebro,  spinali medulla:  cajidura
          Aph. sec. v.—par. 18,
vero utile. 
CAR
113
CAR
debilitated stomachs, until after the in-
troduction of tea amongst them." From
this, one might suppose that tea caused
the teeth to decay, and that dyspepsia
was mainly attributable to its use.
  The  decay  of the  teeth  of  these
people, since  the  introduction of tea
amongst them, may, however, be much
more plausibly accounted for.  The sus-
ceptibility of these organs to the action
of such  causes as produce the disease,
have been  greatly increased by the im-
paired state of their constitutional health,
occasioned, since this time, by the use
of spirituous hquors, and the luxuries
common to civilized life, in which they
have indulged.
  Particular sorts of diet, too, such, for
example, as animal food, are said to ex-
ercise an unhealthy influence  upon the
teeth.  In  proof of the assertion, it  is
stated,  that Indian  nations, who  live
principally upon vegetables,  scarcely
over have a tooth to decay.   But the
same may also be said of those nations
who subsist chiefly on animal diet, and
who enjoy an equal degree of constitu-
tional health.   Savage  and barbarous
people  are usually  possessed of better
teeth than those of civihzed nations, be-
cause their bodies are not enervated by
luxurious hving.  So far as diet is capa-
ble of affecting the health of the body,
it may be considered as an indirect cause
of  caries;  for the health of the child is
not always dependent on the health of
the parent, and, to the absence  of con-
stitutional disease during childhood, the
period  when the teeth of second denti-
tion are being formed, is attributable the
soundness of the teeth of savages.
   With regard to the direct action which
animal food is capable of exerting upon
the teeth, even in a state of putrefaction,
 it is, unquestionably, less  hurtful than
vegetable substances. The fibres of ani-
 mal matter, it is true, may be retained
 longer  between  the teeth than particles
 of vegetables, and  by remaining there
 until they undergo chemical decomposi-
 tion, and by irritating the gums and ab-
       10*
sorbing and retaining the  secretions  of
the mouth, until they become vitiated,
may thus indirectly contribute to the de-
cay of these organs.
  Those parts of the teeth that are cov-
ered with a thick smooth enamel, are,
in the first instance,  never attacked by
caries, unless the enamel has previously
sustained some injury; and it is not ne-
cessary that the injury  should be very
conspicuous, in order  to permit agents
capable of producing the disease to pass
through it to the subjacent bone; they
may be of so subtile a nature as to be able
to penetrate even a very small fracture.
   The existence of an acid in the mouth,
capable of  decomposing  the  teeth,  is
conclusively proven by Dr. S. K. Mitch-
ell, in a letter addressed by him to T. C.
Hope, M. D., of Edinburgh, dated Oc-
tober 10th, 1796, and  the fact may be
demonstrated by a very simple experi-
ment,  which  consists in  moistening a
a piece of blue paper, dyed with turn-
sole, with  the fluids of this cavity, ob-
tained from between  the  teeth,  where
they have been retained until they have
become vitiated. If this be done, the pa-
per will be  turned red. If, then, these
fluids, when in a vitiated  condition, are
possessed  of acid qualities, they must
necessarily exert  a  deleterious  action
upon  the  teeth, by  decomposing and
breaking  down their  calcareous mole-
cules, or in other words, causing their
decay.
   The acid detected  by  Dr.  Mitchell
was the septic, (nitrous,)  but the  acetic,
lactic, oxalic,  muriatic and uric have
been detected  in the  saliva,  in certain
states  of the general health.  Donne.
who has  analyzed  the  fluids  of  the
mouth with great care, says, the  saliva,
"in its normal state," is alkaline, but
that "the secretion of the mucous mem-
brane  of the mouth  is  acid."*  It is
highly probable, therefore, that the acids
which have been detected in the  first of
 these fluids, may have been principally
derived from the latter.   Acidity of the
      * Course de Microscope, p. 209. 
               CAR              .11

sahva may, however, occur in certain
morbid conditions of the general system.
Donne says, he has observed it in pa-
tients affected with gastritis, and in chil-
dren with aphthae. It is to the action of
these acids upon those parts of the teeth,
where they are long retained, that caries
is principally attributable.
  The doctrine  that the decay of the
teeth is the result of the action of exter-
nal corrosive agents, was first distinctly
promulgated  to the dental profession in
this country, about the year  1821,  by
Drs. L. S. and Eleazar Parmly. These
agents may consist of menstrua, formed
by  the decomposition or  acetous  fer-
mentation of the remains of certain ali-
ments, lodged  in  the interstices of the
teeth, or of the fluids of  the mouth, es-
pecially the  mucous, in a vitiated or
acidulated condition, or of acids admin-
istered during  sickness, or  used as con-
diments.   The author is aware, that ac-
cording to  the  tables of elective attrac-
tions, there are but four acids, namely,
the oxalic, sulphuric, tartaric and suc-
cinic, which precede the phosphoric in
their affinity for lime—hence  it may be
argued, that none of the other acids are
capable of decomposing  the teeth, or of
affecting them in any other way preju-
dicially,  but daily  observation proves
the contrary.  By a series of interesting
experiments   performed   by  Dr.  A.
Westcott, in 1843, assisted by Mr. Dal-
rymple, it is proven that nearly all the
acids, both  mineral and vegetable, act
readily upon the teeth.   But the author
is disposed to believe that caries of the
the teeth results  more  frequently from
the action of some acid contained in the
salivary or mucous fluids of the mouth
than from acids used in sickness  or as
condiments, or even such as may be
generated by the acetous  fermentation
of  particles of  certain  kinds of food
lodged about the teeth.
  This theory of the cause of dental ca-
ries, explains the rationale  of the treat-
ment at present adopted for arresting its
progress.  By the removal of the decom-
                 CAR

posed part and filling the cavity with an
indestructible  material, the presence of
those agents, upon the chemical action
of which the disease  depends, is pre-
vented, and the further progress of the
decay arrested.
  Among the indirect  causes of caries,
the following may be  enumerated: de-
positions  of tartar upon the teeth;  a
febrile  or irritable state of the body; a
mercurial diathesis of the general system;
artificial teeth, improperly inserted, or of
bad materials; roots of teeth; irregular-
ity in the arrangement of the teeth; too
great a pressure of the teeth against each
other; and, in short, every thing that is
productive of irritation to the alveolar
and dental membranes, or gums.
Differences in  the Liability of Different
            Teeth to Decay.
  All teeth are not equally liable to de-
cay, or  in  other words,  not equally
susceptible to the action of the causes
that produce the  disease.  Teeth that
are well  formed, well arranged, and
of a compact and close texture, seldom
decay, and even when they are attack-
ed by caries, the progress of the disease
is less rapid than  it  is  in  imperfectly
formed teeth, or teeth which are of a soft
texture, or irregularly arranged.
  The  dentistry, shape,  and arrange-
ment of the teeth, are influenced by the
state of the general health  and that of
the mouth, during the  time of their ossi-
fication.  If, at this period, all the func-
tions of the body are healthily perform-
ed, these organs will be compact in their
structure, perfect in their shape, and re-
gular in their  arrangement.
  But, if on the  other hand, the body,
or any part  of  it, and especially the
mouth, be morbidly affected, the teeth
will be more or less imperfect, and con-
sequently less capable, than they other-
wise would be, of resisting the causes of
decay, to which all teeth are, necessarily
exposed.
  An increased action in one portion of
the system, is generally followed by a di-
4 
CAR
115
CAR
minished one in some other part; thus, 1
gastritis is usually produced by consti-
pation of the bowels:  puerperal fever,
by a diminished action in the heart, and
an increased action in the uterus, &c.
Hence, we may conclude, that if the
body, at an early age, be morbidly excit-
ed, its functions will be  languidly per-
formed;  the process  of  assimilation
checked;  the regular and healthy sup-
ply of bony matter, stopped;  and that,
consequently, the  teeth which are then
formed, will be defective.  Other parts
of the body, in  which constant changes
are going on, if thus affected at these
early periods, may afterwards recover;
but if the teeth are badly formed, they
must ever after continue so, because of
their low degree of organization, and,
consequently, be  more liable to decay
 than those that are perfect.
   "That the teeth acquire this disposi-
 tion," says Mr. Fox, "to decay from
 some want of healthy action during their
 formation seems  to be  proved by the
 common observation, that they  become
 decayed in pairs; that is, those which
 are formed at the same time, being in a
 similar state of imperfection, have not
 the power to resist the causes of the dis-
 ease, and,  therefore,  nearly  about the
 same period of time, exhibits signs of de-
 cay; while those which  have been
 formed  at  another time, when  a more
 healthy action has  existed, have  re-
 mained perfectly sound to the end  of
 life."
   Most writers are of the opinion, that
 the capability  of the  teeth to resist the
 various causes of decay, is  sometimes
 weakened by a change brought  about in
 their physical condition  through the
 agency  of certain remote causes, such
 as the profuse administration  of mer-
 cury, the existence of  fevers,  and all
 severe constitutional disorders.
   Mr. Fox says,  "He has had occasion
 to  observe,  that great changes take
 place in the  economy  of the  teeth in
 consequence  of continued fever; and
 that the decay of the teeth is often the
consequence of certain states of the con-
stitution."
  Mr. Bell remarks: "That amongst the
remote  causes,  (of decay,)  are  those
which produce a deleterious change  in
the constitution of the teeth, subsequent
to their formation, one  of the most ex-
tensive in its effects is  the use of mer-
cury.  To the profuse administration of
this remedy in tropical diseases, we may,
I think, in a great measure, attribute the
injury which a residence in hot climates
so frequently inflicts on the teeth.
  Severe  constitutional disorders, and
the  administration of  certain kinds  of
medicine, do not, as Mr.  Fox and Mr.
Bell suppose, act directly upon the teeth,
by  altering their physical condition and
thus rendering them more liable to dis-
ease; but they exert an  indirect influ-
ence upon them, for, as they impair the
general health,  the secretions  of  the
mouth are changed and rendered more
obnoxious to the organs.
   The  following is the  result of the
author's observations upon this subject:
The gums  and alveolar processes are
sometimes destroyed by the use of mer-
 cury, while all the teeth loosen and drop
 out, without being at all decayed.  The
 teeth of persons, in whom a  mercurial
 diathesis has been for a long time kept
 up, or who have been for years suffer-
 ing from dyspepsia, phthisis, fevers, or
 other severe constitutional disorders,  of-
 ten continue to be perfectly sound, while
 other teeth, under similar circumstan-
 ces, frequently decay.   Now,  all  this
 goes to prove, not that changes are effect-
 ed  in  the organization  of  the teeth,
 whereby their predisposition to decay is
 increased, but that there are differences
 in the capabilities of different teeth to re-
 sist the action of the acrid secretions of
 the mouth,  caused  by  the affections
 which have just been enumerated.
    The predispositions of teeth to decay,
 may, however,  be increased by improp-
 er dental operations,  as injudicious fil-
 ing, careless plugging, &c.
    The  formation,  arrangement,  and 
CAR
116
CAR
 physical condition of the  teeth  are,
 sometimes, influenced by an hereditary
 diathesis of the general system,  or of
 the parts concerned in their production,
 and that a  morbid condition of the sys-
 tem, either on the  part of the father or
 mother, often predisposes their progeny
 to  like affections, is a principle fully re-
 cognized in pathology, and  a  fact of
 which we have many fearful proofs.
   Mr. Bell, in treating of what he calls
 the hereditary predisposition of the teeth
 to decay, remarks:  "That it often hap-
 pens that this tendency exists in either
 the whole or a great part of a family of
 children, where one of the parents had
 been similarly affected; and this is true
 to so great an extent, that I have com-
 monly seen the same  tooth, and  even
 the same part of  a tooth,  affected in
 several individuals of the family, and at
 about the same age. In other instances
 where there are many children, amongst
 whom  there existed a distinct division
 into two portions, some resembling the
 father, and some the mother, in features
 and constitution, I have observed the
 corresponding  differences in the teeth,
 both as it regards their form and texture,
 and their tendency to decay."
  Conclusive  proofs, that  there  is an
 hereditary tendency in  the teeth to de-
 cay, are almost daily presented  to the
 dental practitioner.  Yet, we think it is
 occasioned not by the transmission from
 the parent to the chdd of any peculiarity
 of action in the teeth themselves, but of a
 similarity of action in the parts concerned
 in their production, so that the teeth of
 the child are, in form and structure, like
 those of the parent whom it most resem-
 bles, and from whom it has inherited the
 diathesis. The teeth of the child being
 thus shaped like those of the parent,
 possessed of a like degree of density, and,
 in most  instances,  simflarly arranged,
 are  equally liable to disease, and when
 exposed to the action of the same causes,
 are  affected in a like manner, and, gen-
erally, at about the same period of life.
Such being  the fact, is it unreasonable
 to conclude, that judicious and  early
 attention may so influence the formation
 and arrangement of the teeth, as greatly
 to lessen their liability to disease.  It is
 to the differences in the physical condi-
 tion and manner of arrangement of these
 organs, in different  individuals, and in
 the same mouth, that the differences in
 their liability to decay, are attributable.
   CA'RIOUS.  Affected with caries.
   CARLl'NA. The name of a genus
 of plants.
   Carlina Acanthifolia.   The wild
 artichoke.
   Carlina Acaulis. The carline thistle.
   CARLO  SANCTO.   St. Charles'
 root.
   CARMEN.   A verse;  a  charm; an
 amulet.
   CARMINANTIA.  See  Carmina-
 tive.
   CARMIN'ATIVE.   Carminativus;
 from carmen, a verse, or charm; be-
 cause  their operation was ascribed by
 the  ancients to a charm.  Medicines
 which allay pain and dispel flatus from
 the alimentary canal.
   CARMINE.  A beautiful  red  pig-
 ment prepared from cochineal.
   CARNABA'DIUM. Caraway-seed.
   CARNEY   COLUMNS.   The
 fleshy fasciculi in  the ventricles of the
 heart.
   CARNEOUS.  Carneus;  carnosus;
 from caro, flesh.  Fleshy. Resembling
 flesh.
   CARNIC'ULA. Diminutive of caro,
 flesh.  The gums.  A small fleshy sub-
 stance.
   CARNIFICATION.   Carnificatw;
 from caro, flesh, and fieri, to become.
 Becoming flesh; conversion into a sub-
 stance resembling flesh.
   CARNIFORMIS. From caro, flesh,
 and forma, likeness.   Having the ap-
 pearance of flesh; usually applied to an
 abscess, having a hardened orifice.
   CARNIV'ORA.   An  order  of ani-
mals which subsist on flesh.
   CARNIVOROUS. From caro, flesh,
and voro, I eat.  Feeding on flesh. Any 
CAR
117
CAR
thing which eats flesh.   Apphed, also,
to substances which destroy  fleshy ex-
crescences.
  CARNOSUS.  Carneous; fleshy.
  CARO.   Caro carnis.  Flesh;  the
red part or  belly of a muscle; the pulp
of fruit.
  CAROLINA PINK.  Spigelia mari-
landica.
  CAROTID.   From  xapow, to cause
to sleep.  The carotid artery is so called,
because when it is tied  with  a ligature,
the  animal becomes comatose.    See
Carotid Artery.
  Carotid Artery. Arteria carotidea.
A large artery on each  side of the neck
for carrying the blood to the head.  The
right arises from the arteria  innomina-
tum, and the left, from the arch of the
aorta.   Each is divided into an external
and internal.  The  superior thyroideal,
the sublingual, the inferior, external and
internal maxillary, the  occipital, the ex-
ternal auditory,  and the  temporal, are
branches of the external carotid.  The
anterior  cerebral, the posterior, the cen-
tral artery of the optic nerve, and the
internal orbital, are given oft' within the
cavity of the cranium  by the internal
 carotid.
   Carotid Canal.   A  canal in the
 temporal bone  traversed by the carotid
 artery, and several nervous filaments.
   Carotid Foramina.  The foramina
 at  each extremity of the carotid canals.
 They are distinguished into external and
 internal.
    CARPATHICUM   BALSAMUM.
 See Pinus Cembra.
    CARPHOLOGTA.   From xapfo;,
 the nap of cloths, and Xtyu, I pluck.
 Delirious  picking of the bed clothes, a
 dangerous symptom in disease.
    CARPOBAL'SAMUM.   From xap-
 rtoj, fruit,  and paxaaixov,  balsam.  See
 Amyris Gileadensis.
    CARPIAL. Belonging to the carpus,
    CARPOS.  Fruit.
    CARPUS.  Kaprtoj, the wrist.   The
 wrist.
    CARTHAMUS.   From xc&upw, to
purge,  The  pharmacopoeial name of
the saffron  flower.   See Carthamus
Tinctorius.
  Carthamus Tinctorius.  The  sys-
tematic name of the saffron  flower, or
bastard saffron.
  CARTILAGE.  Cartilago. A white,
hard  and elastic  part  of  the body,
which in the fetus serves as a substitute
for bones, but in the adult  are found
only in the joints, and at the extremi-
ties of the ribs.
  Cartilages, Interarticular.  Car-
tilages situated within the joints.
  Cartilages Articular.  Cartilages
which surround surfaces that  are  in
contact with each other.
  CARTILAGINOUS.  Cartilagineus.
Partaking of the nature of,  or resemb-
ling cartilage.
   CARTILAGO ANNULARIS. The
ring-like, or cricoid cartilage.
   Cartilago  Arytjenoidea.    Two
cartilages of the larynx.
   Cartilago Cricoidea.   The  cri-
coid  cartilage.   A  cartilage of the la-
rynx, situated between the thyroid and
arytenoid cartilages.
   Cartilago Ensiformis.   The ensi-
formis cartilage attached to  the lowest
part of the sternum.
   CARUM.   Kapoj,  from  Caria,  a
province in Asia.  Caraway.  The
pharmacopoeial name of the plant cara-
way.
   CARUN'CULA. Caruncle.
   Caruncula Lachrymales.  A small,
red, glandular body, at the inner  angle
 of each eye.
   Carunculje Mamillares.  The ex-
 tremities of the lactiferous tubes in the
 nipple.
   Carunculje  Myrtiformes.   Sev-
 eral small reddish tubercles near the ori-
 fice of the vagina,  supposed to be the
 remains of the hymen.
   Carunculje Papillares.    The pa-
pillae within  the pelvis of the kidneys.
   CARUNCLE.  Caruncula.  Diminu-
 tive of caro, flesh.   A small fleshy ex-
 crescence. 
CAS               118                CAT
  CA'RUON.  See Carum.
  CARUS. Kapoj, from xapa, the head,
as being the part affected.  Insensibility
and sleep.  Coma.
  Carus Apoplexia.   Apoplexy.
  Carus Asphyxia.  Asphyxia.
  Carus Catalepsia.  Catalepsy.
  Carus Ecstasis.  Ecstasis.
  CARYOPHYL'LUS.   The  clove
tree.  The name of a genus of plants.
  Caryophyllus Aromaticus Ameri-
canus.   Myrtus Pimenta.
  Caryophyllus Hortensis.  Dian-
thus caryophyllus.
  CASCARIL'LA.  See  Croton Cas-
carilla.
  CASCHU.   See Catechu.
  CASEUS.  Cheese.
  CASSIA.  The name of a genus of
plants.  Also, the cassia bark.
  Cassia Caryophyllata.   Myrtus
caryophyllata.  The clove bark tree.
  Cassia Fistula. Cassia nigra;  cassia
fistularis.   The purging cassia.
  Cassia Senna.  The systematic name
of the plant which affords senna.
  CASSIUS'   PRECIPITATE.    A
purple powder used to paint in enamel.
The powder of Cassius.
  CASTRILLO,  F.  Mart.   Author
of  a work on  Dentition, pubhshed at
Valladolid, 1557, and  at  Madrid,  in
1570.
  CASSUMU'NIAR.  A bitter aroma-
tic root, brought in irregular slices from
the East  Indies.
  CASTING.  In Dental Surgery, run-
ning fused lead, tin, zinc or brass, into
a mould made  in sand  with  a plaster
transfer of any portion, or  the whole of
the alveolar border and so  many of the
teeth as may be remaining in it, and pal-
atine arch when it  becomes necessary
to adapt a plate to it.  The castings em-
ployed in mechanical dentistry are some-
times made by pouring fused metal di-
rectly upon the plaster model, and after-
wards into the mould thus formed.   See
Metallic  Models.
   CASTOR.   The name of a genus of
animals.  Also,  a peculiar concrete sub-
stance, having a strong and unpleasant
odor, found in bags near the rectum of
the beaver.
  Castor Fiber.  Fiber ; canisponticus.
The beaver which furnishes the castor.
  Castor Oil.   See Ricinus.
  CASTO'REUM.   Castor fiber.
  CASTRATION.   Castratio.  The
operation for the  removal of the  testi-
cles.
  CASTRATUS. One deprived of his
testicles.
  CATABLE'MA.   From xataSaXXu,
to throw around.  The outermost ban-
dage or fillet which secures the rest.
  CATACAU'MA. From xataxaiu, to
burn.  A burn or scald.
  CATACAU'SIS.  From xotfaxcuw, to
burn.  Combustion.
  Catacausis Ebriosa.   From xata-
xcwco, to burn, and ebriosus, full of strong
liqu'or.  General  combustibility of the
body.
  CATAC'LASIS.   From xataxXa*,
to break or distort. Distorted eyehds.
  CATACLEIS. From xata, beneath,
xXni, the clavicle.   The first  rib be-
neath the clavicle. Also, applied to the
acromion, and  the connection  of the
sternum with the ribs.
   CATACLYS'MUS.   Cataclysma;
from xataxXvgtiv, to submerge, inundate.
A clyster.  Also,  applied to  a  shower
bath and ablution.
  CATAG'MA.  From xata, and ayw,
to break. A fracture.
  CATAGMAT'ICS. From xatayfia,
a fracture.  Remedies supposed to pro-
mote the formation of callus.
  CATALEPSY. From xataXafiSavu,
to seize, to hold.  Catalepsy.  A disease
characterized by sudden suspension of
motion and sensation.
  CATALPA.   A  tree of the family '
bignoniaceas.
  CATALAN.  A French dentist, and
author of a Memoir, Report, and Ob-
servations,  upon  the apparatus neces-
sary to  correct the  deformity which
consists in the under jaw advancing be-
fore the  upper,  pubhshed  at Paris, 
CAT
119
CAT
1826.  The apparatus alluded to here,
is a most valuable invention for correct-
ing certain  varieties of irregularity  of
the teeth. It consists  of a kind of gut-
tered palate and inclined plane.
  CATAMASSE'SIS. From xatfajtatf-
saofiai, to manducate.   Grinding of the
teeth, and biting  of the tongue, as is
often the case in convulsions and epi-
lepsy.
  CATAME'NIA.    The menses,  or
monthly discharge from the uterus of fe-
males between the ages of fourteen or
fifteen and forty-five.
  CATANTLE'MA.  From xatavtxau,
to pour upon.  Ablution with water, or
a medicated  fluid, also, a fomentation.
  CATAPH'ORA.   From xata^tp^,
to make sleepy.   A  term  applied by
some to a disposition  to  sleep, and by
others to a profound sleep.
  CATAPHRACTA.  From xofofp-
affcjw, I  fortify.  A bandage  apphed to
the thorax and shoulders.
  CATAPLASM.   Cataplasma,  from
xataitxaoaa, to  spread like a plaster.
A poultice or plaster.
  CATAPLAS'MA.   A cataplasm.
   Cataplasma  Acetosje.   A  sorrel
poultice.
   Cataplasma Altjminis.  An  alum
plaster.
   Cataplasma  Conii.    A hemlock
poultice.
   Cataplasma Dauci.  A carrot poul-
tice.
   Cataplasma Fermenti.   A  yeast
poultice.
   Cataplasma Lini.  A  linseed poul-
tice.
   Cataplasma  Sinapis.   A mustard
plaster.
   CATAPLEX'IS.  From xata, and
rtXti<s6u, to  strike.  The act of being
struck with amazement.   Also,  depri-
vation of sensation in any of the organs
or members of the body.
   CATAPSYXTS.  From xato^vx",
I  refrigerate.   Coldness  of the  body
without shivering.
   CATAPTO'SIS.  From xataiimta,
to fall down.  Falling down, as in apo-
plexy or epilepsy.  Apphed, also,  to
the sudden restoration  of a paralytic
limb.
  CATARACT.    Cataracta,  from
xatapassu, to confound, or disturb.   A
cataract.   Loss  of sight, caused  by
opacity of the  crystalline lens,  or its
capsules, which  prevents  the  rays  of
light from passing to the optic nerve.
  CATARRH.   Catarrhus, from xat-
appsw, I flow down.   Increased  secre-
tion and  discharge of  fluid from the
mucous membrane of the nose, fauces
and bronchia, accompanied with  fever,
cough, sneezing, loss of appetite and
lassitude.  It sometimes assumes an epi-
demic form, prevailing very generally
throughout a whole country.
  CATARRHCE'CUS.  From xatap-
psa, I flow from.  A catarrhal affection.
  CATARTIS'MUS.  From xatapti-
&iv, to repair, replace.  Coaptation of a
fractured or luxated bone.
  CATASTASIS. From xa^t^i, I
establish.  The state, condition, or con-
stitution of any thing.
   CAT'ECHU.   The various extracts
from the acacia catechu.  It is a power-
ful astringent.
   CATH^E'RESIS.   Exhaustion.
   CATHAR'MA. From xc&upo,  to
remove.  Matters purged from the body,
whether caused by purgatives or  other-
wise.
   CATHARMUS.  From *c£aip«, to
remove.   Purgation.  Apphed also to
the cure of disease by magic.
   CATHARSIS.  From  xa^pw,  to
take away, to purge.  Natural or artifi-
cial purgation by any of the passages.
   CATHARTIC.  Catharticus; from
xa§aipu>, to purge. A medicine  which
when taken  internally increases  the
number of  alvine evacuations.   The
medicines belonging to this class  are
numerous.
  CATHARET'IC. Cathceretica; from
xajkwpw, to remove. Corrosive or caus-
tic subtances used for the destruction of
exuberant granulations, warts, &c. 
CAU
120
CAV
   CATH'ETER.  Catheter. Ka$tt*jp;
 from xa^irifii, to thrust into.  A hollow
 tube to be introduced into the urinary
 bladder, to draw off the water, made of
 silver or elastic gum.
   CATHETERIS'MUS.  From »<gc-
 ttjp, a catheter.  The  introduction of a
 catheter into the bladder.
   CATHID'RYSIS.  From xogcfipvo,
 I  place together.  The reduction  of a
 fracture or dislocation.
   CATHMIA.  Litharge.
   CATHOLTCON.   From xata, and
 oxixoi, universal. A universal medicine,
 or  remedy supposed to  be  capable of
 curing all diseases.
   CATIL'LIA.  A nine ounce weight.
   CAT'LING.  A long, sharp-pointed,
 double-edged knife.
   CATOCATHARTIC. Catocathar-
 ticus; from xata, downward, and xc£-
 a*pw,  to  purge.  A  medicine  which
 purges downwards.
   CATOCHA GALENI.  Catalepsy.
   CATOCHUS.  From xat«*«, to de-
 tain.  A spasmodic disease by  which
 the body is held  in an upright position.
 Catalepsy.
  CATORETTCUS. Catoretica; from
 xata, downwards, and  paw, I flow.
 Purgative  medicines.
  CATOT'ICA. Catoticus; from xata,
 below.  Diseases which effect internal
 surfaces, and produce a morbid  condi-
 tion of the fluids.
  CADUA  EQJJI'NA.   The  spinal
 marrow at its termination  about the se-
 cond lumbar vertebra, gives off a large
number of nerves, which, when unravel-
 ed, resemble a horse's tail, and hence the
 name.
  CAUL.  The  omentum.
  CAULE'DON.   From  xcwaoj,  a
stalk.   A transverse fracture.
  CAU'LIFLOWER    EXCRESC-
 ENCE.  Excresentia  syphilitica.  An
excrescence which  occurs in syphilitic
diseases,  chiefly  about the anus and
vulva.
  CAUMA.  Kau/to, heat, from xotw,
to  burn.  The heat  of  the body  in
 fever, or the  heat  of the atmosphere.
 Inflammatory fever.
   CAUSE.  That  which produces an
 effect.   An act preceding another and
 in which the former is necessary to the
 latter.
   CAU'SIS.  From x<u», to burn. To
 burn.   Act of combustion.
   CAUSO'MA.  From xcuw, to burn.
 Great heat.  Inflammation.
   CAUSTIC.  Causticum; fromxatw,
 to burn. A substance which, when ap-
 phed to the body, produces a burning
 sensation, and disorganizes animal sub-
 stances by destroying their texture.
   Caustic Alkali.  Pure alkalies.
   Caustic Barley. Cevadilla.
   Caustic, Lunar.  Argentum  nitra-
 tum.
   Caustic Volatile Alkali. Ammo-
 nia.
  CAUSTICITY.  Having a caustic
 property.
  CAUTERIZATION.  The act of
 cauterizing.
  CAUTERY.  Cauterium; from xam,
 to burn.  An instrument used for burn-
 ing or disorganizing the  part to  which
 it is apphed.  Formerly, cauteries were
 divided into actual and potential, but it
 is now restricted to the red-hot iron.
 Potential was then apphed to  kah pu-
 rum, or potassa, but this term is now
 used synonymously with caustic.
  CAVA, VENA. A name given to the
 two great veins of the bo% which meet
 at the right auricle of the heart.
  CAVER'NA.   From  cavus, hollow.
 A cavern, an antrum.  Apphed  to the
 female organs of generation.
  CAVERNOUS.   Cavernosas.  Fill-
 ed with small caverns or cavities.
  CAVITAS PULP^E.   The  pulp
 cavity of a tooth. See Dental Cavity.
  CAVITY.  Cavitas, from cavus, hol-
low.  Any hollow.
  CAVUM  DENTIS.    See Dental
Cavity.
  Cavum Narium.  The nares.
  Cavum Oris.  The mouth.
  CAVUS.  A hollow;  a cavity. 
CEM
121
CEM
   CEANOTHUS.    The name of a
 genus of plants.
   Ceanothus Americanus.  New Jer-
 sey tea.
   CEASMA.  From  xcu, to split, or
 divide.  A fissure.
   CED'MATA.   KeSfmta.   Pains in
 the joints, particularly those of the hips.
   CEDRELE'UM.  From xeSpos, the
 cedar, and iXawv, oil.  The oil of cedar.
   CEDAR.  Pinus cedrus.
   CE'DRIA.  Cedrium.
   CEDRIUM. The cedar, or cedar tree.
   CEDRUS. From Kedron, a valley
 where this tree grows.   See  Pinus Ce-
 drus.
   Cedrus Americana. The arbor vita?.
   Cedrus Baccifera.   Savine.
   CEI'RIA.   From xcipa, to  abrade.
 The tape-worm is  so  called from  its
 abrading the intestines.
   CELASTRUS.   Ceanothus  Ameri-
 canus; New  Jersey  tea;  red-root.  It
 possesses bitter and astringent proper-
 ties.
   CELE.  Kt]Xrj, a tumor; a swelling.
 A tumor caused by the protrusion of a
 soft part, and  hence  the compound
 terms, hydrocele, bubonocele.
   CELL. Cella. A cavity, or chamber.
   Cell, Calcigerous. See  Calciger-
 ous Cells.
   Cell, Germinal. See Cytoblast.
   Cell, Nucleated.   See Cytoblast.
   CEL'LULAR.   Cellularis.   Com-
 posed of  small cells.
   Cel'lular Membrane.  Membrana
 cellubsa.  Cellular tissue.
   Cellular System.  The  whole  of
 the cellular tissue of the body.
   CEL'LULE. Cellula; diminutive of
 cella, a cell.   A small cell.
   CELOTOMTA.  From xrp,n, a her-
 nia, and  tefiva, to cut.  The operation
 by cutting for the cure of hernia.
  CEMENT. The name of substances
employed  by  chemists  for  uniting
things  together.  It has also  been ap-
plied to amalgam, a substance used by
some  dentists, for  filling  teeth.  See
Amalgam.
          11
   Cement for  the  Teeth,  Oster-
 maier's.  An earthy  compound  pro-
 posed by M. O.  Ostermaier for filling
 teeth, consisting of thirteen  parts  of
 quicklime, chemically  pure, and finely
 pulverized, promptly mixed with twelve
 parts  anhydrous phosphoric acid, ob-
 tained by the combustion of phosphorus
 in dry air.  "A  sufficient quantity  of
 this powder, which has become moist
 by the process of mixing, is then in-
 troduced into the cavity  of the tooth,
 previously dried by means  of blotting
 paper, care being taken to fill the cavity
 properly, and  to level and pohsh the
 outer  surface,  which  is  afterwards
 moistened with a little water."* If more
 than two  minutes  elapse  after  this
 mixture  is made, the inventor says it  is
 unfit for use, but when used according
 to the directions, he asserts that it ren-
 ders a carious tooth similar to a sound
 one; but experience has failed to con-
 firm his assurances  of its value.
  CEMENTUM.  Cement.  One of
 the  substances or parts of a tooth.   It
 covers the fang or root and has been
 traced over the enamel; it is thickest at
 the extremity of the root, and becomes
 gradually thinner as it  approaches the
 neck of the tooth.   Purkinje and Faen-
 kel mention one case which came  un-
 der their observation, where  it covered
 the enamel of the teeth of an old man,
 and  Mr.  Nasmyth is of opinion that  it
 always envelops the crowns of the teeth.
 The author,  however,  has never been
 able to detect it, except upon the roots
 of the teeth.  Cementum also joins to-
 gether the plates  of compound teeth,
 like those of the elephant, and fills up
 the cavities and folds in the teeth of ru-
 minants.  It is of a cellular texture and
 vascular.
  According  to professor Owen,  ce-
mentum, "always closely corresponds
in texture with the osseous tissue of the
same animal, and wherever it occurs of
sufficient thickness, as  upon the teeth

       • Herb, und Winckl. Jahrb. 
CEM
122
CEM
of the horse, sloth or ruminants, it is i
also  traversed, like  bone,  by vascular
canals.  In  reptiles  and mammals, in
which the animal basis of the bones of
the skeleton is excavated by minute ra-
diated cells, forming with their contents
the 'corpuscles of Purkinje,' these are
likewise present,  of similar size  and
form,  in the 'cement,' and are its chief
characteristic  as a  constituent of the
tooth.  The hardening material  of the
cement is  partly segregated and com-
bined with the parietes of the  radiated
cells and canals, and is partly contained
in aggregated grains in the cells,  which
are thus rendered opaque.
   "The relative density of the dentine
and cement, varies according to the pro-
portion of the earthy  material,  and
chiefly of that part  which is combined
with the animal matter in the walls of
the cavities, as compared with the size
and number of the cavities themselves.
In the complex grinders of the elephant,
the masqued boar and the capibara, the
 cement which forms  nearly  half the
 mass of the tooth,  wears down sooner
 than the dentine.
   "The organized structure and micros-
 copic character of the cement, were first
 determined by Purkinje and Faenkel;
 and the acquisition  of these facts led to
 the detection of the tissue in the simple
 teeth of man and carnivorous animals.
 The cement is most conspicuous where
 it invests the fang of the tooth, and in-
 creases in  thickness  as  it  approaches
 the apex of the fang.  The animal con-
 stituent of this part of the cement had
 been recognized by Berzelius, as a dis-
 tinct investment of  the dentine, long be-
 fore the. tissue, of  which it formed the
 basis, was  clearly recognized in simple
 teeth.  Berzelius describes the cemental
 membrane as being less consistent than
 the animal basis of the dentine, but resist-
 ing longer the solvent  action of boiling
 water, and retaining some fine particles
 of the earthy phosphates, when all such
 earth had been extracted  from the den-
 tinal tissue.   Cuvier,  likewise, states
that the cement is dissolved with more
difficulty in acid than the other dental
tissues.  Retzius, however, states that
the earth is  sooner extracted  by acid
from the cement than from the dentine
of the teeth of the horse.
  "In recent mammalian cement the ra-
diated cells, like the dentinal tubes, owe
their whiteness and opacity to the earth
which they contain. According to Ret-
zius,  'numerous tubes, radiate from the
cells, which, being dilated at their point
of commencement, give the cell the ap-
pearance of  an irregular  star.   These
tubes form numerous combinations with
each other, partly direct, and  partly by
means of fine branches of -^L^th to
„i ^^th of an "inch in diameter.
   "The cells often vary  m size, and
some put on the appearance of a canal
or  tube; this is especially seen in re-
cently  formed  cement.    The average
size of the Purkinjian cells in human
cement is T^rth of an inch.  In sec-
tions made transeversely to the axis of
the tooth, it is clearly  seen that these
 cells are arranged in parallel or concen-
 tric striae, of which  some are  more
 clearly and others more faintly visible,
 as if the cement were deposited in fine
 and coherent layers.  The layer of ce-
 ment is found in the deciduous teeth,
 but is relatively thinner,  and the Pur-
 kinjian cells are more irregular.
   "In growing teeth with fangs not ful-
 ly formed, the cement is so thin that the
 Purkinjian cells are not visible; it looks
 like a fine membrane, and has been de-
 scribed as the periosteum of the fangs,
 but it  increases in thickness  with the
 age of the tooth, and is the seat and ori-
 gin of what are called oxostoses of the
 fang, which are wholly composed of it."
 "These growths," says professor Owen,
 "are subject to the formation of abscess,
 and all the other morbid actions  of true
 bone."  In this, however, he is in error,
 and had he  been as thoroughly versed
 in the pathology, as he  is in the phy-
 siology of the  teeth, he never would
 have ventured  an assertion so  wholly 
CEM
123
CEN
 opposed to facts and observation.  The
 annals of medicine do not furnish a sin-
 gle well authenticated case of abscess of
 the cement of a tooth.
   "It is the  presence  of this osseous
 substance,"   says  professor  Owen,
 "which renders many well known ex-
 periments  of  which the  human teeth
 have been the subjects;  such  as their
 transplantation, and adhesion into  the
 combs of cocks, and the  establishment
 of a  vascular connection between  the
 tooth and  the  comb; the appearances
 which the Huntarian specimens of these
 experiments present, and  of the reality
 of which  professor Miiller satisfied
 himself during his visit  to London, are
 no longer  perplexing,  now that  we
 know that the surface of  the tooth,  in
 contact with,  and adhering to the vas-
 cular comb, is composed of a well or-
 ganized tissue, closely resembhng bone.
   "This correspondence of the cement,
 which, when it exists in sufficient quan-
 tity, becomes almost identical with true
 bone, is illustrated by the varieties of
 microscopic structure which the cement
 presents in different classes of animals,
 and which always correspond with  the
 modifications of the osseous tissue of the
 skeleton in those  animals; thus the ce-
 ment in the osseous fishes, in which the
 bone  is  not characterised by the radiat-
 ed calcigerous cells, likewise ceases to
 present that character;  and,  in reptiles
 and  mammals in which the radiated
 cells are present in the bone of the skel-
 eton and in the dental cement, there is a
 close  conformity  as to their size and
 shape in both tissues.
   "The most remarkable modification of
 mammalian cement, is presented by the
 thick  layer of that substance which in-
 vests  the molares of the extinct mega-
 therium; besides abounding in calciger-
 ous cells, it is here traversed by straight,
parallel and occasionally bifurcated me-
dullary canals, arranged with regular in-
tervals, and directed from the exterior of
the tooth somewhat obliquely to the sur-
face of the unvascular dentine, close to
 which they anastomose by loops, cor-
 responding with,  and opposite to those
 formed by the medullary canals of the
 vascular dentine of the same tooth.
   "Under every modification, the ce-
 ment is the most highly organized and
 most vascular of the dental tissues, and
 its chief use is to form the bond of vital
 union between the denser and commonly
 unvascular constituents of the  tooth and
 the bone,  in which the tooth is implant-
 ed.  In a few reptiles, (now extinct,)
 and in the herbivorous mammalia, the
 cement not only invests the exterior of
 the teeth, but penetrates their substance
 in vertical folds, varying in number, form,
 extent, thickness, and degree of complex-
 ity, and contributing to maintain that in-
 equality of the grinding surface of the
 tooth, which is essential to its function as
 an instrument for the cornminution of
 vegetable  substances."
   With regard to the manner of the for-
 mation of the cementum, which is the
 last to appear of the dental tissues, noth-
 ing  positive  is  known.   Raschkow
 thinks it  may be produced by the re-
 mains of the enamel pulp, but as it
 cannot be detected on the crowns of the
 human teeth,  we have great  reason
 for believing that it is secreted by  the
 periosteum, and the fact that it increas-
 es in thickness with age, would seem to
 render this opinion, by far, more  pro-
 bable.
   CEMENTATION.   A   chemical
 process which consists in surrounding a
 sohd  body with the powder of other
 substances, and exposing the  whole to
 a red heat in a closed vessel for a length
 of time.   It is in this way that iron is
 converted into steel.  It is also  a process
 adopted in some of the mints for refining
 gold.  See Gold, refining of.
  CEMENTERIUM.   A crucible.
  CENEANGEIA.     From  xtvoS,
 empty, and ayys to^, a vessel. Deficiency
 of blood in the vessels.
  CENEONES.  The flanks.
  CENIG'DAM.   Ceniplam; cenigo-
tam;  cenipolam.   The name  of an in- 
CEP
124
CER
strument anciently used for opening the
head in epilepsies.
  CENO'SIS.   'From  xtvoj, empty.
General  evacuation;  also, sometimes
applied to inanition.
  CENOTI'CA.  Cenoticus;  from xi-
vaais, evacuation.  Morbid, or excessive
discharges.
   CENT ACRE A.   The name of a
genus of plants.
   Centaurea Behen.   Behen album.
The white behen.
   Centaurea Benedic'ta.  The bless-
 ed or holy thistle.
   Centaurea Calcitra'pa.  The com-
 mon star-thistle, or star knap-weed.
   Centaurea   Centau'rium.    The
 greater centaury.
   Centaurea   Cy'anus.   The  blue-
 bottle.
   Centaurea  Solstitialis.   St. Bar-
 naby's thistle.
   CENTAURY, AMERICAN.   The
 sabbatia angularis.
   Centaury,  European.    Chironia
 centaurium.
   CENTIGRAMME.  From centum,
 a hundred, and ypa^a, gramme.  Centi-
gramma.  The  hundredth part of a
gramme, which is equal to  about the
fifth part of a French grain, 1544. troy.
   CENTIMETRE.   Centimeter.   The
hundredth part  of a metre,  which is
about four lines.  .3937 English inch.
  CENTIPEDE.   From centum,  a
hundred, and pes, foot.   The  name of
the myriapodus  insects of the genus
scolopendra.   The largest, when  full
grown, have from fifty to two hundred
pairs of feet.
  CENTRES, NERVOUS.  Nervous
centres.  The organs, as the brain and
spinal marrow, from whence the nerves
originate.
  CENTRE OF ATTRACTION.—
Centre of gravitation.  The  point to
which bodies tend as  a consequence of
gravitation.
  CEPA.  From xrjttoi, a wool-card,
from the likeness of its roots.  The onion.
The head.
xs^aXtj, the
head.  The fleshy covering of the skull,
also, head-ache.
   CEPHALAGRA'PHIA.  From *,-
^axrj, the head, and ypa^tj, a description.
 Anatomical description of the head.
   CEPHALALGIA.  From x^,
 the head,  and atyoj, pain.  CephaUza.
 Head-ache.
   CEPHALE.   Ktfaxrj.
   CEPHAL'IC.   From
 head.  Pertaining to the head.
   Cephalic Veins.   Vena cephalka.
 The anterior or  outermost vein of the
 arm is so called, because, taking  blood
 from this vein, was supposed to  afford
 relief to affections of the head.
   Cephalic  Remedies.   Medicines,
 or remedies used for the cure of diseases
 of the head.
   CAPHALITIS.   Phrenitis,  or in-
 flammation of the brain.
   CEPHALOMA.  A medullary, or
 encephaloid tumor.
   CEPHALON'OSUS.  From xt^aXr;,
 the head, and voms, a disease.  Febris
 hungarica, a disease which principally
 affects the head.
    CEPHALO-PHARYNGiE'US.—
 From xttyaXri, the  head,  <j>apuy|, the
 pharynx.  Constrictor pharyngis supe-
 rior, a muscle of the head and pharynx.
   CEPHALOPONIA. From xEpaq,
 the head, and rfovoj, pain.  Head-ache.
   CERA.  Wax.  Bees-wax.  A solid
 concrete animal  product,  prepared by
 the bee, and extracted from their combs,
 after the removal of the honey.  When
first obtained from the comb it is called
yellow wax, or cera flava.   It is of a
bright yellow  color when fresh, or re-
cently extracted.  When softened by
the fire, or in warm water, is very mal-
eable and tough, but it becomes brittle
with age and loses its fine  yellow color.
In Dental Prosthesis, it is  used  for the
procurement of impressions of the jaws.
But when used for this purpose it should
always be fresh.
  By softening  and reducing  yellow
wax into thin cakes, and exposing it
CEPHALyEA.  From xt$axrt, the I for a long time to the sun and open air, 
CER
125
CER
 it becomes  white.  This  when melted
 and formed in cakes,  is termed virgin
 or white wax, cera\alba.  The white
 wax, however, is not sq good for taking
 impressions of the mouth,  as the yel-
 low, as it is generally more brittle.
   Cera Alba.   White wax.
   Cera Flava.  Yellow wax.
   Cera Vegetabilis.  Vegetable wax;
 natural wax.
   CE'RATE.  Ceratum.  A  composi-
 tion of wax, oil, or lard.
   CERATO.   From xspaj, a horn.
 Used in  composition, in  the  names of
 muscles.   See Cerato-Glossus.
   Cerato-Glossus.  A muscle of the
 tongue.  See  Hyoglossus.
   Cerato-Hyoideus.   The stylo-hyoi-
 deus muscle.
   CERATOCE'LE.  From x*paj, and
 xrjXtj, tumor.  Hernia  of the cornea, or
 protrusion of the membrane of the aque-
 ous humor  through an opening in  the
 cornea.
   CERATOTOMUS.  The  name of
 a knife invented by Wenzel, for divid-
 ing the transparent cornea, in the opera-
 tion of cataract.
   CERATUM.   Wax.  Cerate.
   Ceratum Calamine.  Ceratumlapi-
 dis  calaminaris;  ceratum  epuloticum.
 Calamine cerate.
   Ceratum  Cantharidis.    Ceratum
 lyttaz.  Cerate of the blistering fly.
   Ceratum Cetacei.   Ceratum sper-
 matis ceti;  ceratum album.   Sperma-
 ceti cerate.
   Ceratum Conii.  Hemlock cerate.
   Ceratum Plumbi Acetatis. Ungu-
 entum cerussoz acetatoz.  Cerate of ace-
 tate of lead.
  Ceratum Plumbi Compositum.  Ce-
 ratum  lithargyri  acetati  compositum.
 Compound cerate of lead.
  Ceratum Resine.   Ceratum resinoz
flavaz ;  ceratum citrinum. Resin cerate.
  Ceratum Sabine.   Savine cerate.
  Ceratum Saponis.  Soap cerate.
  Ceratum Simplex.   Simple cerate.
  CERCA'RLE.   From x*p*oj, a tad.
 A familv of infusoria animalcules, hav-
      11*
 ing an enlarged body with  a  slender
 tail-like appendage, and one of the most
 curious of which is found in salivary
 calculus.  Indeed, M. Mandl asserts
 that the tartar of the teeth consists of
 nothing more than a deposit of the skel-
 etons  of dead  infusoria, agglutinated
 together by dried mucus, very similar
 to  certain earths, which, according to
 M.  Ehrenborg, are composed almost
 wholly of fossil infusoria.
   If the theory of M. Mandl were  cor-
 rect, tartar would be deposited upon all
 teeth alike.   But this  is not the fact.
 Some teeth, as the lower incisores  and
 the outer surfaces of the molares of both
 jaws,  and particularly the upper, are,
 by far,  more liable to have it  deposited
 on them, than any of the other teeth.
 The infusoria found m salivary calculus
 are doubtless  generated in  the mucous
 fluid of the   mouth, which is  always
 mixed more or less abundantly with this
 substance as it  is deposited  upon  the
 teeth.   It is in this way that their pres-
 ence, in the tartar of the teeth,  is to be
 accounted for.
   CERCH'NOS.   From  xtpXa,  to
 wheeze.  Cerchnus.   Wheezing.
   CE'REA.   From cera,  wax.  The
 cerumen aurium, or wax of the ear.
   CEREBELLUM.   Diminutive of
 cerebrum.  The little brain, which   is
 that portion of the medullary mass of
 the cavity  of the  cranium, situated in
 the inferior part of the occipital fossae,
 below the  tentorium.  It is divided by
 a septum into a right and left lobe, and
 like the other part of the brain is com-
 posed of cortical and medullary matter.
  CERE'BRAL.    Cerebralis;  from
 cerebrum, the brain.  Belonging to the
 brain.   Similar to brain.
  Cerebral  Apophysis.  The pineal
 gland.
  Cerebral  Arteries.  The arteries
 of the brain.   There are three on each
 side, namely,  the anterior, or  artery  of
the corpus callosum, the middle, or arteriaz
sylvianoz, and  the posterior,  or posterior
and inferior.  The two first are furnish- 
CER
126
CER
ed by the internal carotid, and the other
by the vertebral.
  Cerebral  Nerves.    The   nerves
which arise within the cranium.
  CERE'BRUM. The brain.  A term
sometimes  applied to the whole of the
contents of the cranium; at other times
only to the upper portion of  the brain.
"The cerebrum is divided into a right
and left hemisphere, vertically separated
from each other, "and inferiorly  into six
lobes,  two anterior,  two middle, and
two posterior; situated within  the cra-
nium,  and  surrounded by the dura and
pia mater, and tunica arachnoidea.  It is
composed of a cortical substance, which is
external; and  a  medullary,  which is
internal. It has three" distinct "cavities
called ventricles; two anterior,  or late-
ral, which are divided from each other
by the  septum  lucidum, and in  each of
which  is the  choroid plexus, formed of
blood-vessels;  the  third  ventricle  is a
space  between the thalami nervorum
opticorum.   The principal prominences
of the  brain are the  corpus callosum, a
medullary eminence, conspicuous upon
laying  aside  the  hemispheres  of   the
brain ;  the  corpora striata, two  striated
protuberances, one in the anterior part of
each lateral ventricle; the thalami nervo-
rum opticorum, two whitish eminences
behind the former," from "which the op-
tic nerves" were said to originate; "the
corpora quadrigemina, four medullary
projections, called by the ancients nates
andtestes; a little cerebrine tubercle lying
upon the nates, called the pineal gland ;
and, lastly, the crura cerebri, two  me-
dullary columns,  which  proceed from
the basis of the brain to the medulla ob-
longata.  The cerebral  arteries   are
branches of the  carotid  and  vertebral
arteries.  The veins terminate in sinuses,
which  return their blood  into the inter-
nal jugulars.   The use of the brain is to
give off nine pairs of nerves, and the spi-
nal marrow,  from  which thirty-one
more   pairs proceed,  through  whose
means the various senses are performed,
and  muscular motion excited." The
brain "is also considered as the organ of
the intellectual functions."
  Vauquelin's analysis of the brain is
in 100 parts; 80 water, 4.53 white fatty
matter, 0.7 reddish fatty matter, 7 albu-
men, 1.12  osmazome, 1.5 phosphorus,
5.15 acids, salts, and sulphur."*
  Cerebrum  Elongatum.   Medulla
oblongata, and medulla spinalis.
  CEREL^E'UM.   From x^poj, wax,
and  sXaiov,  oil.   Cerate  composed of
wax and oil.  Also, oil of tar.
  CEREOLA.   A  bougie made of
wax.
  CEREVIS'IA.   From ceres, corn;
so called, because it is made  from it.
Any liquor made from grain.
  CERIA.  From cercus, soft, pliant.
The flat worms found in the intestines.
  CERION.  From xqpwv, a honey-
comb.  A  species of porrigo;  also, a
honey-combed ulcerative affection of the
head.
  CEROMANTI'A. From x^poj, wax,
and (tavtEia, divination. The art of fore-
telling the future from the figures which
melted wax, when dropped on the  sur-
face of water, assumes.
  CEROPIS'SUS.   From x^poj, wax,
and 7tia<sa, pitch.  A plaster composed
of pitch and wax.
  CEROPLASTIC Fromx^poj, wax,
and 7tXaotixr] tixvri> tne art of the mod-
eler  or carver.  The art of modeling in
wax.  This art is of great antiquity, and
to the dental surgeon who is anxious to
preserve a transfer of the various cases of
irregularity  of the teeth which may
come under his notice, it is particularly
valuable.
  CEROTUM.   Cerate.
  CERU'MEN.   From   cera, wax.
See Cerumen Aurium.
  Cerumen  Aurium.  The  unctuous
secretion, which is of  a  waxy consist-
ence, found in the meatus auditorius ex-
tern us.
  CERU'MINOUS.   Relating  to, or
having the properties of, cerumen.

          •Hooper's Med  Die. 
CER               127               CHA
  Ceruminous Glands.  The folicular
glands, situated beneath the membrane
lining the meatus, which secrete  the
cerumen.
  CERVI SPINA.  Rhamnus cathar-
ticus, or purging buckthorn.
  CERVICAL.   Cervicalis;  from cer-
vix, the neck.  Belonging to the  neck;
also, every thing that concerns it.
  Cervical  Arteries.  The cervical
arteries are  three in number, namely.
The ascending, anterior, or superficial,
derived from the  inferior thyroid; the
transverse, or ccrvico-scapulare, given off
from the axillary artery, and the  poste-
rior, which  is a branch of the subcla-
vian.
  Cervical  Gan'glions.  The three
ganglions of the great sympathetic nerve.
The first is situated opposite the second
cervical vertebra; the second,  or middle
cervical ganglion is opposite to the inter-
val, between the fifth and sixth cervical
vertebrae; and the third, which is  some-
times called the first thoracic, is situated
between the transverse process  of the
last cervical vertebra and the head of the
first rib.
  Cervical Ligaments.  The  cervi-
cal ligaments, are two in number.  The
first is called the  anterior, and extends
from the basilary  process of the occiptal
bone to the anterior part of the first cer-
vical vertebra; and the second is denom-
inated the posterior, and extends from
the  outer occipital protuberance to the
spinous process of the last cervical ver-
tebra.
  Cervical Nerves.  The eight pairs
of nerves first given off from  the spinal
marrow.
  Cervical Plexus.  The net-work of
nerves formed by the branches of the
first three cervical nerves.
  Cervical Veins.  These veins have
nearly the same distribution as the cer-
vical arteries.
  Cervical Vertebra. The seven up-
permost vertebrae of  the spinal column.
  CERVICA'RIA.  From  cervix, the
neck.  The campanula trachelium, or
herb throatwort, so called, because it
was supposed to be beneficial in affec-
tions of the throat and neck.
  CERVIX.  Cervix; the neck.  Ap-
phed, also, to organs or parts, as the cer-
vix "uteri, neck of the uterus, &c.
  CESTRITES. From x*<jpov, betony.
Wine prepared from, or impregnated
with, betony.
  CESTRON.    Betonica  officinalis.
Betony.
  CETA'CEA   Cetacean.  In Natural
History, an order of marine mammalia,
including the whale, dolphin, porpoise,
&c.
  CETA'CEUM. From xtjtos, a whale.
A white,  insipid, unctuous substance,
obtained from the brain of the sperma-
ceti, and other varieties of whale.
  CETIC ACID.  Acidum ceticum.
  CEVADIL'LA. See Veratrum Sab-
atilla.
   CEYLANITE. The name of a min-
eral of an indigo blue color.
   CHABASITE. The name of a crys-
tallized mineral, of a faint rose color.
   CHALA'SIS.  From *ataW, I relax.
Relaxation.
   CHALASTICUS.  From ^aTuuo,  I
relax.  A relaxing medicine.
   CHALAZION.   From  z<ao£a,  a
hail-stone.  A  species of  hordeolum,
or a moveable tumor on the margin of
the eyelid, commonly called a stye.
   CHALCANTHUM. From *aXxoj,
brass, and ai$oj, a flower. Red calcined
vitriol, or the flowers of brass.
   CHALCITES.  Colcothar, or the
red oxyd of iron.
   CHALCOI'DEUM OS.  The cunei-
form bone of the foot.
   CHALK. A  calcareous earth of a
white color.  Carbonate of lime.   See
Creta.
   Chalk, Black. Drawing slate, used
in crayon drawing.
   Chalk, Red.  A  clay, colored with
oxyd of iron.
   Chalk-Stone.  Earthy concretions
found in the hands and feet  of persons
affected with gout. 
CHA
128
CHA
    CHALYB'EATE.    Chalybea'tus;
 from clialybs, iron or steel. Of, or belong-
 ing to, iron.  Any medicine into which
 iron enters, as  a  chalybeate  mixture,
 pills, waters, &c.
   Chalybeate Waters.  Any min-
 eral water containing iron.
   Chalybis Rubigo. Sub-carbonate of
 iron.
   CHALYBS. From Chalybes, a peo-
 ple of Pontus, who dug iron out of  the
 earth.   Acies, steel, or the proto-carbu-
 ret of iron.  In its  medicinal  virtues,
 steel does not differ from iron.
   ChalybsTartarizatus. Ferrum tar-
 tarizatum.
   CHAMiEACTE.  See  Sambucus
 ebulus.
   CHAM^E'CEDRIS. Artemisia san-
 tonica; wormseed.
   CHAMELEON.  From Wm, on
 the ground, and xeav, a lion, i. e. dwarf
 lion.   The chamaeleon, an animal able
 to change his color  at pleasure.  It is
 also applied to many thistles, from the
 variety and uncertainty of their colors.
   CHAMiEMELUM NOBILE.  See
 Anthemis Nobilis.
   CHAM^E'MORUS.   Xcytcujiopta;
 from aujitai., on the ground,  and uopta,
 the mulberry tree.  See Rubus Chamae-
 morus.
   CHAM^E'PiTYS.  See Teucrium
 Chamaepitys.
   Chamjepitys Moschata. The French
 ground pine.  Teucrium iva.
   CHAM^E'PLION.  See Erysimum
 Alliaria.
   CHAMBAR.  Magnesia,
   CHAMBER.  Camera; a term em-
 ployed in Anatomy, in speaking of the
 eye, in which there are two chambers;
 an anterior and a posterior.  The space
before  the iris is termed  the anterior-
 chamber, and that  behind  it the poste-
rior.
   CHAMOMILE.  Anthemis  nobilis.
  CHAMOMIL'LA NOSTRAS. Mat-
ricaria  chamomilla.
   CHAN'CRE.  From xapxiroj, can-
 cer.   A  sore  resulting from  the di-
 rect application of the  venereal poison
 to any part of the body.  This term is
 never applied to sores occurring in other
 parts  of the  body from absorption  or
 general  contamination  of the  system.
 The French apply the word chancre, to
 cancerous ulcers, and malignant aphthae
 of children.
   CHAOMANTPA. A term used by the
 ancients to signify the art of predicting
 the future from observations of the air.
   CHARACTER.   Xapaxt^p, a mark
 or impression. In General Medicine, the
 term is used synonymously with mark
 or appearance.  Thus,  "a disease is  of
 unfavorable character,"or"has a bilious
 character,"  &c.  In Dental  Surgery, it
 is applied to the appearances which the
 teeth present  in their physiological and
 pathological conditions.  It  has, also,
 the same signification when applied  to
 the gums.
   CHARANTIA.  Momordica elate-
 rium.
   CHARCOAL.  Carbo. An impure
 form  of carbon,  obtained  by burning
 wood with  imperfect access of air, or
 exposing it to a strong heat in a distilling
 apparatus composed of cylinders of iron,
 so constructed  that the volatile product
 may be collected. Among this there will
 be a certain proportion of tar and pyrolig-
 neous acid,  or impure vinegar.  This,
 when it is wished  to procure a pure ar-
 ticle, should be suffered to escape, while
 the  reabsorption of  the  crude  vapor
 should be prevented,  by cutting off the
 communication between the interior of
 the cylinders, and the apparatus used for
 condensing the pyrohgneous acid, after
 the removal of the fire from the  fur-
 nace.
  The charcoal obtained  for common
 purposes, as  fuel, &c. is made  from
wood, piled up in the shape of a pyra-
mid, covered with earth, with a few air
holes, but which as the pile becomes
well lighted, are  closed.  In this way
the wood is deprived of its volatile parts
and converted into a black, brittle, por-
ous substance, called charcoal, but re- 
CHE
129
CHE
 taining the shape of the vegetable from
 which it is obtained.
   CHARLATAN. A quack; a moun-
 tebank;  an  empirical pretender—one
 who sells medicines to which he attrib-
 utes marvellous virtues. Any one who
 attempts to deceive others by pretending
 to have more skill than he really has.
   CHARM.  A  trick, words,  sound,
 philters, or characters of occult power,
 enchantment, spell, incantation, magic;
 a sort of superstitious practice, by which
 it was supposed a person might  be de-
 prived of life,  struck with sickness, or
 restored to health.
   CHARPIE.  A  French word signi-
 fying scraped linen, or old linen torn in
 small pieces,  or tint, used in dressing
 wounds and ulcers.
   CHASME.  From ^tuvo, to  gape.
 Yawning;  gaping.
  CHATTERING OF THE TEETH.
 Dentium crepitus.  A phenomenon re-
 sulting from tremor of the muscles of
 the inferior maxilla, and commonly de-
 pendent on rigor  arising from cold, or
 mental emotion.
   CHEEK.  The side of the face, ex-
 tending from the lower eyehd  to  the
 base of the jaw, and from the nose and
 commissure of the tips to the ear.
   Cheek-Bone.  Malar bone.
  CHEESE.   Casern.  The coagulum
 of milk compressed into a solid mass.
  CHEILITIS, or CHILITIS. From
 2«A.os, a lip.   Inflammatiom of the lip.
  CHEILOCACE.  From XtiXos, a
 lip,  and xaxoj,  evil. Swelling and in-
 duration  of the lip, or canker  in  the
 mouth.
  CHEILOCARCINO'MA.    From
Xtfoos, a hp, and xapxivaua, cancer.
 Cancer of the lip.
  CHEILOPLASTICE. ChUophstice;
from 2«Xo$, a lip,  and rtxaatixos, form-
ing.   The operation for an artificial lip.
  CHEILOS.   Lip.
  CHEIRANTHUS.  The name of a
genus of plants.
  Cheiranthus Cheiri. Xnp, a hand.
The common yellow-wall flower.
   CHEIRAP'SIA.   From *«P,  the
 hand, and arttopai, to touch.  The ac-
 tion of scratching, as in the itch.
   CHEIRI.  Cheiranthus cheiri.
   CHEIRIATER.  From Xtip,  the
 hand, and iatpoi, a physician.  A  sur-
 geon.
   CHEIRIS'MA.   From  x^p^o^uu,
 to  labor with the hand.  Any manual
 operation; the act of touching, or hand-
 ling.
   CHEIRIXIS.   From  2»piiojuat,  to
 labor with the hand.  Surgery in all its
 branches.
   CHEIRONOMTA.  From  *«p<m>-
 fjica, I exercise with the hands.   An ex-
 ercise consisting in using the hands, as
 in the exercise with the dumb-bells.
   CHELA.  XtjXr;, forceps; from #=w,
 to take.  A  bifurcated probe  used  for
 the extraction of nasal polypi.  Apphed
 also to a fissure in the feet and to  the
 claws of a crab.
   CHEL.E  CANCRORUM.   Crab's
 claws.
   CHELIDON'IUM.  Byrony. Also,
 the name of a genus of plants.
   Chelidonium Majus.  Tetter-wort,
 and the common celandine.
   Chelidonium Minus.  Ranunculus
 ficaria; pill-wort.
   CHELO'NE.   XsXavtj,  a  tortoise.
 Also, applied to an instrument for ex-
 tending a limb, because the slowness of
 its motion resembles a tortoise.
  CHELO'NION. From XtXuni, a tor-
 toise, from its resemblance to the shell of
 a tortoise.  A hump or gibbosity of the
 back.
  CHELYS. XiXvi} the chest.  The
 thorax.
  CHELYS'CION.  From X£XvS, the
 chest.  A dry hacking cough, attended
 with  soreness of  the  muscles  of the
 chest.
  CHEMANT,  DUBOIS  DE.   A
French dentist, and author of a Disser-
tation on Artificial Teeth, showing the
advantages of teeth made of mineral
paste, over every denomination of ani-
mal substance; to which is added, some 
               CHE

popular advice  on the prevention and
cure of the diseases of the teeth of first
dentition, published in London, in 1797.
But previously to this time, and as early
as 1789, a Dissertation on the Advan-
tages of  Incorruptible Teeth, by Che-
mant, was published in Paris, where
he commenced his professional career.
Chemant is also the author of several
other papers on the teeth and in defence
of his claims as the originator of miner-
al teeth.  Although, as is asserted, the
idea  of these teeth may have originated
with an  apothecary,  by the  name of
Duchateau, it is now generally conced-
ed, that Chemant was the inventor of
them.  At any rate,  the right was se-
cured to  him by royal patent, both in
Paris and England.  In the introduction
of mineral teeth,  he was violently op-
posed by several  French dentists, and
after having maintained a controversy
with them for a considerable length of
time, he went  to England, where, we
believe, he practiced his profession un-
til near the end of his life.
  CHEMIST.   One versed in chemis-
try.
  CHEMTCAL.  Of, or belonging to
chemistry.
  CHEM'ISTRY.   A  word supposed
to be derived from the Arabic, chema, a
secret. It is defined by Brande, to be "a
department of science, the  objects of
which are to investigate the nature and
properties of the elements of matter, and
their mutual actions and combinations;
to ascertain the proportions in which
they unite, and the modes of separating
them when united; and to inquire into
the laws  and  powers which preside
over and affect these agents."
  CHEMO'SIS.  From Xa*va, to gape,
or from x^l, an humor.  Inflamma-
tion  of the conjunctiva of the eye, char-
acterized by  distention  of its vessels
and  the formation of  an elevated ring
around the cornea.
  CHENOPO'DIUM.  The  name of
a genus of plants.
  Chenopodium Ambrosioi'des.  The
)                CHI

 systematic name  of the Mexican tea-
 plant.
   Chenopodium Anthelmin'ticum.—
 Chenopodium.  Wormseed goose-foot.
 Jerusalem oak of America.
   Chenopodium Bonus  Henri'cus.—
 The systematic name of the  English
 mercury.
   Chenopodium  Botrys.   The syte-
 matic name of the Jerusalem oak.
   Chenopodium Vulva'ria. The stink-
 ing orach.
  CHEQJJERBERRY.   See Gaul-
 theria.
   CHERRY.  The fruit of the prunus
 cerasus.
   CHESNUT.    See  iEsculus  and
 Fagus.
   Chesnut,   Horse.    See  iEsculus
 Hippocastanum.
   CHEVASTER.   A  double-headed
 roller, apphed round the head, the mid-
 dle supporting the  chin, in cases  of
 fracture or luxation of the  lower jaw.
 It has received the names of simple, dou-
 ble, and oblique, according to the man-
 ner in which it is applied.  This band-
 age, however, has, to some extent, been
 superseded  by one  contrived by Mr.
 Fox.  See Fox's Bandage.
   CHEVAUCHEMENT.  A French
 word, signifying,  in General Surgery,
 the riding of the extremities of a frac-
 tured bone on each other; and in Den-
 tal Surgery,  defective arrangement of
 the teeth, consisting in the gradual dis-
 placement of a cuspid or incisor, which
 assumes a position in front of the dental
 arch and  obliquely across one of the ad-
 joining teeth.  See  Irregularity of the
 Teeth.
   CHEWNING, F.  B.  Author of a
 pamphlet on the   Importance of  the
 Teeth, Richmond, 1833.
   CHIASMOS.  From x^a, to form
 like the letter X. A bandage shaped like
 the Greek letter x, chi.  Also, the cru-
 cial union of parts.
   CHIASTOLITE.  A mineral hav-
 ing some  resemblance to the steatite.
   CHIASTOS.  A  crucial  bandage,
13 
CHI
131
CHL
so called, because it resembles the let-
ter X.
  CHIASTER.  SeeKiaster.
  CHICKEN POX.  See Varicella.
  CHIL'BLAIN.   Pernio;  bugantia;
erythema pernio; from chill, cold,  and
blain, a pustule. Erythematous inflam-
mation of the feet, hands, or other part
of the body, resulting from exposure to
cold.
  CHILOGNATHES.  Chilognatha;
from xt&°s,  a lip, and ypo&oj, a jaw.
The myriapoda or centipedes, in which
the two mandibles, or jaws, and tongue
are so united as to form a large lower
lip.
  CHI'LON.  Cheilon;  cheilitis; from
X*ixos,a lip.  Inflammation and swell-
ing of the lips.
  CHILO'MA.   A term applied,  in
 Zoology, to the upper hp or muzzle of
 a quadruped, when it is tumid and con-
 tinued  without interruption from the
 nostril.
   CHI'MIA.  Chemistry.
   CHIMIATER.  From zvpta, chem-
 istry,  and  tarpoj,  a physician.   One
 who applies the science of chemistry to
 medical purposes.
   CHIMPANZEE.    The   African
 orang, which is  of a  black color and
 from four to five feet in  height.  It ap-
 proaches nearer to man than any other
 animal of the brute creation.
   CHINCHIL'LA.  A genus of grow-
 ing mammalia, or  rodents, pecuhar to
 South America.
   CHINA, PRIDE OF.  Melia aze-
 darac.
   CHINCHINA.  See Cinchona.
   CHINCOUGH.  Pertussis.
   CHININUM.   See duinina.
   CHINIOIDINE.  Chinoidine;  chin-
 oidina ; from China, cinchona.  A sub-
 stance separated from cinchona, suppos-
 to  be an alkaloid, and to  consist of a
 mixture of quinia, cinchonia, and a pe-
 cuhar resinous matter.
   CHI'RAGRA.  From xstp, the hand,
 and aypa, a seizure. Gout in the joints
 of the hand.
  CHPROMANCY.    Chiromantia;
palmistry;  from  #stp, the  hand, and
fnavtua, divination.  The pretended art
of divination by an inspection of the hnes
of the hand.
  CHIRO'NIA. From chiron, the Cen-
taur, who discovered its use.  The name
of a genus of plants.
  Chironia Angularis.  The Ameri-
can centaury.
  Chironia Centau'rium.    Centau-
rium  minus vulgare;  centaurium par-
vum; centaurium  minus; smaller cen-
taury.  Lesser centaury.   The  syste-
matic name of the officinal centaury.
  CHIRONI'UM.  From  x^p^,  the
Centaur, who  is said to have  been the
first to heal them.  A malignant ulcer,
with callous edges, difficult to cure.
  CHIROPODIST.   From  X"P, the
hand, and  rtovs, the foot.  One whose
profession is to remove corns  and bun-
yons from the  hands and feet.
   CHIROTHE'CA.   From  X"P, the
hand, and ^xri, a sheath.   A bandage,
 applied in spiral turns, so as to envelop
 the hand and fingers.
   CHIRRHEU'MA.  From  %"P, the
 hand, and piv/Mi, flux.  Rheumatism of
 the hand.
   CHIRURGEON.  A surgeon.
   CHIRURGIA. From 2»p, the hand,
 and spyoj/, a work; because operations
 in surgery are performed with the hand.
 Surgery.
   CHIRURGICUS.  Surgical.
   CHIRURGIEN DENTISTE. Sur-
 geon dentist.
   CHITON.   A membrane or tunic.
   CHLORA. See Chlorine.
   CHLORATE.   A  compound  of
 chloric acid with a salifiable base.
   CHLORIDE.   A compound of chlo-
 rine with different bodies.
   CHLORINE.   From *a.upo$, green.
 A yellowish  green colored gas, of a
 disagreeable taste and strong suffocat-
 ing odor,  exciting great irritation and
 spasm of the glottis when inhaled, even
 in a diluted  state;  incapable  of sup-
 porting combustion,  and soluble in 
CHL                132               CHO
 water,  It is obtained by the action of
 hydrochloric acid on peroxyd of manga-
 nese.
   CHLORITE.   An  earthy  mineral
 of a green color.
   CHLORO'FORM.    Perchloride of
 formyle;  so called  in  consequence of
 its  connection  with formic  acid.   A
 dense, colorless  liquid, possessing  a
 fragrant  fruit-like  ethereal odor,  and
 a saccharine taste.  The following is
 M.  Dumas' formula for making it:
   Jfy Chloride of lime in powder, ft iv.
      Water,                   lb  xii.
      Rectified spirit,           f. §  xii.
   "Mix in a capacious  retort or still,
 and distil as long  as  a dense  liquid,
 which sinks in the water with which it
 comes over, is produced."
   The perchloride of formyle, or chlo-
 roform, consists of two atoms of carbon,
 one of hydrogen, and three of chlorine.
 Its  specific  gravity  is 1.480, and  the
 density of its vapor is 4.2.   It is unin-
 flammable, and boils at 141°.  It is  re-
 commended in asthma, and when taken
 into  the  stomach, produces a grateful
 and soothing effect.
   Professor Simpson, of Edinburg, has
 recently discovered  that the vapor of
 chloroform, when inhaled, acts as a pow-
 erful anaesthetic agent, producing com-
 plete insensibility in from thirty seconds
 to two or three minutes,  and during the
 last  few months, it has been extensively
 used, both in Europe and America, not
 only for the purpose of producing insen-
 sibility in  surgical operations, but also
 to prevent  the pain  attending parturi-
 tion.  Its use, however, has, in a num-
 ber  of instances,  been  attended  with
 fatal effects.
   But the  practicability  of producing
 insensibility by  the  inhalation  of the
 vapor of a volatile agent had been dis-
 covered more than a year before, and
for this purpose, sulphuric ether had
 been  successfully  employed,  though,
in some cases unpleasant and even fatal
effects has resulted from its  use.  The
merit of this most wonderful and valua-
 ble discovery, has been awarded by the
 trustees  of the  Massachusetts General
 Hospital, to Dr. W. T. G.  Morton, a
 dentist of Boston, though the practica-
 bility of  producing insensibility by the
 inhalation of the vapor of ether, is said
 to have  been  suggested to him by Dr.
 C.  T. Jackson, an  eminent  chemist
 of that city.
   Although a variety of  instruments
 have been invented for the inhalation of
 ether and chloroform,  no special  in-
 haler is necessary for either.   One  or
 two tea-spoonsful of chloroform, poured
 upon the interior of a hollow sponge,  or
 pocket handkerchief, or a piece of linen,
 and held to the mouth and nose, so that
 it may be fully inhaled, will, generally,
 in a few  seconds or in one or two min-
 utes, produce the desired effect.
   CHLORO'SIS. From *u>Po$, green.
 The green sickness.  A disease affect-
 ing young females, particularly before
 menstruation,  or those laboring under a
 suppression of the menses.
   CHLOROTIC  Affected  with, or
 pertaining to, chlorosis.
   CHLORUM.  Chlorine.
   CHOCOLATE.  A paste prepared
 from the  cacao-nut, with sugar, a nour-
 ishing article of diet.
   Chocolate  Tree.   Theobroma ca-
 cao.
   CHOAK-DAMP.  A  term  applied
 by miners to irrespirable gas, or vapors
 containing carbonic acid.
   CHOL^EUS.   Biliary.
   CHOLE.  Cholos.  Bile.
   CHOL'EDOCHUS.   From go**,
 bile, and hoxos, containing or receiving.
 Receiving or containing bile.
   Choledochus Ductus. Ductus com-
 munis clvoledochus.  A duct which con-
 veys the bile, from the liver to the duo-
 denum.
  CHOLEDOCITIS.   Inflammation
 of the choledoch duct.
  CHOLEDOG'RAPHY.   Chokdog-
raphia,  from xoty, bile, and ypatyiw, to
describe.  A description of that which
relates to the bile. 
CHO               133               CHO
  CHOLEDOL'OGY.   Chokdohgia,
from  XoXrj, bile, and toyoj, a discourse.
A treatise on the bile.
  CHOLELITHUS.   Biliary calculi.
  CHOL'ERA.   Cholera morbus, from
XoXri, and  pta, I flow   Purging and
vomiting, generally of bile, with grip-
ings,  and  spasms of  the  abdominal
muscles, and  often in  the  legs and
arms.  In the Asiatic cholera, or cholera
asphyxia, the  discharges resemble rice
water, and the disease is generally of a
more malignant and fatal character. Its
pathology is but little understood.
  Cholera Infantum.  Cholera of in-
fants.
  CHOLERIC.  Chokricus. Belong-
ing to cholera morbus or to the bile.
  CHOLESTERPNE.   Cholesterina;
from x°ty>  bite*  and ateptof, sohd, or
atsap, suet.   An inodorous,  pearly
white, insipid, shining  substance,  of
certain biliary calculi.
  CHOLICE'LE.  From  x<&n> bile>
and xr^ri, a tumor.  A swelling caused
by an accumulation of bile  in the gall-
duct.
  CHOLOLITHUS.   Biliary calculi,
or concretions  in the gall-duct.
  CHOLO'MA.  From guXoy, lame, or
maimed.  Lameness or distortion of a
leg.
  CHOLO'SES.     From  gox^, bile.
Diseases of the liver and spleen gene-
rally.
  CHONDRITIS. From *o*Spoj, car-
tilage, and  itis,  a termination signify-
ing inflammation.  Inflammation of car-
tilage.
  CHONDRODES.   Cartilaginous.
  CHONDROGENES'IA.   Chondro-
gcnesis, from go^Spoj, cartilage, and ytve-
ois, formation.  Formation of cartilage;
conversion  of parts into cartilage.
  CHONDROGLOS'SUS.  FromXov-
Spoy, a cartilage, and yXaaaa, the tongue,
A fasciculus of fleshy  fibres, extending
from the lesser cornu of the os hyoides
to the tongue, forming part of the hyo-
glossus muscle.
  CHONDROID.  Chondroides; from
     12
XovSpo j, cartilage, and «So j, resemblance.
Cartilaginous.  Resembling cartilage.
   CHONDROL'OGY. Chondrologia;
from goi/Spoj, cartilage, and a.oyos, a dis-
course.  A treatise on cartilages.
   CHONDRO-PHARYNGE'US.---
From Xovhso$, cartilage, and $apvyi, the
pharynx.  The fibres of the muscular
coat of the pharynx,  arising from the
lesser  cornu  of  the os hyoides, which
form part of the constrictor medius.
   CHONDROS.   XovSpo;, cartilage.
A cartilage.
   CHONDROSYNDES'MUS.  From
Xov8po$, a cartilage, and awSsa,  to  tie
together.  Union of bones by means of
a cartilaginous ligament.
   CHON'DRUS.  The name of a ge-
nus of sea-weeds.
   Chondrus  Crispus.  Carragreen;
Irish moss.
   CHONOS.  The infundibulum.
   CHORA.  Xupa, a region.   Any
void space, as the orbit  of the eye,
&c.
   CHORDA.  From  gopSj?, a string,
The word has  several significations.
An interstice, a  tendon, an assemblage
of fibres, and it is sometimes applied to
a painful tension of the penis.
   Chorda Magna.  Thetendo Achil-
lis.
   Chorda Tympani.   A branch of the
seventh pair of nerves is so called, be-
cause it crosses the tympanum of the
ear,  like a string across the bottom of a
drum.
   Chorda Tendinea.   A cord-hke
tendinous substance connecting the car-
neoz  columnoz of the ventricles  of the
heart to the auricular valves.
   CHORDEE'.  A painful spasmodic
contraction of the penis, sometimes at-
tending gonorrhoea.
   CHORE'A.   Xopaia, from  gopoj, a
chorus, which  formerly  accompanied
dancing.  A disease called St. Vitus'
dance, characterized by convulsive mo-
tions of the limbs, resembling the move-
ments of a person dancing.
  CHO'RION.   From gwpa, a recepta- 
CRY
134
CHU
cle.   The second  membrane  of the
fetus.
 ' CHO'ROID. Clwroides; from gopior,
the chorion, and «6os, resemblance.  A
name apphed to several parts, because
of their resemblance, in the number of
their vessels, to the chorion.
  Choroid Membrane.    Membrana
choroides.   A  thin  membrane of the
eye, fining  internally the sclerotica, to
which it is connected.
   Choroid Plexus.  Plexus choroidals.
Two membranes  and vascular dupli-
catures of the pia mater, situated in the
lateral ventricle of the brain.
   CHRISIS.    Xptfftj,  from  Xpia,  I
anoint.  Inunction.   The anointing of
any part.
   CHRISTUM.   From *p«o, I anoint.
An ointment or liniment.
   CHRO'MAS.   A  chromate, or salt
formed by the union of chromic acid
 with salifiable bases.
   CHRO'MIUM.   From gpco^a, color,
 because it gives color to its combina-
 tions.  A whitish, brittle and very infu-
 sible metal, extracted either  from the
 native chromate of lead or iron.   By
 heating it with nitre, it is converted into
 chromic acid.
   CHRON'IC.  Chronicus; from *Po-
 vos, time.  A  disease of long  continu-
 ance, and,  for the most part, without
 fever.
   CHRUP'SIA   From *poa, color, and
 o^ii, sight. A disease of the eyes, or a
 state of vision, in which a  colored im-
 pression is made on the retina.
   CHRYSALIS.   From gpi;tfoj, gold.
 The second or inactive state of a meta-
 bolian or changeable insect, embracing
 the period when it is enclosed in a trans-
 parent covering,  which sometimes re-
 flects a  metallic lustre, and hence the
 appellation.
    CHRYSANTHEMUM. Fromgpv-
 (joj,  gold, and avdifiov,  a flower.   The
 name of a genus  of plants.  The sun-
 flower, or marigold.
    Crysanthemum Leucanthemum.—
 The ox-eye daisy.  Maudlin-wort.
  Chrysanthemum Parthenium. Mat-
ricaria parthenium.  Motherwort.
  CHRYSI'TIS.  From gpvtros, gold.
Litharge.
  CHRYSOBALANUS. From X9voou
gold, and  jScacwoj, a nut; so called be-
cause it is yellow before it is dried. The
nutmeg.   See Myristica Moschata.
  CHRYSOBERYL.  A  mineral of a
green color and vitreous lustre.
  CHRYSOCOL'LA.   From  X9vooU
gold, and xoxxri, cement.  See gold sol-
der.
  CHRYSOCOMA.  Milfoil, or yar-
row.
  CHRYSOGONIA.    From  gpwot,
gold, and  yivofuu, to become.  A  tinc-
ture of gold.
  CHRYSOLITE.  From Xpvoos, gold,
and Xi$o$, a stone.  Topaz.
  CHRYSOSPLENIUM.  From^-
ooy,  gold,  and ao7ffaviov,  spleenwort.
The name of a genus of plants. Golden
saxifrage.
  CHRYSULCUS. From gpvsoj, gold,
and iXxa, to take away.  Aqua regia.
  CHURCH, EDWARD P., late sur-
geon dentist, was born in Middlesex, N.
York, March 3d, 1805, and at about the
age of seventeen commenced the study
of medicine, which he  pursued  with
great  zeal for upwards  of four years.
During the last  two years of his stu-
dentship he was under the tuition of the
author and of his  brother, Dr.  John
Harris, and devoted a considerable por-
tion  of his time  to  dental  surgery;
upon  the practice of which, after hav-
ing  completed his  medical education,
he immediately  entered.  Being pos-
sessed of much mechanical tact and in-
genuity, he soon acquired a high degree
of excellence as an operator, especially
in surgical dentistry. Natchez, Missis-
 sippi, and  Memphis, Tennessee, were
 the  principal fields of  his professional
 labor, though, the  author believes he
 practiced about one year in Kentucky,
 and one year in the western part of the
 state  of  New York, near his native
 place. 
CHY
135
CIC
   Soon after he commenced practice,
 he invented a pair of forceps for the ex-
 traction of the dentes sapientiae of the
 upper jaw, which are now used, it  is
 believed,  by a  majority of the dentists
 in the United States.
   Dr. Church was a close and accurate
 observer,  a laborious  student, and am-
 bitious to excel in his  profession, he
 availed himself of every means of in-
 formation  calculated  to further  the ac-
 complishment of this object, which he
 could command; and had his life been
 spared a  few years longer, he  would
 have taken rank among the most scien-
 tific and skilful  practitioners of dental
 surgery.   But,  while on a visit to his
 friends in the state of New York, he
 was attacked by a violent disease, sup-
 posed to be Asiatic cholera, which ter-
 minated his life, July 22d, 1832.
   CHUSITE. A yellowish-green trans-
 lucent mineral.
   CHYLE. Chylus.  A nutritive fluid,
 of a milky appearance, found  in  the
 lacteal vessels of the mesentery, and in
 the thoracic duct.  It  is  extracted from
 the food by the  absorbents of the intes-
 tines, after it has been submitted to  the
 action of digestion.
   CHYLIF'EROUS VESSELS. The
 lacteals, which carry the chyle from the
 intestines  to the thoracic duct.
  CHYLIFICATION.   Chylificatio;
 from chylus, and fio, to  become.  The
 process by which the chyle is formed,
 or separated from the chyme.
  CHYLIS'MA.  From  XvXoi, juice.
 An extract, or expressed juice.
  CHYLOG'RAPHY.  From gvjioj,
 chyle, and ypatyr}, a description.   A de-
 scription of the chyle, and the anatomy
 of the parts which elaborate it.
  CHYLOPOIET'IC.  Chybpoieticus;
from gutoy,  chyle, and jtouu, I make.
Any thing connected  with the forma-
tion  of chyle, as the  chylopoietic vis-
cera, vessels, &c.
  CHYLO'SIS. The process by which
food is changed  into chyle.  Chylifica-
tion, or the formation of chyle.
   CHYLU'RIA.  From Xv%oi, chyle,
 and ovpov, urine.   A discharge of milky
 urine, without any apparent lesion of
 the urinary organs.
   CHYME.   Chymus;  from  gtytoy,
 juice.  A homogeneous mass, formed by
 the food in the stomach, and from which,
 after it passes into the intestines, the
 chyle is separated.
   CHYMIA.  Xiyua.  Chemistry.
   CHYMIATER.   A chemical phy-
 sician.
   CHYMIATRPA.  From giyua, che-
 mistry, and lao^tat, to heal.  The art of
 curing  diseases  by  chemical  reme-
 dies.
   CHYMIFICATION. Chymifkatio;
 from xvP-°s> juice, and facere, to  make.
 The conversion of food into chyme.
   CHYM'ISTRY.  Chemistry.
   CHYTLEN, RADIX.   A cylindri-
 cal root,  of a bitterish taste, brought
 from China.
   CHYT'LON.   From  g£«, I pour
 out.  A mixture  of oil and  water for-
 merly used for bathing the body.
   CIBA'LIS.  From cibus, food.  Of,
 or belonging to, food.
   CIBATIO.  From cibus, food. The
 act of taking food.
   CICATRISANT. Cicatrisans; from
 cicatrico, to skin  over.  Such applica-
 tions as are supposed to dispose wounds
 and ulcers to dry up and cicatrise.
   CICATRIX.   From  cicatrico,  to
 heal up, or skin over.   A scar upon the
 skin after the healing of  a  wound  or
 ulcer.
   CICATRIZATION.  The process
 by which a wound or ulcer cicatrizes.
  CICELY, SWEET. Scandix odor-
 ata.
  CICER.  The  name of a genus of
 plants.
  Cicer Arietinum.   The chick pea-
 plant.
  CICHORIUM.  The name of a genus
of plants.
  Cichorium Endivia.  The endive.
  Cichorium  Intybus.   Wild  suc-
cory. 
CIM
136
CIN
  CICI'NUM OLEUM.  An oil, simi-
lar in its properties to castor oil.
  CICU'TA.    Conium  maculatum.
Also, the name of a genus of plants.
  Cicuta Aquatica.   Cicuta virosa;
water hemlock.  An active poison, sel-
dom employed medicinally.
  Cicuta Macula'ta.  American water
hemlock;  wild hemlock;  poison-root.
  CICUTARIA.   Cicuta,  hemlock.
Bastard hemlock.
  -CIDER.   The  expressed  juice of
apples.
  CILIA. Blepharides.  The eyelashes,
or hairs on the eyelids.
  CILIARY.   Ciliaris. Belonging to
the eyelashes.
  Ciliary Arteries.  The ciliary  ar-
teries are divided into shvrt, or posterior,
and anterior.  The first  are numerous
and penetrate the sclerotic coat of the eye
near the optic nerve, are spread out up-
on  the choroid membrane  and supply
the  iris  and ciliary processes.   They
originate  from the  opthalmic  artery in
three or four branches, but  are divided
into about twenty by the time they arrive
at the sclerotica. The anterior ciliary ar-
teries are few in number, and pierce the
sclerotica near the cornea, and are princi-
pally distributed upon the iris.
  Ciliary Ligament.   A  greyish ring
situated between the iris,  cornea and
sclerotica.
   Ciliary Muscle.  That part of the
 orbicularis  palpebrarum in the vicinity
of the ciha.
   Ciliary Nerves. The nerves of the
ciliary hgament.
   Ciliary  Processes.  The  radiated
plaits of the choroid membrane, which
resemble the disk of a radiated  flower,
lodged in the depressions of the anterior
part of the vitreous humor.
   CIL'LO.  From cilium, the eyelid.
A perpetual spasmodic trembling of the
eyehds.
   CILLO'SIS. Cillo.
   CIMO'LIA  PURPURESCENS.—
 Fullers-earth.
   CIMOLITE. A greyish, white earth,
consisting of silex, alumina, oxyd  of
iron and water. Cimolian earth.
  CINA  CINA.  Cinchona.
  CINARA.   The  artichoke.   Also,
the name of a genus of plants.
  Cinara Scolymus.  The artichoke.
  CINCHO'NA.   The name of several
kinds of Peruvian bark, the use of which
is said to have been discovered  by this
circumstance:  Some of the trees from
which  it  is  procured,   having been
blown  by  the wind into a  pool  of
water,  they lay there until they had
imparted to it  such  a bitter  taste that
every body refused to drink it; but a per-
son residing in the neighborhood, was
seized with a fever and not being able
to procure other  water to quench his
thirst,  drank of  this,  and was soon
completely cured.  This  circumstance
was related to others  ill of fevers; they
drank it and were cured.   Its use, how-
ever, as a medicinal agent, did  not be-
come general, until about the year 1638,
when the Spanish viceroy's  lady, the
countess   de Cinchon,  was  cured of
fever by it, at Lima, and hence the ap-
pellation of cortex cinchonoz, and pulvis
comitissae, or the countess' powder.  It
was afterwards introduced into Europe
by the Jesuits, among whom the count-
ess, on her recovery, had distributed it,
and thence arose the name of cortex, or
pulvis  Jesuiticus, Jesuit's  bark; called,
also, cardinal  del Lugo's powder, be-
cause a large  quantity of it was taken
to Rome for  the  use of the  religious
poor, by that charitable prelate.
   Cinchona is called, also,cortex; bark;
Peruvian bark; cortex  China;  China,
 Chinchina;   kina;   kinkina;  quina
quina;  quinquina.    These barks are
possessed of bitter, astringent, tonic and
febrifuge properties, and have constitut-
ed one of the most valuable remedies of
the materia medica,  in the treatment of
intermittent fevers, as well as other dis-
eases, but since the discovery  of their
active principle, quinina, they have not
been so much used.
   CINCHONINE.   Cinchonina; cin- 
              CIO

chonin; cinchonia.  The active princi-j
pie of cinchona lancifolia.  An organic,
crystalline alkali, of a white color, bitter
taste, slightly astringent, insoluble in
water, but soluble in alcohol and ether.
But the sulphate of cinchona, which is
formed directly from cinchonia, is solu-
ble in water as well as alcohol.
   CINCIN'NUS.  The hair on the tem-
ples.
   CPNERES.   Plural of  cinis, ashes.
Ashes.
   Cineres Clavellata.  Potassa  im-
pura.
   CINERITIOUS.  Cineritius; from
cinis, ashes.  Of the color  of ashes.
The cortical substance of the brain is
sometimes so called,  from its  resem-
blance to ashes.
   CINETH'MICS.   From  xivsa,  I
move.  The science  of  movements in
general.
   CINETTCA.  Kivr;tixoi, having the
power of motion.   Diseases affecting
the muscles.  Spasms.  The name of
the class  neurosis, in  the  Nosology of
Dr. Good.
   CINETUS.  The diaphragm.
   CIN'GULUM.  From cingo, I bind.
A girdle applied to the body below the
ribs.
   Cingulum Mercuria'le.  A girdle
of flannel applied to the loins, containing
mercurial ointment.
   CINIS.   Ashes.
   CINNABAR.  Hydrargyri  sulphu-
retum rubrum.  A red  pigment called
vermilion;  a bisulphuret  of  mercury.
   CINNAMO'MUM.   Laurus cinna-
 momum.  Cinnamon.
   CINNAMON.   Laurus   cinnamo-
mum.  Also, the name  of a rare min-
eral of a blood and hyacinth red color.
   CINOPLANE'SIS.   From x^a, I
move, and nxavrjaii, a wandering about.
Irregular  motion.
   CINQJJEFOIL.  Potentilla reptans.
   CION.   The uvula was formerly so
called from its pyramidal shape.
   CPONIS.  From  xiav, the  uvula.
Swelling and elongation of the uvula.
      12»
;7               CIR

   CIONI'TIS.  From xuji/, the uvula,
and itis, signifying inflammation.  In-
flammation of the uvula.
   CIRCE'A.  From circe, the enchan-
tress.  The name of a genus of plants.
Enchanter's nightshade.
   CIRCOCE'LE. Cirsocele.
   CIRCULAR.  Circularis; from cir-
culus, a circle.  Having the form of a
circle.
   CIRCULATION  Circulatio;  from
circulus, a circle, or from circum, around,
and ferre, latum, to carry.  In Physiob-
gy, the circulation of the blood through
the  different  vessels of the body.   In
this vital action, the blood is  ejected
from the left ventricle of the heart into
the aorta and taken to every part of the
body, passes into the veins and is return-
ed to  the right auricle of the  heart,
which, after distending to receive it,
contracts, forces it into the right ventri-
cle.  From thence it  passes into the
pulmonary artery, is conveyed to the
lungs, and brought back to the heart by
the pulmonary veins, entering the left
auricle, it is forced into the left ventricle,
to be  again conveyed by the arteries to
the different parts of the body.
   CIRCULATOR.  From circub, to
 compass about.  A  wandering quack.
 A charlatan.
   CIRCULUS.  A  circle or ring.  In
Anatomy, any part of the body which is
 round like a circle, as the circulus oculi.
   Circulus Arterio'sus I'ridis.  The
 artery which forms a  circle round the
 iris.
   Circulus Q,uad'ruplex.  The name
 of a bandage used by the ancients.
   CIRCUMAGENTES.  The oblique
 muscle of the eye.
   CIRCUMCAULA'LIS MEMBRA-
NA.  The conjunctiva.
   CIRCUMCISION.     Circumcisio;
from circumcido, to cut about. An op-
eration practiced among the Jews, con-
sisting in the removal of a portion of the
prepuce of the infant, by a circular op-
eration.
   CIRCUMFLEX'US. From circum,
1 
CIS
138
CLA
around, and flexus, bent.   Bent circu-
larly.  In Anatomy,  a name  given  to
several organs of the body.  A muscle
of the palate.
  Circumflexus Palati.  Tensor pal-
ati.   A muscle of the  palate, which
arises from the spinus process of the
sphenoid bone, and is inserted into the
velum pendulum palati, and the semi-
lunar edge of the os palati, extending as
far as the suture which unites the two
bones.
  CIRCUMGYRATIO.   From cir-
cumgyro, to turn round.   Turning a
limb around in its socket.
  CIRCUMFU'SA.  In Hygiene,every
thing which acts externally and gener-
ally upon man.
  CIR'CUMSCRIBED.  In Medicine,
tumors  which are distinct at their base
from the surrounding parts.
  CIRRHOUS.  From cirrus, a ten-
dril.  Terminating in a curl or tendril.
The apices of bodies  which terminate
by a spiral filiform appendage; coining
from the rib of a leaf, as in the fumaria
claviculata, and gbiiosa Lupercha.
  CIRROUS. Furnished with tendrils.
  CIRSOCE'LE.   From xipaos, a di-
lated vein, and xrjXrj, a tumor.  Morbid
enlargement of the veins of the scrotum.
   CIRSOM'PHALUS.   From xipooy,
a dilated  vein, or varix, and op$aXo$,
naval.  Varicose condition of the veins
surrounding the naval.
   CIRSOT'OMY.   From  x^aoj,   a
varix, and topy, an incision.   The re-
moval, by incision, of varices.
   CIRSUS.  Ktpaoy;  from xipaoa,  to
dUate.  A morbid distention of any part
of a vein.  A varix.
   CISSAM'PELOS. The name of a
genus of plants.
   Cissampelos  Pareira.  The syste-
matic name of the pareira brava, a plant,
the  root of which  is said to  possess
antinephritic  and calculous properties.
   CISSA'RUS.  See Cistus Creticus.
   CIS'TA.  From  xsiuai, to lie.  A
 cyst.
   CISTERN A.  From cista,  a  cist.
Parts  of the body which serve as re-
positories for fluids.  The fourth  ven-
tricle of the brain is, also, so called.
  CISTUS.  The name  of a genus of
plants.
  Cistus Creticus.   The  plant from
which the ladanum is obtained.
  Cistus Gum.  Cistus creticus.
  CITREUM.   The citron tree.
  CITRIC ACID.  Acidum  citrieum.
Acid of lemons.  The juice of lemons.
  CETRI'NULA. A diminutive of cit-
rus.   A small lemon.
  CITRON.  See Citrus Medica.
  CITRULLUS. Cucurbatio  citrullus.
  CITRUS.  The lemon.  See Citrus
Medica.
  Citrus Aurantium.  The systematic
name  of the orange tree.
  Citrus  Medica,   The systematic
name  of the lemon tree.  The citron
tree.   The same  species  of tree as the
lemon.
  Citrus Vulgaris.  The Citrus Au-
rantium.
  CITTA. An inordinate or voracious
appetite.
  CIVETTA.   An unctuous odorifer-
ous drug, obtained from a fold in the
skin between the  anus  and organs of
generation, of an animal called a  civet
cat.
  CLAMP.  In Mechanical Dentistry,
a piece of round or flattened wire of
iron  or other metal not easily fused,
bent in such a manner as to hold two
or more pieces of gold or silver in con-
tact  with each  other while  they are
being soldered together.
  CLAIRVOYANCE.  Clear-seeing.
"A clearness of sight," says professor
Dungleson,  "said to be communicated
by animal magnetism, which not only
enables the magnetized person to see in
the dark, through stone-walls, &.c, but
even  to observe  prospects, whilst he
fancies he is flying in the air, which he
has  never seen  previously.   It  need
hardly  be said,  that the possession of
such  powers is fabulous."
  CLAP.  Gonorrhoea. 
CLA               139               CLI
  CLAR'ET.  Claretum; from clareo,
to be clear.  A light French wine, pos-
sessing tonic, and antiseptic properties,
used, sometimes,  with  advantage in
typhoid fevers.
  CLARETUM.   Claret.
  CLARIFICATION.   Clarificatio;
depuration;  from  clarus,  clear,  and
facio, I make.  The process of freeing
a fluid from all insoluble  and  heteroge-
neous matters.
  CLASS.  Classis. In ATatural History
and Medicine, a group, or assemblage
of a certain  number of objects having
one or more common characters.  A sci-
entific division or arrangement  of ob-
jects.
  CLASSIFICATION.  Cbssificatio;
from classis, a class.  The act of classi-
fying, or arranging objects  or  things
into classes.
   CLAUDICATION.    Claudicatio;
from claudicare, to be lame.  Halting or
 limping.
   CLAU'STRUM. From claudere, to
 shut.  An aperture capable of contract-
 ing itself, as the throat.
   CLARK, J. P.   Author of a Popu-
 lar Treatise on the Teeth and Dentism,
 published in London, 1836.—Also, of a
 New  System of Treating  the Human
 Teeth, pubhshed, London, 1841.
   CLAUSU'RA.   From claudere, to
 shut.  Imperforation of a canal or cavity.
   CLAVATIO.   From clava, to club.
 An articulation which does not admit of
 motion, as that  of the  teeth in  their
 sockets, called gomphosis.
   CLAVATUS.   Clubbed.
   CLA'VICLE.   Clavicula,  diminu-
 tive of  clavis, a key.  The clavicle or
 collar-bone.
   CLAVIS.   The clavicle.  A key.
   CLAVUS.  A nail.  A term applied
 in  Patlwlogy, to  a  horny  cutaneous
 extuberance, having a central nucleus,
 and sensitive at its base, as corns on
 the toes, produced by the pressure of
 tight  shoes.  Also, a  painful, pulsa-
 ting affection of the forehead, giving a
 sensation  hke what  might be  sup-
posed to be produced by driving a nail
into this part of the head.  When con-
nected with hysteria, it is termed clams
hystericus.
  Clavus Oculorum. A staphylomia,
or tumor on the eye-ball.            •
  CLAY.  Argilla.   An  argillaceous
earth; of which there are a number of
varieties,  consisting of  silica,  varia-
ble  quantities of alumina,  and gener-
ally of more or less oxyd of iron.  They
are used in the manufacture of pottery,
and, s6\ne of  them,  in the manufacture
of porcelain ware  and  mineral  teeth.
See Mineral Teeth and Kaolin.
  CLEAVAGE.  The  natural line of
separation exhibited in  crystals  when
their Uiminoz are separated by mechani-
cal force.
  CLEAVERS. Galium aparine.
  CLEFT PALATE.   A  separation
or fissure extending, sometimes through,
both the  hard and soft palate, in the di-
rection  from before backwards, along
the median line, causing the buccal and
nasal cavities to communicate with each
other. See Palate, congenital defects of.
   CLEIDION. The clavicle.
   CLEIDO-MASTOIDEUS.   From
xXus, the clavicle,  and  [taaoeitys, the
mastoid  process. The sterno-cleido-mas-
toideus muscle.
   CLEIS'AGRA.    From  xxns, the
 clavicle, and aypa, a seizure.   Gout in
the articulations of  the clavicle.
   CLEMATIS. The name of a genus
 of plants,
   Clematis Daphnoi'des.   The lesser
 periwinkle.
   Clematis Passiflora.   The passion
 flower.
   Clematis Recta.  The systematic
 name of the upright virgin's bower;
 a plant,  the leaves of which  are said to
 possess anti-venereal virtues.
   Clematis Vitalba.  The systematic
 name of the traveller's-joy.
   CLEO'NIS GLUTEN.   An astrin-
gent formula of myrrh, frankincense,
 and the white of an egg.
   CLIMACTERIC.    Climactericus; 
CLI
140
CLI
from xXipaxtqp,  a step.  By  degrees,
but commonly applied to certain critical
periods of life, or periods  at which cer-
tain great changes occur, as the periods
of puberty in both sexes; the cessation of
tke flow of  the menses in women, &c.
  Climacteric Years.  From remote
antiquity, a peculiar  importance  has
been attached to certain periods in the
life  of man;  periods  at  which great
changes are supposed  to occur in his
health and fortunes.   It is said  that this
superstitious belief had its origin in the
doctrines of Pythagoras. Sixty-three was
regarded by  the ancients as a climacte-
terical year of peculiar danger, and it
was called by astrologers, "heroicus,"
from a prevalent  belief that it was par-
ticularly fatal to great men.   This year
seems  to have derived  its peculiar im-
portance from its being a multiple of the
mystical years of seven and nine.  Ac-
cording to most writers the climacteric
periods in the life of man are multi-
ples of the  number seven; others have
apphed the term, to years resulting from
the multiplication of seven by an odd
number.  Almost all countries have at-
tached a peculiar  importance to those
years  indicated by compounds of the
number seven.  Hence fourteen years
have been fixed for the period of puber-
ty;  twenty-one for adult age, and Aris-
totle has selected thirty-five for  the per-
fection  of bodily vigor, forty-nine for
the perfection of the mind; sixty-three,
as the grand climacteric, and seventy as
the ordinary limit of the age of man.
In old age, or after the vital powers of
the system begin to decline, an effort is
sometimes   supposed to  be  made, at
these periods, by  the economy, to re-
new the body.
  CLIMATE.  From xxi/m,  a region.
The word climate is differently defined.
According to some, it is a space upon
the surface of the  terrestrial globe, be-
tween  two  circles, forming a belt  par-
allel to the equator,  and measured ac-
cording to the length of days.  But in
a hygienic  sense, it is the prevailing
 constitution  of the atmosphere, relative
 to heat, moisture, and wind, peculiar to
 any region.   "Climate," says professor
 Dungleson,  "embraces all the physical
 circumstances belonging  to each  re-
 gion—circumstances, which exert con-
 siderable influence  on  living  beings.
 The  dark complexion, e. g. of the  in-
 habitants of the  torrid  zone is  easily
 distinguishable from the paleness  of
 those of the  frigid—so are the diseases.
 They are all modified, more or less,  by
 climate or locality.   Hot climates pre-
 dispose  to abdominal complications  in
 febrile affections; cold climates to tho-
 racic.
   "One of the most important consid-
 erations with regard to climates, is their
 comparative  fitness  for the residence of
 invalids, and, especially, of those who
 are liable to, or suffering under catarrhal
 or consumptive affections.   The great
 object,  in such cases, is to  select a cli-
 mate which  wdl admit of regular and
 daily exercise  in  the open  air, so that
 the invalid may derive every advantage
 which this form of revulsion is capable
 of effecting.   To  an inhabitant of the
 northern and middle portions of the
 United States—and the same applies to
 Great Britain, France and the northern
 parts of the old world, a more southern
 chmate alone affords these  advantages
 in an eminent degree. During the sum-
 mer months  there are few, if any dis-
 eases, which require a milder climate
 than that of the United States or of the
 milder districts of Europe.   The tem-
 perature of the winter months is, con-
 sequently, the most  important object of
 attention.  Equability of temperature is
 essential,  inasmuch  as  all  sudden
 changes interfere with the great desid-
 eratum, exercise in the open air.  In the
 whole continent of North America the
 changes are very sudden  and extensive.
 It is not uncommon for it to range 40°
between two  successive  days.  So far,
therefore, as this apphes, the American
cfimate  is not  well  adapted  to the in-
valid.  In the southern portions,  how 
CLI                141               CLU
ever,  of the  Union, this objection is
counterbalanced by many advantages."
  In connection  with his remarks on
climate, Dr. Dungleson,  gives a table,
exhibiting the mean temperature of the
year, and of the  different seasons, with
the mean  temperature of the warmest
and coldest months  at  different places
in America,  Europe, Africa,  &c. but
these we are compelled  to omit.   But
in conclusion, he says, "In the United
States, the most favorable region for the
phthisical  invalid is that of Florida, es-
pecially of Pensacola.  St. Augustine
is frequently chosen, but is  liable to
north-east storms, which  interfere with
the movements of  the vahtudinarian,
and are the source of much discomfort.
Stdl, great benefit has often been derived
from  it as a winter retreat.   Of the
Atlantic isles, Madeira  appears to be
best adapted  for the  consumption, and
those  affected with  chronic bronchitis.
In Italy, Rome and  Pica—and  in Eng-
land,  Torquay  and  Undercliffe, are to
be preferred.  Chronic rheumatism and
gout are benefited by a warm  climate,
which, again, is  unfavorable to  those
who  are  predisposed to cerebral dis-
eases,  especially  to diseases  that are
characterized by debility  and  mobility
of the nervous system—as paralysis, es-
pecially mania, &c.  Hypochondriasis
and dyspepsia require rather change of
climate and travelling exercise,  than a
sojourn in any one."
  CLIMATIC.   Belonging to, or de-
pendent upon, climate.
  CLINICAL.   Clinicus; from xxivv),
a bed.  Any  thing relating to a bed.
Pertaining to a bed.
  Clinical Lecture. A lecture given
at the bed-side, or on a  particular case
of disease.
  Clinical Medicine.   That which
is occupied with the investigation of
disease at  the bed-side,  or with  indi-
vidual cases of disease.
  CLINOID.  Clinoideus; from xXwr\,
a bed, and «8o$, resemblance.  Resemb-
ling a bed.
  Clinoid Processes.  The four pro-
cesses at the upper surface of the sphe-
noid bone  which surround the sella tur-
cica, are  so called from  their  resem-
blance to the posts of a bedstead; two
are anterior and two posterior.
  CLIPPINGS.   A  term applied, in
the Dental Laboratory, to the small por-
tions of gold, platina,  or  silver, which
are cut  from a plate in shaping the di-
mensions  of a base, or other portions
of the metallic part of  a dental  substi-
tute, or piece of dental mechanism.
  CLITORIDIS  MUSCULUS.  See
Erector Clitoridis.
  CLITORIS. From xxna, to enclose,
or hide; so called  because it is hid by
the labia pudendorum.  A small, round
organ, situated above  the nymphee at
the upper  part of  the vulva, before the
orifice of the urethra in females.
  CLITORIS'MUS.  An enlargement
of the clitoris.
  CLONIC.  From xXovo$,  agitation.
Irregular spasmodic, or convulsive mo-
tions ; opposed to  tonic.
   CLONUS.  From xXovsa, to  agitate,
Clonic spasms.
   CLOT.   Coagulum; a clot of blood.
   CLOTTY.   Made up of clots.
   CLOVE.  See Eugenia Caryophyl-
lata.
   CLUB-FEET.  A deformity, either
congenital or acquired, but usually the
former, caused by a contraction  of the
extensor muscles of the feet. The affec-
tion has been  variously designated ac-
cording to the nature of the deformity,
as, tip-foot, when the heel is drawn up-
wards and the patient  is  compelled to
walk  on his toes; knot-foot, when  he
walks on the back of his foot; cross-foot,
when he walks on the outer edge ; out-
bow-foot, when he walks  on the inner
edge, and  heel-club-fool, when  his toes
are drawn upwards so that he  is com-
pelled to walk on his heels.
  CLUNE'SIA.    From  dunes,  the
nates.  Inflammation of the buttocks.
  CLU'PEA.   The name of a genus of
fishes. 
CO A               142               COC
  Clupea Alosa.   The shad.
  Clupea  Encrasic'olus.   The  an-
chovy.
  Clupea Harengus.   The common
herring.
  Clupea Latulus.  The whitebait.
  Clupea Pilchardus. The pilchard.
  Clupea  Sprattus.  The sprat.
  Clupea Thryssa. The yellow-billed
sprat of the West India seas.
  CLY'DON.   KxvSav.  Flatulence;
fluctuation of the contents of the abdo-
men.
  CLYSMA.  A clyster.
  CLYSTER.  Clysterium ; from xXv-
guv, to  wash.  A  liquid thrown into
the rectum by means of a  syringe, or
bladder, with a  pipe—the nozel of the
instrument being introduced into  the
anus.
  CNESIS.   From xvaw,  to  scratch.
Cnismos.  Painful itching.
  CNIDO'SIS.  From xvihn, the nettle.
An itching sensation like that produced
by the nettle.  A dry opthalmia.
  COAGULANT.   That  which  has
the power of coagulating the blood.
  COAGULATION.     Coagulatio;
from con, and  ago,  to drive together.
The act of changing from a fluid to a
jelly-like consistency.
  COAG'ULUM.   A jelly-like, or  soft
and tremulous mass, formed in a coagu-
lable liquid.
  Coagulum  Alu'minis. A coagulum
formed  by beating  the white  of eggs
with a httle alum.   It is used in cases
of opthalmia, where an astringent is re-
quired.
  COALES'CENCE.   In Medicine,
the union of parts previously separated,
as in the case of  preternatural  adhe-
sions.
  COALTER'N^ FEBRES. A dou-
ble intermittent fever.
  COAPTATION.  Coaptatio;  from
cum, with, and aptare, to adjust, adapt.
The act of placing the  two  extremities
of a fractured bone in contact with each
other, or of restoring a  luxated bone to
its proper place.
  COARTICULATIO.    From  con,
and artkulatio, an articulation.  Articu-
lation which admits of manifest motion.
See Diarthrosis and Synarthrosis.
  COBALT.   A  brittle reddish grey
metal, fused with difficulty, and gener-
ally  combined in its  ores with nickel,
arsenic, iron and copper.
  COCCINEL'LA.    Diminutive  of
coccus, a berry; from  its resemblance to
a berry.  The cochineal insect.  See
Coccus Cacti.
  COCCO-BALSAMUM.   The fruit
of the amyris gileadensis, the plant from
which opobalsamum  is obtained.
  COCCOLITE.  A mineral of a green
color, of various shades.
  COCCULUS   INDI  AROMATI-
CUS. Jamaica pepper. Myrtus pimenta.
  COCCUM.  A species of capsule, or
dry seed vessel, more or less aggregate,
with elastic sides, projecting the seeds
with great force.
  COCCULUS  PALMATUS.  The
systematic name of   a plant which
affords the calumba root.
  COCCUS.   A tribe of insects.
  Coccus  Cacti.    The  systematic
name of the cochineal insect.  Cochi-
neal.
  COCCYGE'US.   From xoxxvX,  be-
cause it is inserted into the coccyx.  A
muscle  which arises from  the spinus
process of the ischium, covers the inside
of the sacro-ischiatic ligament, and is in-
serted at the extremity of the sacrum.
  COCCYGIS OS.   From xoxxv%, the
cuckoo, whose bill it is said to resemble.
Os coccygis. Cauda.  A bony appendage
at the point or lower  extremity of  the
sacrum, terminating at an acute point.
  COCCYX.   The  os coccygis.
  COCHENILIN.   Carminium. The
coloring principle of cochineal.
  COCHINEAL.  Coccus cacti.
  COCHLEA.  From xoxago, to turn
round.  The anterior of the three cavi-
ties constituting the labyrinth of the ear,
is so called from its  resemblance to a
snail.
  COCHLEA'RE.  From cochlea, a 
CCE
143
COI
cockle, because its bowl  represents  a
shell.   A spoonful.
  Cochleare Magnum. A table-spoon-
ful, which is about half a fluid ounce.
  Cochleare  Me'dium.    A dessert-
spoonful, or two tea-spoonfuls.
  Cochleare Minimum.  A tea-spoon-
ful, or one fluid drachm.
  COCHLEA'RIA.   From cochleare,
a spoon.  So called from its resemblance
to a spoon.  The name of a genus of
plants.
  Cochlearia  Armora'cia.   Horse-
radish.
  Cochlearia Officinalis.   Cochle-
aria hortensis.   The common scurvy-
grass, said to be a  powerful antiscorbu-
tic.
  COCHLEATUS.  Spiral.  Applied,
to leaves, leguminous seeds, &c.
  COCOA-NUT. See Cocos Nucifera.
  COCOON'.   An oblong  envelop of
silk, spun by the silk worm, previously
to its  transformation into the chrysalis
state.   The same name is given to the
envelop of other larvae.
  COCOS BUTYRACEA.  The sys-
tematic name of the plant from which
the palm oil is obtained.
  Cocos Nucifera.   The systematic
name of the plant which  produces the
cocoa-nut.
  COCTION.   Coctio;  from  coquere,
to boil.  Digestion of the food  in the
stomach; boiling.  A term  formerly
used in medicine to express the change
morbific matters were supposed to ex-
perience before ehmination.
  COD'EINE.  Codeia,  from  xaSia, a
poppy head.  An alkaloid, discovered
in opium, by Robiquet.
   CCE'LIA.  From xoiXos, hollow.  A
cavity in any part of the body, as the
abdomen, uterus, &.c.
   CGE'LIAC  Cozliacus; from xoixia,
the abdomen.  Pertaining to the abdo-
men.
   CffiLiAC Artery.   Arteria  cceliaca.
The first branch of the aorta given off
in the abdomen.
   Celiac Flux  or  Passion.   From
xoata, the abdomen.  A chronic diarr-
hoea, in which the food is discharged in
an undigested state.
  Cceliac Plexus.  A plexus formed
of numerous nervous filaments from the
semilunar ganglia of the great sympa-
thetic, and from branches of the right
and left pneumogastric, nerves.  It is
situated behind the stomach around the
trunk of thecoeliac artery.
  CCELIACA.  Cozliacus;  from xokaia,
alvus venter.  Diseases of the  digestive
functions; the first class in Good's No-
sology, containing two orders, enterica
and spktnchnica.
  CELO'MA.   From xoiXo;, hollow.
An ulcer of the cornea of the eye.
  CCELOSTOMTA.  From xoixo;, hol-
low, and  gtof/ia,  mouth.   Defective
enunciation, characterized by hollow-
ness of voice.
  CCENOLOGIA. From  xowoy, com-
mon, and toyos, a discourse. A consul-
tation.
  CCE'NOTES.   From xiovo;,  com-
mon.  The methodic sect of Physiceous,
who declared that all diseases arose from
relaxation, stricture,  or a mixture of
both.
  COF'FEA. From kofuah,  a mixing
together, from the pleasant  beverage
made from  its berry.  The coffee-tree.
Also, the name of a genus of plant.
  Coffea Arabica.  Jasminum Arabi-
cum.   The  plant which  affords the
coffee.
  COHE'SION.   Cohcesio;  from co-
hozreo, I hold together.  Attraction  of
cohesion is that  power by  which parti-
cles of matter are connected  and held
together in such  a way as to resist any
attempt at separation.
  COHOBATION.  Cohobatio; coho-
bium, cohoph.  Distillation of a  fluid,
on a substance of the same kind as that
•upon which it was at first  distilled, and
repeating it three or four times.
  COINDICANTIA.  From, con, and
indico, to indicate.  Signs furnishing
the same indications, or which are con-
firmatory of the indications furnished by 
COL
144
COL
other signs.  Such signs are called coin-
dicant.
  COIR A.  Catechu.
  COIRAS.   Scrofula.
  COITION.  From coeo, to go togeth-
er.   Copulation.  Carnal union, or con-
junction of the sexes.
  COLATU'RA.  From colore, to strain.
A hquor  which  has been filtered or
strained.
  COLBURN, G. F. J.   Author of a
paper on the Use  of Gutta Percha for
taking Impressions of the Mouth, pub-
lished  in  the  eighth volume of  the
American Journal of Dental Science.
  COL'CHICUM.  From cokhis, the
name of the place where  this plant is
supposed to have abounded.  The name
of a genus of plants.  Meadow-saffron.
  Colchicum Autumnale.  The sys-
tematic name of the common  meadow-
saffron.
  COL'COTHAR.  Colcothar vitrioli ;
brown-red rouge;  crocus mortis vitrio-
latus sue adstringens.  A  brown-red
oxyd of iron,  which remains after the
distillation of the acid from sulphate of
iron.
  COLD.  Privation of heat, or the sen-
sation  produced by the abstraction of
caloric from the body.  Also, the com-
mon name for  a catarrh.
  COLEOPTERA.  An order of in-
sects with sheaths to  their wings, as
beetles, &c.
  COLIC.  Colicus;  from xwJlov,  the
colon.   Pertaining to  the  colon.   The
colic.  This term is applied to almost all
acute pains in  the abdomen.
  Colic Arteries.   These are six in
number.  Three are given off  by  the
superior mesenteric, which are  called
the colkoz  dextroz.   The other three are
given  off by  the inferior mesenteric
artery,  and are called the colicoz sinis-
tra.
  Colica Bilio'sa.  Bilious colic.
  Colica Calculo'sa.  Colic, produc-
ed by earthy concretions in the intes-
tines.
  Colica  Callo'sa.  Colic attended
with a sense of stricture in some part of
the intestinal canal.
  Colica Crapulo'sa. Colic produced
by  eating  hard  and  indigestible ali-
ments.
  Colica   Damnoniorum.   Metallic
colic, or colic peculiar to  Devonshire.
Colic attended with fever.
  Colica Flatulen'ta. Cohc from an
accumulation of air  in the  intestines.
Flatulent cohc.
  Colica Hepat'ica.  Hepatic cohc.
  Colica Hysterica.  Colic attending
hysteria.
  Colica Inflammato'ria. Inflamma-
tory colic;  enteritis.
  Colica Lapsonica.  Colic peculiar
to Laplanders.
  Colica Mesenterica.   Colic pro-
duced by disease of the mesentery.
  Colica Nervosa.   Nervous cohc.
  Colica Metal'lica.  Metallic colic.
Painter's cohc.
  Colica Pictonum.   Painter's  colic.
Metallic cohc.
  Colica  Spasmodica.    Spasmodic
cohc.
  Colica Sterco'rea.  Colic from the
retention of fasces in the intestines.
  Colica Vena.  A  branch of the up-
per mesenteric vein.
  Colica Vena Recta.  A vein of the
colon.
  Colica Vermino'sa. Worm cohc, or
colic from the presence of worms in the
intestines.
  COLITIS.  From  xaXov, the colon,
and itis,  inflammation.  Inflammation
of the mucous membrane of the colon.
  COLLAPS.  Collapsus.
  COLLAP'SUS.  From collabor,  to
shrink down.  Shrinking of the  body.
Prostration of strength.
  COLLAR BONE.   The clavicle.
  COLLAT'ERAL.  Collateralis; from
cum, with, and latus, side. Accompany-
ing, or proceeding by the side of another.
  COLLECTION. CoUectio; from coi-
ligere, to collect.  Used in Pathobgy to
denote the collection or gathering of pus,
or some other purulent or serous matter. 
COL
145
COL
    COLLET.  From collum, the neck.
  A neck or collar.  A term applied by
  some French writers, in Dental Anato-
  my, to the neck of a tooth.
    COLLIGA'MEN.  From colligo, to
  tie together.  A ligament.
    COLLiaUAMENTUM. From col-
  liqueo, I  melt.  The first  rudiment  of
  an embryo.
    COLLIQJJA'TION.  Diminution of
  the sohds, with  copious excretion  of
  liquids by one or more outlets.
    COLLIQUATIVE.  Colliquativus;
  from colliqueo, I melt. Applied to vari-
  ous discharges, as colliquative perspira-
  tion, diarrhoea, &c, which occasion
  rapid loss of strength.
   COLLISIO. From collido, to beat
  together.  A contusion
   COLLOBO'MA.   From  xoXXaa, to
 glue together.   Cobbroma.  Agglutina-
 tion of the eyelids together.
   COLLODES.  From xoTtta,  glue.
 Glutinous,
   COLLUM.  From xaxov, a member,
 as being one of the chief;  or diminu-
 tive  of columna, as being the pillar
 and support of the head. The part of
 the body between  the head  and chest.
 The neck.
   COLLUTION.  Collutio.  Washing
 the mouth, or any other part.
   COLLUTO'RIUM. From colluo, to
 wash.  A mouth-wash;  a gargarism.
   COLLU'VIES.   From  colluo,  to
 cleanse. Filth; excrement;  the matter
 discharged from an old ulcer.
   COLLYRTUM.   From  xaXva,  I
 check, and povy, a defluxion; because
 it stops the defluxion. This term was
 applied by the ancients to a medicine
 used to check any discharge, but at pre-
 sent it is restricted to a wash, or applica-
 tion to the eyes.   The collyria  of the
 pharmacopoeias are, for the most part,
 metallic lotions..
  Collyrium  Plumbi Acetatis.  A
 collyrium of acetate of lead.
  Collyrium  Plumbi  Acetatis  et
opii.  A collyrium of opium and acetate
of lead.
        13
    Collyrium Zinci Acetatis.  A col-
  lyrium of acetate of zinc.
    Collyrium  Zinci Sulphatis.   A
  collyrium of sulphate of zinc.
    COLOBO'MA.  Koxopafia, any thing
  truncated or shortened.   A mutilated
  or maimed organ.
    COLOCYNTH.  Cucumis colocyn-
  this.
    COLOMBO.  See Calomba.
    COLON   Colum ; intestinum majus.
  The portion of the large intestine, which
  extends from the caecum to the rectum.
   COLONDRE.  Author of a treatise
  on  the most frequent Diseases of the
  Teeth, and the Means proper  for their
  Prevention and Cure, by.  Pubhshed,
  Geneva, 1781.
   COLONITIS.  Acute dysentery.
   COLOPHO'NIA.  So caUed  from
  Colophon, the city from which it was
  first brought. The black  resin which
 remains in the retort, after distilling com-
 mon turpentine with a strong fire.
   COLOR.   In Physics, an inherent
 property in light, which gives to bodies
 particular appearances to the eye.   The
 primary colors according  to sir  Isaac
 Newton, are red, orange, yellow, green,
 blue, indigo and violet.
   COLOSTRUM.   The first milk se-
 creted in the breast, after parturition.
   COLPOCE'LE.  Vaginal hernia.
   COLPOPTO'SIS.   A prolapsus of
 the vagina.
   COLT'S  FOOT.  Tussilago.
   COLUBER  BERUS.   The syste-
 matic name of the viper, a poisonous
 reptile.
   COLUMBA.  Calumba.
   COLUMELLA.  Diminutive of co-
 lumna, a column.  A column or little
 pillar;  the central column, or filament
 uniting the partitions in the capsules of
 plants; also the uvula and clitoris.
  COLUMELLARES  DENTES.—
 The  cuspid teeth are so called from their
 shape.
  COLUM'NA.  A column.  In Ana-
tomy, applied to parts of the body, which
resemble in shape or office a column, as 
COM
146
COM
the columnaz carnoz of the heart;  colum-
na nasi, &c.
  COLUMNS CARN^E.  ThesmaU
fleshy columns which project into  the
auricles and ventricles of the heart.
  Columna Nasi.  The lowest  part of
the septum of the nose.
  Columna Oris.  The uvula.
  COLUTORIUM.  A gargle.
  COMA.  Kafia.  A  profound sleep
without being able to rouse the individ-
ual.  It occurs as a symptom in many
diseases.
  CO'MATA.   The plural  of coma.
Diseases characterized by a diminution
of the powers of voluntary motion, with
sleep or the senses impaired.
  COM'ATOSE. Having a propensity
to sleep. Affected with coma.
  COMBUSTIBLE. Capable of being
burnt.
  COMBUSTIO.  From comburo, to
burn.   A burn.
   COMBUSTION. Combustio; from
comburo, to burn. Burning.  The com-
bination of oxygen with a combustible
body.   Among the  phenomena which
attend combustion, are  the evolution of
heat and light, but as these are suppos-
ed to be dependent on chemical  action,
they may  also  be  expected in other
chemical processes.   The presence of
oxygen, therefore, is not absolutely ne-
cessary to them.
   COMMANDUCATIO.  From com-
manduco; to eat.  Mastication.
   COMMEM'ORATIVE.  Commcm-
orativus; from  commemorare, con  and
memor, to  cause to remember. That
which  preserves the remembrance of
something.
   Commemorative Signs. Signs which
point at the previous condition of the
patient. So far as the innate constitution
is concerned, none can be rehed upon
with more certainty than those furnish-
ed by the teeth.  See Teeth, characteris-
 tics of the.
   COMMI.  Gum.
   COM'MINUTED.    Comminutus;
 from comminuere, con and  minuo, to I
break to pieces.  In  Surgery, a bono
broken into a number of pieces; applied
also to food after it has been masticated
or ground between the teeth.
  COMMINUTION.  The fracture of
a bone  into a number of pieces; the
trituration, breaking to pieces between
the teeth, or mastication of food.
  COM'MISSURE. Commissura; from
committo,  I join together. A point of
union between two  parts.  The com-
missures of the lips and eyelids are the
angles where they come together.
  Commissure,   Anterior,  of the
Brain.  A  small medullary-like sub-
stance, crossing the anterior part of the
third  ventricle of the brain, uniting the
two hemispheres.
  Commissure, Great, of the Brain.
The corpus collosum of the brain, which
unites the two hemispheres.
  Commissure,   Posterior,  of the
Brain.  A medullary substance uniting
the two hemispheres of the brain across
the posterior part  of the third ventricle,
and above the corpora quadrigemina.
  Commissure of  the  Uvea.  The
ciliary ligament.
  COMMU'NICANS.  From commu-
nis,  common.   That which communi-
cates or establishes a communication.
Applied to two arteries of the cranium,
one  anterior, and one posterior. The
first extends from one anterior cerebral
artery to the other;  the second from the
internal carotid to the posterior cerebral.
  COMPACT.   Compactus;  from  con
and pangere,  to  strike, to fix. Solid,
close.   In Anatomy, it is applied to  the
hardest and closest parts of a bony tissue.
  COMPAGES.  From compingo, to
put together.  An articulation,  a com-
missure.
  COMPARATIVE.  In Anatomy and
Physiology,  that  which  illustrates by
comparing with  the  human  body, or
any part of it; as for example, the com-
parative anatomy of the teeth, embraces
a knowledge of the differences that exists
between these organs in different  ani-
mals. 
COM
147
CON
   COMPLEX.  Compkxus; from con,
 with, and plectere, to twist. Complicat-
 ed.
   COMPLEX'ION.  The color of the
 face; the aggregate of physical charac-
 ters presented by a body, with reference
 to constitution, temperament, &c.
   COMPLEX'US.    Several  distinct
 things.  Complex.
   Complexus Minor.  Mastoideus lat-
 eralis.   The name of a muscle which
 arises from  the transverse processes of
 the last four cervical vertebrae, and is in-
 serted into  the mastoid process of the
 temporal bone.
   Complexus Mus'culus.  Complexus
 seu biventer  cervicis; compkxus major ;
 dorso trachebn occipital.  A muscle sit-
 uated on the back part of the neck.
   COMPLICATION.   Complicatio;
 from con, with, and plicare, to fold.  In
 Pathology, the presence  of several dis-
 eases, or several circumstances, foreign
 to the primary disease.
   COMPOSITION.  Compositio, from
 componere, to place together.   Compos-
 ing  or compounding; a compound,  or
 thing compounded; a combination.
   COMPOSITUM.  A compound, or
 composition of different things.
   COM'PRESS.   Compressa;   from
 comprimere, to press together.  Pieces
 of lint or folds of a  rag, or any other
 substance, so contrived, as with the aid
 of a bandage, to make pressure upon
 any  part.  In Surgery, a compress is
 employed to arrest hemorrhage, as well
 as various other purposes.
   COMPRES'SION. To press together.
 The application of pressure upon any
 part.
   Compression of the Brain.  This
 may be  caused by extravasated  blood,
 a depressed portion of bone, an accumu-
 lation of fluid, or a tumor.
  COMPRESSOR.   A name applied
 to  muscles which draw  together parts
upon which  they act.  Also the name
of instruments invented for  compress-
ing the femoral artery, and other  pur-
poses.
    Compressor Naris. • Rinazus nasalis;
  transversalis nasi; dilatatores alarum nasi.
  A flat triangular muscle, arising exter-
  nally at the root of the ala nasi, and is
  inserted with its fellow into the extrem-
  ity of the  os  nasi, and  when  the two
  contract, they draw the sides of the nose
  towards the septum.
    Compressor Urethrje.  A muscle
  arising from the ramus of  the ischium,
  and  inserted  into  the  membranous
  urethra, which it embraces.
    COMPTO'NTA.   The  name  of a
  genus of plants.
    Comptonia Asplenifo'lia.   Mea-
  dow-fern; astringent  root.  A  plant
  possessing tonic and astringent proper-
  ties.
   COMPUNCTIO. Compungo, to prick.
  A puncture.
   CONA'RIUM. From xwvoy, because
  of its  conical shape.  A  cone.  The
  pineal gland.
   CONCAVUS.  Hollow;  depressed
  in the centre.
   CONCENTRATION.   Concentra-
  tio; from con, and centrum, a centre.
  In Medicine, an  afflux of  fluids,  or a
  convergence of vital force towards  an
  organ.  Also, the evaporation of the
  water of  fluids for the purpose of in-
  creasing their strength.
   CONCENTRIC.    Composed  of
 many  layers  arranged circularly, one
 within the other.
   CONCEPTION.   Conceptio;  from
 concipio,  to conceive.  The impregna-
 tion of the ovum in the ovarium, by the
 contact of the aura seminis.
   CONCHA.  Koyx*j. The name of a
 liquid  measure among the  Athenians.
 In Anatomy, applied to several  hollow
 parts of the  body.
   Concha Auricule.  The concha of
 the ear.
   Concha Auris. The hollow  part of
the cartilage  of the external  ear.
   Conchje Narium.    The turbinated
part of the ethmoid bone, and the infe-
rior spongy bones, covered by the pitui-
tary membrane. 
               CON

  CONCHUS.  From xoyxq, a shell,
so called from its resemblance to a shell.
The cranium; the sockets of the eyes.
  CONCOCTION.   Concoctio; from
concoquo, to digest.  Concoction.   Di-
gestion.
   CONCOMITANT.  Concomitans;
from  con, and comitare—itself from co-
mire—cum, and ire, to go with.  That
which accompanies, or goes with.  In
Pathology, a symptom which accompa-
nies other symptoms.
  CONCRETION.   Concrete; from
concresco, to grow together. To thicken,
condense, and become more  solid.  It
was formerly used to signify the adhe-
sion of parts.
  CONCUR'SUS. From concurrere, to
meet together. The congeries  of symp-
toms which constitute and distinguish a
particular disease.
  CONCUS'SION.  From concutio, I
shake together.   In Surgery,  agitation
communicated to one organ  by a  fall
upon  another, as the  brain from a fall
on  the  buttocks.  Concussion of the
brain often causes very alarming symp-
toms.
  CONDENSATION.  Condensatio;
from condenso, to make thick.  A thick-
ening of a fluid.   In Anatomy and  Pa-
thology, an increase in the density of the
blood, or other fluids, or any of the tis-
sues of the body.  In Chemistry,  the
subjection of aeriform bodies to  pressure,
or the conversion of vapors to  fluids by
cold.
  CON'DIMENT. Condimentum; from
condire, to preserve or season. Anything
used for seasoning  food, as butter, salt,
pepper, spice, &.c.
  CONDUCTOR. From conducere, to
lead or guide.  That which conducts or
serves as a  guide.  In Surgery, an in-
strument used for  directing a knife or
bistoury in  certain operations.
  CONDUIT.  A passage of  small di-
mensions.  A canal.  A pipe for con-
veying water.
  CON'DYLE.   Condylus;  xovhvXos,
the joint of the finger,  a tubercle or
18               CON

knot.  An articular process of a bone,
flat  in one direction and round  in the
the other.
   Condyli Digitorum Manus.  The
phalanges.
   CON'DYLOID.  Condylotdeus; from
xovSvXoi, a condyle, and  M$oy, shape.
Shaped like  a  condyle.
   Condyloid  Foramina.  Foramina
condyloidca.  Four  foramina, two  an-
terior, and two posterior, in the occipital
bone.
   Condyloid Process.  A condyle.
   CONDYLO'MA.  Condylus; from
xoi>8t#.oy, a knot, an eminence.  A soft
wart-like  excrescence, of an indolent
character, which appears about the anus
and  orifice of the  genital organs, and
sometimes on the  fingers, as a conse-
quence of syphilis.
   CONDYLUS.   A condyloma.
   CONE, C. O.  Author of a paper on
the Morbid Effects  of Decayed Teeth,
pubhshed in the  fifth volume of  the
American Journal of Dental Science.—
Also, of two other articles published in
the  same  work.   The  first  on  the
Origin, Development, and Eruption of
the Teeth, and  the second, on the Ex-
traction of these Organs.
   CONFECTIO.    Confection; from
conficio, to make up.  Any thing made
up with sugar.
   Confectio Alkermes.  Alkermes.
   Confectio Amygdalje. A confec-
tion of almonds.
   Confectio Archig'enis.  A confec-
tion of castor, long  pepper, black pep-
per,  storax,  galbanum,   costus  and
opium.
   Confectio Aromat'ica.   An aro-
matic confection.
   Confectio Aurantii Corticis.  A
confection of orange peel.
   Confectio Cassle.  A confection of
cassia.
   Confectio Hamec   A  confection
composed  of the  bark of the  yellow
myrobalans, violets, pulp of colocynth,
polypody of the oak, absintheum, rhu-
barb, thyme, fennel, red roses, pulps of
!• 
              CON              14

prunes,  raisins, sugar, aniseed, honey,
senna, &c.
  Confectio Hyacinthi. A confection
of hyacinth.
  Confectio Opii.  A confection of
opium.
  Confectio Piperis Nigri.   A con-
fection of black pepper.
  Confectio Rosa; Cant'n.e.  A con-
fection of dog-rose.
  Confectio Rose Gal'lice. A con-
fection or conserve  of the red rose.
  Confectio Rute.  A confection of
rue.
  Confectio Scammonle.  A confec-
tion of scammony.
  Confectio Senne.  A confection of
senna.
  CONFLUENT.  Confluens; from
con,  and fluere, to flow.  Running to-
gether.  In Pathology,  certain exanthe-
matous  affections,  in which the erup-
tions are so thick that they run together.
  Confluent Small  Pox.  This dis-
ease is divided into distinct and confluent.
In the latter division the pustules  run
into each other.
  CONFLUXIO.  Sympathy.
  CONFORMATION.   Conformatio.
In Anatomy, the natural disposition or
arrangement of the parts of the body.
  CONFU'SiE FEBRIS. Irregularity
in the paroxysms  of an  intermittent
fever.
  CONFU'SIO.    From confundo,  to
mix together.  A disease of the eye in
which the membranes become ruptured
and the  humors run together.
   CONGELATION.    Congelatio,
from congelo, to congeal, to freeze. The
act of congealing,  or  passing from a
fluid to a solid state, as in the case of
water when it freezes.  The  word is
also  used synonymously with concre-
tion and coagulation.  It was formerly
applied to diseases attended with stupor
and numbness, as in paralysis and cata-
lepsy.
  CON'GENER.  Congenerous; from
con,  with,  and genus,  kind.  Of  the
same  kind  or  species.   In Anatomy,'
               CON

muscles which concur in  the same ac-
tion.
   CONGENITAL.  Congenitus.  That
which existed at birth. Thus congenital
affections are those which exist at birth,
as a disease or deformity.  See Atrophy
and Erosion of the Teeth.
   CONGESTION.   Congestio;  from
congerere, to amass, accumulate.   An
accumulation of blood, bile, or  other
fluids in an organ.
   CONGLO'BATE.     Conglobatus;
from congbbarare, to gather into a small
ball.  A gland formed of a contortion of
lymphatic vessels, connected by cellu-
lar tissue, without a cavity or excretory
duct.
   CONGLOM'ERATE.  Conglomera-
tus; from conglomerare, to heap upon.
Applied to glands which consist of a
number of small glands.
   CONGLUTINATION. Agglutina-
tion.
   CONGRESSUS.  Coition.
   CONIA.   Conine, conicine.  A 'vol-
atile alkaloid of  conium maculatum,
obtained by distilling the concentrated
infusion with potash.
   CONICE PAPILLvE. The lentic-
ular papillae of the tongue.
   CONICUS.  Conical.
   CONIS.  Dust; fine powder; ashes.
   CONI'UM MACULATUM.  Coni-
um; cicuta; hemlock. A plant possessed
of narcotic and poisonous properties.
   CONI VASCULOSI.  The conical
convolutions  of the  vasa efferentia of
the testicle.
   CONJUGATION.  Conjugate, from
conjugare, to yoke  together.  An as-
semblage ; a union.
   CONJUNCTIVA  MEMBRA'NA.
Conjunctiva tunica.  A mucous mem-
brane covering  the  anterior surface of
the eyeball  and lining the  inner surface
of the eyelids.
  CONJUNCTIVITIS.  Inflammation
of the conjunctive membrane.
  CONJUNC'TUS.   Conjoined.
  CONNATE.  From con and ruxtus,
born with.  Congenital.
9 
CON
150
CON
   CONNECTION.   A term used by
some authors in the same sense as that
of union.
   CONOID.  From xwvoy, a cone, and
ttfioy, shape.  Of a conical shape.
   Conoid Ligament.  A ligament of
the coracoid process to the scapula.
   CONOIDES  CORPUS.   The  pi-
neal gland.
   CONRING,  HERM.  Author of  a
Dissertation on the Nature and Pain of
the Teeth, by.  Helmsladt, 1672.
   CONSECUTIVE.   Consecutivus;
from con, with,  and  sequor, to follow.
Following as a consequence.
   Consecutive  Symptoms.  Phenom-
ena which appear after, or  during  the
decline of a disease, and as a conse-
quence of it.
  CONSENSUS.  Sympathy, consent
of parts.
  CONSENT OF PARTS.   Consen-
sus.
  CONSER'VA. 'From conservare, to
keep.  A conserve;  a preparation com-
posed of a recent vegetable  substance
and sugar, mixed together in a uniform
mass of about the consistence of honey.
It is  the same as confection.
  Conserva Absin'thii.  Conserve of
wormwood.
  Conserva Ari.  Conserve of arum.
  Conserva Aurantii.  Conserve of
orange peel.
  Conserva Lu'jul.e.  Confection of
wood-sorrel.
  Conserva Menthe.   Conserve of
mint.
  Conserva  Scille.    Conserve of
squills.
  CONSISTENTIA.  From consisto,
to  stand still. The acme of  a disease.
  CONSOLIDANTIA.  A name for-
merly apphed to  substances  supposed
to  be capable of hardening  recently
healed wounds.
  CONSTIPATION.    Constipatio;
from constipare, con and stipare, to cram
close.  Costiveness.   A  state of the
bowels in which  the alvine evacuations
take place less frequently than usual.
   CONSTITUTION. Constitute  In
 Medicine, the general condition of the
 organs of the body, considered with ref-
 erence to their particular arrangement,
 and the manner in which they perform
 their  functions.   Individual  organiza-
 tion.
   Constitution of the Atmosphere.
 The state of the  air; its temperature,
 humidity,  dryness, heat, &c. with res-
 pect to  its influence  upon  the human
 body, and during the prevalence of epi-
 demics.
   CONSTITUTIONAL.    Belonging
 to, or inherent in, the constitution.
   CONSTRICTOR. From constringo,
 to bind together.   To bind in a circular
 direction.   Applied to a muscle which
 contracts any opening in the body.
   Constrictor Al.e Nasi.  The de-
 pressor labii superioris alaeque nasi.
   Constrictor Ani.    The  sphincter
 ani.
   Constrictor Cunni.  The sphincter
 vaginae.
   Constrictor Isthmi Faucium. Gbs-
 so-staphilinus ; palato glossus.  A mus-
 cle at the opening of the fauces, occupy-
 ing the anterior lateral half arches of the
 palate;  it arises  from the  side  of the
 tongue near its root, and is inserted in
 the velum  near the uvula.    It draws
 the velum down, and closes the opening
 into the fauces.
   Constrictor Labiorum.   Constric-
 tor mis.  Orbicularis oris.
   Constrictor (Esophagi.   Constric-
 tor of the oesophagus. A muscle compos-
 ed of a number of circular fibres, situated
 at the opening of the oesophagus.
   Constrictor Palpebrarum. Orbi-
 cularis palpebrarum.
   Constrictor Pharyngis Inferior.
 A muscle situated at  the posterior part
 of the pharynx. It arises from the side
of the thyroid cartilage and its inferior
 cornu,  and from the side of the  cricoid
cartUage, and is inserted with it* fellow
in the middle  line on the back of the
pharynx.  It assists to lessen the cavity
of the pharynx, and thus compels the 
              CON               li

food to  take the downward direction
into the oesophagus.
  Constrictor  Pharyngis Medius.
A muscle at the posterior  part of the
pharynx; it arises from the appendix
and cornu of the os  hyoides, and from
the thyro-hyoid ligament—its fibres as-
cend, run transversely and descend, giv-
ing it a triangular appearance—the up-
per ones overlap the superior constrictor,
while the lower are beneath the inferior,
and the whole pass back to be inserted
into the middle tendinous  line of the
pharynx.
  Constrictor Pharyngis  Superior.
A muscle on the posterior  part of the
pharynx, which arises from the cunei-
form process of the occipital bone, from
the lower part of the internal pterygoid
plate  of the sphenoid bone, from the
pterygo-maxillary ligament, and  from
the posterior  third of the  mylo-hyoid
ridge of the lower jaw, near the root of
the last  molar tooth, and  is inserted
with its fellow into the middle tendinous
line on the back of the pharynx.
  CONSTRIN'GENS.    Astringent;
styptic.
  CONSULTATION. In Medicine, a
meeting  of two or more physicians to
dehberate upon any particular case of
disease.
  CONSUMPTION. Consumptio; from
consumere, to waste  away.  A gradual
or progressive emaciation of the  body,
especially in  phthisis pulmonahs, and
hence, the name consumption  which
this disease has received.
  Consumption,  Pulmonary.   See
Phthisis Pulmonalis.
  CONTABESCENTIA.  Consump-
tion;  atrophy.
  CONTACT.  Contactus; from con-
tingere, to touch.   The state of two
bodies which touch each other.
  CONTA'GION.    Contagio;  from
contingere, to touch.  The communica-
tion of disease from one person to an-
other, either by direct or indirect contact.
This term has also  been employed to
signify all atmospheric and morbid poi-
H               CON

 sons, effluvia, miasmata, and infections
 which  cause fevers,  or diseases that
 give rise to them.  But according to the
 strict definition of the term,  it means
 the communication of a disease by per-
 sonal contact with the  sick, or by the
 afnuvium from the body of the sick.  It
 is  generally regarded  as  synonymous
 with infection.
   CONTA'GIOUS.  Capable of being
 transmitted by direct or indirect contact.
   CONTENSIO.  Tension.
   CONTIGUITY. Contact of bodies;
 a touching; applied to the teeth when
 in contact.
   CONTINENCE. Continentia; from
 continere, to hold or keep.  Chastity.
   CONTINENS FEBRIS. Continued
 fever.
   CONTINUED  FEVER.  A  fever
 which proceeds without interruption.
   CONTINUITY.   Continuous. Ad-
 herence of two things.  Connection.
   CONTORTED. Twisted.  Violent
 movement and torsion of a part.
   CONTRA-APERTU'RA. A coun-
 ter opening, to give exit to matter which
 cannot escape from  the  opening that
 already exists.
   CONTRACTIL'ITY.   Contractili-
 tas. That property in living parts which
 gives to them the power of contracting.
   CONTRACTION. Contractio; from
 contrahere, to draw together.  Action of
 contraction, which arises  from  excited
 contractility. The shortening of a muscle
 or fibre.
   CONTRACTURA.   Contraction of
 a muscle.   Permanent rigidity and pro-
 gressive wasting of the flexor muscles.
   CONTRA-EXTENSIO.    Counter
 extension.
   Contra-Fissu'ra.    From  contra,
 against, and findo, to cleave.   A frac-
 ture or injury in a  part distant from that
 which  received the blow.   Counter-
 fissures occur most  frequently in  the
 cranium, but are  not always confined
 to it.
   Contra-Indication.   Counter indi-
 cation.   A symptom which forbids  the
1 
CON
152
COP
  employment of a remedy which, under
  other circumstances might be used.
    CONTRA YERVA.   From contra,
  against, and  yerva, poison.  An herb
  supposed  to  be a  preventive  against
  poison.
    Contrayerva Alba.   Cantrayerva
  Germanorum. A species of asclepias.
    Contrayerva Nova.   Mexican con-
  trayerva.
    Contrayerva Virginiana.  See Aris-
  tolochia Serpentaria.
    CONTRO-STIM'ULANT. A medi-
  cine which debilitates, or diminishes the
  vital force.
    CONTRO-STIMU'LUS. A doctrine
  of Rasori, founded on the contro-stimu-
  lant property of certain medicines, as
  emetic tartar, &c.
    CONTU'SION.  Contusio; from con-
  tundere, to knock together.  A  bruise;
  an injury, or  lesion, in which there is
  extravasation of blood,  caused by  the
  shock of a body with  a large surface.
  When the skin is divided, it is called a
  contused wound.
    CONUS.   A cone.  Strobile.
    CONVALESCENCE. Convalescen-
  tia;  from  convalescere, to grow well.
  Recovery  of health after the cure of dis-
  ease.
    CONVALESCENT.    Recovering
  health, after the cure  or  subsidence of
  disease.
    CONVALLA'RIA.  From  convallis,
  a valley, from its abounding in valleys.
  The name of a  genus of plants.  The
  lily of the valley.
    Convallaria Majalis.  The lily of
  the valley. May-lily.
    Convallaria Polygonatum.  Solo-
  mon's seal.
    CONVEX.  A swelling on the exte-
'  rior  surface of a round or  spherical
  form; gibbous; opposed to concave.
    CONVOLUTION.  Convolutio; from
  convolvere, to roll together. A substance
  rolled upon itself.
    Convolutions of the Brain.  The
  round undulating, winding  projections
  of the surface of the brain.
  Convolutions of the Intestines.
The windings made by the intestines in
the abdominal cavity.
  CONVOL'VULUS.  Intussusceptio.
Also, the name of a genus of plants.
  Convolvulus Jala'pa.  The Jalap
plant.
  Convolvulus Major Albus.  Con-
volvulus sepium.
  Convolvulus  Scammo'nia.  The
scammony plant.
  Convolvulus Se'pium. A plant, the
juice of which is possessed of active
purgative quahties.
  Convolvulus  Soldanel'la.  The
sea convolvulus.  Soldanella.
  Convolvulus Turpe'thum.   The
turbith plant.  Turpethum.
  CONVUL'SION.  Convuhw;  from
convellere,  to pull  together.   Violent
agitation of the whole body, attended by
alternate violent  involuntary contrac-
tions and  relaxations of the muscles,
and, as a consequence,  distortion of the
limbs, muscles of the face, &c.  When
the alternate contraction  is slight, it is
called tremor, but when violent and per-
manent, tetanus, trismus,  &c.  It may
be general or partial.  When general,
all the muscles of the body are more or
less affected, as  in the case of epilepsy
and hysteria. When partial, it affects
only several muscles, as in the cases of
chorea, risus sardonicus, &c.
  CONVUL'SIVE.  Tending  to con-
vulsion.  Slightly spasmodic.
  CONVULSIVES. Medicines which
increase the  irritability of the muscles,
and  induce  convulsions,  as  strychnia,
brucia, &c.
  CONYZA.  The name of a genus
of plants.   Great fleabane.
  COOPERTORIUM.   The  thyroid
cartilage.
  COPA'IBA.  The resinous exudation
of various copaiferous trees.  Balsam
of copaiva.
  COPAIF'ERA  OFFICINALIS.—
The name of a  genus of plants.   The
systematic  name  of the plant from
which the copaiba balsam is obtained. 
COR               153               COR
  COPAL. A resinous substance used
in making varnishes.
  COPPER.  A metal  of a  reddish-
brown color, inclining to yellow, of a
disagreeable taste and smell; very mal-
leable and ductile,  but possessing the
former quality in a higher degree than
the latter.  It is possessed  of greater
tenacity than either  gold,  silver,  or
platinum.  It is  found native, and in
many  ores—the most  important  of
which are the varieties of pyrites, sul-
phurets of copper  and iron.  Its spe-
cific gravity is 8.6.  It fuses  at about
2000° of Fahrenheit's scale.   It readily
tarnishes, forming a red sub-oxyd. The
salts of copper are, for the most part, of
a green color, and those which are solu-
ble are  poisonous.   But for  its medi-
cinal preparations,  see  Cuprum.  In
Mechankal Dentistry, it  is  used  for
alloying gold, and in gold solders.  See
Gold, Alloying of, and Gold Solder.
  COPPERAS.  Sulphate of iron.
  COPPER NOSE.  Gutta rosea.
  COPRAGO'GUM. From xortpoy, the
excrement, and ayu, I bring away.   A
cathartic.
  COPROSTA'SIS. Constipation; cos-
tiveness.
  COPTIS.  Coptis trifolia; a bitter
plant, sometimes used in aphthous and
other ulcerations of the mouth.
  COPULATION.  Coition.
  COPYO'PIA.  Weakness of sight.
  COR'ACO-BRA'CHIALIS. A mus-
cle situated at the inner and upper part
of the arm.  It arises from  the fore-
part of the coracoid process of the scap-
ula, and is inserted about the middle of
the inner side of the os humeri.
  Coraco-Clavicular  Ligament.   A
ligament which serves  to  unite  the
clavicle to the coracoid  process of  the
scapula.
  Coraco-Hyoideus.   A muscle  be-
tween the os hyoides and shoulder. See
Omo-hyoideus.
  CO'RACOID.   Coracoideus;  from
xopa£,  a bird, a crow,  and «8oy,  re-
semblance.  Resembling the beak of a
crow.  A name apphed to some  pro-
cesses  from their fancied  resemblance
to a crow's beak.  A process  situated
at the anterior part of the  upper mar-
gin of the scapula is designated by this
name.
  CORAL.  From xopea,  I adorn, aXi,
the sea.  A  beautiful production, at-
tached to sub-marine rocks, in the  form
of a shrub.  It is of a bright red, black,
or white color, and is principally com-
posed of a calcareous substance, secreted
by the animals which form it.
  CORALLFNA.   The  name  of  a
genus of marine productions, supposed
to be polypifers, having the appearance
of a plant, and containing gelatine, al-
bumen, chloride of sodium, phosphate,
carbonate and sulphate of lime, carbo-
nate of magnesia, silica, oxyd of  iron,
and a coloring principle.
  CORAL'LIUM.   Coral.
  CORD, UMBILICAL.  The  cord
formed by the union of the umbilical ves-
sels and integuments, and which con-
nects the fetus with the placenta.
   CORD A.   A cord.
   COR'DIAL.   Cordiacus; from cor,
cordis, the heart. Warm  and  exciting
medicines,  formerly supposed  to  be
strengthening to the heart.
   CORDOLIUM. From cor, the heart,
and doler, pain.  Cardialgia, or heart-
burn.
   CORE.  The pupil of the eye.
   CORECTOM'IA. See Coretomia.
   CORECTOP'IA.   From  xoptj, the
pupil, tx, out, and -r'ortoy, place. A de-
viation of the pupil of the eye from the
centre, occasioned by one segment of
the iris being larger than the other.
  CORE'MATA. Fromxop£to, I cleanse.
Remedies for cleansing the skin.
   COREON'CION.  Coroncion;  from
xopjf, the pupil, and oyxtiw, a hook.  An
instrument used for the formation of an
artificial pupil.
  CORETOM'IA.   From  xop^, the
pupil, and ttpvtiv, to cut. The opera-
tion  for the formation of an  artificial
pupil. 
COR               154               COR
  CORIA'CEOUS.   Coriaceus; from
corium, leather.  Leathery.
  CORIAN'DRUM.  The name  of a
genus of plants.  Coriander.
  CORIAN'DRUM Sati'vum. The corian-
der plant.  The seeds of this plant have
a slightly  warm  and grateful pungent
taste; and are moderately carminative.
  CORIANNON.   Coriandrum   sati-
vum.
  CORIS.  From xupa, to cleave, or
cut, because it was used to heal wounds.
St.  John's-wort.  Also, the  name of a
genus of plants.
  Coris Monspeliensis.  Symphytum
poztreum.  Heath-pine.
  CORIUM.  Corion. Leather.  The
cutis vera.
  Corium Phlogis'ticum.  The grey-
ish  crust or buff,  which forms on blood
taken from a vein  during  inflamma-
tion, &.C.
  CORK.  The  bark of quercus suber.
  CORMUS.  KoPiuoy, a bulbous en-
largement of the stem of a plant  dis-
tended under ground.
  CORN.  SeeClavus.
  CORNACE^E.  The natural  group
to which the dogwood trees belong.
  COR'NEA. Membrana cornea; from
cornu, horn.  The  anterior transparent
tunic, or sclerotic  membrane  of the  eye,
is so called from its horny consistence.
  Cornea Opaca.   The sclerotic  coat
of the eye.
  Cornea, Opaque.   Caligo.
  CORNEITIS.  Inflammation  of the
cornea.
  CORNICULA.  An  old  cupping
instrument, shaped like a trumpet, with
a hole at the small  end for exhausting
the  air by sucking.
  CORNICULATE.   Having  horn-
like processes.
  CORNIFORMIS.  Shaped  like a
horn.
  CORNU. A horn; a corneous  ex-
crescence,  as  a  wart on the skin; a
corn; the angular cavities  formed by
the termination of  the ventricles  of the
brain are called cornua, or horns.
  Cornu Acusticum. An ear-trumpet.
  Cornu  Ammonis.   Cornu  arietis.
The cortical  substance of the  human
brain, as shown by cutting transversely
through the pes hippocampi, is so called
from its resemblance to the  horn of a
ram. Thepes hijypocampi, is also some-
times called the cornu ammonis.
  Cornu Arietis.  Cornu ammonis.
  Cornu  Cervi.    Heartshorn.  The
horns of several species of the stag con-
tain a considerable quantity of gelatin
which they impart to water when boil-
ed.  When burnt  they afford the cornu
ustum, and the spirit of hartshorn, (liquor
vobtilis  cornu cervi) at present super-
ceded by  ammonia, is obtained from
them by distillation.
  Cornu  Ustum.   Cornu cervi calcl
natum.  Calcined  cornu cervi, which
consists  of phosphate of  lime  with a
very small proportion of  carbonate  of
lime and phosphate of magnesia.
  CORNUA.  The turbinated bones;
also, applied  to the processes of the
hyoid and  other bones.
  Cornua Coccygis.  Two tubercular
eminences at the base and outer side  of
the coccyx, articulated with those of the
sacrum.
  Cornua Hyoidei Ossis.   The cornua
of the hyoid  bone, situated  above  its
body, and  designated by  small or supe-
rior, and great or kiteral.
  Cornua Lachrymalia.  The lach-
rymal ducts.
  Cornua Sacra'lia.  The cornua of
the sacrum.
  Cornua Uteri.  The cornua of the
uterus are the angles  where the fallo-
pian tubes arise.
  CORNUS.   The name of a genus of
plants.
  Cornus Florida.  Dogwood.
  Cornus Circina'ta.  Round-leafed
dogwood.
  Cornus Sericea.  Swamp dogwood.
  COROA.   Coruova, cornova.  The
name of a very bitter bark, possessing
febrifuge properties, obtained in the East
Indies, and recently brought to Europe. 
COR
155
COR
  COROL'LA.  From coronula, a little
crown.  That part of  a flower within
the  calyx which  immediately  sur-
rounds the organs of fructification.
  COROLLARY. A consequent truth,
drawn from a proposition already demon-
strated.
  CORO'NA.  A crown. A term used,
in Anatomy and Botany, to designate
parts  which are  supposed to  resemble
a crown.
  Corona Ciliaris.  The cihary liga-
ment.
  Corona Dentis.  The  crown of  a
tooth.
  Corona Glands.  The margin of the
glans penis.
  Corona Imperialis. Fritillaria im-
periahs.  A plant used by the Turks as
an emetic.
  Corona Regia.  Trifolium melilotus
officinalis.  The plant  mehlot.
  Corona Terre.  Ground-ivy.
  Corona Tubulorum. A circle form-
ed by the minute mouths of the excreto-
ry ducts of the glands of Peyer.
  Corona Veneris. Venereal blotches,
or pustules, on the forehead.
  CORO'NAL.  Coronalis; from coro-
na, crown.   Belonging to a crown; a
name formerly  given  to the os frontis,
because  it  is  the part on which the
crown of kings partly rests.
  Coronal Suture. The suture which
extends over the head from one tempo-
ral bone to the other, uniting the parie-
tal  bones with the frontal.
  COR'ONARY.   Coronarius, from
corona, a crown.  In Anatomy, apphed
to parts which are supposed to resemble
a crown.
  Coronary Arteries of  the Heart.
The  two  arteries which  supply the
heart with blood.
  Coronary Artery of the Stomach.
Anteria coronaria ventriculi.  A branch
of the coeliac artery, distributed upon the
lesser curvation of the stomach.  It is
 accompanied by a vein called the vena
 coronaria ventriculi.
   Coronary Ligament.   A  reflection
of the peritoneum which surrounds the
posterior margin of the fiver.
  CORO'NE.   Kopavrj, a crow. The
coronoid process of the lower jaw is so
called from its  resemblance to the bill
of a crow.
  CORONOID.  Coronoides, from xo-
pavri, a crow, and «6oy, hkeness.  Like
the beak of a crow ; applied to a pro-
cess of the inferior  maxillary, and of
the ulna.
  CORPORA ALBICANTIA. The
two white eminences at the base of the
brain.
  Corpora Geniculata.  Two small
eminences situated at  the lower  and
outer part of the optic thalami.
  Corpora Malpighiana.    Acini of
Malpighi.   A number of small dark
points scattered through the plexus of
blood-vessels and urinary tubes in the
kidney.
  Corporia Olivaria.  Two  oblong
whitish eminences of  the medulla ob-
longata, exterior to the corpora pyrami-
dalia.
  Corporia Pyramida'lia. Two small
eminences, one on each side of  the oc-
cipital surface of the medulla oblongata,
and between the corpora olivaria.
   Corpora  Restifor'mia.   Two ob-
long medullary eminences, one on each
side of the upper extremity of the me-
dulla oblongata.
   Corpora Stria'ta.  Eminences of  a
light brownish grey color, of a pyriform
shape, which form part of the floor of
the ventricles of the brain.
   Corpora Striata Superna Posteri-
ora.  The thalami nervorum opticorum.
   CORPUS.  A  body.   Many parts
are so called, as the corpus callosum, &c.
   Corpus Callosum.  The white me-
dullary part of the  brain joining  the
hemispheres.
   Corpus Dentatum.  An oval nu-
cleus of cineritious matter, seen in the
cerebellum.
   Corpus Fim b r ia'tum .  The flattened
extremity of the  posterior crus of the
fornix. 
COR
156
COR
   Corpus Glandulo'sum.  The pros-
 tate gland.
   Corpus GlandulosumMulie'rum.
 A vascular, spongy body, surrounding
 the orifice of the female urethra.
   Corpus  Highmorianum.   An  ob-
 long eminence, running along the  su-
 perior edge  of the testicle.
   Corpus Lu'teum. A yellow spot ob-
 served in the ovarium  from which the
 ovum has proceeded.
   Corpus Muco'sum.  The second lay-
 er of the skin,  situated between  the
 cutis vera and cuticle, which gives color
 to the body.
   Corpus Nerveo-Spongiosum. The
 cavernous substance of the penis.
   Corpus Nervosum.  The cavernous
 body of the clitoris.
   Corpus Pampinifor'me.  Pampini-
forme ;  from pampinus, a tendril. The
 plexus  of veins which surround the
 spermatic artery  in the abdomen.
   Corpus Papilla're. The nervous and
 Vascular papillae  of the rete mucosum.
   Corpus Pyramida'le. The corpora
 pyramidalia.
   Corpus Riticulare. The rete mu-
 cosum.
   Corpus Spongio'sum Ure'thrje.—
 The spongy structure around the ure-
 thra.
   Corpus Striatum.   The corpora
striata.
   Corpus Wolffianum. Two  bodies
situated in the region of the kidneys in
the young fetus, which  disppear about
the tenth week.
   CORPUS'CLE.    A  very minute
body; a mere atom.
   Corpuscles of  the Blood.   The
globules of the blood.
   CORPUSCULAR ACTION. Mo-
lecular action.
   CORRIGENT.   Corrigens;  correc-
torius.  That which corrects;  in a med-
ical prescription, the addition of a sub-
stance, to modify, or render the action
of another more mild.
   CORRI'GIA.  A leather strap; also,
apphed to tendons and ligaments.
    CORROB'ORANT.  Corrohoram;
 from coroborare, to strengthen. Strength-
 ening medicines.  See Tonics.
    CORROBORANTIA.  Tonics.
    CORRO'SION.  Corrosio;  erosw;
 from con, and rodere, rosum,  to gnaw.
 The action of corrosive substances.
    CORRO'SIVE.  Substances which
 corrode, or when placed in contact with
 living parts disorganize them.
    Corrosive Sublimate.   Corrosive
 chloride of mercury;  bichloride of mer-
 cury.  Hydrargyri  chbridum corrosl
 vium.
    CORRUGATION. Corrugatio; from
 con, and ruga,  a  wrinkle.  Wrinkling,
 frowning.
   CORRUGATOR.  Applied to mus-
 cles, the office of which is to corrugate
 the parts upon which they act.
   Corrugator Supercilii.  A small
 muscle of the eyebrow.
   CORSET  DE  BRASDOR.   A
 bandage invented by Brasdor, for keep-
 ing in  place the fragments of a frac-
 tured clavicle.
   CORTEX.  Bark, or  the common
 integuments of plants.  It is sometimes
 applied  exclusively  to the Peruvian
 bark, or cortex cinchona.
   Cortex Angeline. The bark of a
 tree which grows  in Grenada, the an-
 dera inermis, or cabbage-tree.
   Cortex Angusture.  Cusparia.
   Cortex Antiscorbuticus. The ca-
 nella alba.
   Cortex Canelle  Malabaricje.—
 Larus cassia, or wild cinnamon tree.
   Cortex Cardinalis de Lugo.  The
 Peruvian bark.
   Cortex Cerebri.   The grey portion
 of the brain, seen at the exterior of the
 cerebrum and cerebellum.
   Cortex Chine Regius.  Cinchona.
   Cortex Massoy.  Massoy bark.
  CORTICAL.    From  cortex, bark.
Belonging to bark.
  CORU.  The name of  a tree which
grows in India; the juice of the bark of
which is  employed  in diarrhoea and
dysentery. 
COT
157
COU
   CORUNDUM.  A  very hard crys-
 talline mineral.
   CORYMB.  Corymbus.  A  species
 of inflorescence, formed by many flow-
 ers, the  partial flower  stalks being pro-
 duced along the common  stalk on both
 sides, and  though of  unequal  length,
 rise to the  same  height, and form an
 even surface.
   CORYMBIF'ER^E.  From  corym-
 bus,  a corymb, and few,  I bear.  In
 Botany,  plants which bear a corymb, or
 produce  flowers, or fruit in clusters.
   CORY'ZA. Kopi£»; from xapa, the
 head, and fsw, to boil.   Inflammation,
 attended with increased discharge of
 mucus from the  nose.   A cold in the
 head; a  catarrh.
   Coryza   Maligna.  Mahgnant co-
 ryza.  Ozena.
   COSMET'IC.    Cosmeticus;  from
 xoopia, to adorn. An external medicine
 used for  beautifying the skin.
   COS'MOS.  From xoo/ms, the  world,
 order.  A  regular series.   The order
 supposed to preside over critical days.
   COSSUM.  A mahgnant ulcer of the
 nose.
   COSSIS.    A little pimple on the
 face, caused by inflammation, or  an en-
 largement of a sebaceous follicle.
   COSTA.  In Anatomy, the rib of an
 animal;  in Botany, the  thick fibres of a
 leaf which proceed from the base to the
 apex, are called ribs.
   COSTAL.  Costalis; from costa,  a
 rib.  Belonging to a rib;  a name ap-
 plied to some muscles, arteries, nerves,
 ligaments, &c.
   COSTATUS.  Ribbed.
   COSTIVENESS.  Constipation.
   COSTO.  From costa, a rib. A pre-
 fix, applied to muscles, nerves, &c. con-
 nected with the ribs.
  COSTUS.   From kasta,  Arabian.
 The name of a genus of plants.
  Costus Arabicus. Costus indicus;
amarus;  dulcis; orientalis.  Sweet and
bitter costus.
  CostusCorticosus. The canella alba.
  COTTON.  A white, soft, downy
     14                          3
  substance resembling fine wool, the pro-
  duce of the pods of gossypium  herba-
  ceum.  It is employed, in Dental Sur-
  gery, for wiping out and drying the pre-
  pared  cavity of a carious tooth, pre-
  paratory to filling.   See Filling  Teeth.
    COTULA.   Cotulafoztida, anthemes
  cotula.   The may-weed, o& stinking
  chamomile.
    COTUN'NIUS, LiaUOR OF.   A
  transparent fluid of the labyrinth of the
  internal ear.
   COTYLE'DON. The seminal leaves,
  or lobe that nourishes the seed  of a plant.
    COTYLEDONE^E. Phonerogamia,
  or flowering plants.
    COTYLEDONS.   In  Comparative
 Anatomy, the cup-like processes  of the
 chorion, which form the placenta.
    COUCHING.  A surgical operation
 for the removal of the opaque  lens from
 the axis of vision, by means of a  needle
 constructed for the purpose.
    COUGH.  A sonorous and energetic
 expulsion of air  from  the thorax,
 and fauces.   It occurs as a symptom of
 asthma, phthisis, pneumonitis, catarrh,
 &.c,  and is  often attended by expecto-
 ration.
   Cough, Hooping.  See Pertussis.
   COUNTER-EXTENSION.   Con-
 tra-extension.  Drawing a dislocated or
 fractured limb in a contrary direction to
 that in which it is acted on by the mus-
 cles,  whilst the upper part is firmly re-
 tained in a suitable manner.
   COUNTER-INDICATION.   Con-
 tra-indication.
   COUNTER-IRRITATION.   Con-
 tra-irritation.  Irritation excited  in  a
 part,  not the seat of the disease, for the
 purpose  of  inducing a derivation of
 blood, and changing the  seat of the
 morbid action  to a part less important
 than the affected  organ.
  Counter-Opening.
 apertura.
  COUNTER-SINK.
fixed  in a handle, with a cone-shaped
burr at the opposite extremity,  employ-
ed in  the laboratory of the dentist lor
See  Contra-
A  steel-stem 
cou
158
COX
 enlarging the orifice of a hole in a metal
 plate for the reception of the head of a
 rivet.  Also, a steel-burr so constructed
 as to be attached to the extremity of the
 mandrel of a lathe,  and used for  ex-
'cavating ivory and osseous bases for ar-
 tificial teeth, and for cutting solder from
 a metallic plate.
   COUP DE MAITRE.  The intro-
 duction of a sound or catheter  into the
 urethra, with the convexity towards the
 abdomen,  and afterwards giving  it a
 half-turn, to enter the bladder.
   COUP DE SANG.   Sudden con-
 gestion  of an organ without  hemorr-
 hage; also, loss of sensation  and motion
 caused by  congestion or hemorrhage in
 an important organ.
   COUP DE SOLEIL. A stroke of
 the sun.  An affection produced by ex-
 posure to the rays of the sun, as phre-
 nitis, &c.   It is generally the result of
 exposure of the  naked head to the sun's
 rays, and usually occurs in hot climates,
 or during  the hottest days of summer.
    COURAP.  An  Indian name for an
 eruptive disease,  attended  with  per-
 petual itching and discharge of matter.
    COURBARIL.   The name of the
 tree from which the gum anime is ob-
 tained.
    COURT PLASTER.  Emplastum
 adhozsivum anglicum.   Black or flesh-
 colored  silk,  covered on one side with
 some adhesive  substance,  most  fre-
 quently with a  solution of isinglass.
     COURTOIS,  HONORE-GAILL-
 ARD.  An eminent French dentist of
 the eighteenth  century,  and author of
 the Observing Dentist, or,  a Collection
  of Observations on  the Diseases of the
  Gums and Teeth; the Means for their
  Cure; the Precise Structure of the Parts,
  the  Formation and Connection of the
  Teeth,  with a  Refutation  of the  Pre-
  tended Efficacy of Essences and Elix-
  irs, and a Description of a New Pelican
  for the  Extraction of the Molar Teeth.
  Pubhshed, Paris, 1775.
    Courtois' Lotion for  Ulcerated
  Gums.  Take,  pulv.  rock  alum,  3 ij;
tine, of myrrh and aloes § i;  camphor
 3 i; brandy § viij.  Mix.  To be used
as a gargle and applied to the  ulcerated
gums several times a day.
  COUTOUBEA ALBA.   A bitter
plant of Guiana, supposed to be anthel-
mintic,  emmenagogue, and  anti-dys-
peptic.
  COVOLAM.   See Crataeva.
  COWBANE. Cicuta aquatica. Wa-
ter hemlock.
  COWDIE GUM.   Cowdie pine re-
sin.   The resinous juice from the dam-
mara australis, a coniferous tree of New
Zealand.  It is one of the ingredients of
copal varnishes.
  COWHAGE.  Cow-itch.  See Do-
lichos Pruriens.
  COWPER'S  GLANDS.   Glandu-
loz Cowperi.  Two small groups of mu-
cous follicles, situated before the pros-
tate gland, behind the bulb of the ure-
thra, into which their excretory ducts
open.
  Cowper's Glands in the Female.
Two small glands on each side of the
 entrance  of the vagina, beneath  the
 skin at the posterior part of the labia.
  COW-POX. Vaccina; vacciola. Kine-
 pox. A pustular disease of the teats of
 cows, consisting of vesicles of a bluish
 and  livid color, elevated at  their mar-
 gins and  depressed in the  centre, con-
 taining a limpid fluid.  The  discovery,
 by Dr. Jenner, that the introduction of
 this matter under the skin of the human
 subject,  produces  a  similar  disease,
 which  is  a preventive against small-
 pox, has conferred an inestimable bless-
 ing upon mankind. See Vaccination.
   COXA.  The haunch, or hip-joint;
 also, the ischium and os coccygis.
   COX^ELUVIUM.   From coxa,  and
 lavo, to wash,   A hip-bath.
   COXAGRA.  A neuralgic affection
 of the thigh.
   COXAL'GIA. From coxa, hip,  and
 aXyoi, pain,  Pain in the hip.
   COXARIUS MORBUS.  Coxorum.
 Hip disease.
   COXO-FEMORAL. Coxo-femoralu. 
CRA
159
CRE
 Belonging to the coxal bone or ilium,
 and os femoris.
   Coxo-Femoral Articulation. The
 hip-joint.
   CRAB.  A shell-fish. See Cancer.
   Crab's  Eyes.    Cancrorum  cheloz.
 Concretions found in the crayfish, con-
 sisting principally of  carbonate and
 phosphate of lime.
   Crab-Yaws.   A West Indian name
 for a kind  of ulcer on the soles of the
 feet.   See  Frambossia.
   CRADLE.  A  semi-circular  appa-
 ratus used by surgeons to prevent the
 contact of bed clothes  with diseased
 parts.
   CRAMP.  Sudden  and involuntary
 contraction of  one or more  muscles.
 See Spasm.
   CRANE, J. W.  Author of a paper
 on Filling Teeth, pubhshed in the 8th
 volume of American Journal of Dental
 Science,  and  of a work  entitled, the
 Vade Mecum; or Brief Remarks on the
 Treatment  of the Teeth,  Eyes,  &,c.
 New York, 1847.
   CRANIOL'OGY.  Phrenology.
   CRANIO'SCOPY.   From  xpcwaor,
 the skull, and exonta,  to explore. The
 examination of the skull.
   CRA'NIUM. From xpawov,the head.
 The bony encasement  of the brain and
 its membranes.   It is composed of eight
 bones; namely, the os frontis, the two
 ossa parietalia, the  two ossa temporum,
 the os occipitis, the os ethmoides, and the
 os sphenoides.  The two last  are common
 to the cranium and face.
   Cranium Human. The human skull,
 or cranium.
   CRANTER. From  xpaivnv, to finish,
 render perfect.   The  dentes sapientiae
 are sometimes  so  called,  because the
 presence of these teeth is necessary to a
 a perfect denture.
  CRA'SIS.  From xtpavw/u, I mix.
A mixture of the constituents of a fluid.
The term is apphed to the fluids of the
body.   When their constituents exist in
proper proportion,  health  results, but
when  some  predominates, as in dropsy, I
 scurvy, &c. the healthy mixture of the
 principles of the blood, or crasis, is de-
 stroyed.
   CRASSAMEN'TUM.  From crassus,
 thick. The thick part of any fluid. The
 clot of the blood.
   CRATiEVA. The name of a genus
 of plants.  The  fruit  of nearly  all the
 species have  been  called garlic pears,
 from its peculiar alliaceous odor.
   CRAUSE.  Author of a Dissertation
 on the Sensibility of the Teeth.   Pub-
 lished at Jena, 1704.
   CRAUSIUS.  Author of a Disserta-
 tion on Tooth-ache.  Pubhshed at Jena,
 1681.
   CRE A.  The anterior part of the
 leg.  The shin.
   CREAM.  A thick unctuous matter
 which rises to the surface of milk, com-
 posed of butter, serum and casein.
   Cream  of Tartar.   See  Potassae
 Bitartras.
   CRE'ASOTE.   Creasotum; creazo-
 tum; from xptay, flesh, and  crofw, to
 preserve.  A colorless, transparent fluid,
 of a disagreeable, penetrating odor, solu-
 ble in alcohol  and acetic acid, obtained
 from tar by distillation.
   CREMAS'TER.   From xpifiaa, I
 suspend.   The muscle by which the
 testicle  is suspended, drawn  up  and
 compressed during the action of coition.
   CREMNON'CUS,  From  xp^ivoy,
 the labia pudendi, and oyxoy, a tumor.
 A swelling of the labia pudendi.
   CREMNUS.  The lip  of an ulcer;
 also, the labia pudendi.
   CRE'MOR.  Cream. Any substance
 floating on the top of a  liquid,  and
 skimmed off.
   Cremor Tartari.  Cream of tartar,
   CRENA.  Crenatura. The irregular
 projection, or  serratures by which an
 accurate junction of the bones of the
 cranium is formed by the sutures.
  CRENA'TUS.  Notched or scolloped.
  CREOSOTE.  Creasote.
  CREPITATION.  From crepito, to
make  a  crackling noise.   In Surgery,
the noise made by  the friction of the 
CRI
160
CRI
extremities of fractured  bones against
each other when  moved in certain di-
rections. It is also apphed to the crackling
noise made by effused air into the cellu-
lar membrane  when pressed between
the fingers.
   CREPITUS.  From crepo, to make
a noise.  Crepitation.  The noise made
by a discharge of wind from the bowels,
or by the ends of a fractured bone when
rubbed against each other.
  .CRESCENTIA.  Growth.
   Crescen'tia Cuje'te.  The narrow
leaved  calabash tree.   A  West India
plant, the pulp of the fruit of which  is
acidulous and is used in diarrhoea, &c.
   CRESCENTIA.  Enlargement of
the lymphatics  in the groins.  Waxen
kernels.
   CRESS.  A name applied to a num-
ber of plants of a pungent taste.
   Cress, Garden.  Lepidium sativum.
   Cress, Indian.   Tropoeolum majus.
   Cress, Water.   Sisymbrium  aqua-
ticum.
   CREST.  See Crista.
   CRESTED.   Cristatus.
   CRETA.   Chalk.   Native friable
carbonate of lime.
   Creta Preparata.  Prepared chalk.
   CRETACEOUS.   Chalky.  Con-
taining, or relating to, chalk.
   CRETIN.   One affected with  cre-
tinism.
   CRETINISM. ' Cretinismus.  A pe-
culiar  endemic affection  common in
some parts of Valais, Tyrol, Switzer-
land and the Pyrenees, characterized by
an idiotic expression of countenance,
enfeeblement of the mental faculties, ob-
tuse sensibihty and goitre.
   CRIBRATUS.   Cribrosus.  Like a
sieve;  perforated with holes.
   CRIB'RIFORM. Cribriformis; from
cribrum, a sieve,  and forma, likeness,
because it is perforated like a sieve. The
ethmoid bone.
   CRICK IN THE NECK  An ex-
ceedingly painful rheumatic affection of
the muscles of the neck,  causing the
person to hold his head to one side, and
preventing him from turning  it in any
other direction.
   CRI'CO-ARYTENOID. Crico-avy-
tenoidazus.  Pertaining to the cricoid and
arytenoid cartilages.
   Crico-Arytenoid,  Lateral.    A
muscle which  arises from the cricoid
cartilage, and is inserted into the ante-
rior part of the base of the  arytenoid
cartilage.
   Crico-Arytenoid,  Posterior.  A
triangular muscle situated at the back
part  of  the larynx, arising  from the
middle of the posterior surface of the cri-
coid cartilage, and inserted into the base
of the arytenoid cartilage.
   Crico-Pharyngeus.  See  Constric-
tor Pharyngis Inferior.
   Crico-Thyroideus.    Cr'ieo-tlryroid.
A muscle of a triangular shape at the
anterior and inferior part of the larynx.
It arises from the side and anterior part of
the cricoid cartilage, and is inserted into
the inferior margin of the thyroid carti-
lage.
   Crico-Thyro  Pharyng.eus.   The
constrictor pharyngis.
   CRICOID.     Cricoides, cricoideus;
from  xpixoy, a ring, and «Soy, resemb-
lance.  The name of one  of the carti-
lages of the larynx. It is round like a ring.
   CRIMNO'DES.   Crimnotdes,  from
xpifivov, coarse meal, and  «5oy, resemb-
lance.    Resembling meal.    A  term
applied to urine, when it deposits a sedi-
ment like coarse meal or bran.
   CRINALE.  From crinis, hair.  A
compressing instrument formerly used
in cases of fistula lachrymalis.  One
end of the  instrument consisted  of a
cushion stuffed with hair, and hence its
name.
   CRINIS.   The hair.
   CRINONES.  A morbid  secretion
produced by the  sebaceous follicles in
children, resembling small grubs.
   CRISIS.  Diacrisis;  judgment; from
xpivco,  I  judge.   A  sudden change in
diseases, especially fevers, for the  better
or worse.  Its meaning is restricted by
some to favorable changes. 
CRI
161
CRO
  CRISPATION.   Crispatura;  from
crispare, to wrinkle.  Contraction of
any part, whether natural or the result
of a morbific cause.
  CRISTA.  The  comb of a cock; a
crest.  A term apphed in Anatomy, to
several processes and parts of bones, and
also to the chtoris.  In Surgery, excres-
cences about the anus, and near the
genital organs, produced  by syphilitic
diseases are so called from their resemb-
lance to the comb" of a cock.
  Crista Galli.  A triangular pro-
cess, or eminence of the  ethmoid bone
above the cribriform plate, which gives
attachment to the  anterior part of the
falx cerebri, so called from its resemb-
lance to the comb of a cock.
  Crista of the Ilium.   The superior
margin of the ilium.
  Crista Urethralis.   The  caput
gallinaginis.
  CRISTATUS.  Crested.
  CRITH'MUM.  From xpwa,  to se-
crete, from its supposed virtues in pro-
moting  a secretion of urine and  a dis-
charge  of the  menses.  Samphire, or
sea-fennel.
  Crithmum Maritimum.   The Lin-
naean name of the samphire or sea-
fennel.
  CRITICAL.   Criticus;  from crisis,
and  xnva,  to judge.  Belonging to  a
crisis, or determining the result of a dis-
ease from certain symptoms.
  Critical Days. The days on which
the ancients supposed the crisis of fever
would be likely to happen.   According
to Hippocrates and Galen,  the seventh
and fourteenth, were the most favorable;
then the ninth, eleventh and twentieth;
then  the  seventeenth  and  fifth,  and,
lastly, the fourth, third and  eighteenth.
The sixth day was regarded by Galen
as unfavorable for the crisis.  The most
unfavorable days for  crises, after  the
sixth, were the eighth,  tenth, twelfth,
sixteenth and nineteenth. The thirteenth,
is a day  not marked by any particular
change, either favorable or unfavorable.
Physicians of the present  time  place
      14*
little reliance in the  doctrine of critical
days of fevers.
  CROCINUM. From xpoxoy, saffron.
Made with saffron; colored with saf-
fron.  A mixture of oil and saffron.
  CROCUS.  The name of a genus of
plants.   Saffron; the pharmacopoeial
name of the prepared stigmata of saf-
fron.  Also, the name  of several pre-
parations of metallic substances, as cro-
cus martis and crocus veneris.
  Crocus Antimonii.  A sulphuretted
oxyd of antimony.
  Crocus Germanicus.   Carthamus
tinctorius, or bastard saffron.
  Crocus Indicus.  Curcuma longa.
  Crocus Martis.  Calcined sulphate
of iron.  See Polishing Rouge.
  Crocus Sativus.  The saffron  plant.
  Crocus Veneris.  Oxyd of copper,
formed by calcining the metal.
  CROSS WORT.  Eupatorium per-
foliatum.
  CROTALUS. From xpotaxov, a rat-
tle.  The rattle-snake.
  CROTAPHITES.  From xpoT-ofloy,
the temple.  Pertaining  to the temples.
A term applied  to the temporal artery,
vein or nerve.
   CROTAPHOS.  Crotaphium; from
xpotca, to pulsate.   A pulsating pain in
the temples.
   CROTCHET.  A small hook. Ap-
plied by the French, in Dental Prosthe-
sis, to clasps employed for the retention
of a dental substitute in the mouth.
   CROTON.   The name of a genus of
plants.
   Croton Benzoe. Styrax benzoin.
   Croton Cascaril'la.   Croton elu-
theria.
   Croton Eleutheria.   The  plant
which affords the cascarilla bark.
   Croton Lacciferum.  The  name of
an East Indian  tree, which yields the
resinous juice which affords gum lac.
   Croton Tiglium.   A  Ceylonese
plant, every  part of which is said to
possess medicinal power. The root acts
as a drastic cathartic.  From the seeds
the croton oil, okum tiglii, is expressed. 
CRU               162               CRU
  Croton Oil.  Oleum tighi.
  Croton Tinctorium.  The lac plant.
  CROTO'NE.  A fungus  found on
trees, produced by an insect like a tick.
Also, by extension,  applied  to small
fungous tumors of the periosteum.
  CROUP.  Suffocating breathing, ac-
companied  by a stridulous noise, dry
cough,  and  expectoration of  tough
membranous  sputum.  See Cynanche
Trachealis.
  CROWFOOT.  See Ranunculus.
  Crowfoot-Cranesbill.  Geranium
pratense.
  CROWN.  Corona.  In Anatomy, ap-
phed to parts of a  circular form  sur-
mounting other portions of the  same
body, as the crown  of a tooth, corona
dentis, &c.
  Crown of  a Tooth. The exposed
part of a tooth in the mouth, which is
covered by the enamel. See Teeth.
  CRUCIAL.  Crucialis; from crux,
a cross.  Having the  shape of a cross.
  Crucial   Bandage.    A  bandage
shaped like a capital T.
  Crucial Incis'ion.  An incision made
in the shape of a cross.
  Crucial  Ligaments.   Two  liga-
ments of the knee-joint.
  CRUCIATLTS.  Cruciformis.
  CRUCIBLE.  From crucio, I  tor-
ment, because metals  were tortured by
fire to yield up their various virtues. A
vessel of a conical shape in which sub-
stances are exposed to the heat of a fire
or  furnace,  formed  of  earthenware,
porcelain, black-lead,  silver or platina.
They are  used by dentists, goldsmiths
and jewellers, for refining and alloying
gold and  silver, and  for this purpose
they should  be formed of substances
capable of bearing considerable alterna-
tions of temperature without breaking
or  cracking.    The best crucibles are
formed from pure fire-clay, mixed with
pulverized old crucibles, black-lead, and
pounded coke.
    CRUCIF'ERA.   The cruciferous
tribe of dycotyledonous plants.
  CRU'CIFORM.  Fiom crux, cruris,
a cross, and forma, shape. Cruciformis;
cross-shaped. Applied to the ligaments
which  close  the  articulations of the
phalanges and to the crucial ligaments.
  CRUDE.  Unprepared; raw.  Ap-
plied to  natural or  artificial products
which require purification.
  CRU'DITY. Cruditas; from crudus,
crude,  unprepared.   Rawness, crude
ness; applied to aliments in a raw state;
also, to undigested substances in the
stomach.
  CRUOR.  Coagulated blood.
  CRURA.  The plural of crus, a leg.
Applied to some parts of the body from
their resemblance  to a leg,  as crura
cerebri, crura cerebelli, crura of the dia-
phragm, &.C
  CRURAUS.    From crus, a leg.
Cruralis.  A muscle of the anterior part
of the thigh.
  CRURAL.  Cruralis.  Belonging to
the leg, or lower extremity.
  Crural Arch.   The inguinal arch.
  Crural Artery. The femoral artery.
  Crural Canal.  The femoral ring.
  Crural Hernia.  Femoral hernia.
  Crural Nerve.  A nerve situated
on  the outside of  psoas muscle and
femoral  artery, proceeding  from the
lumbar plexus.
  Crural Plexus.  A  plexus formed
by  the union of the last four pair of
lumbar nerves.
  CRURALIS.  Cruraeus.
  CRUS.  The leg; also, the thigh.
  CRUST A.   A   scab; a shell; tne
scum of a fluid.
  Crusta Adamantina Dentium. The
enamel of the teeth.
  Crusta  Genu Equine.  Sweat or
knee crust.   A scab or corn formed on
the knees of some horses.
  Crusta Inflammatoria.   Thebuffy
coat of inflamed blood.
  Crusta Petrosa.   The cementum
of the teeth.
  Crusta Villosa.  The inner or mu-
cous coat of the stomach and intestines.
  CRUSTA'CEA.  A class of articu-
lated animals protected by a hard shell. 
CRY
163
CUC
  CRUSTA'CEOUS.   Covered with
a shell, or resembling a shell.
  CRUSTULA.   A small shell  or
scab;  also, an effusion of blood under
the conjunctive membrane of the eye.
  CRYMO'DES.  Kpv/uiSisJromxpv-
ftoy, cold. A fever  in which the inner
parts are hot and the external cold.
  CRYMODYN'IA. From xpvpb$, cold,
and oSvvt], pain.   Chronic rheumatism.
  CRYMO'SIS.  From xpv^oy,  cold,
Diseases caused by the action of cold.
  CRYPSOR'CHIS.  From xpvttta, I
conceal, and op^iy, a testicle.   One in
whom the testes have not descended.
   CRYPT A.   From xpvrtto$, conceal-
ed. A small oval hollow body; a follicle
or small pit; a follicular gland.  The
rounded appearances at the ends of the
small arteries of the cortical substance
of the kidneys, are called cryptae.
   CRYPTOCEPH'ALUS. From xp-
urftfoy, concealed, and xtfyaXt],  a  head.
A monster  with  a small head which
does not project from the trunk.
   CRYPTOGAMOUS. Cryptogami-
cus; from xpvrttfoy, concealed, and yaftoy,
a marriage. Plants whose organs of fruc-
tification are concealed  or not manifest.
   CRYSTAL.  Crystallus; xpvataxxof.
 When fluids become solid, their parti-
 cles unite and frequently assume regu-
 lar determinate forms, which are term-
 ed crystals.   Crystallized  quartz was
 supposed by the ancients to  be water
 congealed by intense cold, and hence,
 says  Cleaveland, the term xpvataxxos,
 which signifies ice, and as regularity
 of form is no  where more beautifully
 exhibited than  in  "crystallized quartz,
 the name has been extended to all min-
 eral  and inorganic  substances  which
 exhibit themselves under the form of
 regular geometrical solids."
   CRYSTALLINE.      Crystallinus.
 Crystal-like. Having  the form  or ap-
 pearance of crystal.
   Crystalline Lens.  A clear, trans-
 parent spherical body, situated in a de-
 pression of the anterior part of the vi-
 treous humor of the eye, and enclosed
in a membranous capsule.   It  trans-
mits and refracts the rays of light.
  CRYSTALLIZATION.  Crystalli-
zatio ;  from crystallus, a crystal. The
act of crystalhzing, or that process by
which  the particles  of crystallizable
bodies unite and  assume a  regular and
determinate solid form.  This property
is possessed by most minerals,  but  in
a more eminent degree, by saline sub-
stances.
  CRYSTALLOGRAPHY.  From
xpwstaXXos, a crystal, and ypafya, I  de-
scribe.   The doctrine  of the modifica-
tions and forms of crystals.
  CRYSTALLOID.  From xpvetax-
Ttoy, a crystal, and «5oy, form, resemb-
lance.  Resembling crystal or the crys-
talline.    The  capsule  or membrane
of the  crystalline; also, the  crystalline
itself.
   CUBEBA.  Piper  cubeba.
   CUBEBIN.  A substance extracted
from cubebs.
   CUBEBS.  Piper cubeba.
   Cubebs, Oil of.  Oleum cubebae.
   CUBIFORME OS.  Os cuboides.
   CUBIT^US  EXTERNUS.   An
 extensor muscle of the fingers.
   Cubiteus Internus. A flexor mus-
 cle of the fingers.
   CUBITAL.   Cubitalis;  from  cubi-
 tus, the forearm.  Connected with, or
 relating to, the forearm.
   Cubital Artery.  Arteria cubitalis;
 arteria ulnaris.  A branch of the hume-
  ral artery, given off a little below  the
  bend of the elbow, which  passes down
  along the inner part of the forearm.
   Cubital Nerve.   The ulnar nerve.
   CUBOIDES  OS.  From xvfoy, a
 cube or die, and t i6oy, a  likeness.   A
 tarsal bone of the foot.
   CUCULLA'RIS.   The   trapezius
 muscle.
   CUCULLATUS.  Hooded.  Shaped
 like a cone.
   CUCUL'LUS.  A hood; an odorifer-
 ous cap for the head.
   CUCUMBER.  SeeCucumis.
   CUCUMIS.   The name of  a genus 
CUN
164
CUR
 of plants. The pharmacopoeial name, of
 the  common garden cucumber.
   Cucumis  Agrestis.   The wild  or
 squirting cucumber.  See Momordica
 Elaterium.
   Cucumis  Colocynthis.  The offici-
 nal bitter apple.   Bitter apple; bitter
 gourd;  bitter cucumber.
   Cucumis  Melo.  The melon plant.
 Meb.  Musk-melon.
   Cucumis  Sativus.   The cucumber
 plant.
   CUCUPHA.  SeeCucullus.
   CUCURBIT A.  The name of a genus
 of plants. The watermelon plant; the
 gourd.  Also, a chemical vessel for dis-
 tilling, shaped like a gourd.
   CucurbitaCitrul'lus. The water-
 melon plant.
   Cucurbita Cruenta.   A  cupping
 glass.
   CUCURBITA'CEiE.  From cucur-
 bita, a gourd.  Plants resembling  the
 gourd.
   CUCURBITI'NUS.   A species  of
 worm, the toznia solium. See Taenia.
   CUCURBITULA. A cupping glass.
  Cucurbitula Cruenta. A cupping
 glass, with scarificator.
   Cucurbitula Sicca.  Dry cupping.
   CULMIFERiE.  Plants which have
 soft smooth stems.
  CULUS.  The anus.
  CUMI'NUM.  The name of a genus
 of plants.
   Cuminum  Cymi'num.   The systema-
tic name of the cummin plant.
  CUMME. Author of a Dissertation
 on the History of the Teeth, treated
 Pathologically and  Therapeutically.
Published atThelmst, 1716.
  CUNEA'LIS SUTU'RA.  The su-
ture between the great and little alae of
the sphenoid bone and the os frontis.
  CUNEIFORM.  Cuneiformis; from
cuneus, a wedge,  and  forma, shape.
Shaped like a wedge.  A name applied
to several bones, leaves,  &c. It is ap-
plied to one of the bones of the carpus,
and to three of the tarsus; also to the
basilary process of the occipital bone.
   CUNILA. Pennyroyal.
   CUPEL.  A shallow earthen vessel,
 somewhat like a cup, generally made of
 bone-earth, and used in  assaying gold
 and silver.
   CUPELLATION.  A  process of
 purifying or  refining gold or  silver by
 means of an  addition of lead, which at
 a sufficiently high temperature vitrifies
 and promotes the  vitrification and calci-
 nation of such base metals as may be in
 the  mixture, which  are carried off in
 the fusible glass thus formed, while the
 precious metals are left in nearly a pure
 state.  See Gold, refining of.
   CUPPING. The abstraction of blood
 by means  of a scarificator and a cup-
 ping glass.
  CUPRES'SUS  SEMPERVI'RENS.
 The systematic  name  of the cupres-
 sus.  Cypress.
   CUPRI AMMONIARETUM.  See
 Cuprum Ammoniatum.
   Cupri  Ammoniati Liquor.    See
 Liquor Cupri Ammonio-sulphatis.
   Cupri Rubigo.  Verdigris.
   Cupri Subacetas.   Impure subace-
 tate of copper.
   Cupri Sulphas. Sulphate of copper,
 Blue vitriol.
   CUPRUM. See Copper.
   Cuprum Ammoniatum.  Ammoniat-
 ed copper.   Ammoniacal sulphate of
 copper.
  CUPULA.  The cup of the acorn.
  CUPULIFER^.   The oak  and
 chestnut tribe of dicotyledonous plants.
  CURATIO.  The  treatment or cure
 of a disease or injury.
  CURA AVENACEA.  A decoction
 of oats with nitre and sugar.
  Cura Famis. Abstinence from food.
  CURA'RI.  A  powerful poison used
 by the  South American Indians qn their
 weapons of Avar.
  Curative.   Relating to a cure, capa-
 ble of being cured.
  CUR'CUMA LONGA.  The syste-
matic name of the turmeric tree.
  CURD.  Coagulum of milk.
  CURETTE.  An instrument for the 
CUS
165
CUT
removal of any opaque matter, which
may remain  after the extraction of a
cataract.
  CURRY.  A  condiment, formed of
various spices.              t
  CURTIS.  Author of a work on the
Structure and Formation of the Teeth.
London, 1769.
  CURVATOR  COCCYGIS.   A
muscle of the coccyx.
  CURVATUS. Bent.
  CURVATURE.   From  curvo, to
bend.   Curved  or bent; a  departure
from an erect or straight line, as in the
case of the spine, duodenum, &c.
  Curvature of the Spine.  A devi-
ation of the spinal column from its re-
gular figure.
  CUSCUTA EPITH'YMUM. The
dodder of thyme.
  CUSHMAN,  C.  T.    Author of a
paper,  entitled,  the Dental  Surgeon
Defined,  published  in the fourth vol-
ume of the American Journal of Den-
tal Science.
  CUSPA'RIA.  Cusparia, or angos-
tura bark. Cuspariae cortex.
  CUSPID TEETH.  Dentes cuspida-
ti;  dentes canini;  angulares;  dentes
laniarii ;  and the conoides of Chaussier.
The four teeth  which  have conical
crowns. They are situated, one on each
side, in each jaw, between the lateral
incisor and first bicuspis.  Their crowns
are  convex externally  and  shghtly
concave  and unequal posteriorly, and
pointed at their extremity. Their crowns,
when  not  worn,  are   longer  than
those of any of  the  other teeth.   Their
roots are  larger  and  also the longest of
all the teeth, and like the incisores, are
single, but have a  vertical groove on
either side, laterally, extending from the
neck to the extremity, showing a step
towards the  formation of two roots.
  The upper cuspidati, sometimes call-
ed  the eye-teeth, are larger  than the
lower,  which have  been  called the
stomach teeth.  The  enamel upon these
teeth is thicker  than on  the  incisores.
Both anteriorly and posteriorly, a slight
curve is  seen in the  neck of a cuspid
tooth, and  the  crown projects a little
from the parabolical curve of the dental
arch.
  The cuspidati of second dentition  are
larger and longer than those of first den-
tition, and  as  these  teeth are situated
nearer the  attachment of the muscles
which move the lower jaw than the in-
cisores, which are at the extremity of
the lever, they are enabled to overcome
greater resistance.  Being  parted   at
their extremities, they are intended  for
tearing the  food, and in some of the car-
niverous animals, where they are very
large, they  not only serve to  rend,  but
also to hold prey.
  CUSPIDATI.  The  plural of cuspi-
datus.  The cuspid teeth.
  CUSPIDATUS.   From  cuspis, a
point.  A cuspid tooth.
  CUTA'NEOUS.  Cutaneus;  from
cutis, the skin.  Belonging to the skin. .
  Cutaneous  Diseases.   Diseases  at-
tended with eruption'on the skin.
  Cutaneous Absorption. Absorption
by the skin.
  Cutaneous  Exhalation.  Exhala-
tion from the skin.
   Cutaneous  Nerves.  Two  nerves
given off by the brachial  plexus, an in-
ternal and external, to supply the arm
and hand.  Also, four nerves given off
by the lumbar plexus, or anterior cru-
ral nerve, which go to the leg.
   CUTCH.  Catechu.
   CUTIS.  Dermis; pellis. The skin,
which is said to consist of three  parts,
the cutis vera, or true  skin, the rete muco-
sum, or mucous net, and the epidermis, or
scarf skin.  Others consider it  as con-
sisting of only two layers, the cutis vera,
and epidermis, the rete  mucosum  being
the vascular net-work of the  former.
The outer surface of  the skin is covered
by  conical eminences  called  papillce
which are  very nervous  and vascular.
The skin serves as a  medium of com-
munication with external objects, while
it protects the subjacent  parts,  and is
the seat of touch.   Its color which is de- 
CYA
166
CYN
 termined by the rete mucosum varies
 according to age, sex, the races, &c.
   Cutis  Anserina.   Horrida  cutis.
 Goose-skin.  That contracted  state  of
 the skin  which accompanies the cold
 stage of  an intermittent, in which the
 papillae become prominent and rigid.
   Cutis Externa.  The epidermis.
   Cutis Vera.  The true skin.
   CUTITIS.  Erysipelatous inflamma-
 tion.
   CUVIER, F.  Author of a Treatise
 on the Teeth of Mammiferous Animals,
 considered in their zoological characters,
 illustrated  with  one hundred plates.
 Pubhshed at Paris,  1825.   This is  a
 work of much merit, displaying a depth
 of research and accuracy of observation,
 which must ever make  it valuable not
 only to the student of natural  history,
 but also the odontologist.
   CYA'NOGEN.  Bicarburet of nitro-
.gen. Cyanogen is a colorless gas, of a
 strong pungent odor.  It is  condensed
 into a hmpid liquid at a temperature of
 45° and under a pressure of 3.6 atmos-
 phere.  It extinguishes burning bodies,
 but burns with a light purple flame, and
 supports a strong heat without  decom-
 position.  It is composed of nitrogen
 and carbon.
   CYANOP'ATHY.    Cyanopathin.
 Cyanosis.   A disease in which the skin
 of the whole body assumes a blue color.
 It is generally the result of  congenital
 malformation of the heart, consisting of
a direct communication of the right and
left cavities of the heart.
   CYANOSIS. Cyanopathy.
   CYANURET.  Cyanide.  A com-
pound of cyanogen with a base.
   Cyanuret of Mercury.  Cyanide,
or bicyanide of mercury.  See Hydrar-
gyri cyanuretum.
   Cyanuret of Potassium.  Cyanide
of potassium.
   Cyanuret of Silver.  Cyanide of
silver.
  Cyanuret of Zinc Cyanide of zinc.
  CYANURIC ACID.   See  Cya-
nogen.
    CYAR.  The meatus auditorius in
 ternus.
    CYATHISCUS.  A probe with a
 hollow at one end.
    CYATHUS.  Kva0oy,acup. A mea-
 sure both  of the liquid and dry kind,
 equal to about an ounce and a half.
    CYCLAMEN  EUROPIUM.-
 The sow-bread.  The root is bitter, and
 is a drastic purgative and anthelmintic.
    CYCLE.  Cyclus;  from xvxJtoy, a
 circle.  A determinate period of a cer-
 tain number of  days  or years, which
 finishes and commences perpetually.
    CYCLIS'MOS.  Cycliscus.  A  loz-
 enge.
    CYDO'NIA  VULGARIS.   Cydo-
 nium.  The quince tree.
    CYE'MA.  Kwjfia; from xva, to bring
 forth. The product of conception.
    CYESIOL'OGY. Cyesbbgia; from
 xvqois, pregnancy, and a,oyoy, a descrip-
 tion.  The doctrine of generation.
   CYESIS.  Conception.
   CYLINDER.  From xvXivSa, I roll.
 A long, circular body, of uniform diam-
 eter.  A round tube is a hollow cylinder.
 The long bones are called cylindrical.
   CYLINDRICAL.  Cylindroid.  Re-
 sembling a cylinder.
   CYLLO'SIS.  K\txxa6i{, to lame or
 distort.  Lameness, mutilation, malcon-
 formation.
   CYMATO'DES. Kvjuatuo^y.    An
 undulating, unequal pulse.
   CYNAN'CHE.  From xvuv, a dog,
 and oy^w, I suffocate.  So  called from
 dogs being said to be subject to it. Sore
 throat; inflammation of the upper part
 of the air passages and the supra-dia-
 phragmatic portion of the alimentary
 canal.
  Cynanche  Epidemic a.    Cynanche
maligna;  cynanchefaucium;  cynanche
gangrenosa; tonsillitis.  Epidemic sore
throat.
  Cynanche Maligna.  Cynanche gan-
grenosa;  angina  ulcerosa.  Putrid ul-
cerated sore throat.   Gangrenous in-
flammation of the pharynx.
  Cynanche Parotid^'a.    Cynanche 
CYN
167
CYS
maxillaris; inflammatio parotidum. The
mumps.
  Cynanche Pharynge'a.  Inflamma-
tion of the pharynx.
  Cynanche Tonsillaris.  Inflamma-
tory sore throat, characterized by red-
ness and swelling of the mucous mem-
brane of the fauces and tonsils, accom-
panied by pain, fever and difficult deg-
lutition.
  Cynanche Trachea'lis.   Cynanche
laryngea; suffocatio stridula. Croup. A
disease,  for the  most part, pecuhar to
children, and  characterized  by   in-
flammatory fever, sonorous  suffocative
breathing, the formation of a false mem-
brane in the trachea beneath the glottis,
which is sometimes coughed up  or  ex-
pectorated, and  at other times causes
dyspnoea and suffocation.
  CYNAN'CHUM.  The  name of a
genus of plants.
  Cynanchum  Monspeliacum.   A
black resinous gum, possessing purga-
tive  properties. Montpelher scammony.
  Cynanchum Vincetoxicum.  A Eu-
ropean plant, the leaves  of which are
 emetic.
   Cynanchum Vomito'rium.  The ip-
 ecacuanha of the Isle of France.
   CYNANTHRO'PIA. From  xvav,
 dog, and cw&ptortoy, a man.  A sort of
 melancholy in which the patient fancies
 himself changed into a dog.
   CYNARA'CEiE.   Cynaroz.   One
 of the divisions  of the great  group of
 composites, containing the  thistle,  arti-
 choke,  &c.
   CYN'ICUS.   From xvav, a  dog.
 Relating to, or resembling, a dog. A
 cynic spasm, is characterized by a  con-
 tortion of one side of the face, in which
 the eye, cheek and mouth are dragged
 downwards.
   CYNIPS aUERCUS FOLII.  The
 oak-gall insect.
   CYNODENTES. The canine teeth.
 See Cuspid Teeth.
   CYNOGLOS'SUM.   From  nw, a
 dog, and yxaoaa,  a tongue.    Dog's
 tongue. The name of a genus of plants.
  CYNOLOPHOI.  The spinous pro-
cesses of the vertebrae.
  CYNOLYSSA.  Hydrophobia.
  CYNOMO'RIUM COCCIN'EUM.
Fungus melitensis.
  CY'PERUS.  From xtrfapoy, a little
round vessel.  The name of a genus of
rushes.  Cyperus.
  Cyperus Esculentus.  The  rush
nut.
  Cyperus Rotundus.    The  round
cyperus.
  CYPHO'SIS. Cyphoma; from xv$oy,
gibbosity.  Gibbosity of the spine.
  CYP'RINUM OLEUM.   Oil  of
cypress, composed of oil of unripe olives,
cypress flowers, calamus, myrrh, carda-
moms, &c.
  CY'PRINUS. The name of a genus
offishes.
  CYPRIUM.  Copper.
  CYRTOSIS.  Cyrtoma;  from xvp-
to$, curved.  Gibbous; a tumor.
  Cyrtosis Cretinismus.   Cretinism.
  Cyrtosis Rachia.  Rachitis.
  Cyssarus.  The rectum.
  CYSSOTIS.  Inflammation  of the
anus.  Tenesmus.
  CYST.  From xvatis, a bladder.  A
membranous  sac or  cavity, in which
morbid matters are collected.
   CYSTAL'GIA.   From  xvatis,  a
bladder,  and  aXyos,  pain.   A  painful
spasmodic affection of the bladder.
   CYSTEOLI'THUS.    A stone in
the urinary or gall bladder.
   CYSTIC.   Cysticus, from  xvais, a
bag.  Belonging to  the urinary or gall
bladder.
   Cystic Artery.  The  artery of the
 gall bladder.
   Cystic Duct.  The duct proceeding
 from the gall bladder, and which, after
 uniting with the hepatic, forms the duc-
 tus communis chokdochus.
   CYSTICA.  Remedies used for dis-
 seases of the bladder.
   CYSTICER'CUS.  From  xvatu, a
 bladder,  and xtpxoj, a tail.  The  tailed
 bladder-worm.
   CYSTIN.   Cystic oxyd, which is 
DM
168
DAN
 sometimes a constituent of urinary cal-
 culi.
   CYSTIRRHA'GIA.  Hemorrhage
 from the bladder.
   CYSTIRRHOE'A.    From  xvstit,
 and psa, to flow.  A copious discharge
 of mucus from the bladder, passing out
 with the urine.  Vesical catarrh.
   CYS'TIS.   Fromxixmy, a bag.  A
 cyst, bladder, or  small  membranous
 bag.  The urinary bladder, or membra-
 nous bag enclosing any morbid matter.
   Cystis Urinary. The urinary blad-
 der.
   CYSTITIS.   Inflammation  of  the
 bladder.
   CYSTO-BU'BONOCE'LE.  From
 xvatii, the bladder, and fiovfiov, the groin.
 A species of hernia in which the urinary
 bladder  is protruded through the  ab-
 dominal ring
  CYSTOCE'LE.  From xvatu,  the
 bladder, and xrp^, a tumor.  Hernia of
 he bladder.
  CYSTODYN'IA.  Pain in the blad-
der.
   CYSTO-MEROCE'LE. Protrusion
 of the bladder through the crural arch.
   CYSTOPLASTIC.   An operation
 for the cure of fistulous openings into
 the bladder, consisting in  the dissection
 of skin from a  neighboring part, and
 uniting it by suture to the edges.
   CYSTOPLEG'IC. From xvati{, the
 bladder, and KXiqaaa, I strike.  Paralysis
 of the bladder.
   CYSTOPTO'SIS. From xvctit, the
 bladder, and rtirtteiv, to fall. Protrusion
 of the internal coat of the bladder into
 the canal of the urethra.
  CYSTOTOMTA.  From xveti;, the
 bladder, and tsuva, to cut.  Cutting or
 puncturing the bladder.
  CYTOBLAST.  From xvtos, a cell,
 and pxaatos, a germ.  A cell-germ, nu-
 cleus, or areola.  A primary granule, or
minute spot on the growing cell, from
which all animals and vegetables are
supposed to be  developed.  The rudi-
ment of every new cell.
  CYTOBLASTE'MA.   The fluid
which nourishes the cytoblast.
D.
  DACRYDION.  Scammony.
  DACRYO'MA.   From Saxpva,  to
weep.   Epiphora.
  DACTYL'ION.   Daetylium; from
haxtvXot, a finger. Adhesion of the fin-
gers to each other. It may be a congen-
ital deformity, or caused by a burn.
  DACTYLITIS.   Paronychia.
  DACTYLIUS ACULEATUS.   A
cylindrical worm of a hght  color, some-
times found in diseased urine.
  DACTYLUS. Aaxtft&oy, digitus, a
finger.   See Digitus.  Also, a date.
  D./EDION.  A bougie.
  D^MONOMAN'IA.    Dazmonia;
from da/uav, a demon, and  (iwvia, mad-
ness.  A melancholy in  which the pa-
tient fancies himself to be possessed by
demons.
   DAGUERREOTYPE.   A process
recently introduced  by  Daguerre,  a
French artist, whereby the  images of
objects  formed on a  camera-obscura,
are made  to  depict themselves on the
surface of metal plates.
   DAMMARA  AUSTRALIS. A co-
niferous tree of  New Zealand.   See
Cowdie Gum.
   DAMMARIC  ACID.  A resinous
acid of cowdie gum.
  DAMSON. Prunus domestica.
  DANDELION.  Leontodon  tarax-
acum.
  DANDRIFF.  See Pityriasis. 
DAY              169               DEC
   DANSE DE SAINT GUY.  Cho-
rea.
   DAPHNE. The name of a genus of
plants.  The laurel, or bay-tree.
   Daphne Alpi'na. Chamozka; chame-
loza.   Dwarf olive.
   Daphne Gnid'ium.   Spurge  flax;
flax-leaved daphne.  The plant which
affords the garou bark.
   Daphne Laureola. The systematic
name of spurge laurel.
   Daphne Meze'reum. The systematic
name of the mezereon.
   DAPHNELjE'ON. Oil of bay-ber-
ries.
   DAPHNINE.  The bitter crystalline
principle of daphne alpina.
   DARSIS.   From Sipa, I excoriate, I
skin.  Excoriation.
   DARTA.   Impetigo.
   DARTOS.  From Sspco, I excoriate.
A condensed  cellular structure under
the skin of the scrotum, which the an-
cients supposed to be muscular, and by
means of which  the  outer covering is
corrugated.
   DARTRE.  Herpes.   Impetigo.
   DASYM'MA.  From  fioov;, rough,
hairy.  A  disease  of the  eye.  See
Trachoma.
   DATE.    Palmula; dactylus.   The
fruit of the phoenix dactylifera.
   DATU'RA. The name of a genus of
plants.
   Datura Stramo'nium. Thorn apple;
Jamestown weed; Jimston weed.  The
herbaceous part of the weed and seeds,
are narcotic and poisonous.  They  have
a fetid odor, and a nauseous, bitter taste.
   DATURINE.   Daturia;  daturina,
daturinum. A poisonous alkaloid; the
active principle of datura stramonium.
   DAUCITES VINUM.   Wine, in
which wild carrot has been steeped.
  DAUCUS.  The name of a genus of
plants. The carrot.
  Daucus  Caro'ta.  The carrot plant.
  DAYTON, A. C. Rules for the pre-
servation of the Teeth, by.   Published
in the Dental  Intelligencer, volume
third.
        15
   DAVY'S  SAFETY  LAMP.  A
 lamp surrounded by a net-work of gause
 wire, to prevent explosion in coal mines.
   DAYMARE.  Ephialtes.
   D'ARCET'S METAL.  A metal
 fusible at 212° Fahrenheit, composed
 of eight parts bismuth, five parts lead,
 and three parts tin.  It was at one time
 much used for filling teeth, especially of
 the lower jaw, into the cavities of which,
 while in a fused state, it can be easily
 introduced.  The use of it, however, for
 this purpose, was  soon abandoned, for
 the reason  that  the  temperature  at
 which it had to be applied, could not,
 in all  cases, be borne, and it frequently
 caused inflammation of the lining mem-
 brane. Besides, it was  found  that it
 shrank from the walls  of the cavity on
 cooling, and, consequently, did not pre-
 vent a recurrence  of the disease which
 called for the operation.
  In preparing the alloy, the lead is first
 melted, when it is ready to receive the
 tin and bismuth.  It may be rendered
 still more fusible by  adding a small
 quantity of mercury.
  DAVIER.  Forceps for the  extrac-
 tion of teeth.
   DAY-SIGHT.  Hemeralopia.
   DEADLY-NIGHTSHADE. Atro-
 pa belladonna.
   DEAFNESS.  Diminution or com-
 plete loss of hearing,  See Dysecoea.
   DEATH.  The final cessation of all
 the vital functions, the aggregate of
 which constitutes life.
   Death, Apparent.   Asphyxia,  or
 merely a suspension of the vital func-
 tions.
  Death,  Black.  The  plague of the
 fourteenth century was so called.
  Death, Partial.  Gangrene;  morti-
 fication.
  DEBIL'ITANTS. Remedies  which,
when  exhibited,  reduce  excitement.
Antiphlogistics.
  DEBIL'ITY.   Debilitas; asthenia.
Weakness.
  DECAGRAMME. Ten grammes,
154.44 grains troy. 
DEC
170
DEC
  DECAGY'NIA. An order of plants
with ten pistils.
  DECAN'DRIA. A class of plants
with ten stamens.
  DECANTATION.  Decantatio.  A
pharmaceutical operation, consisting in
pouring off a liquor clear from the sedi-
ment, by  decanting the vessel which
contains it.
  DECARBONIZATION.   Haema-
tosis.  The transformation  of  venous
into arterial blood by respiration.
  DECHAUSSEMENT. Lancing the
gum.   A French word, applied,  in
Dental Surgery, to the separation of the
gum from the neck of a tooth previously
to extraction.
  DECHAUSSOIR.  A French word
signifying gum-lancet.
   DECID'UOUS. Deciduus; from de-
cido, to fall off or down.  Falling off.
In  Botany, applied to trees and shrubs
which lose their leaves on the approach
 of winter.  In Dental Anatomy, to  the
 milk or temporary teeth.  Also,  to the
 membranes which form the sacs that
 enclose the teeth of both dentitions pre-
 viously to their eruption.
   Deciduous  Membranes  of  the
 Teeth. A name applied by Mr. Thom-
 as  Bell,  to  the  two lamellae, which
 form the sacs that  envelop the rudi-
 ments of the teeth,  and which, on  the
 eruption of these organs, disappear, or,
 as  he supposes, are  wholly absorbed.
    Deciduous Teeth.   The temporary
 or milk-teeth are so called, because after
 subserving the purposes of early  child-
 hood, they are removed  by an operation
 of the economy, to give place to  others
 of a larger size, and of a more solid tex-
 ture.  See Teeth, temporary.
    DECLINE.  Declinatio. The abate-
 ment of a disease or paroxysm.  Enfee-
 blement of the vital powers of the body
 from age.  Wasting  of the powers of
 the body, accompanied by fever  and
 emaciation, as in the case of tabes.  It
 is also applied to persons affected with
 phthisis pulmonalis.
    DECOCTION. The process of boil-
ing certain ingredients in a fluid for the
purpose of extracting the parts soluble
at that temperature.  Also, the product
of this operation.
  DECOCTUM.  From decoquo, to
boil.  A decoction.
   Decoctum Album.   See  Mistura
Cornu Usti.
   Decoctum Aloes Composi'tum.—
Compound decoction of aloes.
   Decoctum Althe.'je.  Allhece offi-
cinalis.  Decoction of marsh mallows.
   Decoctum Anthem'idis.  Decoctum
anthemidis nobilis.  A decoction of cha-
momile.
   Decoctum Cassie.   Decoction of/
cassia.
   Decoctum  Cetra'rie.  Decoction
of Iceland moss.
   Decoctum Cinchone.   Decoction
of cinchona.
   Decoctum Columbe Compositum.
Compound decoction of calumba.
   Decoctum Cornus Flor'ide. De-
 coction of dogwood bark.
   Decoctum Daphnes Mezerei. De-
 coction of mezerion.
   Decoctum Diaphoreticum.  Com-
 pound decoction of guaiacum.
   Decoctum Digitalis.  Decoction of
 foxglove.
   Decoctum Dulcamare.  Decoction
 of woody nightshade.
   Decoctum Geoffr.ee Inermis.  De-
 coction of cabbage-tree bark.
   Decoctum Glycyrrhize.   Decoc-
 tion of liquorice.
   Decoctum Guaiaci Compositum —
 Compound decoction of guaiacum.
   Decoctum H.emato.\yli. Decoction
 of logwood.
   Decoctum Hordei.  Barley water.
   Decoctum Hordei Compositum.—
 Compound decoction of barley.
   Decoctum Kine Kine Compositum
 et  Laxans.   Compound  laxative de-
 coction of cinchona.
    Decoctum Lichenis.   Decoction of
 liverwort.
    Decoctum Malve Compositum.—
  Compound decoction of mallows. 
DEC
171
DEF
  Decoctum Papaveris.   Decoction
of poppy.
  Decoctum Q,uercus Albe. Decoc-
tion of white-oak bark.  Take of the
inner bark of young green  white  oak,
 § ij, water oiss.  Boil down to a pint
and strain.   It is astringent, and in the
treatment of inflamed, spongy  and ul-
cerated gums, may be beneficially  em-
ployed as a gargle.
  Decoctum Sarsaparil'le.  Decoc-
tion of sarsaparilla.
  Decoctum Sarsaparille Composi-
tum.  Compound decoction of sarsa-
parilla.
  Decoctum Scille.   Decoction of
squill.
  Decoctum Sen'ege.   Decoction of
seneka.
  Decoctum Taraxaci.  Decoction of
dandehon.
  Decoctum Ulmi.   Decoction of elm
bark.
  Decoctum Uve Ursi.   Decoction
of uva ursi.
  Decoctum Vera'tri.  Decoction of
white hellebore.
  DECOLORATION.    Decobratio.
The loss of the natural color; the re-
moval of coloring matters from any ob-
ject.
  DECOMPOSITION.  Decompositio.
The separation of the component parts
or principles of bodies from each other.
Decay.
  DECORTICATION.  Decorticatio.
The removal of the bark, husk, or shell,
from any thing.
  DECORTICATING PROCESS. A
term sometimes applied, in Dental  Pa-
thology,  to  a species of  caries of the
teeth,  designated by Duval, peeling de-
cay, which  consists in the detachment
from the osseous tissue of the tooth, of
small  portions of the enamel.   See
Caries of the Teeth.
  DECOSTIS.   Without ribs.
  DECREMENTUM.  Decrease, de-
cline.
  DECREPITATION.  Decrepitatio.
A crackling noise, as made by salts
 when exposed to a certain degree of
 heat.
   DECREPITUDE.    Decrepitudo.
 Old age; the last period of life; last stage
 of decay.
   DECUBITUS. From decumbere, to
 lie down.   Act of lying  down, or as-
 suming a horizontal posture.
   DECURTATUS.   Running to  a
 point.  It is sometimes applied to a de-
 clining pulse.
   DECUSSATION. Decussatio; from
 decusso, to cross each other.  In Anato-
 my, applied to nerves and muscles which
 cross each other, as the decussation  of
 the optic nerves.
   DECUSSO'RIUM.  An instrument
 used by the ancients for depressing the
 dura mater after trepanning.
   DEDOLATION.  The making of a
 wound with loss of substance.
   DEER.   Ruminating quadrupeds
 with deciduous horns, or antlers, dis-
 tinguished from other ruminants by not
 having any gall-bladder.
   DEER-BERRY.  See Gaultheria.
   DEFECATION.   From de, and
fceces, excrements. Expulsion  of the
 feces from the body.   In Pharmacy,
 the separation  of any substance from
 a liquid in which it may be suspended.
   DEFECTIO  ANIMI.   Syncope;
 fainting.
   DEFENSIVES. Defensiva. A term
 formerly  applied to apphcations made
 to wounds,  for guarding them against
 injury, and  to medicines which were
 supposed to resist infection.
   DEF'ERENS.  The vas deferens.
   Deferens, Vas. See Vas Deferens.
   DEFLAGRATION. Deflagratio.—
 Rapid  combustion, as that which oc-
 curs when a mixture  of  sulphur and
 nitre is inflamed.
  DEFLECTIO.  Derivation, revul-
sion.
  DEFLEX'US.   Beflcx.   Bending
slightly outward.
  DEFLORATION.  Stuprum.
  DEFLUVIUM CAPILLORUM—
Baldness.  Loss of the hair. 
DEG
172
DEL
   DEFLUX'ION. Defluxio; fromde-
fluo, to run off.  A catarrh, or cold.   A
descent of humors from a superior to an
inferior part.
   DEFORMATION.  Deformatio.  A
deformity.
   DEFRITSCH.  Author of a Disser-
tation on the Teeth. Published at Vien-
na, 1772.
   DEGENERATION.  Degeneracy.
Deterioration.  In Pathology, a morbid
change in the structure of an organ.
   DEGLUTITION.  Deglutitio; from
de, and glutire, to swallow.  The act of
swallowing.  The various muscles of
the  soft  palate  and  tongue  are  all
concerned in conducting the food into
the pharyngeal cavity.  The elevators
raise the palate, and at the same time
protect the posterior  nares  from regur-
gitation of the food,  while the tensor
puts it on the stretch, and after having,
by the approximation of the tongue  and
palate,been conveyed behind the velum,
the constrictor isthmi-faucium, and pal-
 ato-pharyngeus draw  the palate down,
 which by the aid of the tongue, cuts off
 the communication between the fauces
 and mouth, while at the same time the
 passage into the posterior nares is nearly
 closed by the contraction of the muscles
 of the posterior palatine arch.  The food
 is now conveyed by the action  of the
 constrictor muscles of the pharynx, into
 the oesophagus, and  through which it
 is forced by the contraction of its mus-
 cular coat into the stomach.
   The passage of the  food from  the
 mouth to the'cesophagus, is mostly the
 result of voluntary action, but the pro-
 pulsion of it down this duct, is invol-
 untary.
   The deglutition of liquids  is  always
 more difficult than solids, because the
 particles of a fluid have a greater  ten-
 dency to separate, and to prevent which,
 it is  necessary that it should be more
 accurately embraced by the parts which
 convey it from the mouth into the oeso-
 phagus.
   DEGMOS.  A gnawing  sensation;
a biting pain about the upper orifice of
the stomach.
   DEGREE. From gradus, a step. A
step or stage.  An arbitary measure on
a scale of temperature, &c.  The French
use it to signify the intensity or particu-
lar stage  of an incurable disease, as
phthisis, cancer, &c.
   DEJECTION.   Dejectio;  from de-
jecio, to go to stool.  The  expulsion of
the feces.
   DEJECTO'RIOUS. Cathartic.
   DELABARRE, C F.   A celebrat-
ed French dentist and author of several
works on the science  and  art of dental
surgery.   The first,  entitled a  Disser-
tation upon the History of the Teeth,
was published in  Paris,  1806.  The
second, Odontology,  or  Observations
on the Human Teeth, was published in
1815, and contains many valuable as
well as ingenious  observations.   The
third is  entitled, a Treatise on Second
Dentition,  and  the  Natural Method
of directing it;  followed  by a sum-
mary  of  Stomatic  Semiology.  Pub-
lished, 1819.  This is one of the most
elaborate and valuable works which has
been published  upon  these subjects.
Some of the physiological views con-
tained in it, have, however, been shown,
by subsequent observations, to  be  evi-
dently  erroneous.   A translation  of
this work was published in the  hbrary
part of the sixth volume of the  Ameri-
can Journal of Dental Science.  The
fourth work, a Treatise on the Mechan-
ical part of the Art of the Dentist, was
published in two volumes in 1820.   At
the time of its pubhcation, this was the
best work extant  upon  the  subject.
The fifth and last work which we shall
notice as coming from the pen of Dela-
barre, was intended by  the author  as a
supplement to his third, and is entitled,
Natural Method  of  directing   Second
 Dentition, &c. This was pubhshed, 1826.
   DELAP'SUS.  Delapsio. Prolapsus.
   DELETE'RIOUS. Perniciosus; from
SyjXea,linjure. Poisonous; destructive;
 hurtful; injurious. 
DEL
173
DEN
    DELIGA'TIO.   From deligare, to
  bind up. The act of applying a bandage.
    DELIGATION.   Deligatio.   Ap-
  plication of a bandage.
    DELIQUES'CENT. Deliquescentia;
  from deliquesco, to melt down.  The as-
  sumption of a fluid state by the absorp-
  tion of moisture from the atmosphere.
  There are certain salts which  do this,
  as the chloride of lime,  acetate of po-
  tassa, and  carbonate  of potassa,  and
  hence they are called deliquescent salts.
    DELIQUIUM  ANIMI.  Fainting,
  syncope.
    DELIRIOUS.   One  affected with
  delirium.
    DELIRIUM.   From deliro, to rave.
  Wandering of the mind, as in  cases of
  disease, from disturbed function of the
  brain.  It may be violent, as in the case
  of acute inflammation of the membranes
  of the brain, or low and muttering, as in
  typhoid fevers.
    Delirium Furiosum.   Mania.
    Delirium Senile.  Senfle insanity;
  imbecility and moral insanity  resulting
  from old age.
    Delirium Tremens.  Mania dpotu;
  delirium ehiositatis ;  delirium potatorum.
  Delirium pecuhar to drunkards, attend-
  ed with great agitation and sleeplessness.
    DELITES'CENCE.  From delitesco,
  to hide. Sudden termination of inflam-
  mation by resolution.
    DELMOND.   Author of a Memoir
  upon a New Method of Destroying the
  Nerves of  the six  Anterior Teeth, so as
  to prevent their extraction.  Pubhshed,
  Paris, 1824.
    DE LOUDE, S. C.   Author  of a
  Treatise on Surgical,  Operative  and
  Mechanical Dentistry. Pubhshed, Lon-
  don, 1810.
    DELPHI'NIUM.  From oa^voy, the
  dolphin, so called from the resemblance
  of its flower to the head of the dolphin*.
  The larkspur.   Also, the  name  of a
<  genus of plants.
    Delphinium Consol'ida.  The sys-
  tematic name of the consolida regahs.
  The branching larkspur.
       15*                       •
  Delphinium  Staphisa'gria.    The
systematic name of the stavesacre.
  DELTIFORM.   Deltoid.
  DELTOID.   Deltoides;  from  the
Greek letter A, and ttfioy, a likeness.  A
triangular muscle of the shoulder, ex-
tending from the outer third of the cla-
vicle, and from the acromian and spine
of the scapula, to the middle of the hu-
meri.
  DEMENTIA.  From de, and  mens,
without mind.   Insanity;  absence of
thought.
  DEMONSTRATOR.  From demon-
strare, to exhibit.  In Anatomy, one who
exhibits the various parts of the body ;
an instructor.  In Dental  Surgery, one
who  demonstrates  and  teaches the
method of performing the various ope-
rations connected  with this branch of
medicine.
  DEMULCENT.  Demulcens;  from
demidceo, I soothe.   A medicine capable
of obviating and preventing the action
of acrid and irritating humors.
  DEMUSCULATUS. From de and
musculus,  a muscle.   Without  flesh;
emaciated.
  DENIGRATION. Denigratio; from
denigrare, to blacken. Act of becoming
black, as in cases of a bruise, and sphac-
elus.
  DENS.  A tooth.  Also, the specific
name of many herbs,  from their sup-
posed resemblance to the teeth of some
animal, as dens leonis, leontodon tarax-
acum.
  Dens Exsertus.  From dens, a tooth,
and ex and sers, to  thrust out.  A gag-
tooth ; a tooth which projects or stands
out from the dental arch.
  DENT.  A tooth.
  DENT AGRA.  Denticeps, from dens
a tooth, and aypa, a seizure.  An instru-
ment for extracting  teeth ; tooth for-
ceps. The term is also applied to tooth-
ache.
  DENTAL.    Dentalis,  dentarius;
from dens, a tooth.   Pertaining to the
teeth.
  Dental  Apparatus.   The teeth, 
DEN
174
DEN
together with the  alveoli  in  which
they are implanted, and jaws.   Also,
a  set of artificial teeth.   The  instru-
ments and apphances employed in den-
tal operations, are sometimes so termed.
   Dental  Arches.  Arcades  denta-
ires.  The arches formed by the teeth
when arranged in their  sockets in the
alveolar borders.
   Dental  Arteries.   The  arteries
which  supply the  teeth  with blood.
The teeth of the upper jaw are supplied
from the superior dental, which  winds
around  the  maxillary  tuberosity from
behind  forwards, sending off  twigs
through the posterior dental canals to
the molares and bicuspides, and from a
twig of the infra  orbit or, sent off just
before it emerges from the  infra orbitar
foramen, which passes down the ante-
rior canal to the incisores and cuspidati.
The teeth of the lower jaw  are supplied
from the inferior dental artery, given off
by the internal maxillary.   It enters the
posterior  dental  foramen, and  as it
passes along  beneath the  roots  of the
teeth, sends up a twig to each, until it
arrives  at  the mental foramen, from
which,  after sending a small branch to
the incisores, it emerges.
   Dental Atrophy.  Dental atrophia.
See Atrophy of the Teeth.
   Dental  Bone.   The osseous  part
of a tooth.   See Tooth-bone.
   Dental Canals.  The canals which
perforate the   alveoli,  and  give  pas-
sage to the  blood vessels  and  nerves
that enter the teeth at the extremities of
their roots.
   Dental  Caries.  See Caries of the
Teeth.
   Dental   Car'tilage.   The  carti-
laginous ridge along  the  margins  of
the gums, Avhich serves  as a substitute
for the teeth during  the first months of
infancy.
   Dental  Cav'ity.  Cavitas pulpoz ;
cavum  dentis;  antrum dentak.   The
pulp cavity.  The  cavity  occupied by
the  dental pulp  in  the interior of a
tooth.   Its shape  resembles that of the
tooth;  it is larger in  young  persons
than in old, and when the teeth suffer
great loss of substance,  either from mp-
chanical or  spontaneous  abrasion,  it
sometimes becomes completely obliter-
ated.   See Abrasion of the Teeth.
  Dental Ex'cavator.   An instru-
ment employed for the  removal of the
decayed part of a  tooth, preparatory to
the operation of filling.   A number of
instruments varying in  size and shape
are required for this purpose, by every
practitioner of dental surgery, to enable
him to remove with facihty caries from
any part of a tooth, and to give to the
cavity such shape as may be  required
for  the permanent  retention of a filling,
It  is  important,  therefore,  that every
dentist be able, in cases of emergency,
to  construct his own excavators.  In-
struments of this description  should be
made from the very best of steel, and be
so  tempered as  neither to break nor
bend at their points.   See  Tempering.
  Dental  Exosto'sis.  See Exostosis
of the Teeth.
  Dental Files.   Files manufactured
expressly  for  operations  upon  the
teeth, especially for the  removal of su-
perficial caries  from  their approximal
surfaces, and for separating them when
it is deep seated,  preparatory to filling,
as well  as for the removal of decayed
crowns  of  teeth preparatory  to the ap-
plication of artificial  pivot teeth.   See
Files, for separating front, bicuspid and
molar teeth, and for preparing the root
of a tooth for an artificial crown.
  Dental  Forceps.   See Forceps,
for  extracting teeth.
  Dental  Fol'licle.  Folliculus den-
tis ; follicule dentaire.  A follicle, formed
of two membranes, one  outer, and one
inner, in which a tooth is  situated dur-
ing the early stages of its formation, and
which  ultimately becomes a sac, com-
pletely enclosing it.  See  Dental Sac.
  Dental  Formula.     A 'notation
used to  designate  the  number and class
of teeth in mammiferous animals, form-
ing an  important generic  character. 
DEN               175               DEN
In the cats, or genus felis, for example,
the formula is, incisores, |,canini,|, \,
praemolares, or bicuspides, |, |..  Mo-
lares, *,*, =30,  signifying that they
have six incisores in each jaw, one ca-
nine  tooth on both sides of each jaw,
two praemolares, or bicuspides, on each
side, in each jaw, and two true molares.
In man, the dental formula is, incisores
i, canines, or cuspidati, j., j.; praemo-
lares, or bicuspides, |, |; molares |, |..
The upper figures  refer  to the upper,
and the lower figures to the lower jaw.
   Dental In'struments.  Instruments
employed in operations  on the teeth,
such as excavators, filling instruments,
files, forceps, &c.  There is no class of
surgical  instruments  in  which more
care and mechanical skill is required in
their manufacture  than  those used by
the dental surgeon.
   Dental Lab'oratory.  A room or
place where  the  operations connected
with mechanical  dentistry  are  per-
formed.  The fixtures and implements
belonging to  it,  when complete, are
a small forge, anvil  and hammers,
ingot moulds, rolling mill, draw-bench,
lathe, with  grinding  and  pohshing
wheels and  brushes, work-table, small
bench-vice,  sliding tongs, pliers,  snips
or shears for  cutting gold plate, solder-
ing  lamp, blow-pipe,  files, scrapers,
burnishers, pickling pot, and sometimes
the fixtures used in the manufacture of
porcelain  artificial  teeth.   But as the
manufacture of these teeth does not
properly come within the province of the
dentist, the fixtures required for the pur-
pose, are not  essential to his  labora-
tory.
  Dental Necro'sis.   See Necrosis
of the Teeth.
  Dental Nerves. The nerves which
go to the teeth. The teeth of the upper
jaw are supplied from the superior max-
illary. Three or four branches descend
on the tuberosity of the superior max-
illary, and entering the posterior dental
canals are conveyed to  the molar teeth.
The incisores, cuspidati and bicuspides
are  supplied by  a  branch  from  the
infra orbital,  which  passes  along the
front of the maxillary sinus in the an-
terior  dental  canal, sending off twigs
to each of these teeth.
   The teeth of the lower jaw are sup-
plied frem the third branch of the infe-
rior maxillary, which, in  its  course,
passes between the pterygoid muscles,
then along the ramus of the  lower jaw
under the pterygoideus internus to the
posterior dental foramen, which it enters
along with the artery and vein, sending
off twigs to the roots of the molar and
bicuspid teeth, until it arrives  at  the
mental  foramen;  here  it divides into
two branches; the smaller is  continued
in the substance of the jaw,  supplying
the cuspid and incisor teeth—the larger
passes out through the mental foramen
to be distributed to the muscles and in-
teguments of the lower hp, and, finally,
communicates with the facial nerve.
   Dental Neural'gia.  See Odontal-
gia.
   Dental Opera'tion.  An operation
upon the teeth.
   Dental Orthopedi'a.  The art of
correcting deformity, occasioned by  ir-
regularity or  other cause, of the teeth.
See Irregularity of the Teeth, treat-
ment of.
   Dental  Or'ganism.   The   organ-
ism of the teeth; the organical struc-
ture of these  organs;  the vital forces
which govern them.
   Dental Perios'teum.    Periosteum
dentium.   A white  fibrous membrane
which invests the  roots of  the teeth,
and to which it  is intimately  united
by fibrous prolongations and numerous
minute blood vessels.  It is through
the medium of this,  and their  lining
membrane, that these organs  receive
their nutritive  fluids.
  The dental periosteum is supposed to
be a reflection  of the alveolar; it covers
the root of each tooth, is  attached  to
the gums at the neck, and to the blood
vessels  and nerves where they  enter
the extremity, and Mr. Bell is  of the 
DEN                176               DEN
opinion that it enters  the  cavity  and
forms the lining membrane, but this  is
a mere conjecture,  the correctness of
which, we think, it may not be easy to
establish.   This membrane  constitutes
the bond of union between  the roots of
the teeth and alveolar cavities.
  Dental Periosti'tis. Periostitis den-
tium.  Inflammation of the dental pe-
riosteum.   See  Odontalgia.
  Dental Pulp.  A soft vascular,  and
highly sensitive substance, of a reddish-
grey  color, occupying  the cavity of
a living tooth.   It also constitutes the
rudiment of a tooth.   See Teeth, origin
and formation of.
  According to Mr. Nasmyth, the struc-
ture of a dental pulp  is cellular,  like
that of the osseous or dentinal part  of a
tooth.  When the internal  structure is
examined,  he says, "the number of mi-
nute cells" which present "themselves
in a vascular form is very remarkable;
they  seem, indeed,  to  constitute  the
principal portion of its bulk." They are
described by this able writer as varying
in size from the  smallest microscopic
appearance, to one-eighth of an inch in
diameter, and  as being disposed in dif-
ferent  layers "throughout the body of
the pulp."  He also  states, that careful
investigation has  convinced him  that
they exist on the surface of  the pulp in
opposition  to the ivory (bone)  of the
tooth, and that  these are essentially con-
cerned in the development of the tooth.
The correctness of this opinion would
seem to be fully confirmed by a number
of diagrams representing the microsco-
pic appearance of the structure of  this
tissue.  It would appear, by a compari-
son of some of  these diagrams, that the
cells or vesicles are arranged in a more
distinct and regular form on the surface
than in the interior of the pulp, present-
ing the appearance of beautiful reticular
leaflets.
  With regard to the connection of the
pulp with  the bone, and as to whether
the  latter  be simply a product of the
former, or a transformation  of its  sub-
stance, Mr. Nasmyth says:  'vAlthough
this is by far the most interesting point
in dental physiology,  and involves the
grand question of the manner in which
the tooth is formed, as well as that of its
arrangement and  confirmation,  it is,
notwithstanding, less understood,  has
been less studied, and  is, consequently,
more obscure,  than any  other part of
the subject." He also states that he de-
voted much time to the subject before
he succeeded in obtaining any light to
lead  him to the discovery of its true
bearings, and if the conclusions to which
he has arrived are not strictly true, they
are,  at  any  rate,  supported by much
probability of reason.  He continues,
"On the surface of the pulp  are found
innumerable  detached cells, with cen-
tral points.  Generally, these cells form
a regular and complete coating, studded
with points, which  are placed at  inter-
vals, corresponding, in extent, to  those
between the  fibres.  These points  are
rendered visible from the greater opacity
of the intermediate  material, and will
be seen  to  reflect or absorb the light,"
(when examined under the microscope)
"according to the difference in the focal
distance.   A comparison between  the
superincumbent perfect ivory, and the
formative surface  of the pulp beneath,
is always easy, because portions of the
former,  at an early stage at any rate, re-
main adherent  to  the latter, and frag-
ments of the  dental  bone are found
strewn over  it, more especially in hu-
man teeth.
  "The cellular conformation of these
fragments is  always evident, and in size
and appearance they  are perfectly ac-
cordant with the cells of the pulp," as
is shown by diagrams furnished by  Mr.
Nasmyth.
  "At an early stage of dental develop-
ment, the reticulated or cellular appear-
ance of the pulp is particularly beauti-
ful.   When  merely a thin layer  of os-
sific  matter has been deposited  on its
surface,  it may with great  facility be
drawn  out entire,  together  with  the 
DEN
177.
DEN
former,  laid on a glass, compressed a
little, and then examined with the high
powers of the microscope.  The differ-
ent layers of cells will be seen, and the
transition into  ivory may be  observed,
where the different gradations of ossifi-
cation are  marked by  the shade  and
color.
   These appearances  are  all  beauti-
fully illustrated by Mr. Nasmyth in the
diagrams, and  the reticulation, cr cells
of the pulp,  he adds,  "constitute the
fibres of the tooth, which, while in this
state, are spirally coiled, and fit into one
another.  At all events, the diameter of
these fibres of the reticulations  is pre-
cisely that of the fibres of the ivory; the
points or  projections rising  from the
frame work, correspond to the centres of
the cells, and  may be  traced to belong
to their  structure. The fibres composed
of the granules of animal  matter, and
which I describe as the frame work of
the reticulations, become, upon  the de-
position of ossific matter within the cel-
lules of those reticulations,  the fibres of
the ivory.  The only  change  which
they appear to undergo  during the pro-
cess of transition, is, that they are then
drawn out from the coiled up state in
which they exist between the collapsed
cells of  reticulations into the more lon-
gitudinal, but  still spiral, in which they
are found  in the ivory.*  The fibres of
the  ivory  are frequently very spirally
curved, hke those of the pulp,  and as
we should conclude they must be from
the manner of their evolution."
   The  theory of Mr.  Nasmyth, with
regard to the manner of the formation of
dental bone, differs from that of profes-
sor Owen, who maintains, that it is ex-
creted or exuded from the pulp.
   Dental Sac The  teeth, previous-
ly to their eruption,  and  after their
 udiments have  acquired  a  certain
size, are enclosed in membranous bags
   • In quoting from Mr. Nasmyth, the au-
thor omits  the  references to  the diagrams
which accompanies  his  memoir upon the
subject.
which are termed sacs.  Each sac con-
sists of two  laminae, an outer and  an
inner—the outer is described  by Mr.
Hunter as scft and spongy, and  without
vessels, while the inner is extremely vas-
cular and firm.  But more recent inves-
tigations  show both to be vascular; the
structure  of  the outer is spongy, the
inner is of a  firmer consistence, and of
a fibro-mucous  structure.  See Teeth,
origin and formation of.
  Dental Sub'stitute. Any mechani-
cal contrivance used for the replacement
of one or more of the natural teeth.
See Artificial Teeth.
  Dental Sur'geon.  Chirurgien den-
tiste.  Surgeon dentist.  One who de-
votes himself to the study and treat-
ment of  the diseases  of the teeth, and
their connections.
  Dental Sur'gery.  Chirurgia  den-
tium.  That branch of medicine which
has  reference to the treatment of the
diseases of the teeth and their  connec-
tions, and which at the same time em-
braces the  prosthesis,  or  replacement
of the loss, of these  organs with artifi-
cial substitutes.
  So remote is the origin of dental sur-
gery, and imperfect the records of an-
cient medicine, that it cannot, at the pre-
sent time, be traced with any degree of
accuracy.  We learn,  however,  from
Herodotus, the Grecian historian, that
when he went to Egypt, from  his then
comparatively barbarous home, to learn
the sacred mysteries and the sciences in
the world's earhest nursery of learning
and civilization on the banks of the
Nile, he found  surgery  and medicine
divided into distinct profession.   There
were surgico-physicians for the  eye,
others for the ear, others for  the teeth,
and so on for the  different classes  of
disease the appropriate professor  was
found.  This division, by  an unaltera-
ble law of the human mind, would have
given great skill and efficiency to the
various practitioners, had not each  been
confined, under a  penalty  of death, to
fixed  prescriptions; but to  what extent 
DEN
178
DEN
 the remedies and modes of  practice at
 this early period of the world's history,
 were successful in the cure of disease,
 the chasms made in the annals of an-
 cient art and science, by the destruction
 of the great Alexandrian hbrary, must
 forever leave the world in ignorance.
  During  the  time of Hippocrates,
 who flourished about three hundred and
 sixty years before the  Christian  era, it
 is evident  that  little was known con-
 cerning the anatomy and physiology of
 the teeth, as is shown by the fact, that
 this celebrated physician, in treating of
 these organs, calls them, "A glutinous
 increment from  the  bones of the head
 and  jaws, of which the  fatty part is
 dried by heat and burnt."   In the fetus
 he says, "they are nourished by the food
 of the mother, and after birth by the milk
 which the infant sucks from the breast."
 He also describes a method that existed
 for a long time previously to this period,
 of fastening teeth with gold wire, and
 he  recommends several dentifrices for
 cleaning  the  teeth, which  evidently
 comprises most that was known of  the
 diseases and treatment of these organs
 at this epoch.
  Although the writings of Aristotle
 show that the teeth were not altogether
overlooked by him, they,  at  the  same
time afford abundant evidence that  his
 knowledge of their anatomy and physi-
ology was very meagre.  Man, he as-
 serts, has more teeth than woman, and
that this difference is found to exist be-
tween the sexes of various animals, as
in sheep, goats  and  pigs.   In man, he
states, that only the front teeth change,
and that the age of animals may be as-
 certained by their teeth.   Another of
the errors  propagated by this writer is,
that the teeth continue to grow in length
 during hfe.
  Areteus, in  treating of tooth-ache,
seems utterly at a loss to account for its
cause, and contents himself, by stating,
that it was known only to God.   But
Celsus, who flourished during the first
century of  the Christian era, describes
 at some length, the method of proce-
 dure for the  extraction of teeth, and it
 is in his writings that the first mention
 is made of filling the cavities of carious
 teeth.   He does not, however, recom-
 mend  this operation for the purpose of
 arresting the progress  of disease,  but
 merely to strengthen the walls of a cari-
 ous tooth,  preparatory  to extraction;
 an operation, he advises only as a der-
 nier or last  resort, and  for the purpose
 of preventing the necessity of it, he
 recommends a variety  of remedies for
 the cure of tooth-ache, as for example,
 the actual cautery, hot oil, caustic medi-
 cines,  &c,  with a view  of destroying
 the  vitality  of the  organ.  But when
 extraction  becomes  indispensably  ne-
 cessary, he  says, if the  tooth cannot
 be taken out with  the  hand, forceps
 must be used, and for the removal of a
 root, after the crown has broken off, un-
 der the forceps, he recommends the em-
 ployment of  an instrument, termed  by
 the Greeks, rizagra.  It would also seem
 that the alveolar processes  were fre-
 quently fractured in the operation, and
 when an accident of this sort happened,
 he directed that the broken bone should
 be  removed  with a vulsella.  He also
 notices some of the  diseases of  the
 gums,   the loosening of the teeth,  the
 eruption of the permanent teeth behind
 the temporary, and some of the methods
 of treatment  laid down  by  him,  are
 practiced even at the present day.
   But  the best writings of ancient times
 on the   teeth, now extant, are  those of
 Galen, who wrote  in the second cen-
 tury after Christ, after having  enjoyed
 the medical  advantages offered by that
 eldest  and  most  splendid of libraries
 which  was so soon afterwards  doomed
 to the flames by the hand of barbarian
 power.   This writer describes the teeth
 as  being formed  during intra-uterine
life, though they  remain  concealed in
 the alveoli until  after birth.   He also
gives a very  minute description of  the
forms,  functions and evolutions of these
organs. 
DEN
179
DEN
  The  art of  dentistry  was  cultivated
by Greece and Rome, during  their most
palmy days of splendor  and prosperity,
chiefly in aid of the charms of beauty,
and hence, so far as the paucity of medi-
cal works which  have been handed
down from these nations, enables us to
determine, was  principally confined to
the replacement of the loss of the natu-
ral organs with  artificial  substitutes.
Dentistry, in fact, does not seem to have
made much progress for many centu-
ries ; for, when vandalism shut down
upon the world, and learning itself was
hidden in  the  gloom of the dark ages,
then every torchlight of science feebly
glimmering over the waste of ignorance
and  superstition,  and every star  that
shown in the moral and  scientific hori-
zon, were quenched in  that  chill night
of ages which threw its  deadly penum-
bra over the world.
   During  this pause in  the  vitality of
learning.  Dentistry fared  no  worse
than any  other science.  Demonology
and the curative art were antagonistic,
and the cabalistic mummery  of gloomy
and monastic  ascetics was called in, to
eradicate pain and disease, by the aid of
charms and incantations.
   From the time  of Galen,  until  the
sixteenth century, few traces of the art of
dentistry,  are  to be found among the re-
cords of medicine.  In connection  with
the anatomy of the teeth, Aetius men-
tions the fact that they have an opening
in their roots for the admission of small
nerves, which he regards as  the reason,
that these organs are the only bones
which are liable to become painful, and
Rhazes has described, though very im-
perfectly, the process of dentition, but
with regard to the replacement of the
loss of the natural teeth, Albucasis is
said to have been the first to  teach that
it might be done,  either with other hu-
man teeth, or  with substitutes made
from bone.
   Vesalius, who  has been  styled  the
restorer of human anatomy, and author
of "De Corporis  Humani  Fabrica,"
pubhshed at Basil, in 1543, describes
the temporary teeth as constituting the
germs of the permanent teeth—an error
into which some other of the older writ-
ers have fallen. Eustachius, however,
may be regarded as the first to have given
any thing like a correct description of the
number, growth and different forms and
varieties of the teeth.   He describes
their condition and arrangement in the
jaws previous to their eruption, and re-
futes the erroneous opinion  that the
roots  of the temporary serve as germs
for the permanent teeth.  Urbain He-
mard, also  a  writer  of the  sixteenth
century, gave a  very good descrip-
tion of the teeth of both dentitions, both
before and  after  their eruption.   He
also points out the differences between
them  and other bones, and describes
their diseases.  About the time Hemard's
Researches  upon the  teeth made their
appearance  in France, a memoir upon
the teeth was  pubhshed in Germany,
another in Spain, and another in Swit-
zerland. The first was written  by  G.
H.Ryff, and pubishedin 1587; but this
is not a  work of much merit; the second
was written by F. M. Castrillo, and
published at Madrid in 1557, and the
other by E.  Erastrus, was pubhshed at
Bale, in 1595.
   But it was not until near three hun-
dred years  ago, about the time  of the
revival  of letters, that Ambrose  Pare,
in his celebrated work on Surgery, gave
evidence of the vitality of dentistry amidst
the awakening chaos of ancient science
and erudition, that the treatment of the
diseases of the teeth began  to  attract
much attention. His remarks upon this
subject  were only a promise of what the
present  age  is  fulfilling in this depart-
ment of physical alleviation, for they are
intermixed  with numerous absurdities
and improbabilities, which half awaken-
ed science had not yet shaken off, as
she was slowly arousing  herself for her
final,  her noblest triumphs.
   Pare  maintains that the teeth, "like
other  bones, suppurated, and were sub- 
DEN
180
DEN
 ject  to inflammation;  the breeding of
 worms,"  &c.  In  treating of the  ex-
 traction of teeth, he says: "For the better
 plucking out of the tooth, the patient
 should be placed in a low seat, bending
 back his head between the tooth-draw-
 er's legs;  then the tooth-drawer should
 deeply scarify about the tooth, separat-
 ing the gums therefrom,  and then, if
 spoiled, as it were, of the wall of the
 gums, it grow loose, it  must be shaken
 and thrust out by forcing it with a three-
 pointed lever, but if it  stick in too fast,
 and will not stir at all, then  the tooth
 must be taken hold of with some of the
 toothed forceps, now one, then another,
 as the greatness, figure, and sight shall
 seem to require," &c.  Unless the ope-
 rator is sltilful, he says, he may remove
 three, and, sometimes, leave untouched
 the one which caused the pain.
   On the replacement of  the loss  of
 these organs, he observes,  "Teeth arti-
 ficially made of bone or ivory may be
 put in the place of those that are want-
 ing ;  and they must be joined one fast
 unto  another, and, also, fastened unto
 the  natural teeth  adjoining  that  are
 whole; and this must  chiefly be done
 with  a thread of gold or silver, or, for
 want of either, with a common thread
 of silk or  flax, as it is declared at large
 by Hippocrates."
  Scaliger denies that the teeth have
 any sensation, and believes  them to be,
 in this respect, analogous to the nails;
 while Kerkring says they  are similar
 to other bones.  Concerning the struc-
 ture of the teeth, Malpighi asserts that
 they consist of two parts; the interior,
 which is a bony lamella, consisting of a
 fibrous network; but among the writers
 of the seventeenth century, Leeuwen-
 hoek, upon this subject, is, by far, the
 most explicit and satisfactory, and many
 of his microscopical observations  have
 been shown by  the  researches of later
writers  to be very nearly correct.  He
distinctly promulgates the  doctrine  of
the tubular structure of the bony part  of
these organs.                         I
   But it is to Pierre Fauchard,  that
 we are indebted for the first systematic
 Treatise on Dental Surgery, which  was
 published-in France  in 1728.  This
 work, making two 12mo  volumes, and,
 altogether, about nine  hundred closely
 printed pages,  gives a minute descrip-
 tion of all that  was known, at that pe-
 riod, of the anatomy, physiology  and
 pathology of the teeth and their con-
 nections, as well as the various practical
 details  connected with the treatment of
 the  diseases of the mouth  and the appli-
 cation  of  artificial teeth,  palatine obtu-
 rators, &c.  But dental operations, even
 at this  time, were  performed  in a very
 rude and bunghng manner.
   But,  although a number of works
 were contributed to the hterature  of
 dental  surgery,  and among which we
 should  not omit  to mention  those  of
 Bunon, Lecluse,  Jourdain,  Bour-
 det, Herissant and Berdmore,  but
 with the exception of the original sug-
 gestions of these authors, few  improve-
 ments were made in practice  until  to-
 wards the  close  of the eighteenth cen-
 tury.  Pare wrote in 1579, and in 1771,
 John Hunter, wrote the first, and  in
 1778, the second part of his  Treatise on
 the Teeth, on which the broad and firm
 foundation of the English school of den-
 tistry was laid. This has, subsequently,
 been improved and beautified by Blake,
 Fox, Koecker, Bell, Nasmyth and
 other distinguished men  of the dental
 profession.
  What that eminent  anatomist and
 surgeon, John Hunter, was  to the En-
 glish school of dental surgery, Bichat
 was to  the French  modern school, as
 he,  with others equally  phdosophic,
 taught that no theory should be received,
 however plausible, which  could not be
 proven by demonstration. Neither Hun-
 ter nor Bichat were practical  dentists,
but the mighty  energy of their minds
embraced the dental with  the  other
branches of surgery; and the principles
of physiology and  pathology  at large
included this important branch, and  re- 
DEN
181
DEN
 vealed the connection and  sympathies
 of the teeth with the entire frame work
 of man.   Blandin,  Bichat's  editor,
 although  not a practical dentist, was
 much better acquainted with the sci-
 ence of the teeth than Bichat himself;
 and Cuvier's extensive researches into
 osteology, as well as the arcana of na-
 ture at large, all, all came in to aid the
 French dental surgeons: Serres, Dela-
 BARRE, F. CUVIER, ROUSSEAU, MaURY,
 Lefoulon, and Desirabode, have illus-
 trated the modern improvements  of the
 art and science, building, as they have,
 on the foundation  laid years before, by
 Fauchard,  Bunon,  Bourdet,   Le-
 CLUSE, JOURDAIN, HeRRISANT, BaUME,
 Laforgue, and others.
   It would, doubtless, be interesting to
 the dental  student, if we were to trace
 more in detafl, the progress of  this
 branch  of surgery  through the  eigh-
 teenth century, but the limits to which
 we have restricted this  article will not
 permit  us to do so.  Although  it ad-
 vanced steadfly during almost the whole
 of this period, its progress has been, by
 far,  more  rapid since  the  commence-
 ment of the present century.  Profiting
 by the experience of the past, as well as
 by the spirit of enterprise and improve-
 ment now rapidly diffusing itself abroad
 over the whole civilized world, nerving
 the energies of mind for new and greater
 achievements in every  department of
 science and art, and animated by a spirit
 of noble emulation, many practitioners
 of dental  surgery have  devoted  them-
 selves to its cultivation with an enthu-
 siasm and zeal which  have  enabled
 them to overcome every difficulty and
 to arrive, almost, at the highest summit
 of professional excellence.
  The publication  in France, in  1802,
 of a work by Laforgue, on the Theory
and Practice of the Art of the Dentist,
was followed, in 1805, by a work, writ-
ten by Gariot,  on the Diseases of the
Mouth, pubhshed, 1806, and by an elab-
orate Treatise, written by Prof. Baume,
on First Dentition, and the Diseases that
     16
 accompany it.   In thesame yearawork,
 written by Leroy,  (de to Faudiguere,)
 on the Diseases of the Gums, was pub-
 lished, and a Treatise, entitled, Manual
 of the Art of the Dentist, written  by
 Jourdain and  Maggiolo, was issued
 from the press in 1807. But besides the
 above  named  work by Laforgue, the
 author of it has written a number of ar-
 ticles  on the  Diseases of the Teeth,
 which were published in 1808, and a
 Dissertation on First Dentition,  pub-
 lished in 1809.   About the same time,
 a well written  work, from the pen of"
 Duval was published, who is, also, the
 author of several other works, one on
 Second  Dentition, published in  1820,
 and another  on Mechanical  Dentistry,
 published in 1828, besides several small
 Essays.
   The next work which we propose to
 notice is  from  the pen of C. F. Dela-
 barre, and is entitled Odontology, which
 was  published in  1815.—In  1819,  a
 work from the same author, was issued
 from the press, and in 1820, a Treatise
 on Mechanical Dentistry.—From the
 pen of this able writer, we are also in-
 debted for a Treatise on Second Denti-
 tion, intended as a  supplement to his
 former work upon the same subject.
   A  Manual  on  the  Anatomy and
 Physiology of the Teeth, and a Treatise
 on Dental Physiology, Pathology, and
 Therapeutics, both written by Lemair,
 were published, the first, 1816,  and the
 last in 1822.  In 1819, a Treatise on
 the Anatomy  and Physiology  of the
 Teeth, and Dentition, written by Serres,
 was also issued from the press.
   It may also be well to mention in this
 place,  that  during the first  fifteen or
 twenty years of  the present century, a
 number of pamphlets and essays on the
 manufacture  of  mineral artificial teeth,
 were published in France, and in 1821,
 quite  an  elaborate  treatise  upon  the
 same  subject, written by  Audibran,
 made its appearance.  The credit of the
invention of these teeth  is ascribed by
some to Du chateau, an apothecary of 
DEN               182                DEN
St. Germain, but the claim of a dentist i
by the name of N. De Chemant to it,
was so fully established  that royal  let-
ters patent  were granted him both in
France and  England.  Although  these
teeth were manufactured in France as
early as the year 1788, they were  not
brought to a sufficient degree of perfec-
tion, to completely supersede the use of
animal substances  for artificial teeth,
until about the year 1833, when the  im-
provements  made in the  United States
obviated most  of the objections that had
previously existed to their employment.
At present, they are decidedly preferred
by dentists to every other description of
artificial teeth.  The introduction of the
use of mineral  artificial  teeth was the
commencement of a new era in dental
prosthesis, for, although it was a long
time before they were brought to suffi-
cient perfection to render them desirable
substitutes for the natural organs, yet it
gave  an impetus to improvement in
this department which  has been  at-
tended with the most happy and salu-
tary results.
   Although interesting only in a physi-
ological point of view, the work of F.
Cuvier, which  treats on the Teeth of
Mammiferous Animals, and their Zoo-
logical Characters, should not be passed
 without notice. It was pubhshed in
 1825, and contains  one hundred plates.
 It is one of the richest contributions to
 the science of odontology, which had,
 at the period of its  publication,  ap-
 peared.
   Miel, in  1826, gave to the  dental
 profession  a  well written and valuable
 work on the  Art of Directing Second
 Dentition.  In  1828, a  splendid work,
 illustrated by thirty beautiful plates, on
 the Comparative Anatomy of the Teeth
 of Man and  other Animals, by  Rous-
 seau, was  issued  from the press, and
 eight years  previous to this  time,  a
 small treatise, by the same author, on
 First and  Second  Dentition, was  pub-
 lished.  But  the best work on practical
 dentistry, which had appeared in France,
at the period of its publication in 1833, is
from the pen of F. Maury.  In 183G, a
valuable treatise, by professor Blandin,
on  Dental Anatomy,  was published.
This work deserves to be ranked anion;1,
the first upon the subject on  which it
treats.
  In 1841, a work, by  Lefoulon, on
the Theory  and  Practice of Dental
Surgery,  made   its  appearance.  A
Treatise on Irregularity of the Teeth by
Schange, was published in 1842.  But
the best elementary work on the Science
and Art of Dental Surgery, which has
appeared in France, is from the pens of
Desirabode & Sons.  It  occupies up-
wards of  eight hundred pages, and has
passed through two editions.   The last
was pubhshed  in  Paris in 1845.  It
treats on  almost every subject coming
within the province of the dental sur-
geon.
  To the  foregoing works, many more
might be added, but those which we
have already  noticed  will  suffice  to
show the progress  which the science
and art of dental surgery has made in
France since the commencement of the
present  century.  The French have
written much  upon the subject, and
have contributed largely to its  advance-
ment.  They were its earliest, and, for
a long time, its most zealous cultivators.
For the assiduity with which they have
studied its principles, the ingenuity and
talent they have brought to its aid, and
the energy and zeal with which they
have applied themselves to the develop-
ment of  its resources, they are entided
to  the highest praise.
   Leaving the French school, we shall
 proceed to examine very briefly the pro-
 gress which dental surgery has made in
 Great Britain, during the same  period.
 The publication of Dr. Robert  Blake's
 Inaugural  Dissertation on  the   Struc-
 ture of the Teeth in Man and  various
 Animals at Edinburg, in 1798, was fol-
 lowed in 1803 by the first part of Fox's
 celebrated Treatise on the Natural His-
 tory and Diseases of the Human Teeth, 
DEN               183               DEN
 and in 1806, by the second part.  Both
 of the above works hold a  deservedly
 high place in the literature of this de-
 partment of medicine; they  have been
 quoted by  almost  every  subsequent
 writer, but the latter, as having more of
 a practical character, has been more ex-
 tensively read than the former, and that
 portion of it which treats on the anato-
 my and physiology of the teeth, ranks,
 even now, among the best works extant
 upon the subject.  But the doctrine that
 all of the diseases of the teeth are analo-
 gous to those of other bones, as more
 distinctly promulgated to the dental pro-
 fession than had been done by any pre-
 vious author, although even now main-
 tained by several  very  able  European
 writers, has subsequently been  very
 conclusively shown  to be  erroneous.
 The publication of this work, however,
 at once gave to the subject, as a branch
 of the healing art, an importance, which
 it had never before had, and awakened
 a spirit of inquiry which soon led to the
 adoption  of a more  correct system of
 practice than had hitherto  been pursued.
  Four years after the publication of
 the second part of Mr. Fox's  work, a
 small Treatise on the Structure, Forma-
 tion,  and Management of the Teeth,
 by Fuller, was issued from the press.
 The year following, a work  written by
 Murphy,  on  the Natural  History of
 the  Human Teeth, with a  treatise on
 their diseases, from infancy  to old age,
 was published. But as both of the last
 mentioned works were chiefly designed
 for  the popular reader,  they did not,
 either in a scientific or practical point of
 view, contribute much to  the advance-
 ment of dental surgery.    Two other
 works of a somewhat similar character
 were pubhshed, one  in 1819, and the
 other in 1823.  The first was written by
 Mr. Bew, and the last by Gerbaux.
  But the best treatise on dental pathol-
 ogy and therapeutics which  had come
from the Enghsh press at  the period of
its publication in 1826, is from the pen
of Leonard Koecker, M. D., and is
 entitled, Principles of Dental Surgery,
 and the dental profession are indebted
 to the same author for two other works,
 one on the diseases of the jaws, publish-
 ed in 1828, and the other on Artificial
 Teeth, published in 1835.
   In 1827, Mr. Fay published a descrip-
 tion of a mode of using forceps, invent-
 ed by himself, for the extraction and
 excision of teeth.  It is hardly  neces-
 sary to say that the advantages propos-
 ed to be gained by the last named ope-
 ration have not been realized.  In 1831,
 a small treatise written by J. P. Clark,
 was published.  But  one of the most
 popular works that has yet appeared  in
 England, is from the pen of Mr. Thom-
 as Bell, an able and highly accomplish-
 ed writer.  This work was pubhshed in
 1830, and in 1831, it was followed by
 a work on Operative  Dental Surgery,
 written by Mr. Snell, but  previously
 to this period, a small work, entitled
 the Surgeon Dentist's Manual, by G.
 Waite, had  made its  appearance,  as
 well  as several  other  small treatises.
 Mr. Waite is also the author of  a well
 written treatise on the structure and dis-
 eases of the gums.  In 1835, Mr.  Job-
 son gave to the profession a treatise on
 the Anatomy and Physiology  of the
 Teeth, and four years after the publica-
 tion of this work, a treatise,  written by
 Mr. Robertson, made its appearance, in
 which the Chemical Theory of Dental
 Caries, is ably advocated.
   In 1839, an Historical Introduction,
 to Researches on the  Development,
 Structure, and Diseases of the  Teeth,
 by A. Nasmyth,  was issued from the
 press, embodying the views, as well as
 the result of the researches of almost
 every writer of note, upon the subject.
 Mr. Nasmyth is also the author of three
 Memoirs  on  the Development  and
 Structure of the Teeth and Epithelium,
 which were pubhshed in 1841.  These
 contain the result  of a series  of highly
interesting microscopical  observations
made by the author upon these subjects,
and constitute a rich contribution to the 
DEN               184               DEN
science of odontology.   It is  proper to
mention in this connection, that a highly
interesting and ably written  paper on
the Development of the Pulps and Sacs
of the Human Teeth, written by Mr.
Goodsir, was  pubhshed  in  the Janu-
ary No. for 1839, of the Edinburg Med-
ical and Surgical Journal.
  In  1841,  a small Treatise on   the
Structure, Economy and Pathology, of
the Teeth, written by Mr. Lintot, made
its appearance, and soon after,  a small
work on the Extraction of Teeth, by
Mr.  Clendon.  In  1845,  the publica-
tion,  which had  been commenced  in
1840, of an elaborate and very  ably writ-
ten Treatise on the Comparative Anato-
my of the Teeth of vertebrate animals,
by  professor Owen, was completed.
In this work, which is  entitled  Odon-
tography, the physiological  relations,
mode of development,  and  microsco-
pical structure of the teeth, are minutely
described.  It is  also illustrated by  up-
wards of one hundred and sixty splen-
did lithographic plates, which, with the
text,  forms  two large imperial octavo
volumes.
   Several valuable contributions to the
literature of this branch  of medicine
have been made by Dr. E. Saunders,  and
among them are a series of Lectures on
the Anatomy, Physiology and Diseases
of the Teeth, delivered at  St, Thomas'
Hospital, and published in the London
Forceps; and  a pamphlet  of about
eighty  pages,  entitled,  the  Teeth, a
Test of Age.  In 1846 and '7, a course
of  Lectures upon Dental  Anatomy,
Physiology,  Pathology  and Therapeu-
tics,  delivered  by  Mr. Tomes  at  the
Middlesex Hospital, were  published in
the London Medical Gazette. But one
of the best practical manuals  upon den-
tal surgery  which  has come from  the
English press is from the pen  of  Dr.
James Robinson.   It was  pubhshed in
 1846.
   Many other works might be added to
the  fist  of pubhcations on  the teeth,
which  have been published in Great
Britain since the commencement of the
present century, but as most of them
were  intended  for the general, rather
than  the professional, reader, we have
not thought it necessary to extend the
length of  this article by  mentioning
them.  With the increase of the litera-
ture of the Science and Art of  Dental
Surgery in  Great Britain  the  improve-
ments in practice have fully kept pane.
The ranks of the profession for twenty-
five or thirty years, have  been rapidly
filling with men no less  distinguished
for scientific attainments than for prac-
tical skill.
  In Germany, dental  surgery, though
its progress has been less  rapid there
than in France and Great Britain, has
attracted considerable  attention.   Few
works, however, of much  merit have
emanated from that country since  the
commencement of the present century.
There are  two, however, published at
Berlin, particularly worthy of notice-
one in 1803,  and the other in 1842.
The first of these Avorks, written by
Serre, treats of dental operations and
instruments, and forms on octavo vol-
ume of nearly six hundred pages, illus-
trated with upwards  of thirty  plates.
The last is by C. J. and J. Linderer,
and treats of Dental Anatomy, Physiol-
ogy, Materia Medica and Surgery, form-
ing an octavo volume of about five hun-
dred pages, illustratedwith several plates
Both  of the last mentioned treatises, are
very creditable productions.  But, not-
withstanding the merit possessed by a
few of  the German  works upon the
teeth, practical dentistry has not attain-
ed as  high a degree of perfection gener-
ally in  the German  states and prov-
inces, as it  has in some other countries.
  The researches of Professor Ret-
zius,  of Sweden, have excited much at-
tention in Europe, and though  they do
not go  to  confirm previous opinions
with regard to the minute  structure of
the teeth, they have nevertheless thrown
much valuable  light  upon  the sub-
ject.  These researches are both curious 
DEN
185
DEN
 and interesting, and  consist of micros-
 copic examinations of the teeth of man
 and other animals, conducted upon an
 extensive scale,  and would  seem  to
 prove the structure of these organs to be
 tubular.  The account given of these
 researches by the author, has been trans-
 lated into English,  and  are embodied
 in Nasmyth's Historical  Introduction,
 which has already been noticed.
   Having now glanced very briefly at
 the progress of the  science and  art of
 dental surgery, in most of the principal
 countries of Europe,  we shall proceed to
 notice their introduction and growth in
 the United States.
   It has been generally  supposed, that
 it was during our revolutionary struggle
 for independence, that the first know-
 ledge of dental surgery was introduced
 into this country, and that the first dentist
 in the United States, was a man by the
 name of Le Mair,  who  accompanied
 the French army which came over to our
 aid during that period.  But this is not
 the fact. Mr. R. Wooffendale came over
 from England to New York, in  1766,
 and remained in this country  some
 months, practicing in New  York and
 Philadelphia,  but not meeting  with
 much encouragement, he returned to
 England in 1768.  But, soon after the
 arrival of Le Mair, a dentist by the name
 of Whitlock came over from England.
 It was,  therefore, from Wooffendale, Le
 Mair and Whitlock, that dental surgery
 may be  said to have had its origin in the
 United States.  But as yet, so far as the
 author has been able to  ascertain,  no
 regular  treatise upon the subject had
 found its way  to  this country.  With
 regard to the professional  abilities of Le
 Mair and Whitlock, little is known, but it
 is probable they were limited, and that
 their practice consisted chiefly  in con-
structing artificial teeth from blocks of
 ivory.
  It is believed, however, that Mr. Jas.
Gardette, a surgeon from the French
navy, was the first medically educated
dentist in the United States.  He came
     lb»
 to New York in 1783, and the  follow-
 ing year Avent  to  Philadelphia, Avhere
 he soon secured a  high reputation by
 his  professional skill  and  gentlemanly
 deportment, which he retained during an
 eminently successful career of upAvards
 of forty years.
   Mr. John Greenwood, however, it
 is believed, was  the first regular native
 American dentist. He commenced prac-
 tice in New York,  about the year 1778,
 and is said to have been the only dentist
 in that city in the year 1790.  Possessed
 of great energy of character and inge-
 nuity of mind, he rapidly acquired repu-
 tation in  the profession.    But   Mr.
 GreenAvood did  not remain long alone
 in the profession in NeAv York.  About
 the year 1796, Mr. Wooffendale, of Lon-
 don, came to the United States and com-
 menced practice in  this city.   About
 the year 1805, Dr.  Hudson, of Dublin,
 commenced the practice of dental sur-
 gery in Philadelphia, where he soon ac-
 quired skill and reputation which  he
 enjoyed for upwards of  twenty years,
 when death put a stop to his  profes-
 sional career.  But about five years pre-
 viously to the last mentioned period, Dr.
 H. H. Hay den commenced practice in
 Baltimore, and being possessed of an in-
 quiring mind, he soon availed himself of
 the advantages of most of the best Euro-
 pean works upon the physiology  and
 pathology of the teeth, which had been
 written.  In  1807, Dr. Koecker com-
 menced practice in the same city, but in
 a short time, moved  to Philadelphia,
 where he  remained until 1822, when he
 went to London, where he has since
 continued to exercise the duties  of  his
 profession.  But before   he left   the
 United States,  he had acquired a justly
 deserved high reputation for skill in  the
 treatment  of the  diseases of the mouth.
 In the mean time, many others had  en-
 tered the profession, but instead of con-
 tributing to the advancement of correct
 practice, they rather had a  tendency to
retard  its  progress, and bring  odium
upon the calling,  as they  Avere for the 
DEN
130
DEN
most part ignorant of those branches of
knowledge, which it is so important for
a dental surgeon to  possess.  But the
number of dental practitioners  in the
United  States, at the  last mentioned
period,  was  by no  means great, and
even as late as 1820, the number in this
country, did not  greatly  exceed one
hundred.   From this  time, however,
they began to increase more rapidly, and
although few of those who  assumed the
calling, did so Avith  the necessary pre-
paratory education, the  zeal and ability
with which this branch of medicine was
cultivated by a few,  hastened  it on to-
wards perfection with  astonishing and
unexampled  rapidity.   Practical  den-
tistry,  in all its branches began to as-
sume a perfection to  which it had never
before, in any country, attained.
  In 1830, the number of dentists in the
United States, according to the best in-
formation upon the  subject, Avas about
three hundred,  but of these, it is  true,
perhaps, that not more than  forty or
fifty had attained much  practical excel-
lence.   The  portals to  the profession
then, as now, were open to the ignorant,
as well as to  the educated, and in con-
sequence of this, its numbers multiplied
rapidly.  In the course of five years  from
the time last mentioned the number of
dentists in the United States had more
than doubled.
   But an event was now  approaching
in the history of dental su rgery in the
United  States, which gave to its pro-
gress  a new and unexpected impetus.
The pubhcation of the  American Jour-
nal and Library of Dental  Science was
commenced  in  1839.    This  was the
rising of the  morning star of  improve-
ment which was soon followed with more
palpable evidences of  the approach of
day-light to the scattered  members of
the profession, who  had hitherto toiled
in  comparative obscurity,  almost un-
known to each other and to the world.
This pubhcation aroused the energies of
many, who had learned the science in
years of toil, but  who  had not before
found any appropriate medium through
which to communicate their knowledge
to the profession.
  The formation of the American So-
ciety of Dental Surgeons, soon followed
the establishment of this periodical, and
at its  second  annual meeting, an ar-
rangement was made Avith its publish-
ers, by which  it became both the prop-
erty  and the  organ of the association.
Since then, the  agency of the Journal
in recording the  transactions of the so-
ciety, in presenting the papers and the
addresses  read before it at  its  annual
meetings, the  discoveries and improve-
ments in the art, as well as in the dif-
fusion of the knoAvledge of foreign ac-
quirements in  this branch of surgery—
has marked it as the chief ally of the
society in  the elevation of  the profes-
sion, and in giving vigor to its associated
efforts for the  advancement of the sci-
ence.  The   fact that  it has become
a medium of intercommunication be-
tween its members, and the  repository
of valuable information,  should  com-
mend it to the members of the dental
profession generally.
  But a feAv months previous to the in-
stitution  of the  American  Society of
Dental Surgeons,  the  legislature of
Maryland chartered a college with four
professorships, for the purpose of afford-
ing more ample  facilities of  instruction
in the branches of knowledge necessary
to the education of  an accomplished
dentist, than could be furnished by any
private teacher,  and thus securing to
the public a sure guaranty  against the
impositions of empiricism.   The ob-
ject of this institution is, to give  thosf
who receive its instructions,  a thorough
medico-dental education, so that  when
they enter upon the active duties  of the
profession, they may  be  enabled to
practice  it, not  alone as a mere me-
chanical art, but upon sound scientific
principles, as  a regular branch of medi-
cine.  While  the head is being educated
in such branches of general medicine
and surgery, as is deemed necessary to 
DEN                187               DEN
a successful practitioner in this depart-
ment, and in the principles  proper of
dentistry, the fingers of the student, are,
at the same time, regularly drilled every
day in the various mechanical manipu-
lations belonging to it, so that those who
graduate in  the  Baltimore  College  of
Dental Surgery, go out with advantages
that can seldom be obtained  from pri-
vate instruction.   This fact, it is believ-
ed, will ever connect the destinies  of the
institution with the welfare of the pro-
fession in this  country.  A similar in-
stitution has recently been  established
at Cincinnati, Ohio.
  Since the Baltimore College of Den-
tal Surgery, and the American Society of
Dental Surgeons, went into operation,
four local  associations of dentists have
been formed, one in the Mississippi val-
ley, one in Virginia, the third in  Penn-
sylvania, and the fourth in New  York.
  In 1842, there  were about fourteen
hundred dentists in the  United States,
and now (1848)  there are upwards of
two thousand.  But it is a source of re-
gret that many are Avithout  any of the
qualifications necessary for the exercise
of the duties of so nice and difficult an
art.  But, notwithstanding all the dis-
couraging circumstances which  have
and do still attend the progress of dental
surgery  in the United States, its growth
has been astonishingly rapid. Fifteen
years ago,  an  accomplished  dentist
might have been pardoned  the thought
that his  art  had arrived at perfection;
but  great improvements  have  been
made in  this department of surgery
Avithin that time, and who shall say that
the succeeding fifteen  years  shall not
be as pregnant with  improvements as
the past.
   Although the United States may not
have  contributed as much to the lite-
rature of this branch of  medicine  as
Europe, dental surgery has,  neverthe-
less, progressed Avith as much rapidity
here as there, and the works of Ameri-
can authors upon this subject, would
suffer little,  if  at all, by comparison
with similar publications of other coun-
tries.   But few elementary treatises on
the subject  have ever been published
any where, and of those purporting to
be such, Avhich have  appeared during
the last fifteen or twenty years, Ameri-
can dentists have contributed their full
share.
  Among the Avorks on the teeth Avhich
have emanated from the press of this
country, it may be well  to mention the
following:  in  1819,  a work entitled,
a Practical Guide to  the Management
of the Teeth, by L. S. Parmly, Avas pub-
hshed in New York, and another work
from the pen of the same author, on the
Natural History and  Management of
the Teeth, made its appearance in 1821.
  In 1822, a small work on the Disor-
ders and Treatment of the Teeth, writ-
ten by  Dr.  Eleazar Parmly, was pub-
lished  in New  York and  London.  A
small Treatise on the Structure, Forma-
tion, Diseases  and Treatment of the
Human Teeth, by Dr. J. F. Flagg, was
published in Boston in 1822. In 1828, an
Essay  on the Structure or Organization
and Nourishment of the Human Teeth,
from the pen of Dr. J. Trenor, was pub-
lished, and in 1829, a Treatise of upwards
of five hundred pages, entitled, a Sys-
tem of Dental Surgery, in  three parts,
written by Dr. S. S. Fitch, was issued
from the press.  The first part, treats of
Dental Surgery  as  a  Science;  the
second, on Operative Dental Surgery,
and the third, on Pharmacy, connected
with Dental Surgery. This is the largest
and  most  comprehensive  work which
had, at the time of its publication, ap-
peared.   In 1835,  a second, and im-
proved, edition was issued from the press.
  In 1833, a poem by  Dr. S. Brown,
with notes by Dr. E.  Parmly, entitled,
Dentologia, was published.  Dr. Brown
is also  the author of a poem, entitled,
Dental Hygiea, published in 1838, and
of a series  of articles on  Mechanical
Dentistry, published  in the American
Journal of Dental Science.   A year
after the publication of the second edi- 
DEN               1S8                DEN
tion  of Dr. Fitch's System of Dental
Surgery, a popular  Treatise, entitled,
Guide to Sound Teeth, by Dr. S. Spoon-
er, made  its  appearance.  In 1839, a
practical Treatise on  Dental Surgery, of
nearly four hundred  octavo pages, by
the author, was issued  from the press,
which has subsequently, been enlarged
to seven hundred and  fifty-two pages,
and passed through tAvo other editions,
under the title of Principles and Prac-
tice of Dental Surgery.  The last  edi-
tion  was published in  January, 1848.
In 1843,  a treatise  on the Anatomy,
Physiology, and Diseases of the Teeth
and Gums, &c. by Dr. Paul Beck God-
dard, was issued from the press, and two
years after, a popular treatise  on the
Teeth, by  Dr. Robert Arthur.
  The author would  not omit to men-
tion in this connection, that  since the
commencement of the publication of the
American Journal and Library of Den-
tal Science, four other periodicals de-
voted to the interests  of dental surgery
have  been established, namely:  The
Dental  Intelligencer;  the  NeAV York
Dental  Recorder;  the  Dental  NeAvs
Letter and  the Dental  Register of the
West.  In all of which some excellent
articles upon  the teeth have appeared.
  In thus briefly glancing at the  rise
and  progress  of dental surgery,  the
author has necessarily been compelled to
avoid entering into details of particular
modes of practice, and of improvements
and inventions, Avhich have,from time to
time, been made, as Avell as  of an analy-
sis of the works which have been men-
tioned, for, if  he had  done so, it would
have  swelled the  present  article  to a
size  wholly incompatible with the de-
sign  of a work like the  present.
  DENTA'LIS LAPIS. Salivary cal-
culus; tartar  of the teeth.
  DENTA'LIUM. From dens, a tooth.
The  dog-hke tooth shell.  A  genus of
shells resembling in shape a tooth.
  DENTA'RIA. Plumbago europcea.
Toothwort.
  DENTAR'PAGA.  From  dens,  a
 tooth, and aprta^a; I fasten upon.  An
 instrument for the extraction of teeth.
 Anciently, this operation was perform-
 ed with rude and clumsily  constructed
 forceps, and, hence, the operation was
 regarded as formidable,  and difficult to
 perform.  See Extraction of Teeth.
   DENTATA.   From dens, a tooth.
 The second vertebra  of  the  neck is so
 called from its having a  tooth like pro-
 cess at the upper part of its body.
   DENTATE.  Dentatus;  from dens,
 a tooth, having points like  teeth;  ap-
 plied to roots, leaves, ike.
   DENTES.   The  plural of  dens.
 Teeth.  See Teeth.
   Dentes Cuspidati. Kwobovtis- Cus-
 pid  teeth.
   Dentes Bicuspidati.  Bicuspid teeth.
   Dentes Incisores.  Incisor teeth.
   Dentes Lactei.   The milk, tempo-
 rary, or deciduous  teeth. See Decidu-
 ous Teeth.
   Dentes Molares.  Molar teeth.
   Dentes  Sapientle.  The wisdom,
 or third molar teeth.
   DENTICULATE. Denticulatus.—
 Set with small teeth.
   DENTICEPS.  See Dentagra.
   DENTIER.  A set of artificial teeth
 either for one or both jaws.
   DENTIFORM.   Dentiformis; from
 dens, a tooth, and forma, form.   Hav-
 ing the shape or form or a tooth.
   DENTIFRICE. Dcutifriann; from
 dens, a tooth, and fricare, to rub.  A
 powder or  paste for cleaning the teeth.
 Although the teeth can,  in most cases,
 be kept clean by the  use of a suitable
 brush and Avaxed  floss silk, a powder
 or paste may sometimes be advanta-
 geously employed, for the  removal of
 discolorations, stains, or clammy mucus
 from them.  Neglect, or constitutional
 causes, sometimes renders  the  use of
 other means than  a brush,  tooth-pick,
 or floss silk, very necessary.  And a
 variety of dentifrices have,  at different
 times,  and by different  practitioners,
 been proposed.  Some are innocent and
' may be used with advantage, others ex- 
DEN
189
DEN
ert upon the teeth a deleterious effect.
Charcoal is an ingredient which, at one
time, entered largely into  the composi-
tion of many of the dentifrices.  From
its  known antiseptic properties,  it
was regarded as a preventive of caries.
Its use, however,  has  latterly  been
almost altogether abandoned.   It  was
found that it not only did not exert up-
on the teeth the effect formerly ascribed
to it,  but  that its use was absolutely
productive of injury, inasmuch as it was
forced between the gums and  necks of
the teeth, and in the interdental spaces,
and  not being soluble in  the fluids
of  the  mouth, caused  the  margins
and  apices  of  the gums to assume a
blackish appearance.  By acting  as a
mechanical irritant it also caused them
to inflame.  All acids should also  be
excluded from dentifrices, as none of
this class of agents can be used with im
punity upon the teeth. Cream of tar
tar enters largely into the composition
of most of the dentifrices  vended in the
shops for whitening and beautifying the
teeth,  and strange as it may seem, it
alone was recommended by Mr. Hunter
as a tooth powder.  The affinity of tar-
taric acid, one of its principal constitu-
ents,for the lime of the teeth, being great-
er than the phosphoric with which it is
combined, acts readily upon the enamel,
and when used for  any considerable
length of time, not only destroys it, but
renders the teeth sensitive and  painful
to the shghtest touch.
   It has been conclusively demonstrated
by Dr. Westcott, that all acids act upon
the teeth, and no chemical or mechanical
agent capable  of exerting a deleterious
action upon these organs, should  enter
into the composition of a dentifrice. The
following  are the formulae of a few of
the many dentifrices at present  em-
ployed, others will be found in different
parts of the work.
   1$.—Cortex cinchona,        g iv.
        Creta prep.,            § iss.
        Armenian bole,         § iss.
        Oleum bergamii,      gtt.  xxv.
 §iv.
 § iss.
 §iij-
 gss.
 3i-
gtt. XV.
  Mix and  reduce to an impalpable
powder.
  $.—Creta prep.
       Pul. orris root,
       Cortex cinchona,
       Saccharum album,
       Carb. sodae,
       Oleum cinnamoni,
  Mix and  reduce to an impalpable
powder.
  The  following,  however,  will  be
found as useful and agreeable  as any
powder that can  be employed  for the
purpose of simply removing adhesions
of clammy mucus or discolorations from
the teeth.
  1$.—Pul. orris root,
        "  cinnamon,
       Creta prep.
       Sup. carb. soda,
       Sac. album,
       Oleum rosae,
  Mix  and reduce  to  an impalpable
powder.
  Astringent and Aromatic Dentifrice.
  $.—Pul. gallae,
        " orris root,
        Creta prep.
        Cortex cinchona,
   Mix  and reduce to an impalpable
 powder.
          Bourne's Dentifrice.
   ^.—Prepared pumice-stone,
          "    red earth,
          "      " coral,
        Dragon's  blood,
        Cream of tartar,
        Cinnamon,
        Cloves,
   Mix and pulverise.
   By leaving  out the pumice-stone and
 cream of tartar, the last formula would
 not be very objectionable.
   Other formulae might be given, but
 the foregoing will suffice.
      Paste for Ckaning the Teeth.
   1$.—Pul. orris root,          § v.
         " cinnamon,          § ss.
        Creta prep.            § iv.
        Cortex cinchona,       § iij.
 lb"-
 |iv.
 fci-
 5 iss.
 I vii.
gtt. xii.
 §i-
 §i-

 §ss.
 gss.
 §"•
gr. xxv. 
DEN               190                DEN
  Mix, pulverise to a fine powder, and
add a  sufficient quantity of honey  to
form a stiff paste.
  Dentifrice Electuary,Lelande's.
1$.—Pumice-stone, dried bone, red coral,
a a 5 ij ; Florentine orris, calcined alum,
pulverised  cinnamon,  a a  £) ij; rock
alum,  5i;   cochineal, 3 i;  pulverise
finely, and add a sufficient quantity of
Narbonne honey made into a syrup to
form  an electuary.  After fermenting
forty-eight hours, stir it, and put in alco-
hol of cloves, 24 drops, and 10 drops of
alcohol of musk.  Triturate the mixture
again, and put it in tin  boxes, or fine
earthen pots for use.
  Dentifrice Powder, Alibert's.—
$.—Magnesia,  g vi;   shell-lac, g ij;
Florentine  orris, g v; sup. tart, potas-
sa,  gij.  Mix.
  Dentifrice, Mailhe's.  1$.—Sugar
of milk, 1000 grammes; lake, 10 gram-
mes;  pure tannin, 15 grammes; oil of
mint and oil of anise, each 20 drops; oil
of orange flower, 10 drops.  Rub  the
lake with the tanin, and add, gradually,
first, the sugar of milk, previously pow-
dered and passed through a sieve hav-
ing wide meshes, and then the essential
oils.
  DENTINE.  A name given by pro-
fessor Owen  to dental bone,  or  the
osseous part  of a  tooth.  See Tooth-
bone.
  DENTISCAL'PIUM. From dens,
a tooth, and scalpere, to scrape.  An in-
strument employed for  the removal of
salivary calculus, and scraping the teeth.
A number of instruments are often re-
quired  for these purposes, so shaped
that they may be readily apphed to any
part  of a tooth.  The name has also
been apphed to a gum-lancet and tooth-
pick, but we  think  it  applies  more
strictly to  the first mentioned instru-
ment.
  DENTIST.  See Dental Surgeon.
  DENTITION.  Dentitio; from den-
tire,  to  breed teeth.   Teething. The
emergence of the teeth from the alveoli
and gums.
  With regard to the manner in which
this operation of the economy is effected,
a variety of explanations  have  been
given.   Some,  and we believe by far
the greater number,  attribute it to the
prolongation of the pulp for the forma-
tion of the root of the tooth, or in other
words, that a tooth is pushed from its
socket  and through  the gum, by the
formation of its root or roots, if it  have
more than one.  But, that this opinion
is erroneous would seem evident  from
the fact, that, if the  elongation of the
pulp commenced  before the crown of
the tooth had made any advance tOAvards
the gum, it would come in contact  with
the floor of the alveolus, and being in a
soft and yielding condition, be caused to
assume an unnatural configuration. It
is  apparent, therefore, that the crown
must make some  progress  toward the
gum, before an elongation of  its  pulp
can commence, and this then  must be
effected by some  other agency; others
beheve that the tooth is forced from its
socket by the moulding of the alveolus
to its root or roots, if  it have more  than
one, but the objections  which apply to
the other theory, will apply with equal
force to this.
  M. Delabarre believes the exit  of a
tooth from its  matrix and  its  passage
through the alveolus and gums are ef-
fected in precisely the same manner as
the birth of a child.  The  sac, he re-
gards as the chief agent, and that it is
by the  contraction of this, which is ad-
herent  to the neck of the tooth, that the
organ is lifted from its socket, and its
neck ultimately brought to a level with
the gums.  This is the only philosophi-
cal and truly plausible explanation that
has ever been given of this most curious
and interesting operation of  the animal
economy, and when we take into con-
sideration that the inner membrane of
the sac is of a fibro-mucous structure, it
is easy to perceive, how the advance of
a tooth may be effected by  the contrac-
tion of  this enclosure, Avhich is firmly
attached to its neck, and  also to the 
DEN
191
DEN
gum.   It is by the contraction of this,
that the dentition of a tooth is effected.
  The ossification of the exterior of the
root, proceeds nearly  as  fast as  the
elongation of the pulp. Commencing
at the  neck,  and proceeding- inwards
and downwards,  one concentric bony
ring  after another is  formed  until it
reaches the extremity, and   nothing
remains but  a small  canal  running
through the centre from  its apex  to
the cavity in the interior of the crown,
through which the dental nerves and
vessels pass.  The alveolus in the mean
time deepens, approaches the  tooth
and finally  closely embraces  it.  As
soon as the coronal  extremity  of the
tooth emerges from  the gum,  the  sac
assumes its primitive  follicular condi-
tion.  But it continues to contract until
the whole  of the crown has passed
through, when it becomes the free  edge
of the gum which surrounds  the  neck
of the tooth.
   Goodsir  divides dentition into three
stages, to wit: thefollicidar, the sacular,
and the eruptive.  See Teeth, develop-
ment of pulps and sacs of.
   Dentition,  First.   The  dentition
of the deciduous, milk, or  temporary
teeth.   As the  progress  of the  teeth
through the various stages of dentition
will be described in the article on "Teeth,
Development of Pulps and Sacs of," it
will only be necessary, in this place, to
notice  the periods of the eruption of the
temporary  teeth, which are variable;
depending, probably, upon the state of
the constitutional health of the child.
The following,  however,  may  be re-
garded as a very near approximation to
the periods when they are most frequent-
ly erupted.
   The central incisores from 5 to 8
months after birth; the lateral incisores
from 7 to 10; the first molares from 12
to 16; the cuspidati from  14 to20; and
the  second molares  from  20  to  36
months.
   No  general rule, however, can be
laid down from which there will not be
frequent variations.  The following is
the most remarkable variation, not only
from the most common period, but also
from the natural order in which the erup-
tion of the teeth  usually takes  place,
which the author has ever met with.
In November, 1846, he was sent for to
lance the  gums of an infant only four
months old.   On examining the mouth,
the gums  on either side, of both jaws,
immediately  over  the  first  temporary
molaris, was found much swollen and
inflamed.  As these teeth were evident-
ly forcing their way through the gums,
and as the child was  threatened  with
convulsions,  it  became  necessary to
lance them  immediately.  A few days
after, the teeth made their appearance,
but the central incisores, which should
have  appeared  first, were  not erupted
until about the usual period.
  Sometimes there is  an extraordinary
tardiness in  the eruption of the tempo-
rary  teeth.   There is somewhere on
record, the  case of a child, which did
not get any of its teeth until it was ten
years old; and Lefoulon  states that he
saw a young girl of seven years of age,
whose  inferior incisores had not ap-
peared. Several cases have come under
the observation of the author in which
dentition  did not  commence until the
fifteenth,  and one not until the twen-
tieth month.  On the other hand, there
are cases of precocity of action in the
eruption  of the teeth equally remark-
able, as for example, when the tAvo lower
incisores are cut at birth.  Louis XIV
was born with four teeth, and Polydorus
Virgihus mentions a  child  that was
born with six.  Haller, in his Elements
of Physiology, enumerates the cases of
nineteen  children  who were born with
teeth.  Similar examples are on record,
and there are few physicians or dentists
who  have been in practice ten or fifteen
years, who have not met with them.
   In speaking of these  early produc-
tions, Mr.  Fox says, "As they  only
have a weak attachment to the gums,
they  soon get loose, producing a consid- 
DEN                192               DEN
 erable inflammation in the mouth of the
 child, as well as occasioning considera-
 ble inconvenience to the mother.  It is,
 therefore, advisable to extract them im-
 mediately, for they  can never come to
 perfection."   In this  opinion, the au-
 thor is compelled to differ with Mr. Fox,
 for their attachment is  not always, as
 he supposes, confined  to the gums;
 their roots are sometimes securely fixed
 in  sockets in the jaw.   When  this is
 the case, they do not  occasion any  in-
 convenience, and their extraction would
 be highly improper.  It  is always bet-
 ter,  therefore,  to  wait  until  there  is
 some positive indication  that such ope-
 ration is  necessary, before it is per-
 formed.
   In the  eruption of the teeth, those
 of the lower jaw are said to precede the
 upper, but the latter appear first, nearly
 as often as the former.
   Dentition, Morbid.  Although den-
 tition may be regarded as a healthy ope-
 ration of the economy, it is, sometimes,
 performed with  difficulty, and attended
 with serious and occasionally alarming
 effects. There  are  few  children who
 do  not suffer more  or less during the
 progress of dentition, and when we con-
 sider the early age at which this opera-
 tion commences, and the irritable state
 of the body while it  is going on, it will
 not appear strange that it should often
 be attended with painful effects.  Even
 in later life, during the dentition of the
 wisdom teeth, it is sometimes  produc-
 tive of very alarming symptoms.
  First dentition  is  generally  regarded
 as a most  critical period  of life, and it
 has  often  proved one of bereavement
 and sorrow.
  The irritation resulting from difficult
 dentition is  supposed  to  be produced,
 principally, by the pressure of the ad-
vancing tooth against the gum.   When
 the absorption of this  keeps pace with
the growth of the tooth, there is little
 pressure,  but when  the  reverse  hap-
 pens, as is often the case, it sometimes
 becomes so considerable, as to be pro-
 ductive of great irritation, inflammation
 and tumefaction of the gums.  It is not
 altogether unlikely, that a portion of the
 irritation may be produced by the pres-
 sure of the tooth upon the  elongated
 pulp, for when its progress is retarded
 by the resistance of the gum, it would,
 of necessity, cause the ossified part to
 press upon it.   This, as  a  matter of
 course, would give rise to  great irrita-
 tion.
   According to Dr. Good, and we be-
 lieve the correctness of the opinion is
 sustained by observation, the pressure
 of the   advancing tooth  against  the
 gum, is  not constantly and uniformly
 exerted throughout its whole  progress,
 "but is divided  into distinct periods or
 stages, as though the vital or instinctive
 principle, which is what we mean by
 nature, becomes exhausted by a certain
 extent of action, and requires rest  and a
 state of intermission."
   But with regard to the effects pro-
 duced by the irritation, their nature and
 extent are always  determined by the
 state of the health of  the child and its
 constitutional  susceptibilities  and ten-
 dencies.   When the irritation is merely
 slight, it is generally of short  duration,
 subsiding as soon as the tooth emerges
 from the  gum.  But when it is great,
 the functional operations of other parts
 of the body are often disturbed, attended
 by febrile symptoms of a more or less ag-
gravated character, such as drowsiness,
 constipation of the bowels, diarrhoea, &c.
 The gums inflame, swell, become red
 and hot,  with a copious flow of saliva,
 circumscribed redness of the checks,
 cutaneous eruptions, particularly  upon
the face and scalp, green or  pale stools,
griping  of  the  bowels, moaning and
starting during sleep, and various other
unpleasant symptoms, such as difficult
 micturition, sometimes attended  with
 vehement shrieking, and convulsions.
   Dr. Underwood says, and the fact is
 abundantly confirmed  by observation,
 that, "strong   and  healthy  children
 cut  their teeth  earlier than the  weak 
DEN
193
DEN
 and  tender."    "The  robust,  how-
 ever,"  he says, are more subject to
 fever, and "that the extremes of high
 health, and of debility, are both danger-
 ous; the  one being exposed  to  acute
 fever, or convulsions, the  other  to  a
 slow hectic and marasmus.   Therefore,
 air, exercise, food  of easy digestion in
 small quantities, and taken  frequently,
 and every thing that has  a tendency
 to promote general health, and to guard
 against fever, will  greatly contribute
 to the safety of dentition."
   In addition to the above, the bowels
 should  be kept open, when necessary,
 with mild cathartics, such as senna and
 manna, magnesia,  rhubarb, or  castor
 oil,  and should there be much  fever
 with constipation,  a dose  of calomel
 may often be  advantageously given.
 Cool drinks and refrigerant diaphoretics,
 as the neutral mixture and the spirit of
 nitric ether, are recommended as  ser-
 viceable in controlhng irregular nervous
 action.  Should eruptions appear upon
 the skin, and especially upon the  face,
 scalp, and behind the ears, no attempt
 should be made to  dry them up, as the
 irritation which attends them, might in
 that case, fall upon some more vital or-
 gan, as the brain.   When, as is  often
 the case, an ulceration  or scabby affec-
 tion appears behind the ears, its contin-
 uance should be  encouraged, and  some
 physicians have recommended, in cases
 of difficult and obstinate dentition, when
 this  disorder  fails  to appear, irritating
 it, by the  apphcation  of bhsters,  and
 afterwards keeping them  open.
  But the most important  indication,
 as is justly remarked by Dr. Underwood,
 is to assist the eruption  of the teeth.
 For this purpose he recommends the
 application of  cooling sedatives,  and
 demulcent applications to  the gums;
rubbing them with some smooth  hard
substance,  as the  coral,  and dividing
them with the lancet.  The  last,  after
all, he says, "is the only mean to be de-
pended upon," and when  this operation
is performed, it  should be  effectually
        17
 done,  cutting  through  not only  the
 gum, but also the sac, so that  they be
 completely reheved of the tension occa-
 sioned by the pressure of the  advanc-
 ing tooth. The lancet, therefore, should
 ahvays be carried down to it by a single
 cut, making the incision in the direc-
 tion of  the curvature of the  alveolar
 border.   In cutting the gum over an in-
 cisor or cuspid tooth, the incision should
 be about  a hne in front of the  summit
 of the ridge and directed slightly back-
 ward, to avoid cutting behind the tooth,
 as is often done.  In  cutting  the gum
 over a molar tooth, a crucial incision is
 required, and each cut should be equal
 in extent to the diameter of the grinding
 surface of the tooth, in order to secure
 the full benefit of the operation.
   The operation of lancing the gums is
 very simple and safe, and is rarely pro-
 ductive of much pain, often  affording
 instantaneous and complete relief from
 the most  painful suffering.
   Of the  advantages resulting from this
 operation, Dr. Underwood says, he is
 convinced that it "is often inexpressibly
 useful, and appears to have saved many
 lives, after the most dangerous symp-
 toms had taken place, and every other
 means of cure had been made use of."
 The mere bleeding from  the  gums  is
 capable of affording some relief,  as it is
 frequently found to do in adult persons,
 distressed by the tooth-ache.   And I
 cannot here forbear expressing my sur-
 prise at the fears some people entertain
 of lancing the gums and their delaying
 it so long, if not altogether rejecting it,
 though no evd can possibly arise from
 the operation.  On the other  hand  its
 advantages are so great, that whenever
 convulsions take place about the usual
 period of dentition, recourse ought to be
 had to it,  after an unsuccessful  use  of
 other means, though by an examination
 of the gums there may be no  certain
 evidence of the convulsions being owing
 to such a cause; the  irritation from
 teething sometimes taking place  in the
very early stage of the process.  At 
DEN
194
DEN
any rate, the operation can do no harm,
even  at  any  period,  and should  the
shooting of teeth be only an aggravation
to the true cause of the disease, lancing
the gums must be attended with advan-
tage.  But should teething be the proper
and sole cause, it is evident how fruitless
any other means of relief must frequent-
ly be; for  should convulsions, for  in-
stance, take place from a thorn run into
the finger, or toe, the  proper indication
of cure is, an immediate extraction of the
thorn, and the futility of other means,
must be equally obvious.
   "The operations may also be safely re-
 peated, the scars doing no kind of harm.
 This, however, contrary to popular pre-
 judice, may be readily proved, not only
 from the fact of infants cutting their first I
 teeth very easily some weeks after be-
 ing lanced,  but  also  from the circum-
 stances under which  the second teeth
 are often cut.  At this period, children
 from their more advanced age, and de-
  creased irritability are  less subject  to
  fever, and evidently appear to suffer far
  less  pain  than in the first teething,
  though the second teeth often have  to
  make their  way  through much more
  considerable scars than have been made
  by a lancet, from the gums having been
  lanced prematurely. This fact is  like-
  wise established from the  many instan-
  ces in  which dentists have  thought it
  expedient  to draw  out the  first  teeth
  long before the second are prepared to
   take their place.  The objection to lanc-
   ing  the  gums, from any apprehension
   arising from the  scars, is, therefore,
   altogether ill-founded,  and,  indeed, it
   will be frequently necessary to lance the
   gums several times, especially  on  ac-
   count of  the  extraordinary  difficulty
   with  Avhich  some infants  cut  their
   double teeth, which are furnished with
   two or more knobs or points.  Purging,
   fever, and even convulsions, will some-
   times arise from only one  point of a
   large  tooth offending  the  periosteum
   that covers it, and being nearer the sur-
   face than the  other points,  the lancet
may sometimes not completely divide
the membrane that lies over the rest;
and this part not being injured by the
tooth, the symptoms subside on having
divided that portion of the membrane
that was inflamed.  But in a little time,
another point of the same tooth is found
to irritate the periosteum, and calls for
the like assistance of the lancet, which
again removes all the complaints. This,
at least, I have conceived to be the pro-
cess.   When I have found lancing  a
large tooth immediately remove every
terrible symptom, though the fever and
other complaints have returned, and the
whole of the tooth not appeared till the
 operation has been three  or four times
 repeated.   I have seen the like good ef-
 fect from it, Avhen children have been
 cutting a number of teeth in succession,
 and have bred them all without convul-
 sions, nothing having relieved  or pre-
 vented these terrible symptoms but lanc-
 ing the gums, which has removed them
 every time it has been done, one or more
 teeth appearing in a  day or two after
 each operation."
    Regarding dentition as a healthy op-
 eration of the economy, Dr. Blake does
 not believe that the morbid effects which
  so frequently attend it, are as often de-
  termined by any irritation which it pro-
  duces, and, therefore, is somewhat in-
  credulous  with  regard  to the benefit
  which is supposed to result from lanc-
  ing the gums, except Avhat may some-
  times be derived  from the  depletion
  which follows the  operation.  But it
  should be recollected, that Dr.  Blake's
  opinion was deduced more from theory
  than  experience,  for  at  the time he
  wrote, he had had but few opportunities
  of making observations upon this sub-
  ject.  Dr. Underwood's,on the contrary,
  being based upon extensive experience
   and  numerous  observations, carries
   with it a weight of authority, which en-
   titles it to more than ordinary respect.
   Its truth too has been fully established by
   the experience of others.
     It seldom  happens, that  any  very 
DEN
195
DEN
 alarming morbid phenomena attend the
 dentition of the permanent teeth, though
 cases do  occasionally occur in  which
 serious and painful effects  result from
 it, and especially from  the  eruption of
 the third  molares.   Several examples
 have fallen under our OAvn  immediate
 observation, and in  another place, we
 have given the history of a  case, com-
 municated to us by Dr. Moberly of New
 Market, Md.,  of fatal phthisis pulmo-
 nalis which had resulted from the denti- |
 tion of the wisdom teeth. Among a num-
 ber of very interesting  cases, related
 by Dr. Ashburner, is one of a young
 Avoman nineteen years of age, who had
 suffered for several months with profuse
 night  sweats,  starting in  her sleep,
 cramps in  her toes, calves of her  legs,
 and fingers, who was finally relieved by
 lancing the gums freely  over the lower
 Avisdom teeth,  which  had not  yet ap-
 peared.
   But lancing the gum will not always
 remove the irritation  produced by the
 dentition or growth of a  wisdom tooth.
 It often happens that nothing short of
 the removal of the  tooth  itself will re-
 move the morbid effects it has induced,
 and this becomes more especially neces-
 sary in the lower jaw, where, for want of
 room between  the  second molar and
 coronoid process or some other cause,
 the dens sapientiae  has been forced to
 take a false direction in its growth.
   Dentition,  Second.   There is no
 operation of the animal economy more
 curious or interesting than that which
 is  exhibited  in the  gradual destruc-
 tion of the  roots  of the temporary,
 and  in  the  growth  and dentition of
 the permanent teeth.   The time of
 life Avhen  this occurs,  constitutes an
 important epoch in the history of every
 individual.
  During childhood, each of the alveo-
lar arches forms only about the  half of
a circle, but by  a  gradual elongation of
the jaws, each, ultimately, forms nearly
the half of an ellipsis, so that  the num-
ber of teeth required  at the one period,
  is but little more than half the  number
  required at the other.
    Moreover, the food of children is prin-
  cipally  vegetables,  which require  but
  little mastication  to prepare them  for
  the stomach, whereas that of adults
  consists of an almost  equal additional
  portion of animal  substances,  which,
  owing to the greater cohesion of their
  particles, require a more numerous and
  substantial set of instruments for their
  trituration.
   So  admirable  is  the   economy   of
  second dentition,  that  even before  the
  shedding of the temporary teeth  com-
  mences, and as soon  as  the jaAvs  are
  sufficiently enlarged, four of the second
  set, one on each side, in each maxillary
 bone,  make their  appearance.  Conse-
  quently, the number of teeth, after the
  completion of the first set,  is never, un-
 less by accident or disease, at all dimin-
 ished.
   The rudiments of the permanent  in-
 cisores and cuspidati have attained their
 full size at birth, and each is situated
 immediately  behind its corresponding
 temporary tooth.
   The permanent teeth, with the excep-
 tion of the bicuspides, are  considerably
 larger than the temporary, and during
 the time of their formation are situated
 in the segment of a much smaller circle,
 which occasions  great irregularity  in
 their arrangement.  But before the shed-
 ding of the first begins, the latter, by  an
 increase in the depth of the jaws, and
 the  development of the alveolar  pro-
 cesses, are brought forward,  so, that at
 about  the  fifth  year, they  are situated
 immediately below the temporary teeth
 in the lower, and nearly above them  in
 the upper maxilla, occupying places  in
 the alveolar  border,  corresponding  in
 depth to  the length of their respective
 roots.
  By this arrangement,  the permanent
 teeth occupy the smallest possible space
 in the jaws.  The central incisores and
 cuspidati nearly fill  the  anterior part  of
the arch, while the lateral incisores are 
DEN
196
DEN
 thrown back behind and partly between
 them.
   The following concise description of
 the relative position of  the teeth, at  the
 fifth  year after  birth, is given by Mr.
 Bell.   "In the upper jaw, the central
 incisores  are situated  immediaely  be-
 neath  the nose, the lateral incisores
 thrown back  behind the points of  the
 cuspidati; and  the  base of the  latter
 scarcely  a quarter  of  an inch  below
 the orbit.  In the lower jaw, the cuspi-
 dati are placed at the very base of  the
 bone, with only a  thin layer  beneath
 them, but the crowding is much less
 considerable than in  the upper  jaw,
 from the smaller comparative size of the
 incisores.
   "The permanent central  incisor of
 the lower jaw, is  placed immediately
 beneath the temporary,  with  its  point
 directed a little backwards, behind  the
 partially absorbed root of the latter. The
 lateral incisor, not yet so far advanced,
 is placed deeper in the jaw, and instead
 of being immediately beneath the tem-
 porary  is situated with its point between
 the roots  of this and the cuspidatus.
 The permanent cuspidatus is still very
 deeply  imbedded in the bone,  with its
 point resting  between the roots of  the
 temporary cuspidatus, and the first tem-
 porary  molaris.   The two  spreading
 roots  of the  latter, encompass,  as  it
 were,  within their  span, the first  bi-
 cuspis ; and those  of the second  tem-
 porary molaris, in like manner,  the sec-
 ond bicuspis.    Nearly  a similar  ar-
 rangement is  found to exist in the up-
 per jaw, except that the teeth are  alto-
 gether more crowded."
  Before proceeding further with second
 dentition, it may be proper to offer a few
 remarks on the destruction of the  roots
 and the shedding of the temporary teeth.
    Shedding of the Temporary Teeth.
   Some very singular notions were en-
 tertained among the ancients concern-
ing the temporary teeth. Many thought
they never had roots, inasmuch  as they
 were observed to be wanting when they
 dropped out;  others thought the crowns
 were removed, while the roots remained
 and served as germs for  the permanent
 teeth.
   This most wonderful operation of the
 economy is effected in accordance with
 an established law,  but there exists,
 among physiologists, some difference of
 opinion Avith  regard to  the manner in
 which it is effected.  To  the absorbents,
 most writers ascribe the agency of its
 accomplishment.  Mr.  Fox supposes,
 that as  the new teeth begin to  rise from
 their sockets, they come in contact with,
 and press  upon,  first, the partition of
 bone intervening betAveen them and the
 roots of the temporaries, and afterwards
 upon the roots themselves;  and  this
 pressure, he believes, induces  their ab-
 sorption.   He afterwards, however, ad-
 mits that pressure is  not necessary to
 their absorption, as it  sometimes takes
 place where there  is none.
   Mr. Hunter  does not  attempt to ex-
 plain the  manner  of the destruction of
 the roots of the temporary teeth in any
 other way  than by stating, that they
 decay off up  to the  gum.  Fauchard
 and Bourdet attribute  their removal to
 the action of a corrosive fluid,  supplied
 for the special purpose.   Bunon thinks
 they are worn away by the rising teeth.
 Lecluse is of the opinion that when the
 process of their removal  begins, their
 vessels cease to supply their nourishing
juices, and  that they  are broken up by
 a species of maceration, while  Jourdain
 believes it is both by abrasion  and cor-
 rosion.
  Mr. Bell, as do  indeed almost all re-
 cent writers, adopts the theory of Mr.
 Fox, that the destruction of the roots of
 the temporary teeth is the result of ab-
 sorption.  Laforgue, observing a fungi-
form or carneous  substance  behind the
root of  the temporary tooth, which, in
fact, had been noticed by Bourdet,  and
supposed by him to exhale a fluid which
possessed solvent  qualities, gave it the
name of absorbing apparel, and assign- 
DEN
197
DEN
ed to it the office of removing the root
of the primary tooth.
  Delabarre,  who has treated this sub-
ject at greater length, and  apparently,
investigated it more closely, corroborates
the views of Laforgue, and gives the
following  description of the manner of
the formation and function of the carne-
ous substance spoken of by this author
as the absorbing apparel.   "While the
crown of the tooth of replacement,"
says  Delabarre, "is only in formation,
the exterior membrane of the matrix is
simply crossed by some blood vessels;
but as soon as it is completed, the capil-
laries are  then developed in a very pe-
culiar manner, and form a tissue  as fine
as cobweb; from this tissue the internal
membrane, instead of continuing to  be
very  delicate, and of  a pale  red color,
increases in thickness and assumes a red-
der hue.   As  was  before  said, it is at
the instant in which commences  the re-
action of the coats of the matrix, that
are conveyed from the gum to the neck
of the tooth, that the plaiting of the ves-
sels, that enter into their  tissue, com-
pose a body of a carneous  appearance,
whose absorbents extend their  empire
over all the  surrounding parts; it  is,
therefore, the dental matrix itself, which
after being dilated to serve as a protect-
ing envelop to the tooth, is contracted
to  form, not only this bud-like  body
which we find  immediately beloAv the
milk  tooth, at the instant in  Avhich  it
naturally  falls out, and whose volume
is necessarily augmented as odontocia
gradually  goes  on, but also a  carne-
ous mass by which the whole  is sur-
rounded,  and whose  thickness  is the
more remarkable  as  the organ  that it
envelops is nearer its orifice."
   After giving this description, he asks,
"is there  a  dissolving fluid  that acts
chemically on the surrounding parts, or
do the absorbents, without any inter-
mediary, destroy every thing that Avould
obstruct the shooting up of the tooth ?"
In reply to this, he says, "Not  posses-
sing positive proof, suitable to guide me
in the decision of this question, and find-
ing those of others of little importance,
I shall not attempt to answer them."
  In pursuing  the  subject  further, he
states that the vessels of  the temporary
tooth often remain entire  in the midst of
this carneous  substance, continue to
convey their fluids to the central part of
the tooth, whilst the calcareous ingre-
dients and  the  gelatine have been re-
moved, and that, at other  times, they
too are destroyed; and the  conclusion
to Avhich he arrives, after a careful ex-
amination of the whole subject, is, that
whether  the earthy and animal parts of
the root are removed by  the absorbents
of  the carneous tubercle  in  question
without  any  previous  change,  or
whether  they are decomposed by the
chemical action of a fluid exhaled from
it, they are ultimately  carried back into
the general circulating system.
  In proof of the agency of the fleshy
tubercle  in the destruction of the roots
of the temporary teeth, he mentions one
fact that goes  very far to establish the
truth of the supposition, and if his views
be  correct, Avill  account  for those cases
which are occasionally met with, where
one or more of the permanent teeth fail
 to appear.  It is this :  if this  carneous
 substance  fails  to be developed,  or  i«
destroyed by an injudicious operation,
 the tooth often remains locked up in the
jaw through life.
   In as few words as possible, we have
given the views of this ingenious Avriter,
 on the subject under consideration, and
 although they do not seem to  have at-
 tracted  much  attention  from  English
Avriters, and are rejected by Mr  Bell, on
the ground, as  he says,  but which we
have never known to be  the case, that
the destruction  of the root of the tem-
porary frequently commences on a part
"the most remote from  the sac of the
permanent tooth,"  we are  disposed to
believe them, for the most part, correct.
As to the existence of the fleshy tuber-
cles, there can be no question,  and that
it is through the agency of these  that 
DEN
198
DEN
 the  roots  of the temporary  teeth  are
 destroyed, we are fully convinced.  But
 whether it is  through  the agency  of
 their absorbent  vessels or a chemical
 fluid exhaled for the purpose, may not,
 as Delabarre says, be so  easy to deter-
 mine.
   The change that takes place in the
 external membrane of the dental sac, as
 noticed by  Delabarre, is observable, first,
 on the peduncle  or chord  leading from
 it to the  gum behind the temporary
 tooth. It here becomes thickened about
 the time the root of the neAV tooth be-
 gins to form, and assumes a fleshy or
 carneous appearance, and it is here  that
 the destruction of the surrounding bone
 commences, enlarging the alveolo-den-
 tal canal, and gradually removing the
 intervening bony partition, and, finally.
 the root of the temporary  tooth.  The
 agency of this thickened and fleshy con-
 dition of the exterior membrane of the
 dental capsules, in the removal of the
 roots of the temporary teeth, is rendered
 more conclusive by  the  fact, that, in
 those cases A\rhere the roots of the per-
 manent teeth have become partially de-
 stroyed,  the  alveolo-derital periosteum
 had assumed a similar appearance.   In
 the formation, too, of alveolar abscess,
 the tubercle at the extremity of the root
 presents a like aspect.
  There also seems to be, in this inter-
 esting operation of the economy, an as-
 sociation of functions,  each dependent
 upon all the others,  so that if one be
 suspended, the  others  fail to be per-
 formed.  Thus, if from any cause, the
 fibres of the sac fail to  contract,  the
 fleshy tubercle is not developed, nor does
 the formation of  the  root take place—
 consequently, the crown of the tooth
 remains in  the  alveolus.  Hannonious
 consent of  associated functions are no
 Avhere more  beautifully  exemplified
than  in these  three  operations of the
economy.
  It oftentimes happens, that the root of
a temporary tooth fails to be destroyed,
and that the crown of the replacing or-
 gan comes through the gum in a wrong
 place.   Whenever this  happens, the
 carneous body is  developed only be-
 neath the parts through the  opening of
 Avhich the neAV tooth has  emerged, and
 is not brought in contact Avith the bony
 partition betAveen it and the  root of the
 temporary teeth.
   The manner of the destruction of the
 roots of the temporary teeth  has been a
 subject of close and critical inquiry with
 the writer for several years, and the more
 he has examined the subject, the more
 fully has he become convinced, that it is
 the result of  the action of the fleshy tu-
 bercles upon  them.   And Avhile its for-
 mation seems to be the result of the con-
 traction of the sacs of the  permanent
 teeth and their appendages, for the pur-
 pose of effecting the eruption of the teeth,
 they are especially charged Avith the re-
 moval of every thing  that would ob-
 struct their passage.
   In conclusion, it is only necessary to
 observe,  that  the temporary teeth are
 shed in the order which they at first ap-
 peared. After one pair has been shed, a
 sufficient time usually elapses before the
 sheddingof another,for those of the same
 class of the permanent set to come for-
 ward and take their place. Thus,thejaws
 are never deprived, unless  from some
 other cause than the destruction of the
 roots of the  temporary teeth, of more
 than tAvo teeth in each  jaw at any one
 time.
   Having now briefly described the pro-
 cess of the shedding of the temporary
 teeth, we shall next  notice the order of
 the eruption of the permanent, omitting,
 however, a description of their progress
 from the period when they first appear
 as mucous papillae, until they are ready
 to emerge from the  gums, as we shall
 have occasion to recur to this subject in
 another article.  See  Teeth, develop-
ment of pulps and sacs of.

   Ervplicn of the Permanent Tecih.

  Second dentition usually commences
at about six  or seven years  after birth, 
DEN
199
DEN
and is generally completed, as  far back
as the second molares, by the tAvelfth or
fourteenth year.   The dentes sapientiae
seldom appear before the eighteenth or
tAventieth year.   The  periods of  the
eruption of the  adult teeth, are,  how-
ever, so variable,  that it  is  impossi-
ble to state them with perfect accuracy.
Sometimes the first  permanent molares
appear at four years, and the central in-
cisores at five; at other  times, they  are
several years later.
   But as it is of some importance that
the periods of the eruption of the several
classes  of the permanent teeth' should
be known, the author will state  them
with as much accuracy  as possible.
   First molares, from 5  to 6 years; cen-
tral incisores, from 6 to  8 years; lateral
incisores, from 7 to  9 years; first bicus-
pides, from 9 to 10 years; second bicus-
pides, from 10 to 11 g  years; cuspidati,
from 11 to 12 years; second molares,
from 12 to  14  years; third  molares,
(dentes sapientias,)  from 17 to 21 years.
   But, as before  stated, the periods of
the eruption of  the  permanent  teeth,
like those  of the temporary,  are very
variable. The cuspidati  often appear
before  the second  bicuspides, and, in
some  cases, the dentes sapientiae not
until the thirtieth or even fortieth year,
 and, sometimes, they never show them-
selves.   The author is acquainted with
 a gentleman who did not  shed his left
 superior cuspidatus until he was  twen-
ty.  A few months  after, the permanent
 cuspidatus  made its appearance.   In
 fact, he has known the temporary cus-
pidati to remain  until the  fortieth year
in several  instances, but Avhen shed at
 this late age they  are  rarely replaced.
 In the  General Archives of Medicine, for
June, 1840, the case  of a woman is re-
 corded, Avho, at the age of forty-three,
 erupted four permanent incisores, which
 came out behind the corresponding tem-
porary teeth—these, up to this period,
 not having  been shed.  Four molares
 made their appearance a year  later, and
 M. Desirabode says, he has met Avith
similar cases.  Like examples are men-
tioned by other writers.
  Maury fixes the period for the erup-
tion of the four first molares at from six
to eight years, and  M. Desirabode at
from six to seven.  Both of these  au-
thors, too,  place  the  cuspidati,  in  the
order of the eruption of the teeth, before
the second bicuspides.
  The irritation consequent  upon  the
eruption  of the  permanent  teeth, is
usually very shght, and Avith the  excep-
tion of the dentes sapientiae, seldom oc-
casions much inconvenience.  This is
owing to the fact, that when second den-
tition commences, the system has  ac-
quired so much vigor and strength, that
it is not easily affected by slight morbid
impressions, and  that  the  gums offer,
comparatively, little resistance  to  the
exit of the teeth, for when the tempora-
ries drop out, the others are generally so
far advanced as almost immediately to
protrude.   And  even when this is not
the case, the cicatrix that forms over the
permanent tooth is usually of so spongy
a texture, that it  readily yields to the
action of the absorbents.  The process,
too, is more gradual, from six to eight
years being required for its completion,
while the dentition  of the first teeth is
accomplished in less than half that time.
   During the progress of the temporary
as well as  the permanent teeth, great
changes are going on  in the maxillary
bones, which it will be proper,  in  this
connection, to notice.

     Accretion of Maxillary Bones.
   The increase of the maxillary bones
during the development and growth of
the  teeth  is  thus  described by  Mr.
Thomas Bell: "In the first  place, the
relative proportions between the maxil-
lary  bones and  the  teeth  vary con-
siderably,  at  different  periods  of  this
growth, without a knowledge of which,
it would be impossible to comprehend in
what  manner the former  become  ulti-
mately accommodated to the difference
in size between  the  permanent  and 
DEN
200
DEN
adult sets.  In the  second place,  the
form of the jaAVS  themselves,  also,  un-
dergoes a great alteration during the ad-
vance of the permanent  teeth, to afford
room for the three molares, which  are
added to the number of the former set.
The jaws of a child, anterior to the as-
cending plate  in  the lower, and to  the
tubercle  in the upper,  are semi-circu-
lar, whilst those of the  adult  are very
elliptical;  and  as the anterior part of the
latter, as far back as those teeth which
have succeeded the temporary, includ-
ing the incisores, cuspidati and bicus-
pides, is of nearly the same form and
size as it  had  been in childhood, it  fol-
lows, that  the elongation must  have
principally taken place betAveen the sit-
uation of  the second bicuspides and the
ascending  plate in  the  lower jaAv, and
betAveen the same teeth and the tubercle
in the upper: in other words, that the
additional length of the maxillary bones
is formed for the reception, and, conse-
quently, in the situation of the additional
teeth—the permanent molares, that is to
say, posterior  to  the temporary teeth.
The progress  of these changes is noAV
to be described.   At the earliest period
at which mention has been made of the
existence of the dental  rudiments, they
are  found to  be  arranged with perfect
regularity within the jaws; but as ossifi-
cation advances upon them faster than
the jaws expand,  they gradually  be-
come  crowded, and the incisores  are
placed almost in contact with the molares,
in consequence of the  cuspidati  being
thrust,  as it  were, out of their place.
The jaw, however, continues to enlarge,
and, at length, allows of the temporary
teeth being regularly placed in the gum.
But as the permanent  teeth advance in
their formation,  the  proportions  are
again altered, and these are crowded to
a still greater degree than the former,
and continue  to be  so  to a certain ex-
tent during almost the whole period of
their growth. Viewing them in  this
state alone, it would,  indeed, be  diffi-
 cult to imagine  by what means they
could ever  become  regularly arranged.
It Avas the opinion of Hunter, in which
he was followed  by Fox, that the in-
creased size of the permanent incisores,
when compared with the temporary, is
exactly counterbalanced by the smaller
size of the  bicuspides, compared  with
the temporary molares Avhich they suc-
ceed; and  the  figures given  by  both
these authors,  purporting to exhibit a
comparative view of the  lower jaw, in
different stages  of its growth, is so con-
structed as  to favor this opinion to the
utmost.  It is, howeArer impossible, up-
on the grounds  taken  by these authors,
to reduce this question to any thing like
mathematical accuracy; for, as Dr. Blake
very justly observes, the arch of a jaw of
a child of a year old may  even exceed
the arch of an  adult.  It  is,  therefore,
obvious, that no comparison instituted
between the jaws of different individu-
als, can be at all conclusive.   The only
way in which the  fact can  be ascer-
tained,  is by making observations on
the same person at  different ages, and
comparing  the arch of the jaw at seven
years  of age, with  the  same jaw at
twelve or fourteen.   This we have re-
peatedly done,  and  have no  hesitation
in  saying, that  the ten anterior perma-
nent  teeth  occupy  a somewhat larger
arch  than  the  temporary ones which
preceded them had done, and, conse-
quently, that the view taken  by Hun-
ter and Fox, is incorrect, though not to
the extent which Dr. Blake and M. De-
labarre have supposed. As is often the
case, the medium between the two con-
flicting statements would appear  to be
nearest the truth.  When the perma-
nent  incisores, therefore, have  made
their appearance,  were  the  cuspidati
immediately to succeed them, it would
be impossible that they should ever oc-
cupy their  regular situation in the arch,
because there is not room for them be-
tween the incisores and the temporary
molares: but as at least one of the lat-
eral teeth is shed, before  the cuspidati
comes through the gum,  and as the bi- 
DEN
201
DEN
cuspides  occupy less room than  their
predecessors, the necessary accommo-
dation is, by these two circumstances,
ultimately produced in every well pro-
portioned jaw."
  It sometimes happens that the jaws
in their accretion are badly developed,
and have a faulty configuration.   This
may occur with one or both jaws.  The
alveolar arch is sometimes too narrow,
having a compressed  appearance, and
projecting so far  forward as to prevent
the upper lip  from covering the front
teeth, and thus imparting to the indi-
vidual an exceedingly disagreeable ap-
pearance.   In cases of this sort,  the
roof of the mouth, instead of present-
ing an oval arch, forms an irregular tri-
angle. At  other times the alveolar arch
is too wide, causing the teeth to  be
separated from each other, and the roof
of the mouth to present a flattened ap-
pearance.
  Similar defects are met with in the
configuration  of  the lower jaw.   Its
sides may be too close together, causing
the inferior front teeth to project and to
cross and strike on the outside of the
upper incisores, or it may describe too
large a circle.
  These defects are regarded as hered-
itary, and are more pecuhar to some
nations than  others.   The tendency to
them is observable in early childhood,
and even in infancy. Many  suppose
they are determined  by a rickety diath-
esis of  the general system, but  this
opinion has been proven to be incorrect
by the fact, that those affected with this
disease generally have good palates and
Avell developed jaws.  So far, indeed,
from  its  having any agency  in  their
production, rickets is thought by some
medical writers to be produced by den-
tition, assigning as a reason for this be-
lief, its frequent occurrence  at the pe-
riod of life, Avhen this process is going
on; but this opinion is, doubtless, as in-
correct as is the other and opposite one.
The cause  of rickets is involved  in
as much obscurity as  is that of the pe-
culiarities now under consideration, in
the formation of the jaws.
   There is a species of deformity in the
upper jaw, the cause of which is equal-
ly difficult of explanation, characterized
by one  or more divisions of the upper
hp, alveolar ridge and palatine  arch,
and necessarily accompanied by an ir-
regularity in  the arrangement of the
teeth.   This deformity is always con-
genital, and oftentimes exceedingly dif-
ficult to remedy.
  Any  infringement of  the laws of
growth, or disturbance of the functional
operations of any  of the organs of the
face or head, may determine an  im-
proper development of the jaws  and a
bad arrangement of the teeth;  and  on
the other hand, a perfect, and healthful
performance of the several functions of
all the parts concerned in the formation
and growth of this portion of the or-
ganism, will secure a natural develop-
ment and configuration of the maxillary
bones.
   Dentition, Second, Method of Di-
recting.  As it regards  the  beauty,
health and durabiltty of the teeth, there
is nothing more to be dreaded, and at
the same time more easily prevented,
than  irregularity in their arrangement.
In proportion, too, to the  deviation of
these organs from their proper position
in the alveolar arch, are the features of
the face and the expression  of the coun-
tenance injured.   It also increases the
susceptibility of the gums and alveolo-
dental membranes to morbid impres-
sions.
   It is, therefore, important that  the
mouth, during the  dentition  of these
teeth, should be properly cared for; and
so thoroughly convinced is the author
of this, that he does not hesitate to say,
that if  timely  precaution   Avas used,
there would not be one decayed  tooth
where now there are a dozen.
  Much harm, it is true, may be done by
improper meddling with the teeth during
this period, but this, so far from inducing
a total neglect, should only make those 
DEN
202
DEN
 having the care of children, more care-
 ful to secure the services of scientific,
 accomplished practitioners.
   For the judicious  management  of
 second dentition, much judgment and
 a  correct  knowledge  of  the periods
 of the appearance of the several classes
 of teeth, are required.  All  unneces-
 sary  interference  with these  organs
 at this early  period of life should cer-
 tainly be avoided, as it will only tend
 to mar the  perfection at which nature
 ever aims.   The legitimate duty of the
 physician being, as  Mr. Bell correctly
 observes, "the regulation of the natural
 functions when deranged," he should
 never anticipate the removal, by nature,
 of the temporary teeth, unless their ex-
 traction be called for by some very ur-
 gent necessity.
   During the dentition of the teeth of
 replacement, the mouth should be fre-
 quently examined from the  time  the
 shedding of  the deciduous teeth com-
 mences until the second set is com-
 pleted ; and  when the growth of the
 permanent teeth so far outstrips the de-
 struction of the roots of the temporary,
 that they are caused to take an improper
 direction, the primitive teeth, that have
 occasioned  the  obstruction, should  be
 immediately removed.   In the dentition
 of the upper front teeth  this  should
 never be  neglected;  for,  when they
 come out behind the temporaries, as in
 such cases they most frequently  do,
 and are permitted to advance  so far as
 to fall on the  inside of the lower in-
 cisores, a permanent obstacle is offered
 to their subsequent proper  adjustment.
  When a wrong  direction has been
thus given to the growth of the lower
front teeth,  they are rarely prevented
from  acquiring  their  proper  arrange-
ment by an obstruction such as that last
 noticed.  They should not, however, on
this  account, be allowed to occupy a
false position too long, for the  evil will
be  found  much easier of correction
while recent, than after it has continued
 for a considerable length of time.  The
irregularity should, therefore, be imme-
diately removed.
  The permanent  central incisores of
the upper jaAV, are much larger than
those of the temporaries of the same
class. It might, therefore, be supposed,
that the aperture formed by the removal
of the one, would not be sufficient for
the admission of the other, without an
increase in the size  of this  part of the
maxillary arch.  It should, however, be
recollected that, by  the time these teeth
usually  emerge from the  gums, the
crowns   of  the temporary  lateral in-
cisores are  so  much loosened by the
wasting of their roots, that they yield
sufficiently to the pressure of  the new
teeth, to  admit of  their taking their
proper position within the dental circle.
When this, however, does not happen,
the temporary  laterals  should be ex-
tracted.
  Under similar circumstances, a sim-
ilar course should be pursued  Avith the
permanent lateral incisores and the tem-
porary cuspidati,  and with the perma-
nent cuspidati and the first bicuspides.
  The bicuspides being  situated be-
tween the fangs of the temporary mo-
lares are  seldom caused to take an im-
proper direction in their growth.  Nei-
ther are  they  often prevented  from
coming  out in their proper places by
want  of room.
  In the management of  the dentition
of the adult teeth, much will depend on
the experience and judgment of the
practitioner.  If he  be properly inform-
ed upon the subject, and gives to it the
necessary care and attention, the mouth
will,  in  most instances,  be furnished
with a healthy, well arranged, and beau-
tiful set of teeth.  At this  time, "an op-
portunity," says Mr. Fox, "presents it-
self for effecting this desirable object,"
(the prevention of  irregularity,) "but
every thing  depends upon a correct
knowledge of the time when a tooth re-
quires to be extracted, and also of the
particular tooth, for often more injury
is occasioned by the removal of a tooth 
DEN
203
DEN
too early,  than if it be left a little too
long; because a new tooth, which has
too much room long before it is requir-
ed, will sometimes take a direction more
difficult to alter, than a slight irregular-
ity occasioned by an obstruction of short
duration."
   Mr. Bell objects to the  extraction of
the temporary  teeth, especially in the
lower jaw,  to make room for the per-
manent ones, on the ground  that the
practice is harsh and unnatural—that it
often gives rise to a contraction of the
maxillary arch, and that in consequence
of the peduncular connection that exists
between the necks of the  temporary
teeth and the sacs  that  surround the
croAvns of the permanent ones, it inter-
feres with the uniform deposition of the
enamel.
   These objections  are certainly very
forcible, and should deter  every dentist
from adopting the practice, except as a
dernier resort—as the least of two evils.
But when the temporary teeth, by re-
maining too long are likely to effect the
arrangement, and,  consequently,  the
health  of  the permanent teeth, they
should be extracted; because, in that
 case, their  presence is an evil greater
 than any that would be  occasioned by
 their removal.   This  last  objection,
 however, can only  apply to the extrac-
 tion of the temporary teeth before the
 formation of the enamel of  the perma-
 nent.   As a general rule they should be
 suffered to remain as long as they are
 not an injury to  the permanent teeth
 and their contiguous parts.
   When the permanent teeth are much
 crowded,  the lateral pressure is  fre-
 quently so  great as to fracture the en-
 amel.  If this cannot be avoided, in any
 other way, one of  the permanent teeth
 on each side should be extracted; for it
 is better to sacrifice two than perma-
 nently to endanger the  health  of the
 whole.
   M. Delabarre,  in cases where the
 crowding is not very great, recommends
 the passing of a file between the teeth;
as does also  Mr. Bell, when only the
space that is usually occupied by half
of a tooth, is required.
   Notwithstanding the deservedly high
authority  of these two gentlemen, my
own experience compels me to  disap-
prove the practice. The apertures, thus
formed by the file, soon close, but not so
perfectly as to  prevent small particles
of food and other extraneous matters
from getting between the  teeth, where
they  are  retained  until  they become
putrid, vitiating the secretions  of  the
mouth and ultimately causing the  de-
cay of the organs.
   The file, therefore, should never be
used with a view to remedy an irregu-
larity; the extraction of two teeth, one
on each side of the jaw, however small
the space  required to be gained may be,
is far preferable.  The second bicuspi-
des, ceteris paribus, should always be
removed rather than the first, but some-
times, the extraction of the first becomes
necessary.   The  extraction of these,
however, should never  be  determined
on, when the evil can be corrected by
the removal of the others.
   By the removal of two teeth, ample
room will be gained for the develop-
ment and regular arrangement of all the
remaining organs, and the  injury that
 usually result from a crowded  state of
 the teeth prevented.
   On the fifing of teeth, to prevent ir-
 regularity,  Dr.  Fitch judiciously re-
 marks :   "I consider the expediency of
 fifing or not filing the teeth, to be a sub-
ject of serious  deliberation  on  the  part
 of the dental practitioner, and I never,
 especially in  young persons,  perform
 the operation,  unless obliged to  do so,
 to cure actual disease.
   "I was greatly surprised, in the late
 work of Mr. Bell,  to see directions  to
 file slightly irregular and crooked teeth,
 so as to gain about one  half a  tooth  of
 room."
   Nature, when  permitted to proceed
 Avithout interruption, is able to perform
 all her operations in a perfect and har- 
DEN
204
DEN
 monious manner.   But the functional
 operations of all the parts of the body
 are liable to be disturbed from an almost
 innumerable  number  and  variety of
 causes, and an impairment of one organ
 oftentimes gives rise to derangement of
 the whole organism; and for the  relief
 of which,  the interposition of art not
 unfrequently becomes necessary, and it
 is fortunate for the  well being of man,
 that it can, in so many instances, be ap-
 phed with success.
   Dentition,  Third.    That nature
 does sometimes make an  effort to pro-
 duce a third set of teeth, is a fact, which,
 however much it has hitherto been dis-
 puted, is now so well estabhshed, that
 no room is left for cavil or doubt.
   The following interesting particulars
 are taken from  Good's  Study of Medi-
 cine :
   "We  sometimes, though rarely, meet
 with playful attempts on the part of na-
 ture, to  re-produce   teeth at a very late
 period of hfe, and after the permanent
 teeth have been lost by accident, or by
 natural decay.
   "This most  commonly  takes  place
 between the sixty-third and eighty-first
 year, or  the interval which fills up the
 two grand chmacteric years of the Greek
 physiologists; at which period the con-
 stitution  appears occasionaUy to make
 an effort to repair other defects than lost
 teeth.    *     *    *     *    *
   "For the most part, the teeth, in this
 case,  shoot  forth  irregularly, few in
 number,  and without proper fangs; and
 even where fangs are produced, without
 a reneAval of sockets. Hence, they are
 often loose, and  frequently more injuri-
 ous than useful, by  interfering with the
 uniform  fine  of indurated and callous
 gums, which, for many years perhaps,
 had been employed  as a substitute for
the teeth. A case of this kind is related
 by  Dr. Bisset,  of Knayton, in which
the patient, a female in her ninety-eight
year, cut twelve molar teeth, mostly in
the lower jaw, four of which were
thrown out soon afterwards, while the
 rest, at the time of examination, were
 found more or less loose.
   "In one instance, though never more
 than one, Mr. Hunter witnessed the re-
 production of a complete set in both
 jaws, apparently with a renewal of their
 sockets.  'From which  circumstance,'
 says he,  'another that sometimes hap-
 pens to Avomen at this age, it would ap-
 pear that there  is some effort  in nature
 to renew  the body at that time.'
   "The author of this work once attend-
 ed a lady in the country, who cut seve-
 ral stragghng teeth at the age of seventy-
 four; and, at the same  time, recovered
 such an acuteness of vision, as to throw
 away her spectacles, which  she had
 made use of for more than twenty years,
 and to be able  to read with  ease  the
 smallest print of the newspapers.   In
 another case, that occurred to him, a
 lady of seventy-six, mother of the late
 Henry  Hughes  Eryn,  printer of the
journals of the House of Commons, cut
 two molares, and at the same time com-
 pletely recovered her hearing, after hav-
 ing for some  years been so deaf as to be
 obhged  to feel the clapper of a small
 hand-bell, Avhich was always kept by
 her, in order to determine whether it
 rung or not.
  "The German Ephemerides contain
 numerous examples of the  same kind;
 in some of which, teeth were produced
 at the advanced age of ninety, a hun-
dred, and even a hundred and twenty
years.  One  of the most singular  in-
stances on record, is that given by Dr.
Slade, Avhich occurred  to  his  father;
who, at the age of seventy-five, re-pro-
duced an incisor, lost twenty-five years
before, so that, at eighty, he had, hereby,
a perfect row of teeth in both jaws.  At
eighty-tAvo, they all dropped out succes-
sively ; two years afterwards, they were
all successively renewed,  so  that,  at
eighty-five, he had at once an entire set.
His  hair, at  the same  time,  changed
from a white to a dark  hue;  and  his
constitution  seemed, in  some  degree,
more healthy and  vigorous.  He died 
               DEN                2(

suddenly, at the age of ninety or a hun-
dred.
  "Sometimes, these teeth are produced
with wonderful rapidity; but,  in such
cases,  with very great pain, from the
callosity  of the gums,  through which
they have  to  force themselves.  The
Edinburg Medical Commentaries sup-
ply us with an instance of this kind.
The individual was  in his sixty-first
year, and altogether toothless.  At this
time, his  gums and jaw-bones  became
painful, and the pain was at length ex-
cruciating.   But,  within  the space  of
twenty-one days from  its commence-
ment, both jaws were furnished with a
new set of teeth, complete in number."
  A physician of this city informed the
author, about twelve months since, that
a case of third dentition had come under
his own observation.  The subject of it
was a female, who, at the age of sixty,
erupted an entire set,  and distinctly re-
collected  the periods at which  the pre-
ceding sets were cut.
  The following extract of a letter from
Dr. J. C.  McCabe describes  another
very interesting case:
  "I have just seen," says  Dr. M., "a
case of third dentition.   The subject of
this 'playful  freak of  nature,' as  Dr.
Good styles it,  is a gentleman  residing
in the neighborhood of Coleman's Mill,
Caroline  county, Virginia.  He is now
in his  seventy-eighth year, and, as he
playfully remarked, 'is just cutting  his
teeth.'  There  are eleven  out, five in
the upper, and six in the  lower jaw.
Those  in the upper jaw, are two central
incisores, one  lateral, and two bicuspi-
des, on the right  side.  Those  in the
lower, are the  four incisores, one cus-
pidatus,  and one molaris.  Their  ap-
pearance is that of bone, extremely
rough, without any coating of enamel,
and of a  dingy  brown color."
  Several examples somewhat like the
foregoing,  have come under our own
observation.  The subject of the first,
was a shoemaker, Mr. M. of Baltimore,
who erupted a lateral incisor and cuspi-
     18
                DEN

datus at the age of thirty. Two years be-
fore this time, he had been badly salivat-
ed, and, in consequence, lost four up-
per incisores, and one cuspidatus.  The
alveoli of these teeth were caused to ex-
foliate, and, at the time we first saw him,
were  entirely detached  from the jaw,
and  barely  retained in  the mouth by
their adhesion to the gums.   On remov-
ing them,'we found two white bony pro-
tuberances,  which,  on  examination,
proved to be the crowns of an incisor
and a  cuspidatus.  They were perfectly
formed, and though they  are shorter
than the other teeth, yet up to the pres-
ent time, they have remained very firm
in the jaw.  The teeth, that he had lost
by salivation, were preserved,  and are
now in our possession.  They are large,
and have all the characteristics of those
of second dentition.
  The subject of one of the other cases,
was a lady, residing near  Fredericks-
burg,  Virginia,  who erupted four  right
central incisores of the upper jaw, suc-
cessively.  One of her temporary teeth,
in the first instance, had been permitted
to remain too long in the mouth, and a
permanent  central  incisor, in conse-
quence, came out before the dental arch.
To remedy  this deformity, the decidu-
ous  incisor  was,   after  some delay,
removed; and,  about two  years  after,
the permanent tooth, not having fallen
back  into its proper place, was also ex-
tracted.   Another  two  years having
elapsed, another tooth came out in the
same place, and in the  same manner;
and,  for similar reasons, was also re-
moved.   To the astonishment of the
lady  and  her friends, a fourth incisor,
occupying the same position as the pre-
ceding ones had, made its appearance
two years and a half after the extrac-
tion of the last named tooth. When it
had been  out about eighteen  months,
the author was consulted by the  lady,
who wished him, if possible, to adjust
it.  Finding that it could not be brought
within the dental circle, he advised her
to have it extracted, and  an artificial
)5 
1
DEN
206
DEN
tooth inserted in its place.  To  this she
readily consented.
  The author only saw one of the teeth
that had been previously extracted; this
was well developed, and he was inform-
ed that the others were equally perfect.
All the circumstances, connected with
these successive  dentitions, were dis-
tinctly recollected both by the lady  and
by her friends.
  Dr. W. H. Dwinelle, in the second
number of the eighth volume  of the
American Journal and Library of Dental
Science, gives the history of a  case  of
four successive  dentitions  of the me-
dial or central incisores, and other exam-
ples might be adduced, but  the fore-
going will suffice.
  No attempt, that the writer  is aware
of, has ever been made to  explain the
manner of the formation of these anom-
alous  productions.   The rudiments  of
the teeth  of first and second dentition,
 are the product of mucous membrane,
while  those of  third dentition, would
 seem to have their origin in the perios-
 tial tissue, if not from the bone itself.
   In obedience to what law of develop-
 mental anatomy are they formed'?  Cer-
 tainly, to  none primitively impressed
 upon the animal economy, for they have
 never been known to appear while the
 secondary teeth remain in the jaws.   If
 the establishment of  the  law which
 governs the development of a part, de-
 pends upon a  certain condition of other
 contiguous parts, it is possible, that the
 following may furnish a correct expla-
 nation of the phenomenon.   Certain
 parts, in  certain states or conditions, and
 in particular locations, perform functions
 peculiar  to the latter.  In other words,
 the condition and location of a part,
 determines  the function   or  functions
 which it  performs.   For   example,
 when the mucous membrane along the
 course of the alveolar border begins  to
 assume a duphcated or grooved appear-
 ance, which it does  at about the sixth
 week of intra-uterine  existence, dental
 papillae shoot up from it, and when, by a
similar duplication of this same tissue,
behind the sacs of the temporary teeth,
forming what Mr. Goodsir styles "cavi-
ties of reserve," the papillae of the per-
manent teeth, one from  the bottom or
distal extremity of each duplication, be-
gins to be developed. Hence, it would
seem, that this particular state or condi-
tion of this tissue, and in these particu-
lar locations, is necessary to  determine
the development of teeth germs.  This
arrangement or  condition of mucous
membrane, in these particular locations,
which always results from the develop-
ment of the fetus, may be sometimes
produced by accidental causes, after all
the organs of the  body have  obtain-
ed their full size, or at any time during
life;  and, when it does occur, it  is not
unreasonable to  suppose that a new
tooth papilla should be  formed.  Pro-
ceeding still farther, the development of
a dental  papilla is the  signal for the
production of a dental follicle, which ul-
timately becomes a sac, and then  an or-
gan to supply the tooth,  now considera-
bly advanced in the process of formation,
with a covering of enamel.   But  as the
 maxillary bone has previously attained
 its full size, it rarely, if ever, happens
 that alveoli are formed for these  ac-
 cidental productions, and, consequendy,
 they seldom have roots, or if they  do,
 they are  very  short and blunt.  They
 are usually connected to the periosteum
 of the alveolar border, and this union is
 sometimes so close and intimate, that
 very considerable force is necessary for
 their removal, or, at least, so far as our
 own observations go upon the subject,
 and we have had occasion to extract sev-
 eral in the course of our practice. As a
 general rule, however, they loosen in
 the course of a feAV years and drop out.
    But it may be asked, how are such ac-
 cidental  duplications of the mucous
 membrane formed?  This is a question,
 we admit, which it may not be  easy to
 answer  satisfactorily,  but  we  do not
 think it at all improbable, that they oc-
 cur during the curative process that fol- 
DEN
207
DEN
lows the removal of one or more teeth.
The granulated walls of the gums sur-
rounding an alveolus from which a tooth
has been extracted, may become cover-
ed with this tissue before the socket is
filled with a deposit of new bone, or, at
any rate, of the surfaces of the duplicat-
ed membrane near the bone, and when-
ever such arrangement or  condition of
this tissue does take place, upon the al-
veolar border, and that it may, occassion-
ally, we think there can be no question,
it is probable  that a new tooth papilla
is produced, which, in the  progress of
its development, induces the formation
of the various  appendages necessary to
the production of a perfect tooth.
  This, in our opinion, is the only way
that these fortuitous productions can be
accounted for  in accordance with true
physiological principles.  It seems im-
possible to explain the manner of their
formation in any other way. All must
admit that the presence of mucous mem-
brane is necessary  to originate them,
and we cannot conceive of any other
way by which its presence  beneath the
general surface of the gums can be ac-
counted for;  but, if we admit this ex-
planation to be correct, the  question is
at once solved.  We believe it is also
owing  to the accidental occurrence of a
certain  arrangement or condition of the
mucous membrane  concerned  in the
production of the permanent teeth, con-
sisting, most likely, of the formation of
one or  more "cavities of reserve" than
is called for by the  teeth of this  denti-
tion, that the development of supernu-
merary teeth are attributable.
  The operations of nature, it is  true,
are so  secretly carried on, that we can-
not see the precise modus  operandi by
which they are effected, yet in the de-
velopment  of  the various  organs and
structures  of the body, we may see
them  in the  various  stages of  their
growth, as well as what precedes their
arrival to  these various stages in the
progress of their formation, and upon
which their accretion would seem to be >
 dependent.   The periods for the arrival
 of these stages of development, though
 somewhat irregular, occur for the most
 part, in normal conditions of the body,
 at certain fixed epochs.  Thus, the pa-
 pilla of the  first temporary  molar may
 usually be seen between the sixth  and
 seventh weeks of intra-uterine existence,
 but  previously  to  this time a  slight
 groove or depression is observable in
 the mucous membrane of the part from
 whence it has its origin.  The same is
 true with regard to  the papillae  of all
 the other teeth, though the time for  the
 commencement  of their formation  oc-
 curs  at later periods.   The peculiar
 change which takes place in the arrange-
 ment of the mucous tissue here, as well
 as the periods at  which they occur, is
 doubtless  determined by certain stages
 in the development  of other parts, and
 these very likely may determine the es-
 tablished number which the  teeth of
 both dentitions have.
   If.the foregoing views which we have
 advanced be  correct, these fortuitous
 productions are not the result of a mere
 freak of nature, as they are sometimes
 facetiously styled.  They are the result
 of the operation  of an established law
 of the  economy; and  although, after
 the completion of the teeth of second
 dentition, its  course  is suspended,  the
 occurrence of a similar arrangement or
 condition of the mucous tissue in  the
 parts in question, will again put it in
 operation.
   DENTIUM  CAVERNS.   The
 sockets of the teeth.
   DENTON'OMY.  Dentonomia; from
 dens, a tooth, and ovo/m, a name.  The
 arrangement  of  the  teeth into classes.
 Also, the classification of the  teeth  ac-
 cording to their physiognomical charac-
 ters, and their pathological and physio-
 logical indications.   See Teeth, charac-
 teristics of.
   DENTIUM CORTEX.   The en-
 amel of the teeth.
   DENTIUM DOLOR.  See Odon-
talgia. 
1
               DEN               2C

  DENTIUM SCALPTURA.  Lanc-
ing the gum over a tooth.  See Den-
tition, morbid.
  DENTOIDEUS.  Odontoid; tooth-
like.
  DENTS BARREES.  See Barred
Teeth.
  Dents  Bicuspidees.  The  bicuspid
teeth.
  Dents Conoides.  The canine teeth.
  Dents de Lait.  The milk, or tem-
porary teeth.
  Dents  Macheli'eres.  The molar
teeth.
  Dents Molares.  The molar teeth.
  Dents Multicuspidees.  The large
molar teeth.
  DENTURE.   A  complete  set  of
teeth.  The whole assemblage of teeth
in both jaws.
  DENUDATION.  Denudatio; from
den,udaj-e,tomake bare. The laying bare,
or deprivation of a part of its covering,
or envelop.   In  Surgical Pathology, it
is usually applied to bones deprived of
their periosteum.  In Dental Pathology,
to the  teeth when deprived of their en-
amel, or when the roots are  exposed by
the recession of  the  gums and the de-
struction of their sockets.
   DENUDING OF THE TEETH.
An affection which consists in the grad-
ual destruction of the enamel of the ante-
rior or labial surfaces of the incisores, cus-
pidati, and sometimes of the bicuspides;
the molares are rarely affected by it.  It
generally forms  a continuous horizontal
groove, commencing with  the  central
incisores, and afterwards extending to
the laterals, the  cuspidati and bicuspi-
des, as smooth and regular as if it were
made with an oval  file, though some-
times it spreads  over nearly the whole
of the anterior surface, completely  de-
nuding this part of the organs of enamel.
After  having removed the enamel, it at-
tacks  the subjacent bone,  the  groove
becoming gradually deeper  and deeper,
until the  pulp cavities of the teeth are
exposed.  The  color of the enamel is
rarely changed,  but the bone,  as soon
8               DEN

as it becomes exposed, assumes, first, a
light, and afterwards a dark broAvn ap-
pearance—the surface of the groove the
whole time remains  perfectly hard and
smooth.   This most curious and singu-
lar affection  usually commences at a
single point upon each of the central  in-
cisores, and proceeds horizontally back-
wards, but at other times it attacks seve-
ral points almost simultaneously, but
gradually the affected  parts approach
and unite, giving to the enamel the ap-
pearance  of  having been scooped out
with a broad, round, or square  pointed
instrument.
   With regard to the cause of this sin-
gular affection, it has never been  satis-
factorily explained.  Mr. Hunter, who
was the  first to  describe it,  calls  it
"decay by denudation," and is of the
opinion, inasmuch as it attacks certain
teeth rather than others, that it  is a dis-
ease inherent in  the tooth itself, and not
dependent on  circumstances which oc-
cur in after life.  Mr. Fox frankly ac-
knowledges his  inability to assign any
cause  for the affection, conjecturing,
however, that it  may be dependent upon
some solvent quality of the sahva. Mr.
Thomas Bell also confesses his inability
to  explain it, but from the  horizontal
direction  which it  takes, thinks it may
be connected with the manner in which
this substance is deposited,  during its
formation; "for," says he, "it will be
recollected,  that it first covers- the apex
of the tooth, and gradually invests  the
crown by successive circular depositions;
it is, therefore, not improbable, that from
some  temporary Cause, acting during
its deposition, certain  circular  portions
may be more liable to mechanical abra-
sion, or other injury, than the rest."
   This explanation,  however,  is  far
from being  satisfactory; for,  if  as he
supposes, certain circular portions of en-
amel are  more imperfectly formed than
others, and  thus  rendered  more  lia-
ble to be attacked  by the  disease, it
would not be exclusively confined to the
 labial surfaces of the organs, but  would 
DEP
209
DEP
extend  entirely  around them,  and as
soon as these imperfectly formed circles
were destroyed, its ravages would cease.
   Other Avriters have  thought that  it
might be caused by the friction of the
lips, or of a tooth brush, but these hy-
potheses are too palpably  absurd to re-
quire refutation.
   The conjecture of Mr. Fox that the
affection may be produced by some sol-
vent quality of the fluids of the mouth,
is unquestionably correct, and we think
it is clearly ascribable to an acidulated
condition of the  mucous  secretions of
this  cavity.   The  other  teeth  being
more constantly bathed in  the sahva
than the anterior surfaces  of the  inci-
sores, cuspidati and bicuspides, the mu-
cous fluids of the mouth are either wash-
ed from them, or so diluted as to render
them  harmless, but upon  the parts of
the teeth last mentioned, it is often per-
mitted to remain  for days.  That this is
the true cause would seem to be ren-
dered certain by a case which fell under
the observation of Dr. E. Parmly a few
years since, in  which  the  croAvns of
human teeth, used as a dental substitute,
were attacked by this curious affection—
thus proving, most  conclusively, that
the loss of substance was caused by the
action of chemical agents, and if  such
cause is capable  of producing it in one
case, it is in all others.
   In the treatment of this affection, the
most that can  be done, is,  to Aviden the
groove at the bottom, after it has pro-
gressed far enough to require it, and fill
the cavity with gold.  This will arrest
its farther progress.   See Filhng Teeth.
   DEOB'STRUENT.   Deohstruens;
from de, and obstruerc, to obstruct. Me-
dicines  which remove obstructions, as
aperients.  The word has  an indefinite
meaning and is now seldom used.
   DEPILATION. Depdatio; from de,
and pilus, hair.  Loss of hair.
   DEPIL'ATORY.  Thatwhich causes
the loss of the hair, as caustic lime, &c.
   DEPLETION.  Depletio;  from de-1
pho, I unload.  The act of diminishing I
     18*                          to
 the fulness of the vascular system, by
 the abstraction of blood, or by any sys-
 tem of evacuation.
   DEPLETORY.  That which tends
 to deplete,  as blood-letting, emetics and
 cathartics.
   DEPLUMA'TION.   Deplumatio;
 from  deplumis,  without  feathers. A
 disease  of the  eyelids which causes
 the loss of  the eyelashes.
   DEPOSIT.   From depono, to lay
 doAvn.  In Dental Pathology, the pre-
 cipitation of an earthy substance (com-
 monly called tartar) upon the teeth. In
 General Patlwlogy, the accumulation of
 fat in an abnormal position, or morbid
 growths.  The sediment of the urine is
 also called a deposit.
   DEPRAVATION. Depravatio; from
 de, andpravo,  to corrupt.  A depraved
 condition,  or  morbid  change in the
 solids or fluids of the body; also, depra-
 vation of taste or sight.
   DEPRES'SANTS.  That which re-
 duces the vital energy, by diminishing
 the frequency  of the pulse, or the action
 of the heart and arteries.
  DEPRES'SED. Flattened from above
 downwards.
   DEPRES'SION.   Depressio;  from
 deprimere, to press down.  In Anatomy,
 a fossa, holloAV, or excavation. In Sur-
 gery, applied  to fractures  of the  cra-
 nium in which portions of the bone are
 depressed; also, to an operation for cata-
 ract, which consists in the depression of
 the opaque lens from the axis of vision
 into the vitreous humor.   In Dental
 Anatomy,  to the indentations  on the
 grinding surfaces of the molar and bi-
 cuspid teeth.
   DEPRES'SOR.   In Anatomy,  any
 muscle  which depresses  the part on
 which it acts.  In Dental Surgery, an
 instrument employed for confining the
 tongue to the floor of the mouth while
 introducing a filling into a tooth of the
 lower jaw.   See  Tongue-holder.
  Depressor Ale Nasi.  See Depres-
sor Labu Superioris Alaeque Nasi.
  Depressor An'guli Oris.  A mus- 
DER               210                DES
cle of a triangular form, situated beneath
the lower hp.  It arises broad and fleshy
from the base of the lower jaAV at the
side of the chin, and is inserted into the
angle of the mouth.
  Depressor La'bii Inferio'ris.   A
small thin muscle, which  arises from
the side and front of the lower jaw at
its base, and is inserted into the greater
part of the lower hp.
 . Depressor  Labii Superioris.   A
muscle  situated above  the mouth; it
arises from the alveolar processes of the
incisor and cuspid teeth, and is inserted
into the upper hp and side of the ala of
the nose.
  DEPRES'SORIUM. An instrument
used to guard the dura mater when the
skull is cut or sawed through.
  DEPRIMENS AURICULAE.  See
Retrahens Auris.
  DEPURATION.   From depurare,
to purify.  In Pathology, a  process for
purifying the animal economy; also, the
clarification of any thing.
  DEP'URATORY.  Depuratorius.—
That which  purifies the body, or re-
moves from it morbid humors, whether
it be disease, or medicines and diet.
  DERADENITIS. From Ssptj, neck;
afofv, a  gland,  and iris,  signifying in-
flammation. Inflammation of the glands
of the neck.
  DERANGEMENT.  Insanity.
  DERIVATION.  Derivatio;  from
derivo, to drain off.  The drawing away
of any morbid vital action from its
original seat to a less important part, by
exciting irritation,  or inflammation in
it, by the apphcation of some local stim-
ulant.
  DERIVATIVE.  That  which pro-
cures a derivation.  Revulsive medi-
cinal agents.
  DERMA.  The  cutis, or skin.
  DERMAL'GIA.  From Sspfia,  the
skin, and aXyos, pain.   Pain in the skin.
Cutaneous neuralgia.
  DERMATAGRA.  Pellagra.
  DERMATITIS.   Dermatis.   Ery-
sipelatous inflammation.
  DERMATOID. Dermatoides; from
htpfw.,  the  skin, and «8o$, form.  Re-
sembling the skin.  Applied to tissues
which resemble the skin.
  DERMATOL'OGY. Dcrmatologia;
from Stp/jia,  the skin, and Jioyoj, a dis-
course. A treatise on the skin.
  DERMOG'RAPHY. Dernwgraphia;
from dtpua, the skin,  and ypoujuo, I de-
scribe.  A description of the skin.
  DERMOHjE'MIA.   From 6fpfW,
and aiua, blood.  Hyperaemia, or exces-
sive vascularity of  the skin.
  DERMOID.  Dermatoid.
  DERMOLOGY.   Dermatology.
  DERMOT'OMY. Dermotomia; from
Scpfia, the skin, tipvsiv, to cut. The dis-
section of the skin.
  DESCEN'DENS  NONI.  The hy-
poglossal nerves.
  DESCHAMP, (the Younger.) Au-
thor  of a Treatise  on the  Diseases of
the Nasal Fauces and their Sinuses,pub-
hshed at Paris, 1804.
  DESICCATION.  Desiccatio; from
desicco, to dry up.  The  drying up of
any thing.
  DESICCATIVE. Deskcativus; from
deskco, to dry up.  Medicines possessed
of drying  properties,  and which are
used for drying up ulcers.
  DESIRABODE AND SONS. Au-
thors of Complete  Elements of the .Sci-
ence and Art of the Dentist; followed
by an Historical and Chronological No-
tice  of the Works  pubhshed on the
Dental Art, from  the time of Hippo-
crates, &.c, &c, pubhshed at  Paris in
1845.  This is one of the most complete
works  on  the  theory  and practice of
dental surgery, Avhich has ever come
from the French press.  It is published
in two volumes, both making upwards '
of eight hundred pages.  A translation
of it has been published in the Library
part  of the American Journal of Dental
Science.
  DES'MA.  From Stapos, a ligament
or bandage.  A ligament or bandage.
  DESMOGRAPHY. Desmographia;
from fittr/itoj, a ligament, and ypafrj, a de- 
DET
211
DEX
scription.  A description of the liga-
ments.
  DESMOID TISSUE. Ligamentous
tissue. This tissue has a close resemb-
lance to the cellular, and in some places
is continuous with it. It constitutes apo-
neuroses and ligamentous membranes,
and consists of condensed cellular tissue.
  DESMOL'OGY. Desmobgia; from
Stftyws, a ligament, and Xoyos,  a dis-
course.  A treatise on the hgaments.
  DESMOPH'LOGY. Desmophbgia;
from Stafioi, a ligament, and $xoy*o$; in-
flamed. Inflammation of the hgaments.
  DESMORRHEX'IS.  Fromfo^j,
a ligament, and pjjitj, rupture. Rupture
of a hgament.
  DESMOS.  A hgament.
  DESMOT'OMY. Desmotomia; from
fcauo;, a ligament, and ts/jivsiv,  to cut.
Dissection of the hgaments.
  DESPRE.  Author of a Dissertation
on Difficult Dentition, published at Efr,
1720.
   DESPUMATION.   Despumatio;
from despumo, to clarify.  The clarifica-
tion of a fluid by separating from it the
scum and other impurities.
  DESQUAMATION. Desquamatio;
from disquamare, to scale off.  Exfolia-
tion, or the separation of scales, of a
greater or less size, from  the skin.
  DESUDATIO.  From  desudo, to
sweat much.  Profuse  and  excessive
sweating.  Applied, also, to a  miliary
eruption Avith Avhich children are some-
times affected.
  DETENTIA.  Catalepsy.
  DETERGENTS.   From detergere,
to cleanse.  Medicines  which  cleanse
ulcers or foul wounds.
  DETERMINATION.  The afflux
of blood  or other  humors in  a part,
causing congestion.
  Detersive Opiate for the Teeth,
Maury's.   $.—Fine honey, ft ij; cal-
cined alum, g ij; extract of bark, g i;
essential od of peppermint,  g ss; essen-
tial oil of cinnamon, g ss; spirit of amber,
musk rose, 3 ij.   Reduce the honey by
boiling down to one-third; color it with
alcanet;  mix the bark  into it; strain
through a fine sieve, and when nearly
cold, incorporate the alum with it, but
do not add the  essential oils until it is
entirely cold.
  DETONATION.  Explosion.
  Detonating Powder. Fulminating
mercury  and silver,  and other  com-
pounds which  explode  suddenly on
being struck or heated.  They are used
for igniting powder in percussion locks.
  DETRACTOR.   From detraho,  to
draw.  Applied to muscles which draw
the parts  to which they are attached
from some other part.
  DETRITUS. From deterere, to bruise
or wear out.  The inorganic remains of
a disorganized organic texture.
  DETRUSOR URFN.E.  From de-
trudere, to thrust out. The muscular coat
of the bladder, which, by contracting,
causes the expulsion of the urine.
  DEUTEROPATHI'A.  Morbus se-
condarius; from fcvttpos, the second,
and 7ta6oi, disease.   A sympathetic af-
fection, or secondary disease.
  DEUTO.  From Ssvtapoj, second.  A
prefix, denoting two, twice, or double,
as deutoxyd, having two equivalents of
oxygen.  The second oxyd.
  DEVAUT. Author of an Essay on
the Nature and Formation of the Teeth,
published at Paris, 1826.
  DEVEL'OPMENT.  In Physiology,
increase; growth.
  DEVIATION.  Deviatio; from de,
from, and via, the way. Vicious curva-
ture of the spine, or  other bones; a
faulty  direction  or position of one or
more teeth, &c.
  DEXOCARD'IA.    From  6&0i,
right, and xapSia, the heart.   The beat-
ing of  the heart on  the right side, as in
pleurisy and pneumothorax.
  DEXTRINE.  From dexter, right-
handed; so  called from its possessing
the power of reflecting the rays in the
polarization  of light  toward  the right
hand.  A  gummy  substance  obtained
from starch. It  also exists abundantly
in plants. 
DIA
212
DIA
   DI.  A prefix from Sis, twice, used in
 anatomy,  chemistry, &c.   Hence di-
 gastricus, dioxyd, dicldoride, &.c.
   DIA. A  prefix from Sia, through.
 In Composition, extension,  perversion,
 separation.   It was anciently used to
 signify the presence of an ingredient be-
 fore which it was Avritten, as diacydoni-
 um, a medicine containing the quince,
 &,c.
   DIABETES.   From Sia,  through,
 and fiaiva,  I  pass.  A disease attended
 by immoderate secretion of urine, ex-
 cessive thirst, and  gradual emaciation.
 It is divided into three species: 1.  Dia-
 betes insipidiis, characterized by a super-
 abundant discharge of  limpid urine,
 having the usual urinary taste. 2.  Dia-
 betes mellitus, in which  there  is an ex-
 cessive secretion of urine, of a SAveetish
 taste,  and  containing  a considerable
 quantity of saccharine  matter,  and 3.
 Diabetes chylosus, in which there  is a
 copious secretion of urine, of a whitish
 color.
   DIABRO'SIS.   Erosion.
   DIACATHOL'ICON.   Diacatholi-
cum; from  Sia, and xaOoXixos, universal,
 so called from its general usefulness. A
purgative electuary, composed of senna
 leaves, the  pulp of cassia, root of poly-
pody, tamarinds,  rhubarb,  violets, ani-
 seed, sweet  fennel, liquorice and su-
gar.
   DIACAU'SIS. From 8«xxavco, I burn.
 Excessive heat.
   DIACAUS'TIC. Diacausticus. Caus-
 tic by refraction,  as  a  double convex
 lens, or as it is sometimes called, a burn-
 ing glass.
   DIACHALCIT'EOS.   From  Sia,
 and xaxxiti$,  chalcitis or calcothar.  A
 plaster  consisting  of a mixture of oil
 and calcothar.
   DIACHRISIS.   Inunction.
   DIACH'YLON.  DUtchylum; from
 Sia, and xvXos, juice; i. e. composed of
 juices.  Formerly, an emollient plaster
 made of certain juices, but at present
 the term is only applied to the emplas-
 trum plumbi, or lead plaster.
   Diachylon  Cum  Gimmi.   Yellow
diachylon,  Gum diachylon.
   Diachylon Simplex.  The emplas-
trum plumbi.
   DIACINE'MA.  From Sia, and xmw,
I move.   A subluxation.
   DIACLYS'MA, From Sw.xXv(u>, to
wash out.  A gargle; a mouth-wash.
   DIA'COPE. Diacomma. Abscission;
a deep Avound, or cut.
   DIA'CRISES.  From Sia, and xpivu,
I separate.  A  class of diseases charac-
terized by a vitiated state of the secre-
tions.
   DIADERMIATRI'A.   From  foa,
Seppa, the skin,and wn-pfta, healing. The
endermic method  of treating disease.
See Endermic.
   DIADEX'IS.   From SiaStXofiai, I
transfer.   I succeed to.  The  transfor-
mation of one  disease into another of a
different  character and seat.
   DIAD'OSIS. From  SiaBiSafiai, to
distribute. Distribution of nutritive mat-
ter throughout  the  whole body; nutri-
tion ;  the cessation of disease.
   DLE'RESIS.  From Sioiptw, I  di-
vide or separate.  A solution of conti-
nuity, as a wound or ulcer, or as in the
case of a surgical operation, consisting
in the division of some part of the body.
   DLERETICUS.   From 8«up£», I
divide.   Caustic; escharotic.
   DliETA.  Diaztcma; from  Suxitau,
I  nourish.  Diet; aliment.
  DIAGNO'SIS. From Sia, and yivoexu,
I  know.   The  art  of discriminating a
disease by its symptoms, and  one  dis-
ease from another.
   DIAGNOSTIC.   A pathognomic
sign, or symptom, Avhich is characteris-
tic of a disease.
   DIALYSIS.  From SioXva,  to  dis-
solve.  Weakness of the limbs.
   DIAMASTE'MA.  Masticatory.
   DIAMOND. Adamos; from a, priv.
and Sajuaw, I conquer, from its extreme
hardness. The most valuable of precious
stones, and the hardest known substance.
It  was formerly  supposed to possess
valuable  medicinal virtues. 
DIA
213
DIA
  DIAMOTO'SIS.  From potoi} char-
pie, lint.  The introduction of tint into
a wound or ulcer.
  DIANANCAS'MOS.    Dianancas-
mus; from  Sia, and avayxa^a, I force.
The reduction of a dislocated or fractur-
ed limb.
  DIAN'DRIA.   Diandrous;   from
Sis, twice, and avr;p, a man.  A class of
plants with two stamens.
  DIANTHUS CARYOPHYLLUS.
The clove pink.
  DIAPAL'MA.  A plaster composed
of htharge, ohve oil, axunge, water, sul-
phate of zinc  and  white  wax, and
when mixed with a fourth of its weight
of olive oil, it forms the cerate of dia-
pulma.
   DIAPAS'MA.   From  Siariasmv, to
sprinkle.   A medicine reduced to pow-
der and  sprinkled  over the whole, or
some part of the body.
   DIAPEDE'SIS.   From  SiartrjSaa, I
 leap through.  Transudation or escape
 of blood through the coats of the vessels,
 skin, or any membrane.
   DIA'PHANOUS. Diaphanosus; from
 Sia, through, and $aiva, to shine. Trans-
 parent.   In Anatomy, applied to delicate
 serous membranes, as the arachnoid.
   DIAPHORE'SIS.  From  Sia^opta,
 I convey, I dissipate.  A perspiration
 more profuse than natural.
   DIAPHORETIC. Medicines which
 excite perspiration.
   DIAPHRAGM. Diaphragma; Sia-
 typaaoa, to separate by a partition.  The
 midriff.  A thin, almost  circular mus-
 cle, tendinous in the centre, which sep-
 arates the thorax from the abdomen.
   Diaphragma Cerebri.  The  tento-
 rium.
   Diaphragma Narium.  The septum
 narium.
   DIAPHRAGMAL'GIA.   Pain in
 the diaphragm.
   DIAPHRAGMATIC.  Diaphrag-
 maticus.   Belonging to the  diaphragm;
 apphed to several vessels  and  nerves.
   Diaphragmatic Arteries.  Phrenk
 artmes.  The arteries of the diaphragm.
  Diaphragmatic  Hernia.   Protru-
sion of some of the abdominal viscera
through a rupture of the diaphragm.
  Diaphragmatic Nerves. See Phre-
nic Nerves.
  Diaphragmatic  Plex'uses.  There
are two in number; one situated on the
right, and the other on the left side of
the diaphragm.
  Diaphragmatic Ring.  An aperture
through the diaphragm, giving passage
to the vena cava ascendens.
  DIAPHRAGMATi'TIS.   Inflam-
mation of the diaphragm.
  DIAPHTHORA.   From  Sia, and
$6tipsiv, to corrupt.  Corruption of any
part.
  DIAPH'YSIS.  From  Siafva,  I rise
between.  An  interspace.  Any  thing
which separates two bodies.  It is some-
times applied to the middle part of a
long bone, and to the crucial ligaments.
  DIAPYE'MA.  Diapyesis; from Sia,
and rtvov, pus.   Suppuration.
  DIAPYETTC.   Diapyetkus;  from
Siariwifus.,  a suppuration.   Medicines
which promote suppuration.
   DIARHiE'MIA. From Sia, through,
pfw, I flow, and cufta, blood.  Thinness
of the blood from deficiency of the glob-
ules, and as a consequence, transudation
of it through the coats of the vessels.
   DIARRHAGE.  A fracture.
   DIARRHOEA.  From 8ta, through,
 and p£«, I flow.  Purging, looseness of
 the bowels, frequent liquid alvine evac-
 uations, usually attended with  slight
 griping pains,  but ordinarily without
 any fever.  There  are several varieties
 of diarrhoea, as the bilious, serous, mu-
 cous, &c.
   Diarrhoea Alba.  Diarrhoza cozliaca.
 Diarrhoea, with white, milky evacua-
tions.
   Diarrhc3a Cholerica.  A diarrhoea
in  which the  alvine evacuations are
loose, copious and  of a yellow color.
   Diarrhoza Serosa.  A diarrhoea in
which the alvine evacuations are of a
watery or serous character.
   Diarrhoea Verminosa.  A diarrhoea 
DIA
214
DIF
caused by the presence of worms in the
intestines, especially in the rectum.
  DIARTHRO DIAL.   Relating  to
diarthrosis.
  DIARTHRO'SIS.   From  SiapOpoa,
I articulate.   A movable articulation
of bones, in which there are five species;
namely, enerthrosis, arthrodia, gingly-
mus, trochoides and amphiarthrosis.
  DIASCORDIUM.  From Sia, and
oxopSiov, the water germander; so  call-
ed because scordium enters into its com-
position.  An electuary.
  DIASPHYXTS.  The pulse.
  DIASTAS^E'MIA.  From Siaataais,
separation, and aifia, blood.  Disorgan-
ization of the globules of the blood, and
separation of the  fibrin and  albumen
from the coloring matter.
   DIASTASE.  A vegetable principle
having the property of converting starch
into dextrine and grape sugar.   It is the
principal agent in the germination  of
seeds, and is produced when they sprout.
  DIASTASIS.  From 5ia, and lat^i,
to place, separation, distance.   Separa-
tion of bones and cartilages from each
 other, as of those of the cranium in some
cases of hydrocephalus, &c.
   DIASTOLE.   From Siastaxa, I
 send, I dilate, I open.  Dilatation of the
 heart and arteries when the blood enters
 them.  It is immediately followed  by
 contraction, which sends forth the blood,
 and this latter movement is  called sys-
 tok.
   DIASTOLIC.   Relating to diastole,
 as the diastolic action of the heart.
   DIASTOMOTRIS.  From  Siasto-
 poa, I dilate an aperture.  Any dilating
 instrument,  as a speculum  for  the
 mouth, &c.
   DIASTREM'MA.   Distortion,  or
 sprain.
   DIASTROPHE.  Diastremma.
   DIATASIS.  From 5ia*£»/o, I dis-
 tend.   The reduction of a fractured limb,
 by extension and counter extension.
    DIATH'ESIS.  From SiatiOrjui, I dis-
 pose.  Disposition, constitution; predis-
 position to certain diseases.  The  most
common diatheses are  the  scrofulous
scorbutic,  rheumatic, gouty,  cancerous,
calcubus and nervous.
  DIATRITOS.  From 8«*, and t9nu
three.   Diet of three  days.  The plan
pursued by the methodic physicians in
the treatment of disease.
  DIAZOSTER.  From Sia^avvvfu, I
surround.  The twelfth vertebra of the
back, because it corresponds to the gir-
dle.
  DICEPH'ALUS.   From Si, double,
and xityaxri, head.  Having two heads.
  DICERAS RUDE.   An intestinal
worm.
  DICHOPHYTA.  From SiXa, dou-
ble, and $va, I  grow:  That condition
of the  hairs in which they split and
grow forked.
 . DI'CROTUS.  From Sis, twice, and
xpova, I strike.  A pulse which seems
to beat double, or  twice as fast as usual.
  DICTAM'NUS  ALBUS.   White
fraxinella, or bastard dittany.
  Dictamnus Creticus.  See  Origa-
num Dictamnus.
  DIDYMITIS.   Hernia humoralis.
  DIES.   A day.
  Dies Critici.  Critical days, or days
on which it was formerly supposed a
favorable  or unfavorable change Avould
take place in the progress of a disease.
  DIET.  Diozta.  Food, such  as  is
most conducive to health and its preser-
vation.   It was formerly used to denote
the general manner of living, compre-
hending every  thing necessary for the
sustenance of life.
  Diet Drink.   A decoction used for
the purpose of purifying the blood. The
decoction of sarsaparilla and mezereon,
the Lisbon diet drink, is the  most cele-
brated.
  DIETETIC.  Dieteticus; from 8kh-
taa, I nourish.  Belonging to diet.
  DIETETICS.   Dietitica.  Dieting
according to medical rules.
  DIETET'ISTS.    Physicians  who
treat disease only by the application of
dietetic rules.
  DIFFLA'TIO.  Transpiration. 
DIG
215
DIO
  DIFFRACTION.  An   inflexion
which the rays of light undergo in pass-
ing near any opaque body.
  DIFFUSIBLE.   Stimulants which
augment the action  of the vascular and
nervous system, but which are transi-
tory in their effects.
  DIGASTRIC GROOVE. A depres-
sion in the mastoid process from which
the digastric muscle arises.
  DIGASTRICUS.   From Sis, and
yaattjp, a belly.  A muscle with two
bellies, united in the middle by a tendon
which passes through the stylo-hyoid
muscle, and is attached to the  hyoid
bone.   Of the two  bellies,  the one is
posterior, and occupies the fossa at the
end of the mastoid process of the  tem-
poral  bone—the other is anterior, ex-
tending from the os hyoides to the base
of the lower jaw by the side of the sym-
physis.  Its use is  to depress the low-
er jaw, or to raise the os hyoides, or to
move it forwards and backwards, as in
deglutition.
   DIGE'RENTS.   From  digero,  to
digest.  Digestives;  medicines which
promote the secretion of proper pus in
wounds and ulcers.
   DIGESTIBLE.   Capable of  being
digested.
   DIGESTION.  Digestio; from di-
gerc, to dissolve.   In Physiobgy,  the
change which food undergoes on being
taken into the body.  In Chemistry  and
Pliarmacy, an operation which consists
in subjecting substances to the action of
each  other, at a slightly elevated tem-
perature, as a sohd to water, alcohol, or
other menstruum.
   DIGESTIVES.  In Surgery, sub-
stances, which, when applied to a wound
or ulcer, promote suppuration.
   Digestive Tube.  The alimentary
canal.
   DIG'ITAL.   From digitus, a finger.
Belonging to, or resembhng a finger.
   DIGITA'LINE.  Digitalina.   The
active principle of digitalis.
   DIGITA'LIS.   From digitus,  a  fin-
 ger, because its flower resembles  a  fin-
ger.   Digitalis  purpurea.   Foxglove.
The leaves of this plant are powerfully
sedative and diuretic, and requires to be
administered with great caution.
  DIGITATION. Finger-shaped. Ap-
plied to muscles, as the seratus magnus,
Avhich exhibit digitations.
  DIGITATUS.  Digitate; fingered.
  DIGIT'IUM.  Atrophy of the  fin-
gers.
  DIGITUS.   A finger.
  Digitus Annularis.  The annular,
or ring finger.
  Digitus Indicatorius. t The index
finger.
  Digitus Pedis.  A toe.
  DIGNOTIO.   Diagnosis.
  DILATATION.  Dibtatio;  from
dilatare, to enlarge.  Increase  of  bulk
by a separation of some of its molecules.
Increase of the size of a canal or opening.
  DILATOR.   In Anatomy, apphed to
muscles, the office of which is, to dilate
certain parts.  In  Surgery,  an instru-
ment for dilating a natural or  artificial
opening.
   Dilator, Arnott's.  An instrument
for removing strictures of,  and dilating,
the urethra.
   DILL.  Anethum graveolens.
   DILUENTS. Diluentia;  from diluo,
to Avash  away.  Medicines  which in-
crease the fluidity  of the blood,  and
other liquids of the body.
   DIN'ICA. From Stvsa, I turn round.
Medicines which relieve vertigo.
   DINOS.  Vertigo.
   DI'ODON. From Sis, and  oSovs,  a
tooth; two-toothed.  A genus of plec-
tognathic fishe3 with jaws  undivided,
and each having a single and  continu-
ous dental plate.
   DIODONCEPHALUS.  From Sis,
double, oSovs, tooth, and xt^aXri, head.
A monstrosity with  two rows of teeth.
   DIONCO'SIS.  From Sia, and oyxoy,
a tumor.  Tumefaction or plethora.
   DIONYSIS'CUS.  One who has a
bony or horn-like excrescence  near the
temporal or frontal region.
   DIOPTRA.  From Siortto^ai, to see 
               DIP

through.  Dioptron.  A speculum; a
dilator.
  DIOPTRIS'MUS.  The  dilation of
a part or opening with a speculum.
  DIORTHO'SIS.  From &top0pow, to
direct.   The reduction  of a fracture or
dislocation.
  DIOS'MA CRENA'TA.  From&oj,
divine, and oopy,  odor.  Barosma cre-
nata, a South African plant.
  DIOXYD.  A compound of oxygen
with a base, in which there is one atom
of the former, and two of the latter.
  DIPHTHERITIS. Diphtheria; from
Siesta, a skin or  membrane.   Angina
pellicularis.  A name given by M. Bre-
tonneau  to a form of pharyngitis, at-
tended by the formation of false mem-
branes.
  Diphthritis  Trachealis.   Croup.
  DIPHYLLUS.  Two-leaved.
  DIPLASIAS'MUS. Duplicated. Re-
exacerbation of a disease.
  DIP'LOE.   From SiHXoa, I  double.
The cancellated structure which sepa-
rates the two tables of the skull.
  DIPLOGAN'GLIATA. Applied by
Dr.  Grant to  articulated animals,  be-
cause of the increased size of their gan-
glionic knots.
  DIPLOGEN'ESIS.   From  SinXoos,
double,  and ytvtois, generation.   Or-
ganic defect, caused by the union of two
germs.
  DIPLO'MA.  An instrument of wri-
ting conferring some privilege. In Med-
ical affairs, a hcense to practice physic,
or some one or more of its branches;
usually  applied to a document issued
by a chartered college, certifying  that
the title  of doctor  has  been conferred
upon the person who has received it.
In Pharmacy, a vessel with double walls,
as a water-bath.
  DIPLONEU'RANS. Apphed to ver-
tebrate animals, because they have two
nervous systems, the spinal and sympa-
thetic.   Also, by Dr. Grant to an order
of worms.
  DIPLO'PIA.  From Sihxoos, double,
and ojtto^ai, I see.  An affection of the
6               DIS

sight, in which an object makes a dou-
ble impression upon the retina.  Double
vision.
   DIPLOSIS.  Diploe.
   DIPLOSO'MA.   From Sinxoos, dou-
ble,  and aa(na, body. The diplosoma
crenata, is an entozoon, having the ap-
pearance of two worms united, which
has sometimes been known to pass the
urinary bladder.
   DIPROSO'PUS.   From Sis, double,
and  Ttpoaartov, countenance. A monster
with two faces.
   DIP'SACUS SYLVESTRIS. From
5t^a, thirst, because the leaves are so
arranged as to hold water.   Cultivated
teasel.
   Dipsacus Fullo'num.  Fuller's tea-
sel.
   DIPSET'ICUS.   From  Si^a, thirst.
Productive of thirst.
   DIPSOMAN'IA.  From St^a, thirst,
and utowitt, madness. The thirst of drunk-
ards.   Also, delirium tremens.
   DIPSO'SIS.  Morbid thirst.
   DIPTERA.  From Sis, twice, and
ittcpov, a wing.  Insects which have two
wings.
   DIPTERA'CEJE.  A natural order
of dicotyledonous trees, peculiar to In-
dia, and the Indian Archipelago, distin-
guished by the petals not being fringed,
and want of albumen.
   DIPTEREX ODORATA.   A tree
found in Guiana, which yields an odor-
iferous bean, called the Tonquin bean.
   DIPTEROUS. Having two wing-
like appendages.
   DIRCA PAULUSTRIS. Leather
wood.    A  small   indigenous   shrub,
which grows in wet boggy  places, in
many parts of the United States.
   DIRECTOR.  From dirigere, to di-
rect.  A grooved sound for guiding a
knife in some surgical operations.
   DIRT-EATING.  A disorder of the
nutritive functions common among Af-
rican negroes, in which the desire for
eating dirt is irresistible, and producing
the cachexia Africana.
   DISCHARGE.   In Pathobgy, in-
21 
DIS
217
DIS
 creased discharge  from any  secreting
 organ or part.
   DISCOLORATION   OF   THE
 TEETH.  The teeth  often lose their
 natural whiteness and pecuhar brillian-
 cy, and  assume  a yellowish, brown,
 greenish, or black  appearance, and in-
 stead  of exciting  admiration,  become
 objects of disgust. Any of these changes
 may take place at any period of life, by
 the exposure of the teeth to the action of
 the causes that produce them, and from
 want  of proper attention to their  clean-
 liness.   Discoloration of the teeth may
 be produced by the action of the mu-
 cous fluids of the mouth, or by  the
 habitual use of substances containing
 coloring matter, as tobacco, &c. and
 if permitted to continue until the thir-
 tieth year of age, when occasioned by
 the latter, can never be removed.  But,
 when dependent upon the chemical ac-
 tion of the former,  or is the result, sim-
 ply, of an accumulation of viscid and
 discolored mucus, the teeth may  be re-
 stored to their natural color.  The treat-
 ment in cases of this sort should accord
 both with the  local and constitutional
 indications.
   DISCREET'.  Discretus.  Distinct,
 separate.  Applied to exanthemata, in
 which the eruptions or pustules are not
 confluent, but are  distinct and separate
 from each other.
   DISCUTIENTS.  Discutientia; dis-
 cussoria;  from discutere, to shake apart.
 Apphed to substances which have the
 power of repelling or resolving tumors.
   DISEASE. According to Chomel, a
 perceptible disorder occurring either in
 the material disposition of the parts com-
 posing the living body,  or in the  exer-
 cise of its functions.
  DISECOI'A.   Deafness.
  DISFIGURATION.  Deformation.
  DISGORGE'MENT.  The opposite
of engorgement.  Act of disgorging, or
discharging  any fluid previously col-
lected in a part or  viscus,  as the dis-
gorgement of bile, or a portion  of the
contents of the stomach, as in vomiting.
        19
    DISGUST.  A loathing  of food; a
  mental repugnance to any thing.
    DISINFECTANTS.  Agents which
  destroy or neutralize morbid  effluvia,
  and also, according to Prof. Dungleson,
  agents capable of removing  a septic
  condition of the body, or any part of it.
    DISINFECTING  LIQJJID,  LA-
  BARRAQJJE'S.   A solution of the
  chloride of soda.
    DISINFECTION. Disinfectio. The
  act of neutralizing or destroying  the
  contagious miasmata  with which  the
  air or clothing may be affected.
    DISLOCATION.  Disbcatio.  Lux-
  ation.  Displacement of the articular
  extremity of a bone.
    DISORGANIZATION.  A morbid
  change in  the structure of an organ, or
  even total  destruction of its texture, as
  in the case of sphacelus, and some kinds
  of ulcers.
    DISPEN'SARY.  Dispensarium ;—
  from dispendere, to distribute.  A place
  where medicines are prepared; also, a
  place  where  the   poor  are furnished
  with  advice and  the  necessary medi-
  cines.
   DISPEN'SATORY. Dispensatorium.
  A book which treats  of the  properties
  and composition of medicines.
   DISPLACE'MENT.   See Percola-
 tion.
   DISPOSITION.   Dispositio; from
 dis, and ponere, to put or set.  In Anat-
 omy, a particular arrangement,  or mu-
 tual relations of different parts.  In Pa-
 thology, it  is synonymous with diathe-
 sis, but has a more extensive significa-
 tion.
   DISSECTING  ABSCESS.   An
 abscess which insinuates itself between
 muscles, separating them from each
 other.
   Dissecting  Aneurism.  An  aneu-
 rism in which the inner and  middle
 coats of the artery are ruptured, and the
 blood passes between them and the outer
 coat.
  DISSECTION.  Dissectio; from dis-
secare, to cut asunder.  The cutting to 
DIS
218
DOC
pieces of a dead body for the purpose of
exposing the  different  parts and ex-
amining their  structure,  or cutting to
pieces any part of an animal or vegeta-
ble for this purpose.
   DISSECTOR.   Prosector.  A  prac-
tical anatomist.   One  who  cuts to
pieces a dead body for the purpose of ex-
amining the structure and arrangement
of its different parts, or for an anatomi-
cal lecture.
   DISSOLUTION.  Dissolutio;  from
dissolvere, to loosen, to melt. In Humo-
ral Pathology, a diminution of the con-
sistence of the blood.  Also, death.
   DISSOL'VENT.  Dissolvens;  from
dissolvere, to loosen.  Medicines which
are supposed to be capable of dissolving
morbid concretions, swellings, &c. Also,
a menstruum.
   DISTENTION.   Distentio;  from
 distendere, to stretch out.   Dflatation.
   DISTICHI'ASIS.  From Sis, double,
 GiiX0!* a row.  Increased number of
 eyelashes, with some turning in, irrita-
 ting the  eye, while the others  retain
 their proper places, and form, with the
 first, two rows.
   DISTILLATION. Distillatio; from
 distillare, to drop little by httle. The sepa-
 ration by the aid of heat the volatile from
 the fixed parts of bodies. The  opera-
 tion is effected in a retort or still.
    DISTOMA.  From Sis, and  otopa,
 a mouth.   Having two mouths.  A
 genus of worms.
    Distoma Hepat'icum.  Fasciola Ive-
 patica.  The hver fluke.  A small flat
 worm, about an  inch in length,  and
 nearly an inch in  width, sometimes
 found in the gall ducts of man.
    DISTORTION.  Distorsio;   from
 distorquere, to wrest  aside. Deformity
 of parts, as a preternatural curvature of
 a bone, curved spine, &,c. Also, con-
 traction of the muscles, as in strabis-
 mus, &c.
    DISTORTOR ORIS.   The  zygo-
 matics minor.
    DISTRIX.  From Sis, double, ?pt|,
  the hair.  A  morbid condition  of the
hair, characterized  by splitting at their
extremities.
  DITRACHYCERAS.  From StJ.
two, tpaxvs, rough, and xtpas, horn   A
genus of intestinal worms.  The ditra-
chyceras rudis, or diceras rude.
  DITTANY.  Dictamnus  albus.   A
plant, the root of which  was formerly
used as a tonic.
  DIURE'SIS.  From Sia, through  or
by, and ovpea, I pass the urine.  Abun-
dant excretion of urine.
  DIURETIC. Diureticus. A medicine
which increases the secretion of urine.
  DIVARICATION.  The separation
of two things previously  united.
  DIVARICATE.    Standing wide
apart; to diverge at an obtuse angle, as
do sometimes the roots of a molar tooth.
  DIVERGENT.  Diverging, reced-
ing from each other.
  DIVERSO'RIUM CHYLI.  The
 receptaculum chyli.
   DIVERTICULUM.   A turning;
 from divertere, to  turn aside.  Any  re-
 ceptacle capable of holding a more than
 ordinary quantity of blood, for tempo-
 rary purposes, when the circulation is
 obstructed, serves  as a  diverticulum.
 Also, a hollow appendage attached to,
 and communicating with the intestinal
 canal, or any hole to get out of, or by-
 passage.
   Diverticulum  Nuck'ii.  An open-
 ing on  each side  through  which  the
 round ligament of the uterus passes.
   Diverticulum  Chyli.  The recep-
 taculum chyli.
   DIVID'ING. That which separates.
   Dividing Bandage. A bandage used
 to keep parts separated from each other,
 and preventing unnatural adhesions.
   DIVUL'SIO.   In Surgery, a rupture
 or laceration  caused  by external vio-
 lence.
   Divul'sio Uri'ne.  Urine which  has
 a cloudy appearance.
   DIZZINESS.  Vertigo.
   DOCH'ME. A Greek measure equal
 to the breadth of about four fingers.
   DOCIMA'SIA.   FromSox^afw, ex- 
DOL
219
DOS
 amining into the goodness or fitness of
 any thing; to verify. Apphed to the art of
 examining fossils, for the purpose of dis-
 covering what metals, &c. they contain.
   Docimasia Pulmo'num.  The exam-
 ination of the respiratory organs of anew
 born child for the purpose of ascertain-
 ing whether it had breathed after birth.
   DOCK.   Rumex.
   DOCTOR.   From  doctus,  learned.
 A title commonly apphed to  a practi-
 tioner of medicine, but properly con-
 fined to one who has received from a
 regularly chartered institution or col-
 lege the degree of doctor of medicine,
 or doctor of dental surgery.  The power
 for conferring the latter degree was first
 invested in the Baltimore College of
 Dental Surgery, by the legislature of the
 state of Maryland, in an  act of  in-
 corporation, granted in  1840, and con-
 ferred for the first time, at the first an-
 nual commencement of this institution,
 on the 9th of March, 1841.
   DOCTRINE.  In Medicine, the the-
 ory or principles  of any medical sect,
 teacher, or writer.
   DODDER OF THYME.  A par-
 asitical  plant,  possessing a strong, un-
 pleasant smell, and pungent taste.
   DODECAN'DRIA.  Dodccandrous;
 from SaStxa, twelve, and  av^p, a man.
 A class  of hermaphrodite plants having
 twelve stamens.
   DODECA'HEDRON.  A  solid of
 twelve  sides;  a form  frequently met
 with in  crystals.
   DOG-CHOKE. Cynanche.
   Dog-Days.  Dks caniculares.  The
 days comprised between the  24th of
 July and the 23d of August are so called,
 because  the dog-star, Sirius, rises and
 sets, at this  time, with the sun.
   DOGMAT'ISTS. From Soypa, a doc-
 trine.  A sect of ancient  physicians,
 who founded their practice upon con-
 clusions  drawn from certain theoretical
 inferences.
  DOLTCHOS. From So%iXos, long. A
genus of plants of the luguminous fam-
ily, including a number of species.
   Dolichos  Pru'riens.    Cow-hage.
 The pods are covered with stiff hairs,
 called dollichi pubes, which are used in
 medicine as an anthilmintic.  When ap-
 plied to the skin, they excite an intoler-
 able prurient sensation.
   DOLO'MITE.  A  magnesian lime-
 stone.
   DOLOR.  Pain.
   DOMESTIC MEDICINE.  Medi-
 cine as practiced by unprofessional indi-
 viduals in their own families. Also, ap-
 plied to treatises written for the purpose
 of enabling unprofessional  persons  to
 treat diseases, when  the services of a
 regular physician  cannot  be procured.
   DORE'MA AMMONIA CUM. The
 plant which yields ammoniacum.
   DORON'ICUM GERMANICUM.
 Arnica montana.  Leopard's bane.
   DoronicumPardalian'ches. Doron-
 icum romanum.  Roman leopard's bane.
   DORSAL.  Dorsalis; from  dorsum,
 the back.  Relating to the back, or the
 back of any organ.
   DORSE.  A fish which yields some
 portion of the cod-fiver oil.  The gadus
 callarias.
   DORSO-COSTALIS.  The serratus
 posticus superior muscle.
   Dorso-Supra Acromia'nus. The tra-
 pezius muscle.
   Dorso-Trachealia'nus.  The sple-
 nius colli muscle.
   DORSTENIA BRAZILIENSIS.—
 Caa-apia.  The root is emetic and anti-
 diarrhceic.
   Dorstenia  Contrayer'va.   Con-
 trayerva.  The root has a pleasant aro-
 matic smell, and  a rough,  bitter and
 penetrating taste.
   DORSUM.  The back.  The poste-
 rior  part of the  trunk.  The vertebral
 column.  The  back of any part, as the
 dmsum pedis, back of  the foot; dorsum
 manus, back of the hand, &c.
  DOSAGE.  Applied to  an analysis
in  which the regent is added in mea-
sured quantities, from a graduated tube,
to a measured and weighed solution  of
the assay. 
DRA
220
DRI
  DOSE. Dosis; from SiSaui, to give.
The amount of medicine to be given at
one time for  producing a desired effect.
  DOSIS. A dose.
  DOTAGE.  Dementia.
  DOTHINENTERITIS.  From So9-
tyv, a boil, and svtcpov, an intestine.  In-
flammation and   enlargement  of  the
glands  of Peyer and Brunner, and sup-
posed by Bretonneau to be the cause of
the symptoms  which constitute a large
class of fevers.
  DOUBLE-HEARING.    Sounds
heard doubly.
  Double Wedge.  An instrument in-
vented  by Dr. Elliot, of Montreal, for
removing an  artificial croAvn from  the
root of a tooth upon which it has been set.
  DOU'CHE.   The  shock  produced
by a dash of water, or other fluid, upon
the body.
  DOULEUR.   Pain.
  Douleur des  Dents. Pain in  the
teeth.   See Odontalgia.
  DOVER'S   POWDER.    Pulvis
ipecacuanhas; opium  and sulphate of
potassae.
  DOWNING,  RICHARD.  Author
of  a Popular  Essay on  the Structure,
Formation,  and  Management  of the
Teeth, published at London,  1815.
   DRACiE'NA  DRACO.   The drag-
on tree.
   DRACHM. Drachma. An eighth of
an ounce, or 60 grains.
   DRACO.   Apaxav, the dragon.  A
fabulous serpent with wings and feet.
   Draco Mitigatus. Calomel; hydrar-
 gyri submurias.
   Draco Sylvestris.  Sneezewort, or
 bastard pellitory.
   DRACOCEPH'ALUM  CANARI-
 EN'SE.  Turkey balsam; Canary bal-
 sam;  balm of Gilead tree.
    DRACONIS SANGUIS.  Dragon's
 blood.
   DRACON'TIUM   FCETIDUM.—
 Skunk cabbage.  A  plant which ex-
 hales a very fetid odor.
   DRACUNCULUS.   Dracontium.
 Also, the Guinea Avorm.
  DRAGACANTHA.  Dragant gum.
Dragantin.  Tragacanth gum.
  DRAGON'S  BLOOD.   Sanguis
draconis.    A concrete  resinous sub-
stance, of a blood-red color, used in var-
nishes, and sometimes in dentifrices.
  DRA'KENA.   Dorstenia   contra-
yerva.
  DRASTIC.   Drasticus;  cenotic;
from Spaa, I operate strongly.   Gener-
ally applied  to purgatives  which ope-
rate powerfully.
  DRAUGHT.  A sufficient  quantity
of fluid medicine for a dose.
  DRAW-BENCH.   A bench  for
drawing wire, so constructed as to con-
fine a wire plate at one end, with a roller
and  windlass  at the other for drawing
the wire through the plate.  It is used
in the mechanical laboratory of the den-
tist.
  DREAM. Somnus. Imaginary trans-
actions which  occupy the mind dur-
ing sleep.
  DREGS.  Feculence.
  DRESSER.  A surgeon's assistant,
who applies the dressings in a hospital.
  DRESSING.   The proper applica-
tion of bandages, plasters and apparatus
to a diseased part,
  DRESSINGS.  The bandages, plas-
ters  and apparatus used in dressing a
diseased part.
   DRILL.   A small steel instrument,
either  with a flat point or a burr at the
end, sometimes used by dentists in the
removal of caries from a tooth prepara-
tory to filhng, or  in their mechanical
laboratory.
   Drill-Bow.  A bow and string for
moving a drill-stock, Avhich it does by
passing the string around it, and mov-
ing it backwards and forwards.
   Drill, Burr.  An instrument used
 in dental surgery  for the  removal  of
 caries of the teeth, and enlarging  the
 canal in the root of a tooth preparatory
 to the application of an artificial crown.
 It consists of a small steel stem attached
 to a handle, or so constructed as to be in-
 troduced  into a socket-handle, or socket 
DRO
221
DUC
of a drill-stock, with a bulb at the other I
extremity, with a surface hke that of a
coarse single-cut file.
  Drill,  Flat.  A small steel  stem,
fitted to a socket in  a handle, or drill-
stock, with the other extremity flatten-
ed and presenting  a sharp, triangular
shaped point.
  Drill-Stock.   An instrument for
holding and  turning a  drill, moved
either with the thumb and finger, or
with a string and bow.
  Drill-Stock, Lewis'. A very beau-
tiful and ingeniously contrived instru-
ment for drilling into a molar tooth.  It
is so constructed  that a  drill may be
worked in it in any direction from a line
Avith the handle or shaft, to a parallel
with the same, though not with suffi-
cient convenience to the operator to ren-
der  it of much practical utility.
   Drill-Stock, McDowell's. A drill-
stock upon the principle of the helix
lever, the drill being inserted at the end
of the screw, is moved by means of a
female screw attached  to the handle of
the instrument.  It is so arranged that
 drills pointing  in three different direc-
 tions may be worked in it.
   DRIMYPHA'GIA.   From Spipvs,
 acrid, and $aya,  I eat.  An exciting
 diet.
   DRINK.   Every fluid  introduced
 into the stomach for the purpose of allay-
 ing thirst, diluting the ahmentary mass,
 and repairing the losses which the fluids
 of the body are constantly experiencing.
   DROP.  Gutta.  So much of any
 liquid, as co-heres together when pour-
 ed slowly from a vessel.   It,  hoAvever,
 varies in  volume and weight, according
 to the nature of the liquid and the size
 of the orifice or mouth of the vessel
 from which it is poured.  In Pharmacy,
 it is generally estimated at one grain.
   DROPS.   Certain liquid medicines.
   Drops, Anodyne.   A solution of
 acetate of morphia.
   DROPSICAL. Affected with dropsy.
   DROPSY.  See Hydrops.
   Dropsy of the Belly. See Ascites.
      19*
  Dropsy of  the  Chest.   Hydro-
thorax.
  Dropsy  of the Eye.   Hydrop-
thalmia.
  Dropsy  of the  Pericardium.—
Hydropericardium.
  Dropsy of the Skin.  Anasarca.
  Dropsy of the Testicle.  Hydro-
cele.
  DROSE'RA  ROTUNDIFO'LIA.
The sun-dew, a plant  which has a bit-
ter, acrid and caustic taste.
  DROSOM'ETER.  An  instrument
for ascertaining the amount of dew fall-
ing at any time.
  DROUIN.  Author of a Treatise on
the Diseases of the Teeth, pubhshed at
Strasburg, 1761.
  DRUG.  A simple  medicine.
  DRUGGIST.   One who sells drugs.
  DRUM OF THE EAR.   The tym-
panum.
  DRUNKEN'NESS.   Intoxication;
ebriety.  The habitual use of intoxicat-
ing liquors, is attended by loss of appe-
tite, restlessness, tremulous  motion, de-
hrium tremens, &c.
  DRYOBA'LANOPS CAMPHORA.
The name of a tree of the Eastern Archi-
pelago, which, by  incision, yields  the
camphor oil, and the  trunks often con-
tain the concrete camphor.
   DUBOIS.  Author of a  Treatise on
the Hygiene of the Teeth, or an analysis
of the means necessary for the preserva-
tion of the teeth and gums, published at
Paris, 1823.
   DUBOIS-FOUCOU.   Author of an
Exposition  of New Methods  for  the
Manufacture  of  Composition  Teeth,
pubhshed at Paris, 1808.
   DUCHMIN.  Author of a paper up-
on Caries of the Milk Teeth, pubhshed
 1759.
   DUCT.  See Ductus.
   DUCTIL'ITY.   From duco, I draw.
A property possessed by certain bodies,
which enables them to be drawn out, or
elongated, without causing any inter-
ruption  in their  constituent particles.
This property is peculiar to some met- 
DUC              222              DUV
als, as gold, silver, lead, &c, under all
temperatures.  Gold may be drawn  in-
to wire of only the  4000th  part of an
inch in diameter, and it may be reduc-
ed, by passing it through rollers, to the
800th part of an inch in thickness.
  DUCTOR.  Director.
  DUCTS,  BILIARY.  The ductus
communis coledochus; the  cystic and
hepatic ducts.
  Ducts of Bellini.  The urinary
canals of the kidneys.
  DUCTUS.  A canal, or duct.
  Ductus Aquosi.  The lymphatics.
  Ductus Arteriosus.   Canalis arte-
riosus. The arterial tube which forms a
direct communication between the pul-
monary artery and the aorta of the fetus.
It becomes obliterated after birth.
  Ductus  Auris  Palatinus.   The
Eustachian tube.
  Ductus  Bartholinian'us.   From
Bartholin, its discoverer.  The duct of
the sublinguial gland.
  Ductus Communis  Choledochus.
The common excretory duct  of the fiver
and gall-bladder.
  Ductus  Cysticus.   The duct  by
which the bile regurgitates into the gall-
bladder.
  Ductus Ejaculatorius.    A  duct
within the prostate  gland, opening in-
to the urethra.
  Ductus Excretorius.   An excre-
tory duct.
  Ductus Hepaticus. The hepatic duct.
  Ductus Incisorius.  A small canal
leading from the foramen incisivum  in-
to the cavity of the nares.
  Ductus Lachrymalis. The lachry-
mal duct.
  Ductus Lactiferi.  The excretory
ducts of the glandular substance of the
female breasts.
  Ductus Nasalis.   The ducts which
convey the tears  from the  lachrymal
sac to the nose.
  Ductus Pancreat'icus.  The  pan-
creatic duct.
  Ductus  Stenonis.  The Stenonian
or parotid duct.
  Ductus Thoracicus.   The thoracic
duct.
  Ductus Urine.  The ureter.
  Ductus Veno'sus.  Canalis venosus.
A venous canal, forming in the fetus, a
communication between the  umbilical
and left hepatic veins.  It becomes ob-
literated after birth.
  Ductus Warthonian'us.  Called so
after the name of its discoverer. The ex-
cretory duct of the submaxillary gland.
  DUMBNESS.  Mutitas.
  DUNNING, E. J.  Dissertation on
Practical Dentistry, by, read before the
American Society of Dental Surgeons,
at their sixth annual meeting, and pub-
lished in the American Journal of Den-
tal Science, volume sixth.
  DUODENITIS.   Inflammation of
the duodenum.
  DUODE'NUM. From SaSsxa, twelve,
and SaxtvXos, a finger;  so called, be-
cause it was supposed it did not exceed
the breadth of twelve fingers.  The first
part of the intestinal canal.
  DUPLICATION.  Duplicatio; from
duo,  two, and plicare, to fold.  Malfor-
mation, in which parts are doubled.
  DU'PLICATURE.    Duplicatura;
from duplex, double, twofold. A reflec-
tion of a membrane upon itself.
  DUPONT.  Author of a Remedy
for the Tooth-ache.  Paris, 1633.
  DU'RA MATER.   Durameninx;
from  duras, hard.  A thick semitrans-
parent,  sero-fibrous membrane,  of  a
pearly-Avhite  color,  which invests the
brain, lines  the cranium, and contains
the spinal marrow.
  DURA'MEN.   The heart  wood of a
tree.
  DUROS.  Hard.
  DUTCH GOLD.  An alloy of cop-
per and zinc.
  DUVAL, J. R.  An eminent French
dentist, and author of a number of well
written Essays on the Teeth.   First, of
Accidents from the Extraction of Teeth;
second,  Reflections  on  Tooth-ache;
third, the Youth's Dentist; fourth, Histo-
rical Researches on the Art of the Den- 
              DYS               22

tist; fifth, on Fistules of the Teeth; sixth,
Natural Method  of Directing  Second
Dentition;  seventh, Supplement to last
mentioned  work; eighth,  Mechanical
Dentistry.  These works were pubhshed
between the years 1802, and 1828.  Be-
sides the above, Duval  is the author of
a number  of  other small works on the
teeth.
  DWARF.  Nanus.  An animal  or
plant,  whose average  height is great-
ly inferior to the species to  which it be-
longs.
  DWINELLE, W. H.  Dissertation
on Sahvary Culculus, by, 1844.—Dis-
sertation on the Preparation of a Cavity
in a Tooth, preparatory  to Plugging, by,
1846.  Both  of the above  dissertations
Avere published in the  American Jour-
nal of Dental Science, the  first, in vol-
ume  fourth, and the second,  in vol-
ume  seventh.   Dr. Dwinelle, is also
one of the editors of the above named
periodical, beginning with the eighth
volume.
  DYNAMIC.   Dynamicus;  from
Swauis, strength, power. In Mechanics,
the investigation of the powers whereby
bodies are  put in motion.  In Biology,
that which relates to the vital forces,
increased action or force, and used in
contra-distinction to adynamic.  In Pa-
thology, synonymous with sthenic.
  DYNAMICS.  The science of mo-
tion ; or a treatise on the  laws  and  re-
sults of motion.
  DYNAMOM'ETER.  An  instru-
ment  for  measuring the  comparative
muscular power of man  and animals,
or  of man or animals at  different  pe-
riods, and in different conditions.
  DYS.   From  Svs,  difficult, faulty.
Used  as a prefix,  and often  signifies
painful; in ordinary cases  it implies
negation, as dysecoza, want of hearing.
  DYSESTHESIA. From Svs, with
difficulty, and aiaOavouai, I feel. Dimin-
ished sensibility, or abohtion of the senses.
  DYSESTHE'SLE. A term, in ./Vb-
sobgy, used  to  designate  an order  of
diseases, the first in the class debilitates,
3               DYS

 characterized by an  impairment or ex-
 tension of one, or all, of the senses.
  DYSCATABRO'SIS. Difficult deg-
 lutition.
   DYSCATAPO'SIS.   Difficulty of-
 swallowing liquids.
   DYSCHRCE'A. From Svs, and zpoa,
 color.   Morbid change  in the color of
 the skin.
   DYSCINE'SIA.   From Svs,  with
 difficulty, and  xivia, I move.  Loss or
 difficulty  of  motion, as in the case of
 rheumatism, or paralysis.
   DYSCOPHO'SIS.  From Svs, with
 difficulty,  and xo$oa, I am  deaf.   Im-
 pairment of the sense of hearing.
   DYSCO'RIA.  From Svs, and xopil,
 the pupfl.  Irregularity of the pupil.
   DYSCRA'SIA.  From Svs, and *pa-
 ais, temperament.  A bad temperament,
 or habit of body.
   DYSECGE'A.  From Svs, and axorj,
 hearing.  Deafness; hard of hearing.
   DYSEME'SIA.  Painful and inef-
 fectual efforts at vomiting.
   DYS'ENTERY.  Dysenteria; from
 Svs, with difficulty, and tvtspov, intestine.
 Bloody flux, diarrhoea attended by ex-
 cretion of blood.  Inflammation of the
 large intestines, fever, and painful tenes-
 mus.   The stools are mostly  mucous,
 sometimes  streaked with   blood,  and
 mixed with hard substances, called scy-
 bala.
   DYSGENNE'SIA.  From Svs, and
 ytvtais, generation.  Lesion  of the func-
 tions or organs of generation.
   DYSGEU'SIA.  From Svs, and yiv-
 eis, taste.  A morbid condition, or im-
 pairment, of the sense of taste.
   DYSH^EMORRHCE'A.  From Svs,
 with difficulty, and ai^oppotj, the piles.
 Difficulty in the hemorrhoidal flux.
   DYSHAPH'IA.  From Svs, and aft,
 touch.   Impairment of the sense of
 touch.
   DYSHE'MIA.  From Svs, and aiua,
 blood.  Depraved condition of the blood.
   DYSHI'DRIA. From Svs, and iSpas,
 sweat.  Morbid condition of the perspi-
 ration.
3 
               EAR

  DYSLALIA.  FromSvj, andtatoa,
speech.   Difficult or indistinct articula-
tion of words.
  DYSMASE'SIS.   From  Svs, and
lw.Gyiois, mastication.  Difficult masti-
cation.
  DYSMENORRHCE'A.  From Svs,
and pqvoppoia, the menses.  Difficult, or
retarded menstruation.
  DYSMNE'SIA.  From  Svs, badly,
fivijsis, memory.   Impaired or defective
memory.
  DYSO'DIA.   AvoaSia, fetor.   Dis-
eases attended with fetid emanations.
  DYSODONTI'ASIS.    From  Svs,
Avith difficulty, and oSovtiaais, dentition.
Difficult  dentition.
  DYSO'PIA.   From Svs, badly, and
a^, an eye.  Defective vision.
  DYSOREX'IA.    From Svs, with
difficulty, and opal-ij, appetite.  Deprav-
ed appetite.
  DYSOS'MIA.  From Svs, with dif-
ficulty, and oojita,  smell.  Diminished
sense of smell.
  DYSOSPHRE'SIA.    From  Svs,
with difficulty, and oer^pj^tj, the sense of
smell.  An impaired condition of the
sense of smell.
  DYSOSTO'SIS.  From Svs, and ca-
ll               EAR

 tzov,  a bone.  A faulty  conformation,
 or diseased condition of bone.
   DYSPEPSIA.  From Svs, with dif-
 ficulty, and mrtto, I concoct.   Indiges-
 tion.  Weak or impaired digestion.
   DYSPHA'GIA.    From Svs,  with
 difficulty, and $aya, I eat.   Difficult,
 or impeded deglutition.
   Dysphagia Constric'ta. Dysphagia
 pharyngea;  dysphagia  ozsophagea.—
 Stricture of the oesophagus, or pharynx.
   DYSPHO'NIA.   From Svs, badly,
 and $avrj, the voice. Alteration in the
 state of the voice; difficutly in the pro-
 duction and articulation of sounds.
   DYSPNOZ'A.  From  Svs, with dif.
 ficulty,  and nvta, I  breathe.  Difficult
 respiration; shortness of breath.
   Dyspnoea Convulsiva. Asthma.
   DYSTHET'ICA.  From SvoOttixa,
 a bad state  of body.  A bad  habit of
 body.  The fourth  order in the class
 hazmatka of Dr. Good, including cachex-
 ies.
   D YSTH YMT A.  From Svs, bad, and
 §vuos, mind.  Despondency  of mind.
 Melancholy.
   DYSU'RIA.  From Svs, with  diffi-
 culty, and ovpoj;, urine.  Difficulty of
 voiding the urine.
men from the meatus auditorius exter-
nus.
  Ear Trumpet.  An instrument used
by persons partially deaf for collecting
and increasing the intensity of sound.
  Ear-Wax.  Cerumen.
  Ear-Ache. Otalgia.
  EARTH.  In Chemistry, certain in-
soluble metallic oxyds, of  which there
are nine, namely, baryta, strontia, lime,
magnesia, alumina, glucina,  zirconia,
yttria and thorina.
  Earth, Aluminous.  Alumina.
                                   E

  EAGLE-STONE.  An old pharma-
ceutical term applied to globular clay,
iron stone, called lapis aetites.
  EAR. Auris. The organ of hearing,
which is divided into external, compre-
hending the auricle, and meatus audito-
rius  externus; middle, which includes
the tympanum and its connections, and
the internal, which includes  the semi-
circular canals, cochlea, vestibule and
whole labyrinth.
  Ear Pick.  A small scoop and probe
used for the removal  of hardened ceru-
E.
2! 
ECC
225
ECP
  Earth of Bones. Phosphate of lime.
  Earth, Bolar.  Argillaceous earth
of a pale but bright-red color. See Bole,
Armenia.
  Earth, Heavy.  Baryta.
  Earth, Japan. See Acacia Catechu.
  Earth-Worm. Lumbricus terrestris.
  Earths, Absorbent.  Earths which
have the property of neutralizing acids,
as magnesia, chalk, &c.
  EAU.   Water.
  Eau D'Arq.uebusade.   A vulniary
water formerly much used.  It consists
of alcohol distilled with various aromatic
herbs.
  Eau de Belloste.  A compound of
equal parts of muriatic acid, brandy and
saffron, formerly used as a resolvent.
  Eau de Broccheiri.    A styptic,
said to be a solution of creasote.
  Eau des Carmes.   The name of a
French preparation used as a stomachic
and stimulant.
  Eau de Cologne. A perfumed spirit
of lavender.
  Eau de J avelle. A solution of chlo-
ride of soda.
  Eau de Luce.  Succinated spirit of
ammonia.
  Eau de Naphre.  A water obtained
by distillation from the leaves of the bit-
ter orange.
  Eau de Rabel. Aquarabelii. A mix-
ture of concentrated sulphuric acid and
alcohol.
  Eau de Vie. Brandy.
  EBENACEiE.  Diospyros ebenum.
The name of a family of plants allied to
the ebony tree.
  EBENUM.  Ebenus. Ebony.
  EBRIETY.  Intoxication.
  EBULLITION.   Ebullitio;  from
ebullio, to bubble up. Boiling. The mo-
tion of a liquid by which it gives off bub-
bles of vapor, produced by  heat or fer-
mentation.
  EBULUS.  See  Sambucus Ebulus.
  EBUR. Ivory.
  ECCATHARTIC.  Cathartic.
  ECCHELYSIS. Expectoration.
  ECCHYLOMA.  An extract.
  ECCHYMO'MA.  From **, out of,
and ^ujuoj, juice.   Ecchymosis.
  ECCHYMO'SIS.  From ixxva, to
pour out.   A black or blue spot, occa-
sioned by an extravasation of blood.
  ECCHYSIS.  Effusion.
  ECCLISIS. A luxation.
  ECCOPROT'IC. Eccoproticus; from
e|, and  xortpos, excrement.  Laxatives
which simply remove the contents of
the alimentary canal.
  ECCRINOL'OGY.   Eccrinobgia;
from  sxxpiva,  I separate, and xoyos, a
discourse.  A treatise on the secretions.
  ECCRESIS.  Excretion.
  ECCRITTCA.  Diseases of the ex-
cement function.
  ECDORA,  From tx, and Sspa, I
flay.  Excoriation.
  ECDORIUS.   That which exco-
riates.
  ECHETRO'SIS.  White bryony.
  ECHINATE,  Echinatus.  Bristly;
set with small sharp points;  prickly.
   ECHINOPHTHAL'MIA.    From
tXivos, a hedge-hog, and otydaXpia, an in-
flammation of the eye.  Inflammation
of the eyehds, characterized by projec-
tion of the eye-lashes.
  ECHFNOPS.   From  tX^os, hedge-
hog, and a^,  the appearance,  so called
from its resemblance to the hedge-hog.
The globe-thistle.
  ECHI'NUS. The hedge-hog; also,
apphed to the prominent points on the
surface of the pileus of mushrooms.
  Echi'nus Marinus.  The sea-urchin.
  ECLECTICS.   Eckctkm;  from
txXtya, I select.   Writers who  select
from the various works, upon the same
department of science, such doctrines as
seem most conformable to truth.
  ECLYSIS. Exsolutio; from sxXvu,
I loosen.   Faintness;  prostration  of
strength.
  ECON'OMY.  From oixos, a house,
and vsfia,  I rule.   Literally, the man-
agement of household affairs.  In Ani-
mal Physiology, the laws which govern
the organization of animals.
  ECPHYLY'SIS.   Vesicular  erup- 
ECT               226               EFF
tion.  A generic term, including herpes,
eczema, pompholyx and rupia.
  ECPHRACTIC. Ecphracticus; from
sxfpaooa, to remove obstructions. Deob-
struent.
  ECPHRO'NIA.   Insanity;   melan-
choly.
  ECPHY'MA.  A cutaneous excres-
cence, as a wart, corn, physconia, &c.
  ECPHYSE'SIS.   From exfvaaa,  I
breathe through.   Hurried respiration,
as of a person out of breath.
  ECPIES'MA. From exrtie^a, I com-
press.  In  Surgery,  a fracture  of the
skull, with depression of the bone.
  ECPYE'MA.   From ex, out of, and
rtvov, pus.  Suppuration; an abscess;  a
collection of pus.
  ECPYE'SIS.  Suppurative diseases
of the skin.
  ECPYETIC. Suppurative; promot-
ing suppuration.
  ECREX'IS. Rupture; laceration.
  ECRHYTH'MOS. From ex, out of,
pv9fios, rhythm. Irregular. In Pathology,
applied to the pulse.
  ECRYSIS. From expea, I run from.
A discharge.
  ECSARCO'MA.   From ex,  out of,
and  aapi, flesh.  A  fleshy excrescence
or sarcoma.
  ECSTASIS.  From etiatapai, I am
beside myself.  An  ecstacy.   A total
suspension  of sensibility,  voluntary
movements, with retarded vital action.
  ECTASIS.  Extension; expansion.
  ECTHYMA.   From ex9va, I break
out.  A  cutaneous  eruption  of large,
round and distinct pustules, inflamed at
their base.  They are seldom numerous,
*nd  appear most frequently upon the
extremities, neck and shoulders. Three
species are noticed, namely, ecthyma vul-
gare; ecthyma infantile and ecthyma lu-
ridum.
  ECTO'PIA.  From extortos, out  of
place. Displacement of any part. Lux-
ation.
  ECTRO'PIUM.   From extpena,  I
evert.  Eversion of the eyelids, so that
the inner surface is turned out.
   ECZEMA.  From sx&a, I boil out.
Heat; eruption. A cutaneous eruption
of small vesicles thickly  crowded to-
gether, without any  manifest inflam-
mation.
   Eczema Mercuria'le.   Eczema ru-
brum.  Eczema caused by the irritation
of mercury.
   Eczema of the Face.   This some-
times occurs in advanced age, and in
young children.
   EDENTATA.  Edentals.  The name
of an order of mammals characterized
by the absence of the incisor, and, gen-
erally, of the cuspid teeth.
   EDENTULUS.  Edentatus; from e,
and  dens,  dentis,  a tooth.   Without
teeth; one who never had teeth, or one
who has lost his teeth.  The most fre-
quent causes which give rise to the loss
of the teeth, are caries and chronic in-
flammation of the  gums  and alveolo-
dental  membranes. See Caries of  the
Teeth, and Gums, diseases of.
   Although  it  is  impossible to com-
pletely remedy  this defect, yet, to such
a high state of  perfection has the pros-
thesis of these organs been brought, that
their loss is now replaced with artificial
substitutes which  subserve a most val-
uable purpose.  See Artificial Teeth.
   EDES.  'Amber.
   EDUCATION, PHYSICAL.  The
training of the body in such exercises as
are  calculated  to give  strength, vigor
and  health to aU of its organs.
   EDUL'CORANT. Edukorans. Med-
icines which are supposed  to deprive
fluids of their acrimony.
   EDULCORATION. Edulcoratio.—
The act  of rendering  substances mild,
either  by the effusion  of water for the
removal  of their sahne and  other disa-
greeable  qualities, or by the  addition of
saccharine matter.
   EF'FERENT.  Efferens; from  ef-
fero, I carry, I transport.  Applied to
vessels which convey fluids from glands,
as the vasa efferentia, which carry lymph
from the lymphatic glands to the tho-
racic duct; and to nerves, which convey 
EJE
227
ELE
the nervous influence from the nervous
centres to the circumference.
  EFFERVES'CENCE. Effervescen-
tia;  from effervescere, to boil over, to
ferment.  In Chemistry, the commotion
produced by  the escape  of gas from a
liquid, at the ordinary temperature of
the atmosphere.  In Humoral Pathology,
a supposed ebullition of the  blood or
other fluids produced either by elevation
of temperature,  or the  action of  the
principles contained in them,  on each
other.
   EFFETE. Effaztus. Impoverished;
worn out.
   EF'FILA.  Freckles.
   EFFLORES'CENCE.   Effloratio;
from efflorescere, to blow as a flower. In
 Chemistry, the spontaneous  conversion
of a solid into a pulverulent substance.
In Botany,  act of lowering.  In Pa-
tlwbgy,  acute exanthemata.
   EFFLU'VIUM. From effluo, to flow
out.  An exhalation, generally noxious
 or disagreeable.
   EFFUSION.    From effundere, to
 pour out. In Pathology, extravasation
 of a fluid into a visceral  cavity or into
 the  cellular tissue.
   EGES'TA.  From egero,  to  carry
 out. The expulsion  of feces  from  the
 healthy body.
   EGG-PLANT. Solanum melongena.
   EGOPH'ONY. A^gophonixt; from
 ru|, a goat, and §avv\, the voice;  goat's
 voice.  Applied by Laennec, to the  hu-
 man voice, where it gives through the
 stethoscope, a clear and acute sound, re-
 sembling the voice  of  the goat,  and
 which he regards as indicative of mod-
 erate effusion into one of the pleurae.
   EHINGER. Dissertation on Tooth-
 ache, by. Altdorf, 1718.
   EJACULATION. Ejaculatio; from
 ejaculare, to cast out.  The act by which
 the semen is darted through the urethra.
   EJACULATORY. Ejaculans. Con-
 cerned in the ejaculation of the semen.
   Ejaculatory  Ducts.  The vessels
 which convey the semen to the urethra.
   EJECTION. Ejectio;  from ejicere,
to throAV out.  Excretion of the feces,
urine, &c.
  ELABORATION. Elaboratio; from
e, and laborare, to work.  In Physiology,
the various changes which assimilative
substances undergo, through  the action
of living  organs,  before they become
subservient to nutrition.
  ELZEOM'ELI.  From txaiov, oil, and
fieXi, honey.  A purging oil, of a sweet
taste, obtained from the  trunk of a tree
in Syria.
  ELEON. Oil.
  ELvEOPHANES. From omw, oil,
and ^aivoftai, I appear. Having the ap-
pearance of oil.
  ELE'O-SACCHARUM. From ^a-
iov, oil, and dax^apov, sugar.   A  mix-
ture of essential oil and sugar.
  ELAIN.   From eXaiov, ofl. Oleine.
The oily principle of solid fats and oils.
   ELAIS  GUINEENSIS.   A  palm
found in Guinea and  the West Indies,
which yields an  emolient,  fatty  sub-
stance.
   ELASTIC.  Ekisticus; from eXaotys,
impulsion, itself from eXavvew, to impel,
to push.  Endowed with elasticity.
   Elastic Fluid.  A gas.
   Elastic Gum. Caoutchouc.
   ELASTICITY. A property in bod-
ies which restores them to their original
form, after having been made to deviate
from it by external force.
   ELATE'RIUM.  A  substance de-
posited from the juice of the Avild cu-
cumber. See Momordica Elaterium.
   ELATIN.  The active principle of
elaterium.
   ELBOW.  From ell, and bow.  Ap-
phed to the articulation of the arm with
the forearm, and especially to the pro-
jection formed by the ulna.
   ELCO'SIS.   From exxos,  an ulcer.
Ulceration.  Applied  by  Sauvages to
cachectic diseases attended Avith  fetid,
carious, and chronic ulcers.
   ELDER.  SeeSambucus.
   Elder,  Dwarf.  Sambucus ebulus.
   ELECAMPANE.  See Inula Hele-
nium. 
ELE
228
ELE
   ELECTRIC.  Relating to, or con-
 taining, electricity.
   ELECTRICITY. Electricitas; from
 qXextpov, amber—the substance in which
 it was  first discovered.   A  property
 which certain bodies exhibit, either nat-
 urally or when subjected to the action
 of various excitants, causing them to at-
 tract or repel light bodies, emit sparks,
 or streams of light, and to  produce in-
 voluntary muscular contraction in the
 bodies of animals when it is made to
 pass through them.   Also,  the science
 which treats of the phenomena of elec-
 tricity.
   Electricity,  Voltaic.  See Gal-
 vanism.
   ELECTRO'DE.  The end of a wire
 which communicates with a voltaic cir-
 cle, commonly called a pole, is so term-
 ed by Faraday, because, as he believes,
 it serves as a path or door to the elec-
 tric  current.
   ELECTRODYNAM'ICS.  The ac-
 tion of the conductors of electricity or
 galvanism upon each other when con-
 veying this subtile agent.
   ELECTROLYSIS.     The  direct
 decomposition of bodies by galvanism.
   Electro-Mag'netism.    Magnetic
 electricity.
   ELECTROM'ETER.   An  instru-
 ment for measuring electricity.
   ELECTROPUNCTURE.  The in-
 troduction of two or more wires into
 any  part of the body and then connect-
 ing them with the  poles of a galvanic
 battery.
   ELECTROSCOPE.    An   instru-
 ment for the discovery of electrical  ex-
 citement.
  ELECTROTYPE.  The precipita-
 tion, by means of a galvanic current,
 of a metal, from a solution, upon any
 metallic object immersed in it.
  ELECTRUM  Amber.
  ELECTUA'RIUM.  An electuary;
a confection.
  Electuarium.   Cassle^  A confec-
tion of cassia.
  ELE'MENT.   A  substance which
  cannot be divided  or  decomposed by
  chemical analysis.
    ELEMI. Amyris clemifera.  A fra-
  grant resin.
    ELEPHANTIASIS.  From f^aj,
  an elephant.  A chronic inflammation
  of the skin, occurring in warm climates,
  as in Africa, the West Indies, Madeira,
  and  the Isle of France, in which the in-
  tegument  becomes  rough,  indurated,
  wrinkled and scaly, like the skin of an
  elephant, attended by a diminution and
  sometimes  a total loss of sensibility; the
  formation of fissures in the skin, ulcera-
  tions, &c.
    EL'EPHAS.   Elephantiasis.  The
  elephant; ivory.
    ELETTA'RIA.  From elettari. The
  name of a genus of plants, to which the
  lesser cardamom is referred.
    Elettaria Cardamomum. The offi-
  cinal cardamom—the seeds of which are
 aromatic and gently  pungent when
 chewed.
   ELEUTHERIA.  Cascarilla bark.
   ELEVATOR.  From ekvare, to hft
 up. In Anatomy, a muscle, whose func-
 tion consists in raising the part into which
 it is inserted.  See Levator. In General
 Surgery, an instrument used to  raise
 depressed portions of bone, especially
 of the cranial, or for the removal of the
 circle detached  by  the trephine.  In
 Dental  Surgery,  an  instrument some-
 times employed in the extraction of roots
 of teeth.  The elevator used in the last
 mentioned   operation is of  a pointed
 shape, bearing some  resemblance to the
 tongue of a  carp, and is hence called by
 French dentists, bngue decarpe; it is flat
 or slightly concave on one side and con-
 vex on the other, attached to a straight
 or curved shank, according to the fancy
 of the operator, or the part of the jaw on
 which it is  intended to be employed,
 and inserted in  a large strong ivory,
 wood, or pearl handle.
  Elevator, Goodwin's.  An instru-
ment  invented by Mr. C. T. Goodwin,
of Philadelphia, for the extraction of the
roots  of cuspid  teeth.   It is shaped 
ELI
229
ELM
 something like the punch bent down-
 wards near the point.  With regard to
 the merits of the instrument the author
 is unable to speak, not having seen it.
   Elevator Ani.  Levator ani.
   Elevator Labu Infertoris Propri-
 us.  Levator labii inferioris.
   Elevator Labii Superioris Propri-
 us. Levator labii superioris alaeque nasi.
   Elevator  Labiorum.   Levator an-
 guli oris.
   Elevator Nasi Alarum.  See Le-
 vator Labii Superioris Alaeque Nasi.
   Elevator Oculi. Rectus superioris.
   Elevator  Palpebrje  Superioris.
 Levator palpebral superioris.
   Elevator Scapule.  Levator scap-
 ulae.
   Elevator Testiculi.  The cremas-
 ter muscle.
   Elevator  Urethre.   The trans-
 versa perinaei muscle.
   ELEVATORIUM.  The elevator;
 a surgical instrument.
   ELIXATION. Elixatio; from elix-
 us, boiled,  sodden.  The act of boiling
 or seething.
   ELIXTR.   From elekser,  quintes-
 sence.  A  solution of various medicinal
 substances, or their active principle, in
 alcohol. It is analogous to tincture.
   Elixir Acidum Halleri.  A  mix-
 ture of concentrated sulphuric acid and
 alcohol.
   Elixir Aloes. Tincture of aloes and
 myrrh.
   Elixir Antiasthmaticum Boerha-
 avii.   Boerhaavis' antiasthmatic elixir,
 composed of alcohol, aniseed, orris  root,
 liquorice, elecampane, sweet flag, and
 asarabacca.
   Elixir for the Mouth, Maury's.
 1$. Root of ratania, g viij.  Vulnerary
 alcohol, ftiv.  Essential oil of English
 mint,  3 iv.   Essential  oil of orange
 rind 3 i.  Put the bruised  root into a
 matrass; pour over the alcohol, digest
for 18 days, filter and  add the essential
oils.  Add 15 or 20 drops to a tumbler
one-third full of water, and rub the teeth
and gums with it.                    I
     20
   Elixir for the Teeth, Argelat's.
 Take spirit of rosemary, g viij.  Rad.
 pyrethrum, g i.  Put  into a matrass,
 and  infuse for some  days,  and filter.
 When used, mix with two parts water.
   Elixir for the  Mouth, Botet's.
 Take spirit  of wine,  at  33°, 2 htres;
 pounded cloves, cinnamon, green anise,
 each, 32  grammes;  powdered cochi-
 neal, essence of peppermint, each, 16
 grammes.
   Elixir, Dr.  Capon's Odontalgic
 An elixir composed of oil of cloves, oil
 of thyme, opium, alcohol of roses, and
 Frontignac wine.
   Elixir Paregoricum.  Paregoric.
   Elixir, Roger's Tonic, for  the
 Mouth.  An ehxir composed of the fol-
 lowing ingredients;  vulnerary  water,
 ratany root, oil of English mint, oil of
 orange peel and alcohol.
   Elixir Sacrum.   Tincture of rhu-
 barb and aloes.
   Elixir  Salutis.   Compound  tinc-
 ture of senna.
   Elixir Stomachicum.  Compound
 tincture  of gentian.
   Elixir Vitrioli.  Aromatic sulphu-
 ric acid.
   ELIXIVIATION.   Lixiviation.
   ELK.   Cervus alces, or moose deer.
   ELLIOT, W.  H.  Contributions to
 operative and mechanical dentistry, by;
 No. 1, on Filhng Teeth ;  No. 2, on the
 Extraction of Teeth;  No. 3, on  the
 Pivoting Method of Inserting Artificial
 Teeth; No. 4, on the Construction  of
 Artificial Teeth upon plates ; No. 5, a
 new Method of Inserting one or more
 Teeth upon one or more Roots;  No. 6,
 Hints to  the Profession on the Invention
 and Construction of Dental Instruments;
 No. 7, on the Working of Steel, Refining
 Gold, and Making Solders. Besides the
 above, Dr. Elliot is the author of Obser-
 vations on the Effects of Irritation upon
 the Deposition and Absorption of Den-
tal Bone;  all of  which are published
in  the American Journal of Dental
Science.
  ELM.   Ulmus. 
EMB
230
EMM
  ELO'DES.  From txos, a marsh,and
eiSos, resemblance.  Marsh fever.
  ELONGATION.  Ebngatio; from
clongarc, to lengthen.   In Surgery, an
imperfect luxation, in which the liga-
ments are stretched and the limb length-
ened.  Also, the extension required in
the reduction of a dislocation or fracture.
  ELOY.   Dissertation on Antiodon-
talgic Remedies, by.  Vienna, 1772.
  ELUTRIATION.  Elutriatio; from
elutrio, to cleanse.  Decantation.
  ELU'VIES. From eluo, to Avash out.
A preternatural discharge of any fluid;
also the fluid itself. Apphed sometimes
to leucorrhoea.
  ELYTROCE'LE.    From tXvtpov,
an envelop,  and xtjXrj, a  tumor.  Vagi-
nal hernia.
  ELYTRON.   From tXva, I involve.
A sheath; the vagina.  The membranes
enveloping the spinal marrow are call-
ed eXvtpa.
  ELYTROPTO'SIS.   From eXvtpov,
a sheath, and ntaois, fall.  Apphed to
inversion and prolapsus vagina.
  EMACIATION.  Emaciatio; from
emaciare, to grow lean.   Wasting of the
flesh.  The  condition of a person who
is losing  flesh.  Becoming lean.
  EMANATION.   Emanatio;  from
emanare, to  issue from.  A term ap-
plied to fluid or gaseous bodies, which
proceed, or originate from other bodies,
as light from the sun, odors from plants,
and  miasmata, from  the decomposition
of animal and vegetable substances.
   EMASCULATE. Emasculatus; A
male deprived of the generative power.
   EMASCULATION.  Emascubtio;
from emasculare, to  render impotent.
The act  of  destroying or removing the
male generative organs.
   EMBALM'ING.  The preservation
 of the dead body, which, among the
Egyptians was  usually done by satu-
rating every part with asphaltum.
   EMBAM'MA.    From erfaxta,  I
immerse in. A medicated condiment,
 or sauce in  which the food is dipt.
   EMBON'POINT.  A French  word,
signifying, in good* condition, or in full
health.
  EMBROCATION.    Embrocatio;
from e/xfipsxa, I sprinkle.  A fluid ap-
plication, especially a liniment, to  be
rubbed on any part of the body.
  EMBROCHE.  Embrocation.
  EM'BRYO.   Embryon;  from tp-
Ppuw, I grow.  The fetus in utero, during
the early stages of its development, also
the germ of a tooth, or of a plant.
  EMBRYOG'RAPHY.   Embryog-
raphia;  from s/xfipvov,  the embryo, and
ypotytj,  a description.  An  anatomical
description  of the embryo.
  EMERY WHEELS. Wheels vary-
ing in thickness from an eighth to three-
quarters  of an  inch, and in diameter,
from one to nine or ten inches, compos-
ed of shellac and emery.  They are em-
ployed in the mechanical laboratory of
the  dentist  for grinding  porcelain  or
mineral teeth.  When well made they
are preferable to  any  other grinding
wheel that can be used for this purpose.
  EMESIS.  The act of vomiting.
  EMETIC.  Emetkum;  from eueu, I
vomit.  A substance capable of exciting
emesis.
  Emetic  Tartar.   Tartarized  anti-
mony.
  Emetic Weed.   Lobelia inflata.
  EMETIN.   Emetina.   The active
principle of ipecacuanha.
  EM'ETO-CATHARTIC.  Emetko-
catharticus.  A medicine which excites
vomiting and purging at the same time.
  EMINENCE.  Eminentia. A pro-
jection, or  protuberance on the surface
of an organ.
  EMINENTIA ANNULARIS. The
pons varolii.
  EMINENTI^E  CANDICANTES.
The corpora albicantia of the brain.
  Eminentle  Lenticulares.   The
corpora striata.
   Eminentle Magne  Cerebri.  The
thalami opticorum.
   Eminentle  Q,uadrigemine.   The
tubercula quadrigemina.
I   EMISSA'RIA  dvrm MATRIS. 
EMP
231
EMP
 The processes of dura mater which ac-
 company the cerebral nerves  through
 the cranial foramina.
   EMISSION.  Emissio;  from emit-
 tere, to send out, drive  out.  The act
 by which matter of any  kind is throAvn
 from the body.
   EMMEN'AGOGUES. Emmeniago-
 ga ; from epuyvia, the menses, and aya,
 I drive, or expel.   Medicines Avhich
 promote or  favor the discharge of the
 menses.
   EMME'NIA.  The menses.
   EMMENOLOG'IA.  From ^^a,
 menses, and xoyos, a discourse.  A trea-
 tise on menstruation.
   EMOL'LIENT.  Emollentio;  from
 emollire, to soften or relax.   Substances
 which soften and relax inflamed parts, as
 bland oils, fomentations, cataplasms, &e.
   EMOTION.   Emotio.  Affection of
 the mind.  Delirium
   EMPATHE'MA.   EfirtaO^s;  from
 ftaOpria, passio, affectio.  Ungovernable
 passion.
   EM'PHLYSIS.  From  ev,  in, and
 fyXvais, a vesicular tumor or eruption.
 Vesicular eruption, with a discharge of
 an acrid fluid, as in aphtha, erysipelas,
 pemphigus.
   EMPHRACTICUS.   Emphractic;
 from eutypatta, I  close, I obstruct.  A
 medicine Avhich closes the pores of the
 skin, when applied to  it.
   EMPHRAGMA.  That which  ob-
 structs,
   Emphragma Lachrymale.  Fistula
 lachrymalis.
   Emphragma Salivare.   Ranula.
   EMPHRAX'IS.  Obstruction of any
 cavity or canal.
   EMPHY'MA. A tumor, or morbid
 growth.
   EMPHYSE'MA.   From ea^vsaa, I
 inflate.  An elastic, crepitant swelling,
 caused by  the  introduction of air, or
 other aeriform fluid into the cellular tex-
ture.
  Emphysema Abdominis.  See Tym-
panites.
  Emphvsema of the Lungs.  Infil-
I tration of the intercellular texture of the
 lungs Avith air.
   Emphysema Pectoris.  See Pneu-
 mothorax.
   EM'PIRIC.   Empiricus;  from ev-
 rteipia, experience.   Formerly applied
 to one, who, in the practice of physic,
 followed experience alone.  But at pre-
 sent, applied to one who  deviates from
 the course pursued by regular practi-
 tioners, and vends nostrums.  The term
 is used in nearly the same sense as that
 of charlatan, or quack.
   EMPIRICISM. The practice of em-
 pirics.  Q,uackery.
   EMPLASTICUS.  An emphractic.
   EMPLASTRUM. From s^xaaaa,
 I spread upon.  A plaster.  A solid glu-
 tinous compound, which at the ordina-
 ry temperature of the body, adheres to
 the part on which it is placed.
   Emplastrum  Adhe'sivum  Angli-
 cum.  Court plaster.
   Emplastrum Adhesivum.  Emplas-
 trum resinae.
   Emplastrum Ammoni'aci.  An am-
 moniacum plaster.
   Emplastrum Ammoniaci Cum Hy-
 dra rgyro.  A plaster composed of am-
 moniacum, mercury, olive oil and sul-
 phur.
   Emplastrum Aromati'cum.   Aro-
 matic  plaster.
   Emplastrum Asafostide.   An asa-
 foetida plaster.
  Emplastrum Belladon'ne. A plas-
 ter of belladonna.
  Emplastrum Calefa'ciens.  A cale-
 faeient plaster.
  Emplastrum Cantharidis.  A blis-
 tering fly plaster.
  Emplastrum Cantharidis  Vesica-
torle Compositum.  Compound plas-
ter of Spanish flies.
  Emplastrum Cere.  A wax  plas-
ter.
  Emplastrum Cicu'tje.  A prepara-
tion of pitch plaster, Avith hemlock poAV-
der.
  Emplastrum Cumini.  Cumin plas-
ter. 
EMP              232              EMU
  Emplastrum Diachylon.  Emplas-
trum plumbi.
  Emplastrum Epispasticum.  Em-
plastrum cantharidis.
  Emplastrum Ferri.  Iron plaster.
  Emplastrum Gal'bani Compositum.
Compound plaster of galbanum.
  Emplastrum Galbani.  Galbanum
plaster.
  Emplastrum  Gummo'sum.   Gum
plaster.
  Emplastrum Hydrar'gyri.  Mer-
curial plaster.
  Emplastrum Hydrar'gyri Compo-
si'tum.  A mercurial plaster, with resin.
  Emplastrum Lithargyri.  Emplas-
trum plumbi.
  Emplastrum Norimbergen'se.  An
ointment of red lead, wax, oil  and cam-
phor.
  Emplastrum Opii. An opium plas-
ter.
  Emplastrum Oxydi  Ferri Rubri.
Emplastrum ferri.
  Emplastrum Oxydi  Plumbi Semi-
vitreum. Emplastrum plumbi.
  Emplastrum Picis.  Empbstrumpi-
cis compositum.  Compound pitch plas-
ter.
  Emplastrum Picis  Cum  Cantha-
ride.  Plaster of pitch, with Spanish
flies.
  Emplastrum Plumbi. Lead plaster.
  Emplastrum Peumbi  Carbonatis.
Plaster of carbonate of lead.
  Emplastrum Polychres'tum. Em-
plastrum resinse.
  Emplastrum Resine.   Resin plas-
ter.
- Emplastrum Saponis. Soap plaster.
  Emplastrum Saponis Compositum.
Adhesive plaster.
  Emplastrum Simplex. Emplastrum
cerae.  Wax plaster.
  Emplastrum Thuris Compositum.
Compound frankincense plaster.
  Emplastrum Vesicato'rium.  Em-
plastrum cantharidis.
  EMPO'RIUM.  A mart.  The brain
was formerly  so  called, because all the
affairs of the mind are transacted there.
  EMPRES'MA.   From tvttpifia, I
burn within.  Visceral  inflammation;
inflammation of any of the viscera.
  EM'PRION.  From ev, and *ptww, a
saw, serrated. Apphed  by some of the
older writers to a pulse, in which the
strokes of the artery are unequally dis-
tended.
  EMPROSTHOT'ONOS.  From tfi-
rtposdev, forwards, and teiva, I stretch, I
extend.  A form of tetanus, in which
the body is drawn forwards.
  EMPTO'SIS.  Imbibition.   Endos-
mosis.
  EMPTY'SIS.  From epntva, I spit
out.  Haemoptysis.
  EMPYE'MA. From ev, within, and
Ttvov, pus.   A collection of pus in the
cavity of the plura.
  EMPYE'SIS. Suppuration. A phleg-
monous eruption, in which the pimples
gradually fill with purulent fluid, and
after awhile dry up, leaving thick scabs.
  EMPYOCE'LE.  From ev, in, *w,
pus, and x^Xyj, a tumor.  A tumor of
the scrotum formed  by a  collection of
pus.
  EMPYOM'PHALUS.  From ev, in,
rtvov, pus, and ofirpaxos,  the navel.  A
suppurating tumor under  the navel, or
umbilical hernia.
  EMPYOS.  Purulent.
  EMPYREUMA.  From efinvpeva,
I kindle.   A peculiar  offensive odor
which animal and other substances con-
tract when decomposed by being ex-
posed to a strong heat in a closed vessel.
  EMPYREUMAT'IC. Empyreumat-
kus. Possessing the qualities of empy-
reuma, as  an empyreumatic smell or
taste.
  Empyreumatic Oil.  Oil  derived
from the destructive  distillation of ani-
mal matters.
  EMUL'GENT.   Emulgens;  from
emulgere, to milk out, to draw out. The
renal artery and vein are so called, be-
cause the ancients imagined they strain-
ed, or milked, the urine through the kid-
neys.
  EMUL'SIO.  An emulsion. 
ENA               233               ENA
  Emulsio  Acacle.   Gum  Arabic
emulsion.
  Emulsio Amyg'dal.e. Almond emul-
sion ; almond milk.
  Emulsio  Camphorata.   An emul-
sion  composed  of camphor, sweet
almonds, blanched; refined  sugar and
Avater.
  EMUL'SION.  Emulsio. A medicine
of a milky-white appearance, composed
of oil and mucilage.
  Emulsion, Almond. Mistura amyg-
dalae.
  Emulsion of Asafcetida.  Emulsio
antihysterica.   Mistura asafcetida.
  Emulsion,  Camphorated.   Emul-
sio  camphorata.
  Emulsion of Gum Ammoniac. Mis-
tura ammoniaci.
  Emulsion of Gum Arabic  Mistura
acaciae.
  EMUL'SIVE.  Applied to seeds and
the kernels of nuts Avhich yield oil when
pressed.
  EMUNCTORY.  Emunctorium;—
from emungere, to drain off.  Any ex-
cretory organ of the body, or cavity, con-
taining fluids to be excreted.
  EN^EORE'MA.  From ev,  in,  and
(Mwpto, I lift up,  that  Avhich hangs or
floats in.   A  deposit floating in the
urine.
   ENAMEL  OF THE TEETH.—
 Cortex striata; adamantina dentium;
crusta dentium adamantina; substantia
vitrea. A seemingly semi-vitreous sub-
stance which  covers the crown, and ex-
tends to  the neck of a tooth.  It is the
hardest of all animal substances, is gen-
erally of a  pearly milk-white color, and
extremely smooth and glossy on its sur-
face.  Like tooth-bone, it varies in den-
sity, being much  harder on some teeth
than others; it is thickest on those parts
most exposed  to friction, as  on the pro-
tuberances of the molares, the cutting
edges of  the incisores, and the cusps of
the  bicuspides and cuspidati, and is
thinnest  towards the neck.   The struc-
ture of the enamel is fibrous; its fibres
radiating from the centre to the surface
      20*
of the tooth, an arrangement by which
immense strength and power of sustain-
ing great pressure, is given to it.
  In describing the  microscopic struc-
ture of the enamel of the human tooth,
professor Owen says, it "consists of long
and slender,  solid,  prismatic, for  the
most part hexagonal,  fibres  of phos-
phate,  carbonate, and fluate of lime,"
which "are essentially the contents of
extremely delicate membranous tubes,
originally sub-divided into  minute de-
pressed compartments or cells, of which
membranes scarcely a trace can be de-
tected in fully formed teeth. The fibres
are arranged closely together, side by
side, with occasional  narroAv  angular
fissures, or interspaces, which are most
common between the ends nearest  the
dentine;  their general direction is per-
pendicular to the surface of the dentine,
Avhere the ends of the prisms are fixed
in shallow depressions; the opposite and
larger ends form the exposed surface of
the enamel; the fibres proceeding to the
horizontal  masticating  surface  are,
therefore, vertical; the greater number,
which are directed to the circumference
of the crown, are horizontal, or nearly
so; every fibre, as a general rule, hav-
ing, like the  tubes of the dentine, that
direction Avhich is best adapted for re-
sisting either the external force of mas-
tication or the effects of lateral pressure.
Besides the minute  pits corresponding
with the inner ends of the enamel fibres,
the outer surface of the dentine some-
times presents larger depressions. * * *
The enamel fibres  describe a  flexous
course, the curves being much stronger
and shorter than the  primary curves of
the dentinal tubes.  The parallelism of
the fibres continues over a much smaller
extent of any part of the enamel than
that of the calcigerous tubes in the den-
tine: in some  parts  of the enamel they
curve  in opposite  directions  to  one
another,  like  the vane of a feather.
Sometimes  the fibres  may be traced
through the  entire thickness of  the en-
amel ; Avhere they fall short, and where 
ENA
234
ENA
 the larger fibres diverge from each other,
 shorter complimental ones  fill up the
 interspaces.  Each fibre  is T i   th of
 an inch in  thickness,  and is marked
 throughout its entire course  by faint,
 close set,  transverse striae.   When  a
 section of enamel includes several fibres
 in its thickness, certain  of the overlap-
 ping curves intercept a portion of light,
 and occasions the appearance of dusky,
 brownish waves.  Another appearance,
 more immediately related  to the forma-
 tion  of enamel, is produced  by  lines
 crossing the enamel-fibres, parallel Avith
 the outer margin of the enamel, but not
 ahvays parallel with that attached to
 the  dentine.  These lines are not of
 equal clearness,  but are very  nearly
 equi-distant, being about 7 i^th  of an
 inch apart;  they are more plainly seen
 in transverse sections of the croAvn than
 longitudinal sections, and they  have the
 same relation to the fibres of the enamel
 which the contour -lines of the dentine
 bear to the calcigerous tubes.  Without
 doubt they  indicate, in like  manner,
 strata of segments of  the  fibres and
 stages in the formation of the substance.
 Where these strata, which are  arranged
 very obliquely to the vertical surface of
 the dentine, cross out upon that surface,
 they  occasion those waves, transverse
 annular delicate markings which Leeu-
 wenhoek noticed upon  the  exterior of
 the enamel, and which  he supposed to
 indicate successive stages in  the pro-
 trusion  of  the tooth through the gum,
 in taking its place in the dental series."
  Again,  in treating of the enamel of
 teeth in general, professor Owen says,
 "It sometimes forms only a partial in-
 vestment of the crown, as in the molar
 teeth of the  iguanodon, the canine
teeth of the hog  and  hippopotamus,
 and  the incisores of the rodentia.  In
these the enamel is  placed only on the
front of the teeth,  but  is  continued
along a great part of the inserted base,
Avhich is  never  contracted into  one,
or divided  into  more  fangs; so  that
the character of the crown of the tooth
 is maintained  throughout its extent as
 regards both  its shape and structure.
 The partial application of the enamel in
 these  'dentes  scalprarii,'  operates  in
 maintaining a sharp edge upon the ex-
 posed and Avorn end of the tooth, pre-
 cisely as  the  hard steel keeps up the
 outer edge of the chisel by being welded
 against an inner plate of softer iron.
  In the herbiverous mammalia, with the
 exception of the edentata, vertical folds
 or processes of the  enamel are continued
 into the substance of the tooth, varying
 in number, form,  extent and direction,
 and producing,  by their superior dens-
 ity and resistance,  the rigid inequahties
 of the grinding surface on  which its
 efficacy, and the trituration of vegetable
 substances, depends."
  Mr. Nasmyth has demonstrated with
 the microscope, that the enamel of the
 human tooth, as  well as the dentinal
 part is cellular.   Each  cell "is  of a
 semi-circular form,  and the  convexity
 of the semi-circle looks upAvards to-
 wards the free  external position of the
 tooth."  Thus,  by this most pecuhar
 structural arrangement, a capability of
 resisting mechanical force is given to the
 enamel, which its  simple fibrous struc-
 ture would wholly fail to supply.
  The chemical composition, according
 to Berzelius, in  every 100  parts of en-
 amel is, to wit:
  Phosphate of lime,          85.3
  Fluate of lime,               3.2
  Carbonate of lime,           8.0
  Phosphate of  magnesia,       1.5
  Soda and muriate of soda,     1.0
  Animal matter and water,     1.0

                             100
  These proportions, however, are not
 always the same.   They vary in the
 enamel of the  teeth of different  indi-
 viduals.
  Enamel of Porcelain Teeth.  See
 Mineral Teeth.
  ENANTHE'SIS.  Euantliema; from
ev, in, and a^fu, I flourish.   An erup-
tion on the skin, not  connected with in- 
ENC
235
END
ternal disease, as scarlet fever, measles,
&c
  ENARTHRO'SIS.   From ev,  in,
and apflpoy, a joint.    A species of diar-
throsis, in which  the round head  of
one  bone is  received into a cavity of
another, so as to admit of motion in all
directions.
  ENCANTHIS.    From ev, and xav-
Oos, the angle of the eye.  A tumor  or
excrescence in the internal angle of the
eye.
  Encanthis  Benig'na.  A soft, red,
and sometimes  rather livid excrescence
of  the caruncula  lachrymalis, which
generally yields to astringent collyria.
  Encanthis Malig'na.  A malignant
excrescence  of the caruncula lachry-
malis.
  ENCATALEP'SIS. Catalepsy.
  ENCATHIS'MA.  Semicupium.
  ENCAU'MA. From ev, in, and xatw,
I burn. The scar of a burn, or the vesi-
cle caused by a burn.
   ENCAU'SIS.  A burn;  encauma;
moxibustion.
   ENCEPHALALGIA. Head-ache.
   Encephalalgia  Hydropica.  Hy-
drocephalus, or dropsy of the brain.
  ENCEPHALIC. Encephalicus; from
iv, in, and xetyaXq, the head.  Relating to
 the encephalon.
   ENCEPHALITIS.   Inflammation
 of the brain.
   Encephalitis Exsudatoria. Hydro-
cephalus internus.
   ENCEPHALOCE'LE.   From  ey-
xefaxos the  brain,  and xr;X*j,  hemia.
Hernia of the brain.  Hernia cerebri.
Fungus cerebri.
   ENCEPH'ALOID. From syxe<paXos,
and eiSos, resemblance.  Cerebriform.
This term is apphed by Laennec to a
species of morbid  substance Avhich fre-
quently constitutes the mass of scirrhous
or cancerous tumors, because of its re-
semblance to the  medullary substance
of the brain.
  ENCEPHALO'MALACIA. Molli-
ties cerebri, or softening of the brain.
  ENCEPH'ALON.   Encephabs ;—
from ev, in, and xefyaXiq, the head.  The
contents of the cranium, including the
cerebrum and cerebellum, medulla ab-
longata, with their bloodvessels, nerves
and investing membranes.
  ENCEPHALOPYO'SIS.  From ev-
xityaxos, the brain,and 7tvov, pus. Ulcer-
ation of the brain.
  ENCHARAXTS.  Scarification.
  ENCHON'DROMA.   From ev,  in,
and xovSos, a cartilage.  Cartilaginous
exostosis, or the formation of gelatinous
cartilage in a bone.
  ENCHYMO'MA. Enchymosis; from
ev, in, and xva, I pour. Infusion or pour-
ing in of blood into the cutaneous ves-
sels, caused by joy, anger, or shame.
  ENCLYS'MA.   From ev,  in, and
xXv£a, to cleanse out. A clyster.
  ENCOE'LIA.  From ev, in,  and xoi-
toa, the belly.  The abdominal viscera.
  ENCOELITIS.  Inflammation of the
abdominal viscera.
  ENCYSTED.   From ev,  in, and
xvatis,  a  bladder.    A tumor or other
matter enclosed in a cyst or sac.
  ENCYSTIS.  An excysted tumor.
  ENDEIXIS.  Indication.
  ENDEM'IC.  Endemicus;  from e v,
in, and Srjfios, the people. The prevalence
of a disease in  a particular  region or
district of country.
  ENDERMAT'IC.   Endermatkus;
from ev, in, and Stpjxatixos, cutaneous.
The treatment of disease by the appli-
cation of remedies to the skin, especially
after the removal of the  cuticle.
   ENDO.  From  tvSov, within.   A
common prefix.
  ENDO-AORTITIS.   From  evSov,
within, and aortitis, inflammation of the
aorta.   Inflammation of the inner mem-
brane of the aorta.
  ENDOCARDITIS.   Inflammation
of the fining membrane of the heart.
  ENDOCARDIUM.    The lining
membrane of the heart.
  ENDOCOLITIS.  Dysentery.
  ENDODONTITIS.   From  trioy,
within, oSovs, a tooth, and itis, signify-
ing inflammation.  Inflammation of the 
END
236
ENO
 lining membrane of a tooth.  This may
 result from exposure of the pulp cavi-
 ty and the presence or  contact of acrid
 and irritating agents, or from exposure
 to sudden transitions of temperature, or
 from  mechanical violence, as in the case
 of a  blow, or  improperly  performed
 dental operations.   It may also occur
 as the result of constitutional disease.
 But from whatever cause it is pro-
 duced, its occurrence is always attend-
 ed with the severest and most agoniz-
 ing pain, and is seldom reheved by any
 other  means than the extraction of the
 tooth, or the destruction of the pulp and
 lining membrane.   It  may, however,
 sometimes be subdued by the timely ap-
 plication of leeches to the gum, and the
 use of such constitutional remedies as
 may  be  indicated by  the state of the
 general health.
  When no means are  used  to  arrest
 the inflammation,  it  generally  very
 soon terminates in suppuration and al-
 veolar abscess.  See  Alveolar Abscess
 and Odontalgia.
  ENDO-ENTERITIS.  Enteritis.
  ENDO-GASTRITIS. Inflammation
 of the lining membrane of the stomach.
  ENDOSIS.   Remission.
  ENDOSMOSE.  Endosmosis; from
 evSov,  within, and ugpos, impulse.  Im-
 bibition.   The transmission of  a fluid
 through a membrane from  the exterior
 to the interior,  or  the attraction of a
 thin fluid from without by a denser one
 within.  Mr.  Lintot, an English den-
 tist, and author of a small Treatise on
 the Teeth, is of the opinion that dental
 caries is the result of the chemical ope-
 ration of  an  acidulated fluid  of the
 mouth,  upon the dentinal tissue, Avhile
undergoing an endosmotic  action on it.
 That an endosmotic action, might, un-
 der certain circumstances, take  place
through the cells of tooth-bone, is not
improbable, and  in the  event of its oc-
 currence, would, it is fair  to presume,
hasten the decomposition  of the part
of the tooth  in  which it  was  taking
place.
   ENDOS'MOTIC.  Relating to en-
 dosmose. >
   ENDOSTEITIS.  Inflammation of
 the lining membrane of a bone.
   EN'EMA.   From evitjfu,  to inject.
 An injection;  a clyster.
   Enema Ano'dynum.   An anodyne
 clyster;  a clyster of starch  and opium.
   Enema Cathar'ticum.  A purging
 clyster.
   Enema Commu'ne.  A common clys-
 ter, compound of water gruel, or molas-
 ses and water, Avith a little oil or lard,
 and common salt.
   Enema Fcet'idum.  A  purging clys-
 ter of tincture of asafcetida.
   Enema Nicotia'ne. A tobacco clys-
 ter.
   Enema Terebinthine.  A turpen-
 tine clyster.
   ENEPIDERMTC.  Enepidermicus;
 from  ev, in, * hi, upon, and Se pfia, the
 skin.  The treatment of disease, by the
 application of remedies, such as plas-
 ters, blisters, &c. upon the skin.
   EN'ERGY.  Energia; from evepyea,
 I act.   In Physiology,  the active opera-
 tion of the various organs of  the body.
 Thus Ave say, the vital energy, the mus-
 cular energy, the nervous energy, Ike.
   ENERVATION.  Enervatio; from
 e, out of, and nervi, strength.  The act
 of debilitating;  a state of Aveakness.
   ENGASTRIMYTHUS.  From ev,
 in, yaotqp, the belly, and pvOsopai, I dis-
 course.  A ventriloquist.
   ENGEISO'MA.  Engizoma;  from
 eyyi£a, I  approximate.   A fracture of
 the skull, in which a broken portion of
 bone passes beneath a sound portion.
   ENGOM'PHOSIS.  Gomphosis.
   ENGORGEMENT.  From en, in,
 and gorge, the throat.   Inordinate flow
 of blood to the vessels of a part or organ,
 and consequent obstruction and increase
 of volume.
   ENNUI.  Mental languor.
   ENOSIS.  Insertion.
   ENOSTO'SIS.   From ev, in, and
oateov, a bone.   A  tumor formed in
 the medullary part of bone. 
ENT
237
ENT
  ENRYTH'MOS.  From ev, and pv9-
\ms, number.  Irregularity in the  beat-
ing of the pulse.
  ENS.   A being; an entity.
  Ens Martis.  An oxyd of iron.
  Ens Primum Solare.  Antimony.
  Ens Veneris.  Muriate of copper.
  EN'SIFORM.  From  ensis, a sword,
and forma,  form.   Sword-hke.  In
Anatomy, applied  to some parts  from
their resemblance to a sword, as the ensi-
form cartilage.
  ENSTALAX'IS.    Instillation,  or
drop by drop.
  ENTERADE'NES.  From evtepov,
an intestine, and aSrjv,  a  gland.   The
mucous intestinal glands.
  ENTERAL'GIA.  From evtepov, in-
testine, and oiJiyoj, pain.  Cohc;  pain in
the intestines.
  ENTERATROPH'IA.  From evte-
pov, intestine, and atrophia, want of nu-
trition.  Atrophy of the intestines.
   ENTEREMPHRAXTS.  From ev-
tepov,  intestine, and sjitfpa|tj, obstruc-
tion.  Obstruction of the  intestines.
   ENTERTC.  Entericus; from evte-
pov, an intestine.  Petaining to  the in
testines.
   ENTERTC A.   Diseases affecting
 the intestinal canal.
   ENTERITIS.  From evtepov, an in-
 testine, and  itis, signifying inflamma-
 tion.  Inflammation of the intestines.
   Enteritis, Follicular.  Typhoid
 fever.
   ENTERO.   A  prefix; from evte
 pot/, an intestine.
   ENTEROBRO'SIS.  From evtepov,
 an intestine, and j3p«(jt j, the act of gnaw
ing. Perforation of the intestines.
   ENTEROCE'LE.  From evtepov, an
intestine, and xqXtj, hernia, tumor.  In-
testinal hernia.
  ENTEROCYSTOCE'LE.    From
evtepov, intestine, xvstis,  a bladder, and
xt]\q, a  tumor.   Intestinal  hernia in
which a portion of the  bladder is includ-
ed.
  ENTEROGRAPHY.   Enterogra-
phia; from evtepov, intestine, and ypo^j?,
description. An anatomical description
of the intestines.
  ENTERO-HYDROCE'LE.  From
evtepov, intestine, vSap, water, and xifki],
tumor. Scrotal hernia, comphcated with
hydrocele.
  ENTERO'LITHUS. From evtepov,
intestine, and xiQos, a stone.  Intestinal
calculus concretions.
  ENTEROL'OGY,    Enterobgia;
from evtepov, intestine, and Xoyos, a dis-
course. Anatomical treatise on the in-
testines.
  ENTEROMALA'CIA.  Enteroma-
laxia;  from evtepov, intestine, and paXa-
aaa, I soften.  Softening of the coats of
the intestines.
  ENTEROM'PHALUS.  From evt-
epov, intestine, and opfyaxos, umbilicus.
Umbilical intestinal hernia.
  ENTERON.  Kvtepov, intestine.
  ENTEROP'ATHY. Enteropathia;
from  evtepov, intestine, and  rtaOos,  a
disease.  A generic term for intestinal
disease.
  ENTEROPHLO'GIA.  Enteritis.
  ENTERORRAPHIA.   Enterorra-
phy; from evtepov, intestine, and pa^, a
suture.  A suture of the intestines.
  ENTERO'S ES.  A class of diseases
embracing all that affect the intestines.
  ENTEROT'OME.  In Anatomy, the
dissection of the intestines.  In Surgei-y,
an  operation for an artificial anus, or for
the evacuation of accumulated feces.
  ENTEROZOA.  Worms.  SeeEn-
tozoa.
  ENTOMOL'OGY.  From evtoua, in-
sects, and ^oyoj, a discourse.  A treatise
on  insects.
  ENTO'NIA. Tenson. Tonic spasm.
  ENTONIC.   Entonkus;  from *„,
denoting excess, and tovos, tone.  Great
tension;  increased action.
  ENTOZO'A.   Entozoaria; from ev-
tos, within, and £aov, an animal. Para-
sitical  animals,  or  those which in-
fest the  interior of  other animals, as
worms in the intestines, &c.
  ENTOZOON FOLLICULORUM.
Acarus folliculorum.    An  articulated 
EPH               238                EPI
animalcule, found in the cutaneous fol-
licles.
  ENTRAILS. The abdominal visce-
ra ; the intestines.
  ENTRICO'MA.  From ev, in, and
tpixapa, hair.  The ciliary edge of the
eyelids.
  ENTROP'IUM.   Entropion; from
ev, in, and tperta, I turn.  Inversion of
the eyelids, so that the  eyelashes are
brought in contact with, and irritate
and inflame the globe of the eye.
  ENURE'SIS.   From *m,pEco, I void
urine in bed.  Involuntary flow of urine
from paralysis or relaxation of the sphic-
ter of the bladder.
  EP-, EPH-, EPI-.  E*, £$,«", upon,
above; and meaning, above,  exterior,
augmentation, addition, increase, recip-
rocal action, repetition.
  EPACMASTICOS. From em, and
axfioXa, I  increase.  Fevers which in-
crease in violence, from the commence-
ment till the crisis.
  EPANETUS.  From ertavi^ixi, to re-
mit.   Applied by Dr. Good  to  remit-
tent fevers.
  Efanetus Hectica. Hectic fever.
  Epanetds Malignus Flavus.  Yel-
Ioav fever.
  Epanetus Mitis.  Remittent fever.
  EPAPH^E'RESIS.  From ena^ai-
pea, I  take aAvay.   Repeated obstruc-
tion  or evacuation;  particularly   of
blood.
  EPAR'MA.  A tumor.
  EPHEL'CIS. From em, upon, and
eXxos, an ulcer.  The crust of an ulcer.
  EPHE'LIDES.   From em,  upon,
and 97X1,0$,  the sun.   Freckles;  sun-
burns.  A cutaneous disease chacteriz-
ed by small and large brown spots upon
the skin, and caused, as the name im-
ports, by the direct rays of the sun.
  EPHE'MERA.   From em, during,
and yuepa, a day.  In Patlwlogy,  an
epithet applied to disease, especially a
fever, which lasts  but  a day, also to a
poison which proves fatal  within a day.
  EPHIALTES.  From efaxxouai,  to
leap  upon.  Nightmare;  a  distressing
sensation Avhich occurs during sleep, in
Avhich the individual fancies himself
threatened by the approach of an ene-
my  or  eminent danger from Avhich he
cannot escape.
  EPHIDRO'SIS.   From  «$hoPov,  to
perspire.   A copious morbid perspira-
tion.  A colliquative sweat.
  EPICAR'PIUM.  From  em, upon,
and xapttos, the wrist.  An application
to the wrist.
  EPICHRO'SIS.   From  em, upon,
and ^pwjita, color.  Discoloration of the
surface.
  EPICOL'IC.  From em, upon, and
xaxov, the colon. The part of the abdo-
men over the colon.
  EP'ICONDYLE.  From em, upon,
and xovSvXos, a condyle.  A  protuber-
ance at the loAver extremity  of the os
humeros, Avhich gives  attachment to
the outer lateral ligament of the elbow-
joint, and to a very strong tendon to
which several muscles of the posterior
part  of  the forearm are attached; is so
called,  because  it  is  above the con-
dyle.
  EPICONDYLO-CUB1TALIS. The
anconeus muscle.
  Epicondylo-Radialis.  The supin-
ator radii brevis.
  Epicondylo-Supra-Metacarpianus.
The carpi radialis brevior.
   Epicondylo-Supra-Phalangettia-
nus Communis.  The extensor-digito-
rum communis.
  Epicondylo-Supra-Phalangettia'-
nus Mi'nimi Digiti.  The extensor pro-
prius minimi digiti.
  EPICOPHO'SIS.   Cophosis;  deaf-
ness.
  EPICRA'NIUM.  From em, upon,
and xpavtov, the  cranium.  Applied to
various  parts  on the  cranium, as the
tendinous expansion of  the  occipito-
frontalis muscle, and even to the whole
scalp.
  EPICRA'SIS. From em, upon, and
xepavwixi, I temper.  The treatment of
disease by soothing and demulcent rem-
edies, which the humorists supposed 
EPI               239                EPI
possessed the  power of correcting the
vitiated humors.
   EPICRI'SIS. The judgment of the
natural causes, treatment and probable
termination of a disease, founded on
scientific principles.
   EPIDEM'IC.   Epidemicus;  from
em, upon,  and Sypos, the people.  A
disease which simultaneously attacks
multitudes of persons at the same time,
and in the same district, and which is
dependent on a noxious condition of the
atmosphere.
   EPIDEN'DRUM VANILLA.  See
Vanilla.
   EPID'ERIS.  Thechtoris.
   EPIDER'MIC.  Epidermkus; from
emhepiiis, the scarf skin.   Pertaining to
the epidermis.
   EPIDERMIS. From em, upon, and
Sep/xa,  the  skin. The cuticle, or scarf
skin.
   EPIDERMOID.   From **i&PAus,
and eiSos,  resemblance.  Resembling the
epidermis.
   EPI'DESIS.  In Surgery,  the act of
of binding  up  a wound; also, the  ap-
plication  of a ligature to a wounded
vessel.
   EPIDES'MOS.  A bandage or liga-
ture.
   EPIDIDYMIS.  From em, upon,
and SiSvuos, a testicle.   A hard oblong
substance upon the testicle formed by
the convolutions of the vas deferens.
   EPI'DOSIS.  From em, and SiSafii,
to give.  Increase, as of a disease, or in
the growth of the body,
   EPID'ROME. From emSpsfia, I run
upon.   An afflux of humors.
   EPIGASTRIC. Epigastricus; from
em, upon, and yaotqp,  the stomach.
Relating to the epigastrium.
  Epigastric   Artery.   An  artery
given off by the external iliac when it
passes under Poupart's ligament, ascends
between the rectus muscle and perito-
neum, and anastamoses about the um-
bilicus, with the internal mammary ar-
tery.
  Epigastric Region.  The region, on
 each side, below the short ribs, extend-
 ing  from the diaphragm to  Avithin two
 fingers of the umbilicus.
   EPIGASTRIUM.  The epigastric
 region,  or part situated immediately
 over the stomach.
   EPIGASTROCE'LE.   From em,
 upon, yaottjp, the stomach, and xr^.r[, a
 tumor.  Hernia, at or near  the epigas-
 tric region, whether  of the stomach or
 not.
   EPIGEN'ESIS.   From  em, upon,
 and  yeveais generation.   A  theory  of
 generation  which regards the fetus as
 receiving at once from each parent the
 materials necessary for its formation.
   EPIGLOTTIC.  Epigbttkus.  Per-
 taining to the epiglottis.
   Epiglottic Gland.  A collection of
 small glands situated at the  base of the
 anterior surface of the epiglottis.
   EPIGLOTTIS.    From  em, upon,
 and yxattis, the tongue.  An oval car-
 tilage, concave  posteriorly, and convex
 anteriorly,  situated at the root  of the
 tongue  upon the superior  opening of
 larynx.   It is loose at its superior  ex-
 tremity,  and  attached at its inferior to
 the thyroid cartilage.   Its use is to ease
 the glottis,  or superior opening  of  the
 larynx, and prevent the introduction of
 alimentary substances into the air pas-
 sages during deglutition.
   EPIGLOTTITIS.  Inflammation of
 the epiglottis.
   EPIGLOUTIS,   From  em, upon,
 and yXovtos, the buttocks.  The superior
 region of the buttocks.
   EP'ILEPSY.  Epilepsia.  Emxrjfi-
 ■^ia;  from emxappava, I seize upon.   A
 disease of the cerebro-spinal organs, at-
 tended with violent convulsions, coma,
 and  generally, foaming at the mouth.
 The  disease may be idiopathic, or symp-
 tomatic.  In the former case, it results
 from a morbid affection of the encepha-
 lon;  in the latter, from worms, intesti-
 nal irritation,  external violence, or from
some other accidental cause.
  EPILEPTIC. Epikptkus; affected
with, or relating to, epilepsy. 
EPI
240
EPI
  EPINYCTIDES.  From em, upon,
and w%, night.  Eruptions which ap-
pear during the night, and disappear in
the morning.  A kind of nettle rash.
  EPIPAROXYS'MUS.  The two fre-
quent occurrence of the febrde parox-
ysm.
  EPIPH^ENOM'ENON. The occur-
rence of any unusual  symptom during
the progress of a disease.
  EPIPHLOGIS'MA. From em,upon,
and <}>?ioyi|u», I inflame.   Inflammation
or burning heat in any part.
  EPIPH'ORA.  From em<pepa, I car-
ry to.  Weeping.   Continued involun-
tary flow of tears, caused by disease, or
irritation of the lachrymal passages.
   EPIPHRAGMA.    In Botany, a
transverse membrane of the peristoma
of mosses, which sometimes closes the
orifice of the urn and remains long after
the opercula have separated.
   EPIPHYL'LA.  From em,  upon,
and tyvxxov, a leaf.   In Botany, parts or
organs growing upon the leaf,  as  the
pedicle of jungermannia epiphylla; also,
to plants themselves, which vegetate on
the leaves of other plants, and hence, are
called epiphylbus fungi.
   EPIPHYMATA.  Diseases  of the
skin.
   EPIPHYSIS.  From em, upon, and
tyva, I arise.  Any portion of bone sepa-
rated from the body of the bone  by  in-
tervening  cartilage, which  ultimately
becomes converted into  bone.  The
epiphysis then becomes a process.
   EPIPLOCE'LE.  From  £*«aoov,
omentum, and  xqxq,  hernia. Hernia,
formed by the omentum.
   EPIPLOIC  Pertaining to the epip-
loon or omentum.
   Epiploic Appen'dages. Numerous
small prolongations of the peritoneum
filled  with  adipose matter, extending
beyond the surface of the colon and rec-
tum.
   Epiploic Arteries.   The branches
from  the  gastro-epiploic  artery which
are distributed to the epiploon.
   EPIPLO-ISCHIOCE'LE. FromtTti-
rixoov, the epiploon, ieXiotj, the ischium,
and xqXt], a tumor.  Protrusion  of the
omentum through the ischiadic notch.
  EPIPLOITIS.   From emitxoov, the
omentum, and itis, denoting inflamma-
tion.  Inflammation of the omentum.
  EPIPLOMEROCE'LE.  From emn-
Xoov, the omentum,  nypos, the thigh,
and xrfKri, a tumor.  A femoral hernia,
formed by a protusion of the omentum.
  EPIPLOM'PHALON.  From emn-
Xoov, the omentum,  and ofifpaXos, the
navel.  An omental umbilical hernia.
  EPIPLOM'PHRASIS. From emx-
Xoov, the  omentum, and sufypaoea, I ob-
struct.  Obstruction of the omentum.
  EPIPLOON.  From em, above, and
rtxea, I swim, or float.  The omentum,
or cawl, which consists of a duplicature
of the peritoneum, is so called, because it
floats, as it were, above a portion of the
intestines.
  EPIPLOSCHEOCE'LE. Fromtrtt*-
kooj>, the omentum, oaXeov, the scrotum,
and x^Xrj, a tumor.  Omental hernia, in
the scrotum.
  EPIPORO'MA. -Emitafta.  A hard
tumor about the joints; the callus of a
fracture.
  EPIS'CHESIS.   From emaxva, I
restrain.  A suppression of excretions.
  EPISCOPA'LES   VAL'VULiE.—
The mitral valves.
  EPISEMA'SIA.  A sign.  A symp-
tom.
  EPISIONCUS. A swelling or tu-
mor of the labia pudendi.
  EPISPADIAS.  From  em, above,
and omia, I draw. A malformation  of
the urethra, consisting in its opening on
the upper side of the penis.
  EPISPASTIC. Epispasticus; from
em,  above, and  amxa, I draw. Any
substance,  which, when applied to the
skin, excites inflammation  and causes
an effusion of serum under the epider-
mis.   Among the  substances which
produce these  effects, are  cantharides
and mustard.
   EPISPASTICUM.  A blister.
   EPISTASIS.   From  em, upon, 
EPI                 241                EPI
 and ataa, I rest.  A substance which
 floats on the surface of urine.
   EPISTAX'IS. From em, upon, and
 ota£a, I  flow, drop by drop.   Nasal
 hemorrhage.
   EPISTER'NAL.  From  em, upon,
 and atepvov, the sternum.  The first or
 anterior portion of the sternum, which,
 in birds, sustain the forked clavicle.
   EPISTHOT'ONOS.  From emtfev,
 forwards,  and  teiva, to  extend.  A
 variety of tetanus, in which the body is
 drawn forward.
   EPISYNAN'CHE.   Spasm of the
 pharynx.
   EPIT'ASIS.  From eti, and teiveiv,
 to extend.  The period of violence of a
 fever, paroxysm, or disease.
   EPITHE'LIUM.  From em, upon,
 and ^jXrj, a nipple.  The thin layer of
 epidermis which invests parts deprived
 of the derma, properly  so  called, as
 the  nipple, and mucous  membrane in
 general.  This structure,  according to
 Mr. Nasmyth, is composed of  cells,
 and though destitute of vessels, he says,
 it cannot be regarded as inorganic.
   Epithelium of the Mouth. On the
 structure of that portion of the epithe-
 lium which  lines  the  cavity of the
 mouth,he observes, "In the fetal subject,
 previous to the extrusion  of the teeth,
 it forms on the alveolar arch a dense,
 projecting layer,  distinguishable  from
 the surrounding membrane by its white-
 ness, and by the  existence on its sur-
 face of ridges and sulci, having a  Avav-
 ing  course and a  variable  direction.
 The alveolar  epithelium  is  thicker in
 proportion to the  youth of the subject
 examined.  It is most prominent where
 it corresponds with the molar teeth;  its
 internal surface is  concave,  receiving
 the  projecting  mucous  membrane.
 This portion presents various objects for
 investigation.
   "Firstly,  as regards its  composition:
 It is made up of a mass of scales, lying
 one on the surface of the  other.   This
disposition  shows that the terms "den-
tal cartilage,"  or the "cartilage of the
 gum," which have  hitherto been ap-
 plied to this structure, give an  errone-
 ous idea of its true nature, for cartilage
 always presents the corpuscle discover-
 ed and described by Purkinje.  As in
 other portions of the epithelium, the ex-
 ternal scales  here are the larger, and
 this holds good generally, until we come
 to the  surface of the vascular mucous
 membrane, which presents simple cells
 with their corpuscles.
   "In the interior of this alveolar epithe-
 lium,  where  it corresponds to the mo-
 lar teeth, small vesicles may be frequent-
 ly observed, varying in size, from one-
 quarter to  one-eighth of a line in diame-
 ter. They appear to the naked eye to be
 transparent; under the microscope their
 parietes are found to consist of  attenu-
 ated scales, and their cavity to contain
 a fluid abounding in minute granules
 and cells.* The internal surface of the
 epithelium, covering  the alveolar arch,
 frequently presents concavities or inden-
 tations which are from a line and a half
 to three or four lines in circumference :
 they correspond  to projections from the
 mucous membrane formed by a larger
 species of vesicle.  The latter is deeply
 implanted in the vascular mucous mem-
 brane.  The parietes of these vesicles
 are composed of a very delicate mem-
 brane ; they contain a transparent fluid
 which coagulates on  the application of
 heat or acid, or on immersion in spirit,
 and in this fluid floats numerous glob-
 ules and scales  similar to  those of the
 epithelium generally.  The internal or
 attached surface  of the alveolar epithe-
 lium also  presents numerous fringed
 processes   measuring  from one  line to
 one and  a half lines in  length, and
 half a  line in breadth, which sink into
 the substance of the subjacent mucous
 membrane. Under the microscope these

  ♦The vesicles here alluded  to, fire  most
 probably those  which Serres  describes as
 glands for the secretion  of tartar; they are
 very numerous, even after  the extrusion of
 the incisor teeth of the calf, and are seen with
great facility internally. 
              EPI                24!

fringes are found  to  be  composed  of
elongated  scales  connected together,
forming masses which divide and sub-
divide, until  they attain such an ex-
treme tenuity that the  most minute ter-
minations consist but  of two scales  in
marginal apposition.   If the epithelium
be carefully separated  from  the surface
of the mucous membrane corresponding
to the unextruded molar teeth, and placed
in water or in diluted spirit of wine for
some little time, its internal or attached
surface presents these  fringes much en-
larged  and forming a mass more consid-
erable in size than the dense epithelium
itself.
   "The epithelium covering the mucous
membrane of the  palate presents trans-
verse rugae, corresponding  to  those of
the mucous membrane.  If  these pala-
tal rugae of the epithelium of the calf be
carefully  examined from the  internal
surface with a magnifying power  of
one  inch  focal distance,  each  will  be
found to consist, or to be composed of
numerous depressions, or cul  de  sacs,
which receive prolongations or pointed
processes of the subjacent mucous mem-
brane.
   "They are  of extreme  tenuity,  and,
when  viewed by  the aid  of high mag-
nifying powers, are observed to consist
of distinct scales.
   "A  question of much interest, and
one to which I have paid considerable at-
tention, is whether recent investigators
are  warranted in considering  mucous
and epithelium as identical.  I  am dis-
posed to think that they are formations
quite  independent of each other; but
my reasons for arriving at this conclu-
sion are  numerous, and  the details of
my investigations upon this part of the
subject I  propose to treat of at length
elsewhere."
   EPITHEM.   Epithema; from em,
upon,  and tiAr^i,  I put.   A term which
comprehends all topical remedies, with
the exception of plasters and ointments.
   EPITHEMATIUM.   Epithem.
   EPITH'ESIS.   The straightening of
i               Eau

 crooked  limbs,  by  means  of instru-
 ments.
   EPIZOOTIC  Epizootkus; from
 em, upon,  and ^mov, an animal.  The
 simultaneous occurrence of a  disease
 among a great number of the loAver ani-
 mals.  In the Veterinary Art, it  has the
 same meaning that  epidemic   has  in
 medicine.
   EPODE.  The treatment of  disease
 by incantation.
   EPO'MIS.   From  em, upon, and
 auos, the  shoulder.    The  acromion;
 the upper part of the  shoulder.
   EPSE'MA.  Decoction.
   EPSOM SALTS. Sulphate of mag-
 nesia.
   EPU'LIS.   From em,  upon, and
 ovXov, the gum.   A fungous excrescence
 or tumor of the gums.   It is some-
 times soft,  at  other times  hard, and
 makes its  appearance upon the gum
 between two teeth, or from the  sockets
 of decayed teeth.  It is sometimes of a
 simple and at other times of a malignant
 character.  See Jaws, morbid growths of.
   EPULO'SIS.  Cicatrization.
   EPULOTIC.   Epubtkus;   from
 ertovxoa, to cicatrize, or heal up a wound.
 Remedies which promote cicatrization.
   EQJJILIB'RIUM.   From  ozqum,
 equal, and librare, to weigh.  In Medi-
 cine, harmony in the reciprocal action
 of the organs of the body.
   EQJJI'NIA.  From equinus,  belong-
 ing to a horse.   Glanders.  A contagi-
 ous, and sometimes a dangerous disease,
 and is produced by inoculation Avith cer-
 tain diseased  fluids  generated  in  the
 horse, mule,  &c.   Two  species  are
 met with, equinia mitis, caused by inoc-
 ulation  with the fluid of  grease, and
 equinia ghndulosa, a malignant and usu-
 ally fatal disease.
   EQJJISETUM.  Hippuris vulgaris,
 or mare's tail.
   EQUITATION.    From equus, a
 horse.  Exercise on horseback.
   EaUIV'ALENTS,   CHEMICAL.
 In Chemistry, a term introduced by Dr.
 Wollaston to  express  the proportional
24 
Eau
243
ERE
Aveight in which bodies elementary and
compound, reciprocally unite.
Table of Elementary  Substances, with
  their Symbols and Chemical Equiva-
  lents.*
  Elements.
 Aluminium
 Antimony
 Arsenic  .
 Barium   .
 Bismuth .
 Boron .   .
 Bromine .
 Cadmium.
 Calcium  .
 Carbon
 Cerium  .
 Chlorine  .
 Chromium
 Cobalt .   .
 Columbium
 Copper
 Fluorine .
 Glucinium
 Gold .   .
 Hydrogen.
 Iodine
 Iridium
 Iron  .  .
 Lead  .  .
 Lithium .
 Magnesium
 Manganese
 Mercury  .
 Molybdenum
 Nickel  . .
 Nitrogen
 Osmium  .
 Oxygen  .
 Palladium
 Phosphorus
 Platinum .
 Potassium
 Rhodium .
Selenium
Silicium   .
 Silver
Sodium  .
Strontium .
Symbols.
    Al.
.    Sb.
    As.
,    Ba.
    Bi.
,    B.
    Br.
,    Cd.
    Ca.
    C.
    Ce.
,    CI.
    Cr.
    Co.
    Ta.
    Cu.
    F.
.    G.
    Au.
.    H.
    I.
.    Ir.
    Fe.
.    Pb.
    L.
.    Mg.
    Mn.
.    Hg.
    Mo.
.    Ni.
    N.
.    Os.
    O.
.    Pd.
    P.
.    Pt.
    K.
    R.
    Se.
    Si.
    Ag.
    Na.
,    Sr.
Equivalents,
   13.07
   64.06
   37.07
   68.07
   71.00
   10.09
   78.04
   58.08
   20.05
    6.12
   46.00
   35.42
   28.00
   29 05
  185.00
   31.06
   18.68
   26.05
  199.02
    1.00
  126 03
   98.08
   28.00
  103.06
    6.00
   12.07
   27.07
  202.00
   47.07
   29.05
   14.15
   99.07
    8.00
   53.03
   15.07
   98.08
   39.15
   52 02
   39.06
   22.05
  108.00
   23.03
   43.08
   Elements.
Sulphur .
Tellurium .
Thorium .
Tin  .  .  .
Titanium
Tungsten  .
Vanadium
Uranium .
Yttrium
Zinc .  .  .
Zirconium
 Symbols. Equivalents.
    S.      16.01
 .   Te.     64.02
    Th.     59.06
 .   Sn.     57.09
    Ti.      24.03
 .   W.     99.07
    V.      68.05.
 .   U.     217.00
.   Y.      32.02
 .   Zn.     32.03
    Zr.      33.07
•Turner's Chemistry.
  EaUIV'OCAL. From ozquus, equal,
and vox, voice.  Symptoms of a doubt-
ful nature, or which belong to several
diseases.
  EOUUS.  A constant nictitation or
winking.
  ERADICATION. Eradicatio; from
e, from, and radix, a root.  The complete
removal, or rooting out of a disease.
  ERAD'ICATIVE. Any thing which
possesses the power of rooting out, or
completely curing a disease.
  ERASTUS.    Dissertation on  the
Teeth, by.   Tiqur, 1595.
  ERECTILE TISSUE.  A peculiar
tissue of the animal economy, described
by some  writers, but not recognized by
others, consisting  of  a vascular  net-
work,  liberally  supplied  with nerves,
and  susceptible  of erection  by an in-
creased flow of blood.  It enters into the
composition of the corpora cavernosa of
the penis and clitoris, the inferior part
of the  vagina and corpos spongiosum-
urethrae; of the lips, iris, nipples, ner-
vous papillae, &c.  The same tissue is
sometimes developed as a morbid struc-
ture, as exemplified in naevus mater-
nus, many hemorrhoidal, varicose, poly-
pous and other tumors.
  ERECTION.  Erectio. The action,
or enlargement which  takes place in
erectile tissues.
  ERECTOR  CLITORIDIS.  The
ischio-cavernosus.  A muscle, which,
by drawing the clitoris downwards and
backwards, forces the blood into it from
its crus, and serves to make the body of
it more tense. 
               ERO               2-

  Erector Penis.  The ischio-caver-
nosus.  A muscle of the penis, which,
by its contraction,  forces the urine  and
semen forward, and causes  the blood to
flow into the corpus  cavernosum  and
the glands, and thus to distend them.
  EREMACAU'SIS.   From epWos,
waste, and  xavois, combustion.  The
sIoav  combustion,  oxydation, or decay
which takes place in  organic  bodies
when freely exposed to air and moisture.
  ERETHISM.   Erethismus; from
epeOi^a,  I irritate.   Exaltation,  or  in-
crease of the vital  phenomena in  any
organ or tissue.  Irritation.
  ERETHIS'MA.   Rubefacient.
  ERETHIS'MUS.  Irritation.
  Erethismus  Erbriosum.  Delirium
tremens.
  Erethismus Hydrophobia. Hydro-
phobia.
  Erethismus  Mercurialis.  A state
of the constitution produced by mercury,
characterized by depression of strength,
anxiety  about the  praecordia, frequent
sighing,  irregular  action of the heart,
small quick pulse, sometimes intermit-
ting;  tremors, shrivelled countenance,
a sense of coldness, &c.
  ERETHIT'IC.    Appertaining   to
erethism.
  EREUG'MOS.   Eructation.
  ERGOT.  Spurred rye.   See Secale
Cornu turn.
  ERGOTA.  Ergot.
  ERGOTISM. The effects produced
by ergot.
  ERIG'ERON    CANADENSE.—
Canada fleabane.
  ERODED.  Gnawed.
  ERODIUM  MOSCHATUM.  Ge-
ranium moschatum.
  ERO'SION.   Erosio; from erodere,
to eat away.  The gradual  destruction
of a part by the action of  a corrosive
substance.
  Erosion of the Teeth.   A species
of caries, characterized by a gradual de-
composition, first,  of the enamel,  and
afterwards of the subjacent osseous tis-
sue of a tooth, when it  is termed caries.
                 ERO

It has been divided by European con-
tinental writers into congenital and ac-
cidental.  The former occurs previously
to the  eruption of the teeth, and is de-
pendent upon an acidulated condition of
the mucous fluid contained in the sacs
of the teeth; the latter, at any  subse-
quent period of life, and is referable to
an acidulated condition of  the mucous
fluids of the mouth.
  Erosion, properly  speaking, confines
itself to the enamel,  and is usually de-
veloped on a series of teeth at the same
time.  When the disease occurs subse-
quently to the eruption of  the teeth, it
generally manifests  itself on their labial
and  outer surfaces  near  the  margin
of the  gums,  and  the  decomposed
part of the  enamel  is  generally white
and of a  soft chalky  texture, though
sometimes it  assumes  other aspects.
The eroded parts are usually very sen-
sitive to the touch,  and to  impressions
of heat and cold.  After it has destroyed
the enamel, the exposed bone assumes
a light or dark brown appearance.
  Teeth of a soft texture, are more lia-
ble to be attached by it than very hard
teeth,  and it  occurs more frequently
during  protracted  inflammatory  and
other febrile diseases, than  when the
functional operations of the body, gen-
erally, are healthily performed.   In-
deed, any constitutional disease  which
has a tendency to impair the mucous
secretions of the body, may be regarded
as favoring the occurrence of the dis-
ease, and although  the  enamel on the
anterior and outer surfaces of the teeth
are more hable to be attacked by it than
any  other parts, yet it  does sometimes
manifest itself at  other  points on these
organs. But here, the mucous secretions
of the mouth are less frequently washed
from the  teeth by the  saliva, and  it is
for this reason, that erosion oftener de-
velopes itself on these than other parts
of the teeth.
  In speaking of congenital  erosion of
the teeth,  M. Delabarre, says, "in cases
of children that have been sick, the part
4 
ERR               245               ERY
of the tooth that was formed before the
disease,"  (meaning  the  constitutional
affection which had caused the acidula-
tion of the fluids of the  sacs,)  "is fre-
quently sound, though situated in the
midst of disordered fluids, Avhence," says
he, "I have concluded that the action of
this fluid is the more fatal to the enamel
as the enamel is the more recent, so that
its  dissolution may gradually happen,
as it is deposited by the  vessels of the
germ* in a state of disease, and conse-
quently before it has acquired that de-
gree of  aggregation  and  consistence
Avhich is necessary to resist the acidu-
lated mucus  that surrounds it.  To as-
sure myself of the acidity, I placed this
mucus upon blue paper dyed with the
turnsole, the color of which, on touching
the  mucus, was immediately changed
to a red, the more  marked as the teeth
appear to be more  strongly corroded."
  The enamel is  sometimes so badly
eroded on the eruption of the teeth, as
to render their  preservation  hopeless.
But whether the disease be congenital
or accidental the treatment  is  the same,
and  for a description of  which, the
reader is referred to the article on caries
of the teeth.
  EROT'IC. Erotkus; from epas, love.
Relating to the passion of love, as erotic
melancholy, erotic delirium,  &c.
  EROTOMA'NIA.  Eromania; from
epas, love, and /Mtvia, madness.  Melan-
choly, or alienation of mind produced
by love.
  ERRATIC. Erraticus ; from errare,
to wander.  Wandering; irregular.  In
Pathology, applied to fevers which ob-
serve no regular type, and to pains, and
Cutaneous  diseases,  which shift from
place to place.
  ER'RHINE.   Errhinum;  from  ev,
in,   and  pu>, the nose.  A substance,
which, when applied to  the  nose, ex-
cites sneezing and increased  secretion.
  * M. Delabarre, is of the opinion that the
enamel is an integral  part of the tooth, and
that its animal and earthy bases are derived
from the germ or pulp.
      21*
  ER'RHYSIS.  From ev, in, and pea,
I flow.  A slight hemorrhage.
  ERROR  LOCI.  An  epithet, em-
ployed by Boerhaave, to express  devia-
tion of fluids, when  they enter  vessels
not destined to receive them;  as, for
example, when red blood  enters vessels
which circulate only  the serous part of
this fluid, they  become obstructed by
error of place.
  ERUCTATION.  Eructatio;  from
eructare, to  belch. An emission from
the mouth of gas from  the stomach.
  ERUPTION.  Eruptio; from erum-
pere, to  break, or burst out.  According
to the usual  acceptation of this term, in
Pathology, it signifies the development
of an exanthematous affection  on the
surface, and  the exanthema itself.  It is,
however,  sometimes applied to a co-
pious evacuation  of a  fluid; blood, se-
rum, pus, or gas, from a canal or cavity.
Also, the emergence of the teeth from
the gums.
  Eruption of the Teeth. See Den-
tition.
  ERUPTIVE.   Eruptivus.  Applied
to diseases, especially fevers, which are
accompanied by  an eruption  on the
skin.
  ERYN'GIUM  AaUAT'ICUM.—
Eryngium;   water  eryngo;  button
snake-root.
  Eryngium Marit'imum.   The sea
holly, or eryngo.
  ERYSIMUM ALLIARIA.   The
systematic name of Jack-in-the-hedge,
or stinking hedge-mustard.
  ERYSIPELAS.  From tfmo, I draw
in,  and  rieXas, near, so  called, from its
tendency to spread to neighboring parts.
A cutaneous phlegmasia, vulgarly term-
ed  St.  Anthony's fire,  accompanied
with swelling,  diffused  redness,  but
more  or less circumscribed, pain and
heat, and vesications.   Several species
are  described by medical writers.
  ERYSIPEL'ATOUS.  Belonging to
erysipelas.
  ERYTHE'MA.   From tprtpof, red.
Redness. According to Dr. Cullen, a 
ERY              246              ETH
rash,  or inflammatory  blush, without
fever.  It is regarded, also, by some au-
thors  to be  analogous to  erysipelas.
The term is employed by Dr. Willan to
designate a genus of cutaneous diseases
of the third  order, exanthemata,  and
enumerates six species.   He defines it
to be  "a nearly  continuous redness of
some portion of the skin, attended with
disorder of the constitution, but not con-
tagious."
  Erythema Anthrax.  Anthrax.
  Erythema Centrif'ugum.  Erythe-
ma of the face, characterized by a small
red spot, which sometimes spreads over
the whole face.
  Erythema Epidemicum.   See Pel-
lagra.
  Erythema Fugax.   An erythema
which consists of red patches of an ir-
regular shape, and which, sometimes,
occurs  in febrile diseases and during
dentition.
  Erythema Leve.  A slight shining
redness  of  the skin, especially on the
lower extremities, of persons affected
with anasarca.
  Erythema Margina'tum.  Erythe-
ma bounded  by a hard irregular red
border, and in which  the patches are
distinctly separated from each other.
  Erythema Mercuriale.  Eczema
mercuriale.
  Erythema Nodo'sum. A form of ery-
thema peculiar to females, consisting of
oval patches oh the legs  which soon rise
into hard oval protuberances.
  Erythema Papula'tum.  Erythema
which appears in irregular  patches on
the neck, arms and breast, and which,
in about two weeks disappears, leaving
a bluish hue upon the skin.
  ERYTHROEI'DES.  The tunica
vaginahs testis.
  ERYTHROID VESICLE. A pyri-
form vesicle of the fetus, longer, but of
the same  diameter  as the umbilical
vesicle.
  ERYTHRO'NIUM.   See Erythro-
nium Americanum.
  Erythronium Americanum.  Yel-
low snake leaf; adder's tongue. A plant
possessed of emetic properties.
  ERYTHRO'SIS. From epvOpos, red.
Florid plethora.
  ES'CHAR. Escliara; from eax^poa,
to scab over. The crust or disorganized
portion  of animal substance produced
by the application of caustic.
  ESCHAROT'IC.   Escharoticus ;—
from  scr^opa,  eschar.  Any substance,
which,  Avhen applied to living tissues,
is  capable  of  producing  an  eschar.
Among the substances which produce
this effect, are the caustic potassa, con-
centrated mineral  acids, sulphate of
copper,  &c.
  ES'CULENT. Escukntus; from esca,
food.  Such plants and animals as may
be used  for food.
  ESO-. Esw, within.  A prefix signi-
fying  an internal disease.
  ESOCOLITIS.  Dysentery.
  ESOENTERITIS.  Inflammation of
the lining membrane of the intestines.
  ESOGASTRITIS.  Inflammation of
the inner membrane of the stomach.
  ESPHLA'SIS.  From $*aw, I break.
A fracture  of the skull, in  which the
fragments are depressed.
  ES'SENCE.   Essentia.   A volatile
oil, obtained from  plants by distillation,
diluted with alcohol.
  ES'SENTIA.  An  essence;  also,  a
tincture.
  ESSENTIAL.  Pertaining to an es-
sence.
  Essential Oil.  Any volatile oil.
  Essential Salt of Bark.  A watery
extract of Peruvian bark.
  Essential Salt of Lemons. A mix-
ture of cream of tartar and binoxalate of
potash.
  ES'SERA.  Sora.   Sore.  A species
of cutaneous  eruption, consisting of
broad, shining, red spots.
  ESTHIOM'ENUS.  From eoBia, I
eat. An eroding disease, as some erup-
tions and ulcers.
  ESTI'VAL.  AZstivus. Pertaining to
summer, as summer diseases.
  ETHER.  iEther.  See ^Ether. 
               ETI

  Ether, Acetic  An acetate of the i
oxyd of ethyle.  Acetic naptha.
  Ether, Chlorine. See Chloroform.
  Ether, Hydric Sulphuric ether.
  Ether,  Hydrochloric   iEther,
hydrochloricus.
  Ether, Hydrocyanic  iEther, hy-
drocyanicus
  Ether,  Hyponitrous.  iEther,  ni-
trosus.  Nitrous ether.  Nitric ether.
  Ether,  Muriatic   ^Ether, hydro-
chloric.  The extremely volatile chlo-
ride of ethyle.
  Ether, Nitric  iEther, nitrosus.
  Ether,  (Enanthic  The  aromatic
liquid which imparts to wines their pe-
culiar odor.
  Ether,  Sulphuric   iEther, sul-
phuricus.
  ETHEREAL.   Pertaining to, or of
the nature of, ether.
  Ethereal Oil.  Oleum eethereum.
  ETHERIFICATION. The conver-
sion of fluids into ethers.
  ETHERINE.  A solid body, depos-
ited from etherole in the cold.  It con-
tains  the same elements in  the same
ratio with etherole.
  ETHEROLE.  An oily product of
the decomposition of the sweet oil of
wine Avhen heated with Avater.  It is in-
soluble, and isomeric with olefiant gas.
  ETH'MOID Ethmoides ; from eOuos,
a sieve, and eiSos, form.  Sieve-like.
  Ethmoid Bone. Os ethmoides. One
of the eight bones of the cranium, situ-
ated betAveen  the eyes and  ethmoidal
notch of the os frontis, of a light cellu-
lar texture, and cubical form.  It is ar-
ticulated with the frontal, lachrymal,
sphenoid, superior maxillary, palatine,
the vomer,  and inferior spongy bones.
  ETHMOIDAL.  Applied to parts
Avhich pertain to, or are connected with,
the ethmoid bone, as the ethmoidal cells,
ethmoidal arteries, &c.
  ETHULE.  Ethyle.  A term applied
by Berzellius to the elementary carbon
and hydrogen of ether.
  ETIOLATION. Chlorosis. The pro-
cess of whitening plants by  depriving
r               EUP

 them of light, or raising  them in the
 dark.
  ETIOL'OGY.  iEtiology.
  ETTMULLER, C F. B.   Author
 of a Medical and Surgical Treatise on
 the Diseases  of the Teeth.  Leipsic,
 1798.
  ECE'MIA.  From ev, well, and cu^tta,
 blood.  A good state of the blood.
  EU^ESTHE'SIA.  From ev,  well,
 and aioOqsis, perception.  Good percep-
 tion.
  EUCALYPTUS  RESINIFERA.
 An astringent gum resembling kino.
  EUCHYMTA.   From ev, well, and
 Xvuos, juice.  A good condition of the
 humors.
  EUCRA'SIA.  From ev, well, and
 xpaais, temperament. A good tempera-
 ment.
  EUDIOMETER. From evSia, pu-
 rity of air, and petpov, a measure.  An
 instrument for ascertaining the quantity
 of oxygen or any other gas in a given
 mixture of gases.
  EUDIOMETRY. The art of ascer-
 taining  the  quantity of any, gas con-
 tained in a given bulk  of atmospheric
 air.
  EUETHES. Benign.
  EUEXTA.  From ev, well, and e|ty,
 constitution.  A good constitution.
   EUGE'NIA  CARYOPHYLLA'-
 TA.  The clove tree of India.
  EUNUCH.  Eunuchus;  from iwtj,
 the bed, and eXa, I keep.  One who has
 been castrated, or whose generative or-
 gans have been so altered as to render
 him incapable  of reproducing  his spe-
 cies.
  EUPATHI'A.   From ev, well, and
 naBos, suffering.   Easily  affected by
 pain; also, health.
  EUPATO'RIUM. Agrimony.  Also,
 the name of a genus of plants.
  Eupatorium Cannab'inum.   Hemp
 agrimony.
  Eupatorium Perfolia'tum.  Tho-
 rough wort; boneset.
  Eupatorium Purpu'reum.  Purple-
 stalked eupatorium. Trumpet weed.
24 
EUS
248
EVO
  Eupatorium  Teucrifo'lium. Wild
 horehound.
  EUPEPSIA.   From ev, well,  and
 nMfu, I digest.  Good digestion.
  EUPHLO'GIA.  From ev, well, and
 and $xeya, I burn.  Mild inflammation.
  EUPHONY.   Euphonia; from ev,
 well, and ^, voice.  A good voice.
  EUPHORBIA CAPITATA.  An
 astringent Brazilian plant.
  Euphorbia Corolla'ta.  The large
 flowering spurge, or milk-weed.
  Euphorbia Cyparis'sias.  The  cy-
 press spurge.
  Euphorbia Ipecacuanha.  Ipecacu-
 anha spurge.
  Euphorbia Lath'yris.  The syste-
 matic name of the plant which affords
 the cataputia seeds.
  Euphorbia Officina'rum. The sys-
 tematic name of the plant which affords
 the  euphorbium, an inodorous gum-
 resin.
  Euphorbia Palus'tris. The greater
 spurge.
  Euphorbia  Paralias.     The  sea
 spurge.
  EUPHORBIA'CE^. A natural or-
der of exogenous plants, inhabitants of
 almost all parts of the globe.
  EUPHOR'BLE GUMMI-RESINA.
 Euphorbium.
  EUPHRASIA  OFFICINALIS —
 Eye-bright.
  EUPLASTIC From ev, and rtxagis,
 formation.  An epithet employed by
 Lobstein for the elaborated matter out of
 which animal tissues are formed.
  EURHYTH'MIA.   From ev, well,
and pvOpos, rhythm. A regular pulse.
  EUSEMI'A.   From ev, well, and
 atjfueiov, a sign.   Favorable signs.
  EUSTA'CHIAN TUBE.  The tube
which forms a communication between
the  upper part  of  the pharynx and
ear.  It is bony and cartilaginous, and
lined by  a continuation of the mu-
cous membrane of the pharynx.  The
entrance from the pharynx is indicated
by a depression in  the  mucous mem-
brane.
   Eustachian  Valve.  Valmda  eus-
 tachii.  A membranous semilunar fold,
 at the mouth of the inferior vena cava.
   EUSTACHIUS. Author of a small
 Treatise on Anatomy, Avith a chapter
 on the Teeth.  Venice, 1574.
   EUSTHENI'A. Exuberant health.
   EUTAX'IA. A constitution in which
 every part has its proper relation.
   EUTROPH'IA.  From lv, well, and
 tfpo^, nourishment.  Healthy nutri-
 tion.
   EUTROPHIC.   Eutrophicum.   A
 term introduced in medical terminology
 by professor Dungleson, "for  an agent
 whose action is exerted on  the system
 of nutrition, without necessarily occa-
 sioning manifest increase of  any of the
 secretions."
   EVACUANTS.  Evacuantia; from
 e, and vacuare, to empty.  Medicines
 which occasion a discharge from some
 emunctory,  as emetics, cathartics, Sec.
   EVACUATION.  Evacuatio. Any
 discharge from the animal body, wheth-
 er from the natural passages or by an
 artificial opening, or  whether sponta-
 neous or provoked by  artificial means.
   EVAPORATION.   Evaporatio ;—
 from e, and vaporare, to  emit  a vapor.
 The conversion of a fluid or any other
 substance into a vapor, for the puipose
 of obtaining the  fixed matters in  a
 separate state, while the volatile parts
 are dissipated and lost.
  EVENTRATION.   Eventratb;—
 from  e, out of, and venter, the belly.
 A tumor formed from general relaxa-
 tion of the walls of the abdomen, and
 protrusion of the viscera.   Also, hernia
 which takes place  through  any other
 than the natural openings of the  ab-
 dominal walls; and, lastly, the protru-
 sion of the viscera through a wound of
 the walls of the abdomen.
  EVERRICULUM.  An instrument
used for the removal  of fragments  of
calculus, or coagula of blood, from the
the bladder, after the operation of lithot-
omy.
  EVOLUTION. Evolutio; from evol- 
EXA
249
EXO
vere, to unroll.  In Physiobgy, increase,
growth,  or development.  Also, that
theory of generation  which  supposes
the germ of the new being to exist pre-
viously to fecundation, and is only de-
veloped by the process of generation.
   EVUL'SION.  Evulsio; from evel-
lere, to pluck out.  The forcible extrac-
tion of any part, as a tooth.
   EXACERBATION.  Exacerbatio;
from  exacerbare,  to provoke.  An in-
crease of intensity in symptoms of a
disease which recur at intervals.   It is
synonymous with paroxysm.
   EX^E'RESIS.  From efapea, to re-
move.  The removal of whatever is ob-
noxious to the human body, as the ex-
traction of a carious or dead tooth, the
amputation of a  hmb, the removal of
foreign bodies, tumors, &c.
   EXALTATION OF THE VITAL
FORCES.  A morbid increase of ac-
tion, as that which takes place in an in-
flamed part.  It  is  used by some au-
thors  as  synonymous with inflamma-
tion.
   EXAMBLOMA.   Abortion.
   EXANGI'A. From e%ayyi£a, I evac-
uate from a vessel.  An enlargement or
perforation of a blood vessel without ex-
ternal opening.  A genus of disease, in
the order dysthetica, class hozmatica, of
Dr. Good, which  includes aneurism,
varix, and cyania.
   EXAN'GUIOUS.  Exsanguis; from
ex, out  of, and sanguis, blood.  Defi-
ciency of blood, as those who have suf-
fered from hemorrhages.
   EXA'NIA.  From ex, out  of, and
anus.  Prolapsus of the rectum.
   EXANTHEM.  Exanthema; from
eiavBea, I flourish.   A cutaneous erup-
tion, or rash.   It is  employed by some
Avriters to designate  every sort of erup-
tion that appears  on the skin, but Dr.
Willan uses  it as synonymous with
rash.
  Exanthem  Mercuriale.  Eczema
mercuriale.
  Exanthem  Carbuncular. Anthrax.
  EXANTHE'MATA.  An order of'
 diseases, of the class pyrexiae, of Dr.
 Cullen's Nosology.
   EXANTHEMATIC. Eruptive.
   EXANTHEMAT'ICA. Eruptive fe-
 vers—the third  order in the  class hoz-
 matica of Dr. Good.
   EXANTHE'SIS.  From e%av9ea,  I
 effloresce. The breaking  out of an efflor-
 escence on the  skin; also, the efflores-
 cence itself.
   EXANTHROPIA. From e%av9paitos,
 misanthropic. A misanthrope.
   EXARCHIATER.  Exarchiatros;
 from e%apxos, a leader, and  iatpos,  a
 physician. The first or principal physi-
 cian.
   EXARTICULATION.   From ex,
 out of, and articulus, a joint.  A dislo-
 cation.
   EXCISING  FORCEPS,   ELLI-
 OT'S IMPROVED.   This  improve-
 ment consists in placing between the
 handles of a common excising instru-
 ment, a joint, operated by a key handle,
 which is capable of closing the instru-
 ment with -a force  five or six times
 greater than can be produced by the
 hand alone.
   Excising Instrument, Elliot's.—
 An instrument invented by Dr. W. H.
 Elliot of Montreal, for excising the
 crowns of teeth, and which is so con-
 structed  that a tooth is in no  danger of
 being moved in its socket by the opera-
 tion.   The cutting parts of the instru-
 ment are brought together with a force
 seventy-two times greater than that ap-
 phed to the handle by the hand.
   EXCIS'ION.  Excisio; from excidere,
 to cut off. The removal of a  tumor or
 other small part with a cutting instru-
 ment.
   EXCITABIL'ITY. Excitabilitas.—
 The capability of living bodies of being
 brought into action, under the influence
 of exciting agents.  Irritability.
   EXCITANT, A stimulant.
  EXCITATION.  Excitement.  The
action of excitants upon the living body.
  EXCITO-MOTORY  SYSTEM.
It  consists of the fibres of the anterior 
EXE
9;
50
EXO
and posterior roots of the spinal nerves
which are supposed by Dr. Marshall
Hall to derive their origin and power
of action from the  cineritious matter of
the spine in which they arise and to be
brought into action by  exterior agency,
independently of the direct power of the
AviU.
  EXCORIATION.     Excoriatio;—
from  excoriare,  to  remove  the  skin.
Abrasion of the skin.
  EX'CREMENT.  Excrementum;—
from excernere, to separate.  All matters
evacuated from the animal body by the
natural emunctories, as superfluous, as
the feces, urine, perspiration, &c, but it
is generally applied to the feces.
  EXCREMENTITIOUS.  Relating
to, or of the nature of, excrement.
  EXCRES'CENCE.   Excrescentia;
from excresccre, to grow out.  Any pre-
ternatural growth, as a tumor, corn, or
AA^art, from an organ or tissue, especial-
ly from the skin, mucous membrane, or
an ulcerated surface.
  EXCRETION.  Excretio; from ex-
cernere, to separate. The expulsion, by
the various outlets of the body, of such
matters as are  useless,  as  the urine,
feces, perspiration, &c.
  EX'CRETORY.  Excretorius.   A
vessel or duct which conveys the se-
creted fluids from the gland which has
secreted it.
  Excretory Organ.   An organ des-
tined for excretion.
  EXCUTIA   VENTRICULI.   A
stomach brush.    An  instrument for-
merly used for  the removal of foreign
bodies from the oesophagus.
  EXELCO'SIS.  Ulceration.
  EXELCYS'MOS.   From  e%, from,
and eXxva, I draw.  Extraction.
  EXERAMA. From e%epaw, I throw
out.  The act  of vomiting, or the matter
vomited.
  EX'ERCISE.    Exercitatio;  from
exercere, to work.  The movements of
the body,  produced by  the contraction
of muscles, in obedience to the Avill.
  EXERRHO'SIS.  From e%, out of,
and pea, I flow.  The discharge from
insensible perspiration.
  EXFOLIATION. Exfoliatio; from
ex, from, and folium, a leaf. Disquama-
tion.  The separation or detachment of
dead portions of bone, cartilage, fascia,
or tendon.   The definition, however, is
generally restricted to the  separation of
portions of bone.
  EXFOLIATIVE. Medicines which
promote exfoliation.  Also, instruments
for  effecting or  accelerating exfoliation.
  EXHA'LANT.  Exholent; from ex-
halare, to exhale, to throAV out.  A small
vessel  which performs the function of
exhalation.
  Exhalent Vessels.  A distinct sys-
tem of vessels, which,  according to
Bichat, originate from the capillary ar-
terial system, and are distributed to all
the tissues of the body, pouring out on
the surfaces of  the mucous and serous
membranes, and skin, a peculiar fluid.
  EXHALATION. Exhalatio.  The
emanation Avhich.arises from organized
and inorganic bodies, in the form of va-
por.
  EXHAUSTION.   That state of
body which  results  from great fatigue,
privation of food, excessive evacuations,
great mental effort, anxiety, or from dis-
ease.  Also, the  effect resulting from
the removal of air from a vessel  Avith
an air pump.
  EXHUMATION.   Exhumatio;—
from ex, and humus, the ground.  The
disinterment of a corpse.
  EXIS'CHIOS.  From e%, out of, and
Kj^tov,  the ischium.  Luxation  of the
thigh bone.
  EXO-.   E|«, outward.  Used  as a
prefix to other Avords.
  EXO'CHAS.   From  e\a, without,
and eXa, I have.  A tumor at the anus.
  EXOCYSTE.   Exocystis;  fromff,
out of, and xvatis, the bladder.  Prolap-
sus of the urinary bladder.
  EXOGENOUS.   From e%,  outside,
and yetvofiai, I  grow. A  term  applied
to those plants Avhose vessels  are dis-
posed round a cellular substance or pith, 
EXO
251
EXO
so that the more recently produced parts
are in the circumference.   They are
also called dicotyledons, and constitute
one of the primary classes into which
the vegetable world is divided.
   EXOM'PH ALUS.  From e%, out of,
and opfyaxos, the navel.  An umbilical
hernia.
   EXONCO'MA.  Ffom e%, and oyxos,
a  tumor.  A  large tumor or protuber-
ance.
   EXOPHTHAL'MIA. From e%, out
of, and otydaxuos, the eye.  A protrusion
of the bulb of the eye.
   EXOSMOSIS.   From  e%, out  of,
and  wffju.oj,  impulse.   Transudation.
The opposite of endosmosis.
   EXOSTEMA   CARIBB.EUM.—
The tree which furnishes the Caribbean
or Jamaica cinchona bark.
   Exostema Peruvianum. The tree
from  Avhich  the Peruvian  bark is ob-
tained.
   Exostema Souzanum.  The Brazil-
ian cinchona.
   EXOSTO'SIS. Hyperostosis; from *|,
out of, and oateov, a bone.  An osseous
tumor formed on  the  surface, or in the
cavity of a bone.  Three varieties  are
enumerated, namely, ivory  exostosis,
from its resemblance  in structure  to
ivory; lamekited exostosis, from its being
developed in laminae, and spongy exos-
tosis, from its resemblance in structure,
to the tissue of bones.
   Exostosis of  the  Alveoli.  The
alveoli as well as  the teeth, and  other
osseous structures of the body are some-
times attacked by exostosis, which may
develop itself in the form of a bony tu-
mor,  or in the thickening of their waUs,
and a consequent displacement of the
teeth.  See  Displacement of the Teeth.
   Exostosis of the Teeth.  Exostosis
dentium.  The only part of a tooth sub-
ject to exostosis is  the root, and the  de-
velopment of the affection usually com-
mences at or near the extremity; ex-
tending from thence upwards, it some-
times covers a greater or less portion of
the  external  surface.   Occasionally,
however, it commences on the side and
so great a deposition of osseous matter
takes place, that a large irregular tuber-
cle is formed; at other times the bony
deposit is diffused regularly over nearly
the whole of the  root, but more fre-
quently it is irregular.  The bony mat-
ter thus deposited, is generally  harder
than the root, and of a faint yellowish
semi-transparent appearance.
  In treating  of the disease, Mr. Thos.
Bell  says, "whether the bony matter in
this case is produced  by the vessels of
the periosteum, or by those of the tooth
itself, cannot perhaps  be  ascertained,
though from analogy there is every rea-
son to beheve the  former.  The  sub-
stance, which is thus added, differs in
appearance from the original bone;  it
is of a particularly hard, dense texture,
of a yellowish hue, and slightly trans-
parent; and  the irregular manner in
Avhich it is deposited gives it no incon-
siderable superficial resemblance to chal-
cedony.  It is undoubtedly occasioned
by an increased and irregular action of
the vessels, a kind of slow chronic in-
flammation ; the result in most cases, of
incipient  gangrene,  or some  similar
cause of moderate but  continued irrita-
tion. Hence its progress is so tardy,
that, in most instances, the enlargement
of the alveolus  by absorption, almost
keeps pace with the deposition of new
bone; and the pressure Avhich the latter
produces is so trifling  and gradual, as
to  occasion  no more than  a slight,
though continued uneasiness; and it  is
only when the caries  has extended to
the cavity, and tooth-ache is produced
by the exposure of the membrane, that
the patient is induced to lose the tooth,
and that the true cause of the previous
affection is ascertained.   In  other in-
stances the continued irritation occasions
thickening of the periosteum, and after-
terwards suppuration, and the case be-
comes one of simple alveolar abscess.
   "The pressure arising  from this en-
largement of the root sometimes pro-
duces an  affection  exactly resembhng 
               EXO               2Z

tic  douloureux.   I have seen several
cases of this description more or  less
distinctly characterized, in one of which
the affection was of so marked a charac-
ter,  that the  constitutional  remedies
usually adopted in tic douloureux, had
been employed for a long time  before it
was suspected that the cause was local.
The tooth was  decayed, but the pain,
though excessively severe,  was so dif-
ferent from tooth-ache, that the medical
attendant did not suspect the  cause to
be in any way connected with the tooth.
On examining it, however, I found that
although the nerve was not exposed,
yet, on striking it smartly with a  steel
instrument, a sharp pain shot through
the jaw, exactly  resembling the former
attacks; and it is worthy  of remark,
that this effect was only produced when
it was struck in one  direction.  On the
removal of the tooth, the root was found
considerably enlarged by exostosis."
  One of the most remarkable cases of
dental exostosis on record, is related by
Mr. Fox.  The  subject was a young
lady, who, at the time she  sought the
professional advice and aid of Mr. Fox,
had suffered so  severely and so long,
that the palpebral of one  eye had  been
closed for near two months, and the se-
cretion of sahva  had,  for  some time,
been so copious,  that it flowed from her
mouth whenever  it was opened.  She
had tried every remedy which had been
recommended by the ablest medical ad-
visers, without realizing any permanent
benefit, and she was only relieved from
her suffering by the extraction of every
one of her teeth.
  From the many cases of painful ef-
fects occasioned by exostosis of the teeth,
which have fallen under the  author's
immediate observation, he will mention
the following:
  Mr. S. of Baltimore, having suffered
sometime from pain in the left superior
bicuspis, applied to  a dentist in 1843,
for the purpose of having this tooth re-
moved.  In the operation, the root was
fractured about three-sixteenths of an
I               EXO

 inch from its extremity, and the upper
 part left  in the socket, and  in conse-
 quence of which, he did not reahze the
 rehef he had hoped to derive from the
 operation.  The pain continued, and at
 the expiration  of  twelve  months, the
 gum over the upper part of the alveolus,
 became very much swollen, puffing out
 the lip to  the size  of half a hen's  egg.
 The tumor, after a  few days was open-
 ed, and a  large quantity of dark-colored,
 purulent and very  fetid matter was dis-
 charged, which, for a short time, afford-
 ed him considerable relief.  The tumor,
 however,  soon  reappeared, and was re-
 moved some four or five times, by open-
 ing  it and discharging the matter, in
 about that number of months.
  In the fall of  1845, he called on the
 author, for the purpose of obtaining his
 advice. The gum was swollen and the
 hp and cheek protruded  in the manner
 as above  described.  The  tumor  Avas
 again  opened,  and about three table-
 spoonsful of black matter resembling
 thin tar escaped.   Upon further exami-
 nation, the outer wall of the antrum, im-
 mediately over the upper part of the al-
 veolus of the bicuspis which had been
 fractured, was   destroyed,  leaving an
 opening large enough to admit  the end
 of the forefinger.   Beheving that the
 extremity of the root which  had been
 left in the socket was the cause of the
 disturbance, its Immediate removal was
 strongly urged, but to accomplish this,
 it became necessary to cut away the
 outer wall of the alveolus.  The root of
 the tooth, on its removal, was found to
 be enlarged to the  size of a large pea.
 The secretion of purulent matter soon
 ceased, and in a few weeks, the patient
 was completely restored.
  The occurrence  of  exostosis on  a
 single tooth often gives rise to the sever-
 est kind of facial neuralgia.  The author
 might enumerate several very interest-
 ing cases  which have  fallen under his
 own immediate  notice, but he will con-
 clude his  remarks  on the effects which
 sometimes result from the  disease, by 
EXO               253                EXP
quoting  the  following  case  from Mr.
Bell, he says,
   "Mr.----had for some months suffer-
ed severe and  frequent paroxysms  of
pain on the left side of the face, apparent-
ly commencing in the second inferior bi-
cuspis, and  darting through  the lower
jaw to the ear, and upAvards to the tem-
ple. The pain resembled tic douloureux
in the nature of its attacks, but was evi-
dently produced by a local rather than a
constitutional cause,  from the  parox-
ysms occurring without the least periodi-
cal regularity, and from their being ex-
cited by the application  of heat to the
teeth of that part.  On the most careful
examination, however, I could not dis-
cover the least appearance of caries in
any of the teeth, and, I  therefore order-
ed leeches to be applied  to the gum, and
aperient medicines and abstinence from
all stimulating food.  This plan was
productive of only temporary and par-
tial relief, and  in about two days the
pain was as severe as ever.  Finding
that a smart bloAV on the second  bicus-
pis produced a  more painful sensation
than on any  of the teeth, I determined
on extracting it, and found the extremi-
ty enlarged by a deposition of bone, giv-
ing  to it a slightly bulbous shape, but
not larger than  the tip of a small quill.
The newly added bone was yelloAver and
more transparent  than  the  original
structure, as is  generally the case in
this disease.  The removal of the  tooth
was folloAved by  immediate and entire
relief."
  In the  Museum of the Baltimore Col-
lege of Dental Surgery, are some very
remarkable examples  of dental exosto-
sis.  In one, a present from Dr.  G. E.
Hawes, of New York, the  three  supe-
rior molar teeth of one  side, are united
by a deposit of bony matter. In another,
and  a  present  from  Dr. Blandin  of
Columbia, S. C. two upper molares are
united.  In a third, and  a present from
Dr. Ware, of Wilmington, N. C. there
is a deposition of bone on the roots of a
first superior molaris as large as a hick-
        22
 ory nut, and on the root of a cuspidatus,
 placed there by the author, the deposition
 of osseous  matter forms a bulb at its
 apex, the size of a large pea. But besides
 the above, there are in this  institution
 many other very marked  examples of
 the disease.
   The  cause  of exostosis of the teeth
 does not appear to be very Avell under-
 stood.  Most authors attribute it  to in-
 flammation of the periosteum  of the
 fang, which Mr. Bell believes is produc-
 ed, in most cases, by caries of the affect-
 ed tooth.   That it is the result of in-
 creased action in the periosteal tissue,
 is, we believe, admitted by all, though
 not as a result or consequence of caries,
 inasmuch as it often attacks the roots of
 teeth Avhich are perfectly sound.
   The disease having once established
 itself, does not admit of cure,  and when
 it has progressed so far as to be produc-
 tive of pain,  the loss of the  affected
 tooth becomes necessary.  But as the
 prognosis is exceedingly obscure, its ex-
 istence  can only be inferred from the un-
 pleasant symptoms to which it gives rise.
   When the enlargement is  very con-
 siderable and confined to the  extremity
 of the root, and has not been  followed
 by a corresponding  enlargement of the
 alveolus around the neck of the tooth,
 its removal is often attended with diffi-
 culty, and  can only be effected by cut-
 ting away a greater or less portion of the
 socket.
   EXOTIC.    Exotkus;   from  *|w,
 without.   That which comes from a
 foreign  country.   In Natural History
 and Medicine, animals, plants and me-
 dicinal agents which are procured from
 abroad.
   EXPAN'SION. Expansio; from ex-
pandere, to  spread out.  The  dilatation
 of an expandible body; the increase of
 bulk or size which it undergoes  by re-
 cession of its particles from one another.
 In Anatomy, the prolongation or spread-
ing out of an organ, or structure, as of
aponeuroses.
  EXPECTANT  MEDICINE.  A 
EXP
254
EXT
theory  Avhich restricts  practitioners of
medicine to the observation  of disease,
Avithout any effort to control  or arrest
its progress, leaving the cure to the
efforts of nature,  unless very alarming
symptoms occur.
  EXPECTORANT.   Expectorans;
from ex, out of,  and pectus, the breast.
A medicine which promotes expectora-
tion.
  EXPECTORATION.   Expectora-
tio.   The  act by  which  mucus and
other fluids are expelled from the respi-
ratory  passages.
   Expectoratio Sanguinis.  Haem-
optysis.
   EXPELLANT.  An expulsive.
   EXPE'RIENCE. Experkntui. The
knowledge of  things acquired by long
practice.
   EXPERIMENT.   Experimentum.
In Medical Scknce,  a trial made upon
man or other animals with a  view of
making discoveries  in  the structure or
functions of organs, or  for the  purpose
of testing the effects of a new medicinal
agent,  or   unknown ahmentary sub-
stance.
   EXPIRATION.  Expiratio;  from
 expirare, to breathe out.   The expul-
 sion of the air from the lungs.
   EX'PIRATORY Expirationi. An
 epithet, applied to those muscles, which,
 by their contraction, diminish the cavity
 of the chest and thus effect the expul-
 sion of air from the lungs.
   EXPLORATION.  Expbratio; from
 explorare,  to search into.  The  act of
 investigating  the physical signs of dis-
 ease,  with the  eye, hand, and stethe-
 scope.
   EXPLORATORIUM.  A sound.
   EXPRESSED OIL.  An oil obtain-
 ed by pressing.
   EXPRES'SION.  Expressio;  from
 exprimere,  to press out.  The separa-
 tion, by pressure, of the fluids which a
 substance contains. Also, the manner
 in which impressions are depicted upon
 the countenance.
   EXPUL'SIVE.  ExpeUcns;  from
expeUere, to drive out.  In Surgery, a
bandage used for the expulsion of pus
or other fluid from a part.   Also, ap-
phed to medicines which are supposed
to have the power of driving the humors
towards the skin.
  EXSANGUIN'ITY.  From ear, out
of, and sanguis, blood.  Bloodless. Ap-
plied to persons who have little blood.
  EXSERTUS.  Protruding, some-
times applied to teeth which protrude.
See Dens Exsertus.
  EXSICCATION.  Drying.
  EXSPUITTON.  From ex, out of,
and spuo, I spit.  Spitting.
  EXSTROPH'IA.  Exstrophy; from
e|, out of, and atpofq, turning. The dis-
placement  of an organ, especially the
urinary bladder.
  EXTEMPORA'NEOUS. From ex,
and tempore, out of time.   Medicines
compounded from  written  prescrip-
tions made on the spot or at the bedside
of the patient, and not  by formulae.
  EXTENSIBILITY.  Extensibility.
Capable of being extended.
   EXTEN'SION. Extensio; fromcz-
tendere, to stretch out.  In Surgery, the
pulling of a limb for the  reduction of a
fracture or dislocation.
   EXTENSOR.  In  Anatomy, an epi-
thet applied to a muscle Avhose function
is to extend or straighten certain parts.
   Extensor Brevis Digitorum Pedis.
A muscle  of the toes, situated on the
foot.
   Extensor Carpi Radialis Brevis.
An extensor muscle of the Avrist.
   Extensor Carpi Radialis Longus.
 An extensor muscle of the carpus.
   Extensor Carpi Ulnaris.  A mus-
 cle which  arises from the outer condyle
 of the os humeri and from the edge of
 the ulna, and is inserted in the metacar-
 pal bone of the little finger.
   Extensor  Digitorum  Communis.
 A large flat  muscle of  the forearm
 which extends to the fingers.
   Extensor Digitorum Longus.  See
 Extensor Longus Digitorum Pedis.
I   Extensor Longus Digitorum Pedis. 
EXT
255
EXT
A muscle of the leg, extending to the
joints of the four small toes.
  Extensor  Magnus.  The  gastroc-
nemius muscle.
  Extensor Ossis Metac arpi Pollicis
Manus.   A muscle of the wrist situat-
ed on the  forearm.
  Extensor   Primi  Internodh.  A
muscle of the thumb, situated on the
hand.
  Extensor Proprius Pollicis Pedis.
An extensor muscle of the great toe.
  Extensor Secundi Internodh.  A
muscle of the thumb.
  Extensor  Secundi Internodh In-
dicis Proprius.  See Indicator.
  Extensor Tarsi Magnus.  The gas-
trocnemius and soleus muscles.
  EXTENUATIO.   Emaciation.
  EXTERNUS AURIS.  The laxa-
tor tympani muscle.
  EXTINCTION OF  MERCURY.
The trituration of  mercury Avith other
substances, as lard, until its  metalhc
globules disappear.
   EXTIRPATION. Exterpatio; from
extirpare, to root out.   The  complete
removal of a part, (applied generally to
a morbid structure) by excision, or Avith
caustic.
   EXTIRPATOR.  A name applied
to an instrument invented by Mr. C. T.
Goodwin of Philadelphia for the extrac-
tion of the roots of cuspid teeth.  It
is shaped something like the common
straight punch Avhich is sometimes em-
ployed for the removal of roots of teeth.
   EXTRACT. Extractum; from ex-
traherc, to draw out.   In Pharmacy,  a
tenacious substance, obtained by the
evaporation of  a  vegetable  solution.
Also, a substance  held  in solution by
the juice  of a fresh plant, as well as
that to which some menstruum has been
added at the time of its preparation.
  EXTRACTION.  Extractio ;  from
extrahere, to draw  out.  In Chemistry,
the separation  of a simple or compound
substance from a body of which it forms
a part.  In Surgery, the act of removing
foreign  or diseased bodies or  organs,
from any part of the body, as a urinary
calculus from the bladder, a bullet or
splinter from a Avound, or a tooth from
the jaw.
  Extraction of Teeth.  "Of all the
remedies," says Desirabode, "for  dis-
eases of the teeth, there is none Avhich
has been used  so long as  their extrac-
tion ; for, not only is it spoken of in for-
mal terms,  by Hippocrates, who also at-
tempts to correct the abuses to which it
might  lead;  but a  passage in  Cicero
designates Esculapius, the third of that
name,  as the person by whom  it  was
first proposed."
  Although the extraction of a tooth is
generaUy regarded  as  an operation of
comparatively little importance, there
are feAV operations in surgery,  that ex-
cite stronger feelings  of dread, and to
which  most persons submit with greater
reluctance.  Many endure the  tortures
of tooth-ache  for  weeks  and  months
together, rather than undergo the opera-
tion of having a tooth  extracted.  This,
with many persons, is the last resort,
and the accidents that daily result from
the operation, in the hands of the igno-
rant and unskilful, have contributed no
little to excite the fears of almost every
one.   The extraction of a tooth, how-
ever, when the operation is performed
by  a skilful hand, and with a suitable in-
strument, is both safe and easy, but if at-
tempted  by an  ignorant and  inexpe-
rienced practitioner, it may be attended
with serious and even dangerous conse-
quences.
    Indications for  the Operation.
  With regard to the indications which
should determine the  propriety of the
operation in question, the author does
not deem it necessary to say much, in
this place, upon the subject, as they are
so fully pointed out in other  articles of
the work.   But, lest some of them may
be overlooked, he will briefly mention in
this connection, a few of the circum-
stances which call for the operation.
  Beginning Avith the teeth of first den- 
EXT
256
EXT
tition, it Avill be sufficient to state that
when a tooth of replacement is about to
emerge from the gums, or has actually
made its  appearance,  either before or
behind the  corresponding temporary,
the latter should, at once, be removed;
and when the aperture formed  by the
loss of this is so narrow as  to prevent
the former  from acquiring  its  proper
position, it may sometimes be even ne-
cessary to extract an adjoining  tempo-
rary tooth;  but, for more explicit direc-
tions upon this subject, the reader is re-
ferred  to  what  has been said  on the
management of second dentition.  Al-
veolar abscess, necrosis of the walls of
an alveolus, and pain in a  temporary
tooth, which cannot be assuaged by any
of the usual remedies, may, also, be re-
garded as indications which call for the
removal of these teeth.
   With regard to the indications which
should  determine the  extraction of a
permanent tooth, the following  may be
mentioned,  as constituting  the  princi-
pal:
   First, when a molaris,  from the loss
of its antagonizing teeth, or other causes,
has become partially displaced, or is a
source of constant  irritation to the sur-
rounding parts, it should be removed.
   Second, a constant discharge of fetid
matter through a carious opening in the
crown from the nerve cavity, and the
canal of the root of a tooth,  may, also,
be regarded as an indication calling for
the operation  under  consideration.—
There may, hoAvever, be circumstances
which  would justify  a practitioner  in
yielding to the wishes of, or, even advis-
ing his patient to permit the retention of
such a tooth; as, for example, when the
discharge of fetid matter from it is not
very considerable,  and it is  situated in
the anterior part of the mouth and can-
not be securely replaced  Avith an artifi-
 cial substitute.  The secretion  of fetid
 matter, too, may, in some cases, by ju-
 dicious treatment, be prevented; in this
 case, the tooth  may,  perhaps,  be pre-
 served for many years, by plugging, and
the morbid  influence, Avhich  it would
otherwise exert upon  the  surrounding
parts, be wholly  counteracted.   But,
it  is  only in  the fewest  number  of
cases that such favorable results can In-
secured.   A front  tooth should not  l)e
sacrificed unless called for by some very
urgent necessity, but  neither  an upper
incisor nor cuspidatus, should be per-
mitted to remain in the mouth, if it ex-
erts a manifest morbid influence upon
the surrounding parts.  In this case the
effects resulting from its retention in the
mouth might be worse than the loss of
the tooth.
   Third, a  tooth which is  the cause
of alveolar  abscess,  should  not, as a
general  rule, be  permitted to  remain
in the mouth, but, as in the case last
described, if it be an incisor or cuspida-
tus, and  the discharge of matter through
the gum is small, occurring only at long
intervals, and  especially if   the organ
cannot be securely replaced with an ar-
tificial substitute, it may be advisable to
permit it to remain.   But an  abscess in
the socket of a bicuspis or molaris, may
be considered as constituting a sufficient
indication for the removal of a tooth.
   Fourth, irregularity in  the arrange-
ment of the teeth, resulting from a dis-
proportion between the size of the teeth
and alveolar arch, is another  indication
Avhich calls for the  operation.   But,
with regard to the teeth which it is most
proper to remove, the reader  is referred
to the article  on  irregularity of these
organs.   Here  he will find  full direc-
tions for the management of cases of
this kind.
   Fifth, all  dead teeth  and roots of
teeth, and teeth which have  become so
much loosened from  the destruction of
 their sockets  as to be a constant source
 of disease to their adjacent parts, or teeth
 which are otherwise diseased, and are a
 cause of neuralgia of the face, a morbid
 condition of the maxillary  sinus, dys-
 pepsia,  or any other  local or constitu-
 tional disturbance, should, as a general
 rule, be extracted. 
EXT               257              EXT
  There are other indications  Avhich
call for the extraction of teeth, but, the
foregoing are among the most common,
and  will be found sufficient in most
cases, to determine the propriety or im-
propriety of the operation.  Cases are,
however, continually  presenting them-
selves, to which no rules that could be
laid  down would be found  applicable,
and  where enlightened judgment only,
can  determine the propriety or impro-
priety of the operation.
  In conclusion, it is hardly necessary
to say, that whenever a tooth can be re-
stored to health, it should  always be
done, but the tampering with such as
cannot be rendered healthy and useful,
and  which by remaining in the  mouth
would exert a deleterious influence, not
only upon the adjacent parts, but, also,
upon the general health, cannot be too
strongly deprecated.
  We may  also add, in the words  of
Desirabode, that "the operation of ex-
traction should never be performed until
the  dentist  has ascertained, with cer-
tainty, the diseased tooth.  If a shadow
of doubt  remains, no effort should be
spared, which can tend to dissipate it.
After the patient has pointed out the
tooth which  he supposes to be the seat
of pain, it should be examined with the
eye  or a small  mirror, to ascertain the
extent of the decay, and then  moved
slightly with the thumb and finger; if
this  should not excite pain, it should be
struck with a hard body, such as a plug-
ging instrument; cold water should be
taken into the  mouth, and brought  in
contact with it;  or  another  means
should  be  employed,  which,  though
more painful, is still more certain; the
cavity should be explored with a small
instrument, Avhich will furnish a certain
indication of the condition of the tooth."
  A  neglect of  the above  precautions
has often led to the removal of a tooth
which was not  the  cause of pain, or
which, by proper treatment might have
been restored to health  and rendered
useful.                              '
     22*
Accidents which sometimes Result from
            the Operation.
   The extraction of a tooth, though, in
the majority of cases, a simple opera-
tion, is, nevertheless, sometimes attend-
ed by trifling accidents, which, the most
skilful and prudent,  cannot  always
avoid.  The conformation or condition
of a tooth is sometimes such, as to ren-
der its removal, without  fracturing  it,
or the alveolus, impossible, but no acci-
dent of a serious nature need ever oc-
cur if the operation be performed with
a  suitable instrument, and by a skilful
practitioner, except such perhaps  as
may result from a hemorrhagic diathe-
sis of the general system, or from pecu-
liar states of the constitutional health.
   Among the accidents which have been
recorded, or have otherwise come to the
knowledge of  the author, as having oc
curred from the  extraction of  teeth, it
may be well to particularize a few ex-
amples.
   Dr. Fitch relates the  case of a man
residing  in Botetourt county, Va. Avho,
in having a tooth extracted by a black-
smith, the  second superior  molaris of
the right side, had a large portion of the
jaw and five other teeth removed at the
same time.  "The fangs of this tooth,"
says  Dr. F. "were greatly  birfurcated
and dovetailed into the jaws, and would
not pass perpendicularly  out, though a
slight lateral motion Avould have moved
them instantly.  The jaw proved  too
weak to support the  monstrous  pull
upon it,  and gave way between the sec-
ond molar tooth and first molar, and,
instantly, both  the  anterior and poste-
rior  plates  of the antrum gave way.
The fracture continued to the  spongy
bones of  the nose, and terminated at the
lower edge of the socket of the left front
incisor, carrying out with the jaw, six
sound teeth, namely, the first molar, the
two bicuspides, one canine, one lateral,
and one front incisor, six  in  all.  The
soft parts were  cut  away with a knife.
A  severe  hemorrhage ensued, but the 
•
                EXT               a

 patient  soon  recovered, though with
 excessive  deformity of  his  face and
 mouth."*
   Dr. Cross, of Jackson, Northampton
 county, North Carolina, related  to the
 author, in 1838, a case so very similar,
 to the one just quoted, that he was in-
 clined to beheve it was the same, until
 he recollected that  one occurred in Vir-
 ginia, and the other in the county in
 which Dr. C. resides.   The operator in
 this, as in the other  instance,  was  a
 blacksmith, who, in attempting to ex-
 tract one of the superior molar  teeth,
 brought away a piece  of the jaw, con-
 taining five other  teeth, together with
 the floor, and the posterior and anterior
 walls of the antrum.  The piece of bone
 thus detached, is now in the possession
 of a physician residing about  eight
 miles from Jackson.
   We  have adverted to these  cases,
 merely  to show the  impropriety and
 danger of entrusting the operation to in-
 dividuals possessing neither knowledge
 of its principles, nor  skill  in  its per-
 formance.   Injuries of the jaws, occa-
 sioned by  the  operations of such per-
 sons, have  frequently come under the
 immediate observation of the author, to
 whom it has always been  a matter of
 surprise, that an  operation  to  which
 such an universal  repugnance is felt,
 should ever  be confided to such per-
 sons.
   The removal of a wrong tooth, or of
two, and even three, instead of one, are
 such  common occurences, that it were
well  if  the  precautions given  by the
illustrious  Ambrose rare,  met  Avith
more strict attention.  So fearful  was
he of injuring the  adjacent teeth, that
he always isolated  the tooth to  be re-
moved, with a file, before he attempted
its removal.  He regarded it as of the
greatest importance, that a person, who
extracted teeth, should  be expert in the
use  of his "tooth mullets; for," says
he, "unless he knows readily and cun-
ningly how to use them, he can scarce-
     * Fitch's Dental Surgery, p. 347.
58               EXT

 ly so carry himself, but that he will force
 out three teeth at once."   Although
 great  improvements have been made,
 since  his time, in the construction  of
 instruments for the extraction of teeth,
 yet even  now,  accidents  similar  to
 those  to which he alludes, are of almost
 daily occurrence.
   It is truly surprising, that an opera-
 tion which is so frequently required as
 this, should  receive so little attention
 from medical practitioners,  by Avhom,
 though  not  strictly belonging to their
 province, it  must frequently be per-
 formed.   This neglect can only be ac-
 counted  for, by the too general preva-
 lence of the supposition, that little or no
 surgical  tact is necessary for its per-
 formance. But every physician residing
 in the country, or where the  services of
 a skilful dentist  cannot always be com-
 manded, should provide  himself with
 the proper instruments, and make him-
 self acquainted with the manner of per-
 forming  the operation.
   But a feAv months ago, the  author
 was sent for by Mr. G.,  of Baltimore,
 to extract one of  the  first left inferior
 molares, which  had been fractured  a
 few weeks  previously, in an  attempt
 made by a dentist  to  extract  the tooth,
 and left  in the socket.  Violent inflam-
 mation supervened, which soon termi-
 nated in  the formation of an alveolar ab-
 scess.  The matter, in making for itself
 an  outlet to escape, perforated the wall
 of the lower part  of the cheek, trav-
 ersed the cellular tissue back  to the an-
 gle of  the jaw and neck, where a sac
 was formed  large  enough to contain
 half a  pint, and which quantity, as we
 were informed,  had  been discharged,
 daily,  for several  days.  With much
difficulty he succeeded in  removing the
adjoining or  second  molar, which had
become involved in the diseased action,
and in  a  few  days after, the roots of the
tooth which  had been fractured, when
a cure Avas effected.
  In another  case which fell under the
observation of the author, the  lower 
EXT
259
EXT
 jaw, between the first and second mo-
 lares,  had been fractured by an awk-
 ward  attempt to extract the second mo-
 lar with  a key instrument, and which,
 from the violent inflammation that su-
 pervened, was followed by necrosis of
 the posterior part  of the jaw.  At  the
 time she was brought to him, the frac-
 tured  extremity of the necrosed portion
 of the bone had perforated the  cheek
 and protruded exteriorly. The subject
 of this last case was a girl of a cachectic
 habit, about fourteen years of age.
   But besides accidents of this nature,
 the gums are often badly bruised and
 lacerated, when the  proper precaution
 of separating them  from the tooth, pre-
 viously to extracting it, is not observed,
 or where improper instruments are em-
 ployed.   Many cases' of this sort have
 fallen  under the observation of the au-
 thor, and the particulars of one was re-
 lated to him  a few months  since, by
 professor Handy, in which a large por-
 tion of the soft palate had been torn
 away, by an individual, who, to nu-
 merous other  occupations, united that
 of tooth-drawing.
   M.  Duval and M. Desirabode, have
 each pubhshed a  considerable number
 of cases  of accidents which  have re-
 sulted from the extraction of teeth, but
 it would  be out of place here to enter
 into more extended  details upon this
 subject.  In the directions which will be
 given  on  the manner of performing the
 operation, the necessary  precautions
 for the prevention of accidents  in its
 performance, will be given.

 Instruments Employed in the Operation.

   A description of the various instru-
 ments  employed  in  the extraction of
 teeth will be found, each, under its ap-
 priate name.

 Manner of Extracting Teeth  with the
          Key of Garengeot.

  The  key of Garengeot, although, for
a long time, almost the only instrument
 used  for the extraction of teeth, has,
 recently, to a very great extent, been
 superseded by forceps, which, when of
 the proper  construction are far prefera-
 ble.   But inasmuch as it still holds a
 place among the instruments employed
 in the operation, it will be proper to  de-
 scribe the method  of using it.  Before
 we proceed to do this, however, it may
 be well  to  observe, that  its use is  re-
 stricted to the molar and bicuspid teeth.
   The directions required for the use of
 the key  are few and  simple; but,  as
 cases  frequently present themselves to
 which no general  rules can be applied,
 much will depend on the practical judg-
 ment and surgical  tact of the  operator.
 The first step to be taken in the opera-
 tion, after having placed the patient in a
 good light, and selected a  hook with a
 curvature proportioned to the size of the
 tooth, is, to separate the gum from the
 neck of  the tooth down to the alveolus,
 all round.  For this purpose, suitable
 gum  lancets  or  knives should be pro-
 vided.   On the approximal sides of the
 tooth, a  straight narrow  bladed knife,
 pointed at the end, and Avith  one cut-
 ting  edge,  will be found  most conve-
 nient and effectual, in performing this
 part  of  the operation, and it should be
 used,  as described by Dr. Maynard,  by
 passing  the point in between the  neck
 of the tooth and  gum,  down to the
 alveolus, with its back downwards, and
 cutting  from the direction of  the roots
 towards   the coronal extremity of the
 tooth. In this way, the adhesion of the
 gum to  the approximal  sides of the
 neck of the tooth may be thoroughly
 severed.   The same kind of  knife  or
 common gum-lancet, may be used for
 separating the gum from the lingual  or
 palatine, and outer  sides of the tooth.
 If this precaution be neglected, there
 will be danger of lacerating the gum  in
 the removal of the tooth.
  After the tooth has been thus  pre-
pared, the key, Avith the proper hook at-
tached, should be firmly fixed upon it;
the bolster, on the inside, resting upon 
EXT
260
EXT
 the edge of the alveolus, the extremity of
 the claw, on the  opposite side, pressed
 down upon  the neck.  The  handle
 of the instrument should now be grasp-
 ed with the right hand, and the tooth,
 by means  of a firm, steady rotation of
 the wrist, raised from its socket.  In  or-
 der to prevent the claw from slipping,
 (an accident that too frequently occurs,)
 it should be pressed doAvn with the fore-
 finger or  thumb of the left hand of
 the operator, until, by the rotation of the
 instrument, it becomes securely fixed
 to the tooth.
  If the tooth be situated on the left side
 of the mouth, the position of the ope-
 rator should be at the right  side  of  the
 patient;  but, if it be on the right side
 of the mouth, he should stand before
 him.
  For the removal of a tooth, on  the
 left side of the lower jaw,  or the right
 side in the upper, the palm of the hand
 should be beneath the handle of the in-
 strument ; and, vice versa, in the extrac-
 tion of one on the right side in the Ioav-
 er jaw, of on the left side in the  upper.
 The manner of grasping the instrument
 is, perhaps, of more  consequence than
 many imagine.   If it be not properly
 done, the  operator loses, to a great ex-
 tent, his control over it, and  applies the
 power to it disadvantageously.
  The directions here given are, in some
 respects, different from those laid down
 by other Avriters; yet we are  convinced,
 from much experience, that they will
 be found more conducive to the conve-
 nience of the operator and  the success
 of the operation, than those usually
 given for using this  instrument.
  There is a great diversity of opinion,
 as to whether a tooth should be removed
 inwards or outAvards.   Some direct the
fulcrum of the instrument to be placed
 on the outside of the tooth, others on the
inside, while others again, regard it as of
but little importance on which side it is
 placed.  But experience has  taught the
 author that the fulcrum should, gener-
 ally, be placed on  the inside, especially
 of the  lower teeth,  as  they  almost
 always incline towards the  interior of
 the mouth.  Moreover, the alveolar pa-
 rietes of these teeth are usually a little
 higher on the exterior edge of the jaw
 than on  the interior; so,  that the first
 motion of the instrument, with its ful-
 crum on the outside, brings  the side of
 the tooth against the socket, and thus,
 nearly double the amount of power is
 required to  remove it; while, at  the
 same time, the pain of the patient, and
 the chances of injury to the  alveolus
 are very much increased.
   The alveolar walls of the upper teeth
 are, generally, thinner than those of the
 lower, and thus do not afford so strong
 a support to the fulcrum of the instru-
 ment.
   It is, however, frequently  necessary
 to place the bolster of the instrument on
 the outside of the tooth; especially when
 it  is decayed in such a way, as not to
 afford a sufficiently firm support for the
 claw  of  the instrument on this side of
 the tooth.  But, whenever it  is possible
 to  remove  a tooth  inwards, it should
 always be done.

 Manner  of  Extracting Teeth with For-
                ceps.
   In describing the manner of extract-
 ing teeth with  forceps, the author  will
 begin with  the incisores and cuspidati
 of the upper jaw.
   Incisores and Cuspidati  of  the Upper
 Jaw.—The  patient seated,  the gum
 should be completely separated from the
 neck of the tooth, which should then be
 grasped with a pair of straight forceps,
 with thin crescent-shaped jaws, made
 sufficiently concave on the inside as not
 to  press upon  the crown  of  the tooth.
 This done, the tooth should  be firmly
 forced  outwards  and inwards several
 times in quick  succession,  giving it  at
 the same time a slight rotary  motion,
 and as soon as it is found to  yield, it
should be removed from the socket by a
vertical effort.
  If the  tooth be  much  decayed,  it 
EXT
261
EXT
should be grasped as high up under the
gum as possible, and no more pressure
applied than may be  necessary to pre-
vent the forceps from slipping.  By ne-
glecting this precaution, teeth are  often
unnecessarily crushed.
  The position of the operator, while
extracting the above mentioned teeth,
should be at the  right of the patient,
as, indeed, it should be for the removal
of any of the others with forceps, as it en-
ables him to control his head with his left
arm, and to  separate the hps Avith the
hand of the same. Sometimes,  how-
ever, it may be necessary for him to
change his position a little, and occupy
one partly behind  his  patient, but more
to the right than to the left side.  One
or other of these positions he  may
always occupy, if  bis  forceps be of the
proper construction.
   Incisores of the Lower Jaw.—The di-
rections which have been given for the
extraction of the upper incisores and cus-
pidati, will, for the most part, be found
applicable for the removal of the incisores
of the loAver jaw; but forceps of a some-
Avhat different construction are required.
The jaAvs should not be more than one-
third as wide, and they should be bent
downwards, so as to  form  an angle of
thirty degrees Avith the handles of the in-
strument; for, if they are straight, the
hand  of the  operator will frequently
come in contact with the teeth of the
upper jaw,  inasmuch,  as the  lower
incisores generally incline inwards.
   Superior and Inferior Bicuspides and
Inferior  Cuspidati.—The  roots of  the
upper bicuspides being considerably flat-
tened and often bifid, will seldom admit of
much rotary motion. But in the extrac-
tion of one of  these teeth after the gum
has been separated, and the tooth grasp-
ed as high upon its neck as possible, the
connection Avith the alveolus is, first, to
be partially broken up  by several  quick
motions outwards  and inwards, then by
a  downward  effort, it may, in  most
cases, be easily removed from its fock-
et.  In  the extraction of a loAver bicus-
pis, or inferior  cuspidatus, a slight ro-
tary motion joined to  the outward and
inward  movement, will facilitate the
destruction  of the bond of union be-
tween the tooth and alveolus, it may, by
an upward force, be removed from the
socket.  But one pair of forceps is re-
quired for the removal of the upper and
lower bicuspides and  lower cuspidati;
the beak of these should be bent in the
same manner  as those used for the ex-
traction of  the  lower incisores.  The
jaAvs, however, should be about twice
as wide, and thin and crescent shaped.
   Upper  Molares.—These teeth hav-
ing three  roots, generally require more
force for their removal than the  inciso-
res, cuspidati, or bicuspides, of either
the upper or lower jaw, and in the ma-
jority of cases, more than is called for in
the removal of the inferior molares; and
two pair of forceps, one for the right, and
one for the left side, are also needed. The
directions for the removal of these, how-
ever, are few  and simple.  The gum
should be separated in the manner as be-
fore described, and the tooth then grasp-
ed with the appropriate forceps, as high
up under the gum as  possible, and after
having thoroughly loosened it by  an out-
ward and inward movement, repeated a
sufficient number of times, it may be re-
moved  by a downward effort from the
socket. The head of  the patient during
the operation should be firmly confined
with the left arm of the operator against
the back or head-piece of the operating
chair, while the corner of the mouth is
retracted  Avith  the  fingers of the  left
hand, and one of which should, when
practicable, be placed on  either  side of
the tooth.
   Upper Dentes Sapkntioz.—These teeth
are generally less firmly articulated than
either the first or second  superior mo-
lares, andconsequently are more easily
removed.  But the directions for the re-
moval of the one will be found applica-
ble for the removal of the other.  In
most cases, however, forceps of a  dif-
ferent shape and construction  are re- 
EXT
262
EXT
quired  for their extraction.    When
they  occupy  a vertical position, and
have crowns as long as the second mo-
lares, the bicuspid forceps will be found
as well adapted for their removal as any
that can be employed, but when their
crowns are shorter than those  of  the
second  molares, a forcep invented by
the late  Dr. Edward P. Church, and
described in  another place, should be
used.
  Lower Molares.—Although  the infe-
rior molares have  but two roots, they
are sometimes very firmly articulated,
requiring considerable force  for their
extraction, but for the removal  of  the
first, one pair of forceps only, are  re-
quired, provided they are of the  proper
construction.  In applying them, after
having  first  separated  the gum,  the
points  at  the extremity of  the jaws
should be forced between  the roots or
into the groove a  little above  where
they are given off, as far  as  possible,
and after having obtained  a firm hold,
the tooth  should be  forced  outwards
and inwards several times in quick suc-
cession, or  until the tooth moves freely,
when it should be lifted from the socket.
If the crown of the  tooth has been des-
troyed by caries, the upper edge of  the
alveolus should be included  between
the beak or  jaws  of the  instrument,
through  which  they  may readily  be
made to pass, on applying pressure to
the handles, and by this means a se-
cure hold upon  the tooth  will  be ob-
tained, when it may generaUy be easily
extracted.
  Lower Dentes Sapientiaz.—The dentes
sapientiae of the lower jaw when situat-
ed far back under the coronoid process,
are often exceedingly difficult to extract,
but Avith forceps having  crescent shap-
ed beaks like those used for  the removal
of the bicuspides,  they may  generally
be easily grasped, except in those cases
where the crown has been destroyed by
caries, and in  this case it may sometimes
be necessary to cut  away a portion of
the upper edge of the alveolus, either
with forceps or a sharp instrument, pre-
viously to  attempting  the removal of
the tooth. It occasionally happens, too,
that the roots of a loAver dens sapientiae
are bent in such a manner  as to consti-
tute a formidable obstacle to its removal.
But when this happens they are usually
turned posteriorly  towards the coronoid
process, so that after starting the tooth,
if it is found that it cannot be raised per-
pendicularly from the socket, an obsta-
cle of  this sort may be suspected, and
to overcome  Avhich, the crown  of the
tooth should be forced backwards, so as
to make the organ, in its evulsion, des-
cribe the segment of a circle.
   In the foregoing directions, the author
has supposed the arrangement and for-
mation of the teeth  to  be  natural.   It
sometimes happens that the roots of the
first and second molares as well as those
of the dentes sapientiae, are either bent,
diverge or converge in such a manner
as to render their extraction exceeding-
ly difficult.   Indeed, it cannot always
be done without fracturing the roots, or
alveoli, and sometimes bringing away a
portion of the latter, especially when the
roots,  after   diverging,  converge  and
come nearly or quite together at their
apices.  Sometimes  it is necessary to
cut away a  portion of the alveolus be-
fore the tooth can be removed,  which
may be done either  with forceps con-
structed for the purpose, or with a sharp
and  strong pointed instrument.  Simi-
lar obstacles are occasionally met Avith
in the  removal  of the  bicuspides and
cuspidati.  At other times the extrac-
tion of a tooth is rendered very difficult
by the  enlargement of the root by ex-
ostosis.  It  occasionally happens, too,
that when a  tooth has decayed on one
or both of its approximal surfaces, that
the adjoining tooth or teeth have so im-
pinged upon it as to  lock it in the jaw,
and to attempt to extract it without first
filing away a portion of the adjoining
teeth would  be  to  fail in the operation
or tb bring away two or more teeth at
the same time. 
               EXT               2(

  The dens sapientiae of the lower jaw
sometimes occupy a horizontal position,
the root being lodged  in  the  base of
the coronoid process while the grind-
ing surface of the crown is  in contact
with the posterior surface of the crown
of the second molar.  In these cases, it
will often be  necessary to extract the
latter before removing the former.
   Other obstacles  sometimes  present
themselves in  the  extraction of  teeth
which the judgment and tact of the op-
erator alone, can enable him to over-
come.   To point out all of which is im-
possible.  The nature and pecuharity of
each case, can alone suggest the method
of procedure most proper to be pursued
in the performance  of the operation.
The practitioner should never hesitate,
when it may be necessary to enable him
to obtain a firm hold upon  the tooth, to
remove  a portion of the alveolus, or to
include  it between the jaws of the for-
ceps.  The removal of the  upper edge
of the socket of a tooth, is never produc-
tive of injury, as it is always, soon after
the extraction  of the organ, destroyed
by a peculiar operation of the economy.
By this  means, when the croAvn of a
tooth  has become so much weakened
by disease as  not  to bear the neces-
sary  amount  of pressure, it may, in
almost  every  case, be immediately re-
moved;  and that too, Avithout inflicting
upon the patient,  half the pain  that
would be caused by its removal in any
other  way.
   In  the extraction  of the temporary
teeth, the operator should be careful to
not injure the  pulps of the  permanent
ones,  or the alveolar border, as accidents
of this sort sometimes occur.
   Extraction of  Roots  of Teeth.
The extraction of roots of teeth is some-
times  attended  with  considerable  diffi-
culty ; but generally, they can be  more
easily removed than whole  teeth, and
especially those of the molares, for after
the destruction of their crowns,  an  ef-
fort is usually  made by the economy to
expel them from the jaws.   This, as
                EXT

has been stated in another  place, con-
sists in the gradual destruction  and fill-
ing up cf the socket, by a deposition of
ossific matter  at  the  bottom, whereby
the articulation  of  the root  becomes
weakened,  and  its   removal rendered
proportionably easier. The alveolar cav-
ities are often wholly obhterated in the
course of two or three years  after the
destruction of the crowns of the teeth,
and the roots retained in  the mouth,
simply  by  their  connection with the
gums, so that for their removal, httle
more  is necessary  than to sever this
bond of union  with  a lancet or sharp-
pointed knife.
  It sometimes happens, however, that
they are deeply lodged in  the alveoli,
requiring considerable force for their re-
moval, often defeating the efforts and
placing at defiance the skill of the timid
and inexperienced practitioner; and for
the extraction of which a great variety of
instruments have been invented, among
which are  a pair of narrow-beaked for-
ceps, like those mentioned for the remo-
val of the lower incisores, a hook, punch,
elevator and screw.  See Forceps, Eleva-
tor, Punch and Screw for the Extraction
of Teeth. Although almost every dentist
has these instruments made to  suit his
own  pecuhar fancy,  the  manner of
using  them,  and the principal upon
which they act are the same.  It will,
therefore, be sufficient  to observe, that
they should be of  convenient size, made
of good steel, and so tempered as neither
to bend nor break.      <
  But for the skilful use of these instru-
ments considerable tact is required, and
this can be acquired only by practice.
In using the punch  and elevator, great
care is necessary to prevent them from
slipping and wounding the mouth of the
patient.  When, therefore, either of
these instruments are used,the forefinger
of the left hand of the operator should
be wrapped with a  cotton or linen rag,
and placed on the side of the root oppo-
site to that against  which  the instru-
ment is  apphed, so as to catch the point
3 
               EXT               2£

 in case it should slip.  This is a precau-
 tion which should never be omitted.
   For the removal of the roots of the
 bicuspid and molar teeth, and often for
 those of the cuspidati and incisores, the
 narrow-beaked forceps, to  which allu-
 sion has before been made, is the most
 efficient and successful instrument that
 can  be employed.  In using it for the
 extraction of a root which does not pro-
 trude  from the  alveolus,  the  gums
 should be separated from the latter, and
 so much of it as may  be necessary to
 obtain a secure hold upon the former,
 included between  the jaws of the beak
 of the forceps, Avhich, from their being
 very  narroAV, readily pass through it,
 and a firm hold at once obtained upon
 the root; when, after moving it a few
 times, outwards and inwards, it may be
 easily removed from the socket.  There
 are some cases, however, in which the
 punch, hook and elevator may be advan-
 tageously used. We have also occasion-
 ally met with cases where we have suc-
 ceeded in removing roots of teeth with
 great ease, with an elevator shaped like
 the blade of a knife, by forcing it down
 into the socket by the side of the root, and
 then turning it so  as to make the back
 press against the  former and the edge
 against the latter. When an elevator
 of this sort  is used, the blade should not
 exceed an inch in length; and it should
be straight, sharp  at the  point and have
 a very thick back, in  order  to prevent
it from breaking in the operation.  In
using the common elevator, it  is neces-
sary  that there should be an adjoining
tooth or root, to act as a fulcrum. When
this can be  obtained, a root, or even a
whole tooth, may sometimes be removed
with it; but as a general rule the forceps
should be preferred to any  of these in-
 struments.
  For the extraction of the roots of the
upper front teeth, after they have be-
 come so much funnelled out by decay,
as to render their walls incapable of sus-
taining the pressure  of  forceps,  the
screw is invaluable.  This is of a coni-
>,t                EXT

 cal  shape,  and with it, a sufficiently
 firm hold can be obtained for the remo-
 val of a root, by screwing it up into the
 cavity.  But before it is introduced, the
 softened decomposed bone on the inner
 walls  of the  root should  be removed
 with a  conical three cornered instru-
 ment of the size of the screw.
   But the compound screw forceps, in-
 vented by Dr. S. P. Hullihen of Wheel-
 ing, Va., is a much better instrument
 for the removal of the roots of the su-
 perior incisores and even cuspidati, than
 the simple screAV,  inasmuch  as it com-
 bines the advantages of both the  screw
 and forceps.  See Forceps, compound
 screw.
   For the extraction of the roots of the
 upper molares, before they have become
 separated from each other, Dr.  May-
 nard has invented two pair of very val-
 uable forceps, one for the right  and one
 for the left side of the mouth.   See For-
 ceps,  Dr. Maynard's.  Dr. Elliot has
 also invented a very ingenious instru-
 ment for the extraction of roots of molar
 and bicuspid teeth.
   The hook can only be advantageously
 employed for  the removal  of  the roots
 of the molar teeth upon the left side of
 the mouth, and the manner of using it,
 is as follows : After having separated the
 gum from the root, the  hook is forced
 down on the outside, and held firmly in
 place, with  one or more of the fingers
 of the left hand, while with the handle
 of the  instrument  in the  right, it is
 gradually forced from the socket.  But
 as forceps can be used more efficiently
 for the removal of roots  of  teeth on
 which the hook can be made to act, this
 latter instrument is  not, at present, in
 much repute.
   Extraction of Teeth situated out
 of the Range of the Dental Arch-
 es.  In treating of the removal of such
 teeth,  Desirabode says, whatever may
 be their situation "their extraction re-
 quires the greatest care," for, "if they
 are  placed  immediately behind  or in
 front of other teeth, these latter may,
2< 
EXT
265
EXT
in some degree, be loosened by the effort;
and if  they  are  situated at  a  distance
from the dental  range, there is danger
of the instrument  slipping, in  conse-
quence of the difficulty of taking hold of
them, or, in extracting them, of seriously
injuring the surrounding parts."  "For
this  reason, it is important, .that in ex-
tracting such teeth as are situated near
the alveolar border, they should be re-
moved Avith instruments acting in a
straight line, without causing a circular
movement, which might have the effect
of compromising the firmness  of those
regularly situated before or behind them.
When they offer a sufficient hold, for-
ceps are pecuharly adapted to their ex-
traction ; the straight forceps, when they
are situated in front, and the curved,
Avhen they are situated behind the den-
tal range, particularly in the lower jaw.
The precaution  should  always  be ob-
served to sustain the adjacent  teeth, by
placing the  fingers  upon their crowns,
so that the operator may be  apprised of
their shghtest movement."
   "But  when these  teeth  are  simple
tubercles, as is generaUy the case with
supernumerary  teeth, it wUl be diffi-
cult to take hold of them with forceps;
it AviU be necessary then, to introduce a
lever (elevator) between  them and the
regular teeth when they are near them,
or into the socket, if they are too far off
to aUow a fulcrum to be made of them.
In such cases as the last, it is often bet-
ter, we repeat, to excise than to extract
them."  As the  recommendation of this
latter procedure  is so obviously opposed
to correct practice, inasmuch as the pres-
ence of a root in the jaws is always ne-
cessarily productive of more or less irri-
tation, keeping  up so long  as it is per-
mitted to remain, a  morbid action in the
surrounding parts, the author would ob-
serve, that it would be far preferabe for
the purpose of effecting  its  removal at
once, to cut away a sufficient portion of
the socket, to enable the  operator to ob-
tain a firm hold  upon it with forceps.
But this is rarely necessary, as it seldom
     23
happens, that the bulb of the crown of
a supernumerary tooth is situated within
the alveolus, and consequently all that
is necessary to secure a firm hold upon
it with forceps, is, to force  the instru-
ment up on it to the  alveolus, when by
a slight rotary motion it may generally
be easily removed.
  But for the removal of such teeth, it
often becomes necessary to have forceps
constructed   expressly  for  individual
cases.   Without  doing  this, it wUlbe
impossible  to have such as are adapted
to the various  pecuharities which dif-
ferent cases present.
  Extraction  of Concealed Teeth.
It sometimes happens that teeth are de-
veloped in other parts than the alveolar
Border, and  remain out  of  sight, occa-
sionaUy giving rise to severe local irri-
tation ;  and it more frequently happens
that they remain buried in parts adja-
cent to  the place which they should oc-
cupy in the alveolar border.  "These
teeth, however," as  Desirabode  justly
observes,  "almost  always ultimately
make  their appearance; but  the diffi-
culty with which their eruption is ef-
fected  is often troublesome enough to
constitute a state of disease, and their
presence is frequently the cause of phe-
nomena, the true character of which,
may be  completely misunderstood."
Numerous examples of this sort are on
record.   But so  variable is the  place
which they occupy,  that no specific di-
rections can be laid  down  for their ex-
traction.  The method of procedure can
alone be determined by the circumstances
connected  with each individual case.
The foUowing cases, however, will serve
to convey some idea of the effects liable
to be produced by such teeth, and of the
manner of their removal.  The  first is
taken from the  author's  own practice.
  In 1834, he was requested to visit and
also to extract a tooth  for  Miss C. of
about twenty-five years of age, of Balti-
more, which was  supposed  to have
some connection with a distressing neu-
ralgic affection with which  she had 
               EXT

been afflicted for several years.   The
tooth Avas the second right superior mo-
laris, but not perceiving any indications
of disease in  it, after a careful and
thorough examination, he was induced
to beheve that it had no agency in the
production of the  neuralgic affection
with which she was  troubled, but on
being informed  that the pain  always
commenced in the immediate vicinity of
this tooth, he was  induced to  make a
second examination.   Observing that
the wisdom tooth had not yet made its
appearance, and that the  gum back  of
the second molaris  was  very full and
prominent, it occurred to him  that its
eruption  had been  prevented by  some
cause, and that its presence in the alveo-
lar border had given rise  to the painful
affection  under  Avhich she had, for so
long a time, been laboring.  The gum
was laid  open and the wisdom  tooth
found  occupying   a  horizontal  posi-
tion,  the  grinding  surface in  contact
with the  posterior surface of the second
molaris, and the  roots presenting poste-
riorly.  As only about two-thirds of the
tooth was embedded in the jaw, it was
easily removed with an elevator.   The
extraction of this tooth was immediately
foUowed  by a subsidence of the neural-
gic pains.
  The foUowing case was communicat-
ed to the author by his brother, Dr. John
Harris, in 1845.  Mr.----, about twen-
ty-five years of age, applied to him for
advice in relation to an affection of the
inferior maxillary with which  he had
been  troubled for  some months, and
about which he had previously consult-
ed several  physicians and  surgeons.
From the gums and periosteal tissue on
the lingual side of his teeth on one side
of his loAver jaw, a  fungous tumor had
originated.  It was  at first  supposed to
have  resulted from carious  teeth, but
upon examination,  it was found that
the second bicuspis  of the affected side
had made its appearance on the  inner
edge of the base of the jaw, buried in
the soft parts of the floor of the mouth.
3               EXT

 The situation of the tooth was such a*
 to preclude the possibility  of taking hold
 of it with forceps of the  ordinary con-
 struction.   He, therefore, had  a pair
 bent below  the joint  in the form of a
 hook, and with these, after having ex-
 posed the tooth, he succeeded in grasp-
 ing, and removing it.
   The  two foUowing cases are quoted
 from Desirabode:
   "In 1828, a lady about  thirty or thir-
 ty-two years of age, came to consult us
 about  pain, sometimes  very  intense,
 which she suffered in aU the left side of
 the superior jaw, and which had con-
 tinued for six years, keeping her in a
 state of irritabUity  which the slightest
 emotion transformed into  a nervous cri-
 sis.  Amongst the physicians Avho had
 visited her, some  had pronounced this
 pain the  result  of some  rheumatic af-
 fection, the sheet-anchor of many prac-
 titioners in  doubtful cases; others  ex-
 plained the case by saying  it Avas a lesion
 of the fifth pair of nerves,  against which
 no natural treatment could be success-
 fuUy  directed.  What  seemed to  give
 more probabUity  to  this last  opinion
 was,  the  fact that when the greatest
 exacerbation of  the pain  occurred, the
 hearing became obtuse and the face ani-
 mated.
   "Tired out with the diversity of opin-
 ion, and especiaUy  with the failure of
 the treatment advised, this lady had
 consulted several dentists, who, at this
 period, enjoyed the greatest reputation.
 None of them ventured  to give an opin-
 ion as to the cause  of the pain, and all,
 after a careful  examination, had the
 good sense to refuse to remove one or
 any of the teeth which the patient beg-
 ged, earnestly, to   have extracted, but
 which nothing presented by their ap-
 pearance, to the gentleman, authorised
 their removal.  We  were in aU points
 of this last opinion, and the patient left
 us, as little  satisfied, of course, with us
 as with the rest of those upon whom
 she had caUed.
   "We saw nothing of her for about two
26' 
EXT
267
EXT
 years;  but, in 1830, we recognized her,
 in company with' a young  girl, ten or
 twelve years of age  who had  been
 brought to obtain our opinion  with re-
 gard to her  two  superior central inci-
 sores, which seemed about to take a bad
 direction.   We felt at liberty to make
 some inquiries of her in  relation to the
 results  of the painful affection of the
 face which had been the occasion of the
 honor of  our first interview with  her-
 She replied, that the pain she then suf-
 fered had continued  to  increase, and
 that at last she had made up her mind
 to resort to one of those dentists who do
 not  reason, and who complacently ex-
 tract aU teeth they are requested to ex-
 tract.   We begged her to permit us to
 make a second examination.  In exam-
 ining the  teeth on the left  side of the
 superior jaw, we discovered that one of
 the  small molars was missing;  this fact
 had escaped us the first time, and  this
 proves that in making examinations of
 this kind, too much care cannot be taken
 if it is desired to avoid the commission
 of injurious mistakes.
   "Then turning our attention, careful-
 ly to the alveolar border, we discovered
 that it Was not only thicker than  it is
 ordinarUy, but that there was a  hard
 and circumscribed tumefaction, which
 corresponded to a place between the re-
 maining small molar and  the first of the
 three large molares.  From this moment
 we  had no further doubt  that this  part
 of the  alveolar  contained the  missing
 tooth, and when we expressed this opin-
 ion  to the patient, she desired that we
 should take steps without delay to make
 certain of the presumed fact.  A slight
 incision was  made with  the bistoury
 upon the most  projecting part of the
 tumor, the kind of resistance to the in-
 strument, which we experienced, left
 no doubt, and authorized us to push
 our examination farther, and we  soon
 discovered  a small molar lying trans-
 versely  with the  crown  forward.   It
 was easily loosened with a curved lever,
introduced between it  and the posterior
 face of the tooth in front of it, and then
 extracted with a pair of curved forceps.
 The wound suppurated for six or eight
 days, after  which healed, and the pain
 disappeared permanently.
   "In 1813, a man having a fibrous tu-
 mor, situated in the middle of the  roof
 of the mouth, came to  consult Lafor-
 gue.*  From time  to time,  a whitish
 odorless matter  escaped from the  side
 of this tumor which was about the  size
 of an ordinary  cherry-stone.  A num-
 ber of surgeons  who had seen the case,
 were of the opinion that the roots of the
 incisor teeth, (stUl in  place,)  either
 caused or sustained this affection.  The
 croAvns of these teeth were gone, hav-
 ing  been destroyed by  softening  and
 caries.   Laforgue removed three  of
 these  roots  and left one,  at the right
 side, which was firm and not at aU pain-
 ful.   None  of the roots presented  evi-
 dence of being either directly or indirect-
 ly, through their surrounding alveolar
 tissue, connected with  the affection of
 the  palate, which fact  Laforgue com-
 municated to the patient.   Suppuration
 from the side of the tumor recommenc-
 ed.  This tumor was cauterized with
 the actual cautery twice in the space of
 ten  days by  Boyer.  Pelletan was of
 opinion that it  was a case of caries of
 the  jaAV; Dubois,  that  the remaining
 root was the cause of the  continuance
 of the disease, and advised its extraction.
 Dupuytren  was also of the latter opin-
 ion.   Before leaving the patient, hoAV-
 ever, Dupuytren observed,that although
 the  alveolar border was free from any
 indications  of disease,  it was thicker
 than is commonly the  case  after  the
 teeth have been  lost.  He, accordingly,
 made  an incision  of the gum, over
 the  part which projected  most;  this
 point   corresponded  with the  alveo-
 lus of the  lateral  incisor of the right
 side, but he found neither fluid nor any-
 thing to direct his attention  to the cause
of the affection.  The root Avas extract-
ed by Laforgue, who discovered, Avhat
        ♦Vide l'Art du Dentiste. 
EXT               268               EXT
it  Avas  impossible to distinguish  pre-
viously to its extraction, as it Avas almost
covered with the gum, that it was  the
root of a smaU  molar tooth.  The con-
dition of the alveolar periosteum and of
the root, satisfied  him that it was not
the cause of the tumor of the palate.
As he had previously extracted several
roots, amongst Avhich was not that of
the canine tooth, which gave no evidence
of its existence, and as the patient as-
serted, positively, that he had had none
of the roots extracted, except by him,
Laforgue was  led  to beheve  that  the
canine tooth was situated along the alve-
olar border.  He told the patient, of his
suspicions, and was  begged by him to
have  a consultation with  Dupuytren,
which was agreed to.
  "The grounds upon which Laforgue
came to this conclusion were, that, not-
withstanding the loss of the incisor teeth
and root, the alveolar border  had  not
diminished in size, but, on the contrary,
it was so much  enlarged as to lead to the
belief that  some body  was contained
within it.  The patient possessed a great
deal of firmness, submitted himself into
their hands and aUowed them to make
the necessary examination.  The result
was,  that the  canine tooth was found
situated  in the same place from which
the roots had  been  extracted,  but  a
little posteriorly.
   "The crown was towards the left side,
the point touched  against  the alveolus
of the canine  tooth  of  this side;  the
root was turned toward  the right side
and behind the root of the small molar
which had been extracted in the morn-
ing; the external face was turned down-
ward.  The tooth was incrusted, about
two-thirds of its whole length, and ad-
herent to the maxillary bone.  The ex-
traction was affected with a pyramidal
lever, the point being placed upon the
posterior face of the tooth; the triturat-
ing surface  of the  left  smaU  molar
Avhich Avas supported by Dupuytren,
during the operation,  was made the ful-
crum.  The operation was performed
slowly and gently, without the produc-
tion of much pain. ^A.11 the  effects, of
which it was the cause, rapidly passed
away, and the wounds healed without
any other remedies than  an  emoUient
gargle used the  first  two days,  and
afterwards honeyed wine."
  We might multiply cases of this sort
if it were necessary, but the  foregoing
will suffice.
General Rides to be Observed in the Ex-
           traction cf Teeth.
  In recapitulating the rules applicable
for  the  extraction of teeth, Desirabode
says, "Whatever tooth or root is to be
extracted, whatever place it may occupy,
or whatever instrument may be used for
this purpose, the  certainty of the suc-
cess of the operation is just in propor-
tion to the precaution observed by the
operator, first to take a sure hold of the
tooth, and then to obtain a firm fulcrum
for  his instrument.  It is particularly
important  to obtain  a solid fulcrum,
when the lever is used,, for otherwise, it
may escape from the part to which it is
applied and wound the adjacent parts;
the forefinger should be placed near the
point  of the instrument, in order as it
were to watch over its movements.
  "We have said that the tooth should
be seized  as far  up upon the root as
possible, and the question now presents
itself, whether it is  necessary first to
lay bare this portion, that is, whether
the gum, which is adherent to the neck,
should be separated from it and pushed
upward or downward, as the case may
be, to give place to the instrument.
The older dentists never faded to take
this precaution, which they regarded as
the first step in the operation. For this
purpose they used an instrument which
was caUed, and which is still named,
dechaussoir; this was a steel shaft, solid-
ly fixed in a handle, with a blade of
some  five  or six lines, and terminating
in a point—in a word, the same instru-
ment now used for opening abscesses
situated far back in the mouth, and to 
EXT
269
EXT
incise the gums when they present an ob-
stacle to the free eruption of the teeth."
  This very  important  precaution is
recommended by Desirabode, as weU as
by most other French writers, except in
those cases where it becomes necessary
to prevent seizing the tooth between the
jaAvs or hook of the instrument, but it is
requisite not only to enable the operator
to obtain a firmer hold upon the tooth,
and also to prevent lacerating the gums-
The author has known it to be torn from
the alveolar border for more than an inch,
in some cases where it has been neglect-
ed.  The free and complete separation of
the gums from the tooth or root should
always constitute the  first step in the
operation.
   After having grasped  the tooth firm-
ly, the operator should proceed slowly
in his efforts to remove it, gradually in-
creasing the force untU it  is  perceived
to move in the socket, and in the  trac-
tion Avhich he may  find it necessary to
use in its removal, as  any sudden and
violent effort  may  result either in the
fracture of the tooth or alveolus.   We
would, therefore, say, in the language of
the  author from  whom  we  have just
quoted, "that  a tooth cannot be satisfac-
tordy extracted, if its adhesion to the jaw
 is not overcome  by a force  Avhich, in-
 creasing  gradually, causes  its attach-
 ments to yield without damage to the
 adjacent  parts.  It results,  in conse-
 quence of a deviation from this princple,
that  accidents without  number occur,
 that  teeth are so frequently broken in
 their sockets,  and that sometimes con-
 siderable fractures of the jaw occur.  In
 operating, then, the degree of force used
 should be increased, and an effort made,
 by raising the hand, to draw the tooth in
 a direction as nearly perpendicular as
possible; in a word, less force than ad-
dress should be used."
   Of the importance of the foregoing
precautions, M. Gariot seems to be fully
apprised.  He says, "In the extraction
of teeth, there is a physical principle
which should not be lost sight of, that
      23*
every time a body is distended  more
quickly than it  yields,  it will break.
For this reason, the effort to effect the
extraction of a tooth  should be gentle,
moderate, continuous and without  the
least sudden impulse.  If this important
observation  is not lost sight of, teeth
wiU rarely be broken,  an accident which
is of trifling character, but one which
is sufficient to ruin the reputation of a
dentist Avho may have  much  merit."
Many  examples  of  accidents  which
have resulted from too  much  precipi-
tancy in the performance of the opera-
tion might be cited, but we will not en-
large further upon the subject.
  EXTRACTIVE.  In Chemistry, a
pecuhar,  immediate  principle in  ex-
tracts, supposed to consist of combina-
tions of acid, coloring matter, and  an
azoted body.
  EXTRACTUM.   An extract.
  Extractum Aconi'ti.   Extract of
aconite.
  Extractum AconitiAlcohol'icum,
Alcoholic extract of aconitum.
  Extractum Al'oes  Purifica'tum.
Purified extract of aloes.
  Extractum Anthem'idis.  Extract
of chamomile.
  Extractum Artemi'sie  Absin'thii.
Extract of wormwood.
  Extractum Belladon'ne.  Extract
of beUadonna.
  Extractum   Belladonne   Alco-
holicum.   Alcoholic extract of bella-
donna.
  Extractum  Cascaril'le Resino-
sum.  Alcoholic extract  of cascarUla.
  Extractum   Catharticum.   Ex-
tractum colocynthidis compositum.
  Extractum Cincho'ne.   Extract of
cinchona.
  Extractum Cinchone Resino'sum.
Resinous extract of bark.
  Extractum Colocyn'thidis. Extract
of colocynth.
 Extractum ColocynthidisComposi'-
tum.   Compound extract of colocynth.
  Extractum Conii. Extract of hem-
lock. 
EXT              270               EYE
   Extractum  Conii Alcohol'icum.
 Alcoholic extract of hemlock.
   Extractum Digit'alis.   Extract of
 foxglove.
   Extractum Dulcama'rje.  Extract
 of bitter sweet.
   Extractum  Elate'rii.   Extract of
 elaterium.
   Extractum Folio'rum Sabine. Ex-
 tract of savine.
   Extractum Gentia'ne.   Extract of
 gentian.
   Extractum Glycyrrhi'z.e. Extract
 of liquorice.
   Extractum Hjematox'yli.  Extract
 of logwood.
   Extractum Helle'bori Alcohol-
 i'cum.   Alcoholic extract of black hel-
 lebore.
   Extractum Hellebori Nigri. Ex-
 tract of black hellebore.
   Extractum Hu'muli.  Extract  of
 hops.
   Extractum Hyoscy'ami.   Extract
 of henbane.
   Extractum Hyoscyami Alcoholi'-
 c u m .   Alcoholic extract of henbane.
   Extractum  Jala'p.e.   Extract  of
jalap.
   Extractum Jalaps  Resino'sum.—
 Resinous extract of jalap.
   Extractum Juglan'dis.  Extract of
 butternut.
   Extractum Krame'rie. Extract of
 rhatany.
   Extractum Lactu'ce.  Extract of
 lettuce.
   Extractum Nucis Vomi'ce. Extract
 of nux vomica.
   Extractum Opii Purifica'tum. Ex-
 tract of opium.
   Extractum Papav'eris.  Extract of
 white poppy.
  Extractum Pareire.   Extract  of
pareira.
   Extractum Podophyl'li.   Extract
 of may-apple.
  Extractum auAssiE.   Extract  of
 quassia.
   Extractum auERCus.  Extract  of
oak bark.
   Extractum  aui'NiE.  Impure sul-
 phate of quinine.
   Extractum Rhei.  Extract of rhu-
 barb.
   Extractum Rute.  Extract of rue.
   Extractum  Sarsaparil'lje.   Ex-
 tract of sarsaparilla.
   Extractum  Saturni.  Solution of
 acetate of lead.
   Extractum Stramo'nii.  Extract of
 stramonium.
   Extractum Uvje Ursi.  Extract of
 bearberry.
   Extractum  Valeria'ne.  Extract
 of valerian.
   EXTRA'NEOUS BODIES.  From
 extra, without.   Corpus externum.  In
 Hygiene, all substances, whether sohd,
 liquid, or gaseous, animate  or inani-
 mate, introduced from without, or form-
 ed in the body, without  constituting
 any part of the  organism.
  EXTRAVASATION.  Extravasa-
 tio; from extra,  out of, and vas, a vessel.
 Escape of fluids, especially blood and
 serum, from  their  proper  vessels, and
 infiltration or affusion of the same into
 the meshes of the surrounding textures.
  EXTREMITY.  Extremitas.  In
 Anatomy, the  limbs, as the upper and
 lower extremities, but in common lan-
 guage, the end or point of any thing.
 Also, applied to  the last moments of life.
  EXTRIN'SIC  Extrinsecus, exter-
 nal, outward.  In Anatomy, applied to
 the external muscles of certain organs,
 as the ear, tongue, &c.
  EXTROVER'SION.  Extroversion,
 as of the bladder turned inside out.
  EXUDATION.   Exudatio; from
 exudo, to sweat  out. A sweating or dis-
 charge of a fluid or moisture from the
 skin,  the  surface of a  membrane, an
 ulcer, &c.  Also, the discharge of the
juices from a plant,  moisture from  the
 earth, &c.
  EXULCERATION. Exulceratio;
 from exukero, to cause to ulcerate.  In-
 cipient ulceration.
  EYE. The globular organ which oc-
 cupies the cavity of the orbit, constitut- 
FAC
271
FAC
ing the especial apparatus of vision.  Its
appendages are the eyelids, cilia, lach-
rymal apparatus, Stc.  The globe of the
eye is composed of membranes arranged
one within the other, and  humors en-
closed by them.  It is moved by four
straight,  and  two  oblique  muscles.
With the  exception of  the optic, it is
principally supplied with nerves from
the opthalmic ganglion.
  F.  In Chemistry, the symbol of fluo-
rine.  In  Medical Prescriptions,  it is
used as an abbreviation of fiat or fiant,
let it, or them, be made.
  FABA. From mva, to feed.  A bean.
  FABA'RIA. See Sedum Telephium.
  FABRA'RUM AaUA.  Forge wa-
ter.
  FACE. Fades.   The  anterior part
of the head, consisting of the forehead,
eyes  and eyebrows, nose, cheeks, lips
and chin.  In  an Anatomical point of
view, it consists of that portion of the
head situated below and in front of the
cranium.
  Face, Bones of.  The face is formed
of fourteen bones; namely, the two su-
perior maxilbry, the two malar, the two
ossa nasi,  the tivo ossa unguis, the vomer,
the two ossa palati, the two  ossa  spon-
giosa, and the  inferior maxillary.   To
these may be added the os frontis, and
thirty-two teeth.
  FACIAL.  Facialis.  Belonging to
the face, as the facial nerve, facial neu-
ralgia, &c.
  Facial Angle. See Angle, facial.
  Facial Artery.  The third branch
of the external carotid.  It ascends to the
sub-maxillary gland, behind which it
passes on to  the bone of  the  lower
jaw—thence it goes in front of the mas-
seter muscle to the angles of the mouth,
  Eye-Glass.  An optical instrument
used to assist vision.
  Eye-Stone.  The opercula of small
spiral shells, used to remove particles
from between the lids and globe of the
eye.
  Eye-Teeth.   The cuspidati of the
upper jaw are  so called because their
roots extend nearer to the orbit than any
of the other teeth.
and, finally, terminates  at the side of
the nose by anastomosing with the op-
pthalmic arteries.
  In  its  course it  gives off the sub-
mental, inferior labial, superior and in-
ferior coronary arteries—which mainly
supply  the  elevators,  depressors, and
circular muscles of the mouth, or those
agents concerned in the first steps of di-
gestion—the prehension of food.
  Facial Nerve.   The facial  nerve
arises from  the  medulla  oblongata
between the  corpus ohvare and resti-
form, close by the lower margin  of the
pons-varolii—it  then passes  forwards
and outwards with the portio-molhs, to
the foramen auditorium internus, which
it enters and passes  on  to the base of
this opening; here  these tAvo  nerves
separate, the mollis  going to the laby-
rinth of the ear, while the facial enters
the aqueduct of Fallopius, where it is
joined by the vidian; it then goes on in
a curved direction outwards  and back-
wards behind the tympanum^ Avhere it
parts with the  vidian, and proceeds to
the stylo-mastoid foramen, into  which
it emerges.
  At this point it sends off three branch-
es : 1. The posterior auricular;  2. The
styb-hyoid; 3. The digastric.  The pos-
terior auricular  ascends  behind the ear,
crosses the mastoid  process  to the oc-
F. 
FAG
272
FAL
cipito-frontalis muscle. The stylo-hyoid
is distributed to the stylo-hyoid muscle,
and the digastric to the posterior belly
of the digastric muscle.
  The facial nerve being deeply embed-
ed in  the substance of the parotid gland,
divides  into two branches,  a superior
and inferior; these have frequent unions
called the pes  anserinus, or porotidian
plexus, and  send branches  to the Avhole
of the side of the face.
  The  upper branch,  called the tem-
poro-facial,  ascends in front of the ear
upon the zygoma, supplying the  sides
of the head, ear and forehead, and anas-
tomosing with the occipital and supra-
orbital nerves—a set of branches pass
transversely to the cheek, rami malares,
furnishing the lower eyelid, lips,  side
of the nose, and uniting with the infra-
orbitar nerve.
  The inferior, or cervico-facial branch
descends, supplying  the loAver jaw and
upper part of the neck, giving off the
following branches: 1.  The maxillary,
Avhich passes the ramus of the jaw and
masseter muscles to the loAver lip  and
its  muscles;   2.  The sub-maxillary,
Avhich  passes  along the base  of the
lower jaw, supplying the muscles which
arise  from  this part;  3.  The cervical,
which go to the platysma and superficial
muscles of  the neck.
   Facial Vein. The vein which re-
turns the blood of the facial artery.  It
generally descends obliquely on the face
to the external or internal jugular.
   Facial Neuralgia.  See Neuralgia
 Faciei.
   FACTITIOUS.  Factitius ; from fa-
 cere,  to make.  That which is made by
 art. Artificial, as factitious teeth, &c.
   FACULTY.  Facidtas.  The power
 by which any function is executed. In
 Medical Colleges, the professors.
   F^CES. The plural of fcex. Alvine
 excretions.   Also,  dregs, or sediment.
   FiECULA.  SeeFecula.
   FiEX.  An excretion. Also, a sedi-
 ment.
   FAGA'RA  OCTANDRA.   The
systematic  name of the tree which af-
fords  the tacamahaca, a  resinous sub-
stance of a  delightful fragrant odor.
  Fagara Piperi'ta.  A plant found in
Japan and the Phihppine islands, the
berries of which are called Japan pep-
per.
  FAGO'PYRUM.   See Polygonum
Fagopyrum.
  FA'GUS.  The beech. The name of
a genus of trees.
  Fagus Casta'nea.   The systematic
name of the chestnut tree.
  Fagus Castanea Pumila. The chin-
quapin.
  Fagus Sylvat'ica.   The systematic
name of the beech tree.
  FAINTING.  See Syncope.
  FAL'CIFORM.  Falciformis; from
falx, a scythe, and forma, resemblance.
Applied to parts of the body Avhich re-
semble a scythe.
  Falciform Process.  The falx.  A
process of  the dura mater which sepa-
rates  the hemispheres of the brain.
  FAL'CO.   From falco, a falcon.  A
genus of accipitres diurnal birds, as the
eagle, hawk, falcon, &c.
  FALLING SICKNESS.  Epilepsy.
  FALLOPIAN LIGAMENT. Pou-
part's ligament.
  FALLOPIAN TUBE.  See  Tube,
Fallopian.
  FALSE. Falsus. Pseudo;  spurious.
That which  is not pure.  Adulterated.
A deviation from nature.
   False  Membrane. A morbid pro-
duct  resembling a membrane, formed
from an exudation of coagulable lymph.
They are  produced in croup, pleurisy,
&c.
   False Passage.  An accidental pas-
sage  sometimes made  in carelessly per-
formed operations, as  in the introduc-
 tion  of a  catheter when armed with
 caustic.
   FALSIFICATION.  From  falsus,
 false, and facere, to make. Adulteration.
   FALX.  A scythe.  See Falciform
 Process.
   Falx Cerebelli.   A triangular pro- 
FAS               273               FAS
cess of the dura mater between the lobes
of the cerebeUum.
  Falx Cerebri.  The falciform pro-
cess.
  Falx Major. The falx cerebri
  Falx Minor. The falx cerebelh.
  Falx Peritonei.  The great falx of
the peritoneum.  A process  of the pe-
ritoneum extending from the umbilicus.
  FAMES.  Hunger.
  FAMILY.   In Natural  History, a
collection of a number of genera, aUied
to each other by  common  characters,
and having a close affinity  in organi-
zation.
  FANCY MARK.   Na?vus.
   FANON.  A peculiar splint employ-
 ed  in fractures  of the lower extremi-
 ties.
   FANTOME,  See Phantom.
   FARCY GLANDERS.  See Equi-
 nia.
   FARFARA. See Tussilago Farfara.
   FARI'NA.    From far, corn,  of
 which it is made.  Meal or flour.
   Farina  Amygdalarum.   Almond
 powder.
   Farina Fossilis. The agaricus min-
 eralis—a  pure carbonate   of lime or
 mountain milk.
   Farine Resolventes.    Resolvent
 flours.
   FARINA'CEOUS.     Resembhng
 flour.  All alimentary substances which
  contain farina.
    FARINO'SUS. • Farinaceous.
    FAS'CIA.  From fascis, a bundle. A
  bandage, fillet, or roller. Also, an apo-
 neurosis, or tendonous expansion which
 binds parts together.
    Fascia Aponeurotica   Femoris.—
 See Fascia Lata.
    Fascia  Cribriformis.    A fibrous
 substance, pierced with numerous open-
 ings, extending  from Poupart's  liga-
 ment over the inguinal glands.
    Fascia Dividens.   A dividing band-
  age, used to keep parts separated from
 each other.
    Fascia Ili'aca. An aponeurotic cov-
  ering of the psoas and iliacus muscles.
  Fascia Inguinalis. The spica band -
age.
  Fascia  Lata.   The  fascia  of the
the thigh, which is attached superiorly
to Poupart's ligament, the crest of the
ilium, sacrum, coccyx, tuberosity of the
ischium, ramus of the  ischium,  and
pubes; and inserted into the linea as-
pera of the thigh, and to  the prominent
points of the knee-joint.
   Fascia  Lata Muscle.  The tensor
vaginae femoris, a muscle of the upper
and outer part of the thigh.
   Fascia Propria.  The proper cellu-
lar envelop of a hernial sac.
   Fascia Sculteti. A bandage of sep-
arate strips.
   Fascia  Spiralis.  A spiral bandage.
   Fascia  Superficialis.  The  apo-
neurotic covering of the abdominal mus-
cles.
   Fascia T-formis. The T bandage.
   Fascia Tortilis.  A tourniquet.
   Fascia Transversa'lis.   A cellulo-
 fibrous membrane, which lines  the
 inner surface of the transversalis mus-
 cle.
   FASCIAL.   Fascialis.  Of, or be-
 longing to, a fascia.
   FASCIATIO.  The binding up with
 bandages a diseased or wounded part.
   FASCICULI TERETES  CORD-
 IS.  The carneae columnae.
   FASCICULUS.  From  fascis,  a
 bundle. In Anatomy, an assemblage or
 bundle of fibres, either muscular, nerv-
 ous, or aponeurotic. In Pharmacy, a
 handful, and in Botany, a number of
 flowers closely arranged, in Avhich the
 short and straight pedicles have attained
 nearly the same level as in sweet-wil-
 liam.
   FASCIOLA.   Diminutive of fascia.
 A genus of entozoa.  The  fluke-worm.
   Fasciola Cinerea. The tuberculum
 cinerium.
   FASTIDIUM CIBI.  Disgust. Aver-
 sion to food.
   FASTING.  Abstaining from food.
 Loss or  want of appetite  without any
 other apparent affection. 
FAU
274
FEB
    FAT.  A concrete oU contained in
  the cellular membrane of animals.
    FATTY.  Adipose.  Adiposus.  Re-
  lating to, or of the nature of, fat.
    Fatty Liver. Adiposis hepatica.  A
  diseased state of the liver, characterized
  by increase of bulk, and accumulation
  of fat.
    Fatty Ligament.  A reflection of
  the synovial membrane of the knee-joint,
  which passes from the ligamentum pa-
  tellae to the cavity that separates the con-
  dyles of the femur.
    FATU'ITY.  Fatuitas; from fatuus,
  foolish.  Idiotism.
    FAU'CES.   The plural  of  faux.
  The pharynx and posterior part  of the
  mouth.
    FAUCHARD, PIERRE.  An emi-
  nent French dentist, who flourished in
  Paris in the eighteenth century. To this
  able man modern dentistry may be said
  to owe, if not its origin, yet its  first sys-
  tematic and scientific organization as a
  specialty of surgery.  From  the fact
  that his opinions and observations have
 been quoted with the greatest considera-
 tion by almost aU the numerous writers
 Avho succeeded him, it is evident that he
 Avas one  of those masters in  science,
 who appear from time to  time  in every
 department of intellectual inquiry, and
 whose extraordinary capacity and acute-
 ness enable them to prepare, in the brief
 space  of  their  active life, material for
 the full occupation of generations  of or-
 dinary  men who succeed them.   He
 found the dental  art  a rude  branch of
 mechanics, he  left it a digested syste-
 matic branch of  the  curative art;  and
 though his own practice was far inferior
 in excellence and  elegance to that of our
 day; though his instruments were rude,
 and the many appliances of his art very
 deficient in completeness and nicety of
 adaptation,  yet considering aU  the cir-
 cumstances under  which  he  lived,
 Fauchard deserves to be affectionately
 remembered as a noble pioneer and  sure
founder of dental science.   That his
practice was rude was due to his times •
  that it was scientific, and comparatively
  superior  and successful, was  due to
  himself.
    The writings of this celebrated dentist
  are comprised in two volumes, and en-
  titled, the  Surgeon Dentist, or  Treatise
  on the Teeth.  The first edition of this
  work  was publishad as early as 1728,
  and the third and last, in 1786.
    FAUX.  In the  plural, fauces.  The
  opening of the throat.
    FAVO'SUS.  From favus, a honey-
  comb.  Resembling a honeycomb.
    FA'VUS.  A honeycomb.  Applied
  to a state  of ulceration resembhng the
  honeycomb.
    FAY.  A Description of the Mode
  of using the  Forceps invented  for the
  Extraction and Excision of  Teeth, by.
  London, 1827.
   FE.  The symbol of iron.
   FEBRES.  Febris.  An order in the
  class pyrexia; of Dr. Cullen, character-
 ized by fever without  primary  local
 affection.
   FEBRICOSUS.  Feverish.
   FEBRICULA.  Diminutive 'of fe-
 bris.  A slight degree of fever.
   FEBRIF'EROUS.  From febris, fe-
 ver, and fero, I carry.   Fever-bearing.
 Engendering fever.
   FEB'RIFUGE.  From febris, a fe-
 ver, and fugare, to drive away. A medi-
 cine  Avhich possesses the property of
 curing or abating fever.
   FEBRILE.  Febrilis.  Caused  by,
 or  connected  with  fever, as a  febrile
 pulse, &c.
   FEBRIS.  From ferveo,  to be hot.
 Pyrexia, fever. A term which has been
 applied to every case of disease in which
 there is an  acceleration of  pulse,  in-
 creased heat, thirst, &c.
   Febris Acmastica.   Synocha.
  Febris Alba.  Chlorosis.
  Febris Algida.  Algida  febris.  A
malignant remittent,  characterized by
icy coldness of the skin.
  Febris Amatoria. Chlorosis.  Hec-
tic fever.
  Febris Americana.  Yellow fe\rer. 
FEB
275
FEB
   Febris Amphimerina.  A quotidian
 ague.
   Febris Ampullosa.  Pemphigus.
   Febris  Anabatica.  Continued  fe-
 ver.
   Febris Anginosa.  Angina.
   Febris Angiotenica.  Synocha.
   Febris Aphonica.  Aphonic fever.
   Febris Aphthosa.  Aptha.
   Febris Ardens.  Synocha.
   Febris Asodes. Bilious fever. See
 Asodes.
   Febris Bullosa.   Pemphigus.
   Febris Carcerum.  Jafl fever. Ty-
 phus gravior.
   Febris Castrensis.  Camp fever.
   Febris Catarrhalis.  Catarrhal fe-
 ver.
   Febris Catarrhalis Epidemica.—
 Influenza.
   Febris Causodes.   Synocha.
   Febris Cholerica.  Bilious fever.
   Febris Contagiosa.  Typhus fever.
   Febris Continua.  Continued fever.
 Synochus.
   Febris Continua Putrida.  Syno-
 chus.
   Febris Continua  Icterodes Caro-
 liniensis.  YeUow fever.
   Febris Culicularis.  Miliary fever.
   Febris Diaria.  Ephemera.
   Feeris Elodes.  See Elodes.
   Febris Epiala. A fever accompa-
 nied by irregular shivering.
   Febkis Epidemica Cum Angina.—
 Cynanche mahgna.
   Febris Erysipelatosa.  Erysipelas.
   Febris Esserosa.'  Miliary fever.
   Febris Exanthematica.  An  erup-
 tive fever.
   Febris Flava.  Yellow fever.
   Febris Gangrenodes.    Gangre-
 nous fever.
   Febris Gastrica.   Gastric fever.
 Bilious fever.
  Feeris Gastro-Adynamica. Gastro-
adynamic fever.
  Febris Hectica.  Hectic fever.
  Febris Hectica Maligna Nervosa.
Typhus mitior.
  Febris Hepatica.   Bilious fever.
   Febris  Hepatica  Inflammatoria.
  Hepatitis.
   Febris Horrifica.  See Febris Al-
  gida.
   Febris Hunga'ria.  Hungarian fever.
   Febris Hydrocephalica.  Internal
  hydrocephalus.
   Febris Hydro'des. Fever with pro-
  fuse perspiration.
   Febris Hydrophobica.  Hydropho-
  bic fever.
   Febris Hysterica.  Hysteric fever.
   Febris Iliaca Inflammatoria. En-
 teritis.
   Febris Inflammatoria.   Synocha.
 Inflammatory fever.
   Febris Intermittens.  Intermittent
 fever.
   Febris  Intestinalis  Ulcerosa.—
 Typhus fever.
   Febris Intestinorum.  Enteritis.
   Febris Lactea.  Milk fever.
   Febris Larvata. Masked fever.
   Febris Lenta.  Hectic fever. Sy-
 nochus.
   Febris Lenta Nervosa.   Typhus
 mitior, or nervous fever.
   Febris Lethargica. Apoplectic fe-
 ver.
   Febris Lochialis.   Lochial  fever.
   Febris Maligna.  Malignant  fever.
   Febris Maligna Biliosa.  Yellow
 fever.
   Febris Maligna Cum Sopore. Ty-
 phus gravior.
   Febris Marasmodes.  Hectic  fever.
   Febris Miliaris.  Mihary fever.
   Febris Morbillosa. See Rubeola.
   Febris Mucosa.  Adeno-meningeal
 fever.  Mucous fever.
   Febris Mucosa Verminosa.  Infan-
 tile remittent fever.
   Febris Nautica  Pestilentialis.—
 Typhus gravior.
   Febris  Nephritica.   Nephthritic
 fever.
  Febris Nervosa.  Nervous fever.
  Febris  Nosocomiorum.   Typhus
gravior.
  Feeris Palustris.  Marsh fever.
  Febris Periodica.   Periodic fever. 
FEC               276               FEN
  Febris Pestilens.  Plague.
  Febris  Pestilentialis.   Pestilen-
tial fever.
  Febris  Petechialis.  Typhus gra-
vior.
  Febris Phthisic a.  Hectic fever.
  Febris Pleuritic a.  Pleuritis.
  Febris  Puerperum.  Puerperal fe-
ver.
  Febris Purulenta.  Purulent fever.
  Febris Putrida Nervosa.  Typhus
gravior.
  Febris  Putrida Sanguinea.  Ty-
phus mitior.
  Febris Ouartana.  auartan fever.
  Febris auiNTANA.   auintan fever.
  Febris  auoTiDUNA.   auotidian fe-
ver.
   Febris  Remittens.   Remittent fe-
  Febris Remittens Infantum.  In-
fantile remittent fever.
  Febris Rheumatica Inflammato-
ria.  Acute rheumatism.
  Febris Rubra.  Scarlatina.
  Febris Rubra  Pruriginosa.  Urti-
caria.
  Feeris Sanguinea.  Synocha.
  Febris Sapropyra. Typhus gravior.
  Febris Scarlatinosa.  Scarlatina.
  Febris Scorbutica. Scorbutic fever.
  Febris Synocha.   Inflammatory fe-
ver.
  Febris Tabida.   Cohquative  hectic
fever.
  Febris Tertiana. Tertian fever.
  Febris Tropica.  YeUow fever.
  Febris Typho'des.  Typhoid fever.
  Febris Urticaria.  Nettle rash.
  Febris Variolosa.   Variola fever.
  Febris Vesiculosa.  Erysipelas.
.  Febris Virginum. Chlorosis.
  FECES.   Faeces.
  FECULA.  An  immediate princi-
 ple  of vegetables, obtained by grinding
 or bruising them in water, and compos-
 ed  of  hydrogen,  carbon  and oxygen.
 An impure starch.
   Fecula Amylacea.  Starch.
   Fecula  Marante.   Arrow-root
 starch.
  FECULENCE.  Fozcukntia.  The
deposit from turbid fluids.   1 )regs.
  FECULENT.     Excrementitious.
Of the nature of feces, or dregs.
  FECUNDATION.    Fecundatw;
from fecundo, to make fruitful.  Impreg-
nation.  The act by  Avhich the germ
contained in the organs  of the female,
receives from  those  of the male, the
vivifying principle necessary for its de-
velopment.
  FECUN'DITY.  The faculty of re-
production,  possessed  by  organized
bodies.
  FEIGNED  DISEASES.   Pretend-
ed diseases.  Diseases simulated by im-
postors to answer some particular end,
as  by beggars, to  excite sympathy,
criminals, to escape punishment, and
soldiers, to avoid service.
  FEL.   Bile.
  Fel Bovinum. The bUe of an ox.
  Fel Nature.  Aloes.
  FELLIS OBSTRUCTIO. Jaundice.
  FELON.  See Paronychia.
  FEMALE. Fromfcemina, a woman.
 In  animals, the one which bears the
 fetus.
   FEMEN.  Inner part of the thigh.
   FEMI'NEUS. Female.
   FEM'ORAL.  Femoralis;  from fe-
 mur, the thigh bone.  Pertaining to the
 thigh.
   Femoral Artery.  The artery of
 the thigh. A continuation of the ex-
 ternal niac artery from  Poupart's  hga-
 ment, to the bend of the knee.
   Femoral Bone.  The os  femoris.
 The thigh bone.
   Femoral  Hernia.   Hernia crura-
 lis.
   FEMORALIS.  The  triceps cruris
 muscle.
   FEM'ORO-TIB'IAL.   Femoro-tibi-
 alis.   Belonging to the femur and
 tibia.
    FEMUR.  The os femoris, or thigh
 bone.
    FENESTRA. A window.  A term
 applied by anatomists to  two orifices in
 the ear. 
FER
277
FER
     Fenestra Oculi.  The pupfl of the
   eye.
     Fenestra Ova'lis.  An oval-shaped
   orifice, covered by the base of the stapes,
   between the tympanum and vestibule of
   the ear.
     Fenestra Rotunda.   A round fora-
   men, communicating with the internal
   spire of the cochlea, closed by a delicate
   membrane.
     FENESTRAL  BANDAGE.   A
   bandage perforated for the escape of pus
   or other matters.
     FENESTRATE.  Having the ap-
   pearance of a window ; apphed to plants
   in Avhich the leaves are perforated be-
   tween the woody  fibres.
     FENNEL.  Anethum fceniculum.
     Fennel, Dog's.  Anthemis cotula.
     Fennel, Sweet. Anethum (fcenicu-
   lum) dulcc
     Fennel,  Water.   Phellandrium
   aquaticum.
     FERINE.  Ferinus.  Savage, brutal.
   Apphed to a malignant or acute disease.
     FERMENT.   In Chemistry, an in-
   soluble precipitate, compound of oxygen,
   hydrogen, carbon and azote, capable of
   exciting fermentation in  certain solu-
   tions, as sugar, &c.  In Humoral Pa-
   thology, an imaginary principle, sup-
   posed to be introduced into the system
   and  by exciting fermentation, to dete-
   riorate the fluids, and cause diseases
     FERMENTATION.   Fermentatio.
   An  intestinal  movement,  developed
   spontaneously,  or by  the agency  of
   yeast or some other ferment, in a liquid;
   and from which, result substances not
   previously  existing.  There are three
  kinds of fermentation, namely, the alco-
  holic or vinous, the acid or acetous, and
  the putrid or putrefactive.
    FERMENTUM. Yeast.
    Fermentum  Cerevisie.   Yeast;
  barm;  the scum formed on beer during
* the process of fermentation.
    FERN.   The first order of plants, of
  the class cryptogamia.
    Fern, Female.   See Pteris  Aquili-
  na.
          24
    Fern, Male.  Aspidium  filix mas.
  See Fern, male shield.
    Fern, Male Shield.  The nephro-
  diumfilix mas.  Polypody.
    Fern, Mules.   Asplenium hemoni-
  tis.
    FERRA'RIA.   Scrofularia aquatka.
  The water figwort.
    FERRI ACETAS.  Acetate ofiron.
  Iron water.
    Ferri Acetatis Tinctura.  Tinc-
  ture of acetate of iron.
    Ferri Alkalini Liquor.  Alkaline
  solution of iron.
    Ferri Ammo'nio-Chloridum.  Am-
  monio-chloride of iron.
    Ferri  Carbonas  Prjeparatus.—
  Common iron dust.
    Ferri Carbonas Saccharatum.—
  Saccharine carbonate of iron.
    Ferri Citras.  Citrate of iron.
    Ferri Cyanuretum. Prussian blue.
    Ferri  Ferro-Susq.uicyanidum.:—
  Ferro-sesquicyanide of iron.
    Ferri Filum.   Iron wire.
    Ferri Iodidum.  Iodide of iron.
    Ferri Lactas.  Lactate ofiron.
    Ferri Limatura Purificata.  Puri-
 fied iron filings.
   Ferri Oxydi Sgjjamje.  The scales
 of iron from a smith's forge.
   Ferri Oxydum Nigrum. Black oxyd
 of iron.  Iron scales.
   Ferri Oxydum Rubrum. Red oxyd
 of iron.  Iron rust.
   Ferri Pernitras.    Pernitrate  of
 iron.
   Ferri Persulphas.  Persulphate of
 iron.
   Ferri Phosphas.  Phosphate ofiron.
   Ferri Pila.  Iron filings.
   Ferri Potassio Tartras.  Potassio-
 tartrate ofiron.
   Ferri Protocarbonas.  Protocar-
 bonate of iron.
  Ferri Protosulphas.   Protosul-
 phate of iron.  Green vitriol.
  Ferri Sesquioxydum.  Sesquioxyd
ofiron.  Subcarbonate of iron.
  Ferri Sesquioxydum Hydratum.—
Hydrated oxyd of iron. 
FER
278
FEV
  Ferri Sulphas.   Sulphate of iron.
  Ferri Sulphas Exsiccatum. Dried
or exsiccated sulphate of iron.
  Ferri Sulphas Calcinatum.   Per-
oxyd of iron.
  Ferri Sulphuretum.   Sulphuret of
iron.
  FERRO.  From ferrum, iron.   A
prefix in Chemistry, attached to com-
pounds  in  which  this element unites
with cyanogen and  other radicals.
  Ferro-Chya'zic  Acid.  Ferro-cy-
anic acid.
  Ferro-Cy'anate.  Ferro-cyanide.
  Ferro-Cyanate  of Potash.   The
old name for ferro-cyanide of potassium.
Yellow prussiate of potash.
  Ferro-Cyanic  Acid.   A  yellow
acid, crystalline body; a compound of
ferro-cyanogen and hydrogen.  Bibasic.
  Ferro-Cyanide  of Iron.  Prussian
blue.
  Ferro-Cyanide  of   Potassium.—
Prussiate of potash.
  Ferro-Cya'nogen.  A hypothetical
radical, supposed to form the  basis of
the ferro-cyanides.
  Ferro-Prussic  Acid.  Ferro-cyan-
ic acid.
  Ferro-Tartrate of Ammonia.  A
salt of tartrate of iron and ammonia.
  FERROSO-FERRIC OXYD. Mag-
netic iron ore.   Scales from the smith's
anvil.
  FERROUS  OXYD.   Protoxyd of
iron.
  FERRUGI'NEUS.  Pertaining to
iron.
  FERRUGO.  Ferri sesquioxydum
hydratum.
  FERRUM.  Iron.
  Ferrum Ammonia'tum.  A submu-
riate of ammonia with red  muriate of
iron.
  Ferrum Oxyda'tum Hydra'tum.__
Hydrated sesquioxyd of iron.
  Ferrum Salitum. Muriate of iron.
  Ferrum Tartarizatum.  Ferri ses-
quioxydum.
   FERRUM VITRIOLATUM.  Sul-
phate of iron.
  FE'RULA.  The name  of a genus
of plants.
  Ferula Africana Galbanifera.—
The galbanum plant.
  Ferula Asafcstida.  The asaiaeti-
da plant.
  Ferula Persica.  Stinking  giant
plant.
  FERVOR.  From ferveo, to  boil.
A scorching heat.
  FEVER. Febris; from/error,heat.A
disease characterized by rigors, increas-
ed heat of the skin, quick pulse, disturb-
ed circulation, languor and prostration.
Fevers are divided into idiopathic and
symptomatic.  The former occurs inde-
pendently of, without any apparent, or
local cause; the latter is dependent upon
local irritation.  But these divisions admit
of many subdivisions.  Pinel makes the
following:  1. Angeio-tenic,or inflam-
matory fevers situated in the organs of
circulation.  2. The meningo-gastric, or
bilious, which has its origin in the mu-
cous membrane of  the intestines. 3.
Andeno-meningcal,  or gastric fever, re-
sulting from disease of mucous follicles.
4. Ataxic, or  irregular fever, affecting
principally the brain and nervous sys-
tem.  5. Adynamic, or fever attended
by great prostration of the vital powers.
  Fever, Adynamic  Typhoid fever.
  Fever, Asthenic  Typhus fever,
or fever attended by debility.
  Fever, Asthmatic   An intermit-
tent, accompanied with symptoms  of
asthma.
  Fever, Ataxo-Adynamic  A  fever
characterized by prostration and disturb-
ance of the nervous system.
  Fever, Bilious.  Summer and au-
tumnal remittent fever.
  Fever, Bilious Remitting. Yellow
fever.
  Fever, Bilious  Remittent, of In-
fants.  Infantile remittent fever.
  Fever, Bladdery.  Pemphigus.
  Fever, Brain.  Phrenitis.
  Fever, Camp.  Typhus gravior.
  Fever, Catarrhal.  Adeno menin-
geal fever. 
FEV
279
FIB
  Fever, Cerebral.  Phrenitis.
  Fever, Childbed.  Puerperal peri-
 tonitis.
  Fever, Congestive.   A fever at-
 tended with great oppression, obscure
 symptoms, and  congestion  of some
 viscus.
  Fever, Continued.   Febris contin-
 ua.  Continued fever.
  Fever,Convulsia-e. An intermittent
 fever, attended with convulsions.
  Fever, Digestive.  The  chilliness
 and  fever Avhich sometimes Accompan-
 ies digestion.
  Fever, Double.  A  complex inter-
 mittent, in which two paroxysms occur
 in a given time instead of one.
  Fever, Endemic  Remittent fever.
  Fever, Entero-Mesenteric  Ty-
 phoid fever.
  Fever,  Ephemeral.    A  simple
 fever of short duration.
  Fever, Epileptic An intermittent,
 accompanied with attacks of epflepsy.
  Fever, Eruptive.  Exanthematica.
  Fever, Exacerbating.   Remittent
 fever.
  Fever, Gastric   Bilious fever.
  Fever, Hosfital. Typhus gravior.
  Fever, Icteric  Fever folloAved by
 jaundice.
  Fever, Infantile.  Remittent.  A
 low fever occurring in childhood, sup-
 posed to originate from  gastrointesti-
 nal disturbance.
  Fever, Inflammatory.   Synocha.
  Fever, Intermittent.   Ague and
 fever.
  Fever, Jail.  Typhus gravior.
  Fever, Malignant.   Typhus gra-
 vior.  A fever which is insidious in its
 attacks and of a formidable and danger-
 ous character.
  Fever, Masked.   An intermittent
 in Avhich the stages of the paroxysms
 are irregular.
  Fever,  Milk.   The  slight febrile
disturbance Avhich precedes or accom-
panies the secretion of mflk.
  Fever, Mixed.  Synocha.
  Fever, Paludal.   Ague.
   Fever,  Paroxysmal.   Remittent
 fever.
   Fever, Pestilential.  The plague;
 also, typhus gravior.
   Fever, Putrid.  Typhus gravior.
   Fever, Ship.   Typhus gravior.
   Fever, Spotted.  Typhus gravior,
 attended by vomiting, hemorrhages, or
 purple or black petechia?.
   Fever, Syphilitic The fever which
 accompanies syphilis.
   Fever, Tertian.   An  intermittent
 in Avhich  the paroxysms return every
 third day.
   Fever, Typhoid.  Entero-mesente-
 ric fever.
   Fever, Verminous. Fever caused
 by the irritation of worms in the intesti-
 nal canal.
   Fever, Vernal.   An  intermittent
 or other fever occurring in the spring.
   Fever, Vesicular.  Pemphigus.
   Fever, Yelloav.  An endemic ma-
 lignant fever, supposed to be caused by
 miasm, of a more or less adynamic
 character, attended by yeUoAvnessof the
 skin and vomiting of black matter.
   FEVERWORT.  Eupatorium per-
 foliatum.
   FIBER.  Castor fiber.
   FIBRA SANGUINIS.  Fibrin.
   FIBRE.  Fibra. A simple organic
 filament, which enters into the textures
 of animal and vegetable bodies.
   FI'BRIL.  A small thread-hke fibre.
   FI'BRIN.  Fibrine.  An immediate
 principle of animal bodies, composed of
 azote,  hydrogen, oxygen, and carbon,
 existing in chyle, coagulum of the blood,
 and constituting the chief part of the
 muscles of red-blooded animals.
  FIB'RINOUS.   Fibrinosus.   That
 which is composed, or has the nature of,
 fibrin.
  FIBRO-CARTILAGE.   Fibro-car-
 tilago.  Organs composed of an admix-
 ture of fibrous and  cartilaginous tissues.
  Fibro-Mucous.   Fibro-mucosus.  Fi-
brous   membranes, intimately  united
with others of a mucous structure; also,
membranes of a fibrous and  mucous 
FIL                280               FIL
structure, as the inner membrane of the
sac of a tooth.
  Fibro-Serous.  Fibro-serosus. Mem-
branes which are of a fibrous and serous
texture.
  FI'BROUS.   Fibroma.  Composed
of fibres.
  Fibrous Membranes.  Membranes
composed of fibres.
  FIB'ULA.   The outer, or  splint-
bone of the leg.
  FICHER.   On the Different Forms
of the Interior of the MaxUlary Bone in
different Animals. Leipsic, 1S00.
  FI'CUS.   In Botany, the  name of
a genus of plants.  In Pathology, a soft,
though sometimes  scirrhous,  reddish,
fleshy excrescence, attached by a small
peduncle to  the tongue, chin, eyelids,
anus, or organs of generation.
  Ficus-Carica.   The fig tree.
  Ficus-Indica. Musa paradisiaca. See
Lacca.
  FIG.  Ficus carica.
  FIGWORT.  Scrofularia nodosa.
  FIL'AMENT.   Filamentum;  from
filum,  a thread.  In Anatomy, a smaU
fibre, or thread-like substance, adhering
to any part.  A minute cellular or ner-
vous fibre.
  FILARIA MEDINENSIS.    The
Guinea worm.
  FILEL'LUM.  Fraenum.
  FILE CARRIER.  A file holder.
An instrument employed by dentists
for holding a file, while separating the
molar teeth.   File carriers have  also
been employed for holding the thin files
used for separating the  front  teeth, but
these last are but little used.  Those im-
ployed in  separating the molar teeth
are sometimes so constructed  as to re-
quire two, one for the right and one for
the left side of the mouth; but the ne-
 cessity for two has  been obviated by
 having the part of the instrument which
 holds  the  file  so connected  with the
 other part, as to admit of being  turned
 from side to  side, or to revolve upon a
 screw when loosened.
   File Carriers, Dayton's.    Two
instruments, a right and a left, construct-
ed by  Mr. A. C.  Dayton, dentist,  of
Columbus, Mississippi, for holding a
file Avhile separating the  molar teeth.
The shaft of each is bent so as to bring
the handle  and the file into the same
line.  The  shaft has a double curve, so
as to  make the handle and the file cor-
respond both horizontally  and perpen-
dicularly.
   File  Carrier, Elliot's.  An in-
strument invented by Dr. Elliot of Mon-
treal, possessing the foUowing  advan-
tages over the one in common use.   It
has no screws or joints, being composed
of one piece of steel.  It  is both right
and left without alteration, and the file
may be turned so as to act upon a tooth
at any required angle.  A common file
may be fitted to it by grinding the ends
on a common stone.
   File  Carrier, Westcott's.  This
differs from most of the other file car-
riers in use, in not having any mova-
ble fixtures, joints or screws, the file
being introduced by springing the back
part of the instrument Avhich holds it, but
as it is made with a double bend, two are
required, one for the right and one for the
left side of the mouth, and besides it is
necessary to have  files constructed, es-
pecially for them.  It is  a decided im-
provement on the file carriers previous-
ly used.
   FILES, DENTAL.  FUes used  in
operations  upon the teeth.
   Files   for  Separating  Front
Teeth.  FUes  used for  this purpose
are from four and  a half, to five inches
in length, from a third to  a half of an
inch in Avidth, and from a twentieth to
a thirtieth part of an inch in thickness.
Some are cut only  on one side, others
on both, and all are cut on both edges.
Those which are cut only on one side
are termed safe-sided, and are intended
to act  but upon  one tooth at a time.
Those which are cut on both sides, are
designed for separating  two  teeth pre-
paratory to using the safe-sided.
   Files for  Separating  Bicuspid 
FIL
281
FIL
Teeth.  Files employed for  this pur-
pose, may be oval on one side and flat
on the other, or they may be shaped hke
the pinion file of a clock, their two sides
coming nearly together at one edge,
while at the other they are an eighth or
twelfth of an inch apart.  The length
of files used for separating the bicuspid
teeth, including the handle, is from six
and a half to seven and a half inches.
   Files  for   Separating  Molar
Teeth. Until within the last twelve or
fifteen years, dentists  were in the habit
of separating the  molar teeth, when the
width of the mouth would not admit of
the  use of  a straight  file,  with very
short files, or pieces of files, held  in a
file carrier, and this is done even yet, by
many practitioners who are not always
able to procure  files expressly adapted
to the purpose.  The author was  the
first, so far as he is informed, to propose
the use of such files.  As early as 1833,
he employed a file  maker of Baltimore
to manufacture for  him some files, for
separating  the  molar teeth, from  pat-
terns which  he furnished.   But as the
files were  of an inferior quality,  he,
a feAV months aftenvards, sent his  pat-
terns to Stub's manufactory in England,
through Messrs. Canfield & Brother, of
Baltimore.   These  files Avere an inch
and a half in length, shaped like  the
pinion file of a clock, Avith a stem rising
up from the back about a quarter of an
inch, then bent  so as  to form  nearly
a  right  angle  with  both it  and  the
file; and five-eighths of an inch from
the first bend, it was bent again so as to
run in  a parallel  direction  with  the
file; an inch from the last bend, it ter-
minated in  a handle  four and  a  half
inches in length.   These files are made
in pairs, one for  the right,  and  one for
the left side of the mouth, and their con-
struction is such that they may be used
with the greatest  facility on the molar
teeth of either jaw.  Files for the same
purpose, from other patterns, have, sub-
sequently, been manufactured.
  The molar teeth can be separated Avith
     24*
much greater ease with files of this de-
scription than Avith  files held in a file
carrier.
  Files for Preparing  the  Root of
a Tooth for an Artificial  Crown.
An oval or half round file, which should
neither be too large nor too small, and
one  having a diameter as nearly equal
to that of the neck of the tooth as pos-
sible, should be preferred to a  larger or
smaller file.   With a view of obviating
the difficulty sometimes experienced in
making a perfect joint between the root
and crown,  Dr. E. Townsend,  of Phila-
delphia, had two files constructed, one
oval and the other hoUow,  and the
former  exactly fitting  into the latter.
But the hollow file is only useful in
those cases where the crown of a natu-
ral tooth is employed.
  Files, Townsend's Dental. A steel
instrument about seven inches in length,
with thin, curved, oval and other shaped
files at each extremity, invented by Dr.
E. ToAvnsend, of Philadelphia, and used
principally in finishing fillings in teeth,
after the consolidation of the gold. They
are so  constructed that they may be ap-
plied to  the surface of a filling  in any
part of an  incisor, cuspid, bicuspid, or
molar  tooth.
  FI'LICES.  Plural of filix.  Ferns.
Plants  which bear  their fruit on the
back of their leaves.
  FILIFORM. Filiformis; fwmfilum,
a thread, and forma, form. Thread-like.
In Anatomy and Botany, parts which
resemble the form, or have the shape of
a thread, as the filiform papilloz  of the
tongue,  formed  by the termination of
the filaments of the lingual  nerve, &c.
  FILING  TEETH.    An operation
for  the removal of superficial  caries on
the approximal surfaces of the teeth, and
in cases of deep-seated caries occupying
the  same locality,  performed prepar-
atory to removing the diseased  part and
fiUing.   It is, also, sometimes  perform-
ed for other purposes.
  But  there is  no operation in  dental
surgery, against which  a  stronger or 
FIL
282
FIL
 more universal prejudice prevails, than
 that of filing the teeth, but when judi-
 ciously and skilfuUy performed, there is
 none more beneficial, or effectual in ar-
 resting the  progress of caries.  Thou-
 sands of teeth are now every year rescued
 from the ravages of caries, and preserved
 through life, by it.   But, although it is
 productive of so much good, it is, also,
 in the hands of ignorant and unskilful
 operators, productive of incalculable in-
 jury.
    In a paper pubhshed in the fifth vol-
 ume of the American Journal of Dental
 Science, the merits of this operation are
 examined at considerable length by Dr.
 John Harris, brother of the author, and
 from which the following is quoted
   He says, "Filing the teeth is one of
 the most  important and valuable re-
 sources of the dental art; it is one that
 has stood the test of experience, and is
 of such acknoAvledged utility, as to con-
 stitute of itself, in the treatment of super-
 ficial caries on the lateral surfaces of the
 teeth, one  of the most  valuable opera-
 tions  that can be performed on  these
 organs. And even  after caries of the
 teeth, in the localities just mentioned,
 has progressed  so  far  as to  render its
 removal, by this means, impracticable
 or improper, the use of  the file, in most
 cases, is stiU necessary, in  order to the
 successful  employment  of  other reme-
 dial agents.  But in  either case, a faU-
 ure to accomplish the object for which
 it is used, would only be equivalent to
 doing nothing at all.
  "The use  of  the file  then, may very
justly be considered a sine qua non, for
 the  removal of  superficial  caries from
 the sides of  the teeth which come in
 contact with each other, as  can be at-
 tested by thousands of living witnesses,
 and in preparing the way, in  deep-seated
 caries, for the thorough removal of the
 disease, and the filling,  successfully, of
the cavity thus formed.
  "In a paper written by myself, some
 eleven or twelve years  ago, upon  this
 subject, I contended that filing the teeth
 was not necessarUy productive of caries,
 and my subsequent experience and ob-
 servations have only tended to confirm
 the correctness of the opinion which I
 then advanced, and I  cherish  the belief
 that this opinion, wUl not, at this time,
 conflict with the views of the more en-
 lightened of my professional brethren.
   "But when reference is had to the
 physical peculiarities of the  teeth, it
 will at once be perceived, that they pre-
 sent a strange departure from the laws
 that govern and control  all other parts
 of the body—that these organs, Avhen
 diseased, can only be  restored to health
 and usefulness by art,  unaided by the
 sanitary powers of nature.  Hence it is,
 that most of the operations upon them,
 will not, like those in general  surgery,
 admit  of mediocrity in  their  perform-
 ance.
   "The  fact that the  crowns of the
 teeth are covered with enamel, is alone
 sufficient evidence of its importance and
 utility in shielding and-  protecting the
 bony structure, which it envelops, from
 mechanical  and morbid influences, so
 that it would seem that its removal or
 loss would necessarUy expose the or-
 gans to  certain destruction.   But we
 have satisfactory  evidence, that teeth
 after having suffered  the loss of large
 portions of the enamel,  have been re-
 stored to health and preserved for many
 years, and often through life.
   "The rapidity with which  caries of
 the teeth progress, after the exposure of
 the bone, by the loss of the enamel, de-
 pends  upon the physical peculiarities of
 the organs, and upon local and consti-
 tutional influences; hence the difficulty,
 and  oftentimes impossibility of obtain-
 ing the object for which dental opera-
 tions are instituted, while  such influ-
 ences are suffered to exist.  If special
 regard is not had to the curative indica-
 tions, most, if not aU of  the operations
 upon the teeth, which have for their ob-
ject their ultimate preservation, are sure,
 to a greater or less extent, to augment
 aU of the previously existing local affec- 
FIL
283
FIL
tions, by increasing the irritabihty of the
parts, and by rendering them more sus-
ceptible of being acted  upon both by
local and constitutional causes.
  "It may be laid down as a rule, from
which exceptions should never be taken,
that the file should not  be used, while
the teeth  or their contiguous parts are
suffering general or local, acute or chro-
nic, inflammation.   Therefore, when
this is the case, the treatment of the
general and local affections  should be
precedaneous to the operation of filing.
Upon the subjugation of aU the acute or
chronic diseases of the mouth, the  suc-
cess of the dentist in the treatment of af-
fections of the teeth, calhng for the em-
ployment of  the file, greatly depends.
As much  importance, therefore,  is to
be attached to an enlightened and  dis-
criminating judgment, as to  tact in the
performance of the operation.
  "In fact the  removal of  aU  local
causes of irritation,  such as aU  dead
roots of teeth, teeth occasioning alveolar
abscesses, or such as exert a morbid in-
fluence upon the surrounding parts, and
all  depositions  of salivary  calculus or
other foreign matter, should always pre-
cede all  other operations upon these or-
gans.
  "The length of time necessary for the
restoration of the parts contiguous to the
teeth to a healthy condition, may  vary
from a few days, or weeks, to months,
depending upon the nature and extent
of  the  disease in them,  the general
health of the patient, and the constitu-
tional as well as local treatment to which
they are subjected.  The frequent fail-
ures in  accomphshing  the object for
Avhich dental operations are instituted,
are in most instances, the result of the
ignorance of  the practitioner,  or the
want of a correct knowledge of the na-
ture, cause and curative  indications of
the disease he attempts to treat.
  "But, in assuming the position, that
the filing of the teeth, does not, of ne-
cessity, cause them to decay, it is by no
means to be inferred, that the operation '
can, in aU cases, and under aU circum-
stances, be performed with advantage or
even impunity.   By no means; its ef-
fects, like those of most other operations
upon the teeth, when the curative indi-
cations are disregarded, or not properly
carried out, are  never passive.   The
employment of the file at an improper
time, and in an improper manner, in-
creases the liability of the teeth to decay,
and augments the  irritabihty of all the
parts adjacent to them, and, consequent-
ly, their  susceptibility of being  acted
upon by local and constitutional causes.
  "This  view of the subject, taken in
connection with the fact, that compara-
tively few of those engaged in the prac-
tice of this branch of surgery are prop-
erly  qualified for it, satisfactorily  ac-
counts for the pernicious effects that so
frequently result from the use of the in-
strument in question, and for the wide-
spread and deep-rooted  prejudice that
has obtained against its employment.
   "The  principal, and I believe only,
objection urged against filing the teeth,
is based upon the  erroneous belief, that
the loss of any  part of the  enamel of
these organs, must necessarily result in
their destruction.  But,  if this be true,
why is it, as I have,  on another occa-
sion, asked, that the negroes of Abys-
sinia have such sound teeth  as they are
represented to have, since it has  long
been a custom with them,  to  file  all
their front teeth to points, so as to make
them resemble the teeth of a saw or
those of carnivorous animals.  Of course,
large portions of the enamel and con-
siderable of the bony structure, must be
removed in the operation, and yet we
are credibly informed that  their teeth
seldom decay.  The same may  be said
of the Brahmins of India,  who, from
remote ages, have been in the  habit of
using the file, principally, I believe for
separating their teeth, and they, too, are
noted for having fine teeth.   I might re-
fer to the people of other countries, with
whom the  same practice has  long had
an existence, but it is not necessary to 
FIL
2S4
FIL
go abroad for proof, when we have such
an abundance of it at home, to estabhsh
the propriety and absolute necessity for
the practice I am now advocating.
  "With the people just referred to, it
is evident that they file, principally, for
the purpose of ornamenting their teeth,
but with us, only as a remedial agent in
the  treatment  of their diseases.  The
reason why their teeth are not so sub-
ject to disease as are those of the inhabi-
tants of luxurious  and civilized coun-
tries, is attributable to  the difference in
their habits of life, modes of living, and
the absence of  the causes productive of
the various diseases peculiar to civiliza-
tion and refinement.
    "But,  notwithstanding  the  utility
and value of the operation, filing the
teeth may be regarded as a predisposing
cause of  caries.  But if this be true, it
may be asked, why file at  all?   I an-
swer, in this country, OAving to the pre-
valence of the immediate or direct cause
of caries, the operation is only perform-
ed as remedial, for the purpose of remov-
ing actual disease, or as preparatory to
plugging.  It does not, of necessity, fol-
low, that caries of the teeth, after hav-
ing been judiciously removed or treated,
although the  organs be predisposed to
the disease, should ever again occur.
The general system often escapes the de-
velopment of disease to which it is pre-
disposed  through life; so, also, do the
teeth.   If the operation be properly per-
formed, and the filed surfaces kept tho-
roughly clean, a recurrence of the dis-
ease, notwithstanding the increased pre-
disposition thus induced, will never again
take place.  The  immediate cause  of
dental caries being the contact of corro-
sive agents with the teeth, the necessity
for this  precaution is obvious.   The
bony structure of these  organs is more
 easily acted upon by such causes, than
 the enamel, and for this reason, when
 it becomes necessary to expose it, with
 a  file, for the removal of disease,  it
 should be done in such  a way as to ad-
 mit of  its being kept  thoroughly and
constantly clean, so that if it afterwards
becomes carious, it avUI be owing alto-
gether to the inattention of the patient.
In vieAV of this, Avhenever  it becomes
necessary to file the teeth, whether for
the complete  removal of caries,  or  as
only preparatory to plugging, we should
always  impress upon the patient the
importance  of attending to this matter,
of cleansing the surfaces thus operated
upon, at least three or four times every
day.  The  future preservation  of the
organs, and, especially, such  as  are of
a soft or chalky  texture,  for  they are
then, by far, more easily acted upon by
decomposing agents  than when hard,
will depend upon the constant and reg-
ular observance of this salutary precau-
tion.
   "The cases requiring the use of the
file vary so  much, that it  would be dif-
ficult to lay  down  precise directions
Avith regard to the extent to which the
operation should always be carried.
This must  be determined by the  judg-
ment of the operator.
   "The object for which  the  operation
is performed, may be defeated either  by
filing too much or  too  little.  Either
extreme should be  avoided,  but I am
of the opinion, that by far  the greater
number of unsuccessful results are  at-
tributable,  rather, to the  too  moderate
than to the  too great use  of this instru-
ment, and, especially, where the cir-
cumstances of the case have nothing to
do in determining the result.
   "It will be  perceived from the fore-
going remarks, that its utihty depends
upon carrying out all the curative indi-
cations, that it should never be resorted
to except in the absence of  disease in
the parts with which these organs  are
immediately  connected.  Therefore, to
estimate the merits of the operation, cor-
rectly, we  should know all the circum-
stances under which it has  been per-
formed, the competency of the operator,
and whether he Avas permitted the free
exercise of his judgment."
   With regard to the utility of the opera- 
FIL
285
FIL
 tion, Dr. E. Parmly thus expresses him-
 self:
    "On the subject of cutting away and
 filing off  external portions of teeth af-
 fected Avith gangrene," [caries,] "I am
 aware that a mistaken prejudice  pre-
 vails in society, resulting, perhaps, from
 the mal-practice of ignorance and em-
 piricism.  And  yet there is no part of
 dental practice promising more certain
 and beneficial results when  properly
 executed.  If the operation be effectual-
  y performed, the progress of decay is
 arrested; and  if  the mutilation of the
 tooth  be as  small as the nature of the
 case admits, an important object is un-
 questionably  attained.  The successful
 performance of this operation, implies
 one invariable and indispensable condi-
 tion, viz. that the portion of bone from
 which the enamel  has been  removed,
 shall be perfectly  smooth and polished,
 leaving to the patient the responsibUity
 of having it kept so."
   To  ensure the  success of the opera-
 tion, it is sometimes  necessary  to file
 away a considerable portion of the tooth,
 but in doing this, the operator should be
 careful not to destroy the symmetry of
 its labial surface.  The aperture,  ante-
 riorly, should only be wide enough to
 admit of a free oblique or diagonal mo-
 tion of a safe-sided file of about one-half
 of a line in thickness.  In this way, one-
 fourth or more of a tooth may be removed
 Avithout materially altering its external
 appearance.   But a tooth should not be
 filed entirely to the gum ; a shoulder or
 projection should be left so as to pre-
 vent the approximation of it and the ad-
joining organ.
   When the decay occupies a large por-
tion of the approximal surface, and has
penetrated into the tooth to a considera-
ble depth, and destroyed the enamel an-
teriorly, so as to  cause it to present a
ragged and uneven  edge, it wfll be ne-
cessary to form a wider exterior  aper-
ture than  correct  taste would  dictate.
When  the approximal surfaces  of two
front teeth are affected with caries, about I
  an equal  portion, if circumstances will
  permit, should be filed from each tooth.
    It is hardly necessary to give any di-
  rections Avith regard to the manner of
  holding the file.   In filing the front
  teeth and those on the right side of the
  jaws, the operator should stand at the
  right and a little behind the patient, so
  as to steady his head as it rests against
  the head-piece or top of the back of his
  operating chair, with his left arm, while
  Avith the fingers of the hand of the same
  the tips should be raised and the teeth
  properly exposed for the operation.  In
  fifing the teeth on the left side  of the
  mouth, it avUI be necessary for the opera-
  tor to stand upon trie other side of his
  patient.  The file,  firmly grasped be-
  tween the thumb and  middle finger of
  the right hand, with the end of the fore-
  finger resting upon the edge of its distal
  extremity, should be moved backwards
  and forwards in a direct line, as any de-
  viation from this, would instantly snap
  the instrument.  The first opening be-
  tween the teeth, when the approximal
  edges of  two are  carious,  should be
  made with a flat  file, of about  half a
  line  in thickness, cut on both sides and
  both edges, this done, a file cut only on
 one side and both edges should be em-
 ployed for the completion of the opera-
 tion.  If but one tooth is decayed, the
 operation may be commenced and com-
 pleted Avith a safe-sided file.  The file,
 during the operation should be frequent-
 ly  dipped in water, so as to prevent it
 from becoming heated or choked.
   After a sufficient portion of the tooth
 has been filed away, the surface should
 be  made as smooth as possible with a
 very fine or half-worn file and burnisher.
 The edges and sharp corners should be
 rounded and  made smooth, and when
 the operation is completed, the patient
 should be directed to keep them perfect-
 ly clean,  for, if the mucous secretions of
 the mouth, or extraneous matter is per-
 mitted to adhere to them, a  recurrence
of the disease will take place.
  The sensation produced by filing the 
               FIL

teeth, is, to most persons, disagreeable,
and, to some, positively painful; but,
when once the operation has been com-
menced, it should never be left uncom-
pleted.   If the patient becomes alarmed,
his fears should be quieted by a true
statement of the case,  and his consent
to proceed, Avon, by a mild and persua-
sive deportment.
   In separating the bicuspides, an aper-
ture should be  made somewhat in the
form of the letter V ; it  should not, how-
ever, form an acute angle at  the gum;
and for its formation, a file, shaped like
the pinion-file of a clock, or one that is
oval on  one side and flat on  the other,
avUI be found most suitable,  An aper-
ture, shaped like this, avUI prevent  the
approximation of the sides of the teeth,
and, if plugging be necessary, it avUI
enable the operator to  do it in the most
perfect manner.
   When the  separation of the molar
teeth   becomes  necessary,  the  same
shaped aperture should be formed. But,
as these  teeth are situated so far back
in the mouth, it cannot often be done
Avith a straight file, and to obviate the
difficulty,  a file carrier is  usually em-
ployed, but files constructed  expressly
for the purpose will be found  more con-
venient.
   FILIX.  See Polypodium.
   Filix Florida.  The osmond-royal.
   Filix Fcsmina.  Pteris aquUina.  Fe-
male  fern.                        t
   Filix  Mas.  Aspidium filix mas.
Male fern.
   FILLET. From filum, a thread. A
little band.                          «,
   FILLING TEETH.   An operation
for arresting the progress, and prevent-
ing a recurrence of caries of  the  teeth,
consisting, after the removal of the dis-
eased  part, in  filhng  the cavity with
some kind of metal, or other substance.
   This is the most  difficult  operation
the dental practitioner is ever called
upon  to perfqrm—it oftentimes baffles
the skUl of operators who have been in
practice from ten to twenty  years.  It
6                 FIL

 is, also, when well performed, the most
 certain and only remedy that can be ap-
 plied for the cure of deep-seated caries.
 But to be effective, it must be executed
 in the most thorough and perfect man-
 ner.  The preservation of a tooth, when
 well filled, and with a suitable material,
 if it be afterwards kept constantly clean,
 may be  regarded as certain.   At any
 rate, it AviU never again be attacked  in
 the same place 'by caries.
  On this highly important operation,
 Dr. E. Parmly thus remarks:  "If pre-
 servation is as good as a cure, this is as
 good as both, for the  operation of stop-
 ping, when  thoroughly performed, is
 both preservation and cure.  And yet, it
 must never be forgotten, that this  asser-
 tion is true  only in  those instances  in
 which the operation is Avell and properly
 done; and,  perhaps, it is  imperfectly
 and improperly  performed more fre-
 quently  than  any other  operation  on
 the teeth.
  "There are reasons for  this fact, into
 Avhich every ambitious and honorable
 practitioner avUI carefully inquire.
  "Although the books are explicit  on
 this point, I deem it sufficiently import-
 ant to deserve a feAV additional remarks,
 and yet I am  perfectly aware  that  my
 time requires  me to be extremely gen-
 eral in my observations.  Let me say,
 then, that the  following considerations
 are essential, and, therefore, indispensa-
 ble to success in this department of prac-
 tice.
  "Firstly—The instruments used must
 be of the proper  construction and va-
 riety.
  "Secondly—Themetalemployed must
 be properly prepared as weU as properly
 introduced.
  "Thirdly—The cavity which receives
 the metal, must be so fitted  as to  retain
 it in such a manner as to exclude not
 only solids, but all fluids, and even the
 atmosphere itself.
  "Fourthly—The surface of  the metal
 must be left in such condition as to
 place it beyond the reach of injury from
28 
FIL                287                 FIL
food and other mechanical  agents with
which it must of necessity come in con-
tact.
   "Fifthly—The tooth  thus stopped,
should be free from pain,  and  every
known cause of internal inflammation."
   It  is  necessary, however, that the
 operation should be  performed before
 the caries has reached  the  pulp cavity,
 for after this, the permanent preserva-
 tion of the tooth,  espeHnUy if it  be  a
 molaris, may be regarded, in at least the
 majority of cases,  as hopeless,  unless
the  material employed  for  filling the
cavity can be  so introduced as  not to
press upon the  nerve. When the lining
membrane and pulp of a  tooth have
been destroyed, whether by the process
of inflammation  and  suppuration,  or
with arsenic, or by any other means,
except it be an incisor or cuspidatus, the
chances  of its  permanent  preservation
are stUl less, for, in this  case, it is apt to
become a source of irritation to the sur-
rounding parts, causing a morbid secre-
tion  at the extremity of its root or roots,
as it may have  one or  more, which is
discharged through them, as long as the
cavity remains  open; but if this is filled,
the matter is  prevented from escaping
through  it, and the result is, that it ac-
cumulates and  ultimately makes for it-
self a passage,  and  is discharged  either
through  the alveolus and gum, or if  it
be an upper molar, sometimes through
the  floor of the  maxillary sinus.  It,
however, more frequently  takes  the
former than the latter direction.
   For the purpose of preventing  the
effects that result from the accumulation
of matter in the tubercle  at the extremity
of the root, Dr. L. S. Parmly, in a conver-
sation  with the author, some years ago,
stated, that he was  in the  habit, when
he plugged teeth thus affected, of intro-
ducing the fiUing  round a small probe
or wire, Avith one end resting upon the
bottom of the cavity, and which, after
the operation  Avas  completed, he  re-
moved.  By this means, an opening is
left through the plug for the escape of'
the matter.  But, while the decay of the
walls of the tooth is thus prevented, and
the organ, for a time, rendered service-
able, the ravages of the  disease are
going on interiorly, and must, of neces-
sity, sooner or later,  effect  its destruc-
tion.
   Drs.  Maynard,  of Washington city,
and Baker,  of New York, propose a
plan of treatment, by which they are of
opinion,  that  the disease  at the ex-
tremity of the root, may, in the majority
of cases,  be radically cured.  It consists
in freeing the canal through the root of
all impurities, and filling it to the very
apex, as AveU as the cavity in the croAvn,
with gold.
   This  practice is  based upon the sup-
position,  that  if the accumulation of
matter in the root can be prevented,  its
secretion  wiU cease, and the author has
been informed, that in the hands of Dr.
M., Avho, for excellence as an operator,
is unsurpassed, it  has proved, so far as
he has had an opportunity of observing
its results, highly successful.
   It should not, however, be attempted
when there is any diseased action at the
extremity of the root,  and, for the re-
moval of this, the  author  has succeeded
more frequently by injecting the tooth,
once a day, for a Aveek or  two, with a
solution of nitrate of sUver, than  with
any other remedy he has ever employed.
But as a substitute for this, he has some-
times used with success, a weak solu-
tion of chloride of soda.
   The operation wiU often appear to be
successful for a few weeks  or months,
and sometimes  for a year or  two, but
sooner or  later, in  very many cases, it
wiU result in the formation of alveolar
abscess  and  the discharge of matter
through the socket and gum, or if it be
a superior molaris, sometimes into  the
maxiUary  sinus.
  A front tooth, after  the destruction of
its pulp, is not so liable to give rise to
alveolar abscess  as a molaris, and,  con-
sequently, may sometimes be preserved
for years, by being treated in this man- 
               FIL

ner.  But Avhether  there is a discharge
of fetid matter from it, or not, the opera-
tion of plugging  is not always advis-
able.
  A tooth may often be plugged when
the pulp is  exposed;  but great  care
should be taken to prevent the gold from
coming in contact  with it, else severe
pain wUl be produced, and  the removal
of the filling rendered indispensable. It
should never, however, be attempted,
whUe the pulp is inflamed, or the tooth
in an aching oondition.
  Dr. Koecker recommends, in cases of
this sort, covering  the  exposed pulp
with  a  piece of thin leaf lead, on  the
ground that this metal is supposed to be
less irritating to the animal fibre than
any other.  The author never tested
the  merits  of this  practice,  but is
disposed to believe that it wiU not  an-
swer, for the reason, that the extreme
sensibihty of the pulp is such, that the
contact  of any hard substance with it
is productive of great pain.
  Dr. Fitch says  he has often  succeed-
ed,  by covering the  exposed nerve with
a plate of gold.  This is by far prefer-
able to the plan proposed by Dr. Koeck-
er,  for the gold plate may be so fitted to
the cavity that its edges wiU rest upon
the circumjacent bone, and  thus   be
effectually  made to shield the exposed
pulp.   After  this  has been  properly
placed,  the filhng may be introduced
without danger of its coming in contact
with the nerve.
  But, if there be inflammation in the
lining membrane, Dr.  F. recommends
that this should be reduced, previously
to the application of the plate; and for
this purpose,  he advises the use of the
Aleppo  gaUs.   He  directs  that a small
portion of the fresh nut be placed in the
cavity of the  tooth, and covered with
beeswax, in order to protect it from the
action of the  air, and  the  whole to be
renewed every ten or fifteen days. The
author adopted this treatment in a num-
ber of cases, but has seldom succeeded
with  it.   He  cannot, therefore, speak
8                 FIL

of it in as high praise as  does  its au-
thor.
  It is an exceedingly difficult matter to
reduce inflammation of the lining mem-
brane of a tooth.  Indeed,  it can rarely
be  done; and although the author has
sometimes succeeded, he is fuUy of the
opinion, that in aU such cases, except
the tooth be an incisor or cuspidatus, it
should  at  once be extracted.
  A tooth is ofifcn exceedingly sensitive,
when the nerve is not exposed; but this
need never deter  the  dentist from re-
moving the decayed part and plugging
the cavity, as the only inconvenience
which it will occasion  the patient,  will
be a little suffering during the operation,
and slight momentary pain for a few
days, whenever he takes any thing hot
or cold into his mouth.  But, if the sen-
sibility is so great as to render it impos-
sible for the patient to endure the opera-
tion, the fortieth  or  fiftieth part  of a
grain of arsenic, with an equal quantiy
of the  sulphate of morphia, should be
applied to the diseased part, and the
cavity afterwards sealed up with white
wax, or gum mastic, to prevent it from
getting into the mouth and being SAval-
lowed,  and the saliva  from getting to
it.  At the expiration of from two to
three hours, it should be removed, and
the cavity properly prepared and filled.
There is great danger, however, when
this is applied to the front teeth of very
young persons, if it be permitted to re-
main  too long, of its inducing inflam-
mation  and sometimes the death of the
lining membrane, and causing the tooth
to assume a dark, muddy, or purple ap-
pearance.   Therefore,  when  applied
only for the purpose of destroying the
sensibihty  of the  bone of  the tooth, it
should not be  permitted to remain any
longer than is necessary for the accom-
plishment of this object.
  The filling of teeth,  therefore, is ad-
visable  only   under   certain circum-
stances, and when the operation is per-
formed without a due regard to these, it
may be productive of great injury.
21 
FIL
289
FIL
    Manner of Forming the Cavity.
   This is an important part of the op-
 eration, and though generaUy the easiest,
 is, nevertheless, often attended  with
 some  difficulty.   The removal  of the
 diseased part of the tooth is not always
 aU that it is necessary to do, preparatory
 to the introduction  of the gold.  The
 cavity must be so shaped, as when pro-
 perly filled, to prevent trfe liability of the
 filhng from coming  out.   The part of
 the tooth, too,  surrounding the orifice,
 should present  no rough or brittle edges
 or points.  The bottom of the  cavity
 should be as nearly of the size of the
 orifice as it is possible to make  it, and
 it would be better to have it even a  little
 larger than smaller.  But the difference
 between  the size of the  one and the
 other should never be very great; for if
 the interior of the cavity is  much larger
 than the orifice, it wiU be difficult to
 make the plug sufficiently firm and  solid
 to render it impermeable to the fluids of
 the mouth; and if, on the other hand,
 the orifice is larger than the bottom of
 the cavity, there wiU be danger of not
 being  able to obtain sufficient stability
 for the filhng  to prevent it from  ulti-
 mately loosening  and faffing out.  It
 often happens, however, that the situa-
 tion and extent of the decay is such, as
 to render it impossible to make the
 cavity as large  at  the bottom  as at the
 orifice, and Avhen this is the  case, several
 circular grooves should be cut on its in-
 ner walls for the purpose  of obtaining
 as much security for the fiUing as  pos-
 sible. By properly attending to this pre-
 caution, a plug may be so inserted as to
 prevent it from ever coming out.
   OrdinarUy, it is much easier to form
 a  cavity in the grinding surface  of a
 molaris or bicuspis, than in any other
 tooth or part of a tooth, though it some-
times happens,  that even here, it is at-
tended Avith difficulty, and, especially,
when the  decay, commencing in  the
centre, foUows  the several  depressions
which run out from it.  In cases of this I
     25
 sort, the edges bordering on and cover-
 ing the diseased  part, and  Avhich are
 often thick and very hard, should be cut
 away so as to completely expose it and
 form an opening as  large as the cavity
 avUI be in the interior after the caries has
 been removed. Caries of the approximal
 surface of a tooth has first to be exposed
 by  filing a space  between the affected
 and adjoining organ, before it can be ap-
 proached by the dentist, and even then
 its removal and the proper formation of
 the cavity  is oftentimes a nice  and ex-
 ceedingly difficult  operation.  The aper-
 ture between the  teeth  should always
 be made sufficiently wide to enable the
 dentist to  operate  with ease; otherwise
 it wiU be impossible to remove the ca-
 ries and plug the tooth in a proper man-
 ner.  In young subjects, the teeth may
 sometimes be  separated sufficiently to
 admit of  the  operation of plugging,
 Avith wedges of soft wood or gum elas-
 tic.  This is  recommended,  and  has
 been practiced with success by Dr. E.
 Parmly.   It is only admissible, how-
 ever, in the fewest number of cases.  If
 it  be attempted after  the twentieth or
 twenty-fifth  year  of age, there wiU be
 danger  of inducing inflammation in
 the alveolo-dental membranes and gums
 that wiU ever render them exceedingly
 susceptible to morbid impressions. Much
 judgment, therefore, is necessary in de-
 termining  the propriety or impropriety
 of thus separating the teeth.
   After every  particle  of decomposed
 bone has  been removed, the cavity
 should be thoroughly cleansed before
 the plug is inserted.  This may be done
 by first injecting water  into it with a
 properly constructed  syringe, and, af-
 tenvards wiping it dry with a small lock
 of raw cotton fixed upon the point of a
 probe or excavator; or, the cavity may,
 in  the  first  place, be  wiped  with a
 little raw cotton moistened with water,
 and afterwards  with dry cotton.  The
 latter method is the most convenient,
 and is equally  as  good as the former.
The cavity  should always be dry when 
FIL
290
FIL
 the material with which it is to be fiUed
 is introduced.
  Instruments for Introducing the Gold.
   For introducing and consolidating the
 gold, a number of instruments are requir-
 ed, which should be sufficiently strong to
 resist any amount of pressure the oper-
 ator may  be capable of putting  upon
 them in the  operation.  They should
 have round or octangular handles, large
 enough to prevent the  liability of their
 being broken, and to enable him to grasp
 them firmly in his  hand.  Their points
 should  vary in size, though none should
 be very large.  Several should be straight,
 but for the most part, they require to be
 curved—some very  slightly, others so
 as to form with the shaft of the instru-
 ment an angle of ninety degrees.  Most
 of them should have  a  shm  wedge
 shape.   Some, however,  both of the
 straight and curved instruments, should
 have blunt points with a crucial groove
 filed across them,  and  a few  should
 have highly polished oval points, for
 finishing the surfaces of the fillings in
 the grinding and other exposed surfaces
 of teeth.  Most dentists  employ for in-
 troducing and consolidating the gold,
 simple blunt-pointed  pluggers; but, it
 is impossible with such  instruments to
 make a filhng  as firm  and sohd  as it
 should be for the perfect preservation of
 the tooth, and especiaUy if the cavity is
 large.   From  one-fourth  to  one-half
 more gold can  be introduced into a tol-
 erably large sized cavity, Avith a wedge-
 pointed, than with  a blunt-pointed in-
 strument.
   The sides of the wedge-pointed plug-
 gers should be left a little rough, for the
 purpose of preventing them from cut-
 ting the  gold,  and  there should be one
 or two smaU notches filed across their
 edges.   When thus prepared, the gold
 can  be  more  perfectly  controUed and
more readUy conveyed to the bottom  of
the cavity than with smoother edged in-
struments.   The blunt-pointed instru-
ments, or those which  should be used I
 for condensing the extruding extremities
 of the folds of gold, should,  as before
 stated, have a crucial groove filed across
 their points.
   This general description will serve to
 convey  a tolerably correct idea of the
 number and sort of instruments required
 for the operation; but, no two dentists
 have  their plugging  instruments pre-
 cisely alike; each has them constructed
 in such  a way as he thinks will enable
 him to apply them most easUy and effi-
 ciently  to  the  various parts of a tooth
 Avhich may require fining.
 Manner of Introducing and Consolidat-
   ing the 'Gold, and finishing the Sur-
  face of the Filling.
   The operator,  being  provided with
 the necessary  instruments, should cut
 his gold with  a  pair of scissors, into
 strips of from half an inch to an inch
 wide.  Each of these  should be loosely
 rolled or folded together lengthAvise, and
 after  the  cavity  has been  properly
 cleansed  and  dried, one  end of one
 should be introduced and carried to the
 bottom of the cavity, with a straight or
 curved wedge-pointed  plugger; the roU
 on the outside should  be folded on the
 part first inserted.  The folding  should
 be commenced on one side of the cavity,
 and the  inner end of each fold  should
 be taken to the bottom,  and the outer
 should extend nearly the twelfth of an
 inch  on  the  outside of the orifice,
 and thus fold after fold should be intro-
 duced, until the cavity is tolerably weU
 fiUed.  Having proceeded thus far with
 the operation, a Avedge-pointed plugger
 should be forced through the  centre
 of the fining, and the gold firmly press-
 ed out against the AvaUs of the cavity.
 The opening  made through  the  cen-
 tre of the  filling should then be filled
 in the manner  as first described, and
 this time it should be  packed in  as
 tightly as possible.  This done, the op-
erator  should endeavor  to force in a
smaUer wedge-pointed instrument than
was employed  in the  first part of the 
FIL
291
FIL
operation, at the side or some other part
of the cavity; and thus  he should pro-
ceed, until he has tried every part of the
plug;  filling, as  he  proceeds, every
opening Avhich he shall have made, and
exerting, in the packing of the gold, aU
the pressure Avhich he can put on, Avith-
out endangering the  tooth.  If one roll
or fold of gold is not enough, he should
take another and another, until eyery
part of the cavity is filled.
   The advantage to be derived from in-
troducing the gold in this manner is ob-
vious.  By extending the folds from the
orifice to the bottom  of the cavity, the
liability of the gold to crumble and come
out, is effectually  prevented, and by
putting it in with a  wedge-pointed in-
strument, it may be pressed out  into all
the depressions of the walls of the cav-
ity, and rendered altogether more solid
than it could othenvise be made.
   When the nerve is exposed, the  inte-
rior extremities of the  folds should  not
touch  the bottom of  the  cavity,  and,
after the cavity has been loosely filled in
the manner described,  the Avedge-point-
ed  plugger,  instead of being  forced
through the centre of the filhng, should
be introduced at one side.  In this way
a tooth may often be so fiUed as to se-
cure  its preservation  for a number of
years, if not through  life.  But it re-
quires  a dexterous   and  experienced
practitioner to do it, and on the grinding
surface the operation wiU be found more
difficult than Avhen the cavity is in the
side of the tooth, nor should it ever be
attempted when  the lining membrane
is inflamed, or Avhile there is pain in the
organ.
  After the cavity has  been thoroughly
filled,  every portion of  the projecting
part of the  plug should  be consoli-
dated, either with a  straight or curved,
small blunt-pointed instrument, as may
be most convenient; or if the plug be
in the side of a  tooth  next another, it
may be compressed with  the  angle of
the point of the plugger, making the ad-
joining  organ a kind  of fulcrum for the
instrument.  After the fiUing has been
thus consolidated, as long  as  it can be
made to yield in the least to  the pres-
sure of the instrument, the protruding
part should be scraped or cut, if  in the
grinding face, and filed, if in the side,
down  to  the tooth, so  as to form  a
smooth, uniform, gently  swelling, or
perfectly flat surface.  If in this part of
the operation any portion of the gold
should  crumble  or  be dislodged,  but
Avhich it will not do if it has been pro-
perly introduced and consolidated,  the
injury should be repaired by making in
the part of the  plug, where it has  oc-
curred, an opening, and filling it, or by
the removal of the whole of the first and
the introduction of a new filling.  Every
part of the  surface of the fiUing  should
be uniform and free  from the shghtest
indentation which might afford a lodge-
ment to clammy mucus or extraneous
matter of any sort.  This  is a point
which should never be lost sight of,  for,
however excellent the  filling  may  be,
in other respects, if the  surface  is  not
smooth and  uniform,  and flush with
the surrounding walls of the tooth,  the
object intended to be accomplished by
it, may be  partiaUy, if not wholly  de-
feated.  If any portions of the gold have
been forced over the  edge of the orifice
of the  cavity, they  should be carefully
and accurately trimmed off. This is a
precaution which should never be over-
looked, and it should be more especially
attended to,  when the  filhng is in  the
approximal surface of a tooth where a
portion of the gold is very liable to be
forced up or down upon the neck of the
tooth, as it may happen to be in the  up-
per or  lower  jaw, and for the  removal
of any overlapping portion  here, a thin
pointed cutting' instrument will be  ne-
cessary.
  After having prepared the surface of
the fiUing in  the  manner as  here des-
cribed, it should  be  rubbed with finely
powered pumice-stone, or, with what
is  by far  and incomparably  better, a
smaU piece of Arkansas oil-stone, until 
FIL
■20-2
FIL
all the file scratches or  other asperities
shall be perfectly removed.   If the fiU-
ing is in the grinding,  outer  or  inner
surface of a molaris or bicuspis,  a long
piece of the stone having a small trian-
gular and slightly oval point should be
used, or, if powdered pumice-stone be
employed, it may be used on the point
of a simUarly shaped piece of wood, pre-
viously moistened in Avater.   For a fill-
ing in the approximal surface of a tooth,
the oU-stone should be shaped like the
pinion file of a clock, and in either case
it should be frequently dipped in Avater,
and when its pores become filled with
the gold, the surface should be ground
off by rubbing it on another piece of the
same kind of stone, or if pumice-stone
be used, it may be applied with floss
silk, moistened with water, by draAving
it backwards and  forwards across the
surface of the filling.
  The surface of the filling, after all the
asperities have  been thus ground off,
should be Avashed untU every particle of
the pumice-stone, or grit  from the oil-
stone, if the latter has been used, Avhich
may have been left upon it, is removed.
Every portion of it should then be pol-
ished with a suitable burnisher,  which
should, from time to time, be dipped in
water  having a small quantity of the
purest castile soap dissolved in it, until
it is  rendered as brilliant  as a mirror.
This done, it should  again be washed,
and the operation completed by rubbing
it from three to six minutes with dry
floss sUk.
  The time required to fill a tooth weU,
by an  expert operator, may be said to
vary from thirty minutes  to two  hours
and a half, according as the cavity  is
large or smaU, or favorably or unfavora-
bly situated, and in some cases a  much
longer time will be required.  The au-
thor has found it  necessary  in  filling
some cavities, to bestoAv as many  as six
hours  constant  labor upon the opera-
tion.   Much less time and skUl are re-
quired to fill a  cavity in  the grinding
surface of a tooth than in the side, and
the operation in either place to be bene-
ficial to the patient, must be Avell per-
formed, and the  dentist who does not
feel the importance of executing it in a
proper manner, should never be entrust-
ed Avith the management of the diseases
of these important organs.
  In  every part of the operation, the
operator should so guard his instruments
as to prevent them from slipping, and he
avUI be better able to do this by standing
a little to the right and behind his patient
than in any  other  position.  In  plug-
ging the loAver teeth he should  stand
from  six  inches  to a foot higher than
Avhile plugging the upper, and to enable
him to do this, he  should be provided
with a stool to be  used Avhenever he
may find it necessary  to occupy a more
elevated position. When it can be done,
he should grasp the tooth he is filling
Avith  the  thumb  and forefinger  of his
left hand, so as not only to  steady it,
but also to catch the point of the instru-
ment  in case it should slip; but if he is
always careful to press in a direction
towards the cavity, this need never hap-
pen,  but,  against  which accident he
should nevertheless always be guarded.
When he cannot shield the mouth with
the thumb and  finger  of his left hand as
described, he should  let the  thumb or
one of the fingers of his right hand rest
either upon the tooth he is operating on,
or upon some other.
   The foregoing description of the de-
tails of the operation, will serve  as a
general guide for its  performance, and
at the same time, enable the more inex-
perienced practitioner to appreciate, in
some small degree, the amount of labor,
accuracy  of manipulation, and  perfec-
tion of execution which it requires.  To
describe minutely the manner of filling
a cavity in every part of each individual
tooth, which is liable to be attacked by
caries, Avould, if  it were necessary, be
occupying too much space.  But believ-
ing that  aU the important information
Avhich can be advantageously imparted
by description, concerning the details of 
FIS
293
FIT
the operation, has now been given, the
author does not deem it necessary  to
enlarge further upon the subject.
  FILTER.   An instrument, general-
ly composed of paper, linen, sponge,
sand,  pulverized  charcoal, or  glass,
properly arranged  in a funnel.
   FILTRATION.   Filtratio;  from
filtrum, a strainer.   A pharmaceutical
operation, which consists in  freeing a
fluid from any feculent, earthy, or other
insoluble matters, too light  for precipi-
tation.
   FILTRUM.  A filter.
   FILUM.   A fibre or thread.
   FIM'BRIA.  A fringe.  In Anatomy,
any  fringe-like  body,  as the fimbrated
extremity of the Fallopian tube.
   FIMBRIATED.  Fringed.
   FINGER.  Digitus.
   FINOT, C. F.   Inaugural Disserta-
tion on the Diseases of First Dentition,
by.  Paris, 1813.
   FIR.  See Pinus.
   Fir, Canada.  Pinus balsamea.
   Fir, Norway Spruce.  Pinus abies.
   Fir, Scotch.  Pinus sylvestris.
   Fir, Silver.   Pinus picea.
   Fir, Balsam.  Pinus balsamea.
   FIRE.  Ignis.
   Fire-Damp.  The  explosive  carbu-
 reted hydrogen gas of coal-mines.
   Fire, Saint Anthony's. Erysipelas.
   FISH GLUE.   Ichthyocolla.
   Fish Skin.  Ichthyosis.
   Fish  Tongue.   A name  given  by
 some dentists to an elevator used for  the
 extraction of teeth, and more  especiaUy
 the  roots of teeth.  It is more frequent-
 ly called carp's tongue, langue de carpe,
 by the French, as it is the tongue of this
 fish to which the instrument in question
 is supposed most to resemble.  See  El-
 evator.
   FISSU'RA.  Frorn/mdere, to cleave.
 A fissure,  crack,  or cleft.  A fracture
 in Avhich the  bone is not completely
 separated.  Also, a lesion of the skin or
 mucous membrane, as a  chop on  the
 hand,  or a deep depression in  a part.
   FISSURE.  See Fissura.
      25*
  Fissure, Capillary.  See Pilatio.
  Fissure of the Palate.  Cleft pal-
ate.  A division of the soft and some-
times of the hard palate, and generally,
along the median line.  See Pal»tine
Organs, defects of.
  Fissure, Central.  The aggregate
of the cavities of the brain, regarded by
Meckel as but one, in the form of a cross.
  Fissure, Glenoid. A fissure situated
in the deepest part of the glenoid cavity
of the temporal bone.
  Fissure  of  Rolan'do.   A  fissure
passing transversely between the two
superior convolutions of the brain.
  Fissure, Semilu'nar.  A notch  at
the anterior of the cerebeUum.
  Fissure of  Sylvius.  A deep, nar-
row  sulcus on  each  side,  parting the
middle and anterior lobes  of the cere-
brum,  ascending  obhquely backwards
from the temporal ala of the sphenoid
bone to near the middle of the parietal.
  FISTULA. A deep sinuous ulcer,
kept up by an altered texture of the
parts, and communicating  with a natu-
ral cavity, excretory  duct, or secretory
gland.  A fistula  is said to be complete,
Avhen it  has an external  and  internal
opening, and  incompkte, when it has
but one opening.
   Fistula in Ano.   A sinuous ulcer
by the side of the  rectum.
   Fistula Cibalis.   The oesophagus.
   Fistula Lachrymalis.  An ulcera-
tive  opening into the lachrymal sac, giv-
ing egress to a puriform fluid.
   Fistula, Salivary.   An ulcerous
opening in the cheek communicating
with the parotid duct.
   FITCH, SAMUEL SHELDON.—
Observations upon  the Importance  of
the  Teeth, by.  Philadelphia, 1828 and
1830.—A System of Dental Surgery in
three parts, by.   1. Dental Surgery as
a Science;  2. Operative  Dental  Sur-
gery;  3.  Pharmacy, connected with
Dental Surgery, by. PhUadelphia, 1829
and  1835.  This work, although for the
most part a compUation, is one of the
best  and most comprehensive  treatises 
FLA
294
FLE
upon the science and art of dental sur-
gery, that had come from  the  press of
any country up to the time of its pubh-
cation.
  FiXED.   Fixus;  from  figere,  to
fasten.  In  Chemistry, a substance not
capable of being volatilized by fire.
  FIXI DENTES.  The  teeth of se-
cond dentition.
  FLABELLATION.    Flabellatio;
from flabelbre, to agitate the air.  Agi-
tation of the air Avith a fan.
  FLABELLIFORM.  Fbbelliformis.
Having the form of a fan.
  FLACCID'ITY.  Flacciditas; from
flaccidus; flabby, soft.   Softness of a
part.
  FLAGG, JOSIAH F.  The Family
Dentist; containing a  brief description
of the structure, formation, diseases and
treatment of the human teeth, by. Bos-
ton, 1822.   Dr. Flagg, is also author of
several papers upon the teeth pubhshed
in the  Boston Medical and Surgical
Journal.
   Flagg's Drill  Stock.   An instru-
ment invented  by Dr. J. F. Flagg for
drilling into the pulp cavity of a tooth
for the purpose of giving egress to matter
formed there by the suppuration of the
 pulp—an operation proposed  by Mr.
Fox.
   FLAG.  A  water weed.
   Flag, Sweet.  Calamus.
   Flag, Water.   The yellow  water
 flag.
   FLAME.  A light, glowing, lumi-
 nous fluid, proceeding from  the surface
 of a burning body, and resulting from
 the combustion of their volatile parti-
 cles.  The  flame of a spirit or oil lamp
 is used in mechanical dentistry for unit-
 ing or soldering the different parts of a
 piece of dental mechanism.
   FLANK.  The iliac region.
   •FLATULENCE. An accumulation
 of gas or wind in  the stomach or intes-
 tines.
   FLATULENT.  Windy.
   FLATUS.   AVind  in  the  stomach
 and bowels.
  FLAVEDO  CORTICUM CITRI.
Lemon peel.
  FLAVUS.  Yellow.
  FLAX.  See Linum.
  Flax, Purging.   Linum  catharti-
cum.
  Flax-Leaved  Daphne.   Daphne
gnidium.
  FLEABANE.  Inula dysenterica.
  Fleabane, Great.   Conyza squar-
rosa.
  Fleabane, Canada.  Erigeron cana-
dense.
  FLEA WORT.  Plantago psyllium.
  FLEAM.  In  Veterinary  Surgery,
an instrument for bleeding horses.
  FLEGMEN.  See Flemen.
  FLEMEN.   Swelling of the ankles.
  FLESH.   The soft part  of an ani-
mal, especially the muscles.
  Flesh, Proud.   Fungous granula-
tions.
  FLEURIMON.   Means of Preserv-
ing the Health and Beauty of the Teeth
by. Paris, 1682.
  FLEXIBILITY.   A property pos-
sessed by certain bodies, of bending or
yielding Avithout rupture.
  FLEXTON.  Flexio; fromfledere,
to bend.  In Physiology, the action of
the flexor muscles, and the  state  of a
joint bent by them.
   FLEXOR.  A muscle, the function
of which is, to  bend a certain part or
organ.
   Flexor Brevis Digito'rum Pedis
Perfora'tus.  A flexor muscle of the
toes, situated at the middle part of the
sole of the foot.
   Flexor Brevis Minimi  Digiti Pe-
dis.  A flexor muscle  of the little toe,
situated at the inferior and outer edge of
the metatarsal bone of the same.
   Flexor Brevis Pol'licisManus. A
flexor muscle of the second joint of the
thumb, situated at the outer part of the
palm of the hand.
   Flexor Brevis Pollicis Pedis.  A
 flexor muscle of the  first joint of the
 great toe, situated at  the anterior and
 middle part of the sole of the foot. 
FLO
295
FLU
  Flexor Carpi Radialis.  A  long
thin  muscle  of the forearm,  which
serves to bend the hand.
  Flexor Longus Digito'rum Pedis
Profun'dus  Per'forans.   A flexor
muscle of the toes, situated at the pos-
terior and inner part of the leg.
  Flexor  Longus  Pollicis Manus.
A flexor muscle of the thumb, situated
at the anterior part of the forearm.
  Flexor Longus Pollicis Pedis.—
A flexor muscle of the great toe, situat-
ed at the posterior part of the leg.
  Flexor Ossis Metacarpi Pollicis.
A muscle of the thumb which serves to
turn the first bone of it upon its axis.
  Flexor  Parvus   Min'imi  Dig'iti.
A muscle situated along the inner side
of the metacarpal bone of the little finger.
It assists the abductor muscle in  bend-
ing the tittle finger.
  Flexor  Profun'dus  Per'forans.
A long, thick, flat muscle of the fingers,
situated under the perforatus.
  Flexor Subli'mis Perfora'tus.  A
thick, flat muscle of the forearm, which
serves to bend the second  joint of  the
fingers.
  FLEXUO'SUS.  FuU of windings.
  FLOCCI.   The fine down or villi
which forms the nap of mucous mem-
branes.
  FLOCCULI.  SeeFlocci.
  FLORAL.   Fbtialis;  from flos, a
flower.   Pertaining to, groAving  in, or
on, a floAver.
  FLORES. The plural of flos.  Flow-
ers ; a term applied to several crystal-
line bodies.
  Flores Benzoes.  Flowers of Ben-
jamin.  Benzoic acid.
  Flores Boracis.  Boracic acid.
  Flores  Martiales.   Ferrum am-
moniatum.
  Flores Sulphuris.  Sublimated sul-
phur.
  Flores Zinci. Oxyd of zinc.
  FLORESCENTIA.  Act of flower-
ing.
  FLORET.   A little flower.
  FLOS.  In  Botany,  a  flower.  In
Chemistry, formally applied to whatever
had a flower-like appearance,  as flow-
ers of sulphur, &.C.
   FLOWERS.  Menses.
   Flowers of Benjamin. Benzoic acid.
   Flowers of Sulphur.  Sublimated
sulphur.
   FLUATE. A fluoride.
   FLUCTUATION. Fluctuatio; from
fluctus, a wave.  The movement or un-
dulation of a fluid accumulated in a
natural  or artificial cavity, distinguisha-
ble by pressure with the finger.
   FLUID. Fluidus; fromfluere,tot\ow.
A body, the inherent particles of which
yield to the slightest pressure and move
with the greatest facility  in  all direc-
tions.  Fluids are  divided  into liquids,
or incompressible fluids, and  gases,  or
aeriform fluids.   The greater part of the
human body  consists of fluids.
   Fluids of  the Body.  The fluids of
the body consists of  blood, lymph, the
perspiratory,  follicular and   glandular
fluids.
   Fluids of the Mouth.   The saliva
furnished by the parotid, submaxillary
 and sublingual glands, and the secre-
 tions of the mucous membrane which
 lines it.  See Saliva, and Fluids of the
 Mouth, characteristics of.
   Fluids of the Mouth, Character-
 istics of.  The saliva, in  healthy per-
 sons having  good constitutions, has a
 light frothy appearance, and but  very
 little viscidity.   Inflammation  of the
 gums, from whatever cause produced,
 increases its  viscidity, and causes it to
 be less frothy.  In a healthy state  it is
 inodorous, floats upon and mixes readi-
 ly with water, but when in a  viscid  or
 diseased condition, it sinks and mixes
 with it with difficulty.
   Irritation in the mouth, from diseased
gums,  aphthous  ulcers, inflammation
 of its mucous membrane, the introduc-
tion of mercury into  the system, or the
taking of any thing pungent into it,  in-
creases the flow of this fluid, and causes
it to be more  viscid than it is  in its na-
tural and healthy state. 
               FLU

  In treating on the signs of the saliva,
professor SchiU says, "The sympathet-
ic affection of the  stomach in pregnan-
cy is sometimes accompanied by saliva-
tion, which, in this case, mostly  takes
place after conception, and  sometimes
continues to the time of dehvery.   It is
also  observed to occur in weakened di-
gestion, in gastric catarrhs, after the use
of emetics; in mania, in what are called
abdominal obstructions, in hypochondri-
asis and hysteria; salivation occurs dur-
ing the use of mercury or antimony.
  "In confluent small-pox, salivation is
a favorable sign.  If it cease before the
ninth day the prognosis is bad.  In ling-
ering intermittents, salivation is some-
times critical;  more frequently in these
affections it precedes the termination in
dropsy.
  "Diminution of the salivary secretion,
and, in consequence of this, dryness of
the mouth, is pecuhar to the commence-
ment of acute diseases, as also to the
hectic fevers occasioned by affections of
the abdominal organs.  If the  Aoav of
the saliva stop suddenly,  there is rea-
son to apprehend an affection of the
brain.
  "Thick viscid saliva occurs under the
same circumstances as the  diminution
of the salivary secretion,  especially in
small-pox, typhus, and in hectic fevers.
It is  thin in ptyahsm.   In  gastric dis-
eases, Avhere the liver participates, it be-
comes yellow  or green;  by the admix-
ture of blood it may assume a reddish
color; in pregnant or lying-in  women,
it is  sometimes milky;  an icy cold
saliva was  observed by the author in
face-ache.
  "Frothy saliva from the mouth is ob-
served  in  apoplexy, epilepsy, hydro-
phobia,  and in the hysterical parox-
ysm."*
  Dr. Bell, editor of the Select  Medical
Library and Bulletin of Medical Science,
in a note to the work from which I have

  * Outlines of Pathological Semeiology; edi.
tion of the Select Medical Library, pp. 173.4.
>6                FLU

just quoted, says,"Acid saliva is regard-
ed by M. Donne, as indicative of gas-
tritis, or deranged digestion.  Mr. Lay-
cock," he observes, "on the other hand,
infers  from numerous  experiments on
hospital patients, that the saliva may be
acid, alkaline, or neutral, when the gas-
tric phenomena are the same.  In gen-
eral, Mr. L. remarked, that it was alka-
line in  the morning, and acid in  the
evening."
  The author has had occasion to  ob-
serve, that the acid quality of the sahva
was more apparent, and more common in
lymphatic, mucous and bUious disposi-
tions, than in sanguinous or in sanguino-
serouspersons, and that weakened orim-
paired digestion always had a tendency
to  increase it.
  M.  Delabarre, says, "When  this
fluid," (the saliva,) "has remained in the
mouth some moments, it there obtains
new properties, according to each indi-
vidual's constitution and the integrity of
the mucous membrane, or some of  the
parts which it covers.
  "In subjects who  enjoy  the best
health, whose stomach and lungs are
unimpaired, the saliva  appears very
scarce, but this is because it passes into
the stomach almost as soon as it is fur-
nished by the glands that secrete it.  It
only remains long enough in the mouth,
to mix with a small quantity of mucus,
and absorb a certain portion of atmos-
pheric air, to render it frothy.
   "On the other hand, the saliva of an
individual, whose mucous system fur-
nishes  a large quantity of mucus, is
stringy and heavy; is but slightly charg-
ed with oxygen, contains a great pro-
portion of azote and sulphur, and stains
silver."*
   Increased redness  and irritability of
the mucous membrane of the mouth, is
an almost invariable accompaniment of
general acidity of these fluids. Excoria-
tion and aphthous ulcers of the mouth,
 and bleeding of the gums, also, frequent-

     *Vide Traite de la Seconde Dentition.
2£ 
               FLU

ly result from this condition of the sali-
vary and mucous juices of this cavity.
  Anorexia,  languor, general depres-
sion of  spirits, head-ache, diarrhoea,
and rapid decay of the  teeth, are very
common among persons habituaUy sub-
ject to  great viscidity  of the  buccal
fluids.  It is  likewise among subjects
of this kind, and particularly when the
viscidity is so great as to cause clammi-
ness of these juices, that the green dis-
coloration of the enamel of the,teeth, is
most frequently met with.
  FLUIDITY. A liquid  or gaseous
state ; the state of a fluid.
  FLUIDUM.   A fluid.
  FLUKE.  A smaU flat Avorm, found
in the bUe ducts of sheep and oxen, and
sometimes in the human subject.
  FLUOR ALBUS.  Leucorrhcea.
  Fluor Albus Malignus.    Gonor-
rhoea.
   Fluor Spar.  Native fluoride of cal-
cium.
   FLUORIC ACID. The hydrofluoric
acid.
   FLUORIDE.  A compound of flu-
orine.
   FLU'ORINE.  Fluorium.  A hy-
pothetical basis of fluoric acid.
   FLUX.   Fluxus;  from fluere, 'to
flow.  In Chemistry, any highly fusible
substance, or mixture, as the sub-borate
of soda, employed in the fusion of metals.
In  Physiology,  a natural  discharge, as
the menstrual  flux.   In  Pathobgy, a
morbid  evacuation, as in cases  of dys-
entery,  diarrhoea, &,c.
   Flux, Bilious.  A discharge of bile
either by vomiting or purging.
   Flux, Black.  A mixture of  char-
coal and carbonate of potash, obtained
by  the  deflagration of cream of tartar
Avith about half its weight of nitre.   It is
used in  the separation of metals  from
their ores.
  Flux, Bloody.  Dysentery.
  Flux, Crude.  A  mixture of nitre
and cream of tartar used to assist in the
fusion of metals.
  Flux,  White.   Sub-carbonate of I
7                FCE

 potash obtained by the deflagration of
 equal parts of cream of tartar and nitre.
   FLUXION.   Fluxio; fromfluere,to
 flow.  In Chemistry, fusion. In Pathol-
 ogy, an afflux, flow, or determination of
 blood towards any organ or part of the
 body, as a consequence  of irritation or
 inflammation.
   FLUXUS.  A flux; a discharge.
   FLY.   In Zoology, a winged insect,
 of Avhich there are various species. See
 Musca.
   Fly, Spanish.   See Cantharis.
   F03NICULUM. Anethum. Fennel.
   Foeniculum   Aquaticum.   Water
 fennel.
   F(eniculum Dulce.  Sweet fennel.
   FOZTAL.  Foztalis.   Pertaining to
 the fetus.
   Fcetal Circulation.  There being
 no pulmonic circulation in  the  fetus,
 the blood seems to undergo in  the  pla-
 centa, a change similar to that which it
 experiences in the lungs after birth, and
 is conveyed from here through the um-
 bilical vein to the liver, and vena cava,
 by the ductus venosus.  From there, it
 is conveyed into the right auricle of the
 heart.  From thence, a small portion is
 sent into the right ventricle, then  into
 the pulmonary vein and is returned by
 the ductus arteriosus into the aorta; but
 larger portions  pass  directly through
 the foramen ovale into the left auricle ;
 from thence, it is  thrown into the left
 ventricle  and passes  into the  aorta, to
 be conveyed through the arterial system.
 The umbUical artery  returns  it to the
 placenta.
   FCETOR. From fceteo, to stink. An
 offensive smell.
   Fcetor Oris.  An  offensive breath.
 This may  result  from disease of the
 lungs or stomach, but the most frequent
 cause of fetor of the breath is a morbid
 condition of the gums, caries of, or ac-
 cumulations of salivary calculus on, the
 teeth.  Inflammation, sponginess  and
 ulceration of the gums, and large accu-
 mulations of light broAvn or yellow sali-
 vary calculus, however, impart to the
29 
FON
298
FOR
breath a much more offensive odor than
caries of the teeth.  See Gums, diseases
of, and Salivary Calculus.
  FCETUS.  Fetus ;  from feo, I bring
forth.  The unborn of animals, after its
parts are distinctly formed, until birth.
Previously to this  time, it is generaUy
termed embryo.
  FOLIATION.  Foliatio; from fo-
lium, a leaf.  The  folded  arrangement
of leaves while in their buds.
  FOLIUM.  A leaf.
  FOL'LICLE.  See Follicule.
  Follicles, Ciliary.   See Meibomi-
us' Glands.
  Follicles,  Dental.  See  Dental
Follicles.
  FOLLICULE.  Follkulus; diminu-
tive of follis,  a bag.  A  little bag.  In
Anatomy, a simple gland or follicle, con-
sisting of a roundish  hollow, and an ex-
cretory duct,  like the mucous and saba-
ceous follicles. In Botany, a seed-vessel.
  Follicule,  Ciliaire.  See  Meibo-
mius' Glands.
  Follicule, Dentaire.  See Dental
Follicles.
  FOMENTATION.  Fomentatio. A
partial bathing with simple or medicated
warm water, affected with  cloths pre-
viously dipped in it,  and then applied to
the part.
  FOMENTUM. Fomentation.
  FOMES MORBI. In Pathology, the
seat of a disease.
  FOMTTES.  From fomes, fuel; any
thing Avhich  retains heat. In Pathology,
any thing which absorbs and retains
contagious effluvia,  as  wooUen goods,
cloths, &c.
  FONS PULSANS.  A fontanel.
  FONTANA, CANAL OF.  A trian-
gular canal, at the inner side of the cili-
ary  circle of the  eye.
  FONTANEL'LA. A fontanel. Di-
minutive  of fons, a fountain.   The
opening between the frontal and parietal
bones which is  not  closed until about
the  third  year  after birth.  There is,
 sometimes, a second opening  between
the  occipital  and parietal bones, the first
is called the anterior fontanel, and the
other, the posterior fontanel.
  FONTIC'ULUS.  An  abscess.  A
small ulcer produced by art.
  FONZI.  Report upon Terre Metal-
lic Artificial Teeth, by.  Paris, 180*.-
Reply to the Pamphlet of Dubois Fau-
cou, by.  Paris, 1808.
  FOOD.  A nutrient,  digestible  sub-
stance, not combined with a poisonous
ingredient.
  FOOT.  Pes.  The  lower extremity
of the leg, or that part on which an an-
imal stands or walks.
  Foot-Bath.  Pediluvium.
  Foot, Flat.  SeeKyllosis.
  FORA'MEN.  From foro, I  pierce.
A little opening.
  Foramen Centra'le. See Foramen
of Soemmering.
  Foramen Cozcum.  An opening in
the base of the cranium  between the
ethmoid and frontal bones.  A depres-
sion near the root of the  tongue has
also received the appellation of foramen
ccecum, as well as a little sulcus be-
tween the corpora pyramidalia and the
pons varolii.
  Foramen Incisivum.   A foramen
behind the incisor teeth of the upper
jaw common  to the two bones below,
but proper to each above.
  Foramen Lacerum Anterius.  The
opening between the greater and lesser
wing of the sphenoid bone, through
Avhich the third, fourth, first branch of
the fifth, and the sixth pair of nerves,
and opthalmic artery, pass.
  Foramen Lacerum in Basi Cranii.
A foramen in the  base of  the cranium
which gives passage to the internal jug-
ular vein, and the  eighth pair and ac-
cessory nerves.
  Foramen Magnum Occipitis.  The
great opening  at the base  and anterior
part of the occipital bone.
  Foramen Monroia'num.  The aper-
ture beneath the anterior part of the body
of the fornix, through which the lateral
ventricles of the brain  communicate;
caUed so, after Monro, the discoverer. 
FOR
299
FOR
   Foramen of Soemmering. The cen-
 tral foramen or depression in the retina.
   Foramen of Winslow.  An open-
 ing in the omentum.
   Foramen Opticum.  The  opening
 through which the optic nerve passes.
   Foramen Ovale.  The opening be-
 tween  the two auricles  in the heart of
 the fetus.  Also, a foramen of the sphe-
 noid bone.
   Foramen Rotundum.  See Fenestra
 Rotunda.
   Foramen Supra-Orbitarium.   The
 superior orbitar hole.
   Foramen Vesalii.  A scarcely per-
 ceptible hole between the foramen ro-
 tundum and foramen  ovale of the sphe-
 noid bone.
   FORCE.  From fortis, strong.  Any
 power which determines an action.  By
 musadar forces, is meant the power of
 the  muscles; vital forces,  the  powers
 inherent to organization,  &c.
   FORCEPS.  From ferrum, iron, and
 capio, I take. An instrument for taking
 hold of, and extracting bodies or parts
 which it would be difficult to  seize or
 remove with the fingers.
   Forceps for Extracting  Teeth.
 Tooth  forceps.   This  was probably
 among  the first, and, perhaps, almost
 the only instrument employed  for the
 extraction of teeth, until  the  invention
 of the key by  Garengeot, in  the  early
 part of the eighteenth  century.   But
 from the time of Celsus, who wrote in
 the  first century of the  christian  era,
 down to this period,  the forceps  used
 for the extraction of teeth were  so rude
 in their construction, and so illy adapted
 to the purpose,  that for the removal of
 molar teeth, the employment of the key
 instrument soon became  general,  both
 among dental and medical practitioners.
 But the use of forceps  for  the extraction
 of the  back teeth  having again been
brought into notice by Mr, Cartwright,
an eminent dentist of London, who had
so improved  them, as to render their
employment both  safe  and  efficient,
they  have, since about 1830, been  rap-'
 idly taking the place of the key of Ga-
 rengeot, in aU its improved and modified
 forms.
    The  practicabihty,  however, of ex-
 tracting firmly articulated molar teeth
 with forceps, even after it had been de-
 monstrated by Mr. Cartwright, was, for
 several  years, doubted by many very
 respectable practitioners, and when wc
 consider the  strong prejudices that ex-
 isted to their use, it is not surprising
 that their employment should have been
 adopted with caution.  Nor is  it to be
 wondered that a gentleman of Mr. BeU's
 intelligence  and practical experience,
 should,  so late as the period of the pub-
 lication  of his work, 1830, teU us, that
 the key  is the only instrument  to be re-
 lied on for the removal of teeth that are
 much decayed, and that those who have
 heaped  the  most opprobium upon it,
 are glad to have a concealed recourse to
 its aid.
   This may have been true at  the time
 Mr. B. wrote, but it is not  now.  On
 the contrary, cases are daily occurring
 of the extraction of teeth Avith the for-
 ceps,  upon  which  the key had been
 previously unsuccessfully employed. It
 is  generally supposed, that a  greater
 amount  of force is necessary to remove
 a tooth with forceps, than with the key,
 but this  is a mistake.  It does not ordi-
 narily require as much.  All  that is
 gained by the lever action of the key, is
 more  than  balanced  by  the greater
 amount of resistance  encountered in the
 lateral direction of the force exerted by
 that instrument in  the removal  of the
 tooth.  But with the forceps, the direc-
 tion of the  force  being perpendicular,
 either  upwards or downwards, as the
 tooth may happen to  be in the upper or
 lower jaw, a sufficient  amount only to
 break up the connection with the sock-
 et, and to overcome the resistance of the
 waUs of the alveolus, is required.
  The author has used forceps, to  the
 exclusion of the key, for nearly fourteen
years, and he does not hesitate to affirm,
that any tooth that  can be extracted 
               FOR

with  the latter,  can also  be removed
with the former, if properly constructed,
and that, too,  in the majority of cases,
with greater ease to the operator, and
less  pain to  the patient.   He  knoAvs
that, in the  expression of this opinion,
he differs from many of his professional
brethren ; and that there are many skil-
ful and experienced  practitioners, who,
whUe they prefer the forceps for the ex-
traction of most teeth, stiU  occasionally
use the key.   But he is confident,  that,
if they would provide themselves  with
forceps properly constructed for the ex-
traction of the teeth, which they  now
remove with the key, and use them for
six months to  the exclusion of that in-
strument, they Avould never employ it
again.   He could mention the names of
more  than fifty, who, at his  instance,
have done this, and the result has been,
that  they have whoUy abandoned  its
use.
  It may, perhaps, require a little more
practice to become  skilled in the use of
forceps, than  in that of the key.  We
would, therefore, advise those who  have
been accustomed to the key, not to lay
it at  once entirely aside; but to com-
mence the use of forceps on teeth that
are least difficult to remove, as, for ex-
ample, the bicuspides, and then after-
Avards upon the molares.
  But,  in order that forceps may  be
used with ease, it is necessary  that they
should  be of  a proper shape  and  con
struction.  Every operator should  pos-
sess several pair, (seven at least,)  each
with a differently shaped beak, fitted to
the necks of the teeth to which they are
respectively designed to be applied.
  For the extraction of the  molares, the
forceps recommended and described  by
Mr. SneU, are the best in use, so far
as their adaptation to the teeth is  con-
cerned.  Their jaws are so adapted to
the necks of the teeth as to secure a firm
hold, and to prevent the liability of their
slipping.  But in describing the forceps
used for the extraction of teeth, the au-
thor wUl commence with those employ-
0                FOR

ed for the  removal of the  upper inci-
sores and cuspidati.
Forceps for the Extraction of the  Upper
        Incisores and  Cuspidati.
  For the  extraction of the upper in-
cisores and cuspidati, one  pair of for-
ceps only,  is necessary.  These should
be straight, with  grooved or crescent-
shaped jaws, accurately  fitted  to  the
necks  of the teeth, and  thin, so that,
when  it becomes necessary, from the
decay  of the tooth, they  may be easily
introduced under  the gum, up to the
edge  of the alveolus.  Their handles
should be large enough to prevent them
from springing in the hand  of the ope-
rator.   One of the handles  should be
bent at the extremity, as recommended
by Mr. SneU, so  as to form a hook to
pass around the little  finger, to prevent
the hand of the operator from slipping,
which, in the extraction of  a firmly ar-
ticulated  cuspidatus,  and,  especiaUy,
when  moist from perspiration, it is lia-
ble to do.
  Most of  the  straight forceps vended
for the extraction of teeth, have the in-
side of their jaws  simply  notched, and,
consequently, not being adapted  to the
necks of the teeth,  are iUy suited for the
extraction  of the  upper  incisores and
cuspidati.
Forceps for the Extraction of the Bicus-
  pides of both Jaws and the  Lower Cus-
  pidati.
  Forceps for the extraction of the above
mentioned teeth, should be bent so as to
be easUy and  readily  apphed to them;
their jaws  should be narrow, thin, and
slightly grooved.  If but one pair, which
is all that are reaUy required, be employ-
ed, both handles must be straight.
Forceps for tlie Extraction of tlw  Upper
               Molares.
  For the  extraction of the upper mo-
lares, two  pair, one for each side, are
required.  Those described by Mr. Snell,
are curved just below the joint, so that
the jaAvs of the beak forms  an angle
3( 
FIL
301
FIL
with  the  handles, of about twenty  or
thirty degrees, or  just enough to clear
the lower teeth. The inner jaw of each
is grooved to fit the palatine root or side
of the neck of a superior molaris, while
the outer jaw has  two grooves in it,
with  a point in the centre to  fit the de-
pression just below the bifurcation of the
two outer roots.  One of the  handles is
bent so as to form a hook.  This passes
round the httle finger of the hand of the
operator and prevents it from shpping.
In the drawing which Mr. S. has given
of his superior molar forceps,  the hook
is on  the inner or palatine  handle of
each, and consequently, in the extrac-
tion of a right molaris, the upper side of
the instrument must be grasped, and
the lower side in the extraction of a left
molaris.  The author has obviated this
inconvenience by having the  handle so
bent,  that when the instrument is ap-
plied, the hook of  each is  towards the
operator, which gives him an equal con-
trol over both. The handles should be
large  enough  to  prevent  them from
springing under the grasp of  the hand;
wide, and accurately fitted  to it; and
their length should not  exceed five or
five and a half inches. The beak should
not be bent any more than is absolutely
necessary to  prevent the handles from
coming in contact with the lower teeth,
for, in proportion to the greatness of the
curvature, wUl the  force required  to
be apphed to  the instrument, be disad-
vantageous^  exerted.  Every dentist,
therefore, in  having  forceps  manufac-
tured, should  give  special  directions
with regard to their shape and size.
Forceps for the Extraction of the Lower
               Incisores.
  The lower  incisores being narrower
than any of the other teeth, require very
narrow-beaked forceps for their removal,
to prevent interfering with the teeth ad-
joining the one upon which the instru-
ment is  apphed.   Their width should
not exceed the  twelfth part of an inch.
The beak should be bent to an angle of
         26
 about twenty-five degrees.  An instru-
 ment of this sort is as weU suited to the
 extraction of the lower incisores as any
 which can be employed.  It is also an
 exceedingly valuable instrument for the
 removal of roots of teeth.

 Forceps for the Extraction of the Lower
               Molares.
   Each jaw of the beak  of the lower
 molar forceps  recommended  by  Mr.
 SneU, has two  grooves, with a point in
 the centre, which, in grasping the tooth,
 comes between the two  roots just at
 their bifurcation.  Mr. S. employs  two
 pair for the extraction of the lower, as
 weU as the upper molares, in order, as
 he says, to have a "hook to  turn round
 the httle finger," supposing that this,
 must be on opposite sides of the instru-
 ment. But this is rendered unnecessary
 by an improvement made by the author
 in 1833, which consists in  having  the
 handles of the instrument so bent  that
 it may be as readUy applied  to one side
 of the mouth as  the  other, while  the
 operator occupies a position  at the right
 and a little behind the patient.  By this
 improvement, the necessity for two pair
 is Avholly superceded, and it moreover
 enables the operator to control the head
 of his patient with his left arm, and the
 lower jaw with his left hand, rendering
 the aid of an assistant wholly unneces-
 sary.
   When applied to a tooth, the handles,
 as may be perceived, are turned toward
 the operator, forming an angle with the
 median line  of the mouth, of about
 tAventy-five or thirty degrees.  Without
 this curvature in the handles of the in-
 strument, the arm of the operator would
 often  be thrown so far from his body, as
 to prevent him from exercising the con-
 trol over it, often required in the per-
 formance of the operation.  And, whUe
 it is important that they should be bent
 in the manner here  described, they
 should, at the same time, be wide and
accurately fitted to the hand  of the ope-
rator. 
FOR
302
FOR
Forceps for the Extraction of the Dentes
             Sapkntiaz.
  The forceps described for the extrac-
tion of the bicuspides of both  jaws and
the canines of the lower, are, in the ma-
jority of cases, as well suited for the re-
moval of both the upper  and  lower
wisdom teeth as any instrument which
has been employed for the purpose.  It
sometimes happens, however, that  the
crowns of the upper second molares are
so much longer than the dentes sapien-
tiae as to render their application exceed-
ingly difficult and even impossible.  To
obviate this difficulty, Dr. Edward  P.
Church, about eighteen years ago, had
a pair of forceps constructed with the
beak bent above the joint, so as to form
nearly two right angles.   This  has
proved to be a very valuable instrument
not only for the purpose  for which it
was originally designed, but also for the
extraction of roots of teeth situated im-
mediately behind a long crowned bicus-
pis or molaris.
   Forceps, Compound Screw, Hul-
lihen's.   An  instrument,  combining
the advantages of the conical screw and
upper incisor forceps, invented by Dr.
S. P. Hulhhen,  for the extraction of the
roots of the upper incisores and  cuspi-
 dati.  It is thus described by the author,
 "Lengthwise, within and between the
 blades of the beak is a steel tube, one
 end of which is open; the other sohd
 and flat, and jointed in a mortice in the
male  part of the joint of the forceps.
 When the forceps are opened, this joint
 permits the tube to fall backwards and
 forwards from one blade of the beak to
 the other, without any lateral motion.
 Within this tube is a spiral spring which
 forces up a shaft two-thirds of the tube,
 the other part is a weU tapered or coni-
 cal screw.  *   *  * The shaft and tube
  are so fitted together, and  to the beak of
  the forceps, that one-half of the rounded
  part of the shaft projects beyond the end
  of the tube; so that the shaft may play
  up and down upon the spring," about
half an inch, and the  screw or shaft be
embraced between the blades of the beak
of the instrument.
  "The forceps," says Dr.  H., "are
used, by  first  embracing the shaft be-
tween the blades."   "Then screwing it
as gently and  deeply  into  the  root as
possible, the blades are opened—pushed
up  on the root, which is then seized"
and extracted.
  "The screw thus combined with the
forceps," as is justly  remarked by Dr.
H., "prevents  the  root  from  being
crushed.  It  acts as  a powerful lever
when  a lateral motion  is given; it is
likewise  of advantage when a  rotary
motion is made—it prevents the forceps
from slipping,  or of their action being
lost, should even one side of the root
give  way in the act of extracting it;
and is used with equal advantage where
one side of the root is entirely gone."
   The opportunities  which the  author
has had of testing the value of this in-
strument, have been sufficient to  justify
him in stating that  its merits are not
overrated by the inventor.  Every prac-
titioner would, therefore, do well to pro-
vide himself with one of them.
   Forceps, Crane's. Two pair of for-
 ceps designed by Dr. J. W. Crane, of
 New  York, for the extraction  of the
 lower molar teeth, one for the removal
 of the first and second molares on either
 side of the lower jaw, and the other for
 the third molares, or dentes sapientiae.
 The beaks and handles of these instru-
 ments are so bent as not to interfere with
 the teeth of the  upper jaw, and at the
 same time so constructed as to give the
 operator a firm grasp  upon them.
    Forceps, Maynard's.   Tavo instru-
 ments,  a  right  and a left, invented by
 Dr. E.  Maynard, for the extraction of
 the roots of the upper molares before
 they have become separated from each
 other.  The outer jaw of each instru-
 ment is brought to a sharp point, for
 perforating the alveolus between  the
 outer roots of the teeth and for  securing
 between them, a firm hold, while  the 
FOR
303
FOX
inner nib is intended  to rest upon the
edge of the alveolus and  embrace the
palatine fang.  By this means a suffi-
ciently firm hold is secured  to enable
the  operator to remove the roots of  an
upper molaris  without  difficulty; two
pair, as we have  before  stated, one
for the  right and one for  the left side,
are required.  The advantage to be de-
rived from forceps  of this description,
in the extraction of the superior molares,
Avhen in the condition as above describ-
ed, must  be apparent to  every practi-
tioner.  When properly apphed,  they
avUI always enable him to remove the
roots of an upper molaris at once, and
by a single effort.
  FOREARM.   Cubitus.   Pars  in-
ferior brachii.   The portion of the up-
per  extremity, extending  from  the
elbow to the hand.
  FOREN'SIC MEDICINE.   The
application of  medical science to the
solution of judicial questions.
  FORESKIN.  The prepuce.
  FORFEX.  A pair of scissors; also
an iron  hook.
  Forfex Dentaria.   A hook,  used
by dentists for the extraction of roots of
teeth.  The point of it is shaped some-
thing hke the extremity of a hook used
Avith the  key  instrument.   Some are
forked, and others are slightly crescent-
shaped.   It is particularly applicable
for the removal of roots of molar  teeth,
on the left side of the mouth, after they
have become partiaUy loosened.  It was
formerly much more generaUy used than
at present.
  FORGE.  See Furnace, forge.
  FORMIC ACID. Acidumformkum.
An  acid  found in  the ant, or formica
rufa, and obtained by distiUation.   It is
also  prepared artificially.
  FORMI'CA.  The ant.  A genus of
insects;  also, the name of a black wart
with a  broad  base and  cleft surface.
The epithet is applied too, to a varicose
tumor Avhich appears on the anus and
glans penis.
  FORMICATION.   A  slight ting-'
 ling sensation, such as one might sup-
 pose would be produced by a number
 of ants creeping on a part.
   FORMULA.   From forma, a form.
 A medical prescription.
   FORM'ULARY.   A collection of
 medical prescriptions or formulae.
   FOR'MYLE.   A hypothetical radi-
 cal of formic acid.
   FORNIX. An  arch  or vault.  A
 medullary body beneath the corpus cal-
 losum is so called, because, in one direc-
 tion it presents an arched appearance.
   FOSSA.   From fodio, I dig.  A cav-
 ity with an orifice wider than the base.
   Fossa  Amynt.e.  A double  headed
 bandage used in fractures of the nose.
   Fossa  Cerebel'li.   The  inferior
 occipital fossa.
   Fossa Corona'lis.   A depression in
 the orbital plate of the frontal bone.
   Fossa Hyaloide'a.  A depression in
 the vitreous humor for the reception of
 the crystalhne lens.
   Fossa Magna.  The great groove of
 the ear.  Also, the pudendum muliebre,
 or vulva.
   Fossa Ovalis.  A  depression in the
 right auricle of the heart, occupying the
 place of the foramen ovale in the fetus.
   FOSSIL.   The organic  remains of
 animals and vegetables.
   FOTUS.  A fomentation.
   Fotus  Communis.   A decoction of
 poppies.
   FOURCHETTE.  FurcuU. A fork.
 A forked instrument used for raising the
 tongue in the operation of dividing the
 fraenum.
   FOUCHON.   Author of tracts of
 vicious positions of the Teeth, publish-
 ed Paris, 1775.
   FO'VEA.   From fodio,  I  dig.  A
 slight depression; the pudendum  mu-
 liebre.  Also, a vapor both.
   FOX, JOSEPH. A dentist, and au-
 thor of a work on the Natural History
 and Diseases  of the Human Teeth.  He
 commenced his professional career near
the close  of  the  eighteenth  century,
but with regard to the period of his birth, 
FOX
304
FRA
early history, and time of his death, the
author is not informed.  It would seem,
however, from what he says in the in-
troduction to the second edition of his
Avork, which has contributed in so emi-
nent a degree to the elevation of the pro-
fession, and advancement of the Science
and Art of Dental Surgery, published in
1814, that he was, for some time, engag-
ed as a dresser for Mr. Cline, surgeon of
St. Thomas' Hospital.   But  he must
have had some knowledge  of  practical
dentistry previously to this time, as he
states, that he found amongst the stu-
dents  of St. Thomas' and Guy's Hos-
pital, whUe thus occupied, "a  great de-
sire  to obtain  particular  information,
concerning the diseases of the teeth,"
Avhich he could not have furnished, had
he not been a dentist. He  also  adds,
that it was from "frequent conversations
Avith them" on these subjects, that he
Avas led to deliver a "course of lectures
on the Structure  and Diseases of the
teeth.  In this undertaking" he received,
as he acknowledges, much assistance
from Sir Astly Cooper. His first course
of lectures was delivered in the spring of
1799, and  were afterwards  "continued
as one of the spring courses of lectures"
of Guy's Hospital.   "The lectures hav-
ing been favorably received," continues
the author, "a publication of them was
called  for, with engravings from draw-
ings taken from the preparations  used
to illustrate  the  oral descriptions.  A
volume containing the Natural History
of the  Human Teeth, &c. was publish-
ed in 1803; and  a second volume on
the Diseases of the Teeth, &,c.  was pub-
lished in  1806."  In 1814,  as before
stated, a  second edition of these two
works were issued  from the press, in
one volume, and in  1833, some  years
after the death of the author a third edi-
tion was  published.  This work has
been  more  extensively  quoted  than
almost any other upon the same subject,
and so great has  been the  demand for
it in the United States, that  as late as
 1846,  an edition, with numerous  addi-
tions, Avas published  in  Philadelphia.
A translation of it into French, has also
been, published in France.
  During the whole course of the pro-
fessional career of Mr. Fox, he enjoyed
a high reputation as  a practitioner of
dental  surgery,  and as we  have else-
where  stated, although he has passed
from among the living, he  has left be-
hind him a memorial Avhich will perpe-
tuate his name  to the latest period  of
time.   Wherever, and so  long as this
branch of surgery shall be practiced by
educated men, will the name of Fox be
held in grateful remembrance.
  Fox's  Bandage.  A bandage  used
in the extraction of teeth, to prevent
luxating the jaw.   "It  consists  of a
piece of leather formed so as to receive
the chin, and a strong cap, that may be
placed upon the  top of the head, which
are connected by two  straps  upon each
side;  it is to be fixed when the mouth
is opened to a certain degree, with the
condyles as far back as possible; the cap
is then to be put on the posterior part of
the crown of the head, and  the leather
being applied to  the chin, the straps are
to be buckled tight, when it will not be
possible, by any effort, to advance the
jaw so much as  to endanger its luxa-
tion."
   FOXGLOVE.  Digitalis perpurea.
   FRACTURE.  Fructura; fromfran-
gere, to break.   In Surgery, the  break-
ing of a bone into two or  more pieces.
A  fracture is termed simple, when it
occurs without injury to the  surround-
ing integuments;  compound, when ac-
companied by a laceration or contusion
of the integuments, and  comminuted,
when the bone is broken into numerous
pieces and forced into the soft parts.
Fractures may  be transverse, oblique,
&c.
   Fracture of the  Alveolar Pro-
cesses.   An accident which more fre-
quently results from  the  extraction  of
teeth by  unskilful  practitioners than
from any other  description of mechani-
cal violence. "The danger of the occur- 
FRA
305
FRA
     rence of this accident," as Maury very
     properly observes, "also  depends upon
     several circumstances, as the adhesion
     of the tooth to the socket  by its perios-
     teum, the thickness of the alveolar waUs,
     the length, number, curvature and diver-
     gence of the  roots, &c.;" and  as  Mr.
     Thomas BeU  correctly  remarks,  "a*s
     many of the molares occupy  a consider-
»    able smaUer space at the neck,  Avhere
     the edge of the alveolus surrounds them,
     than at  the extremities of the diverging
     roots, it is obvious that no tooth of such
     form can be extracted, without more or
     less yielding  of the alveolar  process.
     This should, if possible be confined to a
     simple  fissure in  that  part  towards
     which  the  tooth is moved; but even
     should a smaU portion of bone  be at-
     tached to the side of the  tooth,  and be
     removed with it, not the slightest in-
     jury is inflicted by such a circumstance,
     unless it should extend to the side of the
     next tooth, and partially denude it of its
     support.  If the portion of alveolar pro-
     cess which is broken, should still re-
     main in the socket, attached  to the inner
     part of the gum, it  is better at once to
     remove  it, which may be easily done
     with a  pair  of common dressing for-
     ceps."  If this be neglected  it wiU give
     rise to more or less irritation which wiU
     be kept  up until its  removal is  effected
     by  exfohation.
       The follqwing interesting  case is re-
     lated by the author last quoted.
       "Mr. M.,  having suffered  severely
     from tooth-ache, requested  a  young
     practitioner of his  acquaintance to re-
     move the tooth which caused the pain;
     namely, the second inferior  molaris on
     the right side.  The fulcrum of  the in-
     strument was placed on  the inside, and
     suffered to sink below the alveolar pro-
     cess.   After  several very  violent at-
     tempts, the crown of the  tooth at length
     broke, and,  at the  same  moment,  a
     severe crush was felt along the whole
     of the inside of the jaw.   The roots of
     the teeth were suffered  to remain. A
     few days afterwards inflammation  took
           26*
place, and at length suppuration foUow-
ed to a very great extent.  When I saAV
him the cheek was greatly enlarged, and
the tumefaction extended under the jaw
and doAvn the neck.  The elevators of
the jaw partaking of the inflamed state
of the parts, the mouth was with  diffi-
culty opened  sufficiently for  me to see
the extent  of the mischief which  had
been produced.  I found very extensive
ulceration along the inner side of the
jaw, from  the bicuspides to the  dens
sapientiae;  an abscess had formed and
burst, and  large quantities of pus were
constantly pouring from it.  The whole
of the teeth occupying the space I have
mentioned  were  loose, including the
roots of the broken one; and upon ex-
amining the  state  of the alveolar pro-
cess, I found that a large portion had
been fractured,  and was  now exfoliat-
ing.  The constitution was exceedingly
reduced, and  it was found necessary to
order tonics  and the  most nourishing
food to prevent the patient from sinking.
At length the bone became sufficiently
loosened to aUow of its being detached,
and when  I removed it, more than two
months after  the accident, I found that
it was so large as to have included
the three molar teeth and both  the  bi-
cuspides, some  of Avhich, having  be-
come loose, had previously come away.
The part afterwards healed  and gradu-
aUy assumed its natural condition, leav-
ing, however, a deep depression on the
cheek.   In  this  case, therefore, five
teeth were lost, besides a considerable
portion of bone, in consequence of the
misapplication of the instrument."  To
the foregoing the author will add the
following:
   In 1835, the author was requested by
the late Dr. Baker, of Baltimore, to visit,
with him,  a lady who, by the upsetting
of a stage-coach between Washington
and this city, had her face severely bruised
and lacerated.  All that portion of the
lower jaw, which contained the six ante-
rior teeth was splintered off, and only re-
tained in the  mouth by the gums and 
FRA
306
FR^E
 integuments, with which it Avas  con-
 nected.  The wounds of her face, hav-
 ing been properly dressed, the detached
 portion of the jaw was carefully adjust-
 ed and  secured  by  a ligature  passed
 round the front  teeth and first molares,
 and by a bandage on the outside, pass-
 ed round the chin and back  part of the
 head.   Her mouth Avas washed, five or
 six times  a day, with dduted  tinct.
 myrrh.  The third day after the  acci-
 dent, by the direction of Dr. B., she lost
 twelve ounces of blood; and, in about
 five or six weeks, with no other treat-
 ment than the dressing of the wounds
 had perfectly recovered.
   To the above case the author might
 add several which have fallen under his
 OAvn immediate observation, but as some
 of these have already been noticed in
 the article on  accidents Avhich some-
 times result from the extraction of teeth,
 he does not deem it necessary to enlarge
 further upon the subject.
   Fractures of the Teeth.  This is
 an accident of daily  occurrence.  The
 molares, and even bicuspides, are some-
 times  so securely articulated as to ren-
 der extraction difficult, and occasionaUy
 impossible, without  fracturing  one or
 more of their roots, especially when the
 alveolar processes are firm arid unyield-
 ing.  In this case, if the fractured por-
 tion is not deep, it should always be re-
 moved, though, in so doing, it may be
 necessary to cut  away a small portion
 of the edge of the alveolus.  But when
 it is deep, and not productive of pain or
inconvenience to the patient, it may be
 suffered to  remain, untU by the gradual
destruction and filling up of the  alveo-
lus, it can be reached Avith a  pair of for-
 ceps or elevator, when it may be readily
removed.
  But  it sometimes  happens that the
croAvn of a tooth is broken by a bloAV,
and in this case, the socket generally
 sustains  more or less injury from the
 concussion. The author has known as
 many as four, and in one case, thirteen
 croAvns of teeth to be broken off from a
 single Woav.   A  fireman of Baltimore,
 in 1835, received a blow from the head
 of an axe, which fractured the crowns
 of the incisores of both jaws, the infe-
 rior canines and three of the bicuspides
 of the loAver jaw; and in 1828 or '29,
 he saw a boy about twelve years of age,
 who, from a similar accident, occasion-
 ed  by running up suddenly behind a
 man while chopping,  had the crowns
 of his superior incisores broken off.  In
 both  of these  cases, the inflammation
 which supervened was so great as to ren-
 der the removal of the  roots necessary.
 The  crowns, fangs, and alveolar pro-
 cesses, are sometimes ground to pieces,
 or the teeth driven into the very substance
 of the jaAV-bone.  Mr.  Bell  says that
 he once  found a central incisor so com-
 pletely  forced  into the bone,  that  he
 thought it to be the remains of a  fang,
 but, on removing it, he found it to be an
 entire tooth.
  When the crown of a tooth has been
 broken off by a blow, the root should be
 immediately extracted,  because the in-
jury that it has received AviU not permit
 it to remain with impunity in its socket.
 The author has sometimes engrafted ar-
 tificial crowns on such roots,  but the
 practice is, in general, a bad one. When
 it is desirable that the loss should be re-
 paired by the  substitution of an  artifi-
 cial tooth, the root should  be extracted,
 and time allowed for the alveolus to be-
 come filled with a deposition of osseous
 matter, and the gums to be restored to
health, before replacing it.
  But whether the loss of the crown be
replaced or not, the root can seldom re-
main  with impunity,  for after the in-
flammation, induced  by the concussion
of a blow, sufficiently severe to fracture
the tooth, has subsided, or terminated in
the suppuration of the fining membrane,
which it usually does, it acts as a mor-
bid  irritant to the socket and  adjacent
parts, and for this reason  it should, at
once be removed.
  FR^ENUM.  A bridle. In Anatomy,
a term applied to a fold of membrane 
FRE               307              FRO
Avhich binds down or restrains the move-
ments of a part.
  Frenum Labio'rum.  Folds of mu-
cous membrane, which bind down the
lips to the maxiUary bone at the medial
line.
  Frenum Lingue.  A triangular fold
of mucous membrane from the floor of
the mouth which binds down, or rather
restrains the motion of the tongue.
  Frenum Preiputii.  A membranous
fold connecting the prepuce with the
lower part of the glans penis.
  FRAGA'RIA. From fragro, I smell
sweetly.  The strawberry.
  Fragaria  Sterilis.   The barren
straAvberry.
  Fragaria  Vesca.   The  strawberry
plant.
  FRAGIL'ITAS  OSSIUM.   Brittle-
ness of bones.
  FRAG'MENT.  Frogmen; fragmen-
turn; fromfrangere, to break. A splinter
or fragment of bone.
  FRAMBCE'SIA.  From framboise,
a raspberry.  The  yaws; a disease
peculiar to the AntiUes and Africa, and
characterized by cutaneous excrescen-
ces, resembling mulberries, which sup-
purate and discharge an ichorous fluid.
  ERAN'GULA.  Black alder.
  FRANK.  Author of a Small Work
on  restoring  the Teeth  to  Soundness.
Heidelb, 1672.—Also, of a Dissertation
on  Tooth-ache, pubhshed at Jena, 1692.
  FRANKINCENSE.  At present the
resin of spruce fir, but formerly, oliba-
num.
  FRA'SERA.  American calumba.
  FRAXINEL'LA,   WHITE.  Dic-
tamnus  albus.
  FRAXINUS EXCEL'SIOR. The
ash tree.
  Fraxinus  Ornus.    The tree from
whence manna flows.
  FRECKLES.  Ephelides.
  FREEZING POINT.  For water,
thirty-two degrees of Fahrenheit.
  Freezing Mixture.   A preparation
capable  of suddenly  producing cold.
The two  foUowing are selected from
Mr.  Walker's table of frigorific  mix-
tures :
   Mixture with Snow.     Therm, falls.
Snow, or pounded ice, five^l
  parts by weight,       I   t0_12o
Muriate of soda,       2 [
Muriate of ammonia,   1J
   Mixture without Snow.    Therm, falls.
Muriate of ammonia,   5} from+5rj0
Nitrate of potash,      5 >  i   ', no
Water,              163
  FREM'ITUS. Shuddering.
  FRENA.  The socket of a tooth.
  FRIABIL'ITY.  Friabilitas;  from
frio,  to break or crumble.  The property
of being easily broken  into small frag-
ments, or coarse powder.
  FRIABLE.  Easily crumbled.
  FRICTION.  Frictio; from fricare,
to rub.  The act of rubbing any part of
the surface of the body with the hand,
a piece of flannel or a brush, or with
medicinal substances.
  FRIGIDITY.   Frigiditas;   from
frigidum,  cold.   A sensation of cold.
Also, impotence.  Frigidity of the stom-
ach, anorexia exhaustorum, consists  of
loss  of appetite, occasioned  by  exces-
sive venery.                               •
  FRIGORIF'IC.  Possessed  of  the
power of producing cold. See Freezing
Mixture.
  Frigorific Mixtures. See Freezing
Mixture.
  FRIGUS.  Cold.
  Frigus Tenuo.  A rigor.
  FROG TONGUE.   Ranula.
  FRONT.  From.  The forehead.
  FRONTAL.  Frontalis.  Belonging,
or relating to the forehead.
  Frontal  Artery.  A branch of the
opthalmic, the supra orbital, distributed
to the muscles of the forehead.
  Frontal  Bone.  The os frontis.
  Frontal  Nerve.  A branch  of the
opthalmic,  which  divides  into  two
branches; one passes  up through  the
supra-orbitar foramen, and the other be-
tween the internal orbitary beneath  the
pulley of the superior oblique muscle.
  Frontal Sinuses.  Two cavities  in
the os frontis,  separated  by a medium 
FUL
308
FUN
 septum, and communicating with the
 anterior ceUs of the ethmoid bone.
   Frontal Spine.  A vertical ridge on
 the  middle  of the inner  side of the os
 frontis, which gives attachment to the
 falx cerebri.
   FRONTA'LIS. Frontal.
   FROST-BITE.  Numbness and im-
 perfect or arrested circulation in a part.
   FRUCTIFICATION. Fructificatio;
 from fructus, fruit, and facio, to make.
 The coUection of  phenomena which at-
 tend the formation of fruit.
   FRUCTUS.  The fruit of a plant.
   FRUGIV'OROUS.   From fruges,
 fruits, and voro, I  eat.   An animal that
 feeds on fruits.
   FRUIT.  Fructus.
   FRUMENTA'CEUS.   An epithet
 applied to plants like wheat.   Also,
 made of wheat, or hke grain.
   FRUMENTUM.  Wheat; also, the
 cereaha, from the  grains of which bread
 is made.
   FRUTEX.  A shrub.
   FUCUS.  AseaAveed.
   Fucus  Amyla'ceus.   Ceylon moss.
 Marine moss.   Irish moss.   Carrageen
 moss.
   Fucus  Digitatus.   Sea girdle and
 hangers.
   Fucus Helmintho'corton. Corsican
 worm weed.
   Fucus Natans. Sea lentU.
   Fucus Vesiculosus.   The sea  oak.
 Sea wreck.  Bladder wreck.
   FUGA'CIOUS. Fugax; fromfugcre,
 to fly.  Fading quickly, In Botany, ap-
 phed to organs which speedily  fade
 away.  In Pathology, symptoms which
 appear and  disappear almost immedi-
 ately afterwards.
   FUL'CRUM.  A  prop or support.
 The fulcrum of the key instrument used
 for the extraction  of teeth is the  bulb
 around which the hook moves, and is
 placed on  the opposite side of the tooth.
 In Botany, the term, in its plural sense,
fulcra,  signifies the appendages of the
 axis of a plant, except the leaves.
   FULGU'RATION. The sudden bril-
 liancy emitted by gold and sUver in the
 cupel of the assayer, immediately the
 last film  of vitrious  lead and  copper
 leaves the surface.
   FULIGINOUS.  Fuliginosus; from
fuligo, soot.  Having a smoky, or dark
 brown  color.  Apphed  to  the  hps,
 tongue and teeth, when they assume
 this appearance.
   FULI'GO. Soot. Fuligoligni. Wood
 soot.
   Fuligc/kali. From fuligo, soot, and
 kali, potash.  An alkaline medicine pre-
 pared by  boiling soot and potassa, in
 certain proportions in  water,  and after-
 wards evaporating and filtering the solu-
 tion.
   FULLER. A Popular Essay on the
 Structure, Formation and Management
 of the Teeth, by.  London, 1810—and
 a new edition, with Introductory  Ob-
 servations, by Richard Downing, pub-
 lished, London, 1815.
   FULLER'S EARTH.  An argiUa-
 ceous earth.
   FULNESS.  Repletio.  Plethora.
   FUMA'RIA.    Fumaria  officinalis.
 Fumitory.   Common fumitory.
   FUMARIC ACID. An  acid,  ob-
 tained from fumaria and Iceland moss,
 and, also, from the maleic acid.
   Fumaria Bulbosa.   A  plant, the
 root of which was formerly used as an
 emmenagogue and anthelmintic.
   FUMIGATION.  Fumigatio; from
fumus, smoke.  The application of va-
por, as fumes, to purify the atmosphere
from some noxious emanation or mias-
ma.  Chloride of lime is supposed to
be the most poAverful disinfecting agent,
and,  consequently, is most frequently
employed for this purpose.
   FUMITORY.   Fumaria.
   FUMUS.  Smoke.
   Fumus Albus.   Mercury.
   Fumus Citrinus. Sulphur.
   Fumus Duplex.  Sulphur and mer-
cury.
   Fumus Terr.e.  Fumitory.
   FUNCTION.   Functio;  from fun-
gor, to execute an office.  In Physiology, 
              FUN

the action of an organ, or system of or-
gans.
  FUND A.  A  bandage split at each
end to within two inches of the middle,
employed in diseases of the nose, and,
especially in cases of fracture or disloca-
tion of the lower jaw.
  FUNDAMENT.  Fundamentum.—
The anus.
  FUNDUS.  The base of an organ
which has an external opening, or ends
in a neck.
  FUN'GI.  The plural of fungus. See
Fungus.
  FUNGIFORM.  Fungiformis.  Re-
sembling a fungus.
  Fungiform Papille. A term some-
times apphed to the papiUae  near  the
edges of the tongue.
  FUNGOID.  Fungoides; from fun-
gus, a mushroom, and eiSos, resemblance.
That which has the shape or resembles
a fungus.
  FUNGOS'ITY. Fungositas.  A fun-
gous excrescence.  Proud flesh.
  FUNGUS.  In Surgery, a soft, spon-
gy, luxuriant growth, or tumor, devel-
oped on  the membranes, or other tex-
tures of the body. In Botany, the mush-
room order of plants,  in the  Linnaean
system;  class cryptogamia.
  Fungus Articuli. Spina ventosa.
  Fungus, Bleeding. Fungous haema-
todes.
  Fungus Cerebralis.  An encepha-
loid tumor.
  Fungus Cerebri. Hernia cerebri.
  Fungus Hematodes. MeduUary  sar-
coma ; spongoid inflammation;  a mor-
bid excrescence of a malignant charac-
ter, and somewhat similar to the sub-
stance of the brain.  Three varieties are
enumerated by Laennec:  1. The encys-
ted; 2. The unencysted, and 3. The in-
filtrated or diffused.  The first rarely at-
tains a very great size; the second some-
times grows to the size of a chUd's head,
and the third, consists of uncircumscrib-
ed masses.
  Fungus Medullaris. Fungous hae-
matodes. Also, an encephaloid  tumor.
)               FUR

  FUNICULUS. Diminutive of funis,
 a chord.  A little chord.
  Funiculus Spermaticus. The sper-
 matic chord.
  Funiculus Umbilicalis.  The um-
 bilical chord.
  Funiculus Varicosus. Cirsocele.
  FUNIS. A chord.
  Funis Umbilicalis.   The umbilical
 chord.
  FURCATUS. Forked.
  FURCULA.  The clavicle.
  FUR'FUR. Bran. Also, a genus of
 scaly diseases.
  FURFURA'CEOUS.   Resembling
 bran; applied to the bran-like sediment
 sometimes deposited in the urine.
  FURNACE. Fornax. An apparatus
 in which a vehement fire and heat may
 be  made, for  melting ores or metals,
 baking clay, or porcelain ware or teeth,
 supplied with air by various means, for
 the purpose of facilitating the combus-
 tion of the combustible matter employed
 for heating it.
  Furnace, Evaporatory. A furnace
 used for the purpose of reducing sub-
 stances into vapor by means of heat, in
 order to separate the fixed from the vol-
 atile principles.
  Furnace,Ceylonese Goldsmith's.
 A  small  low  earthen pot, filled with
 chaff, or saw-dust, on which a charcoal
 fire is  placed.  This is excited with a
 small bamboo blow-pipe inserted in a
 nozzle, placed at the bottom of the fire.
 It is sometimes used by dentists for re-
 fining and aUoying gold.
  Furnace  for Baking Porcelain
 Teeth.   A  muffle  furnace; which is
 made of fire clay, cased or hooped with
 iron bands, to prevent it from cracking
 when heated, Avith a muffle, 5r arched
 clay vessel with a  flat bottom in  the
 side, for the reception of a slide or tile,
 on  which  the teeth  are placed. Some
 furnaces used for  this  purpose are in
 two pieces,  the  top one being shaped
 hke a  dome; others constructed on a
 more extensive  scale are cased with
 brick.  See Mineral Teeth.
30 
GAL
310
GAL
  Furnace, Forge.   A  furnace  in
which the current of air is supphed by
a beUows.  It is sometimes used in the
laboratory of the dentist.
  Furnace, Reverberatory.  A fur-
nace in which the flame is made to dif-
fuse itself, over an arched surface, as in
distUlation.
  FUROR UTERINUS.  Nympho-
mania.
  FURUN'CULUS. From furiare to
make mad.  A species of phlegmon, or
boil, seated in the  dermoid texture,
which, after some days, suppurates and
discharges a bloody pus.  It is vulgarly
caUed a boil.
  Furunculus Gangrenosus. An an-
thrax.
  FUSIBILTTY.   Capable of  being
fused.
  FUSIBLE.  Possessed of fusibihty.
  Fusible Metal.   See  D'Arcet's
Metal.
  FUSIFORM.  Spindle-shaped.
  FUSION.  Fusio; from fundere,  to
melt.  The transformation of solids into
liquids, by exposure to  the action  of
heat.
G.
  G.  With the ancient Greek physi-
cian, an ounce.
  GABIR'EA.  A fatty kind of myrrh.
  GALACTOPO'SIA.   From  ycoa,
milk, and itosis, drink.  Treatment of
disease by a milk diet.
  GALANGA. See Maranta Galanga.
  GALANGAL,  ENGLISH.  Cype-
rus longus.
  GALBANETUM. Balsam of galba-
num with turpentine.
  GAL'BANUM.  A fetid, aromatic
gum-resin, the product of Bubon galba-
num, possessing properties, similar to
those of asafcetida.
  GAL'BULUS.   From galbus,  yel-
low. The cone of thecypress-tree. Also,
a natural yellowness of the skin  with
Avhich some persons are affected.
  GALE.   Dutch myrtle.
  GALEA.  A helmet.  In Pathology,
head-ache,  involving the  whole head.
In  Surgery, a bandage for the head,
called Galen's bandage.  In Botany, the
upper petal of the  lobate corolla.
  GALE'GA  OFFICINALIS.  Gale-
ga; rata capraria.  Goat's rue.
  GALE'NA. Native sulphuret of lead.
   GALENIC.    Relating to the  doc-
trines of Galen, or Galenism.
  GALENISM.     The doctrines of
Galen.
  GALENISTS.  The foUowers of the
doctrines of Galen.
  GALEN'S BANDAGE.  A four-
headed bandage.
  GA'LIA.  The name of two ancient
medicines, in one of which galls were an
ingredient; the galiapura.  The other,
galia moschata, contained aloes,  amber
and musk.
  GALIPE'A CUSPARIA.  The An-
gustura bark-tree, or Bonplandia  trifo-
liata.
  GALIPOT.  White turpentine.
  GALIUM.   From y«aa, rrulk, be-
cause some species  curdle milk.  The
name of a genus of plants.
  Galium Album.  See Galium Mol-
lugo.
  Galium  Apari'ne.   Goose  grass.
Cleavers.
  Galium Mollu'go. .• Galium album.
Greater ladies' bedstraw.
  Galium Verum.   Ladies'  bedstraw,
or cheese-rennet.  The gahum of the
pharmacopoeias.
  GALL.  Bile.
  Gall-Bladder.  Vesiculafellis. An
oblong membranous receptacle, serving 
GAN
311
GAN
 as a reservoir for the bUe attached to the
 inferior surface of the right lobe of the
 liver.
   Gall Ducts.  The ductus commu-
 nis  choledochus,  and  the  cystic and
 hepatic ducts.
   Gall-Stone.  Bihary calculus.
   GALLA.  A gaU  nut.  GaU oak.
   GALLIC ACID.  Acidum gallkum.
 A sUky, crystaUine substance, obtained
 by the oxydation of tannic acid.
   GALLETTE.  1. Present for  both
 sexes to keep the  Teeth healthy and
 clean, by.  Franckfort, 1797.—On the
 Art of the Dentist, by. Mayence, 1803.—
 Glances into the Province of the Den-
 tist, by.  Mayence, 1810.
   GAL'LIPOT.  A glazed earthen pot
 used for medicines.
   GALLS.  GaU-nuts.
   GAL'VANISM. Galvanismus; from
 Galvani, the discoverer.   The electrical
 phenomena, manifested on the contact
 of two metallic  plates of a different na-
 ture, and  when  executed  on animal
 parts endowed  with irritabUity, excite
 sensible movements.  A form of elec-
 tricity.
   Galvano-Magnetism.  An assemb-
 lage of phenomena, produced by the
 passage of  a magnetic current through
 a wire wound  around a centre of soft
 iron.
  GAMBOGIA.   Gambogium.  A yel-
 low gum-resin,  opaque  and  brittle,
 a drastic  cathartic,  emetic, and an-
 thelmintic.
  GAMMARUS.  The common  lob-
 ster.
  GAMPHE'LE.  The cheek; the jaw.
  GANGLIA ABDOMINAL.    The
 semilunar ganglia and solar  plexus.
  Ganglia  Cerebri  Postica.   The
 thalami novorum opticorum.
  Ganglia, Cervical.  The superior,
 middle and  inferior cervical ganglions.
  GAN'GLIFORM. Having the form
 of a ganglion.   A knot-hke  enlarge-
 ment, in the course of a nerve.
  GANGLION.  rayy**o»/, a knot.  In
Anatomy, a tubercle, or knot-like en-'
 largement,  varying  in  form,  texture,
 color, size and  consistence, composed
 of a net-work of nervous filaments or
 blood vessels, united by  cellular sub-
 stance, and  enveloped  in  a capsular
 membrane.
   Ganglion, Abdominal.   The semi-
 lunar ganglia.
   Ganglion Azygos, Vel Impar.  A
 smaU ganglion situated on the first bone
 of the coccyx which serves to connect
 the inferior extremity of the sympathetic
 system.
   Ganglion, Cardiac.   A ganglion
 situated upon the concavity of the arch
 of the aorta.
   Ganglion, Casserian. A large semi-
 lunar ganglion of the posterior chord of
 the fifth  pair of nerves, situated  near
 the extremity of the petrous bone.
   Ganglion, Ciliary.  A small gang-
 lion situated  within  the orbit, between
 the external rectus  muscle  and optic
 nerve.
   Ganglion, Jugulare. The superior
 ganglion in  the jugular fossa  of the
 glosso-pharyngeal nerve.
   Ganglion, Optic  A smaU, flatten-
 ed, oval-shaped  ganglion, situated  im-
 mediately below the foramen ovale.
   Ganglion, Petrosum.  The inferior
 ganghon of the glosso-pharyngeal nerve
 situated in the jugular fossa.
   Ganglion, Plexiforme.  A gangli-
 form swelling  of the  pneumogastric
 nerve, situated  between the internal
 carotid artery, and internal jugular vein.
   Ganglion, Spheno-Palatine.   The
 largest of the cranial gangha of  the
 sympathetic  nerve, and situated in  the
 spheno-maxillary fossa.
   Ganglion, Submaxillary. A round
 ganglion, situated on the submaxiUary
 gland.
   GANGLIONIC.  Ganglionics.  Ap-
 plied to nerves which have ganglions in
 their course.
   GANGR^ENA ORIS.    Sbughing
phagedazna of the mouth.  Necrosis infan-
 tilis.  This is an  affection which seems
 to be  peculiar to chUdren, and occurs 
GAN
312
GAN
 more frequently during the shedding of
 the temporary, and the dentition of  the
 permanent teeth, than at any other pe-
 riod of fife.    The  author  has never
 known adults  to  be affected with  it,
 though it is said that it does sometimes
 attack them, and to the ordinary spongy,
 inflamed, and ulcerated gums, it bears
 no  resemblance.   Although  gangrene
 is generaUy regarded as a result of in-
 flammation, Dr. Wood, in treating of it
 as it occurs in  the  mouth, says, "it is
 an  unsettled point,  whether it  has  in
 general any dependence upon it."  He
 further  states that it is thought "by
 many to  be an original affection,  and
 the inflammation which sometimes at-
 tends it" is regarded "rather as an effect
 than a cause."
  Among the symptoms which charac-
 terize the affection, are itching, ulcera-
tion and separation  of the gums from
the necks of the teeth and alveolar pro-
 cesses, the discharge, at first, of a muco-
 purulent, but ultimately of a fetid icho-
 rous matter.  The gums and lips as-
 sume a deep red or purple color; and
 ulcers are formed in various parts of the
 mouth;  the gums  ultimately slough,
 and  the  alveolar  processes  exfoliate,
bringing with them the temporary, and
 sometimes the crowns of the permanent
 teeth.   To these  symptoms may  be
 added loss  of appetite, dryness of the
 skin, smaU quick pulse, constipation  of
 the bowels, though sometimes there is a
 diarrhoea, lassitude, and frequently a
 disposition  to sleep.
  With the exfoliation of the alveolar
 processes, the disease usuaUy  abates,
 and  sometimes  entirely  disappears.—
 Delabarre says, "among the great num-
 ber of children  brought  to the Orphan
 Asylum, he has had frequent occasion
 to notice singular  comphcations of the
 affection," which are modified accord-
 ing to the strength, "sex, and idiosyn-
 crasies of the different subjects."  The
gums and lips, in some, he describes as
being of a beautiful red color; in others,
 the lips are rosy and the gums pale, and
 sometimes much  swollen.   He  also
 enumerates among the symptoms, burn-
 ing pain in the mucous membrane of
 the cheeks, ulceration, pain and  swell-
 ing in the submaxiUary glands.
   In  the majority of cases the disease is
 confined to one jaw  and to  one side,
 though sometimes both are affected with
 it.  Delabarre says,  if children reach
 the seventh or eighth year, the perma-
 nent teeth  are not injured, except  that
 it causes them  to be badly  arranged,
 owing to the want of proper  develop-
 ment of the jaw, but the author has
 never met with a case, however, in
 which they had not  suffered more or
 less seriously from it.
  The author just referred to,  enumer-
 ates among the symptoms of the disease
 in its  most aggravated form, inordinate
 appetite, burning thirst, a smaU spot on
 the cheek,  or about the lips, resembling
 anthrax, which rapidly increases in size,
 turns black, separates,  discharges an
 ichorous fluid, and its edges "roU  them-
 selves up like flesh exposed to the action
 of a  brisk  fire."  The flesh  separates
 from  the face; the bones become ex-
 posed, hectic fever ensues, and in  the
 course of fifteen or twenty days, death
 puts  an  end to the  sufferings of the
 child.  We are also informed by Dela-
 barre, that  this affection is  more com-
 mon  among  females  than  males,  and
 that the bones of the jaws are so  much
 softened  as to  be  easily cut with a
knife.
  The disease seems  to  be dependent
upon  a cachectic  habit  of body  and
 defective nutriticn, or   unwholesome
 food.   "It is most prevalent," says  Dr.
 Wood, "in miasmatic districts, and in
public establishments where children are
crowded together.  It  is a frequent se-
 quela of other diseases, especiaUy of in-
termittent and remittent fever, and the
exanthemata.  Mercury has sometimes
been  accused of producing it, though
upon  insufficient grounds.  It  is  possi-
ble  that  mercurial sore  mouth  may
 sometimes  have degenerated  into  this 
GAN
313
GAR
complaint, in persons predisposed to it.
The opinion is highly probable, Avhich
ascribes the constitutional predisposition
to the disease to a depraved condition of
the blood." This opinion is also main-
tained by Delabarre, who says, its "seat
is in the organs of nutrition, and in the
fluids conveyed to them."   The bad
disposition which gives rise to it, the
last mentioned writer thinks is some-
times innate, and at other times the re-
sult of unwholesome diet.
   In the treatment of the disease, such
constitutional remedies should be  pre-
scribed as are best  calculated to sustain
and strengthen the enfeebled energies of
the system, sulphate of quinine, miner-
al acids and a nutritious diet are recom-
mended.
   The local treatment should consist,
in the early stages of the disease, that is,
before sloughing has commenced, in
acidulated and astringent gargles, and
a solution of  chloride of time or  soda
may also be advantageously used.  The
ulcerated and discolored parts should be
occasionaUy touched with a strong solu-
tion of nitrate  of silver, and Delabarre
says, he has  derived great advantage
from touching them with the actual cau-
tery. A strong solution of sulphate of
copper is recommended by Dr.  B. H.
Coats, to be apphed to every part of the
diseased  surface.   Dr. Wood says,
"solid nitrate of sUver, or a strong solu-
tion of the salt, if sloughs  are already
formed, the mineral acids, and undilut-
ed  tincture of chloride of iron,  have
also been recommended as topical ap-
plications, and wiU, in most cases, be
found effectual."  As soon as exfolia-
tion of   the  alveolar   processes takes
place, the detached portions of bone
should be removed.
  Gangrena Senilis.  The  dry gan-
grene which sometimes occurs in old
age, commencing, generally, in  a pur-
ple or black spot under one of the small
toes, and  from thence, graduaUy extend-
ing up the leg.
  GAN'GRENE.   Gangrena;  from
     27
 ypao, to feed upon.  Incipient  mortifi-
 cation.  That condition of a part which
 immediately precedes mortification. See
 Mortification.
   GARCIN'IA  MANGOSTA'NA.—
 The mangosteen of Java and the Mo-
 lucca islands.
   GARDE'NIA  DUMETORUM.—
 A plant, the root of which is possessed
 of emetic properties.
   GARDETTE, JAMES. James Gar-
 dette, surgeon dentist, was the second
 son of Jean Blaize Gardette, and was
 born 13th of August, 1756, in the town
 of A gen, departement de Lot et Garon-
 ne,  France.  His  father  died when
 James was quite a lad, and we are but
 little acquainted with  this early period
 of his hfe: nor, indeed, does  it enter
 into the plan for the performance of our
 task.  We only know that he possessed
 a very trifling  patrimony, insufficient
 for his maintenance or education, and
 that  after his father's death he  was
 brought up by his paternal uncle, Blaize
 Gardette, who lived at Agen, and held
 the  office of prosecuting attorney until
 an advanced age. His uncle designed
 James for the medical profession, and
 with that view,  after the ordinary acad-
 emical studies of that day in a provin-
 cial town of France, sent him to Paris.
 He  remained at the capital  about two
 years, (from  1773  to  1775,) pursuing
 the study of anatomy and surgery in the
 Royal Medical School; and thence he
 was removed to the hospital at Tou-
 louse, where he resided eighteen months
 as a pupil in the institution. At the end
 of this period he was sent to  Bayonne,
 and  there was examined by the sur-
 geons  of the  admiralty, and commis-
 sioned as a surgeon in the French navy.
  We are not aware whether this first
 step  in life, or the more important one
 that immediately foUowed it, met the ap-
 probation of the good old uncle at Agen :
 but the probabihty is that they were the
 voluntary  independent  movements  of
the young and more ambitious nephew.
For we find that immediately on obtain- 
                GAR                31

ing the commission in the navy, he re-
ceived orders to embark in his profes-
sional capacity, on  board the brig of
Avar La Barquaize de St. Jean de Luz,
destined for Boston, Massachusetts.  He
sailed in  October, 1777, and arrived at
Plymouth early in January following.
   The love of liberty  and popular move-
ment throughoutFrance, Avhich brought
so  many young Frenchmen  to  the
United States, at the  period of our "De-
claration  of  Independence," had  no
small influence in governing the course
of Mr. Gardette.  He made a cruise of
four months, during  Avhich an engage-
ment occurred with  two British ships,
lasting three hours  and a half, and in
which there were  several killed and
wounded on board the vessel of which
he Avas the surgeon.  This seems to have
terminated his offiicial duties and con-
nection with the French navy, from
which he resigned, intending to  adopt
this country as  his  home.  When  the
French fleet and army arrived at New-
port, he was induced to visit that town,
and commence practice as a dentist, the
officers affording him considerable and
congenial occupation for  a short time.
He had received instructions in dental
operations (as part of his  profession of
naval surgeon) from  Mr. Le Roy de la
Faudiniere, a dentist  at Paris, then in
high repute.   He  had  also  provided
himself  with  the best works  extant
(Fauchard and  Bourdet) on the Teeth,
and with a limited set of dental  instru-
ments : stiU we scarcely think he could
have had any expectations of pursuing
the profession of dentist in this country,
at the time he left France.
   He returned to Boston from Newport,
and in the  autumn  of 1783 we find,
went  to  New  York.  He was there
when the American  army, under Gen.
Knox, took possession of the city—an
inactive but not indifferent spectator of
the great events of that interesting epoch
in American history.  His professional
success as  a dentist  in   New  York,
seems to have been comparatively small,
4                GAR

and his limited knoAvledge of the Eng-
lish language was,  as yet, a great  im-
pediment to making himself knoAvn or
appreciated as he desired.  It was not
untU the summer of 1784, and in Phila-
delphia, that  he attained  the  position
which determined his permanent resi-
dence in the United States.  The pleas-
ant and  successful character of his oc-
cupation  among the  best class of citi-
zens in Philadelphia, at the period when
Fourth street was its western boundary,
needs, perhaps, no stronger comment
than the fact, that he continued there
in  uninterrupted practice  as a dentist,
from 1784  to 1829—a period of forty-
five years! *

  *In Mr.  E.  Parmly's  "Appendix"  to
"Dentalogia," a Poem by Mr. S. Brown, we
find a republication of an obituary notice of
the late Dr. Edward Hudson, dentist, which
originally appeared in  a  city newspaper,
under the signature of "A Surgeon Dentist,"
and which, Mr. Parmly tells us, is from the
pen of Dr. S. S. Fitch.  We feel that it would
be  an act of injustice to the professional
character of James Gardette, to omit noticing
here, an article calculated to mislead the
reader and disguise the  truth; deriving im-
portance  chiefly,  it  is true, from having
obtained space in a volume which bears the
name of so distinguished a Dentist and esti-
mable a man as Mr. E. Parmly.
      Extract from the  "Appendix,""
  "When he  (Dr. Hudson) commenced his
practice here, he found the profession, gener-
ally, at a very low ebb—usually exercised by
mechanics.  Those grefct- principles which
elevate  dental  surgery  from an art  to a
science, were almost  entirely overlooked or
unknovjn.  To remove this mass of  rubbish,
to obliterate bitter and widely extended pre-
judices, was the task of Dr. Hudson," &c. &c.

  Other passages are scarcely less objection-
able on the score of impartial truth—for Dr.
S. S.  Fitch cannot well  have been ignorant
that when Dr. Hudson commenced his prac-
tice here in Philadelphia (about 1605-ti) he
had practiced but  little  anywhere else; and
that Mr. Gardette  had already, as a practi-
tioner of twenty  years'  standing, acquired
and deserved a high  reputation for science
and skill in his profession. Dr. Hudson him-
self was among those  who  acknowledged
and honored that reputation, and in cases of
31 
GAR
315
GAR
   Among  the eminent physicians  of
 that period, doctors  Wistar, Shippen,
 Kuhn  and Rush,  befriended  and en-
 couraged him by such aid and courtesy
 as were due to his  correct professional
 vieAvs, and his education and  manners
 as a gentleman—characteristics Avhich,
 we may safely conclude, Avere not very
 commonly found among the soi-disant
 dentists of our country at that remote day.
 Mr. Gardette devoted himself attentively
 to the pursuit and improvement of his
 profession, and acquired no unenviable
 reputation for knowledge and skill in its
 Ararious departments.
   The difficulties which the dentist then
 had to contend Avith were manifold: he
 Avas dependent chiefly  upon his OAvn
 judgment  and inventive genius for his
 success, and that, too, for the benefit of
 patients Avho, in many  instances, had
 but  little confidence in the operations of
 dentistry.   Instruments  Avere very de-
 fective, and  were  not  to  be had  in
 this country;  and  even the materials
 which Avere recognized  as appropriate
 for professional use, could  not be ob-
 tained short of Paris or London. Among
 the  improvements introduced  into the
 practice of dental surgery by Mr. Gar-
 dette, Avhether in the way  of instru-

doubt, in his  own early practice, he  sought
the benefit of Mr. Gardette's experience.  It
would have been but a slight effort of justice
 ments or operations, some few, at least,
 have been identified with his name; and
 Ave cannot  better  show  the  estimate
 placed upon them,  than by the follow-
 ing extract  from the minutes  of  the
 "John Scott Legacy for the  Encourage-
 ment of Useful  Inventions  in the Arts
 and Sciences."
   "1822.—To James  Gardette, dentist,
 for three mechanical  improvements in
 his profession, which are highly  com-
 mended  in Europe and in the United
 States; and  for  a simple  lever  instru-
 ment for the easy and expeditious ex-
 traction of teeth and stumps of teeth—
 aAvarded, a medal 'to  the  most deserv-
 ing,' and twenty dollars."
   The above "award of merit"  is the
 highest permitted by the will of John
 Scott,  Avho left the fund  (secured, we
 beheve, to the city in trust)  for the ob-
jects specified.
   This brief and (as regards the nature
 of  the "mechanical  improvements")
 unsatisfactory  account,  is  all  we are
 able to discover from the archives trans-
ferred  into the hands of the Franklin
Institute.   But we  think  we can enu-
merate  most  of  the inventions which
the profession owe  to  Mr. Gardette,
without injustice to others.
  He was the first dentist  Avho substi-
ted the use of elastic flat gold bands or
braces, in the place  of ligatures of silk
 and truth, to have excluded Mr. Gardette \ or fine gold wire for securing ^irtificial
 from the "mass of rubbish" which it became  teeth, Avhen attached to the living ones.*
 the task of Dr. Hudson to clear away; and
 to have extended the same just exception in
 reference to the "very low ebb" at which the
 profession stood in Philadelphia "when  Dr.
 Hudson commenced practice here."  The
 exalted professional position ascribed to Dr.
 Hudson, was justly his due at a later period
 of his life, when he attained merited distinc-
 tion, spite of accumulated "rubbish:" we are
 ready and glad to name  him as among the
 best educated and most successful dentists
 of modern times.
  Had Dr. S.  S. Fitch's article possessed  no
 other than the passing existence afforded  by
a newspaper, it had probably  never claimed
notice here, but been allowed all the honor
that belongs to undeserved and uncontradicted
misrepresentation.
   * Mr. L. Laforgue, a distinguished dentist
 of Paris, says, in his "Theorie el Pratique de
 I'Art du Dentiste," 2nd edition, 1810, p. 20:
   Translation—"The plan of maintaining
 artificial teeth  by means of  ligatures, is
 almost entirely done away with  by Gardette
 of Philadelphia: he secures artificial pieces
 without tying them, even when of limited ex-
 tent.  I have seen such, admirably secured,
 and  am  acquainted  with no dentist  who
 equals  him  in this beautiful  and valuable
 description of work."
  In  pp. 257—294, Laforgue refers to  the
 invention of gold mortise plates, for mounting
artificial teeth, as due to Gardette, of Phila-
delphia. 
GAR
316
GAR
   He invented the manner of mounting
natural teeth, which consists of a gold
mortise plate to which the teeth are se-
cured by means of gold pins, and Avhich
permits the tooth to rest  upon  the gum
instead of  the  gold plate.
   He was the  first to apply  the princi-
ple of suction or atmospheric pressure*
for the support of entire sets of artificial
teeth, dispensing with  the use of spiral
springs and the  endless contrivances
then in use, much to the inconvenience,
of those who Avore them.

  * It is a well  authenticated fact,  that Mr.
Gardette  successively  maintained  sets  of
artificial teeth for the upper jaw, on the prin-
ciple of atmospheric pressure, as  early  as
1800.
  We have heard him relate the  following
anecdote of the chance which led to this impor-
tant discovery.  He had  furnished, for the
second  time,  an entire set  of upper teeth
(enamelled hipp's) for  Mrs. A. M'C, and
owing to the short time the first set had last-
ed under the action of the saliva, he suggest-
ed that this set should be left much heavier.
In  order that  the tongue should become
accustomed to this increased bulk,  necessa-
rily contracting  the limits for its free  move-
ments,  the lady  was desired to keep the new
piece in her mouth as much as possible, dur-
ing a few weeks, but not expecting her to use
it for purposes of mastication or speech until
the usual springs should be attached  to  it.
Mr. G. promised,  at the end of the  period
named, to call and arrange the piece for per-
manent  use.
  It wasThen still the custom for the dentist
to attend at the  houses of his patients, and a
busy season caused months instead of weeks
to elapse, when Mr. Gardette called again;
with an apology for neglect, his plyers and
springs ready, he  requested Mrs. M'C. to
bring the artificial pieces.  She  replied,  "I
have them  in my mouth," much to  the
astonishment of her dentist, with whom she
had been conversing with her usual facility.
She stated that  at  first they were a  little
troublesome, but she had become accustomed
to them now, and they answered every pur-
pose as well without as with springs, and she
was glad to  dispense with them.  The prin-
ciple upon  which the  artificial piece thus
adhered to the gum at once  suggested itself
to  his  mind, and  suction, or  atmospheric
pressure, was henceforth depended upon, in
numerous cases of the same kind.
   Nor were his improvements  less im-
portant in the cure  of diseases to which
the teeth and  gums are liable; he was the
early advocate, if not the  first  Avho re-
cognized the wisdom, of affording space
for the healthy and good  arrangement
of the teeth, by judicious  extractions in
youth.   He believed, and  his long ex-
perience proved, that he  thus obviated
a great cause of decay, arising from lat-
eral pressure, when the  circle of the
jaAV is too narrow for the number and
size of the teeth, to permit their regular
and easy arrangement.
   He Avas one of the  earliest dentists
who adopted gold foil, instead of lead or
tin, as the best material for filhng teeth;
and related often that he had at one pe-
riod, prepared gold foU  for his oAvn use
from Dutch ducats, when no gold-beat-
er was to  be  found in this country, or
none, at any  rate,  who could  furnish
dentist's filling gold.
   As an operator  Mr. Gardette dis-
played  great  judgment, care and dex-
terity, AvhUe he exhibited no misplaced
or morbid  sensibility  inconsistent with
the best performance of his painful pro-
fessional duties.
   In the mechanical departments of his
art, his Avork evinced discrimination and
good taste, as well  as  originality:  his
artificial pieces, at a period when no aid
Avas to be  derived from  "dental labora-
tories,"  possessed  all the good Avork-
manship and finish which are the re-
sult of mechanical skiU and patient in-
dustry.
   His practice was characterized by the
one strong motive of good to his patient,
and not less by the  liberal  and benevo-
lent feelings which  should govern pro-
fessional life.
   His Avant of familiarity with the En-
glish language seems to have made him
diffident about publishing  his vieAVS or
improvements in his profession; and it
was not untU 1827 that he was induced
by his friend,  the late Dr. James Mease,
(a liberal  and warm friend of  the  arts
and sciences,) to  furnish  an  article for 
GAR               317               GAS
the Medical Recorder,  on the "Trans-
plantation of the Human Teeth :" the
first, and we believe, the only publica-
tion that bears his name.  This paper,
occupying seven pages of the periodical
referred  to, (January,  1827,) goes to
shoAV the  impracticabihty  and injudi-
cious character of the operation, and ex-
hibits a sound and sensible theory, with
some original suggestions.
   As a practicing dentist,  the useful-
ness of Mr. Gardette was much impaired
during the latter years of his life,  by
continued and severe suffering from the
gout.   He had long cherished a desire
to return to France and end his days in
his native country, but owing to unfor-
tunate investments and various  disap-
pointments, this favorite plan Avas not
accomplished untU the year 1829, at the
age of seventy-three, too late to realize
the pleasant anticipations he had so long
connected with such  a step. His native
Adllage  of Agen, which  he revisited,
Avas no longer what it  had seemed to
his longing heart, during an absence of
half a century: he  took up  his resi-
dence at Bordeaux, Avhere he died from
an attack of gout, in August, 1831.
   GARENGEOT.   The  inventor of
the key instrument for the extraction of
teeth.  See Key of Garengeot.
   GARGA'REON.  The uvula.
   GAR'GARISM.   Gargarisma; gar-
garismus;  from yapyapt£w, I wash the
mouth and throat.  A   gargle or Avash
for the mouth and throat.  Gargles
are employed in cases  of inflammation
and ulceration of the  mucous  mem-
brane of the mouth and fauces, tonsUs,
gums, and are made   of  astringents,
stimulants, sedatives, refrigerants, &c.
according to the indications of the case
which calls for their employment.
   GARGLE.  See Gargarism.
   Gargle,Bourdet's Antiscorbutic.
Take  sarsaparilla, esquine, and  shav-
ings of  guaiacum, each § ij ; infuse
them for twenty-four hours in one gal-
lon of myrtle water, with as much dis-
tilled plantain  water; then strain: put
         27*
in cinnamon water, § viij; strong spirit
of scurvy-grass, in which is dissolved
sal ammoniac, 3 i; tinct. myrrh, tinct.
aloes, each 3 ij ; and tincture of cloves,
 3 i. Incorporate weU together, for use.
   GARIOT, J. B. An eminent French
dentist, and author of a Treatise on the
Diseases of the Mouth, comprising the
Structure and Functions of the Mouth;
the History of its Diseases;  the Means
of Preserving it  in Beauty and Health,
and  Operations  appertaining  to  the
Dental Art.   Published, Paris, 1805.
The above  well written excellent work,
has  been translated into English, and
published in the third volume of the
Library part of the American Journal
of Dental Science. M. Gariot occupied
a high position  as a practitioner, was
dentist to the king of Spain, member of
the Royal College of Surgery at Madrid,
and  associate member of the Society of
Medicine at Paris.
   Gariot's Dentifrice Powders.—
The foUowing are  his formulae : Tooth
powder, No. 1. 1$.—Prepared terra sig-
Ulata,  §  vi; cream tartar, § ij ; cloves,
 9 i.  No.  2. 1$.—Pumice-stone, § vi;
cream tartar, § ij; carmine lac, § i; cin-
namon, 3 ij. No. 3.1$.—Dragon's blood,
 | i; red  coral, § iv; fine carmine, 3 ss;
orange peel, 3 ij. These are to be mixed
and  reduced to an impalpable powder.
   Gariot's Elixir for the Mouth.
1$.—Brandy, spirituous vulnerary water,
each 3 ij ;  essential oil of mint, gtt. iv.
   Gariot's Odontalgic Elixir. 1$.—
Cloves,  opium,  cinnamon,  each  3 ij;
pyre thrum, 3 i;  resin, § ss; brandy,
 § viiJ-
   Gariot's Elixir for the Gums.—
1$.—Vulnerary water,  § viij;  spirit of
scurvy grass, § i; essential oil of cloves,
gtt.iv.
  GARLIC.  See Allium.
  Garlic,  Hedge.   Stinking  ,hedg«
mustard.
  GAROSMUM.  The stinking orach.
  GARROPHYLLUS.   The  Indian
clove tree.
  GAS.  An aeriform fluid. Any per- 
GAS
318
GAU
manently elastic fluid, whether simple
or compound, except the atmosphere.
  Gas, Ammoniacal.   See Ammonia.
  Gas, Azotic  Nitrogen.
  Gas, Carbonic Acid. Carbonic acid.
  Gas, Heavy Carbonated  Hydro-
gen.  Carbureted hydrogen.
  Gas, Hepatic. Sulphureted hydro-
gen gas.
  GASEOUS OXYD OF CARBON.
Carbonic oxyd.
  GASOM'ETER. A reservoir for gas.
  GASTER.  raattjp.  The abdomen.
Also, the stomach.
  GASTRAL'GIA. From yaattjp, and
aXyos, pain.  Cardialgia.
  GASTRIC. Gastricus; from yantrjp,
the stomach. Pertaining to the stomach.
  Gastric Arteries.   The gastro-epi-
pbica dextra, gastro-epipbica  sinistra,
and the coronaria ventriculi.   The first
is a branch  of the hepatic artery; the
second, a branch of the splenic, and
the third of the cceliac.
  Gastric Fever. See Febris Gastrica.
  Gastric Juice.  The fluid secreted
by the lining or mucous  membrane of
the stomach.
  Gastric   Nerves.   The  terminal
branches of the pneumogastric and sym-
pathetic nerves.
   Gastric  Plexus.  A  nervous net-
work, derived from the solar plexus.
   GASTRI'TIS.    From yattyp, the
stomach, and itis, signifying inflamma-
tion.  Inflammation  of the stomach.
   GASTRO-ARTHRITIS.  Gout.
   GASTRO-BRONCHITIS.  Catarr-
hal fever.
   GASTROBRO'SIS.   From yaatrjp,
the stomach, and Ppioms, the act of gnaw-
ing.  Perforation of the stomach.
   GASTROCE'LE. From yastrjp, the
stomach, and x^x*,  a tumor.   Hernia,
formed by a protrusion of the stomach
through the superior part of the linea alba.
   GASTROCNE'MII.   From yaatnp,
the beUy, and xvypt;, the leg. The name
of two large muscles on the  posterior
part of the leg.
   GASTRODID YMUS.  From y*a-
trjp, the belly, and S^vfios, a twin.  A
monstrosity, consisting of twins united
by the abdomen.
  GASTROENTERITIS. Froinyai-
tr\p, the stomach, evtepov, an intestine,
and itis, signifying  inflammation.  In-
flammation of the stomach  and intes-
tines.
  GASTRO-EPIPLOIC.  From yaa-
ttjp,  the  stomach,  and ertittxoov,  the
epiploon.   Relating to the stomach and
epiploon or omentum.
  Gastro-Epiploic Arteries.  The
gastro-epiploica dextra, and the gastro-
epiploica  sinistra, derived from the  he-
patic and  splenic arteries.
  Gastro-Epiploic Ganglions. The
lymphatic glands situated between  the
anterior laminae of the great omentum.
  Gastro-Hepatic  From yaatqp,  the
stomach,  and yrtap, the liver.   Belong-
ing to the stomach and hver.
  Gastro-Phkenic  From yaatvp,  the
stomach,  and $peves, the diaphragm. Be-
longing to the stomach and diaphragm,
as the gastro-phrenic ligament.
  GASTRO-MALA'CIA. Gastro-ma-
laxia;  from yaat^p, the  stomach, and
fiaXaxos, soft.  Softening of the stomach.
  GASTROP ATH Y.   Gastropathia;
from yaattjp, the stomach, and  rtotfoj,
disease.   A  morbid  condition of  the
stomach.
  GASTRO'RAPHY.     Gaslrorrha-
phia;  from yaatrip, the stomach,  and
pa<3>»7, a suture.   The union, by suture,
of wounds of the abdomen.
  GA^TRORRHA'GIA.   Discharge
of blood from the stomach.  Hasmate-
mesis.
  GASTRORRHCEA.  Fromyatfrw,
the stomach, and paw, I Aoav.   Exces-
sive secretion of mucus from  the mu-
cous membrane of the stomach.
  GASTRO'SES.  A generic name for
diseases of the stomach.
  GASTROTOMY.   From  ycwrr,,,
the stomach, and tefiva, to cut.   The
operation of opening the stomach or ab-
domen.
   GAUCHIR.  A  word apphed by 
GEM               319               GEN
French  dentists  to artificial pieces, or
dental substitutes which have been awk-
Avardly  constructed, or  which  have
shrunk or warped, and lost their proper
adaptation.
  GAULTHE'RIA.   Gaultheria pro-
cumbens.  Mountain tea; wintergreen;
patridge berry.
  GAUGE PLATE.   In the mechani-
cal laboratory of  the dentist, an instru-
ment for measuring the thickness of
plate employed for bases for artificial
teeth, clasps  and backings.  See Gold,
manner of making it into plate.
  GAZ.  Gas.
  GEHLER, J.  Observations  on the
Teeth of Third Dentition, by.  Leipsic.
  GEL'ATINE.  Gelatina, jelly.  A
peculiar animal substance, obtained by
boiling  the skins, cellular tissue, bones,
&c. of animals,  in water.  Glue is an
impure form  of gelatine.
  GELATI'NOUS.  Of the nature of
gelatine.
  GELA'TIO.  From gelo, to freeze.
Freezing, congelation.    In Pathology,
rigidity of the body, as in catalepsy.
  GELLY, or JELLY. A soft tremu-
lous, transparent substance,  obtained
from animal and vegetable matters.
  GELU.  Gelly.
  GEMELLUS. Double, twin.  One
of tAvo children produced at a birth.  In
Anatomy, muscles disposed in  pairs.
See Gemini Musculi.
  GEMINI.   Twins.    In  Anatomy,
applied to muscles disposed in pairs.
  Gemini Musculi. Gemelli.  A mus-
cle of the thigh, consisting of two por-
tions, united by a tendinous and fleshy
membrane.
  GEM'MA.  A gem. In  Surgery,
a granulation. In Botany, a bud on the
stem of a plant.
  Gemma Oculi.  The crystalhne lens.
  GEMMIPAROUS.  From gemma,
a bud, and pario, to produce.  Plants
which produce  buds, and  zoophytes,
Avhich propagate by a hke process.
  GEMMULE.   The  terminal bud of
the plumula of germinating seeds.
  GE'NA.  The cheek.
  GENCIVES.   See Gingivae.
  GENERAL  ANATOMY.    The
anatomy of the textures, or more prop-
erly, the tissues  of which the body is
composed, as  distinguished  from des-
criptive anatomy, which consists of a
description of the various organs formed
by these tissues.
  GENERATION.  Generatio; from
yeivouai, to beget.   The aggregate vital
functions concerned in the production
of organized  beings, comprehending,
conception, pregnancy, parturition and
lactation.
  Generation, Organs of. In women
they are divided into external and inter-
nal.  The external are, the mons veneris,
the labia, the  clitwis, the nymphoz, and
the perinceum; the internal, consist of
vagina, the uterus, the  Falbpian tubes,
and the ovario. In man, they consist of
the penis,  testkks, vcsiculoz  seminales,
vasa deferentia, and prostrate gbnd.
  GENE'RIC.   Genericus.    Pertain-
ing to a genus or kind.
  GENET'ICA.   From yevetis, origin.
Diseases of the sexual functions.
  GE'NIAL.  Relating to the chin.
  GENI'O-GLOSSUS.   Genio-hyo-
glossus.   From  ysveiov, the  chin, and
yXaaoa, the tongue.  A muscle extend-
ing  from  the  genian apophysis to the
base of the os hyoides, and to the root,
middle, and extremity of the tongue.
  Genio-Hyoideus.  Fromyeveiov, the
chin, and voeiSqs,  the  os hyoides.  A
long, thin, and fleshy  muscle, extend-
ing from  the  genian apophysis  to the
base of the os hyoides.
  Genio-Pharynge'us.  From yeveiov,
the chin, and <j>apvyi, the pharynx. Con-
strictor pharyngis superior.
  GENISTA. The name of  a  genus
of plants.  The spartium scoparium.
  Genista Spino'sa Indica.   An In-
dian tree.
  Genista Tinctoria.   The  dyer's
broom.
  GENITAL.  Genitalis.   Relating
to generation. 
GER              320              GER
   Genital  Organs.   The  organs  of
generation.
   GENITU'RA.    The  male seed.
Also, the genitive organs of the male or
female.
   GENLIS, Z. C.   Programme and
Observations upon Third Dentition, by.
Leipsic, 1786.
   GENONU'SI.  From yevos, sex, and
vosos, disease.  Sexual diseases.
   GENOS.  Sex.
   GENSANG.  Panax quinquefolium.
Ginseng.
   GENTIAN.  See  Gentiana  Lutea.
   GENTIA'NA.   The  name of a ge-
nus of plants.  Gentiana lutea.
   Gentiana Alba.  White gentian.
   Gentiana Cachenlaguen.   Chiro-
nia chUensis.   A species of  gentian
groAving in Chili.
   Gentiana Catesboji.  Blue gentian.
   Gentiana Centaurium.  Chironia
centaurium.
   Gentiana Chirayita.  This species
is  a native of India, and is employed as
a tonic, febrifuge, and alterative.
   Gentiana Lutea.   Gentiana rubra.
The officinal gentian.
   Gentiana Major.   Gentiana lutea,
   GENTIANINE. An alkali, obtained
from gentian.
   GENTI'LII  MORBI.  Hereditary
diseases.
   GENU.   The knee joint.
   GENUGRA.   Gout in the knee.
   GENUS. An assemblage of objects
possessing characters common to each
other.
   GEOFFROY,  SAINT-HILAIRE.
The Dental System  of Mammiferous
Animals and Birds, by.  Paris, 1824.
   GEOFFRiE'A  INERMIS.    Cab-
bage tree.   Cabbage bark tree.
   GEOPH'AGISM.   From  yn, earth,
and $aya, I eat.  The  practice of dirt-
eating.
   GERA'NIUM.    From  yEpavoj,  a
crane,  because its pistils resemble the
bill of a crane.  The crane's-bill.
   Geranium Moscha'tum.  Erodium
moschatum.  A European plant.     '
   Geranium Robertia'num,.  Stinking
 crane's-bUl.
   GERAULDY.  The Art of Preserv-
 ing the Teeth, by.  Paris, 1737.
   Gerauldy's Absorbent  Powder
 for the Teeth.  1$.—Coral, mother of
 pearl, crabs'-eyes, diaphoretic antimony,
 each § iv.  Pulverize and pass through
 a fine sieve, then porphyrise with a little
 plantain  water, afterwards form the
 mass into little balls, and dry them in
 the shade; next powder them and pass
 through a sieve as before, when it should
 be boxed or bottled for use.
   Gerauldy's Paste for the Teeth.
 Take, of the above powder, lb i; dra-
 gon's blood finely pulverized,  § i; put
 them in a mortar of marble or earthen-
 ware, mix with a  pound of Narbonne
 honey, incorporate the whole into the
 consistence of a thick syrup, with four
 ounces of the sugar of fresh kermes,
 eight ounces  of  plantain water, and
 three ounces of water of orange flowers,
 and mix  with a spatula of ivory or sil-
 ver.   Let it  remain for fifteen days,
 shaking it from time to time, then add
 a sufficient quantity of honey to make
 it of a proper  consistence.  It may now
 be put in small pots for use.
   GERM.  Thegermen; the rudiment
 of a being.  Blastema.
   Germ, Dental. A tooth papula, or
 pulp.
  GERBAUX.   A Practical Treatise
 on the most  frequent Diseases of the
 Mouth and Teeth, especially on the
 Accidents of First Dentition, &c. by.
 London, 1823.
  GERMANDER.  See Teucrium.
  GERMEN.  A  germ.
  GERMINAL CELL.  A cytoblast.
  GERMINATION.    Germinatio.-
 In Botany, the act of sprouting.  The
 first development of a seed.
  GEROCO'MIA.   From ytpaj old
 age, and xo/xea, to be concerned about.
That part of hygiene which relates to the
health of the aged.
  GEROCOMI'UM.  An hospital for
old persons. 
GIM
321
GLA
  GERONTOX'ON.  A bow-shaped
opacity around the cornea, occuring in
aged persons.
  GERSA. Plumbi subcarbonas. White
lead.
  GESTATION.  Gestatio; from ges-
ture, to carry.   The period,  during
which the pregnant female carries the
fetus in her womb.   Also, passive ex-
ercise, such as swinging, riding in a car-
riage, &c.
  GESTICULATION.   The  act  of
making many movements or gestures,
a symptom exhibited in many diseases.
  GEUM.  The name of a genus  of
plants.
  Geum  Riva'le.   Water avens, the
root of which is astringent.
  Geum Urba'num.   The herb bennet,
or common avens.
  Geum Virginia'num.  White avens.
Evan root.
  GEUM A.  Taste.
  GEUSION'OSI.  From yevais, taste,
and voaos, disease. Diseases of the func-
tion or organ of taste.
  GEUSIS.  Taste.
  GIBBOSI'TAS.   See  Gibbosity.
  GIBBOSITY.   Gibbositas;  from
gibbus, a hunch or swelling on the back.
A  curvature  and protuberance of the
spine.
  GIBBUS.  A hunch or swelling on
the back.
  GIDDINESS.  Vertigo.
  GILEAD,  BALM OF.   Amyris
opabalsamum.
  GIINZ.  Dissertation  on  the Fetor
of the Gums, and Observations on Ul-
cerated Teeth, by. Leipsic, 1753.
  GILLE'NIA.  The name of a genus
of plants.  The gillenia trifohata.
  Gillenia Trifolia'ta.  Indian phy-
sic.  Western drop-wort.  Ipecac.
  GILLIFLOWER.  Dianthus cary-
ophyllus.  Clove pink.
  GIMBERNAT'S  LIGAMENT.—
The lower border of the aponeurosis,
stretched from the anterior and superior
spinous process of the Uium and crest
of the os pubis.
  GIN.  Geneva.  A spirit distilled
from corn and juniper berries.
  GINGER.  Zingiber.
  Ginger  Beer.  An  effervescing
beverage,obtained by fermenting ginger,
cream of tartar and sugar with yeast.
  Ginger, Wild.  Asarum canadense.
  GINGIBRA'CHIUM.   From gin-
giva}, the gums, and brachium, the arm.
Scurvy is caUed so, because the  gums
and arms are the parts principally  affect-
ed by it.
  GINGIVAE.  The gums.
  GING'LYMOID.   Ginglymoideus;
from ytyya-iyios, a ginglymus, and eiSos,
resemblance.  A hinge-joint—a species
of diarthrodial articulation.
  GIN'GLYMUS.  A hinge-joint.
  GINSENG.  Panax quinquefolium.
  GILLES,ARNAULD.  The  Flow-
er of Remedies against the Tooth-ache,
by.  Paris, 1622.
  GIRAUD, J.   The Good Mother, or
a Treatise on the Means of Procuring
for ChUdren, a Strong and Lasting Con-
stitution, particularly by a happy teeth-
ing, by.  Brunswick, 1790.
  GIRMIR.  Tartar.
  GLABER.  Glabrous;  smooth.
  GLACIES.  Ice.
  GLADIATE.   Ensiform.  Shaped
like a sword.
  GLAMA.   The sordes of the  eye.
  GLAND.   Gbndula;  from  ghns,
an  acorn.  In Anatomy, an organ des-
tined for  the secretion  or alteration of
some peculiar fluid. It is composed of
blood vessels, nerves  and  absorbents,
and may consist of a follkulus, or small
bag, at the termination of a duct; lacunu,
or sac opening into the passage; crypta,
as in the  large intestines and  kidneys,
or acinus, which  is a round  body not
regularly invested  with a membrane, as
is  seen  in the structure of the  liver,
which is  principaUy made up of acini.
Glands are divided into simple,   com-
pound, congbbate, and congbmerate.
A simple gland is a small hollow foUicle,
with an excretory  duct.  The mucous
glands of the tongue, fauces, nose, intes- 
GLA
322
GLE
tines, urinary bladder, and the sebaceous
glands of the ear, &c, belong to this class.
A compound gland is made up of a num-
ber of simple glands, the excretory ducts
of Avhich unite into one common duct. A
conglobate, is a gland, into which lym-
phatic vessels enter and go out. The mes-
enteric and lumbar glands are of this de-
scription. A conglomerate gland is form-
ed of many simple glands, and the excre-
tory ducts of Avhich open into one com-
mon duct, as the parotid,  salival and
pancreatic.
  GLANDERS.   See Equina.
  GLANDIFORM.  Having the form
or texture of a gland.
  GLANDIUM.  A kernel in the flesh.
  GLANDULA.   A little gland.
  Glandula Bartholiniana.   The
sublingual gland.
  Glandula Basilaris.  The pituary
gland.
  Glandula Innominata Galeni. The
lachrymal gland.
  Glandula Pinealis.   The  pineal
gland.
  Glandula Riviniana.  The sublin-
gual gland.
  Glandula Salivalis Abdominis.—
The pancrease.
  Glandula Thyreoidea.  The thy-
roid gland.
  GLANDULZE   ARTICULARES.
The synovial glands.
  Glandule Brunneri.   Brunner's
glands.
  Glandule Cervicis  Uteri.  Na-
both's glands.
  Glandulje  Durje   Matris.  See
Glandulae Pacchioni.
  Glandule Intestinales.   Peyer's
glands.
  Glandule Myrtiformes.  Carun-
culae myrtiformes.
  Glandulje Odoriferje.    A  num-
ber of very small glands around the cor-
ona of the penis and clitoris.  They are
also called Tyson's glands.
  Glandulje Pacchio'ni.  A number
of smaU, round, whitish granulations,
clustered along the margin of the longi-
 tudinal fissure of the hemispheres, be-
 neath the dura mater.  In infancy they
 do not exist.
   Glandule  Plexiformis.   Peyer's
 glands.
   Glandulje  Sebaceae Ciliares. The
 meibomian glands.
   Glandulje Vasculosje.  Conglom-
 erate glands.
   GLAND'ULAR. Glandubsus. Hav-
 ing the form, structure, function, or ap-
 pearance of glands.
   GLANS.  A gland.  Also, an acorn.
   Glans  Clitoridis.  The extremity
 of the clitoris.
   Glans Jq.vis.  The chestnut.
   Glans Penis.  The extremity of the
 penis.
   GLARE A.   Gravel.
   GLASS.  Vitrum.
   Glass  of  Antimony.  Antimonii
 vitrum.
   GLAUBER'S SALT.   Sulphate of
 soda.
  GLAUBRECT.  Analytic Disserta-
 tion on the Tooth-ache, and its various
 remedies,  especially the magnetic, by.
 Argent, 1766.
  GLAUCE'DO.  See Glaucoma.
  GLAUCO'MA.  From yXavxos, sea-
 green.   Dimness of vision from opacity
 of the vitreous humor.  The name has,
 also, been applied to cataract.
  GLAUCOSIS.  Glaucoma.
  GLECHO'MA HEDERA'CEA.-
 Ground-ivy, or gill.
  GLE'CHON.   Mentha pulegium.
 Pennyroyal.
  GLECHONPTIS.  Wine impreg-
 nated with pennyroyal.
  GLEET.  A mucous discharge from
 the urethra.
  GLE'NE.  rx^vrj.  The pupil of the
 eye.  Also, a shallow cavity in a bone
 for receiving the articular extremity of
 another bone.
  GLENOID.   Gkne;  from  yXrjvri,
 the pupil,  and  eibos, resemblance.  A
 shallow articular cavity in a bone, as the
glenoid cavity of the scapula, and of the
 temporal bone. 
GLO
323
GLU
   Glenoid Ligament.  A  fibro-carti-
 lagenous ring which surrounds and in-
 creases the depth of the glenoid cavity
 of the scapula, formed, apparently, by
 an expansion of the  long head of the
 biceps flexor cubiti muscle.
   GLI'RES.   From glis, a dormouse.
 The name given by Linnaeus to the tribe
 rodentia.
   GLISCHROCH'OLOS. From yxia-
 Xpos, viscid,  and xoXy, bile.  BUicus,
 viscid excrement.
   GLISOMAR'GO.   Chalk.
   GLOBULA'RIA ALYPUM.  The
 leaves of this  plant are  possessed of
 cathartic properties.
   GLOB'ULE.  Gbbulus.  A minute
 sphere or globe.
   Globules Ot the  Blood.  Blood
 corpuscles.  Blood  disks.  Small glob-
 ular bodies observed in the blood when
 examined with a  microscope.  They
 are circular in mammalia and elliptical
 in birds and reptiles.
   GLOB'ULIN.  A  pecuhar albumi-
 nous principle which  constitutes  the
 nuclei of the globules of red blood.
   GLOBUS. AglobeorbaU.
   Globus Hystericus.   A sensation
 experienced by hysterical persons, as if
 a round body Avere rising from the ab-
 domen to the larynx.
  Globus  Martialis.   Ferri potassio
 tartras.
   GLOMER.  A conglomerate gland.
   GLOM'ERATE.  Gbmeratus.  In
 Anatomy, a gland having no  cavity, but
 furnished  with an  excretory duct, as
 the lachrymal  and mammary glands
 In Botany, congregated.
   GLOSSA. From yJiwaua, and yXatta,
 the tongue.  The tongue.
   GLOSSAGRA.  From yXaaaa,  the
tongue, and  aypa, a seizure.  Severe
pain of the tongue.
  GLOSSALGIA.  Glossagra.
  GLOSSANTHRAX. FromyUwa,
the tongue, and avQpal,  a carbuncle.  A
carbuncle of the tongue.
  GLOSSIANUS. The Ungual muscle.
  GLOSSITIS.   From  yjiwwa, the
 tongue, and itis, signifying inflamma-
 tion.  Inflammation of the tongue.
   GLOSSOCAT'OCHOS. Fromy?io<j-
 ua, the tongue, and  xatexa,  I arrest.
 An  instrument  for  depressing  the
 tongue.
   GLOSSOCE'LE.  From yXaesa, the
 tongue, and xqXr;, a tumor.  Protrusion
 of the tongue.
   GLOSSO'COMA. Retraction of the
 tongue.
   GLOSSO-EPIGLOTTIS.  Belong-
 ing to the tongue, and epiglottis.
   GLOSSOG'RAPHY.    Gbssogra-
 phia ; from yXaoaa, the tongue, and ypa-
 tyrj, a description.  A description of the
 tongue.
   GLOSSOL'OGY.  Glossologia; from
 yXaaaa, the tongue, and xoyos, a treatise.
 A treatise on  the tongue.  The term,
 however, is usually used to designate a
 vocabulary, or dictionary, explanatory
 of obscure,  antiquated, or local words.
   GLOSSOL'YSIS.   Glossoplegia ;—
 from yXaaaa, the tongue, and Xvais, solu-
 tion.   Paralysis of the tongue.
   GLOSSOMANTI'A.   From yXaaaa,
 the  tongue,   and  fiavteia, divination.
 Prognosis from the appearance and con-
 dition of the tongue.
   GLOSSON'CUS.  From yXaoaa, the
 tongue, and oyxos, a  tumor.  A swell-
 ing of, or tumor on, the tongue.
   GLOSSO-PHARYNGEUS.   Be-
 longing to the tongue and pharynx;,  as
 the glosso-pharyngeal nerves and mus-
 cles.
   GLOSSOPLE'GIA.   SeeGlossoly-
 sis.
   GLOSSOT'OMY. Glossotomia; from
 yxagaa, the tongue, and tepveiv,  to cut.
 Excision, or dissection of the tongue.
   GLOTTA.  Glossa.  Tongue.
   GLOTTIS. Fromyxatta, the tongue.
 A triangular opening at the upper part
 of the larynx, bounded on  the sides by
 the chordae vocales and arytenoid carti-
 lages, and behind by  the  arytenoideus
muscle.
  GLUCO'SE.  From yxvxvs,  sweet.
Grape sugar.   Diabetic or starch sugar. 
               GLY

The sugar found  in  acid fruits and
plants.
  GLUCO'SURIA.   Diabetes  melli-
tus.
  GLUE.   Inspissated jelly from the
parings of hides.
  GLU'ME.   Gluma.  The husk; the
calyx of grasses, and the envelops of the
flowers of these plants.
  GLUMO'SE.   Flowers  furnished
with a calyx, or glume,  like those of the
gramineae, or grasses.
  GLUMEL'LE.  Glumella.  A little
glume, or calyx.
  GLUTEUS. See Gluteus.
  GLUTEAL. Belonging to the but-
tocks.
  Gluteal Artery.   A  continuation
of the posterior internal iliac artery.
  Gluteal Nerve.  A branch of the
lumbo-sacral nerve.
  GLUTEN.   A peculiar  substance
found in wheat and other grains, pos-
sessing glutinous properties.   Paste.
  Gluten, Animal.   Gelatine.
  Gluten, Vegetable.   See Gluten.
  GLUTE'US. From yXovtos, the but-
tocks.  A name given to muscles, arte-
ries, nerves, &c. of the  buttocks.
  Gluteus Maximus.  A thick, fleshy
muscle of a quadrangular  shape, form-
ing the convexity of the buttocks.
  Gluteus  Medius.   A  thick,  dense
muscle situated in  front and partly be-
neath the gluteus maximus.
  Gluteus Minimus.   A radiated mus-
cle, situated beneath the  gluteus me-
dius.
  GLUTIA.   The buttocks, or nates.
Also, the corpora quaragemina.
  GLUTINE.  Vegetable albumen.
  GLUTINOUS.  Glutinosus.  Adhe-
sive.   Sticky.
  GLUTTONY.  Bulimia.  Exces-
sive appetite.
  GLU'TUS.   The buttock.
  GLYCAS'MA.  From y%vxvs, sweet.
A sweet, medicated wine.
  GLY'CERINE. From yXvxvs, sweet.
The sweet principle of  the various oUs.
  GLYCYRRHI'ZA.  From yxvxvs,
4                GOB

 sweet, and pi£a, a root.  The name of a
 genus of plants.  Liquorice.
   Glycyrrhiza  Glabra.  The offi-
 cinal liquorice.
   GLYCYRRHI'ZINE.  The sugar of
 liquorice.
   GLYSTER.   An enema.
   GNAPHALIUM POLYCEPH'A-
 LUM.  Sweet-scented life everlasting.
   GNATHITIS.  From  yvados,  the
 cheek, the jaw.  Inflammation of  the
 cheek or upper jaw.
   GNATHOPLE'GIA.  From yva0o5,
 and TiXrfyri, a  stroke.  Paralysis of  the
 cheek.
   GNATHORRHAG'IA. From yva-
 6os, and p^yvv/tw, to burst forth.  Hem-
 orrhage from the internal surface of  the
 cheek.
   GNATHOSPASMUS.   From y*a-
 0o$ and  CTtao-pos, spasm.  A spasmodic
 contraction of the muscles of the lower
 jaw.
   GODFREY'S CORDIAL.  An  an-
 odyne nostrum.
   GOBLIN,  D.  J.    Manual of  the
 Dentist, to be used for  Examinations,
 or a Treatise on Dental Surgery, con-
 sidered  in its Anatomical, Physiologi-
 cal, Hygienic and  Pathological  Rela-
 tions, by.   Paris, 1827.
   Goblin's Powders for the Teeth.
 1.  Take, calcined alum, § i; Florentine
 orris in poAvder, § iij ; cream of tartar,
 | ij; pulverized  cochineal,  3 ss;  es-
 sence of cloves, gtt. iv. Mix.  2. Take,
 porphyrised red coral, fine cinnamon,
 a  a § ij. 3. Take, carbonate of magnesia,
 | ss; quaroxalate of wood sorrel, 3 ss;
 pulverized red coral, § ijessenceofmint,
 gtt. iv. Mix.   4. Tonic powder.—Take.
 finely pulverized  cinnamon,  § ss; cin-
 chona, orange, in fine powder, a a.  § i;
 cloves, in powder, gr. x. Mix. 5. Take,
 red cinchona, § i; pulverized charcoal,
 § i. Mix, and suitably aromatise.
   Goblin's  Pastes for the  Mouth.
 1.  Take, catechu,  3 ij;  coral,  3 iv;
 sugar, 3 iij; essence of cinnamon,  gtt.
 x.  MucUage a  sufficient quantity to
 form into a paste.  2. Take, prepared
32 
GOL
325
GOL
charcoal, sugar, a  a,  3 i; essence  of
citron, gtt. iv.  Mucilage, g. s.
  GOITRE.  Bronchocele.
  GOLD.  Aurum.  The most valuable
being not more than from fifteen to seven-
teen carats fine, and sometimes it is re-
duced even to fourteen.  When not above
these standards of fineness, the buccal
of metals, and found either in its native ! secretions not only corrode and discolor
state, or  combined with  silver, copper I it, but it imparts an exceedingly disa-
or iron.  It  is of a yellow  color, very ; greeable taste to the mouth.  The plate
brilliant,  and possessed of great density, [which is to serve as a basis for artificial
ductility and maUeabUity.
teeth  should never  be  reduced below
  In Therapeutics, various preparations : twenty carats, and as that for the upper
of it are  used, and in Dental Surgery,' jaw does not require to be more than
                                      one-third or one-half as thick as that for
                                      the lower, the gold for the latter should
                                      be a httle finer than  that employed  for
                                      the  former,  as  it is necessary that it
                                     should be more maUeable.  The follow-
                                     ing standards of fineness, may be regard-
                                     ed as the best that can  be  adopted  for
                                     gold to be used in connection with arti-
                                     ficial teeth.
                                       Plate  for  the  upper jaw, twenty
                                      carats;  for the lower twenty-one, and
                                     for  clasps and wire for spiral  springs,
                                     eighteen.  In reducing perfectly pure,
                                     or  twenty-four  carat gold,  to  these
                                     standards, the following are the proper
                                     proportions of aUoy to be employed :
                                       1, For  twenty  carat  gold;  take  20
                                     dwts. pure gold, 3 dWts. fine copper,
                                     and 1 dwt. silver.
                                       2. For twenty-one carat gold;  take
                                     21 dwts. pure gold, 2 dwts. fine copper,
                                     and 1 dwt. silver.
                                       3. For eighteen  carat gold; take  18
                                     dwts. pure gold, 5 dwts. best copper,
                                     and 1 dwt. silver.
                                       The  gold  should be first melted in a
                                     clean crucible, in the manner to be here-
                                     after described, and as soon as it has be-
                                     come thoroughly fused, the  silver  and
                                     then the copper should be thrown in, with
                                     two or three small lumps of sub-borate
                                     of soda.  After keeping  the Avhole in a
                                     fused state for some five or ten minutes,
                                     it maybe poured into an ingot mould of
                                     the proper size, previously warmed and
                                     thoroughly oiled.   If the gold  cracks
                                     during  the process of hammering or
                                     rolling,  it should again be melted, and
                                    a few small pieces of sub-borate of soda,
                                    with a httle muriate of ammonia thrown
  it is  very extensively employed, both
  for filling teeth, and in the construction
  of  dental  substitutes,  and  artificial
  palates and  obturators.  With the  ex-
  ception of platina, it is the  only metal
  that can be placed in the mouth with
  impunity.  When used for filling teeth,
  it should be pure,  but  for other  dental
  purposes, it should  contain  a  small
  quantity  of alloy.
   Gold, Alloying of. Gold in an un-
  alloyed or pure state, is too soft to serve
 as a basis or support for artificial teeth,
 and, consequently, it has been found ne-
 cessary to combine with  it some other
 metal or metals to increase its elasticity.
 Silver and copper  are  the alloys most
 frequently employed.   Some prefer the
 former, for the reason as is erroneously
 supposed, that it does  not increase as
 much as  does  the latter, the liability of
 gold to oxydize. But gold, when alloyed
 Avith copper, unless reduced altogether
 too much for dental purposes, will resist
 the action of acids as effeetuaUy as when
 aUoyed with silver,  and  the  former
 renders it much harder  than  the  latter.
 Besides, it renders the  gold susceptible
 of a much higher and more beautiful
 finish.  If, therefore,  but one of these
 metals be used, copper  may be regard-
 ed as preferable to silver, but the author
 is of opinion, that  two or three parts
 of the former, and one of the latter, con-
 stitutes a better alloy for gold, which is
 to be used as a basis for artificial  teeth,
 than either, separately from the other.
  The gold  employed  in  mechanical
 dentistry by most  practitioners, is  alto-
gether  too impure for  the purpose, it
     28 
GOL
326
GOL
in.   In  five or ten minutes it  may be
again cast into an ingot.
  When scraps  and filings are to be
converted into  plate, they should first
be refined in the manner as described in
another place,  and afterwards properly
alloyed. This may also be necessary Avith
all gold, the quahty or fineness of Avhich
is not known, but with national coins
having  a known fixed standard,  this
wiU not be necessary, unless  they are
below twenty-one  or  twenty  carats.
When they are above  these standards
of fineness, a sufficient  amount of alloy
may be added to reduce them to the one
required.
  When several  coins of different  de-
grees of fineness are to be melted at the
same time, the mean  carat and aggre-
gate weight of the gold should be ascer-
tained, and if it be above the  standard
required a  sufficient quantity  of aUoy
should be added to reduce it, but if it be
below it, it should be  refined untU  it
comes up to it.
  The foUoAving  is the manner adopted
by  Dr. Joseph Lee, of Camden, S. C. in
alloying gold for bases and clasps for
artificial teeth: to  twenty British gold
sovereigns add one dollar of old Spanish
silver.  "This," says Dr. L., "makes a
tough alloy of a fine color, unalterable
in the mouth."  He also  states that he
uses the same alloy for clasps, "as it  is
of great importance to have every part,
as near as possible, of the same fineness,
to avoid galvanic action.
  "When I use  the gold of our South
Carohna  mines,  I   alloy  with  four
penny-weights of sUver coin and two of
pure copper to the ounce of gold.  In
some of our mines there is a slight alloy
of bismuth which renders the gold  brit-
tle and of the color of dirty brass.  This
is easily oxydized by a charge  of  salt-
petre, and afterwards melting in a clear
crucible with  borax.   It  is useless  to
pour the gold into the ingot  while it
shows a dirty surface in the crucible  as
it wUl crack under the hammer."
   Gold Foil, Dentists.  Aurumfolia-
tum.  Gold leaf.  The gold foil, or leaf,
employed by dentists for filling teeth, is
much thicker than that ordinarily used,
and when properly prepared, constitutes
the best material that can be employed
for this purpose.  The gold, however,
should be pure, and the leaves thin and
well annealed previously to being used.
Although gold has been employed since
the early part of the eighteenth century
for filling teeth, it  was not until about
the year 1800, that its use became com-
mon among dentists, owing, no  doubt,
to the fact, that the manufacture of foil
had not, previously to this period, been
brought to a sufficient degree of perfec-
tion to render it practicable to fiU a very
large or badly shaped cavity in a tooth
with it.
   Although there  may be no difference
in the purity of the gold, and thickness
of the leaves, yet, a marked and great
difference exists in the malleability and
toughness of the foil of different beaters.
The art of preparing gold for filling
teeth is an  exceedingly nice and diffi-
cult one, and, it is believed, has attained
greater perfection  in the United States
than any other country; or, at any rate,
this fact is  so  generally  admitted, that
many  of the most eminent  European
practitioners, procure most  if not all
they  use,  from  Mr.  Charles   Abbey
of PhUadelphia, the oldest manufacturer
in America.  There are, however, many
other gold beaters in the United States
who manufacture good gold foil.
   The thickness of the leaves is deter-
mined by  the  number of grains Avhich
each contains,  and  is  designated by
numbers  on the  books, between the
leaves of which they are placed, after
having been properly annealed.  These
vary from 4 to 20.  For example, a book
containing a quarter of an ounce of No.
4, wUl have  thirty leaves  in it.  The
weight of the leaves, generally, vary
two grains, so that the numbers run, 4,
6,  8,  10,  and so on up to 20.  Some
dentists, in their practice, use foil vary-
ing in Nos. from 4 up to 20, while others 
GOL
327
GOL
 confine themselves to a single No.  If
 but one No. be used, 6  will, perhaps,
 be found  to be better than any other.
 Great advantage,  hoAvever, may be de-
 rived from the employment of, at least,
 three or four different Nos. in filling cav-
 ities of different sizes and  situations in
 the teeth.   The Nos. which the author
 prefers, and is generally in the habit of
 using, are 4, 6, 8, 10, and 15, but more
 of the second than any of the others.
   As many of the dental profession are
 probably unacquainted with the mode
 of preparing gold foil, now so extensive-
 ly used by them, and of so much im-
 portance in their  practice, a brief de-
 scription of the manner  of manufactur-
 ing  it, may not  be uninteresting  to
 them.
   The first requirement  is, the purity
 or fineness of the gold.  There are vari-
 ous methods of freeing gold from foreign
 matter or alloy, but we shall speak of
 only one, that which is most in use
 among assayers,  and generally known
 by the name of parting.
   By this process, a quantity  of sUver,
 equal to three times  the  weight of the
 gold to be refined, must be  melted with
 it, and weU mixed by being stirred up
 in the crucible, and then poured into an
 ingot, roUed very thin and cut into smaU
 pieces; or instead of this,  the melted
 mixture may be  poured into  a vessel
 containing water which is  rapidly re-
 volving; this latter  procedure, is  call-
 ed granulating, and wiU serve equally
 as well as the other.   The  whole  mass
 is now put into a  glass matrass, and a
 quantity of nitric  acid  poured on  it.
 The matrass is now placed in a sand
 bath, moderately heated at first.   The
 action  of the acid commences imme-
 diately, and when it becomes complete-
 ly saturated  with the silver, it  must be
 carefully poured off into a. vessel con-
 taining  water,  and  a fresh supply of
acid poured into the matrass, and the ac-
tion continued until  the whole of the
silver is decomposed or dissolved, which
may  be knoAvn by the colorless appear-
 ance of the fumes.  The pure gold re-
 maining in the matrass has  a broAvn
 appearance,  is easily broken with the
 fingers, but  its metaUic qualities have
 not been affected, and only requires to
 be melted to be ready for use.
   The sUver may be  coUected by plac-
 ing a sheet or bar of copper in the liquid,
 previously well  dUuted,  and  may be
 used again for the same purpose  when
 another refining is required.
   The gold being now refined, is melt-
 ed and cast in an ingot about one inch
 in width, and is ready for manufactur-
 ing into foil.   A piece weighing  about
 tAvo and a half ounces is cut from the
 bar and roUed to the length of about fif-
 teen feet, which is equally divided into
 160 pieces  or squares, then put into the
 centre of a tool called a "cutch," made
 of veUum MS. books of the 13th  and
 14th centuries, about  four inches square
 and  containing  165 or  170 leaves,
 enough to hold the whole 160 squares
 of gold, and which is called a "beating."
   The cutch being "filled," is encased
 on aU sides with parchment wrappers
 or "bands," when it is ready for the pro-
 cess of beating, which is performed by
 manual labor, with iron hammers weigh-
 ing from eight to fifteen pounds, wielded
 with one hand, the other being required
 to hold the tool.
   The beating  is continued until the
 gold is forced out beyond the edges in
 sufficient quantities to leave the  foil of
 the desired Aveight.   The  protruding
 edges are now scraped or cut off with a
 knife, and  the sheets of foil carefully
 laid out and the rough edges  trimmed
 off with a pair of scissors,  when it is
 ready for the process of softening or an-
 nealing.
   The annealing process is one of the
 greatest importance,  and is variously
 performed.   Some manufacturers do it
 by placing a sheet upon a Avire grating
 and holding it over a fire or spirit lamp;
 others heat  a plate of stone, and lay the
gold upon it, Avhilst  others again,  place
it directly on a charcoal fire; each,proba- 
GOL
328
GOL
             bly, thinking his OAvn method the best,
             but whatever one is adopted, great care
             and patience is required in doing it; and
             as the operation is necessarily slow, as
             only one leaf can be annealed at a time,
             and a great deal of heat  required, it is
             very exhausting to the system, and par-
             ticularly injurious  to the eyes.   After
             the foil is annealed, it is put into books,
             when it is ready for use.
                The  foregoing description  refers to
             No. 6  foil; for No. 8 or  10,  a  greater
             quantity of gold is required at starting.
                The  vellum books made use of for
             tools—the relics  of centuries gone by,
             are many of them beautifully illuminat-
             ed, and the different colors remain as
             bright as  when first  put  on.  Some of
             them must have required the  greater
             part of an ordinary  life-time for their
             completion, and after having performed
             their part  in the  world as literary pro-
             ductions, are  made  to perform a very
             different part, one  never  contemplated
             by their authors, namely, that of  form-
             ing an indispensable  tool  for the manu-
             facture of dentist's gold foil.
                Gold  Plate, Manner of Making
             it.  This  being  an article much used
             in the construction of dental substitutes,
             the author avUI here describe the man-
             ner of making it.
                The gold, after being melted in a clean
             crucible, rubbed  on the inside with bo-
             rax (sub-borate of soda)  is poured into
             an ingot mould of the proper  length,
             width and thickness, and after it has
             cooled, is  reduced by hammering it on
             au anvil, to  the thickness of about an
             eighth of  an inch.   It should now be
             annealed by placing it in a charcoal fire,
             or furnace, and heated until every part
             becomes red.  It may be necessary dur-
             ing the operation of hammering, to sub-
             ject it several times to this process, to
             prevent the gold from cracking, and  if,
             notwithstanding this precaution, it does
             crack, it should be remelted, and a little
             muriate of ammonia thrown on it in the
»            crucible whUe in a fused  state.  It may
             then be recast  into  an ingot, and the
hammering proceeded  with as just des-
cribed.
  When  it is reduced to the thickness
above mentioned, it should be annealed
and then placed betAveen the  rollers of
a rolling mill, so adjusted as to be the
same distance apart at  both ends, and
not so near to each other as to require a
very great  effort to  force the  gold be-
tween  them.   The rollers should  be
brought  a little  nearer  to  each other
every time the  plate is passed  between
them,  and  during  this  process they
should be kept well oiled, that there may
be no more friction than possible.
  In the mean  time the gold should  be
frequently annealed, and the thickness
of the  plate determined  by a gauge.
Gold plate intended for a basis for arti-
ficial teeth for the upper jaw, should  be
reduced until it fits the slits in the gauge,
marked 25, 26, or 27,  according to the
thickness required;  and for the lower
jaw, until it fits in 21  or 22; for back-
ings, in 24, and for  clasps in 23.  But
it is  sometimes necessary to  vary  the
thickness of the plate used for these seve-
ral purposes ; as for example, when the
Avhole alveolar border  and a portion of
the roof of the mouth is  to be  covered,
the plate may be thinner than  Avhen it
is to be applied only to  a  small surface.
But  these are matters Avhich the judg-
ment of the dentist alone can  properly
determine, and consequently  no rules
can be  laid down,  from which it will
not sometimes  be necessary to deviate.
   Gold, Refining of.  In the descrip-
tion  given of the method of manufactur-
ing  gold foil, one of the. processes  for
refining gold, is briefly noticed, but there
are  other  methods  which it  will  be
proper to mention.  The first is employ-
ed in some of the mints,  and is termed,
"cementation."  This  consists in first
rolling the gold out into exceedingly thin
plates, then placing it with a mixture of
four parts of brickdust, one of  sulphate
of iron, calcined to  redness, and one of
muriate of soda, in a crucible. A bed
of this mixture, or  cementing powder, 
GOL               329                GOL
should first be placed in the bottom of
the crucible; the gold  should  then be
put in and covered with it.  The cruci-
ble should be covered with another cru-
cible, the joints well luted with clay,
and exposed to a heat  graduaUy raised
to a red heat, at which elevation of tem-
perature it should be kept from twenty
to twenty-four hours.    The  crucible
should now be removed from  the fire,
the top broken off, and  after  the latter
has cooled, the gold should be separated
from the cement and washed with  hot
Avater, or what is still  better, boiled in
hot Avater.*
  The kind of furnace which should be
employed for melting gold may  be very
simple, such, for example, as is  used by
gold and silversmiths, or the one invent-
ed by  Dr. Somerby, in connection with
his concentrated blow-pipe.  See Blow-
pipe and Furnace,  Somerby's.   But
in the absence of  either of these, a
furnace similar to the one used by the
Ceylonese  goldsmiths may  be  substi-
tuted.   This consists of a  small low
earthen pot, filled with  chaff, or saAV-
dust, on Avhich a little charcoal fire may
be made, which is excited with a smaU
bamboo  blow-pipe, about six inches
long, the blast being directed through a
short earthen pipe or nozzle, the end of
which is  placed  at  the  bottom of  the
fire.f  By  this simple  contrivance, a
most  intense heat,  greater, it  is said,
than is required for  melting  gold or sil-
ver, may be obtained.
  For separating copper, tin,  lead or
zinc,  from gold,  the following simple
method may  be adopted: put the  gold
in a clean crucible covered with another
crucible, having a small opening or hole
through the top;  lute the two  together
with clay, place them in a bed of char-
coal in the furnace, ignite the coal grad-
ually, afterwards  increase the combus-
tion by means of a current of air from a

  * Chemistry of the Arts, vol. ii, p. 551.
  t Chemistry of the Arts, vol. i, pp. 545-'6,
and550-'l.                            I
           28*
pair of  belloAVs, such as are usually
used in connection with small furnaces;
after the gold has melted, throAv in seve-
ral small lumps of nitrate of potassa
(salt-petre) and sub-borate of soda, (bo-
rax,) and keep it in a fused  state for
thirty or forty minutes, then separate the
tAvo crucibles and pour the metal in an
ingot mould of the proper size, previous-
ly warmed and well oiled.  Most of the
base metals will be dissipated during the
process of fusion in the form of vapor,
the lead  escaping into  the pores  of the
crucible.  The bichloride of mercury
(corrosive sublimate) is sometimes used
instead of the nitrate of potassa, for the
purpose of dissipating  the base metals,
and, often with more certain  and better
results.   If  the gold  cracks  on  being
hammered or rolled, it  should be melted
again, and more nitrate of potassa, and
sub-borate of soda thrown into it, and the
inside  of the  crucible should  be Avell
rubbed Avith the  latter, before the metal
is put in. It is sometimes necessary to
repeat this process several times, and if
the gold  stUl continues brittle, a little
muriate  of  ammonia  (sal ammoniac)
should be thrown into the crucible when
the gold is in a fused state, and after the
vapor ceases to escape, the metal should
be  poured in  an ingot mould, warmed
and oUed as before directed.   This  last
method of treatment will make the gold
tough, and prevent it from cracking un-
der the  hammer, or Avhile being rolled,
if it be, from time to time, properly an-
nealed.
   To separate platina  from gold, it is
necessary to dissolve the alloy in a mix-
ture of muriate of ammonia and nitric
acid, which will cause the former metal
to  be  precipitated.  The  acid  should
then be poured into another vessel, and
the gold precipitated by pouring a solu-
tion of sulphate ofiron  into it.
  By the foregoing methods of refining
gold, sufficiently accurate results may
be obtained for all useful practical pur-
poses in  mechanical dentistry, and as
this is the object at which the author 
GOL
330
GOL
 aims, he does not deem it necessary to go
 into a minute detail of the various com-
 plex processes employed for separating
 the several metals which are occasion-
 ally found combined with the one under
 consideration.   The variation of   an
 eighth or a quarter of a carat in the fine-
 ness of  the gold employed in connec-
 tion with artificial teeth, is not a matter
 of much consequence.
   The method of procedure pursued by
 Dr. Elhot for refining gold is as follows:
 he  says, "The  following implements
 are  necessary for this purpose;  a  small
 draught furnace, a quantity of fine hard
 wood coal, a clean crucible, with a sheet-
 iron cover, a light crucible tongs, an in-
 got  mould made of soap-stone, a little
 nitrate of potassa, carbonate of potassa,
 borax and oil.  The fireplace of the fur-
 nace should be about  ten inches in di-
 ameter,  and eight  or  ten deep; this
 should be connected by means of a pipe
 with the chimney, so that a powerful
 draught  may be made to pass through
 the coal.  A  blast-furnace is objectiona-
 ble,  for  the  reason,  that  the  bellows
 burns out the coal  immediately under
 the crucible,  and it is,  therefore,  con-
 stantly dropping down, which is not the
 case with the draught-furnace;  besides,
 the  draught-furnace produces  a  more
 even fire, a quality equally indispensa-
 ble.
   In preparing for a heat, the  furnace
 should be filled about half full  of  coal,
 and  after it is Avell ignited, it should be
 consofidated  as much   as  practicable
 Avithout choking the draught. The cru-
 cible containing the metal, and a  little
 borax may then be set on, and more coal
 placed around  and over  it, the door of
the  furnace closed, and the  damper
 opened;  it should remain in this way
until the gold  is  perfectly  fused, the
 cover may  then be  removed  from over
the crucible, and a bit of nitrate of po-
tassa dropped in, in quantity equal  to
the size of a pea to every ounce of gold,
and  the  crucible  immediately covered
with  a plate of iron;  more  coal  may'
 then be placed over and around the cru-
 cible, and the gold kept in a fused state
 at a high temperature, until the scoria
 ceases to pass off, which it avUI do in
 the course of five or six minutes. The
 ingot mould  having  been previously
 warmed, may be placed in a convenient
 position  for pouring,  and  filled  about
 half full of lamp oil.  The iron cover
 may now be thrown  off quickly,  the
 crucible  seized  Avith the tongs, and at
 the same instant another small bit of ni-
 trate of potassa  should be  thrown into
 it, and  the gold rapidly, but carefully,
 poured into the mould.
   "The ingot always cools first  at the
 edges, and shrinks aAvay  from  the mid-
 dle; on that  account the mould should
 be a little concave on the sides, so that
 the shrinking will not reduce the ingot
 thinner in the  centre than at the edges.
   "Moulds of the best form will some-
 times produce ingots of irregular thick-
 ness; such ingots should  be brought to
 a uniform thickness under the hammer,
 using the common callipers as a gauge;
 if this be neglected, the plate will  be
 found imperfeet at those points where
 the ingot was  thinnest.  The  plate
 should be annealed occasionally during
 the process of hammering and rolling,
 and should be reduced about one num-
 ber in thickness each,time it passes be-
 tween the rolls.  If any lead, tin  or
 zinc be mixed with the gold, the nitrate
 of  potassa must be used in much larger
 quantities, and in that case, it  is better
 to let the  button cool in the bottom of
 the crucible; then break the crucible and
 melt it in  a clean one for pouring, using
 borax and nitrate of potassa,  in very
 small quantities, for the last melt.
  "In  case the subject of assay be in
 the form  of filings or dust, a  magnet
 should be passed through it so as to re-
 move every particle of iron, and then,
 instead  of melting it with  borax,  it
 should be melted first with carbonate of
potassa, and  afterwards with nitrate of
 potassa in quantities proportioned to the
 necessities of the case as before directed; 
GOL               331               GOM
carbonate of potassa is the only flux that
will bring all the smaU particles of met-
al into one mass; without it, a great
portion of the gold wiU be found among
the scoria,  adhering to  the sides of the
crucible, in the form of small  globules.
This process of refining, answers equal-
ly as weU for silver as gold."
   Gold Solder.  Gold alloyed Avith
one  or more metals.  But "the metals
used in making solders," as Dr. W. H.
Elliot correctly observes, "should be re-
fined separately  before weighing," for
without this precaution, it would be
difficult to ascertain their relative  de-
grees of fineness.  This  done, the gold
should  be  placed in a  clean ciucible
Avith a little borax, and as soon as it has
become completely fused, the silver, and
afterwards  the copper, these being the
proper  alloys for  gold  solder,  may be
added.  When the whole are melted, the
alloy may be immediately  poured into
an ingot mould, previously warmed and
oiled.
   The ingot should now be hammered
on  an  anvil,  and  afterwards passed
through a roUing-mill until it is reduced
to a very thin plate, when it is ready for
use.
   The solder employed  for uniting the
various parts of a piece of dental me-
chanism, should be  sufficiently fine to
prevent it from being easily acted on by
the  secretions of the mouth.  The fol-
lowing exhibits the relative proportions
of the metals most frequently employed
for  three  different  qualities  of  gold
solder.

      Fine Flowing Gobi Sobler.
  No. 1.—2 dwts. 22 carat gold,
         16 grs. fine silver,
         12 grs. roset copper.
  No. 2.—1 dwt. 15 grs. 22 carat gold.
         16 grs.  fine silver.
         12 grs. roset copper.
  The following makes  a finer solder
than either  of the above,  and, although
it requires a little stronger blast  to fuse
it, it  flows very freely.
   No. 3.—6 dAvts. pure gold,
          2 dwts. roset copper,
          1 dwt. fine silver.
   In making gold solder, if the proper
 relative   proportions  of the  different
 metals are varied  even half a  grain, it
 will affect the  flowing of it, a quality
 which it is very desirable for it to pos-
 sess.
   Dr. J. Lee, of Camden, S. C, recom-
 mends the following as an exceUent sol-
 der :  "Take  eight parts  of plate alloy
 (made in the proportion of one dollar sil-
 ver to twenty British sovereigns) and one
 part of silver,  melt them, and as soon as
 melted, add one part clean scraped sheet-
 brass—turn it out immediately into  an
 ingot, and then with a mill roll it into
 thin strips."
   "This solder," says  Dr. L.,  "I have
 used several  years; it is of the same
 color of the plate, and is not discolored
 in any mouth.  The brass causes it to
 flow evenly."
   Gold  Thread.  Coptis  trifolia,  a
 ranunculacious plant.
   Gold Wire.  See Spiral Springs.
   GOECKEL, EBERB. Epitome of
 the Theory and Treatment of  Odontal-
 gia, by.   Nordl, 1688.
   GOGUELIN, J. G.   Memoirs upon
 Scurvy, by.  S.—Brienc, 1804.
   GOMPHI'ASIS.    Gomphiasmus;—
 agomphiasis; from you$os, a nail.  Dis-
 ease, pain, or loosening of the teeth, es-
 pecially   the molares.  It is generally
 the result of a partial destruction of the
 alveolar processes, caused by disease of
 the gums and alveolo-dental periosteum.
 The teeth are, sometimes, shghtly loosen-
 ed from inflammation, and, as a con-
 sequence, a thickening of the peridental
 membranes.
   GOMPHIAS'MUS. Gomphiasis.
   GOMPHIOI.  Dentes molares.
   GOMPHO'SIS.  rojiufwffcs, from yofi-
<j>oj, a nail.  Gomphoma.   An immova-
ble articulation in  bones,  in Avhich one
bone is received  into the  cavity of an-
other, like a nail in a board. The articu-
lation of the teeth with the alveoli fur- 
GOU
332
GRA
 nish the only example of this species of
 articulation.
   GONAGRA. Gonyagra; from yow,
 the knee, and aypa, a seizure.   Gout in
 the knee.
   GONAL'GIA. Pain in the knee.
   GONARTHRITIS.  From yow, the
 knee, apflpov, joint, and itis, inflamma-
 tion.  Inflammation of the knee.
   GONGRO'NA.  Bronchocele.
   GONORRHOEA.  From yovn,  the
 semen,  and pia, I flow.  Literally, an
 involuntary discharge  of semen, but
 used to  designate a discharge of mucus
 from  the  urethra, A\rhich may result
 either from the direct application of irri-
 tants  to the lining  membrane of this
 passage, or from impure sexual connec-
 tion.  The former is termed gonorrhoea
 benigna, and the latter, gonm-rhcea viru-
 lenta, maligna, or venerea.
   GONORRHEAL. Relating to gon-
 orrhoea virulenta.
   GONYAG'RA.  Gout in the knee.
   GONYAL'GIA.  Gonalgia.
   GONYON'CUS.   From yo™, the
 knee, and oyxos, a tumor. A  swelling
 of the knee.
   GOOSE-FOOT.  Chenopodium an-
 thelminticum.
   GORGET.  An instrument used in
 the operation of lithotomy.
   GOSSYP'IUM HERBACEUM.—
 The cotton plant.
   GOULARD'S CERATE.  The ce-
 ratum plumbi subacetatis.
   Goulard's Extract. Liquor plumbi
 subacetatis dilutus.
   GOURD, BITTER.  Cucumis colo-
 cynthis.  Bitter apple.  Bitter  cucumber.
   Gourd, Worm. Distoma hepaticum.
   GOUT.  Arthritis; podagra; chira-
gra; morbus articularis.   Pain, redness
 and sweUing in the  joints, especially
 that of the great toe,  and those of the
 feet and hands.
   Gout, Diaphragmatic. Angina pec-
 toris.
   Gout, Rheumatic  Acute  rheuma-
 tism.
   Gout-Weed. An umbeUiferous plant,
 formerly used for mitigating the pain of
 gout.
   GOUTTES D'OR DU GENERAL
 LAMOTTE.   De  Lamotte's golden
 drops.
   GRACILIS.   Slender.  The rectus
 interior femoris, a long slender muscle
 of the thigh.
   GRAIN.   Granum.   The 60th part
 of a troy drachm.
   GRA'MEN.  Grass.  Any grass-like
 herb.
   Gramen  ^Egyptiacum.   Egyptian
 cock's-foot grass.  Grass of the cross.
   Gramen Crucis Cyperioidis.  Gra-
 men iEgyptiacum.
   GRAMIN'E^E. The natural family
 of the grasses.
   GRAM'MA.  A scruple.
   GRAMME. A French weight, equal
 to 15.434 grains  troy, or T5T6/tr aracnm
 avoirdupois. The 24th part of an ounce.
 Also, the iris.
   GRANADIL'LA.     The  passion
 flower.
   GRANA ACTES.  Elder berries.
   Grana Moschata.  Musk-seed. See
 Hebiscus Abelmoschus.
   Grana Paradisi. Amomum granum
 paradisi.  The greater cardamon seeds.
  GRANATUM.   The pomegranate.
  GRANDHOMME, M. P. A.  Re-
 flections on the Means Employed at the
 Present Day, for Regulating the Teeth,
with a Description of a New Method of
Procedure, by.  Paris, 1845.
  GRANDIN,  D. S.  Neuralgia Fa-
cialis,  by.  Published  in  American
Journal of Dental Science, vol. first.
  GRANIF'EROUS.  From granum,
grain, and fcro, to bear.   Bearing grain.
  GRANULAR DISEASE OF THE
KIDNEY.  Bright's disease of the kid-
ney, consisting  of granular degenera-
tion, Avith albuminous urine.
  Granular Liver.  Cirrosis.
  GRANULATION.    Granulatio;
from granum, a grain.  Red, flesh-like
bodies of a conical shape, which form on
the surfaces of ulcers and suppurating
wounds.  They  serve to fiU up  their 
GRA
333
GRE
 cavities, and to unite their sides.  Also,
 organic lesions, consisting in the forma-
 tion of  small,  semi-transparent oval tu-
 mors, resembling the millet seed. They
 are  most  frequently  met with in the
 lungs.  In Chemistry, metals reduced to
 grains or small particles.
   GRAN'ULE.  Granulum.  A small
 grain.
   GRANUM.  A grain or kernel.
   GRAPE.   See Vitis Vinifera.
   GRAPH'ITE.  Graphites.  Plumba-
 go.  Black lead.
   GRASSA.  Sub-borate of soda.
   GRASS OIL OF NAMUR. A vola-
 tile  oil  obtained  from Indian nard,  or
 spica nardi.
   GRASHO.  Author of a Paper upon
 Difficult Dentition, published at Er-
 fort.
   GRATI'OLA OFFICINALIS. Di-
 gitalis minima.  Hedge-hyssop.
   GRAVEL.   Lithia rcnalis.  Small
 calculus concretions formed in the kid-
 neys, Avhich pass into  the urinary blad-
 der and are expelled with the urine.
   Gravel Root.  The root of the eu-
 patorium purpureum.
   GRAVER.   An engraAting  instru-
 ment.  An instrument consisting of a
 steel stem,  fixed  in  a handle, with
 a sharp point,  shaped  to suit the par-
 ticular purpose for which it is  intended.
 It Avas formerly much used by dentists
 in the manufacture of artificial teeth
 from ivory and the tooth of the hippo-
 potamus, but as  the use of these sub-
 stances for dental substitutes  has been
 almost altogether superseded,  it  is now
 seldom  employed  except  in  finishing
 such substitutes as are fixed on metaUic
 bases.
   GRAVITATION.  The act of mov-
 ing towards the centre, as when a body
falls to the earth.
   GRAVITY.  Gravitas; from gravis,
heaA'y, Aveight, heaviness. The tenden-
cy of a body  towards the centre, or of
bodies tOAvards each other.
  Gravity,  Specific  Gravitas spe-
cifica. The density or weight of a body, I
compared with the density or weight of
another of the same bulk, assumed as
the standard.   For solids  and  liquids,
water is the standard, and common air
for gases.   The weight of a  solid  of
any given dimensions, compared with
the weight of the same bulk of water,
is, its specific gravity.  Thus, if a solid
be first weighed in air, and then in Ava-
ter, it will be found in the  latter case to
have lost of its av eight a quantity equal
to the weight of its own bulk of water.
Now by dividing the total weight by the
loss of weight  in water,  the quotient
wUl show the specific  gravity.
  GRAY, JOHN.  Preservation of the
Teeth Indispensable to Comfort and Ap-
pearance, Health and Longevity, by.
London, 1840.
  GRAY LOTION.  The black wash.
  GREEN SICKNESS.  Chlorosis.
  GREEN VITRIOL.   Sulphate  of
iron.
  GREENWOOD,  ISAAC I.   Au-
thor of an Article on the Treatment of
Tooth-ache, and  of  the Report  of a
Case of Diseased Antrum successfully
treated.—Also, of a  Paper  on Filling
Teeth ; all of which  were published in
the American  Journal of Dental  Sci-
ence, vols, second and third.
   GREENWOOD, JOHN. Late den-
tist of New York, and second  son  of
Isaac Greenwood, the first  practical
dentist in Boston, who was  a  son  of
Rev. Isaac  Greenwood,  professor of
mathematics and  natural  philosophy
in Harvard College, Cambridge, Massa-
chusetts, was born in Boston, May 17th,
1760.   He  received  his education at
what was known as the North School of
Boston, where there were in attendance
between  three  and four hundred  boys
from all classes of society, instructed by
two teachers, in the first rudiments of a
plain English education.
  At the early age of thirteen, he was
placed with his uncle, Thales  Green-
wood,  a cabinet maker, of Portland,
Maine, as an apprentice, but at  the ex-
piration of two years, and at the first 
GRE
334
GRE
 outbreak of the revolutionary war, ani-
 mated by the spirit of ambition and pat-
 riotism which every where  manifested
 itself in the colonies, anticipated  his
 majority, and sundered the bonds of his
 apprenticeship, on a Sunday morning,
 while his uncle's family Avere at church.
 He  immediately  enlisted  for  eight
 months as a soldier  in  the American
 army,  and during this period was at the
 battle  of Bunker's Hill  and Trenton.
 From  the termination of the period of
 his enlistment,  nearly the whole time,
 until the conclusion of the war, young
 Greenwood served on board of various
 privateer and other vessels, in the  sev-
 eral capacities of seamen. Two of the
 vessels on board  of which he  served,
 were captured, and  the officers  and
 men made prisoners.  The first time
 he was released after  an  imprisonment
 of five months, and the second time, he
 escaped.
  At the conclusion of the war, finding
 himself without the means of support,
 or any available profession, he  visited
 his youngest brother, Clark Greenwood,
 who was in New York, practicing den-
 tistry, but as he received no encourage-
 ment from him, he determined  to seek
 employment again as  a seaman.  In the
 meantime he became acquainted with
 a Mr.  Quinzey, a  nautical and mathe-
 matical  instrument maker, who  fur-
 nished him the means of engaging in
 several  speculations,  but  which  not
 proving very profitable,  Mr. Q,., ulti-
 mately, sold out his tools to Mr. Green-
 wood,  and moved to Boston.
  Soon after having engaged  in  this
 new business, Dr. Gamage, requested
 Mr.  Greenwood to extract a tooth for
 one of his  patients, which he  accom-
 plished  very successfully.   This was
the commencement of his practice as a
dentist.  He was,  however, for some
time after this employed in the manu-
facture of nautical and mathematical in-
struments, and ivory turning, and prac-
ticing  dentistry as opportunity offered.
 The demand for his services, however,
 in the last mentioned capacity, soon in-
 creased to such an extent that he was
 compelled to abandon his other occupa-
 tions,  and to procure  the  assistance,
 first, of Wm.  Pitt,  and afterwards of
 Clark GreenAvood, his brothers, to ena-
 ble him to meet his  numerous  profes-
 sional engagements.   Up to this time,
 1786 or '7, he occupied an office near
 the Old Tontine Coffee  House, but he
 now removed to the corner of William
 and Beakman streets, opposite general
 Washington's office.  He here made the
 acquaintance of general Hamilton, col-
 onel Burr, and  other general officers of
 the army, and influential individuals.
 He, also,  soon became acquainted with
 general  Washington, for whom he
 manufactured a number of sets of teeth.
 The following letter from Gen. Wash-
 ington, will serve to exhibit the estima-
 tion placed upon his  professional skill
 as a dentist:
     "Mount Vernon, Jan. 6th, 1795.
  "Sir—Your letter  of the 28th ult.,
 with  the  parcel that accompanied it,
 came safe to hand.   I  feel  obliged to
 you for your attention  to my  request
 and for the directions you have  given
 me.
  "Enclosed you will find bank notes
 for fifteen dollars, which I shall be glad
 to hear have got safe to your hands. If
 you should return to Connecticut, I
 should be  glad  to be  advised of it, and
 to what place, as I shaU always prefer
 your services to those of any other in
 the line of your present profession.
           "I am,  sir,
      "Your very  humble servant,
                "G. Washington.
  "I  thank you very  much for your
 obliging attention to  my requests, and
 am, sir, with esteem and regard,
    "Your very humble servant,
                "G. Washington.
  "To John Greenwood.
  "P. S. I am ready and wilhng to pay
what you  may charge me."
  Mr.  Greemvood was familiar with 
              GRO              3c

such dental literature as existed at his
time, and was well informed in the sur-
gical department of his profession.   An
old copy  of Hunter on the teeth, with
marginal notes by Mr. G., and its weU-
thumbed leaves, now  in the possession
of his  son, Dr. Isaac I.  Greenwood,
bears ample testimony to the careful at-
tention with which he perused  its pages.
During his practice, in the treatment of
a diseased maxiUary sinus, he perforated
this cavity from the socket of  an upper
molar tooth, and effected  a cure of the
disease.  It has been said that he was
the first to strike up a gold plate to serve
as a base for artificial teeth, in the United
States, and that without having seen a
description of the  process, or known
that it had ever been done, at that time,
1799.  He was in  the  habit of con-
structing sets  of artificial teeth with
stained gums, and during his profes-
sional career, he frequently correspond-
ed with that eminent French dentist,
C. F.  Delabane, from whom he pro-
cured a large quantity of human teeth,
Avhich he used in his practice.
  As early as  1789, he constructed an
upper and under set of teeth for general
Washington,  with  artificial gums, se-
cured in the  mouth with springs.   In
the lower piece an opening was left for
a single  remaining tooth.  This after-
wards  dropped out and is  now in Mr.
Greenwood's famtiy as a rehc.
  Mr. Greenwood continued to practice
his profession untU  1815, when he died
from an attack of apoplexy.
  GRI'AS  CAULIFLORA.    The
anchovy pear.
  GRIE'LUM.  Parsley and  smaUage.
  GRINDING APPARATUS, ELLI-
OT'S  IMPROVED.    An  improve-
ment made by Dr. Elliot, of Montreal,
which consists in placing  the  stone up-
on an upright shaft, so as to bring its
face horizontaUy.
  GRIPES.  The cohc.
  GRIPPE.  From gripper, to gripe.
To catch hold of.  The influenza.
  GROATS.  HuUedoats.
5               GUB

  GROG-BLOSSOMS.  Gutta rosea.
  GROMWELL.  Lithospermum of
 ficinale.
  GROS.  Drachm.
  GROSSULA'RIA. The gooseberry.
  GROUND BERRY.  Gaultheria.
  Ground Nut.  Bunium bulbocasta-
 num.
  Ground Pine.  Teucrium chamae-
 pitys.
  GROUSEBERRY.  Gaultheria.
  GROUSSET.  Dissertation on Den-
 tition, or the Development of the Teeth
 in Man, by.  Paris,  1803.
  GRUN.  Dissertation upon Odontal-
 gia, by.  Jena, 1795.
  GROWTH.   The development of
 the body, especially in  height.  Also,
 the development of a morbid tissue.
  GRUINA'LES.  Plants that resem-
 ble the geranium.
  GRUMUS.  A coagulum; a clot of
 blood.
  GRUTUM.   Grutum  milium.  A
 hard, white pimple, or  tubercle of the
 skin, resembling a millet-seed
  GRYPHO'SIS.  From ypvrtow, I m-
 curvate.  Incurvation of the naUs.
  GRYPHUS LAPIS.  The philoso-
 pher's  stone.
  GUACO.  The eupatorium guaco,
 a plant of South America.
  GUAIACUM.  The gum resin of
 the officinal guaiacum.  Also, the name
 of a  genus of plants.
  GUAJAVA.  Guavo;guajabo. The
 guava  tree.
  GUAVA APPLE.  Psidium pomi-
 ferum.
  GUBERNAC'ULUM DENTIS. A
 name  given by M. Serres, a French
 anatomist, to the small chord which con-
 nects the sac of a tooth with the gum.
 This appendage is described  by Dela-
 barre as  being hollow, and as playing
 an important part in  dentition.   See
 Dentition, and Teeth, origin and forma-
 tion of.
  Gubernaculum Testis.   Ligamen-
 tum testis. A name given  by Hunter to
 a fibro-ceUular  chord;  which, in the 
GUM               336               GUM
 fetus, extends from the scrotum to the
 testis.
   GUERTIN.  Advice  upon the Pre-
 servation of the Teeth, and upon Artifi-
 cial Teeth, in Spanish, by. Paris, 1819.
   GUILANDI'NA MORIN'GA.  The
 name of a genus of plants.  The  plant
 Avhich produces the ben nut.
   GULA.  The upper part of the oeso-
 phagus and pharynx.
   GULLET.  The oesophagus.
   GUM.  Gummi. A concrete vegeta-
 ble juice which  exudes from  certain
 trees, generaUy  transparent,  more or
 less brittle when  dry, and soluble in
 water.   Also,  the  fleshy  substance
 which surrounds the necks of the teeth
 and invests the alveolar border.   See
 Gums.
   Gum Acacia.  The concrete juice of
 the  acacia vera and  other species of
 acacia.  Gum arabic.
   Gum Boil.  Alveolar abscess.
   Gum Elastic   Caoutchouc.
   Gum Lancet.  Dentiscalpium; odon-
 toglyphon.   A  curved instrument  or
 knife for separating the gums from the
 neck of a tooth, previous to extraction.
 The gum lancets usuaUy employed, are
 shaped like a fleam, but different den-
 tists have them constructed differently.
 Two, hoAvever, are required in the per-
 formance of the operation.  One with a
 thin, narrow, curved blade, oval at the
 point, and another with a sharp-pointed
 narrow blade, with only one edge. The
 former may be employed for separating
 the gums from the Ungual, labial and
 outer sides  of the teeth, and the latter
from their approximal sides.
  Gum, Red.  A red cutaneous erup-
tion which occurs in infancy and gener-
 ally during first dentition.
  Gum, Wasting of.   See Ulatrophia.
  GUMMA.  An elastic  tumor on the
periosteum, especiaUy of the  cranium
 and sternum, usuaUy resulting from a
syphilitic taint.
  GUMMI.  See Gum.
  Gummi Acacije.  Gum arabic.
  Gummi Carannje.  A  resinous sub-
 stance, said to be derived from amyris
 caranna,  a tree of Mexico  and South
 America.
   Gummi   Ceiiasoiium.    The  gum
 which exudes from  the bark of cherry
 trees.
   Gummi Courbaril.  Gum anime, a
 resin said to be derived from the hyme-
 noza courbaril.
   Gummi Euphorbii.   A concrete re-
 sinous juice from one or more species of
 euphorbia.
   Gummi Kino.  See Kino.
   Gummi  Lutea.  A gum resin pro-
 duced by  the grass-tree of New South
 Wales.
   Gummi  Myrrhje.   Myrrh,  a resin-
 ous exudation from the balsanwdendrou
 myrrha.
   Gummi Nostras.  The gums obtain-
 ed from indigenous trees, as the cherry,
 apricot, almond, peach, &c.
   Gummi Rubrum Gambiense. Kino.
   Gum-Resin.   Gummi resina.  The
 concrete juices of plants, consisting of
 gum  and  resin, frequently associated
 with essential oil, and other substances.
   GUMS.  Gingival.  (M». A thick,
 dense, mucous membrane, adhering to
 the periosteum of the  alveolar  border.
 and  closely surrounding the necks of
 the teeth.   The  texture of the gums,
 however, differs  from that of the mem-
 brane of  Avhich they  are composed.
 This membrane lines the cavities of the
 mouth and nose, the maxillary and fron-
 tal sinuses, the whole alimentary canal,
 and is a continuation of the skin cover-
 ing the outer surface of the body. From
 the change of structure, however, which
 it undergoes after entering the mouth,
it may be  regarded as  an entirely dif-
ferent membrane.
  Mr. George Waite, author of an ably
written treatise on the  gums, seems to
think that mucous membrane serves
merely as a covering to the gums, and
consequently does not  constitute the
whole of their structure, but as it cannot
be separated from them, this opinion is
beheved to  be incorrect.  The gums, 
GUM               337                GUM
properly speaking, may be said to com-
mence near  the  base of the alveolar
border, and after having extended to the
necks of the teeth are reflected  upon
themselves and intimately united to the
dental periosteum, leaving a free border
around each tooth covering the termina-
tion of the  enamel  upon  its crown.
When in a healthy condition, their mar-
gin on either side  of the dental arch, is
thin and exhibits a beautifully scolloped
or festooned appearance.
  The gums of the upper jaw are sup-
plied with blood vessels from the supe-
rior coronary artery,  and those of  the
lower from the sub-mental and sub-lin-
gual  arteries;  and they  derive  their
nerves from the superior dental branches
of the fifth pair.
  The gums are  remarkable for their
insensibility  and  hardness when in the
healthy state, but  exhibit great tender-
ness, upon  the slightest touch,  when
diseased.
  In the infant state  of  the gums, the
central hne of both dental arches present
a white, firm, apparently cartilaginous
ridge, which gradually becomes thinner
as the teeth advance; and  in  old age,
after the teeth drop out, the gums again
resume  somewhat  their former infan-
tile condition, showing, "second-child-
hood."
  The gums may be regarded as that
portion of the mucous membrane from
which the teeth papilla; and dental sacs
originate, and they contribute in an emi-
nent degree to the stabUity  of the teeth
after their eruption.
  Gums, Characteristics of.  Sub-
ject as are the gums to the  laws which
govern  the  operations of  the  general
economy, their appearance varies with
the state of the constitutional health and
the  condition and arrangement of  the
teeth. Although the immediate or proxi-
mate cause of disease  in  them  may be
regarded as  local  irritation—produced
by depositions of tartar upon the teeth,
or decayed, dead, loose,  or  irregularly
arranged teeth, or  a vitiated state of the
        29
 fluids of the mouth, resulting from gene-
 ral organic derangement, or any or all
 of the first mentioned causes, their sus-
 ceptibility to deleterious  impressions, is
 influenced to a very considerable extent
 by the state of the general health ; and
 this determines, too, the character of the
 effects that are produced upon them  by
 local irritants.  For example, the depo-
 sition of a small quantity of tartar upon
 the teeth,  or a dead or loose tooth, would
 not, in a healthy person, of a good con-
 stitution,  give  rise to any thing more
 than a slight redness or tumefaction of
 the margin of the gums in immediate
 contact  with it; while in  a scorbutic
 subject, it would cause  it to assume a
 dark purple appearance for a considera-
 ble distance around, to become flabby,
 more turgid, and to separate and retire
 from the  necks of the teeth, or to grow
 down upon  their crowns, to  ulcerate
 and bleed from the slightest injury, and
 to  exhale a fetid  odor.   In  propor-
 tion as  this disposition of body exists,
 their liability to be thus  affected is  in-
 creased;  and, it is only among constitu-
 tions of  this kind,  that  that  peculiar
 preternatural prurient growth, by Avhich
 the whole of the crowns of the teeth
 sometimes become almost entirely im-
 bedded  in their substance, takes place.
   But,  notwithstanding the dependency
 of  the condition of the  gums upon the
 state of the general health, they are occa-
 sionally  affected with  sponginess and
 inflammation in subjects  of  the best
 temperaments   and  of  uninterrupted
 good health.  The wrong position of a
 tooth, by  causing  a  continued  tension
 of  that  part of  the gum  which  invests
 its alveolus, sooner or later, gives rise
 to a sort of  chronic  inflammation in it
 and the  alveolo-dental periosteum, and
 a gradual wasting of its substance, about
 the  mal-placed  organ.    Tooth-ache,
 too, from  whatever cause it originates,
 often produces the same effects, and the
formation  of salivary calculus upon the
teeth, however  small the quantity,  is
likewise prejudicial to their health. 
GUM
331
18
GUM
  All of these may occur independent-
ly of the state of the general health.  A
bad arrangement of the best constituted
teeth, and tooth-ache, may be produced
by a multitude of accidental causes, in-
dependently of the functional operations
of the other parts of the body.
  Therefore, Avhile the appearance and
physical condition of  this peculiar and
highly vascular structure, are influenc-
ed,  in no inconsiderable degree, by the
habit of body, they are not diagnostics
that always, and with  unerring certain-
ty,' indicate the pathognomic state of the
general system.  It can,  however, in
by the far larger number of cases, where
the gums are in an unhealthy condition,
be readily ascertained,  whether the dis-
ease is altogether the result of local irri-
tation, or whether it has  been favored
by a constitutional tendency.  A com-
parison of the different effects, that are
produced upon them by the same causes,
in different  individuals,  wiU enable a
careful observer, in most instances, to
decide without much difficulty.
  In childhood, or  during adolescence,
when the formative powers of the body
are aU  in active exercise, and the ner-
vous susceptibUities of every part of the
human frame highly acute, the  sympa-
thies between the gums and other parts
of  the  organism, and particularly the
stomach, are,  perhaps, greater  than at
any other period of hfe.  The  general
health, too, at this time, is more fluctu-
ating, and with all the changes this un-
dergoes, the gums vary.   Moreover,
there are operations which are carried
on  beneath and within their substance,
which  are  almost constantly altering
their appearance ar.d  physical  charac-
teristics; and which, being additionally
influenced by various states of health
and habits  of body, it may  readUy be
conceived,  that those which are met
Avith in one case, might be  looked for
in vain in another.
  Having arrived at that age when all
the organs of  the  body are in  the fuU
vigor  of maturity, and not under the
debilitating influences to which they are
subject during the earlier ppriods of life,
the gums  participate  in the  happv
change, and  as  a consequence, present
less variety in their characteristics.  The
general  irritability of the system is not
now so great, the gums are less suscep-
tible to  the  action of irritating agents,
and as a consequence, less frequently
affected with disease;  but as  age ad-
vances, and the  vital energies begin to
diminish, the latent tendencies of the
body  are  re-awakened, and  they  are
again easily excited to morbid  action.
  Mr. George Waite, in treating on the
diseases of the gums, says, "It is a  well
known  and  an  established fact,  that
although we may  consider ourselves
well in health, and in the enjoyment of
all  our  faculties with  their blessings,
still there exists in every one a  diatheses
of a pecuhar nature; each varied dispo-
sition has its own different tendencies;
in one we have a disposition to one  con-
dition, which may be  connected Avith
the venous and artereal system; and, in
another constitution, we have  that  con-
nected with a diseased state of the ner-
vous,  glandular  and  absorbent  sys-
tem."
  After alluding to the indications fur-
nished by the tongue, he  observes, "In
inferring,  therefore,  a priori, that if the
nature of the gum be  properly known
and scrutinized, it will  manifest greater
changes, indicative of the alterations in
the body's  condition, than any  other
part of the frame, I trust that I am borne
out by true physiological facts.  Amongst
other important  considerations, I must
allude to the correctness with  which, if
we have a real practical knowledge of
the gum, we may judge of the extent of
irritation lying dormant in the constitu-
tion.  I must state, from  observations
which I have made with considerable
care for the last thirteen  years,  that  there
is no person in  Avhose  constitution dis-
ease is lurking who has his gums in a
wholesome and  pure  state;  and  that
previously to the development of dis- 
GUM
339
GUM
ease, let it show itself  how it wiU, the
gum becomes  so perceptibly involved
in the changes  as to afford premonitory
forebodings of  the  illness.  In the dis-
eased alterations from scurvy, scrofula,
and other diseases, this  theory is direct-
ly applicable, as also in  changes of high
importance to the health which occur at
middle  age."
   With regard to the alterations which
take place in the breath, he says, the
theories upon the subject, "remain in-
volved  in  considerable  mystery," and
that "the  changes which it is subject to
from the alterations in the habit of body
never occur Avithout an altered appear-
ance in the condition of the gums ; and
this is an   actual fact, which to  eluci-
date any theory on the point, is of more
avail than volumes of the  finest compo-
sition.  It must be admitted that no one
can form  so correct an  estimate of the
condition  of the breath,  as  connected
Avith that of the constitution,  as the
surgeon, who, laying aside all other pro-
fessional occupations, is  compelled  to
be in close contact Avith the mouth and
teeth."
  "It has  always been  observed  that a
mercurial breath has its peculiar taint,
and that  those suffering  from scurvy
have some  peculiarity; but  the  varia-
tions of breath  appear to me so diversi-
fied, that each may easily be detected  by
any person subjected as I have been to
be in close contact Avith various mouths.
The fetor  arising from  false  teeth, and
that from  decayed, can  each be  easily
distinguished."
  "By a wholesome and pure gum it
may be knoAvn that let mercury be given
even to a  great extent,  let  the most
noisome drugs  and  eatables be contin-
ually swallowed, let, lastly, high fever
arise, the  breath avUI be affected but
Avith difficulty,  and  on the discontinu-
ance of medicines will retain all its pris-
tine sweetness, going down through life
pure as the constitution of the person
Avhose lot may be the happiness of pos-
sessing it.
   "On the contrary, there is an irritable
 appearance of the gums which indicate
 an impurity of breath; for a short time
 indeed it  may  prove  wholesome, but
 should any  thing occur to cause the
 least excitement, it assumes an unplea-
 sant fetor, and this is occasionally quite
 insupportable.
   "From all these circumstances it may
 be clearly  seen  that the gums open to
 us an extended  vieAV of many tenden-
 cies which the  constitution evinces to
 disease, and  also that there is  no other
 part of the frame whose outward ap-
 pearances  will  unfold  to us  the real
 character of each diathesis of body with
 equal certainty."
   In  subjects of the most perfect consti-
 tutions,  and during  adolescence, the
 gums present the foUowing appearances.
 They have  a violet color, a firm con-
 sistence, rough  surface; their  margins
 form along  the  outer  surfaces of the
 dental circle, beautiful  and regular fes-
 toons, and their  mucous membrane, as
 well as that which covers all the other
 parts of the mouth, has a fresh, lively,
 roseate appearance.
   The time for  the moulting  of a pri-
 mary tooth is announced some weeks
 before it takes  place by an increased
 redness  and  slight tumefaction of the
 edges and  apices of the gums surround-
 ing it. The dentition of a tooth,  whether
 of the first  or second set, is> also preced-
 ed by similar phenomena in the gums
 through which it is forcing its way, and
 these will be more marked as the condi-
 tion of the system is  unhealthy, or as
 the habit of body is bad.
   If the health of the subject continues
 good, and  the teeth be  well  arranged,
 and their crowns do not wear  off, and
 the necessary attention to their cleanli-
 ness be strictly observed, the character-
 istics just enumerated will be preserved
 through life, except that there will be a
 slight diminution of color in them, from
after the age of puberty until that of the
next  chmacteric  period  of life, Avhen
they Avill again  assume  a  somewhat 
GUM               340                GUM
redder appearance.  But if the health of
the subject becomes impaired, or the
teeth be not regularly arranged, or wear
off, or be not  kept free from  aU lodg-
ments of extraneous matter, the edges
of  the  gums, and  particularly  their
apices betAveen the teeth, avUI  inflame,
SAvell, and become more than ordinarily
sensitive.
  The gradual Avasting or destruction
of the margins of the gums around the
necks of the  teeth  which  sometimes
takes place in persons of the best consti-
tutions, and is supposed by some Avri-
ters to be the result of a general atrophy,
is ascribable, we have not the least doubt,
to some one or other of these causes—
favored,  perhaps, by a diminution  of
vitality in the  teeth, Avhereby  they are
rendered more obnoxious to the more
sensitive  and  vascular  parts  within
Avhich their  roots  are  situated.  That
these are  the  causes of  the affection,
(for it is evidently the result of diseased
action in the  gums,) is rendered more
than probable, by the fact, that it never
occurs Avith  those, who,  from early
childhood, haAre been in the regular and
constant habit of thoroughly cleansing
their teeth from four to five times'a day.
   Mr. Bell, however,  while he  thinks
it may occasionally be an "indication of
a sort of premature  old age," does not
believe it can "always be thus account-
ed for, as it is sometimes seen in young
persons,"  and "doubtless  arises," he
says, "from  the  same cause as those
presently to be considered," (alluding to
what he afterwards says upon the same
subject,) "as  originating  a similar  loss
of  substance  in  these  parts, when at-
tended Avith more or  less of  diseased
action."  We cannot,  for reasons that
have been already assigned, concur with
him in  opinion  that  it  "occasionally
takes place  Avithout any obvious local
or constitutional morbid action."
   Although possessed, as those, in the
larger number of cases, are, whose gums
are such as we have just described, with
the best of constitutions;  they  may, by
intemperance, debauchery, or long pri-
vation of the necessary comforts of life,
or protracted febrile or other severe kinds
of disease, have  their assimilative and
all their other organs  so  enervated, as
to render every part of the body highly
susceptible to  morbid impressions  of
every sort, but  still,  this  general func-
tional derangement, rarely pre-disposes
the structure, now under consideration,
to any of  the more malignant forms of
disease that are occasionally known to
attack it in subjects  possessed of less
favorable  innate constitutions.    The
margins of the gums  may inflame, be-
come turgid, ulcerate,  and recede from
the necks of the teeth, and the whole of
their  substance be involved  in an un-
healthy action, but they will seldom be
attacked with scirrhous or fungous tu-
mors, or bad conditioned ulcers, or affect-
ed with morbid preternatural prurient
growths;  and in  the treatment of their
diseases, we  can always  form a more
favorable prognosis in persons of this
description, than  those coming into the
world Avith some specific morbid consti-
tutional tendency.
  But, the occurrence of severe consti-
tutional disease even  in these subjects,
is followed by an increased  irritabihty
of the gums,  so that the slightest  cause
of local irritation, gives rise to an afflux
of blood to and stasis of this fluid in their
venous  capillaries.
  The teeth  of persons  thus happily
constituted, are  of  the best quality.
They are  of a medium size, both in
length and volume, of a dull or heavy
white, compact in their structure, gen-
erally well arranged, and seldom affect-
ed with caries.
  Another constitution is observed, in
which  the  gums,  though  partaking
somewhat of the characteristics of those
just described, yet, that differ from them
in some particulars.   Their color is of
a deeper vermihon, their  edges rather
thicker, their structure less  firm, and
their  surface not so  rough, but more
humid.  Their mucous membrane has 
GUM
341
GUM
a more lively and animated appearance.
They are rather more sensitive and sus-
ceptible to the action of local irritants,
and their morbid  tendencies  are more
increased by general organic  derange-
ment, than they are in gums possessed
of the appearances first  mentioned.
  Their diseases, though generally easi-
ly cured or arrested by  proper remedial
treatment, are, nevertheless, more obsti-
nate, and when favored by disease of
the general system, assume a still more
aggravated form.  Their predisposition,
in fact, to disease, is so much increased
by severe  and long  continued general
morbid excitement, and especially dur-
ing youth, and by febrile or inflamma-
tory  affections, or  obstructions in  the
parenchymatous organs, that not only
their margins, but their whole substance,
also, sometimes becomes involved in in-
flammation, and  sponginess,  foUowed
by ulceration  of  their edges, and  re-
cession from  the necks of the teeth,
Avhich, in consequence, loosen, and often
drop out.  But gums  of this kind,  hke
those first described, seldom grow down
upon the crowns  of the teeth.   Neither
are they often attacked with scirrhous or
fungous tumors, or any form of disease
resulting in  sanious or  other malignant
conditioned  ulcers.  With diseases of
this kind, they are  not, perhaps, ever
affected, except  in  those cases where
every part of the body has become ex-
ceedingly depraved; and this is an oc-
currence that happens mucfi less  fre-
quently in  habits originally good, than
in those in whom a specific tendency to
such unfavorable morbid constitutional
diatheses was primitively implanted in
the organization.
  The teeth of those whose gums are
possessed of this second description of
characteristics, if weU  arranged,  and
kept constantly clean—and, if the secre-
tions of the mouth  be not vitiated by
general disease,  wiU, in  most cases,
maintain their integrity through life.
  It is only  among  sanguinous persons
that this  description of gums is met
         29*
with, and the teeth of subjects of this
kind are generaUy of an excellent quali-
ty, and though  rather  more  liable  to
be attacked by  caries than those first
noticed, it is seldom that they are affect-
ed Avith it.
  In sanguino-serous and strumous dis-
positions, the gums  are  paler than  in
either  of  the preceding,  and though
their margins are thin and weU festoon-
ed, they exude, after the twenty-fifth or
thirtieth year, a small quantity of muco-
purulent matter, which,  on  pressure,
sometimes is seen to ooze from between
them and the necks of the teeth.   Their
texture is usually firm, and they are not
very liable to become turgid,  and they
often remain in  this condition to a late
period of life, without undergoing any
very   perceptible  change.   Although
their connection with the necks of the
teeth  and alveolar  processes appears
weak, they rarely separate from them.
   In remarking upon  individuals hav-
ing  such constitutions, M. Delabarre
teUs us, that if they "abuse  their physi-
cal powers," by an injudicious regimen
or too much study,  they  become ener-
vated and "are  subject to chronic san-
guinous obstructions of the capillaries of
the lungs, and to profuse hemorrhages."
 Dyspepsia  and diseases  in which the
primae viae generally, is more or less in-
volved,  and chronic hepatitis, are not
unfrequent, and are indicated  by  in-
 creased  irritability,  and,  sometimes, a
pale yellowish appearance of the gums.
In jaundice, the yeUow serosity of the
blood is very apparent in the capillaries
of this structure.
   These  constitutions are  more  com-
mon to females  than males, to the rich
than the poor, and to persons  of seden-
tary habits than to those who use invig-
orating exercises.  If at any time during
life the health is ameliorated,  the gums
assume a fresher and redder appearance,
and the exudation  of  muco-purulent
matter, from between their edges and
the necks of the teeth, ceases.
   In mucous dispositions,  the   gums 
GUM
31'
o
GUM
have a  smooth, shining  appearance,
and are rather more highly colored than
those of the preceding.  Their margins,
also, are thicker, more flabby, and  not
so deeply festooned;  they are more ir-
ritable, and, consequently, more suscep-
tible to morbid  impressions.
  If, to this  disposition, there be com-
bined a scorbutic or scrofulous tendency,
the gums  during  early childhood, in
subjects which,  from scanty and un-
wholesome  diet, have become  greatly
debilitated,  are  liable, besides the ordi-
nary forms of disease that  attack them,
to another—characterized by  their sepa-
ration from, and  exfoliation of the alve-
olar processes—accompanied  by  a con-
stant discharge of sanies.  This form of
disease,  however,  though peculiar to
childhood, and  wholly confined to the
indigent, is by no means common.
  These constitutions are rarely met
Avith, except among  persons who live
in  cellars,  and  damp and  closely con-
fined rooms in large cities, and in low,
damp, and  sickly  districts of country.
The mucous membrane  in  such sub-
jects is exceedingly  irritable, and  se-
cretes a large quantity of fluid.
  In alluding to this species  of disposi-
tion, M. Delabarre says, "in children,
the skin is ordinarily white and tender;
nevertheless, it is sometimes brown and
wrinkled.  They are usually fragile and
Aveak; their blood is pale, their nutri-
tion is imperfectly effected.  In females,
the vertebral  column  is  disposed to
curve  about the age of  puberty,  be-
cause,"  says he,  "at this period,  the
vital  energies  are  principally directed
towards the uterus, and in consequence,
although so very necessary  in the  os-
seous  system, there  they  appear to be
weak.
  "The number of observations  that  I
have collected during  my practice in
the city, and in  several  public  institu-
tions,  have  confirmed me  in the opin-
ion, that it is in this  constitution, espe-
cially, (aUuding to the mucous,) that the
children of whom  I have just spoken,
are met with.  The organic life in them
has so little energy, that a local cause on
a  certain point, operates  Avith  greater
activity than  it Avould otherwise do, sen-
sibly diminishes the assimilative force of
almost all the others.  It is also probable,
that the development of ganglionic ob-
structions during dentition,  are, many
times, OAving to the  diminution of the
sensibitity in the lymphatics.
  "We may also remark,"  says he,
"that their skin being very susceptible,
the sympathy established between it and
the mucous  membranes, renders  indi-
viduals of this kind very liable to con-
tract rheums, and gastric and intestinal
affections; they are, likewise, subject to
easy night SAveats, and  vomitings  of a
sero-mucous  fluid," &c.
  But,  persons  even thus unhappily
constituted, do, sometimes, by a change
of residence and judicious  regimen, ac-
quire  tolerably good constitutions.  Lit-
tle advantage, hoAvever, is derived from
these, unless  they are had recourse to
before the twenty-fifth or thirtieth  year
of age, though they may  prove benefi-
cial at a much later period.
  The gums, in subjects in whom there
exists a scorbutic tendency, have a red-
dish-broAvn color; their margins are im-
perfectly  festooned,   and  thick;  their
structure rather disposed to become tur-
gid, and ever ready, on the presence of
the slightest cause of local irritation, to
take on a morbid action.   When  thus
excited, the blood accumulates in their
vessels—where, from its highly carbon-
ized state, it  gives to  the gums a dark,
purple, or   broAvn  appearance;  they
swell, and become spongy and flabby,
and bleed from the slightest touch.  And
to these symptoms,  supervene the ex-
halation of a fetid odor, the destruction
of the bond of union betAveen them and
the necks of  the teeth, suppuration and
recession  of  their margins  from  the
same—gradual wasting of the alveolar
cavities,  the  loosening, and not  un-
frequently,   the  loss  of several,  or
the whole of the teeth.  These are the 
GUM                343               GUM
most  common results, but, sometimes,
they take on other and more aggravated
forms of diseased action.  Preternatural
prurient groAvths of their substance,
fungous and scirrhous tumors, ichorous
and other mahgnant  conditioned ulcers
are occasionally met  with here, in per-
sons  in whom there exists a scorbutic
taint.
   The occurrence of alveolar abscess in
 dispositions of this kind is often foUowed
 by necrosis and  exfoliation of portions
 of the maxillary bone, and the  effects
 which result to  the gums from it  are
 always more pernicious than  in  habits
 less depraved.
   The development   of the  morbid
 changes that take place  in this structure,
 even in  subjects of this kind, while
 their character is influenced, if not  de-
 termined,  by  a  specific constitutional
 tendency, are, nevertheless, referable to
 an immediate or proximate cause, and,
 were this the proper place, we could cite
 numerous  cases tending directly to es-
 tablish this pathological position; but as
 this  constitutes no  part  of my  present
 design, we shall content ourself with
 what we have already  said.
    In scrofulous dispositions the gums
 have a  pale  bluish  appearance,  and
 Avhen subjected to  local irritation, they
 become  flabby,  exhale a  nauseating
 odor, detach themselves from the necks
 of the teeth, and their apices grow down
 betAveen the teeth.  The blood circulates
 through them  languidly, and  debihty
  seems to pervade their whole substance.
  They are exceedingly irritable, and not
  unfrequently take on  aggravated forms
  of disease, and, as it  often happens, to
  this, as well  as to  the preceding habit,
  there are combined  tendencies which
  favor the production  of ill conditioned
  tumors and ulcers.
    The  indications furnished  by  the
  gums of a mercurial diathesis in the
  system, are morbid sensibility, increased
  vascular and glandular action, foulness,
  bleeding from the most trifling  injuries,
  pale, bluish  appearance  of their  sub-
stance, turgidity of the points or apices
between the teeth, and sloughing.  The ■
effects,  however, resulting to  these
parts from the use of this medicine dif-
fer in different individuals according to
the general constitutional susceptibihty,
the quantity taken into the system, and
the length of time its use has been contin-
ued.  In persons of very  irritable habits,
a  single dose wiU sometimes produce
ptyahsm, and so increase the suscepti-
bihty of the gums, that the secretions
of the mouth, in their altered state, wiU
at once rouse  up a morbid action  in
them.
   The  influence of a mercurial diathe-
sis upon these parts, is not unfrequently
so great as to  result in the loss of the
whole  of  the teeth; but with  these ef-
fects both the dental and medical prac-
titioner are too  familiar  to require any
 further description.
   FinaUy, we would observe, that the in-
 dications  of the several characteristics
 to which  we have now briefly alluded,
 may not be correct  in every particular,
 and there are others which Ave have not
 mentioned; yet, that they will generally
 be found so, we are persuaded every one
 whose attention has been for  any con-
 siderable  length of time particularly di-
 rected to the subject,  Will  agree.  As a
 general  rule,  persons  of  a full habit,
 though  possessed  of mixed  tempera-
 ments, and in the enjoyment of Avhat is
 usually caUed  good health, have gums
 that are well colored, with rather thick
  margins, and that  are  very susceptible
 to local irritation, and with this descrip-
  tion of individuals, inflammation, tur-
 gidity, and suppuration of the gums are
  very  common.  To  prevent this, con-
  stant attention to the cleanliness of the
  teeth is indispensable.
    Professor  Schill says,  the  "gum is
 pale in chlorosis and anaemia;  of a pur-
 ple red  color  before an  active hemor-
 rhoidal discharge, and in cases of dys-
 menorrhoea; of a dark  red color, spon-
 gy, and bleeding readily in scurvy  and
 diabetes mellitus,  and  after the  use. of 
GUM
344
GUM
  mercury.  Spongy growths indicate ca-
  ries of the subjacent bone."*
    Regular  periodical  bleedings  of the
  gums in dysmenorrhoea, and particular-
  ly  in  scorbutic and  mucous subjects,
  are  not  unfrequent,  nor  in  any  case
  where they are in a turgid condition.
   Spongy growth of the gums in scor-
  butic and scrofulous persons, often re-
  sult from irritation produced by decayed
  teeth, and are not, therefore, ahvays to
  be regarded as an indication of caries of
  the subjacent bone.
   Mr. George Waite says, "a change
  of residence to a  damp cfimate will
  often rouse up in  the gums a great de-
 gree of vascularity. In the damp places
 of England and Ireland, the appearances
 which the gums present are of a turgid
 and vascular nature. In the damp coun-
 tries of France, these conditions of the
 gums run a much  greater length from
 the circumstance of the difference in the
 constitutions  of the two  nations.   In
 the  damps of Germany and  Switzer-
 land, persons also lose their teeth early
 in life, the climate engenders malaria
 and low fevers, enfeebles the powers of
 digestion, and brings on rheumatic affec-
 tions, with languor and general constitu-
 tional debility."
   Of the correctness of Mr. Waite's ob-
 servations there can be no question, and
 they  go to establish what has been said
 in regard to the predisposing cause of dis-
 ease in the gums—namely, that the en-
 ervation of the vital powers of the body,
 from whatever cause produced, increases
 theirsusceptibilitytomorbidimpressions.
  Gums, Diseases of.  The gums and
 alveolar processes,  from apparently the
 same cause, frequently assume various
morbid  conditions.   An  unhealthy ac-
tion in one, is almost certain  to be fol-
lowed by disease  in the  other.  The
most common form of disease, to which
these parts are subject, is usually though
very improperly, denominated  scurvy,

  * Outlines of Pathological Semeiology, page
168 of the Select Medical Library edition.
  from its supposed  resemblance to scor-
  butus, "a genus of disease in the class
  cachexia}, and order impctiginis, of Cul-
  len."   To  this  disease,  however,  it
  bears no resemblance.  Instead, there-
  fore of being  designated  by this term,
  it might with more propriety be caUed
  inflammation  and   sponginess  of  the
  gums, accompanied  by recession of their
  margins, and destruction of the  alveolar
 processes, which seems to express more
  clearly the  condition of the parts, and
  the nature of the disease.  The other
  affections  to which  the gums and alveoli
  are liable, will be  noticed under their
 appropriate  names.
   The diseases of the gums and alveo-
 lar processes, are divided  by Mr. Bell,
 into two classes: "those  which  are the
 result  of  local irritation,  and  those
 which arise from constitutional causes."
   But were  it  not  for local irritation,
 the constitutional tendencies to disease,
 in these parts, would rarely manifest
 themselves;  and, on the  other hand,
 were it not for constitutional tendencies,
 the effects of local irritation Avould sel-
 dom be of a serious character. "Thus,"
 says Mr. B., "the same cause of irrita-
 tion, which, in a healthy person, would
 occasion only simple abscess, might, in
 a different constitution, result in ulcera-
 tion of a decidedly cancerous type; and
 in others, in  the production of fungous
 tumors, or the formation  of scrofulous
 abscesses."
   Each constitution has  its own pecu-
 liar tendency, or,  in other words, is
 more favorable  to the  development of
 some forms of disease than others, and
 this tendency is always increased or di-
 minished,  according as the functional
 operations  of the body, generaUy, are
 healthily  or  unhealthily  performed.—
 Thus, in an individual of a mucous habit,
 derangement of the digestive organs in-
 creases the tendency superinduced by it
to certain  forms of diseased  action in
particular  organs, and in  none more
than the gums.  A local irritant, which
Avould  not before have produced any 
GUM
345
GUM
thing more than  slight inflammation of
the margins and apices  of the gums,
would now give rise  to  turgidity and
sponginess of  their  whole  structure.
The same, too,  may  be  said with re-
gard to a person of a scrofulous or scor-
butic habit.
   The susceptibUity of the gums to the
action of morbid irritants, is always in-
creased by enfeeblement of the vital
powers of the body.   Hence, persons
laboring under excessive grief, melan-
choly,  or any  other  affection of  the
mind, or constitutional disease, tending
to enervate the physical energies of the
system, are exceedingly subject to in-
flammation, sponginess and ulceration
of their gums.   But, notwithstanding
the increase of susceptibihty which the
gums derive from certain constitutional
causes and states of the general health,
these influences, in the majority of cases,
may aU be counteracted  by a strict ob-
servance of the rules of dental hygiene;
or, in other words, by regular attention
to the cleanliness of the teeth.
   A local disease, situated in a remote
part, often has the effect of diminishing
the tendency of the gums to disease, but
Avhen, from its violence  or long contin-
uance, the general health becomes im-
plicated, the susceptibihty of these parts
is augmented.
   Although deriving  the predisposition
Avhich they have to disease, from a spe-
cific, morbid, constitutional tendency,
they, nevertheless, when diseased, con-
tribute  in no smaU degree to derange
the whole organism.  An unhealthy ac-
tion here vitiates the fluids of the mouth,
and renders them unfit for the purposes
for  which they are  designed; hence,
Avhen these parts are restored to health,
whether from the loss of the teeth, or the
treatment to which they may have been
subjected, the condition of the general
health  is always immediately improved.
   Thus, whUe the susceptibihty of the
gums to morbid impressions is influ-
enced by the state of the general health,
the latter is equaUy influenced by the
condition of the former.   And, not only
is a healthy condition of the gums es-
sential to the general health, but it is also
essential to the health of the teeth and
alveolar  processes.  From the intimate
relationship that subsists between  the
former and latter, disease cannot exist
in one,  without,  in some  degree  at
least, affecting the other.  Caries of the
teeth, for example, often gives rise to in-
flammation of the gums and alveolo-
dental periosteum; and, on  the other
hand, inflammation of these parts, viti-
ates the fluids of the mouth, and often
causes them to exert a corrosive action
upon the teeth, and graduaUy to destroy
the alveolar processes.
  Gums, Effects of  Lead on the.
It would seem from the  observations of
Dr.  Burton,  that the  introduction  of
lead into the  system, whether by per-
sons who have been exposed to  the ac-
tion of it in the usual course of their avo-
cations, or who had taken acetate of lead
medicinaUy, imparts to the edges of the
gums a  leaden-blue.  On the other hand,
Dr. Chowne states, that he has met with
numerous instances in  which the blue
line on the gums was observable with-
out  any  evidence  that  lead had been
taken into the system.
   Gums,  Preternatural  Prurient
Growth of.  This disease is character-
ized by  swelling  and inflammation of
the gums, a morbid growth of their sub-
stance ;  so that, in some instances, the
crowns of the teeth are entirely covered,
and  mastication rendered  exceedingly
difficult and painful.  The gums, when
affected  with it, are of a dark  purple
color,  with  thick,  smooth,  rounded
edges, and discharge a very fetid matter.
They hang loosely around the teeth, and
are attended with a pecuhar itching sen-
sation, which, at times,  is very annoy-
ing; they  are  also  so  very  sensitive,
that even the pressure of the tips pro-
duces pain.  Their vessels are turgid,
and often bleed  profusely  "from  the
slightest touch.
  The breath of a person thus affected, 
GUM
146
GUM
is  exceedingly  offensive, the saliva  is
vitiated, and so viscid, that it is even dif-
ficult to spit.   The secretions of the
mouth,  generaUy,  are  so  acrid, that
gold, even tAventy carats fine, is readily
discolored by them.
   This peculiar affection, though caused
by local irritants, appears, nevertheless,
to be dependent on a cachectic tendency
of the general system.   How far it may
be influenced by local causes, the author
is unable to determine.   It often attacks
the gums  of  individuals whose  teeth
are perfectly sound, and regular in their
arrangement;  but the author has never
seen a case Avhere tartar was not present,
though, in some instances, the quantity
Avas so smaU,  that he  doubted whether
it could have had any agency in the pro-
duction of the  disease.   A diseased ac-
tion, however, may have been  first ex-
cited in the gums, by its presence,
Avhich, aftenvards, having been favored
by a constitutional predisposition, may
have continued until  it induced this
peculiar morbid condition.
   The  first thing to be attended to in the
treatment of this disease, is the removal
of aU dead and such other teeth as may,
in any way, irritate the gums.  The
morbid groAvth of the gums should next
be removed, by making a horizontal in-
cision entirely  through to the crowns  of
the teeth.   This  should be carried   as
far as the morbid growth itself extends,
even if that  includes the whole dental
circle.  After  this operation has  been
performed, the gums should be freely
scarified, by passing a lancet  between
all the teeth entirely down to the alveoli,
in order that the vessels may discharge
their accumulated blood.  This should
be repeated several times, and at  inter-
vals of four or five  days.   Meanwhile
the  mouth should  be  washed several
times a day, with some astringent and
detergent lotion; and occasionally with
a weak solution of nitratum argentum.
The tartar also, should  be  removed,  as
soon as the gums  have sufficiently col-
lapsed.
  During  the employment of  these
local means, the constitutional  health
should not be neglected; but such reme-
dies prescribed, as may be best calculat-
ed to countejract and break down every
tendency to the disease.  Particular at-
tention must be paid to regimen, and
excesses and intemperance  of every
kind, prohibited.  Suitable exercise, and
vegetable diet, should, at the same time,
be prescribed.  If any animal food be
used,   it should be  fresh,  and consist
principally of beef,  mutton, and fowls.
Vegetables, fruits, and acid beverages,
such as spruce beer, lime juice, and in-
fusions of malt and vinegar, should be
recommended, for the purpose of restor-
ing to the fluids their healthy qualities.
  Another and very important indica-
tion, is perfect cleanhness  of the teeth.
If particles of food or other foreign mat-
ter  be permitted to remain along the
edges  of the gums, or betAveen the teeth,
the cure, to say the  least, will be greatly
retarded, if not prevented.  As  before
directed, the teeth should be thoroughly
cleaned, five times a day, Avith an elas-
tic  brush and  Avaxed floss silk.  The
importance of this should be most stren-
uously urged upon  the patient.
  The author  has  met with several
cases   of this  description  of diseased
gums, which, when treated as here re-
commended, were uniformly restored to
health; so that he does  not hesitate to
say, that most of the failures, which oc-
cur in  the treatment of  this, as well as
every other sort of spongy  and inflam-
ed gums, is  attributable to  inefficient
treatment.
  Gums, Turgescence and Ulcera-
tion of. This affection is characterized
by inflammation and sponginess of the
gums, frequently, recession of their mar-
gins, and a gradual  wasting or destruc-
tion of the alveolar  processes.  They
also assume a deep  florid or dark pur-
ple appearance;  their edges are thick,
round, and on being pressed, discharge
matter, varying in  appearance from
healthy pus to that  of the most fetid 
GUM
347
GUM
 kind.   They are  sometimes  slightly
 painful,  usually  very  sensitive,  and
 bleed from the most trifling injury.
   The disease generally makes its  ap-
 pearance round the lower  front teeth
 and the upper  molares,  opposite  the
 mouths of the salivary ducts, and in the
 immediate vicinity of aching,  decayed,
 dead,  loose, or  irregularly  arranged
 teeth, or in the neighborhood of roots of
 -teeth, and from thence it extends to the
 other teeth.  The rapidity of its progress
 is dependent on the age, health, and con-
 stitutional temperament or habit of body
 of the  individual,  and  the  nature  of
 the  local irritants  which have given
 rise to it.  In some cases, it exists for
 years, without occasioning any percepti-
 ble recession of the gums, or destruction
 of the alveolar processes—the only un-
 pleasant   consequences  attending  it,
 being a vitiated state of the secretions of
 the  mouth, and an offensive breath.  In
 other instances, it progresses so rapidly,
 that, in  a  few weeks or months, both
 the  gums and alveoli become involved
 in complicated disease.
   When inflammation in  the  gums is
 favored by a constitutional tendency, it
 soon extends to the alveolar and dental
 periosteum, and often causes a  deposi-
 tion of bony matter at  the bottom of the
 alveoli.  The edges of the gums and al-
 veolar processes are, at the same time,
 gradually  wasted,  so  that,  sooner or
 later, the  teeth,  by the destruction of
 the  sockets are loosened and caused to
 drop out.
  Nor do the pernicious  effects of  this
 disease always stop here.  Constitution-
 al symptoms often supervene, more j
 vital organs become implicated, and the
 health of the  general  system is some-
 times very seriously impaired.  Hence,
 the  constitutional  improvement that is
 often observed after the loss ofnhe teeth
of those  persons, whose mouths have
for a long time been affected  with this
disease.  No condition of the mouth has
a greater tendency to deteriorate  its  se-
cretions,  and  impair the function  of'
  mastication, than  the one now under
  consideration.
    In forming an opinion  of its charac-
  ter, and the consequences that are like-
  ly to  result from  it, the  practitioner
  should be governed, not  only by the
  health and age of the patient, and the
  local causes concerned in its production,
  but he should also endeavor to  ascer-
  tain, whether it is connected Avith a con-
  stitutional tendency, or is purely a local
  disease.   To determine these points,
  will  often  require  much  pathological
  knowledge, because its causes are fre-
  quently involved  in considerable ob-
 scurity.  Hence, some have been led to
 believe, that  the wasting of the  gums
  and alveolar  processes, may sometimes
 take place without being connected with
  any  special, local or  constitutional
  causes; that it  is  identical with that
  process by  which the teeth of aged per-
  sons are removed, and that Avhen it oc-
  curs  in persons not past the meridian of
 life, it is symptomatic of a sort of prema-
  ture old age.
   Mr.  Bell,  on this subject, remarks:
  "In forming a judgment upon  cases of
  this description, however, and even on
 those in which the  loss of substance is
  associated Avith more or less of diseased
 action, it is necessary to recollect, that the
 teeth are generally removed in old age
 by this identical mode, namely, the de-
 struction of their support, by the absorp-
 tion of the gums and alveolar processes;
 and as  this step towards general decay
 commences at very  different periods in
 different constitutions, it may, doubtless,
 in many cases, even in persons not past
 the middle period of life, be  considered
 as an indication of a sort of premature
 old age, or  an anticipation, at least, of
 senile decay, as far as regards these parts
 of the body."
   Though the loss of the  teeth, by the
wasting of the gums and alveolar pro-
cesses, is often an attendant on advanced
age, the author does not beheve it to be a
necessary consequence of  senility,  for
we occasionally see persons of seventy, 
GUM                348                GUM
and even eighty years of age, whose teeth
are as firmly fixed in their sockets, and
their  gums as little impaired,  as they
were at twenty.  He does not recollect
ever to have seen a case  of this sort, in
which there was not evidently some
diseased  action in  the parts.   But it is
of little importance whether it be the re-
sult of old age, a constitutional tendency,
functional derangement  of some other
part,  or of local irritation, since  the  ef-
fects are  always the same.
   But the effects  of the disease under
consideration, do  not always manifest
themselves  in the  manner  here  de-
scribed.   The diseased action often ex-
tends to  the alveolo-dental  periosteal
tissues.   They become the seat  of sub-
acute inflammation, are  thickened and
pour  out an acrimonious  fluid which
gradually breaks down and destroys the
walls of the alveoli, so that the extremi-
ties of the roots of the teeth of the upper
jaw, so far protrude  through them and
the gums as to be a source of great an-
noyance  to the lips  and inner walls of
the cheeks.   The teeth of first dentition
are more liable to be thus affected than
those of  second, and in this  case they
should always  be  immediately extract-
ed. It is  not necessary that there should
be aching,  decayed, dead, irregularly
arranged teeth, or  tartar, to irritate the
gums and alveolar membrane. The  ar-
rangement of the  teeth  is often such,
even  when regular, as  to produce  in-
flammation  in  certain  parts  of the
mouth, which sooner or later,  accord-
ing to the constitutional tendency,  re-
sults in disease.  Hence it is, that when
all the teeth are sound, we occasionally
see a gradual wasting of such parts of
the gums as are most prominent, espe-
cially those which surround the cuspi-
dati and  the palatine fangs of  the upper
molar teeth.
   The secretions  of the mouth, espe-
cially the mucous, are often rendered, by
certain conditions of the general system,
so acrid, as to become a source of great
irritation  to the gums.   And  it  may be
that all the teeth, as their vital powers
are weakened by age, are, to a  certain
extent, rendered obnoxious to the more
highly organized and  sensitive parts
within which their roots are  contained.
  Thus it will be seen, that local agents
may exert a  considerable influence in
the production of this disease, without
being easUy detected.  It should also be
recollected, that a person  of sixty, sev-
enty, or even eighty years of age, is ex-
posed to  the  same, and perhaps, more
powerful  local causes of irritation than
one  of twenty,  and the reason  the
effects  are not always developed in ear-
tier life, is, that there are greater tenden-
cies to  this disease  in the constitutions
of some than in those of others.
  Dr. Koecker, a practitioner who has
had the most ample opportunities of ob-
serving this  affection in all its various
forms,  says, he has never seen a case of
it in which tartar was not present.
  This disease attacks  persons of all
ages, ranks and conditions, and in every
country, cUmate  and nation.  "I have
observed," says  Dr. Koecker, "the in-
habitants of the most opposite countries,
the Russians, the French, the Italians,
the  Spaniards,  the  Portuguese,  the
English, the  Africans, the  East and
West Indians, and those of  the United
States, to be all more or less liable to it."
  It is, however, more  frequently met
with in the  lower than in the higher
classes of society.   Persons  who pay
no attention to the cleanliness and health
of their teeth, are particularly subject to
it.  With sailors, and those  Avho hve
principally on salt provisions, it is very
prevalent.  "Persons of robust constitu-
tions," says the author just quoted, "are
much more liable to this affection of the
gums,  than those of delicate habits; and
it shows itself in its  worst forms, oftener
after the age of thirty than at any earlier
period."
  Every thing that tends to produce in-
flammation in the  gums and alveolar
processes, may be regarded as exciting
causes of the disease.  To those that 
GUM
349
GUM
 have already been enumerated, may be
 added, accumulations of extraneous mat-
 ter on the teeth, and along the edges of
 the gums, exostoses  of the roots of the
 teeth, artificial teeth badly  inserted, or
 of improper materials, and dental opera-
 tions injudiciously  performed.    The
 use of tooth-brushes wrongly construct-
 ed, and improper tooth powders, espe-
 cially charcoal, may be reckoned among
 its exciting  causes.  Acids of aU sorts,
 we are told  by Dr. Fitch, produce "ir-
 ritability of  the gums  about the necks
 of the teeth."
   Every condition of the general system
 that tends to increase the susceptibility
 of the gums to the action of local irri-
 tants, favors the  production of the dis-
 ease ; and every  thing that  tends to in-
 duce such conditions, may be regarded
 as its predisposing causes;  such as bil-
 ious  and inflammatory fevers, the ex-
 cessive use of mercurial medicines, ve-
 nereal poison, and  intemperance and
 debauchery.   Any deterioration  of  the
 fluids of the body is  peculiarly condu-
 cive to it. Persons of cachectic disposi-
 tions are far more subject to it, and gen-
 eraUy in its worst forms,  than those
 possessed of good constitutional health.
   Strumous individuals sometimes have
 an affection of the gums, which differs
 from the one  just described in  many
 respects.  The gums, instead of being
 purple and swollen, are paler and harder
 than  ordinary, and,  on being pressed,
 discharge a muco-purulent matter,  of
 a dingy  white color.  They often  re-
 main in  this condition  for years, with-
 out appearing  to undergo any physical
 alteration, or to affect the alveolar pro-
 cesses.
  This variety of disease of the gums,
is principally  confined  to persons that
have very white teeth, is much less likely
to  attack males than  females; and has
never, so far as we have been able to as-
certain, been  mentioned by any dental
writer.  Mr. Fox speaks of ulceration
of the gums of scrofulous children; but
that is of frequent occurrence, and is
     30
 characterized by the usual signs of in-
 flammation.  This rarely occurs before
 the age  of eighteen or twenty;  and,
 though unquestionably the result of sub-
 acute  inflammation, yet the gums ex-
 hibit no inflammatory symptoms;  but,
 on the contrary, are paler, less sensitive,
 and possessed of less warmth than  usu-
 al.  It is never attended with tumefac-
 tion nor by absorption, except in its ad-
 vanced stages; whereas, the affection of
 which Mr. Fox  speaks is always  ac-
 companied by both.
   Its effects are the most simple and in-
 nocent of any form of disease to which
 the gums are hable; but the cure of the
 disease is often very difficult and some-
 times exceedingly tedious.
   Inflammation and  sponginess of the
 gums  are generaUy regarded by dentists  «
 as being capable of cure, and so far as
 regards the restoration of the gums to
 health, they  most assuredly  are;  but
 when  the gums have lost their connec-
 tion with the teeth, a re-union can never
 be established.
   The gums, after  having been once
 affected in this manner, are more liable
 to be attacked again, because the necks
 of the teeth,  having become  exposed,
 present a surface more favorable to the
 collection of tartar, and more irritating
 to the edges  of  the gums  than  the
 crowns of these organs.
   The treatment of spongy and inflam-
 ed gums, in order to be successful, must
 be thorough.   No temporizing,  half-
 way measures wiU answer.  If an  en-
 ergetic and  properly conducted plan of
 treatment be pursued, a favorable result
 may always be anticipated; or, at least,
 the progress of the disease may be ar-
 rested.
   Local irritation being the cause of the
 affection, its curative indications are ob-
 vious.   AU dead and loose teeth should
 be extracted, salivary calculus and every
 other sort of offensive, irritating matter,
should be removed; "all such teeth,"
says Dr. Koecker, "as from their irregu-
lar situation or  direction, excite a me- 
GUM
350
GUM
   chanical irritation, provided this irregu-
   larity cannot be remedied  by fifing, or
   by  cutting  away the irritating  parts,
   should also be removed."
     Irregularity of the teeth is so produc-
   tive of irritaton to the gums and alveolar
   membrane, that these parts are rarely in
   a perfectly healthy condition, whenever
   it is very considerable; but instead of at-
   tempting to remedy it by filing such as
   crowd against, or impinge upon each
   other, the  cause should  at once be re-
   moved, by extracting one or two teeth.
   The irritation  occasioned  by the pres-
   sure  of the incisores, may, in young
   persons, generally be removed by the
   extraction of a bicuspis on each side of
   the mouth;  but the propriety  of this
   operation can never be ascertained, ex-
l  cept by a careful examination of each
   individual case.  "A molar tooth,  that
   has no antagonist, should not," says
   Dr. Koecker, "be permitted to remain,
   particularly if it be situated in the upper
   jaw."  This opinion is  certainly in ac-
   cordance with the indications of nature;
   for when a tooth has  been deprived of
   its antagonist, it generally soon becomes,
   more or less, protruded from its socket,
   by  a deposition of bony matter at the
   bottom of the alveolus.  The gum, too,
   around it, assumes a more florid appear-
   ance, its margin becomes thickened, and
   the tooth itself is rendered more or less
   sensitive.
     "In  this manner," says the  author
   just quoted,  "the loss  of  one molar
   tooth, produces the destruction of its re-
   maining antagonist.   This is  effected,
   hoAvever, after a struggle  of nature, of
   of very long duration, which will always
   involve, in  some degree,  all the other
   teeth in a  like diseased  condition; itis
   necessary,  therefore,  to prevent  this
   morbid condition, particularly pernicious
   in  this disease, by the extraction of the
   tooth, or any  molar so situated."
      Although a molar tooth, after having
   lost its antagonist, is generally produc-
    tive of bad consequences, it may, some-
    times, be aUowed to remain with impu-
nity.   Its  removal  is necessary only
when it acts as an irritant to the gums.
  To the  cure of  this disease, it is es-
sential that a decided impression should
be made upon it at once;  consequently,
no time should be lost in the removal
of its  causes.  If there  be  any  teeth
Avhich act as  irritants, and cannot be
restored to health, they  should be im-
mediately  removed.   The advantage
derived from this operation, says  a dis-
tinguished practitioner, (Dr. Koecker,)
would be  either partly or whoUy lost,
were it performed at different periods.
This observation  has been verified by
the author more than once.  When he
has  been prevented  by  the timidity of
his patient from extracting all the offend-
ing  teeth, at the first sitting, he has
always found the  cure much retarded,
and in some  instances, almost entirely
defeated.
  This operation having been complet-
ed, Dr. Koecker thinks that it is  better
to wait ten or  fifteen days, before  the
tartar is removed.  The   operations of
extraction and cleansing should, for rea-
sons before stated, be performed with as
little delay as possible; but it is  of no
great consequence which is performed
first; though,  on  some  accounts, it is
desirable, that so much of the tartar as
can, should be removed  at one and the
first sitting.  Several sittings, however,
as has been before remarked, are often
requisite for its complete removal.
   The  bleeding  from the  gums and
sockets, occasioned by these several ope-
rations, should be promoted by frequent-
ly Avashing the mouth with  warm wa-
ter; and Avhen the gums  are much swol-
len, they  should be, from time to time,
freely  scarified with a  sharp  lancet.
This operation is highly recommended
by Messrs. Hunter, Fox, and Bell, and
indeed its good effects are so apparent,
that it should never be neglected. The
application of leeches to the gums, is
also attended Avith the most decided ad-
vantage.  For the last four or five years,
we have been accustomed, in obstinate 
GUM               351               GUM
 cases, to recommend their employment,
 and always with decided benefit.
   After the gums have began to recover,
 the cure wiU be  much accelerated, by
 washing the mouth several times a day
 with some tonic and astringent lotion.
   Mr. Fox says, that great  benefit is
 derived from the use of sea water, "and,
 therefore,"  says  he, "I ahvays recom-
 mend it whenever it can be procured;"
 adding, that if the gums  be tender, it
 should be used warm.  The author is un-
 able to speak of the merits of this reme-
 dy from experience; but he would sup-
 pose, that no decided  advantage could
 result from it.   He has, in cases where
 there was  much soreness and ulcera-
 tion of the gums, prescribed  the follow-
 ing :  J$.—Sub. boras, soda, 9 ij; de-
 coct, sage, § vj; honey, § i.  Misce.
   As a wash for the  mouth, Dr. Fitch
 recommends a decoction  of the  inner
 bark of green white oak, which the au-
 thor has,  in several  cases,  prescribed,
 and always found it to be beneficial.
   If, notwithstanding the use of the
 means here recommended,  matter still
 be discharged from  around the necks of
 the teeth, and the gums continue spon-
 gy, and manifest no disposition to heal,
 their edges should  be touched with a
 solution of the nitratumargentum., which
 wiU seldom fail  to impart  to them a
 healthy action.  It may be used in the
 proportion  of  one or one and a half
 grains to one  ounce of  water.   The
 most convenient mode of applying it, is
 with a camel's-hair pencil.  Its use  is
 recommended  by Mr. Fox, and wiU of-
 ten  succeed, Avhen all  other  remedies
 fad.   In those  cases where  the matter
 discharged from the edges of the gums
 has a nauseating and disagreeable odor,
 "a Aveak solution," says he, "is an ex-
 cellent remedy for  rendering the mouth
 sweet and comfortable;" but in using it
in this way, precaution  is necessary to
prevent its getting in the fauces, as, in that
case, it will cause a disagreeable nausea.
  While the means here directed for the
cure of this disease are being employed,
 a recurrence of its exciting causes must
 be studiously guarded against.  Tartar
 and foreign matter of every kind, should
 be prevented from accumulating on the
 teeth, by a free and frequent use of a
 suitable brush and waxed  floss silk,
 which, until a healthy action be impart-
 ed to the gums, should be used at least
 five times a day; as, for example, im-
 mediately after rising in the morning,
 after each  meal, and before  retiring at
 night. The application of the brush may
 at first  occasion some pain;  but its use
 should, nevertheless,  be  persisted  in;
 for, without  it, all the other remedies
 will be of but little avail.  The friction
 produced by it, besides keeping the teeth
 clean, is of great service to the gums, as
 it imparts to them a healthy action.
  Treatment, different from that  here
 described, is necessary for the form of
 disease,  which  we noticed,  as  being
 characterized by a preternatural pale-
 ness of the gums, and by a discharge of
 muco-purulent matter, from  between
 their edges and the  necks of the teeth.
 In the first case of this disease treated by
 the  author, he directed astringent and
 detergent lotions  to be used; but these
 did not produce the desired effect.  Hav-
 ing been led  from  his observations in
 this case, to believe that the disease was
 connected with the constitutional health,
 and probably the result of a debilitated
 state of  the  general system, he recom-
 mended in the next case in  which  he
 was  consulted, the use of tonics and
 free exercise in the open air.  This treat-
 ment did not  seem to  be productive of
 any benefit  to the gums.   They still
 appeared debilitated, and, on being press-
 ed, discharged matter from beneath their
 edges.  He advised a continuance of the
 tonics and exercise, and Avith a view of
 exciting inflammation, touched the edges
 of the gums  with nitratum  argentum.
 This had the  desired  effect, and, as he
 had anticipated, a new disease was sub-
 stituted  for the old one; for the cure of
 which he  directed the  mouth to be
washed, five  or six times a day, with 
               GUT

sage  tea,  slightly  impregnated  with
alum, and  sweetened with honey; and
every night and morning, with  warm
salt water; which, as soon  as the ten-
derness of the gums subsided, was used
cold.
  This  treatment  was  perfectly suc-
cessful.    In  about three weeks  the
gums assumed  a  healthy action, ac-
quired their natural color, and the dis-
charge of muco-purulent matter entirely
ceased.   He has since had occasion to
treat several other  cases of  the same
disease; in aU  of which he  adopted a
similar practice, and with like success.
  GUNNELL,  J. S.  Author of a pa-
per entitled, a Remedy for Protrusion of
the Lower Jaw.—Also, of a description
of a Cheek and Lip Protector, or Retrac-
tor, and of an article, entitled a Remedy
for  the Painful Affection  produced by
the Cutting of the Lower Dens Sapien-
tiae, or Wisdom Tooth,  published in
volumes third and fourth of the Ameri-
can Journal of  Dental Science.
  GUSTATORY.   Gustativus;  from
gustus, taste.   Pertaining to taste.
  Gustatory Nerves.  The nerves of
taste.  See Lingual Nerve.
  GUSTUS.  Taste.
  GUT.  Intestine.
  GUTTA. A drop.  Also, apoplexy.
  Gutta Gamba.  Cambogia.
  Gutta  Nigra.   The  black-drop,  a
preparation of opium.
  Gutta Opaca. Cataract.
  Gutta Percha.  The following ob-
servations on the properties and use of
this substance, are taken from an article
by G. F. J. Colburn, surgeon dentist, of
Newark, N. J., published in the Ameri-
can Journal Dental Science, volume 8,
No. 3.  He says, "The new substance,
similar  to  caoutchouc, recently intro-
duced to the notice of the public, called
gutta percha, is the coagulated sap and
milky  juice, of  a whitish grey  color,
which exudes from a tree belonging to
the natural order, sapoteas, a native of
the island  of Singapore, and the dense
forests of the  Malayan peninsula.   It
2               GYM

has many curious  properties.  Below
the temperature of fifty  degrees, it is of
the consistency and hardness of wood.
Unlike caoutchouc, it has httle elasticity,
possessing much  tenacity when drawn
out, and remains Avithout contracting.
  This material may be apphed to many
useful purposes.   For  the  surgeon it
makes excellent bougies, catheters, ene-
ma pipes, splints, &c.
  The dentist may find in it a substitute
for  wax for  taking impressions of the
mouth, it will not adhere  to the teeth,
and becomes  so hard in a few moments
as to be readily  removed without danger
of being disturbed by coming in contact
with  the  cheeks  and  angles  of  the
mouth."
  Mr. C.  says he has employed it for
this purpose, and directs that it be first
"thoroughly  soaked in boiling Avater,
then kneaded and moulded in the same
way as wax to  fit the case; both should
then be immersed, the water shaken off,
and immediately placed  in the  mouth,
and firmly pressed  to its  place."   He
further states, that he has "instituted a
number of experiments  with this sub-
stance in order  to test its  practicability
for fiUing  teeth."  W. P. Blake, dentist
of New York, is  of the opinion that it
may  prove  serviceable  for  temporary
fillings for teeth.
  Gutta  Rosea.   A  cutaneous erup-
tion of the face, of red, shining, suppu-
rative tubercles,  having  an irregular
granular appearance, frequently caused
by excessive drinking.
  Gutta  Serena.  Amaurosis.
  GUT'TUR.  The throat.
  GUTTURAL.  Pertaining to  the
throat.
  Guttural Artery.   The superior
thyroideal artery.
  GUTTURNIA.  The arytenoid car-
tilages.
  GYMNA'SIUM.  A place for bodily
exercise.
  GYMNASTIC. Gymnasticus; from
yvfivos,  naked, because  the  athleta
were stripped.  That part of hygiene,
31 
HiE
353
HM
which consists in bodily exercises, such
as wresthng,  running, using  dumb-
bells, &c.
  GYMNOSIS.  Denudation.
  GYMNOSPER'MIA.  From yvuvos,
naked, and arcepua, a seed.   An order of
the Linna^an class  of plants, compre-
hending  such as have naked, or appa-
rently naked, seeds.
  GYNECOMANIA.   From yvvt),
woman, and jtMwia, madness.  Insanity
from love for women.
  GYNECOMYS'TAX. From yvvtj,
woman, and pvstai;, beard.  The hair on
the female pudendum*
  GYNANTHRO'PUS.   Gynandrus.
An  hermaphrodite, partaking more of
the male than of the female sex.
  GYNATRE'SIA.    From yvvn,  a
woman, and atpntos, imperforate.  Im-
perforation of the  female external parts
of generation.
  GYNE.  A woman.
  GYNIDA.  An hermaphrodite.
  GYPSUM.  Sulphate of lime. Plas-
ter of paris. A native sulphuret of lime,
consisting of 28 parts  of time, 40 of
sulphuric acid, and 18 of water.  When
exposed tc a heat of 400°  Fahrenheit,
the water of the gypsum escapes. After
being properly calcined and pulverised,
if mixed with water  to the consistence
of thin batter, it hardens in a few min-
utes, by a species of crystallization, and
acquires great solidity.  During the first
part of the process of consolidation,  it
expands, by the absorption of the water,
filling  the  small depressions in  any
mould in which it may be  poured.
  In Mechanical Dentistry,  plaster of
paris, or gypsum, is used for  obtaining
casts or models of the jaws,  and as  a
substitute  for wax, in taking impres-
sions of the mouth.   It is also used by
artists  and  by anatomists  for taking
casts.
  There is a great difference  in  the
quahty of plaster of paris.   For taking
impressions and models  of the mouth,
it should be of the best description, well
calcined, finely pulverized and  passed
through a fine sieve previously to being
used.
  GYRATE. Circinate.
  GYRATION. Osculation.
  GY'RI CEREBRI.   The  cerebral
convolutions.
  GYRUS.  Anfractuosity.
H.
  HABIT.  From habere, to have or to
hold.   A disposition  of body or mind;
a tendency, resulting from frequent re-
petition, to perform certain actions.   A
predisposition to, or protection against,
certain diseases.
  Habit of Body.  Constitution and
temperament.
  HABITATION.  Habitatio;  from
habit are, to dweU.  The country or lo-
cality  in which an animal lives, or a
plant grows spontaneously.
  HABITUS.   Habit of body.
  H/EMA.  Hcematos; from aiua, ai-
          30*
 fiat os, blood. Blood.  A term used as a
 prefix in medicine.
   HEMACHROINE. Hasmatosin.
   HEMACYANIN.    From  aiua,
 blood, and xvavos, blue. A blue coloring
 matter, supposed to have been detected
 by Sanson, in the blood.
   H^EMADON'OSOS.  From  aiua,
 blood, and voaos, a disease.  Diseases of
 the blood-vessels.
  HEMADOSTO'SIS.   From a^a,
blood, and oataais, a bony tumor.  Os-
sification of the blood-vessels.
  HEMADYNAMOM'ETER. From 
HE
354
HE
 aiua, blood, Svvauis, power, and uetpov,
 a measure.  An instrument to deter-
 mine the force with which the blood is
 driven through the principal vessels by
 the action of the heart.
   HEMAGO'GUES.   Hazmagoga;—
 from aiua, blood, and ayw, I drive off.
 Medicines  which promote the hemor-
 rhoidal and menstrual discharges.
   HEMAPHETN. From aiua, blood,
 and <j>(wo$, of a dusky color.   The brown
 coloring matter of the blood.
   HEMAPOR'IA.  From aiua, blood,
 and artopoj, poor.  Bad blood; paucity
 of blood.
   HEMASTAT'ICA.   From   aiua,
 blood, and otatixrj, statics. The doctrine
 of the laws which regulate the action of
 the blood-vessels, or the circulation of
 the blood.
   HEMATEME'SIS.    From  aiua,
 blood, and euea, I vomit.  A vomiting of
 blood.   A discharge of blood from the
 stomach.
   HEMATHORAX.   See Haemato-
 thorax.
   HEMAT'ICA.  From aiua, blood.
 Diseases of the sauguinous function.
   HE'MATIN.  See Haematosin.
   HAEMATITES.  From a^a, blood.
Blood-stone. A term applied to an oxyd
of iron  from its red color,  or from its
supposed power  of  arresting hemor-
rhage.
   HEMATOCELE.   From  aiua,
blood, and x*jx*i, asAvelling.  A sweU-
ing or  tumor caused by  an extravasa-
tion of blood either in the ceUular tis-
sue of the scrotum, the cavity of the tu-
nica vaginalis, or  testicle  itself.
  HEMATOCHE'ZIA. From aiua,
blood, and %eC,a, I go to stool.  Bloody
stools.
  HEMATO'CHYSIS. Hemorrhage.
  HEMATO'DES. From aiua, blood,
and e&os, a likeness. Having the nature
or appearance  of  blood.   See Fungous
Haematodes.
  HEMATOLOGY.   Hazmatologia;
from at/^a, blood, and xoyoj, a discourse.
A treatise on the blood.
   HEMATO'MA.  A tumor resemb-
 ling blood.
   HEMATOMPHALOCE'LE. Ha.
 matomphahis; from aiua, blood, au$a3ix>$,
 the navel, and xij\tj, a tumor.  An um-
 bilical tumor, caused by an extravasa-
 tion of blood.
   HEMATON'CUS.    From  a^a,
 blood, and oyxoj, a tumor.  A name
 given by Alberti  to nozvi-malerni,  or
 varicose tumors.
   HEMATOPHOB'IA.  From c^a,
 blood, and <j>o|3oy, dread.   That dread of
 the sight "of blood, Avhich produces syn-
 cope.
   HEMATOPLA'NIA.   Vicarious
 menstruation.
   HEMATO'SIN.  Hozmatin.  The
 red coloring matter of the blood.
   HEMATO'SIS.  From aiua, blood.
 The arteriahzation of the blood, or the
 transformation of the venous blood and
 chyle into  arterial blood.  Also, a hae-
 morrhage of blood.
   HEMATOTHO'RAX. Fromcupa,
 blood, and  0wpa|, the chest.  Effusion
 of blood in the piura.
   HEMATOXYLON CAMPECHI-
 A'NUM.  The logwood tree.   Acacia
 Zeylonica.
   HEMATURE'SIS.   Haematuria.
   HEMATU'RIA. From aiua, blood,
 ovpea, I make urine.  The discharge of
 bloody urine.
   HEMI'TIS.  From aiua, blood, and
 itis, denoting inflammation.  Literally,
 inflammation of the blood. That altera-
 tion of the blood which  occurs in in-
 flammation.
  HEMO'DIA.    From  aiuaiea, I
 stupify.  Aching of the teeth;  the teeth
 set on edge from the use of acerb or
 acid  aliments.
  HEMOPHTHAL'MIA. From <»-
ua, blood, otyQaXuos, eye.  Effusion of
 blood in the eye.
  HEMOPTOE.  See Haemoptysis.
  HEMOPTYSIS. From cu/ta, blood,
rttva, I spit.  Spitting of blood.  An ex-
pectoration of frothy blood,  preceded
by cough, heat and pain  in the chest. 
HE
355
HE
  Hjemoptysis  Interna.    Haemato-
thorax.
  Hjemoptysis Phthisis.  Phthisis pul-
monahs.
  HEMORRHAGE. Hazmorrhagia;
from aifia, blood, and  prjywui,  I break
forth.  The escape of blood from any of
the  vessels  destined  to   contain it,
whether  from  rupture  or  otherwise.
Haemorrhages are divided  into active
and passive; the former resulting from
increased action; the latter  from debil-
ity.  They are  also distinguished into
external and internal; general and local;
spontaneous and  traumatic.
  Hemorrhage After the Extrac-
tion of Teeth.  The hemorrhage oc-
casioned by the  extraction of a tooth  is
seldom considerable, except in those
cases where there is a hemorrhagic dia-
thesis of body, and then, it is sometimes
excessive and even alarming.  Several
cases have been recorded in which it
baffled every  attempt to arrest its pro-
gress, and terminated  fatally.  When-
ever a tendency to excessive hemorr-
hage from the rupture of one or more
smaU vessels, manifests itself in one
member of a famUy, composed of sev-
eral  individuals, it wUl  generally  be
found to exist in several.
  Among the means which have been
employed for arresting hemorrhage from
the socket of a recently  extracted tooth,
are astringents, styptics, caustics, the
actual cautery and compresses.  But the
actual cautery and compresses, after all,
are the only means that can be rehed
upon,  with  any  degree  of certainty.
When the hemorrhage is from the den-
tal artery,  it  may always be arrested by
plugging the socket tightly with raw
cotton, lint, sponge, or a piece of cork,
previously  saturated in tinct. nut galls,
or the replacement of the tooth.   Dr. B.
B. Brown has invented a very ingenious
compress which is probably better adapt-
ed to the purpose than any that has been
employed; it consists  of waxed linen
or cotton cloth made into a  cone, fitted
to the size of the  socket of the tooth.
 When the bleeding is from a number of
 vessels, and especiaUy from the gums
 around the alveolus,  it is  necessary to
 apply the actual cautery.
   HEMORRHAGE FROM THE LuNGS.—
 Haemoptysis.
   Hemorrhage from the Nose.—
 Epistaxis.
   Hjemorrhage from the Stomach.
 Haematemesis.
   Hjemorrhage from the Urinary
 Organs.  Haematuria.
   Hjemorrhage from the Uterus.
 Menorrhagia.
   Hjemorrhage  from the  Gums,
 Spontaneous.  In depraved or cachec-
 tic habits of body, it  sometimes hap-
 pens, that passive hemorrhage occurs
 spontaneously from the gums, and es-
 peciaUy from those portions  which oc-
 cupy the inter-dental  spaces, baffling
 every effort that can  be made to arrest
 it.  It may, however, in the majority of
 cases, be stopped by the apphcation of
 the actual cautery or compresses.  The
 author succeeded in one case with the
 latter.  The best method of  applying a
 compress, is to fiU a wax-holder, such
 as is employed for taking  impressions
 of the  mouth, with wax,  previously
 softened in warm water, and then ap-
 plying it in such a manner as complete-
 ly to imbed the teeth and gums in it.
 This method of compressing the gums
 was suggested to the author by Dr. O.
 Holmes, of Baltimore.
   HEMORRHA'GIE.   Hemorrha-
 ges.  A  distinct order in the class py-
 rexias of Dr.  Cullen's nosological ar-
 rangement.
   HEMORRHOZ'A.  Passive hem-
 orrhage.
   Hjemorrhoza Petechialis.  Purpu-
 ra haemorrhagica.
   HEMORRHOI'DAL.  Hazmorrhoi-
 dalis.  Relating to hemorrhoids, as  a
 hemorrhoidal tumor, or flux.
   Hemorrhoidal  Arteries.   The
 arteries of the rectum.  Three are enu-
 merated ;  the  superior, middle and in^
fcrior. 
HAL
356
HAN
  Hemorrhoidal Nerves.  Filaments
sent from the sciatic  and hypogastric
plexuses to the rectum.
  Hemorrhoidal Veins.   They are
iavo, the external and internal.
  HEMORRHOIDES ORIS. Hem-
orrhage from the veins of the  palate,
uvula, fauces, and sometimes from the
gums, resulting from  a suppression of
the hemorrhoidal discharge.
  HEMOR'RHOIS.   From   tupa,
blood, and pea, I flow.  Piles. A varicose
enlargement of the veins about the anus
and of the rectum, and a  discharge of
blood from them.
  HEMOSPAS'TIC.   From  aiua,
blood, and srtaw, I draw.   That which
draws the blood to a part.
  HEMOSTASIA. From atpa, blood,
and  otaois,  stagnation.  Stagnation of
blood.  That which stops  the flow of
blood.
  HEMOSTAT'IC.   Hazmostaticus;
from aiua,  blood, and  otaa,  to  stop.
That which is calculated to arrest a hem-
orrhage.  A styptic.
  HEMOT'ROPHY.  Hazmotrophia;
from aiua, blood, and tpotyrj, nourish-
ment. Excess  of nourishment of the
blood.
  HAGGARD.   An  expression  of
countenance, especially  of the eye, in-
dicative of terror and grief.
  HAIR.  Pilus.  Corneous filaments,
which issue from the skin, and to which
it adheres by means of a bulb.  They
include the hairs of the head, eye-brows,
eye-lashes, those of the trunk, beard, and
of the axillary and pubic regions.
  Hair  Lichen.  Lichen pilaris.  An
eruption confined to  the  roots of the
hair, followed, after ten days, by dis-
quamation.
  Hair, Falling off of.  Alopecia.
   Hair, Platted or Matted.  Plica.
   Hair-Worm.  Seta equina.
   HALCHEMI'A. From ojlj, salt, and
%ea, I pour out.  The  aft of fusing salts.
   HAL'ITUS.  From hob, to breathe
 out. Vapor.  Also, the breath.
  Halitus, Sanguinis.  The vapor ex-
haled by fresh blood.
  HALLUCINATION. Hallucinatio;
from hallucinor, to blunder.  Depraved
imagination, an error of an individual
who believes he sees, or distinguishes
by hearing, touching, smelling or tast-
ing, objects not present.
  HAL'LUS.   The great toe.
  HALO SIGNATUS. The impres-
sion formed by the ciliary processes on
the anterior surface  of the vitreous hu-
mor.
  HAL'OGENE.  Chlorine.
  HA'LOID.  From ca$, sea-salt, and
eiSoj,  resemblance.   Resembling salt.
Salts which are compounds of chlorine,
iodine, bromine, cyanogen and its com-
pounds, and fluorine with metals.
  HAM.   Poples.
  HAMAME'LIS   VIRGINICA.-
Witch-hazel.   Winter witch-hazel.
  HAMARTHRITIS.  From aua, at
once, and  apflpttftj,  gout.   Gout in all
the joints.
  HAM'MA.  From artta, to bind, or
fit on.   A truss for hernia.
  HAM'ULUS.  A  little hook.  In
Anatomy, a hook-like process,  as the
hamulus of the pterygoid process of the
sphenoid bone.
  HAND.  Manus.
  Hands, Dropped.  Paralysis of the
hands caused by the action of lead.
  HANDY,  W. R.  Anatomical and
Physiological Relations  of the Mouth,
by.   Published  in  volume  eighth,
American  Journal  of Dental Science.
Professor Handy is also the author of a
Paper  on the  Science of the  Human
Body,  published in the same periodical.
   HANDEL'S ODONTALGIC RE-
MEDY.  $.—Opium, 5 ss; oil of hen-
bane,  3j; extract  of belladonna, ex-
tract of camphor,  a a, gr. vi; oil  of
cajeput, tinct.  cantharides, a a,  §j and
gtt. vi.  This is made into a paste, and
introduced into the cavity of the aching
tooth.
   HANG-NAIL.  A detached portion
of epidermis near the finger nail. 
HAR
357
HAR
  HAPHON'OSI.    Diseases  of the
sense of touch.
  HAPLOTOM'IA  From artXos, sim-
ple, and tout], incision.  A simple  in-
cision.
   HAPSIS.  The sense of touch.
   HARBERT,  SAMUEL   C.  A
Practical Treatise on  the Operations of
Surgical and Mechanical Dentistry, by.
Philadelphia,  1847.
   HARE-LIP.  Labium  leporinum;
lagocheilus; lagostoma.  A vertical fis-
sure  or division of one  or both lips.
It is almost  always congenital,  though
it may be produced by a wound. Some-
times the cleft is double.   The fissure
frequently extends to  the alveolar arch
and palate.  When there is but one di-
vision it is called simple; double, when
there are two, and complicated, when the
maxiUary bone and palate are implicat-
ed, or when one or more  of the  teeth
project  and occupy the separation in
the hp.  Mr. Fox gives a drawing of a
very remarkable example of distortion,
in which a portion of the javsr-bone,
with three teeth, projected beneath the
nose more than an inch and a quarter.
Dr. Simms, describes  in the American
Journal Dental Science, vol. 5, page 51,
a similar example of complicated hare-
lip, and numerous others are on record.
  The manner of remedying hare-lip
consists, 1st,  in removing the rounded
edges of the  cleft, and 2d, in bringing
them accurately together and retaining
them in  contact untUaunion takes place.
But with regard to the most  efigible
period of life for the performance of the
operation, there exists  a difference of
opinion. Some think the  sooner it is
performed the better, others believe that
the best time is, immediately after the
child  has ceased to suck;  while others
again think it better to defer it untU even
a later period.
  For simple hare-lip, the operation
may be performed in the following man-
ner.  The head of the child being slight-
ly elevated and firmly secured by means
of an assistant,  a narrow flat piece  of'
 wood, or pasteboard, should be introduc-
 ed between the lip  and gums and held
 by another assistant; a narrow, sharp-
 pointed scalpel, or, what is preferable, a
 straight bistoury, is then passed through
 the margin of the Up, immediately be-
 low the nose, and  by a single cut, in a
 straight  line downwards, the  rounded
 edge is  removed.   This operation  is
 next repeated on the  opposite  side,
 leaving  an aperture between the two
 margins resembling  the letter V invert-
 ed.  The margins are next brought ac-
 curately together and secured by pass-
 ing two or three gold, steel-pointed, or
 steel pins, horizontaUy through them at
 regular intervals, and rather nearer the in-
 ternal than external surface. The edges of
 the wound are now held in close contact
 by passing a separate ligature around
 each pin in the form of the figure 8.  Some
 surgeons, however,  seem to think that
 additional security is obtained by pass-
 ing the ligature from one  needle to the
 other.  The suture having been applied
 to the points of the needles, if steel ones
 have been used, should be  clipped off
 with a pair of cutting nippers.  When
 the  needles  are properly apphed, Mr.
 Fergusson  is of opinion, that  there  is
 no necessity for straps or bandages to
 keep the cheeks forward, though it may
 be advisable to protect the tender adhe-
 sion of the wound for a few days, after
 their removal, by means of a strap.
 The needles may be withdrawn at the
 expiration of three or four days.
   If there be any adhesion between the
 mucous membrane of the lip and gums,
 it should be separated before the opera-
 tion is performed, and if any of the
 teeth project through the fissure, and
 cannot be carried back to  their proper
 place in the dental  arch, they should
 also be previously removed.
   For cutting the edges of the  fissure,
 some surgeons prefer scissors to the
 scalpel or bistoury.
   In  double  hare-lip,  both   fissures
 should be closed at  the same time, by
passing the needles entirely across, and 
HAR
358
HAS
securing them in the manner as above
described.
  Hare-Eye.  See Lagophthalmia.
  HARMALA.   See Peganum Har-
mala.
  HARMONY.  Harmonia; fromapw,
to fit together. In Anatomy, an immov-
able articulation, as in the case of the
superior maxiUary  bones  with  each
other.
  HARRIS, JAMES H.  James H.
Harris, late surgeon dentist of Baltimore,
was born November 3, 1795, in Salis-
bury, Conn., but while a mere boy, his
father moved to the state of New York,
where he was principally educated.
  At about the age of nineteen or twen-
ty, he commenced the study of medi-
cine, and at twenty-two or three, after
having graduated, commenced the prac-
tice of his profession in a small village
near Cincinnati, Ohio, where he soon ac-
quired the reputation of a scientific and
skUful physician.   He afterwards mov-
ed to Columbus, Ohio, and in 1824 to
Lancaster.  Here he soon succeeded in
obtaining an extensive practice, but the
arduous duties of his profession having
somewhat impaired his general health,
he determined to qualify himself for the
practice of dental surgery and relinquish
the exercise  of the duties  of  general
medicine.  Availing himself of such in-
formation as he was able to derive from
the works of the best authors upon the
subject, and some instructions received
from  his brother, Dr. John Harris, he
began,  occasionally,  about the  year
1827, to operate upon the teeth, and be-
ing possessed of considerable mechanical
tact and ingenuity, he soon relinquished
the practice  of general medicine  alto-
gether,  and devoted his whole time and
attention to dental surgery.  In this as
in the other  branches of medicine he
Avas eminently successful as a practi-
tioner.
  In alluding to  his professional abUi-
ties as a dentist, Dr. M. Z. Kreider, an
eminent practitioner  of  medicine and
surgery of  Lancaster,  Ohio,   says,'
"Bringing to his aid the experience of
years in the medical profession—his in-
timate acquaintance with the structure
of the human system, together with a
naturally  vigorous and well  cultivated
mind, he  could not fail of success in
this new enterprize.  Consequently, we
find him at once one of the  ablest ope-
rators we have ever known.   He  was
a man of engaging manners and emi-
nently pious."
  "In his ardent desire to improve him-
self, and elevate the profession of den-
tal surgery, he left the  place and friends
to whom  he Avas  fondly attached, and
moved to the city of Baltimore.  Soon
after, his  health became impaired, and
he died, October 24th,  1836, a victim to
haemorrhoids  and  calculus concretions
of the gall-duct."
  Although  a good writer, Dr. Harris
contributed nothing to the literature of
dental surgery, except  an Essay on the
Importance of the Teeth; their diseases
and curative indications.
  HARRIS, JOHN.  Observations on
the Utility of Filing  the  Teeth,  by;
published in volume fifth of the Ameri-
can Journal  of Dental  Science.  Dr.
John Harris is also the author of a Dis-
sertation on Tooth-ache, read before the
American Society of Dental  Surgeons,
at  their  sixth annual meeting, and of
Observations  on the  EvUs  Resulting
from  the Premature Application of Ar-
tificial Teeth on  Plate,  with Clasps,
Obturators, Palates, &.c, published in
the same periodical.
  HART, WILLIAM.   Destructive
Effects of Camphor on the Teeth, by;
published in volume first of New York
Dental Recorder.
  HART'S  TONGUE.   Asplenium
scolopendrium.
  HART-WORT.  Laserpitium siler.
  HARTSHORN.  Cornu cervi.
  Hartshorn, Spirit of.  A watery
solution of ammonia.
  HASTA.  A spear.  An epithet ap-
plied to parts of animals and vegetables
I which are supposed to resemble a spear. 
HAY
359
HAY
  Hasta Regia. Asphodelus luteus.
  HASTATE.  Spear-shaped.
  HASTEL'LA.    A  spear-shaped
splint.
  HARRING, D. Author of a Report
of a Case of Fungus of the Inferior
MaxiUary, successfuUy treated; pub-
lished  in  volume  sixth  of  American
Journal of Dental Science.
  HAUNCH.   That  portion of  the
trunk formed by the lateral parts of the
pelvis and hip-joint.
  HAUSTUS.  From haurio, to swal-
low.  A draught. A  single  dose of
liquid medicine.
  Haustus Niger.  Infusion of senna.
  HAUFFMANN. Dissertation on the
Teeth, their  Diseases  and  Cure,  by.
Halle,  1698 and 1714.—Dissertation on
Anti-tooth-ache Remedies, by.  Halle,
1700.
  HAWES, GEORGE  E.  Author
of a Description of Anchylosis of Three
Teeth,  pubhshed  in  the New  York
Dental Recorder, volume first.
  HAWES'AND ALLEN.  Popular
Information on the Subject of Dentistry,
by.  New York, 1838.
   HAYDEN, HORACE H.  Horace
H. Hay den, late surgeon dentist of Balti-
more,  and professor of dental pathology
and therapeutics in the Baltimore  Col-
lege of Dental Surgery,  was born  in
Windsor, Conn., on the  13th October,
 1768.  While a mere child he contracted
a most remarkable fondness for books,
which he cherished through  aU his  sub-
sequent life.   "Such," says his  bio-
grapher, "was his industry and syste-
matic  application, that at  the  age  of
four years he had read the  bible regu-
larly through."  He soon contracted a
great fondness for natural history, and
whUe a mere boy, he  manifested great
ingenuity in the discovery of objects of
 interest, "while rambling through the
 fields or woods." He commenced the
 study  of the  ancient  languages at the
 age of ten years, "but for some  cause,
 not known, he soon  abandoned it." As
 his mind became enlightened  by inter-
course with  books,  he  manifested a
great desire to travel, and at the age of
fourteen, having obtained the reluctant
consent of his parents,  he  entered on
board of a new brig as a cabin boy, and
in which humble capacity,  he  made
two voyages  to the West Indies.  His
desire for  travel  having, by this time,
somewhat  subsided,  he  returned  to
school and to his books, with greater
industry and pleasure, but at the age of
sixteen, being thrown upon his own re-
sources for his maintenance, his parents
being poor, he reluctantly submitted to
be bound apprentice to a practical archi-
tect, whom he served untU he became
of age.  Soon after,  he saUed for the
West Indies,  in search of employment
in his business at  Point Petre, Gauda-
loupe, but the periodical fever soon com-
pelled him to return.   He visited the
West  Indies   again  in  the  following
spring, but was again compelled by the
pestUence to return.  "For several years
after his return he pursued  his business
Avith  great industry, embracing,  at the
same time, every opportunity to increase
his knowledge."
   When in  his twenty-fourth year, he
visited New  York in quest of employ-
ment in his business, but in the faU re-
turned to Connecticut, and not satisfied
to remain idle through the winter, he
occupied himself in teaching a  school
near Hartford.  In this employment he
was strongly urged  to  continue,  but a
 circumstance had occurred which gave
 a new direction to his energies. "While
 in New York, he had  occasion to call
 on Mr. Greenwood, a dentist, for  his
 professional  aid.  While  under  treat-
 ment, the thought suddenly struck him
 that he would hke to be a dentist," and
 he, at once, "determined to devote him-
 self to dental surgery."  He, therefore,
immediately  procured  the few  books
which were then accessible, and not ap-
prehending any  deficiency  in mechani-
cal skiU, he directed his course south-
ward in quest of a location, where he
might  hope  to win fame  and fortune, 
HAY
360
HAY
and arriving in Baltimore in 1804, he
hired a frame house in Fayette street.
  Aware that dentistry, as then gener-
ally practiced in the  United States, had
not attained a very high standard of ex-
ceUence, he labored  to elevate the caU-
ing to a "parallel with his own abilities,
and make it worthy  of the partiality
which he had so suddenly and strangely
contracted for it." To this end, he com-
menced the study of general medicine,
and the extensive knowledge which he
acquired, was such as to secure the con-
fidence and respect of the medical profes-
sion, so that in later hfe, without solicita-
tion on his part, the honorary degree of
doctor of medicine was conferred upon
him, both  by the University of  Mary-
land and the Jefferson  College of Phtia-
delphia.   He soon acquired reputation
and confidence, and  became the com-
panion of the most eminent physicians
and medical professors of Baltimore. In
such high estimation  was he held, that
he was invited  about the year 1825, to
read a course of  lectures, on dentistry,
before the  medical  class  of the Mary-
land University.  Dr.  Hayden  contrib-
uted several able papers to medical
journals, embodying the result of some
of his  physiological researches, and dis-
playing much  ingenuity of mind,  and
experimental ability.   He also devoted
much time to the study of geology, and
wrote a very valuable  work on this de-
partment of physical science.
  Having by his own unaided industry
and talents acquired distinguished pro-
fessional reputation, he was anxious for
the elevation of the respectability of the
art, and under these circumstances, a few
months after the commencement of the
publication  of  the  American Journal
and Library of Dental Science, he con-
sented, at the solicitation  of the author,
in December, 1839,  to unite with him
and others, in a petition to the legisla-
ture of Maryland, to estabhsh a Dental
College; the faculty to consist partly of
dental, and  partly of medical  practi-
tioners.  The legislature having granted
a liberal charter, Dr. Hayden, at the ad-
vanced age of seventy, entered upon the
duties  of the  chair assigned  him in
the institution, namely, dental  physiolo-
gy and pathology, with a zeal and en-
ergy worthy of the noble enterprize in
which  he had engaged.   He labored
faithfully  to impart knowledge to his
class,   and  having read every  thing
which could throw light upon the sub-
ject, his lectures  Avere both interestini;
and instructive.
  On the  18th of August, 1840, a few
months after the  legislature of Mary-
land had  chartered the  Baltimore Col-
lege of Dental Surgery,  a  number of
dentists met in the city  of New York,
for the purpose of forming an associa-
tion  for mutual improvement and en-
couragement, which resulted in the for-
mation of the American Society  of
Dental Surgeons.  Dr. Hayden was pre-
sent on that occasion, and was unani-
mously chosen president,  and  to which
office, he  was, from year to year, elect-
ed until the period of his decease.
  Until the illness which terminated his
life, Dr. Hayden continued to exercise
the duties of his profession, and to lec-
ture to  his class, and to use the  lan-
guage of his biographer, "there is much
reason to fear that laborious bodily and
mental exertion  exhausted   his  little
strength,  and accelerated"  this event.
He died on the 26th of  January, 1844.
in the 75th year of his age.
  Among his contributions to the litera-
ture of dental surgery are the following:
1. A paper  entitled Conjoined Suppu-
ration of  the  Gums.  This was  pub-
hshed in the New  York Medical  Rf
corder, 1825, and has subsequently been
repubhshed in the third  volume of the
American Journal of Dental Science.
2. An Investigation of  the  Nature.
Growth, and Formation of the Human
Teeth, with an explanation of the cause
of their Decay, particularly of its un-
common prevalence in the middle and
northern  states of America, published
in the New York Medical Repository, 
HEA
361
HEC
 1823.  3. Asphyxia, or  the  Appear-
 ance of the Teeth of those who have
 died from Strangulation,  pubhshed in
 the Encyclopaedia of Medicine.  4. Ob-
 servations on the Use and Functions of
 the  Salivary, Lachrymal  and  other
 Glands in the Human System, publish-
 ed in the New York Medical Reposito-
 ry, 1818.  5.  Opening Address deliver
 ed  before  the  American Society of
 Dental Surgeons at the second annual
 Meeting, published in the American
 Journal of Dental Science, Arolume se-
 cond.  6. Comments upon a Disserta-
 tion delivered by the author, on the Dis-
 eases of the MaxiUary Sinus, pubtished
 in the  third volume of the last named
 periodical.
  HEAD.  Caput. The upper extrem-
 ity of the body; the cranium and face.
  HEAD-ACHE.  Cephalalgia.  Pain
 in the head.
  HEALTH.  That state of the living
 body  in which all its functions  are
 healthily performed.
  HEARING.  Auditus.   The faculty
 by which sound is received.
  HEART. Cor. KapSta.  A muscular
 organ,  Avhich forms the  centre of the
 circulating system in the  higher  order
 of animals, having four  distinct cavi-
 ties—two auricles, the right receiving the
 blood from all parts of the body, the left
 from the lungs, and two ventricles;  the
 right sending the blood  to the lungs
 by the  pulmonary  artery, and  the  left
 to every part of the  body, by the aorta.
 It is of an irregular pyramidal shape,
 enclosed in a membrane called the peri-
 cardium, and is situated obliquely, and
 a little to the left side, in the chest, be-
 tAveen the lungs.
  Heart, Atrophy of the.  A dimi-
 nution  in the thickness  of the  waUs of
 this organ.
  Heart,  Displacement of  the.—
Ectopia cordis.  It is generally  the  re-
sult of malformation.
  Heart,  Hypertrophy  of the.  A
morbid  increase  in the  muscular sub-
stance of the waUs of this organ.
        31
I   HEARTBURN.  Cardialgia.
   HEAT.   Caloric.  The  sensation
 produced in the animal  body by the
 transmission of caloric.
   Heat, Absolule.  The whole quan-
 tity of caloric existing in chemical union
 in a body.
   Heat, Animal.   Animal  tempera-
 ture.
   Heat, Free.  The heat which is sen-
 sible to the touch or thermometer.
   Heat, Latent.   Insensible  heat, or
 heat which does  not pass from  one sub-
 stance to another  so as  to  affect the
 senses or the thermometer.
   Heat, Prickly.   See  Lichen  Tro-
 picus.
   Heat, Sensible.  Free heat.
   Heat, Specific   The amount of
 heat necessary to bring a given body to
 a certain temperature, compared  with
 the number of degrees required to  ele-
 vate water or another body.
   Heat, Vital.  Animal heat.
   HEAVY  INFLAMMABLE AIR.
 Carbureted hydrogen.
   Heavy Spar.   Sulphate of barytes.
   HE'BE.   H%;  from  q6aa, flores,
 vigeo. The hair of  the pubes.  Also,
 puberty.
   HEBENSHEIT, J. E.  Dissertation
 on  Second  Dentition,  by.    Leipsic,
 1738.
   HEBERT. The Citizen Dentist, by.
 Lyons, 1778.
   HEBETUDO  DENTIUM.   See
 Haemodia.
   HECTIC.  Hectkus; extixos', from
 e|ij, habit.   Belonging to the habit or
 constitution.
   Hectic Fever.   Febris hectica.  A
 disease characterized by emaciation and
 fever of a peculiar type and character;
 frequent pulse, hot  skin, particularly of
 the palms of the  hands and soles of the
feet, loss  of appetite, and  towards the
last by colhquative sweat when in bed,
and diarrhoea.  It is generally a symp-
tomatic disease.
  HECTICA. Hectic fever.
  HECTOGRAMME.  One hundred 
HEL
362
HEM
grammes, or three ounces, one drachm,
and thirty-four grains, troy.
  HECTOLITRE.  A measure of one
hundred French Utres, or 211.35 pints.
  HEDEO'MA.  Pennyroyal.
  HED'ERA HELIX.  Hedera  arbo-
rea.   Ivy.
  Hedera   Terrestris.    Glechoma
hederacea.  Ground ivy.
  HEDGE GARLIC. AUiaria offici-
nalis.
  HEDYSMA.  Condiment.
  HEISTER.   Dissertation  on the
pain of Teeth, by.  Altd, 1711.—Epis-
tle on the Bones  and Teeth, found in
different parts of the human body, by.
Thelmst, 1743.
  HELCO'DES.   Ulcerous.
  HELCO'MA.  An ulcer.
  HELCYD'RION.  A little ulcer.
  HELEN'IUM.    See Inula  Hele-
nium.
  Helenium Autumna'le.   Sneeze-
wort.
  HELIANTHUS.   From rpjios, the
sun, and avOos, a flower.  The name of
a genus of plants.
  Helianthus Annuus. The sun-flow-
er.
  Helianthus  Tuberosus.    Jerusa-
lem artichoke.
  HELICA'LIS.   Belonging  to the
hehx of the ear.
  HEL'ICINE  ARTERIES.   The
short arteries and vessels of the penis,
given off from the larger  vessels and
smaller twigs of the artery of that organ.
  HEL'ICIS MAJOR.  A muscle of
the ear, situated upon  the upper point
of the helix.
  Helicis  Minor.  A muscle of the
ear,  which contracts the fissure of this
organ.
  HELICOTRE'MA.  The foramen
by which the scalas of the cochlea  com-
municate.
  HELIOTROPE.  The blood stone.
  HELIOTRO'PIUM  INDICUM—
Convolvulus batatas.  The sweet potato.
  Heliotropium   Majus.   Heliotro
pium Europaeum.
  HE'LIX.  From eixu, to turn round.
The outer circumference or ring of the
outer ear.  Also, a genus  of  the snail-
shell.
  HELLEBORASTER. HeUeborus
foetidus.
  HELLEBORE,   AMERICAN.-
Veratum viride.
  Hellebore,  Black.   HeUeborus
niger.
  Hellebore, White.  Veratrum al-
bum.
  HELLE'BORUS.  The name of a
genus of plants.
  Helleborus Albus.   Veratrum al-
bum.
  Helleborus  Foetidus.   Stinking
hellebore.   Helleboraster.
  Helleborus Niger.   Black  helle-
bore.
  HELMINTHAGOGUS.  Helmin-
tluigoga; from eXfiivs, a worm, andayw,
I expel.  Remedies used  for  expelling
Avorms.  Anthelmintics.
  HELMINTHIA.  Helminthiasis.
  Helminthia Errat'ica. Worms ac-
cidentally introduced into  the stomach
or intestines.
  HELMINTHIASIS.  A  condition
of  body, favoring the generation of
Avorms.
  HELMINTHOL'OGY. Hehninthol-
ogia ; from eXuivs, a worm, and Xoyos, a
description.   A  treatise or description
of worms.
  HELO'DES.  A fever  accompanied
by profuse perspiration.
  HELO'PYRA.  Marsh fever.
  HELO'SIS.   From  eiXa, I  turn.
Eversion of the eyelids.
  HEMATURIA.  See Haematuria.
  HEMARD,URBAIN.  Dissertation
on the  True  Anatomy of the Teeth,
their nature and properties, by.  Lyons,
1582.
  HEMERALO'PIA.  From  nue^,
the  day, and a%, the  eye.  A  defect of
vision,  by which a person  is not able to
see  by day-light, but can see at night.
  HEM'ERALOPS.   One affected
with hemeralopia. 
HEP              363               HEP
   HEMI.   From ^uiovs, half.  The
 same as semi, and used as a prefix.
   HEMICRA'NIA.  From nuiavs, half,
 and xpavioc, the head.  Pain,  affecting
 only one side, or half of the head.
   HEMIDES'MUS  INDICUS.  An
 Indian plant, used as a  substitute for
 sarsaparilla.
   HEMIO'PIA.   From nuiavs, half,
 and orttouai, I see.  A defect of sight,
 in Avhich a person affected Avith it can
 see only one half of an object.
   HEMIOP'SIS.  Hemiopia.
   HEMIPA'GIA.  Hemicrania.
   HEMIPLE'GIA. Hemiplexia; from
 tjuiavs, half, and 3tXnMa, I  strike.  Pa-
 ralysis of one side of the body.
   HEMISPHERE. Hemisphera; from
 rjuiavs, half, and <j$oupa, a sphere.  One
 half of a sphere, or of a body of spheroi-
 dal shape.  The upper portion  of the
 brain is divided into hemispheres.
   HEMITRITE'US.  A semitertian
 ague.
   HEMLOCK.  Conium maculatum.
   Hemlock  Dropavort.  QSnanthe
 crocata.
   Hemlock Tree.  Hemlock, spruce.
 Pinus Canadensis.
   Hemlock, Water. Cicuta virosa.
   HEMORRHAGE. Haemorrhage.
   HEMP.  Canabis sativa.
   Hemp,  Indian.   Apocynum canna-
 binum.
   HENBANE.  Hyoscyamus niger.
   HE'PAR.  Hrtap, the liver.   An an-
 cient  name for the liver  of  sulphur,
 hepar sulphuris.
   Hepar Antimonii.   An oxy-sulphu-
 ret of antimony.
   Hepar  Martia'le.  A compound
 sulphuret of potass and oxyd ofiron.
  Hepar Sulphuris Volatilis.  The
 hydro-sulphuret of ammonia.
  HEPATAL'GIA.  From ^ap, the
liver,  and aXyos, pain.   Pain in  the
liver.
  HepatalgiaCalculosa. Paincaused
by biliary calculi.
  Hepatalgia Phlegmonoides.  See
Hepatitis.                           |
   HEPATAPOSTE'MA. From ^ap,
 the liver, and  artootiqua, an abscess.
 Abscess of the liver.
   HEPATEMPHRAX'IS.     From
 artap, the liver, and ep^paasa, I obstruct.
 Hepatic obstruction.
   HEPAT'IC.  Hepaticus; from artap,
 the liver.  Relating to the liver.
   Hepatic Artery.  Arteria hepatica.
 The artery of the hver; a branch of the
 coeliac.
   Hepatic Duct.  Ductus hepaticus.
 A duct which conveys the bile from the
 liver towards the duodenum, and being
 joined by the cystic duct; the two form
 the ductus communis choledochus.
   Hepatic Flux.  A form of  dysen-
 tery, in Avhich there  is a  copious dis-
 charge of biliary matter.
   Hepatic Plexus.   Plexus hepaticus.
 The nervous  filaments  of the  coeliac
 plexus which accompany the hepatic
 artery.
   Hepatic Veins.   Venaz  hepaticce.
 The veins which return the blood con-
 veyed to the liver by the hepatic artery
 and vena porta, to the vena cava infe-
 rior.
   HEPAT'ICA.   American liverwort.
 Also, the name of a genus of plants.
   Hepatica Tril'oba. Hepatica Amer-
 icana.  Liverwort.
   HEPATPCE.  The liverwort tribe
 of acotyledanous plants.
   HEPATIRRH02A. From ^rtap, the
 liver, and pea, I  flow.  An intestinal
 flux, with bilious evacuations.
   HEPATISATION.  Hepatisatio.—
 The conversion  of any  texture into a
 liver-like substance.  Apphed to  a mor-
 bid condition of the lungs.
   HEPATITIS.  From ^aP, the hver,
 and itis,  denoting inflammation.  In-
 flammation of the liver.
  Hepatitis,  Chronic   Chronic in
 flammation of the liver.
  HEPATIZATION.   Hepatisation.
  HEPATOCE'LE.  From yrtap, the
hver, and xrjXt], a tumor.  Hernia of the
liver,  or  a protrusion of this  organ
through the abdominal parietes. 
HER               364              HER
  HEPATOCO'LIC. Belonging to the
hver and colon.
  HEPATO-CYSTIC.   Pertaining to
the liver and gall bladder.
  Hepato-Gastric  Pertaining to the
liver and stomach.
  HEPATOGRAPHY.  Hepatogra-
phia; from rj-rtap, the liver, and ypa<j»7,
a description.  An  anatomical descrip-
tion of the liver.
  HEPATOHE'MIA.   From ^rtap,
the liver, and aiua,  blood.  Sanguinous
engorgement, or congestion of the liver.
  HEPATOL'OGY.  Hepatologia ;—
from rjriap, the liver, and xoyos, a  dis-
course.  A treatise  on the liver.
  HEPATOMALA'CIA.   Softening
of the liver.
  HEPATON'CUS.  Tumefaction  of
the liver.
  HEPATOPHY'MA.  Abscess of the
liver.
  HEPATOT'OMY. Dissection of the
liver.
  HEPTAN'DRIA.  Heptandrous ,—
from ertta, seven, and avr;p, a man, or
husband.  Plants with  hermaphrodite
flowers and seven stamens.
  HEPTAPLEU'RUM.  See Planta-
go Major.
  HEPTAR-TOMPHALUS.  Umbil-
ical hernia, with a portion of the liver.
  HERACLE'UM.   The name  of a
genus of plants.
  Heracleum Gummifekum.  Dore-
ma ammoniacum.
  Heracleum Lannatum.    Master-
wort.
  Heracleum Spondylium.  Spondu-
lium.  Cow-parsnip.
  HERBA.  Herb. Herbs which perish
the same year are called  annuab;  and
those Avhich have their leaves the  first,
and flowers  and fruit the second, are
caUed biennials.
  Herba Alexandrina.   Smymium
Alexandrinum.
  Herba Benedicta. Geum urbanum.
  Herba Britannica.  Rumex hydro-
lapathum.
  Herba Felis.  Nepeta cataria.
  Herba Julia.  Milfoil.
  Herba  Melancholifuga.   Fuma-
ria officinalis.
  Herba  Patri.   Primula veris and
crithmum maritimum.
  Herba Regia.  Ocymum officinalis.
  Herba  Sacra.   Verbena trifoliata.
  Herba Sancte Barbaree.  Erysi-
mum barbarea.
  Herba  Trinitatis.  Anemone he-
patica.
  HERBA'CEUS.   Like an herb.
  HERBA'LIST.    One who deals in
herbs.
  HERBA'RIUM.   A collection of
dried specimens of plants.
  HERBIVOROUS.   From  herba,
grass, and vero, I eat.  Animals which
feed on herbs.
  HERBORIZATION. A tour for the
collection of plants.
  HERED'ITARY.   Hereditarious;
from hozres, an heir.  An epithet applied
to diseases propagated from  parents to
their offspring, as  phthisis pulmonalis,
&c.
  HERMAPH'RODITE.   Hermaph-
roditus; from Epur;s, Mercury, and Atypo-
hitri, Venus, that is,  partaking of  both
sexes. One Avho has the organs of the two
sexes so developed as to render it doubt-
ful to Avhich it belongs.  In  Botany,  a
flower which contains both stamens and
pistils.
  HERMETIC.   Hermetkus;  from
Epuys, Hermes, Mercury, the fabled in-
ventor of chemistry.  Pertaining to
chemistry.   That part of  chemistry
which had for its  object the pretended
transmutation of the metals.
  Hermetic Seal.  The closing  of a
glass vessel in such a way as to prevent
the most  volatile substances from es-
caping.  It is generally done by fusing
the orifice with a lamp and  blow-pipe.
  HERMODAC'TYLUS.  A bulbous
root, brought from the east, supposed to
be the product of the iris tuberosa.
  HERNANDEZ.   Semiology of the
Tongue, Lips and Teeth, by.  Toulon,
1708. 
HER              365               HER
  HERNIA.  From cpvofc a shooting
forth, a branch. Ramex, a rupture. A
tumor, formed  by the displacement and
protrusion of the whole, or a part of a
viscus.  Herniae are distinguished  ac-
cording  to the regions in which they
occur.
  Hernia Cerebri.   Encephalocele.
Hernia of the brain.
  Hernia Congenita.  The  adhesion
of a protrusion of intestine or omentum
to the testicle, after its descent into the
scrotum.
  Hernia Cruralis.  Femoral hernia.
  Hernia Epiploic.    Epiplocele.—
Omental hernia.
  Hernia Femoralis.   Hernia  cru-
ralis.
  Hernia Humoralis.  See Orchitis.
  Hernia Incarcerata.  Incarcerated,
or strangulated hernia.  Hernia with a
stricture.
  Hernia Inguinalis. Bubonocele. In-
guinal hernia.
  Hernia Intestinalis.  See Entero-
cele.
  Hernia Ischiatica.  Hernia at the
ischiatic notch.
  Hernia Lachrymalis.   SweUing
from distention of the lachrymal sac.
  Hernia Mesenteric a. Mesenteric
hernia.
  Hernia  Mesocolica.   Mesocolic
hernia.
  Hernia   Omentalis.   Epiplocele.
Omental hernia.
  Hernia Oschealis. Scrotal hernia.
  Hernia Perinealis.   Perineal  her-
nia.
  Hernia Pharyngis.  See Pharyngo-
cele.
  Hernia Phrenica.  Diaphragmatic
hernia.
  Hernia Pudendalis.  Pudendal  her-
nia.
  Hernia Sacci Lachrymalis.  Rup-
ture of the lachrymal sac.
  Hernia Scrotalis.   Oscheocele.—
Hernia oschealis.  Scrotal hernia.
  Hernia Thyroidealis. Thyroideal
hernia.
        31»
  Hernia  Umbilicalis.   Umbilical
hernia.
  Hernia Uteri.  Hysterocele.  Her-
nia of the uterus.
  Hernia Vaginalis. Vaginal hernia.
  Hernia Varicosa.  See Varicocele,
and Cirsocele.
  Hernia Venarium.  Varix.
  Hernia Veneris. A tumefied testicle.
  Hernia  Ventosa.  See Pneumato-
cele.
  Hernia Ventralis. A hernia at any
point of the anterior part of the abdo-
men.
  Hernia  Ventriculi.   Gastrocele.
Abdominal hernia of the stomach.
  Hernia  Vesicalis.  Cystic hernia.
Cystocele.  Hernia of the urinary blad-
der.
  HERNIAL.  Pertaining to hernia.
  HERNIOTOMY.   The  operation
for hernia.
  HER'PES.   From eprta, I creep, be-
cause it creeps and spreads about on the
skin. Tetter. A cutaneous eruption, ap-
pearing in  patches, upon an  inflamed
base, attended with more or less heat,
itching,  and,  sometimes, considerable
local uneasiness, but terminating in from
eight to fifteen or twenty days in furfu-
raceous scales.
   Herpes Ambulativus. Thought by
some to be an erratic erysipelas.
   Herpes Circina'tus. Ring-worm.
   Herpes Depa'scens.  A corroding
form of herpes.
   Herpes Esthiom'enos.  Herpes at-
tended by ulceration and great destruc-
tion of skin.
   Herpes Exe'dens.  Herpes which
spreads rapidly.
   Herpes Farinosus.  Herpes having
furfuraceous exfoliations.
  Herpes Ferus.  Erysipelas.
  Herpes In'dicus. An itching herpes
pecuhar to India.
  Herpes  Iris.  A cutaneous eruption
occurring  in smaU circular patches on
the palms of the hands, fingers, and in-
step, each consisting of concentric rings
of different colors. 
HES
366
HEV
  Herpes  Labialis.   A cutaneous
eruption  on the edges of the  lips, and
about the corners of the mouth.
  Herpes Miliaris. Herpes beginning
with an eruption like mtilet seeds.
  Herpes Peri'sceles. Herpes zoster.
The shingles.
  Herpes  Phlyctenodes.   A  vesi-
cular eruption,  usually  preceded  by
slight fever, and occurring in irregular
clusters, most frequently, on the cheeks,
neck, arms, breast, and, sometimes, on
other parts of the body.   The vesicles,
which contain a colorless, and some-
times a brownish fluid, break about the
fourth day, or begin to dry up, forming
a dark or yeUowish scab,  which, about
the eighth or  tenth day falls off, when
the subjacent skin gradually assumes a
healthy appearance.
  Herpes Preputialis.   A vesicular
eruption either upon  the outer or inner
surface of the prepuce.
  Herpes Pustulo'sus.   A  name ap-
plied to different forms of  acne.
  Herpes Serpi'go.  Herpes  circina-
tus.  Ring-worm.
  Herpes  Siccus.  The dry,  mealy
tetter.
  Herpes Zoster.  The shingles.
  HERPETIC.     Herpetkus; from
herpes, a disease  of the skin.  Pertain-
ing to herpes.
  HERPETON.    Herpeticon;  from
iprteiv, to creep.  A creeping ulcer.
  HERSH.  Practical Remarks on the
Teeth, by.  Jena, 1796 and 1801.—On
the Means of Preserving  the Health of
the Teeth, by.  Ronneburg and Leip-
sic, 1799.
  HERTZ, J. P.  Author of aFamitiar
Dissertation on  the  Causes and Treat-
ment of the Diseases of the Teeth, by.
London, 1815.
  HESLOPP.  Dissertation on  Diffi-
cult and Laborious Teething of Infants,
by.  Leid, 1700.
   HESPERI'DEE. Evergreen plants
with rigid leaves, odorous and polyan-
drous flowers, as the clove, myrtle,
wintergreen, &c.
  HESSIAN CRUCIBLE.  A cruci-
cible made of fine clay and sand.
  HETERO-.  A prefix, from ttepos,
different, used in medicine.
  HETERO'-CHYMEU'SIS.  A de-
praved  chymification and sanguifica-
tion ; and a class  of diseases in which
this is indicated.
  HETERO'CLITE.  See  Heterolo-
gous Formations.
  HETEROGE'NEOUS.  Unlike  in
kind.  Opposed to homogeneous.
  HETEROLOGOUS  TISSUES.-
Morbid tissues.   See Heteroplasis.
  HETEROMOR'PHISM.   Helero-
morphismus;  from etepos,  other,  and
uop$y, shape.  Malformation,  or devia-
tion from natural shape of parts.
  HETERO'PATHY.  Hetoropathk;
from etepos, different, and rtaflo;, affec-
tion.  The removal of a morbid condi-
tion of body by exciting a different mor-
bid condition.  Allopathy.
  HETEROPHO'NIA.  From nfpU
different, and tyavrj, voice.  An impair-
ed, cracked, or broken voice.
  HETERO'PLASIS.  Heteropksty;
from etepos, different, and xxaois, forma-
tion.  Formations which do not belong
to the healthy body, as cancer, &.c.
  HETEROSARCO'SES. From ete-
pos, different, and aapi, flesh.  Diseases
which consist in the production of false
tissues.
  HETEROREXIA. Malaria.
  HETEROTAX'IA.   From etepos,
different, and ta%is, order. Transposi-
tion of organs.
  HETEROTOPIA.  From etepos,
and tortos, place.  Deviation from natu-
ral place of parts.
  HEUCHE'RA.  The alum root-
Also, the name of a genus of plants.
  HeucheraCortusa. Heuchera Amer-
icana.   Heuchera viscida.  The  alum
root, or American  sanicle; a perennial
plant.
  HEURNIUS.  Author of a Tract on
the Diseases of the Eye, Ear and Teeth.
Leid, 1602.
  HEVEA GUIANENSIS.  Hevea 
HIE
367
HIP
elastica.  One of the trees which yield
caoutchouc.
  HEXAGYNIA.    Hermaphrodite
plants with six pistUs.
  HEXAN'DRIA.    Hermaphrodite
plants with six stamens of equal length.
  HEXAPETALOUS.  Having  six
petals.
  HEXAPHYL'LOUS.  Having six
leaves.
  HEX'IS.  Egtj, habit. Habit of body.
Constitution.
  HEYE. Author of a Dissertation
on the Pain of the Teeth, pubhshed,
Helmstadii, 1672.
  HIATUS.   From Hare,  to  gape.
Literally, a gap.  In Anatomy, an  ori-
fice, aperture, or passage.  Also, yawn-
ing.
  Hiatus Fallopii.  The aquaeductus
FaUopii.
  Hiatus of Winslow.  The foramen
of Winslow.
  HIBER'NICUS LAPIS.   A kind of
bluish slate, found in masses  in  dif-
ferent parts of Ireland.
  HIBIS'CUS.   Althaea.   Also,  the
name of a genus of plants.
  Hibiscus Abelmos'chus.   The plant
which yields the grant moschi, or musk
seed.
  Hibiscus  Popule'us.  A smaU tree,
or shrub of Molucca.
  HICCOUGH.   Singultus.
  HICCUP. Singultus.
  HIDROA.  From iSpwj,  SAveat.—
Sudamina.  Also, eczema.
  HIDRO'NOSOS.   Sudor anglicus.
Sweating sickness.
  HIDROPHO'ROUS. Sudoriferous.
  HIDROPYRETUS.   A  sweating
fever.
  HI'DROS.  From tSpwj, sweat-
Sweat.
  HIDROTTCUM.   Sudorific.
  HIERA PICRA.  From upo5, holy,
and rtixpos, bitter.   Holy bitter.  An
aloetic powder  made into an electuary
with honey.
  HIERABO'TANE.   Verbena trifo-
liata.
  HIERA'CIUM MURO'RUM.  Pul-
monaria gallica.  Auricula muris ma-
jor.
  Hieracium  Pilosel'la.  The sys-
tematic name of the auricula muris, or
mouse-ear.
  HIERA'NOSOS.  Epilepsy.  Also,
chorea.
  HIGHMORE, ANTRUM OF.  See
Maxillary Sinus.
  HILL, A.  The Teeth, with respect
to the Voice, by.  Pubhshed in volume
eight of the American Journal of Dental
Science.
  HILLBERRY.  Gaultheria.
  HILSCHER. Dissertation on Odon-
talgia, by.  Jena, 1748.
  HIMANTO'SIS. Himas.  Relaxa-
tion and elongation of the uvula.
  HIP.  Haunch. The articulation of
the thigh with the pelvis. The ripe fruit
of the rosa  canina.
  Hip Bone.  The ischium.
  HIPPANTHRO'PIA.  From wtrtoj,
a horse,  and avOpanos, a man.  A dis-
eased imagination, in  which the indi-
vidual fancies himself changed into a
horse.
   HIPPO-.  From trtrtoj, a horse.  A
prefix, signifying a large size.  •
   HIPPOCAM'PUS  MAJOR.   The
 cornu ammonis.  The internal surface
 of the convolution of the lateral edge of
 the hemisphere of the  brain.
   Hippocampus Minor.  A medullary
 eminence situated in the posterior cornu
 of the lateral ventricle  of the brain.
   HIPPOCASTANUM.   The  horse
 chestnut.
   HIPPOCRAT'IC.  Relating to Hip-
 pocrates, or his doctrine.
   HIPPOT'OMY. Hippotomia; from
 irtttos, a horse, and teuveiv, to cut.   The
 anatomy of the horse.
   HIPPOPOTAMUS.   The  river
 horse, an inhabitant of the rivers and
 lakes of the south of Africa.  The inci-
 sor teeth, or tusks of this animal, which
 attain from twelve to  fifteen  inches in
length, were formerly very generally
used by dentists for artificial teeth.  At 
              HOL              3(

present, however, they are seldom em-
ployed for this purpose.
  HIPPURIC ACID.  An acid found
in the urine of the horse and other rumi-
nants.   Also,  in  human urine, after
taking benzoic acid.
  HIPPURIS  VULGARIS.    The
horse's or mare's-tail.
  HIPPUS.   From irtrtoj, a horse.   A
disease of the eyes, characterized by per-
petual  twinkling, or  repeated  alternate
dilatation and contraction of the iris.
  HIRCUS.  Tragus.  A goat.
  HIRQJJUS.  The inner canthus  of
the eye.
  HERSUTIES.   Hairiness.   The
growth of hair in unusual situations,  or
in greater abundance than usual.
  HIRU'DO.  The leech.
  Hirudo Medicinalis.  The medi-
cinal leech.
  HIRUNDINA'RIA.   See  Lysima-
chia Nummularia.
  HIRUN'DO.  The swallow.
  HISTOGEN'IA.  Histogeny; from
tatos,  organic, and ytveeis, generation.
The formation of organic tissues.
  HISTOL'OGY.   General anatomy,
as also, the minute anatomy of the tis-
sues.*
  HISTON'OMY.   Histonomia; from
iatos,  organic, and vouos, law.   The
laws which govern the development and
arrangement of organic tissues.
  HITCHCOCK, D. R.  Preservation
of the Teeth, a Family Guide, by. Bos-
ton, 1840.
  HIVE  SYRUP.    Syrupus sciUae
compositus.
  HIVES.   Croup.   Also, a species
of chicken pox, the varicella globularis.
  HOARSENESS.   Raueedo.
  HOARY.  Of a gray, bluish-green
color.
  HOFFMAN'S ANODYNE.  Spiri-
tus aetheris sulphurici compositus.
  HOG.  Sus scrofa.
  Hog's Lard.  Adeps praeparata.
  HOLCE.  Oxxrj.  A drachm.
  HOLERA'CEOUS PLANTS. Cul-
inary herbs.
»8               HON

   HOLLANDS.  Gin.
   HOLLY.  Ilex aquifolium.
   Holly, Dahoon.  Ilex vomitoria.
   Holly, Ground.  ChimaphiUa urn-
 bellata.
   Holly, Knee.  Ruscus aculeatus.
   Holly, Sea.   Eryngium  mariti-
 mum.
   HOLLYHOCK.  Alcea rosea.
   HOLMIS'CUS.   A small mortar.
 Also, the socket of a tooth.
   HO'MA.  An anasarcous swelling.
   HOMO.   Man.   A  mammiferous
 animal, of the  bimana, hvo-lutnded, of
 which he is the  only genus.
   HOMCEOP'ATH.    A  homceopa-
 thist
   HOMOEOPATHY.  Homozopathia;
 from ouoios, similar, and rtaOos, affection.
 A doctrine which maintains that all dis-
 eases of the body are to be cured by in-
 ducing other diseased  actions  of the
 same kind, and that this is to be effected
 by exceedingly minute doses of medicine.
   HOMOGE'NOUS. Having the same
 structure throughout.  Having elements
 of the like nature.
   HOMOIO'SIS.  From ouoioa, I re-
 semble, I assimilate.  The elaboration
 of the chyle, by which it is assimUated
 to the blood.
   HOMOL'OGY. The doctrine of simi-
 lar parts.
   HOMOPH'AGUS.    From auos,
 raw, and  $>oy«, I eat.  One who  eats
 raw flesh.
   HOMOPLASTY.  The formation
 of homologous tissues.
   HOMOT'ONOS. Acmasticos. Hav-
 ing the same tone.
   HONESTY.  Lunaria rediviva.
   HONEY.  Mel. A mucoso-saccha-
 rine substance,  of a yellowish color,
 and  aromatic  smell, elaborated^by the
 opts mellifka, or honey-bee, from the
 nectaries  of flowers, and deposited in
 the cells of the comb.
   Honey of Squill.  Syrupus scUk*
 compositus.
   HONEYSUCKLE.  Lonicera peri-
 clymenum.
3 
HOR
369
HUD
  HOODED. CucuUate. Cone-shaped.
  HOOK.  A curved steel instrument,
used by anatomists, surgeons and den-
tists.  The tenaculum  is a variety of
hook used by the two former, and the
hook belonging to the key of Garengeot,
and the one Avith a forked, or crescent-
shaped extremity, with a straight shaft
attached to a handle, and used for the
extraction of the roots  of molar teeth,
are the  kinds  employed by  the  latter.
The hooks used with  the  key instru-
ment in the extraction of teeth, should
correspond in  size with the size of the
organs to  which they are applied, and
be so shaped at the extremities as to se-
cure a firm hold  upon them.
   Hook, Saunders'.  A hook  for the
key instrument, invented by Dr. Edwin
Saunders,  of  London, so  constructed
that it may be applied to any small key,
and is adapted for the removal of large
roots.   Its peculiarity consists in having
an angular projection  on its  convex
part, upon which the forefinger of the
left hand may be firmly pressed, while
the key is used in the ordinary direction,
but with a number of short turns, so as
to  dislocate the  root,  when it wUl be
found to rise easily in the socket.
   HOOPING-COUGH.  Pertussis.
   HOP PLANT.  Humulus lupulus.
   HORDEIN.   Starch of  barley.
   HORDEI SEMINA.  Pearl barley.
   HORDE'OLUM. A  diminutive of
hordeum,  barley.  A stye, or smaU tu-
mor of the eyelids, which is somewhat
of the nature of a little boil.
   HOR'DEUM.   Barley.   Also, the
name of a genus of plants.
   Hordeum  Causticum.    Veratrum
sabadilla.  Indian caustic barley.
   Hordeum Vulgare.  The common
barley.
   HOREHOUND.  Marrubium  vul-
gare.
   Horehound,  Black. Stinking hore-
hound.  Ballota nigra.  Ballota fcetida.
   Ho»ehound,  Wild.   Eupatorium
teucrifolium.
   HORMINUM.  Salvia  sclarea.
  HORN.  Cornu.
  Horn-Seed.  Secale cornutum.
  Horn-Shaped.   Cornutus.
  HOR'RIDA CUTIS.   Cutis anse-
rina.  Goose-skin.
  HORRIPILATION.  Hmipilatio;
from horrere, to bristle  up, and  pilus, a
hair.  A shuddering, chiUy, or creeping
sensation, with bristling  of the hairs,
over the body, preceding fever.
  HORSE CHESTNUT.   Esculus
hippocastanum.
  Horse-Radish.   Cochlearia armo-
racia.
  Horse-Tail.  Hippuris vulgaris.
  HORSTIUS.  On the Golden Tooth,
by.  Leipsic, 1595.
  HORTUS.  Vulva.
  Hortus  Siccus.   A  coUection  of
dried plants.
  HOSPITAL.   From hospes, a guest.
An establishment for the reception and
medical treatment of the sick.
  Hospital  Gangrene.    A  peculiar
form of gangrene, occurring in hospitals,
in which the air, by the  accumulation
of  patients, or want of proper ventila-
tion, has become vitiated.
  HOUND'S-TONGUE.   Cynoglos-
sum.
  HOUSE-LEEK. Sempervivum tec-
torum.
   HUDSON, EDWARD.   Edward
Hudson, late surgeon  dentist, of Phila-
delphia, was born in  the year  1772, in
the  county of Wexford,  Ireland.  His
parents it is believed,  were  members of
the  religious society  of   friends, and
although left an orphan at an early age,
the principles implanted in his  mind by
his  connexion  with  this proverbially
honest  and upright sect, appeared to
germinate, and in maturer years to pro-
duce appropriate fruit.
  He was  remarkable for blandness of
manners;  an equanimijty of  temper,
which nothing seemed ever to disturb,
and a simplicity of character, combined
with great  steadiness of  purpose and
unbending integrity, which secured for
him numerous friends, and caused him 
HUD
370
HUD
 to be respected and beloved  wherever
 he was known.
   A cousin, established  as a dentist in
 the city of Dublin, and who stood in the
 foremost rank in his profession, adopted
 young  Hudson  as  his son;  and soon
 after entered him as a student  at Trinity
 coUege.
   His studies here were  pursued  with
 ardor and delight, and the result realized
 the fondest hopes of his guardian, him-
 self a man of very considerable classical
 and  literary attainments.  Under  the
 kind and  judicious care of his relative,
 Mr. Hudson rose rapidly in qualification
 for his profession, and  his future  fame
 and eminence were confidently predicted.
   While residing in the  house of  his
 cousin he practiced dental surgery for a
 considerable time, until he Avas arrested
 at the house of Mr. Oliver Bond, and
 imprisoned by order of the government,
 a circumstance for which we  shaU pre-
 sently account.
   At the hospitable board of his instruc-
 tor and friend, he had  the advantage of
 constant communication and intercourse
'Avith men distinguished for literary, clas-
 sical and scientific attainments, his cou-
 sin's house being a resort  for the elite of
 Europe, who, in him haded a congenial
 spirit.
   While at college Mr. Hudson became
 a member of several  of the debating and
 historical societies established about this
 time in the city  of Dublin.  He thus
 became associated with  many  of the
 most celebrated and distinguished lite-
 rary luminaries of the age—among these
 may be enumerated, Tom  Moore, the
 poet, the Emmets, the Sheares, the Cor-
 betts and others—with these Mr. Hud-
 son was on terms of the  greatest inti-
 macy and friendship.
  He soon became knoAvn as a writer
 and debater, and,  as  the  association
 was established upon the  basis of  a re-
 ciprocal interchange of sentiment in aU
 matters connected with the weU being
 of society, and the interests of mankind
 at large,  being in short, thinking  men, I
 and men,  moreover, whose object was
 to devise means to render their felloAVs
 wiser and happier.  It foUowed  as a
 necessary  consequence that vieAVS Avere
 promulged so  liberal in their tendency
 and anti-aristocratic in jheir scope, that
 the  Anglo-Irish   government  became
 alarmed; and, in  unison with its set-
 tled policy, to suppress every expres-
 sion of sentiment calculated to open the
 eyes of  the people to  the tyranny  of
 their rulers.   The lord chancellor Clare
 exercised his prerogative by ordering the
 dissolution of both the societies, and the
 banishment of such members  as were
 most obnoxious to the censure of the
 government.
  Many of those who remained, how-
 ever, soon became active members  of
 the  society of United Irishmen, and
 among them, Mr. Hudson took a prom-
 inent and distinguished part.
  Some of these men, as is well known,
 expiated with their lives their devotion
 to their country and their love for their
 feUow-men.   Some suffered long and
 painful incarceration  in  the filthy  jails
 of the metropolis, and many more were
 compelled, after becoming convinced  of
 the inutility of further labors, to fly their
 country, and seek liberty and happiness
 in other lands.
  To this necessity Avere Ave indebted for
 the residence of Dr. Hudson in the city
 of Philadelphia. But unlike some others,
 he was not permitted to expatriate him-
 self in  his own  time and Avay.   His
 first determination after  he had became
 a mark for the shafts of tyranny  and
 oppression, was to settle himself in Lon-
 don, in order to pursue  the practice  of
 his profession, but ere he  could depart,
 he, with twenty-two other leaders of the
 United Irishmen were seized and trans-
 ported to Fort George,  in  Scotland,
 where they were confined until the peace
 of Amiens, in 1802.   While confined
 in Fort George he  was visited, profes-
 sionally, by many  of the nobih/y and
gentry of the surrounding country, and
so weU satisfied Avere they of his  skill 
HUD
371
HUD
 and integrity, that not only were large
 fees paid him very cheerfully, but great
 regret expressed, when, by  his libera-
 tion  from  confinement,  his  services
 could no longer be obtained.
   After being released from this long
 and tedious imprisonment of four years'
 duration, Dr. Hudson abandoned his
 original design of settling in London,
 and came to Philadelphia.
   He commenced the practice of dental
 surgery some time after his arrival in
 that city, where he found but one gentle-
 man who had obtained the  fuU confi-
 dence of the public,  the late Dr. James
 Gardette, a practitioner of high stand-
 ing in his profession, of acknowledged
 skill, combined with great scientific at-
 tainments,  which,  together with  his
 honesty and integrity, rendered him in
 every way worthy of the  reputation he
 enjoyed.  During the earlier years of
 Dr. Hudson's residence in PhUadelphia,
 he was induced, probaHy by glowing
 accounts and representations of  sudden
 acquisition of wealth, to engage in  two
 distinct partnerships.   Neither of these
 seems to have been fortunate; possibly
 on account of injudicious speculations,
 but more probably from a lack of com-
 mercial skiU and tact, so far, at least, as
 Dr. Hudson was concerned, for  all ex-
 perience has proved, that men educated
 for, and possessing skill in, any of the
 learned professions, are almost necessa-
 rily deficient in the pecuhar  talent  and
 acumen necessary to secure success in
 mercantile  or monetary  speculations.
 His first partnership  connection was
 with his father-in-law,  Mr.  Patrick
 Byrne,  with whom he embarked in the
 stationery business.   This,  however,
 Avas soon relinquished.
   At a  subsequent period  he engaged
 in brewing,  with a gentleman in whom
 he reposed  the utmost confidence, both
 as to integrity and knowledge of the pe-
 cuhar duties  appertaining to this  art.
 For a time the firm seemed to be in a
prosperous condition, but became sud-
denly and deeply involved, and that to I
 an extent for which no remedy remain-
 ed except the last and most trying one,
 the relinquishment of the  whole busi-
 ness into the hands of the creditors.
   This  failure  was said to  have been
 owing to gross  mismanagement on the
 part of the senior  partner, but Ave be-
 lieve no charge of want of integrity was
 ever intimated.
   The  firm paid a per centage on its
 debts, and received a unanimous release
 from all its liabilities.
   After the first misfortune,  Dr. Hud-
 son immediately resumed the practice
 of the profession which  he had origin-
 ally chosen, and for  which  he was so
 eminently  qualified both  by natural ge-
 nius and education.
   He did not relinquish  his practice on
 entering into the second  partnership,
 but continued  to pursue it during the
 wnole time the connection existed—the
 majority  of his former patients and
 friends  gladly returning to  him as soon
 as it was  known he had  resumed the
 duties of his office.
   This enabled  him to liquidate  every
 claim which this unfortunate specula-
 tion had created.
   And never did any man more heartily
 rejoice  to feel himself free from such in-
 cumbrance.  The desire to accomplish
 this noble "duty," as he  thought it, had
 weighed on his mind constantly from
 the time of his failure, and had render-
 ed his days anxious and his nights  sleep-
 less.
   This  duty  was  unwaveringly per-
 formed; and not only Avere  the  debts
 extinguished, but  the interest  on  them
 was paid to the last farthing.
   Although this  Avas simply  an  act of
justice, and as such requires  no laudatory
 notice,  it,  nevertheless,  gives us great
 pleasure to  record it, as it speaks trum-
 pet-tongued for the good faith and up-
 rightness by which this noble and pure
hearted  man was  ever  distinguished.
The virtue of strict and uncompromising
honesty is so rarely practiced in our de-
generate age, that even  as an example 
HUD               372               HUM
to others, when a brilliant instance like
the present occurs, it seems well to give
it pubhcity, for in this case it wiU be re-
collected that Dr.  Hudson  was  not
legally bound /or a dollar of the money
which he disbursed with such alacrity
and good will.
  From this time, Dr. Hudson resumed
the cheerful and bright hearted temper-
ament which had been habitual to him,
but which, in consequence of the many
and sad reverses to which he had been
subjected, added to  severe  domestic
afflictions, it  was feared  by his friends
he had lost forever, and from this period
also his professional  business rapidly
augmented and his circumstances be-
came easy.
  He was realizing a handsome compe-
tence, and in his case it should seem
that the adage that "rogues succeed in
business better than honest men," was
not verified;  and  his friends felt con-
vinced that  Providence  had, indeed,
smiled upon the man, who, in the sin-
cerity of his heart  had striven to "do
unto his neighbor as he would have his
neighbor do unto him."
  The personal appearance of Dr. Hud-
son was highly prepossessing. TaUer
than  ordinary, his fine figure was weU
proportioned  and  graceful,  and the no-
bUity of his soul was fitly indicated by
the outward  grace  and dignity of his
bearing.
  Dr. Hudson died in January, 1833,
at the age  of sixty-one  years, deeply
lamented not only  by his  immediate
family, but by a large circle of attached
and devoted friends, among whom were
numbered many  of the wealthiest and
most distinguished of the scientific and
literary  persons resident in Phtiadel-
phia.
  AU who knew him intimately, res-
pected and prized him, for the exceed-
ing goodness  and sincerity which shone
so brightly conspicuous in his character.
By his patients he was idolized as few
of his professional brethren can ever ex-
pect to be.
  All Avho approached  him  were de-
lighted with the blandness of his man-
ners ; all could  see at a  glance there
was nothing approaching charlatancy
visible in his opinions or practice.
  His advice was imparted with a mod-
est bearing which charmed, but Avith a
quiet  confidence which  carried a con-
viction  of his  admirable  skill  to  the
minds of all by whom he Avas consulted.
We are aware our words fail to do jus-
tice to the many exceUencies and virtues
which distinguished Dr. Hudson.  To
those  who knew him they are not need-
ed;  to those who knew him  not, what
has been said, may serve to give a faint
idea of  the character of this most ex-
cellent man and  truly eminent dentist.
  Hudson's Preservative for Teeth
and Gums.  A pleasant aromatic mouth
wash, consisting of tinct. myrrh., tinct.
cinch, aq. cinnam. a a, §iij;  eau d'ar-
quebusade,  § i; pulv. gum Arabic.
 § ss.  M.
  HULLIHEN, S.  P.   Observations
on Tooth-ache, by.  Published  in  the
first volume of the  American Journal
of Dental  Science.   Dr.  Hullihen  is
also  author of the  following  papers,
published  in the same periodical.   1.
Observations  on Abscess of the An-
trum  Maxillary. 2. The  report of a
Case of Aneurism by Anastomosis of the
Superior Maxillary.  3. Hare-lip, and
its Treatment.   4. Of a Description of
Compound Root Forceps.  5. Abscess
of the Jaws and Treatment.   <5. Cleft
Palate and its Treatment.   7,  Cases of
Tic Douloureux, successfully  treated
with Lunar Caustic, by  applying it in
the antrum maxiUare, &.C., described in
a paper read before the Ohio Co. Medi-
cal Society of Virginia.
  HUMAN  TEETH,   CUSTOMS
CONCERNING.  Apart from the im-
portance  attached to  the  teeth, some
very  curious  and  singular  customs
connected  with them, have obtained
among many  of the nations of  the
earth.  It is said that  the Brahmins of
Hindostan, rub their teeth for more than 
HUM
373
HUN
 an hour with a twig from the racemif-
 erous  fig-tree, immediately after rising
 every morning, addressing their prayers,
 at the same time, to the sun, invoking
 blessings upon themselves and famihes.
 It is also said of them, that they sepa-
 rate their teeth as soon as the second set
 is formed.
   The inhabitants of Tonquin and Siam,
 dye their teeth  black, as do,  also,  the
 females of the Marian Islands, and the
 unmarried ladies of Java. Many of the
 women of Sumatra have  their teeth
 filed off to the gums; others have them
 filed to points, or  the enamel  filed  off,
 in order to dye them black, which is re-
 garded as very ornamental.  The great
 men of these islands color their upper
 teeth black and encase their lower ones
 with gold, creating a contrast which is
 regarded as particularly beautiful by can-
 dle-light.  The inhabitants of some of
 the other East India islands, gild their
 tAvo  front teeth,  and  dye  the  others
 black.
   The natives of Malacca cut  horizon-
 tal grooves across their upper incisores,
 and  the Abyssinian negroes file their
 teeth to points, giving them a notched or
 serrated appearance. The inhabitants of
 Prince William's Sound, says Mr. Mur-
 phy, make an incision in the upper lip,
 parallel Avith the mouth, and Avhen the
 sides of the Avound have healed, they
 insert a shell, carved in  such a manner
 as to  resemble teeth.  The  natives of
 the Sandwich islands, in order to pro-
 pitiate their god,  Eatooa, offer  up to
 him  their front teeth.
  HUMECTANT. Humectans; from
 humecto, to make moist.   A diluent.  A
 drink supposed to  increase the fluidity
 of the blood.
  HUMERAL.   Humeralis.  Pertain-
ing to the humerus or arm.
  Humeral  Artery.   The  brachial
artery.
  HUMERUS. From auos, the shoul-
der.   The upper part of the arm and
shoulder.  Also, the bone of the arm,
os  humeri,  which  is of a cylindrical'
     32
 shape, and situated between the scapu-
 la and forearm.
    HU'MILIS.  The rectus inferior oc-
 uli.
    HU'MOR.  From humeo, to be moist.
 Any fluid of the body.
    Humor, Aq.ueous. A thin, transpar-
 ent fluid, which fills the two chambers
 of the eye.
    Humor, Vitreus.  The vitreous hu-
 mor of the eye.
   HUMORAL PATHOLOGY. That
 theory which attributes aU diseases  to
 disordered states of the fluids.
   HUMORIC.  The sound produced
 by percussion  on the stomach, when
 distended with fluid or air.
   HUMORISTS.   Those who attrib-
 ute all diseases to a disordered condition
 of the fluids of the body.
   HUMOUR.  Humor.
   HUMP BACK.  A protuberance  of
 the back, occasioned by  a curvature  of
 the spine.
   HU'MULIN.  The narcotic principle
 of the humulus lupulus.
   HUMULUS LUPULUS.  The hop
 plant.
   HUNCH.  Hump.
   HUNGER.   Fames.   A desire for
 food, or Avant of it.
   HUNGARIAN BALSAM.   The
 resinous juice of the pinus pumilio.
   HUNTER, JOHN.  John Hunter,
 an eminent anatomist and surgeon, was
 born at Long Calderwood, about eight
 miles from Glasgow, Scotland,  in  the
 Parish of Kilbride East, Lanarkshire,
 February 13th, 1728.  His family hved
 retired, and He remained comparatively
 uneducated until he arrived at that age
 when he felt the importance of  know-
 ledge and became ashamed of his idle-
 ness.  Accordingly, in 1748, he went to
 London to assist his brother, Dr. Wil-
liam Hunter,inhis anatomical inquiries.
He apphed himself with great diligence
to his studies and became the best prac-
tical anatomist of the age.   In 1755, he
assisted his brother in delivering a course
of lectures, but his arduous labors so im- 
HYA
374
HYD
paired his health,  that  in 1760, his
friends procured a situation for him in
the army.  In  1765, he was  elected a
fellowof the Royal  Society.  Through
his influence a select club was formed
out of the members  of the society, who
met in retirement  for the purpose of
reading and criticising each other's pa-
pers previously to submitting them to
the general body.  Among the numer-
ous valuable contributions which  he
made to the literature of medicine, Avas
a Treatise on the Natural History  and
Diseases of the  Human Teeth; explain-
ing their Structure, Use, Formation,
Growth and Diseases,  in two parts.
The first was published in 1771, and the
second in 1778.
   Although  Mr. Hunter  was  not  a
practical dentist, his name deserves  to
be held in grateful remembrance, by the
members of the dental profession, for
having laid the foundation, upon which
nearly all that is  known of at least the
physiology of  the teeth  has been built,
and his work upon this subject, notwith-
standing all the errors which it contains,
 would, were it the only memorial which
he has left, perpetuate his name to the
latest period of time.  It constitutes, in
the language of Mr. Thomas Bell, "a
 never ceasing claim to the gratitude and
 admiration of every scientific practition-
 er of dental surgery."   But  it was  in
 general anatomy and  surgery that the
 principal  energies   of  this great and
 most extraordinary man were  chiefly
 expended, and it was  in these depart-
 ments that he was  most pre-eminently
 distinguished.  It would, therefore, be out
 of place to enlarge upon his life in a Avork
 like the present.  He died, October 16th,
 1793, in the sixty-fifth year of his age.
    HURLOCK.  A Practical Treatise
 upon Dentition, by.  London, 1742.
    HUSK. Glume; calyx.
    HY'ACINTH.  Hyacinthus. A gem.
    HYACIN'THUS. A genus of plants.
 The hyacinth.
    Hyacinthus Muscari.  Bulbus vom-
 itorius.  Musk-grape flower.
  HYALOID. Hyaloides; fromvaJioy.
glass, and siSoj,  likeness.  Resembling
glass.  Transparent.
  Hyaloid Fossa.  The depression in
the vitreous humor, in which the crystal-
line lens or  humor  is partially embed-
ded.
  Hyaloid  Membrane.   The mem
brane which forms the covering of the
vitreous humor.
  HYBOMA.   Gibbosity of the spine.
  HYBRID.  Hybrida; from u(?pi$, an
injury,  because  its nature  is tainted.
The offspring of two different animals,
as the mule,  or plants of a  different
species.   In Physiology, words com-
pounded of different languages.
  HYDARTHRUS.    Hydarthrosis;
from  uScop, water,  and apOpov, a joint.
Hydrops articulorum.  Dropsy of a joint.
White-swelling.
  HYDATID.   Hydatis;  from  via-
tis, a vesicle, and vSap, water. An en-
cysted tumor, containing a transparent
Avatery fluid.  Also, a genus of intesti-
nal worms, characterized  by a  body,
wholly, or posteriorly,  vesicular.
   HYDATIDOCE'LE.  Hydatocele;
from vSatis, a hydatid, and xrfkri, a tu-
mor.  A tumor formed of, or contain-
ing hydatids.
   HY'DATOID.   Hydatoides;  from
uScop,  water, and  eibos,  resemblance.
 Watery; resembling water.
   HY'DERUS.   Anasarca. Dropsy.
   HY'DRAGOGUES.  Hydragoga;
 from v§ap, Avater,  and  ayco, I  expel.
 Medicines which increase the secretions
 or excretions, so as to  cause the remov-
 al of effused serum, or water, from any
 part of the body.
   HYDRARGYRI ACETAS.  Ace-
 tate of mercury.
   Hydrargyri Ammo'nio-Chloridum.
 Ammonio-chloride of  mercury.
   Hydrargyri Bichloridi Liquor.—
 A solution of corrosive sublimate.
   Hydrargyri Bichloridum. Bichlo-
 ride of mercury.
   Hydrargyri Bicyanidum.  Bicya-
 nide of mercury. 
HYD
375
HYD
  Hydrargyri Biniodidum.  Biniodi-
de of mercury.
  Hydrargyri Binox'ydum. Binoxyd
of mercury.
  Hydrargyri Bisulphuretum.  Bi-
sulphuret of mercury.  Cinnabar.
  Hydrargyri  Borussias.   Hydrar-
gyri cyanuretum.
  Hydrargyri Bromidum.  Bromide
of mercury.
  Hydrargyri Calx Alba.  Hydrar-
gyrum ammoniatum.
  Hydrargyri Chloridum.  Chloride
of mercury. Protochloride or sub-chlo-
ride of mercury.  Calomel.
  Hydrargyri Chloridum Corrosi-
vum.   Corrosive  chloride of mercury.
Bichloride of mercury.  Corrosive sub-
limate.
  Hydrargyri C'yanuret'um.  Bicy-
anide, cyanuret, or prussiate of mercury.
  Hydrargyri Deuto-Iodidum.   Bi-
noxyd of mercury.
  Hydrargyri Hyperoxydum.  Hy-
drargyri oxydum rubrum.
  Hydrargyri  Iodidum.    Iodide  of
mercury.
  Hydrargyri  Iodidum  Rubrum.—
Red iodide of  mercury.
  Hydrargyri Murias Corrosivus.—
Corrosive sublimate.
  Hydrargyri Murias Dulcis.  Cal-
omel.
  Hydrargyri Nitras. Nitrate of mer-
cury.
  Hydrargyri Nitrico-Oxydum.  Ni-
tric oxyd of mercury.
  Hydrargyri  Oxydum  Nigrum.—
Black oxyd of mercury.
  Hydrargyri Oxydum Rubrum. Red
precipitate of mercury.  Nitric oxyd of
mercury.
  Hydrargyri  Oxydum  Sulphuri-
cum.   See Hydrargyri Sulphas Flavus.
  Hydrargyri Oxymu'rias. Corrosive
sublimate.
  Hydrargyri Prussias.  Hydrargyri
cyanuretum.
  Hydrargyri Submurias.  Calomel.
  Hydrargyri Submurias  Ammonia-
tum.   Hydrargyrum ammoniatum.
  Hydrargyri  Sulphas  Flavus.—
Yellow sulphate of mercury.  Subsul-
phate.  Sulphate of mercury. Turpeth
mineral.
  Hydrargyri  Sulphuret'um   Ni-
grum.   Black sulphuret of mercury.
Ethiop's mineral.
  Hydrargyri  Sulphuretum  Ru'-
brum.   Red  sulphuret  of  mercury.
Bisulphuret of mercury.  Cinnabar.
  Hydrargyri  Supermurias.   Hy-
drargyri chloridum corrosivum.
  HYDRARGY'RIA.  Eczema mer-
curiale.  Mercurial eczema, or eczema
resulting from the use of mercury.
  H YDRARGYRO-IODIDES. Com-
pounds of iodide or cyanide of mercury
with corresponding salts of potassium,
sodium, &c.
  HYDRARGYRUM.  From vSwp,
water, and apyupoj,  stiver.  Quicksilver.
Mercury.  A liquid metal, of a brUliant,
bluish-white color.
  Hydrargyrum Acetatum. Hydrar-
geri acetas.
  Hydrargyrum Ammonia'tum.  Am-
moniated mercury.
  Hydrargyrum  Borussicum.  Hy-
drargyri cyanuretum,
  Hydrargyrum  Calcinatum.  Hy-
drargyri binoxydum.
  Hydrargyrum  Cum Creta.   Mer-
cury with  chalk.
  Hydrargyrum  Cum  Magnesia.—
Mercury Avith carbonate of magnesia.
  Hydrargyrum  Hydrocyanicum.—
Hydrargyri cyanuretum.
  Hydrargyrum Muriaticum. Chlo-
ride of mercury.  Protochloride of  mer-
cury.   Calomel.
  Hydrargyrum  Phosphora'tum.—
Phosphureted mercury.
  Hydrargyrum   Precipitatum.—
Hydrargyrum praecipitatum album.—
Hydrargyrum ammoniatum.
  Hydrargyrum Precipitatum  Cin-
ereum. Hydrargyri oxydum nigrum.
  Hydrargyrum Purificatum.  Pu-
rified mercury.
  Hydrargyrum    Sacchara'tum.—
Mercury triturated with lump sugar. 
HYD
376
HYD
  Hydrargyrum Vitriolatum.   Hy-
drargvri sulphas flavus.
  HYDRARTHRUS.  Hydarthrus.
  HYDRASTIS  CANADENSIS.—
Yellow root.  Tumeric  root.  Golden
seal.
  HYDRATE. A compound in which
water is chemically combined.
  HY'DRATED.   Chemically  com-
bined with Avater.
  HYDRENCEPHALOCELE.  Hy-
drocephalus, chronic.
  HYDRENCEPH'ALOID.   From
t)5wp, Avater, and £yxjij>a?ioj, the brain, and
eiSos, resemblance.  Resembling hydro-
cephalus.  Spurious hydrocephalus, re-
sulting from diseases of the bowels and
the irritation of teething.
  HYDRENCEPHALUS.  Acute hy-
drocephalus.
  HYDRENTEROCE'LE.    From
uSwp, Avater,jj'T'£pov, intestine, and xr[xvi, a
tumor.  Intestinal  hernia, with an en-
closure of water in  the sac.
  HYDRIODATE. The old name for
iodide.
  HYDRIODIC ACID.  A colorless,
gaseous acid, consisting of one atom of
iodine and one of hydrogen.
  HYDRO'A.  From ^Scop, water.  A
pustule containing  a serous  or' watery
fluid.
  HYDROE'MIA. From vcap,water,
and aifia, blood.  A state of the blood in
Avhich there is an excess of its watery
constituents.
  HYDROA'RION. From vSwp,water,
and aapiov,  ovarium.  Dropsy of the
ovarium.
  HYDROBLEPHARON.    From
i>5«p, water, and fixetyapov, eyelid.  Wa-
tery swelling of the eyelids.
  HYDROBROM'IC ACID.  An acid
consisting of one atom of hydrogen and
one of bromine.
   HYDROCELIAS.  Ascites.
   HYDROCAR'DIA.   Dropsy of the
pericardium.
  HYDROCE'LE. FromvSwp, water,
and xrjXri, a tumor.   A collection  of se-
rous fluid either in the membrane of the
scrotum, or in the coats  of the testicle
and its vessels.
  Hydrocele Cystata. Encysted hy-
drocele of the spermatic chord.
  Hydrocele Peritonei.  Ascites.
  Hydrocele Spinalis. Hydrorachis,
  HYDROCEPHALUS.  From v8aP,
water, and xefyaxr;, the head.   Dropsy
of the brain.  Dropsy  of the head.  It
is distinguished into acute and chronic;
external and  internal.   When acute, it
is attended by symptoms of inflammation
of the brain.   Chronic hydrocephalus
generally commence at an  early period
of life, causes a distention of the  brain
and bones of the cranium, and generally
proves fatal.  When  external, it con-
sists in  a mere infiltration  of the sub-
cutaneous cellular tissue.  The internal
variety, is said to be seated in the men-
inges  and  surface of the  excephalon,
and is termed tubercidar meningitis.
  Hydrocephalus Spurius.  Hydren-
cephalous disease.
  HYDROCHLORATES.  The old
name for chlorides.
  HYDROCHLO'RIC ACID. Muri-
atic acid.
  HYDROCYANIC ACID.  Acidum
hydrocyanicum.   Prussic acid.
  HYDROCYSTIS.   From  vSup,
water, and xvatis, a  bladder.  A cyst
fiUed  with a serous fluid.
  HYDRODERMA. From i>8wp, wa-
ter, and Sepua, the skin.  Dropsy of the
skin.   Anasarca.
   HYDRO-ENTERO-EPIPLOCE-
LE.  An entero-epiplocele, complicat-
ed with effusion of serous fluid in the
hernial sac.
   Hydro-Epiploce'le.  Omental her-
nia, with effusion of serous fluid in the
hernial sac.
   Hydro-Epiplomph'alum. Umbihcal
hernia, with  an effusion of serous fluid
in the sac.
   HYDROFLU'ORIC   ACID.   A
caustic, gaseous  acid, obtained by the
action of  sulphuric acid on fluoride of
calcium.
   HY'DROGEN. Hydrogenium; from 
HYD
377
HYD
vSap, water, and yewaa, I produce.  So
called, because it forms water in combi-
nation with oxygen.   Inflammable air;
an elementary body, known  only in a
gaseous state, without odor or color.
   Hydrogen,  Carbureted.   Carbu-
reted hydrogen.
   Hydrogen, Oxyd of.  Protoxyd of
hydrogen.  Water.
   Hydrogen, Phosphureted. A com-
pound of  hydrogen and  phosphorus;
a transparent colorless gas, of an offen-
sive odor, and bitter taste.
   HY'DROLATA.  Distilled water.
   HYDROL'OGY. Hydrohgia ; from
vSap, water, and xoyos, a discourse.   A
treatise on the properties and nature of
water.
   HYDROMAN'IA.   From vSap, wa-
ter, and uavia, mania.  A propensity
to drown oneself.
   HYDROM'EL.  Hydromcli;  from
uSup, water, and ueXi,  honey.   Water
sweetened with honey.
   HYDROMETER.  Hydrometrum;
fromuStop, water, and/w^cw, a measure.
An instrument to determine the specific
gravity of fluids.
   HYDROMETRA.     From uSwp,
water, and ur;tpa, the  womb.   Dropsy
of the womb.
   HYDROM'PHALUM. From vSap,
Avater, and outyaxos, the navel.  A tu-
mor at the navel containing  a serous
fluid.
   HYDROMYRIN'GA.  From vSap,
Avater, and myringa or myrinx, the mem-
brana tympani.  Dropsy of the tympa-
num.
   HYDRONEPHRO'SIS. FromvSap,
Avater, and  vefpos, kidney. An accu-
mulation of urine in the kidney, caused
by obstruction of the uriniferous tubes.
  HYDRONOSOS.   From  d8coP, wa-
ter, or iSpwj, sweat, and voaos, a disease.
Sudor anglicanus.  Sweating sickness.
  HYDRO'PATHY.   Hydropathia;
from vSap, water, and  riados, disease.
The treatment of disease by the external
and internal use of water.
  HY'DROPERICAR'DIUM.   Hy-1
          32«
 dropericardia; from vSap, and rtepixap-
 8iov, the pericardium.  Dropsy  of the
 pericardium.
   HYDROPHO'BIA.   From  v8ap,
 water,  and $o6ea,  dread.   Literally,
 dread of water. Canine madness. That
 pecuhar and horrible disease consequent
 on the bite of a rabid animal.
   HYDROPHTHAL'MIA.    From
 vSap, and o$9aXuos, the eye.   Dropsy of
 the eyeball.
   HYDRO-PHYSOCE'LE.   From
 uSwp, water, fvatj, wind, and xv\Xri, a
 tumor.  Hernia, containing serum and
 gas.
   HYDROPIC.  Hydropicus;  from
 uSpco^, the  dropsy.  One  affected with
 dropsy.   Relating to dropsy.
   HYDROPIC A.  Hydragogues.
   HYDROPLEURITIS.   Pleurisy,
 attended with  serous effusion.  Acute
 hydrothorax.
   HYDROPNEUMO'NIA.    From
 tSup, water, and rtvevuav, the lung.  Se-
 rous infiltration of the cellular tissue of
 the lungs.
   HYDROPNEUMOSARCA. From
 vSap, water, ttvevua, wind, and <rapf,
 flesh. An abscess containing air, liquid
 and flesh,  or generaUy, extravasated
 blood.
   HYDRO'PNEUMOTHO'RAX.__
 FromuSwp, water, rtvevuav, the lung, and
 0copa|, the chest. Pneumothorax, compli-
 cated with serous effusion into the chest.
   HY'DROPS.    From  vSap, water.
 Dropsy.
   Hydrops Abdominis.   Ascites.
   Hydrops Articulorum.   Hydar-
 thrus.
   Hydrops Capitis.  Hydrocephalus.
   Hydrops Cerebri.  Acute hydro-
 cephalus.
   Hydrops Cysticus.   A collection  of
 serous fluid in a cyst or sac.
  Hydrops Genu. Dropsy of the knee.
  Hydrops Glottidis.  OZdema of the
glottis.
  Hydrops Oculi.  Hydropthalmia.
  Hydrops Ovarii.    Dropsy of the
ovarium. 
HYG               378               HYG
  Hydrops  Palpebre.    Hydroble-
pharon.
  Hydrops Pectoris.  Hydrothorax.
  Hydrops  Pericardii.   Hydroperi-
cardium.
  Hydrops Pul'monum.  Hydropneu-
monia.
  Hydrops Sacci Lachrymalis. Fis-
tula lachrymalis.
  Hydrops Saccorum Pleure.  Hy-
drothorax.
  Hydrops Tubalis.  Serous accumu-
lation in the Fallopian tube.
  HYDROPYRETOS.     Sweating
sickness.
  HYDRORA'CHIS.    From  vSap,
water, pa^tj, the spine.  Dropsy of the
spine.
  HYDRORCHIS.  Hydrocele.
  HYDRORRHEA.    From  vSap,
water, and pea, I flow. Any chronic dis-
charge of serous fluid.  Also, Egyptian
ophthalmia,  with a profuse flow of
tears.
  HYDROSARCOCE'LE.     From
vSap, water, aapi, flesh,  and  xtiXt;, a tu-
mor.  Sarcocele,  complicated with se-
rous effusion of the tunica  vaginalis.
  HYDROSTATICS. Hydrostatica;
from vSup, water, and ataais, condition.
That part of physics which treats of the
weight and equilibrium of fluids.
  HYDROTHO'RAX.   From vSap,
water, 0u>paf, the chest.  Dropsy of the
chest.  Effusion of serum in one or both
of the cavities of the pleura.
  HYDROTICA.   Hydragogues.
  HYDROTIS.   Dropsy of the ear.
  HYGIENE.   From  vyum,  health.
That part of medicine  which  has for
its object the preservation of  health.
  Hygiene, Dental.  That part of the
dental branch  of  medicine which  has
for  its object the preservation of the
health  of the teeth  and the  parts with
which they are immediately  connected,
and as the organism generally, from the
period of birth, is subject to hygienic
influences, so also, are the teeth, gums
and  alveolar processes.   But,  as the
health of one organ is  dependent upon
the manner in which all the  rest per
form their  functions, it is impossible to
lay down efficacious hygienic  rules for   «
the one, irrespective of the condition of
the others.   A system of hygiene, there-
fore, for one set or class of organs, to be
complete, must, of necessity, have refer-
ence to the health of all the other organs
of the body.  For example, the state of
the general health during the ossification
of  the teeth, determines  the  physical
condition of these organs, and as a con-
sequence, their susceptibility to morbid
impressions;  so also, does it affect their
condition after they are formed, as well
as that of the parts with which they are
connected.   StiU, experience has estab-
lished certain enhghtened  rules for the
care of the  teeth which have been found
efficacious  in counteracting many of the
morbid influences to which they are
exposed.  Some of these it wtil be proper
to notice, but in the few remarks which
the author  proposes to make upon this
subject, he  does not intend to enumerate
the various morbid influences to which
they are exposed.    For  information
upon these  subjects, the reader is refer-
red to  the  various  articles on the dis-
eases of the teeth  and gums, as treated
of under their appropriate heads.  Also,
to the characteristics of the teeth, gums,
safivary calculus, and the  fluids of the
mouth.
  The particular  care which the teeth,
when well  arranged and  free from dis-
ease, require, to secure their preserva-
tion, is none other, to use the language
of Desirabode, than  that which should
"form the daUy 'toilette' of the mouth,"
and this should consist in thoroughly
cleaning  the  teeth three  or four times
every day  with a suitable brush and
waxed floss-silk, as recommended by
Dr. L. S. Parmly.   The brush alone is
not sufficient.  The outer and inner sur-
faces of the teeth only can be kept clean
by the brush, and for the  removal of
lodgments of alimentary substances from
between  them  where they are most
likely to be productive of  pernicious ef- 
              HYM

fects,  floss-silk, hemp or flax, is abso-
lutely necessary.
  If stains or discolorations appear on
the enamel of the teeth, they should at
once be removed by the use of some
suitable tooth powder, or, what in many
cases wiU be found more  efficient and
preferable, by an argiUacious tooth-pol-
isher, as advised by Dr. L. S. Parmly,
or some other similar mechanical agent.
   The  use  of the foregoing  simple
means should  be commenced early, as
soon  as the temporary teeth begin to
make  their appearance  through the
gums,  and  regularly  persevered  in
through life.  During early childhood,
and untU the habit becomes so fuUy es-
tablished as to be indespensable to com-
fort,  it should be attended  to by the
nurse, or mother.   See Teeth, tempo-
rary,  importance of the preservation of.
   Much more might be said upon this
subject, but as almost every thing con-
nected with it is treated of in other ar-
ticles, it is  not necessary  to repeat here
what is there stated in relation to it.
   HYGIENTC.   Relating to hygiene.
   HYGROL'OGY. Hygrobgia; from
uypoj, humid, and xoyos, a discourse.  A
treatise on the fluids of the body.
   HYGRO'MA.  From  vypoj, humid.
A  tumor containing  serous  or  some
other humid matter, but not pus. Drop-
sy of the bursas mucosae.
   HYGROM'ETER. Hygrometrum;
from  vypos, humid, and uetpov, a mea-
sure.  An instrument for measuring the
humidity of the atmosphere.
   H YGROM'ETRY. The art of mea-
suring the  dryness or humidity of the
atmosphere.
   HYGROPHOBIA. Hydrophobia.
   HYMEN.  From vur;v, a membrane
or pellicle.   Also, the god of marriage.
In  Anatomy, a circular fold of mucous
membrane  which, partly, or  wholly,
closes the entrance to the  vagina in vir-
gins, and especially before menstruation,
though itis said to be sometimes wanting.
  HYMENE'A.  The name of a ge-
nus of plants.
9              HYP

  Hymenea Courbaril and Marti-
ana.  The trees which are said to yield
the gum anime.
  HYMENO'DES.   Membranous.—
Urine fiUed with pedicles.
  HYMENOL'OGY.   Hymenologia;
from vurjv, a membrane, and xoyos, a
discourse.  A treatise on the structure
and functions of membranes.
  HYMENOPTERA.   From vuVv, a
membrane, and rttepov, a wing. An or-
der of insects, as  the bee, wasp, &,c,
which have  membranous wings.
  HYMENOT'OMY.   Hymenotomia;
from vuyv, a membrane, and teuva, I
cut.  The  dissection of membranes.
Also, the incision of the  hymen.
  HYO-BA'SIO-GLOSSUS. The ba-
sio-glossus muscle.
   HY'O-CHON'DRO-GLOS'SUS.—
The hyo-glossus muscle.
  HYO-EPIGLOTTICUS.  Belong-
ing to the hyoides and epiglottis.  Also,
applied to the hyo-epiglottic hgament.
  HYO-GLOS'SUS.   A thin, broad,
quadrUateral muscle, which  has  its
origin from  the body, cornu, and apen-
dex of the os hyoides, and is inserted
into the side of the tongue, forming the
greater part of its bulk.
   HYOI'DES.  From the Greek letter
v, and siSoj, likeness, because it resem-
 bles the upsilon.  The os hyoides.
   Hyoides  Os.  A movable bone, con-
 vex anteriorly, situated in the soft parts
 of  the  neck,  between  the  root of the
 tongue and  larynx.
   HYOSCYAMUS.    From   vs,  a
 swine,  and xvauos, a bean ; so called be-
 cause hogs eat it, or because the plant is
hairy and bristly like a hog.  The name
of a genus of plants. Also, henbane.
   Hyoscyamus Albus.   White hen-
bane.
  Hyoscyamus Luteus. See Nicotiana
Rustica.
  Hyoscyamus Niger.    Black hen-
bane.  Hyoscyamus.
  HYO-THYROIDEUS.  The thyro-
hyoid muscle.
  HYPER. Trtep.   Above; in excess.
37 
HYP
380
HYP
  HYPERACU'SIS.    From  vrtep,
above, and  axoucuj,  hearing.  Morbid
sensibility of the organ of hearing.
  HYPERE'MIA. From vrtep, above,
and aiua, blood. Sanguinous congestion.
Local plethora.
  HYPERESTHE'SIS.  From vrtep,
above, and aiaOavopai, to feel.  Preter-
natural, or morbid increase of sensibility.
  HYPERAPHTA.   From vrtep, in
excess, and aq>rj, touch.  Morbid acute-
ness of touch.
  HYPERCRIN'IA.    From  vrtep,
above, and xpiva, I  separate.  Morbid
increase of the secretions.
  HYPER'CRI'SIS.   An  excessive
crisis, or  critical evacuation.
  HYPER'EMESIS.  From  vrtep, in
excess, and euea,  I vomit.  Excessive
vomiting.
 HYPEREPHIDRO'SIS.  From^rttp,
above, and efyiSpaais, excessive sweat-
ing.  Immoderate  sweating.
  HYPERERETHIS'IA. From vrtep,
in excess, and epeQi^w, I excite.  Exces-
sive irritability.
  HYPERGEN'ESIS.   From vrtep, in
excess, and yevqois, generation.  That
excess of formative power in any  organ
or tissue Avhich occasions  excessive de-
velopment.
  HYPERGEUSTIA.  Hypergeusis;
from vrtep, above, and yevatis, taste. Ex-
cessive sensibility  of the organ of taste.
  HYPERHEMATO'SIS.   Inflam-
mation.
  HYPERICUM. The name of a ge-
nus of plants.
  Hypericum Androsemum.  St.  Pe-
ter's wort.
  Hypericum Bacciferum.  A tree of
Brazil, the juice of the bark of which,
in a dry state, resembles gamboge.
  Hypericum Perfoliatum. St. John's
wort.
  HYPERINO'SIS. From vrtep, above,
and  is, fibre.  That  condition of the
blood  in which there  is  an excess of
fibrin, as in inflammation.
  HYPERO'A.  From vrtep, upon,  and
aov, a high place.  The palate.
  HYPEROITIS. From hyperoa, the
palate, and itis, denoting inflammation.
Inflammation of the palate.
  HYPERO-PHARYNGEUS.  The
palato-pharyngeus muscle.
  HYPEROSPHRE'SIA. Fromvrtfp,
above, and ootypqois, smeU.  Excessive
acuteness of smell.
  HYPEROSTO'SIS.   From  vrtep,
upon, and oateov, a bone.  Exostosis.
  HYPERSARCO'MA.  From vrtep,
above, and <jap|, flesh.   Hypersarcosis.
An exuberant  growth  of flesh.  A
fleshy excrescence.
  HYPERSARCO'SIS.   Hypersar-
coma.
  HYPERSTHENI'A.  From  vrtep,
above, and aOevos, poAver.  Excess of
vital power.
  HYPERSTHE'NIC.  Hyperstheni-
cus. Active.
  HYPERTONTA.   From vrtep, be-
yond, and tovos, tone.   Excess of tone
in the tissues of the body.
  HYPERTROPHY.  Hypertrophia;
from vrtep, in excess, and tpofyri, nour-
ishment.  Excess  of nourishment, and
consequent increase of an organ or part,
without changing the nature of its sub-
stance.
  Hypertrophy of the Heart.  A
morbid increase  of the muscular sub-
stance of the heart.
  HYPERURE'SIS.   Superabundant
secretion  of urine.
  HYPINO'SIS. From vno, under, and
is, fibre.  A  deficiency of fibrin in the
blood, as  in chlorosis, scorbutus, &c.
  HYPNOBATA'SIS.   The  act of
walking  in one's  sleep.  Somnambu-
lism.
  HYPNOL'OGY. Hypnologia; from
vrtvos, sleep, and Xoyos, a discourse.  A
treatise on sleep.  Also, that part of
hygiene which relates to the proper reg-
ulation of sleeping and waking.
  HYPNOTIC.    Hypnotkus; from
vrtvos, sleep.    Medicines  which induce
sleep.  Somniferous; narcotic.
  HY'PO-.  A prefix, from vrto, under,
signifying deficiency. 
HYP               381               HYP
   Hypo.   An abbreviation of hypo-
 chondriasis.
   HYPOE'MA.   From vrto,  under,
 and aiua, blood.  Sanguinous effusion
 into the chambers of the eye, under the
 cornea.
   HYPOCATHAR'SIS.   From vrto,
 under, and xaflatpw, purgation.   Gentle
 purgation;  insufficient operation of a
 cathartic.
   HYPOCHONDRIAC.  Hypochon-
 driasis ; from vrto, under, and xovSpos, a
 cartilage.  Belonging to the hypochon-
 dria.  Also, one affected with hypo-
 chondriasis.
   Hypochondriac Region.  In Anato-
 my, the space situated on each side be-
 low the short ribs.
   HYPOCHONDRIASIS.  Morbus
 hypochondriacus. Lowness of spirits; a
 low species of melancholy  combined
 with dyspepsia, flatulence, and iUusion
 of the senses.
   HYPOCHON'DRIUM.  The lateral
 and superior regions of the  abdomen
 under the cartUages of the false ribs.
   HYPOCRAN'IUM.  From vrto, un-
 der, and xpajaov, the skull.  A collection
 of pus between the cranium  and dura
 mater.
   HYPODERMAT'OMY.  Hypoder-
 matomia;  from  vrto, under, Sepua,  the
 skin, and tour;, incision.  The section of
 subcutaneous parts, as the tendons, mus-
 cles, &c.
   HYPO'GALA.  From  vrto,  under,
 and yata,, milk.   A collection of Avhite
 humor in  the chambers of the eye.
   HYPOGASTRIC.  Hypogastricus.
 Belonging to the hypogastrium.
   Hypogastric Artery. The internal
 iliac artery.
   Hypogastric Plexus.   A plexus of
 nerves formed by the  termination of the
 aortic plexus,  and  by  the union of
 branches  from the lower lumbar gan-
glia. It is situated at the lateral and
posterior parts of the  rectum, and  the
lower and back part of the bladder.
  Hypogastric  Region.   Hypogas-
trium.
  HYPOGASTRIUM.   From vrto,
under, and ya^p, the stomach. The
lower part of the abdomen, extending
from above the pubes to within three
fingers' breadth of the navel.   It is di-
vided into three secondary regions, the
pubic, or central, and two lateral, or in-
guinal.
  HYPOGASTROCE'LE.  A hernia
in the hypogastrium, formed by the pro-
trusion of intestine, or omentum through
the lower part of the linea alba.
  HYPOGLOS'SUS.  From vrto, un-
der, and  yXaaaa,  the  tongue.    That
Avhich is  under the tongue, as the hypo-
glossal nerves.
  HYPO'MIA.   From  vrto,   under,
and auos, the shoulder.   The part sub-
jacent to  the shoulder.
  HYPO'PION. Hypopyon; from vrto,
under, and rtvov, pus, because the pus
is under the cornea.  Apphed to  a small
abscess between the laminae of the cornea,
and to collections of coagulable  lymph,
hke pus, in the chambers of the eye.
  HYPORIN'ION. From vrto, under,
and pn>, the nose.  The upper  lip be-
neath the nose; also, the beard which
grows upon it.
  HYPOSPA'DIAS.   Hypospadia;—
from vrto, under, and artaa, I draw.  A
malformation of the penis, in which the
urethra opens at the base, instead of the
apex.
  HYPOSTA'PHYLE.   Relaxation
and elongation of the uvula.
  HYPOSTASIS.  Sediment from the
urine.
  HYPOSTHE'NIC.   Contro-stimu-
lant.
  HYPOTHE'NAR.  From vrto, un-
der, and ^»/ap, the palm of the hand.
A muscle on the inside of the hand.
Also, the part of the hand opposite to
the palm.
  Hypothenar Eminence. The fleshy
projection on the palm or surface of the
hand, corresponding to the little  finger.
  Hypothenar Minimi Digiti. The
flexor parvus minimi digiti muscle. 
IAT
382
ICH
  Hypothenar  Minor Metacarpus.
The abducto minimi digiti muscle.
  Hypothenar  Riolani.  The flexor
parvus minimi digiti muscle.
  HYPOTH'ESIS.  A supposition in-
vented to explain a phenomenon.
  HYPOZO'MA.  From vrto, under,
and favvvpi, I bind round. A membrane
or septum.  The diaphragm.
  HYSSOP. Hyssopus officinalis.
  Hyssop, Hedge. Gratiola officinalis.
  HYSSOPUS.  The name of a genus
of plants.
  Hyssopus Capitatus.  WUd thyme.
  Hyssopus Officinalis.    Common
hyssop.
  HYSTERA.  The uterus.
  HYSTERAL'GIA.   From vatepa,
the uterus, and aXyos, pain.  Pain in the
uterus.
  HYSTE'RIA.   From vatepa,  the
uterus, from which the disease Avas sup-
posed to originate.  Hysterics. A mor-
bid affection peculiar  to the human fe-
male, occurring in paroxysms, and char-
acterized by anxiety of mind, effusion
of tears, palpitation at the heart, diffi-
cult breathing, a  sense of suffocation,
stupor,  insensibility, agitation of the
limbs and whole  body,  spasms, alter-
nate fits of laughter and  crying, with a
discharge  of frothy saliva, and some-
times dehrium.
  Hysteria Cataleptica.  Catalepsy.
  HYSTERICS.  Hysteria,
  HYSTERITIS.  Metritis.  Inflam-
mation of the uterus.
  HYSTEROCE'LE.   Hernia of the
uterus.
  HYSTERO-CYSTOCE'LE. Her-
nia of the uterus, Avith displacement of
the bladder.
  HYSTERO-MALA'CIA.   Hyste-
romabcosis; from vatepa, the uterus, and
/uatowua,  softness.   Softening  of  the
uterus.
  HYSTEROMAN'IA.  Nymphoma-
nia.
  HYSTERON'CUS. A tumor of the
uterus.
  HYSTEROPTO'SIS.    Prolapsus
uteri.                   _
  HYSTRICTASIS.  A dilase of the
hairs, in which they stand erect.
  IAMA.  laua.  A cure; a medicine.
  IAMATOL'OGY.  Materia medica.
  IATERIA.  The curative art.
  IATRALEIPTICE. The treatment
of disease by friction and apphcations to
the skin.
  IATRALEPTES.  From vatpos, a
physician,  and aXei^a, I anoint.  One
who treats disease by friction and other
external remedies.
  IATRINE.  A female practitioner of
medicine.
  lATROCHY'MIA.  A physician of
the chemical school—one who treats
disease with chemical remedies.
  lATROGNOM'ICA.   From latpos,
a  physician, and  yt»/a><j*co,  I  knoAv.
Medical knowledge.  A knowledge of
medicine.
  IATROS.  Iafpoj. A physician.
  ICE.  Ghcies. Frozen water.
  Ice Cap.  A bladder fiUed with pul-
verized ice and applied to the head.
  ICELAND  MOSS.  Cetraria islan-
dica.
  Iceland Spar.   Crystallized carbo-
nate of lime.
  ICHOR.  lXap.   Sanies.  A thin,
watery, and acrid discharge.
  ICHOROUS. Of the nature of, or
resembling, ichor.
  ICHTHYOCOL'LA. From  iXdvs, a 
ICT
383
IGN
fish, and xoxxa, glue.  Isinglass.  Fish-
glue.  Pure gelatine.  The dried swim-
ming-bladder  of  acipenser  huso,  and
other species of the sturgeon-genus.
   ICHTHYOLOGY.  From iX9vS, a
fish, and xoyos, a discourse.  A  treatise
on fishes.
   ICHTHYOSIS. From iX9vs, a fish,
from the resemblance of the scales to
 those of a fish. A disease characterized
 by a rough, hard, thickened, and almost
 horny texture of the integuments of the
 body.   It is called the fish-skin disease.
   Ichthyosis Pellagra.   See Pella-
gra.
   Ichthyosis  Seba'cea.    Sebaceous
ichthyosis.  A morbid incrustation of
sebaceous substance  upon the surface
of the skin.
   I'CICA ARACOUCHPNI.  A tree
ofGuayanafrom which the aracouchini
balsam is obtained.
   ICOSAN'DRIA. Icosandrous; from
eixoai, twenty, and av*ip, a  man or hus-
band.    Hermaphrodite  plants  A\Tith
flowers, having twenty or more stamina
on the inner side of the petals.
   ICTERITIA ALBA.  Chlorosis.
   ICTERUS.  From ixtepos,  a yel-
Ioav thrush.   A  disease characterized
by yellowness of  the skin  and eyes,
with white  feces, high colored urine,
languor, inactivity, loathing of food,
acidity of the stomach, nausea and  dis-
turbed sleep.
   Icterus Albus.  Chlorosis.
   Icterus Biliosus.   This species is
said to be occasioned by the inspissation
of bUe in the mouth of the ductus com-
munis choledochus.
   Icterus  Calculosus.    GaU-stone
jaundice.
   Icterus Gravidarum.  The jaundice
of pregnant females.
   Icterus Hepaticus.  Hepatic jaun-
dice.
  Icterus Infantum.  The jaundice
of infants.  Yellow gum.
  Icterus  Spasmodicus.   Spasmodic
jaundice.
  Icterus Nigra. Black jaundice.
  Icterus Viridis.  Green jaundice.
  ICTODES  FCETIDUS.   Dracon-
tium foetidum.
  ICTUS.   From ko, to strike.   A
stroke or blow; a stroke of the sun, coup
de soldi.  Also, the pulsation of an ar-
tery, and the sting of a bee.
  Ictus Solis.   A stroke of the sun.
  IDEA.  From »5W, I see. The im-
age of an object in the mind.
  IDE, W. E.   Author of  a paper on
the use of Arsenious Acid for Destroy-
ing the Nerves-in Decayed Teeth, pub-
hshed in the American Journal of Den-
tal Science, volume second.—Also,  of
a paper on Avhole sets of Artificial Teeth,
pubhshed in the Dental  Register of the
West, volume first.     .
  IDEOLOGY. Ideobgia; from eiSa,
I see, and Xoyos,  a  discourse.  A trea-
tise on ideas.  InteUectual philosophy.
  IDIOPATHIC.   Idiopathicus; from
i8wj, peculiar, and jtafloj/an affection.
A primary disease;  one not dependent
on any other.
  IDIOSYN'CRASY.   Idiosyncrasia;
from 18105, peculiar, aw, with, and xpa-
ais, a temperament.  A constitution pe-
culiarly susceptible to  morbid impres-
sions from certain agents, Avhich Avould
produce no effect on others of a different
constitution.
  ID'IOT.  Foolish; stupid; one who
is destitute of reason.
  ID'IOTISM.   Idiocy.  Amentia.
  IDIOTRO'PIA.   Idiosyncrasy.
  IGNATIA  AMA'RA.   The plant
which yields St.  Ignatius' bean.
  IGNIS. Fire.  The evolution of light
and heat which  results from combus-
tion.  Also,  universal solvents, and the
heat, redness and acrimony of disease.
  Ignis  Cal'idus.  A hot fire.  Violent
inflammation about terminating in gan-
grene.
  Ignis  Columelle.   Erysipelas.
  Ignis  Fatuus.  A luminous appear-
ance sometimes  seen  at night over
marshy  grounds, produced by inflam-
mable gasses, especially the phosphu-
reted hydrogen. 
ILI
384
IMM
  Ignis Frigidus.  Gangrene.
  Ignis Persicus.  Erysipelas.  Also,
anthrax.
  Ignis Rote.  Fire for fusion.
  IGNITION.  From ignis, fire. The
act of catching fire, or of being heated to
redness.
  ILAPHIS. Arctium lappa.
  IL'EAC  PASSION.   Passw iliaca.
Colic seated in  the ilium, and  charac-
terized by severe griping pain, vomit-
ing of fecal  matter, costiveness  and
spasms of the abdominal muscles.
  ILEITIS.   Inflammation  of  the
ileum.
  ILEO-.  From ileum,  the smaU in-
testine. Used as a prefix.
  iLEO-CmcAL Valve.  A valve at the
junction of the ileum and ccecum.
  Ileo-Colic Artery. The last branch
from the concavity of the superior mes-
enteric artery, distributed to the ileum,
ccecum,  and  commencement  of the
colon.
  Ileo-Colitis. Enteritis.
  Ileo-Lumbar Artery. A branch of
the internal Uiac  artery, distributed to
the psoas and Uiacus muscles.
  ILEUM. Ikon.  From eiXea, to turn
about,  from its convolutions. The last
portion of the small intestines  which
terminate at the valve <of the ccecum.
  ILEUS. See Ileac Passion.
   ILEX.  The name of a genus of
plants.
  Ilex Aq.uifolium.  The European
hoUy.
   Ilex Vomito'ria.  Ilex cassin.
  ILIA.   The flanks.  Also the small
intestines.
  ILIAC.  Iliacus; from ilia, the flanks.
Pertaining to, or connected with, the
flanks.
   Iliac Arteries.  Arteries formed by
the bifurcation of the aorta, and divided
into external and internal. The external,
after  passing Poupart's ligament, is
caUed  the femoral artery.
   Iliac Crest.   The superior margin
of the  ileum.
   Iliac Fosse. There are two, the in-
ternal and external.  The internal is a
broad, shallow cavity in  the inner sur-
face of the os iliacum ; the external,  is
on the external surface.
  Iliac  Mesocolon.   A fold of the
peritoneum, embracing the sigmoid flex-
ure of the colon.
  Iliac Region.  The sides of the ab-
domen between the hips and the ribs.
  ILIACUS.  Iliac.
  Iliacus Internus.  A broad, trian-
gular, and radiated muscle, situated on
the inner surface of the ileum.
  ILIN'GOS.  Vertigo.
  ILIO-. Words compounded with this
term, signify parts connected with the
ihum, as ilio-ahdominal,  ilio-costal, ilk-
sacral, ilio-lumbar, &c.
  ILIUM  OS.   The  haunch bone.
The largest of the three  bones which
form the os innominatum.
  ILLI'CIUM.  The name of a genus
of plants.
  Illicium Ani'satum.   The yellow-
flowered aniseed tree.
  Illicium Florida'num.   Florida
anise tree.  Sweet laurel.
  Illicium Parviflo'rum. A shrub,
the bark of which resembles that of the
sassafras.
  ILLI'TIO.  Anointing.
  ILLO'SIS.   From a?u>s, the eye.
Strabismus.
  ILLUTATIO.  From in, upon,and
lutum, mud.   lllutation.  The act of
besmearing any part of the body with
mud.
  IMBECILITY.  Imbecilitas. Weak-
ness, especially of intellect.
  IMBER'BIS.   Without beard.
  IMBIBITION.   Imbibitio;   from
imbibere, to drink, to imbibe.  Endose-
mosis.  The absorption of a liquid by a
solid.
   IM'BRICATE.  Imbricatus.  Imbri-
cated ; arranged  hke tUes on the roof of
a house.
  IMMOVABLE APPARATUS. An
apparatus used in fractures and disloca-
tions, consisting of bandages or sup-
ports, imbued with  starch  or   gum, 
IMP               385                 IMP
being  applied,  become

     The  subscapularis
 which, after
 solid.
   IMMERSUS
 muscle.
   IMPACTION.   Impactio.  A frac-
 ture with projections and depressions of
 fragments of bone.
   IMPAL'PABLE. From in, and pal-
 po, to feel.  A term generally applied to
 hard  substances reduced to so  fine a
 powder that their  particles cannot be
 distinguished  by the sense of  touch.
 Powders for the teeth should usuaUy be
 of this character.
   IMPATIENS.  The name  of a ge-
 nus of plants.
   Impatiens  Balsam'ina.    Balsam
 weed.  Touch-me-not.
   IMPEN'ETRABILITY. A property
 possessed by bodies of excluding from
 the space which they occupy all other
 bodies.
   IMPERATO'RIA.   The name of a
 genus of plants.
   Imperatoria  Ostru'thium.   Mas-
 ter-Avort  The root is slightly aromatic,
 and has a bitterish, pungent taste.
   IMPERFECT.   In  Botany, flow-
 ers without anther or pistil, or both.
   IMPERFORATION.    Imperfara-
 tio.  In Anatomy, a malformation, con-
 sisting in the absence of a natural open-
 ing or orifice of an organ, as of the mouth,
 anus, &c.
   IMPERMEABLE.   Impermeabili-
 tas.  Capable  of resisting the  passage
 of fluids and gases.
   IMPETI'GO.  From impetio, I in-
 fest.  A word which has received sev-
 eral significations, but at present  prin-
 cipally  used to  designate a genus  of
 cutaneous  diseases,  belonging to the
 order pustuloz,  of Bateman.  In Cullen
 it forms a genus  in the class cachexiaz,
 and Sauvages employs it as  a  generic
 term,  comprising under  it, syphilis,
 scorbutus, rachitis, elephantiasis, lepra,
scabies, tinea,  scrofula, &,c.  The hu-
mid  or  running  tetter, and of which,
five species are enumerated.  1. Impeti- \
 petigo erysipebtodes. 4. Impetigo scabida.
 5. Impetigo rodens.
    IMPETUM FACIENS.  Vital ener-
 gy-
    IM'PETUS.   Force.  The momen-
 tum of a moving body.
    IMPLANTATION.   The act  of
 planting, setting, or fixing for the pur-
 pose of growth;  applied sometimes to
 the transplantation of a tooth from the
 mouth of one person into  a recently
 vacated socket in the mouth of another.
   IMPLU'VIUM.   An embrocation.
 Also, a shower bath.
   IMPON'DERABLE.  From in, not,
 and pondus, weight. Substances which
 produce no effect  on  the most delicate
 balance, as light, heat, and the electric
 fluid.
   IMPOSTHUME.  Imposthuma. An
 abscess.
   IM'POTENCE. Weakness;  loss of
 energy, but generaUy applied to a want
 of sexual vigor.   It is also used synony-
 mously with sterility.
   IMPOVERISHED.   Having be-
 come  poor.   In  Humoral  Pathology,
 thinness of the blood or  any secretion
 from loss of some of its constituents.
 The blood,  when pale and thin, is said
 to be impoverished.
   IMPREGNATION.   Fecundation.
   IMPRES'SION OF THE MOUTH
 IN PLASTER OF PARIS.  For the
 purpose of obviating the difficulty which
 is sometimes experienced in the procure-
 ment of a perfectly accurate  transfer of
 the alveolar border, from impressions in
 wax, plaster has been  substituted   Drs.
 Westcott and Dunning, it is  believed,
 were the first to employ the latter.  The
 folloAvingis the manner of obtaining an
 impression in it.  The plaster is mixed
 with water until  a thick batter is form-
 ed; this is poured into a wax-holder or
 a curved box, with high walls, fitting
 loosely over the alveolar border, the pos-
 terior or  open extremities being  pre-
viously closed with wax softened by
the fire, or in hot water.  The instant
gofigurata  2. Impetigo sparsa.   3. Im-! the plaster begins to congeal, it is put
33 
IMP                386                INC
into  the  mouth and pressed carefuUy
against the alveolar border until a suffi-
ciently deep impression is made in the
plaster, and so much of it as  may  be
forced out on either side should be im-
mediately pressed up against the parts
with the forefinger of one  of the hands
of the operator.  This done, it should be
permitted to remain in the  mouth two
or three  minutes, or long enough for
the plaster to harden, before it is remov-
ed ; and in doing this, great care is ne-
cessary to prevent cracking or injuring
the impression.  Should it adhere with
great tenacity  to  the mouth, one  side
should first be slightly detached,  and
then the other, and if it cannot be readi-
ly loosened  at one point,  another and
another should be tried until it is made
to yield, when the whole may beeasUy
removed, the edges trimmed, and after it
has become dry, and before being used,
it should be smeared Avith oil or varnish-
ed.
  Impression of the Mouth in Wax.
The  manner  of procuring a wax im-
pression is as follows :  FiU a frame of
suitable dimensions, with white or yel-
Ioav wax, previously softened in warm
water, or by a fire, until it is of the con-
sistence of dough or soft putty,  then
put it in the mouth with the wax facing
the jaw from which a transfer  is to  be
obtained, and press it carefully against
it until a sufficiently deep indentation is
made, or the entire  alveolar ridge and
any teeth which may remain is embed-
ded in it.   The  wax-holder or frame
should be held steadily in one hand, and
the pressure apphed equally with the
other to every part of it.   This done, the
wax around the edges should  be care-
fuUy pressed against the gum, and when
applied to the upper jaw, to the roof of
the mouth.  The whole should now be
removed, and in doing this,  considera-
ble care  is necessary  to  prevent the
shape of the impression from being alter-
ed by the corners of the  mouth and
teeth. Before being fiUed with plaster it
should be smeared with oU.
  IMPUBER.  Impubis;  from in, not.
and pubcrtas, puberty.  Not of the age
of pubetry.
  IMPULSE, DIASTOLIC.  Back-
stroke  of the  heart.   The short stroke
felt at the end of each pulsation.
  IMRIE, WILLIAM. Author of the
Parents'  Dental  Guide ;  a treatise on
the diseases of the teeth and gums, from
infancy to old age, with observations on
Amalgams, Cements, &,c, and remarks
on the construction of artificial teeth.
London,  1835.
  INANITION.  Inanitio;  from in-
anire, to  empty.   Exhaustion  from
want of food.  Emptiness.
  INCANDES'CENCE.  The bright
light emitted by heated bodies.
  INCANTATION.  Incantatio; from
in, and cantare, to sing.  The cure of
disease by charms.
  INCARCERATION. Incarceratio;
from in,  in, and career, prison.   Ap-
plied to hernia when  the neck of the
sac is  so constricted as to prevent its
easy reduction.
  INCARNATION.   From in,  and
caro, flesh. Granulating, filling up Avith
flesh.
  INCARNANS.  Medicines which
were supposed to promote the formation
of flesh.
  INCEN'DIUM.  From incendere, to
burn.  A burning fever, or any burning
heat, or inflammation.
  INCERNIC'ULUM.   From inccr-
nere, to sift.  A strainer or sieve. Also,
the pelvis of the kidney.
  INCINERATION. Incineratk;—
from incinero, to reduce to ashes.  The
reduction of any  substance to ashes by
combustion.
  INCISION.   Incisio.  A division of
soft parts made with a sharp-edged in-
strument.
  INCISIVUM  FORAMEN.  Fora-
men incisivum.  A canal, single below
and double above, a httle behind the inci-
sor teeth, opening on the median hne.
  INCISI'VUS.  Relating to the inci-
sor teeth. 
INC
387
IND
   Incisivus  Inferior.  Levator  labii
 inferioris.
   Incisivus  Lateralis.  Levator labii
 superioris alaeque nasi.
   Incisivus  Medius.   Depressor  labii
 superioris alaeque nasi.
   INCISOR TEETH.  The four front
 teeth in each jaw, are  caUed incisores,
 from incido, to cut, because they cut
 the food.   They occupy  the  central
 part of each  maxillary arch.    The
 crown or body of each is wedge shape;
 the anterior  surface  is convex  and
 smooth—the posterior  is concave, and
 presents a tubercle near the neck; the
 two surfaces come together and form a
 cutting edge.   In a front view the edge
 is generally the widest part; diminish-
 ing towards the neck, it continues  nar-
 rowing to the extremity of the root.
   The roots are all single, of a  conical
 shape; laterally, slightly flattened.  The
 enamel  is thicker before than  behind,
 and behind than at the sides.
   The incisores of the upper jaw are
 larger than those of the lower.   The
 central incisores of the upper jaw are
 about one-third wider than  the  laterals
 of the same.   The lateral incisores of
 the loAver jaw are generaUy a little wider
 than the central, though the difference
 in Avidth is never so considerable as to
 be very perceptible.
   INCISO'RIUM. A table on which
 a patient is placed for an operation.
   INCI'SED.  Cut
   INCOMPATIBLE.    Substances
 Avhich cannot be prescribed together, on
 account of having a chemical action on
 each other.
  INCONTINENCE. Incontinentia;
 from in, and  contineo,  I contain.  Ina-
 bility to retain the natural evacuations.
 Abuse of the sexual appetite.
  INCORPORATION. Incorporatio;
 from  in, and cm-pus,  a body.    The
 thorough admixture of various substan-
 ces so as to give them a uniform consist-
 ence.
  INCRAS'SANS.  From  incrasso, to
make thick.   Medicines which were
 formerly believed to have the  property
 of thickening the fluids.
   INCREMENTUM.  Augmentation;
 increase;  growth.
   INCRUSTATION.     Incrustatio;
 from in, and crusta, a crust.  The for-
 mation of  a crust  on the surface of a
 body, or over any substance.  Also, the
 crust itself.
   INCUBATION.  Incubatio;  from
 incubare, to fie upon.  In Mitural His-
 tory, the period a bird sits upon her eggs
 before the  young  are  produced.   In
 Meditdne, the  period that elapses from
 the time of the introduction of a morbi-
 fic agent into the body before the inva-
 sion of disease.
   IN'CUBUS.  From incubare, to lie
 upon. The nightmare.
   INCURABLE.  A term apphed, in
 Patlwbgy, to diseases not susceptible of
 cure.
   IN'CUS. An anvil.   The name of
 one of the bones of the ear.
   INDEX.  From indicare,  to point
 out.  The  forefinger.
   INDIAN ARROW  ROOT.   Ma-
 ranta.
   Indian Cress. Tropaeolummajus.
   Indian   Date-Plumb.   Diospyros
 lotus.
   Indian Fig.   Cactus opuntia.
   Indian Pink.  Spigeha marilandica.
   Indian Physic   Gillenia trifoliata.
   Indian Rubber.  Caoutchouc.
   Indian Tobacco.  Lobe liainflata.
   Indian Turnip.  Arum triphyllum.
   INDIANA RADIX.  Ipecacuanha.
   INDICA CAMOTES. The potato.
   IN'DICANT.  Indicans; from indi-
 care, to point out.  Pertaining to an in-
 dication.
   INDICATING   DAYS.    Critical
 days.
   INDICATION. Indkatio. The man-
 ifestation afforded by disease of what
 ought to be done.
  INDICATOR.   Extensor proprius
indicis;  an  extensor muscle of the fore-
finger.
  INDIG'ENOUS.   Indigena.  That 
INF               388                  INF
 Avhich is peculiar to any  country, in
 opposition to exotic.
   INDIGESTION.  Dyspepsia.
   INDIGO.   The blue coloring matter
 obtained from the indigofera tinctoria;
 anil, or the indigo plant.
   INDIGOF'ERA.   The  name of a
 genus of plants.
   Indigofera Tinctoria.   Indigofera
 anil.  The plant from which much of
 the indigo is  obtained.
   IN'DOLENT.  Indolens;  from in,
 privative, and dolere,  to be in pain.
 Without pain.   Applied  to tumors
 which are attended with but little pain.
   INDU'RANS.  From induro, to har-
 den.   Medicines which are supposed
 to harden the parts to which they are
 applied.
   INDURATION.  Induratio. A har-
 dened and thickened  condition of a part
 resulting from inflammation.
   INE'BRIANTS.  Intoxicating sub-
 stances.
   INEQJJAL'ITY.   Unevenness; al-
 ternate rising and falling of a surface:
 applied in Dental Surgery, to malform-
 ed teeth, and to  decayed teeth which
 present an asperated  surface.
   INERTIA.   From iners, slothful.
 A passive condition of parts.  Also, in-
 activity.
   INFANCY.  Infantia. Early chtid-
 hood, generaUy including the age from
 birth to the seventh year.
   INFANTICIDE.  From infans, a
 child, and cozdere, to kill.  The murder
 of a  young child.
   INFANTILE TEETH.   The tem-
 porary or milk teeth.
   INFECTION.  See Contagion.
   lN'FERUS.  Inferior.
   INFILTRATION. Infiltratio ; from
filtrare, to filter.   Effusion.   The accu-
 mulation of a fluid in the ceUs of an or-
 gan or texture.
   INFIRMARY.   Infirmarium.   A
 hospital, and generally, where patients
 are not furnished with beds.
   INFLAM'MABLE.  Inflammabilis;
 from inflammo, to burn. Such bodies
as inflame with facility ;  easily enkin-
dled ; susceptible of combustion.
   Inflammable Air.  Hydrogen gas.
   Inflammarle Air, Heavy.  Carbu-
reted hydrogen.
   INFLAMMATION.  Inflammatio;
from inflammare, to set on fire.  A state
characterized by redness, heat, tension,
swelling  and pain, and  terminating
by resolution, suppuration,  mortifica-
tion, adhesion, effusion or induration.
   Inflammation of the Bladder.—
Cystitis.
   Inflammation of the  Brain.   En-
cephalitis.
   Inflammation  of  the Breast.—
Mastitis.
   Inflammation  of  the  Choroh)
Membrane.  Iritis.
   Inflammation of the Eye.  Oph-
thalmitis.
   Inflammation of the Intestine.—
Enteritis.
   Inflammation of the Iris.  Iritis.
   Inflammation  of  the Kidney.—
Nephritis.
   Inflammation of the Lining Mem-
brane of a Tooth.   See Endodontitis.
   Inflammation of the Liver. Hep-
atitis.
   Inflammation  of  the   Lungs.—
Pneumonitis.
   Inflammation of the Mouth.  See
Inflammation of the Mouth, common
diffused.
   Inflammation of the Mouth, Com-
mon Diffused.  This is so fully and
accurately described by Dr.  Wood  in
his treatise on the Practice of Medicine,
that we shall  quote  his remarks upon
the subject.  He says, it "appears in
reddened somewhat elevated patches,
or occupies large portions of the surface,
sometimes  extending apparently  over
the whole mouth.  In some cases, it is
superficial, with little or no sweUing,
and may be designated as erythematous;
in others, it occupies the whole  thick-
ness of the membrane, extending some-
times to the  sub-mucous  tissue,  and
even to  neighboring structures, as the 
INF
389
INF
sub-lingual  and sub-maxiUary glands, I
and  the  absorbent glands of the neck,
and occasions considerable tumefaction
in all these parts.  In the erythematous
form, it is  characterized by redness, a
sense of heat, and sometimes considera-
ble tenderness, but is not usuaUy attend-
ed with  acute  pain; when deeper in
the tissue, it is often very painful. Por-
tions of the epithehum sometimes  be-
come opaque, giving an  appearance of
whiteness in streaks or patches.  Occa-
sionaUy this coating is elevated in blis-
ters, or even detached like the cuticle
from the skin in scalds.  Superficial ul-
cerations not unfrequently occur, which
may spread over considerable portions
of the membrane.  In certain states of
the constitution, the  ulcerative tenden-
cy is very strong, and deep and exten-
sive sores occur, which are sometimes
attended with gangrene.  There is often
a copious flow of  saliva;  though, in
some instances, this secretion, as well
as that of the mucous follicles, is check-
ed, and  the mouth is clammy or dry.
The sense of taste  is  usually more or
less impaired, and speech and mastica-
tion are  often  difficult and  painful.
When the tongue is affected, its surface
is in general first covered with a whit-
ish fur, through which the red and swol-
len follicles may often be seen project-
ing. This fur sometimes breaks off, leav-
ing the surface red, smooth and glossy,
Avith here and there prominent follicles,
and very  sensitive to the contact of even
mild substances; or the surface may be
dry, hard and gashed, with painful  fis-
sures.  When the gums are involved,
they swell, and rise up between the
teeth, around the necks of which they
not  unfrequently ulcerate.   In some
rare instances,  this ulceration is very
obstinate, and does  not cease until it has
extended into the sockets, and destroyed
altogether the connections of the teeth,
which become  loosened and faU out,
after which the  gum will  heal.  Ordi-
nary stomatitis is seldom so violent as
to induce symptomatic fever.
         33»
  "Causes.—The form of inflammation
of the mouth above described,is more fre-
quently a complication of other diseases
than an original affection.  When of the
latter character, it is generally caused by
the direct action  of irritant bodies, as by
scalding drinks,  acrid or corrosive sub-
stances taken into  the  mouth, or un-
healthy secretions from decayed teeth.
The sharp edge  or spicula of a broken
tooth sometimes  gives rise to much in-
flammation, and even deep  and obsti-
nate ulcers,  especially  of the tongue.
The tartar which  coUects  about  the
necks of the teeth often keeps up a state
of chronic inflammation  of  the  gums,
which sometimes ends in destructive ul-
ceration.   Stomatitis may  also result
from the reaction which foUows the long
continued contact of very cold substan-
ces, such as ice, with the interior of the
mouth.  It sometimes  proceeds  from
the propagation  of inflammation from
the  fauces,  and is  a frequent conse-
quence of gastric irritation, produced
by sour or acrid matter in the stomach.
Drunkards seem peculiarly predisposed
to it.  Of the constitutional causes none
are  so frequent as the state of fever,
which, whatever  may  be its peculiar
character, is very apt to affect the mouth,
and not unfrequently occasions inflam-
mation.
   "Treatment.—In the acute stage, little
treatment  is  required.  In  some  very
severe cases, in  which the neighboring
parts are involved, leeches beneath the
jaw or over the  parotid  may be advisa-
ble.  But,  in general, cooling  and de-
mulcent liquids locally,  magnesia  or
one of the saline cathartics internally,
with a soft and spare diet, from which
meat is excluded, constitutes aU that is
requisite.   When the inflammation re-
sults from  some  corrosive  substance
taken into the mouth, almond oil spread
over the surface will be found a useful
application.  In the latter stages, and in
chronic cases, astringent  washes, such
as weak solutions of acetate of lead, sul-
phate of zinc, and alum, may be advan- 
INF
390
INF
tageously applied; and, if ulcers exist,
their surface may be  touched  with a
very strong solution of sulphate of zinc,
sulphate of copper, or nitrate of stiver,
care being taken that  the apphcation
does not extend beyond the limits of the
ulcer.   In  cases accompanied with
gangrene,  washes of chloride of soda,
chloride of time, or aqueous solution of
creasote may be used.  Should the in-
flammation depend upon the condition
of the teeth, whether upon sharp edges or
points, wounding the adjacent parts, or
upon acrid secretions, or the deposition
of tartar about the neck of the tooth, care
should be taken to correct the evti."
  Inflammation of the  Periosteum
of a Tooth.  Odontitis.   Dental Peri-
ostitis.   See Odontalgia.
  Inflammation of  the Peritoneum.
Peritonitis.
  Inflammation of the Pleura. Pleu-
ritis.
  Inflammation  of the Pulp of  a
Tooth. See Odontalgia.
  Inflammation of the Retina.   Re-
tinitis.
  Inflammation of the  Stomach.—
Gastritis.
  Inflammation of the  Testicle.—
Orchitis.
  Inflammation of the  Urethra.—
Urethritis.
  Inflammation  of the Uterus.—
Hysteritis.
  Inflammation of  a Vein.  Phlebitis.
  INFLAMMATORY.  Inflammato-
rious.  Of  the nature of inflammation;
tending to excite  heat and  inflamma-
tion.
  Inflammatory Fever.  Synocha.
  INFLATIO. Emphysema.  Colica
flatulenta.  A windy swelling.
  INFLATUS.  Inflated.
  INFLEX'US.  Bent inward.
  INFLUEN'ZA.  The Italian word
for  influence.  Epidemic  catarrh is so
termed, because it was supposed to be
the result  of a pecuhar atmospherical
influence.
  Influenza Ectropea.  Influenza,
   INFRA-ORBITAR.  Sub-orbitar.
   Infra-Orbitar Foramen.  A fora-
 men immediately below the orbit.
   Infra-Scapularis.  The sub-scapu-
 laris muscle.
   Infra-Spinatus-.  From infra,  be-
 neath, and spina, a spine. A muscle of
 the humerus.
   INFUNDIB'ULUM.  From in, and
fundere, to pour out.   A  funnel.   In
 Anatomy, a name given to parts which
 resemble a funnel.
   Infundibulum of the Brain.  A de-
 pression or canal leading from the third
 ventricle, to the petuitary gland.
   INFUSION.  Infusio; from infun-
 dere,  to pour  in.   In Pliarmacy, the
 pouring of a  hot  or  cold fluid  upon
 substances for the purpose of extracting
 their  medicinal properties.  Also,  the
 product itself.  In Surgery, the introduc-
 tion of medical  substances into the veins.
   INFU'SUM.  An infusion.
   Infusum Anthem'idis.  Infusion of
 chamomile.
   Infusum Armora'cie Compos'itum.
 Compound infusion of horse-radish.
   Infusum Auran'tii Compos'itum.—
 Compound infusion of orange-peel.
   Infusum Buchu.  Infusion of buchu.
   Infusum  Calum'be.  Infusion  of
 Columba.
   Infusum Caryophyl'li. Infusion of
 cloves.
   Infusum Cascaril'le.  Infusion of
 cascarilla.
   Infusum Cat'echu Compos'itum.—
 Compound infusion of catechu.
   Infusum Cincho'ne.   Infusion of
 cinchona.
   Infusum Cuspa'rie. Infusion of cus-
 paria.
   Infusum Digita'lis.  Infusion of di-
 gitalis.
   Infusum Eupato'rii Perfoliati.—
 Infusion of thoroughwort
   Infusum Gentia'ne  Compos'itum.
 Compound infusion of gentian.
   Infusum Humu'li. Infusion of hops.
   Infusum Krame'rie.   Infusion of
 rhatany. 
ING
391
INN
  Infusum Lini.  Infusion of flaxseed.
  Infusum Lini  Compositum.  Infu-
sion of flaxseed.
  Infusum Menthe Simplex. Infu-
sion of spearmint.
  Infusum  Menthe Compositum.—
Compound infusion of mint.
  Infusum Parei're.  Infusion of pa-
reira brava.
  Infusum Pruni Virginiane  Infu-
sion of wUd-cherry bark.
  Infusum Q,uassie. Infusion of quas-
sia.
  Infusum Rhei.  Infusion of rhubarb.
  Infusum Rose Compositum.  Com-
pound infusion of roses.
  Infusum Sarsaparil'le.  Infusion
of sarsaparilla.
  Infusum  Scopa'rii.    Infusion  of
broom.
  Infusum Senne. Infusion of senna.
  Infusum Senne Cum  Tamarin'dis.
Infusion of senna with tamarinds.
  Infusum Serpenta'rie. Infusion of
Virginia snake-root.
  Infusum Simarou'be.  Infusion of
simarouba.
  Infusum Spigel'ie. Infusion of pink-
root
  Infusum Taba'ci.   Infusion of  to-
bacco.
  Infusum Ulmi.  Infusion of shppery
elm bark.
  Infusum Valerian'e.  Infusion of
valerian.
  Infusum Zingibe'ris.   Infusion of
ginger.
  INGESTA.  From ingero, to throw
in.   The  aliments introduced into the
body.
  INGLU'VIES. Gluttony.  Also, the
crop of birds.
  INGOLSELLER.   On the  Golden
Tooth of the Silesian Boy, by.  Leipsic,
1695.
  INGRE'DIENT.  From ingrcdiens,
entering tino.  That which enters into,
or is a component part of, a compound*
or mixture. Applied to medicinal com-
pounds.
  INGUEN.  The groin.
  IN'GUINAL.   Inguinalis; from in-
guen, the groin. Belonging, or pertain-
ing to, the groin.
  Inguinal  Artery.    The  external
iliac  immediately beneath the crural
arch.
  Inguinal  Glands.  The lymphatic
glands in the groin.
  Inguinal Ligament.  Poupart's lig-
ament.
  INHALATION.  The drawing in of
vapors with the breath.
  Inhalation of Ether. See Chloro-
form.
  Inhalation  of Chloroform.   See
Chloroform.
  INHALER.   An instrument  used
for the inhalation of ether, chloroform,
and other vapors.
  INHE'RENT.  That which belongs,
adheres, or is united to, a thing.
  INHUMATION.   Inhumatio; from
inhumo, I put into  the ground.  The
burying of the dead.
  INJECTION.  Injectio; from inji-
cere,  to throw into.  The introduction,
by means of a syringe or other instru-
(ment of a medicated hquor into a natu-
ral  or preternatural cavity of the body.
When thrown into  the  rectum, injec-
tions are called enemata.
  IN'NATE.  Innatus;  from in,  and
nascor, to be born.    Inborn; not ac-
quired.
  Innate Diseases.   Diseases  with
which the infant is born.   Congenital.
  INNERVATION. Innei-vatio; from
in, and nervus, a nerve. The vital ope-
ration by which a part or organ is sup-
plied with nervous influence.
  INNOMINATA ARTE'RIA.  The
first branch given off by the arch of the
aorta.
  INNOMINATINERVI. The nerves
of the fifth pair.
  INNOMINATUM.  From in, priva-
tive, and nomen, a name.   Without a
name.  Applied to some  parts of the
body.
  Innominatum Foramen. A foramen
in the petrous portion of the temporal 
INS                392                 INS
bone through which the vidian nerve
passes.
   Innominatum Os. A large, irregular
bone, which forms the anterior and lat-
eral waUs of the pelvis. It is divided in
the young subject  into three portions,
the iliac, ischiatic, and  pubic.
   INOCULATION.  Inoculatio.  The
artificial  introduction of a poison  into
any part of the body, especiaUy the
variolus  or vaccine virus.
  Inoculation, Cow-Pox. Vaccination.
  INORGANIC.   From in, without,
and organum, an organ. Having no or-
gans.  In Chemistry, minerals and other
bodies which are not derived from or-
ganic products.
   INOSCULATION.  Inosculatio ;—
from in, and osculum, a  little mouth.
The union of the extremities of vessels.
Anastomosis.
   INSALIVATION.  Insalivatio.  The
admixture of saliva with food during
mastication.   The process of mastica-
tion,  and the  presence of food in the
mouth, increases the secretion of this
fluid, as does also a desire for, or the odor
of, savory alimentary substances.   The
salivary glands being liberally furnished
with nerves and blood-vessels, are easily
excited and readily provided with an
abundant supply of viscous fluid, which
flows in greater quantity when the food
is  acrid and stimulating, than when it
is  of a less exciting nature.  It is esti-
mated that from five to six ounces is se-
creted at a meal.  This, together with
the fluid secreted by the labial, palatine
and sub-lingual mucous glands, as well
as the moisture from the exhalent arte-
ries of the mouth, not  only contribute
to  lubricate the buccal  cavity, but  mix
with, dissolve, and bring  together the
divided alimentary  particles; assist in
forming  them into a pultacious  mass,
and to produce on them the first change
which they undergo in the process of
digestion.
   INSALU'BRIOUS.  Unhealthy.
   INSAN'ITY.   Insanitas.  Madness;
mental alienation.
   INSECT A.  Insects; a class of in-
vertebrata, belonging to the sub-regnum,
articulata of Cuvier.
   INSENSIBILITY. Anaesthesia. Loss
or absence of sensation.
   INSERTION. Insertio. In Anatomy
and Botany, the intimate connection of
one part or organ to another, as the in-
sertion of a ligament  or muscle into a
bone; of a corolla, stamen, pistil, leaf or
ovary, into any part of a  plant.  In
Dental Surgery, the engrafting of an ar-
tificial tooth to the root of a natural one.
   Insertion of an Artificial Tooth.
See Pivot Tooth, manner of insertion.
   INSID'IOUS. In Pathobgy, diseases
which do not at first appear as formida-
ble as they are, and which are apt to es-
cape attention.
   INSOLATION.  Insolatio; from in,
and sol, the sun.  Exposure to the di-
rect rays of the sun, which is frequent-
ly a source of disease.
  INSOLUBILITY.  Insolubilis.  The
property of a  solid which prevents it
from not dissolving when immersed in
a fluid.
   INSOM'NIA. From in, without, and
somnus, sleep.   Sleeplessness, which is
usually a sign of disease.
  INSPIRATION.   Inspiratio; from
in, in, and spiro, I breathe.  The act by
which the air is drawn into the lungs.
  INSPIRATORY.  A name given to
certain muscles, which, by their con-
traction,  enlarge the  chest,  and cause
inspiration.
  INSPISSATION.   From in,   and
spissatus,  thickened.   The evaporation
of a  juice or decoction  to a  thick  con-
sistence.
  INSTEP. The most elevated part of
the top of the foot.
  INSTILLATION.   Instillatio.  The
act of pouring out a liquid, drop by drop.
  INSTINCT.  Instinctus.  Imvardly
moved.   That   power  of the mind  by
Avhich animals are spontaneously  led,
or directed, to  do Avhatever is necessary
for the preservation of the individual,
or the continuation of  the species. 
INT
393
INT
  INSTITUTES OF MEDICINE.—
The theory and practice of medicine.
  INSTRUMENT.  Instrumentum.—
Any mechanical agent employed in the
operations  of any of the branches of
manual medicine.
  Instruments for Cleaning Teeth.
The  instruments employed for this
purpose are constructed  with variously
shaped points to suit the peculiar views
of the operator, both with regard to con-
venience and efficiency.  They consist
of steel stems, fixed in handles; with
triangular-shaped  points, more  or less
curved, with sharp edges.  Every den-
tist requires from ten to twelve instru-
ments  of this description,  and  they
should be so shaped that they may be
applied to any part of the surface of the
crowns of the teeth.
  Instruments for Enlarging the
Canal in the Root of  a Tooth. The
burr,  flat  drUl,  and broach,  are the
instruments usuaUy employed  for this
purpose.
  Instruments for the Extraction
of Teeth. Those most commonly em-
ployed in this operation are forceps, the
key of Garengeot, the punch, elevator,
hook, and conical screw.
  Instruments for Filling  Teeth.
See Filling Teeth.
  Instruments for Removing Dental
Caries.  See Dental Excavators, Drill,
burr and flat.
  INSUFFLATION.  Insufflatio; from
in and suffla, to blow.  The injection of
a gaseous fluid into a cavity of the body.
  IN'SULA  CER'EBRI.  The inter-
mediate lobe of the brain.
  INSULATION.  From  insula, an
island.  In Electricity,  the state of the
body when  surrounded by non-con-
ductors.
  INTEGER. Entire.
  INTEG'UMENT.   Integumentum;
from in, and  tegere, to cover.   That
which  serves  to cover or envelop. In
Anatomy, the skin and ceUular tissue is
the common integument.
  INTELLECT. Intcllectus; fromin-
telligere, to understand.  The aggregate
of the faculties of  the mind.  Under-
standing.
  INTEM'PERANCE.  From in, ne-
gation, ami temperare, to temper.  Im-
moderate indulgence of the appetite, es-
pecially for alcohohc drinks.
  INTENSITY.   Activity, violence.
  INTENTION.   Intentio; from in,
and tendere, to stretch. In Surgery, the
cicatrization of a wound without suppu-
ration.
  INTER-.  A prefix, signifying, be-
tween, intermediate.
  INTERARTIC'ULAR.  Any thing
between  the  articular  extremities  of
bones.
  INTERCA'DENCE.  Applied to a
supernumerary beat of the pulse.
  INTERCELLULAR. Between the
cells.
  INTERCLAVICULAR.   Apphed
to a ligament which passes from one
clavicle to the other.
  INTERCAL'ARY  DAYS.   The
days which occur  between  those that
are critical.  Also,  the days which in-
tervene between the paroxysms of inter-
mittent fever.
  INTERCOSTAL. Intercostalis. Ap-
phed  to  muscles and vessels situated
between the ribs.
  Intercostal Arteries.  The  arte-
ries which run betAveen the ribs.
  Intercostal Muscles.   The mus-
cles which extend from the inferior edge
of each rib above to the superior  edge
of each  rib below.  They constitute
eleven pair of double muscles and are
distinguished into external and internal.
  Intercostal Nerves.  The great
sympathetic, and twelve branches  from
the anterior  branches  of  the dorsal
nerves, which are distributed to the
muscles of the walls of  the thorax and
abdomen.
  Intercostal Spaces.  The intervals
between the ribs.
  Intercostal  Veins.   The  veins
which accompany the intercostal arteries.
  INTERCURRENT.  Intcrcurrens; 
INT
394
INT
from inter, between, and currere, to run.
Diseases which  occur at different sea-
sons, or that do not belong to any par-
ticular season.  Also, a disease which
occurs during the progress of another
disease.
   INTERCUTANEOUS.  Sub-cuta-
neous.
   INTERDENTIUM.   The spaces
between  the teeth of the same order.
   INTERMAX'ILLARY.  Intermax-
illaris; from  inter, between, and max-
illa, a jaw.  Situated between the jaws.
   Intermaxillary Bone.  A portion
of bone wedged in between the superior
maxillary bones  of the human  fetus,
found in  the mammalia.
   INTERMEDIARY.  From  inter,
between, and medius, middle.  Lying
between  two bodies; in the middle; in-
terposed.
   INTERMISSION.   Intermissio ;—
from inter, between, and mittere, to put
or  send.   The intervals which  occur
between  two paroxysms of an intermit-
tent fever, or  disease,  or betAveen two
pains.
   INTERMITTENT.  A disease  in
which there are  intermissions, or one
which ceases  and returns after stated or
uncertain intervals.
   Intermittent Fever.  A fever con-
sisting of paroxysms which subside and
return at  regular periods.
   INTERNUS AURIS.  The tensor
tympani  muscle of the ear.
  INTERMUSCULAR.  That which
intervenes between two muscles.
  INTEROS'SEI MANUS. The small
muscles situated between the metacarpal
bones, extending from the bones of the
carpus to the fingers.
   Interossei Pedis.   The small  mus-
cles  situated  between  the  metatarsal
bones.
  INTEROSSEOUS.  From  inter,
between,  and  os, a bone.  Situated be-
tween bones.
  Interosseous   Arteries.     Small
branches  from the dorsalis carpi arteries,
distributed to  the  interosseous ligament
 of the forearm and between the interos-
 seous muscles.
   Interosseous Nerve.    A  branch
 from the median  nerve  which passes
 over the interosseous ligament of the
 forearm.
   INTERSCAPULAR.   Interscapu-
 laris. That which is betAveen the shoul-
 ders.
   INTERSCAPU'LIUM.  The spine
 of the scapula.
   INTERSEPTUM.  From inter, be-
 tween,  and septum, a partition.  The
 septum narium; also, the uvula.
   Interseptum Virginale.   The hy-
 men.
  INTERSPI NAL.   Interspinalis;—
 from inter between, and spina, the spine.
 Applied to muscles, nerves, &c. situated
 between the spinous processes.
  INTERSPINA'LES. The portions
 of muscles situated between the spinous
 processes of the cervical, dorsal and lum-
 ber vertebras.  They are  distinguished
 by  the names, interspinales colli, dorsi,
 et lumborum.
  INTERSTICE.  From  inter, be-
 tween, and sto, I stand.  An interval; a
 space between two organs.
  INTERSTITIAL.  Relating to, or
 containing interstices, as interstitial mat-
ter, interstitial absorption, &.c.
  INTER-TRANSVERSA'LES. The
small quadri-lateral  muscles situated
betAveen the transverse processes of the
vertebrae of the neck and loins.
  INTERTRI'GO.  From  inter, be-
tween, and tcro, to  rub. Excoriation or
chafing  of the skin about the anus,
groins, and other parts of the body.
  INTERVERTEBRAL.Thatwhich
is situated between the vertebrae.
  Intervertebral Cartilages. The
cartilages between the vertebrae.
  INTESTINAL.  Implicating, or be-
longing  to, the intestines.
  INTESTINA'LIA. Intestinal worms.
  INTESTINE.   Intestinum;   from
intus, within.  The convoluted  mem-
branous and muscular tube extending
from the stomach to the anus.  It is dis- 
INV
395
IOD
tinguished into  smaU and  large.  The
former include the duodenum, jejunum
and ileum;  and the latter, the ccecum,
colmi and rectum.
   INTOLERANCE.  That condition
of the  body which indicates the impro-
priety  of using certain  remedies, as in-
tolerance of blood-letting, &c.
   INTOXICATION.  Intoxkatio ;—
from in, and toxicum, a poison. Ebrie-
ty; the effect of alcoholic liquor taken
in excess.
   INTRINSIC.  Intrinsecus; from  in-
tra, within, and secus, towards.  Inhe-
rent, not adventitious.  In Anatomy and
Pathology, organs and diseases situated
internally.
   INTROTTUS.   Entrance;  act  of
entering.
   INTROMISSION.   Intromissio ;—
from intra, within, and mitto, I send.
The introduction of one body, or organ
into another.
   INTROSUSCEPTION.    Introsus-
ceptio.   See Intussusception.
   INTUMES'CENCE. Intumescentia;
from intumescere, to sweU.  Increase of
size in a part.   SweUing.
   INTUSSUSCEPTION.   Intussus-
ceptio ; from intiis, within, and suscipio,
I receive.  In Physiology, nutrition;  the
mode of increase peculiar to  organized
bodies.  In Pathology, the introduction
of a portion of intestine into that which
precedes or follows it.
   lN'ULA.   Elecampane.   Also,  the
name of a genus of plants.
   Inula Dysenter'ica.   The lesser
inula.
   Inula Hele'nium.  The  systematic
name of the common inula or elecam-
pane.
   INUNCTION.   Inunctio.  A  lini-
ment,  or ointment. Also, the act of
anointing.
   INUSTION.  Cauterization.
   INVAG'INATED.    Invaginatus;
from in, and vagina, a sheath. Apphed
to  a part received  into another.  Intus-
susception.
  INVAGINATION. Intussusception.
   INVASION.  Invasio.  The period
 when a disease first makes its attack, or
 is developed.
   INVERMINATION.  Helminthia-
 sis ;  affected with worms; that condi-
 tion  which gives rise to the presence of
 worms.
   INVERSIO  PALPEBRARUM.—
 Entropion.
   INVERSION. Inversio. Turned in-
 side  out.
   INVERTEBRATA.  Invertebrates.
 Animals which have no vertebral col-
 umn.
   INVOLUCEL'LUM.  A partial in-
 volucrum.
   INVOLU'CRUM.   From in,  and
 volvo, to wrap up.   A  wrapper.  In
 Anatomy, a membrane which surrounds
 a part.  In Botany,  the bracteae which
 surround the flowers  of the  umbelli-
 ferae.
   Involucrum Cordis.   The pericar-
 dium.
   INVOLUTE.  Involutus.    RoUed
 inward.
   IODATE.  Iodas. A  genus of salts,
 formed by the union of iodic acid with
 a  salifiable base.
   IO'DIC ACID. Acidum iodicum. A
 Avhite semi-transparent solid, of an as-
 tringent and sour taste, and destitute of
 odor.
   IODIDE.  A  compound  of iodine
 with a simple body.
   IODINE.  Iodium ; from iaSes, vio-
 let colored.  A soft friable opaque solid,
 of a bluish-black color and metaUic lus-
 tre.
   IODINA.  Iodine.
   IODINIUM.  Iodine.
   IODINUM. Iodine.
   I'ODIFORM.  Carbonis sesqui-iodi-
 dum.
   IODISM.   The morbid effects of io-
 dine.
  IODO-HYDRARGYRATE    OF
POTASSIUM.  A double salt of iodide
of potassium and binioide of mercury.
  IODOSIS.  Iodism.
  PODURETS.  Iodides. 
IRI
396
IRR
  IONIDIUM.  The name of a genus
of plants.
  Ionidium Ipecacuan'ha. A BrazUian
plant, which  yields a root of a yeUow-
ish-gray color, containing five per cent.
of emetine.   False  Brazilian ipecacu-
anha.
  Ionidium Marcucci. A South Ameri-
can plant,  caUed by the natives, cin-
chunchulli.
  IONTHUS.  From tov, the violet,
and avOos, a flower.  A  small unsuppu-
rative tumor  on the face; a variety of
acne.   Also,  the down  on the  face
which precedes the beard.
  IOTACIS'MUS.   Defective articu-
lation, in which the patient is unable to
pronounce the palatals, J and G soft.
  IPECACUAN'HA.  The pharmaco-
poeial name of the cephozlk ipecacuanha,
a South  American plant.   In  large
doses, it is emetic;  in  smaller, diapho-
retic and expectorant.
  Ipecacuanha, American.  Euphor-
bia ipecacuanha.
  Ipecacuanha, Annulated. The root
of the cephaelis ipecacuanha.
  Ipecacuanha, Black.   The root of
the psychotria emetica of Peru.
  Ipecacuanha, False Brazilian.—
The root of the ionidium ipecacuanha.
  Ipecacuanha, Undulated.  Ipecac-
uanha, white.
  IPOME'A JALAPA.  Convolvulus
jalapa.
  IRACUN'DUS.  The rectus externus
oculi.
  IRIDECTOMEDIALYSIS.  From
tptj, iris, extourj, excision, and foaTiucrtj,
separation.   The formation of an ar-
tificial pupU, by excision and separa-
tion.
   IREDES'CENT.  The property of
shining with many colors.
   IRI'DIUM.  A gray, brittle and very
fusible  metal,  found  with the ore of
platinum.
   IRIS. In  Anatomy,  a flat and circu-
lar partition  between the anterior  and
posterior chambers of the eye, perforated
in  the centre by a  round  orifice caUed
the pupil.  In Botany, the name of a
genus of plants.
  Iris Florenti'na.   Florentine orris.
  Iris Florentine.  Iris Florentina.
  Iris  German'ica.   The flower-de-
luce.  Iris nostra.
  Iris  Palustris. The yeUow  Avater-
luce-flag.
  Iris Versicolor.  The blue-flag.
  IRITIS.  Inflammation of the iris.
  IRON. Ferrum. A metal of a bluish-
gray color; fibrous texture, and brilhant
fracture.
  Iron, Hydrated Peroxyd of.  Hy-
dra ted oxyd of iron.
  IRREDUCIBLE.  Applied to frac-
tures, dislocations, herniae, Stc, which
are not capable of  being restored to
their natural position.
  IRREG'ULAR.   Irregubris.   Ap-
plied to the types of disease, and to the
pulse, when its  beats are separated by
unequal intervals. Also, to the teeth
when one or more is out of the dental
arch.
  IRREGULARITY. Deviation from
an established rule or straight line.
  Irregularity of the Teeth. "Dur-
ing the shedding of the teeth," says Mr.
Fox, "there are several circumstances
which prevent  the  permanent  teeth
from acquiring a regular position, and
often give rise to very great irregularity
in their arrangement.
  The most frequent cause is a want
of simultaneous action  between the in-
crease of the permanent teeth, and the
decrease of the temporary ones, by the
absorption  of  their  fangs.   It rarely
happens that so much of the fang of a
temporary tooth is absorbed as  to per-
mit its removal by  the  efforts of the
child,  before the permanent tooth is
ready  to pass  through, on which ac-
count the new  tooth takes an improper
direction, and  generaUy comes through
on the inside.
   Cases are very frequent in which
scarcely any absorption of the fangs of
the  temporary  teeth had  taken place
previous to the appearance of  several 
IRR
397
IRR
 of  the  permanent  teeth, and it often
 happens, that upon the removal of the
 shedding teeth to give room for the per-
 manent ones, that no absorption of the
 fangs of the temporary teeth has taken
 place.
    Irregularity of the permanent teeth is
 most commonly occasioned by the re-
 sistance made by the nearest temporary
 teeth; this  is always  the  case  if the
 temporary teeth are small and close set,
 for as the permanent incisores are much
 larger than  the temporary, they require
 more room; but as the  space left by the
 shedding of the temporary is too smaU
 for the regular position of  the perma-
 nent, they are exposed  to the pressure
 of the next  tooth, and  hence are fre-
 quently turned out of their direction.
   Another cause of the irregularity of
 the teeth arises  from  the permanent
 teeth being too large for the space occu-
 pied by  the temporary ones; those parts
 of the jaAV not being sufficiently extend-
 ed to permit a regular position of the new
 teeth; in this case  the irregularity is
 considerable, and occasions  great defor-
 mity in the appearance  of  the mouth.
 The incisores and cuspidati being much
 larger than those of the child, require
 room, for want of which they are turn-
 ed out of their proper  positions.  The
 central incisores  overlap each other—
 the lateral incisores are either placed ob-
 liquely with their edges turned forwards,
 or they are pushed back, and  stand be-
 tween and behind the central incisores
 and the cuspidati; the cuspidati are pro-
jected, occasioning the lip to stand out
 with considerable prominence, and the
 bicuspides are placed very irregularly."
  In addition to the  above, malforma-
tion of the jaws may be mentioned as
another cause of irregularity.  The su-
perior alveolar arch is  sometimes  too
narrow, having a compressed appear-
ance, and projecting so as to prevent the
uper lip from covering the front teeth.
The arch at other times is  too broad,
giving to the  roof of  the mouth a flat-
tened appearance, and causing the teeth I
  to be separated from each other.  The
  effect upon the appearance of the indi-
  vidual in either of these  cases, is bad,
  but worse in the first than the last.  The
  lower jaw is liable to similar faulty con-
  figurations.
   The  disposition  to  defects such  as
  these, is observable in early childhood,
  and is regarded by most of those  who
  have  treated of it, as hereditary, and
  more  peculiar  to  the people of some
  countries than others.  Some attribute
  it to a rickety  diathesis of the general
  system, but this opinion is gratuitous,
  as is shown by the fact, that most  per-
  sons laboring under this affection, have
 good palates and weU developed jaws.
  It cannot, therefore, with any degree of
 propriety be regarded as  having  any
 agency  in  the  production of  a faulty
  configuration of the jaws.
   There is also another species of defor-
 mity sometimes met with in the upper
 jaw,  equally difficult of explanation.
 It is characterized by one or more divi-
 sions  of the upper hp, alveolar border,
 and palatine arch, always  giving rise  to
 irregularity in  the  arrangement of the
 teeth.  This description of malformation
 is congenital.
   Supernumerary teeth,  too, may  be
 reckoned among the causes of irregu-
 larity.  But examples of  this sort are
 comparatively of rare occurrence.
   Irregularity of the Teeth,Treat-
 ment of.  The  cases of irregularity of
 the teeth are so various, and sometimes
 so complicated in their nature, that the
 skiU and ingenuity of the dentist are of-
 ten put to the severest  test.  Different
 cases require to be treated differently.
 It often becomes necessary to vary the
 means employed in the same case, or to
 use  different  appliances   in  different
 stages of the treatment; and the length
 of time required for its accomplishment,
 is sometimes such as to call for a greater
amount of patience and perseverance on
the part of both patient and  practitioner,
than every one can be prevailed  upon
to exercise. 
IRR
398
IRR
  Mr. Fox says, "In all cases of irregu-
larity during the shedding of the teeth,
the treatment to be observed is to remove
the obstructing temporary teeth, and then
to apply pressure in the most convenient
manner upon the irregular tooth, in order
to direct it into its proper situation."
  Again, he says, "In the under jaw,
Avhen the groAvth of the permanent cen-
tral incisores has exceeded  the absorp-
tion of the temporary ones, they grow
up immediately behind them, in a direc-
tion towards  the  tongue.  These two
new  teeth are  generally  so broad  as
nearly to cover the inner surface of the
four temporary incisores.  It will, there-
fore, be necessary,  in order to  obtain
room for these  teeth, that the four tem-
porary incisores be extracted. The new
teeth will then graduaUy come forward,
in which they wtil naturally be assisted
by the  pressure of the  tongue of the
 child, and may be occasionlly helped by
 the finger of the parent or nurse.
   "If the temporary  central incisores
 have loosened, and  come out previous
 to the appearance  of the  permanent
 teeth, the space is  seldom  sufficiently
 wide, and the new teeth will either groAV
 up with their  sides turned forward, or
 one will be placed before the other.  In
 this case the two lateral  incisores must
 be taken out.
   "When the  permanent central inci-
 sores have  completely grown  up, they
 occupy full  two-thirds  of the space,
 which contained the four temporary in-
 cisores, therefore, when the permanent
 lateral incisores appear, they are placed
 partly behind the centrals and the tem-
  porary cuspidati; or they grow  up with
  one corner turned  forwards  and  the
  other pointing backwards.   In either of
  these  cases  the  temporary cuspidati
  must be removed to give room."
    This arrangement, is  often, though
  not always, forced upon the lateral in-
  cisores by want of room  between the
  centrals and  cuspidati.   The space be-
  tween the last mentioned  teeth is often
  amply sufficient for the four incisores.
  "The four permanent incisores," con-
tinues Mr.  Fox, "take up nearly  the
Avhole of the space of the temporary in-
cisores and cuspidati.   The permanent
cuspidati  are  large teeth, and when
they have not sufficient  room, they oc-
casion very great irregularity.  Some-
times they come through on the inside,
but most commonly they cut  the gum
on the outside, and  project very much
out of the circular line from the tempo-
rary incisores to the temporary molares.
In this case the necessity of the removal
of the first temporary molares is obvi-
ous."
  Mr. F. here  has  evidently mistaken
the order of the eruption of the perma-
nent teeth.   The first  temporary mo-
lares and  sometimes the second are re-
placed with bicuspides before the cus-
pidati appear, so that if  the removal of
any becomes  necessary, to make room
for the last  mentioned teeth, it will be
the  first or  second bicuspides, or even
the  first permanent molares, if they are
decayed, but as the former are smaller
than their predecessors, it is compara-
tively seldom  that the sacrifice of any is
 called for.
   But, proceeds Mr. F., "it is not very
 common that the bicuspides of the lower
jaAV are  irregular, because the tempo-
 rary molares are generally removed be-
 fore they appear; but when this is  not
 the case,  they always come through the
 gums on the inside, pointing towards
 the tongue, in which case the tempo-
 rary molares must be removed, that the
 bicuspides may  rise  into their proper
 situations.
   "In the upper jaw the permanent cen-
 tral incisores  sometimes pass through
 the gums behind the temporary ones;
 when this happens, the four temporary
 incisores  must be  extracted,"  if the
 wrong direction taken by the former has
 resulted from want of room between the
 latter, "and  frequent  pressure by the
  thumb  should  be applied to the  new
 teeth, in order  to  bring them  forward
  as soon as possible, and prevent one of 
IRR
399
IRR
the cases of irregularity most difficult to
be remedied.
  "When the temporary central inciso-
res come out, the space is generaUy too
narrow for the permanent ones, and
hence they are pressed into some shape
of  distortion.  Their edges do  not as-
sume the regular  curve, but stand ob-
liquely, or even sometimes one before
the other.  Cases of this  kind require
the removal of the temporary lateral in-
cisores."
   The practice recommended in the last
paragraph, is based upon the erroneous
belief that the anterior part of the  jaAV
acquires no increase of dimensions after
the  dentition  of the  temporary teeth.
But the  slight  increase  which takes
place in this part of the alveolar border
and the yielding of the temporary lateral
incisores, to the pressure of the perma-
nent centrals, the latter, in the majority
of cases, acquire their proper position
in the arch.  Therefore, it is only when
they are  forced to take a  wrong direc-
tion in their growth, for want of room
betAveen the temporary lateral incisores,
that these last should be extracted.
  "The permanent central incisores are
very broad;  they  occupy the  greater
part of the space of the four temporary
ones, and leave scarcely any room for
the  permanent lateral  incisores;  on
Avhich account these  latter  teeth must
grow very irregularly; they generally
pass through behind, being forced  con-
siderably backwards by the resistance of
the central incisores and the temporary
cuspidati.  Sometimes they pass though
edgeways, and now and then they pro-
ject forwards.  In  any of these cases
the removal of the temporary cuspidati
is absolutely  necessary, and unless the
operation  be timely performed, the ir-
regularity is Avith difficulty remedied."
A temporary tooth,  however, should
not be extracted, except to make room
for a permanent one, or unless  called
for  by some very  pressing necessity.
The practice  above  recommended  is
based upon false theory.              I
   "But," adds Mr. Fox, "the greatest
 deformity is generally occasioned by the
 want of room  for  the lateral incisores
 and the cuspidati, and  when  too long
 neglected, usually becomes permanent."
   But with regard to the means neces-
 sary for  the prevention  of  irregulari-
 ty, the  reader is  referred to  the article
 on Dentition, second, method of direct-
 ing.   The  varieties of irregularity to
 which  the front  teeth are subject, are
 thus enumerated by Mr. Fox.
   First, "When the permanent  inci-
 sores of the upper  jaw  have cut the
 gum behind the  temporary  teeth, and
 have been suffered to remain  until con-
 siderably advanced in growth, they al-
 ways stand so much inwards,  that when
 the mouth is shut,  the incisores of the
 under jaw stand before  them, which is
 always an  obstacle to  their acquiring
 regularity, and occasions a great defor-
 mity.  There are four states of this kind
 of irregularity.   The first, when  one
 central incisor is turned in, and the un-
 der teeth come before it, whUst the other
 central incisor keeps its proper 'place,
 standing before the under teeth.
   "The second is, when both  the central
 incisores are turned in, and  go behind
 the under teeth; but the lateral incisores
 stand out before the under teeth.
   "The third variety is, when the central
 incisores  are placed properly, but the
 lateral  incisores  stand very  much in;
 and when the mouth is shut,  the under
 teeth project before them and  keep them
 backward.
   "The fourth is, when all the incisores
 of the  upper  jaw  are  turned in, and
 those of the  under jaw shut before them.
 This is  sometimes  occasioned by too
 great a length of the under jaw, in  con-
 sequence of which it projects  considera-
 bly more forward than the upper jaw.
 But the majority of such cases originate
 entirely from neglect, and may be com-
 pletely remedied by early assistance."
  It is also proper to state that the  cus-
pidati of the upper jaAV present the same
variety in deviating  from their proper 
IRR
400
IRR
 position as the superior incisores, though
 it less  frequently  happens  that they
 come out behind the arch so as to strike
 on the inside dlf the lower teeth, in the
 occlusion of the jaws.
   The most  proper time, according to
 Mr. Fox, to  effect  an alteration in the
 position of a tooth,  is before the thir-
 teenth or  fourteenth year.   The  diffi-
 culty is certainly increased by delaying
 it to a later period,  though it  may  be
 done with safety at  any time before the
 eighteenth and often  even before the
 twentieth or twenty-first year of age, but
 as a general rule, the  later  a tooth is
 moved, the greater  wUl be  the future
 susceptibility  of the socket  and  gum
 around it to disease.
  To bring an upper tooth forward into
 the arch, which has come out so far be-
 hind it as to strike on the inside of the
 lower teeth,  "two  objects," says Mr.
 Fox, "must be accomphshed, one to ap-
 ply a force which shaU act constantly
 upon the irregular tooth, and  bring it
 forward; the other, to remove  that ob-
 struction which the under teeth, by com-
 ing before the upper, always occasions.
  "The first of these objects may be at-
 tained by the apphcation of an  instru-
 ment adapted to the arch of the mouth,
 which, being  attached to some strong
 teeth on each side, wtil furnish  a fixed
point in  front, to  which  a ligature
previously  fastened on  the irregular
tooth may be applied, and thus by oc-
 casionally renewing it, a constant pres-
sure is preserved, and the tooth may be
drawn forward.
  "The second object, that of removing
the resistance of the under teeth, must
be attained by placing some intervening
substance between the  teeth of the up-
per  and under jaws, so as  to prevent
them from completely closing,  and be
an obstruction to the coming forwards
of the irregular tooth.
  "The  instrument  may be made  of
gold or silver; it should be so strong as
not  easily to  bend; if about the six-
teenth of an inch in breadth, and of a
 proportionate thickness, it AviU be suffi-
 ciently firm.  This bar of gold must be
 bent to the form of the mouth, and
 should be  long enough to reach to the
 temporary," or  permanent  "molares,
 which are the teeth  to Avhich it is to be
 tied. Holes are  to  be drUled  in  it at
 those  places  where ligatures are re-
 quired, Avhich  wtil  be on the parts op-
 posed to the teeth  designed to be the
 fixed points, and, also, at the parts op-
 posite to the place where the irregular
 tooth or teeth are situated.  Then to the
 bar a small piece of  ivory  is to be con-
 nected, by means of a little piece of
 gold which may be fastened to the ivory
 and the bar by  two rivets.  This piece
 of ivory passes under the grinding sur-
 faces of the upper  teeth, is kept there
 fixed, and prevents the teeth  from clos-
 ing, and,  consequently,  takes off aU
 obstruction in front."
   "The bar is to be attached by a strong
 silk ligature to the teeth at the sides, so
 that, if possible, it may remain tight as
 long as it is required; a ligature is then
 to be tied  around the irregular tooth,
 and the ends, being brought through the
 holes in the bar, are to be  tied in a firm
 knot  In two or three days this ligature
 must be removed and a new one  ap-
 plied ; the  tooth will soon be perceived
 to move. A fresh ligature must be used
 every three or four days, in order to
 keep up a constant pressure, sufficiently
 powerful to bring the tooth into a fine
 with the others.
  "The same mode of treatment is to be
 observed whether there be one, tAVO, or
 three teeth  growing in a simUar man-
 ner.   The   teeth  are usuaUy brought
forwards in  about  a  month or  five
weeks, and as soon as they are so much
 advanced as to allow the under teeth to
pass on  the inside, the piece of ivory
may be removed, and the bar only be re-
tained for  a few days, untU the  teeth
are perfectly firm, which  wtil prevent
the accident of the teeth  again reced-
ing."
  "In cases Avhere the irregularity has 
IRR
401
IRR
 been suffered  to  continue too long, no
 success can be expected to foUow at-
 tempts to remove it; we must content
 ourselves in the treatment of these cases
 in  adults, with taking  away the most
 irregular  teeth, and thus, as much as
 possible, lessen the deformity."
   Gold caps are now substituted for the
 blocks of ivory recommended  by Mr.
 Fox.  These latter, when well  adapted
 to the teeth over which they are placed,
 are far preferable, as they are less  an-
 noying to the  patient, and  can, conse-
 quently, be worn  with  less inconveni-
 ence.  The first permanent molares are
 the most suitable teeth to be employed
 for the purpose. The second temporary
 molares, may, however, be used, or if
 they  have  been  molted  and replaced
 Avith  bicuspides,  these  wUl  answer,
 though less suitable than either of the
 others.  When caps are used, it is not
 necessary to attach them to the gold bar
 passing round the front teeth.
  It is also proper to remark, that the
 gold bar and caps should be removed,
 and the  teeth thoroughly cleansed,
 every  time the ligatures are renewed.
 This is necessary to prevent the teeth
 from being injured by the chemical ac-
 tion of the corrosive martter that forms
 between them and the  gold bar, caps,
 and ligatures.
  Various other methods  have been
 proposed  and adopted for the purpose
 of remedying  irregularity of the teeth.
 M.  Delabarre recommends the employ-
 ment of ligatures, so apphed, as to keep
 up a constant action upon the deviating
 teeth.  Instead of  using blocks of ivory
 or gold to prevent the teeth from coming
 together, and forming a permanent ob-
 stacle  to  the  adjustment of a tooth
 Avhich has come out so far back of the
 dental  circle, as to faU behind the lower
teeth every  time the mouth is closed,
he employs wire caps or  grates placed
upon two of the lower molares. This
treatment, if it  were the most efficient,
would, for several reasons, be objection-
able.   In the first place, the ligatures,
     34*
 Avhen apphed so as to act upon a devi-
 ating tooth, acts with equal force upon
 the adjoining  teeth and moves  them
 just as far from their place, as it  does
 the other toward the place it should oc-
 cupy. In the second place, it is difficult
 to apply it so as to prevent it from com-
 ing in contact with, and irritating the
 gums.  Thirdly, it cannot be  made to
 act Avith as much force when thus ap-
 plied as when used in connection with
 the gold bar. The fourth, and  last ob-
 jection,  apphes  to the  wire grates.
 These cannot be fixed to the teeth as
 readily as either the ivory blocks or gold
 caps, and such as could be conveniently
 employed for the  purpose,  would not
 interpose a barrier  sufficiently  thick in
 aU cases to prevent the front teeth from
 coming together.
   For remedying the description of ir-
 regularity under  consideration.    M.
 Catalan proposes the employment of an
 inchned plane, which  may be  made
 either of gold, or stiver, but the former
 is preferable, as the  latter  is liable to
 corrode  in the mouth,  fixed upon the
 lower teeth in such a way that it shall
 strike behind the deviating teeth, at each
 occlusion of the jaws, and press them
 forward toward the place they should
 occupy.  When  several  of the upper
 front teeth  have come  out  behind the
 arch so as to faU  behind the lower in-
 cisores,  Catalan employs as many in-
 chned planes as there are deviating teeth.
 When only one tooth is behind the circle
 of the lower teeth, a single  inclined
 plane will be sufficient.
  The gold frame or case applied to the
 lower teeth, and to  which the inclined
 plane is attached, should be fitted with
 the nicest accuracy, and made to en-
 close one or both of the bicuspides on
 each  side.  The cutting edges of the
 incisores and points of  the cuspidati
 need not be covered with it. Its adapta-
 tion, when apphed, should be such as
to hold  it firmly and securely in its
place, and prevent the action of the de-
viating tooth upon the inclined plane 
IRR                 402                 IRR
from jostling or moving it in the least.
It will  be necessary, too, in adjusting
one  or more  inclined  planes  to this
frame,  so  that they shall act upon the
right points on the deviating teeth, to
have a plaster antagonizing model.
   When this instrument is employed, it,
of course, is  not necessary to interpose
any  substance  between the back teeth,
and  it  is unquestionably the  most effi-
cient and  powerful agent that has ever
been used for remedying this description
of irregularity.  But before it is applied,
it should  be ascertained whether there
be a sufficient aperture in the dental cir-
cle for the reception  of the  deviating
tooth,  or  teeth, if there be more than
one, and  if  there is  not, more room
should be  obtained by the removal of
one of the bicuspides on each side, or
the  first molares, if they be decayed.
The tooth, too, which  is to be brought
forward, should always be opposite the
aperture it is intended it should occupy,
before  it is submitted to the action of
the inclined plane.  Therefore, when it
is situated at either side, as is often the
case, it should  be moved with ligatures
to a point directly behind the vacuity in
which it is intended it should be forced,
by the inclined plane, before that is ap-
plied.
   It often happens, that  one or more of
the teeth, though situated in the circle,
stands obliquely or transversely across
it, so that its anterior and posterior sur-
faces present laterally.  AU that is ne-
cessary in  cases of this  sort, is simply
to turn the tooth  or teeth, if there be
more than one, partially round  in their
sockets.  To  do this, M. Delabarre ap-
plies a  gold  cap to  the twisted tooth,
with ligatures  attached to each  side,
which he  passes  round the  adjoining
teeth, and secures to the temporary mo-
lares or bicuspides  on either side, in
such a manner as  to make them act
constantly in the direction the tooth is
to be turned.  The author has found a
gold ring, properly fitted to the tooth, to
answer better than a cap, for the reason
that it is less  annoying  to  the patient.
The object  may sometimes be accom-
plished with ligatures alone.
  In  altering  the position  of a  tooth,
ligatures of gum elastic are  far prefera-
ble  to stik.
  It sometimes  happens, from  exces-
sive development of the lower incisores
and alveolar border, that the front teeth
of  the inferior maxUlary shut over  the
corresponding  teeth  of the superior,
causing the  chin to project and a bulg-
ing of the lower lip.  This species of de-
formity, however, is  not always pro-
duced by the cause just stated. It some-
times  results  from excessive develop-
ment, or a partial dislocation of the jaAV.
When from the former,  the deformity
can only be remedied by diminishing
the  size of  the dental arch, which is
always a tedious and difficult operation,
requiring a vast amount of patience and
perseverance on the part  of the patient,
and much  mechanical  ingenuity and
skill on the part of the dentist. The ap-
pliances to be  employed have, of neces-
sity, to be more  or less complicated, re-
quiring the  most perfect accuracy  of
adaptation and neatness  of  execution ;
they must also be worn for a long time,
and as a natural  consequence, are a
source of very considerable annoyance.
  In the treatment of a case of this sort,
the  first thing  to be done, is to extract
the  first bicuspis on each  side of the jaAV.
By  this means, a  sufficient  amount  of
room will be obtained  for the contrac-
tion, which  it  will be necessary  to  ef-
fect in the dental arch  for  the accom-
plishment of the object.  An accurate
impression  of the teeth and alveolar
ridge, should now be taken, in the man-
ner described  in another article, with
wax, previously softened  in warm water.
From this impression, a  plaster  model
should next be procured,  and afterwards
a metallic model and counter-model.
  This done, a gold plate of the ordinary
thickness should be swedged up over
the first and second molares if the latter
has made its  appearance, and  if not, 
IRR
403
ISC
over the second bicuspis and first molar
on each  side of the jaw, so as com-
pletely to encase these teeth.  If these
caps, on applying them to the teeth in
the mouth, should not be found thick
enough to prevent the front teeth from
coming together,  a piece of gold plate
should be soldered on that part  of each
Avhich covers the grinding  surface of
the  organ, and having proceeded thus
far, a small gold knob should be solder-
ed on each side of each cap, and to each
of which a ligature of silk or gum elas-
tic should be attached.  These ligatures
should  now  be  brought forward  and
tied tightly around  the cuspidati.  By
this means the cuspidati may, in fifteen
or twenty days, be taken back to the  sec-
ond bicuspides ; but, if in their progress
they are not carried towards the inner part
of the alveolar ridge, the outer ligatures
may be left off after a few days,  and the
inner ones only employed to complete
the remainder of the operation.
   After  the position of the cuspidati
have been thus changed, the gold caps
should be removed and a circular bar of
gold extending from one to the other, so
constructed as to  pass about a quarter of
an   inch behind  the incisores, should
now be soldered at each end to  the in-
ner  side of each cap, and a hole made
through  it behind each of the incisores,
through Avhich a ligature of silk should
be passed,  and after  it is placed in the
mouth, brought forward and tied tight-
ly in front of each  tooth.  These liga-
tures should be renewed every day un-
til the teeth are carried far enough back
to strike on the inside of the correspond-
ing  teeth in the upper jaAV.
  The author has never known an ap-
paratus of this description to  be  em-
ployed by any one but himself, but  in
his practice it has proved more efficient
than any  contrivance which  he  has
ever used.  But it is necessary that every
part  of  the  apparatus be  constructed
Avith the most perfect accuracy, to en-
sure success  and prevent, as much as
possible, the inconvenience necessarily
resulting from the use of such an appli-
ance.
  IRRITABILITY. Irritabilitas ; from
irrito, I provoke.   The susceptibility,
possessed by all living organic tissues,
of being acted upon by certain stimuli.
  IR'RITANT.   Irritans. That which
causes irritation.
  IRRITATION.  Irritatio. The con-
dition of an organ  or tissue, in which
there exists an excess of vital action.
  ISATINE.  A  compound,  formed
by  digesting  blue  indigo  with water,
sulphuric acid, and bichromate  of  po-
tassa, or by heating it with weak nitric
acid.
  ISATIS TINCTORIA.   Glastum.
Woad.
  ISCHEMIA.   From iaXa, I retain,
and ai.ua, blood.  A morbid suppression
of a customary discharge of blood.
  ISCHE'MON. Any medicine which
arrests or restrains bleeding.
  ISCHI'AGRA.   From iaXiov, the
haunch, and  aypa, a seizure.   Ischiatic
gout.  Also, femoro-popliteal neuralgia.
  IS'CHIAS.   Hip-gout, or rheuma-
tism of the hip-joint.
  ISCHIO-CAVERNOSUS.     The
erector  penis muscle.
  ISCHIOCE'LE.  From iaXiov, the
ischium, and xtjXij, a tumor.  Ischiatic
hernia.
  Ischio-Clitoria'nus.   Belonging  to
the ischium and clitoris.
  Isc hio-Clito 'ri an Artery. A branch
of the internal pudic artery, which sup-
plies the two arteries of the clitoris.
  Ischio-Clitorian Nerve. A branch
of the pudic nerve distributed to the cli-
toris.
  Ischio-Clitoride'us.   The  erector
clitoridis.
  Ischio-Coccyge'us.   The coccygeus
muscle.
  Ischio-Femoralis.   The  adductor
magnus femoris.
  Ischio-Femoro-Peroneus.  The bi-
ceps femoris muscle.             .-'
  Ischio-Perinea'lis.   The trans ver-
sus perinei. 
1ST
404
IXU
   Ischio-Prostat'icus.  The transver-
 sa perinei.
   ISCHIOSIS.   Sciatica.   Femoro-
 popliteal neuralgia.
   IS'CHIUM.  From iaXts, the loin.
 The lower part of the os innominatum.
 In the fetus,  one of the three bones of
 the os innominatum.
   ISCHNOPHO'NIA.   From  iaXvos,
 slender, and q>avt], voice.   Shrillness of
 voice.
   ISCHNOTES.  Emaciation,
   ISCHURET'IC.   Remedies which
 relieve a suppression of the urine.
   ISCHU'RIA. From «t#«, I restrain,
 and ovpov, the urine.   Retention  of
 urine.
   Ischuria Spasmodica.   Retention of
 urine from spasmodic contraction of the
 sphincter of the bladder.
   Ischuria Spuria.  A  retention  of
 urine occasioned by some disease of the
 kidney  or  uterus which prevents  the
 urine from reaching the bladder.
   ISINGLASS.  Ichthyocolla.
   ISIS NOBILIS.  Red coral.
   ISOCH'RONOS.  From iaos, equal,
 and  xpovos, time.  Applied to two or
 more actions  performed  in  an equal
 length of time, as the pulsations of the
 arteries in different parts of the body.
   ISOLATED.  Insulated;  standing
 by itself.
   ISOM'ERIC.  From woj, equal, and
fiepos, a part.  In Chemistry, compounds
which agree in composition,  but  differ
in properties.
   ISOM'ERISM. The state of an isom-
eric compound.
   ISOMORPHISM.  Isomorphous.
   ISOMORPHOUS.  Applied to dif-
ferent bodies having the  same  crystal-
line form.
   ISOTHERMAL.  From taos, equal,
and^p^,  heat.  Applied to  different
bodies and places which have the same
average temperature.
   ISSUE.   An artificial ulcer.
   ISTH'MION.  Isthmus.   The fauces.
   ISTHMITIS.  Inflammation of the
fauces.
   ISTH'MUS.  Isthmion.
   Isthmus Hepatis.    The anterior
 point of the right  lobe of the liver;
 caUed, lobulus anonymus.
   Isthmus of the Thyroid Gland.—
 A band of fibres uniting the two divi-
 sions of the thyroid gland.
   Isthmus Vieussenii.  The ridge sur-
 rounding the remains of the  foramen
 ovale, in the right auricle of the heart.
   ITCH.  Psora.
   Itch, Baker's.  Psoriasis.
   Itch, Barber's.   Sycosis.
   Itch, Grocer's.   Psoriasis.
   Itch, Insect.  Acarus scabiei.
   ITER.  A passage.
   Iter ad Infundib'ulum.  The fora-
 men commune anterius of the brain.
   Iter a Palato ad  Aurem.  The
 eustachian tube.
   Iter a Tertio ad Q,uartum  Ven-
 tric'ulum. A passage from the third to
 the fourth ventricle of the brain.
   Iter Dentis. A name given by Dela-
 barre to the alveo-dental  canal, a small
 foramen immediately behind each tempo-
 rary tooth communicating with the cell
 of the corresponding permanent tooth.
  ITINERA'RIUM.   A conductor;  a
 director.  Also, a catheter.
  ITIS.   From  itr^s, bold, rash. A
 suffix denoting inflammation, as odon-
 titis, periostitis, &.c.
  I'VORY.  The tusk of the male ele-
phant.  It is of a uniform close texture,
and under the  microscope exhibits  a
structural  arrangement  simtiar to that
of tooth-bone.  According  to Retzius,
it  is of a  tubular structure, but it has
also been shown to be ceU^lar.   It con-
tains about 66 per cent, of phosphate of
lime with a smaU trace of carbonate of
lime, and 34 of animal matter. It was at
one time much used for artificial teeth,
but at present is seldom employed for that
purpose.
  Ivory, Black.  Animal charcoal.
  IVY.  Hedera helix.
  Ivy, Ground.   Glecoma hederacea.
  I'XIA.  A  varix.   Viscum album.
  IXUS.  Gahum aparine. 
JAS
405
JAW
J.
    J AC A INDICA. Thymus mastichi-
  na, or the common herb mastich.
    J ACE A.  Viola tricolor.   Pansey.
  Also, the name of a genus of plants.
    JACINTHUS.  Hyacinthus.
    JACK-IN-THE-HEDGE.   Erysi-
  mum alliaria.
    JACKSON.  Author of a Disserta-
  tion  on the Physiology and Pathology
  of the Eruption of the Teeth, published,
  Edinburgh, 1772 and 1778.
    JACOBEA.    Sonecio Jacobaea.
    JACTITATION.   Jactitatio.  In-
  quietude ; restlessness.
    JALAP.  Jalapa.  Convolvulus jal-
  apa.  The root of the ipomoza jabpa, a
  valuable purgative.
    JALAPA ALBA.  White jalap.
    JALA'PIN.   The principal resin of
 jalap.
    JAMAICINE.   Geoffraea inermis, or
  worm-bark  tree.
    JAMES'  POWDER.  Antimonial
 poAvder.
   JAMESTOWN  WEED.    Datura
 stramonium.
   JAMET,  C.  A.   Treatise on  the
 Teeth, &c. by.  Paris, 1839.
  , Jamet's  Tooth  Powder.   1$.—
 Florence iris, calcined,  with spirits of
 wine, foi;  magnesia,  § iv;  pumice
 stone, | viij; bones of cuttle-fish, § viii;
 sulph. quinine,  § iv;  cascartila, § i;
 sugar of milk, fci.  Reduce these sub-
 stances  to  powder and  pass  them
 through a fine sieve.
   JANITOR.  The pylorus. Also, a
 door-keeper.
   JANKE.   Dissertation  on the Ex-
 traction of Teeth, by.  Leipsic, 1751.—
 On the Bones of the Mandibule of Chil-
 dren of seven years of  age, Leipsic,
 1751.
  JANITRIX. The vena portae.
  JASMIN.   Jasminum officinale..
  J AS'MINUM.  The name of a genus
of plants.                           I
Jasminum Arabicum.  Coffeaarabi-
    Jasminum Officinale.  Jessamine.
    JASPACHATES.  Agate, jasper.
    JASPER.   A sihceous  mineral  of
  various colors;  a species of quartz.
    JATROPHA.  The name  of a ge-
  nus of plants.
    Jatropha Curcas.  Nux  catharti-
  ca Americana; physic-nut.
    Jatropha Elastica. Caoutchouc.
    JAUNDICE.  Icterus..
    Jaundice, Black.  Melaena.
    JAW.  MaxiUa.
    Jaw, Lower, Anchylosis of.  Stiff-
  ness and immobility of the temporo-max-
  illary articulation.  It results from chro-
  nic rheumatism or gout, or old age, or
  from some disease of the synovial mem-
  brane, cartilage of the joint, or articu-
  lar surface or  extremity  of the  bone.
  Fortunately, it  is an affection  of rare
  occurrence, as it seldom admits of cure.
    Jaw, Lower,  Dislocation of.—
  From the pecuhar manner in which the
  inferior maxtila is  articulated to the
  temporal bones, it is not  very tiable to
  be dislocated, and when one or both of
  its condyles are  displaced, the luxation
  is always forwards.  The conformation
  of the  parts prevents it  from taking
 place in any other direction.  The ob-
 long, rounded head  of each condyle is
 received into the fore part of a deep fossa
 in the temporal  bone, situated just be-
 fore the meatus auditorious externus,
 and under  the beginning of the zygo-
 matic arch. The  articular surface of
 each is covered with a smooth cartilage,
 and between which there is a movable
 cartilage.  This latter is connected with
 the articulating surface of the condyle
 and the  fossa of the temporal bone by
 hgaments attached to its edges. But the
articulation  is rendered still more secure
by means of an external ligament which
rises from the external edge of the fossa 
JAW
406
JAW
in the temporal bone, and is attached to
the  neck  of the condyle  of the jaw,
Avhich it  surrounds—constituting  the
true capsular ligament.   The interven-
ing movable cartilage, from being more
strongly connected with the head of the
condyle than to the articular cavity, es-
capes with the former, whenever a dis-
location of the jaw takes place.
  Dislocation of the lower jaw is rarely
caused by a blow, except it  is given
when the  mouth is open; it is more fre-
quently occasioned  by  yawning,   or
laughing.   It has been known to occur
in the extraction  of teeth, and in at-
tempting to bite a very large substance.
Sir  Astley Cooper mentions the  case of
a boy who had his jaw dislocated by
suddenly  putting  an apple  into  his
mouth to keep it from a playfellow.
  After the  jaw has been dislocated
once, it wiU ever after be more liable to
this accident,  and in consequence of
Avhich, Mr. Fox very properly  recom-
mends to  those to whom it has once
happened, the precaution of supporting
the jaw whenever the mouth is  opened
very Avidely in gaping, or  for the pur-
pose of having a tooth extracted.  But
none of these causes would be sufficient
to produce the accident, except the liga-
ments of  the temporo-maxiUary  articu-
lation  are very loose, and the muscles
of the jaAV very much relaxed.
  The author  has never had an oppor-
tunity, in his own practice, of witness-
ing but one  case  of dislocation of the
lower jaw, and  the subject of this was
a young lady from Virginia, about se-
venteen  years of age.   It occurred in
attempting to extract the first right infe-
rior molaris.  Both condyles were  dis-
placed, but  so  completely were  the
muscles of the jaw relaxed, that he im-
mediately reduced it without the least
difficulty, and, afterwards, by support-
ing the jaw'with his left hand,  he  suc-
 ceeded in removing the tooth.
   When  the lower jaw  is dislocated,
 the mouth remains  wide open, and a
 great deal of pain is experienced, Avhich,
according to  Boyer, is  caused by the
pressure of the  condyles on the deep-
seated temporal nerves, and those which
go to the masseter muscles, situated at
the roots of  the zygomatic processes.
The condyles having left their place of
articulation, are advanced before the ar-
ticular eminences and lodged under the
zygomatic arches. The jaAV cannot be
closed; the  coronoid process may be felt
under the  malar bones; the  temporal,
masseter and  buccinator muscles  are
extended; the articular  cavities being
empty, a hollow may be felt there; the
saliva flows  uninterruptedly from the
mouth, and deglutition  and speech are
either wholly prevented, or very greatly
impaired.  Boyer says, that "during
the first five days after the accident, the
patient can neither speak nor SAvallow."
The jaw when only one condyle is dis-
placed,  is forced, more  or less, to  one
side.
  If the dislocation continues for  sev-
eral days or weeks, it is said, the chin
gradually approaches tho upper jaw,
and that the patient slowly recovers the
functions of  speech  and  deglutition.
We are told  by Mr. Samuel Cooper,
that it may prove fatal, if it remains un-
reduced,* but  Sir Astley Cooper says,
he  has never known  any  dangerous
effects to result from this accident—on
the contrary, that after it had continued
for a considerable length of time, the
jaw partially recovered its motion.f
  In  the reduction of a dislocation of
the lower jaw,  the ancients employed
two pieces of wood, which were intro^
duced in each  side of the  mouth be-
tween the  molar teeth,  and  whUe  they
were made to act as levers for depress-
ing the back part of the bone, the  chin
was raised by means of a bandage.
   The method usuaUy adopted by sur-
geons for reducing a dislocation  of this
bone, consists in introducing the thumbs,
wrapped with a napkin or cloth, to pre-
    •
  * Vide Surgical Dictionary, p. 306.
  t Vide A. Cooper on Dislocations, p. 389. 
JAW
407
JAW
vent them from being hurt by the teeth,
as far back upon the molar teeth as pos-
sible, then depressing  the back part of
the jaAV, and, at the same time, raising
the chin with the fingers.  In this way
the condyles are disengaged from under
the  zygomatic  arches,  and  made to
glide back into their articular cavities.
But the moment the condyles are  dis-
engaged, the thumbs  of the operator
should be shpped outwards between the
teeth  and cheeks, as the action of the
muscles, at this instant, in drawing the
j aw back, causes it to close very suddenly,
and with considerable force, so that this
precaution is necessary to prevent being
hurt, unless a piece of cork or soft wood
has been previously placed between the
teeth—a precaution which should never
be neglected.
   By the foregoing simple  method of
procedure, the  dislocation may, in al-
most  every  case,  be  readily reduced,
but Mr. Fox  mentions a case in which
it failed.  The subject was a lady who
had had her lower jaw luxated several
times before, and this  time the accident
was occasioned by an attempt Avhich he
made to extract one of the inferior dentes
sapientiae. After having failed to reduce
the luxated bone by the  usual method,
he says,  he  "happened to recollect a
statement made to  him  by M. de Che-
mant, of his having been frequently ap-
plied to by a person at Paris, who  was
subject to this accident, and  that he al-
ways  succeeded in reducing the luxa-
tion immediately,"  by means "of a lever
of wood, as recommended by Dr. Mon-
roe."   Profiting by this statement,  Mr.
F. procured a piece of Avood "about an
inch square, and ten  or twelve inches
long."  He placed one end of this upon
the lower molares, and then  raised the
other, so that the upper teeth aided  as a
fulcrum.   As soon as  the jaw was de-
pressed, the condyle of this side of the
jaw, upon which the wood was applied,
immediately slipped back into its articu-
lar cavity.  The wood  was then applied
to the opposite side of  the jaw, and the
other condyle reduced in the same man-
ner.*
  Trie method proposed by  Sir Astley
Cooper, consists, when both condyles
are displaced, in introducing two corks
behind the molares, and then elevating
the chin.  He, however, first places his
patient in  a recumbent posture.f
  After the reduction of the dislocation,
the patient is recommended to abstain,
for several days, from the use of solid
aliments,  and to  prevent  a  recurrence
of the accident,  to wear a four-tailed
bandage,^ or, what is still  better,  the
bandage  contrived  by Mr.  Fox,  (see
Fox's Bandage,)  to  prevent its  recur-
rence in the extraction of teeth.   When
it  is used for the latter purpose,  the
mouth is  first opened to a  proper  ex-
tent, Avhen, with  the condyles in their
articular  cavities, it is  applied and  the
straps tightly buckled.   This done, it is
impossible to advance the  jaw suffi-
ciently to  produce a dislocation.
   Jaw, Lower, Fractures of. Frac-
tures of the loAver jaw may occur near
the symphysis, or between this point and
the coronoid  process at the ramus, and
at one or two places.   The condyloid
or  coronoid process may be fractured,
or the alveolar herder, and the solution
of continuity may be perpendicular with
the  base, oblique, or longitudinal,  and
as  the accident  is the result of great
mechanical violence, the  soft parts are
generaUy more or less injured.   In one
case which fell under the observation of
the author in which the fracture occur-
red between the first and second molares,
the extremity of the posterior portion of
the bone  protruded externaUy through
the cheek.
   In his Surgical Dictionary, Mr. Sam-
uel Cooper says, "Fractures of the lower
jaw, are subject to  displacement in the
foUowing way.  When the fracture is

  *Vide American edition of Fox on the
Human Teeth, p. 330.
  t Vide A. Cooper on Dislocations, p. 391.
  X Vide Cooper's Surgical Dictionary, p. 306. 
JAW
408
JAW
 near the symphysis, the side on  Avhich
 the process innominatus is situated, is
 drawn downwards  and backwards by
 the sub-maxtilary  muscles, while  the
 other fragment is supported by the mus-
 cles Avhich close the jaw.  When  the
 fracture is more backwards, the displace-
 ment occurs in the  same Avay but  not
 so easily.   When the bone is fractured
 in two places, the middle portion is al-
 Avays pulled downwards and backwards
 by the  muscles  attached to the  chin.
 While the  two  lateral  pieces are kept
 up by the levator muscles.  When  the
 ramus of the jaw is broken, the masse-
 ter being  attached  to both  pieces pre-
 vents  any  considerable  degree  of dis-
 placement.  When the neck of the con-
 dyle is  fractured,  the pterygoideus ex-
 ternus may puU the condyle forwards.
   "When a blow is received on the low-
 er jaw, or the bone is injured by  a fall,
 or by the pressure of some heavy  body;
 when an acute pain is  experienced in
 the part, and an  inequality  can be felt
 at the basis of the bone,  when some of
 the teeth, corresponding to that ine-
 quality, are lower than the others; and
 when a crepitus is perceptible on mov-
 ing the two pieces of the jaw on each
 other;  there can be no doubt of a frac-
 ture.  When the gums are lacerated,
 or the bone denuded by a wound, the
 case is, if possible, still  more manifest.
   "Fractures of the rami and condyles
 produce great pain  near the ear, par-
 ticularly when the jaw is moved; and
 a crepitus may also be felt.
   "Fractures of the lower jaw, whether
 simple or double, are easily set,by push-
 ing the displaced part  upwards and a
 httle forwards, and then pressing in the
 basis of the bone, so as to bring it ex-
 actly on a level with  the portion which
 has preserved its natural  position.  In-
 deed, the correctness of the reduction
 can always be rightly judged of by at-
 tending to the line which the base  of
 the jaw ought to form, and observing
 that the arch of the teeth is  as regular
as nature will allow.  The maintenance
 of the reduction, however, jg difficult;
 and can only be executed by support-
 ing the lower jaw,  and keeping it ap-
 plied to the upper one.   As the latter
 indications cannot be properly fulfilled
 in persons whose  teeth are very irregu-
 lar, it is, sometimes, necessary to inter-
 pose an even piece of cork between the
 teeth on each side of the mouth, and
 against this cork the lower jaw is to be
 kept up with the bandage presently no-
 ticed, while the aperture left between
 the incisores  in the situation where no
 cork is placed, allows food and medi-
 cines  to  be  introduced  with a small
 spoon.
   "As  soon as the fracture is set, the sur-
 geon should adapt some thick pasteboard,
 previously wet  and softened with vine-
 gar,  to the outside  of the jaw, both
 along its side and under its basis. Over
 this moistened  pasteboard,  a bandage
 with four tails is to be applied, the cen-
 tre being placed on the patient's chin,
 while the two posterior tails are to be
 pinned to the front part of a night-cap,
 and the two anterior ones  fastened to a
 part of the same cap  more backwards.*
 When  the  pasteboard becomes dry, it
 forms  the  most convenient apparatus
 imaginable  for  surrounding  and sup-

  * Dr. J. Rhea Barton, of Philadelphia, to
 whose science and skill  I have had frequent
 occasion to allude, has devised a bandage for
 fractures of the jaw, to which a preference
 is now generally given in this country, as well
 for its superiority in retaining the fragments
 in a state of coaptation, as for the facility it
 affords in securing the dressings occasionally
 applied to wounds of the face  and chin.  He
 commences with "a roller an inch and a half
 wide just below the prominence in the occipi-
 tis and continues it obliquely over the centre
 of  the parietal bone across the juncture ol
 the coronal and sagittal sutures, over the zy-
 gomatic  arch, under the chin, and pursuing
 the same direction on the opposite side, until
 he arrives at  the back of the head; he then
 passes it obliquely around and parallel to the
 base of  the lower jaw  over the  chin; and
 continues the same course on the other side
until  it ends where he commenced and re-
peats."—Reese. 
JAW
409
JAW
 porting the fracture.   A piece of soap-
 plaster may now be applied to the skin
 underneath, which will prevent any iU
 effects of the hardness and pressure of
 the pasteboard.
   "Until the bone  is firmly united, the
 patient  should be  aUowed only such
 food as does not require mastication, and
 it may be given by  means of a small
 spoon introduced  between  the  teeth.
 Broths, soups, jellies, tea, and other
 slops, appear most eligible.
   "In order to keep the  middle portion
 of the bone from  being drawn down-
 Avards and backwards towards the la-
 rynx, it is frequently necessary to apply
 tolerably  thick  compresses just under
 and behind the chin; which  are to be
 weU supported by the bandage already
 described.
   "I need hardly state the necessity of
 enjoining the patient to avoid talking, or
 moving the jaw more than can possibly
 be avoided.
   "When the condyle is fractured, as it
 is incessantly drawn forwards by the
 action of pterygoideus externus, and on
9 account of  its deep situation  cannot be
 pressed back, the lower portion must, if
 possible, be pushed into contact with it.
 For this purpose the bandage must be
 made to operate particularly on the an-
 gle of the jaw, where a thick  compress
 should be placed.
   "Compound  fractures  of the lower
 jaw are to be treated on the same princi-
 ples  as similar  injuries of other bones.
 If possible,  the external wound  should
 be healed  by  the  first  intention; and
 when this attempt fails,  care must be
 taken to keep the wound clean by chang-
 ing  the dressings  about once in three
 days, but not oftener lest  the fracture
 suffer too much disturbance.  It is ob-
 served that  compound fractures of the
 jaw, and even simple  ones, whi#h are
 followed by abscesses are  particularly
 liable to be  succeeded by  troublesome
 and tedious  exfoliations'.
   "In very bad fractures, in which all
 motion of the jaw  must have  the most |
 pernicious effect, I consider it prudent
 to  administer  every  kind of nourish-
 ment in a fluid form  through an elastic
 gum catheter,  introduced through  one
 of the nostrils down the oesophagus.
  "It now and then happens that fractures
 of the jaw continue ununited:  Dr. Phy-
 sick's successful treatment of one such
 with a seton I have already noticed."
   When the fracture is confined to the
 alveolar border, it  becomes necessary,
 in most instances, to remove the detach-
 ed portion, as a union wiU seldom take
 place, though it wtil be proper to wait,
 except  the  soft parts are considerably
 lacerated,  until the  bony fragment is
 separated from them, by the suppura-
 tive inflammation  which  soon super-
 venes.   But when a large portion of the
 border is fractured, a union may some-
 times be effected, if the part be properly
 secured.
   Jaav, Lower, Immobility of. This
 may result from anchylosis, or from in-
 flammation and adhesion of the gums,
 or from  contraction of the muscles.  It
 is particularly liable to occur after mer-
 curial salivation which has resulted in ne-
 crosis and exfoliation of the alveolar pro-
 cesses.   The following interesting case
 was  communicated by professor Mot:
 to the American editor, Dr.  Reese, of
 Cooper's Surgical Dictionary, and from
 which work it is now quoted.
   "A youny man  twenty-one years of
 age, from North Carolina,  called, with
 the lower jaw almost immovably fixed to
 the upper.   No motion in a downward
 direction could be  discovered,  nor was
 the most powerful effort with the hand
 upon the chin able in the shghtest de-
 gree to alter its situation.  He had been
 in a deplorable state for ten years.  Una-
 ble to chew a mouthful of food or even
 open the jaws for its reception, his food
 had to be introduced  through a small
 opening, occasioned by an irregularity of
 the bicuspid teeth on the right side.  On
 the left side, just within the angle of the
mouth, a firm band, of more than liga-
mentous  hardness, was to be seen and 
JAW                410               JAW
felt, reaching from this point along the
alveolar ridge to the coronoid process.
  "Along the whole course of this adhe-
sion to the gum of the lower jaAV, there
was not a  vestige of  a tooth, and  he
stated that from this part the jaw had
been formerly separated, Avith the teeth
attached to it.   This morbid  adhesion
had  been several times freely divided, it
was cut  from within the mouth in dif-
ferent  directions, but  never permitted
the least motion of the jaw.
  "From the circumstance that he could
give a little lateral motion to the jaw, I
thought  that his  mouth might yet be
opened, and the deformity removed.   I
then made an incision from the angle of
the mouth on the left side through the
cheek, nearly to the coronoid process
dividing  the  firm cicatrix within com-
pletely.  The jaws being reheved by di-
viding all the adhesions between them;
a piece of very  broad  tape  was placed
between the teeth by a probe and spatula
and  tied  some distance below the chin.
To  the  loop  thus formed I applied all
the strength I could command, but not
the  least yielding of the jaw could  be
discovered.
  "I then applied the principle  of the
screw and lever, by an instrument pre-
pared for  the  purpose,  composed  of
two steel plates about three inches  in
length. When applied to each other, they
were of a wedge shape. To the large end
was attached a screw, which, when turn-
ed, caused the thin extremity of the plates
to expand.  This instrument enabled me
to open the mouth completely.
  "With considerable difficulty this vice
was insinuated between the range of
teeth on  the left side, resting along their
whole course.   It was then expanded,
by turning the screw, and such was the
report that attended the yielding of the
lower jaAV, that several present thought it
was broken,  but the noise was like that
attending the  laceration of ligaments
rather than such as attends the fracture
of a bone.  The mouth was immediate-
ly opened to  a sufficient extent.
  "The Avound was closed with the in-
 terrupted  suture  and adhesive plaster;
 to prevent the  adhesion of the cheek to
 the jaws internally, pieces  of sponge
 were interposed.   The patient was en-
 abled to chew his food, and to converse
 and articulate distinctly as the result of
 the operation, and he entirely recovered."
  The operation  has subsequently been
 repeated by  professor Mott, and with
 like success.
  When the immobility results from, or
 is complicated with, anchylosis of the
joint, no benefit will be derived from an
 operation.
  Professor Paul F. Eve,  of Augusta,
 Georgia, has performed two operations
 for separating the jaws.  The first ope-
 ration was performed in 1840, on a boy,
 aged five years, who, says professor E.,
 "had had gangraenopsis, which had re-
 sulted not only in the destruction of the
 soft parts but anchylosis of  the lower
jaw.  There was great deformity of the
mouth.   After  free division of the zy-
gomatic muscles and other soft parts,
the right commissure of the lip was de-
pressed, and the separation of the lowerf
jaw increased by the lever power." The
 deformity was only partially removed.
  In the other case, which  had resulted
 from  cancrum  oris,  or profuse saliva-
 tion, the operation was  only partially
 successful.
  Jaw, Lower, Operations on.  In
 describing the  operations on the lower
jaw we shall begin  with:  I. Exciswn.
 Four pathological  conditions are no-
 ticed  by Chelius, as indicating the ne-
 cessity of this operation, namely: first,
 a cancerous  degeneration of the lip, ex-
 tending to  the bone,  or from cancer
 originating in the bone itself.  Second,
 an  osteosteatoma, osteosarcoma,  spim
 ventosa  and fungoid degeneration of the
jaw.  Third, deep seated caries. Fourth,
 exostosis.  Fifth,  want of union of frac-
 tures.
  According to the  seat and  extent of
 the disease, excision may  be required
 either of a part or of the whole jaAV. 
JAW
411
JAW
 Excision of Middle Portion of the Jaw.

  The patient is seated in a chair, as in
this position the blood is not so  liable
to flow into the throat and produce suf-
focation.  An assistant behind supports
the head, compressing, at the same time,
the facial artery Avhere it mounts over
the lower jaw in front of the masseter
muscle. The surgeon now  makes an
incision from  the angle of the  mouth,
on each side,  down to the base of the
bone.   The lip and soft parts between
these  two  incisions are dissected  to-
wards the neck.  The extent of the dis-
ease avUI now be ascertained, and the
teeth corresponding to its hmits are to be
extracted.  The bone is now to be deep-
ly notched on  the anterior surface from
above downwards, by a smaU saw, such
as Hay's,  and then with the  straight
cutting forceps, one of the blades  being
Avithin the mouth on the inner  surface,
the other in the groove on the outer sur-
face, the bone is to be divided.  In this
division with  the forceps the operator
leans over the patient, and the  tongue
and  soft parts are  protected from the
inner blade by means of a  spatula,  or
other suitable  instrument, or the finger,
Avhich is better than any thing else, and
it is considered proper to clear a space
for the blade  within by  passing a knife
up.   The next  step is  to  remove the
piece divided.  This is done by standing
in front, and  with a sharp-pointed bis-
toury passed from  below upwards,  to
cut close to the inner surface of the bone,
dividing all the  soft parts, namely, the
digastric, part of the mylo-hyoid, the
geno-hyoid, the geno-hyo-glossus, and
the mucous  membrane on  both  sides.
But  before this  dissection, the  tongue
should be secured by passing a ligature
through its apex, or the framum, so as
to prevent its  sudden retraction in the
mouth and suffocation.
  Another mode of incision is to divide
the lower lip by a single cut, after mak-
ing it tense by stretching its angles, and
extending the incision through the skin
and cellular tissue to the os hyoides and
dissecting the flaps  from the surface of
the bone outwards, which are to be held
by assistants, the removal by the saw,
forceps, and knife, being the same  as
described.   The chain-saw is sometimes
preferred in the division of the bone.
   Dressing.—A tier cleaning the wound,
all bleeding arteries  should  be  tied.
The inferior dental artery  may  be se-
cured by plugging its orifice in the bone
with wax.   If  bleeding continues from
vessels that have retracted and  cannot
be discovered,  the  surface  should  be
touched with the heated iron.  Mr. Fer-
guson recommends  that a  quantity of
lint be placed in the wound to prevent its
sides from falling inwards, which other
surgeons think of rather doubtful utility.
To obviate  this difficulty, Mr. Nas-
myth, of Edinburgh, has constructed a
doubk silver  case, to contain the molar
teeth of both  upper and lower jaws,
which is adapted previous to the opera-
tion, and which  has been successfuUy
used  and highly recommended by Mr.
Listen.   The  flaps are to be  placed
in juxta-position, and secured  by the
twisted suture.
   The ligature passed through the fra-
num or tongue is directed by Dupeck,
to be carried between the flaps, and se-
cured to one of the hare-lip pins.
   The  several steps of the operation
just described, may require to be modi-
fied in a greater or less degree,  to suit
particular cases.   As,  for  example, if
the lip  be cancerous, its removal will
be necessary, and should be  done by
making a section in the shape  of the
letter V, the apex looking downAvards.
Where only the anterior portion of the
bone is  attacked by  disease, the poste-
rior may be left, according to Dupeck,
as being useful, both in preserving the
natural shape of the jaw, and affording
attachment to the muscles of the tongue.

Excision of the  Side of the  Lower Jaw.

  The patient  being seated as  in the
first case, an incision is made from the 
               JAW

angle of the  mouth to  the  base of the
ja\v.  A second incision is carried from
this point along the base to the angle,
and for a short distance up the ramus.
The flap thus marked, is dissected back-
wards and held by  an  assistant.  The
facial artery is secured  by ligature, but
should  not be divided  by the first in-
cisions ; the masseter muscle is detach-
ed.  An incisor and molar  tooth being
extracted, the jaw is prepared for divi-
sion at its angle and near the  symphy-
sis by  the application  of the saw and
forceps as already described in excision
of the chin.   In  its removal the mylo-
hyoid, the internal pterygoid muscles,
and  trunk of the inferior maxillary
nerve will have to be separated.  The
genio-hyo-glossus will not be disturbed,
and  consequently the tongue will not
be retracted.
   Should it be required to remove the
ascending ramus, it is only necessary to
extend the incision stiU higher up along
the ramus, and apply the saw, forceps
and knife as before, bearing in mind the
proximity of the external carotid artery.
All the bleeding vessels having been se-
cured, the flap is brought down and re-
tained at the hp by means of the twist-
ed suture, and along  the base of the
jaw by  the  interrupted, and supported
by strips of adhesive plaster.
   Other incisions are used in this ope-
ration.   The square-shaped of Cloquet is
made by commencing  at the angle of
the mouth, and extending the incision
transversely to the posterior margin of
the ramus of the jaw;  then from each
extremity of this cut to make two  ver-
tical  incisions, namely,  one in  front
going to  the  base  of the jaw, and the
other behind  the  ramus, descending  a
little below the angle.  This flap is then
dissected from above downwards upon
 the neck.
   Professor Mott makes two  flaps, the
 one semilunar,  the other  triangular.
 The first is made by one incision over
 the articulation of the jaw, carried down
 to the chin; the  convexity of the semi-
2               JAW

lunar incision looking backwards.  The
second begins at the upper end of  this,
and extends down the back part of the
angle of the jaw, and a short distance
along the  anterior  edge of the sterno-
cleido-mastoideus.  The superior flap is
now dissected upwards, and the inferior
downwards,  thus fully  exposing the
bone, which is  removed  in both these
different incisions in the Avay already
described.

Excision of both Sides of the Lower Jmc.
  Make  an incision along the base of
the inferior jaAV from one angle to the
other across  the chin, and dissect the
flap from the bone upwards, which  is to
be held by an assistant.  The bone Avith
the muscles and soft parts upon its  pos-
terior surface  are  to be divided  and
separated,  as already detailed.  If the
tumor be very large, it is thought  best
to divide the lip.

2. Disarticubtion, with Excision of luilf
            the Lower Jaw.
  In  an operation  of this sort the in-
cision must be  directed very much by
the size of the tumor and the extent of
the disease invading the  integument.
The  method of Lisfranc and Curack is
thought to  be very applicable.  It is as
foUows : An incision is carried from the
symphysis along the base to the angle
of the jaw—then two vertical incisions
are made at each extremity of this hori-
zontal one—the first faUing from the
middle of the lower lip, and the second
descending from the zygomatic arch be-
hind the ramus of the jaw.  The facial
artery being secured, this flap is to be
dissected upwards,  taking care not to
wound the parotid duct and gland.  The
jaw is now to be divided at the  sym-
physis by the saw and forceps, and the
muscles and soft parts  separated from
the posterior surface as  far as the angle
with the bistoury.   The masseter  is
also  to be  separated from its attach-
ments, which exposes the articulation.
A probe-pointed bistoury is now passed
4 
JAW               413               JAW
 behind the coronoid  process  to  divide
 the tendonous insertion of the temporal
 muscle.  The jaw is depressed so as to
 luxate the condyle, and the knife is car-
 ried up to the  articulation, dividing the
 external pterygoid muscle and articular
 ligaments, drawing the jaw forwards at
 the same time, so as to remove it as
 much as possible  from the vessels be-
 hind its ramus.   The condyle is now
 turned outwards,  the knife passed  into
 the joint, and the internal lateral liga-
 ment severed.  At this stage, a number
 of arteries will be cut, which must be
 secured with ligature.

  3. Removal of the Wlwle Lower Jaw.

   In the performance of this formidable
 operation, a horizontal incision is made
 along the base of both sides of the jaw
 and chin  to the angles;  a second in-
 cision is made from the root of the zy-
 goma  to  the  angle of the jaw uniting
 with the posterior extremity of the hori-
 zontal incision.  The flap is next  dis-
 sected up over the face, and the jaw di-
 vided  at  its symphysis.   Each half is
 now  disarticulated as before described,
 and in both, the dressings are the same
 as  detailed for  other sections  of this
 bone.  Other incisions are used in this
 operation by different surgeons.  One
 consists in carrying the knife  from the
 angles of the mouth to the front of the
 ear.   Another, in making two elhptical
 incisions, the one  below along the base
 and ramus of  the  jaw to  the condyle,
 the other  above, laying bare the coro-
 noid process and opening the joint.  A
 third method, is the four cornered  flap,
 made by carrying the knife from the an-
 gle of the mouth vertically to  the  base
 of the jaw, thence along the base to the
 angle, and upwards  to the front of the
 articulation.*
  Professor Paul F. Eve, of Augusta,
Georgia, has furnished the author with a

  • Vide Ferguson's  Practical Surgery by
Norris;  Pancoast's Operative  Surgery ; Che-
iius' System of Surgery, &c.
        36»
 description of four operations performed
 by himself on the inferior maxtila.
   The first  operation was performed,
 May 31st,  1838, on a  negro  woman,
 aged twenty-five, for the removal of a
 tumor involving nearly the whole of the
 left side of the  lower jaw-bone.  The
 operation is thus described by professor
 E.: "An incision  was  made perpen-
 dicularly from the left angle of the lips
 to  the  thyroid  gland,  and  from this
 point another one extending to  the lobe
 of  the ear of the same side.   Extract-
 ing the canine tooth of this side, the in-
 ferior maxilla was divided  Avith a saw,
 and then by a  careful  dissection, this
 portion of the bone  was  drawn out-
 wards so as to apply the saw at  its neck,
 leaving its condyle in the  articulation.
 It  measured four inches  and three-
 quarters in length; the  diseased mass
 presented a large fungous growth, con-
 taining numerous  irregularly  shaped
 spiculae and laminae of bone.
   "Three ligatures, and  some  eight or
 ten sutures, with the ordinary dressings
 were applied."
   "The disease,"  says  professor E.,
 "reappeared  on the right side, and de-
 stroyed the life  of the patient in eight
 or ten months."
   In the second case, the operation was
 for epulis of  the lower jaw.  The bone
 was exposed "by an incision from the
 left angle of the mouth through the
 cheek to  the extent  of an  inch and a
 half, the diseased mass was isolated by
 two perpendicular applications of the
 saAV, and it was then chipped off with
 the chisel and maUet  This patient fuUy
 recovered."
  In cases third and fourth, a portion of
 the inferior  maxilla was removed  for
 osteo-sarcoma, and both operations were
 successful.
  Mr. H. Scott, dentist,  of Lancaster,
 Ohio, furnished  the author with a re-
port of three operations, on the inferior
maxiUa,  taken from  the case-book  of
M. Z. Kreider, M. D., of that place.
  The first was for the removal  of a ne- 
JAW
414
JAW
crosed portion of the lower jaw, result-
ing from inflammation produced by the
dens sapientiae.  An incision was first
made upon the ramus, and then carried
forward  to the canine tooth; this Avas
removed, the soft parts  separated, and
the bone disarticulated,  thus removing
more than one-third of the bone.  The
second operation was performed for the
removal of an osteo-sarcomatous tumor,
extending from the first molaris, on one
side, to the corresponding tooth on the
other,  which extended  back  in the
mouth so as greatly to impede the mo-
tions of the tongue, and down to the os
hyoides, to which  it was slightly at-
tached.   The first molar on each side
was extracted, and an incision  made
from one ramus  to the other along the
base of the jaAV.  The flap was then dis-
sected from  the jaw and  turned up-
wards, the  facial arteries secured, and
the bone divided on  each side at the
points where the teeth had been ex-
tracted with the saw.  The whole mass
was next dissected out, the divided ves-
sels tied, and the wound dressed in the
usual manner.   The operation was en-
tirely successful.
   The following is the history  of case
third: In 1824,  Alexander Stall, aged
forty-three years,  "having tooth-ache,
had the second molar of left side of the
lower jaw extracted; he caught  a  se-
vere cold about this time in consequence
of laying out over night in a drunken
spree; swelling with inflammation and
great  pain  supervened;  suppuration
followed;  pus  was  discharged  from
many points both from within and with-
out the mouth;  at  this time (1827) is
greatly emaciated; the bone, upon ex-
amination, is found to be necrosed, in-
volving the articulation, and as far  as
the chin.  To relieve him, the  canine
tooth of the opposite side was extracted
and the bone found to be sound.   A
simple incision  was then made, com-
mencing below  the lobule of the left
ear, and at the posterior part of the ra-
mus of the jaw; this was carried down
to the base and continued around to the
point of the  extracted tooth.  The fa-
cial artery was  secured, the flap  dis-
sected upAvards from the base, the mas-
seter muscle  detached, and the attach-
ments  within also separated  from the
bone.  This was divided at the point of
the extracted  tooth; the trunk of the in-
ternal maxillary  artery lying between
the pterygoid muscles had been pre-
viously secured to prevent hemorrhage
from its various  branches.  After hav-
ing isolated the  coronoid  process,  the
bone was forced upAvards, the internal
pterygoid was then divided at  its  in-
sertion near  the condyle of the bone,
which was then  readily disarticulated
and removed; it was  found to  be dis-
eased and very offensive.  The flap was
brought down and secured by pins. The
patient recovered and is still living."
  For a  description of the foUowing
novel and most extraordinary operation,
the author is indebted to Dr. S. P. Hul-
lihen,  surgeon  dentist, of Wheeling,
Va.   The ingenuity, skill, and boldness
displayed in  the conception  and per-
formance of this complicated operation,
places Dr. H. at once among the ablest
and best surgeons of the day.
  "Miss Mary S.----, aged 20, daugh-
ter of the Hon. Wm. S----, of Ohio,
came to Wheeling in the spring of 1848
to obtain relief from the effects of a very
severe burn,  which she had  received
fifteen years before.
  "The burn was  principaUy confined
to the neck, and loAver part of the face,
and its cicatrix produced a deformity of
the most dreadful character.   Her head
was drawn forward and downward, the
chin was confined within an inch of the
sternum, the  under lip  was  so  pulled
down that the mucous membrane of the
left side came far below the  chin, the
under jaw was  bowed slightly  down-
Avard, and elongated, particularly its up-
per portion, which made it project about
one inch and three-eighths beyond the
upper jaw.   In front  there was scarce-
ly  any  appearance of either chin of 
JAW
415
JAW
neck, she was unable to turn her head
to either side, the cheeks and upper lip
were dragged  considerably downward,
she  could  not close her  eyelids;  she
could not close her jaws, but for  an in-
stant,  and then  only  by bowing her
head forward, she could not retain her
saliva for a single instant, and as might
be  expected,  her articulation was very
indistinct.
   "She had been taken to the city of
New York some years before, for the
purpose of being relieved of this defor-
mity, and was placed under the care of
two of the most distinguished surgeons
in that city, who  performed  an opera-
tion by dissecting up the cicatrix on the
neck, then raising the head, and sliding
up the cicatrix from its original position,
leaving a raw surface below to heal up
by granulation; I need scarcely add that
the  operation was entirely  unsuccess-
ful.
   "After a careful examination of the
case, it became evident that such a com-
plicated deformity could be  best reme-
died by performing three separate  ope-
rations, one upon the jaw, another upon
the neck, and  a third upon the under
hp.
   "To remove the projection of the un-
der jaw seemed to require the first atten-
tion; unless that could be done the other
operations, however successful, would
add but httle, if any, to the personal ap-
pearance of the patient.  This length-
ening  of the jaw had taken place entire-
ly between the cuspidatus and first bi-
cuspid tooth  of the  right side, and be-
tween the first and second bicuspides of
the left.  By this elongation, the teeth
just described were  separated on  both
sides  about  three-fourths of an  inch.
To saw out the upper edge of these elon-
gated portions of the jaAV, and then to
divide that part of the jaw in front of the
spaces thus made, by sawing it through
in a horizontal manner, so as to permit
the upper and detached portion to be set
back in its proper and original position,
appeared to be the only possible way of
remedying the deformity.  This plan I
therefore adopted, and  performed the
operation on  the  12th day of June, in
the manner now to be described.
  "The operation was  commenced by
sawing out in a V shape the elongated
portions, together with the firstbicuspid
on the left side, each section extending
about three-fourths of the way through
the jaw.   I then introduced a  bistoury
at the lower point of the space  from
which the section was removed on the
right  side, and pushed it through the
soft parts, close to and in front of the
jaw, until it came out at the lower point
of the space on the left  side.   The bis-
toury was then withdraAvn, and a slen-
der saw introduced in the same place,
and the upper three-fourths of the jaw,
containing the six front teeth was saw-
ed off on a horizontal line ending at the
bottom of the spaces before named, the
detached portion being still connected on
the outer and inner sides to the jaw be-
lowbythe soft parts.  After having with
the bone-nippers removed from the de-
tached portion  the corners which were
created by the horizontal and perpendi-
cular cuts of the saw, it Avas set back
so  that the edges from which the  V
shaped sections Avere  removed,  came
together.
  "Thus  it will be perceived, that this
portion of jaw and teeth which before
projected,  and inclined outward, now
stood back, and inclined inward, and in
its  proper and original place.
  "In this position the jaw was secured
by  passing ligatures around the cupida-
ti in the detached portion, and the now
adjoining  bicuspides  in the sound por-
tion, then taking  an  impression of the
jaw in very soft wax, a cast was pro-
cured, and a silver plate struck up and
fitted over the teeth and gum in such a
manner as to maintain  the parts in that
same relation beyond the possibility of
movement.
  "The patient declared that the opera-
tion gave her little or no pain.  There
was a httle swelling about the chin dur- 
JAW
416
JAW
 ing the first three days after the opera-
 tion, but not the slightest uneasiness. In
 this way the case progressed,  the gum
 healed in  a  few days, the jaw united
 strongly, and in the time bones usually
 unite, and the wearing of the plate was
 discontinued within six weeks after the
 operation was performed.
   "The deformity of the jaw being now
 removed, the next thing to be done was
 to relieve the  confined condition of the
 head, and the distortion of the face and
 neck resulting therefrom.  This I deter-
 mined to accomplish,  if possible,  after
 the manner of Prof. Mutter  in  similar
 cases, and I accordingly performed this
 operation on the 31st  day of July, as-
 sisted by Dr. Frissell.
   "I began by dividing the skin imme-
 diately in front of the neck, about  half
 an inch above  the  sternum, and then
 carried the incision back about three
 inches on each side.   I then commenc-
 ed a careful division of the  strictures,
 which were so thickened in  front as to
 extend to the trachea, and on the sides
 as not only to  involve  the  platysma,
 myodes, but a portion of the sterno cle-
 ido mastoideus muscle, also.  After di-
 viding every thing that interfered with
 the raising of  the head, and the closing
 of the mouth, so far as the incision was
 now  made, it became evident that  to
 give free motion to the head, the inci-
 sion on the neck must be extended back
 through the remaining cicatrix, which
 was at least two inches wide  on one
 side;  and about  an inch and a  half on
 the other;  this was  accordingly done,
 the whole presenting a wound upwards
 of nine inches  in length, and nearly five
 in width.  A thin piece of leather was
 now cut in the shape of the wound, but
 somewhat larger,  and placing it upon
 the shoulder and arm, immediately over
 the deltoid muscle, a  flap nearly  ten
 inches in length, and  five in breadth,
having a neck or attachment two inches
wide, was marked out, and then dissect-
ed up as thick as the parts below would
permit.  This  flap was  now brought
 around, and secured in the wound on
 the neck by the twisted sutures, the su-
 tures were placed about an inch and a
 half apart; between each of these su-
 tures, one, two  and sometimes three
 smaU  stitches were inserted depending
 entirely  upon the  number necessary to
 bring the edges neatly together.  These
 stitches were  of fine thread, had a very
 superficial hold, produced little or no irri-
 tation, and served to keep the  parts in
 better apposition than any other means
 I could have devised.  The wound on
 the shoulder was  next drawn together
 about one half of its entire extent, the
 remainder  was covered with lint. One
 long narrow strip of adhesive  plaster,
 applied around the neck to support the
 flap, and over this a cravat  tied in the
 usual way, constituted aU the dressing
 deemed advisable at this time.
   "The  patient bore this tedious, and
 very painful operation with great forti-
 tude, and without uttering scarce a mur-
 mur—she  was  somewhat  exhausted,
 but  not  from the loss  of blood—there
 was no vessel divided of sufficient im-
 portance to require a ligature.
   "August 1st.—During the fore part
 of last night the patient was somewhat
 distressed—was  very unmanageable—
 would talk incessantly, and occasion-
 aUy  sat up in bed.  An anodyne was
 administered at 12 o'clock, after  which
 she rested much better and slept  some.
 Complains of  sickness of the stomach
 this morning, has vomited three or four
 times—flap very  pale—pulse   rather
 weak.  Patient directed to refrain from
 taking aU kinds of drinks.
  "2nd.—Patient  complains of pain
 only in the shoulder, was  much dis-
 tressed the  latter part of last night on
 account of  a retention of urine.  The
 catheter was employed, and about three
 pints of  urine drawn off, after which
 she rested welL  Pulse someAvhat ex-
 cited, flap better color.
  "3d.—The patient  rested well last
night—the use of the catheter still neces-
sary.   AU  efforts  to keep the  patient 
JAW
417
JAW
from  talking and moving unavailing,
color of the flap rather pale, save at the
extreme point, and about two  inches
along the lower edge, which is assum-
ing rather a dark blue  color.  Pulse
about the same as yesterday—removed
a pin from near the point of  the flap,
and enveloped  the neck in cotton bat-
ting.  Patient  complains of hunger—
chicken broth ordered.
   "4th.—Patient rested weU, the use of
 catheter still necessary, complains of
slight head-ache, the color of the  flap
nearly natural, and even the point is as-
suming a healthy hue, and appears to
be  uniting, pulse almost natural.
  "5th.—Urinates  without  difficulty,
bowels  moved by  injection, patient en-
tirely free from pain, pulse natural.
  "6th —Dressing removed, the  flap is
uniting by the first intention along both
sides throughout  its entire extent, the
greater part of the pins and stitches re-
moved.
  "7th.—The  remainder of the pins
and stitches removed, patient  perfectly
comfortable and cheerful.
  "10th.—Sat up  all day by the win-
dow.
  "15th.—Walked out to take an air-
ing.
  "During the whole progress  of the
cure, there was not the slightest sweU-
ing or undue inflammation in the flap
or  about the neck.  The patient  was
slightly hysterical the first few days,
but never complained of any thing ex-
cept pain on the shoulder, a slight head-
ache of a few  hours duration, and the
uneasiness occasioned by  the retention
of urine.  The Avound on the shoulder
granulated rapidly, and skinned over in
about six weeks after the operation.  It
was curious to  observe   that  upon
touching the flap after it had healed in
the  neck, the patient would always re-
fer the sensation to the shoulder or arm
from which the flap was taken.
  "The confinement of the head and
distortion of the face occasioned by the
strictures,  being now  removed;  the
 next step was to reheve, as far as possi-
 ble, a very great deformity of the under
 hp.
   "The under hp  from being dragged
 down, and greatly stretched by the for-
 mer projection of the under jaAV  was
 rendered greatly too large, so much so
 that it pouted out an inch or more fur-
 ther than the upper lip.  This, together
 with a turning out of the mucous mem-
 brane on the left side, which extended
 nearly down  to the lower  edge of the
 chin, making  the lip  too short on  that
 side, was the  nature  of the  deformity
 yet to be reheved.
   "To reheve this unseemly appearance
 of the lip, the inverted portion was  cut
 out in a V shape, extending down to the
 flap in the neck, and sufficiently large
 to reduce the lip to the proper size.  The
 edges were then brought together and
 secured  after the manner of a single
 hare-lip.   The  wound  healed  in  the
 most beautiful manner, the appearance
 of the  lip was  greatly improved,  but
 stiU there remained a  deep depression or
 notch in the edge sufficiently large to
 keep exposed  the tops of two or three
 teeth, besides  preventing the coming to-
 gether of the lips on that side.
   "I now determined to raise, if possible,
 this depressed portion of the lip, and
 for this purpose  passed   a bistoury
 through the lip, about two lines from
 the free edge, first on  one side of the de-
 pression, and then on the other,  and
 then carried the incisions downward to
 meet at a point on the lower edge of
 the chin.
   "The depressed portion of lip now ly-
 ing between the two incisions was next
 dissected loose from the jaw and then
 raised on a level with the remainder of the
 lip, and there retained  by pins, after the
 manner of dressing a  double hare-lip,
 the line of union forming the letter V.
   "This operation was as successful as
 the others  and the original deformity
 being now removed,  the young lady,
though stiU carrying  evidences of the
burn, has the free use  of her head, eye- 
JAW
418
JAW
lids, jaws and lips, and  may mingle in
society without  particular note or re-
mark."
  Jaav,  Lower, Protrusion  of.  A
deformity which gives  to  the  face a
morose  and  disagreeable  appearance,
often  interfering with mastication, and
frequently with prehension and distinct
articulation.  It also changes the natu-
ral relationship which the teeth sustain
to each other Avhenthe mouth is closed.
The cusps of the bicuspides, and pro-
tuberances of the molares of one jaw,
instead of fitting into the depressions of
the corresponding teeth of the other, are
caused to strike upon their most elevat-
ed parts;  at other times the outer pro-
tuberances of the lower molares and bi-
cuspides, instead of fitting into the de-
pressions of the same class of teeth in
the upper jaAV, strike on  the outside of
these  teeth.
  Although  the effect of this  descrip-
tion of deformity upon the lower part of
the face, is similar to that Avhich results
from excessive development of the teeth
and alveolar border of the lower jaw, it
results from a different cause.  It is oc-
casioned, according to Dr. J.  S.  Gun-
nell,  by  a "natural partial luxation."
and is of more frequent occurrence than
the other, and requires an  entirely dif-
ferent plan of treatment.
  The plan  of treatment proposed by
Dr. Gunnell, and it  is  unquestionably
the most successful that has ever been
employed, consists in fastening a small
block of ivory on one of the lower mo-
lares, thick enough  to  keep the front
teeth  about a quarter of an inch apart
when the jaws are closed.   He then
puts on Fox's bandage, Avhich he buck-
les "as  tight as the  patient can  bear
with  convenience," pressing "the chin
upwards  and backwards."   Then, if
the teeth be irregular, he takes "a piece
of tough wood of the shape of a narrow
spoon-handle," which he introduces be-
tween the teeth and presses on the "out-
side of the front lower protruding tooth
or teeth, and on the inside of the upper
irregular teeth, firmly, for  from five to
ten minutes, two or three times  a  day,
the lower end of the  stick or piece of
wood and hand  being  below the chin,
thereby pressing the  lower teeth in-
wards and backwards, and the upper
teeth outwards  and forwards.   In this
way," says  Dr. G. "I  have restored
the face or jaws  to their proper sym-
metry in  one week,  though occasion-
ally it will take from three to six Aveeks
or even longer."
  When the protrusion of the lower
jaw is accompanied by irregularity, Dr.
G.  very properly  directs  that  means
should, at  the same time, be employed
for remedying it  He also recommends
that the operation for retracting the  pro-
truding jaw be performed as soon as the
deformity occurs, though, he says, "it
may  be successfuUy  remedied at  any
time previous to the age of puberty, and
that he has  done it, at a much later
period, but that after the sixteenth year
of age the operation becomes more diffi-
cult and tedious.
  The author has never had occasion to
adopt this practice but in one instance,
and then he substituted a cap of gold for
the block of ivory.  The  subject was a
little girl about  thirteen  years  of  age.
It proved perfectly successful in about
five Aveek3.
  But in cases where  the  lower front
teeth shut over  the upper, and thus
cause a deformity of the face, it  is im-
portant to discriminate  correctly  be-
tween those which  result from  malfor-
mation, and a protrusion of the jaw oc-
casioned by partial luxation, as  the re-
medial indications of the two are entire-
ly different.  Those which would prove
successful in the one, would prove  un-
successful in the other.
  Jaw, Upper,  Operations  on.  As
the  manner of opening the maxUlary
sinus with a  view of  giving  egress
to accumulated  matter, is  described in
another article, we omit a description of
it in this place.   See  Maxillary Sinus,
diseases of. 
JAW               419               JAW
      Excision of the Upper Jaw.
   Malignant  tumors,  and tumors not
 malignant,  but of large size;  caries,
 osteosarcoma, osteosteatoma, fungous de-
 generation, and polypus of the antrum,
 are regarded as indications demanding
 this operation.
   The size  of the tumor,  and the na-
 ture and extent of the disease, will ne-
 cessarily regulate, in a great measure,
 the direction of the incisions, and the
 whole process of the operation,  so that
 only general rules can here be given, to
 be modified to suit  individual cases.
 One invariable rule should be observed,
 whatever mode of incision be adopted,
 namely, to direct the cuts so as to cause
 the least possible  disfiguration,  but at
 the same time to  thoroughly eradicate
 every diseased part.
   If the morbid growth or tumor be
 about the size of an egg or walnut, and
 situated on  the front  part of the  jaw,
 the patient should be  placed in  the sit-
 ting posture, as in excision of the lower
 jaw, and the head held by an assistant.
 Then, according to Mr.  Ferguson, an
 incision is made from the margin of the
 upper  lip to the root of the  ala of the
 nose.   This  flap, with  the mucous
 membrane, is dissected from off the tu-
 mor upwards, as far  as may be neces-
 sary, and extending the first incision if
 required. An incisor, bicuspid, or mo-
 lar tooth is then extracted, and the mu-
 cous membrane of the hard palate di-
 vided with the point  of the knife; the
 alveolus is  next notched Avith a small
 saAV in front and  behind,  and the  divi-
 sion and separation of the bone effected
 with the cutting forceps.  If  the tumor
 be of small size,  it  may  be removed
 without  dividing the hp, and it may be
 so large as  to require the complete ex-
 cision of the entire upper jaw.
  For  this formidable operation,  Mr.
 Liston,  who has  repeatedly  operated
with success,  adopts the  foUowing
method.  The extent of the disease be-
ing accurately  ascertained,  and  the
 points  of  separation  decided upon.
 Supposing the malar bone involved, the
 instruments  employed are  a pair  of
 straight tooth forceps, a full sized bistou-
 ry, copper spatula, powerful scissors, ar-
 tery forceps, a small saw, and necdks for
 interrujHed and twisted suture.
   Thus armed, he commences the ope-
 ration by  extracting a central incisor
 tooth either on  the affected side or the
 opposite, as the size of the tumor may
 require.  The point of the bistoury is
 then  carried from the external angular
 process of the frontal bone down to the
 corner of the mouth through  the cheek;
 the incision being guided by placing the
 fore and middle fingers  in the cavity of
 the mouth.  A second incision is made
 along the zygoma,  and connects Avith
 the first.   The knife is  now pushed
 through the integument  to  the nasal
 process of the superior maxiUa, detach-
 ing the ala from the bone, and cutting
 the lip through in the middle tine.
   This flap is dissected up and held by
 an assistant; the soft parts, as the infe-
 rior oblique muscle, infra-orbitar nerve,
 and attached to the floor of the orbit are
 cut,  and its  contents supported by  a
 narrow bent spatula.
   The section of the bone  comes  next
 in order.  This is done with the cutting
 forceps, dividing in succession the junc-
 tion of the malar bone,  the  zygomatic
 arch, the nasal process of the superior
 maxilla, and then with strong scissors,
 after  having notched the alveolar pro-
 cess,  one blade is passed in the mouth,
 and the other in the nostril of the affect-
 ed side, the palatine arch is cut through.
 At this stage the  carotid artery, if ne-
 cessary, is compressed.  The tumor is
 now turned down from its bed, and the
 remaining  attachments divided,  pre-
 serving,  if possible, the  palatine plate
 of the palate bone with the velum pal-
 ati.  The branches of the internal max-
iUary  being torn and stretched, may not
require a ligature.  The patient being
now placed in a reclining  posture, the
cavity sponged out and examined, and 
JAW
420
JAW
all vessels, whether bleeding or not that
are seen, secured with  a ligature, and
the ends cut off.  The space  occupied
by the tumor and  removed  structures
are filled with lint and the edges of  the
wound  united with  either  the  inter-
rupted or twisted suture.  No dressing is
applied—plasters, bandages,  &c. being
thought useless.  In twenty-four  hours
some of the sutures are withdrawn and
plasters then applied;  in  forty-eight
hours they are aU removed, the wound
at this time having adhered.
   Other methods have  been  proposed
for excision of the upper jaw.  Fergu-
son begins his incision from the margin
of the upper lip, carries it to the nostril,
and along the ala to within half an inch
of the inner canthus; a second incision
extends from the angle of the mouth to
the zygomatic process, and a third, at
right angles to this last, extending from
the external angular process of the fron-
tal bone towards the neck of the jaw.
Gensoul lets fall a vertical incision from
near the inner canthus, and divides the
upper hp entirely through over the ca-
nine  tooth; a transverse cut, beginning
and level with the nostrti, extends from
this last to the fore  part  of the lobe of
the ear.   A third incision commencing
about half an inch  to the outer side of
the external canthus, is carried  down
almost  vertically  and  touching  the
outer extremity  of  the  transverse inci-
sion.  Two flaps -are thus formed, the
one superior and dissected upwards, the
other inferior, and turned downwards.
   Professor  JVarren  and  M.  Vclpcau
use a single incision, simtiar  in  shape,
and extending from the external can-
thus, at its temporal margin, to the an-
gle of the mouth.  From this incision
 a flap  is  dissected upwards from the
 surface of the bone, the ala detached
from the nose, and the whole  turned up-
wards towards the forehead.   From the
 same incision another  flap  is  turned
 downwards sufficiently to expose the
 malar and maxiUary bones.
    The  use of the  saw and cutting for-
ceps, and  if necessary,  the  chisel and
mallet, together with the securing of the
arteries by ligature and the actual cau-
tery—in  a word,  the dressing  of the
wound in  aU these different  methods is
nearly the same as that already describ-
ed.*
  The author is  indebted to professor
Paul F.  Eve, for a description  of the
following  operations performed by him-
self.
  The first  was for the removal of a
fibrous tumor of the superior maxillary
bone, with polypus of the nose. "In
July,  1835," says professor E., "I liga-
ted  the left carotid artery, removed a
polypus from the  left nostril,  and dis-
sected from the cheek of the same side,
a fibrous  tumor which  was found at-
tached to  the outer surface of the left
superior maxiUary bone.   This foreign
growth had an osseous attachment, and
was about the size of a guinea egg. The
patient was  a youth   aged  eighteen
years.  His parents inhabited a sickly
district of South Carohna, and had re-
cently lost five children; this their last
was of a cachectic habit  The polypus
returned  the next winter and was re-
moved a second time.  In 1836, the pa-
tient visited New  York  to consult Dr.
Mott, who ligated the right carotid. He
is now a  man of famtiy,  managing a
large property."
  The second operation was for the re-
moval of nearly the whole superior max-
illary bone for the removal of polypus
of the antrum, which is  thus described:
"May, 1836,  Mr. J. S., aged  21, was
operated upon the third  time for a large
fibrous polypus  of the  right antrum
highmorianum.   In two  previous at-
tempts, the foreign growth had been at-
tacked in the nostril, the antrum Ava?
opened, and the soft palate sht up, but
without  succeeding in its entire remo-
val.   In the third  operation, a flap was
  * Vide Liston's Practical Surgery; Fergu-
son's  Practical Surgery; Pancoast's Opera-
tive  Surgery; Chelius' System of Surgery,
and Druit's Surgeon's Vade Mecum. 
JAW
421
JAW
  made by  two  incisions  through the
  cheek  and lip, this reflected over the
  eye; the maxillary bone of the right side
  thus exposed was separated between its
  first and second  incisor  teeth, then the
  nasal process of the same  bone divided
  transversely, after  which  the alveolar
  processes with six teeth, (the wisdom
  tooth not being developed) was  gradu-
  ally detached.  The palatine process of
  the superior maxilla, and the palatine
  plate of the palate bone were also re-
  moved, and as the  fibrous tumor could
  not yet be puUed away, even by great
  force, it was separated by  curved scis-
  sors from  the basilar processes  of the
  occipital and sphenoid bones,  and also
  from the internal plate of the pterygoid
  process. The mass removed,  Aveighed
  three ounces three and a half drachms.
  Three sutures were applied to the palate,
  and five to the face in dressing the wound.
  The latter united, but the former did not.
  The patient entirely recovered."
   The operation in  the third case con-
  sisted in the removal of nearly the whole
  of the right superior maxillary bone, for
  fungous hematodes of the antrum, but
  the affection was rapidly reproduced, and
  the  patient died in two or three months
 after the operation.  The fourth opera-
 tion consisted in trepanning the antrum
 highmorianum, but as the tumor proved
 to be  osseous, it was  abandoned, and
 the patient died on  the third day from
 symptoms of congestion of the brain.
   In the fifth operation a portion of both
 the  superior  and  inferior  maxillary
 bones were removed for  epulis, which
 was successful.
  JAWS, MORBID GROWTHS OF.
 Both the upper and lower jaws are sub-
ject to a  variety of morbid growths de-
 pending, says Mr. Listen, for their dif-
ferences of structure "somewhat" upon
the tissue in which they  originate, "as
the gum, the membranes of the teeth,
the periosteum of the alveoh, the sur-
face  or the  internal structure  of  the
bones, or the membranes  lining their
cavities."  All these different parts from i
          36
   external injury,  or,  according to  Dr.
   Koecker, from some "accidental excite-
   ment or peculiar irritation" may  be-
   come the  seat of tumors of every size
   and consistency,  both small and large,
   hard, soft, benign and malignant, and
   many of them have their  origin tracea-
   ble to dental  irritation,  arising either
   from  disease,  irregularity of, or badly
   performed operation upon, the teeth.
    The most common of  these morbid
  growths are epulis, fibrous, fibrocarti-
  laginous, sarcomatous, osteosarcomatous
  and fungous tumors.  Epulis is a tumor,
  as its  name implies, belonging to the
  gum,  and is found  mostly  upon the
  lower jaw,  though the upper is by  no
  means exempt from it. It is invariably,
  says  Mr. Ferguson,  of a  sarcomatous
  character, at one time "soft and spongy,
  at another of a more  solid kind."  Its
  size and extent varies.  In its  simple
  form, it is confined to the gum between
  two teeth.   If neglected it involves sev-
  eral teeth and the alveolar processes.  It
  is, says Mr. Liston,  of slow  growth,
  being most generally of firm consistence,
  and having its attachment broad  and
  firm, "its surface, even large, is covered
  by smooth membrane, and  is often un-
  broken, becomes  iobulated, and  unless
  it projects from the mouth and is ex-
 posed to  injury, the teeth  are loosened
 and present  in various parts of the tu-
 mor."  It is not generaUy of a malig-
 nant nature, and is to be  distinguished
 from another tumor of the gum which
 is described as soft, of rapid progress,
 uneven surface, and giving out a fetid,
 bloody discharge, and which is decided-
 ly malignant.
   The treatment of epulis  in its first
 stage is simple, it being only necessary
 to remove  the exciting causes, which
 are generally decayed teeth, and extirpa-
 ting the entire tumor with a strong knife
 and cutting forceps.  If the tumor be of
 much size, and  the alveolar processes
 much involved, it  is recommended, in
 addition to extracting the teeth on each
side, and cutting around it, to saw the 
JAW
422
JAW
bone with a fine saw before using the
forceps;  and in some cases of large tu-
mors, it is necessary to divide the cheek
so as to obtain free access.
  Thefibrous and fibrocartilaginous tu-
mors  are morbid growths common to
both jaws, and also found in the maxil-
lary sinus.  According to Mr. Listen's
experience, these tumors generaUy result
from external injury, and have their ori-
gin in the bone and investing membrane,
surface Iobulated, structure of firm con-
sistence; homogeneous,  and  not  very
vascular—decidedly fibrous, and  con-
taining spicula of bone or earthy matter.
They are described  as being surrounded
by a dense  cellular cyst, and from the
enormous size they  sometimes attain,
displace the adjacent bones, and by pres-
sure, cause their attenuation.  The irri-
tation arising from decayed and diseased
teeth is probably the  most frequent ex-
citing cause.
   In the advanced stages they fill the
pharynx, and are not only troublesome,
but exceedingly dangerous, as they in-
terrupt both respiration and deglutition.
   The only treatment, after they have
 attained considerable size, is complete
 excision  of the diseased  mass.  This
Mr.  Liston  confidently  recommends
from repeated successful operations, and
says, "if the tumor be cut into instead
 of being cut beyond, there  must neces-
 sarily ensue vast and alarming loss of
 blood, together with unwarrantable de-
lay, and all to no purpose."
   According to the  extent of the dis-
eased mass, either the whole of the su-
perior maxilla, malar and palate bones,
 or a part of them may require removal.
 As a general rule, however, when  op-
portunity offers before the tumor has at-
tained a very large size, such local causes
 of irritation as may have been concern-
 ed in its production, should first be re-
moved.   For the  mode of operating,
 see Jaw, Upper, operations on, and Jaw,
 Lower, operations  on.
    Osteo-Sarcoma.  This morbid growth
 professor Warren  describes as tubercu-
lated, irregular, moderately hard, some-
what variable in size, connected with
bone, and  sometimes mahgnant;  pre-
senting externaUy a rounded form, of
firm consistence, and  enveloping  the
bone from which it originates.  Its color
is like the skin generally, though some
times reddened and exhibiting enlarged
veins.
  As it enlarges, its hardness diminishes,
and it assumes a greater or less amount
of elasticity; softening as it increases in
size, and varying in consistence, accord-
ing to professor Warren,  from  day to
day, in some instances.
   A tuberculated surface is regarded as
a characteristic indication of this kind of
tumor, and it consists, according to the
above named writer, of thrae elements:
"1. The bone on which  the tumor is
placed.  2.  The periosteum.  3.  The
meduUary fungus contained in the pe-
riosteum," to which is added a fluid of
varying consistence  found in the  cells
of the periosteal cavity.  These tumors
belong more especiaUy to the lower jaw,
and may also attain an enormous  size,
involving  either a part or  the whole of
 the jaw.   Their only treatment is exci-
sion.  See Jaw, Lower, operations on.
   Fungous tumors are of  a  malignant
 character.   Professor Warren thus de-
 scribes one of the maxiUary sinus:  "It
begins with an uneasiness in the nose.
 After a time the nostril of the diseased side
 is obstructed, and the patient thinks he
 has a polypus.  A red tumor is seen in
 the nostril, Avhich is grasped by the for-
 ceps, gives out a copious discharge of
 blood.  The obstruction increases, and
 is  accompanied with  pain.   The nos-
 tril frequently  bleeds without provoca-
 tion.  An offensive ichorous discharge
 issues from the anterior  and posterior
 apertures  of the  nostrils.   The  face
 swells.  The portion of maxillary bone
 which covers the antrum, protrudes and
 produces a horrible deformity.  Some-
 times the  first protrusion  of  bone wiU
 be perceived in the mouth,  from a de-
 pression  of the palatine plate, pushed 
JOB                423              JUG
downwards by the  enlarging antrum.
The molar teeth  drop out, and are fol-
lowed by a discharge of blood, which
for the time gives some relief.  As the
tumor grows large the nostril of the op-
posite side becomes obstructed from the
pressure of the septum into it. The ex-
ternal sweUing of the  maxtilary bone
assumes a sugar-loaf form and seems to
be composed of  bone and carttiage in-
termixed. Fistulous openings appear.
The throat becomes obstructed from a
posterior extension of the disease.  The
eye is sometimes protruded,  and some-
times buried in the tumor."   This spe-
cies of morbid growth is always regard-
ed as fatal. But for diseases of the an-
trum, see MaxiUary Sinus, diseases of.
   JE'CUR.  The liver.
   JEJUNPTIS.  Inflammation of the
jejunum.
   JEJU'NUM.  From jejunus, empty.
Jejunum intestinum.   That portion of
the small intestine comprised between
the duodenum and ilium.
   JELLY.  Gelatine.
   JERON, J.   Author of a Practical
Treatise on the  Operations of Dental
Surgery, published, Berlin, 1804.
   JERUSALEM   ARTICHOKE.—
Helianthus tuberosus.
   Jerusalem Oak.  Chenopodium bo-
try s.
   Jerusalem  Oae, American. Che-
nopodium anthelminticum.
   Jerusalem Sage.  Pulmonaria offi-
cinalis.
   JESSAMINE.  Jasminum officin-
alis.
   JESUIT'S BARK. Cinchona bark.
   JEUZE. Upon Difficult  Dentition.
Erfort, 1732.
   JOBSON, DAVID WEMYSS.   A
Treatise on the Anatomy and Physiolo-
gy of the Teeth, &c, &c.;  their  Dis- |
eases  and Treatment, with  Practical
Observations on  Artificial Teeth, and
Rules for their  Construction, by.  Lon-
don, 1835, and  republished  in Library
part of American Journal of Dental Sci-
ence, volume fourth.
   Jobson's Lotions for the Gums. 1.
 $.—Tinct. myrrh,  3vi; mistu.  cam-
 phorat,  § viij.  M.  2. $.—Tinct. cin-
 chona?, 3 ss; vini rubri  susitan ; aq.
 fortis a a,  § iij. M. 3. $.—Tincture
 myrrh, 3iv; tinct.  cinchon., §ss; in-
 fus. rosar., § iv;  aq. fortis, § vi. M.
   JOHNSON,  ---.  The Successful
 Treatment of an Alveolar Abscess con-
 nected with the nasal opening, of eight
 years standing,  by.  Published  in vol.
 first of the New York Dental Recorder.
   JOINT.  Articulation.
   Joint, Stiff.  Anchylosis.
   JOINTED.  Articulated.
   JOURDAIN.  A  celebrated  French
 dentist of the eighteenth century, and
 author of three  ably written treatises:
 The first, entitled, Treatise on the De-
 positions in the  MaxiUary Sinus, Frac-
 tures and Caries, with Reflections on
 all of the Operations of the Art of the
 Dentist, was published,  Paris,  1761.—
 The second, Essay on the Formation of
 the Teeth, compared with that of bone,
 was pubhshed,  Paris, 1766.—The third
 forms two large volumes,  and  is enti-
 tled, Treatise on the Diseases and Sur-
 gical Operations  of the  Mouth.  &c,
 published,  Paris, 1778.  The last is a
 work of much practical value;
   JOURDAN. New Elements of Odon-
 tology, by. Paris, 1756.
   JOURDAN  AND MAGGIOLO.—
 Manual of the Dentist's Art, by.  Nan-
 cy, 1807.
   JUDICATO'RII  DIES.    Critical
 days.
   JUGAL PROCESS.   The  zygo-
 matic process.
   JUGALE OS.»  The cheek bone.
   JUGA'LIS.   From jugum, a yoke.
 Jugal.  Belonging,  or relating  to, the
 cheek.
   Jugalis Sutura.  The suture which
 unites the malar bone with the maxil-
 lary.  Also, the sagittal suture.
  JU'GLANS.  The name of a genus
of plants.
  Juglans  Cinerea.   Butter-nut—
White walnut. 
JUN                424               JUX
   Juglans Regia. The walnut tree.
   JUG'ULAR.  Jugidaris; from jugu-
 lum, the throat.  Relating to the throat.
   Jugular Veins.   Two veins, an ex-
 ternal and internal, situated on the lat-
 eral and anterior part of the neck.  The
 tAvo unite and form, with the subclavian
 vein, the superior vena cava.
   JU'GULUM.  The throat.
   JU'GUM PENIS.  A compress for
 the urethra, formerly used to prevent
 the escape  of urine in cases  of incon-
 tinence.
   JUJUBE.  Jujuba.   See Rhamnus
 Zizyphus.
   Jujube Paste.  A paste formed with
 gum arabic and sugar, dissolved in a de-
 coction  of the fruit  of the  rhamnus
 zizyphus, or jujube.
   JULEP.   A name formerly applied
 to medicinal mixtures, as the  camphor
julep, mistura camphoroz.
   JULY-FLOWER. Dianthus caryo-
 phyllus, or clove-pink.
   JUNCKER.  Dissertation on Affec-
 tions  of the Teeth, by.—2d. Difficulty
 of Teething.—3d. On Tooth-ache, Sac.
 HaUe, 1740, '45 and '46.
   JUNKER.   On  Head and Tooth-
 ache, and the Remedies against them.
 Brunswick,  1802.
   JUNCUS ODORA'TUS.    Andro-
pogon schoznanthus. Juncus aromaticus.
 SAveet rush.
   JUNGLE FEVER.   A mahgnant
remittent fever occurring in the jungle
districts of India.
  JUNIPER.  Juniperus communis.
   Juniper Resin. A resinous substance
which exhudes from the juniperus com-
munis.  It was suppCsed to be identical
with sandarach.
  JUNIPERUM VINUM.  Wine im-
pregnated with juniper berries.
   JUNIP'ERUS.  Juniper. The ber-
 ries of juniperus communis.  Also, the
 name of a genus of plants.
   Juniperus Commu'nis. The juniper
 tree.
   Juniperus Lycia.  A plant which
 Avas supposed to afford the olibanum, or
 true frankincense.
   Juniperus Sabina.   The savin tree.
   Juniperus Virginiana.  Red cedar.
   JUPITER. Tin.
   JURIBALI.  A tree of Asia.
   JURISPRUDENCE, MEDICAL.
 Jurispi-udentia medicalis; from jus, ju-
 ris,  laAV,  and prudentia,  knowledge.
 Sometimes erroneously used as synony-
 mous with forensic medicine; but at
 present generally restricted to a knowl-
 edge of the laws which regulate medi-
 cal education and practice.
   JUS.  Animal broth.  Soup.
   JUSTPCIA.  The name of a genus
 of plants.
   Justicia Adhato'da.   A plant of
 Ceylon.
   Justicia Ecbo'lium.  Carim curini.
 A Malabar plant.
   Justicia Pectoralis.  A West India
 plant.
   JUVANS. Juvantia ; from juvo, to
 assist.  Means, medicinal or otherwise,
 Avhich contribute to the rehef or cure of
 a disease.
  JUVENES'CENT.    From juvenis,
 young.  Becoming young.
  JUXTA-POSITION.  From juxta,
near to, and  ponere, posilum, to place.
Placed near to, or in contiguity, as the
parts of a substance; apphcation to the
exterior;  accretion, a mode of increase
peculiar to minerals, which consists in
the successive application of new mole-
cules upon  those  that constitute the
primitive nucleus. 
KEE
425
KEY
K.
  KAATH.  Catechu.
  KiEMPFE'RIA.  The name of  a
genus of plants.
  Kjempferia Galanga.   The greater
galangal root.
  Kempferia Rotun'da. The officinal
zedoary, a Ceylonese plant.
  KAJEPUT.  Cajeput.
  KA'LI.  Potash.  The vegetable al-
kali.
  Kali Acetatum. Potassa? acetas.
  Kali Aeratum. Potassae carbonas.
  Kali Arsenicatum.  Potassae  arse-
nias.
  Kali Citratum.  Potassae citras.
  Kali Pr^eparatum.   Potassae sub-
carbonas.
  Kali Purum.  Potassae fusa.
  Kali Sulphuratum.  Sulphuretum
potassae.
  Kali Tartarizatum.  Potassae  tar-
tras.
  Kali Vitriolatum.   Potassae  sul-
phas.
  KA'LIUM.  Potassium.
  KAL'MIA.   The name of a genus
of shrubs.
  Kalmia Angustifo'lia.  Sheep lau-
rel.   DAvarf laurel.
  Kalmia Glauca. Swamp laurel.
  Kalmia Latifo'lia. Laurel.  Moun-
tain laurel. Broad-leafed laurel.  Calico-
bush.
  KAMPHUR.  Camphor.
  KA'OLIN.  The  Chinese  name for
porcelain clay.  It is disintegrated and
decomposed  feldspar.   See  Mineral
Teeth.
  KAREO.   See  Ripogonum Parvi-
florum.
  KASSANDER.  Convolvulus pan-
duratus, or wild potato vine.
  KAURI RESIN.  Cowdie gum.
  KEEP, SOLOMON. Solomon Keep,
late dentist, of Boston, Mass., was ad-
mitted to the degree of M. D. at Har-
vard  University in 1835, and  having
made himself  thoroughly  acquainted
with dental surgery, he, subsequently,
devoted himself to the cultivation and
practice of this department of his pro-
fession, in  Avhich, while health con-
tinued, his success was brilliant and full
of promise.  His high moral character,
his quick perception of the correct cu-
rative, or proper  remedial indications,
and the great accuracy and  neatness of
aU his operations, both for the preserva-
tion  of the  natural teeth, and  the re-
placement of these organs when lost, at
once gave him high rank in his profes-
sion, and endeared him to a large circle
of professional and social friends.  He
died on the  13th of December, 1848.
  KELP.  The impure mineral alkali.
  KEMME.   Dissertation on the His-
tory of the Teeth, PhysiologicaUy, Pa-
thologically and TherapeuticaUy con-
sidered, by.  Helmst, 1740.
  KENNEL-WORT.  Scrofularia no-
dosa.
  KER'MES.  An  insect  found  in
many parts of Asia and the south of
Europe.  Coccus ilicis.  They were, for
a long time, mistaken  for the seeds of
the tree on which they live, and hence
were called grains of kcrmes.
  Kermes Mineral.  Precipitated sul-
phuret of antimony.
  KETCHUP. A pickle prepared from
the tomato, walnut and mushroom.
  KEY  FORCEPS,  ELLIOT'S.—
Two  instruments  invented by Dr. W.
H. Elhot, of Montreal—one having the
beaks of forceps and the handle of a
key, for  the  extraction of teeth—the
other is designed for the extraction of
roots of teeth that  present but one side
above the alveolus.  This resembles a
pair of forceps—one beak serving as a
hook, Avhile the other is represented by
a movable fulcrum.
  Key, Baker &  Riley's  Improved.
An improvement,  made by Messrs. 
KEY
426
KIO
Baker & Riley, of Columbus, Ohio, on
the common key instrument, consisting
in having a mortice in the hook, and
controlling the hook by means  of  a
lever working in the mortice. The au-
thor has not seen  the instrument, but it
is recommended  by the inventors as
possessing  great  advantages  over the
ordinary key.
  Key of Garengeot. An instrument
invented by Garengeot in the early part
of the  eighteenth century for the ex-
traction of  teeth.  It is an improvement
on the ancient pelican.  It is composed
of a movable hook, attached transverse-
ly to a fulcrum or bolster,  situated at
the extremity of a steel-shaft.  To the
other extremity of this shaft, a handle
is fixed transversely. This instrument,
says Dr.   Arnott, "may be  regarded
in the  light of a wheel and axle; the
hand of the  operator  acting on  two
spokes of the wheel, to move it, while
the tooth  is  fixed to the axle by the
claw, and  is drawn out as  the  axle
turns.   The gums  and  alveolar pro-
cess of the jaw, form the  support on
which the axle rolls."   It also  forms
a lever  of  the first kind, as the  tooth
which is the resistance is situated be-
tween  the fulcrum  and the point of
the hook, Avhile the hand grasping the
handle is the power.
   But since the time of Garengeot, the
key has underwent a number of im-
provements.   In  fact, almost  every
dentist has felt the necessity of modify-
ing the instrument, in  order to obviate
the objections to which it is  liable, but
notwithstanding  the ingenuity which
has been displayed  in the various im-
provements which have  been made on
it, they stiU exist.  "The first material
improvement,"  says Mr. Fox,  "was
made  by Mr.  Spence: it consisted in
adding a projecting part  at the end  of
the bolster,  and  through  which the
screw is passed.   This addition was
for the purpose of fixing a claw, in an
advanced position,  beyond the bolster,
which was found extremely useful  in
the
tiae.
extraction of the  dentes  sapien-
  The round fulcrum and raised shaft
are improvements made by Mr. Savig-
ny, and  more recently, Duval, added
the movable bolster,  but none of the
above improvements have contributed
very materially to enhance the value of
the instrument, except that of the round
fulcrum,  which is certainly better than
any that had been  previously, or has
since been employed.
  The key,  however, notwithstanding
all the improvements which it  has un-
derwent,  is  rapidly  falling into disuse,
and being superseded by forceps.
  KIASTER.   Chmster.  A bandage
having the form of the letter X, used by
the ancients in fracture of the  patella.
  KID'NEY.  The  organ  which se-
cretes the urine.   There are two, situ-
ated in the upper and back part of the
abdomen in the lumbar region.
  Kidney, Inflammation of.  Ne-
phritis.
  KI'ESTEIN.   A peculiar substance
which forms on the urine of pregnant
females after the  third month of gesta-
tion.
  KILOGRAMME.   From **«»,  a
thousand, and ypauua, a gramme.  The
weight of one thousand  grammes, or
two pounds, eight ounces, one drachm,
and twenty-four  grains, troy.
  KILOLITRE. From *a««, a thou-
sand,  and Xitpa,  a  litre.  A  measure
containing one thousand litres.
  KINA KINA.  Cinchona.
  KING'S  EVIL.   Scrofula.
  KINIC ACID. Acidum kinicum. Cin-
chonic acid.
  KINKFNA.  Cinchona.
  KI'NO.  A gum-resin, obtained from
different  African and Indian  plants, of
a  reddish brown or blackish color, of
a bitterish taste, but without odor, and
highly astringent.
  KI'OTOME.  Kiotomus; from xiuv,
a pillar, and tepveiv, to cut.  An instru-
ment  invented by Dessault, for  dividing
pseudo-membranous bands in  the rec- 
KNI
427
KUC
turn and bladder, and afterwards  em-
ployed for the removal of the tonsils.
  KIRCHWASSER.   Cherry water.
A liquor distilled from cherries.
  KLOPEMA'NIA.  Kleptomania;—
from xXertta, I steal, and uavta, mania.
Monomania, with an uncontrollable de-
sire to steal.
  KNAPP, DAVID  P.   David P.
Knapp,late surgeon dentist of Danbury,
Connecticut, was  born  August  13th,
1806.  At  an early age he acquired a
thirst for medical knowledge, and espe-
cially  medical botany,  which became
his favorite study.    About the year
1830, he commenced the study of den-
tal surgery under the tuition of the late
Granville Meritt, and  finished  his pu-
pilage  under the instruction of Dr. G.
W. Grant.
  Uniting in his person much suavity
of manner, and  a gentlemanly deport-
ment, he soon succeeded in gaining the
confidence of the public, which he en-
joyed to the day of his  death. His early
medical  acquirements,  natural  inge-
nuity and  mechanical tact, all greatly
contributed  to the  skill  which he soon
acquired as a practitioner of dental sur-
gery.  In his native town, and by aU
who knew him, his memory is warmly
cherished.   He died from hemorrhage
of the lungs, August the 22d, 1840, in
the 34th year of his age.
  KNEE.  The  articulation of the fe-
mur Aviththe tibia.
  Knee, Housemaids.  Inflammation
and swelling of the knee, occasioned by
kneeling; a form of capsular rheuma-
tism.
  Knee Pan.  The patella.
  Knee-Scab. The crusta genu equina.
  KNIFE.  A cutting instrument em-
ployed in Surgery,  usually larger than
the bistoury and scalpel.
  Knife, Amputating. A large straight
knife  used for the division of the soft
parts in the amputation of a limb.
  Knife, Cat'ara ct.  A knife used for
making the section of the  transparent
cornea, in  the  operation for cataract.
Various knives have been invented for
this purpose.
  Knife, Cheselden's.  A knife with
a concave edge and convex back em-
ployed by Cheseldon in the operation of
lithotomy.
  Knife, Double-edged.  A  catling.
A straight double-edged knife.
  KNOT,  SURGEON'S.  A  double
knot made by passing the ends of the
ligature twice through the same noose.
  Knot Grass.  Polygonum aviculare.
  Knot Root.  Collinsoiiia canadensis.
  KOA-KOA.  A New Zealand tree.
  KOECKER, LEONARD.  Princi-
ples of Dental Surgery, by.   London,
1822.  This work Avas republished in
the Library part of the American Jour-
nal of Dental Science, and on dental
pathology and therapeutics, is one  of
the best treatises that has ever issued
from the Enghsh press.  Dr. Koecker
is also author of  an Essay on  the Dis-
eases of the Jaws,  published, London,
1834—and an Essay on Artificial Teeth,
Obturators  and  Palates,  published,
London, 1832.—Besides the above^ Dr.
K.  has contributed several valuable  pa-
pers  to the literature of dental surgery,
one of which is entitled, Case of Ex-
traordinary Fungous Disease  of  the
Gums and Sockets  of the Teeth; its
Constitutional  Effects,  and   Surgical
Treatment.
  KOENEN. Dissertation on the Prin-
cipal Diseases of the Teeth, by.  Franck,
1793.
  KORE.  Kop^. Core.   The pupil of
the eye.
  KRAME'RIA.  Rhatania.
  KRANSE, R. W.   On Odontalgia.
Jense, 1780.
  KREASOTE. Creasote.
  KRAUTERMANN, VAL. Author
of an  Essay  on the  Treatment of the
Eyes and Teeth, published, Arnstadt,
1732.
  KREBEL, J. L. COTT1S.  Inaugu-
ral  Dissertation upon Difficult Denti-
tion, by. Leipsic, 18C0.
  KUCHLER.  Dissertation on Fistu- 
LAC              428                LAC
lous Ulcers of the Teeth, by.  Leipsic,
1733.
  KULENKAMP.    Dissertation  on
Difficult Dentition in Infants, by. Har-
den) w, 1788.
  LABDANUM.   A  gum-resinous
substance, of a  blackish-green  color,
bitter taste, and agreeable odor.
  LABIAL.  Labialis.  Belonging to
the lips.
  Labial  Arteries.   The  coronary
arteries of the lips.
  Labial  Glands.   The  muciparous
follicles on the  inner surfaces of the
lips beneath the mucous membrane.
  LABIALIS.   The orbicularis oris.
  LABIATiE.  A natural family of
plants Avhose corolla is divided into lips,
or labiated.
  LABIATE.  Labiatus.  Having lips.
  LA'BIUM.  The lip.
  Labium Leporinum.  Hare-lip.
  Labium Pudendi. The sides of the ori-
fice of the vagina, exterior  to nymphae.
  LABOR.  Parturition.
  LAB'ORATORY.   Laboratorium;
from laborare, to work.   A room or
place for performing chemical and phar-
maceutical operations.
  Laboratory, Dental.   See  Dental
Laboratory.
  LA BRUM.   The extremities of the
lip.  Also the upper lip of  insects.
  LAB'YRINTH.  Labyrinthus.  In
Anatomy, an assemblage of parts, con-
sisting of several  cavities, which consti-
tute the internal ear.
  LAC. Milk.  Also, the name of a
peculiar substance  deposited  by an in-
sect on different species of trees.
   Lac Ammoniaci.  Mistura ammoni-
aci.
  Lac Amygdala. Emulsio amygdalae.
  KYLLO'SIS.  From xvXXos, crooked.
Club-feet.
  KYNANCHE.  Cynanche.
  KYST.  Cyst.
  KYSTHOS.  The vagina.
  Lac Asafo2tidje.  Mistura asafcetida.
  Lac Avis.  Albumen ovi.
  Lac Guaiaci.  Mistura guaiaci.
  Lac Gum.  Lacca.
  Lac Lunje.  Marga Candida.
  Lac Seed.  Lacca.
  Lac Maris.   Sperm;  semen.
  Lac Shell.   Lacca.
  Lac Stick.  Lacca.
  Lac Sulphuris.  Sulphur  prsecipi-
tatum.
  Lac Terrje.   Magnesia carbonas.
  Lac Virginis.  Virgin's milk.
  LACCA.  See Coccus Lacca.
  LACERATED.   Torn.
  LACERATION. Laceratio. Lacera-
ted;  also, the act of being lacerated or
torn.
  LACH'RYMA.   A tear.
  LACH'RYMAL. Lachrymalis; from
lachryma, a tear.  Belonging, or pertain-
ing to, tears.
  Lachrymal  Apparatus.    The or-
gans  which secrete and  conduct  the
tears, as the lachrymal gland, the punc-
ta lachrymalia and ducts, &c.
  Lachrymal  Artery.   A branch of
the opthalmic artery distributed to  the
lachrymal gland.
  Lachrymal  Bone.  The os unguis.
  Lachrymal  Canal.  A canal in the
outer wall of the nasal fossae, lined by
a continuation of mucous membrane
from the lachrymal sac, and  serving to
convey the tears into the nasal fossa;.
  Lachrymal Duct. The excretory
duct of the lachrymal gland.
  Lachrymal  Fossa.  A depression at
L. 
LAC
429
LAF
 the upper part of the orbit which serves
 to lodge the lachrymal gland.
   Lachrymal  Gland.  A glomerate
 gland situated in the lachrymal fossa.
   Lachrymal Groove.  A bony chan-
 nel situated at the anterior  part of the
 orbit, and serving as a lodgement for
 the lachrymal sac.
   Lachrymal  Nerve.  A branch of
 the opthalmic nerve distributed to the
 lachrymal gland and upper eyelid.
   Lachrymal  Puncta.    Two smaU
 orifices situated just within the cihary
 margins of the eyelids, and  continuous
 with the lachrymal ducts.
   LACHRYMATIO.   Involuntary
 discharge of tears.  Also, profuse weep-
 ing.
   LACINIATED.  Laciniatus.  Jag-
 ged-, fringed.
   LAC'MUS. Litmus.
   LACONTCUM.  A stove or sAveat-
 ing room.
   LACTATE.  A salt formed by the
 union of lactic  acid with  a salifiable
 base.
   LACTATION. From lacteo, I suckle,
 I give milk.  The suckling of a young
 child or animal.
   LACTEAL.   Lacteus;  from  lac,
 milk.  A chyliferous vessel.
   LACTEUS.  Milky;  appertaining
 to mtik.
   LACTIC.   Lacteus.
   Lactic  Acid.  The acid of sour milk.
   LACTIF'EROUS.   From lac, milk,
 and fero, I carry.  That which conveys
 mUk, as the lactiferous vessels of the
 mamma.
   Lactiferous Swelling.  Tumefac-
 tion of the breast, from obstruction of
 one or more of the lactiferous vessels.
  LACTIF'UGA.   Medicines which
 dry up the secretion of milk.
  LACTIN.   Sugar of milk.
  LACTU'CA.  From be,  mtik, caU-
ed so from its milky juice.  Lettuce.
Garden lettuce*. Also, the name of a
genus of plants.
  Lactuca Elongata. American wild
lettuce.                             I
    Lactuca Graveolens.  See Lactu-
  ca Virosa.
    Lactuca Sativa.  Garden lettuce.
    Lactuca Scari'ola.  Lactuca  syl-
  vestris.
    Lactuca Virosa.  Lactuca  graveo-
  lens.  The  strong scented lettuce.
    LACTUCA'RIUM.  Lactuca virosa.
  Also, the inspissated juice of lactuca sa-
  tiva.
    LACU'NA.  From lacus, a channel.
  The mouth of the excretory duct of a
  mucous gland.
    LACUNOSUS.  Dotted; pitted.
   LACUS  LACHRYMALIS.   The
 lachrymal sac.
   Lacus Lachryma'rum.  The small
 space in the inner angle of the  eye to-
 wards which the tears flow.
   LADANUM.  Labdanum.
   LADIES' MANTLE.   Alchemilla
 arvensis.
   Ladies' Slipper, Yellow.   Cypri-
 pedium luteum.
   Ladies' Smock.  Cardamine praten-
 sis.
   LADY-BIRD. Lady-bug.  Coccin-
 ella septem-punctata.  This insect was
 at one time  supposed, in Germany, to
 possess powerful antiodontalgic virtues;
 it is highly recommended for this pur-
 pose, by Dr. Frederick Hirsch, dentist to
 several German courts.  His method of
 applying  them, consists in crushing
 them between the thumb and forefinger,
 rubbing them  until  a warmth is felt,
 then with the finger  and thumb;  when
 thus prepared,  rubbing the  tooth and
 gum around it.
  LiETIFICANTIA.  From laztifico,
 I make glad. Medicines formerly em-
 ployed as cordials for dispeUing melan-
 choly.
  LAFORGUE.  Seventeen  articles
 relating to the diseases of the teeth, by.
 Paris, year VIII.—Theory and Practice
 of the  Art of the  Dentist, by.  Paris,
 1802 and 1810.—Laforgue is also the
author of a work, on the Semiology of
the  Mouth, published, Paris, 1806, and
of a Dissertation  on First Dentition. 
LAM
430
LAP
 The above works contain much useful
 and valuable information; the one on
 the semiology of the mouth is particu-
 larly interesting.
   LAGETTA LINTEARIA.   The
 Jamaica lace-bark tree.
   LAGNE'SIS.  From Xayvrjs, lustful.
 Nymphomania, and satyriasis.
   LAGOCHEPLUS.  Hare-lip.
   LAGOPHTHAL'MIA. From Xayas,
 a  hare, and o^,axuos,  an eye.   The
 hare's eye.  An affection of the upper
 eyehd, which prevents it from covering
 the globe of the eye during sleep.
   LAGOPO'DIUM.  Plantago media.
   LAGOSTOMA.   Hare-lip.
   LAKEWEED.  Polygonum hydro-
 piper.
   LALANDE'S TOOTH POWDER.
 Take pumice-stone, red coral, a a  § i;
 sandal citrin,  § ss;  cream  of tartar,
 3 iiss;  cinnamon,  cloves,  a a  § i;
 myrtle, xviii  grains;  musk, benzoic
 acid, each six grains. Mix and pulver-
 ize to a fine powder.
   Lalande's Dentifrice  Elixir.—
 J$.—Rad. pyrethrium, § i, 3 ij j cloves,
 3 ss; flowers of lavender, § ij; coch-
 ineal, 3 ij ; rock alum, 3 ij ; brandy of
 22 degrees, ftiv, and §iv; mix.
  LAMBDOPDAL  SUTURE.   Su-
 tura hmbdoidalis.  The suture formed
 by the parietal bones and  the  occipital
 is so called, from its  resemblance to the
 Greek  letter A.  The occipito-parietal
 suture.
  LAMEL'LA. Diminutive of bmina.
 A  thin plate.
  LAMTNA.  From eXaa, to  beat off.
A  layer or plate, as a lamina, or flatten-
ed portion  of bone.
  Lamina Cribrosa. That portion of the
sclerotic coat of the eye through which
the branches of the opthalmic nerve and
artery pass.
  Lamina  Spiralis.   The spiral plate
of bone which winds round the modio-
lus of the cochlea.
  LAMINATED. LameUar;  compos-
ed of laminae.
  LA'MIUM ALBUM.  Dead nettle.
   LAMP-BLACK.  The soot obtain-
 ed from the imperfect combustion of
 resin of turpentine.
   LAMP FOR SOLDERING.  The
 lamp most commonly employed for this
 purpose, consists of a tin or copper vessel
 about four inches  in  diameter and five
 or six in length, with an opening in the
 top large enough  to receive the oU or
 alcohol, according as  the one  or  the
 other is used, closed with a cork or cap,
 with a spout at the side,  three or  four
 inches long,  and about three-fourths of
 an inch in diameter, fiUed with a cotton
 wick.  See  Blow-pipe, Parmly's  self-
 acting. Also, Blow-pipe, Elhot's com-
 pound self-acting.
  LA'NA.  Wool.   A  hairy pubes-
 cence like wool.
  Lana Philosophorum.   Oxyd of
 zinc.
  LANA'TUS.  WooUy.
  LANCEOLATE.   Lanceolatus.—
 Lance shaped; spear shaped.
  LANCET.  Lancetta.  A lancet.  A
 surgical instrument  used for  bleeding
 and other purposes.
  Lancet, Gum.  See Gum Lancet.
  LAN'CINATING. Lancinans; from
 lancinare,  to strike or thrust through.
 A sharp, darting  pain, similar to that
 which would be produced by thrusting
 a lance into the part.
  LAN'GUOR.   Depression, or debil-
 ity ; a species of atony.
  LANU'GO.  Soft wool; down.
  LAPARA.  The flank.
  LAPAROCE'LE.  Fromxartapa, the
 lumbar region, and xyX?;,  a tumor.   A
 rupture through the side of the abdomen.
 Lumbar hernia.
  LAPARO-ENTEROT'OMY.   La-
paro enterotomia, from Xartapa, the lum-
 bar region, the abdomen, etepov, intes-
 testine, and tourj, incision. The opera-
 tion of opening the abdomen and intes-
 tinal canal.
  LAPIS.   A stone; also, a calculus.
  Lapis Bezoar.   Bezoar.
  Lapis Ckruleus.  Lapis lazuli.
  Lapis Calaminaris.  Calamine. 
LAR              431               LAR
   Lapis Calcareus. Carbonate of lime.
   Lapis Dentium.  Tartar of the teeth;
 salivary calculus.
   Lapis Haematites.   Haematites.
   Lapis Hibernicus.  Irish slate.
   Lapis Hystricis. Bezoar hystricis.
   Lapis Infernalis. Potassa fusa.
   Lapis La'zuli.   Azure stone.
   Lapis Lydius.  Lydian stone.
   Lapis Philosophorum.  The phtio-
 sopher's stone.
   Lapis Simle. Bezoar simiae.
   Lapis Specularis. Selenite.
   Lapis Syderitis.  The magnet.
   LAP'PA.  Arctium lappa.
   LAPPULA HEPATICA.  Agrimo-
 ny.
   LAPSA'NA.  The name of a genus
 of plants.
   Lapsana Communis.   Dock-cresses.
 Nipple wort.
   LA'QJJEUS GUTTURIS.  Inflam-
 mation of the tonsils with a sense of
 suffocation.
   LARCH.  Pinus larix.
   LARD.  Adeps sutila.
   L ARDA'CEOUS.  Of the nature or
 consistence of lard.  Applied to morbid
 alterations in textures of parts which
 resemble, or are of the consistence of,
 lard.
   LARIX.    The  larch tree;  pinus
 larix.
   LARKSPUR, BRANCHING. Del-
 phinium consohda.
   LARVA.  A mask.  Also, a meta-
 bolian insect in its first stage after extru-
 sion from the egg, and certain reptiles
 which undergo a similar change, when
 at a corresponding  state of existence.
   LARVALIS.   Belonging,  or per-
 taining to, larva.
   LARYNGEAL.  Laryngeus.  Be-
 longing to the larynx.
   Laryngeal Arteries. The branches
 of the thyroid arteries distributed to the
 larynx.
  Laryngeal Nerves.  These are two
in number, a superior and inferior.  The
former is given off from the pneumogas-
tric, in the upper part of the neck, and
 the latter from the pneumogastrk, with-
 in the thorax.
   LARYNGISMUS.  A genus of dis-
 ease, including spasmodic croup.
   LARYNGITIS.   Inflammation of
 the larynx.
   LARYNGOG'RAPHY.  Laryngo-
 graphia; from jiapuyl-, the  larynx, and
 ypag^, a description.   A  description of
 the larynx.
   LARYNGOL'OGY.  From Jiapvyt,
 the larynx, and  Xoyos,  a treatise.  A
 treatise on the larynx.
   LARYNGOPH'ONY. Laryngopho-
 nia; from  Tiapvyi,  the  larynx,  and
 <j>ww7, the voice.  The sound of the voice
 in health as heard through  the  stetha-
 scope when placed over the larynx.
   LARYNGOT'OMY. Laryngotomia ;
 from Tiapuyi, the larynx,  and teuveiv, to
 cut. Bronchotomy. Tracheotomy. An
 operation which consists in  opening the
 larynx for the removal of a foreign body
 or an obstruction of the glottis.
   LARYNGO-TRACHEITIS.  Cy-
 nanche trachealis.
   LARYNX. A short tube of an hour-
 glass shape, situated  at the  forepart of
 the neck between the base of the tongue
 and trachea.  It is composed of  cartila-
 ges, ligaments, muscles, nerves, blood-
 vessels,  and mucous membrane, and
 constitutes the apparatus of voice, in the
 higher  vertebrata.   The carttiages of
 the larynx are, the thyroid,  the crycoid,
 two arytenoid, and the epiglottis.
   The ligaments of the larynx are nu-
 merous and  serve as bonds of union to
 the cartilages.
   The  muscles are  the  cryco-thyroid,
 the crico-arytenoideus  posticus, the crico-
 arytenoideus  lateralis, the thyro-q/ytenoi-
 deus, and the arytenoideus.
   The opening into the larynx is trian-
 gular, and bounded in front  by the epi-
 glottis, behind by the artenoideus mus-
 cle, and on each side by a fold of mu-
 cous membrane, extending from the side
 of the epiglottis to the point  of the ary-
tenoid cartilage.  The larynx is divided
into  two  parts.   The  upper portion 
LAT
432
LAU
 is broad above and narrow below ;  the
 lower portion  is narrow above  and
 broad below.
   The larynx is lined by mucous mem-
 brane, Avhich forms in its ventricles  a
 caecal pouch, called the sacculus laryn-
 gis.
   The larynx is  supplied with arteries
 from the superior and  inferior thyroid,
 and the nerves which go to it are de-
 rived from the superior laryngeal and
 recurrent laryngeal,  branches of the
 pneumogastric.
  LASERPITTUM.  The name  of  a
 genus of plants.
  Laserpitium Chiron'ium.  Hercu-
 les' all-heal.  Wound-wort.
  Laserpitium Latifo'lium.  White
 gentian.
  Laserpitium Siler.   Heart-wort.
  LAS'SITUDE.  Lassitudo.  Lan-
 guor ; weariness; debUity.
  LATENT. Latens; from latere, to
 lie hid, lying  hid, concealed.   Hidden;
 not appreciable to the touch, as latent
 heat, btent period, &c.
  Latent Period.  The period before
 a disease, Avhich is lurking in the  sys-
 tem, manifests itself by any morbid phe-
 nomena.
  LATERAL  OPERATION.  The
 lateral division of the prostrate gland
 and neck of the bladder in the operation
 of lithotomy.
  LATERITIOUS.  Lateritius; from
 later, a brick.   A name  applied to a
 sediment resembling brick-dust, which
 is sometimes deposited in the urine.
  LATEX.   In Botany, the proper
 or hidden juice of a plant, which circu-
lates in anastomosing vessels, caUed the
laticiferous tissue, or cinenchyma.
  LATIB'ULUM. From lateo, I  lie
hid.   The hidden matter  of infectious
 diseases.
  LAT'ICA.  A quotidion remittent
 with long paroxysms.
  LATIS'SIMUS COLLI. The pla-
 tysma myoides.
  Latissmus  Dorsi.   A  broad,  flat
 muscle covering the lower part of the
 back and loins.  It arises from the spi-
 nous process of the seven inferior dorsal
 vertebrae, from all  the lumbar and sac-
 ral spinous  processes, a portion of the
 crest of  the Uium, and the three lower
 ribs, and ascending, is inserted in the
 bicipital groove of the os humeri.
   LATTICE-WORK.   Cancelli.
   LATUS.  Broad.
   Latus Ani.  The levator ani.
   LAUBMEYER.    Dissertation on
 the Teeth, by.  Regiom, 1745.
   LAUDANUM. Thought to be from
 bus, praise, from its valuable properties.
 Tincture of opium.
   Laudanum Abbatis Rousseau.  Ab-
 be Rousseau's drops.  Wine of opium.
   Laudanum Liq.uidum Sydenhami.—
 Wine of opium.   Sydenham's lauda-
 num.
   Laudanum  Opia'tum.    Extract of
 opium.
  LAUGH,  SARDONIC.   Canine
 laugh. Risus sardonicus.
  LAURA'CE^E.   The  cinnamon
 tribe of dicotyledonous plants.
  LAUREL.   See Laurus.
  Laurel,  Broad-Leaved.  Kalmia
 btifolia.  Mountain laurel.
  Laurel, Cherry.  Prunus lauroce-
 rasus. Poison laurel.
  Laurel, Spurge.  Daphne laureola.
  Laurel Water.  The distilled water
 of the prunus laurocerasus.
  Laurel, White.  Magnolia glauca.
  LAURE'OLA.  Daphne laureola.
  LAURO-CERASUS.  Prunus lau-
 rocerasus.
  LAU'RUS.  The  laurus nobilis.—
Also, the name of a genus of plants.
  Laurus Camphora.  The camphora
officinarium.
  Laurus Cassia.    The  wild cinna-
mon tree.
  Laurus  Cinnamomum.   Cinnamon
zeylanicum, the tree from which  the
cinnamon bark is obtained.
  Laurus Nobilis. The sweet bay tree.
  Laurus Persia.   The  tree which
produces the avigato pear.
  Laurus Pichu'eim.   One of  the 
LAX
433
LEF
 plants which produces the pichurim
 bean.
   Laurus Sas'safras.  The sassafras-
 tree.
   LAUTIS'SIMA   VINA.    Wines
 strongly impregnated with myrrh.
   LAVATION.  Washing or spong-
 ing the body.
   LAVENDER.  A small shrub  of
 two or three feet in  height, the  flowers
 of which have a strong  fragrant odor,
 and an  aromatic,  pungent, bitterish
 taste.
   LAVEN'DULA.  Lavender.   Also,
 the name of a genus of plants.
   Lavendula Spica.   The common
 lavender.
   Lavendula St^chas. French lav-
 ender.
   LA'VER.  The  brook lime.   Also,
 a sea-weed, ulva lactuca.
   LAVIGNA.  Fr.  Observations on
 Odontalgia and the Cause of Caries, by.
 Turin, 1813.
   LAVIPE'DIUM.   From  too  to
 wash, and pes, the foot.  A foot bath.
   LAWRENCE'S      PORTABLE
 BLOW-PIPE.  An apparatus consist-
 ing of a double beUows, with a treadle
 for the foot fixed horizontaUy  over it,
 with a hinge attached to one end, while
 the  other is rendered stationary by a
 small hasp and staple.  The bellows is
 made to rise and fall by the application
 of the foot to the treadle, and by means
 of two spiral brass  springs attached  to
 the machine. The air escapes through
 a long flexible tube,  with a brass jet at-
 tachment, and by  means of which the
 flame may be managed  with great fa-
 cility.
  LAWSONIA INERMIS.  Alcanna,
 an Indian and African plant.
  LAX.   A diarrhoea.
  LAXATIVE.     Laxativus;  from
laxare, to loosen.   A mild purgative.
  LAXATOR TYM'PANI. Laxator
auris internus, a muscle of the internal
ear.
  Laxator Tympani Minor.  A very
smaU muscle extending from the upper
 part of the meatus auditorius externus
 to the handle of the malleus.
   LAXITY.    Laxitas.  Atony.   A
 relaxed condition.
   LAZARETTO.   From lazzero,  a
 leper.   A solitary  building in most
 large seaports, used for the disinfection
 of men and goods.
   LEAD.  Plumbum.  A metal of a
 bluish-gray color, very soft, flexible,
 and inelastic, slightly maleable and duc-
 tile, but possessed of little tenacity.
   Lead, Black.  Plumbago.
   Lead, Red.  See Minium.
   Lead, White.  Plumbi subcarbonas.
   LEADWORT. Plumbago europaea.
   LEAF.   Folium.
   LEAFSTALK.  The petiole.
   LEANNESS.   Emaciation.
   LEAPING AGUE.  A disease said
 to be peculiar  to Scotland, and charac-
 terized by preternatural activity of both
 mind and body.
   LEATHER. Tanno-gelatine.  The
 tanned skins of animals.
   Leather-Wood.   Dirca palustris.
   LECLUSE.  Useful  Treatise to the
 public for taking care of the Teeth, by.
 Nancy, 1750.—Essential directions for
 Preventing and Preserving  the Teeth
 from Decay,  Paris,  1775.—Lecluse is
 also author of a  work entitled New
 Elements of Odontologia, and the new
 Abridged Practice of the Dentist, with
 many  observations,  published,  Paris,
 1764 and 1782.
   LECTUA'LIS.  Relating to a bed.
 Also, a long chronic disease.
   LEDUM.  The name of a genus of
 plants.
   Ledum Latifo'lium.  Labrador tea.
   Ledum Palus'tre.  Marsh tea.
   LEE, J.  Author of a paper on the
 Extraction of Teeth, and of the report
 of a case  of Dental  Neuralgia;  both
 published in the American Journal of
 Dental Science, volume eight.
  LEECH.  Hirudo.
  LEEK.   Allium porrum.
  LEFOULON, J.  A New Treatise
on the  Theory  and Practice of Dental 
LEM
434
LEO
Surgery,by. Paris, 1841. Thisworkhas
been translated, by professor T. E. Bond,
into English and published in the Library
part of the fifth volume of the Ameri-
can Journal of Dental Science.
  Lefoulon's Powder for the Teeth.
Take cochlearia, (scurvy grass,)  horse-
radish, guaiacum, Peruvian bark, mint,
pellitory, calamus, rhatany-root, reduce
to  an  impalpable  powder  and pass
through the finest hair sieve.
  Lefoulon's Elixir for the Mouth.
Take, tincture of vaniUa, 15 grammes;
tincture pellitory, 128 ;  spirit of mint,
32; spirit of rosemary, 32; spirit of rose,
64; mingle them together.
  LEG.  Crus.   The  portion of  the
lower extremity extending from the knee
to the foot.
  Leg, Swelled.  Phlegmasia dolens.
  LEGNA.  From  a,Ey»/oj>, a fringed
edge.   The orifice of  the pudendum
muliebre.
  LEGROS.   The  Preserver of  the
Teeth, by.  Paris, 1812.
  LEGU'MEN.  From lego, I gather.
All kinds of pulse, as peas, beans, &.c,
are thus termed, because they are gath-"
ered by the hand.
  LEGU'MINE.  Vegetable casein.
  LEGUMINO'SjE.  From  legumen,
a legume.  A family of dicotyledonous
polypetalous plants,  with perigynous
stamens;  bearing leguminous fruit.
  LEGU'MINOUS.   Pertaining to a
legume; applied to plants which have
a legume for a pericarp.
  LEICHNER, RICHARD. Author
of a Dissertation on the Pain  of  the
Teeth, pubhshed, Erfort, 1678.
  LEIPH^E'MA.  Anaemia.
  LEIPYR'IAS.  From^trtw,Iwant,
and nvp, fire, or heat.  A mahgnant fe-
ver, with great internal heat and cold-
ness of the extremities.
  LEMAIRE,  JOSEPH.  The  La-
dies' Dentist, by.  Paris, 1812,1818.—
Two Observations on the Anatomy and
Physiology of the Teeth, by. Paris, 1816.
—Treatise upon the Teeth, Physiology,
Pathology and  Operations, by.  Paris,
1822 and 1824.  Lemaire is also author
of a French translation of Fox's work
on the teeth.
  LEMAITRE.  Author of a Report
made to the Society of Inventions and
Discoveries, on Perfect Sets of Teeth.
Paris, 1784.
  LEMON.  Citrus medica.
  Lemon Acid.   Citric acid.
  LEMONADE.  Lemon juice dilu-
ted with water  and  sweetened with
sugar.
  LEMONIER.  Dissertation on the
Diseases of the Teeth,  by.  1753 and
1783.
  LENITIVE.  Lenitivus; fromknis,
gentle.  Assuaging medicines, or medi-
cines which operate mildly.
  LENOS.  Torcular herophilu
  LENS.  The lentil;  ervum lens.
Also, a piece of glass or other transpar-
ent substance, so shaped as to be capa-
ble of converging or diverging  the rays
of light.
  Lens, Crystalline.   The crytaUine
lens of the eye.
  LENTIC'ULA. Diminutive of lens,
a lentil.   A freckle; an ephelis. Also,
a  surgical  instrument  for removing
sharp points of bone  from the edge of
a perforation, made Avith  a trephine in
the cranium.
   Lenticula Marina.  Sea lentil.
   LENTICULAR.    Lenticubris.—
Shaped like a lens.
   Lenticular Cataract.  A cataract
of the lens.
   Lenticular Ganglion.   The op-
thalmic ganglion.
   Lenticular Papill* .  The papillae
on the posterior part of the tongue.
   LENTIFORM. Lenticular.
   LENTI'GO.  A freckle; ephelis.
   LENTIL.  Ervum lens.
   Lentil, Sea.   Fucus natans.
   LENTIN, LEBER  BENJAMIN.
On the Effects of the Electric Shock in
Tooth-ache, by.   1756.
   LENTOR.  From lentus, clammy.
Viscidity of any fluid.
   LEONTI'ASIS.  Elephantiasis. 
LER              435        •      LEV
   LEONTODON.  The name of a
 genus of plants.
   LeontodonTarax'acum.  The dan-
 delion.
   LEONURUS.  The name of a ge-
 nus of plants.
   Leonurus Cardi'aca.  The mother-
 wort.
   LEOPARD'S-BANE.  Arnica mon-
 tana.
   LEPID'IUM.  The name of a genus
 of plants.
   Lepidium Iberis.  Sciatica cresses.
   Lepidium Sati'vum.  Dittander.
   LEPIDOPTERA.  From  uttis, a
 scale, and rttepov, a wing.  An order of
 insects which have scaly wings.
   LEPIDOSARCO'MA From^rt^a
 scale, and aapxaua, a fleshy tumor.  A
 fleshy tumor, covered with scales.
   LEPIDO'SIS.  Scaly-skin.  Scaly
 diseases.
   LEPPDOTE.  Covered with  scales.
   LEPORI'NUM LABIUM.  Hare-
 lip.
   Leporinum  Rostrum.  Hare-lip.
   LEPORI'NUS OCULUS.  Lagoph-
 thalmia.
   LEP'RA.  From xertpos, scaly. The
 leprosy.  A term applied to various
 diseases.
   Lepra  Arabum.   Tubercular ele-
 phantiasis.
   Lepra Judaica. Leprosy of Jews.
   Lepra Mercuriale.  Eczema mer-
 curiale.
   Lepra Nigricans.  A disease differ-
 ing but little from lepra vulgaris.
   Lepra Vulgaris.  A disease char-
 acterised  by  red shining elevations
 upon the  skin, which continue to en-
large until they attain the size of  a dol-
lar, covered with  a  prominent  scaly
crust.
  LEPRIASIS. Leprosy.
  LEPROSY. Lepra.
  LEPROUS.  Affected with leprosy
  LEPTYS'MUS. Emaciation.
  LE'PUS.  A hare.
  LERE'MA.  Dotage.
Keeping and Preserving the Health of
ChUdren, particularly during the Dan-
gerous Period of Dentition, &c,  by.
Vienna, 1786.
  LEROY, (DE  LA  FAUDIGU-
ERE.)  Method of Preventing and
Curing the Diseases of the Teeth and
Gums, by.  Paris, 1766.
  LE'SION.  From lozsus, hurt,  in-
jured.  An  injury.  Any alteration in
the structure, or functions, of an organ.
  LETHAL.  Lethalis.  Mortal. Per-
taining to death.
  LETHAR'GIC.
taining to lethargy.
  LETHARGY.
Xrfiri, forgetfulness.
                  Lethargicus.  Per-

                  Lethargus;  from
                  Excessive drowsi-
ness; a constant sleep from which it is
almost impossible to arouse the indi-
vidual.
  LETHEON. The inhalation of ether
or chloroform.
  LETHUM.
  LETTUCE
               Death.
               Lactuca.
   LEUCE.  From tauxos, white.   A
 variety of leprosy.
   LEU'CINE. A white substance re-
 sulting from the  action of potash on
 proteine.
   LEUCO'MA.  From Xevxos, white.
 A white speck caused by the heahng of
 a wound in the cornea.
   LEUCOPATHTA.   The condition
 of an albino.
  LEUCOPHLEGMA'SIA. Fromxei;-
 xos, white, and tyXeyua, phlegm. A ten-
 dency to dropsy, characterized by pale-
 ness of the  skin, and a  flabby state of
 the sohds, resulting from a redundancy
 of serum in the blood.
  LEUCOPHLEGMAT'IC.  Having
 a tendency to, or affected with, leuco-
 phlegmasia.
  LEUCOPY'RIA. Hectic fever.
  LEUCORRHCEA.   From  Xevxos,
 white,  and  ps&>, I flow.   Fluor albus.
 The  discharge of  a whitish   mucus
 from the vagina, arising from debility.
  LEVATOR.  From levo, to lift up.
Apphed to muscles which lift the parts
LEROY,  ALPHONSE. Means of I to which they are attached. 
LEV
43G
LIC
  Leaator Anguli Oris.  A muscle
Avhich arises from the  canine fossa of
the superior maxiUary bone, beloAV the
infra orbitar foramen, and inserted into
the angle of the mouth.
  Levator Ani.  A muscle of the rec-
tum.
  Levator Ani Parvus.  The  trans-
versus perinei muscle.
  Levator Coccygis.  The coccygeus
muscle.
  Levator Labii Inferioris.  A mus-
cle of the lower lip.  It arises from the
alveolar processes of the incisor teeth of
the lower jaw, and is inserted into the
lower lip and chin.
  Levator Labii Superioris Alje^ue
Nasi.  This muscle arises by two heads:
first, from the nasal process of the su-
perior maxillary  bone;  second,  from
the edge of the  orbit above the infra-
orbitar foramen, and is inserted narrow
into the angle of the mouth.
  Levator Labii Superioris Propri-
us. A thin quadrilateral muscle which
arises from  the lower edge of the orbit,
and is inserted into the upper lip.
  Levator Oculi.  Rectus superioris
oculi; a muscle of the eye.
  Levator Palati.   A  muscle  of the
soft palate.  It arises from the point of
the petrous bone and adjoining portion
of the eustachian tube, and is spread out
in the structure of the soft palate.
   Levator Palpebrje Superioris. A
muscle of the upper  eyehd,  which  it
opens by draAving it upward.
   Levator Scapula.   Levator pro-
prius scapulae, a muscle situated  on the
posterior part of the neck.
   LEVEILLE.    Memoir  upon the
Connections between the First and Se-
cond  Dentitions,  and  the  Favorable
Dispositions of the Last to the Devel-
opment  of  the Jaws, by.  Society of
Emulation, vol. seventh.
   LEVEQ.UE.   Notice upon the Ne-
cessity of Directing the Dentition of
Infants.   Care Necessary  to  Prevent
their Diseases, by.  Strasbourg, 1823.
   LEVER.  From levare, to lift up.
One of the simplest  of the mechanical
powers,  and consists of an  inflexible
rod  or bar, supported on, and movable
round a fixed point, caUed a fidcrum.
The fulcrum is the support of the lever,
and constitutes the  axis around which
it turns.   The force  which moves the
lever is called the power, and the weight
to be raised, the resistance.  When the
fulcrum is placed  between the power
and the resistance, it  is called  a lever of
the first kind:  when the resistance, or
weight to be raised, is between the ful-
crum and  the power, it is  caUed a lever
of the second kind. A lever of the third
kind has the power between the fulcrum
and resistance. The punch and elevator,
used by dentists  in  the extraction  of
teeth are  levers  of the first kind, as is
also the key of Garengeot.
   LEVIGATION.   Levigatio;   from
levigare, to polish.  The  reduction  of
hard substances to a very fine  powder.
   LEVISON, J. L.  Premature Denti-
tion and  Supernumerary  Teeth, by-
published in the London Forceps, and
copied into volume eighth of the Ameri-
can Journal of Dental Science.
   LEWIS. Author of an Essay on the
Formation of the  Teeth,  with a Sup-
plement containing the  Means of Pre-
serving them.  London, 1772.
   LIATRIS SPICATA. Button snake
root, an indigenous plant found in mead-
ows and  moist grounds in the middle
and southern states.
   LIBA'DIUM.   The lesser centaury.
   LIBANOTIS.  Rosemary.
   LIBANUS.  Juniperus lycia.   The
cedar of Lebanon.
   LIBRA. A pound.
   LI'CHANUS.  The index or  fore-
finger.
   LICHEN.  AeiXriv, or  uxn, lichen.
 In Pathobgy, a cutaneous affection,  or
eruption  of papulae,  terminating  in
scurf, and giving to  the skin the aspect
 of a vegetable lichen. There  are sev-
 eral varieties of the disease.
   Lichen A'grius.   A disease charac-
 terized by clusters of papulae of a red 
LIF
437
LIG
color, which appear on the arms, neck,
back, face, upper part of the breast and
sides of the abdomen, attended with in-
flammation, itching, and a painful ting-
ling sensation.
  Lichen Circumscrip'tus.  An erup-
tion  characterized by patches of papu-
las, with a well  defined margin, and of
an irregular circular form; sometimes
continuing for several weeks.
  Lichen Livi'dus.   An  eruption of a
dark-red color, or livid papulae.
  Lichen Pilaris.  A papular erup-
tion which makes its appearance about
the roots of the hair.
  Lichen Simplex.   An eruption  of
red papulae  on  the face, or arms, and
sometimes extending over the  body, ac-
companied  by an unpleasant tingling
sensation.
  Lichen Tropicus.   Prickly heat.
  LICHEN. In Botany,  the name of
a genus of plants.
  Lichen Caninus.  The ash-colored
ground livenvort
  Lichen Islandicus. Iceland moss.
  Lichen Marinus. See Ulva Lactuca.
  Lichen Olivarius.   The tree liver-
wort.
  Lichen Pulmonarius. Pectoralmoss.
The  lung-wort.
  Lichen Pyxidatus.  The cup moss.
  Lichen Roccella.  Canary archel.
  LICHENS.  Plants which grow  on
the bark  of trees or  rocks, forming a
sort of incrustation, or upon the ground,
forming irregular lobules  with the sur-
face  of the earth.  They  have a very
low organization.
  LIDDELIUS. On the Golden Tooth
of the Silesian Boy.   Hamb., 1626.
  LFEN.   From a.«o$, soft or smooth.
The spleen.
  Lien Sinarum. Nymphsea nelumbo.
  LIENTERY.  From Xeios, smooth,
and evtepov, intestine. A diarrhoea ; fre-
quent evacuations of half digested food.
  LIFE.  Bios; vita.  The exhibition of
those phenomena which  characterize
organized  beings from inanimate and
inorganic bodies.
        37*
  Life-Everlasting.    Gnaphalium
margaritaceum.
  LIGAMENT.   Ligamentum; from
ligare, to bind. A fibrous cord, or elas-
tic and strong membrane which serves
to connect bones, and to form articula-
tions.  Ligaments are of a dense white
structure, and are divided into capsular
and connecting. The former surrounds
joints like a bag, and prevents  the es-
cape of the  synovial fluid—the  latter,
strengthens the union of movable bones.
  LIGAMENTS,  CRUCIAL.  Two
ligaments of the knee joint—the ante-
rior, or external, and the posterior, or in-
ternal.
  Ligaments, Lateral.   The liga-
ments at the side of a joint.
  Ligaments, Annular. A ring-shaped
ligament of the ankle and wrist.
  LIGAMENTA  ALA'RIA.   Alar
ligaments. Two short and thick liga-
ments of the knee joint.
  Ligamenta Interspinals.  Thein-
terspinous ligaments of the vertebra?.
  Ligamenta Intertransversa'lia.—
The intertransverse hgaments  of  the
vertebrae.
  Ligamenta Radiata. The ligaments
which pass between the inner extremity
of the  clavicle and the sternum, and
those which pass from  the extremities
of the carttiages of the ribs  over  the
sternum.
  LIGAMENTUM, ARTERIOSUM.
The ductus arteriosus, which assumes
the nature of  a hgament after birth.
  Ligamentum Brachio-Cubitale.—
The brachio-cubital ligament.
  Ligamentum  Brachio-Radiale.—
The brachio-radial ligament.
  Ligamentum Capsular.   A liga-
ment Avhich surrounds ajoint like a bag.
  Ligamentum Ciliare.  The bond oP
union between the external and internal
tunics of the eyeball.  See Ciliary Lig-
ament.
  Ligamentum Conoides.  The cora-
co-clavicular ligament.
  Ligamentum  Deltoides.  The in-
ternal lateral hgament of the ankle. 
LIG
438
LIL
   Ligamentum  Denticulatum.   A
ligament extending the whole length of
the spinal marroAV.
   Ligamentum Dentis. A name given
by Mr.  Calwell to that portion of the
gum which is attached to the neck of
a tooth.  See Gums.
   Ligamentum Interclaviculare. A
cord-like band extending from the  ex-
tremity  of one clavicle to the other.
   Ligamentum Interosseum.  The lig-
aments  which  unite  the radius  and
ulna, and tibia and fibula.
   Ligamentum Latum.  The suspen-
sory ligament of the liver and that of
the uterus.
  Ligamentum NucHiE.  The cervical
ligament.
  Ligamentum Orbiculare.   The
ligament which connects the neck  of
the radius to the ulna.
  Ligamentum Ovarii. A round cord
of  muscular fibres derived from  the
uterus.
  Ligamentum  Posticum Winslovii.
A  broad expansion of ligamentous cov-
ering of  the knee joint.
  Ligamentum Poupartii.   Poupart's
ligament.
  Ligamentum Rhomboides. The lig-
ament which binds the clavicle to the
first rib.
  Ligamentum Rotundum. The round
ligament of the uterus.
   Ligamentum Teres.   The round
ligament of the hip joint.
   Ligamentum Trapezoides.  The
coraco-clavicular ligament.
  Ligamentum Triangulare. A liga-
ment of the scapula.
  LIGATURE. Ligatura; from ligo,
I bind.  A thread of silk used for tying
arteries, removing tumors, uniting  the
edges of a wound, &c.  For some pur-
poses fine gold or silver wire is used as
a substitute  for silk.   Ligatures have
also been employed for the retention of
artificial teeth in the mouth; at present,
however, they are not used for this pur-
pose.
   LIGHT.  Lux.  Lumen.  The agent
which produces vision, or a perception
of other bodies by depicting their image
on the retina of the eye.
  Light Carbureted Hydrogen.—
Carbureted hydrogen gas.
  LIGNE'OUS.  Ligneus.  Woody.
  LIG'NIN.  Lignine; from  lignum,
wood.   The fibres of wood divested of
all impurities.
  LIGNUM.  Wood.
  Lignum Aloes.  Aloes wood.
  Lignum Braziliense.   Caesalpina.
The Brazil woods used in dying.
  Lignum Calambac.  Lignum aloes.
  Lignum Campechense.   The log-
Avood tree.
  Lignum Colubrinum.  The wood of
a tree of India. Strychnos colubrina.
  Lignum Indicum.  Guaiacum.
  Lignum Moluccense.  Croton tig-
lium.
  Lignum Nephriticum.  Guilandina.
  Lignum Santali  Rubri.  Pterocar-
pus.
  Lignum Serpentinum. Ophioxylum.
  Lignum Vitje. Guaiacum officinale.
  LI'GULA.  The  clavicle; also, the
glottis, and a measure containing ten
scruples.
  LIGUSTICUM.  The name  of a
genus of plants.
  Ligusticum Levis'ticum.  Lovage.
  Ligusticum Podagra'ria.    Gout
Aveed.
  LIGUSTRUM.   The name  of a ge-
nus of plants.
  LlGUSTRUM VULGA'RE.  Privet.
  LILIACE^E.  A family of endoge-
nous plants, including the  lilies,  hya-
cinths, &.C.
  LILIA'CEOUS. Resembling the lily.
  LILIA'GO. Spidenvort; liliastrum.
  LILIUM.  The name of a genus  of
plants.
  Lilium Can'didum.  Lihum album.
The white lily.
  Lilium Conval'lium.  The  lily  of
the valley.
  Lilium Marta'oon. The martagon
lily.
  LILY.  LUium. 
LIN
439
LIN
   Lily, May.  Convallaria majalis.
   Lily, Water.  Nymphaea alba.
   Lily, White.  Lilium candidum.
   Lily of the Valley.  Convallaria
  majalis.
   LIMA.   Many Observations upon
  a New Means of Curing certain Pains
  of the Teeth, by.  Lyons, 1778.
   LIMATURA.  From lima, a file.
  File-dust; filings.
   Limatura Ferri.  Iron filings.
   Limatura Stanni.  Tin filings.
   LIMAX.  The slug, or snail.
   LIMB.  A member.
   LIME. Citrus  limetta;  a  fruit like
  a small lemon.
   LIME. Calx. The oxyd of calcium.
   Lime, Carbonate of.  Creta.
   Lime Water.  Calcis liquor.
   LIMONADA.  Lemonade.
   LIMONIA MALUS.  The lemon.
   LIMO'NIUM.  The  lemon.  Also,
 buckwheat, and statice limonium.
   LIMOSIS. Fromxiuos, hunger.   A
 morbid appetite.  Also, a genus of dis-
 ease in the class cozliaca, order enterica,
 of Dr. Good, characterized by exces-
 sive, or depraved appetite.
   Limosis Avens.  Insatiable appetite.
   Limosis Expers.  Anorexia.
   Limosis Helluonum.  Gluttony.
   Limosis Pica.  Malacia.
   LIMOTHERAPEIA.  From xiuos,
 hunger, and $eparteia, treatment.  The
 cure of disease by fasting, or abstinence
 from food.
   LIMPID.  Limpidus;  from xaurta,
 to shine.  Clear; pure; transparent.
   LINA'CE^E.  The flax tribe of di-
 cotyledonous plants.
   LINAMENTUM.    From linum,
 linen.  Lint.
   LINC'TUS.   From lingo, to tick.
 In Pharmacy, applied to a soft substance,
 like honey, which may be licked from a
 spoon,
  LINDEN TREE.   Tilia.
  LINDERER, C. J.  and J. Authors
of a Treatise on Dental Anatomy, Phy-
siology, Therapeutics  and Surgery,
pubhshed, Berlin, 1842.
   LINE.   Linea.  That  which has
 length, without breadth or thickness.
   Line, Median, of the  Body.  An
 imaginary line, beginning at  the top of
 the head and falling between the feet,
 dividing the body vertically into two
 equal parts.
   LIN'EA.  From linum, a thread. A
 line.  In Anatomy,  applied to  parts
 which have a line-hke appearance.
   Linea Alba.  A tendinous cord or
 line, extending from the ensiform carti-
 lage of the sternum to the navel, and
 from thence to the symphysis pubis.
  Linea As'pera.  The rough  projec-
 tion along the posterior surface of the
 femur.
  Linea  Ilio-Pectinea.    A  sharp
ridge on the lateral edge of the brim of
the pelvis, caUed also, linea innomina-
   LINE^E SEMILUNA'RES.   The
 lines on the outer margins of the recti
 muscles of the abdomen.
   LinEjE  Transversje.  The lines that
 cross the recti muscles of the abdomen.
   LINEAMENT. Lineamcntum; from
 linea, a line.  A feature ; the form, or
 outline which marks  the  particular
 character of the countenance, and dis-
 tinguishes the features of the face of one
 person from another.
   LIN'EAR.   Linearis.  In  Surgery,
 fractures which exhibit the appearance
 of a line.
   LINEATUS.   Lineate;  streaked;
 having lines.
   LINE'OLA.  Diminutive  of linea, a
 line.  A small line.
   LIN'GUA.   From lingo, to lick up.
 The tongue.
   Lingua Avis.  Sparrow's tongue.
   Lingua Canina.  Hound's tongue.
   Lingua Cervina.  Hart's tongue.
   LINGUAL.   Lingualis.   Relating,
 or belonging, to the tongue.
  Lingual Artery.  A branch of the
 external carotid  artery.
  Lingual Nerve. The hypoglossus
nerve.  Also, a  branch of the inferior
maxillary. 
LIN
440
LIP
   LINGUA'LIS.  Basio-glossus muscle.
 A long, small muscle, passing from the
 root to the tip of the tongue.
   LINGULA.  Ligula.
   LINTMENT.  Linimentum.
   Liniment, Anodyne.  Linimentum
 opii.
   Liniment  of Mercury.  Linimen-
 tum hydrargyri compositum.
   Liniment, Volatile.  Linimentum
 ammoniae.
   LINIMENTUM.   From linire,  to
 anoint.  A liniment; an unctuous me-
 dicine, to be applied externally by means
 of friction.
   Linimentum  Ammonije.   Liniment
 of ammonia.  Volatile liniment.
   Linimentum  Ammonite  Composi-
 tum. Compound liniment  of ammo-
 nia.
   Linimentum  Ammonlh Sesciuicar-
 bonatis.  Liniment of sesquicarbonate
 of ammonia.
   Linimentum  Calcis.  Liniment of
 lime.
   Linimentum Camphors.  Camphor
 liniment.
   Linimentum  Camphorje  Comfosi-
 tum. Compound camphor liniment.
  Linimentum  Cantharidis.  Lini-
 ment of Spanish flies.
  Linimentum Hydrargyri Composi-
 tum.  Compound liniment of mercury.
  Linimentum Opii.  Liniment of opi-
 um.  Anodyne liniment.
  Linimentum  Saponis  Camphora-
 tum.  Camphorated soap liniment.
  Linimentum Simplex.  Simple lini-
ment
  Linimentum  Terebinthinje.  Lini-
ment of turpentine.
  LINNiEA.  The name of a genus
of plants.
  Linnjea Borea'lis.   A plant which
 has a bitter, sub-astringent taste.
  LINN^EAN  SYSTEM.  The sex-
ual system of plants, so called from  the
name of the founder of it, Linnaeus.
  LINSEED.  The  linum usitatissi-
mum.                          •
  LINT.  Linteum.  Charpk.  A soft,
 flocculent substance, made by scraping
 old linen cloth, or rags.
   LI'NUM.  Linseed. Also, the name
 of a genus of plants.
   Linum Cathar'ticum. Purging flax.
   Linum  Usitatis'simum.   Common
 flax.
   LINTOTT,  WILLIAM.   Author
 of a Treatise on the Structure,  Econo-
 my, and Pathology of the Human Teeth,
 with careful instructions  for their pre-
 servation  and culture; and concise de-
 scriptions of  the best modes of surgi-
 cal treatment;  equally adapted to the
 use of the medical practitioner, the stu-
 dent in medicine, and of the public.
 London, 1841.—On the exchange of the
 deciduous  for the permanent incisor
 teeth,  published in the London  For-
 ceps.
   LIP.  Labium.   The  two, circum-
 scribe the anterior opening of the mouth,
 and are distinguished into upper and
 lower.
   LIPS, CHARACTERISTICS OF.
 "The  lips,"  says Delabarre, "present
 marked differences in different constitu-
 tions.  They are thick, red, rosy or pale,
 according to the qualities of the arterial
 blood that circulates  through their ar-
 teries."
   Firmness of the lips,  and a pale rose
 color of the  mucous membrane  that
 covers them, are, according to Laforgue,
 indicative of pure blood, and, as a con-
 sequence, of a good constitution. Red-
 ness of the lips, deeper than that of the
 pale rose, is mentioned by him, as one
 of the  signs  of sanguino-serous blood.
 Soft pale lips, are indicative of lymphat-
 ico-serous  dispositions.  In these sub-
jects the lips are  almost entirely with-
 out color.   When there is a sufficiency
 of blood the tips are firm, though varia-
 ble in color, according to  the predomi-
 nancy of the red or serous  parts of this
 fluid.
  Both hardness and redness of the lips,
 and all the soft parts of the mouth, are
enumerated among the signs of plethora.
Softness of the lips, without change of 
LIP                441                 LIP
color  in their  mucous membrane,  is
spoken of by this last author as indica-
tive of deficiency of blood; and, soft-
ness and redness of  the mucous mem-
brane of the lips are signs that the blood
is  small in quantity and sanguino-se-
rous.
   Serous anemic and pale blood are in-
 dicated by want of color and softness of
the lips,  and general paleness of the
 mucous membrane of the whole mouth.
   ■The fluids contained in the vessels,"
says Laforgue, "in the three foregoing
forms of anaemia, yield to the slightest
pressure, and leave nothing between the
fingers but  the skin and ceUular tissue."
   In remarking upon the  signs of the
different qualities of the blood, the above
mentioned  author asserts that the  con-
stitution of children, about  the age  of
six years, cannot, by a universal  char-
acteristic, be distinguished, but that the
lips, as well as other parts of the mouth
constantly  betoken the "quality of the
blood and that of the flesh;" and "con-
sequently,  they proclaim health or dis-
ease,  or the approach  of  asthenic and
adynamic  disorders, which the  blood
either causes or aggravates."
   Again, he observes,  that the  blood
of all children is "superabundantly se-
rous," but that it  is redder in those of
the second constitution than it  is  in
those of any of the others; and that
this is more distinctly indicated by the
color  of the lips.  "This quality of the
blood," says  he, "is necessary to dis-
pose all the parts  to elongate in  their
growth.  When the  proportions of the
constituent elements of the blood are
just,  growth is accomplished without
disease.  If the proportions are other-
Avise  than they should be  for the pre-
servation of the health, or if one'or more
of its elements be altered, health no long-
er exists, groAvth is arrested altogether,
or is  performed irregularly. The nu-
tritive matter is imperfect—assimilation
is prevented or impaired.  On the other
hand,  disintegration  decomposes  the
patient: if death does not sooner result,
 it will consume him by  the lesion of
 some vital organ."*
   To the correctness of the foregoing
 observations, every experienced and in-
 quiring  dental  practitioner  can  bear
 witness.  The changes produced in the
 color of  the blood by organic derange-
 ments are at once indicated by the color
 of the lips.
  The accuracy of Laforgue's observa-
 tions on  the indications of the physical
 characteristics of the lips has been fully
 confirmed by subsequent writers.   Del-
 abarre, in his remarks on  the semeiolo-
 gy of the mouth, has added nothing to
 them.
  "The  secretion of  the  lips,"  says
 professor Schtil, "has a  similar diag-
 nostic and prognostic import to that of
 the  tongue and gums.   They  become
 dry  in all fevers and in spasmodic par-
 oxysms.  A mucous white coating is a
 sign of irritation or inflammation of the
 intestinal canal;  accordingly, this coat-
 ing  is found in mucous obstructions, in
 gastric intermittent fever,  in  mucous
 fever, and before the gouty paroxysms.
 A dry brown coating of the lips  is a
 sign of coUiquation in consequence of
 typhus affection; it  is accordingly ob-
 served in  typhus, in  putrid fever, in
 acute exanthems,  and  inflammations
 which have become nervous."f
   The appearance of the lips, however,
 do  not present  so great  a  variety  as
 those of other parts of the mouth, for the
 reason that they are not as subject to
 local diseases, but their general  pathog-
 nomic indications are, perhaps, quite as
 decided.
  LIPA'RIA.  Obesity.
  LIPAROCE'LE.  From Xirtapos, fat,
 and  xtjXrj, a tumor.  A  fatty  tumor, es-
 pecially in the scrotum.
  LIPO'MA.   From Xirtos, fat.    An
 encysted  fatty tumor.
  LIPOTH'YMY.  Lipothymia; from
Xeirta, to fail, and ^vfnos, soul. Syncope.

  *Vide Semeiologie Buccale et Buccamancie.
  fVide Pathological Semeiology,v. 152. 
Lia
442
LIT
   LIPPITU'DO.  From lippus, blear-
eyed.  Bleared eyes.  A chronic in-
flammation of the tarsal edges of the
eyelids  and a discharge of  puriform
matter.
   LIQUATION.   The  separation of
tin, lead, &,c, by melting.
   LIGIUEFACIENT.  Liquefaciens;
from  liquidus, a liquid, and facere, to
make.  That which has the property of
liquefying  solids, as mercury, iodine,
&c.
   LIQUEFACTION.  Liquatio;  li-
quefkatio.  The  conversion of a solid
into a liquid.
   LIQUEUR.  An  aromatic prepara-
tion of distilled spirits.
   LIQUID. Liquidum. A flowing sub-
stance ; a feebly elastic fluid.
   LIQUIDAM'BAR.   The  name of
a genus of plants.
   Liquidambar  Styracif'lua.   The
tree which affords the liquidambar and
liquid storax.
   LIQUOR.  From liqueo, to become
liquid.  A  name given to many com-
pound fluid medicinal preparations.
   Liquor jEthere'us Oleo'sus. Ethe-
real oil.  Heavy oil of wine. Sulphate
of ether and etherine.
   Liquor ^Ethereus Sulphu'ricus.
Sulphuric ethereal  liquor.  Unrectified
sulphuric ether.
   Liquor  Aluminis  Compositus.—
Compound solution of alum.
   Liquor Ammonia.  Water  of  am-
monia.
   Liquor Ammonle  Acetatis.  Solu-
tion of acetate of ammonia.
   Liquor Ammonle Sesquicarbona-
tis.  Water of carbonate of ammonia.
   Liquor Argenti Nitratis.  Solution
of nitrate of stiver.
  Liquor Arsenicalis.  See Liquor
Potassae Arsenitis.
  Liquor Barii  Chloridi.   Solution
of chloride of barium. Solution of mu-
riate of baryta.
   Liquor Calcii Chloridi.  Solution
of chloride  of calcium.  Solution of
muriate of lime.
   Liquor Calcis.  Lime water.
   Liquor Cupri Ammonio'sulphatis.
 Solution of ammoniated copper.
   Liquor Ferri Iodidi.   Solution of
 iodide ofiron.  Syrup of iodide ofiron.
   Liquor Ferri Ternitratis.   Solu-
 tion of ternitrate of iron.
   Liquor  Hydrargyri Bichloribi.
 Solution of bichloride of mercury.
   Liquor Iodini Compositus.  Com-
 pound solution of iodine.
   Liquor Morphije Sulphatis. Solu-
 tion of sulphate of morphia.
   Liquor  Plumbi  Diacetatis.  See
 Liquor Plumbi Subacetatis.
   Liquor Plumbi Subacetatis. Solu-
 tion of subacetate of lead.
   Liquor Potass je. Solution of potassa.
   Liquor Potassa Arsenitis.  Solu-
 tion of arsenite  of potassa.   Arsenical
 solution. Fowler's solution.
   Liquor Potassae Carbonatis. Solu-
 tion of carbonate of potassa.
   Liquor Potassje Chlorinates.  So-
 lution of chloride of potassa.
   Liquor Potassa Citratis.  Solution
 of citrate of potassa. Neutral mixture.
   Liquor Potass.e Effervescens. Ef-
 fervescing solution of potassa.
   Liquor Potassii Iodidi Compositus.
 Compound solution of iodine.
   Liquor Sou.e Chlorinate.  Solu-
 tion of chlorinated soda. Solution of
 chloride  of soda. Labarraque's  disin-
 fecting soda liquid.
   Liquor Sod.e Effervescens.  Ef-
 fervescing solution of soda.
  Liquor Tartari  Emetici.   Anti-
 monial wine.
  LIQUORICE. Glycirrhiza.
  LIRIODEN'DRON   TULIPIF'E-
 RA.  The tulip-tree.
  LITHAGO'GUE. Lithagogus; from
xiBos, a stone, and ay«, to bring away.
 Medicines supposed  to have the power
 of expelling urinary calculi.
  LITHARGE.  See Lithargyrum.
  Litharge Plaster.   Emplastrum
 lithargyri.
  LITHAR'GYRUM.  From xtfos, a
stone, and  apyvpoy,  stiver.  Litharge 
LIT               443                LIX
 Plumbi oxydum semivitreum.  Semivitri-
 fied protoxyd of lead.  When white, it
 is called  litharge  of silver, and when
 red, litharge of gold.
   LITHECTASY.   From uOos, a
 stone, andextaats, dilatation.  An ope-
 ration for the removal of stone from the
 bladder,  by dilating the neck of  the or-
 gan,  after having made an incision in
 the perineum and opened the membra-
 nous  portion of the urethra.
   LITH'IA.   The oxyd of lithium.
   LITHIASIS.  From XiOos, a stone.
 The formation  of stone.  Also, a dis-
 ease of the eyelids, in which their mar-
 gins are  beset with stone-like concre-
 tions.
   LITHIC.   Lithicus.   Relating to
 lithic or uric acid, or to stone.
   Lithic Acid.  Uric acid.
   LITHPUM.  A white metal obtained,
 by means of galvanism, from lithia.
   LITHOL'ABUM.    From xiOos, a
 stone, and xauSava, I seize.   An instru-
 ment  for grasping  and extracting the
 stone from the bladder.
   LITHOL'OGY.  Lithobgia.  From
 XiSos, a stone, and xoyos, a discourse. A
 treatise on calculus concretions.
   LITHONTRIPTIC.  Lithontripti-
 cus; from XiBos, a stone, and tpiSa, to
 wear away.  A remedy supposed to be
 capable of dissolving urinary  calculi.
   LITHONTRIPTOR.    An  instru-
 ment for breaking calculi in the bladder
 into  small pieces so that they may be
 washed away by the urine.  A variety
 of instruments have been  invented for
 this purpose.
   LITHOSPER'MUM.  The name of
 a genus of plants,
   Lithospermum Officina'le. Grom-
 well.
   LITHOTOMIST.   One  who  de-
 votes himself to the operation of lithoto-
 my.
   LITHOT'OMY.  Lithotomia;  from
Ju0os, a stone, and tefiva, to cut.  Cut-
ting into the bladder for the extraction
of  stone.
  LITHOT'RITY.  Lithotrith;  from |
  Xttios, a stone, and tpijSa, I break.  The
  operation of breaking  or  bruising the
  stone  into small pieces so that it may
  be discharged with the urine.
    LITHU'RIA.  From Xidos, a stone,
  andovpov, urine.  Urine containing uric
  acid and urates.
    LITMUS.  A blue  coloring matter
  prepared from argol, and used by chem-
  ists on paper to detect  the presence of
  acids, which turn it red.
    LITRA.  Attpa.  A pound.
    LITRE.   A French measure  con
  taining 2.1135 English pints.
    LIVER.  Hepar.  The largest gland
  in the body.    It is of a  brownish-red
  color, and situated under the diaphragm,'
  occupying the  whole  hypochondriac
  region, and part of the epigastric.  It is
  the organ of the biliary secretion.
    Liver, Granulated.  A disease of
  the liver, in  which  this organ becomes
  tuberculated, and assumes a rusty yel-
  low  color, and on  which  account it is
  termed cirrhosis.  The  disease is vari-
  ously designated by different authors.
    Liver,  Inflammation of.   Hepati-
  tis.
    Liver of Sulphur.  Potassii  sul-
 phuretum.
    Liver Spot.  Chloasma.
   LIVERWORT.   Marchantia poly-
 morpha.
   Liverwort, American.  Hepatica
 Americana.
   Liverwort, Ash-Colored.  Lichen
 caninus.
   Liverwort, Ground.  Lichen cani-
 nus.
   Liverwort, Iceland.  Cetraria  is-
 landica.
   Liverwort, Noble.    Marchantia
 polymorpha.
   Liverwort  Tree.   Lichen  oliva-
 rius.
   LIVIDITY.  A dark color.
   LIVOR. From liveo, to be black  and
blue.  Lividity.
   LIX.  Ashes.  Wood ashes.
   LIXIVTAL.  Lixivialis; from  lix,
wood-ash.  Salts obtained by lixivation. 
LOC
444
LON
   LIXIVIATION.   Lixiviatio.  The
 act of treating ashes with water, for the
 purpose of dissolving the alkaline salts
 which they contain.
   LIXIVTUM. Any solution contain-
 ing soda or potassa in excess.  Lye.
   LOADSTONE.  Magnet.
   LOATHING.   Disgust.
   LOB ATE.  Lobatus.  Lobed.
   LOBE.  Lobus. In Anatomy, a round
 projecting part of an organ.
   LOBE'LIA.  Lobelia inflata.  Also,
 the name of a genus of plants.
   Lobelia Cardina'lis. Cardinal flow-
 er.  Cardinal plant.
   Lobelia Infla'ta.  Indian  tobacco.
   Lobelia Syphilit'ica.  Blue cardi-
 nal flower.
   LOBE'LIACE^).  The lobelia tribe
 of dicotyledonous plants.
   LOBSTER.  Cancer gammarus.
   LOB'ULUS.   Diminutive of bbus,
 a  lobe. A small lobe.
   Lobulus Auris.  The lobe, or lower
 part of the ear.
   Lobulus Pneumogastricus. A small
 lobe of the cerebellum.
   LOBUS.   A lobe.
   LOCAL.   Localis.   In  Pathology,
 applied to  a disease affecting a part,
 without implicating the whole system.
   LOCALES.  Plural  of bcalis.  In
 Cullen's Nosology,  the  fourth class,
 which comprehends morbid  affections
 that are partial.
   LOCK, E.  Author of a  paper  on
 the  Structure and Extraction of the
 Teeth, pubhshed in the Dental Register
 of the West, volume first.
   LOCKED JAW.  Trismus.
   LOCOMOTION.  Locomotio;  from
 hcus, a place,  and movere,  to move.
 The process  by which animals of the
 higher  classes move from  place to
 place.
   LOCULAMENTUM.  In Botany,
 the space between the valves and par-
 titions of a capsule.
   LOCUS NIGER.  The dark matter
in the centre of the peduncles of the
brain.
   Locus Perforatus.  See Pons Ta-
 rini.
   LOESCHER.  Dissertation  on the
 Wisdom Teeth, and their Diseases, by.
 Willeb,  1728.
   LOESELIUS.  Dissertation  on the
 Pain of the Teeth, by.   Regiom, 1639.
   LOGWOOD.  Haematoxylon cam-
 pechianum.
   LOIMIC.  Loimkus ; from xoiuos, a
 pestilence.   Pertaining to a pestilence.
   LOINS.   The lumbar region of the
 back.
   LOMEN'TUM. A fruit similar to a le-
 gume, excepting that the space between
 each seed is divided into distinct pieces.
 giving it the appearance, at  maturity,
 of being composed  of  many  articula-
 tions.  Also, meal  of beans,  and the
 bread made from such meal.
  LONGBOTHOM,B.T. B.T.Long-
 bothom,  late  surgeon dentist of Jamai-
 ca, and  author of  a  small  work on
 the teeth, entitled, a Treatise on Den-
 tistry, Explaining the  Diseases of the
 Teeth and Gums, with  the most effec-
 tual means of Prevention and Remedy;
 to which is added, Dentition; with rules
 to be  observed  during that interesting
 period.  Baltimore, 1802.
  LONGANON. The rectum.
  LONGEVITY.  Longcevitas.   The
 prolongation of life to an advanced age,
 or to above  seventy years.  Haller col-
lected examples of more than a thousand
over a hundred  years.  It is said that
Thomas Parr reached 152; Henry Jen-
kins,  169;  Peter Torten, 185;  John
Rovin and wife, 172 and 164.
  LONGIS'SIMUS DORSI.  A long
muscle of the back.
  Longissimus Femoris.  The sarato-
rius muscle.
  Longissimus  Manus.  Flexor  tertii
internodii pollicis.
  Longissimus Oculi .  Obliquus supe-
rior oculi.
  LONGITUDINAL.  Longitudinalis.
In Anatomy,  applied to parts which
have such direction.
  Longitudinal Sinus.  A triangular 
LOT
445
LUM
 canal of the dura mater, proceeding from
 the crista galli to the tentorium.
   LONG-SIGHTEDNESS. See Pres-
 byopia.
   LONGUS COLLI.  A muscle situ-
 ated on the anterior of the vertebrae of
 the neck.
   LONICE'RA.  The name of a genus
 of plants.
   Lonicera   Periclim'enum.   The
 common honey-suckle.
   LOOSENESS.  Diarrhoea.
   LOPEZ.  Radex bpeziana.  Radex
 indica bpeziana.  The root  of an un-
 known tree of India.
   LOQUACITY.  Garrulitas; from
 loquor, I speak.  Volubility ;  sometimes
 a symptom of disease.
   LOTIO.  A lotion.
   Lotio Acidi Pyrolignei.  Lotion of
 pyroligneous acid.
   Lotio Aluminis.  Alum lotion.
   Lotio Ammonie Acetatis. Lotion
 of acetate of ammonia.
   Lotio Ammonie Hydrochloratis.
 Lotion of muriate of ammonia.
  Lotio Ammonie  Muriatis  Cum
 Aceto. Lotion of muriate of ammonia
 and vinegar.
  Lotio Ammonie Opiata.  Lotion of
 ammonia and opium.
  Lotio Boracis.  Lotion of borax.
  Lotio Calcis Composita.  Black
 Avash.
  Lotio Flava.  Yellow wash.
  Lotio Galle.  Lotion of gaU-nuts.
  Lotio Hellebori Alba.  Lotion of
 veratrum album.
  Lotio  Hydrargyri  Amygdalina.
 Amygdaline  lotion of  corrosive subli-
 mate.
  Lotio  Hydrargyri  Oxymuriatis.
 Lotion of corrosive subhmate.
  Lotio Hydrargyri  Oxymuriatis
Composita.  Compound lotion of cor-
rosive sublimate.
  Lotio Nigra.  Black wash.
  Lotio Opii.  Opium lotion.
  Lotio Picis.  Compound lotion of tar.
  Lotio Plumbi Acetatis.   Lotion of
acetate of lead.
        38
   Lotio Potassh Sulphureti.  Lotion
 of sulphuret of potassium.
   Lotio Zinci Sulphatis.  Lotion of
 sulphate of zinc.
   LOTION.   Lotio;  from hvare, lo-
 tum, to wash.  A liquid preparation to
 be applied to the body extemaUy.
   LOTI'UM.  Urine.
   LOUSE.  Pediculus.
   LOUSPNESS.  Phthiriasis.
   LOUSELAND'S   DENTIFRICE
 POWDER. Take red bark, selected
 and pulverized,  § ij;  red  saunder's
 wood, made into a powder, § i; vola-
 tile oil of cloves, xij drops; oil of berga-
 mot, vii drops.  Mix properly for use.
   LOVAGE.  Ligusticum levisticum.
   LOVE-APPLE.  Solanum lycoper-
 sicum.
   LOW SPIRITS.  Hypochondriasis.
   LOXARTHROS.    From   *ofo$,
 oblique, and apOpov, a joint  Obliquity,
 or Avrong position of parts  forming a
 joint.
   LOX'IA.  Wry neck.
   LOZENGE.  See Trochiscus.
   LUCID.  Lucidus.  Clear; transpar-
 ent; shining; bright.  In Medicine, in-
 tervals of reason in mental affections.
   LUDOLF, H.  Dissertation  on the
 Diseases of the Gums, by.  Erfort, 1722.
   LUD WIG.  On the Cortex Striatus.
 Leipsic,  1753.—Dissertation on Diffi-
 cult  Dentition^ by.  Leipsic, 1800.
   LUES. From Xva, to dissolve.  Pes-
 tilence.  Also, syphilis.
   Lues Gutturis Epidemica. Cynan-
 che maligna.
   Lues Indica.  The yaws.
   Lues Neurodes.  A typhus fever.
   Lues Venerea.  Syphilis.
   LUMBA'GO. From lumbi, the loins.
 Rheumatism affecting the muscles about
 the loins.
   LUMBAR.   Lumbalis. Belonging,
 or relating,  to the loins.
   Lumbar Abscess.   Psoas abscess.
   Lumbar Arteries. Four or five ar-
teries on each side which curve around
the lumbar vertebrae beneath the psoas
muscle, giving off the spinal, anterior, 
LUN
446
LUX
posterior, and external muscular branch-
es.
  Lumbar Nerves. Fivepair of nerves
which issue from the vertebral column,
by the spinal foramina of the loins.
  Lumbar Plexus.  A  plexus, situa-
ted between the transverse  processes of
the lumbar vertebras and the quadratus
lumborum behind, and the psoas mag-
nus muscle before, and  formed by the
anterior branches of the  first four lum-
bar nerves.
  Lumear Region.  The loins.
  LUMBARIS EXTERNUS.  The
quadratus lumborum muscle.
  Lumbaris  Internus.   The  psoas
magnus muscle.
   LUMBI.  The loins;  the lumbar
region.
   LUMBOSACRAL.   Belonging to
the lumbar and sacral regions.
   LUMBRICALIS. From lumbricus,
the earth-worm.  A name given to cer-
tain muscles from their resemblance to
 the earth-worm.
   LUMBRICALES MANUS.  The
 small flexor muscles of the fingers.
   Lumbricales Pedis.  Four muscles
 of the foot similar to those of the hand.
    LITMBRPCUS. The common earth-
 worm.  Also,  the long,  round  worm
 found in the intestines of man and other
 animals.
    Lumbricus Terrestris.  The earth-
 worm.
    LUMBUS  VENERIS.  Yarrow.
    LUNA.  The moon.   Also, silver.
    Luna Cornea.  Chloride of silver.
    Luna Fixata.  Oxyd of zinc.
    LUNAR CAUSTIC.  Nitrate of sil-
 ver.
    LUNA'RE  OS.  One  of the bones
 of the carpus.
    LUNARIA REDIVI'VA.   Bulbo-
 nach.
    LU'NATIC.  Lunaticus; from luna,
 the moon.   Moonstruck.  Applied  to
 diseases  which  are supposed to be in-
 fluenced by the changes of the moon.
 GeneraUy, however, restricted to men-
 tal alienation.
  LUNG.  Pidmo.  The right lung is
divided into three lobes, and the left into
two.  The lungs, in man and many
other animals, are the organs of respira-
tion.
  Lung-Wort.  Pulmonaria officina-
lis.
  Lung-Wort Tree.  Lichen  pulmo-
narius.
  LUPIA. Enycsted tumors, with con-
tents of a pultaceous consistence.
  LUPPNUS  ALBUS.   The white
lupin.
  LU'PULIN.  Lupuline. The yel-
low aromatic matter of hops.
  LU'PULUS.  The hop plant.
  LUPUS.  A wolf. Noli me tangere,
a malignant disease of the face,  consist-
ing of ragged  tubercular  excrescences,
and spreading ulcerations, particularly
about the lips  and nose.
  Lupus Cancrosus.   Cancer.
  Lupus Vorax.  Herpes exedens.
  LURID. Luridus. Ghastly. Also,
a pale-yellowish purple color.
  LUS'CITAS.  Distortion of the eye-
ball, and  inability to move it when the
other eye is closed.  Also, strabismus.
   LUSUS NATURiE.   A  freak of
 nature, a deformed or unnatural produc-
 tion.
   LUTE.  SeeLutum.
   LUTEUS. Yellow.
   LUTUM.  In Chemistry, a composi-
 tion for covering chemical vessels and
 for closing their joinings.
   LUXATION.  Luxatio; from /lat-
 ere, to put out of place.  Displacement
 of the articular extremity of a bone from
 its proper place or cavity. Dislocation.
    Luxation of Teeth.  The displace-
 ment of one  or more teeth from their
 sockets.  This may be partial or com-
 plete;  simple or complicated.  "When
 partial, the tooth is only slightly raised
 in its  socket, and the  connection be-
 tween the  two not entirely destroyed.
 When complete, the tooth has entirely
 left the socket.  The luxation  may be
 said to be  simple, when the  alveolus
 sustains no other injury than that which 
LUX               447               LYG
 is inflicted by the mere evulsion of the
 organ; and complicated, when the gum
 is bruised and lacerated, or the alveolus
 fractured.
   The cause of the luxation of a tooth
 is generaUy external violence, as that
 of a blow or a fall, though it sometimes
 results  from careless or awkward  at-
 tempts at extraction, in  not  using the
 precautions necessary in the perform-
 ance of this operation.  See Extraction
 of Teeth. Partial luxation is sometimes
 produced from improper methods of pro-
 cedure in the treatment of irregularity
 of the teeth, and sometimes by the action
 of an antagonizing tooth, and occasion-
 ally by the filling up of the socket Avith
 a deposition of bony matter.
   When  the luxation is only partial
 and produced by external violence, as a
 blow or faU, or by the extraction of  an
 adjoining tooth, the partially displaced
 organ, should be at once forced back
 into its socket, and should violent  in-
 flammation   supervene,  two or  three
 leeches should be applied to  the gum,
 and the mouth gargled several times a
 day with  some coohng and astringent
 lotion.  The patient, in  the  meantime,
 for three or four days, should be restrict-
 ed to a light and soft diet.
   Although, under  certain  circum-
 stances, it may  be advisable to replace a
 tooth after it has been forced entirely
 from the socket, it seldom happens that a
 sufficiently perfect connection is re-estab-
 lished to  prevent a tooth  thus replaced
 from exercising a morbid influence upon
 the parts  which immediately surround
 it.  But Avhen the replacement of a lux-
 ated tooth is determined on, it should be
 done immediately.    The coagulated
 blood, however, should be first removed
from the socket, and if the tooth has be-
come cold or there be any dirt adhering
to it, it should be  washed  off in warm
water and then immediately replaced,
and confined to the adjoining teeth with
a ligature of stik. If a union takes place,
it is by an effusion of coagulable lymph
and the formation of an imperfectly or-
ganized  membranous  investment for
the root, an operation of the economy
to shield the surrounding living  parts
from the noxious effects which the root
would otherwise exert.  But, even in
the most favorable cases, teeth thus re-
placed, are apt to become  sensitive to
the touch, and occasionally to give rise
to more or less tumefaction or turgidity
of the surrounding gum.  When com-
plicated with fracture of the alveolus,
the  replacement of a  luxated  tooth
should never be attempted.
  Mr. Fox proposed the partial luxation
of a tooth for the cure  of tooth-ache,
thinking, that by the severance of the
vascular and nervous cord at the ex-
tremity   of  the  root,  the pain would
cease, but his hopes were not realized,
and the efforts  of other practitioners
have been attended with no  better suc-
cess.
   For the treatment of gradual displace-
ment of a tooth by a deposition of bony
matter at the bottom of the socket. See  ,
article upon that subject.
   LYCAN'CHE.  Cynanche.
   LYCANTHRO'PIA. From Xvxos.
a wolf, and  ov^partos, a man. A variety
of melancholy, in which the person be-
lieves himself changed into a wolf, and
imitates  the habits of that animal.
   LYCOPER'DON.   The puff ball.
Also, the name of a genus of fungi.
   Lycoperdon  Tuber.  The  truffle;
a globular, solid fungus, which grows
under  ground  and attains the size of
a potato.
   LYCOPO'DIUM.  The name of a
genus of plants.
   Lycopodium Clava'tum.  The club-
moss.
  Lycopodium  Sela'go.   The  up-
right club-moss.
  LYCOP'SIS.   The name of a genus
of plants. Also, the wall bugloss.
  LY'COPUS.   Lycopus  virginicus.
Bugleweed;  water hoarhound.
  LYCOREX'IA.  Morbid appetite.
  LYE.  A solution of alkaline salts.
  LYG'MUS.  Singultus. 
MAC              448               MAC
  LYMPH.  Lympha.  The fluid con-
tained in the lymphatic vessels.
  LYMPHADENITIS.   From lym-
pha, lymph, and adenitis, inflammation
of a gland.  Inflammation  of a  lym-
phatic gland.
  LYMPH GLOBULES.  The glob-
ules of the lymph.
  LYMPHANGIOL'OGY.    From
lymphangeon, a lymphatic, and xoyos, a
discourse.  A treatise on the lymphatics.
  LYMPHAT'IC. Lymphaticus; from
lympha, lymph.  Of the nature of lymph.
Also, a smaU transparent absorbent ves-
sel that carries lymph.
  Lymphatic Gland.  A  gland into
which lymphatics enter, and from which
they go out, as the mesenteric, lumbar,
&c.
   Lymphatic Veins.  The  absorbents.
  LYMPHATICS.   The lymphatic
vessels.
  LYMPHIZATION.  The  effusion
of coagulable lymph.
  LYMPHOCHE'ZIA. Fromlympha,
lymph, and Xe£a, I go to stool.  Serous
diarrhoea.
   LYMPHO'SIS.  The elaboration of
lymph.
M.
  M.  In Medical  Prescriptions, this
letter signifies manipulus, a handful.
Also, misce, mix.
  MACA'CUS.   A  genus of Catarr-
hine monkeys, characterized by having
a fifth tubercle or  cusp upon their last
molar tooth, ischial callosities and cheek
pouches.
  MACANDOU. A Malacca tree.
  MACAPATLI.  Sarsaparilla.
  MACARO'NI.  An alimentary pre-
paration from wheat, containing a large
quantity of gluten; also, a sort of paste
moulded into  a cylindrical form, from
  LYMPHOTOMY.  From lymplia,
lymph, and teuva, I cut.  The  dissec-
tion of the lymphatics.
  LYPEMA'NIA.  Melancholy.
  LY'RA.  From Tivpa, a lyre.  Psal-
tcrium.   Corpus psalloidcs. The trans-
verse lines upon the posterior  part of
the under surface of the fornix between
the diverging corpora fimbriata, are so
called, from  their fancied resemblance
to the strings of a harp.
  LYR1NGIUM.   Button snake-root.
  LY'RUS.  Arnica montana.
  LYSIMA'CHIA.   The name of a
genus of plants.
  Lysimachia Nummula'ria. Money-
wort.
  Lysimachia  Purpurea.   Lythrum
sahcaria.
  LYSSA CANINA.  Hydrophobia.
  LYSSODECTUS.    From  Xvaaa,
canine madness, and oax»<w, I bite. One
laboring  under hydrophobia.
  LYTHRUM.  The name of a genus
of plants.
  Lythrum Salica'ria.  WiUow herb.
  LYTTA VESICATORIA. Cantha-
ris.
I   Lytta Vitta'ta.   Potato fly.
the flour of wheat. It is eaten, when
boiled, in soup, &c.
 «MACE.   The  arillus,  or  covering
which envelops the nutmeg.   It has a
pleasant aromatic odor, and a warm,
moderately pungent taste.  It is of an
oleaginous nature and yellowish color.
  MACERATION.  Maceratw; from
macero, I soften by water.  The infusion,
either with or without heat, of a solid
substance in a liquid, with  a view of
extracting its virtues.
  MACIES.  Atrophy; emaciation.
  MACROBIOSIS.  Longevity. 
MAG
449
MAG
   MACROBIOTIC.  From  juoxpoj,
 great, long, and j3(,o$, life.   Long-lived.
   MACROCEPHALUS.  From uax-
 poj, great, and xetyaxr;, head.  Large
 headed.
   MACRO'PIPER.  Long pepper.
   MACROPMEA.   From uaxpos,
 long, and rtvea, I breathe.   A  long or
 deep inspiration.
   MACULA. A spot. A permanent
 discoloration of some portion of the
 skin, as in the case of nozvus, ephelis, &c.
   Macula Germinatiaa.  See Nucleus
 Germinativus.
   Macula Matricis. Naevus mater-
 nus.
   MACULAE.  The  eighth order, in
 Dr. Willan's arrangement of cutane-
 ous diseases,  comprehending  ephelis,
 nozvus, opilus and moles.
   MACULATE. Maculatus.  Spotted.
   MADAR.  Mudar.
   MADAME DE LA VEILLIER'S
 WATER FOR THE TEETH.  $.—
 Cinnamon,  § ij;  cloves,  3 vi; recent
 rinds of lemons, § iss; red roses, dried,
 | i;  scurvy  grass,  § viij;  alcohol,
 lb iij- Pound the cinnamon and cloves,
 divide the roses and lemon rinds, bruise
 the scurvy-grass;  macerate in the alco-
 hol for twenty-four hours, and  distil in
 a water bath.
   MADARO'SIS.  From  uaSos, bald*.
 Loss of the hair, especially of the eye-
 lashes.
  MADDER.  Rubia tinctorum.
   MADNESS. Insanity.
  Madness, Canine.  Hydrophobia.
  MADOR.  Moisture.
  MAGGOT PIMPLE. Acnepunctata.
  MAGISTE'RIUM PLUMBI.  Car-
bonate of lead.
  MAG'ISTERY.'Magisterium; from
magister, a master.  A name applied by
the old chemists to a method of prepar-
ing any  secret  medicines, inducing the
belief that it  was done by a masterly
process.   The term was also applied to
certain precipitates.
  MAG'ISTRAL.   Medicines prepar-
ed extemporaneously.                I
     38*
   MAGNES.  A magnet.
   MAGNE'SIA.  From magnes,  the
 magnet, because it  was supposed to
 have the power of attracting any prin-
 ciple from the  air.   The name of  one
 of the alkaline earths, having a metaUic
 basis. Magnesium.
   Magnesia  Calcinata.    Calcined
 magnesia.  Protoxyd of magnesium.
   Magnesia, Henry's.  A preparation
 of calcined magnesia.
   Magnesia Usta. Magnesia calcinata.
   Magnesia Vitriolata.  Sulphate of
 magnesia.
   Magnesia Water. Fluid magnesia.
   MAGNESLE CARBONAS. Mag-
 nesia; subcarbonas. Magnesia alba. Car-
 bonate of magnesia.
   Magnesle Sulphas.  Sulphas mag-
 nesiaz purificata.  Magnesia vitriolata.
 Sal cathartkus amarus.  Sal cathartkum
 amarum.  Sulphate of magnesia.   Ep-
 som salt.
   MAGNESIUM.  The metal which
 constitutes the base of magnesia.
   Magnesium, Oxyd of. Magnesia.
   Magnesium, Chloride  of.  Mag-
 nesii chloridum.
   MAGNET.  Mayv^s, from magnesia,
 in Asia Minor, whence it was obtained.
 The loadstone; an amorphous, oxydula-
 ted ore of iron, having the  property of
 attracting iron, and  some of its ores,
 and of pointing by one  of its extremi-
 ties to the north pole.
   MAGNETIC. Magneticus.  Belong-
 ing, or relating, to the magnet.
   Magnetic Fluid.   The impondera-
 ble fluid to which the magnet owes its
 virtues.
   MAG'NETISM.   That department
 of science which investigates the prop-
 erties of the magnet.
   Magnetism,  Animal.   Mesmerism.
 The pretended  science  which  claims,
 that by means of an electro-nervous  in-
 fluence, one person can be made to con-
 trol all the  actions and sensations of
 another.  It is hardly  necessary to say,
that  no  evidence of the existence of
such a fluid exists. 
MAL
450
MAL
  MAGNO'LIA. The name of a ge-
nus of floAvering trees.
  Magnolia Acumina'ta.   This spe-
cies  of magnolia grows to the  height
of seventy or eighty feet.   It is called
the cucumber tree,  from the resemb-
lance of its fruit to the garden cucumber.
  Magnolia Glauca.  A shrub which
sometimes grows to  the height of forty
feet.  Its flowers are large, of a cream
color, and gratefully odorous.
  Magnolia  Grandiflora.  The big
laurel magnolia, which, in the southern
states, rivals, in magnitude,  the  largest
forest trees.
  MAGNUM  DEI BONUM.   Cin-
chona.
  Magnum Os.  The third bone of the
lower row of the carpus, counting from
the thumb.
  MAHOGANY TREE.   Swietenia
mahagoni.
  MAHON.   Author of a curious and
interesting work on the Teeth, entitled,
the Observing Dentist, &,c.  Paris, year
VI.  This work  contains much valua-
ble information on the semiology of the
teeth, with some interesting observations
on  the diseases of the maxillary sinus.
  MAIDENHAIR.  Adiantum.
  Maidenhair,  Black.  Leek fern.
  Maidenhair,  Golden. Polytrichum.
  MAIZE.  Indian corn.  Zea mays.
  MAJANTHEMUM. The may lily.
  MAJORANA. Sweet marjoram.
  MAL.  A disease.
  Mal de la Rosa.  An endemic dis-
ease of the Asturias;  a variety of pel-
lagra.
   Mal de Dent.  Odontalgia.
   Mal de San Laza'ro.  A severe
leprosy.
   Mal de Si am. Yellow fever.
   Mal del Sole.  Pellagra.
   Mal des Ardens. A name given to a
 species of pestilential erysipelas, that pre-
 vailed in France in the twelfth century.
   Mal Rouge de Cayenne.  Cayenne
 leprosy.
   MA'LA.  The cheek.
   MALABATHRUM. The leaves of
a tree of India, supposed to be the lau-
rus cassia.
  MALA'CIA.   From uaXaxos, soft,
effeminacy.  Longing for some particu-
lar aliment, with  disgust for common
articles of diet, as is the case with per-
sons affected with  chronic gastritis, and
in chlorotic and pregnant females.
  MALACO'SIS.  From uaXaxos, soft.
Softening of a tissue or organ, as in the
case of mollities ossium, mollitks cerebri,
&c.
  MALACOSTEON.  From pataxoj,
soft, and oateov, a bone.  Softening of
bones.
  MALACTICA. Emollients.
  MALADY.  Disease.
  MALAG'MA.   From  uaXaoaa,  to
soften. An emollient application.
  MALAR.  Molaris ; from mala, the
cheek. Belonging, or pertaining, to the
cheek.
  MALAM'BO BARK.  Matias bark.
  MALA'RIA.  Miasm.
  MALA'RIOUS. Resulting from, or
connected with, malaria.
  MALE. The mascuhne sex of ani-
mals. Also, the axilla.
  Male Fern.   Aspidium filix mas.
  Male Speedwell. Veronica officin-
alis.
  MALFORMATION.  Malformatio.
Wrong formation, or structure of apart,
or organ.  A deviation from natural de-
velopment or structure.
  MALIC ACID.   Acidum malicum.
The acid of apples, pears,  &c.
  MALIG'NANT.   Malignus.  Ap-
plied to  diseases  of an aggravated  or
dangerous character,  as  pestilential
fevers; cancers, &c.
   MALINGERER.  One who feigns
disease.
   MALIS.  Maliasmus.  A cutaneous
affection, produced  by parasitical  in-
sects.
   Malis Acari.  Tick bites.
   Malis  Filarie. The Guinea-worm
disease.
   Malis Pediculi.  Lousiness.
   MALLAN,  JOHN.  Practical  Ob- 
MAL
451
MAM
servations on the Physiology and Dis-
eases of the Teeth, by.  London, 1835.
  MALLEABILITY.   Maleabilitas;
from malkus, a hammer.   Susceptible
of extension under the blows of a ham-
mer, a property possessed by several of
the metals, and gold, in a higher  de-
gree than any of the others.
   MALLEI ANTERIOR.  The laxa-
tor tympani muscle of the ear.
   Mallei Internus. The tensor tym-
pani muscle.
   MALLE'OLAR.  Malleolaris. Per-
taining to the ankles.
   Malleolar Arteries.  Two arter-
ies of the ankle  derived from the ante-
rior tibial.
   MALLE'OLUS.  The two projec-
tions formed by the tibia  and fibula at
the ankle, the internal, is called the mol-
leolus internus, and the external, malleolus
externus.
   MALLEUS.  A  hammer.   The
 outermost  of the  four bones of the ear
 is so named from its shape.
   MALLOW, MARSH.  Althaea offi-
 cinalis.
   Mallow, Vervain.  Malva alcea.
   MALPIGHI, ACINI OF.  A num-
 ber of smaU dark spots, scattered through
 the plexus  formed by the blood vessels
 and uriniferous tubes in the kidney.
   MALPIG'HIA  GLABRA.    The
 Barbadoes  cherry.
   MALT.    Barley, or  other  grain,
 made  to germinate, by  steeping it in
 water, and afterwards drying in a kiln,
 for the purpose of forming beer.
   MALTHA.  From paXatta, I  soft-
 en. Mineral pitch.
   MA'LUM.  A disease.  Also, an ap-
 ple.
   Malum  Canum.  Malum cotoneum.
 The quince.
   Malum  Citreum.  The citron.
   Malum  Insanum.  The mad-apple
 plant, or egg-fruit
   Malum  Medicum.  The lemon.
   Malum  Mortuum.  A cutaneous
 affection in which the affected parts ap-
 pear to be  struck with death.
  Malum Pilare.  Trichosis.
  MALUS.  Pirusmalus.  The apple.
  Malus Indica.  Bilimbi biting-bing,
of Bontius.   A tree of the  East Indies.
  MAL'VA.  The name of a genus of
plants.
  Malva Verbenaca.  The  vervain
mallow.
  Malva Sylvestris.  The common
mallow.
  MALVA VISCUS.  Althaea officina-
lis.
  MAMA-PIAN.   The master yaw of
framboesia.
  MAMIL'LA.   The breast of man.
Also, the nipple.
  MAMMA.  The glandular organ
peculiar to mammiferous  animals, im-
perfectly developed in the male,  and des-
tined in the female, for the secretion of
milk.
  MAMMA'LIA.  From mamma, the
breast.  A class of animals, comprising
all those which suckle their young.
  MAMMARY.   Mammarius;  from
mamma, the breast.  Relating to the
breast.
  Mammary Abscess.  Abscess of the
breast.
  Mammary  Arteries.    They  are
three in number, one internal, and two
external.  The internal  is a branch of
the subclavian, and gives off the medias-
tinal,  thymol,  and: pericardal arteries.
The external are given off by  the axil-
lary artery.
   Mammary Gland. The organ which
secretes the  milk.
   Mammary  Sarcoma.  A tumor of
 the texture and color of the mammary
gland, occurring in various parts of the
body.
   Mammary Veins.  These veins fol
 low the course of the mammary arte-
ries.
   MAMMIF'ERA.  Mammalia.
   MAMMIL'LA. The nipple.
   MAM'MILLARY. Mammillaris.—
Pertaining to the nipple or breast.
   Mammillary Eminences.  Corpora
albicantia.   Two white bodies,  of the 
              MAN

size of a pea, behind the tuber cinereum,
and between the crura cerebri.
  MAM'MILLATED.  Mammiform.
Mastoid; resembling a nipple.
  MANDI'BULA.  From mando, to
chew.  A jaw.  In Zoology, the lower
jaw of mammals, both jaws of birds, and
in insects, the upper or anterior pair of
jaws.
  MANDRA'GORA.  The mandrake.
  MANDRAKE.  Atropa mandrago-
ra.
  MANDUCATION.   Manducatio.
Mastication.
  MAN'GANESE.  A greyish-white,
hard, brittle metal, of  a granular tex-
ture.
  Manganese,  Black  Oxyd  of.—
Manganese, oxyd  of.  Manganese, bi-
noxyd of. Manganese, peroxyd of. This
oxyd is much used in the manufacture
of porcelain teeth, for  coloring the en-
amel.  It is never,  however,  used by
itself for this purpose, but in combina-
tion with some other oxyds.
  Manganese, Sulphate of.  A very
soluble, rose colored salt.
  MANGIF'ERA IN'DICA.    The
mango tree of Asia.
  MANGO TREE.   Mangifera indi-
ca.
  MA'NIA.  From fiaivouai,  I rage.
Raving madness.
  Mania a  Potu.  Delirium  tremens.
  MAN'IAC. One affected with mania.
  MANIOC. Jatropha manihot.
  MANIPULATION.  From manus,
a hand.   The art  of using or handling
instruments.  In  Chemistry, the prepa-
ration of substances for experiment, and
in Pharmacy, the preparation of medi-
cines.
  MANIPULATOR.   One who ma-
nipulates.
  MANIP'ULUS.  A handful.
  MANNA.   A saccharine  matter,
which exudes  from many plants, es-
pecially, the fraxinus ornus, and is used
as a laxative.
  Manna Brigantiaca.  Manna of the
larch.
12              MAR

   Manna Calabrina.  Calabrian man-
 na.
   Manna Canulata.  Flaky manna.
   Manna Metallorum.  Calomel.
   MANU'BRIUM MANUS. The ra-
 dius.
   MANULU'VIUM.  A hand bath.
   MANUS.  The hand.
   MAPLE  SUGAR.   Sugar made
 from the juice of the acer saccharinum.
   MARANTA.  The name of a ge-
 nus of plants.
   Maranta  Arundinacea.  Arrow-
 root
   Maranta  Galan'ga.  Galanga mi-
 nor.  The smaller galangal.
   MARAS'MUS.   From  fxapaivu, to
 grow lean.  Atrophy.  Emaciation.
   MARATH'RUM.  Sweet fennel.
   Marathrum   Sylvestre.   Hog's
 fennel.
   MARCASITA. Marcasite. Pyrites.
   Marcasita Alba.  Bismuth.
   Marcasita Plumbea.  Antimony.
   MARCET'S  BLOW-PIPE.   A
 spirit-lamp fed by a jet of oxygen.
   MARCHANTIA.   The name of a
 genus of plants.
   Marchantia Polymor'pha. Liver-
 wort.
   MAR'COR.  Emaciation.  Atrophy.
   MARCO'RES.  The name of an or-
 der in the class cachexias, of Dr. Cullen,
 embracing such diseases as are charac-
 terized by general emaciation.
   MARE'S-TAIL.  Hippuris vulgar-
 is.
   MARGARITA.   Pearl.  Also,  a
 tumor of the eye resembling pearl.
   MARGIN ATE.  Bordered.
   MARIGOLD.   Calendula  officina-
 lis.
   Marigold Fig.   Mesembryanthe-
 mum crystallinum.
   Marigold, Marsh.   Galtha palus-
 tris.
   MARINE ACID.  Acidum muriati-
 cum.
   Marine Salt.  Sodae murias.
   MARJORAM.  Sweet marjoram.
   MAR'MALADE.   A confection  of
4i 
MAR
453
MAS
 quinces, or other fruit, and sugar, reduc-
 ed to a pultaceous consistence.
   MARMA'RYGA.  From uapuaipa,
 to shine.  Flashings, or coruscations be-
 fore the eye.
   MARMONT,  J. L.  Odontotechny,
 or the Art of the Dentist;  a Didactic
 and Descriptive poem, in four cantos,
 by. Dedicated to the ladies, Paris, 1825.
    MARMON.  Marble.
   MARROW.   The fatty  substance
 contained  in the  medullary  cavities in
 the long cylindrical bones.
   Marrow, Spinal. The medulla spi-
 nalis.
   MARRU'BIUM.  The  name of a
 genus of plants.
   Marrubium Alyssum. Galen'smad-
 wort.
   Marrubium  Aquaticum.  Water
 hoarhound.
   Marrubium Vulgare.  Marmbium.
 Marrubium album.   Common  hoar-
 hound.
   MARS.  Iron.
   Mars Solubilis.  Ferrum tartariza-
 tum.
   MA RSH.  A tract of low land cover-
 ed with water.  The emanations from
 marshes are a fruitful source of disease.
   Marsh-Mallow.  Althaea officinalis.
   Marsh Tea.  Ledum palustre.
   MARSUPIAL  Marsupialis;  from
 marsupium, a purse. The obturator inter-
 nus muscle.  Also,the abdominal pouch
 of the opossum,  kangaroo,  &c, into
 Avhich their young are received and nour-
 ished for some time after they are born.
   MARSUPIAL'IA.  Animals which
 have the marsupial pouch.
  MARTEL, N.  M.  On  Odontalgia,
 and Affections which simulate it, by
 Paris, 1807.
  MARTIAL.  Martialis; from mars,
 iron.  Chalybeate.
  Martial  ^Ethiops.   Protoxyd  of
iron.
  Martial Salts.  Salts of  iron.
  MARTIN.  Author of  a  Disserta-
tion on  the Teeth, published, Paris,
 1670.
   MARTIS LIMATURA. Iron filings.
   MAS'CHALE.  The axilla.
   MASS A.  From  uaaoa, I mix.  A
 mass.  Generally applied to the com-
 pound from which pills are to beformed.
   MASSE'SIS.  Mastication.
   MASSETER.  From uaaaaouai, I
 chew.  A  muscle  of the lower jaw,
 situated at the side and back part of the
 face, in front of  the meatus  externus.
 It arises by two portions, the one, an-
 terior and tendinous  from the superior
 maxilla where it joins the malar bone,
 the other, from the inferior edge of the
 malar bone  and the  zygomatic arch as
 far back as the glenoid  cavity, and is
 inserted, tendinous and fleshy, into the
 external side of the ramus of the jaw,
 and its angles, as  far up as the coronoid
 process.  The use of this muscle, when
 both  portions act together, is to close
 the jaws; if the inferior acts alone, the
 jawis brought forward ; if the  posterior,
 it is drawn backward.
  MASSETERIC.   Relating, or  be-
 longing, to the masseter muscle.
  MASTIC.  The  tree which affords
 the mastich.
  MASTICATION. Masticatio, from
 mastico,  I chew.   The act of chewing
 food, or the process by which it is com-
 minuted, and mixed with saliva, pre-
 paratory to being introduced into  the
 stomach.   The organs of mastication
 are the superior and inferior maxiUary,
 and  the palate bones; the teeth, and
 the temporal,  masseter, and the exter-
 nal and internal pterygoid muscles.  To
 these, might also be added the lips, the
 various movements of which depend
 upon the single and combined  action of
 their  muscles  which extend  over the
 greater portion of  the face.
  The upper jaw being  rendered im-
 movable  by its connection with  the
 bones of the head, is  aptly compared
 by Richerand, to  an anvil, on which
 the lower jaw, in the act of mastication,
 "strikes as a movable hammer," but
the motions of the latter, and the pres-
sure which it exerts,  in these efforts, 
MAS
454
MAS
 upon the former, would have the effect,
 continues this learned physiologist, to
 displace the different bones of the face,
 were they merely placed in juxtaposi-
 tion, or only  held together by sutures,
 if not so supported as "to transmit to
 the skuU the double effort which presses
 on it from below upwards, and pushes
 out laterally."  Hence we find the fab-
 ric of the face supported in an upward
 direction, by the ascending apophyses
 of the superior maxilla,  the  orbitar
 processes of the  malar and the vertical
 processes of the palate bones; and lat-
 erally,  by the zygomatic processes of
 the  temporal,  which articulates  with
 the malar bones.
   Two distinct actions are concerned
 in mastication.  The first  consists in
 separating a portion of food by means
 of the  incisores, and the  second,  its
 m anducation by the molares. The lower
 jaw being  depressed, the food is placed
 between the lower and upper incisores,
 when by the action of the elevator mus-
 cles ; their edges are brought together;
 the condyles and interarticular cartilages
 retaining  the position on the articular
 eminences which they  were made to
 assume in  the first  movement of the
 jaw, the grinding surfaces of the molares
 do not  meet.  But as soon as  the in-
 cisores come together, the lower jaw is
 drawn slightly backwards by the con-
 traction of the temporal and  masseter
 muscles.  By this movement the lower
 incisores pass backwards and slightly
 upwards, separating the food by an ac-
 tion which has been  compared  to  the
 cutting  of a pair of shears.  The lower
jaAV is now depressed  sufficiently to ad-
 mit the separated portion of food be-
 tween the superior and inferior molares,
 which is conveyed there, by the action of
 the tongue, tips and cheeks.  It is then
 successively elevated   and  depressed,
 while, at  the  same time, a degree of
 lateral motion is given to it by the alter-
 nate action of the external and internal
 pterygoid muscles. By this complicated
movement of elevation and partial rota-
 tion, the process of mastication is effect-
 ed.
   The  amount  of lateral  and rotary
 motion, however, is greatly influenced
 by the relationship which the teeth sus-
 tain  to  each other when the mouth is
 closed.  It is much greater when the in-
 cisores of the upper jaAV strike plumb
 upon the lower, than when the former
 shuts over  the  latter.  The process of
 mastication, however, is very much aid-
 ed by the adaptation of the  tubercles of
 the molares of one jaw, to the depressions
 of those of the  other, into which they
 constantly  glide as the teeth come to-
 gether.
   The food, during the process of mas-
 tication,  is penetrated by  the saliva,
 Avhich  facilitates  the reduction of it
 into a pultaceous mass.  Reduced to this
 state, it is ready for deglutition.
   Mastication is justly regarded as the
 first step in the process of digestion, and
 viewed in this light, it assumes an im-
 portance in the functions of the animal
 economy Avhich would not otherwise
 attach to it.  Upon the complete disinte-
 gration of alimentary substances, healthy
 digestion greatly depends, and it is,
 doubtless, in a  great degree, owing to
 the  imperfect manner in which it is
 effected, that many of the numerous
 cases of dyspepsia, which are continu-
 aUy occurring, are  measurably  attribu-
 table.
   MASTICATORY.   The  instru-
 ments and process of mastication. Also,
 a substance intended to be chewed for
 the purpose of exciting  salivary secre-
 tion.
   MASTICH.   A concrete resinous
 exudation from the pistacia kntiscus.
   Mastich-Herb.   Thymus mastichi-
na.
   Mastich Tree.  Pistacia lentiscus.
   MASTITIS. Frowuaotos,the breast,
and itis, signifying inflammation.  In-
flammation of the breast.
   MASTIX.  Mastich.
  MASTODYN'IA.   From  uaaros,
the breast, and oSwjj, pain.  Pain in the 
MAT
455
MAU
breast, generally of a neuralgic charac-
ter.
  Mastodynia Apostemato'sa. Inflam-
mation and abscess of the breast
  MASTOID.  Mastoideus; fromuaa-
tos, a breast, and  eifos, resemblance.
Nipple-shaped. Also, processes of bone
shaped like a nipple, and the sterno-cle-
ido mastoideus muscle.
   Mastoid Foramen.   A hole by the
 side of the mastoid process.
   Mastoid  Process.   A large, round
protuberance at the  inferior and  poste-
rior part of the temporal bone.
   MASTOIDEUS.  The sterno-cleido-
mastoideus muscle.
   Mastoideus Lateralis.  The com-
plexus minor.
   MASTON'CUS.   A tumor of the
breast.
   MASTURBATION.  Excitation of
the genital organs with the hand.
   MAT.   Dull.   In  Patlwlogy, ap-
plied to the chest, when, on percussion,
it emits a duU, obscure sound.
   MATERIA.  Matter.
   Materia Medica.  That branch of
medical  science  which  embraces the
knowledge of medicines, their action
on the animal economy,  and mode of
administration.
  MATI'CO. Piper angustifotium.
  MATONIA  CARDAMOMUM.—
Amomum cardamomum.
  MATRASS. Matracium. A retort;
a glass vessel with a long neck, used in
chemistry and pharmacy.
  MATRES CEREBRI. The menin-
ges of the brain.
  MATRICARIA. The name of a ge-
nus of plants.
  Matricaria  Chamomil'la.   Wild
corn. Dog's  chamomile.
  Matricaria Parthenium.   Fever-
few.  Mother's-wort.
  MATRIX. The uterus. The epithet
is also apphed by French writers to the
sac of a tooth.  In Mineralogy, the earthy
matter which  accompanies ore.
  MATTER.  Every substance which
enters into the composition of a body,
or which  has sensible  properties.  In
 Pathology, pus, and other morbid  evac-
 uations.
   MAT'URATIVE. Maturans.  Rem-
 edies which promote the  suppuration
 of an inflammatory tumor.
   MATURATION.  Maturatio.  Pro-
 gress to maturity of an abscess.
   MATURITY. Perfect development.
 Ripeness.
   MAURY, J. G. F.  Observations on
 Porcelain Teeth,  by.  Paris,  1816.—
 Manual of the Dentist, for  the applica-
 cation of Incorruptible Artificial Teeth,
 &c. by.  Paris, 1820 and 1822.
   MAURY, F. Complete Treatise on
 the Dental Art, founded on actual ex-
 perience, by.  New edition, Paris, 1833.
 This  very excellent  treatise has been
 translated into  English, by Dr.  J. B.
 Savier,  pubhshed, Philadelphia,  1843.
   Maury's Dentifrice Powder. 1$.—
 Charcoal of white wood, 256 grammes;
Peruv. bark, 128 grammes;  white su-
gar, 236;  oil of mint, 16; essence of
cinnamon, 8,  and muscated spirit of
amber, 2 grammes.
   Maury's  Detersive Powder for
the Teeth.   1$.—Red  bark,  § ij ;
 English magnesia,  § viij; cochineal,
 § iss; calcined alum,  § i;  cream of
 tartar, foss; essential  oil  of English
 mint, 3 v; essential oil of cinnamon,
 3 iij ; spirit of amber, musk rose, 3 i.
 Reduce the first five ingredients  sepa-
 rately to an impalpable powder; then
 porphyrize the alum with the cochineal,
 put in the cream  of tartar and  bark,
 place the essence in another vessel with
 the magnesia, and when they have been
absorbed, mix with the first powder and
pass through a fine sieve.
   Maury's Philodontic  and  Anti-
spasmodic Liquor. $.—Alcohol of 38
degrees, ftij;  essential oil of Engfish
mint, §i; neroli, 3 iij; essence of cin-
namon, § ij; spirit of amber, musk rose,
3 ij; sul. ether, 3 ss.  Put eight or ten
drops  in a glass  one-third full of water,
dip a brush in  and rub the teeth and
gums  with it. 
MAX
456
MAX
   MAW-WORM.   Ascaris vermicu-
 laris.
   MAXIL'LA.  From uaaaaa, I chew.
 The jaw, both upper and lower.
   Maxilla, Inferior. The lower jaw.
   Maxilla, Superior. The upper jaw.
   MAXILLA RE  INFERIUS OS.—
 Maxilla, inferior. Mandibula. The low-
 er jawis the largest bone of the face, and
 though but one  bone in  the adult, con-
 sists of two symmetrical pieces in the
 fetus.
   It occupies the lower part of the face,
 has  a  semicircular form, and extends
 back to the base of the skull.
   It is divided into the body and extrem-
 ities.
   The body is the middle and horizon-
 tal portion—this is divided along its cen-
 tre by  a ridge  called the symphysis—
 which is the place of separation in the
 infant state—the middle portion pro-
jects at its  inferior  part  into an emi-
 nence called the mental process or chin—
 on each side of which is a depression for
 the muscles of the lower lip, and exter-
 nally to these depressions, are two fora-
 mina, caUed anterior mental, for  trans-
 mitting an artery and nerve of the same
 name.
   The horizontal portion or sides  ex-
 tend backwards  and outwards—and on
 the outer surface have an oblique line
 for the attachment of muscles.
   On the inner surface of the middle
 part behind the chin, along  the line of
 the symphysis, there is a chain of emi-
 nences  called genial processes—to  the
 superior of which the frenum linguae is
 attached, to  the  middle, the genio-hyo-
glossi, and to the inferior  the  genio-
 hyoid muscles—on  each side of these
eminences are depressions for the sub-
lingual  glands—and  on each  side of
these depressions there runs an oblique
ridge upwards and outwards, to the an-
terior part of which is attached the my-
lo-hyoid muscle, and to the posterior
part, the superior  constrictor of the
pharynx—this latter muscle is conse-
 quently involved more  or less in the
 extraction of the last  molar teeth.  Ee-
 low this line there is  a groove for the
 mylo-hyoid nerve.
   The  upper  edge of the body is sur-
 mounted by the alveolar processes, and
 cavities—corresponding in number and
 size to the roots of the teeth.
   The  lower edge called the base is
 rounded, obtuse, and receives the super-
 ficial facia and platysma muscle.
   The extremities of the body have two
 large processes rising up at an  obtuse
 angle named the ramui of the lower jaAV.
 These  processes are  flat  and broad on
 their surfaces, the outer is covered by
 the masseter muscle—the inner has a
 deep groove which leads to a large hole,
 the posterior dental or  maxillary fora-
 men, for transmitting  the inferior dental
 nerves and vessels  to the  dental canal
 running  along  the  roots of the teeth.
 This foramen is protected by a spine, to
 which the internal  lateral hgament is
 attached.
   The ramus  has a  projection  at its
 lower part, which is  the angle of the
 lower jaw—its upper ridge is curved,
 having a process at each end—the ante-
 rior one is the coronoid process;  this is
 triangular, and has the temporal muscle
 inserted into it—the posterior is the con-
 dyloid, and articulates  with the temporal
 bone.  This process has a neck for the
 insertion of the external pterygoid mus-
 cle.
   The structure of the lower jaw is com-
 pact externally, cellular within, and
 traversed in the greater part of its ex-
 tent by the inferior dental canal.
   The  lower  jaw  is developed from
 two centres of ossification, which meet
 at the symphysis. It  is articulated to
 the temporal bones by the condyles, and
 several ligaments, to Avit: external and
 internal lateral, the capsular, inter-max-
 illary, stylo-maxillary, and  two syno-
vial membranes.  It is also articulated
 with the teeth.
   Maxillare Superius os.  Maxilla,
superior.  The  upper jaw  is composed
of two bones, which  are united on the 
MAX
457
MAX
median line of the face.  They occupy
the anterior upper part of the face, are
of very irregular form, and each consist
of a body, processes and foramina.
   The body is the  central part of the
bone and has four surfaces, namely, the
anterior or facial surface, the  posterior
or pterygoid, the superior or orbital, and
the inferior or palatine surface.
   The anterior surface is irregularly con-
vex, and has a depression about its cen-
tre just above the canine and first bicus-
pid teeth,  caUed the canine  fossa—im-
mediately  above Avhich is the infra-or-
bitar foramen for transmitting an artery
and nerve of same name—its upper and
inner edge  forms part of the lower mar-
gin of the orbit—from the inner extrem-
ity of which proceeds upwards towards
the nasal and  frontal bones, a long and
rather flat process, the nasal process of
the superior maxilla—it is of a pyrami-
dal form; its posterior edge forming the
internal margin of the orbit and helping
to make the lachrymal groove,—its an-
terior edge receives the cartilages of the
nose—its upper corresponds to the nasal
bones, and its summit to the frontal,
while its outer surface gives attachment
to muscles, and its inner enters into the
formation of the nose.
   From the lower edge  of its anterior
surface, the alveolar processes and cavi-
ties are formed—these consist in depres-
sions of a more or less conical  form and
correspond to the number of teeth, or
roots of  teeth, they are intended  to re-
ceive.
  The posterior surface has  a  bulging,
called tuberosity, which is connected to
the palate bones, and bounds behind the
antrum—is perforated by three or  four
small holes—the posterior dental canals
which go to  the  alveoli  of  the molar
teeth.
  The lower surface  extends from the
alveolar  processes in  front to  the hori-
zontal plate of the palate bones behind,
called the palatine processes, which are
rough below, forming the roof of the
mouth, and smooth above, making the '
 floor of the nostrils.  They are united
 along the median tine, at the  anterior
 part of which is the foramen incisivum,
 having two openings in the nares above,
 Avhile there is but one in the mouth be-
 low.
   The upper or orbital surface is trian-
 gular in shape, with  its  base  in  front
 forming the anterior, lower and internal
 edge of the orbit—while  its apex ex-
 tends back to the bottom, it forms the
 floorof the orbit androof of the antrum—
 its internal edge is  united to the  lach-
 rymal, ethmoid,  and palate bones—its
 external edge  assists in  forming the
 spheno-maxiUary fissure, and along its
 central surface is seen  a canal running
 from behind, forwards and inwards, the
 infra-orbitar canal.   This canal divides
 into two, the smaller is the anterior den-
 tal, which descends to the anterior alve-
 oli along the front waU of the antrum—
 the other is the proper continuation of
 the canal and  ends at the infra-orbitar
 hole—along the upper part of the line
 uniting the palatine processes there is a
 ridge, the nasal crest, for  receiving the
 vomer, and at  the  anterior part of this
 crest there is a projection forwards, the
 nasal spine—at the  external and upper
 part of the body is a malar process.
   The body of the  superior maxiUa is
 occupied by a large and very important
 cavity called the  antrum highmm-ianum
 or maxiUary sinus.  This cavity is some-
 what triangular in  shape, with its base
 looking to the  nose, and its apex to the
 malar process.  Its upper wall is formed
 by the floor of the orbit, its lower by the
 alveoh of the molar teeth, which some-
 times perforate this  cavity. The canine
 fossa bounds  it in front, while  the tu-
 berosity closes it behind.
   The opening of  this cavity is on its
 nasal portion or base  into the middle
 meatus of the nose,  and in the skeleton
 is large, while in  the natural state it is
 much contracted  by the ethmoid bone
 above, the inferior spongy  bone below,
the palate bone behind, the lachrymal
bone in front, and by the mucous mem- 
MAX
458
MAX
brane which passes through this open-
ing and lines the antrum.
  This cavity  communicates with the
anterior ethmoidal ceUs and frontal sinus.
  The structure of the upper  jaw is
thick  and  ceUular in its alveolar and
other processes.
   It is articulated with two bones of the
cranium, the  frontal and ethmoid, and
seven of the  face, namely, the  nasal,
malar, lachrymal, palate, inferior spon-
gy, vomer, to its fellow, and also to the
teeth.
   Its development is very complicated,
 and is stated to be  by as many osseous
points as that of the body and its various
 processes.
   MAXILLARY.  Maxillaris; from
 maxilla,  the jaw.   Pertaining  to the
jaws.
   Maxillary  Artery, External.—
 See Facial Artery.
   Maxillary Artery, Internal. One
 of the terminal branches of the external
 carotid.  It commences in the substance
 of the parotid gland, opposite the mea-
 tus auditorius externus, then  goes hori-
 zontally behind the neck of the condyle
 of  the  lower  jaw to  the pterygoidei
 muscles, between which it passes, and
 then proceeds forwards to the tuberosity
 of the  superior maxillary bone—from
 thence it takes a vertical  direction up-
 wards between the temporal and exter-
 nal pterygoid muscles to the zygomatic
 fossa, where it again becomes horizon-
 tal, and, finally, ends in the spheno-max-
 iUary fossa, by  dividing  into  several
 branches.
    Those branches of the internal maxil-
 lary  supplying the passive organs  of
  mastication, or the superior and inferior
  maxiUary bones, with the teeth, are the
  inferior maxillary or dental artery, the
  alveolar or superior dental, the infra-or-
  bital, the superior   palatine,  and the
  spheno-palatine.
    Maxillary Bone, Inferior. Max-
  illare inferius os.
    Maxillary Bone, Superior. Max-
  illare superius os.
  Maxillary Gi.and.  Gbndulamax-
ilbris. One of the three salivary glands,
situated  under the base of the lower
jaw, resting upon  the hyo-glossus  and
mylo-hyoideus  muscles, and separated
from the parotid gland by a process of
facia, and from the subhngual by the
mylo-hyoideus muscle.
  It is of an oval form, pale color, and
like the parotid, consists in its structure
of small granulations,  held together by
cellular tissue,  and each having a small
excretory  duct, which,  successively,
uniting with one  another, finally forms
one common duct, to wit: the duct of
Wharton, which passes above the mylo-
hyoid muscle, and  running forwards
and inwards, en ters the mouth beknv the
tip of the tongue at a papilla  seen on
either side of the fraenum linguae.
   The use of this  gland is the  same as
the parotid,  to secrete the saliva, and
its duct is the route by which it is con-
ducted into the mouth.
   Maxillary Nerve, Inferior. This
nerve forms the third great division of
the fifth pair.  It  is the largest  branch,
 and passes from the ganglion of Casser
 through the foramen ovale of the sphe-
 noid bone to the zygomatic fossa.
   This nerve,  as stated, is united to the
 anterior or motor root, Avhich come to-
 gether on the outside  of  the  foramen
 ovale,  then in  the zygomatic fossa, the
 inferior maxiUary  nerve  divides into
 two branches:  1. An external, or supe-
 rior.   2. An internal, or inferior.  The
 external is the motor branch, and gives
 off the masseteric, the  temporal, buccal,
 and pterygoid branches.
    The internal  division of this nerve
 consists of three branches, all of which
 give  sensation, and  are, the  anterior
 auricular, the gustatory, and the inferw
 dental.
    Maxillary Nerve, Superior. This
 nerve proceeds from the middle of the
 Casserian ganglion, passes through the
 foramen rotundum of the sphenoid bone,
 into the pterygo-maxillary fossa—here
 it enters the canal of the floor  of the or- 
MAX
459
MAX
bit, the  infra-orbitar canal, traverses its
whole extent, and emerges on the face
at the  infra-orbitar foramen, where it
terminates in numerous  filaments in
the muscles and integuments of the up-
per lip  and cheek.
   The  superior  maxillary nerve  sup-
plies the upper jaw, and gives off many
important  branches, which are  as fol-
Ioavs :
   In  the pterygo-maxillary fossa two
branches  descend to  a small  reddish
body called  the ganglion of Meckel, or
the spheno-palatine ganglion, Avhich is
situated on the outer side of the nasal
or vertical plate of the palate bone.
   From  this  ganglion proceed  three
branches:  1. An inferim- descending,
or palatine, nerve. 2. An internal, bte-
ral nasal, or spheno-palatine.   3.  A pos-
terior, pterygoid, or  vidian.  The su-
perior  maxillary  nerve also gives off,
the orbital, and  the  posteriw  dental
nerves.
   Maxillary  Sinus.   Antrum High-
morianun.   Antrum maxilloz superiwis.
See MaxUlare Superius Os.
   Maxillary Sinus,  Diseases  of.—
The diseases of this cavity, though often
of a dangerous and formidable nature,
have received less attention  from the
surgical and  medical practitioner than
almost any to which the body is liable.
Among the  different forms of morbid
action set up in  the maxillary sinus,
are, 1. Inflammation of the lining mem-
brane.   2. A purulent  condition  of its
secretions.  3. Abscess.  4.  Ulceration of
the lining membrane.   5. Caries, necro-
sis and  softening of its osseous parietes.
6. Tumors of the lining membrane and
periosteum;  and, 7. Exostosis of its os-
seous parietes.   Besides  the  above, it
sometimes becomes the seat of injuries
produced by mechanical violence.
  The form which the  disease puts on,
is determined by the state of the consti-
tutional  health or some specific tendency
of the general system, and we can there-
fore readily imagine, that a cause which
in one person, would give rise only to
simple inflammation of the lining mem-
brane, or mucous engorgement, might,
in another,  produce an  ill-conditioned
ulcer, fungus haematodes or osteo-sar-
coma.  Simple  inflammation and mu-
cous  engorgement  not  unfrequently
cause caries  and exfoliation of tfie sur-
rounding osseous tissues, and, as a con-
sequence, in some instances,  even  the
destruction of the life of the patient.
  The importance of early  attention to
these diseases is very apparent, and this
is the more  necessary as it is often dif-
ficult, and sometimes  even impossible
to determine  the eharacter of the dis-
ease,  until it  has  progressed so far as to
have  involved,  to a greater or less ex-
tent, the neighboring parts; when, if it
has not become  incurable, its removal
is, at least, rendered less easy of accom-
plishment. It may, therefore, be safely
assumed, that in a very large majority
of the cases, the danger to be apprehend-
ed results more  from neglect, than any
necessarily fatal  character of the affec-
tion,  so that in forming a prognosis, the
circumstances  to be considered, are the
state  of the  constitutional  health,  the
progress made by the  disease, and the
nature of the injury inflicted by it upon
the surrounding tissues.   If the general
health is not so much impaired, as to
prevent its restoration  by the employ-
ment of proper remedies, and  the dis-
ease has not invaded  the neighboring
structures, the prognosis will be favora-
ble : but if the functional operations of
the body have become much deranged
and the bones of the face and nose seri-
ously implicated, the combined resources
both of medicine and surgery will prove
unavailing.
  The occurrence of disease in this cav-
ity is  often very insidious. It frequently
exists for weeks, and even months, be-
fore its presence is suspected.   For the
most part the diseases of this cavity are
similar  to those  of the  nasal fossae.
There is, however, a  form of disease
which seems to be pecuhar to  it, viz.
mucous engorgement. Deschamps men- 
MAX
460
MAX
tions  two, dropsy and purulent accu-
mulations; the first  of these, properly
speaking, is  never met with, and  au-
thors who  have enumerated it  among
its  diseases have  evidently mistaken
mucous engorgement for it.  The fluids
that accumulate are of a mucous  or
muco-purulent character,  except Avhen
they are the  result of  the disorganiza-
tion of some of the  surrounding parts;
then they are sanious.
  The most simple form of disease that
occurs, is  inflammation  of its lining
membrane, and this, in most instances,
may be said  to precede all  others, and
when unattended by any  other morbid
affection, either local or constitutional,
is easily subdued.
  A purulent condition of the fluids of
the antrum is a very common affection,
and seems  to be dependent upon a bad
habit of body and inflammation of the
lining  membrane,  arising  more fre-
quently from dental  irritation than any
other cause.  This condition of the se-
cretions, sometimes  gives rise to caries
and exfohation of portions of the sur-
rounding bone, and to  fistulous ulcers;
but when dependent upon no other local
cause than simple inflammation of the
lining membrane, such effects seldom re-
sult. When complicated with other mor-
bid conditions, they are not unfrequent
  Ulceration of the lining membrane is
an affection less frequently met with.
It is  rarely,  if ever,   idiopathic,  but
seems rather to be dependent upon some
other local affection, or some specific
constitutional vice, as a scorbutic, scrof-
ulous, or venereal taint. Consequently,
local remedies are seldom adequate  to
its cure.   It is almost  always compli-
cated with fungi of the  hning membrane
and caries  of the walls of the sinus, and
when neglected, it  sometimes takes on
a cancerous  form, and becomes incura-
ble.
  Next  in the order  of arrangement
which the author  proposes to adopt, is
caries of its walls. This, though always
complicated  with  one or  more other
forms of diseased action, seems, never-
less, to be worthy of separate consider-
ation.   Like ulceration  of the lining
membrane, it is an effect of some one
or more other affections.  It may result
from accumulation  of the secretions of
the sinus, ulceration, or from tumors.
  The occurrence of fungi, and other
morbid growths, is less  frequent than
any of the preceding affections;  yet this
cavity is not exempt from  them, and
they constitute  the most dangerous de-
scription of diseases to Avhich the supe-
rior maxilla is subject   Although it is
probable, in their incipient stage, they
might in nearly every instance be radi-
cally  removed, it is  seldom they are
cured after  they have attained  a very
large size, and  implicated in their mor-
bid action the circumjacent tissues.
Inflammation of the Lining Membrane.
  Inflammation of the lining membrane
of the maxillary sinus, when not com-
plicated with any general morbid ten-
dency, or constitutional predisposition,
seldom gives rise to any other  form of
diseased  action;  and  it usually sub-
sides spontaneously on the  removal of
the cause that induced it.  This mem-
brane, in good constitutions, is less sub-
ject to inflammation,  and, consequent-
ly, to any other description of  morbid
action, than those in whom there exists
some vice of body, or unhealthy predis-
position.  Febrile and gastric affections,
eruptive  diseases,  such as measles,
small-pox, &c, &c; syphihs, an exces-
sive and protracted  use of mercurial
medicines,  a  scorbutic  or scrofulous
diathesis of the general system, and, in
short, every thing that has a tendency
to enervate the  vital powers of the body,
increases its irritability.
   When in a  healthy condition, it se-
cretes a shghtly glutinous, transparent
and inodorous  fluid, by which it is con-
stantly  lubricated,  but inflammation
causes these secretions to become vitia-
ted ;  at first, to be less abundant, after-
wards to be secreted in larger quanti- 
MAX •              461               MAX
ties than usual, to be more serous, and
so acrid as sometimes  to irritate the
membrane of the nose over which they
pass, after having escaped from the an-
trum.  It also causes them to exhale an
odor more or  less offensive, according
as the  inflammation is severe or mild.
It moreover gives rise to a thickening of
the membrane,  and, sometimes  to  an
obliteration of the nasal opening.   This
last, rarely occurs, but when it does, an
accumulation of the secretions and other
morbid phenomena, of which Ave shaU
hereafter treat, result from it, as a neces-
sary consequence.
   If, at any time during the continuance
of the  inflammation, the patient is at-
tacked with severe  constitutional dis-
ease, the local affection will be aggra-
vated, and sometimes assume a different
character.
   The inflammation, when  long con-
tinued, degenerates into a chronic form,
and is  sometimes kept up for several
years,  Avithout giving rise to any  other
unpleasant effects  than occasional par-
oxysms of a dull  and  seemingly deep-
seated  pain in the face, and  a vitiated
condition of the fluids of the cavity.
   Symptoms.—The symptoms by which
this affection  is characterized, though
not always precisely the same, are, ne-
vertheless, for the  most part, very sim-
ilar. Boyer describes them to be severe,
fixed,  and deep-seated pain under  the
cheek, extending from the alveolar bor-
der to the lower part of the orbit, local
heat, pulsation, and sometimes fever.
He, however,  teUs us that these symp-
toms are not always present, and that
the disease sometimes exist when it is
not suspected.   Other  affections of the
face and  superior  maxillary, may be
mistaken  for this, and this for others :
but that it should  exist without being
attended with pain or any other  signs
indicative  of  its  presence,  is hardly
probable.
   Deschamps  distinguishes  the symp-
toms from those of other affections of
this cavity, by "duti, heavy pain in the
region of it," which he says, "becomes
sharp and lancinating," and  extends
from  the  alveolar arch to the frontal
sinus.  The disease goes on without in-
terruption, increasing until the superior
maxilla of the affected side is  more or
less involved. This malady, he tells us,
cannot be confounded with any other, if
there is no external visible cause; it dif-
fers, he says, from a retention of mu-
cus, by being painful at the commence-
ment,  and by not being accompanied
with swelling  of the bones; he distin-
guishes it from polypus, as that causes
no pain; and from cancer, which occa-
sions pain of a different kind. "Suppu-
ration and ulcers have peculiar signs
which cannot be confounded with those
of inflammation."  Pain in the molar,
and bicuspid teeth, accompanied  by a
sense of  fluctuation in the  parts, he
seems to regard  as a very certain  indi-
cation of inflammation, and, especially,
when  joined to  the  other symptoms.
"If an external cause is discovered, it,"
he says, "will furnish a certain  diag-
nosis;"  he also mentions  fever and
head-ache as almost  invariable accom-
paniments.
   The inflammation, if not subdued by
appropriate remedies, after having con-
tinued for a length  of time, gradually
assumes a chronic form; the pain  then
begins to  diminish, and is less constant;
it becomes more duU, and is principally
confined  to the region of the antrum.
The teeth of the affected side  cease  to
ache, or ache only at times, but still re-
main sensitive to the touch.   The mu-
cous membrane  of the nostril next the
diseased sinus, is often tender and slight-
ly  inflamed, and  if the other one be
closed in the morning, or after two or
three hours sleep,  by pressing  upon it
with the thumb  or one of the  fingers,
and a violent expiration made through
it, a thin watery  fluid, of a slightly fetid
odor,  will be discharged, and pain will
be experienced in the region of the an-
trum.
   Causes.—Deschamps,  after  stating 
MAX
462
MAX
that it is produced by  all those general
causes  which  give  rise to it in other
parts of the body, enumerates, among
what he denominates "peculiar causes,"
a degeneration of the humor which it
pours out, "blows upon the cheek, frac-
tures,  wounds, and  the extraction of
teeth."
  Boyer says, "it may be produced  by
a blow upon the cheek, by small-pox,
measles,"  &c. but the  most ordinary
cause, he thinks, is caries and  pain  in
the teeth.  The two last, although not
mentioned by Deschamps, are very fre-
quently concerned in the production  of
this affection.  All morbid conditions of
the teeth and gums, that give rise to  ir-
ritation in the alveolar periosteal tissue,
may be regarded  as among the most
frequent of its exciting causes.   Of the
affections of the teeth that do this, caries,
necrosis and exostosis may be mention-
ed; also, loose teeth, and the roots  of
such as have been either fractured in  an
attempt at extraction, or by a  blow or
fall, and left in  their  sockets;  or that
have remained after the  destruction  of
their  crowns by caries.  It sometimes
happens, too, that inflammation is ex-
cited in this membrane by fractured  al-
veoli ;  but when an accident of this sort
occurs, the detached portions of bone are
generally soon thrown off by the opera-
tions of the economy, and the cause be-
ing removed, the inflammation imme-
diately subsides.  Not so with the roots
of teeth. They often remain concealed
in their sockets for years.  Nature, it is
true,  makes  an  effort to  expel them
from the jaw, but this is accomplished
only by a slow and very tedious process,
and not, in many instances, until they
have given rise to much mischief. But,
of the deleterious effects that result from
roots of teeth in the alveoli, it is not ne-
cessary now  to  speak;  as extraneous
bodies,  they are always  productive  of
more or less irritation.
  Treatment.—The curative indications
of the affection under consideration are
simple, and for the most part, similar
to those of inflammation in other parts
of the body.  "Bleeding from the arm,
feet,  pediluvia,  antiphlogistics, mild
purgatives, emollient cataplasms, ano-
dyne applications to the cheek, fumiga-
tions to the nose, by means of an invert-
ed funnel," says Deschamps, are the
means usually employed. Originating,
however, as does  most  frequently, in-
flammation of the lining membrane of
the maxillary sinus, from the irritation
produced by decayed,  dead, or loose
teeth,  the removal  of  these, will,  in
most cases, be all  that is necessary to
accomplish a cure.  This is the prac-
tice  which Boyer  recommends, and
Deschamps says, "it  is not uncommon
for  the disease  to  cease immediately
after the extraction of an affected tooth."
When the inflammation is  severe, its
reduction wiU be expedited by bleeding
from the arm, saline purgatives and fo-
mentations to the face. In many cases,
great benefit will be  derived  from the
application of leeches to the cheek, as
recommended by Mr. Thos. BeU.  The
author has known the most decided ad-
vantage  to result from  their employ-
ment.  When the disease is dependent,
as in most instances it is, upon an un-
healthy condition of the alveolar pro-
cesses, the first thing  to be done, is  to
remove all such teeth, or roots of teeth,
as are productive of the least irritation,
for, while any local sources of irritation
are permitted to  remain, neither topical
nor general bleeding, or any other treat-
ment, will be of permanent advantage.
  This affection,  as is  remarked by
Boyer, would be of little consequence,
were it not that it  is  liable to give rise
to other and more  dangerous forms of
disease; such, for instance, as a purulent
condition of the  secretions of this cav-
ity, or an engorgement of it.  It should
never, therefore, be  permitted to con-
tinue, but should be as speedily arrest-
ed as possible; and for the accomplish-
ment of  this, the  means here pointed
out, will, if timely and properly apphed,
be found fully adequate. 
MAX
463
MAX
  Inflammation  of the pituitary mem-
brane of the maxillary  sinus,  some-
times causes the opening into  the nose
to become closed,  and Avhen this hap-
pens, an engorgement  of the cavity  is
certain to result  Various other morbid
phenomena  also occasionally arise from
it, but the most common form of disease,
resulting from it, is an altered or purulent
condition of the mucous secretions of the
cavity.  This he proposes to notice next.

A Purulent  Condition of the Secretion
       of the Lining Membrane.
  A purulent condition of the secretions
of the maxiUary sinus and engorgement
are often treated of under the  name  of
abscess, but to which, neither bears the
slightest resemblance. Deschamps says,
"if after the inflammation  has passed,
the surrounding parts cease to be pain-
ful, while the affection still  continues to
cause pain in the antrum, and the fever,
though diminished, occurs at regular in-
tervals, and if the inflammation is fol-
lowed by a pulsating pain, we wtil have
reason to suppose  that an  abscess has
formed in the sinus; and," he contin-
ues, "all doubts wtil be removed, if on
the patient's inclining  his  head to the
opposite side, matter is discharged into
the nostril, or if some tubercles are form-
ed near the outer angle of  the  eye,  or
alveolar  border, which  last  happens
more frequently;  and, finally, if the
purulent matter, not finding any open-
ing through which  to evacuate itself,
distends the sinus to such an extent  as
to form  a tumor  outwardly upon the
cheek."   In short,  aU the symptoms
Avhich he mentions as belonging to the
disease, are those accompanying the one
under consideration.   The matter, he
says,is of a"putrid serous consistency."
  Bordenave terms an altered condition
of these secretions, suppuration  of the
membrane, Avhich he thinks may occur
without inflammation.   It is  evident,
from what he says upon  the  subject,
that he has confounded in alveolar ab-
scess those cases where the matter, in-
stead of evacuating itself, as it ordinarily
does, by  an opening through the alveo-
lus and gum into the mouth, escapes in-
to the antrum, with abscess of that cavi-
ty.  Again, he asserts, that the disease
(suppuration as he calls it) may be in-
dependent of the surrounding parts, and
although ordinarly  implicated with an
altered condition of them, he affirms, it
is sometimes the effect of disease pri-
marily seated in this cavity.*
   There is no doubt that a purulent con-
dition of the fluids of this cavity is often
complicated with ulceration of the lin-
ing membrane, but that the affection is
at all analogous to abscess or suppura-
tion, is evidently incorrect.   "A refer-
ence to the  structure  of the antrum,"
says Mr. Bell, "would appear to be suf-
ficient to point out the improbability, to
say the least, of the  occurrence of ab-
scess in such a situation.  That  a  mu-
cous membrane covering, in a thin lay-
er, the whole internal surface of such a
cavity, should  become  the  seat of aU
the consecutive steps  of true abscess, is
a statement bearing on the face of it an
obvious absurdity."f  Notwithstanding
the seeming improbability of such an
occurrence, and it is certainly one that
very   rarely  happens, abscess  does,
nevertheless,  sometimes form in this
cavity; but, it  is a  different  affection
altogether from  that usually treated  of
under that name as occurring here.
   When complicated with ulceration of
the mucous membrane—and  it is pro-
bable that a purulent condition of the se-
cretions of this cavity, in most instan-
ces, is thus complicated—the  affection
is precisely  analogous  to ozena, and,
by many of the older writers, is desig-
nated by that name.  M r. Bell describes
it, as being similar to  gonorrhoea—both
diseases equally consisting of an altered
secretion; in the one, of the pituitary
membrane, and in the other of the mu-

  *Vide Memoirs de  VAcademie  Royal de
Chirurg.\o\, 12, p. 8,  12mo.
  \Anat. Phys. and Diseases of the Teeth, p.
253. 
MAX               464              MAX
cous  lining of the urethra, which, in
neither instance,  possesses  any of the
characteristics  of abscess,  though the
matter in both is purulent.*
   An accumulation of the secretions of
the antrum, whether in a  healthy or
purulent state, is a constant source of
irritation to  the  lining membrane, and
the pressure  which they ultimately ex-
ert upon the  surrounding structures,
causes a new form of diseased action to
be  set up, involving  not unfrequently
all the bones of the face as well as those
of the base of the cranium, and which,
if not soon  arrested, ultimately destroys
the hfe of the patient.  When prevent-
ed  from escaping  through  the  nasal
opening, an artificial  one is ultimately
formed.   This is  sometimes  effected
through  the  cheek, at other times be-
neath  it, just above the alveolar ridge,
or through the  palatine arch or alveoli,
and thus a fistula is established, from
Avhich a fetid matter is almost constant-
ly discharged.  This is sometimes con-
tinued for years, while the disease in the
antrum  very frequently does not seem
to undergo  any apparent change.  At
other  times the membrane ulcerates and
the bony walls  become carious.
   A purulent condition of the  mucous
fluids of this cavity is an exceedingly
troublesome and  unpleasant affection.
The odor from  the matter is often very
annoying, even to the patient, and Avhen
the secretions are  retained for some days
in the  sinus, before they are evacuated,
the fetor is almost insufferable.
  The secretions  of this cavity, when
purulent, have  mixed with it, not  un-
frequently, a greater or less  quantity of
flocculi, sometimes of so firm a consist-
ence,  as to  block up the nasal opening,
and prevent its  exit.   Mr. Thomas Bell
says,  he  has seen more than one case in
which a considerable accumulation had
taken place in  the antrum, accompani-
ed by the usual indications of this affec-
  *Anat. Phys. and Diseases of the Teeth, p.
254.
tion,  (muco-purulent  engorgement  of
the sinus,) when a sudden discharge of
the contents  into  the  nose  took place,
"in consequence of the pressure having
overcome the resistance which had thus
been offered to  its  escape."*  Cases of
a very similar nature have fallen under
the observation of the  author;  the his-
tory of some  of which may  be given in
the course of this article.  The forma-
tion of these flocculi rarely cease, except
with the cure of the ulcers of the mem-
brane.  They give rise to considerable
irritation, and  their presence  ahvays
constitutes an  obstacle to  the cure,
though generally easily removed by  in-
jections.
  The pituitary membrane-of the an-
trum when in a healthy state, secretes,
as we have before stated, a transparent,
slightly glutinous and inodorous fluid,
which is poured  out only in sufficient
quantities to lubricate the cavity ;^but no
sooner is inflammation excited in the
membrane, than its secretions become
more  abundant, and,  at  first thinner,
afterAvards thicker and  more glutinous.
Their  color  and consistence  are  not
ahvays the  same.   Instead  of being
transparent, they sometimes have a dirty
opaque appearance; at other times they
assume a greenish, whitish or yellow-
ish color, and in some instances they re-
semble pus.
  Mucous engorgement and purulent
accumulations, in this  cavity, are more
common to young subjects than to mid-
dle aged  ones, or persons in advanced
life.   An eminent French writer says,
that of three individuals  affected with
dropsy (mucous engorgement) the old-
est was   not  twenty  years  of  age.
Although these affections are more com-
mon to young persons  than individuals
of advanced life, they are by no means
confined  to  the  former.   Debilitated
habits, of every age, are subject to them.

  •Vide Traite des Maladies Chirurgicaltt ti
des Operations  qui leur convienntnt, torn. *i,
p. 139. 
MAX
465
MAX
    Symptoms.—The symptoms  of  the
 several affections of the antrum, as has
 been intimated in a preceding place, are
 so much alike, that it is often difficult
 to distinguish those that belong to  one
 from those of another.  The symptoms
 of mucous engorgement  and purulent
 accumulations, however,  are generally
 such, as will enable the practitioner to
 distinguish, with considerable certainty,
 these affections from others.  They  are
 always preceded by inflammation of the
 lining membrane; a description of  the
 signs  of which,  having  already been
 given, need not be repeated.  Omitting
 these, we  at once  proceed to mention
 those by which they are accompanied.
   In speaking of the symptoms which
 more particularly belong to  a purulent
 condition of the secretions of the antrum,
 Deschamps says, the affection may be
 distinguished by a dull heavy pain,  ex-
 tending along the alveolar border;  but
 upon this symptom alone, little rehance
 can be placed, as it is always present in
 chronic inflammation  of  the  lining
 membrane  of this  cavity.  In addition
 to this, he mentions the presence of  de-
 cayed teeth, soreness in those that  are
 sound, and  on the  patient's inclining
 his  head  to the  side opposite the one
 affected, the discharge  of fetid  matter
 from the nose.   These  are certainly
 very conclusive indications  of a puru-
 lent condition of the fluids of this cavity.
 Bordenave, after enumerating the symp-
 toms indicative of inflammation, men-
 tions the following as belonging to the
 affection of which we are now speaking,
 viz. dull and constant pain in the sinus,
 extending from the maxiUary fossae to
 the  orbit; a discharge of fetid  matter
 from the nose, when the patient inclines
 his head to  the opposite side, or when
 the nose is blown from the  nostril of the
 affected side.  These symptoms are
 mentioned by almost every Avriter upon
 the subject, as indicative of the affection
in question.
  The symptoms of engorgement differ
materiaUy  from those  which denote
  simply a purulent condition of the mu-
  cous secretions  of this cavity.   The
  pain instead of being dull and heavy, as
  just described, becomes acute,  and a
  distressing sense of fuUness and weight
  is felt in the cheek, accompanied  by
  redness and tumefaction of the integu-
  ments covering the antrum.  The nasal
  opening  having  become  closed,  the
  fluids gradually accumulate until they
  fill the sinus, when finding no egress,
  they press upon and distend  the sur-
  rounding osseous walls, causing those
  parts which are  thinnest ultimately to
  give way.  These effects  are generally
 first  observable anteriorly beneath  the
 malar eminence,  where a smooth hard
 tumor  presents itself,  covered by the
 mucous membrane of the mouth.  But
 this is not always the point which first
  gives Avay, the sinus sometimes bursts
  into the orbit, at other times outwardly
  through the cheek, or through the pala-
  tine arch.  The long continued pressure
  thus exerted  upon  the bony walls  of
  this cavity, often cause them to soften
  and give way.
   A distention of  the walls  of the
 sinus, says Deschamps, may be distin-
 guished from other diseases  that affect
 the skin or intermediate  structure be-
 tween it and the bone, by the uniformi-
 ty or irregularity of the tumor, its firm-
 ness  at the  commencement, the  slow-
 ness  with which it progresses, and,
 above all, by the natural appearance of
 the skin, and the absence of pain when
 pressure is made upon the tumor.  An
 obliteration of the  nasal  opening, he
 says, may be suspected  by the dryness
 of the nostril of the  affected side, the
 mucous membrane  of which becomes
 thickened,  and the  cavity  contracted;
 inflammation  and sponginess  of the
 gums, loosening,  and, sometimes, (in
 consequence of the destruction of their
 sockets,) displacement of the teeth, may
 also be mentioned as occasional accom-
paniments of engorgement.
   Causes.—Inflammation of the lining
membrane, no matter how produced, is 
MAX
460
MAX
the immediate cause, and this, as has
been before shown,  results  more fre-
quently  from alveolo-dental irritation
than from any other cause.  The author
is  not the only one of this  opinion—it
is  maintained by almost every  Avriter
upon the morbid affections of this cavi-
ty. The teeth most frequently concern-
ed in the production of irritation of the
lining membrane of the antrum, are the
first and second  superior molares, but
it  is  sometimes  caused by  the bicus-
pides, dens sapientiae, and even cuspi-
dati.
   Engorgement of the maxillary  sinus
is  attributed  to  several  causes, among
which,  are blows  upon the cheek, ca-
ries of the teeth, &c, &c.   But, what-
ever  may be the  exciting  or primary
causes,  it is certain that the proximate
or  immediate cause, is, the closing or
obliteration of the nasal  opening.  This,
like a purulent  secretion, may be pro-
duced by inflammation and  thickening
of the lining membrane, which is, per-
haps, the most frequent cause.*
   Treatment.—The curative indications
of  muco-purulent  secretion  and  en-
gorgement of the maxillary  sinus, are,
1 st. If the nasal opening be closed, the
evacuation of the  retained matter; 2d.
The  removal of all  local and exciting
causes of irritation;  3d, and lastly, the
restoration of the lining  membrane.f
   For  the fulfilment of the  first,  an
opening must be made into the antrum,

  •Fouchard says, in the  Anatomical Mus.
of the University of Copenhagen, he saw
caries of the bones of the face  produced by
a molar tooth, the crown  of which having
turned outwards,  had penetrated the  maxil-
lary sinus.  Mem.  de I'Academie de Chirurg.
vol. v,  mem. 257.  Also  the  fangs of  tbe
bicuspides and front molaris sometimes pene-
trate  the siuus. Bertin Osteologie,  vol.  xi,
p. 309 —Portal Camp. d'Anatomie Medicale,
vol. i, p. 210.  Note 2.—My Uerzichniss, No.
3278; there are in the Brest Mus. No. 8128,
two teeth, as  it were absorbed, which had
been drawn out of the maxillary sinus.—Otto's
 Compend. of Comp. Anat.
   fVide Anat. Phys. and Diseases of  the
 Teeth, p. 259.
and this  should be  effected in that part
which will afford the most easy exit to
the retained  matter; but  as it regards
the several methods that have been pro-
posed  for the  accomplishment of this
object, practitioners differ; and before we
proceed further,  it may not be  amiss
to notice some of the various methods
that have been adopted.
  Dr. Drake, an English anatomist, and
author of a Avork entitled "Anthropolo-
gia Nova," has the credit of being the
first to propose a plan for evacuating
accumulated  fluids from  this cavity,
and the  method  adopted  by  him  for
effecting this object, consists in the ex-
traction of a molar tooth  and  the per-
foration of the sinus through the alveo-
lus of  one of its roots.   This method of
treatment,  however, is said by some to
have been inserted into Drake's Anat-
omy by Dr.  Cowper, an eminent anat-
omist  and surgeon.*   Having  never
seen any evidence touching the correct-
ness of this  conjecture, we suppose its
truth is,  probably, somewhat question-
able.   M. Gunz says, the credit belongs
to John  Henry  Meibomius,  who, a
long time before, proposed a very simi-
lar method of treating these affections.!
Henry Meibomius, many years after
the death of his father, John Henry,
proposed for  the evacuation of accumu-
lated fluids in the  antrum, the extrac-
tion of one or several teeth.J  But, the
perforation   of the   maxillary  sinus
through  the  alveolus of a  molar tooth,
is said not to be the most ancient method.
Molinetti,  as early as the year  107"),
describes an  opening made through the
cheek  into  the antrum,  the walls  of
which, after having been  exposed by a
crucial incision through the integuments
covering it, Avas penetrated with  a tre-

  * Heister's Surgery, note to chapter 72, p.
445.
  f Vide Mem. de I'Acad. Royale de Chirurg.
12mo. vol. xii, p. 12.
  J Vide  Discurs. de Abscessibus Internis,
Dresd. 1718,  page 114, and  la Dissertation
d'Gunz. 
MAX
467
MAX
 phine.  The perforation  of this  cav-
 ity through the  alveolus  of a  supe-
 rior molaris, is  an  operation which,
 according  to Velpeau, Avas performed
 by Zwinger, a long time before it Avas
 performed by  Meibomius;  and  Van-
 uessen says, Ruysch extracted several
 molares and cauterized their sockets,
 for the destruction of a polypus, until
 an opening was made into  the antrum
 large enough to admit the finger. Drake,
 according  to Bordenave, seems, never-
 theless, to be entitled to  the credit of
 having been the first to  perforate  the
 maxillary sinus through the alveolus of
 a molar tooth, by means of a punch, for
 the evacuation of accumulated fluids,
 and the injection of the cavity. We are
 also informed by the same author, that
 Cowper treated a case of maxillary
 ozena, Avhich had caused a  large quan-
 tity of ichorous and fetid matter to be
 discharged through the nose, by  ex-
 tracting the first molaris and perforating
 the antrum through the alveolus with
 an instrument suited to the purpose.
   It is not at all probable  that Meibo-
 mius was the first to propose the per-
 foration of the antrum through the al-
 veolus of a molar tooth, for his researches
 Avere not published until 1718, twenty-
 one years after the publication of Drake's
 System of Anatomy, and,  besides, he
 regarded the  perforation of  this  cavity
 as a dangerous operation, and, on that
 account, confined himself simply to the
 extraction of a tooth.  Saint Yves, says
 Velpeau, treated with success a person
 affected with fistula, the floor of whose
 orbit had been destroyed by the removal
 of a tooth.
   With regard to the tooth most proper
 to be extracted, authors differ.  Chesel-
 don preferred the first or second molaris.
 Junker recommends the extraction  of
 the first or second bicuspis, and if a
 fistula  had formed,  to  enlarge it, in-
 stead of perforating the floor of the an-
 trum.   It is at present pretty generally
conceded, that the second  molaris,  it
being directly beneath the most depend-
 ent part of the  cavity, is the most suit-
 able tooth to be removed.   If  this be
 sound, the first molaris, den sapientiae,
 or either of the bicuspides, if carious,
 should be extracted in its stead, and, in
 fact, none of the teeth in an unhealthy
 condition should be permitted to remain.
   An  opening  having  been effected
 through the alveolus of a tooth into the
 antrum, it should be kept open until the
 health  of the cavity is restored.   For
 this purpose, sounds and bougies adapt-
 ed to the purpose have been introduced.
 Heuerman recommends the employ-
 ment of a small canula, which is  also
 preferred by Bordenave  and Richter,
 the latter of whom says, it should be
 kept closed to prevent  particles of food
 from getting  into  the  sinus.    But,
 whether a canula  or  bougie be intro-
 duced  into the opening, it should be so
 secured as to prevent it  from coming
 out or passing  into the antrum, which
 may be done by fastening" it  to one of
 the adjoining teeth, as recommended by
 Deschamps.
[   Lamorier recommends perforating the
 antrum immediately above the first mo-
 laris, or rather between it and the  ma-
 lar bone.  In this,  he seems to  have
 been influenced by the considerations
 that the wall of the cavity here presents
 the least thickness, and that this is the
 most dependent part of the sinus.   But
 he did not always deem  it necessary to
 make a perforation here, when a fistu-
 lous opening had previously formed in
 some other place.  His method of ope-
 rating is as follows:  the jaws being
 closed, the angles of the mouth  are
 drawn outwards and slightly  upwards
 with a curved instrument called a spec-
 ulum;  this done,  the  gum  is incised
 across the malar apophysis, or maxillo-
 labial sulcus, and the bone made bare,
 Avhich is next pierced with  a  spear-
 pointed punch.   The opening is after-
 wards enlarged if found necessary.
  Desault  is of the opinion  that  the
opening should be  made through  the
canine fossa, beneath the upper lip, and 
MAX
468
MAX
for that purpose, after having laid bare
the bone, he employs a sharp triangular
and a blunt-pointed perforator,  which
he invented for the operation.  Runge,
says Velpeau, used nothing but a scalpel.
Mr. Charles  Bell invented a  trephine
for the purpose, but this, it is  thought,
does not possess any advantage over the
instruments employed  by Desault and
Runge.  In cases of fistula in the cheek
from the antrum, Ruffel advises the in-
sertion of a trocar, to be carried through
the gum, so as to form a counter open-
ing. Through this, in  a case which he
treated,  he passed a seton, and it re-
mained six weeks;  at the expiration of
this  time,  a  cure was accomplished.
This practice has been  followed by Cal-
lisen, Zang, Busch, Henkle, Bertrandi,
Faubert and others.  Callisen is  of the
opinion, that when the tumor points in
the palatine arch and fluctuation is felt,
the artificial opening should be formed
there.   Gooch, says Velpeau,  in a case
Avhich he* treated, advised  the perfora-
tion of  the antrum  through  the nasal
surface,  and  fixing in the opening a
canula of lead.  We are also  informed
by the same  author, that,  Acrel, after
having operated in the manner proposed
by  Cowper,  inserted  a second  canula
into the sinus through  a fistulous open-
ing formed in the  nose.  The method
attributed to.Wienhold, consists in pen-
etrating the sinus from the upper and
external part  of the canine fossa, with
the instrument directed obliquely down-
wards and outwards, so as to avoid the
branches of the infra-orbital nerve; and
then placing in the opening, thus made,
a tittle lint.  Wienhold,  directs, that
when the antrum has no other opening,
the instrument should be carried entire-
ly through the palatine arch,  and then
by means of a curved needle and thread,
he introduces a  roll of lint saturated or
 covered with some appropriate medi-
 cine, and this  he designs to act as a
 seton.
   Velpeau says, the  perforation  is ef-
 fected "in the point of election or of ne-
cessity.  The first varies  according to
the ideas of the operator.   The circum-
stances, on the contrary, determine the
second.  In cases of abscess, dropsy,
fistula, and ulceration, the operation is
almost always performed in the place of
election.   Then,  provided one  of the
molar teeth be unsound, it must  be ex-
tracted, together  Avith  the  adjoining
tooth;  the gum is then to be cut doAvn
to the bone, externally ; internaUy, be-
hind and before, forming a kind of a
square flap, and to  be completely de-
tached from the  surrounding tissues;
after this, the alveoli are to  be perforated
with the instruments of  Desault, and
an opening made large enough to admit
the finger into  the  sinus."   For the
evacuation simply of purulent mucus,
or accumulated  fluids, the  author be-
lieves with  Boyer,  that  the opening
should always be made from beneath  ;
and he is the more convinced of the im-
portance of giving  the alveolus of an
extracted tooth the preference, from the
consideration that it is to  the irritation
produced by some one or more of these
organs, that this affection is attributable.
Even though a fistula  may  have been
formed above the alveolar ridge, beneath
the cheek, or in  the palatine arch, we
should not neglect to extract such teeth,
whether carious  or sound, as may be
productive of irritation.  It may not
always in  such  cases be necessary to
perforate the sinus from the  socket of a
tooth, though the cure in most instances
would be expedited by it.
   Jourdain, an eminent French dentist,
and graduate in surgery, instead of seek-
ing egress for matter accumulated in the
maxillary sinus, by any of these meth-
ods, -proposed, in a memoir which he
presented to the Academy in 1765, to
probe the cavity by its natural opening,
and then by suitable injections to restore
it to  health.  The  Academy gave this
proposition its attention: it was care-
fully  and minutely discussed.    The
practicability of obtaining entrance into
the sinus in  this  way  was called in 
MAX
469
MAX
  question;  it  was  contended that  the
  difficulties presented by  the peculiar
  structure of  the parts were  such that
  they could seldom be overcome; but to
  remove all doubt  upon the  subject, a
  trial was determined on.
    While  this subject was  before  the
  Academy, M. Allouel, Jr. claimed  the
  credit of the discovery  for his father,
  Avho, he  said, made it in  1737,  and
  treated with  success in 1739, a case of
  disease of the antrum by throwing in-
  jections into it through the natural open-
  ing.  But the Academy  determined
  that inasmuch as M. AUouel had never
  pubhshed it,  Jourdain could  not have
  borrowed it from him, and was, there-
  fore, entitled to the credit  of  being the
  discoverer.  It is certain  that he was
  the first to announce it to the world.
   The instruments  employed for prob-
  ing and injecting  the sinus  are, says
  Bordenave,  1st, a  small  silver sound
 with a button on one end, and a plate
 in the form of a heart at the other, to be
 held between the forefinger and thumb
 of the operator: 2d,  a  hollow sound
 Avithout either button or plate, contain-
 ing a stilet of whalebone,  with  its ex-
 tremity  extending  beyond the sound
 between the  fingers: 3d, a small sy-
 ringe, with a pipe  adapted to the hol-
 low sound.  The two first instruments
 should  be curved  something like  the
 letter S, and vary a little in size.
   The treatment of affections of the
 maxillary sinus by injections through J
 the nasal opening, having been almost
 entirely abandoned, a more  minute des-
 cription of the instruments employed
 for the purpose is not deemed necessary.
 It may be well, before dismissing  this
 part of the subject,  to  state that the
 Academy, when this method of treat-
 ment was proposed by Jourdain, at once
 appointed commissioners  to investigate
 its merits, who, after having made a
 number of trials, came to the  conclu-
 sion that the introduction of a sound by
the nasal  opening,  although perhaps
possible, was  so exceedingly difficult,
        40
  that it could seldom be effected.   They
  attempted it upon each antrum of five
  subjects, and the result proved that the
  sound pierced the membranes between
  the turbinated bones  more frequently
  than  it entered the sinus by the natural
  opening.  Their report was,  therefore,
  unfavorable, and Bordenave, in remark-
  ing upon this method of gaining access
  to the cavity, states, that whtie the mem-
  branes between the  ethmoidal and infe-
  rior turbinated bones may be pierced
  without causing  serious injury, it in-
  duces us, when it happens, to suppose
  that we have entered the sinus by the
  natural opening, Avhich "goes to prove
  that the operation is as  difficult as it is
  uncertain."  He  adds, however, that
  while there are cases in which the use
  of injections through the natural opening
  will suffice to effect a cure, these would
  succeed in only a very small number of
  the cases, inasmuch as these diseases
  result more frequently from morbid con-
  ditions of the teeth than from any other
  causes.
   The only advantage then, as is justly
 remarked by the last  named  author, to
 be derived from injections, is the cleans-
 ing of the membrane of the antrum, or
 the disgorgement of the  cavity, and
 this, while the cause remains, will not
 suffice to effect a cure, while the removal
 of this, and giving vent to purulentor ac-
 cumulated fluids, Avtil, of themselves, in
 most instances, be all that is required to
 bring about a healthy action. The cure,
 no doubt, AviU many times be greatly fa-
 cilitated by the  employment of suitable
 injections,  but  that  these  exercise as
 great a curative influence as many im-
 agine, the author has yet to be convinced.
 They may in those cases where a mor-
 bid action has been kept up  so long in
 the mucous membrane of this cavity, as
 to have nearly  destroyed its power to
 re-act,  be highly serviceable,  but the
 difficulty of doing this through the natu-
 ral opening, as is shown by the result
of the experiments of  the commission-
ers appointed by the French Academy, 
MAX
470
MAX
and those of others who have attempted
it, is  such as  must forever preclude
their introduction in that Avay.
  Moreover, M. Allouel and Jourdain,
who have attempted to establish the
efficacy of injections, by the citation of
cases,  seem  to have  overlooked the
agency which the removal of the causes,
during the employment  of the injec-
tions, had, in bringing about the cure;
so that arguments advanced by them in
favor of their method  of  treatment do
not prove any thing in its favor.  "They
might," as Bordenave  justly observes,
"just as well have been cured without
as Avith them."  Boyer, in alluding to
the  method  proposed by  Allouel and
Jourdain, asserts that it is  opposed both
to  reason and experience.  It  is also
 condemned by almost every Avriter upon
 the diseases of this cavity.
   When the natural opening is closed,
 the first indication, as has been stated,
 is the evacuation of the matter, and for
 this  purpose,  a perforation should be
 made into the  sinus, and the most pro-
 per place for effecting this, it has been
 shown, is through  the alveolar cavity
 of the second  molaris.  It may, how-
 ever, be penetrated from that of either
 of the  other  molares or bicuspides.
 The perforation, after the extraction of
 the tooth, is made with a straight trocar,
 which  will be found  much more con-
 venient  than  those usuaUy employed
 for the purpose.   The point of the in-
 strument after having been introduced
 into the alveolus, through which it is
 intended to  make the opening, should
 be pressed against its bottom in the  di-
 rection towards  the  centre of the an-
 trum.  With the handle of the instru-
  ment in the hand of the operator, a few
  rotary motions will suffice to pierce the
  intervening plate of bone.  If the first
  opening be not sufficiently large,  its
  dimensions may  be  increased to  the
  necessary size, by means of a spear-
  pointed instrument. In introducing the
  trocar, care should be taken to prevent
  a too sudden entrance of the instrument
into the cavity.  Without this precau-
tion, it might be suddenly forced into it
and against the opposite wall.  The en-
trance of it, is usually  attended with a
momentary  severe pain, and its with-
drawal  followed by  a  sudden gush of
fetid mucus, or of muco-purulent mat-
ter.
  It is not always necessary to perfo-
rate the floor of the antrum after  the
extraction of  a tooth;  it occasionally
happens, as has already been remarked,
that some of the alveolar cavities com-
municate with it.
  An opening having  thus been effect-
ed, it should be prevented from closing,
until a healthy action  shall have been
established in the lining membrane, and
for this purpose a bougie, or  leaden or
silver canula, may be inserted into  the
opening and  secured,  in the  manner
previously described, to one of the teeth.
 It should, however, be removed for the
 evacuation of the secretions of the an-
 trum at least  twice a day.  The estab-
 lishing of  an opening  at  the base or
 most dependent part of the  sinus, will,
 in those cases where a fistula has been
 previously  formed, in most instances,
 be  foUowed by its  speedy  restoration.
 Having proceeded  thus far, the  cure
 will be aided by the employment of such
 general remedies as may be indicated
 by the state of the constitutional health,
 and for the reduction of the local inflam-
 mation, leeches to the gums and cheek
 will be found very  serviceable.   The
 antrum should, in the meantime, be in-
 jected with, at first, some mild or bland
 fluid, and afterwards with gently stimu-
 lating liquids.  Diluted port Avine, a
 Aveak  solution of the sulphate of zinc;,
  and rose water, and of sulphate of copper
  and rose water, have been recommend-
  ed.  Diluted tinct. of myrrh may some-
  times be advantageously employed, and
  when  the  membrane  is  ulcerated, a
  weak solution of  the  nitras argentum
  will be highly serviceable.   For correct-
  ing the  fetor of  the secretions of this
  cavity, a weak solution of the chloride
I 
MAX
471
MAX
of soda or time, may be injected into
the antrum once or twice a day.
  The following  are  the formulae  of
Mr. Thomas Bell:  $.—Zinci sulphat,
grs. vi.,  aqua rosae, f. § vi. M.  1$.—
Cupri sulphat, grs.  iv., aqua rosae, f.
 | vi. M.  In addition to the above, he
recommends the subjoined:  1$.—Tinct.
myrrh, 5 i.  decoct hordei,  f. § vi. M.
   This  should  at first  be  used  very
weak, say  in  the proportion of one
grain of nit. arg. to  two ounces of soft
water.   Its strength, however, may, if
necessary, be gradually increased.
   Dr. Isaac  I.  Greenwood,  of New
York, employed with success, in a case
of muco-purulent secretion of the an-
trum caused by an  alveolar abscess,
"suds made  from tepid soft Avater and
old castile soap," and he mentions an-
other, treated in the same  way by his
father, the late Mr. John Greemvood.
   In  cases of muco-purulent secretion
simply, a weak  decoction of galls may
be injected into the sinus with advantage.
   Injections  of a too stimulating nature
are sometimes employed. This should
be carefully guarded against by making
them at first  very weak, and afterAvards
increasing their strength  as  occasion
may require; but Avhen symptoms of a
violent  character are in this  way pro-
duced,  they  should  be combated by
leeches to  the gums and fomentations
to the cheek.
  But, dependent as these affections in
most instances are, upon local irritants,
greater reliance  is to  be placed on their
removal,  and giving vent to the acrid
puriform fluids in the sinus, than to any
therapeutical effects  exerted  upon the
cavity by  injections.   As  adjuvants,
they  may  be serviceable, but a  cure
cannot be accomplished while the ex-
citing cause remains unremoved.  For
a report of a number of highly interest-
ing cases of an altered condition of the
fluids of this cavity and engorgement,
the reader is referred to the  author's
Principles and Practice of Dental Sur-
gery.
               Abscess.

  Abscess  in  the  maxillary  sinus,
although  very rare,  does  sometimes
occur.   The  structure of the  parts
composing this cavity, would seem, as
has been remarked by Mr. Bell, to ren-
der the occurrence improbable, and if
the fact were not well estabhshed, it
might perhaps  be  doubted.   If  the
apices of the roots of some of the supe-
rior molares  did not occasionaUy  per-
forate the floor of this cavity, the occur-
rence of abscess in it would indeed be
rare, but,  as  the antrum is sometimes
thus penetrated,  its  formation here is
not, after all, a matter of so much sur-
prise.   An abscess is as liable to form
at the apex of the root of a tooth pene-
trating this cavity, as at that  of one in
its alveolus, but it is very seldom that
one is found seated in any other  place
in it.   The case described by Mr.  BeU
was supposed to be the only weU authen-
ticated one on record.   But Bordenave
gives the history of a case of a disease of
the maxiUary sinus,* so  similar to the
one described by Mr. B., that there can
be little doubt in regard to  the nature
of it.   In both  instances,  the  affec-
tion was seated in the upper part of the
antrum beneath the orbit. It is unneces-
sary to say more at present concerning
these cases;  for a description of which,
the reader is referred to the author's Prin-
ciples  and Practice of Dental Surgery.
  Dr.  HuUihen, in a well Avritten arti-
cle in the  American Journal  of Dental
Science,f contends that  abscess of the
antrum as well as alveolar, consists in
the effusion of pus, formed in  the pulp
cavity of a tooth, "between the bone and
hning membrane." But this view of the
subject would seem to be incorrect, from
the fact that abscesses are as frequently
formed in the sockets of dead teeth as liv-
ing ones.  The matter from alveolar ab-

  *Vide Mem. de  I'Acad. Royale de Chirurg.
vol. 12, ed. 12mo. obs. xi, p. 31.
  tVide vol. ii, page 179. 
MAX
472
MAX
scess, in those  cases Avhere the plate of
bone intervening between the extremity
of the root or roots of a superior molaris
or bicuspis, as the case  may be, being
thinner than the surrounding  osseous
Avails, often escapes into  this cavity,
after having first, as Dr. H.  justly re-
marks, effused  itself between the bone
and lining  membrane.   In this case, it
cannot properly be termed an abscess of
the antrum.  Although  the matter es-
capes into this cavity, which, in conse-
quence,  becomes involved in disease,
yet the disease having originated in the
alveolus of a tooth, Avhich is  still its
principal seal, would be, in the strict-
est sense of the  term, an alveolar ab-
scess.    It not unfrequently happens
that pus, .from an abscess formed in the
socket of a superior  molaris, discharges
itself  into this  cavity  and  escapes
through the nasal opening  for months
and sometimes  for  years;  for after an
abscess  has once formed at the apex of
the root of a tooth, purulent matter Avill
continue to be  formed, though not al-
Avays  in the same quantity, until the ir-
ritant that caused it is removed.  The
pulp of a tooth may suppurate, and the
matter be confined in the cavity of the
tooth for a long time, or, be discharged
through a decayed opening in the crown
communicating Avith the internal cav-
ity, without causing alveolar abscess.
The purulent matter contained in the
sac at the  extremity of the  root of a
tooth, is  never altogether formed in the
cavity of the organ.   The pus discharg-
ed from an alveolar abscess is  often-
times  greater than that Avhich could be
formed by the suppuration of the  soft
tissues contained within  the cavity of
a tooth, and, besides, after this matter
has once discharged, it cannot be again
reproduced here, as  the  process of de-
composition can  no longer be carried
on, and, consequently,  any  matter
Avhich may afterwards  accumulate in
the cavity of the tooth, is secreted by the
soft parts about the extremity of the
root.  A tubercle or sac having formed
here, is seldom removed by any opera-
tion of the economy.
   The apices  of the  roots of the first
and second superior molares, when they
do not actually  perforate  the  floor  of
the antrum, are often above its  level,
and covered by only a very thin shell or
cap of bone, and hence in case of an ab-
scess in one of these, although strictly
alveolar,  the  matter  is more liable  to
make for itself a passage into this cavi-
ty, than  through the  gum into the
mouth.   When this happens, it  gives
rise to inflammation of the lining mem-
brane and causes its  secretions  to be-
come more or  less  vitiated,  and often
leads  to an erroneous opinion concern-
ing the real nature of the disease.
  It is only Avhen the root of a tooth ac-
tually penetrates the floor of the antrum,
or the tubercle at its apex becomes sit-
uated in it, that the abscess, properly
speaking, can  be said  to be of this cavi-
ty.  When the root of the tooth  does
penetrate it, the tubercle, although form-
ed at its apex around  the nerve cord, is
betAveen the lining membrane and pe-
riosteal tissue,  both of which, in the im-
mediate vicinity become directly involv-
ed in the inflammation, and this some-
times extends itself to every part of the
cavity, causing, in  some instances, an
obliteration of  the nasal opening. This,
however, does not often occur,butwhen
it does, is followed  by engorgement  of
the sinus, and, occasionally, by ulcera-
tion of its lining membrane, and disease
in the surrounding bone.
  It is sometimes the case, that the plate
of bone intervening between the extrem-
ity of the root  of a tooth, around which
a tubercle has  formed, and the  antrum
is destroyed, and the tubercle, instead of
being wholly confined Avithin the alveo-
lus, is forced up, as it enlarges, almost
entirely into this cavity.  The inflam-
mation after having attained a certain
height, is succeeded by suppuration, and
and the secretion of pus goes on until
the sac bursts, when the matter is dis-
charged, and, mixing Avith the mucous 
MAX
473
MAX
secretions of the antrum, ultimately es-
capes with them, through the nasal open-
ing, into the nose.
  As it regards the morbid effects pro-
duced upon the lining  membrane and
surrounding  bony parietes, by an ab-
scess of this kind, it is of little conse-
quence whether it be formed in this cav-
ity, if the matter be discharged here, or
in  a subjacent alveolus.  The effects
are about the  same in  one case as in
the other.  If the general health of the
patient be  good, and the natural open-
ing of the  sinus remain pervious, they
seldom assume an alarming character;
under  other and less favorable circum-
stances, the most dangerous and aggra-
vated forms of disease may result from
an abscess seated in either  place.
   Symptoms.—In the incipient  stages
of abscess of the maxillary  sinus, the
symptoms are  similar to  those  that
 characterize inflammation of the lining
 membrane of this cavity, or violent in-
 flammatory  tooth-ache.   The  pain is
 generally most severe in the upper part
 of the alveolar ridge, above some one of
 the molar or bicuspid teeth.   From
 thence, it often extends to the lower
 part of the orbit, ear, temple, muscles
 of the cheek and scalp.  It is more  or
 less constant, and a  throbbing  is felt
 high up in the  alveolar border beneath
 the cheek.  If the abscess originates  at
 the apex of the root of a tooth, this or-
 gan will be slightly elongated and sore
 to the touch; the cheek in most instan-
 ces is a little  tumefied and more or less
 flushed.
    The pain, after having continued for
 several days, is succeeded by suppura-
 tion,  when  it  immediately subsides.
 Slight paroxysms of cold  and heat are
 now felt, and if the natural opening of
 the  antrum  be not closed, purulent
 matter will occasionally be discharged.
    If the abscess be seated  in any other
 part than  the base of  the antrum, the
 symptoms may differ in some respects
 from the foregoing. If purulent matter,
 or mucus mixed with pus, be discharg-
       40*
ed from the nostril of the affected side,
when the patient inclines his head to
the opposite one, or makes a sudden
and forcible expiration through it, while
the other is closed, the existence of ab-
scess in this cavity, will be very conclu-
sively indicated.
  The abscess having burst, pus  will
be discharged from it, from time to time,
for sevaral  days,  which  will escape
through the nasal opening, if not closed,
with hardened flocculi or  other foreign
matter, and  then i t will cease altogether
or very nearly so.   The disease,  how-
ever, if the cause  still remains, is by
no means cured.  A recurrence gener-
ally occurs every time the patient takes
cold, when all the  symptoms just de-
scribed will be again  experienced, and
each succeeding attack leaves the parts
in a more unhealthy condition, and as
a consequence more susceptible to the
action of morbid irritants.
   Causes.—It will  not be necessary to
 say much concerning the causes of ab-
 scess of the antrum.  It is sufficient to
 state,  they  are the same as those of
 tooth-ache;  namely,  inflammation of
 the alveolo-dental periostea and  lining
 membrane of this  cavity, which may
 be  excited  by  caries of the teeth,  a
 blow,  or a dead  or loose tooth, and
 by  exposure  to   sudden changes of
 Aveather.  Other causes may sometimes
 be concerned, but the foregoing  are the
 principal, and all which it is necessary
 to enumerate.
    Treatment.—In the cure of abscess of
 the maxillary sinus, as well as that of
 a muco-purulent condition of its secre-
 tions or engorgement, the first and most
 important indication to be fulfilled, is to
 obtain an opening for the escape of the
 matter. The best method of doing this
 has before been described, and it is un-
 necessary to  recapitulate the directions
 already given for  the accomplishment
 of this object.
   The formation of abscess might, how-
 ever, in almost evfcry instance, be pre-
 vented by the timely adoption of proper 
MAX
474
MAX
treatment. On the occurrence of severe,
deep-seated and throbbing pain in the
upper part of the alveolar ridge or just
above it in the region of the antrum,
such as has been described as attending
the formation of abscess in this cavity or
that of the alveolus of a superior mo-
laris ; or if the tooth directly beneath
the place Avhere itAvas first felt, be con-
siderably  decayed, or  its  lining mem-
brane exposed; or if it be dead, loose,
or the socket much diseased, it should
be immediately extracted.  By this sim-
ple operation, the formation of abscess,
not only in the socket, but also in  the
antrum, may, in  the majority of cases,
be prevented.   If it be not folknved by
an immediate subsidence of pain, leeches
should be applied to the  gums and fo-
mentations to the cheek.   If the patient
be of full habit, and there be  any gene-
ral febrile symptoms,  saline purgatives
may also be employed with advantage.
But, the extraction of the tooth, in most
cases, will be all that is required to arrest
the progress of the disease.
  The curativeindications, if the abscess
be of recent formation, and has resulted
from  the presence of a diseased tooth,
are similar to the preventive.   The first
thing to be done is to  remove the tooth
that caused it,  and if this operation be
not delayed too long, it, in most instan-
ces, wtil be all that is necessary to effect
a cure.  In addition to this, Dr. Hulli-
hen  recommends the perforation of the
antrum ; but in those  cases where the
abscess has formed at  the apex of the
root of a molaris, this is not necessary ;
because, in all such cases, the alveolus
communicates Avith this cavity, so that
on the removal of  the tooth,  there will
be a sufficiently large  opening into it;
besides, the tubercle or sac,  although
situated within the sinus, is, in nearly
every instance, brought away with  the
tooth.
   When  the abscess has  been of long
standing, and the lining  membrane of
the antrum become seriously affected,
in addition to the removal of  the tooth,
 other treatment will have to be resorted
 to.  The opening  into the antrum,  if
 necessary, should  be  enlarged, and  it
 should be prevented from closing until
 the  health of  the  lining membrane  is
 restored; and for the promotion of this,
 injections, such as have been previously
 recommended, avUI be found serviceable.
   In cases of simple abscess of the an-
 trum, seated  at the apex of the root of
 a  superior molaris, the  author  never
 found  it necessary  to   adopt  other
 treatment than the foregoing.   It may,
 however, in some instances, be neces-
 sary to  remove more  than one tooth,
 though that be the one that gave rise to
 the abscess.
 Ulceration of the Lining Membrane.
  Ulceration  of the lining membrane of
 the  maxillary sinus,  is, we believe,
 ahvays dependent upon some other mor-
bid condition of this cavity, and when
 it occurs, it often gives rise to some of
 the worst forms of disease to which it
is liable.  It is not a simple disease, but
is complicated Avith some other  morbid
affection, and is generally preceded by
a purulent condition of the secretions of
 the lining membrane, and often followed
by fungi, and sometimes by caries of the
surrounding osseous walls. The mem-
brane covering the floor of the antrum,
is usually first attacked;  but ulceration
having  commenced here, it  generaUy
soon extends to other parts of the sinus,
and is frequently accompanied by ulcera-
 tion of the lining membrane of one or both
 of the nasal cavities; and ulceration of
 the latter is sometimes mistaken for ul-
 ceration of the former.  The existence of
 ulcers in the  antrum can only be  infer-
 red from certain signs ;  but when seated
 in  the nose, they can almost always be
 seen. The matter secreted by ulcers situ-
 ated here, exhales  a less fetid odor than
 that of ulcers of the maxillary sinus.
 This of  itself,  says Deschamps,* will
 enable us to determine, almost to a cer-
 * Maladies des Fosses Nazales, sec. 2, art. vi,
 p. 262. 
MAX              475               MAX
 tainty, the seat of the disease. There are
 other signs that will assist us  in ascer-
 taining  its location.   The  foregoing,
 however, are sufficient, especially when
 taken in connecton with symptoms that
 precede the formation of the ulcers.
   Ulcers of the maxillary sinus present
 as great a variety  of character as do
 those of other parts of the body.  Their
 nature is determined by the state of  the
 constitutional  health  and  the causes
 that produce them.  It is not necessary
 to go into a minute  description of  the
 various  kinds of ulcers  that  are here
 met  with.   The  following   varieties
 have been met with; namely,  the sim-
 ple, or those resulting from mechanical
 injury;  the fungous, scorbutic, venereal,
 cancerous, gangrenous,  scrofulous,  in-
 veterate, carious, &c.
   In the simpler species of ulcer,  the
 matter  is of a  thick consistence  and
 nearly  white, but as the disease  in-
 creases in malignancy, it becomes thin-
 ner, and varies in appearance from a
 transparent to a dirty brown, yellow, or
 black.
   Symptoms.—Many of the symptoms
 of ulceration of the mucous membrane
 of the maxillary sinus, are  similar to
 some which accompany other affections
 of this  cavity; as  for example, deep-
 seated heavy pain in the cheek.; occa-
 sional escape  of  matter into the nose,
 &c.   In  addition to constant pain in the
 region of the  antrum,  the  folloAving
 may  be  mentioned as signs  indicative
 of ulcers of this cavity.  The escape of
 a fetid sanies  into the nose on the pa-
 tient's inclining his head to the  opposite
 side, or through  an opening which it
 has  itself effected, or  that  has been
 formed by art for its escape.  Also, the
 traversing of the  ulcer from the interior
 through  the bony walls of the cavity
 and external soft parts.  An opening of
 this sort may be effected through the
 cheek, near, or  even into the  orbit,
which last has often happened;  at other
times  it is effected through the canine
fossa  or  palatine  arch. Moreover, the
 matter escaping from the. sinus, often
 has  flocculi mixed with it, which is
 never the case, in simple  muco-puru-
 lent secretion of the sinus.  These floc-
 culi  sometimes choke up  the natural
 opening  of the cavity and cause its se-
 cretions,  together with those of the ul-
 cers, to accumulate, and distend its os-
 seous waUs until  they ultimately give
 way, or an opening is formed for their
 escape.  It occasionally happens that
 the flocculi which have gotten into the
 nasal opening, and  thus prevented the
 egress of the fluids  secreted here, after
 choking  up this  conduit  for a  long
 Avhile, suddenly give Avay and permit
 the matter to pass into the nose.
   When  the ulcer is of a fungous char-
 acter, the matter secreted by it, is thin
 and of a  dark brown or  blackish color,
 and has mixed Avith it blood and pus.*
 It is, says Deschamps, slightly painful,
 and  can  only  be distinguished  from
 other ulcers by the introduction of the
 bougie into the sinus;  and like polypus,
 it is capable of spreading and penetra-
 ting  every opening, that will  give  it
 passage;   but in  consequence of the
 morbid growth  being of a softer con-
 sistence, it makes less impression  upon
 the surrounding parts.
   If  the ulcer be of a cancerous nature,
 the pain  will be sharp and lancinating
 and affect the whole of the side of the
 face; the  matter will be serous,  very
 fetid, and streaked with blood.  If it is
 discharged through the natural opening
 into the nose, it will cause the pituitary
 membrane  of the nasal cavity of the
 affected side  to become  exceedingly
 irritable,  sensitive to  the touch, and
 ulcerate.   The  bones of the  affected
 side of the face soon become softened or
 carious, the teeth loosen, the external
 soft parts  inflame and ultimately ulcer-
 ate; openings are formed into the sinus,'
 fever  of a low grade  supervenes, and
 ultimately death closes the scene.

  * Maladies des Fosses Nazales, sec. 2, art.
vi,p.263. 
MAX
476
MAX
     Causes.—A  degenerated  or altered
  state  of the secretions of this cavity, is
  said to be the most common cause  of
  ulceration.  This may  be an exciting
  cause, and it may be one of the most
  frequent exciting  causes, but  were it
  not favored by a constitutional predis-
  position, it would seldom give rise  to
  it.  Local  irritation, whether produced
  by an altered  condition of the fluids
  of this  cavity  or by the presence  of
  decayed or dead teeth, the roots of teeth,
  or a  blow  upon the  cheek, may be,
  and doubtless  is, the  exciting cause  of
  ulceration of the mucous  membrane of
  this  cavity.  This,  however, in a sub-
  ject of good constitutional health, would
  have  to  be very severe and continue
  for a long time, to result in  ulceration,
  and  even then, a cure  would soon be
  effected by the restorative powers of the
  economy.  It is only in bad habits, or
  debilitated constitutions, that malignant
  ulcers are often met with in the maxil-
  lary sinus.
     Deschamps, although  he acknowl-
  edges that diseased  teeth often exercise
  a  morbid influence upon this cavity,
  and that the apices of the roots of these
  organs are sometimes in contact with its
  mucous  or lining  membrane, seems,
  nevertheless, to doubt  that they have
  any agency in the production of ul-
  cers.   His reasoning  upon the  subject,
  is far from satisfactory. While he  ad-
  mits, by the contact and adhesion of the
«  dental periosteum and mucous mem-
  brane of this cavity, by  the  penetration
  of its floor by the roots of teeth, inflam-
  mation and ulceration may be produced,
  hedenies that it can be positively proven.
  Although  we  may not be  able to ad-
  duce positive evidence,  the circumstan-
  tial prooft Avhich we  have,  are so clear
  and strong, that no candid inquirer could
  for a single moment doubt, that the dis-
  ease in question, when favored by a bad
  habit of body, often results  from dental
  or alveolar irritation.   In reply to the
  question, which he a little  further  on
  propounds, "How can the extraction of
a tooth be of service in the subduction
of inflammation of the  mucous mem-
brane with which the dental periosteum
is only simply in contact?" we answer,
by  this  operation a constant  source of
irritation may be, and often is, removed.
Ulcers having absolutely formed, a cure
cannot  always be  effected by  the  re-
moval simply of the exciting cause.
  Inflammation of the lining membrane
of the maxiUary sinus, and as a conse-
quence, an altered  condition  of its  se-
cretions, may, it  cannot be denied, be
produced by other causes than irritation
resulting from a diseased  condition of
the teeth, and it is to this, that  ulcera-
tion here, is attributable.
  Treatment.—As in the  case  of en-
gorgement, the first indication of cure is
to give egress to the purulent matter, and
for  this purpose  an opening should be
formed at the most dependent  part of
the sinus; this may be  effected in the
manner as before described, through the
alveolar border, or rather the alveolus of
a molaris;  and it should be made large
enough  to admit the tittle  finger, and if
there be any  teeth so much decayed as
to  be productive  of  irritation   to  the
parts subjacent  to  the  antrum, they
should be removed.
  Free  egress for  the  matter  having
been obtained, and all local irritants re-
moved,  the antrum should be injected
from time to time, with gently  stimu-
lating and detersive  fluids.  This, in
cases of simple  ulcer, if the constitu-
tional health be  not seriously impaired,
will, often, be aU that is necessary to
effect a  cure.
  If the ulcer be  of a fungous nature,
the employment of escharotics, and,
sometimes even the actual cautery, be-
comes necessary; this last should be re-
peated  until the fungi  are completely
destroyed.  With regard however to the
employment of escharotics, such as the
nitrate of silver, blue vitriol, &.c, for the
purpose of destroying luxuriant granu-
lations in ulcers, it has been proposed
to combine them with some other sub- 
MAX              477               MAX
stance, so as to prevent them from im-
mediately destroying the granulations.
  The surface of the  ulcer should, if
practicable, be kept clean by means of
dossils of dry lint  or  pledgets spread
with some simple ointment.  The treat-
ment of ulcers of this cavity, is usuaUy
attended with more difficulty,  on ac-
count of their concealed situation, than
those of most other parts of the body.
Among other things,  Deschamps  re-
commends injections of a decoction of
quinine.   In  many cases a lotion of
sulphate of zinc may be used with ad-
vantage.  The remedies to be employ-
ed  in  the treatment of ulcers  of the
maxiUary sinus, as  in the treatment of
ulcers of other parts, should be varied
to suit the indications of each particular
case.   In debilitated subjects, tonics, as
quinine  and  preparations of steel, are
said to be highly serviceable.  There
are some cases  in which  mercurials
are very beneficial.   Strict attention
should always be paid to the regimen
of the patient, and such general treat-
ment adopted as may be best calculated
to restore the constitutional  health,  for
upon this, the cure of the local affection
often depends.
  If the ulcer be of an irritable  nature,
warm  fomentations, (conveyed to the
interior of the antrum  by means of a
properly constructed funnel,) of a  de-
coction  of poppy  heads,  chamomile
flowers, or the leaves of hemlock, will
often prove beneficial in soothing the
pain.  Tincture  of myrrh,  diluted, or
a decoction of walnut leaves  may be
advantageously employed  as injections
in cases of indolent ulcers—the last of
which, is recommended  as an applica-
tion to ulcers  of this character in other
parts of the body by HunezaAvsky, and
both of which are favorably spoken of
by  Sir E. Home.   This last  named
writer recommends  "diluted sulphuric
acid and the juice of the powder of dif-
ferent species of pepper  in a recent
state;" also nitrous acid  diluted  with
water.  The unguentum hydrargyri  ni-
trate, mixed with lard; the ceratum resi-
nae, and the unguentum elemi, mixed
with the balsam of turpentine, are also
recommended. The application of oint-
ments to ulcers of this cavity is always
attended  with inconvenience, and  on
this account they are less easily  cured
when seated here than when situated in
other parts of the body.
  Many of the ulcers of the maxiUary
sinus are regarded as  incurable, as, for
example,  such as are of a cancerous
nature,  and ulcerated fungus haema-
todes.  Although  the resources of sur-
gery have hitherto, in most instances,
proved inadequate to the cure of these
formidable diseases, nevertheless,  they
should be put in requisition, and  we
should endeavor to  combat them  by
every means in our power.  Deschamps
says, the interior of the  antrum should
be exposed at the commencement of  the
disease. He recommends the formation
of a large opening, if the alveolar  ridge
be healthy, above it,  if not, through it.
As much of  the cavity  as  possible
should be exposed.  This  done, he di-
rects, if there be a cancerous tumor,
that it be as thoroughly extirpated by
means of  a curved and flat bistoury or
curved scissors as possible. All that may
have escaped removal by this means, he
says, should be touched with the actual
cautery.   These, he  says, are the only
remedies  "to  be employed when the
membrane is  in  a state of cancerous
ulceration."   The surgeon, he  adds,
"should destroy the parts in such a way
as to leave only  the  osseous surfaces,
and  he should pay some attention to
these bony parts, which also, he should
carefully cauterize."   The disease  hav-
ing been thus removed, the surrounding
osseous walls that have been cauterized
will  soon  exfoliate, when a chance  for
a cure will be  afforded, and of which,
if the neighboring  parts  have not  been
so extensively invaded,  nature  avUI
avail herself.  The administration  of
soothing  and  anodyne  medicines are
also  directed.  Arsenic  has been em- 
MAX
478
MAX
 ployed with  advantage as an external
 remedy in ulcers of this kind.
   There  are  other  kinds  of ulcers of
 this cavity, but it  is not necessary here
 to describe the treatment for each of the
 various forms which this description of
 disease puts on.  Particular and ample
 directions  for each are laid down by
 writers on affections of this kind,  and
 though they may  not have special re-
 ference to  their occurrence in  the an-
 trum maxillare, they will, for the most
 part, be  found as applicable, as  when
 the ulcers are seated in other  parts of
 the body.
  The history of  several  interesting
 cases of ulceration of the lining mem-
 brane of this cavity, is  contained in the
 author's Principles and Practice of Den-
 tal Surgery.

 Caries, JYecrosis, and Softening of the
           Bony  Parietes.
  The  bony  parietes  of  this cavity,
 and sometimes the whole of the subja-
 cent alveolar border, and superior max-
 illary; the nasal,  palatine and orbital
 bones, as well as  some that belong to
 the base of the cranium and the malar
 bone, are involved in caries or necrosis.
 Molhties ossium, though rarely occur-
 ring  in the alveolar ridge, frequently
 affects the walls of the sinus.   Caries
 may  affect a considerable portion of
 both for a long time, without completely
 destroying the vitality of the diseased
 parts.  During its continuance a fetid
 sanies wiU be discharged from one or
 more fistulous openings through  some
 part of the cheek, alveoli, gums, pala-
 tine  arch, or into  the sinus, and from
thence through the natural opening in-
to the nose.   The disease  eventually
terminates in  the  decomposition  and
death of the parts affected, and  then by
an operation  of the economy,  this is
separated  from  the living bone  and
thrown off, or in other words, is exfoli-
 ated. Although caries ultimately causes
the death of the bone affected  by it, it
does not always precede the destruction
 of vitality in osseous tissues.  The oc-
 currence of necrosis, therefore, although
 it may result as a consequence of caries,
 is not necessarily dependent upon it.
   When the Avails of the antrum or
 alveoli are affected by  necrosis,  the
 soft parts in contact with the  diseased
 or dead bone, inflame, ulcerate and dis-
 charge a fetid ichorous  matter.  The
 gums sometimes become  gangrenous
 and  slough.  The  destruction of  the
 vitality of the  osseous parts often pro-
 gresses very  sloAvly,  and thus  piece
 after piece  is exfoliated  until  the dis-
 ease is arrested.
   Besides these  affections, it  not un-
 frequently happens that  the  osseous
 parietes of the antrum, are so  softened
 as to be easily bent.  This alteration of
 the  bone,  as  well  as the others just
 noticed,  are, in nearly every instance,
 preceded by some other affection of this
 cavity.
   The annoyance occasioned by caries
 and necrosis of the bony Avails of this cav-
 ity or of the alveoli, to the unhappy pa-
 tient, is very great The fetor of the sanies
 is sometimes almost insufferable; and
 the matter often excoriates and inflames
 the parts with which it comes  in  con-
 tact to such a degree, as to cause them
 to become exceedingly sensitive and not
 unfrequently to ulcerate.
   Symptoms.—It is  sometimes difficult
 to distinguish caries  and necrosis of the
 bony parietes of the antrum from some
 of the affections  that  seat  themselves
 within this cavity.   They, therefore,
 often exist for a long time without be-
 ing suspected.  The signs that indicate
 mollities ossium or softness of the walls
 of this cavity, are such,  as not to  be
 easily mistaken for  those  of any other
 affection.  In this disease, the walls of
 the sinus yield to  pressure, and regain
 their former shape when  the pressure,
 is removed.   Its existence, therefore,
 may always be known by these signs,
 and as these are sufficient, it is  not ne-
 cessary to enumerate any of the other-
by which it is characterized.  Caries 
MAX               479              MAX
and necrosis not being so easily detect-
ed, often make considerable progress be-
fore their existence is ascertained.   The
fetor and appearance of the matter  dis-
charged, do not always furnish  a di-
agnosis that can be relied upon, inas-
much as some of the diseases that oc-
cur within this cavity, cause its  secre-
tions to become equally as offensive as
the sanies resulting from caries, or ne-
crosis, and not unlike it in appearance.
Their existence may, in most instances,
be inferred, from the discharge  of dark
fetid sanies.  The exfoliation of pieces
 of bone will set all doubt at rest.
   Caries  or necrosis  may often be de-
 tected by perforating the antrum  and
 exposing the denuded or diseased bone;
 or when there  is an  external opening,
 by probing it.   In  this  way any loose
 or dead bone may be  felt with the in-
 strument ; and the diagnosis in either
 case will  be satisfactory.
   When  caries or necrosis is situated
 in the alveolar border, or floor of the an-
 trum, its  existence can be more readily
 ascertained.   The occurrence of either
 in the alveolar ridge, causes the gums
 to inflame; to assume a dark purple or
 livid appearance; to  separate from the
 sockets of the teeth,  and frequently to
 slough in large pieces  and expose the
 caried or  necrosed bone.  When situat-
 ed in the floor of the antrum, the rough
 denuded bone may be easily felt  with a
 probe or stilet,  introduced through the
 fistula in the gums or alveolus of a
 tooth from which the matter is discharg-
 ed.
   The pain  acompanying these  affec-
 tions does not constitute a diagnosis of
 much importance, since this, is said not
 to belong to the osseous tissue,  but to
 the soft parts that cover it.
   Causes.—Caries, necrosis and other
 alterations of the  osseous walls of the
 maxtilary sinus are thought by some to
 result, very  frequently, from   certain
 specific or constitutional vices;  such,
 for example, as the venereal, scorbutic,
 scrofulous,  cancerous, &c, indepen-
dently of any previous morbid condition
of the soft parts.  We  have yet to be
convinced, that disease ever occurs in
an osseous tissue, except in the teeth,
while the soft parts  in  contact with it,
are in a healthy state.   The author  is
of the opinion, therefore, that  the  con-
trary supposition is gratuitous.  A bad
habit of body or   constitutional  vice
may, perhaps, increase the susceptibil-
ity of the bony tissues of the body to mor-
bid impressions, but it is questionable
whether it ever gives rise, independently
of the condition  of  the  soft parts  with
which they are connected, to actual dis-
ease in them.
  The  immediate cause of caries and
necrosis of the osseous walls of the an-
trum maxillare, is  the destruction  of
the  periosteum, caused by inflamma-
tion or  ulceration. These  last  may
result from a purulent  condition of the
secretions  of the  mucous membrane
of  this  cavity,  engorgement,  abscess,
from the presence of foreign  bodies,
tumors, a blow upon the cheek or from
other kinds   of mechanical  violence.
They may also result from the irritation
produced by diseased teeth.  The pres-
sure of incarcerated fluids may perhaps
be regarded as the most frequent cause;
and from this too,  results  some of the
most aggravated forms of disease that
ever attack the maxillary sinus.
   A morbid action kept up in the peri-
osteum for a long time, by ulceration of
the lining membrane, or any other ag-
gravated form of disease in the sinus, or
 neighboring soft parts,  is apt, especially
 in  bad habits,  to result in caries of the
bone, but when the inflammation is so
 severe  as to cause the immediate de-
 struction of the periosteal tissue, necro-
 sis at once takes place.
   The  softening of the bone seems to be
 the result of the action of some solvent
 fluid upon it, capable of  decomposing
 or  breaking down  its  calcareous  mole-
 cules.  Although inflammation and ul-
 ceration are  always present,  and ap-
pear necessary to the  exudation of this 
MAX
480
MAX
 fluid, its production, nevertheless, seems
 to  be dependent upon  some  peculiar
 state or habit of body.
   Thus it is,  from other affections of
 this cavity, that those now under con-
 sideration are attributable.
   Treatment.—Complicated   as  are,
 most frequently, caries, necrosis and
 alteration of the osseous walls of the
 maxiUary  sinus, with other affections
 of this  cavity,  their cure is often diffi-
 cult and generally tedious.  The first
 indication  to be fulfiUed, however,  in
 their treatment, as in the case of en-
 gorgement, and  of a  muco-purulent
 condition of the secretions of the sinus,
 is to obtain free  egress  for any fluids
 Avhich  may  have  accumulated in  it.
 This should  be effected  in the manner
 before described, by the extraction of a
 molaris or bicuspis, and  the perforation
 of the base of the cavity through  its
 socket.   In addition to this, if  the dis-
 ease  of the  osseous tissue be  compli-
 cated with any other affection of the
 sinus, the means necessary for the cure
 of the disease with  which it is compli-
 cated, should at once be employed. It is
 not necessary here to describe the treat-
 ment of the other diseases of this cavity;
 inasmuch as that has  already  or will
 hereafter be done.
  Deschamps,  in  treating upon the
 affections of the  osseous walls of this
 cavity, after stating that the perforation
 or opening in it should be large enough
to expose the seat of the disease, recom-
mends the employment of detersive and
stimulating injections,  a decoction  of
 quinine, tinct. of myrrh and aloes, &c,
 &c.  These last, he says, may be intro-
duced as injections or  by means  of
pledgets  moistened  in them.  He also
directs the cavity  to be "cleared of all
foreign matter which may have obtain-
ed admission  into it."  This treatment,
having a tendency to promote a healthy
action in the lining membrane of the
sinus, will often be aU that  is required.
It should be continued until the caried
or necrosed bone has exfoliated, and the
 secretions  of the  antrum cease  to ex-
 hale an offensive odor.  The dead bone,
 however,  having exfoliated, a cure  is
 generally soon effected.
   It sometimes happens that the disease
 of the bone has been produced by some
 very malignant and incurable affection
 of the soft parts.  In that case, the re-
 sources of art, will, of course prove un-
 availing.   When the  disease of  the
 bone has  extended itself to the greater
 part of the superior maxillary and the
 bones with which  it is connected, as,
 for example, the nasal, palatine, orbital,
 &c, the most that can  be hoped for,
 from the skill of the physician, is a pal-
 liation of the symptoms.  Art in such
 cases, can  seldom  effect a cure. There
 are other cases in which it can only re-
 tard the progress of the disease, or as-
 sist nature in her efforts to separate the
 dead from  the living bone.
   It is impossible to lay down rules
 for the treatment  of alterations of the
 walls of  the  maxillary  sinus,  from
 which it will not be necessary occasion-
 ally to deviate.  It will be sufficient to
 state, that in those  cases, where they
 are extensively involved in caries or ne-
 crosis, it wtil  be proper,  in  addition to
 perforating the base of the sinus, if by
 this means the dead bone cannot  be so
 exposed that it may be detached from
 the living,  to cut away the whole of the
 alveolar border beneath the cavity, or to
 penetrate the sinus above it, or even, as
 Deschamps recommends, "through the
 cheek itself, whether there be an ulcer
 penetrating these parts or not."  Hav-
 ing by this means exposed the necrosed
 bone, it  should be carefully detached
 from  that  which  is  sound,  and re-
 moved.   By this, the disease interiorly
will be more fuUy exposed, and a better
opportunity afforded for applying such
other  remedies as its peculiar nature
may caU for.   It is important that the si-
nus should be kept clean, and the air kept
from it, and whenever any loose pieces
of bone are discovered, they should be
removed.  Their exfoliation should not, 
MAX
481
MAX
 as is justly remarked by the author last
 quoted, be hastened, by improper inter-
 ference, unless the state of the patient's
 health be such as to render it absolutely
 necessary, for, by so doing,  a  piece  of
 bone that is still  attached  to the soft
 parts may be broken. While this should
 be  carefully avoided, all dead pieces,
 isolated from the soft parts, should be
 detached from  the sound   bone  with
 which they may be connected, and re-
 moved.
   The character Avhich the affections of
 this cavity put on, being determined by
 the state of the constitutional health, or
 some particular  vice of body, it  often
 becomes necessary, in their treatment,
 to have recourse to general remedies.
 If the subject be  of a scrofulous  or
 scorbutic habit, or  is affected with any
 specific constitutional vice, such reme-
 dies as are indicated by the affection of
 the general  system under  which he
 may be laboring, should be  employed.
 It is not necessary  to describe the  signs
 by  which the various habits  of body
 and constitutional vices are designated,
 nor is it essential to point out the  cura-
 tive treatment respectively required by
 each.  Full and ample directions  upon
 these subjects will be found in works
 devoted  especially  to the  affections of
 the general system.
   Although  the  character and malig-
 nancy of the disease are determined by
 the state of the constitutional health, or
 disposition of  body,  its   occurrence
 seems to be dependent upon local irrita-
 tion.  Its  continuance, in  many  in-
 stances, results from this; and the cure,
 in cases of this kind, soon follows the
 removal of the cause that gave rise to it.
   It sometimes happens When a very
 large opening has been formed through
 the inferior part of this cavity, that it
 does not always readily close.  This does
 not  often occur,  except  the  natural
opening has become obliterated. When
the parts do not manifest a disposition
to  unite,  the practice  introduced  by
Bordenave and Scultet, which consists
        41
  in cauterizing  the interior  circumfer-
  ence of the opening, will, in most  in-
  stances, prove successful.  If this and
  all other means fail, the opening should
  be closed by means of an obturator of
  fine gold.  This should  be  accurately
  fitted  to  the parts, and secured,  by
  means of a broad clasp, to a molar or bi-
  cuspid tooth, and if there be none suit-
  able on the side of  the mouth to which
  it is to be apphed,  the gold  should  be
  extended  to one on the  opposite side.
  If it be  necessary  to  replace the teeth
  lost with artificial ones, these may be so
  mounted  that  the  plate  upon  which
  they are  set, shall  cover the opening
  into the maxillary  sinus, and thus ob-
  viate the necessity of  any other obtu-
  rator.

  Tumors of the Lining Membrane and
              Periosteum.
    The lining membrane  and periosteal
  tissue of the maxiUary sinus occasional-
  ly become the seat of fungous and other
  tumors, and, in consequence of the con-
  cealed situation  of the  cavity, they
  often make considerable progress before
  they attract attention; hence, treatment
  which  might  otherwise  frequently
  prove successful, is, in most  instances,
  unavaihng.   The presence of a tumor
  here, may give rise to all the diseases
 to which its osseous walls are liable, as
 well as to most  of  the affections inci-
 dent to the lining membrane.  As soon
 as a morbid growth  has filled the sinus,
 it, as it continues to augment in size,
 presses upon the fining membrane, ex-
 cites inflammation,  and sometimes ul-
 ceration,  causing its secretions to be-
 come vitiated and unhealthy;  the  peri-
 osteum soon becomes diseased, follow-
 ed by softening, caries or necrosis of
 the  surrounding osseous tissues,  and,
 ultimately, one or more fistulous open-
 ings are  formed through the cheek,
 alveoli,  or palatine  arch.   These are
 among the most common  effects  that
result from tumors of this  cavity.  As
they increase in volume, they gradually 
               MAX               48:

distend and displace its bony parietes;
the floor  of the orbit is sometimes ele-
vated, and the eye more or less forced
from the socket; the palatine arch and
alveolar  ridge are depressed, the teeth
become  loosened  and  drop  out,  and
Avhen  the  tumor is of  a soft fungus
nature,  it  not  unfrequently   escapes
through the alveoli into  the mouth, and
after forcing the jaws asunder to their
greatest  extent, protrudes  from it  in
enormous masses.   Bertrandi gives the
history of a case  of polypous excres-
cence of the antrum, which, after hav-
ing destroyed the palate, anterior  part
of the maxiUary bone, and filled the
mouth, forced  itself up into the orbit,
elevated  its roof, pressed upon the brain,
and ultimately occasioned apoplexy and
death. Other similar cases are on record.
Mr. Cooper says there are three speci-
mens of diseased  antrum  in  the  mu-
seum of London  University  College,
in which the tumor in two had "made
its way from the antrum to the brain."
The third was taken from a patient of
his,  which  had died.   The tumor  in
this  case, which was of a medullary
and scirrhous character, forced itself up
into  the  orbit,  displaced the eye,  and
ultimately caused the death of the pa-
tient.  The same  author mentions an-
other case, the  subject of which was a
boy  in St.  Bartholomew's  Hospital,
who had a tumor of the antrum which
"made its way through the orbitar plate
of the frontal bone and  cribriform plate
of the ethmoid into the  cranium," and
though the portion that entered the
brain was as large  as a smaU orange, he
says the boy  was  only in a comatose
state about forty-eight hours previously
to his death.
   Tumors   occupying  the maxillary
sinus do not always originate in its
lining membrane or periosteum. They
sometimes arise from the pituitary mem-
brane of the nose, frontal sinus, or eth-
moidal  ceUs, and  after having found
their way into  this cavity, augment  in
in size, until they produce  the effects
2               MAX

just described.   Some suppose that the
 morbid productions found here, origin-
 ate more frequently in  the  cells of the
 ethmoid bone, than in the lining mem-
 brane of this cavity.*  The author is
 disposed to beheve that this opinion is
 not well founded, and that it has chiefly
 resulted from the great liability of most
 kinds of tumors of the maxillary sinus,
 to be reproduced after having  been ex-
 tirpated, which  is often attributable to
 the continuance of the cause that gave
 rise  to them in the first instance, or to
 their imperfect removal.  That they do,
 however, sometimes  originate  in  the
 ethmoidal cells,  there can be  no ques-
 tion.
   It  sometimes  happens that tumors
 having their seat  in  the antrum, after
 having fiUed it, make  their way into the
 nose, where  they acquire a size equal
 to, or even greater than, that which they
 had previously  attained, thus dividing
 themselves, as it were, into two parts—
 one  occupying  the  antrum,  and  the
 other, one of the  nasal cavities.  Oc-
 currences of this  sort  are  not unfre-
 quent, and they  sometimes lead to the
 adoption of an incorrect opinion, with
 regard to  the real seat of the disease.
 Thus a polypus  of the antrum is occa-
 sionally mistaken for one of the nose,
 and the error frequently not discovered,
 until an attempt is made to remove it.
   The character of morbid  growths in
 this cavity is exceedingly variable, as
 much so as is the state of the  constitu-
 tional health of different individuals,
 and the causes that give rise  to them.
 They not only vary in their appearance
 and  structure, but they vary in their
 malignancy.  Some  are of a  healthy
 flesh color, soft, sensitive, but not pain-
 ful,  and present  a smooth, regular sur-
 face ; others varying in their consistence
 from hard to soft, and in their color
 from a pale yellow to a deep red or pur-
 ple, present a rough,  irregular, and not

  * Vide Traite des Maladies de la Bouch, t.i.
 p. 210, &c. 
MAX
483
MAX
 unfrequently ulcerated surface, and are
 more or  less sensitive  to  the  touch.
 Some have their origin in the mucous
 membrane, and others, both in this, and
 the periosteum.   Some are attached by
 a broad base, and  others,  only by  a
 mere peduncle.
   As it regards this latter description of
 tumors, which  are  usually designated
 by the name of polypi, their occurrence
 in the maxillary sinus is questioned by
 some writers.   Sir Benjamin  Brodie
 does not believe that they ever form in
 this cavity ;* and in  this opinion Mr. S.
 Cooper  fully concurs;  but that they
 are occasionaUy met with here, seems,
 nevertheless, to  be pretty conclusively
 established.  A  case described by  M.
 Bertrandi in  his Treatise on Operative
 Surgery, page 369, has already been re-
 ferred to, and Bordenave, in his obser-
 vations on the diseases  of the antrum
 maxtilare, gives the history of a case
 treated by M. Doublet.  Rusch declares
 that he has twice seen polypus of this
 cavity,  'and Petitt, Levrette and other
 Avriters also affirm that they  have wit-
 nessed polypi here.f   The occurrence,
 then, of polypi in the  maxillary sinus,
 although very rare, it must be admitted,
 does sometimes happen. Other descrip-
 tions of tumors are certainly more fre-
 quently  met Avith in  this cavity.  Of
 these, some are of a simple fibrous, sar-
 comatous, or  osteo-sarcomatous, na-
 ture,:}: and when thoroughly extirpated,
 are seldom reproduced; others are of a
 medullary, cancerous, or carcinomatous
 character.  These last, although origin-
 ating in the mucous membrane, if long
 neglected,  are very liable to be repro-
 duced after their removal and generally
 occasion the death of the patient.

r *Vide London Medical Gazette for Decem-
ber, 1834, p. 850.
  fVide  Traite des  Maladies de la  Bouch,
torn. 1, p. 212,  and sur  cure des Polypes de la
matrice de la gorge, et du nez, p. 253.
  % Vide Professor Reese's Appendix to Coop-
er's Surgical Dictionary,  American edition,
1842.
   Tumors in the maxiUary sinus sel-
 dom grow  very fast during the  early
 stages of their formation;  but, as they
 enlarge, the neighboring parts become
 involved in the diseased  action,  and,
 consequently, furnish them with fluids
 less healthy in their qualities, and thus
 cause them to  assume  a  character of
 greater malignancy,  and,  generally to
 increase more rapidly in size.
   Symptoms.—The  occurrence of tu-
 mors in  the maxillary sinus is rarely
 accompanied, previously to their hav-
 ing obtained a size sufficiently  large to
 fill it, by symptoms differing materially
 from those occasioned by many of the
 other affections  that  locate themselves
 here.  After they have filled the sinus,
 the indications soon become less equivo-
 cal.  Swelling of the cheek, depression
 of the palatine arch  and alveolar ridge,
 loosening of the superior molar teeth of
 the affected side,  inflammation  and
 sponginess of the gums,  elevation of
 the floor of  the orbit, and protrusion or
 concealment of  the eye,  are symptoms
 which result from the presence of tu-
 mors in  this cavity, but they  are not
 peculiar to these affections alone; many
 of  them are produced by  mucous en-
 gorgement of the sinus. When to these
 is superadded the discharge of a bloody
 sanies from the  nose, or from one or
 more fistulous  openings through  the
 cheek, alveolar ridge, or palatine arch,
 the diagnosis will be conclusive;  and
 the existence of a tumor in the antrum
 be established beyond doubt.
  There are also other signs by which
 the occurrence of a morbid growth in
 this cavity may  be known; as, for ex-
 ample, the dropping out of the supe-
 rior molares of  the  affected  side,  and
 the protrusion of portions of the tumor
 through  the alveoli.
  The pain  is seldom severe until the
 tumor has filled  the cavity, except the
 excrescence  be, from its inception, of a
 malignant character; as it augments in
size, and forces the waUs of  the sinus
asunder,  it  becomes  more and more 
MAX
451
MAX
severe.   Sometimes, during  the  pro-
gress of the disease, it becomes almost
excruciating.   In  a case of fungus
hematodes of this  cavity, which  the
author, a  few years since  had an  op-
portunity  of  witnessing,  the patient
was in  the habit of taking upwards of
two tea-spoonsful of black drop at a
time, for the  procurement  of  ease and
sleep.
  In addition to  the  foregoing symp-
toms, several of the affections  already
treated on, together  with all the effects
produced  by  them, not unfrequently
result from tumors  in this cavity.   In-
flammation and ulceration of its lining
membrane, a purulent condition of its
secretions,  caries, necrosis, and a soft-
ening of its osseous  walls,  seldom fail
to foUow some of the stages of the for-
mation of  the morbid productions un-
der consideration.  It is  unnecessary to
mention the symptoms peculiar to each
variety of tumor, as they are given by
writers on general surgery.
  Causes.—Tumors of  the maxillary
sinus are dependent, for the most part,
upon both local  and   constitutional
causes. Scorbutic and scrofulous habits,
and persons whose general health has
been impaired by certain constitutional
diseases—such as  the  venereal, pro-
tracted inflammatory and bilious fevers,
dyspepsia, &c, are  most subject to tu-
mors of this  cavity.  Every thing, in
fact, which has a tendency to increase
the irritability  of the soft tissues of  the
body may be considered as so many pre-
disposing causes.  The local causes are
the same as those of most other morbid
affections of this cavity.  Diseased teeth,
gums and alveolar processes, are, proba-
bly, among the most common.  The irri-
tation produced by  these so frequently
extends itself to the antrum, that their
agency in the production of tumors here,
cannot be questioned.  There are, how-
ever, other causes of irritation to which
this cavity is  exposed,  as  blows upon
the cheek, wounds,  &c.
  Treatment.—Itis only in the early
stages of the formation of tumors in the
maxillary sinus, that surgical treatment
can be adopted with success, and even
then, their entire extirpation is necessa-
ry.   If this be  not accomphshed, a
speedy return  of the disease may be
expected.  But, preparatory to the re-
moval of the diseased structure, a large
opening should be made into  the an-
trum, so as to expose as much of it as
possible; and with regard  to the most
proper place for  effecting  this,  Des-
champs recommends, when the alveolar
ridge has been  started, the removal of
the first or second molaris, and the per-
foration of the sinus  through its socket
Avith a "three-sided  trocar  of suitable
dimensions." When the alveolar ridge
and teeth are sound, he directs the open-
ing to be made  through the outer wall
of the sinus above the ridge, and this
he thinks, on account of its being more
direct, is preferable to the other mode.
An opening may be easily  effected in
either way  into  the sinus,  as its walls
are generally so much softened as to
offer but little resistance.
  When the  opening is made through
the external parietes,  the  instrument
recommended by Mr. Thos. Bell, to be
employed for cutting  away the bone
after it has  been  exposed, is a "strong
hooked knife," which is probably as
well adapted to  the purpose as  any
that could be  used.   Some surgeons
employ strong curved  scissors, but the
hooked knife is  probably preferable.
  A free opening having- been effected
into the antrum, a finger of the operator
should be introduced, and the nature of
the diseased structure ascertained. This
done, he will be enabled to determine
the proper procedure to be had recourse
to for its removal.  If the tumor is of a
polypous nature it may  be  seized with
a pair of forceps  and torn  away;  if it
be attached by a broad base, its extirpa-
tion wiU be most readtiy effected with
a knife.  It is often exceedingly difficult
to effect its total removal even with the
knife, so that it not unfrequently be- 
MAX               485              MAX
comes necessary to employ the actual
cautery;  for, if any small portions be
left behind, as  has before been stated, a
re-production of the disease Avill gener-
aUy very soon take place.  When the
disease has  originated, or is  seated, in
the periosteum, the cautery is the most
effectual  means of preventing its return.
The French surgeons  have  applied  it
with great success.  Desault, in a case
of fungous tumor,  succeeded in effect-
ing a cure after three applications.  The
root of the disease, by the employment
of this, can  often be  destroyed, Avhen
less effectual means would fail.  But it
is important when  it is had recourse to,
that it should  have  such a  degree of
heat, as to accomplish this object instan-
taneously, else the inflammation that
would  otherwise be excited  by its ap-
plication, in  the  surrounding  parts,
Avould greatly  retard, if  it did not pre-
vent the cure.  The remarks  of Mr.
Thomas  Bell  upon this subject, who
says,  "the  Avhite  heat should be em-
ployed," are worthy of attention.
  In remarking  upon the bold practice
of the French  surgeons in the treatment
of these  affections,   the author  just
quoted says, it "is  vvorthy of our praise
and imitation;" and, continues he, "the
timidity which, until very lately, almost
excluded the use of the actual  cautery
in this country, has been one cause, and
that a very prevalent one, of failure in
the treatment of some of these cases;
but it is not  so easy  to  account for the
stiU more culpable dread, Avhich has in
so many instances prevented  any at-
tempt from being made  to extirpate the
disease; a degree of pusillanimity which
is at once an opprobrium on the profes-
sion, and a fatal injustice to the suffer-
ers, who, thus abandoned to the  unre-
strained progress of the disease, are left
to perish by  a  lingering and most  pain-
ful process,  without even  an attempt
being hazarded for their relief."
  The foregoing comparison, instituted
by Mr. BeU, between the practice of the
French  and English surgeons in the
         41*
treatment of tumors of the maxiUary
sinus, is certainly correct, and, it is due
to truth to say, that the bold practice of
the former, has been  fuUy and success-
fully emulated by American surgeons.
Dr. A. H. Stevens, professor of surge-
ry in the University  of  New York, in
1823, in a case of fungous tumor, at-
tached  by a broad base to the lower part
of the antrum, removed a large portion
of the lower and  anterior parts of the
upper jaw.  The patient recovered and
is said  to be living at the present time.*
In 1841,  Dr. J. C. Warren, of Boston,
for a case of cephalomatous  tumor of
this cavity, removed the superior max-
illary bone.  This operation was, also,
successful.!  The same operation was
performed soon after, and for the remo-
val of a tumor of the antrum with suc-
cess, by R. D. Mussey, of Cincinnati,
Ohio;f and  Dr. Fare, of Columbia,
South Carolina, has performed the ope-
ration twice with success.
  The operation for the removal of the
superior  maxillary,  did not  originate
with American surgeons. Velpeau says
it Avas  performed by Acoluthus in 1693,
for a tumor of the face.||  By reference,
hoAvever, to the history  of the case as
given in  a memoir of the  Academy of
the Curiosities of Nature, $ it will be per-
ceived that the tumor originated in the
maxillary sinus, and that only a part of
the jaw-bone was removed.   If,  how-
ever, we can believe Wiseman, this
most formidable operation was perform-
ed at a still earlier period.  He says in
his Surgery, the first  edition  of Avhich
was published in 1676, "that he cut in-
to a man's cheek, sawed in pieces the
alveolus, and took out the whole jaw,
and cured him."1f   Although  the op-

  * Appendix to Cooper's Surgical Dictiona-
ry, p. 30.
  t Boston Medical and  Surgical Journal for
1842.
  $ Western Lancet for 1842.
  || Velpeau's Operative Surgery, p. 263.
  §Decad 3, ann. 4o. obs. 57.
  HVide Wiseman's Surgery, p. 285. 
MAX
486
MAX
eration may have been performed thus
early, it does not at all detract from the
credit due to modern surgeons, since
the method  of effecting it, is,  at least,
original with them.
  Thus it is perceived, that the disease
under consideration not  unfrequently
calls for one of the most formidable op-
erations  in  surgery,  and that  by  it,
many unfortunate sufferers have been
snatched from the very jaws  of death.
Notwithstanding  the  performance  of
this operation, the apphcation  of the
cautery often becomes necessary  to pre-
vent a reproduction of the excrescence,
and there are many cases in which  it
cannot be repressed by this. The result
of the most  thorough  and best directed
treatment depends on the state  of the
constitutional health and  the  nature of
the disease.  In  depraved habits and
shattered constitutions, if the  tumor be
of a carcinomatous character, a cure
need never be expected.
  The hemorrhage, during the  opera-
tion for the  removal of tumors  of the
antrum, is sometimes  so  profuse as  to
require very prompt and active  means
to arrest  it.   It may, generaUy, how-
ever, be controUed by the employment of
compresses, ligatures, and suitable styp-
tics, but should these fati,  the actual
cautery must be had recourse  to.  See
Jaw, Upper, excision of.
  The maxillary sinus is sometimes oc-
cupied by fungous tumors, originating
in the alveoli of the molar teeth, or from
the roots of these teeth.   The following
is a case which came under the ob-
servation of the  author  in  February,
1846.
  In conclusion,  the  author would re-
mark, that professor Pattison proposed
in 1820, for the dispersion of fungous
tumors  of the maxillary sinus, tying
the carotid  artery.   He  was induced
to  recommend  this  method  of treat-
ment, from  the  consideration, that the
"capability  of action of a part,  is
proportioned to its  vascularity," and
that thus by cutting cff the circulation
of blood to it, the morbid groAVth would
slough and be throAvn off.  He says
this practice has been successful Avhere
it has been adopted, in all the cases that
have come to his knowledge.*
Exostosis of the  Walls of the Muxilbry
               Sinus.
  The osseous walls of the maxillary
sinus sometimes becomethe seat of bony
tumors—a disease  designated by  the
name of exostosis.   This,  however, is
not an affection  peculiar  to the bony
parietes of this cavity; all of the osse-
ous structures  of the body are liable to
be attacked by it.
  Exostosis, hke  many other diseases,
presents several varieties.   It is divided
by some writers into true and false, the
one consisting of a tumor composed
Avholly of bone, or  nearly  so, and  the
other, of a tumor composed both  of  os-
sific matter and fungous flesh, or of a
mere thickening of the periosteal tissue.
Sir Astley Cooper divides exostosis  in-
to periosteal, medullary, cartilaginous
and fungous. The first consists of a de-
position of bony matter on "the exter-
nal surface of a  bone and the internal
surface of its periosteum," and to both
of which it firmly adheres,   The second
consists of "a similar formation, origi-
nating in the medullary  membrane and
cancellated structure of the bone;" this
description of exostosis never  attacks
the walls  of the  maxillary sinus.   By
cartilaginous exostosis, he  means "that
which is preceded by the  formation of
cartilage, which forms the nidus  for  the
ossific deposit."   Fungous exostosis he
describes to be a tumor  not so firm in
its consistence as cartilage, but  harder
than fungous flesh, having interspersed
through its substance spicula of bone,
of a malignant character,  and depend-
ent upon some peculiar constitutional
diathesis, and action of vessels.  This
species of exostosis differs but little, if
at aU, from osteo-sarcoma.
  •Vide Appendix  of Surgical Anatomy of
the Head and Neck, pages 477-8. 
               MAX

  Exostoses differ as much in shape as
they do in structure.  They sometimes
rise abruptly from the  surface of bones
by  a narroAv  and circumscribed base,
projecting in large irregularly or spher-
icaUy shaped  masses;  at other times
they  rise very  gradually, covering a
larger surface of the affected bone, but
less massy and with limits less perfect-
ly  defined.   An  exostosis has  been
known  to occupy the whole extent of
the surface of a bone.   "The whole ex-
ternal surface of one of the bones of the
skull was found occupied by an exosto-
sis, whtie the cerebral  surface of the
same bone was in a  natural state."*
Both sides and the whole thickness of
bones are occasionally  affected by  this
disease.  This is what Sir Astley Coop-
er calls periosteal exostosis.
  Exostosis  is  said to  attack  some
bones  more  frequently  than  others.
Those  of the  skull,  the lower jaw,
sternum, humerus, radius ulna, femur,
tibia and bones of the carpus are said to
be most subject to  it.   It is  also very
frequently attacks the  upper jaw, and
none of the bones  of the body, in fact,
are exempt from it.
  The texture of exostoses is sometimes
spongy and ceUular, at other times very
dense.  Dr. E. Carmichael, a  distin-
guished surgeon and physician, former-
ly of Fredericksburg, but now of Rich-
mond, Va., described  to the author, a
few years since, an exostosis of the su-
perior maxiUary, which had, a short
time  before, fallen under his observa-
tion, larger than  a  hen's  egg,  and as
solid as ivory.   Exostoses of the roots
of the teeth are always hard, exceeding
in density, very frequently, even tooth-
bone; and instances are sometimes met
with  of osseous tumors  upon  other
bones possessed of nearly an equal de-
gree of solidity.   Exostoses of this de-
scription grow less rapidly  than those
which are more cellular; but they some-

  ♦Vide  last American edition  of Cooper's
Surgical Dictionary, p. 362.
7               MAX

times acquire  a very large size.  It is
not, however, uncommon for such, after
having attained a greater or less size, to
cease to grow, and "remain stationary"
through  life,  without giving rise   to
any very serious or unpleasant  conse-
quences.
   Exostoses sometimes attain an  enor-
mous size, and especially  upon  cylin-
drical bones;  very  large ones, too,  are
frequently met Avith upon the maxillae.
The  largest   one  of  the  maxtilary
sinus, of which medical  history fur-
nishes any account, is exhibited upon a
specimen of morbid anatomy, presented
in 1767,byM.Beaupreau,to the French
Academy. A description and drawing
of this tumor  is contained in the Me-
moirs of the Royal Academy of Surgery,
but we have no account of the history
of its formation, nor  of the symptoms
that resulted  from  it. The tumor  oc-
cupies the whole of the right maxillary
sinus, and several  of the  neighboring
bones are involved in it.   It is very
large near its base and projects from the
lower part of the  orbit,  forward and
downward, six inches.  Its largest  cir-
cumference, is said to be one foot. The
upper part of the maxillary bone, says
Bordenave, projects on the side of  the
orbit, and straightens the cavity; the os
unguis is included in the  mass of  the
tumor, and is represented as being near-
ly effaced.  The nasal bones of the  left
side are displaced, and the  right nostril
entirely  closed up, and the exostosis
projects so much on the left side as to
be nearly underneath the  malar  bone.
The inferior part of the maxillary bone,
says our author, is so extended near its
base, that it inclines obliquely  to  the
left, and the pterygoid apophyses of this
side are larger than those of the other.
The malar bone is  described as  being
involved in the upper and external part
of the exostosis, which  extends  to  the
left maxillary bone.
  Exteriorly,  says Bordenave, the  tu-
mor had  a smooth and polished appear-
ance, its  upper part was very hard, in-
4S 
MAX               488              MAX
 feriorly its substance had become thin-
 ner, was wanting  in  some places, and
 the interior of the exostosis was expos-
 ed.  The substance of the bone  was
 spongy  and  serous, and in  appear-
 ance, not unlike pumice stone.  The
 walls Avere thick, and measured in some
 places one inch.*
   From this  brief description, taken
 from the one given by Bordenave, some
 idea may be formed of the dimensions
 and  appearance of  this  enormous and
 most remarkable exostosis.
   A case of exostosis of each antrum,
 is described by Sir Astley Cooper, both
 of which forced themselves up into the
 orbits, and pushed the eyes from their
 sockets.   One  made its way into  the
 brain, and caused  the  death  of  the
 patient.
   Mr. Thomas BeU does not believe in
 the occurrence of "true exostosis upon
 the bony parietes"  of this cavity, but
 too  many examples  have  presented
 themselves to leave any room for doubt
 upon the subject.  Although none may
 ever have fallen under his  own  imme-
 diate observation, there are many well
 authenticated cases on record—the de-
 tails  of  a  number of which we have
 given  in another place.   Apart from
 these, we think it would be difficult to
 assign any sound reasons for supposing
 that the osseous walls of this  cavity
 should be more exempt from the disease
 than the other bones of the body.
  Symptoms.—The  attacks of  exosto-
 sis of the Avails of the maxillary sinus,
 are generally so insidious, that the pres-
ence of the disease,  is not, for  a long
time,  even  suspected.  Those   which
result from venereal  vice, Boyer says,
are preceded  by acute  pain, extending
at first to almost every part of the affect-
ed bone,  but which afterwards confines
itself  to  the  affected portion.   Those
which are occasioned by scrofula, the
same writer teUs- us, are attended by a

 •Vide Memoires  de I'Academie  Royale de
Chirurgie, t. xiii, obs. xii, p, 412.
  duller and less severe pain ;  the symp-
  toms  of  those resulting from  causes
  purely local, such, for example,  as  a
  blow, are very similar.  These  signs
  are common to the disease wherever it
  may be situated, and Avhen  it is seated
  in the maxillary sinus, they do not dis-
  tinguish it from many of the other af-
  fections that occur here; for they are
  often produced by them, as well as by
  exostosis.   Furthermore,  the disease,
  not unfrequently gives rise to other
 symptoms  which are  attendant upon
 several  of the  other  affections of  this
 cavity, so that previously to the disten-
 tion of its  walls, it may be confounded
 with inflammation of the lining mem-
 brane, or sarcomatous or other tumors.
 After  it has  fiUed the sinus, or very
 considerably thickened its exterior walls,
 it will cause them  to  offer a firmer re-
 sistance to  pressure, than will any of
 the other diseases of this cavity. When,
 therefore, they have become distended,
 if they are firm and  unyielding to pres-
 sure, the presence of exostosis may be
 inferred.
   Causes.—There is a difference of opin-
 ion among writers on the diseases of the
 bones, with regard to the causes of exosto-
 sis. Certain constitutional diseases,such
 as  "scrofula  and lues venerea,"  are
 thought by some to give rise to the affec-
 tion.   That the last  of these diseases is
 favorable to its production, is, we believe,
 admitted by all; but Sir Astley Cooper
 declares that no evidence has  yet been
 been adduced  to prove that the former
 is ever  concerned   in  its  production.
 Others impute the disease to local irrita-
 tion produced  by contusions, fractures,
 &c.   It  is  probably dependent upon
 both local  and  constitutional  causes,
 and that neither, independently of the
 other, is capable of producing it.
   Treatment.—A variety  of plans of
 treatment have  been recommended  for
 this  disease,  and  Bordenave  assures
 us it may be cured, if suitable remedies
are applied before it has acquired much
solidity.  Assuming  that it sometimes 
MAX              489              MAX
 results  from constitutional  causes, he
 directs  that  the  treatment should be
 commenced by the employment of such
 means as are indicated by the nature of
 the vice with which the patient may be
 affected.  If a venereal vice be present,
 the use of mercurial  medicines  are re-
 commended.  The author last mention-
 ed, says he has known it to be success-
 fully treated with mercury.  Topical
 applications, such  as fomentations and
 cataplasms,  have also been found ser-
 viceable.   Boyer advises poultices of
 linseed meal,  and  a  decoction  of  the
 "leaves of henbane and  nightshade."
 Iodine and mercury have been employ-
 ed, but not, so far as the author is aware,
 with any  decided advantage.  Sir Ast-
 ley Cooper  thinks  the  best internal
 remedy, is "oxymuriate of quicksilver,
 together with the  compound decoction
 of sarsaparilla."  The author, however,
 believes with Boyer, that a dispersion
 of an exostosis can never be effected,
 Its progress  may, perhaps, be  partially
 arrested, but is never removed  by the
 action of  the absorbents;  and  it is  not
 advisable  to remove a  tumor of this sort,
 unless it  continues  to augment, and is
 likely to become dangerous, or produc-
 tive of serious  inconvenience.
   When, therefore, the remedies which
 have been mentioned, after having been
 thoroughly tried, prove  unsuccessful,
 the tumor  should  be fully exposed;
 first, by the dissection of the gum and
 other soft  parts from the exterior waU
 of the sinus, and secondly, by the per-
 foration of this cavity with a trephine,
 or such other instrument as can  be
 most conveniently employ ed. This part
 of the operation, though simple, should
 be conducted with  care.  If the  tumor
 be large and  attached by a very broad
 base, its removal will  sometimes prove
 more difficult, yet by means of suitably
 constructed saws, scissors, knives, tre-
 phines, &c, it may, in most instances,
be easily effected.  An external wound
through the  cheek should always, if
possible, be avoided.
   Dr. B. A. Rodrigues, of Charleston,
 S. C, removed an exostosis from the
 maxillary sinus, a few years since, and
 the patient was restored to perfect health.
   Exostosis of the maxiUary sinus often
 gives rise to  other morbid conditions of
 this cavity, the remedial indications of
 which should be properly attended to,
 as should* also those of any constitu-
 tional affection, vice, or habit of body
 that the patient may be laboring under
 at the time.
   When the exostosis is not complicated
 with any other disease of the cavity,
 the restorative  energies of nature, after
 its removal, will generally be aU that is
 required to complete the cure.
   Maxillary  Sinus, Wounds   and
 Fractures op. The waUs of the max-
 illary sinus are sometimes fractured by
 blows and  pierced  by  sharp-pointed
 instruments.    Fouchard  mentions  a
 case, in which  a canine tooth had been
 driven up into it*   This is an accident
 that rarely happens.  The instance here
 alluded to, is, we believe, the only one
 on record; and as might be supposed,
 it was foUowed by severe pain, and it
 ultimately gave rise to a  tumor  upon
 the cheek near  the nose, and three fistu-
 lous openings, from which a fetid matter
 was discharged.   The sinus  having
 been opened, and the tooth taken from
 it, a cure was at once effected.  .
   It often  happens Avhen the waUs of
 the  sinus are fractured from a blow or
 other mechanical violence, that portions
 of the bone and foreign bodies are driven
 into the cavity, and which, remaining
 there, become a constant source of irri-
 tation to its hning  membrane, and, not
 unfrequently, a hidden cause of other
 and more malignant forms of disease.
 Bordenave describes  the  case  of  a
 French officer, who had  the walls-of
 one  of his  maxillary sinuses fractured
 by a fragment of a bomb.  Dressings
were applied  to the wound, but it did
not heal, and  upon examination, some-

  *Le Chirurgien Dentiste, torn. 1, page 391. 
MAX              490              MAX
time after by M. AUouel, several pieces
of bone and a splint which nearly fiUed
the cavity  were  found.  These were
removed, but a cure was not immedi-
ately effected ;  a fistulous opening stUl
remained, and it was not until a long
time after, when another splinter came
away, that the external opening healed.
The same writer mentions the case of a
man who had  a nail forced  head fore-
most, by the discharge of a  gun, into
his right cheek and  maxillary  sinus.
The  opening   became  fistulous, and
although the point of the nail was sub-
sequently discharged, it was not until
M. Faubert had removed the  remaining
part, that the fistula closed.
   Wounds of the antrum  are  almost
always  complicated with  fractures  of
its osseous  parietes, so that the effects
resulting from  them  are more  to  be
dreaded  than those  which  would  be
produced simply by the penetration of
it  with a sharp instrument.
   Treatment.—The nature  and extent
of the injury inflicted, should determine
the treatment most proper to  be adopted
for wounds of this cavity. Complicated
as they, in most instances, are with the
presence of extraneous substances  in
the sinus, the removal of these consti-
tutes the first,  and, not unfrequently,
the  only  remedial  indication.   This
should never be neglected.  When any
extraneous bodies, or portions of bone,
have been forced  into the sinus, these
should first be allcarefuUy removed. The
external wound should next be dressed
with adhesive slips so as to prevent the
formation of an unsightly cicatrix.  If
constitutional   symptoms  supervene,
they  should be met with appropriate
remedies.
   Maxillary Sinus, Foreign Bodies
in it.   That  foreign  bodies are  some-
times introduced into the maxillary sinus
through wounds penetrating its exterior
parietes, has already been shown, but
that they should gain access to it in any
other way, would seem almost impossi-
ble.  The smallness and peculiar situa-
tion of the opening which communi-
cates  with  it, is such,  one  Avould
think, as to preclude  the  introduction
of extraneous substances  of  any kind
through it,  yet they have  been found
here when they could  not have  gained
admission in any  other way.  There
are several weU authenticated cases on
record in which worms have been found
in this cavity.  The case mentioned by
Bordenave in  Obs. 12, p.  380,  vol. 13
of the Memoirs of the  Royal Academy,
of a diseased  maxillary  sinus, from
which several  worms  were at different
times  discharged, does not prove that
they obtained admission into it through
the nasal opening, and thus, as some
writers have conjectured, gave  rise  to
the disease  Avith  which it was affected.
In this case, a fistulous  opening from
the cavity,  had existed for a long time
previously  to  the  discharge  of the
worms from it, and it is very probable
that they introduced themselves through
this aperture. A cause sufficient to have
produced the disease  in  the  sinus had
been operating for two years, immediate-
ly preceding its manifestation.  The pa-
tient during the whole of this time was
affected with pain in the superior teeth
of the affected side.
   Deschamps says, his coUeague of la
Charite Hospital, found a worm in the
maxillary sinus of a  soldier, whom he
was dissecting, four inches long; and
the same writer informs us that  a simi-
lar example is  furnished in the Journal
of Medicine.  The particulars of a case
which came under the observation  of
Mr. Heysham, physician  of Carlisle,
taken from a work   entitled Medical
Commentaries, are contained in Coop-
er's Surgical Dictionary.  The  subject
of this case was a strong woman, sixty
years of age, who  was in  the habit of
taking a great deal of snuff.  She was
affected for a number  of years  with
severe pain in the regionlof the maxil-
lary sinus, which "extended over one
side of the head."  She was never en-
tirely free from  this  pain, but it was 
MAX
491
MEC
 greater in cold than in warm weather,
 and for the purpose of obtaining  relief
 she had been twice salivated,  and had
 taken various anodyne medicines.   The
 pain, however, instead of being mitigat-
 ed by these means, became more severe.
 Her teeth on the affected side were aU
 extracted, and as a last resort, the  max-
 iUary sinus  was perforated. This, for
 several days did notgive any relief.  In-
 jections of bark  and "elixir of aloes,"
 were thrown into it,  and "on the fifth
 day a dead insect" of more than an inch
 in length, and as thick as a "common
 quill,"  was removed from this cavity.
   Instances of the introduction of in-
 sects or foreign bodies of any descrip-
 tion into the antrum, through the nasal
 opening, fortunately, are exceedingly
 rare.  The  Memoirs of Medicine do
 not furnish more than four  or five AveU
 estabhshed examples.
   Symptoms.—The signs indicative of
 the presence of insects or foreign bodies
 in the maxiUary sinus, are  so obscure,
 that the fact can only be ascertained by
 perforating the cavity and on an exam-
 ination  of its interior.  Some  say that
 foreign  bodies here  cause  an  itching,
 crawling or tickling  sensation  in the
 substance of the  cheek.  This is an un-
 certain  diagnosis, for such  sensations
 are not unfrequent in the region of .this
 cavity.   That  they sometimes cause
 great pain, is proven by the history of
 the case related by Mr. Heysham, the
 particulars of which we have just no-
 ticed.  This, like the other signs, is not
 peculiar to occurrences  of this  sort
 alone.  It is more or less  common to
 all the morbid affections of this cavity.
   Treatment.—The proper remedial in-
 dication for foreign bodies in the antrum,
 is their removal.  When insects are dis-
 covered here, injections of oil and tepid
 water are recommended.  This consti-
 tutes aU the treatment necessary to be
 employed in  cases of this kind, except
 an artificial opening be required.
  MAXIMUM. The greatest amount
or quantity; opposed  to minimum.
   MAY-APPLE.   PodophyUum pel-
 tatum.
   May-Weed.  Anthemis cotula.
   MAYNARD, E. Essay on Salivary
 Calculus, by.   Read before the Ameri-
 can  Society  of Dental Surgeons,  at
 their third annual  meeting, in Boston,
 1842.—Irregularity of the Superior Den-
 ture, by;  published in' the fourth volume
 of the American  Journal  of Dental
 Science.  Dr. Maynard was, also, one
 of the editors of the third and fourth
 volumes  of the above named periodi-
 cal.
   McCABE, JAMES  D.  Effects  of
 Constitutional Disease upon the Health
 and  Structure of the Teeth, by;  pub-
 lished in the American Journal of Den-
 tal Science.—Dr.McCabe is also, author
 of a  Paper on Dental Education, pub-
 lished in the fourth volume of the above
 named periodical.
   McCABE, JOHN C.  Thoughts on
 the Abuse of Dental Practice, by; pub-
 lished in volume first of American Jour-
 nal of Dental Science.
   McCALLA, JOHN.  A  Thesis  on
 Tic Douloureux, or Neuralgia Faciei,
 by; published in the American Jour-
 nal of Dental Science, volume eight.
   MEAD.  A fermented  liquor made
 from honey and water.
   MEADOW CROWFOOT. Ranun-
 culus acris.
   Meadow Saffron. Colchicum atum-
 nale.
   Meadow-Sweet. Spiraea ulmaria.
   MEASLES.  Rubeola.
   MEA'TUS. A passage  or canal.
   Meatus Auditorius Externus.__
 The external auditory passage.
   Meatus Auditorius  Internus.__
 The internal auditory passage.
   Meatus CiEcus.   The eustachian
 tube.
   Meatus Narium.  Nasal fossa;.
   Meatus Urinarius.   The urethra.
   MECHAN'ICAL.  Mechanicus;-
from ^xavij, a machine. Pertaining to
a machine; the art of constructing  ma-
chines.  Also, acting by physical pow- 
MEC
492
MED
er.  It relates, too, to the sensible pro-
perties of masses of  matter.  In Medi-
cine, remedies which act by irritation.
Also, physicians who refer every func-
tion of the  body, whether  healthy or
morbid,  to  a  certain condition  of the
mechanical properties of the  blood and
other parts of the body.   For the appli-
cation of the term in Dental Surgery,
see Mechanical Dentistry.
  Mechanical  Dentistry.   The art
of constructing and  applying artificial
teeth,  artificial palates, obturators and
appliances for the correction of irregu-
larity in the arrangement of the natural
teeth.  See  Impression  of the Mouth
in Wax; Metallic Base for Artificial
Teeth;  Model, Plaster and Metallic, of
the  Alveolar Border; Model, Antago-
nizing, for Artificial  Teeth; Mounting
Mineral Teeth upon  a Metallic Base;
Spiral Springs, &c.
  However remote may have been the
origin of mechanical dentistry, it was
not until recently that  it arrived to a
very  high degree of perfection,  and
Desirabode, with a great deal of pride,
claims that it has made greater progress
in France than any other country.  It
cannot be denied that France was the
birth  place  and  early  nursery of this
branch of dentistry, and the French
are  certainly entitled  to great credit for
the  ingenuity and zeal they have dis-
played in its cultivation,"but it is due to
truth and justice to say, that its progress,
since  1835, in the United States  and
we  may  add, Great  Britain,  has  been
as rapid as in that country. In fact, there
is no country at present, where finer or
more ingenious specimens of mechan-
ical dentistry are produced, than in the
United States, or where this description
of mechanical appliances are made to
subserve a  more efficient or valuable
purpose.
  MECHANTCS.  The science which
treats of the laws of the motion of ma-
terial bodies.
  Mechanics, Animal.   That part of
physiology which treats  of the  laws
 which  govern the movements of  the
 animal body.
   MECHANISM.   The structure  of
 the body, the assemblage of the parts of
 a machine.
   MECKEL'S GANGLION.   The
 spheno-palatine ganglion.
   MECO'NIUM.   From mxav, the
 poppy.  The  inspissated juice of the
 papaver somniferum.   Also, the ex-
 crement in the large intestines of the
 fetus.
  ME'DIAN.  Medianus;  from me-
 dium, the middle. That which  occu-
 pies the middle.
  Median Line.   The imaginary ver-
 tical line supposed to divide a body into
 two equal parts.
  Median Nerve.  A nerve  occupy-
 ing an intermediate  position between
 the radial and ulnar  nerves, and pass-
 ing down the middle  of the fore-arm to
 the palm of the hand.
  Median Veins.  Three of the  veins
 of the fore-arm are so  called, the median
 cephalk, the  median  basilic,  and the
 common median.
  MEDIASTI'NUM.  The membra-
 nous partition Avhich divides the thorax
 into two lateral halves.
  Mediastinum Cerebri.  The  falx
 cerebri.
  ME'DIATE.   Mediatus.   Middle;
between two extremes.
  MEDICAL.   Medicus.   Relating
to the science, or  professors, of medi-
cine.
  Medical Jurisprudence.   Legal
medicine.
  MED'ICAMENT.  Medicamcntum;
from medicare, to heal. A medicine.
  MEDICASTER.   An empiric;  a
quack.
  MED'ICATED.  Having medicine
in it;  treated Avith medicine.
  MEDICI'NA.  The healing  art  A
science which has for its object the cure
of disease and the   preservation of
health.
  Medicina Conservativa.  Hygiene.
  Medicina Dletet'ica. Dietetic me- 
MED
493
MEL
 dicine.  That part of medicine which
 relates to diet.
   Medicina Gymnas'tica. That part of
 medicine which relates to exercise.
   Medicina Hermet'ica.  The em-
 ployment  of chemical remedies in the
 treatment of disease.
   Medicina Prophylac'tica.   Hy-
 giene.  Preventive medicine.
   MEDICINAL.  Medicinalis; from
 medicina, medicine.   Having remedial
 powers: adapted to the mitigation or
 cure of disease.
   Medicinal Days.  Critical days.
   Medicinal Hours. The hours when
 it is supposed medicine may be given
 with greatest advantage.  Those most
 commonly fixed upon are in the morn-
 ing, about an hour before  dinner, four
 hours  after,  and  before going to bed.
 But, as a general rule, the times should
 be governed by the symptoms.
   MEDICINE.  Medicina.  The heal-
 ing art.  Also, a medicine.
   MEDICO-CHIRURGICAL.   Be-
 longing or relating both to medicine and
 surgery.
   MEDICUS.  A physician.
   ME'DIUS. Middle; median.
   ME'DULLA.  Marrow.  Also, the
 pith of vegetables. The white substance
 of the brain, too, is so called.
   Medulla Cassle. The pulp of cas-
 sia fistula.
   Medulla Oblongata.  The upper
 enlarged  portion  of  the spinal cord,
 resting upon the basilary process of the
 occipital bone.
   Medulla  Spinalis.   The  spinal
 cord.
   MED'ULLARY. Mcdulbris; from
 medulla, marrow.   Relating to, or re-
 sembling, marrow.
   Medullary Arteries.   The arte-
 ries which go to the marrow of bones.
   Medullary Membrane.  The pe-
riosteal membrane which lines the cavi-
ties of hollow bones.
  Medullary Sarcoma.    Fungus
hsematodes.
  Medullary Substance.  The white
        42
 part of the brain.  Also, the internal
 substance of the kidney.
   MEDU'SiE.   A  term applied in
 Zoology, to a genus of soft  radiated
 animals or acalephes, called sea-nettks.
   ME'GRIM.  Hemicrania.
   MEIBO'MIUS'  GLANDS.   The
 small sebaceous follicles  situated be-
 tween the conjunctive membrane of the
 eye and the cartilage of the eyelid.
   MEKEL.  Author of a Paper, enti-
 tled, Whether those  Diseases which
 follow the Transplantation of Teeth, are
 always of a Venereal Character;  pub-
 lished, Hal., 1792.
   MEL. Honey.
   Mel Acetatum.  Oxymel.
   Mel .ZEgyptiacum.  Oxymel of sub-
 acetate of copper.
   Mel Boracis. Honey of borax.
   Mel Despuma'tum. Clarified honey.
   MelPrjepara'tum. Prepared honey.
   Mel Rosa:.  Honey of roses.
   Mel  Scillje Compositum.  Com-
 pound honey of squill.
   MELA.  From uaa, to search.   A
 probe.
   MEL^'NA.   From peXas,  black.
 Vomiting of concrete blood of a black-
 ish-red color.
   Mel.ena Fungosa.  Fungus haema-
 todes.
   MELALEUCA.   The  name of a
 genus of plants.
   Melaleuca Cajeputi. The name of
 a plant which affords the cajeput oil.
   MELANAGOGUE.  From  ueXas,
 black, and aya, I expel.  A  medicine
 supposed by the ancients to possess the
 poAver of purging off black bile.
   MELANCHO'LIA.  Melancholy.
   MELANCHOLY.  Melancholia;—
 from ptxas, black, and ^o^, bile.   A
 mental affection characterized by  de-
 pression of spirits, and occupation of the
 mind on one train of thoughts.  It was
 supposed by the ancients to be caused by
 bbck bile, and hence the appellation.
  MELANO'SIS.  From ueXavoa, to
become black.  An organic affection, in
which the structure of the parts assume a 
MEL
494
MEM
black color, and firm consistence, exhibit-
ing an appearance not unlike the bron-
chial glands, when, by a softening pro-
cess, they are converted into deep ulcers.
The  lungs,  cellular and  adipose tex-
tures are most subject to this species of
degeneration. It is called by Dupuytren,
bbck  cancer, and by  CarsAveU, meb>
noma.
  MELANOTIC. Of, or belonging to,
melanosis.
  MELAS'MA.  From fieXas,  black.
A black spot usually occurring upon
the tibia of old persons, which soon de-
generates in  an ulcer.
  MELAS'SES. Molasses.
  MELATROPH'IA. From ^oj,  a
limb, and atpotyia, wasting.  Wasting
of the limbs.
  MELEGE'TA.   Grains of paradise.
   MELI. Honey.
   MELIA  AZEDARAC.  Pride of
 China; an ornamental tree much culti-
 vated in the southern states.
   MELl'CERIS.  From uexi, honey,
 and sespas, wax.  An  excisted tumor,
 the contents of which resemble Avax.
   MELIGEPON.  From uexi, honey.
 A fetid humor,  of the consistence  of
 honey, discharged  from  an ulcer, at-
 tended with caries of the bone.
   MELILO'TUS. The officinal melilot.
   MELIS'SA.   The name of a genus
 of plants.
   Melissa  Calami n'tha.  The com-
 mon calaminth.
   Melissa  Citrina.    The  officinal
 metissa.
   Melissa  Grandiflo'ra.  Mountain
 calamint.
   Melissa Nepeta. Field calamint.
   MELIT'TIS    MELISSOPHYL'-
 LUM.  Mountain  balm.
   MELLA'GO.  From mel,  honey.
 Any  medicine of  the consistence  of
 honey.
   MELO.  Melon.  Also, staphyloma.
   MEL'OE NIGER.  The cantharis
 atrata, or blistering fly of the United
 States.
   Meloe Vesicatorius. Cantharis.
  MELON.  Musk-melon.
  Melon, Water.  The water-melon
plant.
  MELON'GENA.  The mad-apple
plant, or egg fruit.
  MELOPLAS'TIC.   Meloplastkus;
from uyxov, the cheek, and nxaaau, I
form. The operation for the restoration
of any part of the cheek when lost by
wounds or ulcers.
  MELO'SIS.  MriXaais; from urjXr;,  a
probe.  The exploration of a Avound or
ulcer with a probe.
  MELO'TIS.  A small probe.
  MEMBRA'NA.  See Membrane.
  Membrana Adiposa. Adipose mem-
brane.
  Membrana Arachnoidea.    Arach-
noid membrane.
  Membrana  Cellulosa.   CeUular
membrane.
  Membrana  Hyaloidea. The deli-
cate transparent membrane which en-
closes the vitreous humor of the eye.
   Membrana  Jacobi.  An extremely
thin and delicate membrane which in-
vests the external surface  of the retina.
   Membrana  Pigmenti.  The inter-
nal layer of the choroid membrane.
   Membrana Pituitaria. The mem-
brane which lines the nasal fossae
   Membrana Pupillaris.  A delicate
vascular membrane which covers the
 pupil of the eye until about the seventh
 month.
   Membrana Reticularis.  Cellular
 membrane.
   Membrana Sacciformis.  A syno-
 vial membrane between  the lateral ar-
 ticulation of the ulna with the radius.
   Membrana Schneideria'na.   The
 pituitary membrane of the nose.
   Membrana  Tympani.   The thin,
 semi-transparent membrane which cov-
 ers the cavity of the drum of the ear.
   MEM'BRANE.   Membrana.    In
 Anatomy, a thin expanded substance, of
 a cellular texture, intended to envelop, or
 separate, or form other organs, and to
 exhale, absorb, or secrete certain fluids.
   MEM'BRANIFORM.  Membrani- 
MEN
495
MEN
formis.    Applied  to  laminated parts
which resemble a membrane.
  MEMBRANOL'OGY.  Membrano-
bgia; from membrana, a  membrane,
and  koyoj, a discourse. A treatise on
membranes.
  MEMBRANO'SUS.   The  tensor
vaginae femoris.
  MEM'BRANOUS.  Having the na-
ture  of a membrane, or formed of mem-
branes.
  MEMBRANU'LA.  A  smaU  thin
membrane.
  MEM'BRUM.  A member; a limb.
  Membrum Virile.  The penis.
  MENAGOGUE. Emmenagogue.
  MENINGEAL. Meningeus. Rela-
 ting to the meninges, or dura mater.
  Meningeal  Arteries.  The arte-
ries distributed to the external surface of
the dura mater.   They are distinguish-
ed into middle, anterior, and posterior".
  MENIN'GES. From unviy%, a mem-
brane. The membranes which envelop
the brain.
  MENINGITIS.   Inflammation  of
the meninges.
  MENINGO-CEPHALPTIS. From
uriviy%, a membrane, xe$aXtj, head, and
itis,  a suffix, signifying inflammation.
Inflammation of the brain and its mem-
branes.
  MENINGOPH'YLAX.  An instru-
ment for depressing the dura mater, and
shielding it from injury while the bone
is cut or rasped after the operation  of
trepanning.
  MENINGO'SIS.    The  union  of
bones by means of membrane.
  ME'NINX.   A  term given by the
ancients to all membranes, but now re-
stricted to those of the brain.
  MENISPER'MUM.  The  name  of
a genus of plants.
  Menispermum Canaden'se.    The
name of a climbing plant found in va-
rious parts of the United States.
  Menispermum  Coc'culus.   The
name of the plant bearing the cocculus
indicus, or Indian berries.
  Memspermum  Palmatum.   The
 name of the plant which produces the
 calumba root.
   Menispermum  Tuberculatum.—
 The name of a Chinese plant.  The
 cocculus crispus.
   MENOLIP'SIS.   Cessation of the
 menses.    •
   MENORRHAGIA.  From urjv, a
 mouth, and pr^ywui, I flow  fiercely.
 Profuse menstruation; immoderate flow
 of the menses, or blood from the uterus.
   MENOSTASIS.  From mv, mouth,
 and ataais, stagnation. Suppression of
 the menses.
   MENS.  The mind.
   MENSES.  From mensis, a mouth.
 The sanguineous discharge at the pe-
 riods of menstruation.
   Menses, Immoderate  Flow  of
 the.  Menorrhagia.
   Menses, Interruption of.  Amen-
 orrhoea.
   MENSTRUAL FLUX.  The men-
 ses.
   MENSTRUATION.   Menstruotio.
 The flowing of the menses,  which,
 from  the age  of puberty, in  healthy
 women, not pregnant, and who do not
 suckle, occurs monthly.
   Menstruation, Painful. Dysmen-
 orrhcea.
   Menstruation, Profuse.   Menorr-
 hagia.
   Menstruation,  Vica'rious.   The
 occurrence of hemorrhage from other
 parts,  as from the nose, gums, lungs,
 and other organs, at  the regular men-
 strual  periods,  in consequence of the
 suppression of the menses.
   MEN'STRUUM.   A solvent. Any
 substance which has the property of
 dissolving one or more others.
   MENSURATION.   Mensuratio;
 from mensura, measure.  Act of mea-
 suring. In Disease, this means of ex-
 ploring the chest is sometimes  adopted
 for the  purpose of ascertaining its exact
 dimensions.
  MENTAGRA. From mentum, the
chin, and aypa, a prey.   An eruption
about the chin. 
MER
496
MER
   Mentagra Infantum.   Porrigo lu-
 pinosa.
   MENTAL.  From mens, mind.  Be-
 longing, or  relating, to  the mind.   In
 Anatomy, it  relates to the chin,  (from
 mentum, the  chin.)
   Mental Ar'tery.  A branch given
 off by the dental artery, which  issues
 from the anterior  mental foramen,  and
 is distributed upon the loAver lip.
   Mental Fora'men.   The outer  ori-
 fice of the inferior dental canal, situated
 on the outer surface of the inferior max-
 illa beneath the cuspid tooth.
   Mental  Nerve.  A  branch of  the
 inferior dental, which escapes from  the
 anterior mental foramen  to be distribu-
 ted upon the lower lip.
   MENTHA. The name  of a genus
 of plants.
   Mentha Aquat'ica.  Mentha rotun-
 difolia palustris.  Water-mint
   Mentha Cervi'na. ^Hart's penny-
 royal.
   Mentha Crispa. Curled-leaved mint.
   Mentha Piperi'ta.   Peppermint.
   Mentha Pole'gium.  Pennyroyal.
   Mentha Viridis.  Mentha vulgaris.
 Spearmint.   Mint.
   MENTO-LA'BIAL.  Mento-labialis.
 Belonging to the chin and lip.   Also,
 the depressor labii inferioris.
   MENTULA.  The penis, or clitoris.
   MEN TULAGRA. Convulsive erec-
 tion of the penis.
   MENTUM.  The chin.
   MENYANTHES TR1FOLIATA.
 The buck bean.
   MEPHIT'IC.  Mephitkus.  Applied
 to noxious  exhalations,  and to things
 possessed of poisonous properties.
   Mephitic Acid.  Carbonic acid.
   Mephitic Air. Nitrogen.
   MEPHTTISM. A poisonous exhala-
 tion ; all gases unfit for respiration.
   MERCU'RIAL.  Mercurialis. Re-
lating to, or containing, mercury.  Also,
 active; sprightly;  fuU of  vigor.
   MERCURIA'LIS.  Mercurialis an-
nua. French mercury. The name of a
genus of plants.
   Mercurialis Peren'nis.  Mercuria-
 lis sylvestris.   Mercurialis montana syl-
 vestris.   Dog's mercury;  a poisonous
 plant.
   MERCU'RIUS.  Mercury.
   Mercurius  Acetatus.  Hydrargy-
 rus acetatus.
   Mercurius Alkalizatus.  Hydrar-
 gyrum cum creta.
   Mercurius  Calcinatus.  Hydrar-
 gyri oxydum rubrum.
   Mercurius Chemicorum.   Quick-
 silver.
   Mercurius Cinereus.  Black oxyd
 of mercury.
   Mercurius  Cinnabarinus.    Red
 sulphuret of mercury.
   Mercurius Corrosivus.  Corrosive
 sublimate.
  Mercurius Corrosivus Ruber.—
 Red precipitate.
   Mercurius Cosmeticus.  Ammo-
 niated mercury. White precipitate.
   Mercurius Dulcis Sublimatus.—
 Calomel.
  Mercurius Emeticus Flavus. Yel-
 low  sulphate  of  mercury.  Turpeth
 mineral.
  MERCURY.   Hydrargyrum.  Hy-
 drargyrus.   Mercurius.   Quicksilver.
 The compounds of this metal form an
 extensive and important  class of medi-
 cines.  For the names of its various
 preparations,  see Hydrargyrum,  Pilula
 Hydrargyri and Unguentum.
  Mercury,  Dog's.  Mercurialis  pe-
 rennis.
  Mercury, English.  Chenopodium
 bonus henricus.
  Mercury,   French.    Mercurialis
 annua.
  MERIDRO'SIS.   From  ^poj,  a
 part, and ihpaais, SAveating.  A partial
 perspiration.
  MEROBALNE'UM.   From jutpoy,
 a part, and |3aXamoj<, a bath.  A par-
 tial bath.
  MEROCE'LE.   From  Wpo5  the
thigh, and xrp\r[, a tumor.  Femoral or
crural hernia.
  ME'ROS.  The thigh ; the femur. 
MES
497
MES
  MERRYMAN, G.  Author of a Pa-
per on the Osseous Union of the Teeth,
published in the first volume of Ameri-
can Journal of Dental Science.
  ME'RUS.  Genuine;  pure.
  MESARAIC.  Mesenteric.
  MESEMBRYANTHEMUM
CRYSTAL/LINUM.  The ice plant.
  MESENTERIC.   Mesentericus.—
Belonging, or relating, to the mesentery.
  Mesenteric Arteries. The second
and fifth branches of the aorta, are called
the superior and inferior mesenteric ar-
teries.
  Mesenteric Glands.  The lymphat-
ic glands of the mesentery.
  Mesenteric Plexuses. These plex-
uses, distinguished into superior, mid-
dle and inferior, are formed  by  the
branches of the great intercostal nerves.
  Mesenteric  Veins.   These are dis-
tinguished  into superior and inferior,
and both terminate in the splenic.
  MESENTERITIS.   Inflammation
of the mesentery.
  MES'ENTERY. Mesenterium; from
ueaos, the middle and evtepov, intestine.
A duplicature of the peritoneum which
maintains the intestines in their respec-
tive situations.
   MESERATC.  Mesenteric.
   MESMERISM. Magnetism, animal.
   MESO-.  Meaos, the  middle.  Used
as a prefix to certain words.
   MESOCiE'CUM.  A duplicature of
the peritoneum, at the posterior part of
the caecum.
   MESOCEPHALON.  The   pons
 varolii.
   MESOCO'LON.  From ueaos, the
middle, and xaxov, the colon.  A du-
plicature of the peritoneum  to which
the colon is attached.   It is designated
according to its situation.
   MESOCRANIUM.  The top of the
head, or vertex.
   MESODME.  The mediastinum.
   MESODMITIS.  Inflammation of
the mediastinum.
   MESOGASTRIUM.  The umbili-
cal region of the abdomen.
     42*
  MESO-GLOS'SUS. Thegenio-glos-
sus muscle.
  MESOLOBE. The corpus caUosum.
  MESOME'RIA.  The parts situated
between the thighs.
  MESOMPHA'LIUM.  The middle
of the navel.
  MESOPH'RION.  The space above
the nose, between the eyebrows.
  MESORECTUM.  The transverse
fold of the peritoneum, which connects
the rectum with the sacrum.
  MESOTH'ENAR.   The abductor,
and deep seated portion of the flexor
brevis of the thumb.
  MESOTHORAX.    From  fieaos,
middle, and thorax, the chest.  The in-
termediate of the three  segments which
compose the thorax in insects.
  MESOTTCA. Diseases affecting the
intermediate or connecting substance of
organs without derangement of the gen-
eral health.
   MESTILUS GERMAN!CA. The
medlar tree.
   Mespilus   Oxyacan'tha.  White
hawthorn.
   META-.   A common prefix, from
ueta, after;  with, signifying  change.
   METABASIS.  From  (ieta6aiva,
I digress.  A  change of medicine, or
treatment.
   METABOLEL'OGY.  Metaboleb-
gia, from  uetaSoXr}, change, and xoyos,
a discourse.  A treatise on the changes
which occur in the course of a disease.
   METACARPAL.  Belonging,  or
relating, to the metacarpus.
   Metacarpal Ar'tery. A branch of
the radial  artery  which descends ob-
liquely  upon the back of the  hand.
   Metacarpal Articulations.  The
articulations  of the  last four metacar-
pal bones, at their upper extremity.
   Metacarpal Bones.  See Metacar-
pus.
   Metacarpal Ligaments.  The lig-
aments  which connect  the metacarpal
bones.
   METACARPUS. From ueta, after,
and xaprfoy, the wrist. The bones of that 
MET
498
MET
part of the hand situated between the
wrist and fingers.
  METACORE'SIS.  Metastasis.
  METALLUR'GIA. Fromuetaxxov,
a metal,  and apyov,  work.  The art of
treating metals, or separating them from
their ores.
  METAL.   Metallum.   Metaxxov, a
metal.  A numerous class  of simple
combustible  bodies, distinguished  by
their peculiar lustre, considerable specific
gravity,  almost  total opacity, insolu-
bility in water, and as being conductors
of electricity and heat.
  The existence of forty-two metals
are admitted by chemists.  The foUow-
ing table contains their names, specific
gravity,  melting points, and symbolic
abbreviations.
Names of Metals.
Specific
Gravity.
15.
16.
17.
 1. Gold...........19.25
 2. Silver..........10.47
 3. Iron............ 7.78
 4. Copper......... 8.89
 5. Mercury.........13.56
 6. Lead...........11.35
 7. Tin.............7.29
 8. Antimony.......6.70
 9. Bismuth.......► 9.80
10. Zinc............7.00
11. Arsenic......... 5 80
12. Cobalt....,..... 8.53
13. Platinum........20.98
14. Nickel..........8.27
   Manganese.....6.85
   Tungsten.......17.60
   Tellurium...... 6.11
18. Molybdenum.... 7.40
19. Uranium........9.00
20. Titanium....... 3.30
21. Chromium.........
22. Columbium.........
23. Palladium......11.50
24. Rhodium...........
25. Iridium............
2t>. Osmium............
27. Cerium............
28. Potassium...... 0.86
29. Sodium......... 0.97
30. Barium.............
31. Strontium...........
32. Calcium............
33. Cadmium....... 8.60
34. Lithium............
 Fahr.
2016°
1873
2800
1996
  39
 612
 442

 497
 773

2810
oh. bp.'
2810
2800

 620
oh.bp.
oh. bp.
oh. bp.
oh.bp.
oh. bp.

oh. bp.
oh. bp.
oh. bp.

 136
 190
442
•Oxyhydrogen blow-pipe.
Au.
Ag.
Fe.
Cu.
Hg.
Pb.
Sn.
Sb.
Bi.
Zn.
As.
Co.
Pt.
Ni.
Mn.
W.
Te.
Mo.
U.
Ti.
Cr.
Ta.
Pd.
R.
Ir.
Os.
Ce.
K.
Na.
Ba.
Sr.
Ca.
Cd.
L.
	Names of Metals.	Specific Melting Gravity. Points. Fahr.
35.		
36.	Zirconium.....	.........
37.	Aluminium.....	.........
38.	Glucinium.....	.........
39.		
40.	Thorium......	.........
41.	Magnesium....	.........
42.	Vanadium.....	. .... .•••
                                Si.
                                Zr.
                                Al.
                                G.
                                Y.
                                Th.
                                Mg.
                                V.
  METAL'LIC.   Of the  nature of
metal.
  Metallic  Base  for  Artificial
Teeth.  A metaUic plate adapted to
such portion of the alveolar arch as is
deprived of natural teeth, and is to be
supphed Avith  an  artificial  substitute.
Gold is the most  suitable metal for this
purpose, and the  one most frequently
employed  by American  dentists,  but
platina is  occasionally  used, and so
far  as it regards its  indestructibility,
or  power  of  resisting  the action of
the buccal fluids, would  answer as
well as gold, but  the  heat required to
fuse it, is greater than can be obtained
by  the means employed for  melting
gold,  silver, and  other metals;  conse-
quently, if it were used for purposes of
this sort, it would beat a great sacrifice,
as the scraps and filings which would be
removed in working it into the  proper
forms, would be of little value, or at any
rate, they  could  not readily be re-con-
verted into plate.   It would not, there-
fore,  be a matter of much economy
to  substitute  the  use of  this  metal
for that of gold, and so much more
generally  is the  value  of the latter
known, than that of the  former,  that
there are few who would not decidedly
prefer it.
  The manner of preparing a metallic
base, is as follows:  The exact size of the
plate  is generaUy ascertained by  first
adapting a thin plate of lead to the model,
and marking the dimensions  designed
for the base to have on it;  the pattern is
then  cut and placed upon the gold plate,
if this be the  metal designed to  be em-
ployed, and its shape marked upon it.
 With a pair of  strong shears or snips, 
               MET               49!

the plate is then cut out to the size and
shape of the pattern as marked upon it.
Itis noAV annealed, and partiaUy adjusted
to the model Avith a pair of pliers, or for-
ceps made expressly for the purpose of
bending plate, and a hammer, it is then
again annealed and swaged between a
metallic model and counter-model. This
done, it is filed to the exact size required,
and, if  the piece is  to be held  in the
mouth Avith clasps, accurately fitted to
the teeth to Avhich they are to be ap-
plied.   It  is  sometimes  necessary  to
anneal  and  swage the  plate several
times in order to secure a perfect adap-
tation to the model.
  When block-tin or  lead models  or
counter-models are used as swages for
the plate, any  portion of these metals
which  may adhere to it, should be re-
moved  before annealing, as the  fu-
sion of such portions upon its surface,
by this process,  wUl  render the gold
brittle, and, in some degree,  destroy its
ductility.
  After fitting it to the model, it should
be tried in the mouth for the purpose of
ascertaining  if  the impression from
which the model was obtained is cor-
rect.  It sometimes happens that this is
imperfect, and, in which  case, a new
one wiU have to be taken, and the whole
process of procuring plaster and metal-
he models  and a counter-model, again
gone through with, and hence the pro-
priety of the precaution of trying it in
the mouth before the clasps and teeth
are attached  to it.  To be worn with
comfort, and at the same time  to sub-
serve any valuable purpose, it is impor-
tant that the plate should fit accurately to
all the inequalities of the parts to which
it is to be applied. When an unbroken
series of several teeth are to be supplied,
it seldom happens that much difficulty
is experienced in fitting the plate, but
Avhen the loss of six or eight teeth, from
different parts of  the dental arch, are to
be replaced,  with substitutes attached
to a single plate, a perfect  adaptation to
the various inequalities of aU the parts,
                MET

cannot always be easily procured.  But
until it is made to fit accurately, neither
the clasps nor the teeth  should be at-
tached to it.
  With regard to the width of the plate,
and the peculiar form  and shape  that
should be given to it in different cases,
there exists some difference of opinion.
Some prefer a very  wide plate, others
a narrow one.  When it is to be retain-
ed in the mouth by  means of clasps or
spiral springs, it should be from three-
fourths of an inch to an inch in width;
a suction or atmospheric pressure plate
requires to be considerably wider.  A
base for a substitute  for all the teeth of
the lower jaw, should  extend as far
back as possible, and for the upper jaw,
far enough back to cover the tuberosi-
ties of the alveolar border.  When the
substitute is to be retained in the mouth
by means of clasps attached to the me-
tallic base and fitted to one or  more of
the remaining natural teeth, it is impor-
tant that they should be  so constructed
as to fit with  the most perfect accuracy,
so that  when applied, no undue force
shall be exerted upon the organs around
which  they  are placed.   In  uniting
them to the base, the  following  is the
method of procedure usually adopted.
  Having sAvaged and fitted  the  plate,
it should be transferred from the metal-
lic to the plaster  model.  The clasps
should then be adapted to the  teeth to
which they are to  be applied, as repre-
sented on the plaster model,  to one on
each side, and here it may be proper to
observe, that the plate used for this pur-
pose should,  as  a general rule, be from
one-third to one-half thicker than that
employed for the base, and  as wide as
the length of the crowns will  permit.
This  precaution is necessary to secure
to the piece the greatest possible amount
of stability, and to prevent the clasps
from acting as retractors, or exercising
an undue force upon the teeth to which
they are applied.  If the transfer teeth
on the plaster model are imperfect or
do not represent the exact shape  and
9 
               MET               5

size of the teeth in the mouth, the clasps
should be fitted to the latter and there
united to the plate by means of a little
cement composed of two parts beeswax,
and one of resin, or common yeUow
wax, previously softened in warm water
or by afire, and then carefully removed,
with the plate, from the mouth.
   But supposing the teeth on the model
to be an exact representation of those in
the mouth, the clasps, when accurately
fitted to them and the plate,  should be
united to the  latter  in  the  manner as
above  described.   The whole should
then be  carefuUy   removed from the
model, and placed, with the convex sur-
face of the plate  downwards,  upon a
piece of paper.  This done, a paste or
batter  of plaster of paris,  should  be
poured on  the upper side of the plate
and clasps to the thickness of half  an
inch. When this becomes hard, the piece
maybe  taken  from the paper, turned
over, placed on a piece of charcoal, and
the wax  softened and removed.
  When the teeth deviate  from a verti-
cal position, and it becomes necessary
to  fit the  clasps to the  teeth in the
mouth, only one  can  be  applied at a
time, and the  greatest  care  wiU be ne-
cessary to prevent moving or altering
its position in removing the  piece from
the mouth.
  The clasps being properly secured to
the plate with plaster of paris, and the
Avax removed, a mixture  of borax and
water should be applied with a camel's-
hair pencil to the line of union between
the two, and several small  pieces of sol-
der. This done, they should be solder-
ed together  by means  of  a  blow-pipe
and spirit or oil lamp, or by means of a
self-acting  blow-pipe and  lamp.  See
Soldering,  and Parmly's  Self-Acting
Blow-Pipe.
  The clasps being attached to the base,
the teeth may be selected,  arranged, fit-
ted and united to it, and for the manner
of doing which, see Mounting Porcelain
Teeth, upon a metallic base.
  In supplying the loss of the natural
                MET

teeth with an artificial substitute, the in-
genuity of the dentist is often taxed to
its  greatest extent, and not  only with
regard to the means employed for  its re-
tention in the mouth, but also with  re-
gard to the shape and  construction of
the base used for a support and attach-
ment for the teeth.  It may be weU, there-
fore, to give a  brief description of  the
form of a base for artificial teeth as em-
ployed in  different cases.
  In  supplying the  loss of  an  upper
central incisor, the usual practice is  to
extend the plate back on the inside of
the dental arch, and attach each branch
to a first or second bicuspis, or a mo-
laris,  by  means  of a  clasp.  But it
sometimes happens that a suitable tooth
for this  purpose can only be  found  on
one side of the mouth, and in this case
one of the branches of the plate may be
dispensed with, and in fact, it may, in
almost all cases, where  a suitable tooth
can be had  to serve as  an  attachment
for the clasp.  But when only one clasp
is employed, the  tooth to which it is
applied should  have a tolerably  long
crown, else a sufficient  amount of sta-
bility cannot be obtained for the piece.
  In the construction of a base for two
or more incisores, or for  the whole four,
or a  greater number of teeth,  each
extremity should  be  provided  Avith a
clasp, if a tooth can be procured on each
side to Avhich a clasp  can be apphed.
But in the event of  the loss  of all the
teeth on  one side of the mouth, and
there be one or more securely articulated
molares, on the other, the base may be
provided Avith one or two clasps on the
side on which  the remaining teeth are
situated; but in this case, they should
be so  adjusted, that  when  the piece is
applied, as to hold the opposite side of
the  base securely  against the alveolar
border.    When,  however,  there are
only one or two teeth  remaining on one
side of the jaw, the better practice is to
remove them, and furnish a  substitute
for the entire arch upon the atmospheric
pressure or suction principle, or to cut
)0 
MET
501
MET
 a sufficiently  large hole through the
 base to admit the remaining teeth.
   In the construction of a base for two
 or three teeth on one side of the mouth,
 say, for example, the two  bicuspides,
 the posterior  extremity only need be
 provided with a  clasp.   For  a like
 number on each side of the mouth, ad-
 ditional stabihty may be given  to the
 piece by extending the plate across be-
 hind the front  teeth, or  by  connecting
 the two plates by means of a third, pass-
 ing across  from side to side, under the
 palatine arch, a method recommended
 by Dr.  Roper, of Philadelphia.
   With a  view of avoiding in  most
 cases, the use of clasps, and preventing
 the hurtful effects which so often  result
 from their  employment, Dr.  G. E.
 Hays,  of Buffalo, N. Y., recommends
 perforating the  base in  such a way as
 to permit one or more remaining teeth
 to pass through it.  The author has
 adopted this plan in two cases with de-
 cided advantage. For a fall description
 of his method of procedure, see Ameri-
 can Journal of Dental Science, vol. 8,
 No. 4.
   It often happens that the  loss  of the
 teeth results from  disease in the  gums
 and alveolar processes, and when this
 happens, the latter are so much wasted
 and destroyed, that the ridge in the low-
 er jaAV  is scarcely perceptible and  be-
 comes covered with loose folds  of mu-
 cous membrane.  In cases of this  de-
 scription, the application of a dental sub-
 stitute often becomes exceedingly diffi-
 cult.  The pressure of the apparatus is
 apt to cause irritation.   But  this  diffi-
 culty may, in most cases, be obviated by
 using a thick base, fitted accurately to
 the parts and extended back  upon the
 coronoid processes.  It  should,  also,
 when practicable, be  applied without
 springs.
  The upper plate  should be about one
inch in width, and  the lower as wide as
the shape of the ridge wiU admit  of its
being made.  The loAver plate  should
be fully  twice as thick as the upper, and
 made from gold  at least twenty-two
 carat fine.  Twenty carat gold wiU do
 for the upper plate.
   From  the thickness of the plate em-
 ployed  for  a metallic base,  and  the
 manner of aUoying  and refining gold,
 and making it  into  plate, see articles
 upon these subjects.
   Metallic Base, Cleaveland's.—
 With a view of increasing the adhesion
 of a suction or atmospheric  pressure
 base, a variety of plans have been pro-
 posed, all consisting, for the most part,
 in so constructing the base that a space
 shaU be left between it and  the pala-
 tine arch or alveolar border, from which,
 in its application, the air may be  ex-
 hausted; thus leaving a vacuum, which,
 in accordance with a well knoAvn philo-
 sophical  principle,  would secure  the
 desired end.  Among those who have
 attempted to avail  themselves of this
 principle, the author was, perhaps, the
 first to suggest it,  which he did, as
 early  as 1835, but  the  air  chamber
 which he designed  being regarded as
 somewhat objectionable, he did not use
 it.  Within the last  four  or  five years
 the principle has been applied by a num-
 ber  of dentists, but the best method of
 constructing a metallic base with an air
 chamber, which has come to the knowl-
 edge of the author, is the one contrived
 about 1845 by Dr. J. A. Cleaveland, of
 Charleston, S. C.  The following is the
 method of procedure in its construction.
   A metallic model and counter-model
 having been obtained in the usual man-
 ner, a plate is struck up, covering the
 palatine arch and so much of the alveo-
 lar border as is to be supplied with arti-
 ficial teeth.  This is then put in the
 mouth, for the purpose of ascertaining
 whether  it be accurately adapted to all
 the parts with which it is intended to be
 placed in contact, and if not, a new im-
 pression  must be  taken,  new models
 obtained, and the plate re-swaged, when
 it is again placed in the mouth.  The
plate being accurately adapted, a piece
of half round gold wire, (if the plate be 
MET
502
MET
ol this  metal,) as large as  a medium
sized knitting needle, is soldered to the
lower side of the plate,  describing a
circle behind the alveolar ridge, the size
of a twenty-five cent piece.  The  plate
within this circle is next removed; the
plate is next placed on the model, and
a piece of softened yellow  or  white
wax, about the twelfth part of an inch
in thickness, and of a circumference
one-fourth larger than  the hole in the
plate, is applied, so as completely to
close the  opening and extend a  short
distance beyond the wire on every side.
An impression in soft wax of the model
and the plate  as thus prepared, is next
taken, from  which a new model and
counter-model is  obtained, and a thin
plate of gold, large enough to cover the
wax on  the  first plate,  swaged up.
The wax is then removed and the two
plates soldered together, when, if it be
applied to the mouth, and the  air ex-
hausted, it will be found to adhere with
much greater tenacity  than a  simple
plate.  The base  being  thus  prepared,
the teeth may be  mounted in the man-
ner as described in another article. See
Mounting Porcelain Teeth  upon me-
tallic base.
  Metallic Tinkling. Metallic voice.
A peculiar noise  heard by the stetheo-
scope, when there exists in the chest a
preternatural cavity  containing air, or
Avhen there is air in the cavity of the
pleura. It is said to resemble that caused
by striking glass, or a metallic or porce-
lain cup.
  METAME'RIC.  Isomeric.
  METAMORPHOP'SIA.  From^-
tauopfyoa,  I transform, and aty, the eye.
A species  of  depraved vision in which
imaginary objects appear to be seen.
  METAMOR'PHOSIS. From ueta,
and uopfyrj, form.  Transformation.  In
Physiology, the change through which
any texture or organ of the body pass-
es in the progress of its development.
  METAPTO'SIS.  From uetanirtta,
I digress.  The conversion of one dis-
ease into another.
  METASTASIS.   From ueOiatyui,
I change place.  A change in the seat
of a disease.
  METATAR'SAL. Metatarsalis. Be-
longing, or relating, to the metatarsus.
  Metatarsal Ar'tery.  An  artery
which forms an arch across the base of
the metatarsal bones, supplying  the
outer side of the  foot, and giving off
three interosseal branches.
  Metatarsal Articula'tions.  The
articulation of the metatarsal bones with
each other.
  Metatarsal Bones. See Metatarsus.
  METATARSO-PHALAN'GIAN.
Pertaining to the metatarsus and pha-
langes.
  Metatarso-Phalangian Articula-
tions.  The articulation of the metatar-
sal bones with  the corresponding pha-
langes of the toes.
  METATAR'SUS.  From ueta, after,
and tapaos, tarsus.   That portion of the
foot which is situated between the tar-
sus and toes, consisting of five small
cylindrical bones.
  METATH'ESIS.  From uetatiBnui,
I change place.  Transposition.  Also,
the act  of removing the  consequence,
or cause of  a disease, from  one place
to another, where  its presence  will be
less hurtful,  as  depressing a cataract,
&c.
  METATHO'RAX.   From  ueta,
after, and thm-ax, the chest. The hind-
most of the three segments which com-
pose  the  thorax in  insects.
  METEOR'ISM. Meteorismus; from
ueteapi^a, to elevate.  Distention of the
abdomen with gaseous fluid.
  METEOROL'OGY, Mdeorobgia;
from  ueteapos, aerial, and  xoyoj,  a
discourse.  That department of science
Avhich treats of atmospheric phenome-
na, as the formation  of  dew, the pro-
gress of winds, &c.
  METH'ODISTS.  An ancient sect
of physicians  who endeavored to re-
duce the treatment of disease to exact
rules, supposing that all  morbid affec-
tions of the body was the result of con- 
MIA               503               MIC
striction or relaxation of  the  animal
fibre.
  METHOMA'NIA.    From  ueOr,,
drunkenness, and uavia, mania.  An ir-
resistible desire for intoxicating liquors.
  METHYLE.   A hypothetical radi-
cal of a numerous series of compounds,
analogous to those of ethyle.
  METOPANTRAL'GIA.  From^-
taftov, forehead, avtpov, a cavern,  and
aXyos, pain.  Pain in the frontal sinus.
  METOPANTRITIS.    Inflamma-
tion of the frontal sinus.
  METOPOS'COPY.  Metoposcopia;
from uetaitov, forehead, and axofteiv, to
view.   The art  of  distinguishing the
temperament of an individual by inspect-
ing the forehead.
  METRA.  The uterus.
  METRAL'GIA.  From uritpa, the
womb, and aXyos, pain.   Pain  in the
uterus.
  METRATRE'SIA.  From  uritpa,
the womb, and atpnaia, imperforation.
Morbid closure of the uterus.
   METRE.  A French measure equal
to 39.33 English inches.
  METRITIS.   Inflammation of the
uterus.
  METROCARCINO'MA.  From uri-
tpa, the womb, and  xapxivaua,  cancer.
Cancer of the uterus.
  METROCE'LE.    Hernia vagina-
lis.
  METROH^E'MIA.   From mtpa,
the womb, and aiua,  blood.  Sangui-
neous congestion of  the uterus.
  METROMAN'IA.  Nymphomania.
  METRO-PERITONITIS. Inflam-
mation of the uterus and peritoneum.
  METROPOL'YPUS.   Polypus of
the uterus.
  METROPTO'SIS.  Prolapsus uteri.
  METRORRHAGIA.  Hemorrhage
from the uterus.
  MEYER.   A Treatise on the Usual
Diseases of the Teeth, by.   Hanan,
1778.
  MEZE'REON.  Daphne mezereon.
  MIALHE'S ASTRINGENT  LO-
TION.  The foUowing is  recommend-
ed byMialhe for relaxation of the gums.
$.—Alcohol at 33°, 1000 parts; true
kino 100; rhatany root, 100; tr. of tolu,
tr. of benzoin,  of each, 2;  oil of mint
and of canella, of each, 2;  and oil of
anise, 1 part.  Macerate the kino and
rhatany in the alcohol for eight days ;
filter, and add the other articles.  A tea-
spoonful diffused in three or four tea-
spoonfuls of tepid water should be used
as a gargarism.
  MIAS'MA.   Miaaua, a stain  or  po-
lution; from uiaiva, I contaminate.   In
Pathology, the effluvia arising from sick
persons, and from the decomposition of
animal or vegetable substances.
  MIASMATIC.  Relating to, or pro-
duced by, miasmata.
  MI'CROCOSM.  Microcosmus; from
uixpos, small, and xoauos, world.  A little
world; applied  to man as the epitome
of every thing admirable in the world.
  MICROCOUSTIC.   From ju^poj,
small, and axovw, I  hear.  An  instru-
ment to augment the intensity of sound,
and assist in hearing.
  MICROGLOSSIA.   From  uixpos,
small, and yXaaaa, tongue.  Congenital
smallness of the tongue.
  MICROG'RAPHY.   From juxpoj,
small, and ypa^w, to describe.   A  de-
scription of objects  too small to be seen
without the assistance of a microscope.
  MICROLOGY.  Microbgia; from
uixpos, small,  and  Xoyos, a discourse.
In Scknce, a treatise on minute objects,
as microscopical animals and plants.
  MICROM'ETER.   From  uixpos,
small, and uetpov, a measure.   An in-
strument attached to a  microscope  or
telescope for measuring  small objects.
  MI'CROSCOPE. From uixpos small,
and oxortea,  I  view.   An  instrument
for the examination of objects too mi-
nute to be seen  with the naked eye.   A
microscope may be single or compound;
it  is single when  an  object can  be
viewed through it directly,  Avhether it
consists of one or more lens ; and com-
pound, when two or more lens are so
arranged, that the enlarged image of the 
MIL               504               MIN
object formed by one, is again magnifi-
ed by others, and seen  as if it were the
object itself.  The microscope has re-
cently been much used in the examina-
tion of the minute structural arrange-
ment of the various tissues of the body.
It is to the aid  of this  instrument that
we are indebted for the valuable and
highly interesting researches   of  Ret-
zius, Nasmyth, Owen and others, into
the minute structure of the teeth.
  MICROSPHYX'IA.  From uixpos,
small, and afyvyfios, pulse.  Smallness,
or weakness  of pulse.
  MICTURITION.  Micturitio; from
micturio,  I make  water.  The act  of
making water.
  MIDRIFF.  The diaphragm.
  MIEL,  E. M.  Pivots  of  Artificial
Teeth; Instruments  to move them, by.
Paris, 1810.—Manner   in  which the
Teeth pass from the Sockets  through
the Gums,  by.   Paris, 1810.—Some
Ideas on the  Connection of the Growth
of the Jaws connected  with the Denti-
tions; Researches  upon the Direction
of Second Dentition, by.  Paris, 1826.
  MILFOIL.  Yarrow.
  MILIARIA.  Miliary fever; from
milium,   millet.   An  exanthematous
eruption, so called, because the vesicles
resemble miUet-seed.
  MILIOLUM.   Diminutive of mil-
ium, millet.  A small tumor of the eye-
lids, in size, resembling a millet-seed.
  MPLIUM.  Millet.   Also,  a hard,
white tubercle, of the size of a millet-
seed, seated immediately under the cu-
ticle,  and when  pressed, discharging
its contents,  Avhich, seemingly, is of a
sebaceous  nature.
  Milium Solis.  GromweU.
  MILK.  Lac.   A sweetish, opaque
fluid, secreted by the mammary glands
of the females of the mammaha, for the
nourishment of their young.
  Milk, Almond. Emulsio amygdalae.
  Milk, Asses'.   Lac asininum.
  Milk, Cows'.   Lac vaccinum.]
  Milk, Eaves'.   Lac oviUum.
  Milk, Goats'. Lac  ovinum.
  Milk, Human.   Lac humanum.
  Milk, Mares'.   Lac equinum.
  Milk-Blotch.   Crusta lactea.
  Milk-Fever.  Febris lactea.
  Milk-Sickness.    Sick  stomach.
Puking fever.   A  disease quite com-
mon in the western and south-western
states;  it affects both man and cattle.
  Milk, Snakes'. Euphorbia corollata.
  Milk, Sugar of.  Lactin.
  Milk-Teeth.  The teeth of first den-
tition.
  Milk-Thistle.   Carduus marianus.
  Milk-Vetch.  Astragalus excapus.
  Milk-Weed.  Asclepias syriaca.
  Milk-Wort.  Polygala vulgaris.
  MILLEFOLIUM.  Achillea mille-
folium.
  MILLET.   Panicum miliaceum.
  Millet-Seed Rash.  Miliaria.
  MILLIGRAMME. The thousandth
part of a gramme, or 0.0154 troy grain.
  MILLIMETRE.  The thousandth
part of a metre, equal to  about two-
fifths of a line.
  MILPHO'SIS.  Baldness of the eye-
brows.
  MIMO'SA.  The name  of a genus
of plants.
  Mimosa Catechu.  Acacia catechu.
  Mimosa Nilotica.  Acacia vera.
  MIND.   The intellectual, thinking,
or intelligent  faculty in man.   The
term is also used as signifying the phe-
nomena resulting from the exercise of
this faculty.
  MIN'ERAL. Mineralis.  Any inor-
ganic body, found in the earth.
  Mineral Kingdom.  The division
of nature which includes minerals.
  Mineral Oil.   Petroleum.
  Mineral Pitch.   Bitumen.
  Mineral Solution.  Arsenicalis li-
quor.
  Mineral Teeth.    See Porcelain
Teeth.
. Mineral  Waters.  Springs im-
pregnated with substances foreign to
the  common composition of water, and
which exercise a sensible action on the
animal economy.   Mineral waters are 
MIS
505
MOD
 divided into five classes, namely, acidu-
 bus,  alkaline, chalybeate, sulphureous,
 and saline.
   MINERA'LIS.  Mineral.
   MINERAL'OGY.  Mineralogia.—
 That department of science which treats
 of minerals.
   MINER'S ELBOW.  An enlarge-
 ment of the bursa over the olceranon, oc-
 curring in miners who are forced to lean
 much upon the elbow.
   MINIMUM.  A minim.   The  six-
 tieth part of a fluid drachm.
   MINIUM.  Red oxyd of lead.
   MIRROR,  DENTIST'S.   Mouth-
 glass.
   MISANTHROPY.  Misanthropia;
 from  uiaos, hatred, and av^panos, man.
 Hatred of men and society.
   MISCARRIAGE.  Abortion.
   MISERERE   MEL    Ileac  pas-
 sion.
   MISTLETOE.  Viscum album.
   MISTURA.  A mixture.  A  fluid
 compound, containing several ingredi-
 ents.
   Mistura Acacle.  Gum arabic mix-
 ture.   Gum arabic emulsion.
   Mistura  Ammoniaci.   Ammoniac
 mixture.
   Mistura Amygdalae.  Almond mix-
 ture.  Almond emulsion.
   Mistura  Asafcetida.   Asafcetida
 mixture.
   Mistura  Camphor.ze.    Camphor
 water.
   Mistura Camphor.e  Cum Magne-
 sle .  Camphor with magnesia.
   Mistura Cascarille Composita.—
 Compound mixture of cascarilla.
   Mistura Creasoti.   Creasote mix-
 ture.
   Mistura Cretje.  Chalk mixture.
   Mistura Ferri Aromatica.  Aro-
 matic mixture  of iron.
   Mistura Ferri Composita.  Com-
 pound mixture of iron.
  Mistura Gentiane  Composita.—
 Compound mixture of gentian.
  Mistura Guaiaci.   Guaiac  mix-
ture.
        43
   Mistura Hordei.   Compound de-
 coction of barley.
   Mistura Moschi.  Musk mixture.
   Mistura Scammonii.    Scammony
 mixture.
   Mistura Spiritus Vini Gallici.—
 Brandy mixture.
   MITCHELL, J. B.  Author of a Pa-
 per on Irregular Dentition; published
 in the London Medical Gazette, and of
 notes  to Dr. Koecker's Essay on the
 Diseases of the Jaws.
   MITH'RIDATE. Mithridatium.  A
 compound  electuary, said to have been
 invented by Mithridates, kingofPontus
 and Bithynia.
   MITRAL VALVE.  Valvula mitra-
 Ik.  A valve at the opening of the left
 ventricle of the heart.
   MIXTURE.  Mistura.
   MNEMONICS.   From uvaouu, I
 recoUect   The art of assisting the mem-
 ory by signs.
   MOANTNG.  Audible expression of
 of pain or sorrow in low plaintive
 groans.
   MOBILITY. Mobilitas; from mow-
 eo, to move.  Capability of being mov-
 ed ; susceptibility of motion. In Physio-
 bgy, great nervous susceptibility, com-
 plicated with a convulsive tendency.
   MOCHLIA.  From t*.oXXos, a lever.
 The reduction of a luxated bone.
   MOD'EL.  Modulus;  from modus,
 a measure, rule, size, or bigness.  A
 pattern of something to be made; any
 thing  of a particular  form, shape, or
 construction.   A mould; something in-
 tended to give shape to castings. Some-
 thing  made in imitation  of real life.
 An artificial form.
   Model,  Plaster, of the Alveo-
 lar Border.  In the  adaptation  of  a
 metallic base, it is necessary to have a
 correct model or transfer of the parts to
 which it is to be applied,  and from
 which a metallic model and counter-
 model can be procured,   The manner of
 obtaining a plaster model, is as follows :
 An accurate impression, either in wax or
plaster of paris, having been procured, it 
MOD
506
MOD
should be first smeared with olive oil, and l
then filled with a batter or thin paste,
made of the best calcined  plaster and
water.  At first, it should be poured in
while it is quite thin, until  the indenta-
tions made by the teeth, if there be any
in the jaw at the time the impression is
taken, are fiUed; after which, the bat-
ter may be  allowed  to thicken a little,
before the remainder of the impression
is filled, and it should then be poured on
until the plaster is raised an inch or an
inch and a  half above the impression.
   After the  plaster  has   sufficiently
hardened, it should  be trimmed, and
after softening the wax in  warm water
or by a fire, it should be removed from it.
The same  impression can sometimes
be used a second or third time, but lest
the shape of it  should be altered in the
removal of the model,  a  duplicate im-
pression should be taken.   The plaster
model should be shaped with a knife,
so that a metallic cast obtained from it
may be easily  withdrawn from an im-
pression in the same or some other soft
metal.
   The model,  after having thus  been
trimmed, should have  several coats of
shellac or sandarach varnish applied to
it with a  smaU brush,  to give  it a
smooth, hard  and  polished surface.
This will prevent the model from wear-
ing  away by use,  and render it  more
pleasant to the touch of the hand.  The
sandarach  varnish is preferable to  the
sheUac, as it is more transparent, and,
consequently, does not color the plaster.
It may be made in the following  man-
ner  : take  sandarach,  §v;  elemi, gi;
digest in one quart of alcohol, moder-
ately warm,  until dissolved, then add
Venice  turpentine, § ij.   This is  per-
haps, as good a varnish as can be used
for plaster models.   Itis easily prepar-
ed,  but in warming  the alcohol,  some
care is necessary to prevent it from tak-
ing  fire. The sandarach should be of
the  most transparent quality, and wash-
ed in water before being put into  the
alcohol.
  Model of the Alveolar Border
in Sections.  It sometimes happens,
when the alveolar ridge is  very  deep,
that the lower edge of the arch inchnes
outwards, so much so as  to make the
span of it here considerably greater than
it is  a quarter or half an  inch higher
up.  In  this case,  if sand be  used in
procuring a metallic model, it would be
difficult to remove the  plaster  without
injuring  the impression made in  the
sand.  To obviate  this difficulty,  the
plaster model should be so  constructed
as to consist of three pieces, or sections.
After the three  are put together, the
model may be pressed in the sand un-
til a good impression is made, and after-
wards  removed  separately.   Dr. A.
Westcotl, I believe, was the first to in-
troduce the use  of  this description of
plaster model, which may  be procured
by first fiUing the wax impression with
the plaster as in the manner before de-
scribed; this is then  removed, and about
one-third from each side trimmed  off,
leaving the  lower surface  wider than
the upper.   This done, it is replaced in
the impression, and filled  up on each
side with plaster as  in the first instance.
After  the last   has consolidated,  the
model is trimmed in the manner as be-
fore described, and when it has become
perfectly dry, should be varnished.
  Model  and  Counter-Model   of
the Alveolar Border, Metallic—
Various methods have been adopted for
procuring metallic  models and counter-
models,  but the two following are  all
which the author deems it necessary to
describe.   One   of these  consists in
pouring fused metal in an impression
made  in sand with the plaster model.
By this means a metallic model is pro-
cured, and the female or counter-model
is obtained  either  by  immersing  this
in, or pouring fused metal on  it.  The
other consists in making  the  counter-
model first, by  either immersing  the
plaster model in, or pouring fused metal
on it, and afterwards obtaining the male
model by pouring fused metal in this. 
MOD               507               MOD
   When they are to be obtained by the
 first method, the dentist should be pro-
 vided with  a box about  six  inches
 square and three or four inches deep,
 filled  Avith fine  sand,  such as is em-
 ployed  in brass and  iron foundries.
 After this has been  sufficiently damp-
 ened to enable it to  preserve the form
 of the mould, the plaster model should
 be pressed in it to the depth of an inch
 or an  inch and a half, leaving a portion
 of it unimbedded, so that, at the proper
 time,  it may be readily  removed.  The
 sand should noAV be thoroughly  pack-
 ed on every side of  the plaster model,
 which,  after  this  has  been   done,
 should be gently tapped several times
 with some light instrument or hammer,
 for the purpose of starting or detaching
 it a little from the matrix, and then care-
 fully removed.  If the  model be com-
 posed of  three pieces,  the middle one
 should be first removed, and afterwards
 the two others.
   A shalloAv furrow or groove, of about
 an inch in length, should now be form-
 ed in the sand, on one side of the mould
 leading to it, and both the furrow and
 mould should then be  encircled  by a
 rim of sheet iron  of about three inches
 in diameter, and an inch and  a quarter
 in  width. If, in the  meantime, any
 particles of sand have fallen in the mould,
 they should  be  removed by  blowing
 gently into it, either with the mouth or
 a bellows.
   The mould being now prepared, the
 metal  to  be  employed  for the casting
 should be put in a tolerably thick wrought
 iron ladle, and fused either in a common
 fire or  furnace.   If brass is  used, the
 latter will be required to fuse it, but if
 zinc, block-tin or  lead be employed, a
 common fire will afford  sufficient heat.
 After the metal has become thoroughly
 fused, it should be poured on the inside
 of the ring into the furrow  formed in
the sand, when it will immediately flow
into the mould.  It is  necessary to con-
vey the fused metal into the  mould in
this way to prevent the liability of injury
 which it might sustain by pouring the
 metal directly in.
   If zinc or block-tin be used,  a suffi-
 cient quantity should be  melted to fill
 nearly the whole of the ring, but if brass
 be employed, it will only be necessary
 to fill the mould in the sand.   For all
 ordinary purposes, either of the first
 will answer, but  when  a very thick
 plate is  to be SAvaged, brass  is prefera-
 ble.
   After  the casting has cooled, it may
 be removed, or rather turned over so that
 the part presenting a transcript of the
 plaster model shall be upwards, while
 the remainder should be buried in the
 sand.  The casting thus placed, should
 be encircled by  the same ring which
 was first employed, and if it be made of
 block-tin, it should be covered  with a
 thin coating of whiting,  mixed with
 water,  until it is of the consistence of
 cream.  This may be put on  with a
 camel's-hair pencil, and after it has be-
 come perfectly dry, a sufficient quantity
 to fill the  ring,  of block-tin or lead,
 should be fused in the ladle as before
 directed, and when its temperature has
 become so much reduced as not  to char
 or even discolor white paper, it should
 be immediately poured into it..
   If the last metal be poured into the
 ring while it is at a higher temperature,
 or if the  precaution of covering the ex-
 posed part of the first casting Avith whit-
 ing be not used, the two will be liable
 to unite.  Even when zinc is used for
 the first  casting, there is danger of fus-
 ing it if the metal  poured on be too hot.
 When the last metal  used requires as
 high or nearly as  high a heat to  fuse it
 as the first,  an accident of this  sort is
 liable to occur, unless great care  be
 taken to prevent it.
   The gas,  which is  generated by the
 decomposition of the water in  the sand,
 sometimes  coUects  under,  or diffuses
 itself through the metal, and renders the
 casting more or less imperfect.  This,
 however, in most instances, may  be
prevented by pouring the metal slowly, 
MOD               508               MOD
or by making a small opening through
it, before it has congealed, with a wire,
for its escape.
  After the last metal has  cooled, the
castings may be separated, and if per-
fect, they are ready for use.
   By the second method of procedure,
the  use  of sand  is whoUy dispensed
with, and  this,  for  the  reason  that
smoother castings may be secured by it,
is, in most cases, preferable to the first
It consists in pouring fused lead into a
sheet or cast iron cup or box, of about
three and a half or four inches in diame-
ter,  and  three inches deep, until it is
half full, and immediately immersing
so much of the plaster model in it as
represents the  shape of  the alveolar
ridge and remaining teeth, if the latter
be left  on  the model,  and holding it
there until the lead congeals.   It should
then be removed, and the whole upper
surface of the lead, including that of the
mould made in it with the plaster model,
covered with a thin coating of whiting in
the manner as before directed. After this
has  become perfectly dry,  fused block-
tin,  at  a temperature  so  low  that it
Avill not char or discolor white  paper
when dipt and held in  it, should be
poured on, until the cup or box is filled.
When  cold, the castings  may be  re-
moved from the iron cup or box, and
separated,  when  they  are  ready  for
use.
   When a metallic model  and counter-
model is procured in the manner as last
described, the plaster model should not
be varnished, and as  the one immersed
in the fused metal is generally broken
in removing it, a  duplicate, varnished
as before directed, should be obtained.
   When it is necessary to have brass
or zinc  castings, they  must be made
in sand, as first described.
   Finally,by cutting about three-fourths
of the teeth from the plaster model,  be-
fore using it for obtaining metalhc casts,
the  plate may be fitted  more eastiy and
perfectly, to the teeth, around which
 clasps  are to be placed,  than  can be
done when they remain  on the plaster
model, for in the former case, it need
not be cut to fit the teeth  until it has
been  swaged, whUe in the  latter, this
must  be done  first, and, consequently,
in striking it up, it will be  drawn to a
greater or less distance from them.
   Model,  Antagonizing, for  Arti-
ficial Teeth.   After having made the
surface of the solder smooth Avith suit-
able scorpers, (scrapers,) and files, the
piece  should be placed in  the mouth,
and, if a series of artificial  teeth are to
be attached to it, a rim of softened wax
should be placed on the plate; the pa-
tient should now be requested to bring
his jaws naturally and  closely together,
imbedding  the  teeth  of the  opposite
jaAV in it.  While  his mouth is thus
closed, the  wax on the  outside of the
teeth and alveolar ridge should be press-
ed closely  against them.  This done,
the patient should  open  his mouth,
when the  plate  and  Avax  impression
should be carefully removed and placed
on a piece of paper, with the plate up-
Avards.   The upper side of the plate
should now be  smeared  Avith  olive oil,
and filled with a thin paste made of plas-
ter of paris, and as soon  as the plaster
has become sufficiently thick, it should
be applied, until  it is raised  an inch
above the plate, and extended back of
it on  the paper an inch and a half or
two inches. As soon as  the plaster has
become consolidated,  it should be neat-
ly trimmed around the  edges, and on
the lower surface behind the plate and
wax, and in which a deep crucial groove
should  be cut, or  several  conical  de-
pressions, half an  inch deep, excavated
to serve as moulds for the  formation of
corresponding  ridges  or protuberances
on the model with which this is to an-
tagonize.  The grooves  or depressions
thus formed, as well, as the impression
made in the wax by  the  teeth of the
lower jaw, after  the  plaster becomes
dry, should be  oiled, and filled  with a
thin paste of plaster, and as soon as the
latter has  acquired sufficient consist- 
               MOD               &

ence, it should be put on until this side
is raised to a thickness equal to that of
the side first filled.
  After the plaster has thoroughly con-
gealed, it should be  trimmed as before
directed.   When it has become perfect-
ly dry, the tAvo pieces may be separated,
the wax  and plate  carefully removed,
and  the  pieces varnished, when  the
model is ready for use.
  By this simple contrivance, an exact
representation of the manner in which
the jaws meet, is had, and the most ac-
curate  and convenient antagonizing
model procured that can possibly be ob-
tained.  Provided with  this, the dentist
may proceed to select, arrange and  an-
tagonize the teeth.
  Models, Elliot's Method of Mak-
ing.  A method invented  by  Dr.  W.
H.  Elliot,  of Montreal, for obtaining
a perfect metallic model, which is done
in the following manner:
  The plaster  model is first  trimmed
and  then covered with one or two coats
of sheUac  varnish,  and when  dry, it
should be slightly smeared with sweet
oil,  the model is then  laid upon  the
bench and the face surrounded by a cop-
per hoop of about  three-fourths  of an
inch in depth, this hoop is then fiUed
with a composition of one part plaster
of paris, and two parts sand, and when
hard it may be  carefully removed from
the model by jarring it first Avith a light
hammer, and then  by  cautiously sup-
porting it with the  fingers.  We now
have an impression in plaster and sand
which  is a perfect representation of the
wax.   This impression is then  laid
upon the bench  with another  hoop of
the same size and shape laid upon it,
for the purpose of deepening the mould.
This last hoop  may then be lined with
more of the composition,  so as to pre-
vent the melted metal from  escaping
between  them,  and also  to  give  the
mould a proper shape. The mould may
then be heated nearly to redness upon a
shovel  in the furnace,  and it  is then
ready to receive the zinc.
        43*
09              MOL

   Models, Lee's Method of Obtain-
 ing.   "I take the impression," says Dr.
 L., "in the usual manner, preferring sim-
 ply the clean yellow wax to any prepa-
 ration of it.  I fill  the  mould with pre-
 pared plaster, raising above the teeth
 and gums a  body about half an  inch
 high.  This I trim smooth  before har-
 dening, and after melting off the wax,'I
 dry the cast well on the fire, wrap it  in
 two or three turns of  common news-
 paper. It is now  prepared to  receive
 the metal.  This consists of one part by
 weight of type-metal and two  parts of
 lead, previously melted together and run
 into  ingots.  This alloy is easily fused,
 and retains its  fluidity at a low  heat, it
 is hard when cold, and  in cooling does
 not shrink, the antimony in the type-
 metal having the property of expanding
 in cooling.
  "This metal melted, but not hot enough
 to burn a strip of paper put into it, is
 noAv poured on the plaster model so as
 to cover the gums and nearly to  the top
 of the teeth, as the latter should not be
 covered in the first pouring, as there
 may be an escape of vapor and gas from
 the plaster;  as soon as this ceases, hav-
 ing  kept the metal hot,"  the  mould
 should be fiUed  up, "forming  a  solid
 body above the teeth.  When cold, take
 out the plaster, envelop the metal cast
 just made in paper and make the reverse
 swage by pouring  in the metal some-
 what colder than first used."
    MODPOLUS.  A hollow cone in the
 cochlea of the  ear, forming a  central
 pillar, round which the gyri  of  the
 cochlea pass.
    MODUS  OPERAN'DI.  Mode  of
 operating.  Mode of curing.  The  gen-
 eral  principles upon which medicines
 act in morbid conditions of the body.
    MO EBIUS.  Dissertation on Tooth-
 Ache, by.  Jena, 1661.
   MOGILA'LIA.   From jttoytj,  with
 difficulty, and a.aA.EM>, to speak. Impedi-
 ment of speech, or difficult articulation.
   MO'LA.  The patella.
   MOLAR.   Molaris;  from  mob,
)9 
MOL               510               MOM
 a millstone.   That which  bruises  or
 grinds.
   Molar Glands.  Two small bodies
 formed by a number  of mucous  cryp-
 tae, between the masseter and  buccina-
 tor muscles, furnished with an excreto-
 ry duct which opens  opposite the wis-
 dom tooth.
   Molar Teeth.    Dentes  molares;
 molares permanentes  dentes; mylodon-
 tes; mylacri; gomphioi; grinders. The
 molar teeth occupy the posterior part of
 the alveolar arch, and are six to each
jaw—three on either  side.  They are
 distinguished by their greater size, the
 first and second being the largest, the
 grinding surfaces have the enamel thick-
 er and surmounted by four  or five tu-
 bercles or cusps, with as many corres-
 ponding depressions, arranged in such
 manner that the tubercles of the upper
jaw, are adapted  to the depressions  of
the lower, and vice versa.
   The upper molares  have three roots,
sometimes four,  and as many as five
are occasionally seen;  of these roots two
are situated  exteriorly, almost parallel
Avith  each other, and perpendicular;
the third root forms an acute angle, and
looks  to the roof of the mouth.
   The lower  molares have  but two
 roots, the one anterior, the other poste-
rior, are nearly vertical and parallel with
 each other, and much flattened laterally.
 The roots of  the two  first superior mo-
 lares correspond with the floor of the
 maxillary sinus, and sometimes pro-
 trude into this cavity—and their diver-
 gence secures them more firmly in their
 sockets.
   The last molar, called the dens sapi-
 entiae or wisdom tooth, is  both shorter
 and smaUer than the others, the roots of
 the upper wisdom tooth are, occasion-
 ally,  united  so as to form but one—
 while the last molar of the loAver jaw
 is generally single and of a conical form.
   The use of the molares, as their term
 signifies, is to triturate or grind the food.
   MOLARES DENTES. Molar teeth.
   MOLAS'SES.  Melasses.  The un-
crystallizable saccharine and other ex-
tractive  matters Avhich  drains  from
Muscovado sugar when cooling.
  MOLE.  Mob.  A fleshy substance
of variable size and  consistence, pos-
sessing a low degree of vitality, which
forms in the uterus.
  MOLECULAR.  Composed of, or
relating to, molecules.
  MOL'ECULE.   Molecula.   A mi-
nute particle of any body.  Molecules
are the  smallest  particles  of  which
bodies  are supposed to be  composed.
Microscopic particles.
  Molecule, Purkinjean. A germi-
nal vesicle.
  MOLI'MEN. From molior, to move.
An attempt to struggle.
  MOLLITIES.   From mollis, soft.
Preternatural softness of a part.
  Mollities Cerebri.   Preternatural
softness of the brain.
  Mollities Ossium. Softening of the
bones.
  Mollities Unguium.   Softening of
the nails.
  MOLLUS'CA. Soft-bodied animals,
destitute of articulations, but furnished
with respiratory and circulating organs,
and a nervous system.
  MOLLUS'CUM.  A  disease of the
skin, so called from its resemblance to
certain molluscous  animals, and con-
sisting  of numerous tubercles, of vari-
able size and forms, containing a seba-
ceous matter.
  MOLYB'DATE.  A genus of  salts,
resulting from a combination of the mo-
lybdic acid with salifiable bases.
  MOLYBDE'NUM.  Molybdena.  A
white, brittle, and very infusible metal.
  MOLYB'DOS.  Lead.
  MOMENTUM. In Physics, impetus.
The  quantity  of force  of  a  moving
body, which is  proportioned to its velo-
city, multiplied into its weight or quan-
tity of  matter.
  MOMOR'DICA.  The  name  of a
genus of plants.
  Momordica  Balsam'ina.   Balsam
apple. 
MON
511
MON
  Momordica Elate'rium.  The wild
or squirting cucumber.
  MONAD.   From uovos, unity.  A
simple particle or atom. Also, the most
minute rudimentary infusorial animal.
The cells of the animal are termed mo-
nads.
  MONADIFORM. Having the form
of a monad.
  MONADELTHIA. Monadelphous;
from uovos, alone, and aSeXina, a brother-
hood.   Plants in Avhich all the stamens
are united by their filaments into one
body or brotherhood, and which have
hermaphrodite flowers.
   MONAN'DRIA. Monandrous; from
uovos,  alone,  and avrip,  a  husband.
Plants whose flowers  have but one
male organ or stamen. They constitute
one class, and three orders, in the sex-
ual system of Linnaeus.
  MONAR'DA.  The  name of a ge-
nus of plants.
  Monarda Fistulo'sa.   The purple
monarda.
  Monarda Puncta'ta. Horsemint.
  MONAVIUS.  On the Affections of
the Teeth.  Basil, 1578.
  MONE'SIA.  A vegetable  extract
from an unknown tree of South Amer-
ica, possessing astringent and stomachic
properties.
  MONEY WORT. Lysimachia num-
mularia.
  MONGIN.  Author of a work upon
the Propriety of Extracting Teeth from
Pregnant Females, who suffer Severe
pain from Tooth-ache; published, 1740.
  MONIER, G. PH. L. Dissertation
upon the  Diseases  of the Teeth, by.
Paris, 1783.
  MONIL'IFORM.    Animals  and
plants whose  parts or organs exhibit
the appearance of a necklace or string
of pearls.
  MONKSHOOD.  Aconitum napel-
lus.
  MONNI'NA POLYSTA'CHIA.  A
South American plant, the root and
bark of which possess astringent pro-
perties.
   MONOBLEP'SIS. From uovos, one,
 and j3x*4*s, sight. An affection in which
 vision is imperfect  and confused when
 both  eyes are used, and good, when
 only one is used.
   MONOCEPHA'LUS.   From povos,
 one, and xefaxrj, head. A monster with
 two bodies and but one head.
   MONOCOTYLE'DON.   From /*o-
 vos, one, and xotvXqSav, a cotyledon. A
 term applied to plants  which have but
 one cotyledon or seed lobe.
   MONOC'ULUS. From uovos, one,
 and oculus, an eye.  A  bandage for one
 eye.  Also, a one-eyed monster.
   MONCE'CIA. From uovos, one, and
 oixia, a house.  A term applied to plants
 which have male and female organs in
 separate flowers on the same plant.
   MONOGASTRIC.  Monogastricus;
 from uovos, one, and yaatqp, stomach.
 Having but one stomach.
   MON'OGRAPH.  From ^ow;, one,
 and ypaq>n, description. A treatise on
 one subject. A medical monograph is a
 treatise on a single  disease, or a single
 class of  diseases.
   MONOMA'NIA. From uovos one,
 and fiavia, madness. Insanity upon one
 subject.
   MONOMYARY.  From uovos, and
 uvav,  muscle.  A bivalve whose shell is
 closed by one adductor muscle.
   MONOPA'GIA.  Hemicrania.
   MONOPATHY. Monopathia; from
 uovos, one, and itaQos, disorder. An affec-
 tion in which but one organ or function
 is disordered.   Monomania is a mono-
 pathic affection.
   MONOPLASTIC.  Monoplasticus;
 from  uovos, one, and YXaaaa, I  form.
 That which has one form, or which does
 not change its form.
   MONOR'CHIS.   From uovos, one,
 and opxis, testicle.   A person who has
 but one testicle.
   MONOTHALAMOUS.  From uo-
vos, one, and ^ato^oj,  a chamber.  A
univalve sheU which has but one cham-
ber.
  MONS VEN'ERIS. The projecting 
MOR
512
MOR
» eminence  covered with hair, immedi-
  ately over the os pubis in women.
    MONSTER.  Monstrum. Any un-
  natural production; any  organized be-
  ing with parts unnaturaUy developed,
  or having  an extraordinary vice of con-
  formation.
    MOR'BID. From morbus, a disease.
  Diseased, or relating to disease.
    Morbid Anatomy.  The anatomy of
  diseased organs.
    MORBIF'IC.   From  morbus, a dis-
  ease, and faccre, to make.  Causing dis-
  ease.
    MORBIL'LI REGULARES.  Mea-
  sles.
    MORBOSUM  AUGMENTUM.—
  A morbid or diseased growth.
    MORBO'SUS.  Morbose.  Diseased.
    MORBUS. A disease.
    Morbus Aphrodisius.   Syphilis.
    Morbus Arquatus. The jaundice.
    Morbus Articularis.   Gout.
    Morbus Astralis. Epilepsy.
    Morbus Ckruleus. Cyanosis.
    Morbus Cceliacus.  Mucous  diarr-
  hoea.
    Morbus Coxa'rius. Hip disease.
    Morbus Fellifluus  Cholera.
    Morbus  Gallicus.  Venereal dis-
  ease.
    Morbus Maculosus Werlhofii.—
  Purpura haemorrhagica.
    Morbus  Mercurialis.   Eczema
  mercuriale.
    Morbus Metallicus.   Colica pic-
  tonum.
    Morbus Niger. Melaena.
    Morbus Pallidus. Chlorosis.
    Morbus  Psoadicus.   Lumbar ab-
  scess.
    Morbus Saltatoeius.   Chorea.
    Morbus Strangulatorius. Cynan-
  che maligna.
    Morbus  Truculentus Infantum.
  Croup.
    Morbus Virgineds. Chlorosis.
    MOR'DICANT. Mordicans. A dis-
  agreeable pungent heat.
    MORDICES.  Teeth, or fangs.
    MORGAG'NI,  HUMOR OF.  A
 transparent humor between  the  crys-
 taUine lens and its capsule.
  MORIN'GA.  The name of a genus
 of plants.
  Moringa  Aptera.  Hyperanthera
 moringa.
  Moringa  Pterygosperma.    The
 horseradish tree.
  MORIOPLASTY.  Morioplastice;
 from uopiov, a part, and nxaatixos, form-
 ing. The restoration of lost parts.
  MORO. From morum, a mulberry.
 A smaU abscess resembling a mulberry.
  MOROTRO'PHIUM.  From ^wpoj,
 fatuous, and tpo^rj, support. An asylum
 for lunatics.
  MORPHEA.  Lepra alphoides.
  MOR'PHIA.  From Morpheus, the
 god of sleep.  A  principle of opium.
  MORPHLE ACETAS.  Acetate of
 morphia.
  Morphije Citras.  Citrate of mor-
 phia.
  Morphije Hydrochloras.  Hydro-
 chlorate or muriate of morphia.
  Morphle  Sulphas.   Sulphate of
 morphia.
  MORPHINE.  Morphina. Morphia.
  MORPHOL'OGY.   From  uopipn,
 form, and xoyos, a discourse.  In Bota-
 ny,  a treatise on the metamorphosis of
 organs.   In Zoology, a treatise on the
 modifications of form which the same
 organ undergoes in different animals.
  MORPHON'OMY. Morphonomia;
 from uopfyrj, form,  and vouos, a law. The
 laws of organic development.
  MORS. Mortis. Death.
  MORSULUS.   A little mouthful.
Also, a lozenge.
  MOR'SUS. From mordeo, to bite or
know.  A bite, sting or grasp.
  MORT DE CHIEN.   Spasmodic
cholera in hot climates.
  MORTA.  Pemphigus.
  MORTAL.  Mortalis;  from mors,
mortis, death.  Subject to death.
  MORTALTTY.  Mortalitas.  Fre-
quency, rate, or proportion of deaths in
a place, disease, &c.
  Mortality,  Bills of.   A register 
MOT              513              MOU
exhibiting the number of deaths  in a
given time.
  MORTAR. A hoUow vessel, ofiron,
glass, marble, or wedgewood ware, for
reducing solid substances to powder, or
for making certain mixtures.
  MORTARI'OLUM.  A small  mor-
tar.  Also, the socket of a tooth.
  MORTET. Dissertation on the Ex-
traction of the Teeth, with the aid of a
New Instrument, by. Paris, 1783.
  MORTIFICATION.  Mortificatio;
from mors, death,  and fio,  I become.
The loss of vitality in any  part of the
body; but generally applied to soft parts.
  MORTIMER, W. H. Observations
on  the Growth and Irregularities of
Children's Teeth; foUowed by Remarks
and Advice on the Teeth in General; to
which is added a Short Essay on Arti-
ficial Teeth, by. London, 1845.
  MORUM.  Morus nigra.
  MORUS NIGRA. The black mul-
berry tree.
  MOSAIC  GOLD.  Bisulphuret of
 tin.
   MOSCHATA NUX. See Myristica
 Moschata.
   MOSCH.  Musk.
   MOSCHATUS.  Musky.
   MOS'CHUS. Musk.
   Moschus Moschif'erus.  The musk
 animal.
   MOSaUITO.  Musquito.
   MOSS. The species of musci which
 grow on old wood, trees, damp ground,
 walls, &c.
   Moss, Carrageen.  Chondrus cris-
 pus.  Irish moss.
   Moss, Pectoral.   Lichen pulmo-
 narius.
   Moss, Sea.  Fucus helminthocorton.
   MOTHER. Mater.  Also, a term
 applied to many chemical preparations
 and plants.
   Mother  of Pearl.  The silvery,
 briUiant internal layer of several  shells,
 particularly  those which  produce the
 pearl.
   Mother of Thyme.   Thymus ser-
 pyllum.
  Mother-Water.   Saline solutions
from which crystals  have been depos-
ited.
  Mother-Wort. Leonurus cardiaca.
  MOTHER'S MARK. Na;vus.
  MOTILITY. Motilitas; frommotus,
movement. The power of moving.
  MOTION.  Motio. Motus. The act
of moving, or changing place.
  MOTOR.  From moveo, to move.  A
mover;  applied to muscles and nerves.
  Motor  Oculi Exter'nus.   The
sixth pair of nerves.
  Motor Oculorum.  The third pair
of nerves are so called because they go
to the muscles which move the eye.
  MOTORY. Motor. That which  in-
duces movement.
  MOTUS.  Motion.
  MOUNTING.  The act of preparing
any thing for use.
   Mounting  Artificial Teeth upon
an Osseous Base.   Although a base
constructed from any osseous substances
is exceedingly objectionable, it is, never-
theless, sometimes used. For the man-
ner of  preparing  a base of this sort,
 See Osseous Base for Artificial  Teeth.
 The method of mounting teeth upon a
 base of this description, is so fully and
 accurately described by Desirabode, that
 we shall quote the description which
 he has given.  He says:  "When we
 wish to mount human teeth  upon a
 base, the sea-horse, or any other osseous
 substance, cut in this manner;  it having
 been weU adjusted in the mouth, we
 place the teeth below it and adjust them
 in their  proper places, and  maintain
 them there with a little modelling wax,
 then with a foret, (drill,) we  perforate
 them with holes in their ends, in which
 we hold them with small  pegs for the
 time being, upon  their base.  We then
 increase the size of the holes, and some-
 times substitute for the pegs,  central
 metallic pivots, or two pegs, either lat-
 erally or one before the other, with rivets
 in both bases.  Sometimes, on the con-
 trary, screws, either introduced through
 the teeth, and riveted upon them, or but 
MOU
514
MOU
 more rarely, introduced and riveted in
 the side of the teeth, but not  crossing
 their base.
   "It is nearly in the same manner that
 we mount upon bases of this sort min-
 eral teeth.  We obtain the adjustment
 necessary,  by  fixing them on Avax,
 then we afterwards remove them with
 care.  The impress  marked  by  their
 form indicates  the precise place where
 the holes destined to receive their pivots,
 should be pierced; we then rivet them
 upon the  concave part  of the  base,
 using the precaution to make a counter-
 sink for the reception of  the heads  of
 the rivets, to prevent wounding the soft
 parts, with which they would come  in
 contact.
   "In order that the teeth may not crack
 in riveting, we place  them alternately
 upon a piece of lead, hollowed like a V,
 upon all the points of which they  bear
 exactly; when this precaution is weU
 taken, we can use the hammer, without
 endangering the piece.  We admit, here,
 that it acts with a pivot which does not
 cross; but in  the contrary case, we
 apply the  rivet of the  tooth (human
 tooth) having its  pivot previously at-
 tached upon a  steel  block, maintained
 in a vice, then we rivet the other ex-
tremity  upon the  concave part of the
base by means of another smaU steel
 anvil, whose point we hold upon the
 part that we wish to rivet, and upon
 which we strike with  precaution.
  "The person who is riveting, cannot
 hold the anvil, the hammer, and  the
piece, he is obliged to have an assistant
who shaU hold this latter.  We may,
however, rivet  directly alone with  a
pointed  hammer, being careful not to
injure the  base, which is necessarily
weaker in aU points where the teeth are
received, than in the surrounding parts.
  "As the  rivets made directly upon
hippopotamus   are never as solid as
upon  a  metallic substance,  we some-
times cut into that part of the base which
corresponds  to  the extremity of each
pivot, a  groove intended for the recep-'
  tion of a very small band of platina,
  pierced with as many holes as there are
  rivets, and upon  which all are united
  in a countersink.  We may, however,
  make the extremity of the pivot, a small
  target  of platina  or gold, countersunk
  in the base, upon which we rivet equally
  with the surface, so  that  it may not
 project."
   Some practitioners are in the habit of
 coloring bases of this sort so as to imi-
 tate, as nearly as  possible, the gums,
 and particularly such portions as would
 be likely,  by  the  movements of  the
 lips, to become exposed to view.  For
 the  accomplishment of this, Laforgue
 recommends steeping  the piece for a
 short time in alum-water, and then dip-
 ping it in a  decoction of cochineal, but
 the coloring matter is soon removed by
 the  action of the fluids of the mouth.
 Other  dentists have  adopted other
 means, but  none  have succeeded in
 giving to it a color that was not  soon
 destroyed by the action of the buccal
 secretions.    Another plan, however,
 consists in boiling the piece in a solu-
 tion  of soda, with  a few drops of oil,
 then  applying  a solution  of tin and
 hydrochloric acid,  and afterwards bod-
 ing it in an  earthen vessel containing a
 pint  of water, two and a half drachms
 of madder, one half drachm of kermes,
 and  seven grains of crushed cochineal.
 This  done,  it  is  removed,  dipped  in
 warm  soap-suds, when it  assumes a
 rose  color.
  In the construction of a base from the
 tooth of the hippopotamus, it is impor-
 tant that it should be made from a single
 piece, though when  a piece of sufficient
 size cannot be procured, two pieces may
 be united so  as  to answer the purpose.
  In describing the method of mount-
 ing artificial teeth upon an osseous base,
 the author has not  deemed it necessary
 to enter into  very minute detail, as sub-
stances  of this sort, are, at present,
rarely used for the purpose.
  Mounting Artificial Teeth upon
 a Porcelain Base.  As the  use  of 
MOU
515
MOU
 porcelain bases for maintaining artifi-
 cial teeth, has been  almost entirely
 abandoned, the author does not deem
 it necessary to describe the manner
 either of mounting teeth upon them or
 of their construction.  Their use origi-
 nated in France,  and for a time  was
 advocated by a few dentists, but at pres-
 ent they are seldom if ever employed.
 Their construction  is  attended  with
 difficulty,  especiaUy  for  interrupted
 pieces; itis also  difficult to maintain
 them in the mouth, and still more so to
 mount artificial teeth upon them in a se-
 cure and substantial manner.  Besides,
 they are liable to be broken by the slight-
 est accident.  So fully aware of this was
 Audibran,  that he recommended  that
 several pieces be made at once, to be pre-
 pared for accidents, which are so very
 liable to occur, and Lefoulon admits,that
 in the construction of half a dozen, not
 a single perfect one may  be obtained.
   Mounting  Human Teeth upon a
 Metallic Base.  The following is the
 method  described by  Desirabode  of
 mounting human teeth upon a metallic
 base, or plate:  "The plate  being  pre-
 pared, we  proceed to fit and adjust the
 teeth to it, after having attached  the
 fixtures which  are to retain it in the
 mouth,  namely,  crotchets, (clasps.)
 But as it rarely happens that the mould
 has  been preserved perfect;  we take it
 from the plate, put in place a new wax
 impression, not only of the toothless
 places which  it  should  cover,  but
 of the parts which surround it, so that
 the  adjustment of the  teeth shall be
 made in  all  their definite relations.
 When  we have this  impression, we
 fix the plate in the place where we may
 wish to have  it, fill the   impression
 with plaster or sulphur, and obtain a
 new mould in rehef,  upon  which the
 plate  rests for the adjustment of the
 teeth ; we cut these of the proper length
 with a saw or file, but rarely with the
latter—we then cover the plate with a
little rouge, applying each tooth upon
it to  mark each  point to be removed
 with the file and engraver; we make
 the  median line  the starting  point,
 placing  the central incisores first, by
 giving them the proper direction.
   "As to mounting the teeth, there are
 several methods of procedure in doing
 it; fixing them by means of a central
 pivot, by maintaining them  with two
 lateral pegs, but placed vertically, as
 the  pivot, of which there is but one
 variety;  by adjusting with a screwupon
 the  plate  soldered  to the  cuvette,"
 (base,) "and a peg behind;  this gives
 them much strength, and permits them
 to be advanced, as may be desired.
  "If we employ one of the two methods,
 we first place the pivot or the two pegs
 upon the plate, by piercing  the latter
 through and through, at the place which
 we intend the tooth to occupy, or which
 corresponds to the hole in it, which
 point may be indicated by moistening
 the plate after having placed upon it a
 thin layer of wax, and then  adjusting
 the tooth, which leaves a mark or im-
 print at the  proper point; then we sol-
 der these pivots upon the convexity of
 the  plate, that is to say, to the side on
 which we apply the tooth, and when
 they are solidly fixed, we place the teeth
 upon them, and rivet them.
   "Finally, if the pivot is  a transverse
 one, we rivet on the posterior surface of
 the  tooth;  if not transverse, we  turn
 with a little wire, and  make it enter by
 the force of co-adaptation  in  the tooth.
 But experience proves that transverse
 pivots,  crossing and  riveted on  one
 side or  the  other, are the best, because
 they do not wear the holes, or allow the
 pieces to vacillate;  the  screw  pivots
 which are so easily placed, and hold the
 teeth so securely that it is difficult to
 remove them with pincers, but we think
 they should  be first introduced into the
 teeth, and afterwards, into the plate, to
 which they should be riveted."
  Mounting Porcelain Teeth upon a
Metallic Base.  American Method.
Where a vacuity,  requiring  only  one
or even five or six  teeth, is to be filled, 
               MOU               5

it is important that the  artificial should
correspond in shade and color, with the
natural organs, for in proportion as they
are whiter or darker, wtil the  contrast
be striking, and their liability of detec-
tion increased.  But of the  two, it is
better that they should be a little darker
than any whiter.  Their outer configura-
tion should resemble, too, the shape of
those which have been los t or very nearly.
   As they are  selected, they should be
placed on the plate, and retained there
by a piece of wax  placed on it behind
them.  If they do  not fit closely to the
plate and gum, they should  be ground
on an emery wheel, or small grindstone,
until they do, and be so arranged as to
meet the teeth with which  they  are
intended to antagonize, at the same in-
stant that the natural teeth, which have
antagonists,  come  together.   The  an-
tagonizing models will  enable the ope-
rator to do this with the most perfect
accuracy.
   As it is  often necessary to cut away
a considerable portion of a tooth in or-
der to make it fit accurately to the plate,
a number  of emery wheels, or  smaU
grindstones, varying from three-fourths
of an inch to six or seven inches in di-
ameter, are required,  and these should
be turned in a small foot-lathe.
  After the teeth havebeen thus arranged
and adjusted, a gold plate, large enough
to cover the  posterior surface of each,
should be fitted to them in the foUowing
manner: each tooth has securely fixed
in the back part of it, two platina rivets
for the purpose of connecting the plate
to it.   Each  backing, therefore, should
have two holes  punched through it, by
means of a pair of dentists' punch for-
ceps, large enough to admit the rivets of
the teeth, and of the same distance from
each other.   The holes on the back part
of the plate should be slightly enlarged,
and  after placing  it  on the  tooth, it
should  be made  fast  by riveting  or
striking up,  with a light hammer, the
ends of the  platina rivets.   The gold
backings of the teeth should  be slightly
                MOU

hoUowed before they are put on, so that
they may fit up closely to every part of
the back of each tooth, and  the plate
employed  for  this  purpose  should  be
nearly as thick as that used for clasps.
  After the gold plates have been rivet-
ed to the backs of the teeth, they should
be accurately fitted to the  plate, and re-
tained in  their situation  by  the wax
behind them.
  The gold plate,  with  the teeth and
wax on it, should now be carefully re-
moved from  the  plaster model, and
placed on a  large piece  of  charcoal,
using the precaution not to disturb or dis-
arrange the teeth.  A paste, made with
plaster of paris and water, of the thick-
ness of thin batter, should next be pour-
ed around them, untU their outer surface
and coronal extremities are covered to
the thickness  of half an inch. When
this has become  hard, the wax should
be removed from behind the teeth.
  If it should be found, on the removal
of the wax, that  the  gold backings do
not all fit do wn tight to the plate, the aper-
tures should be filled with gold foil. This
done, borax, triturated in  water, in the
manner as described  in another article,
until of the consistence of cream, should
be applied with a camel's-hair pencil to
all the parts where it is wished that the
solder  should  take effect, not omitting
the platina rivets that pass through the
gold plate on the backs of the teeth, for
experience has proven that these can-
not be made too secure.  They should,
therefore, be made fast by soldering as
well as riveting.
  When the surface of the plate cov-
ering the alveolar ridge is  very uneven,
greater accuracy  may, perhaps, be se-
cured in fitting the  backings  to it,  by
placing the plate on a piece of charcoal,
after  the teeth have  been  arranged,
ground up, antagonized and fixed to it
with wax, then covering  their outer or
labial surfaces, and coronal extremities,
with a paste or batter of plaster, to the
thickness  of half an inch.  After this
has become dry, the wax may be warm-
16 
MOU
517
MOU
   ed and removed, and the teeth taken off,
   one by one, backed, and then replaced.
   In this way the  backings may be ad-
  justed, and made to fit Avith the great-
   est exactness.
    After applying the borax, a number
   of small pieces of solder  made  from
  recipe No. 1 or 2, (see Gold  Solder,)
  should be applied immediately on the
  line of connection between each tooth
  and the plate, and one over each rivet,  j
    In soldering the teeth to the plate, the
  heat should be apphed  by means of a
  large  flaring flame,  until  the whole
  mass becomes red, and then  by one of
  about half an inch in diameter, thrown
  immediately on  the line of connection
  between the backing of a single tooth
  and the plate, and as soon as the solder
  floAvs freely here, and over each rivet, it
  should be passed to the adjoining tooth,
  and so on, until the process is completed.
  When the solder runs in the  wrong di-
  rection,  the  heat,  as  before  stated,
  should be increased at the point Avhere
  it is wished that it should take effect,
  which wiU, immediately, if a sufficient
  amount be apphed, cause it to flow in
  that direction.
   After the process of soldering is com-
  pleted, the plaster,  as soon as the piece
  has become sufficiently cool, should be
  carefully removed from  the teeth and
 plate.  The piece should  now be placed
 in a glass or porcelain vessel contain-
 ing a  mixture of equal parts of sul-
 phuric  acid  and  water, and remain
 there until the borax, which, by  the
 process of soldering, has lost  its water
 of crystallization and assumed a glassy
 hardness, is  decomposed.   This pro-
 cess is termed by jewellers, pickling,
 and requires from ten minutes to half
 an hour for its completion, according to
 the strength of the acid and the quan-
 tity of vitrified borax on the plate.  Af-
 ter this is decomposed, the acid should
 be washed from  the piece, and any
rough portions of solder that may pre-
sent themselves, carefully removed  by
means of suitable  scrapers.
        44
     In removing the roughness which
   may have been occasioned by the  im-
   perfect fusion  and unevenness of any
   of the pieces  of solder,  or  from its
   floAving in a  wrong  direction,  care
   should  be taken not to cut away too
   much of the plate.  After the work has
   been made as smooth as  possible with
   scrapers, which should be so construct-
   ed as to be readily applied and made to
  act upon any  part  of  the surface of
  the plate, backings  of  the teeth  and
  clasps, it should be rubbed with pieces
  of scotch stone  and  water until every
  scratch is removed.
    The piece should now be placed in a
  porcelain vessel containing the  follow-
  ing mixture:  pul. nitrate of potassa,
   |ij; muriate of soda, |i; alum, g i;
  water,  § iv.
    After boiling for half an hour in this,
  and the object of Avhich is  to decom-
  pose the copper in the  surface of the
  solder,  it should be  boiled a few min-
  utes  in four  ounces of water, and one
  ounce of sub. carb.  soda, for the pur-
  pose of  decomposing the  acid formed
  by the first mixture, and then washed
  with a brush in clear water.
    The copper being removed from the
  surface of the plate, the gold will have
  a beautiful orange color, which  it will
 always  retain.   The  secretions  of the
 mouth will not only fail to tarnish it,
 but it will be free from the disagreeable
 taste of which so many, who wear ar-
 tificial teeth applied on plate, complain.
   The process of finishing having been
 conducted thus far, it may be completed
 by polishing every part of the surface
 of the plate, backings of the teeth, and
 clasps, with highly tempered, and  finely
 polished burnishers, or a brush-wheel,
 rotten-stone and jeweller's rouge.  (See
 Rouge, polishing.)  If burnishers are
 used, they should be frequently dipt in
 a mixture of water and  castile  soap,
 and in polishing,  should  be rubbed
 backwards and forwards  in  tire  same
direction,  until every  part  of the gold
exhibits a high polish.  Burnishers of 
MOU
518
MOU
different  shapes  and sizes will  be  re-
quired for different parts of the work.
  A large piece, however, can be pol-
ished  in  much less time,  if not more
perfectly, with a revolving brush, turn-
ed in a foot-lathe, than Avith burnishers.
But, before the rotten-stone is apphed
to the brush, it should be lightly smear-
ed with suet, which is done by holding
a small piece against the brush Avhile it
is revolving. The rotten-stone is applied
in the same manner, and with the brush
thus charged, the polishing may com-
mence, but the plate should not  be  ex-
posed too long  to  the friction  of  the
brush and rotten-stone, as  they wear it
away very rapidly.  After the piece  has
been exposed to the action of the brush
until all the fine scratches have been re-
moved, it should be thoroughly washed
with a hand brush  in  soap and  water,
then  in  water and afterwards  rubbed
with a piece of soft buckskin  wrapped
or  sewed around a small  blunt-pointed
piece of wood and rouge, until every
part is made brilliant.
   In  the application  of  teeth, prepar-
ed in the manner, as just described,
it  often becomes  necessary  to make
some little alteration  in the adaptation
of the clasps.   This, the  operator  can
always effect, if they have been  attach-
ed to the plate with  the  proper care,
with  a  pair of common pliers, and it
should  always be  borne  in mind  that
they should never be  so applied as to
prevent the patient from removing  and
replacing the piece  at  pleasure.  He
should  be directed to do this  tAVO or
three times every day, and each time,
to thoroughly clean the teeth  to which
the clasps are applied, and it would be
well too, for the artificial piece to be
 taken out every night, on going  to bed,
and remain out until morning.
   Mounting Porcelain Teeth upon
a Metallic Base, English Method.
The  porcelain teeth manufactured in
 England, both pivot  and plate,  have a
 vertical canal passing through the cen-
 tre for the reception of a pivot,  the
means of attachment employed, Avheth-
er applied  to a root or a metallic base.
The manner of mounting them upon a
plate, or metallic base, is thus described
by Dr. James Robinson.
  "The plate being  placed upon the
cast,  and  the  teeth  selected, the next
process is to rough-fit them to the plate.
This  is done by  repeatedly  applying
the base of the tooth to that part of the
plate to which it is  to  be fixed; the
plate having previously  been  painted
with vermilion and oil; and by cutting
aAvay, with the emery wheel, that por-
tion of the tooth that is  marked  by the
color.
  "The exact point where the rivet is to
be inserted, so as to correspond in posi-
tion to the natural teeth in the mouth,
must now be ascertained.   This is done
by temporarily fixing the teeth in their
intended places on the plate by  means
of a  piece of warm  beeswax; on the
removal of Avhich, a raised point will
be observed, corresponding to the open-
ings in  the teeth; and at  this point the
rivet is  to be  inserted by  first drilling a
hole  of the same size as the gold wire
intended to be used for  the rivet, and
soldering it to the plate  in the usual
manner.
  "The process of fitting the teeth must
now be continued until they are reduced
so as to correspond in length with those
in the mouth.  In most cases it will be
found necessary  to file away the outer
edge of the plate somewhat, in order to
allow the teeth to project, so that Avhen
inserted in the mouth, their edges shall
come in close contact with the gum.
   "Place the teeth in their rivets, and
insert a smaU quantity of sulphur be-
tween the  rivets  and the tubing; hold
the  plate over a spirit  lamp until the
sulphur melts;  then allow it to cool
gradually, and it will be found that the
teeth are securely fixed  to the rivets.
Some dentists use pewter solder in the
same manner; it is objectionable, inas-
much as it yields a constant  metallic
taste in the mouth." 
MOU               519               MOU
  Mounting Porcelain Teeth upon
a Metallic Base, French Method.
The following is the method adopted in
France of  mounting  porcelain teeth
upon  a  metallic base or plate as de-
scribed by Desirabode.  He says, "The
plate adjusted properly in the mouth,
we take  a  second  impression, so as to
secure the  proper  relative relations be-
tween them and the plate, and which
have been altered; we adapt  the teeth
upon the plate, one by one, and retain
them there for the time being, by means
of Avax placed behind  them ;  then we
place  the piece  upon a small plate of
iron, and pour upon its anterior part a
mixture  of plaster, which, becoming
dry, maintains the teeth  in the place
they should occupy, and which permits
the wax, after being warmed,  to be re-
moved;  then we  solder  them to  the
plate.  We, moreover, give  to them
greater sohdity  by soldering  to their
posterior surface small plates of platina.
After  having tried the  piece in  the
mouth of the patient, such corrections
as may be necessary should be made,
noticing if the mouth closes naturally,
&c.
   "Mounting upon plate is not  confined
to one or more teeth as is the case with
pivots. It may  be resorted to for  all
kinds  of pieces,  from one tooth to a
complete  denture, and serves  for con-
tinued as  well as interrupted dentures.
By the latter term, we  mean pieces be-
tAveen the teeth of which intervals  are
left for teeth, which may be remaining
in  the mouth; and this  kind  is most
frequently  met with  in  practice, and
has the greatest variety of forms.
  "When the part of the  alveolar bor-
der, upon which we wish  to place an
artificial piece, has experienced a great
loss  of substance, we oftener mount
this piece upon a base of hippopotamus
which permits us to imitate perfectly,
the gums.   But the  color which Ave
give to this piece, as we shall soon see,
is not very durable ; on the other hand,
the pieces thus mounted always have a
certain  weight.  These  two  reasons
have given us the idea of imitating the
gums on the bases which  sustain the
mineral teeth.
  "In order to accomplish this, the piece
being properly mounted, we take a suf-
ficient quantity of the following com-
position given by Delabarre: porcelain
paste,  | i;  white sand,  3 ss;  any
oxyds we wish, gr. 10.
  "We add a portion of mica, or calcined
gypsum, to  render  the paste very fusi-
ble,  and we reduce it to  a very fine
powder.
  "We apply a proper quantity of this
paste either to imitate the gums or only
to interdent their  points;  finally, we
try the piece in order to correct the de-
fects which may now be found to exist,
then we put it to the fire. The presence
of the gypsum in the paste renders it
fusible at a  much lower  temperature
than would  be necessary  to  fuse the
mineral, or bake the mineral teeth un-
connected with it; this paste agglutin-
ates, and solidifies the two parts of the
piece; but if this  composition has the
form, it has not the color of the gums.
   "There are two means which can be
employed for coloring it; one composed
and employed  by  Dubois-Chemant,
consists in giving to the paste, of which
we are speaking, the tint of the gums,
by adding  to it  a  certain quantity, for
example,  precipitated purple  of Cas-
sius, or any other  oxyd which has the
same property; but, as we may, with
reason, observe, the gums thus colored,
Avant that transparency which life gives
to all of the animal  tissues.   Fonzi,
who first noticed this defect, believed he
might avoid it, by using jeweller's ena-
mel, colored in melting,  or afterwards
painted.  Pieces thus enamelled do not
last long, and we have been obliged to
abandon the use of them.
  "Those Avho employ this method, pro-
ceed thus :  they coyer the paste or bis-
cuit which  forms the gum  with an en-
amel, composed of: petunse,2 drachms;
oxyd of gold, 6 grains; kaoline, 6 grs. 
MOU
520
MUC
  "They cover the gums with this, in-
cluding their apices, and then put it to the
fire, but as it often happens that,from too
intense heat, the vermilion color of the
enamel turns pale, they  take  the oxyd
of gold and beat it very fine, and add an
equal part of turpentine and  lavender.
When the mixture is  made, we pour a
few drops of oil into it, which gives bril-
liancy to the color; then we paint with a
brush that part of the  piece which cor-
responds to the gum. We then place this
piece weU dried  in an oven, and when
it  has become  red,  and  thoroughly
glazed, we take the muffle from the fire,
and let it become cold, before Ave draw
the teeth from it, as it might crack them
if we  expose  them too  suddenly to a
lower temperature.
  "As this work is complicated, and as
it is  always difficult  to  calculate per-
fectly the results, we  prefer,  with rea-
son,  in a doubful case, that is to say, be-
fore  furnishing  the  front part of the
plate Avith a substance for imitating the
gums, particularly where there is a loss
of the alveolar  border,  we prefer, we
say, to make a true inlaying of hippo-
potamus, cut for this purpose, fixed  to
the plate by the  same pivots, a screAv
Avhich unites the teeth to the latter,
colored by one of the methods Avhich
Ave have given.   We have even made
this inlaying with blonde coral, that is,
plain rose, but this substance increases
the  work without a sufficient compen-
sation."
   MOUSE-EAR.  Hieracium ptiocel-
la.
   MOUTH-GLASS.   A small oval
or round mirror, fixed in a wood, ivory,
pearl or metallic frame, with a handle
from three to six inches in length, and
employed by dentists in  the examina-
tion of the teeth.  The diameter of a
 mouth-glass or mirror  should not ex-
 ceed three-fourths of an inch.
   Mouth.  Os. Cavum oris. An oval
 aperture, situated in the lower and an-
 terior part of the face hetween the jaws,
 bounded above  by the palatine proces-
ses of the superior maxillary and palate
bones, below by the tongue and mylo-
hyoid muscles, laterally by the cheeks,
anteriorly  by the lips,  and posteriorly
by the soft palate and fauces.  It con-
tains the dental apparatus, and is a com-
plicated piece of mechanism; forms an
essential part of the human frame; has
the widest possible range of sympathy,
contains a great variety of organs, and
performs an  equally great variety  of
functions.  It, also, contains the organs
of taste, and is  concerned  in the  four
primary stages of digestion; prehension,
mastication, insalivation and  degluti-
tion, besides being engaged in the intel-
lectual acts of speech  and expression.
The term mouth, is also applied to the
open extremities of vessels.
  Mouth, Sore.   Aphtha.
  MOUTON.  Essay  on Odontechny,
or Dissertation on Artificial Teeth, by.
Paris, 1786.
  MOXA.  A Chinese term employed
to designate a cone or  cyhnder of pre-
pared cotton, or other combustible sub-
stance employed in a state of combus-
tion, to cauterize the skin.
  Moxa Japanica.  Artemisia chinen-
sis.
  MOXIBUSTION.  The cauteriza-
tion of the skin by  means of moxa.
  MU'CILAGE. Mucilago. A watery
solution of gum, or substances closely
allied to it.
  MUCILAG'INOUS.  Of the nature
of, or abounding in mucilage.
  MUCILAGO.  Mucilage.
   Mucilago Aca'cije.   Mucilage of
gum arabic.
   Mucilago  Am'yli.  Mucilage  of
starch.
   Mucilago Gummi Arabici.  Muci-
lage of gum arabic.
   Mucilago  Tragacantha.   Muci-
lage of tragacanth.
   MUCIPAROUS.   An epithet ap-
plied to the follicles of mucous mem-
brane.
   MUCOCE'LE.   Fistula lachryma-
lis. 
MUC
521
MUL
  MUCO-ENTERITIS.  Enteritis.
  MUCOS'ITY.  Mucositas.  Fluids
containing, or of the nature of,  mu-
cus.
  MUCOUS. A name applied to parts
which contain or secrete mucus, as mu-
cous glands, mucous membrane,  &c.
Also, of the nature of mucus.
  .Mucous Glands.  Glands that se-
crete mucus.
  Mucous Membrane.   The  mem-
branes that line the canals, cavities and
hoUoAv organs, which communicate ex-
ternally, and they are so  called, from
the mucous fluid which they secrete,
and with which they are lubricated.
  Mucous Membrane of the Mouth.
The whole interior cavity of the mouth,
palate, pharynx and  lips, are covered
by mucous membrane forming folds or
duplicatures at different points  called
fraeni or bridles.  Beginning at the mar-
gin of the lower lip, this membrane can
be traced lining  its posterior surface,
and from thence it is reflected on the
anterior face of the lower jaw, where it
forms a fold opposite the symphysis of
the chin, the fraenum of the lower lip;
it is now traced to the alveolar ridge,
covering it in front and passing over its
posterior surface, where  it  enters the
mouth.   Here it is reflected from the
posterior symphysis of the lower jaw
to the  under surface  of the tongue,
Avhere it forms a fold or bridle called
the frcenum  lingua.   It  now spreads
over the tongue, covering  its dorsum
and sides to the root, from whence it is
reflected  to  the  epiglottis  forming
another fold; from this point it can be
followed entering the glottis and lining
the larynx, trachea, &c.
  In the same way, commencing at the
upper hp, it is  reflected to the upper
jaw, and at the upper central incisores
forming a fold, the frcenum  of the up-
per lip;  from this it passes over the al-
veolar ridge  to the roof of the mouth,
which it completely covers, and extends
as far back as the posterior edge of the I
palate bones;  from this it is reflected
     44.
downwards  over the soft  palate, or,
more strictly speaking, the soft palate
is  formed by  the  duplicature of this
membrane at this  point, between the
folds of which are placed the muscles of
the palate described in another place.
  From the palate it is traced upwards
and continuous with the  membrane lin-
ing the nares, and downwards with the
same, lining the  pharynx,  oesophagus,
stomach and intestinal canal.
  The mucous membrane,  after enter-
ing the nostrils and lining the roof, floor,
septum nasi, and turbinated bones, en-
ters the maxillary  sinus between the
middle and  lower  spongy  bones, and
lines the whole of this great and impor-
tant cavity of the superior maxilla.
  Many  mucous  glands or  follicles,
elsewhere enumerated,  are   scattered
over the whole of  this membrane, and
furnish the mouth with its  mucus.
  As this  membrane passes over the
superior surface of the alveolar ridge of
both jaws, its texture becomes changed,
and receives the name of gums.
  MUCRONATA  CARTILAGO.—
The xiphoid cartilage.
  MUCRONATE.     Mucronatus.—
Sharp-pointed.
  MUCUS.  From uv%a, the mucus of
the nose.  A  substance analogous to
vegetable mucilage, secreted by the
mucous membranes.
  Mucus, Vegetable.  Gum.
  MUDAR.  Madar.   Calotropis gi-
gantea, a plant of  the asclepiadaceous
order.
  MUF'FLE.  An  arched  vessel of
earthenware, with  a flat bottom, in
which substance may be exposed to a
red heat in  a  furnace without coming
in contact with the  fuel.  See Porcelain
Teeth, manufacture of.
  MUGWORT.  Artemisia vulgaris.
  MULBERRY TREE.  Morus ni-
gra.
  MULLEIN, BLACK.   Verbascum
nigrum.
  MUL'LUS.  The name of a genus of
fishes. 
MUR
522
MUS
   Mullus  Barbatus.  Mullus ruber.
 The red surmullet.
   Mullus Sarmuletus.  The striped
 surmullet.
   MULSUM.  Hydromeli.
   MULTAN'GULAR. Multangularis.
 Having many angles or corners.
   MULTICUSPIDATI.   The  molar
 teeth are so called from the number of
 cusps or protuberances they have upon
 their grinding surfaces.
   MULTIFTDUS. Divided into many
 parts.
   Multifidus Spina.  The transver-
 salis dorsi.
   MULTIPAROUS.  One that brings
 forth many young at a time.
   MULTIVALVE.    From  multus,
 many, and valvce, folding doors.  In
 Conchohgy,  shells composed of many
 pieces or valves.
  MUMMY.  Mumia.  A dead body
 dried after having been embalmed.
   MUMPS.   Cynanche parotidea.
   MUNDICATI'VUS. Mundificans;
from mundo,  to cleanse.  Having the
power to cleanse or purify.
  MUNGOS.  Ophiorrhiza mungos.
  MURiE'NA.  The name of a genus
of fishes.
  Murjena Anguil'la. The common
eel.
  Murjena Conger.  The conger eel.
  Mur.ena Helena.  Murozna roma-
na.  The Roman eel.
  MURAL.  Muralis; from  murus, a
wall. Belonging, or appertaining, to a
wall.
  MURIA.  Brine;  saltwater.
  MURIAS.  A muriate or chloride.
  MURIATIC.   Muriaticus;   from
muria, brine.  Belonging to sea salt.
  Muriatic Acid.  Hydrochloric acid.
  Muriatic   Acid,  Oxygenated.—
Chlorine.
  Muriatic   Ether.  Hydrochloric
ether.
  MURMUR,  RESPIRATORY—
The  noise occasioned by  inspiration
and expiration.
  MURPHY, JOSEPH.   A Natural
,  History of the Human Teeth, with a
  Treatise on  their diseases from  in-
  fancy to old  age, by.   London, 1811.
  Although intended more for the gener-
  al than  the  professional  reader,  the
  above named work contains much val-
  uable and curious information.
   MURPHY, J. L.  Author of a Pop-
  ular Treatise on the Structure, Diseases
  and Treatment of the Human Teeth,
  London, 1837.
   MU'SA.  The name  of  a genus of
  plants.
   Musa Paradisi'aca.  The plantain
 tree of the tropics.
   Musa Sapien'tum. The banana.
   MUS'CA.    Mvio'xti;  from /«£w, to
 murmur.  The name of an extensive
 genus of insects.  The fly.
   Musca Hispanica.  Cantharis.
   MUSCLE. Musculus; a diminutive
 of mus, a mouse, from its supposed re-
 semblance to  a flayed mouse.  A red-
 dish, vascular and  highly  contractile
 organ.  It is through the agency of the
 muscles that the various movements of
 the body are performed.
   MUS'CULAR.  Muscularis;   from
 musculus, a muscle.  Belonging, or re-
 lating, to the muscles.
   Muscular  Fibres.   The  fleshy
 fibres which form the body  of a mus-
 cle.
   Muscular Nerve.  The fourth pair
 is so called.
   MUSCULO-CUTANEOUS.   Ap-
 pertaining to the muscles and skin.
   Musculo-Cutaneous Nerve.  The
 external cutaneous nerve given off by
 the brachial plexus, and a branch fur-
 nished by the popliteal nerve, are  each
 so caUed.
   Musculo-Rachidian.  Relating to a
 muscle and the spine.  Applied, also,
 to the posterior branches of the inter-
 costal, lumbar and sacral arteries.
   MUSCULUS. A muscle.
   Musculus Acclivis.  Obliquus in-
 ternus abdominis.
   Musculus Auxiliarius.  Pyramida-
 lis abdominis. 
MUS
523
MYL
   Musculs Cutaneus.  Platysmamy-
 oides.
   Musculus Eustachii.  Tensor tym-
 pani.
   Musculus Fascia Lata. Tensor va-
 ginae femoris.
   Musculus Patientia. Levator scap-
 ulae.
   Musculus Penicillatus.  Levator
 labii inferioris.
   Musculus Stapedius.  Stapedius.
   Musculus Testicondus.   Muscu-
 lus testk.  Cremaster.
   Musculus Tuba Nova.  Circum
 flexus palati.
   MUS'CUS.  From paaxos, tender.
 A moss.
   Muscus Arboreus.  Lichen plicatus.
   Muscus Caninus.   Lichen caninus.
   Muscus Clavatus.  Lycopodium.
   Muscus  Cranii Humani.  Lichen
 saxatilis.
   Muscus Erectus.  Lycopodium se-
 lago.
   Muscus Islandicus. Cetraria islan-
 dica.
   Muscus Marinus.   Conferva rupes-
 tris.
   Muscus Maritimus. CoraUina offi-
 cinalis.
   MUSHROOM.  Fungus.
   MUSICOMA'NIA.     Musomania;
 from  music,  and  mania.  Passion for
 music carried to such an excess as to
 derange the faculties of the mind upon
 that subject.
   MUSK.  Moschus.  A pecuhar con-
 crete substance, having a strong,  pene-
 trating and powerfully diffusive odor,
 obtained from the  moschus moschiferus,
 or musk-deer.
  Musk, Artificial.  A dark brown-
 ish-red substance, having a burning,
 bitter, aromatic taste, and a musky odor,
 obtained from a  mixture of rectified oil
 of amber and nitric acid.
  Musk-Melon.  Cucumis  melo.
  MUSOUITO.  A small and exceed-
ingly troublesome insect, bred in water,
and abounding in low lands and marshes.
  MUSSITATION.   Mussitatio.  A1
 movement of the lips and tongue with-
 out producing any audible sounds; an
 unfavorable sign in disease.
   MUSTARD.  Sinapis.
   Mustard, Hedge.  Erysimum allia-
 ria.
   Mustard, Mithridate.   Mustard
 treacle.  Thlaspi arvense.
   Mustard, Yellow.  Sinapis alba.
   MUTILATION.  Mutilatio.  From
 mutilus, broken.  Loss of a limb or other
 exterior organ or portion of the body.
   MUTITAS.  From  mutus,  dumb.
 Dumbness.
   Mutitas Surdo'rum.  The speech-
 lessness of deaf persons.
   MYASTHENIA. From uvs, a mus-
 cle, and aadeveia,  debility.  Muscular
 debUity.
   MYCES.  Fungus.
   MYCTE'RES.  The  nares.
   MYCTEROPHO'NIA.  From uvx-
 tt}p, the nose, and ^«^,the voice. Nasal
 voice.
   MYDON.  Fungous flesh in a fistu-
 lous ulcer.
   MYDRIASIS.  Morbid  dilation of
 the pupil of the eye.
   MYELENCEPH'OLA.  From^w-
 Xos, marrow, and tyxetyaxov, brain.  A
 primary division of animals,  compre-
 hending aU those Avhich have a brain
 and spinal marrow.  Vertebrata.
   MYELITIS.  From uveXo$, marrow,
 and itis,  signifying inflammation.  In-
 flammation of the spinal marrow or its
 membranes.
   MYLACRI.  The molar teeth.
   MYLA'CRIS. The patella.
 '  MYLE.  The pateUa. Also,.a mole
 in the uterus.
   MYLICUS.  Molar.
   MYLODONTES.  The molar teeth.
   MYLO-GLOSSUS. From uvxv, the
jaw,  and yXoaaa, the  tongue.   Some
 fibres  of the constrictor pharyngis su-
 perior have been so caUed.
  Mylo-Hyoideus. Athin,flatmuscle,
forming the floor of the mouth.  It
arises  from the mylo-hyoid ridge on the
posterior surface of the lower jaw, and 
MYR
524
MYZ
is inserted into the body of the os-hyoi-
des.
  Mylo-Pharyngeus.  The constric-
tor pharyngis superior.
  MYOCEPH'ALON.   Staphyloma.
  MYOC03LITIS.  From pur, mus-
cle, xoiXia, lower belly, and itis, signi-
fying inflammation.  Inflammation of
the muscles of the abdomen.
  MYODYNIA.  From  uvav, mus-
cle, and oSwr;, pain.   Pain in the mus-
cles.
  MYOG'RAPHY. Myographia; from
uvav, muscle, and ypa^stv, to describe.
A description of the muscles.
  MYOLEM'MA.   Myokma; from
y.vav, muscle, and Xeuua, a coat. The
membranous covering of each muscular
fibre.
  MYOL'OGY. Myologia; from uvav,
muscle, and  xoyos, a  discourse.   A
treatise on the muscles.
  MYON.  Muscle.
  MYO'PIA. From uva, I contract,
and a$, the eye.   Near-sightedness.
  MYOPS.  One affected with myo-
pia.
  MYO'SIS.  A  permanent  contrac-
tion  of the pupil of the eye.
  MYOSITIS.   Inflammation of  a
muscle.
  MYOTOMY. Myotomia; from uvav,
a muscle,  and tepvew,  to cut.  The
anatomy of the muscles.
  MY'RIAPODA.   Myriapods; from
uvpias, ten-thousand, and rtovs, foot.  A
term applied to a  class of articulate
animals, characterized by their nume-
rous feet, equaUing in number the artic-
ulations of the body.
  MYRFCA.  The  name of a genus
of plants.
  MyricaGale. Dutchmyrtle. Sweet
willow.
  MYRISTICA.  The name a genus
of plants.
  Myristica  Moscha'ta.   Myristica
aromatka.   Myristka officinalis. The
tree which produces the nutmeg  and
mace.
   MYRME'CIUM.  A very painful,
deeply rooted, soft wart, with  a broad
base, seated on the palms of the hands
and soles of the feet.
  MYROBALANUS.  The  name of
a dried Indian fruit, of the plumb kind,
and of which there are several varieties.
  MYRON.  An ointment.
  MYRONIC ACID.  A bitter acid
of black mustard.
  MYROSPER'MUM.  Myroxylon.
  MYROX'YLON.   The name of a
genus of plants.
  Myroxylon  Peruif'erum.   The
Peruvian balsam tree.
  MYRRHA.  Myrrh.  The  concrete
juice of balsamodendron myrrha.  It is
of a reddish-yeUow,  or reddish-brown
color, of a peculiar  smell, and bitter
taste.
  MYRRH EN. Dissertation on Odon
talgia, by.  Geiss, 1693.
  MYRRHIS.  Sweet cicely.
  MYRSINELiE'UM.   The  oil  of
myrtle.
  MYRTA'CEiE.   The myrtle tribe
of dicotyledonous plants.
  MYRTIFORM. Myrtiformis; from
myrtus, a myrtle, and forma,  shape.
Having the figure of  a leaf of  myrtle.
  MYRTLE.  Myrtus.
  Myrtle, Dutch.  Myrica gale.
  MYRTON.  The  clitoris.
  MYRTUS.  The  name of a genus
of plants.  Myrtle.
  Myrtus Caryophylla'ta.  The tree
which affords the clove bark.
  Myrtus Communis.  The  common
myrtle.
  Myrtus Pimen'ta.  The tree which
bears the Jamaica pepper, or allspice.
  MYSTAX.  The  mustache.  Also,
the upper lip.
  MYT'ILUS.  The name of a genus
of shell fish.
  Mytilus Edu'lis.   The edible mus-
cle.
   Myxa.  Mucus.
  MYXOSARCOMA.  A  tumor of
a fleshy and mucous  consistence.
  MYX'TER.  Myxoter.  The nose.
  MYZE'SIS.  Sucking. 
NAR
525
NAS
  N.  In Prescriptions,  a contraction
for numero, in number.
  NABOTH'S  GLANDS.   JVabothi
glandulaz.  The smaU mucous follicles
situated in the inner surface of the cer-
vex uteri.
  NA'CREOUS.   A term applied, in
Zoology,  to  the surface  of a shell or
other part which has a pearly appear-
ance or reflects iridescent light.
  NA'CRITE.  A mineral of a pearly
lustre, found in crystallized granite. It
is a sihcate of alumina and potassa.
  N^E'VUS.  Nozvus  maternus.   Mo-
ther's-markp  A mark, or spot on the
skin of children when born, presenting
a variety of appearances.
  NAIL.   Unguk.  A thin, whitish
transparent, horny laminae situated at
the extremities of the fingers and toes.
  NATS.   From  vaias, a naiad. A
term applied to a  genus of red-blooded
worms, capable of reproducing parts of
the  body when mutilated, and of pro-
creating their kind by the separation of
the hinder segments of the trunk.
  NAJA.  The name of a genus of
venomous Asiatic serpents.
  NANUS.  A dwarf.
  NAPE OF THE NECK.   Nucha.
  NAPH^E FLORES.  Orange flow-
ers.
  NAPHTHA. A  bituminous, lim-
pid, oily liquid, of a yellowish color, and
smell, somewhat resembling that  of oil
of turpentine.
  Naphtha  Vitrioli.    ./Ether sul-
phuricus.
  NAPHTHALINE. A whitish, shin-
ing,  concrete, crystalline substance,
found during the rectification of the pe-
troleum of the  coal-gas works, incrust-
ing the pipes.
  NAPIUM.   Dock-cresses.
  NAPUS DULCIS.  The turnip.
  NARCAPHTHON.  The bark  of
an  aromatic tree of India.
  NARCIS'SUS.  The name of a ge-
nus of plants.
  Narcissus Pseudonarcissus.  Com-
mon daffodil.
  NARCO'SIS.  JYarcotism ; from *ap-
xoa, I benumb.   The effects produced
by a narcotic.
  NARCOTIC.   Narcotkus;  from
vapoa, I stupefy. A medicine which has
the property of stupefying, or diminish-
ing the energy of the nervous system,
as opium, stramonium, &c.
  NARCOTINE. JVarcotina. A vege-
table alkali, discovered by Derosne, in
opium.   It posseses the stupefying pro-
perties of opium.
  NARCOTISM.  Narcosis.
  NARD, CELTIC.   Valerian cel-
tica.
   Nard, Indian.   Nardus Indica.
   Nard of the Ancients.  Spikenard.
   NARES.  The nostrils.
   Nares, Posterior. Two large open-
ings at the upper and anterior  part of
the  pharynx, terminations of the nasal
cavities posteriorly.
   NASAL.  Mtsalis ; from nasus, the
nose.  Relating to the nose.
   Nasal Artery.  A branch  of the
opthalmic artery, which  passes by the
root of the nose and anastomoses with
the last branch of the facial artery. The
spheno-palatine artery has also received
this name.
   Nasal Bones.  Ossanasi.  The two
bones of the nose.
   Nasal Fossa.   The two cavities of
 the nose.
   Nasal Nerve.   A branch  of the
 opthalmic nerve, which passes forward,
 crosses the optic nerve and enters the
 anterior  ethmoidal foramen, traversing
 the  ethmoid  bone,  to  the cribriform.
plate, then passing down by the side of
the crista galli into the  nose, where it
divides into  two  branches, an  internal
and external. 
NAS               526              NEC
  Nasal Spines.  The superior occu-
pies the centre of the nasal notch of the
os frontis ; the inferior is situated at the
inferior part of the nasal fossae, and the
posterior is formed by the  union of the
two palate bones, and is situated at the
posterior part of the palatine arch.
  NASALIS LABII  SUPERIORIS.
The orbicularis oris.
  NAS'CENT.   From nascor, to be
born. .  The act of being developed.  In
Chemktry, the act of being produced or
evolved, as a gas.
  NASI OSSA. The two bones of the
nose.
  NASMYTH, ALEXANDER. His-
torical  Introduction  to  the Anatomy,
Physiology and Diseases of the Teeth,
by.  London,  1839.  In this work the
science and art of dental  surgery from
the earliest period of which we have any
account of their existence, down to the
time of its publication, is traced with an
accuracy of detail which at once stamps
the author as a man  of  extensive re-
search  and high scientific and literary
attainments.  It is a most valuable and
highly  interesting contribution to the
literature of dental science.  Mr. Nas-
myth,  is  also author of three  memoirs
on the  Development and  Structure of
the Teeth  and  Epithelium—a work
characterized by an equal degree of abil-
ity and scientific research.
  NASO-PALATINE.  Belonging to
the nose and velum palati.
  Naso-Palatine Ganglion.  A small
ganglion situated in the anterior pala-
tine foramen.
  Naso-Palatine Nerve.  A small
branch of the spheno-palatine, proceed-
ing from the ganglion of Meckel.
  NASTURTIUM.  The name of a
genus of plants.
  Nasturtium  Aquaticum.     The
water cress.
  Nasturtium Hortense.  Dittander.
  Nasturtium Indicum.   The greater
Indian  cress.
  NASUM DILATANS.  The pyri-
midalis nasi.
  NASUS.  The nose.
  NATATION.  Swimming.
  NATATORY.   A term applied, in
Zoology, to an animal or part formed for
swimming.
  NATES.  The buttocks.  Also, the
tubercula  quadrigemina are so called
from their resemblance.
  Nates Cerebri.     The  tubercula
quadrigemina.
  NAVEL.   Umbilicus.
  NATRON.   Soda.   Also, the im-
pure subcarbonate of soda.
  Natron  Muriatum.    Muriate  of
soda.
  Natron Praparatum.   Subcarbo-
nate of soda.
  Natron Tartarisatum.  Soda tar-
tarizata.                 «
  Natron Vitriolatum.  Sulphate of
soda.
  NATURAL.  Pertaining to nature.
  NATURALIA.  The genital organs.
  NAUSEA.  An indication to vomit.
  Nausea Marina.  Sea-sickness.
  NAU'SEANT.   An agent which
causes nausea,
  NAVICULAR.  JYavicularis.  Sca-
phoid ; boat like.
  NAVICULARE  OS. A bone of the
tarsus is so named from its fancied re-
semblance to a boat.
  NAVIFORMIS.   Navicular.
  NEAR-SIGHTEDNESS. Myopia.
  NEB'ULA.  A speck on, or super-
ficial  opacity of, the cornea.  Also,  a
mist, or cloud-like  appearance in the
urine.
  NECK,  DERBYSHIRE.   Bron-
chocele.
  Neck, Stiff.  Torticollis.
  NECR^E'MIA.  From vexpos, death,
and aiua, blood.  Death beginning with
the blood,  or by the destruction of its
vital condition.
  NECRODES.  Cadaverous.
  NECROL'OGY.  From vexpoa, dead,
and fcoyoj, a discourse.  A register of
deaths ;  a discourse on death.
  NECROPHOBIA.   Morbid  dread
of death. 
NEC
527
NEC
  NECROPNEUMO'NIA.  Gangrene
of the lungs.
  NECRO'SIS.   From wxpoo,  I kill.
Mortification.  Death of a bone, or por-
tion of a bone.
  Necrosis of the Alveoli.  When
any portion of the alveoli is  deprived of
vitality it becomes a source of irritation
to the living parts with which it is con-
nected,  and an  effort  is immediately
made by  the economy to  remove it;
the necrosed part is  separated from the
living, and is thrown off by exfoliation.
Although the alveolar processes, like
other bone, are  endowed with blood-
vessels  and nerves, their recuperative
powers are weaker,  and hence, when
deprived of a portion of  substance, by
necrosis and exfoliation, or other cause,
the injury which they  thus  sustain, is
not, as is  often the case in other parts
of the osseous system, repaired by the
restorative efforts of nature.
  Necrosis and exfoliation of the alveo-
lar processes is always  accompanied by
a discharge of  fetid, ichorous matter,
and as the diseased action progresses, the
gums become spongy, separate  from
the alveoli, and  assume a  dark purple
color.
  Cases have occurred in which the
entire alveolar border has become ne-
crosed and  exfoliated, but   more fre-
quently, the necrosis is confined to the
sockets of one, two, three or four teeth.
Several examples of  necrosis  of the
sockets of several teeth have  faUen un-
der the observation of  the  author, and
one of the whole of the lower jaw.
  The cause of necrosis of the alveolar
processes is inflammation and the death
of the periosteum, occasioned, in the
majority of cases, by dental  irritation,
though it often results from the immod-
erate and  protracted use of  mercurial
medicines, and sometimes, it is induced
by ulceration of the gums.
  With regard to the  treatment  most
proper to be pursued, the most that can
be done, is, to remove the dead portions
of bone, as they become separated from
the living, which may be done with a
pair of forceps.  The mouth should be
frequehtiy  washed  with a  solution of
chloride of soda for  the purpose of cor-
recting the fetor arising from the matter
which is almost constantly discharged.
  Necrosis of the Teeth.   By the
term necrosis, when applied to the teeth,
is meant the entire death of the crown of
one or more of these organs.  It is  a dis-
ease common to all bones, and is similar
to  mortification in a soft part.
  When it affects other bones than the
teeth, the dead part is thrown off, and
the loss  repaired by the formation of
new bone.  But, when it  attacks the
teeth, thereis no such restoration. These
organs, as  has been shown in another
place,  are not  endowed with recuper-
ative powers.   And, even if they were,
necrosis  would  still forever  deprive
them of vitality, because they are gen-
erally affected by it  throughout nearly
their whole substance at once.
   It does not in the least affect their
density,  but  it  produces  so great  a
change in  their  appearance, that  a
tooth thus affected,  may  be  readily de-
tected by the most casual observer.   It
causes them  to assume a dark brown,
bluish or dingy hue, and this change is
more striking in teeth that are soft, than
in those that are hard.  It is also  more
marked in those that have been sud-
denly deprived of vitality from  a bloAv,
than in those which have lost their vi-
tality in a more gradual manner.
   The front teeth, from their being more
exposed to injuries from blows, are more
liable to necrosis than those  that are
farther  back  in the  mouth.  It is also
more frequently  met with in sound
teeth, than in those that are decaying.
This  fact may appear strange, yet we
think it capable of satisfactory explana-
tion.
   It has been  before  shoAvn, that soft
teeth are more  liberally supplied  with
blood vessels, nerves, &c, and are  more
easily acted upon by external  agents,
than those that are hard.  Hence it will 
NEC               528               NEE
 be seen, that if soft teeth, on  account
 of their higher organization, are more
 susceptible to  the  action of corroding
 agents, they are, also, for the same rea-
 son, less liable to be deprived of their
 vitality.
   Necrosis of the teeth may  be produ-
 ced by a  variety  of causes, such  as
 protracted  fevers, the immoderate  ex-
 hibition of mercurial medicines, and by
 caries.   The immediate cause, how-
 ever, in all cases in which it is not oc-
 casioned by a blow, sufficiently violent
 to  destroy, at once, the vascular con-
 nection of  the tooth with the rest of the
 system, is  inflammation and suppura-
 tion of  the lining membrane.
   When once the vascular connection
 of  a  tooth with the rest of the system
 is destroyed, it becomes an extraneous
 body—inflammation of the socket  en-
 sues, and the gum  becomes turgid and
 spongy, and generally bleeds from  the
 slightest touch.  The tooth, as the al-
 veolus  is  wasted,  becomes  loosened,
 matter  is discharged at different open-
 ings, through the gums, or at their edges,
 the root assumes a dark brown color,
 and has a rough eroded appearance.  A
 morbid  action is also often  imparted to
 the contiguous parts.  The sockets of
 the adjacent teeth  are  frequently de-
 stroyed, the teeth  loosened, and the
 gums swell and become spongy.
  We have, in some instances, known
 teeth  to remain firmly fixed in their
 sockets  for  years, after having been de-
 prived of their vitality, without produc-
 ing any very unpleasant consequences.
 Cases of this sort, however,  are of so
 rare occurrence, especially with  the mo-
 lares  and bicuspides, that we are dis-
 posed to believe, that in such instances,
 there  is  always  a low degree of  vitality
 kept up by  the periosteum of the fangs,
 after  the suppuration of the internal
 membrane.   This  hypothesis appears
 the more probable, when  we  reflect,
 that something of the same sort often
 happens in  the roots of teeth long after
the destruction of their crowns.
   When a tooth, deprived of its vitality,
 is found  to  be productive of injury to
 the gums and to the adjacent teeth, it
 should be immediately  removed; for,
 however important or valuable its pre-
 sence may be, the health and durabUity
 of the others should not be jeopardized
 by its retention.
   If a necrosis of one or more of these
 organs is apprehended, we  should en-
 deavor, by the application of leeches to
 the gums, and gargling the mouth with
 suitable  astringents, to prevent its oc-
 currence.  When this plan of treatment
 is adopted at an early period, it wUl of-
 ten prove successful; but, if it be long
 neglected, no favorable result can be an-
 ticipated from it.
   NECROT'OMY.  Dissection.
   NECTAR.   A name given to many
 drinks, and particularly to wine sweet-
 ened with honey.
   NEDHEART. Upon the Affections
 of the Teeth.  London.
   NEDY'IA.   The intestines.
   NEDYS.   The abdomen.
   NEEDLE.   In  surgery,  a round,
 flat, or triangular, straight  or curved,
 sharp  pointed  instrument,  and  most
 commonly with an  eye  at, or near, one
 extremity.
   Needle, Acupuncture.   A  gold
 or silver,  sharp pointed,  inflexible in-
 strument, four inches  long, of a conical
 shape, furnished with  a handle,  and
 sometimes with a canula.
   Needle Carrier.  A pair of small
 forceps, called portc aiguille.
   Needle,  Cataract.  A   delicate
 knife attached to a handle, used for the
 purpose of depressing or cutting up the
 lens in cataract.
  Needle, Hare-Lip.   A gold or sil-
 ver pin, with a movable steel  point.
  Needle, Seton.  A long, narrow,
 steel instrument, pointed and sharp at
 one extremity, and pierced at the other.
 Needle, Suture.  A  curved, and
 nearly  flat needle,  with two  cutting
edges, pointed and sharp at one extrem-
ity, and pierced at the other. 
NEP               529              NER
   NEFREN'DES.  Odontia edentula.
  Persons without teeth.
   NEGRO.  From niger, black.   A
  native or descendant of the black race
  of men in Africa.
   NEMATOPDEA.  JYematoideans;
  from vrjua, a filament, and eiSos, form.
  The name of an order of cozlelmintha,
  or intestinal worms, characterized by a
  long, slender, filiform body.
   NEMATONEURA.   From vryna,
  and vtvpov, nerve.   That division  of
  radiata, of Cuvier, whose nervous sys-
  tem is filamentary, as the star-fish.
   NE'OPLASTY.   From „£0j, new,
  and Ttxaaaa, I form.  The formation of
  new parts, either by granulation, adhe-
  sion, autoplasty, or cicatrization.
   NEP.  Nepeta cataria.
   NEP'ETA CATARIA.  The nep,
  or cat-mint.
   NEPHRALGIA.   From  ve^pos, a
 kidney, and a^yoj, pain.   Pain in the
 kidney.
   NEPHRELMINTIC. JYephrelmin-
 tkus ; from ve$pos, a kidney and eXuivs,
 a worm.  A  term applied to diseases
 which  result  from  the  presence of
 worms in the kidney.
   NEPHREMPHRAXTS.  From*s-
 $poy, the  kidney, and eutypaaaa, I ob-
 struct.  Obstruction of the kidneys.
   NEPHRITIC.  JYephritkus;  from
 »-£^poj, a kidney.  Relating to the kid-
 neys.
   NEPHRITTCA. Medicines employ-
 ed in the treatment of diseases of the
 kidneys.
   NEPHRITIS. From ve^pos, a kid-
 ney, and itk, signifying inflammation.
 Inflammation of the kidneys.
   Nephritis  Albuminosa.  Bright's
 disease of  the kidney.
   NEPHROCE'LE.  From vetyos, a
 kidney, and xijhrj, hernia.  Hernia of
the kidney.
  NEPHRODIUM  FILIX MAS—
The male fern.
  NEPHROHiE'MIA.  From  ve$poS,
a kidney, and aifia, blood.  Congestion
of the kidney.
    45
    NEPHROLITHIASIS.  From w-
  $>po$, a kidney, and fctfloj, a stone.  A
  calculus disease of the kidneys.
    NEPHROLITH'IC.   Relating  to
  calculi in the kidneys.
    NEPHROL'OGY.   Mphrobgia;
  from »>£<}>po$, a kidney, and Jioyoj, a dis-
  course.  A treatise on the kidneys.
    NEPHRON'CUS.    From  r^poj,
  kidney,  and oy#o$, a swelling.   Tume-
  faction of the kidney.
    NEPHROPYO'SIS.  From ve^os,
  a kidney, and itvov, pus.  Suppuration
  of the kidney.
    NEPHROS.   The kidney.
    NEPHRO-SPASTIC. JYephro-spas-
  ticus.  A term applied to a variety of
  ischuria.
    NEPHROTOMY.  JYephrotomia;
  from »>«j>pos, a kidney,  and  teuvew, to
  cut.  The operation for the removal of
  a stone from the kidney.  Also, the dis-
  section of the kidney.
    NE'RIUM.  The name of a genus
  of plants.
    Nerium Antidysenter'icum.  The
  tree which affords the codaga pala bark.
    Nerium Olean'der.   The rose bay.
   Nerium Tinctorium. TheHindos-
 tan tree  which affords indigo.
   NEROLI OLEUM.  The essential
 oil of orange flowers.
   NERVALIS.  Nervous.
   NERVE.  JYervus ; j/supov.  A white
 cord, composed of a substance similar
 to that of the brain and spinal marrow,
 enveloped in a sheath.  The nerves are
 the organs which transmit sensation and
 motive power, to and from the brain, or
 nervous centre or  centres, to every part
 of  the  body.

         Table of Nerves.
  The nerves of the body are divided into
 the cranial, spinal and sympathetic.
  The following classification is  taken
 from Wilson's Anatomy:
         I.  Cranial Nerves.
  These,  counting from before  back-
wards, are:
  1. The olfactory. 
NER
530
NER
  2. The optk.
  3. Motores oculorum.
  4. Pathetici, (trochleares.)
  5. Trifacial, (trigemini.)
  6. Abducentes, (motores externi.)
  7. Facial,  (portio dura.)  Auditory,
(portio mollis.)
  8. Pneumogastric, (vagus, par  va-
gum.)  Gbsso-pharyngeal, (spinal  ac-
cessory.)
  9. Hypo-glossal, (lingual.)
  Functionally  or physiologicaUy  ar-
ranged, they are as follows:
  Nerves of—
                   fl.  Olfactory.
1. Special sense.   <2.  Optic.
                   I 7. Auditory.
             3. Motores oculorum.
             6. Abducentes,  (motores
                  externi.)
             9. Hypo-gbssal.
                4. Pathetici.
                7. Facial.
                8. Glosso-pharyngeal,
                   pneumogastrk and
                   spinal accessory.
  4. Spinal.       5.  Trifacial.
          II.  Spinal JYerves.
These are divided into  :
  1. The Cervical, 8  pair.
  2. The Dorsal,   12   "
  3. The Lumbar,  5   "
  4. The Sacral,   6   "
Making, in all, thirty-one pair, each of
which arises by two roots, an anterior or
motor root, and a posterior or sensitive
root.  The anterior roots arise from the
anterior columns of the spinal cord, and
the posterior,  from the  posterior  co-
lumns of the same cord.   These latter
are larger, and  their filaments of origin
more numerous than the anterior.
  In  the  intervertebral  foramina,  a
ganglion is found on each of the poste-
rior  roots.   The  first  cervical nerve
seems to be an  exception, as its poste-
rior root  is  smaUer than the anterior,
and is, frequently, without a ganglion
and often joins the spinal accessory.
2. Motion. <
3. Respiration
      (Bell.)
The anterior branches, excepting the
two first cervical, are  larger than the
posterior, and supply the front  half of
the body, while the posterior supply the
posterior half.
       III. Sympathetic JYerves.
  This system  of  nerves  are  called
sympathetic, from  their communicating
with all the nerves of the body, and
supplying all the  various organs and
viscera;  and  ganglionk,  from  pos-
sessing numerous ganglia.  It has also
been styled automatic,  or the original
and self-moving system of nerves. This
system is situated  on  each side of the
vertebral  column,  extending from the
head to the coccyx, and is seen to con-
sist of a series of ganglia or  knots,
giving  off  an  immense  number  of
branches, forming  various  plexuses,
which pursue  the course of the arte-
ries, and have the same name.
  The head has six ganglia.   The neck
three.  The back twelve. The lumbar re-
gion four.  And the sacral four or five.
  Cranial ganglia:
  1. Ganglion  of Ribes is  small, and
situated on the anterior communicating
artery  of the brain.
  2. Ciliary  or  lenticular ganglion,  is
also small, and situated within the orbit,
between ihe optic nerve and the exter-
nal rectus muscle, surrounded  by  a
quantity of fat.
  3. JYaso-palatine, or  ganglion of Cb-
quet, is situated in the  naso-palatine
canal,  and is a small, though lengthened
body.
  4. Spheno-palatine, or  ganglion  of
Meckel, is situated in the spheno-maxil-
lary  fossa, and is  the largest of the
cranial ganglia.
  5. Sub-maxilbry ganglion, is  small,
and situated in the sub-maxiUary gland.
  6. Otic  ganglion, or  ganglion  of
Arnold, is  situated directly below the
foramen ovale, and rests against the in-
ferior maxUlary  nerve.   It is described
as a small, red  body.   AU  these gan-
glia give off branches supplying the
eye, the  ear, the nose, the palate, and 
NER               531               NER
  communicating with the other nerves.
  A plexus is formed in the carotid canal,
  called carotid plexus, which is regarded
  as the  centre of  communication be-
  tween all the cranial ganglia.
    Cervical ganglia:
    1. Superior cervical ganglion, is situa-
  ted at the superior part of the neck, in
  front of the rectus anticus major  mus-
  cle, as low down as  the  third cervical
  vertebral, and is long, of  a  grayish
  color, and smooth.
   2.  Middk  cervical ganglion, is situa-
  ted opposite the fifth cervical vertebral,
  and is sometimes wanting.
   3.  Inferior cervical ganglion, is situa-
  ted as low down as the seventh cervical
  vertebral, and is  called  the  vertebral
  ganglion. It is large  in size compared
  with the middle.
   From these cervical ganglia, the car-
  diac  nerves proceed, and constitute the
  cardiac  plexus,  which is situated be-
 hind the arch of  the aorta, at the bifur-
 cation of the  trachea, and goes to sup-
 ply the heart.
   Thoracic ganglia:
   The  thoracic  ganglia  are  situated
 upon the heads of the ribs, covered by
 the pleura costalis, are twelve in num-
 ber on each side, and are irregular in
 their  form.
   The inferior of these ganglia, begin-
 ning  at the sixth, send off the great and
 lesser splanchnic nerves, which descend
 below the  diaphragm, the former to
 terminate in the  semi-lunar  ganglion,
 the latter in the renal plexus.
   The semi-lunar  ganglion, is situated
 at the side of the coeliac axis, and  con-
 sists of a number of small ganglia, pre-
 senting a semi-lunar form, and sending
 off numerous  branches,  like the radii
 of a circle, receives the name  of solar
pkxus.   This  plexus  receiving  the
splanchnic nerves, and  branches from
the phrenic;  and  the pneumogastric
sends  off a  multitude of  filaments,
caUed plexuses, upon  all the  branches
of the abdominal aorta, and having the
same names as the arteries.
    These plexuses are as follows :
    1. Phrenic plexus.
    2. Gastric.
    3. Hepatic.
    4. Splenic.
    5. Supra-renal.
    6. Renal.
    7. Superior mesenteric.
    8. Spermatic.
    9. Inferior mesenteric pkxus.
    Lumbar ganglia:
    These ganglia  are  four  in  number,
 and situated upon the anterior portion
 of the lumbar vertebral.
    They send  off branches upon the
 aorta, called the  aortic pkxus, which
 also receives filaments  from the  solar
 and superior mesenteric plexuses.
   The  hypogastric plexus,  is  situated
 between the two common iliac arteries,
 over the promontory  of the  sacrum,
 and is formed  from the aortic plexus,
 and branches from the inferior lumbar
 ganglia.
   Sacral ganglia:
   The sacral ganglia, are smaller  than
 the last, and situated close  to the ante-
 rior sacral foramina, upon the sacrum
 on each side.  The last of these  gan-
 glia is called ganglion-impar, or azygos.
 The branches communicate freely with
 the hypogastric plexus.
   NERVELESS.  Enervis.
   NERVINE.  JYervinus; from ner-
 vus, a nerve.  Neurotic.  A medicine
 which relieves disorders of the nerves.
   NERVOUS. Nervosus.  Belonging,
 or relating, to the  nerves.
   Nervous Attack.  An affection at-
 tended with pain,  spasms, rheumatism,
 and other nervous  symptoms.
   Nervous Centres.  The brain, spi-
 nal marrow, and ganglions.
  Nervous Diathesis.  That disposi-
 tion of body which predisposes to ner-
 vous diseases.
  Nervous Diseases.  Diseases which
 have their seat in the nervous system.
  Nervous Fever.  Typhus nervosus.
  Nervous Fluid.  A fluid supposed
to  circulate through the nerves, and 
NEU
532
NEU
which has been thought to be the agent
of sensation and motive power.
  Nervous  Matter.    The   matter
which composes the nerves ; it resem-
bles that of the brain and spinal mar-
row.
  Nervous System. The nerves, col-
lectively, of the body.
  NERVU'RES.   In Entomobgy, the
delicate framework of the membranous
wings of insects.  In Botany, the veins
of a leaf.
  NER'VUS   A nerve.
   Nervus  Sympatheticus  Medius.
The fifth pair  of nerves.
  NESTIS.  The jejunum.
  NETTLE-RASH.  Urticaria.
  NEURAL'GIA.    From rtvpor,  a
nerve, and oxyoj, pain.   Literally, pain
in a nerve.  A painful affection of the
nerves.  The  particular designation of
neuralgia is determined by  the situa-
tion of the affection, as neuralgia faciei,
or  tic douloureux, when it  affects the
branches of the fifth pair of nerves, &c.
   Neuralgia Cubito-Digitalis. Pain
 extending from the inner  condyle to
 the back of the hand.
   Neuralgia Dentalis.  See  Odon-
 talgia.
   Neuralgia Faciei.  Neuralgia of
 the face.  Tic douloureux.  An affec-
 tion characterized by acute lancinating
 pains in certain parts of the face, occur-
 ring at more or less irregular intervals.
 It is sometimes dependent  upon con-
 stitutional causes, but  more frequently
 upon local  irritation, produced by one
 or more  decayed, dead or loose teeth,
 or by disease  in the gums and alveolar
 processes.  In the former case the treat-
 ment should  be  constitutional, and in
 the latter, local, and consist in the re-
 moval of such irritants  as may have
 been concerned in its production.  See
 Odontalgia.
    Neuralgia,  Femoro-Popliteal.—
 Sciatica.
    Neuralgia of  the Heart.  Angi-
 na pectoris.
    NEURASTHENI'A.  From vtvpop,
a nerve, and ao$tveva, debility.  Debility
of the nerves.  Irritability.
  NEURILEM'MA  From  vtvpov,a
nerve, and Xeuua, the bark or covering.
The transparent membranous sheath
which covers the nerves.
  NEURILEMMITIS.  Murilemma-
titis; from vevpov,  a nerve, Xeufia, the
coat, and itk, signifying inflammation.
iimammation of the neurilemma.
  NEURINE. The substance of which
a nerve is composed.
  NEURITIC.  Nervine.
  NEURITIS.    Inflammation of a
nerve.
  NEUROBLACPA.   From  wvpov,
a nerve, and /3jiax»a, stupor.  Insensi-
bility in a nerve.
  NEURODYNIA.  Neuralgia.
  NEUROGRAPHY. JYeurographia;
from rtupor, a nerve,  and ypatyr;, a de-
scription.   Neurology.  A treatise on
the nerves.
  NEUROL'OGY. JYeurobgia; from
vevpov,  a nerve, and xoyos, a discourse.
A treatise on the nerves.
  NEURO'MA. From j/tvpov, a nerve.
A morbid enlargement  or swelling of,
or painful tumor on, a nerve.
  NEURON.  A nerve.
  NEURO'SES.   Nervous  diseases,
constituting  the second  class  in  the
nosology of Cullen, and  the fourth in
that of Pinel.
   NEUROSTHENI'A. From wvpov,
a nerve, and a9evos, force. Excess of
nervous excitation.  Nervous  irritation.
   NEUROTICA.    Diseases  of the
nervous system.  Also, nervine  medi-
cines.
   NEUROT'OMY.   Murotomia ;—
 from Mvpov, a nerve, and teuva, I cut.
 Dissection of the nerves, or division of
 a nerve.
   NEUTRAL.  Neutralis;  from neu-
 ter, neither.  In Chemktry, saline com-
 pounds, which possess neither the char-
 acters of an acid nor alkali.
   NEUTRALIZATION. In Chemis-
 try, the combination of acid  and alka-
 line matter in such proportion that the 
NIM
533
NIT
compound will not change the color of
litmus or violets.
  NI.  Nickle.
  NICARAGUA WOOD.  Caesalpina
echinata wood.
  NICHOLLES, JOHN.   The Teeth
in relation to Beauty, Voice and Health,
being the result of twenty years' practi-
cal  experience and assiduous study to
produce the full development and per-
fect regularity of those essential organs,
by.  London, 1833.
  NICKEL.   A whitish, malleable,
and ductile metal.
  NICOLAI.  Dissertation on the va-
rious Affections of the Teeth, and their
nourishment in health, by.  Jena, 1799.
  NICOTIANA. So called from Ni-
cot, who carried it to Europe.  Tobac-
co.  Also,  the  name  of a genus of
plants.
  Nicotiana  Americana.   Nicotiana
tabacum.  Virginia tobacco.
  Nicotiana  Minor.  Nicotiana rus-
tica.  Green tobacco.
  NICTATION, or NICTITATION.
Nictitatio;  from nictare,  to  wink.
Rapid winking of the eyehds.
  NIGEL'LA.  The name of a genus
of plants.
  Nigella Sativa.  Fennel  flower;
nutmeg flower;  devti-in-a-bush.
  NIGER. Black.
  NIGHT BLINDNESS.  Hemera-
lopia.
  NIGHTMARE.  Incubus.
  NIGHTSHADE,  AMERICAN.—
Phytolacca decandria.
  Nightshade, Deadly.  Atropa bel-
 ladonna.
   Nightshade, Palestine.  Solanum
 sanctum.
  Nightshade,  Woody.   Solanum
dulcamara.
  NIGRITA.  Negro.
  NIGRITIES OSSIUM.  Literally, a
blackness of the bones.  Caries.
  NIMMO'S  ODONTALGIC MIX-
TURE.   $.—Mistur, camphor, 5 vi;
tinct. opii, gtts.  xxxvi; vin. tart, anti-
mon. gtts. xvi.
         45*
  NIPPLE. A small conical protuber-
ance at the centre of the breast.
  NIPPLE-WORT. Lapsana.
  NISUS.  Effort, straining; a volun-
tary retention of the  breath.
  Nisus Formativus.  Formative  ef-
fort ; vital activity;  plastic force.
  NITRAS. A nitrate. Nitric acid with
a salifiable base.
  Nitras  Ammonia.  Nitrate  of am-
monia.
  Nitras  Argenti.  Nitrate of silver.
  Nitras Calcis.  Nitrate of lime.
  Nitras  Potassa.   Nitre.  Nitrate of
potash.
  Nitras  Potassa  Fusus.   Nitrate of
potash, containing a little sulphuric acid.
  Nitras Soda. Nitrate of soda.
  NITRATE.  Nitras.
  Nitrate of Potash. Nitras potassae.
  Nitrate of Silver.   Nitras argenti.
  NITRE.  Nitrate of  potash.  Salt-
petre.
  NITRIC.  Of, or belonging to, nitre.
  Nitric  Acid.  Acidum nitricum.—
Aquafortis.  A colorless fluid, of a suf-
focating pungent odor, acid taste, and
extremely caustic.   It is obtained by the
action of sulphuric acid and heat on
nitrate of potash or soda.
  NITROGEN. From vitpov,  nitre,
and yewaa, to  produce. Azote.   An
elementary, irrespirable,  colorless gas,
incapable of supporting combustion,
and forming four-fifths  of  the atmos-
phere.
  Nitrogen, Gaseous  Oxyd of.  See
Nitrous Oxyd.
  NITRO-MURIATIC  ACID.  Aci-
dum  nitro-muriaticum.   Nitro-hydro-
chloric acid.  Aqua regia.  A  mixture
of nitric and muriatic acids. Chlorine
is evolved  by  this  mixture, and  it is
probably  owing to this, that gold is
readily dissolved by  it.
  NITROUS.   Nitrosus.  Of, or  be-
longing to, nitre, or  its combinations.
  Nitrous Acid.   Acidum nitrosum.
The red fumes emitted by exposing
binoxyd of nitrogen and oxygen, which,
when condensed, is  a colorless  fluid. 
NON
534
NOT
   Nitrous Oxyd.  Protoxyd of nitro-
gen.  Intoxicating gas. Laughing gas.
   NITRUM.  Nitre.
   Nitrum Flammans.  Nitrate of am-
monia.
   Nitrum Purifica'tum. Purified nitre.
   Nitrum Vitriolatum.  Sulphate of
potash.
   NOBILIS.  Noble; principal; essen-
tial.
   NOCTAMBULATION.   Noctam-
bulatio; from nox, night, and ambub, to
walk. Somnambulism. Sleep-walking.
   Nocturnal Blindness.  See Heme-
ralopia.
   NODE. Nodus. A hard tumor, pro-
ceeding from a bone, and caused by a
thickening of the periosteum.   Also, a
calcareous  concretion formed  around
articulations which have been the seat
of rheumatism or gout.  In Botany, the
elevations observed in the stems of
grasses.
•   NODO'SUS.  Knotty.
   NODULE.  From nodus, a knot. A
little knot-like eminence.
   NODULUS.  A little node.
   NODUS CEREBRI. The pons va-
rolii.
   NOLI ME TANGERE. In Botany,
the name of a plant, which,  like  mo-
mordica balsamina, when ripe, on being
touched, discharges  its seeds  from its
capsule with  considerable force.   In
 Surgery, a species of malignant herpes,
 affecting the skin, and sometimes, the
 cartilage of the  nose.  The disease is
 often of a very malignant character, and
 the nose is sometimes  destroyed by it.
   NOMA.  Cancer aquaticus.
   NOMENCLATURE.   Nomencla-
 tura; from  ovoua, name,  and xaXea, I
 call.  The words peculiar to a science
 or art;  the technical terms of any par-
 ticular art or science.
   NON-NAT'URALS. Non-naturalia.
 The ancient physicians comprehended
 under this  term, air, meat and drink,
 sleep and  watching, motion  and  rest,
 the retentions and  excretions, and the
 affections of the  mind.
  NOR'MAL.  From  norma, a rule.
According to an established law, rule
or principle.
  NORTON, C. L. Author of a paper
on the Use of Arsenious Acid in the
treatment of Carious Teeth, published
in the fourth volume of the American
Journal of Dental Science.
  NOSE.  Nasus.
  Nose, Artificial.   See Artificial
Nose.
  Nose, Bleeding of the. Epistaxis.
  Nose, Running at the.  Coryza.
  NOSEROS.  Insalubrious.
  NOSOCOMI'UM.   From  voaos,  a
disease, and xouea, to take care of.  An
infirmary or hospital.
  NOSOG'ENY.   Nosogenia;  from
voaos, a disease, and yevos, origin.  The
origin of disease.
  NOSOG'RAPHY.    Nosographia;
from voaos,  a disease, and ypa$w, I des-
cribe.   A description of diseases.
  NOSOL'OGY.   Nosologia;  from
voaos, a disease, and  a.oyoj, a discourse.
That  department of medical science
which treats of the classification of dis-
eases.
  NOSON'OMY.   JVbsonowta;  from
voaos, disease, and owyta, name.  The
nomenclature of diseases.
  NOSOS.  Disease.
  NOSTAL'GIA.   From voatos, a re-
turn, and aXyos, pain. Melancholy, loss
of appetite, &c. occasioned by the de-
sire of returning to one's country.
  NOSTOMA'NIA.  Nostalgia,  mad-
ness of.
  NOSTRILS.  Nares.
  NOSTRUM.   From noster,  ours.
A medicine the ingredients of which
are kept secret for the purpose of secur-
ing to the proprietor the  profits arising
from the same; a private or quack medi-
cine.
   NOTAL.   From  votos, the  back.
Belonging to the back.
   NOTAL'GIA.  Pain in the back.
   NOTCH.  A depression or indenta-
tion observed on the margin of a  bone.
   Notch,  Ethmoid'al.  The depres- 
NUT
535
NYM
sion in the frontal bone which receives
the superior part of the ethmoid bone.
  Notches, Ischiat'ic. These are two
in number. The first, which is the larg-
est, is situated at the inferior part of the
pelvis, gives passage to the sciatic nerve,
pyramidalis muscle, and to the superior
gluteal vessels and nerves.  The other
gives passage to the tendon of the obtu-
rator internus, and to  the internal pu-
diac vessels and nerves.
   Notch, Parot'id.  The triangular
space between the  parotid  edge of the
lower jaw and mastoid process, and in.
which the parotid gland is lodged.
   NOTHUS.  False; spurious.
   NUCHA. Nucha capitk. The nape
of the neck, the part where the medulla
spinalis begins.
   NUCLEATED  CELL.   The  cell
formed in a primary granule, (cytoblast,
or nucleus.)  See Cytoblast.
   NUCLEUS.   From nux, a nut.
Literally, a kernel  or nut.  The centre
of any body, the part about which mat-
ter collects.  In Animal and  Vegetable
Physiology, a primary granule, or cyto-
blast  See Cytoblast.
   Nucleus Germinativus.  The ger-
minal spot in the germinal vesicle of
the ovum.
   NU'CULA.  A little nut.
   NUDIBRACHIATE.  Fromnudus,
naked, and brachia, arms.  The poly-
pus whose arms are not  clothed with
vibratile ciha.
   NUDIBRAN'CHIATA.  From nu-
dus, naked, and bronchia, gills.  Nudi-
branchians.   A term applied  to an or-
der of gasteropods in which the gills are
exposed.
   NU'DUS.   Naked.
   NURSE.  One Avho suckles her own
child or another's.  One who  has the
care of a sick person.
   NUT.  Nux.
   NUTATION.  Constant involuntary
movement of the head.
  NUTMEG.  Myristica moschata.
  NUTRITION.  Nutritio; from nu-
trire, to  nourish.  The  reparation of
the molecular changes and decomposi-
tions of the body; the function by which
the elaborated nutritive matter loses its
own nature, and assumes  that of the
different living tissues.
  Nutrition, Force of. Plastic force.
  NUTRITIOUS.  Nutritio.   Nutri-
tive; nourishing; capable of sustaining
life.
  NUTRITIVE  CENTRE.  A  cell
from which a succession  of cellules
originate.
  NUTRITUS.  Aliment.
  NUX.  A fruit with a hard  shell.
  Nux Aquatica.  Trapa natans.
  Nux Aromatic a.   Myristica  mos-
chata.
  Nux Barbadensis. Jatropha curcas.
  Nux Cathartica.  Jatropha curcas.
  Nux Metella.  Strychnos  nux vo-
mica.
  Nux Pistacia.  Pistacia vera.
  Nux Serapionis.   Ignatia amara.
  Nux Vomica.  Nux cathartica.
  NYCTALO'PIA.  From vv%, night,
and orttouai, I see.   A defect of vision,
which renders a person incapable of
seeing by day, and of discerning objects
distinctly at night.
   NYCTALOPS.   One affected with
nyctalopia.
   NYCTHE'MERUM.   From  vv%,
night, and quepa, a day.  Twenty-four
hours, or a day and a night.
   NYCTO'BASIS.  Somnambulism.
   NYMPH A.  From wutpa,  a water
nymph.  A membranous fold arising
from the lateral part of the prepuce of
the clitoris, within the external labia of
the female parts of generation  on each
side.
   NYMPH^EA.  The name of a ge-
nus of plants.
   Nymphaa Alba.   The white-water-
lily.
   Nymphaa Glandifera.  Nymphaea
nelumbo.
  Nymphaa Lutea.  The yellow water
lily.
  Nymphaa Nelum'bo.  The pontic,
or Egyptian bean. 
OBL               536               OBT
  Nymphaa Odora'ta.  The sweet-
scented water-lily.
  NYMPHOMANIA.  From vvu^j,
a bride,  and uavia, madness.   Furor
uterinus.   An irresistible desire for coi-
tion in females, particularly those of a
nervous temperament, and is supposed
to be caused by preternatural irritability
of the uterus, nymphae and clitoris, or
unusual acrimony of the secretions in
these parts.
  OAK TREE,  auercus.
  Oak, Jerusalem. Chenopodium bo-
trys.
  Oak, Sea.  Fucus vesiculosus.
  Oak, Lungs.   Lichen pulmonarius.
  OARION'CUS.  Ovarian tumor.
  OARITIS.    Inflammation of  the
ovarium.
  OATMEAL.  Avenae farina.
  OATS.   Avena.*
  OBEL^EA.  The sagittal suture.
  OBE'SITY.   Obesitas; fromobesus,
fat.  Corpulency; fatness,
  OBLPQJJUS.  Oblique.  In Anato-
my,  applied to  certain muscles from
their direction.
  Obliquus Externus Abdominis.  A
broad thin muscle of the abdomen.
  Obliquus  Inferior  Capitis.   A
muscle of the head.
  Obliquus Inferior Oculi.  A mus-
cle of the eye.
  Obliquus Internus Abdominis.  A
muscle of the abdomen, situated under
the obliquus externus abdominis.
  Obliquus  Superior  Capitis.  A
small muscle  of the head  situated be-
tAveen the occiput and first vertebra of
the neck.
  Obliquus Superior Oculi.  Ti-och-
learis.  A muscle of the eye.
  OBLITERATION.   In Anatomy,
  NYMPHON'CUS.   From  wpty,
the nympha, and oyxoj, a tumor.  Tu-
mefaction  of the nymphae.
  NYMPHOT'OMY.  Nymphotomia;
from wufyri, and teuveiv, to cut. The op-
eration for the removal of the nymphae,
when attacked by scirrhus, cancer, or
fungus.
  NYSTAGMUS. Involuntary move-
ment of the eyelids.
the disappearance of a part that has
ceased to be useful, as the ductus veno-
sus, after birth.  In Dental Surgery, fill-
ing the cavity of a carious tooth.
  OBLIVION.   Oblivio.   Forgetful-
ness; loss of memory.
  OBSERVATION.  Observatio. Act
of examining a thing;  and, also, the
knowledge gained. In French, it means
care, or the history of  the phenomena
of a disease.
  OBSTET'RICS.  The art of mid-
wifery.
  OBSTIPATION.  Obstipatio. Con-
stipation ;  costiveness.
  OBSTRUCTION.  Obstructio.  In
Pathology, the arrest of a  function or
secretion, by  the closure of the parie-
tes  of a duct, or  by the accumulation
of foreign or morbid matter in it.
  OBSTRUCTIO ALVI.  Constipa-
tion.
  OB'STRUENS.  From obstruo, to
shut up. A medicine supposed to have
the power of closing the orifices of ducts
or vessels.
  OBTUN'DENS.  Obtandant; from
obtundo, to make blunt.  In Pathology,
medicines supposed to have the power
of blunting  the acrimony  of the hu-
mors.
  OBTURATOR. Obturatorius; from 
OBT
537
OBT
obturare, to close, stop up the entrance.
That which closes, or stops up the en-
trance of any thing.
  Obturator  Artery.  A branch of
the hypogastric  or epigastric artery,
which passes forward a little below the
brim of the pelvis and escapes through
the obturator foramen.
  Obturator Externus. A smaU, flat
muscle, situated at the anterior and up-
per part of the  thigh.
  Obturator Fora'men. An opening
beneath the horizontal ramus of the os
pubis in the anterior part of the os in-
nominatum.
  Obturator  Internus.   A muscle
situated almost entirely within the pel-
vis.
  Obturator Ligament.  A  tendino-
fibrous  membrane stretched across the
obturator foramen.
  Obturator  Nerve.  A nerve form-
ed by a branch of the third and another
from the fourth lumbar nerve, and dis-
tributed to the muscles on the inside of
the thigh.
  Obturator, Palatine.   An instru-
ment for closing or stopping an opening
through the palatine arch.  This  is an
ancient invention.  According to Guil-
lemean, they were applied by the Greek
physicians, but it is to  that celebrated
surgeon, Ambrose Pare, that we are in-
debted for the first description of an ap-
pliance of this  sort.   He has  also  fur-
nished an  engraving of an  obturator
which  he  had  constructed  in  1585.
The instrument consisted of a metallic
plate, probably of silver or gold, fitted
to an opening in the vault of the palate,
and maintained in place by means of
a piece of sponge fastened to a screw in
an  upright attached to the upper sur-
face of the plate.
  The employment of sponge, however,
proved objectionable, as it was found
that it absorbed the secretion of the nose,
and soon became exceedingly offensive.
But its use, notwithstanding,  was con-
tinued for a long time. It was  ultimate-
ly,  however, superseded, by  an obtu-
rator invented by Fauchard, which was
held in place by means of wings, which
turned on a pivot.  But this was near-
ly as objectionable as the  other.  The
pressure of the wings, like that of the
sponge, upon the surrounding  parts,
caused them to be gradually destroyed,
enlarging  the opening, and thus  aug-
menting the evil, consequently, the use
of obturators constructed upon this prin-
ciple, has  been abandoned.  An appli-
ance of this sort should never, therefore,
if it can possibly be avoided, be sustain-
ed by means  of any fixtures which act
upon the lateral parts, as  they neces-
sarily tend to increase the dimensions of
the opening.
   With a  view of obviating these ob-
jections, Bourdet proposed to employ  a
simple metallic plate fitted  to the vault
of the palate and large enough to cover
the opening in it,  with two lateral pro-
longations, one on each side, extending
to the teeth, to which they were fasten-
ed by means  of ligatures.  This was
also found to be objectionable, as the
ligatures  were productive  of constant
irritation to the gums, and, besides, they
did not hold the plate with sufficient sta-
btiity, in place. Its use was, therefore,
soon abandoned.  But these objections
were both obviated, by an improvement
made by M. Delabarre,  which consists
in the employment of clasps, instead of
ligatures attached to lateral branches of
the plate, and to prevent these from slip-
ping too high up upon the teeth, he at-
tached to  each, a kind of  spur, which
was so bent as to come down over the
grinding surface of the tooth to which  it
was applied.   The last named author,
also made another equally valuable im-
provement, which consists in the appli-
cation of a drum,  to  the upper surface
of the plate.   The object of this was to
prevent the accumulation  of mucous
fluids from the nose, in  the cul-de-sac,
formed, by simply closing  the opening
below, and to prevent fluids, in swallow-
ing, from passing up  between the obtu-
rator and soft parts, through the open- 
OBT
538
OBT
ing into the nose, which a simple plate
fails to do.
  The manner of constructing an obtu-
rator, with a drum  upon  its surface, is
as follows:  first,  take an impression
of the entire palatine vault and alveolar
ridge in wax.   From this, a plaster and
metallic model and  a counter-model are
procured, in the manner as before de-
scribed;  a gold plate is  then  swaged
between the two last,  a little larger than
the opening in the palate, with a broad
arm on each side, extending to a bicus-
pis or molar tooth, to which a broad
clasp is fitted.   This is soldered  to  the
arm of the plate.    Second, an  im-
pression of the opening in the vault of
the palate with wax, properly softened,
and placed upon the  upper surface  of
the palate plate is now taken, using the
precaution to prevent  forcing it  up  too
far through the aperture;  this  is next
trimmed where it comes in contact with
the plate,  so that it  shall not be quite as
large as the opening;  it is then covered
with plaster,  after which, a metallic
model and counter-model are taken, then
a  gold plate is  swaged between the
two, and this last is fitted and soldered
to the palatine plate. The piece is now,
after being properly finished, ready to
be applied.
  But an  obturator  of this description is
seldom required, except in those cases
where the opening extends back to the
velum, so that by the contraction of its
muscles, the parts  are raised from the
plate in such a manner during degluti-
tion, as to permit fluids to  pass up into
the nose.   In  this case it is absolutely
necessary, but in fitting and adjusting
the drum  to the upper surface  of the
plate, great care is requisite to prevent
placing it to one side  of  the opening.
After it has been properly adjusted and
one side soldered to the plate,  a  hole
should be drilled  through it  for the
escape of the heated air.  The other
side may then be  soldered, and the
hole closed by the introduction of a screw
of  the same  metal.   The projecting
portion of which should afterwards be
filed off.
  But when the opening in the palate is
small, and has  no connection with the
velum, it  is seldom  necessary to raise
the upper surface of the plate by attach-
ing a drum or air-chamber to it.   If it
be accurately fitted to the vault of the
palate, it will effectually prevent fluids,
in deglutition, from passing up into the
nasal cavities, or the escape of any por-
tion of the voice through  the opening,
and by frequently removing the plate,
it will prevent the stagnation of the se-
cretions which may accumulate in the
cul-de-sac.   Although the stability  of
the  plate when applied will depend,  in
a great degree, upon  the width of the
clasps,  the latter  should  never be  so
wide as to press  upon the gums around
the  necks of the teeth  to Avhich they are
attached, as in that case, they will be
productive of irritation, and ultimately
cause the destruction of the alveoli and
loss of the teeth.  Nor should they press
upon  the teeth so as to force them apart
or draw them towards each other, as  in
either case, the effect would be, gradu-
ally to loosen and displace  the  organs.
In short, the same precautions  are ne-
cessary in the application of clasps to a
palate plate, as to one which is to serve
as a support for  artificial teeth.
  The benefit derivable from an artifi-
cial obturator will very greatly  depend
upon  the accuracy of its adaptation to
the  contiguous and surrounding struc-
tures,  and  the perfection of its finish.
If it exerts any  undue pressure upon
them  it wiU be productive of injury and
and ultimately  fail to accomplish the
object for which it was designed. As in
the  case of a dental substitute, the piece
should not  be apphed  while any of the
teeth, especially  in the  upper jaw, are
in an  unhealthy  state.   The gums and
sockets of the teeth should also be free
from disease. The piece, too, should be
removed two or three times every day
and thoroughly  cleansed,  as  also the
teeth  to which the clasps are applied. 
OBT               539             OBT
  For a description of the manner of
constructing an obturator or  palatine
plate with an artificial velum, see Ar-
tificial Palate.
  Obturator  and Palate  Plates,
with Artificial Teeth.—When an
imperfection of the palate, whether the
result of malformation  or accident, is
accompanied by the loss of one or more
of the teeth, and especially from  the
anterior  part of the mouth, the plate
which is employed for  remedying  the
former, should be so constructed as to
serve as  a base for a substitute for  the
latter. The idea of complicating a pal-
ate  plate with artificial teeth, as  the
author  has stated  in another place,*
originated  with Fauchard.  When a
palatine  obturator  and  artificial  teeth
are to be applied at the same time, they
may be connected, and the piece made
to answer an excellent purpose, provid-
ed  there be healthy natural  teeth  in
the upper jaw to sustain it.
  In the construction of an  artificial
palate or obturator, to which  artificial
teeth are to  be attached, a gold plate of
the  proper  size should  be fitted to all
that portion of the  vault of the palate
and alveolar ridge  which are  to be co-
vered by it, with a lateral branch on
each side, extending to the first molaris
or the tooth to which it is  to be clasped.
To these, clasps should be soldered, and
aftenvards artificial teeth fitted and se-
cured  in the manner as  described  in
another article.  If, however, the upper
surface of the plate is to  be surmounted
with a  drum  or  air  chamber,  this
should be done before the  teeth are at-
tached.
  When the teeth have  all been lost on
one side  of the mouth, or  are too much
decayed to serve as  a support for an ob-
turator, either with  or without artificial
teeth, the plate may be constructed with
two  branches upon the other side, if
there be two healthy and firmly articu-
  * Vide  American edition of Fox on the
Human Teeth, with additions by the author,
p. 417.
lated teeth to which clasps can be ap-
plied.
   The following is the  method of pro-
cedure  adopted by Dr. C. O. Cone, in
the  construction of an  obturator, com-
plicated with   three  artificial  teeth,
for a patient  introduced into the in-
firmary of  the Baltimore  College of
Dental Surgery, during the latter part
of the session of 1846-7, by Dr. Mori-
son, from the infirmary of the medical
department of the University of Mary-
land.
   The opening in the palate was of
an eUiptical shape, about an inch in
length, and six-eighths  in width at its
widest part.  The loss  involved a por-
tion of the superior maxillary and pal-
ate bones, anterior part of the vomer,
and implicating in  a  downward and
backward direction, to  a considerable
extent, that portion of it  which is re-
ceived into the groove formed by the
articulation of the palate processes of
the superior maxillary and palate bones,
uniting the  cavities of the nose and
mouth, and almost totally destroying
enunciation, and greatly embarrassing
deglutition.  The whole mucous lining
of the mouth  was of a deep red, the
gums swollen  and irritable, the teeth
coated with tartar  and a slimy mucus.
The central incisores and  right lateral
of the upper jaw were loose, and an
ichorous fluid  almost  constantly dis-
charged from  between  them and the
gums, indicating a diseased condition
of their sockets.
   It is  hardly necessary to state, that
the destruction of parts and local mani-
festations of disease, in  this case, were
the result of a venereal  diathesis of the
general  system, which  had developed
itself in the usual  manner, producing
its various  pathological  changes,  and
among them, Avere those just noticed.
  The patient, previously to being in-
troduced into the infirmary of the Bal-
timore College of Dental Surgery, hav-
ing been under  the influence of appro
priate constitutional remedies, it only 
OBT          *     540
OBT
remained to institute such local treat-
ment as the nature of the  case  at this
time seemed  to demand.  The right
lateral  and superior  central incisores
were extracted, which opened a free
communication through their sockets,
between the nose and  mouth.  The re-
maining teeth were next freed from all
extraneous matter, and such other den-
tal and surgical treatment adopted  as
the nature of the case seemed to require.
In about two months, the teeth, gums,
and palate, were restored to health.
   Having accomplished this,  a correct
impression of  the superior  alveolar
ridge, and vault  of  the palate, was
taken in wax.   The plaster and metallic
models, and counter-models, were then
obtained in the usual manner.
   A gold plate was now fitted to the
opening in the  palate; its  inferior sur-
face, presenting a large concavity, was
filled with wax, so that when  placed in
the aperture of the palate, the cavity of
the mouth should  be restored to its nat-
ural shape. New models and a coun-
ter-model  were  next  obtained,  and
another plate, thicker than the first, and
of greater dimensions, extending ante-
riorly, to serve as a support for artificial
teeth, was next adjusted.
  It would seem  superfluous to state,
that great care was observed in adapting
these two plates to each other, and  to
the parts, so that the pressure should be
positively equal.  They were  adjusted
to each other in the mouth,  and held
together by means of a resinous cement,
previously softened;  they were now
removed, enveloped in plaster and sol-
dered  together, leaving  an  air-tight
chamber between the two.
  Having  proceeded thus far in the
construction of the piece, clasps  were
attached.  These were fitted to a mo-
laris on one side, and the two  bicuspi-
des on the other.  This done, artificial
gum teeth, were fitted and  attached to
the plate in the manner as described in
another article.  See Mounting Porce-
lain Teeth upon a Metallic Base.
   The author  would  here refer to an
 obturator, complicated  with  artificial
 teeth, constructed by Mr. Rowell, of
 New York, and  the great difficulty to
 be overcome in this case, according to
 the report made of it by Dr. Griscom,*
 was the want of  teeth  in the upper jaw
 to sustain it, and the great size of the
 opening in the palate, the vomer and
 turbinated bones having been destroyed.
   Upon  examination, however,  Mr.
 Rowell found that the posterior portion
 of the palatine aperture  was  formed,
 "to a considerable extent, of a semi-car-
 tilaginous substance,  possessing suffi-
 cient elasticity to allow  a larger body
 than   the4 opening  to be  pushed up
 through it, and that when so forced up,
 it would be supported  above the aper-
 ture by the edge retiring to its original
 position."  This, he hoped, would sup-
 port a light plate, if the obturator could
 be so shaped as to rest upon the cartila-
 ginous ledge, after it was  introduced.
   Without  quoting  the  description
 which is given  of his method of proce-
 dure, it will be sufficient  to state, that
 the obturator,  which  he  constructed,
 consisted of a plate  larger than the
 opening  in the  palate and covering the
 anterior  part of the  alveolar ridge, to
 which artificial teeth  were attached,
 and an irregularly shaped drum or air
 chamber, larger  above   than  below,
 where it was connected with the palate
 plate.  The neck of this bulb or drum,
 is of the exact size of the opening in the
 palate, and the upper part or summit
 has several depressions which corres-
 pond with the irregular "surfaces of the
 remaining nasal bones."
   The anterior  part of  the palate plate,
 to which the teeth are attached, is com-
 posed of two plates, "to compensate by
 its  thickness for the deficiency of the
 alveolar ridge."  The drum is seen ris-
ing from the palate plate, to which it is
soldered.
  At the time Mr. Rowell constructed
  • Vide New York Journal of Medicine,
vol. viii, No. 23, p. 187. 
OBT
541
OBT
  this  obturator, we are assured by Dr.
  Griscom, he  had never heard nor seen
  of "Delabarre's proposed operation," so
  that it would seem that the obturator
  which  he constructed, was  original
  with  himself.  We are also informed,
  that it has been worn since 1841, and as
  yet has not caused any appreciable in-
  crease in the size of the opening.  That
  this,  however,  will ultimately be the
  case, we think there can be no question.
  But,  Mr. Rowell,  nevertheless, is cer-
  tainly entitled to great credit for the in-
  genuity and skill he has displayed  in
  contriving and  executing a piece  of
  mechanism which has, even for so long
  a time, restored to his afflicted patient
  the functions of mastication, deglutition
  and speech.
   Dr. Mutter  gives an engraving of an
  artificial palate, comphcated with  sev-
  eral artificial teeth, and a metaUic velum
  connected with  the palate  plate  by
  means of a hinge, constructed  by  Mr.
  Neil, a dentist of Philadelphia, which
  is represented  as  having answered an
  exceUent purpose.*  It is difficult to
  conceive, however, how a gold plate of
  an oval shape, could be made  to per-
  form the functions of the velum palati.
  So far  as an imperfection in  the hard
 palate is concerned, the evil, we know,
 may be remedied by covering the open-
 ing with a metallic  plate, but the loss
 of the  soft palate, cannot be replaced
 with any hard unyielding material, so
 as to restore the functions of the natu-
 ral parts.
   Instead, therefore, of employing this
 complicated instrument, a simple palate
 plate, raised  upon its upper surface,
 with a velum tike the one constructed
 by Mr. Stearns, with artificial teeth at-
 tached  to it, would be found to answer
 a much better  purpose,  in a case like
 the one for which M. Delabarre's com-
 plicated piece of mechanism was fabri-
cated.  As it is not probable that such
an appliance will  ever  be constructed
•Vide Liston's and Mutter's Surgery.
   46
   again, we do not deem it necessary even
   to give a minute description of the in-
  strument.  If any of our readers, how-
   ever, should  desire to see it, we would
   refer them  to vol.  2, of Delabarre's
   Treatise on Mechanical Dentistry, or to
   the American edition of Fox's Natural
   History and Diseases of the Teeth,
    M. Desirabode  proposes  a kind  of
  palatine obturator for congenital fissure
  of the palate,  by which he  thinks the
  sides  of the  alveolar  border may be
  so approximated as to favor the  union
  of the divided parts.  It consists of a
  platina plate fitted  to the vault of the
  palate  and fastened  to the teeth  by
  means of three crotchets, (clasps,) sol-
  dered  to  each side,  so as to cap  the
  canine teeth, the  bicuspid, and two of
  the molar teeth, bent upon  the alveolar
  border, in such a manner as to maintain
  the Avhole pressure.  After  the plate,
  with  these appendages, has  been well
  adapted, it is divided from before back-
  wards along the median hne, and then
  a piece is removed from each side, so
  that the  two edges may be  separated
  about  half an  inch from each other.
  The two half plates are now united by
  means of a thick and resisting band of
  caoutchouc, made fast by riveting.  The
 plates thus united, form a smaller obtu-
 rator than the plate before it was divi-
 ded, so that it can only  be  applied  by
 putting the caoutchouc upon the stretch,
 which  is  effected by means of two
 stocks, so  contrived  as to force the two
 plates asunder.  After the plate is prop-
 erly adjusted, these are removed, when,
 by the contraction of  the caoutchouc,
 the  sides  of the  alveolar  border are
 graduaUy approximated.
   Other contrivances have been invent-
 ed for the accomplishment of the end
 proposed  by Desirabode, but have not
 been found to answer a very good pur-
 pose, except when  apphed  to young
 subjects.
  It sometimes happens that an imper-
fection  of the palate is accompanied by
an opening into the maxiUary  sinus. 
               OCI

In this case, the palatine plate should
be large enough to cover both openings,
and the loss of the alveolar border re-
placed by means of a raised plate, sol-
dered to the lower  surface of the palate
plate, and to which artificial teeth should
be apphed,  or, the deficiency may be
supplied with long porcelain gum teeth.
  OBTUSE.  Obtusus.  Blunt.
  OCCIPITAL.  Occipitalis.  Belong-
ing to, or conned with, the occiput.
  Occipital Artery.  A branch of
the external carotid artery distributed to
the muscles, &c, of the occiput.
  Occipital Bone.   Osoccipitk. One
of the bones of the cranium, situated at
its posterior and inferior part; convex
externally, and concave internally.
  Occipital Nerve.   A nerve which
arises by eight or ten filaments from the
upper part of the spinal marrow, passes
between the foramen magnum and pos-
terior  arch of the  atlas, and  dividing
into an anterior and posterior branch.
The former  anastomoses with a branch
of the second cervical nerve,  and the
latter is distributed to the muscles of the
upper and back part of the head.
   OCCIP'ITO-AT'LOID. That which
is  connected  with  the  occiput  and
atlas.
   Occipito-Ax'oid.   That which  is
connected with the occiput and axis, or
second vertebra.
   Occipito-Fronta'lis.  A broad,flat
muscle, covering the cranium from the
occiput to the eyebrows.
  OCCIPUT.  The  back part of the
head.
  OCCLU'SION.  Occlusio; from oc-
cludere, to shut up.  Shutting up, close-
ing.  Also, imperforation.
  OCCULT.  Occultus; from ob, and
celo, to conceal.   Hidden; invisible;
secret; undetected.
  O'CHRA.  Ochre.   Also, the shin.
  OCHRA'CEUS.   Ochre-like.
  OCHRE.  Argil, colored with oxyd
ofiron.
  OCTMUM.  Ocymum.   The name
of a genus of plants.
2              ODO

  Ocimum Basil'icum.  The common
or citron basil.
  Ocimum  Caryophylla'tum.  The
small or bush basil.
  OCTA'NUS.   Applied  to  an inter-
mittent fever whose paroxysms are said
to return every eighth day.
  OCTAN'DRIA.   Plants  with her-
maphrodite flowers and eight stamens.
  OCTA'RIUS.  The eighth part of a
gallon, or sixteen fluid ounces.
  OCTOPODA.   From oxta, eight,
and rcovs, a foot.  Octopods.   Animals
with eight feet. The name of a tribe of
cephabpods which have eight cephalic
tentacular appendages.
  OCULAR  SPECTRES.   Imagi-
nary bodies, like flies, spots, &c, float-
ing before the eyes.
  OCULA'RIA.   Eyebright
  OCULARES COMMUNES.  The
motores oculorum.
   OCULIST.  One who devotes him-
self particularly to the treatment of the
diseases of the eye.
   OCULO-MUSCULARES. A name
given by Vicq d'Azyr, to the third pair
of nerves.
   OCULO-MUSCULARES COMMUNES. A
name  given by Chaussier to the third
pair of nerves.
   OcULO-MuSCULARES EXTERNI.   A
name given by Chaussier to  the sixth
pair of nerves.
   OCULUS.  From oxxos,  the eye.
The eye.
   Oculus Bovinus.  Hydrophthalmia.
   Oculus Bovis.   Chrysanthemum
leucanthemum.
   Oculus Casius.   Glaucoma.
   Oculus Genu.  The patella.
   Oculus Lachrymans.  Epiphora.
   Oculus Purulentus.   Hypopion.
   ODAXIS'MUS. From 0801;$,a tooth.
A  painful itching of the  gums which
sometimes precedes the eruption of the
teeth.   Lancing of the gums in cases of
this sort generally affords immediate re-
lief.  See Dentition, morbid.
   ODONEN'CH YTES.  From oowj,
a tooth, ev, into, and xva, I pour.    A
54 
ODO
543
ODO
 tooth syringe, used  for injecting  the
 cavity of a tooth.
   ODONTAGO'GON. An instrument
 for the extraction of teeth. SeeDentagra.
   ODONTAGRA.   From  oftovs,  a
 tooth, and aypa, a seizure.  According
 to French  lexicographers, tooth-ache
 from retrocedent gout or rheumatism,
 but the term is employed by Greek wri-
 ters as synonymous with  oSovtoyuyov,
 See Odontagogon.
   ODONTAL'GIA.   From  oSovs,  a
 tooth, and aXyos, pain.  Odontia;  den-
 tium dolor.   Tooth-ache.   Pain,  more
 or less  severe, in teeth, resulting, most
 frequently,  from caries  of the  affect-
 ed  organs   and inflammation of the
 lining membrane, but often dependent
 upon inflammation of the alveolo-den-
 tal periosteum, and sometimes upon the
 transfer of  nervous irritation. It can
 scarcely, however,  as Dr. Wood very
 correctly remarks, be  called a disease,
 "being merely a symptom of various
 morbid  states  of the affected  part."
 The pain is variable in degree and du-
 ration.  Sometimes it  amounts only to
 a slight uneasiness;  at other times to
 insupportable agony.   It may be dull,
 slight,  tantalizing,  deep-seated, throb-
 bing, acute  or lancinating. It may be
 confined to  a single tooth, or several
 may be affected at the same time. Com-
 mencing in  one, it sometimes passes
 to another and another, until all in one
 and occasionally in both jaws, are af-
 fected.   The pain is sometimes contin-
 ued ; at other times paroxysmal, and it
 may announce itself gradually, or sud-
 denly, and in its most intense form.
   From the frequency of the occur-
 rence of caries in the teeth and exposure
 of the pulp cavity, the lining membrane
 of a tooth is more apt  to be first attack-
 ed by inflammation than the investing
 or alveolar, for,  after  decay has pene-
 trated to the centre of the organ, it is
 constantly exposed to the action of acrid
 humors, and  to  exciting  and irritating
 agents.   Moreover, inflammation here,
is attended with a much greater amount'
 of pain, because, surrounded as are the
 highly  vascular  and nervous internal
 tissues  of a tooth by unyielding bony
 parietes, the parts are prevented from
 distending themselves, and consequent-
 ly subjected to severe pressure, which
 becomes a powerful  additional cause of
 pain.
   But inflammation  of the lining mem-
 brane,  generally, soon extends to the
 alveolo-dental, causing  it to become
 thickened and to raise the tooth slightly
 from the alveolus, so as  to strike the
 antagonizing  teeth,  before the  other
 teeth meet, occasioning great inconve-
 nience, and preventing a proper commi-
 nution of food.  But the pain produced
 by the action of external irritating agents
 upon an exposed dental membrane and
 pulp, is of the most violent and agoniz-
 ing kind, equaling, not unfrequently, in
 lancinating intensity, the excruciating
 severity of  the  Avorst forms  of facial
 neuralgia.
   "The sympathetic affections to which
 it gives rise," says  Mr. Thomas Bell,
 "are exceedingly various  and impor-
 tant; though itis only of late years that
 they have been properly understood,and
 the attention of medical men directed to
 their source. Now, however, that these
 remote sympathies have excited a de-
 gree of interest  more  commensurate
 with their importance, so frequently
 are they  found to occur,  that practi-
 tioners are, on the other hand, in dan-
 ger of  attributing to  this cause diseases
 which have  not  the remotest connec-
 tion with it.  It not  unfrequently hap-
 pens that parts of the most remote be-
 come the apparent seat of pain, from
 the exposure of the  nerve of a  tooth.
 I have seen this occur not  only  in the
 face, over the scalp, in the ear, or un-
 derneath the lower jaw, but down the
 neck, over the shoulder, and along the
 whole length of the arm."
   When the inflammation  is confined
 to the parts within the pulp cavity, pres-
sure upon the tooth  does not sensibly
augment it, but  a slight blow upon  it 
ODO
54
4
ODO
with any hard substance, increases it,
as do also hot and cold liquids. Although
of rare occurrence,  it does sometimes
happen that  the inflammation  extends
no farther than the  pulp cavity.  But
whether it remains confined  to the lin-
ing membrane and pulp, or extends, as
it most frequently  does, to the investing
soft tissues, suppuration generally takes
place in six or eight days.  It rarely, ex-
cept prompt  and active  means be em-
ployed to arrest its progress, terminates
in resolution.  Suppuration of the pulp
having taken place, the pressure of the
accumulating matter upon the parts at
the extremity of  the  root,  generally
soon  gives   rise  to the  formation of
a sac, and true alveolar abscess.   Some-
times, however, the  matter escapes be-
tween the tooth  and alveolus.   When
the carious opening in the crown of the
tooth communicates  with the  internal
cavity,  the   inflammation  sometimes
gives rise to a fungous growth of the
pulp.
  When the alveolo-dental periosteum
is the part first attacked by the  inflam-
mation, the pain is less severe, and more
easily controlled.   It is, however, eq ual-
ly constant, and more deep-seated, and
generally soon extends  to  the lining
membrane, causing,  in the mean time,
a thickening  of the investing tunic,
swelling  of the gums, and often of the
salivary  and  tonsil  glands   and face.
A painful throbbing sensation  is now
experienced;  a sac soon  forms at  the
extremity of  the root; suppuration of
the lining membrane supervenes, and
an alveolar  abscess  is formed, which
see.
  But as the author has before remark-
ed, tooth-ache sometimes results from
the transfer of nervous irritation.  Indi-
viduals of a nervous temperament, and
pregnant females are particularly liable
to this variety of odontalgia; and it is
sometimes a symptom of a disordered
state of the stomach.  When it results
from these causes, its attacks are period-
ical, seldom  lasting  more than two or
three hours at a time, and recurring at
stated, but more  frequently, at  uncer-
tain intervals.  Sound as  Avell as cari-
ous teeth are subject to this  variety of
tooth-ache, and it is often  difficult to
locate the pain in any particular tooth.
Sometimes it seems, at one minute to
be seated in one tooth, and at the next
in another, frequently passing round
the whole jaw.   Sometimes it is acute
and  lancinating,  but more  frequently
dull and tantalizing.  Gouty and rheu-
matic persons are occasionally affected
with this variety of tooth-ache.
  Some teeth, from a peculiar constitu-
tional idiosyncrasy,  are more liable to
ache than others.  Some  persons have
all their teeth  to decay and crumble to
pieces,  without  ever being  attacked
with pain, while others whose teeth are
apparently perfectly  sound, are pecu-
liarly subject to tooth-ache.
  Tooth-ache is frequently  occasioned
by exostosis of the root of one or more
teeth, but for a description of this varie-
ty, the reader is  referred  to the article
upon that subject, for which, see Exos-
tosis of the Teeth.
  In neuralgic tooth-ache,  the. affection,
says Dr. Wood, "may be  seated in the
nerve of a single tooth; but it  much
more commonly occupies  the nervous
trunk from which several teeth are sup-
plied;  and  not  unfrequently   affects
rather the jaw than the teeth themselves.
The pain is usually of the acute charac-
ter, sometimes mild  in the  beginning,
gradually increasing in intensity,  and
as gradually declining;  but usually very
irregular,  at   one time  moderate, at
another severe, and occasionally dart-
ing with excruciating violence through
the dental arches.  Not unfrequently it
assumes a regular intermittent form.
Instead of pain, strictly speaking, the
sensation is   sometimes of  that kind
which is indicated  when we say that
the teeth are on edge, and is apt to be
excited by certain harsh sounds, such
as that produced  in  the filing  of  saw
teeth, by mental inquietude, and by the 
ODO                545               ODO
 contact of acids or other irritant substan-
 ces.  Neuralgic tooth-ache sometimes
 persists, with intervals  of exemption,
 for a great length of  time.  The diag-
 nosis is occasionally  difficult.  When,
 however,  it occurs in sound teeth,  is
 paroxysmal in its character, is attended
 with little or no swelling of the  exter-
 nal parts, occupies a considerable por-
 tion of the jaw, and especially when it
 alternates or is associated with pain of
 the same character in other parts of the
 face, there can be  little doubt as to its
 real nature."  This is a variety of sym-
 pathetic tooth-ache, and in most cases, is
 principally the result of the transfer of
 nervous irritation.  The teeth no doubt,
 as in almost every form of the affection,
 though perhaps free  from caries, in-
 crease, either by  the  manner in which
 they are arranged in the alveolar arch,
 or in some other way, the susceptibility
 of the parts to morbid impressions, and
 thus, as it were, in some degree, invite
 a transfer of  nervous irritation, as is
 shown by the fact,  that the pain almost
 always ceases on their removal. Cases,
 however, are occasionally met with, as
 will presently  be seen, where the affec-
 tion is purely neuralgic.
   In treating of tooth-ache, Dr.  Good
 says, "this is often  an idiopathic affec-
 tion, dependent upon  a peculiar irrita-
 bility, from a cause we cannot easily
 trace, of the nerves subservient to  the
 aching tooth, or the tunics by which it
 is covered, or the  periosteum, or  the
 fine  membrane that lines the interior of
 the alveoli.  But it is more frequently
 a  disease of sympathy,  produced  by
 pregnancy, or chronic rheumatism, or
 acrimony  in the stomach, in persons of
 an irritable habit."
   "It is still less to be  wondered at, that
 the nerves of the teeth should often as-
 sociate in the maddening  pain of neu-
 ralgia faciei, or tic   douloureux, as  the
 French writers have  quaintly denomi-
 nated it, for here the connection is both
 direct and immediate.  In consequence
of this, the patient, in most instances,
     46*
 regards the teeth themselves as the  sa-
 lient points of pain, (and they unquestion-
 ably may be so in some cases,) and rests
 his only hope of relief upon extraction;
 and when  he has applied to  the opera-
 tor, he is at a loss to fix upon any one
 point  in particular.  Mr.  Fox gives a
 striking example of this, in a person for
 whom he extracted a stump, which af-
 forded little or no relief; in  consequence
 of which his patient applied to him only
 two days afterwards and requested the
 removal of several   adjoining  teeth,
 which were perfectly sound.  This he
 objected to, and suspecting  the real
 nature of the disease, he  immediately
 took him to Mr. (now Sir) Astley Coop-
 er, who, by dividing the affected nerve,
 procured a radical cure in a few days."
   The author has met with several sim-
 ilar cases, one, a Mr. F. who had all his
 teeth on the right side of both jaws ex-
 tracted without obtaining any relief.
   The treatment of tooth-ache should
 be as variable as are the  causes  which
 produce it  When dependent upon in-
 flammation of the  lining  or investing
 periosteal tissue, or both, without expo-
 sure of the  pulp, the application of two
 or three leeches to the gums of the af-
 fected tooth, and if accompanied by gen-
 eral febrile symptoms, blood-letting from
 the  arm,  saline cathartics, and  absti-
 nence from animal food, may be advisa-
 ble;  but this treatment will prove bene-
 ficial only in the incipient stage of the
 affection.   After swelling of  the gums
 has  taken   place,  accompanied  by a
 throbbing pain, a  certain  prognostic
 of the formation of alveolar  abscess,
 the  progress of the inflammation can
 only be arrested by the extraction of the
 tooth.  The intensity of  the  pain, ac-
 companying inflammatory  tooth-ache,
 may sometimes be temporarily palliated
 by the  use of revulsive applications, but
 as no permanent benefit is derived from
 temporizing treatment  of this sort, the
immediate removal of the organ should
be recommended, except its presence is
called for by some  peculiar necessity. 
ODO
546
ODO
  In this  case, the  pulp of  the tooth, if
  the caries has not already penetrated to
  it, may be exposed,  and a fortieth or
  fiftieth part of a grain of arsenious acid,
  with an equal quantity of  the sulphate
  of morphia, applied to it, on a small par-
  ticle of raw cotton, previously moisten-
  ed in water.  The cavity  should then
  be immediately  sealed up with  a little
  yellow  wax or gum mastic.  In from
  five to seven hours, the vitality of  the
  pulp will  be  completely destroyed,
  Avhen the arsenic may be removed, and
  the cavity washed out.  For the subse-
  quent treatment, see Filling Teeth.
   Tooth-ache occasioned  by exposure
  of the pulp of a tooth and slight inflam-
  mation  of  the lining membrane, may,
  in most cases, be  temporarily relieved
  by the application of a bit of raw cotton
  moistened  in  either of the following,
  viz.    $.—Sul.  ether, gi;  creasote,
  5 ss. ext nut galls, 3 i;  gum camph.
  5 ss; ntisce.  l|.—Sul. ether, § i; pul.
  camph.  5 ij ; pul. alum,  3 ij;  misce.
   The application of this to the exposed
  pulp, should be  repeated  from time to
  time, as occasion may require.  The
  last formula the  author has found to be
  more certain and efficacious  than the
  first  Neither, however,  are specifics,
  and  when they fail to afford relief, the
  extraction of the tooth should be  recom-
  mended, except, as we before stated, its
  presence is called for by some very ur-
'  gent necessity, when the pulp may be
  destroyed by the application of arseni-
  ous  acid.   With regard to the propriety
  of this, there is a diversity of opinion,
  inasmuch, as so  great a portion of  the
  vitality of the tooth is, at the same time
  destroyed, that the organ  is apt, sooner
  or later to  become obnoxious to the  sur-
  rounding parts.   But the  vascular  and
  nervous  supply  from the investing
  membrane, will,  in  the majority of
  cases, if  the root of the tooth be filled,
  so as  to  prevent it from  becoming a
  reservoir for morbid  secretions, counter-
  act the prejudicial effects which would
  otherwise be likely to occur.  In a front
tooth, the pulp may be immediately ex-
tirpated with an instrument, a method
which the author conceives to be prefer-
able to destroying it Avith arsenic.
  When suppuration of the pulp and
lining  membrane  of  a front  tooth, in
other respects sound,  has taken place,
the pain may be relieved as well as the
formation of alveolar abscess prevented
by  perforating  the tooth and giving
egress to the confined  matter.  When
the discharge   ceases and  the  parts
around  the extremity of the  root be-
come  healthy,  the  opening should be
enlarged and both it and the pulp cavity
and fang up to its very apex, filled. By
this means  a recurrence of the disease
may often  be prevented and  the tooth
preserved and rendered useful for many
years.   But should alveolar abscess af-
terwards form, the removal of the tooth
Avill probably become  necessary.  The
most favorable point for perforating the
tooth is in the posterior surface, and in
introducing the drill it should be directed
towards the pulp cavity.  This opera-
tion was first proposed by Mr. l?ox.
  Tooth-ache resulting  from the trans-
fer of nervous  irritation, requires dif-
ferent treatment; if it be occasioned, as
is often the case, by a disordered state
of the stomach, an emetic or cathartic
will often  afford  relief.  In  pregnant
females, pediluvium and a dover's pow-
der on going  to  bed will  frequently
assuage  the pain, and  if the pulps of
none of  the teeth have become exposed
from caries, but if they have, or if any
of  the teeth  have lost their  vitality, or
from any other cause, act as morbid ir-
ritants, they should be extracted. The
fear of inducing abortion by  the opera-
tion, is not well founded.  A tooth may
generally be extracted at  any period of
pregnancy, if the apprehensions of the
patient with regard to the supposed un-
favorable consequences likely to result
from the operation can be previously
allayed. When the  pain is  dependent
upon long  continued nervous irritation
of the general system, tonics, gentle ex- 
ODO
547
ODO
 ercise, change of air,  and such  other
 general means as  the  nature of  the
 symptoms may seem to indicate should
 be recommended.   Local applications
 alone will seldom afford much relief.
   The treatment of neuralgic tooth-ache
 should  be conducted upon  the  same
 general principles.  In cases of debility,
 tonic medicines,  especially   subcarbo-
 nate of iron and sulphate of quinine, ad-
 ministered in  large doses, three or four
 times a day, have  sometimes proved
 highly beneficial.   Dr. Wood says, "the
 extracts of  belladonna, stramonium,
 hyoscyamus, conium and aconite, may
 be employed singly, or in combination.
 Opium or some of  its preparations are
 occasionally  necessary,  to relieve  the
 violence of the pain. When  the neu-
 ralgic affection can  be traced to sympa-
 thy  with disease elseAvhere, this should
 be corrected.  Thus, antacids should be
 given in acidity of the stomach, laxa-
 tives in constipation of the bowels, the
 blue mass or  calomel  in deranged or
 deficient hepatic secretion, aloes or other
 emanagogues in amenorrhcea; and not
 unfrequently the co-existence of two or
 more of these  affections catis  for  the
 simultaneous  use of the appropriate
 remedies.   If a rheumatic or gouty dia-
 thesis be suspected, wine of colchicum,
 hot pediluvia, and other means adapted
 to these disorders may be tried."
   The treatment, in short, should be va-
 ried  to suit the indications of the con-
 stitutional  disease or affection which
 may be  concerned in its production.
   Odontalgia Hamodia. See Haemo-
 dia.
   Odontalgia Nervosa.   Neuralgic
 tooth-ache.  See Odontalgia.
  ODONTALGIC.   Odontalgkus.—
 Anti-odontalgic. Relatingto tooth-ache.
 Remedy for the tooth-ache.
  Odontalgic Drops, Blake's. 1$.—
Nitrous ether, 5 parts; pulvis aluminae,
2 parts, mix.
  Odontalgic Elixir,  Lalander's.
1$.—Essential oil  of cloves, 3 i; essen-
tial oil of thyme, 3 ss; thebaic extract,
 | ij; alcohol of roses, § ij; frontignan
 wine, § iij.  Digest for eight days and
 filter.  It is directed to be used by hold-
 ing  a few drops in the  mouth on the
 painful side, and rejected  as soon as the
 pain ceases.
   Odontalgic   Mixture,  Cadet's.
 1$.—Sulph. ether, 3 i; laudanum, 3 i;
 turlington's balsam,  3 i; essential  oil
 of cloves,  gtt.  ij.   Mix, and apply to
 the painful tooth, on a little cotton.
   ODONTALITE.  A petrified tooth.
   ODONTIA.   Odontalgia.
   ODONTIA INCRUSTANS.  Tar-
 tar of the teeth.
   ODONTIASIS.  Dentition.
  ODONTITIS.  Dentiuminflammatio.
 Inflammation of the teeth.
  ODONTOG'ENY.    Odontogenia;
 from oSovj, obovtos, a tooth, and yeveais,
 generation.  The generation, or origin
 and  development, of  the teeth.  See
 Teeth, development of pulps and sacs of.
  ODONTOGLY'PHON.  An instru-
 ment for cleaning the teeth;  also, a
 gum lancet.
  ODONTOGRAPHY.  Odontogra-
 phia ; from oSovj, a tooth, and ypot^ a
 description.  A description of teeth.
  ODONTOID.    Odontoides;  from
 oBovs, a tooth,  and eiSos, resemblance,
 shape.   Tooth-like.   In Anatomy, a
 name applied to a process of the second
 cervical vertebra; also, to  a ligament
 attached to this  process.
  ODONTOL'ITHOS.  From ooouj, a
 tooth, and x^os, a stone.  Salivary Cal-
 culus, which see.
  ODONTOL'OGY.   Odontobgia;—
 from oSovs, a tooth,  and a.oyoj, a dis-
 course.  A treatise on  the teeth.
  ODONTON'OMY.   Odontonomy;—
 from obovs, a tooth, and ovoua, a name.
 See Dentonomy.
  ODONTOPHY'IA. Dentition.
  ODONTORRHAG'IA.    Hemor-
 rhage from the socket of a tooth.
  ODONTOTECHNY.   Odontotech-
nia;  from oSovs, a tooth, and texv*j, art.
Dental surgery.
  ODONTOTRIM'MA.   From riw?, 
CEN
548
OIL
a tooth, and tpiuua, a pulverised sub-
stance.  A tooth powder.
  ODONTATROPHY.   Odontatro-
phia; from oSovs, a tooth, and  atpotyia,
want of nourishment.  Consumption;
atrophy of the teeth.
  ODOR.  Smell,  scent; a sweet  or
an offensive smell.  The subtle emana-
tion of an odoriferous body.
  ODOUS.  OSovs.  A tooth.
  CECONOMY. See Economy.
  CEDE'MA. From oiSea, I am  swell-
ing.  Swelling occasioned by an accu-
mulation of serous fluid of the cellular
texture.  See Anasarca.
  GEdema Arsenicalis. The SAvelling
of the eyelids and face produced by the
use of arsenical medicines.
  GSdema Cerebri.  Infiltration of the
brain with a Avatery fluid.
  03dema, Compact.  Induration  of
the cellular tissue.
  GSdema of the Glottis.  Edema-
tous swelling of the mucous membrane
of the  glottis,  a very dangerous and
almost always fatal affection.
  GSdema Lacteum.  Phlegmasia do-
lens.
  GSdema of the  Lungs.  Serous in-
filtration into the tissue of the lungs,
carried to  such an extent as to impede
respiration.
  CEdema Uvu'la.  Staphylcedema.
  OZDEMOSAR'CA.   A tumor par-
taking of the nature both of an ozdema
and sarcoma.
  CENANTHE. The name of a genus
of umbelliferous plants.
  GEnanthe Croca'ta. Hemlock drop-
wort. Hemlock water dropwort.
  CENEL^E'UM.   From OWoS, wine,
and exaiov, oil.  A beverage composed
of wine and oil.
  ffiNO'MELI.  From »„oj, wine, and
uexi, honey. Honied wine; Avine sweet-
ened with honey.
  GENOSTAG'MA.  Rectified spirits
of wine.
  CENOTHE'RA  BIEN'NIS.    The
evening primrose, a  common indige-
nous plant.
  OESOPHAGEAL.   Relating to the
oesophagus.
  OESOPHAGITIS. Inflammation of
the oesophagus.
  CESOPHAGOT'OMY.  The opera-
tion of cutting into the oesophagus for
the removal of a foreign body.
  OESOPHAGUS.  From oia, I carry,
and <j>ay«, I eat  The gullet.  A mus-
culo-membranous tube, extending from
the pharynx to the  superior  orifice of
the stomach.  Commencing  opposite
the loAver border of the cricoid cartilage
and the fifth vertebra of the neck,  be-
hind, and a little to the  left of the tra-
chea, it passes in its descent behind the
arch of the aorta, along the  posterior
mediastinum,  enters   the   abdomen
through an opening in the diaphragm,
and terminates in the cardiac orifice of
the stomach, situated nearly opposite
the tenth dorsal vertebra.
  CESTROMA'NIA. Nymphomania.
  CESTRUM.  Clitoris.
  QEstrum Ven'eris.  A strong desire
for sexual intercourse; the excitement
of coition.
  OETTINGER.  Dissertation on the
Development of the Teeth, by. Erlang,
1770.
  OFFICINAL.  Officinalis. A term
applied to medicines directed by the
pharmacopoeia, with the assent of the
physicians.
  OIL.  Oleum.
  Oil of Almonds.  The fixed oil of
the kernels of amygdalus communis.
  Oil of Amber.   Oleum succini.
  Oil of Amber, Rectified.  Oleum
succini rectificatum.
  Oil of Anise. Oleum anisi.
  Oil of Benne.  Oleum sesami.
  Oil  of Bergamot.    Oleum ber-
gamii.
  Oil of Caraway.   Oleum cari.
  Oil of Chamomile.  Oleum anthe-
midis.
  Oil  of Cinnamon.   Oleum  cinna-
monni.
  Oil of Cloves. Oleum caryophyUi.
  Oil of Copaiba.  Copaibae  oleum. 
OLE
549
OLE
  Oil of Cubebs. Oleum cubebae.
  Oil of Dill. Oleum anethi.
  Oil of Elder Flowers.  Oleum
sambuci.
  Oil of Fennel. Oleum foeniculi.
  Oil of Horsemint.  Oleum monar-
dae.
  Oil of Juniper. Oleum juniperi.
  Oil of Lavender.  Oleum  lavan-
dulae.
  Oil of Lemons. Oleum limonis.
  Oil of Marjoram.  Oleum origani.
  Oil of Nutmeg. Oleum myristicae.
  Oil, Olive.  Oleum olivae.
  Oil of Origanum.   Oleum origani.
  Oil of Partridge-berry.  Oleum
gaultheriae.
  Oil of Pennyroyal.   Oleum hed-
eomae.
  Oil of Peppermint.  Oleum men-
thae piperitae.
  Oil of Pimento.  Oleum pimentae.
  Oil, Phosphorated. Oleum  phos-
phoratum.
  Oil of Rosemary.  Olium rosma-
rini.
  Oil of Roses.  Oleum rosae.
  Oil of Rue. Oleum rutae.
  Oil of Sassafras. Oleum sassafras.
  Oil of Savin.  Oleum savinae.
  Oil of Spearmint.  Oleum menthae
veridis.
  Oil of Tar.  An impure, red-color-
ed volattie oil, obtained from tar by dis-
tiUation with water.
  Oil  of Turpentine.   Oleum tere-
binthinae.
  Oil of Vitriol.  Sulphuric  acid.
  Oil of Wormseed.   Oleum cheno-
podii.
  OILS, ESSENTIAL.  Otis obtained
by distillation.
  Oils, Expressed.   Fixed oils.
  Oils, Volatile.  See Essential Oils.
  OINTMENT.   See Unguentum.
  OLEA DISTILLATA.  Disttiled
or essential oils.
  Olea Empyreumat'ica. Empyreu-
matic oils, or oils which have a burnt
smell.
  Olea Europaa.  The olive.  Oliva,
and olea sativd. The olive tree; from the
fruit of which the olive oil is obtained.
  Olea  Fixa Vel  Pin'guia.   Ex-
pressed oils.  Fixed  oils.   Fatty oils.
The oils obtained from the seeds of vege-
tables without distiUation.
  Olea Buga'cia. Oils which are of
so volatile a nature as to require a dif-
ferent process for obtaining them than
that employed for other volatile oils; as
the oUs of jessamine,  lily, violets, &c.
  Olea Medicina'lia. Medicinal oils,
or oily  solutions of  certain medicinal
substances.
  Olea Volatil'ia.   Distilled or es-
sential oils.  Oils  obtained from aro-
matic vegetables, and generally by dis-
tillation.
  OLEA'MEN.  A soft ointment pre-
pared of oil.
  OLEAN'DER.     Rhodondendron
chrysanthemum.
  OLECRANON.  From aXevri, the
ulna, and  xpavov,  the head.  A large
process  at the upper extremity of the
ulna, forming the projection of the el-
bow.
  Olefiant  Gas. Heavy carbureted
hydrogen.
  OLEUM.  Oil.
  Oleum Absinthii. Oil of Artemisia
absinthium.
  Oleum ^Ethe'reum.  Ethereal oil.
Heavy oil of wine.   Sulphate  of ether
and etherine.  A yellowish liquid, of
oleaginous consistency, acrid odor, and
sharp, bitter  taste, formed in the distil-
lation of ether.
  Oleum Amygdala . Oil of almonds.
  Oleum Anethi.   Oil of  dill.
  Oleum Anisi.   Oil of anise.
  Oleum Anthemidis.  Oil of cham-
omile.
  Oleum  Bergamii.   Oil of berga-
mot.
  Oleum Benzo'ini.   Oil of benzo-
in or benjamin.
  Oleum Bu'bulum. Neat's-foot oil.
  Oleum Cajuputi.  Oil of cajuput
  Oleum  Camphoratum.  Camphor
liniment. 
OLE
550
OMN
  Oleum Cari, or Carui.   Oil of
caraway.
  Oleum Caryophyl'li. Oil of cloves.
  Oleum Chenopodii.  Oil of  worm-
seed.
  Oleum Cinnamomi.  Oil of  cinna-
mon.                     •
  Oleum Copaiba.  Oil copaiba.
  Oleum Cornu Cervi.  Oil of harts-
horn.
  Oleum Cubeba.  Oil of cubebs.
  Oleum Fceniculi.  Oil of fennel.
  Oleum Gaultheria.   Oil of par-
tridge-berry.
  Oleum Hedeoma.   Oil of penny-
royal.
  Oleum Juniperi.  Oil of juniper.
  Oleum Lavandula .  Oil of lavender.
  Oleum Limonis.  Oil of lemons.
  Oleum Lini. Flaxseed oil.
  Oleum Mentha Piperita.  Oil of
peppermint.
  Oleum Mentha Pulegii.  Oil of
European pennyroyal.
  Oleum Mentha Virides.  Oil of
spearmint.
  Oleum  Monarda.  Oil of horse-
mint.
  Oleum Myristica.  Oil of nutmeg.
  Oleum Oliva.   Olive oil.
  Oleum Origani. Oil of marjoram.
  Oleum Phosphoratum. Phospho-
rated oil.
  Oleum Pimenta. Oil of pimenta.
  Oleum  Pulegii.  Oil  of European
pennyroyal.
  Oleum Ricini.   Castor oil.
  Oleum Rosa.   Oil of roses.
  Oleum Rosmarini. Oil of rosemary.
  Oleum Ruta.  Oil of rue.
  Oleum Sabina.  Oil of savine.
  Oleum Sambuci. Oil of elder flowers.
  Oleum Sassafras.   Oil of sassafras.
  Oleum Sesami.  Benne oil.
  Oleum Succini.  Oil of amber.
  Oleum Succini Rectificatum.—
Rectified oil of amber.
  Oleum Sulphuratum.  Balsam of
 sulphur.
   Oleum Tartari Per Deliquium.—
 Solution of carbonate of potash.
  Oleum Terebinthina.  Oil of tur-
pentine.
  Oleum  Terebinthina  Purifica-
tum.  Purified oil of turpentine.
  Oleum Thymy.  Oil of thyme.
  Oleum Tiglii.  Croton oil.
  Oleum Vitrioli.  Sulphuric acid.
  Oleum Vivi»i.  Bitumen.
  OLEFACTION.   Olefactus.   The
faculty of smelling.
  OLFACTORY. Olfactorius ; from
olfactus, the smell.  Belonging, or re-
lating, to the apparatus of smelling.
  Olfactory Foram'ina.  The  holes
or foramina in the cribriform plate of
the ethmoid bone.
  Olfactory Nerves. Ncrvi olfactorii.
The first pair of nerves.
  OLFACTUS.   The sense of smell.
  OLIBANUM.  Juniperus lycia.
  OLIGJEMIA.  Anaemia.
  OLIGOBLEN'NIA.  From ojuyoj,
few, and flxevva, mucus.  Deficiency of
mucus.
  OLIGOCHOL'IA. From o?uyoj, few,
and x°h*i> bile. Deficiency of bile.
  OLYGOCH'YLUS.  From oxiyos,
few, and £iao$, juice, chyle. Deficiency
of chyle, and but little nutritious.
  OLIGOTROPHIA.  From ojwyoj,
few, and tpe$a, I nourish.  Deficiency
of nourishment.
  OLISTHE'MA. A luxation.
  OLIVA. Olea Europoea.
  OLIVA'RIS.  From oliva, the olive.
Resembling an olive.  Olive-shaped.
  OLIVE. See Olea Europoea.
  OLOPHO'NIA.  Congenital defect
of the organs of voice.
  OMAGRA.  From u/ios, the shoul-
der, and aypa, a seizure.   Gout in the
shoulder.
  OMA'SUM.  The third stomach of
ruminantia.
  OMENTITIS.  Inflammation of the
omentum.
  OMENTUM.  The caul, or epip-
loon.
  OMMA.  The eye.
  OMNIVOROUS.  Omnivorus; from
omnis, aU, and voro, to devour.   Ani- 
              ONO               5

mals which feed indiscriminately  on
vegetable and animal substances.
  OMO-.  A prefix, from  auos, the
shoulder. Relating to the shoulder.
  OMOCOTYLE. The glenoid cavity
of the scapula.
  OMO-HYOIDE'US.  A muscle aris-
ing from the  superior costa of the
scapula, and inserted into the  inferior
margin of the os hyoides.
  OMOPLATA.  The scapula.
  OMOS.  The shoulder.
  OMOT'RIBES.   Oil from unripe
olives.
  OMPHA'CINUM.    The  juice of
unripe grapes.
  OMPHACITES.  Wine prepared
from unripe grapes.
  OMPHALOCE'LE.  Umbilical her-
nia.
  OMPHALO-MESENTERTC. Om-
phalo-mesentericus;  from  o^atoj, the
navel,  and  mesenterium,  the  mesen-
tery.  Relating to the navel and mesen-
tery.
  Omphalo-Mesenteric Vessels. A
name given by  HaUer to an artery, and
vein of the  umbilical vesicles of the
fetus, which terminate in the superior
mesenteric artery and vein.
  OMPHALOS. The umbilicus.
  ONANISM.  Masturbation.
  ONCOS. A tumor.
  ONCOT'OMY.   Oncotomia;  from
oyxoj, a tumor, and tourj, incision. The
operation of opening a tumor or ab-
scess.
  ONEIRODYNIA.  From o»/»poj, a
dream, and oSwrj, anxiety.   Disturbed
and troubled dreams.
  ONEIROG'MOS.    A   lascivious
dream.
  ONION.  Allium cepa.
  Onion, Sea.  Scilla maritima.
  ONIS'CUS.  A genus of apterous in-
sects.   The  wood-louse.   Also, the
glow-worm.
  ONOMATOLOGTA.    Nomencla-
ture.
  ONOPOR'DIUM.   The name of a
genus of plants.
il               OPE

  Onopordium Acan'thium.  The cot-
ton thistle.
  ONTOL'OGIST.   One  who treats
of the nature and qualities of being in
general.
  ONTOL'OGY. Ontologia; ovta, from
eiui and xoyos.  That department of sci-
ence which investigates the nature of
beings.
  ONY'CHIA.  From owf,  the nail.
Paronychia at the side of the finger
nail.
  ONYCHOGRAPHO'SIS.   A cur-
vature of the nails.
  ONYCHON'OSI.  Diseases of the
nails.
  ONYCHOPTOSIS. FaUing off of
the nails.
  ONY'CHOTEUTHIS.  From «*&
a claw, and tevdos, a calamary.  The
name of a genus of cabmaries, in which
the suckers of the cephalic appendages
are armed with a hook or claw.
  ONYX.   Nail. Also, applied to a
collection of purulent matter between
the lamellae of the cornea.
  OOEIDES.  The aqueous humor.
  O'OLITE.  From  aov, an egg, and
Xidos, a  stone.  A granular variety of
carbonate of lime, like the roe or eggs
of a fish.
  OON.  An ovum or egg.
  OPACITY.  Opacitas.  The quality
of an opaque body Avhich obstructs  the
rays of light.
  OPALINE.  Resembling the opal;
of a milky, irridescent color.
  OPAQJJE.    Impermeable to  the
rays of light.
  OPERATION.     Operatio;  from
opus, work.  In Surgery, the applica-
tion of instruments to the human body
for the cure of  disease. Also, some-
times applied to the action of medicine,
as that of a purgative,  &,c.
  OP'ERATOR.  One who  performs
a manual process.  In Surgery, a sur-
geon.  In Dentistry, a dentist.
  OPER'CULATE.    Operculatus.—
Having a lid-like cover.  Operculated.
  OPER'CULUM.  A lid or cover. 
              OPH              55

  OPHIASIS.  A  species of porrigo
decalvens, or partial baldness, in which
the parts  destitute  of hair, present a
winding figure, or form.
  OPHIOGLOS'SUM.  The name of
a genus of ferns.
  Ophioglossum Luna'ria.    Moon-
wort.
  Ophioglossum Spicatum.  Adder's
tongue.
  OPHIORRHI'ZA.  The name of a
genus of plants.
  Ophiorrhiza Mungos.   Radix ser-
pentum. Mungos radix.
  OPHIOSTO'MA.  The name of a
genus of intestinal worms which have
two lips.
  OPHIOX'YLUM.  The name of a
genus of plants.
  Ophioxylum  Serpenti'num.  The
tree yielding the lignum serpentum.
  OPHIS. A serpent.
  OPHITES.   From o<j>i$, a serpent.
The  serpentine  or  black porphyry—a
rock formerly worn as an amulet for the
cure of diseases of the head.
  OPHRYS. The eyebrow.
  OPHTHALMALGIA. Fromo^,9ax-
uas, the  eye, and oXyoj, pain.   Pain in
the eye.
  OPHTHAL'MIA.  From o$9aXuos,
the eye.  Ophthalmitk.  A term used  to
designate inflammation of the investing
membranes of the eye, and of the inner
surfaces of the eyelids, or of the whole
bulb of the eye.  There are several va-
rieties of opthalmia; and each of which
has received a specific designation,  as
acute, chronic, conjunctival, Egyptian,
gonorrhceal, purulent, &c.
  OPHTHALMIC. Ophthalmkus;—
from o$6aXuo$, the eye.  Belonging,  or
relating, to the eyes.
  Ophthalmic Artery.  A branch of
the internal carotid artery, which passes
to the eye  through the foramen opti-
cum.
  Ophthalmic  Ganglion. Lenticular
ganglion.  A ganglion  situated  on the
external part of the  optic  nerve in the
orbit.
B                OPI

   Ophthalmic  Nerve.    A  branch
 given off from the Casserian ganglion;
 it is  the first and smallest of the fifth
 pair; enters the orbit by the sphenoidal
 fissure, and divides into the lachrymal,
frontal and nasal nerves.
   Ophthalmic  Vein.  A vein which
 accompanies the ophthalmic artery.
   OPHTHALMICI  EXTERNI.—
 Motores oculorum.
   OPHTHALMITIS.   Ophthalmia.
 This term is restricted by some writers
 to inflammation of the bulb of the eye.
   O P H T H A LJVIO-BLENNO R-
 RHCEA. Purulent ophthalmia.
   Ophthalmo-Carcino'ma. Cancer of
 the eye.
   OPHTHALMOCE'LE. Protrusion
 of the bulb of the eye.
   OPHTHALMODYNIA.    From
 o$9axuos, the eye, and ohvvn, pain. Pain
 in the bulb of the  eye.  According to
 Plenck, orbito-frontal neuralgia.
   OPHTHALMOG'RAPHY.  From
 ofyOaXuos, the eye, and ypo<j»7, a descrip-
 tion.  A description of the eye.
   OPHTHALMOL'OGY. From o$-
 OaXuos, the eye, and Xoyos, a discourse.
 A treatise on the eye.
   OPHTHALMOM'ETER.   From
 oi>9aXfios, the eye, and uetpov.  A mea-
 sure. An instrument for measuring the
 capacity of the chambers of the eye.
   OPHTHALMOPLE'GIA.   From
 o$9aXuos, the eye, and itxriaaa, I strike.
 Paralysis of one or more  of the  mus-
 cles of the globe of the eye.
   OPHTHALMOPTO'SIS,    From
 oyOaXfios, the eye, and tttaais, a falling
 down.  Protrusion, and prolapsus of the
 globe of the eye.
   OPHTHALMOS. The eye.
   OPHTHALMOSTATUM.  From
 o$9aXuo(, the  eye, and  ataais, station.
 An instrument for confining the eye; a
 speculum oculi.
   O'PIATE.   Opiatum.  A medicine
 containing opium; an anodyne.
   OPION.  Opium.
   OPISTHENAR.  The back of the
 hand.
2 
              ORB               51

  OPISTHOTONOS. From oxiaOev,
backward, and teiva, I bend.   A va-
riety of tetanus, in which the body is
bent backward.
  OPIUM.   Ofiiov.  The inspissated
juice of the poppy.
  OPOBAL'SAMUM.   Opobalsam.—
Amyris gileadensis.
  OPODEL'DOC. Camphorated soap
liniment.
  OPOPANAX.   The gum resin  of
opopanax chironum.
  OPO'RICE.  A conserve of several
autumnal fruits, particularly quinces
and pomegranates.
  OPPO'NENS. Opposing.  An epi-
thet applied to two muscles of the
hand.
  Opponens Min'imi Dig'iti. A small
muscle of the hand situated on the hy-
pothenar eminence.
  Opponens Pol'licis.   The   flexor
ossis metacarpi pollicis muscle.
  OPPOSITUS. Opposed;  placed op-
posite to each other.
  OPPRESSIO  CEREBRI.    Cata-
lepsy.
  OPPRES'SION. Oppressio.  A sense
of weight, especially about  the  chest,
which seems to impede respiration.
  OPSIONUSI.   From a^s,  vision,
and vovoos, a disease.  Diseases of vi-
sion.
  OPSIS.  Vision.
  OPTIC.   Opticus ; from  orttouai, I
see. Relating to vision.
  Optic Foramen.  A foramen in the
sphenoid bone through  which the
optic nerve passes.
  Optic Nerve.  The second pair  of
cerebral nerves.
  OPTICS.  That branch of physics
which relates to vision and the phe-
nomena of light.
  ORA  SERRATA.   The posterior
serrated margin of the ciliary processes.
  ORANGE.  Citrus aurantium.
  ORBICULAR.  Orbicularis; from
orbk, a circle.   Round; a circle.
  Orbicular Bone.  The  smallest  of
the four bones of the ear.
     47
               ORE

  Orbicularis Oris.   The  circular
muscle which surrounds the mouth. It
has no bony  attachment, and consists
of two planes of  fibres—one for  the
upper, the other  for the lower lip—
which meet at the angles of the mouth.
Its use is to draw  the lips together  and
shut the mouth.
  Orbicularis  Palpebrarum.    A
muscle common to both eyelids, in the
substance  of Avhich  it is  seated.  Its
use is to shut the eye by  drawing both
lids together.
  ORBICULATE.     Orbicubtus.—
Round and flat.
  ORBICULUS  CILIARIS.   The
ciliary ring or circle.
  ORBIT.  Orbitum. The two cavi-
ties which lodge the  organs of sight.
  Orbital Arch. The  superior edge
of the orbit.
  Orbital Fissures.  The sphenoidal
and spheno-maxillary fissures, situated
in the orbit.   The first is called the su-
perior, and the other, the inferior.
  Orbital Nerve.   A branch of the
superior  maxiUary,  which enters the
orbit by the spheno-maxillary fissure.,
  ORBIT A R.  Relating to the orbit
  Orbitar Foram'ina.  The foramina
entering the orbit, which are, the ante-
rior and posterior  ethmoidal orbitar, the
optic, the foramen  lacerum   superius,
and the supra and  infra-orbitar fora-
mina.
  ORCHEOT'OMY. Castration.
  ORCHIS,  Opxis- A testicle. Also,
the name of a genus of plants.
  Orchis Bifolia.  The butterfly or-
chis.
  Orchis Mas'cula. The male orchis.
  Orchis Morio.  The salep root.
  ORCHITIS. From oPXis, a testicle,
and itis, signifying inflammation.   In-
flammation of the  testicle.
  ORCHOS.  The tarsal extremities of
the eyelids.
  ORCHOT'OMY.   Castration.
  OREOSELI'NUM.   Black  moun-
tain parsley.
  OREXIS.   Appetite.
i3 
ORI
554
CRT
  ORGAN.  Organum.  A part of an
organized  body, animal  or vegetable,
which  has a  determined  function or
office to execute.
  ORGANIC.  Orgonicus.  Relating
to an organ or organs; possessed of or-
gans.
  Organic Chemistry.  The chemis-
try of matters  derived from animals or
plants.
  Organic Diseases.  Diseases which
cause a change in the structure of an
organ or organs; or in which an organ
is directly  implicated.
  Organic Force.  See Plastic Force.
  OR'GANISM.   The  aggregate of
the organs  and powers which govern
an organized being.
  Organism, Dental. See Dental Or-
ganism.
  ORGANIZATION.  Organizatio;
from opyaiw, an organ.  The condition,
or arrangement, of the parts of an or-
ganized body.
  ORGANOG'ENY.  Organogenia;
from opyaiw, an organ, and  yeveais, gen-
eration.  The formation of the organs.
  ORGANOG'RAPHY.  Organogra-
phy;  from  opyorov,  an  organ,  and
ypa^rj,  a description.  A  description of
the organs of a living body.
  ORGANOT'OMY.  Anatomy.
  OR'GASM.  Orgasmus; fromopyaw,
I desire ardently. Excitement and vital
turgescence of an organ, but  generaUy
applied to the organs of generation.
  ORGASTICA.   An  order of  dis-
eases in the  class  genetka, of Good's
Nosology.  Diseases which affect the
orgasm.
  ORIGANUM.  The origanum vul-
gare.  Also,  the name of a genus of
plants.
  Origanum  Creticum.   Origanum
dictamnus.  Dittany of Crete.
  Origanum Marjora'na.  Sweet mar-
joram.
  Origanum Syriacum.    Teucrium
marum.
  Origanum Vulgare.   Wild  mar-
joram.
  ORIGIN.   In Anatomy, the  com-
mencement of a muscle.
  ORIS CONSTRICTOR.  The or-
bicularis oris.
  ORISMOL'OGY.  Terminology.
  ORNITHOL'OGY.  From opn|, a
bird, and Xoyos, a discourse.  A treatise
on birds.
  ORNUS EUROP^A.   Fraxinus
ornus.
  OROBUS.   The name  of a genus
of plants.
  Orobus Tuberosus. The heath-pea.
  OR'PIMENT.  The  native yellow
sulphuret of arsenic.
  ORPINE.  Sedum telephium.
  ORRHOS.   Serum.  Also, the pe-
rineum, and extremity of the sacrum.
  ORRIS. Iris florentina.
  ORTHO'CERA.     From   op0o5,
straight, and xtpaj, a horn.   Orthoce-
rates.  The extinct cephabpods,a class
of molluscous animals, having the head
situated between the body, and the feet,
which inhabited long chambered sheUs,
resembling a horn.
  ORTHOCO'LON.  Anchylosis, with
the limb extended.
  ORTHODONTIA. Dental orthopa-
dia; from op0os, straight, right, and
oSovs, a tooth.   That part of dental sur-
gery which has for its object, the treat-
ment of irregularity of the teeth.  See
Irregularity of  the Teeth, treatment of.
  ORTHODONTIC. Relating to the
treatment of irregularity of the teeth.
  ORTHOP^EDPA.    From   opdos,
straight, right, and nais, a child.   The
correction of deformities  of chUdren,
such as club-foot, &c.
  ORTHOPEDIC. Relating to ortho-
paedia.
  ORTHOPNCE'A.    From   opOos,
straight, and Hvea, I respire.  Inabihty
to breathe in a recumbent posture.
  Orthopnea  Cardiaca.    Angina
pectoris.
  Orthopnea Convulsiva.  Asthma.
  Orthopnea Cynanchica.  Cynan-
che trachialis.
  ORTHOPTE'RA. Orthopterous;— 
osc
555
OSS
from opBos, straight, and rttepov, a wing.
Applied to an order of insects  which
have straight wings, as the locust and
grasshopper.
  ORTLOB.  Dissertation on the Dif-
ficult Teething of Children, by.  Leip-
sic, 1694.
  ORY'ZA.  Rice. Also, the name of
a genus of plants.
  Oryza Sati'va.  The rice plant.
  OS.  Bone, which see.  Also, mouth,
and in the latter sense, applied to open-
ings of parts,  as the os  externum,  os
internum, os tincaz, &c.
  Os Externum.   The entrance  into
the vagina.
  Os Internum.   The mouth of the
uterus.
  Os Sepia.   The cuttle-fish bone,
which is sometimes used in a  pulver-
ised state as a dentifrice.
  Os Tinca.  Os interrum.
  OSANORE TEETH. A name giv-
en by Mr. William  Rogers, to artificial
teeth constructed from the ivory of the
tooth of the hippopotamus, and, as he
says, afterwards submitted to the action
of some pecuhar chemical agent,  by
which  the  pores of the ivory  become
filled with a silicious substance.  But
Mr. Rogers does not tell his profession-
al readers what this chemical agent is,
though he represents the  teeth of his
manufacture as being superior to those
of any  one else.   When he  makes
known this most wonderful discovery,
the profession wiU  judge of its value,
though  the object  of his  secresy may
not be rendered any more apparent by
so doing.
  OSCE'DO.  Aphthae.
  OSCHEAL. Relating to the scrotum-
  OSCHEO-CARCINOMA.   Chim-
ney-sweeper's cancer.
  OSCHEOCELE. From oaxtov, the
scrotum, and xr^, a tumor. A tumor of
the scrotum. Also, scrotal hernia.
  OSCHEON. OaXsov. The scrotum.
  OSCHEOPHY'MA. Hydrocele.
  OSCHIT1S.  Inflammation  of the
scrotum.
  OSCILLATIO.   Muscular irrita-
bility.
  OSCILLATION. Vibration; swing-
like; a pendulum.
  OSCILLATO'RIA. A term applied
to plants of the lowest organization.
They are found  in  wet and damp
places, and consist of threads, which,
apparently, sometimes have movement.
  OS'CITANT.   Oscilation; from os-
citare, to yawn. Yawning; gaping.
  OSCULATO'RIUS.   The orbicu-
laris oris.
  OS'MAZOME.  From oaui;, smell,
and §auos, soup.  An extractive matter
in meat having the smell of soup.
  OSME.  Odor.
  OSMIUM.   A metal discovered by
Tennant, and so called from the pecu-
liar smell of its oxyd.
  OSMONO'SI.  Diseases of the sense
of smeU.
  OSMUN'DA.  The name of a genus
of ferns.
  Osmunda Lu'naria.  Moon-wort.
  Osmunda Rega'lis.   The osmund
royal.
  OSPHRE'SIS. Olfaction ;lhe sense
of smell.
  OSPHYS.  The loins.
  OSSA INCISORIA.   Ossa inter-
maxillaria.
  Ossa Intermaxillaria. Ossa labialia.
Two bones situated between the supe-
rior maxillary  in quadrupeds, but not
in man, which receive the roots of the
incisor teeth of animals that have these
teeth.
  Ossa  Labialia.  Ossa intermaxil-
laria.
  Ossa Spongiosa. Os spongiosum.
  Ossa  Usta  Alba.  Ossa  calcinata.
Bones calcined into a  white powder.
  OS'SEOUS. Bony.
  Osseous  Bases   for Artificial
Teeth. Previously to the employment
of metallic bases, osseous attachments
for  artificial teeth  were much  used.
They were  generally carved from the
ivory of the tusk of the elephant or the
tooth  of the hippopotamus,  and, in- 
OSS
556
OST
deed, the entire substitute—the teeth as
well as the base, were formerly wholly
constructed from it, but since the intro-
duction of metaUic bases, it has been
less frequently employed for  this pur-
pose.
  In the adaptation of an osseous base,
the operator  should  first procure  two
accurate plaster models, one for rough-
ly fitting, and the other for  finishing
the piece, and with a piece of  ivory, or
the tooth of the  hippopotamus, a little
larger than the portion of the alveolar
border to be covered by it.  One of the
models should  next be  covered with
red, brown,  or  black paint,  to mark
upon the block, from time to time, du-
ring the process of fitting the piece
where it is to be cut away.  With a file
and round and straight-edged engravers
it may now be  cut away,  trying  it
upon the model occasionally, until it is
partially fitted,  when for the comple-
tion of its adjustment, the second mo-
del should be painted and employed, as
the first, as by the repeated application
of the block, it will be more or less rub-
bed and worn.   The piece being ac-
curately fitted,  the operator may  pro-
ceed to  mount  the  teeth upon.  See
Mounting Artificial Teeth upon an Os-
seous  Base.
   Osseous Union  of   Teeth.  See
Teeth, osseous union of.
   OSSICULUM.  A small bone.
   OSSICU'LA AUDITUS.  The four
small bones of the internal ear.
   OSSIFICATION. Ossificatio; from
os, a bone, and facere, to make.  The
formation of bone.
   Ossification, Points of. The points
where the ossification of bone  commen-
ces. In the teeth, the edges of the inci-
sores, the points ofthe cuspidati, cusps of
the bicuspides, and protuberances upon
the grinding surfaces of the molares,
are the points where ossification com-
mences on these organs.
   OSSIV'ORUS.  From  os, a bone,
and voro, I devour.  A particular  kind
of tumor mentioned by Ruysch, which
causes the destruction of bone, and oc-
curring in the thigh.
  OST A GRA.  From os, a bone, and
aypa, seizure.  Forceps for cutting or re-
moving portions  of bone.
  OSTALGITIS.   From oateov,  a
bone, and Wis, inflammation.  Ostitis.
Inflammation of bone, accompanied by
sharp lancinating pains.
  OSTEALGIA.   From oateov,  a
bone, and axyos, pain.  Pain in a bone.
  OSTEMPYE'SIS.  From oateov,  a
bone, and  eurtvqois,  effusion of pus.
The occurrence  of suppuration  in the
interior of a bone.
  OSTEOCOL'LA.   From oateov,  a
bone,  and xoMa,  glue.   Glue-bone;
bone-binder.   Petrified  carbonate  of
lime; so called,  from the supposition
that it promoted the formation of callus
between the extremities of a fractured
bone.
  OSTEOCOPUS.  Ostealgia.
  OSTEODYNIA. Osteocopus.
  OSTEOGENIA.   Ossification; for-
mation of bone.
  OSTEOG'RAPHY. Osteographia;
from oateov, a bone, ypa<j>£u>, to describe.
A description of the osseous system.
  OSTEOL'OGY.   Osteologia; from
oateov, a bone, and xoyos,  a  discourse.
A treatise on bones.
  OSTEO'MA.  An osseous tumor.
  OSTEOMALACIA.   From  oateov,
a bone, and uaXaxos, soft.   Mollities os-
sium; softness of bones.
  OSTEON.  A bone.
  OSTEON'OSI. From oateov, a bone,
and voaos, a disease.  Diseases  of the
bones.
  OSTEO-SARCO'MA.  From oateov,
a bone, and  aapxaua, a fleshy  tumor.
A tumor containing a mixture of bony
and soft matter.  Also, spina ventosa.
See Jaws, morbid growths of.
  Osteo-Sarcosis.   Osteo-sarcoma.
  OSTEOSIS.  Ossification.
  OSTEO-STEATO'MA.  From oa-
teov, a bone, and eteap, fat.  A tumor
composed of bony and fatty matter.
  OSTEOT'OMY.   From  oateov, a 
               OTO              51

bone, and -etpvtiv, to cut.  The cutting
of bone.
  OSTERMAIER'S CEMENT FOR
THE TEETH.  See Cement for  the
Teeth,  Ostermaier's.                #
  OSTITIS.   Ostalgitis.
  OSTIUM.    A  door,  foramen,  or
opening.
  OSTOIDEA   SUBSTANTIA.—
Tooth-bone.  A name given by Mal-
pighi to the osseous or dentinal part of
a tooth.
  OSTREA EDU'LIS.  The oyster.
  Ostrea Maxima.  The scallop.
  Ostrea Testa.  Oyster shells.
  OTAL'GIA. From odj, the ear, and
oXyoj, pain.  Pain in the ear.
  OTAL'GIC.  A term apphed to rem-
edies for diseases of the ear.
  OTEN'CHYTES.  From ovS,  the
ear, ev, into,  and xva, I pour.  An ear
syringe.
  OTIC. Oticus. Pertaining to the ear.
  Otic Ganglion.   A smaU  ganglion
of the inferior maxillary  nerve,  at the
inner margin of the foramen ovale of the
sphenoid bone.
  OTITIS.   From ovs,  the ear, and
itis,  inflammation.    Inflammation of
the ear.
  OTOG'RAPHY. Otographia; from
ovs, the ear, and ypaf a, to  describe.  A
description of the ear.
  OTOL'ITHI.   From ovs, the ear,
and ?u0os, a stone.  The calcareous sub-
stances found  in the  vestibule of the
ear of the mammalia.
  OTOL'OGY.   Otologia; from  ovs,
the ear, and xoyos, a discourse.  An an-
atomical treatise on the ear.
  OTOPLASTY.   Otoplastice; from
ovs, the ear, and rtxaaoa, to form.  An
operation for the restoration of a lost ear.
  OTOT'OMY.  Ototomia; from odj,
the ear, and tepveiv, to cut.  The  dis-
section of the ear.
  OTOPYO'SIS.   From  odj, the ear,
and xvov, pus.  A discharge  of  puru-
lent matter from the ear.
  0TORRHO2A.  From ovs, the ear
and pea, to flow.  A discharge of mat-
        47«
               ovu

ter from the ear, generally of a purulent
nature.
  OTTO OF ROSES.  Oleum rosae.
  OUNCE.  Uncia.  Eight drachms,
or the sixteenth part of  a pound avoir-
dupois.
  OUDET,J.L.  Proofs  of the  con-
tinued increase of the Jaws and Teeth
of Rabbits, considered in their connec-
tion with their  application  to the study
ofthe organization ofthe Human Teeth,
by.  Paris, 1823.
  OURON. Urine.
  OVAL.  Ovalis; from ovum, an egg.
Round and oblong.
  OVA'RIAN. Pertaining to the ova-
rium.
  OVA'RIUM.  From ovum, an egg.
The ovary.  In the female mammalia,
the ovaria, are the secretory organs of
the embryo.  They  are two oval bod-
ies, situated, one on each side of the
uterus, behind and a little below the
Fallopian tubes.
  OVARY.  The ovarium.
  OVATE. Oval, or egg-shaped.
  OVEN, ENAMELLING.   A small
oven made of brick, sometimes used in
enamelling porcelain teeth.
  O'VIDUCT. Oviductus; from ovum,
an egg, and ductus, a canal.  The  duct
through which the ovum or egg passes.
  OVIDUCTUS MULIEBRIS.  The
Fallopian tube.
  OVIG'EROUS. From ovum, an egg,
and gero, I bear.  A term applied, in
Zoology,  to parts containing or support-
ing an egg.
  OVIPAROUS.    Oviparus; from
ovum, an egg,  and pario,  I bring forth.
Animals  which produce  their young
from eggs, outside of the body.
  OVO-VIVIPAROUS.  From ovum,
an egg,  vivus, living,  and parere, to
bring forth.   Oviparous  animals, in
which the process of incubation is com-
pleted in  the body of the mother.
  OVULE.  Ovulum.  Diminutive of
ovum, a little egg.  In Botany, the rudi-
mentary  seed enclosed in the carpels of
plants.
17 
               OXY

  OVULUM.  A small egg.
  OVUM.  From uov, an egg.  An
egg.  In Physiology, the capsule enclos-
ing the prolific germ of animals.
  OWEN,  RICHARD.   Odontogra-
phy ; or  a Treatise on the Comparative
Anatomy of the Teeth; their physio-
logical relations, mode of development,
and microscopic structure, in the verte-
bral animals,  by.  London, 1840-'45.
This is the most comprehensive Avork
that has  ever been  published upon the
subject, and forms  two imperial octavo
volumes, one consisting of 168 beauti-
ful plates, with their explanations.
  OXALATE.  A salt resulting from
the combination of oxalic acid Avith a
salifiable base.
  OXALIC ACID.  Acidum oxalicum.
Acid of sorrel.  An acid  occurring in
the form  of an acid oxalate of potash in
certain vegetable juices, as that of sorrel.
It is also  obtained by the action of nitric
acid on sugar and starch.
  Oxalic Ether.   Oxalate of ethyle.
A colorless, aromatic liquid.
  OXALIS.  The name of a genus of
plants.
  Oxalis Acetosel'la. Wood-sorrel.
  OXAL'ME.  From  ofvj, acid, and
axs, salt.  A mixture of  vinegar and
salt.
  OXALU'RIA.   Urine in  which ox-
alates are formed.
  OX'YD.  Oxydum;  from o%vs, acid,
and ttSoj, form. A  compound of oxy-
gen with an element or  other body.
  Oxyd of  Carbon, Gaseous. Car-
bonic oxyd.
  OXYALCO'HOL BLOW-PIPE.—
See Blow-Pipe, Dr. EUiot's Compound
Self-Acting.
  OXYCHLORIC ACID.   Perchlo-
ric acid.
  OX'YCRATE.   Oxycratum; from
o|us, and xpaa, I mix.  A mixture of
honey and diluted vinegar.
  OXYDATION.   Oxydatio.   The
action by which  a substance is con-
verted into an oxyd; the  act  of com-
bining with oxygen.
8              OXY

   OXYDUM.  Oxyd.
   Oxydum  Ferri Nigrum.   Black
 oxyd ofiron.
   Oxydum Ferri Rubrum.  Red oxyd
 of iron.
   Oxydum Stibii Semivitreum. Glass
 of antimony.
   Oxydum Stibii Sulphuratum. Cro-
 cus of antimony.
   OXYGARUM.  A composition of
 garum and vinegar.
   OX'YGEN. Oxygenium; from o\-
 vs, acid,  and yevvaa,  to generate.  A
 tasteless, inodorous, colorless element,
 ahvays existing in a gaseous  state
 when not combined with other ponder-
 able matter; a supporter of combustion,
 combining Avith every combustible body,
 with all the metals, and most vegetable
 and animal substances; is indispensa-
 ble to respiration, and  is a component
 part of the air and water.
   OXYGENATION.  Oxydation.
   OXY-HY'DROGEN     BLOW-
 PIPE.  An instrument for burning one
 volume of oxygen and  one of hydrogen,
 which issues from a small tube or aper-
 ture.  It produces a most intense heat.
   OX'YMEL. From o|vj,  acid, and
 uexi,  honey.  A syrup composed  of
 honey and vinegar.
   Oxymel Colchici.   Oxymel of col-
 chicum.
   Oxymel Cupri Subacetatis.  Oxy-
 mel of subacetate of copper.
   Oxymel Scilla.  Oxymel of squiU.
   OX'YMURIAS HYDRARGYRI.
 Corrosive chloride of mercury.  Bi-
 chloride  of  mercury;  corrosive subli-
 mate.
   Oxymurias Potassa.  Chlorate  of
 potash.
   OXYMURIATE OF LIME. Chlo-
 rinated lime.
   Oxymuriatic Acid. Chlorine.
   OXYMYRRHINE.   Myrtus com-
 munis.
   OXYNOS'EMA.   Acute disease.
   OXYODIC.  Iodic.
   OXYO'PIA.   Preternatural  acute-
 ness of vision.
5 
PAC
559
PAL
  OXYOSPHRE'SIA.  Acuteness of
the sense of smell.
  OXYPHLEGMA'SIA.  Violent in-
flammation.
  OXYPHO'NIA. Shrillness of voice.
  OXYPROTEIN.    The  substance
which forms the buffa coat of inflamed
blood.
  OXYREG'MIA.  Acid eructations.
  OXYRRHOD'INON.  A composi-
tion of vinegar and oil of roses.
  OXYS. 0|vj.  Acid; sharp; acute.
  OXYSACCHARUM.  Sugar and
vinegar.
  OXYSULPHURET.  The sulphu-
ret of a metaUic oxyd.
  OXYTAR'TARUS.  Acetate of pot-
ash.
  OXYURIS.   Oxyurus.  The asca-
ris or thread-worm.
  OYSTER.  Ostrea edulis.
  Oyster Shells.  Ostreae testae.
  OZiENA.  From o^, a stench. Ul-
ceration ofthe pituitary membrane ofthe
nose, and discharge of a purulent and ex-
ceedingly fetid matter.  It is sometimes
accompanied by caries of the bones.  It
is usually dependent  on a syphilitic or
scrofulus disease.  The  author once
met with a case which had resulted from
a diseased condition ofthe lining  mem-
brane of the maxillary sinus.
P.
  P.  A contraction of pugiUus, a pugil,
and of pars, or partes, a part or parts.
  PAB'ULUM.  Food; aliment.
  Pabulum Vita.  Literally, the food
of life.  Aliments.  The animal heat
was formerly so called.
  PACHEUS.   Dissertation on  the
Pain of the Teeth, by.  Basil, 1707.
  PACHY^E'MIA. Pachozmia; from
ita%vs, thick, and  aiua,  blood.  Thick-
ness of the blood.
  PACHYBLEPHARO'SIS. Pachea-
bkpharosis;  from  naxvs,  thick,  and
/3?u<j>apoi', the eyelid.  A morbid thicken-
ing of the eyelid.
  PACHYDER'MA.  Pachydermata;
from rtaxvs, thick, and $epua>, the skin.
Thick-skinned. An order of mammifera,
embracing the thick-skinned animals, as
the elephant, hippopotamus, rhinoceros,
hog, &c.
  PACHYNTICA. Medicines which
were  formerly supposed  to have  the
property of thickening the humors.
  PACINIAN CORPUSCLES.  The
small tubercles formed on the nerves of
the hand and foot.
  PAD.  A small cushion used to com-
press certain parts, and sometimes plac-
ed on splints, or between them and the
fractured limb.
  P^E'DATROPHIA.   From  Tiais, a
child, a priv. and tpo$u, to nourish.
Emaciation of children ;  tabes mesen-
terica.
  P^EDIATRIA.  The  treatment of
the diseases of children.
  P^E'DO-NOSOLOGY.  Pcedonoso-
logia ; from itais, a child, voaos, a disease,
and xoyos, a discourse.  A treatise on
the diseases of children.
  P^DOTRO'PHIA.  From *ats, a
child, and  tpotya, to  nourish.    The
nourishment of children in accordance
with the rules of hygiene.
   PAIGIL.   Primula veris.
   PAIN.  Dolor.
   PAINT, INDIAN.    Sanguinaria
canadensis.
   PAINTER'S COLIC.  Colica pic-
tonum.
   PALAEONTOLOGY.  Palazontolo-
gia;  from itaxaios, ancient, and ontol-
ogy, the science of being. The science 
PAL
560
PAL
 of ancient beings or creatures; applied
 to the fossil remains of extinct animals
 and plants.
   PALATAL.  Palatine.
   PALATE.  Palatum.   The roof of
 the mouth.
   Palate, Artificial. See Obturators
 and Palates.
   Palate Bones.  Two bones situated
 at the back part of the superior maxil-
 lary bone, between its tuberosities and
 the pterygoid processes of the sphenoid
 bone.   They are shaped precisely alike.
   The palate bone is divided into three
 plates—the horizontal or   palate,  the
 vertical or nasal, and the orbital.
   The palate plate is broad, and on the
 same line with the palate  processes of
 the superior maxillary bone—its upper
 surface is smooth, and forms  the  pos-
 terior  floor of  the nostrils—the lower
 surface is rough, and forms the poste-
 rior part of the roof of the  mouth—its
 anterior edge is connected to the palate
 process  of the  upper jaw,  and  its
 posterior  is  thin and crescentic, to
 which is attached the velum-pendulum
 palati  or soft palate—at the posterior
 point  of the suture,  uniting  the  two
 palate bones, there projects backwards
 a process caUed the posterior nasal spine,
 which gives origin to the azygos-uvulas
 muscle.   The  vertical plate  ascends,
 helps to form the nose, diminishes the
 opening into the antrum by projecting
forward, and  by its  external posterior
 part, in conjunction with the pterygoid
 processes of the sphenoid bone, forms
 the posterior palatine  canal—the lower
 orifice of which is seen on the margin
of the palate plate, and called the pos-
terior palatine foramen which transmits
the palatine nerve and artery to the soft
palate;  behind this  foramen  is often
seen a smaller one passing through the
 base of the pterygoid  process of this
bone, and  sending  a  filament of the
same nerve to the palate.
  The upper end of the vertical or na-
sal plate has two processes—the one is
seen at the back of the orbit  and caUed
 the orbital process, the other is posterior
 and fits to the under surface of the body
 ofthe sphenoid bone. Between these tAvo
 processes there is a foramen, the spheno-
 palatine, Avhich transmits to the nose a
 nerve  and artery of the same name.
   The palate bone articulates Avith six
 others, namely: the superior maxillary,
 inferior turbinated, vomer, sphenoid and
 ethmoid.
   The structure  of this  bone  is  very
 thin,  and consists almost entirely  of
 compact  tissue.   Its development, it is
 said, takes place  by a single point  of
 ossification at the place of the union of
 the  vertical, horizontal and pyramidal
 portions.
   These bones are aU  more or less re-
 lated with the bones  of  the head—of
 which eight  compose the cranium and
 fourteen the face.  Those of the cranium
 are one frontal, two  parietal, two tem-
 poral, one occipital, one sphenoid, and
 one ethmoid.  Those of the face are six
 pairs and two single bones—the pairs
 are,  to wit: the two malar, two supe-
 rior  maxillary,  two  lachrymal,  two
 nasal, tAvo palatine  and  two  inferior
 spongy.  The vomer and inferior max-
 iUary are the two single bones.
   Palate, Soft.  The velum  pendu-
 lum palati.
   PALATI TENSOR.  The circum-
 flexus palati.
   PALATINE.   Palatinus;  from pal-
 atum, the palate.  Belonging, or rela-
 ting, to the palate.
   Palatine Arteries.  These are two,
 the superior palatine,  and the splieno-
pabtine. The superior descends behind
 the  superior  maxillary  bone,  passes
 through the posterior palatine canal to
 the roof of the mouth, and supplies the
 palate, gums, and velum pendulum pa-
 lati.   It also  sends off  a smaU  branch
 through the foramen incisivum to the
 nose.  The spheno-palatine enters the
 back  part of the nose  through the
 spheno-palatine foramen, and  is  dis-
 tributed upon the  pituitary membrane.
  Palatine  Foramina.  These  are 
PAL               561                PAL
two, an anterior and posterior.   See
Palate Bones.
  Palatine Nerves.  These are three,
the anterior, middle and posterior.  The
anterior descends  through the posterior
palatine canal, passes forward  through
the hard palate, to which it is distribu-
ted, communicating with the naso-pala-
tine ganglion and its branches.  It also
sends off several branches ofthe antrum
and spongy bone.   The middle pala-
tine nerve, descending through the same
canal as the posterior, supplies  the soft
palate, uvula and tonsils.  The poste-
rior, emerges from an opening behind
the posterior palatine foramen, and is
distributed to the  hard and soft palate,
gums and tonsils.
   Palatine  Organs   The  organs
which enter  into the formation of the
hard and soft palate.
   Palatine Organs, Defects  of.—
The nature and extent of the defects of
the palatine organs are exceedingly va-
rious.  They sometimes consist of a sim-
ple perforation  of the vault of  the pal-
ate, either in the centre or on  either
side of the median line;  at other times,
the loss of substance extends to the en-
tire vault and  velum.   Nor is the loss
of structure always  confined to these
parts; it sometimes  extends to the an-
terior  part of the alveolar border, and
upper lip, constituting what is termed
hare-lip.
   The defects of the palatine organs
may be divided into accidental and con-
genital.  The first are caused  by a pa-
thological  change of structure.  The
 second, are the result of malformation
or imperfect development of the parts.
But from whatever  cause they may be
produced, their effects upon the voice,
speech, mastication and deglutition are
the same.  These functions are all im-
paired by  them, in proportion to their
nature and extent.   When they extend
so far as to cause a complete division of
the hard  and soft  structures, distinct
utterance is  whoUy  destroyed, and the
acts of mastication  and deglutition are
greatly impaired and always performed
with difficulty.
  When the loss of substance is the re-
sult of disease, and  extends so  far as
to establish a communication between
the mouth and nasal fossae, the  defect
can seldom be remedied in any other
way than by means of an artificial ob-
turator ; and even when it is congenital,
though  the aid of surgery  may very
frequently be successfully invoked, the
resources of  art will often be required.
When the defect is confined to the vault
of the palate, and  consists of a  sim-
ple opening  between the  mouth and
nasal  cavities, these  resources may al-
ways be  successfully applied, and even
when the loss of substance extends to
the soft palate and anterior part of the
alveolar ridge, a mechanical appliance
may be so constructed, as to restore, in
a great degree, the functions dependent
upon the presence and integrity of the
natural parts.

          Accidental  Defects.
   Accidental lesions of the palatine or-
gans are divided by  M. Delabarre into
three species.  The  first consists  in
perforations of the vault of the palate;
the  second, in perforations of the ve-
lum,  and the third, in the destruction of
the entire vault of  the palate, or of a
great portion of it.  To this last, might
also  be  added  the  destruction of the
whole, or a large portion of the velum,
as well as of the vomer, part of the al-
veolar border and turbinated bones.*
   It  has also been  remarked, that  le-
sions of  the palate and velum, resulting
from disease, differ from congenital de-
fects.
   The first  most  frequently perforates
the side  of the palatine vault, and com-
municates with only one nostril, where-
 as, the latter, as will presently be seen,
occupies the centre  of  the  arch, and
penetrates both of the nasal cavities.

   • Vide Traite de la Partie Mecaique d I'Art
du Chirurgien Dentiste, 1.1, p. 294. 
PAL
562
PAL
          Congenital  Defects.

  Congenital defects  of the palate, oc-
cupy the median line or palatine raphae,
and consist in a division of the osseous
and soft textures, of greater  or less ex-
tent.  This  division is sometimes con-
fined to the vault of the palate ; at other
times the velum, anterior part of the
alveolar arch and upper lip participate.
It forms a  communication with both
nostrils, and  when  the  malformation
extends to the alveolar border, and up-
per lip, which is divided vertically in
one, and sometimes  in two  places, it
gives to the mouth a  most disagreeable
aspect.   But hare-lip  is sometimes met
with when there is  no imperfection of
the osseous structures, and imperfec-
tions are often met with here when the
lip is perfect.  In some cases the cleft
or fissure is more than three-fourths of
an inch wide throughout the whole ex-
tent of the  palate  and velum, accom-
panied by  an absence of  the  whole of
that portion ofthe alveolar border which
should be occupied by  the four incisores;
at other times the  alveolar arch is di-
vided in two places,  leaving a portion
between the lateral  and  central inci-
sores, or one lateral and one central, after
projecting more  or  less, and thus very
greatly  increasing the deformity. Al-
though a double hare-lip,  with two di-
visions of the alveolar border, is seldom
met with without  some  defect of the
palatine organs, cases do occasionally
occur.  Dr. Sims, a  skilful and  inge-
nious surgeon of Montgomery,  Ala.,
describes a most  interesting case of this
kind, in vol. 5th, page 51,  ofthe Amer-
ican Journal of Dental Science.
  Congenital defects  of the palate are
sometimes  accompanied  by  more  or
less deformity of the sides of the alveo-
lar arch, and of  the teeth. Sometimes
the sides of the alveolar ridge are forced
too far  apart, and at  other times they
are too near to  each other,  while the
teeth are either too  large  or too small,
with imperfectly developed roots, and,
generally, of a soft texture.
   Want of coaptation, resulting  from
defect of formation in the palatine plates
ofthe maxillary and palate bones, are
the cause of congenital deficiencies of
the parts in question.
   Thus, it is seen, that the defects ofthe
palatine organs which result from  mal-
formation,  present as much diversity of
character as  do those  which  are  pro-
duced by disease,  or  other accidental
causes.   Mr.  Stearns  of  London, in a
very able and highly interesting paper,
published  in  the London Lancet, on
Congenital  Fissure  of the Palate, in
noticing their various anatomical pecu-
liarities, divides them into three classes.
   The first class embraces all the cases
in which  the fissure extends through
the velum, palate, and  maxillary bones,
to the alveolar  border,  and, sometimes,
"through the Avhole extent of the me-
dian symphysis." This form of fissure
is the most  extensive, and justly re-
garded as the worst, "is  usually com-
plicated with hare-lip."
   In the second class, the bones of  the
palate are,  "apparently entire,  though
the concavity of the arch may be some-
what greater than  usual,  and  the  fis-
sure" extend a short distance into their
"posterior  margin."   The lesion, in
this case, is almost  wholly confined to
the velum palati.
   The third class embraces those cases
in which the fissure is  confined to  the
soft parts, extending, perhaps,  only a
short distance up into the uvula.  This
form  of fissure is, probably,  less fre-
quently met with than either ofthe pre-
ceding.
Functional Disturbances, resulting from
     Defects of the Palatine Organs.
   The principal  effects resulting from
an absence of a portion of the palatine
organs,  are, an impairment of the func-
tions of mastication,  deglutition  and
speech.   Distinct  utterance is some-
times wholly destroyed by it, and mas- 
PAL               563               PAL
 tication  and deglutition  are  often  so
 much embarrassed as to  be performed
 only with  great  difficulty.  These ef-
 fects  are always in proportion to the
 extent of the separation or deficiency
 of  the parts.  But in  noticing the ef-
 fects which result from an absence of a
 portion of the palatine  organs, we shall
 first speak  of those that are produced
 upon the functions of  mastication and
 deglutition.
   Although the simple act of triturating
 the food, may not be materially imped-
 ed by  the absence of a portion, how-
 ever extensive, of the palatine  organs,
 unless the  natural relations ofthe teeth
 of the upper and  lower jaws are chang-
 ed, still the process is  more or less in-
 terfered with, as  substances taken into
 the mouth cannot  be  so  readily man-
 aged as when the parts are in their nat-
 ural state.   They are constantly escap-
 ing from the control of the tongue and
 passing up into the cavity of the nose.
   In cases of congenital defects of the
 palate and velum, it is difficult to con-
 ceive how, in infancy, the  child man-
 ages to  obtain from the breast of its
 mother or nurse,  the food  necessary for
 its  subsistence;  yet,  even  where  the
 anterior part of the  alveolar border, and
 a part of the upper lip is wanting, it
 does, in  accordance with the  sugges-
 tions of natural instinct, by means  of a
 peculiar mechanical process, contrive
 to do it.' The expedient to which it re-
 sorts for effecting this  process is curi-
 ous.  The  nipple, instead of being seiz-
 ed between the tongue, upper lip and
 gum of  the superior alveolar border, is
 taken between its  lower surface, and the
 under lip and gum of  the inferior alve-
 olar ridge, and in this  way it manages
 to extract  the nourishment necessary
 for  its subsistence  and growth.   The
 tongue, as is remarked by M. Delabarre,
is thus made to close the opening in the
palate, and perform the office of an ob-
turator.   By  the  contracting of its lip
and depressing its tongue, the milk is
drawn from the breast  of its mother or
 nurse.  At this young and tender age,
 it is not conscious of the imperfection of
 its palate, and it is not, until the period
 arrives when it should begin to make
 its Avants known by words, as is re-
 marked by the author just mentioned,
 that it feels the importance of the func-
 tions of speech and begins to realize the
 misfortune with Avhich it is afflicted.
  But asthe child arrives at this period,
 the mechanism of sucking, as  M. Del-
 abarre observes, is  perfected, and ulti-
 mately applied to  the mastication  of
 solid  aliments.  "When  chewed, it is
 conveyed between the tongue and mov-
 able  floor,  which  serves  for  a point
 d'appui to  it, and thence  it is brought
 back  between the teeth.   Thus it is,
 that the complicated operation of mas-
 tication and deglutition is  performed
 without the alimentary morsel getting
 into the  nose; or, if this  does some-
 times happen,  it  is the result of acci-
 dent."  But in cases of accidental lesion
 ofthe palate, the individual has not the
 advantage,  as  the author  just  quoted
 observes, "of early infancy."  Those
 who are afflicted with accidental lesions,
 no  matter  what may be their position
 and  extent, "having," as our  author
 says, "acquired the habit of eating, by
 placing the aliment on the tongue, can
 take no nourishment, without a part of
 it getting  into the nose."   When  to
 this inconvenience is added a change in
 the natural relations of the teeth of the
 two jaws,  mastication is rendered still
 more difficult and embarrassing.  When
 this is the  case, the tubercles  of the
 teeth of  one jaw, instead of being re-
 ceived into the depressions  of  those of
 the other, strike upon their protuber-
 ances, and cannot be  made to triturate
 the food in as thorough  and perfect a
 manner as is required for  healthy and
 easy  digestion.  Thus, not only is the
 process of mastication rendered imper-
 fect, but it is also more tedious.
  The process  of deglutition itself, so
long as the  velum and uvula are per-
fect, is not materially affected by a per- 
PAL
564
PAL
foration simply of the vault of the pal-
ate, although  much difficulty may be
experienced in  conveying alimentary
and fluid substances to the fauces and
pharynx.   But when this curtain  is
cleft or partially or wholly wanting, it
is rendered very difficult, for,  by the
contraction of the muscles of the pha-
rynx, part of them are forced up into the
nose.  The reason of this wtil appear
obvious, when we take into considera-
tion the form and functions of this mov-
able appendage.  When its muscles are
relaxed, it forms a slightly concave cur-
tain ; but in the act  of deglutition, the
muscles contract, raise the velum and
close the  opening  from  the  pharynx
into the nose.  Thus, alimentary sub-
stances and fluids are prevented from
escaping into  the nose.
   It matters not, therefore, whether the
imperfection of the velum palati be the
result of accident or disease,  its effects
upon deglutition are the same.  In pro-
portion as  the lesion  or deficiency is
great, wiU  this operation be  rendered
difficult and embarrassing.  M.  Dela-
barre mentions the case of an individual
who, in consequence of an imperfection
of the palate,  could  sAvallow no  fluids
without a  part  being returned  by the
nose.  To obviate this inconvenience,
he had to throw his head sufficiently far
back to precipitate them  into the oeso-
phagus.  This is an expedient to which
others, thus affected,  have been com-
pelled to resort.
   Imperfection of speech always results
from an opening in the palate, for this
gives to the voice a nasal twang, and ren-
ders the formation of some sounds im-
possible.   The loss of the teeth, though
never to the same extent, is productive
of the same effect.   But  to fully com-
prehend the manner in  which a lesion
of the palate  may affect  the utterance
 of speech, it wtil be necessary to under-
stand the  agency  which the several
parts of the mouth have  in the  forma-
tion of articulate sounds.
   Speech consists in the  combination of
sounds  produced  by the organs  be-
tween the glottis and  external opening
of the  mouth.    The co-operation of
several parts  of the mouth  are neces-
sary for the formation of most sounds,*
and hence, if any of these be defective
or wanting, the power of forming such
sounds is either partially or wholly de-
stroyed.
  Dr. Arnott, viewing the mouth as a
vocal tube, divides it  into three princi-
pal "oral positions," the first is at the ex-
ternal opening ofthe mouth, the second
is behind the  teeth where the tip of the
tongue approaches the palate, and the
third is where the  body  of the tongue
approaches the  palate, near the region
of the throat,  or back part of the mouth.
The following table represents the three
divisions,  or  "oral positions" of this
tube.
  T
 D L
  N
thSsh
thZJ
  R
  K
  G
  ng n
Hch
  gh
  ghr
Mute.
Semi-mute.
Semi-vowel or nasal.
Aspirate.
Vocal aspirate.
Vibratory.    ______
  According to the above parallelogram,
six sounds or articulations, as indicated
by the letters, may be made with the
voice or breath, "as it passes through
each  of  the  three  positions of  the
mouth."  "First, a sudden and com-
plete stoppage of the voice or breath—
producing what may be called a mute
articulation;  viz. P, in the labial posi-
tion ;  T, in the palatal; and K,  in the
guttural,"  &.c.   "Second,  a sudden
shutting, as in the last case, but the
voice being allowed to continue until
the part of the mouth behind the  clo-
sure be distended with air.   This pro-
duces the semi-mutes, B, D,  and G (in
its hard  sound as in pig or go,) for

   'Mutter's Physiology, vol. 2,p. 1045. 
PAL
565
PAL
  the three positions," &c.  "If the sides
  of the tongue be depressed after  it has
  taken the position required, T or D, the
  sound L is produced,"  &c.  "Third,
  the positions closed  as for the mutes,
  while sound  is aUowed to pass  by the
  nose.   Thus arise the semi-vowels  or
  nasals, M, N, NG, for the three posi-
  tions.  NG (as  in king) is  a simple
  sound, although our imperfect alpha-
  bet has no  single letter for it."  * * *
  "Fourth, breath only, (or whisper J al-
  lowed to pass at the three oral positions
  nearly closed.  Hence come the sounds
  which we call aspirates, viz. F, TH and
  S, and CH, (heard in the Scottish word
  bch;) the TH  and  CH  are  simple
  sounds," &c.  "Fifth, using voice in the
  same manner as breath or whisper  is
  used for the aspirates.  This produces
  the sounds called vocal aspirates, viz. V,
  TH,  Z,  J, and GH," &c.   "Sixth,
  shaking the approaching parts in the
 three  positions,"*  of  the  vocal   tube.
 The vibratory sounds are produced in
 this way.
   By leaving  the mouth or vocal tube
 open, "so  that  the  sound,"  as Mr.
 Stearns  remarks,   passing outwards,
 meets with no interruption until it ar-
 rives at the  hps, which being simply
 closed so as to obstruct its final exit, we
 then have the letter P, which is there-
 fore termed a bbial mute.   But if this
 obstruction is attended by a momentary
 accumulation  of sound in the cavity be-
 hind the organ making  the  closure, so
 as to  cause a slight  distention,  that
 would give a half mute, as B, instead
 of P.   There is a similar difference be-
 tween T and D,  and  also between K
 and G, as between P and B.  In T and
 D, the  necessary closure  is made by
 bringing the edge of the tongue in  con-
 tact with the edge of the gums of the
 upper teeth throughout its whole cir-
 cumference.  In K, the closure is made
 by carrying the  root  of the  tongue
against the soft palate, thus obstructing

  'Elements of Physic, vol. 1, p. 504-5 and 6.
     48
  the passage of the voice almost at its
  starting point.*
    Thus, it would seem, that the articu-
  lation of sound depends upon  its inter-
  ruption at one or other ofthe three oral
  positions mentioned by Dr. Arnot, and
  this interruption is effected by a mere
  mechanical process.  Hence, it is easy
  to perceive, how a perforation or fissure
  of  the  palate may, by preventing this
  interruption, as Mr. Stearns says, "ren-
  der the articulation of some  of the let-
  ters impossible," and at the same time,
  "vitiate the character of all the  others."
  This "indistinctness of utterance," says
  Mr. S., "is  usually proportioned to the
  extent of the lesion.  Thus, where the
  fissure  extends as  far as  the  alveolar
  processes, the patient loses several of
  the letters which another,  with only a
 portion of the  soft palate involved, is
 able to produce with  considerable dis-
 tinctness."
   The exposition  which Mr.  Stearns
 has given of the "vocal phenomena at-
 tending the fissure of the palate" is  so
 very clear and satisfactory, that the au-
 thor would  be  glad to quote what he
 says upon the subject, but the limits as-
 signed to this  article will not permit
 him to do so.  He  would simply state,
 however, that after describing the man-
 ner  in which voice and articulation are
 made, as well as the  effects  produced
 upon the latter  by  lesions ofthe palate,
 Mr. S. says, "In cases of fissure, par-
 ticularly  those  of the more extensive
 kind, the movements of the tongue are
 comparatively limited, as the patient is
 instinctively  aware that the very effort
 he should make in order to give letters
 their  appropriate  articulation, often
 serves  to  render his impediment more
 painful.  So far, indeed, in some cases,
 is this inactivity of the organs persisted
 in, that speech becomes little else than
 the emission of a succession of  vowel

  'Observations on Congenital Fissure of the
Palate with some remarks on Articulation and
Impediments of Speech, by Charles W. Stearns,
Esq.  Surgeon, London. 
PAL
566
PAL
sounds, which, in lieu of receiving prop-
er consonant  adjuncts, are only made
inteUigible by the accompanying inflec-
tion, key, gesticulation, and expression
of countenance,  all of which are, more
or less, the vehicles of thought."
   With the limited action ofthe tongue,
nearly all the muscles concerned in the
formation of articulate sounds in a great-
er or  less degree, as  Mr.  Stearns re-
marks, participates, while  the muscles
about the nose, as the compressor nasi,
and depressor nasi, are violently con-
tracted, for the purpose  of closing the
nostrils  and preventing the escape of
sound.   This gives to the features  a
particularly disagreeable aspect.
   For the methods  of remedying de-
fects  of the palatine organs, see Staphy-
loraphy, Staphyloplasty, Obturator, Pal-
atine, Artificial  Palate  and Obturator
and Palate Plates.
   Palatine Organs, Diseases of.  In
 common with other parts of the body,
the palate sometimes becomes the seat
 of various morbid phenomena,  but the
 occurrence of disease here, is generally
 the result of constitutional causes, such
 as certain depraved habits of body.  It
 is, perhaps, more frequently induced by
 secondary syphilis than any other cause,
 and when it is, its ravages are often tru-
 ly deplorable.   It may, however, result
 from the immoderate and protracted use
 of mercurial medicine, or a  scorbutic,
 cancerous, scrofulous or rickety diathe-
 sis of the general system.   Among the
 diseases  liable  to attack the palate, are
 tumors, caries and necrosis ofthe bones,
 ulceration of the  mucous membrane,
 and  inflammation, elongation and ulce-
 ration of the uvula.   In consulting wri-
 ters  on the diseases  of the palate, the
 author has been able to find  but few
 Avho have treated on  them at much
 length, and for the information which
 he has been able to obtain upon the sub-
 ject, except that which he has derived
 from his own limited observations,  he
 is principally indebted to Jourdain and
 Boyer.   The first of these authors has
devoted, in the first volume of his trea-
tise on the surgical diseases ofthe mouth,
about one hundred and forty pages, to
the affections under consideration.
         Tumors ofthe Palate.
  The morbid growths of the palate are
analogous to those of other  parts of the
mouth.  A  description of their various
peculiarities,- therefore, is  not deemed
necessary.   See Jaws, morbid growths
of. But with regard to the causes which
are concerned  in their production, there
exist some diversity of opinion.  They
are supposed, by some, to be dependent
upon a peculiar specific constitutional
vice, as venereal, scorbutic, cancerous,
scrofulous, &c, while others think they
may occur in individuals in whom no
such habit or vice exists.   Local irrita-
tion, no doubt, is the immediate or ex-
citing cause of the various morbid pro-
ductions of the palate, but this, unless
favored  by some specific  or peculiar
constitutional tendency or  cachectic
habit of body, would  not be hkely to
give rise to them.   Thus,  while  the
former would seem to be  the exciting
cause, the  character  assumed  by the
disease, is evidently determined by the
latter.
   Every  habit of body or tendency to
any particular form of diseased action
may be regarded,  too, as having a sus-
ceptibility to morbid impressions pecu-
liar  to itself. Hence, an irritant, which,
in one case, might not be productive of
any appreciable disturbance,  might, in
 another, give rise to a morbid  growth
of  a  more  or  less  malignant char-
 acter—according  to  the habit of body
 or constitutional tendency. of the indi-
 vidual.
   The irritation  produced   by dead,
 loose, and diseased  teeth, ulcers of the
] mucous membrane and necrosed bone,
 are, perhaps, among the most common
 of  the  exciting  causes.  Some  may,
 perhaps, be  disposed to  question the
 agency of dental irritation in the pro-
 duction of a morbid  growth  of the 
PAL                567                PAL
palate, but the fact is  too well  estab-
lished to admit of doubt.   Many weU
authenticated cases are on record Avhich
conclusively prove that diseased teeth
are capable of exerting a morbid influ-
ence  upon these parts.  M.  Guyard*
reports the  case of a woman, forty
years of age, who had  a cancerous ex-
crescence  of the palate, caused by the
irritation produced by  the superior in-
cisores, and numerous examples of tu-
mor and other diseases of the palate,
resulting from the presence of diseased
teeth, are given by Jourdain and other
authors.f
   But there are  other causes, such for
example, as sahvary calculus, mucous
engorgement of  the maxillary  sinus,
acrid saliva, and mechanical injuries
from blows, and hard substances taken
into the mouth.  Roche and Sanson,  in
their Theory and Practice of Medicine
and Surgery, say, that "from the irrita-
tion produced  by syphilitic ulcers, car-
cinomatous tumors nearly always fol-
low.}
   Although tumors of the palate may
sometimes spontaneously disappear  on
the removal of the exciting cause, the
proper curative  indication consists  in
their entire extirpation.   When they
are attached by a small base, this may
be easily effected with  a pair  of scissors
properly curved  at their points, or  by
means of a ligature in the manner as
directed for the removal of similar tu-
mors of the gums.  But when they are
attached by a broad base, a curved bis-
toury is the most convenient  instru-
ment that  can  be  employed,  and,
sometimes, it may be necessary to have
two, a right and a left, or one for each
side.
   Boyer describes an operation which

  *Vide Journal de Med. tome xix, p. 361.
  t Vide Traite des Maladies Chirurgicale de
la Bouche.
  X Vide Nouveaux Elements de Pathologie de
Medico-Chirurgicale, ou precis Theorique et
Pratique deMedecine et Chirurgie, tome 4, p.
1011.
 he performed for the removal of a hard,
 white, indolent tumor, of the size of a
 large nut, situated a little  behind the
 middle of the palate, and  which  had
 occasioned  the patient,  who was a
 lady, no  other inconvenience than an
 unpleasant  sensation  during mastica-
 tion and  deglutition.  He excised the
 tumor with a bistoury,  curved so  as to
 fit exactly  the  vault  of the palate,
 which  he had made for the purpose.
 After  having  removed the tumor, he
 destroyed the membrane from which it
 had originated, with a rasp.  The hem-
 orrhage was suppressed  with vinegar
 and water  and pledgets of lint.  The
| wound soon healed, and at the expi-
 ration  of eight years,  there  were  no
 signs  of a reproduction of the disease.*
   In the removal of tumors from the
 palate, as well as from other parts of
 the body, no portion should be left; as,
 in this event, a reproduction of the dis-
 ease would be likely to occur, and more
 especially, if it be of a malignant char-
 acter.  The operation  should be  per-
 formed, too, before  the  tumor has ac-
 quired great size, or implicated in the
 diseased  action, to  a considerable ex-
 tent, the neighboring structures.
    There is ahvays great danger when
 the morbid production is of a cancerous
 nature, however perfectly it may be re-
 moved, of its  reproduction.   To guard
 against this, as far as possible, the ap-
 plication of the actual cautery is recom-
 mended  by many  surgeons, not  only
 for the purpose of  causing an exfolia-
 tion of a portion ofthe superjacent bone,
 but  also to  arrest  the  hemorrhage,
 which generally follows operations of
 this sort. Boyer, who says he has per-
 formed the operation for the removal of
 tumors from  the palate several  times,
 frankly admits that he has never been
 successful where they were of a  ma-
 lignant character.  But,  notwithstand-

   * Traite des Maladies Chirurgicales et des
 Operations, qui leur Convenient, tome  6, p.
 449. 
PAL
568
PAL
 ing the  great liability there is of a re-
 production of most  morbid  growths,
 this does not always happen, as is  Avell
 attested by many  cases on record, and
 from which it may be well to cite three
 or four.
   Pierre Guyard reports in the Journal
 de Medecine, vol. xix, p. 361, and to
 which reference has before been made,
 the case of a woman, forty years of  age,
 who  had a cancerous excrescence of
 the palate, of  many years  standing,
 which weighed nine ounces.  This ex-
 crescence was extirpated, and the pa-
 tient restored  to health.
   The case of a  man,  forty years of
 age, affected with so  large a tumor of
 the palate that he could take no nour-
 ishment, except in a fluid state,  is re-
 ported by Varner.    In this case, it
 was of a cartilaginous character, inter-
 spersed  with  osseous points, and  the
 operation for its removal was also suc-
 cessful.*
   Jourdain describes the case of a man,
 who, from the  irritation produced by
 the roots of several decayed teeth,  had
 a swelling of the upper lip and nose,
 and a tumor of the palate of the size of
 a pigeon's egg.   A fistula, traversing
'the alveolar and maxillary border, ex-
 tended from the superior lateral incisor
 to the first molar of the same side, from
 which a large quantity of matter was
 discharged. The  teeth being trouble-
 some, were removed. The discharge of
 matter soon ceased.  He next removed
 the tumor from the palate, which  ex-
 posed a portion of necrosed bone, which
 exfoliated in  a  few days,  leaving an
 opening into the nose of the size of a
 large quill, through which fluids,  taken
 into the mouth, readily passed. By  the
 application of caustics, the sides of the
 opening were  caused  to granulate, and
 in six weeks it had entirely healed.
   The same author mentions the case
 of a lady who  had a tumor of the pal-

  * Vide Traite des Maladies Chirurgicale de
 la Bouche, t. 1, p. 427.
 ate, caused by  erysipelas.   The  last
 named disease having extended to the
 lips, nose and vault ofthe palate, caused
 in the last mentioned place an  ulcera-
 tion, from the centre of which grew a
 small  fungous tumor.   This was re-
 moved,  and  a portion of the  bone,
 which was exposed, Avas found to be
 in a necrosed and partially  exfoliated
 condition.   This Avas extracted with an
 excavator, and, under proper treatment,
 the patient soon recovered.
   In presenting the foregoing cases, the
 author has not thought it necessary to
 give any thing more than the important
 facts connected with each.    A full
 translation of the reports would occupy
 more space than he wishes to devote to
 this  particular subject.
   It is seldom that the operation for the
 removal of tumors  of  the palate are
 followed by as favorable results as fur-
 nished by  the foregoing cases.   If it
 were necessary, many examples of tu-
 mors of the palate, which were attend-
 ed with fatal effects, might be cited.
 Jourdain mentions one given  by M.
 Plater,  of  a cancerous  tumor of the
 palate, caused by ulceration ofthe throat
 and uvula.
  Both before and after the operation,
 such general or constitutionol treatment
 as may be indicated by the habit of
 body or vice under which  the patient
 may be laboring, should be adopted. If
 of a scorbutic or  scrofulous  habit, or
 affected with a syphilitic disease, suit-
 able  remedies should be  prescribed, and
when practicable, such local irritants as
may have acted as an  exciting cause
should be removed.
 Caries and Necrosis of the Bones of the
  Palate, and  Ulceratwn of the Mucous
  Membrane.
  The bones of the palate sometimes
become the seat of caries and necrosis,
causing ulceration of the subjacent soft
parts, and  the destruction of a greater
or less portion of the  structures which
separate the cavities  of  the mouth and 
PAL
569
PAL
 nose.  Although these  effects  are of
 more frequent occurrence than tumors,
 they are less dangerous  in their conse-
 quences.   Commencing with inflam-
 mation and suppuration of the perios-
 teal tissue, caries and necrosis of the
 bones, accompanied  by ulceration of
 the subjacent mucous membrane, soon
 supervenes, and, ultimately, exfoliation
 takes place, when an opening of greater
 or  less size, between the buccal  and
 nasal cavities, is established.
   During the progress of the disease, a
 fetid  sanies is continually discharged,
 from  one or more  fistulous  openings,
 into the mouth and sometimes the cav-
 ities of the nose, rendering the  condi-
 tion of the unhappy sufferer exceed-
 ingly loathsome and  distressing.  The
 progress  of the disease is  often  slow,
 continuing, not unfrequently, for weeks,
 months, and in some cases, even years,
 destroying all the pleasures of life, and
 rendering existence itself a burden.   A
 case of this  kind was  recently  intro-
 duced  into the infirmary of the Balti-
 more College of Dental Surgery, which
 is noticed at some length, in  an  article
 on the means employed  for remedying
 defects of the palatine organs. See Ob-
 turator and Palate Plates.
  Dr. B. B. Brown, surgeon dentist of
 St. Louis, Mo.,  describes a very  inter-
 esting case of the destruction  of a large
 portion ofthe  palate plates of the su-
 perior  maxillary and palate bones, ac-
 companied by the loss of the left lateral
 and central incisores.*
  The ravages of caries and  ulceration
 of the palate  are  sometimes so  great
 that the   palatine  bones,  the  palate
 plates  of the  superior maxillary,  the
 vomer, turbinated and nasal  bones, to-
 gether with the velum and uvula, are
 entirely destroyed,  but when they are
 thus extensive, they are seldom arrested
 except with the life of the patient.
  The ulcerative process  of the  soft
parts, when resulting from caries of

  • Vide Am. Jour. Dent. Sci., vol. 6, p.236.
         4S*
 the bones, is frequently participated in
 by the  pituitary  membrane  lining the
 floor of the nasal fossae; it does some-
 times  happen, however, that this re-
 mains unaffected. A case of this kind,
 and to which the author will hereafter
 have occasion to refer, is related by
 Jourdain.
   But ulceration  of the mucous mem-
 brane,  lining the vault of the palate,
 often  occurs while  the  superjacent
 bones are in a healthy condition.  It is
 often caused by inflammation and ulcer-
 ation of the velum and uvula, whether
 resulting  as  an  effect  of secondary
 syphilis or from  malignant ozaena pro-
 duced  by  other  causes.   But  from
 whatever cause the ulceration may be
 produced, it may  ultimately give rise to
 caries and necrosis of the bones.  It is,
 however, more   frequently an effect,
 than a  cause, of caries of the osseus
 structures of these parts.
   As in the case of tumors of the pal-
 ate, caries, necrosis  and ulceration of
 these parts are the result of local irrita-
 tion and certain habits of body, or con-
 stitutional vices.   The immediate or
 exciting cause is local irritation, but  the
 extent of  the effects  resulting  from
 such irritation is, as has been frequent-
 ly stated  before,  in  proportion to  the
 susceptibility of  the  body  to morbid
 impressions.   The local  irritants  are
 the same  as those  which have been
 already mentioned, namely,  dead  and
 loose teeth,  roots of teeth,  salivary
 calculus,  mechanical  injuries,  acrid
 humors, &.c.  The case of a lady of
 irreproachable character, is related  by
 Jourdain,  in whom a scratch on  the
 palate  with a fish-bone, caused a  tu-
 mor,  which  suppurated and degen-
 erated into an ulcer Avith hard elevated
 edges and a fungus in the middle.*  A
 case, in which effects similar to these,
 and produced by  the  same cause, was
 mentioned to the author a short time

  * Vide Traite des Maladies Chirurgicales
de la Bouche, tom. 1, p. 407. 
PAL
570
PAL
 since  by Dr. Cone.   Local irritation,
 unquestionably, has much to do in the
 production of the  diseases under con-
 sideration—more  than many  seem to
 imagine or are willing to admit  Most
 Avriters are of the opinion  that they are
 wholly caused by some constitutional
 vice, and nearly  always  by the vene-
 real, but  that this opinion, to some ex-
 tent at least, is erroneous,  will  be fully
 proven by some  facts which  will be
 presented when  we come  to speak  of
 the treatment of these affections.
   In the treatment of  caries  of the
 bones of the palate, it is  important to
 ascertain if the patient be  laboring un-
 der any constitutional vice which may
 have contributed to the disease, and the
 local irritants concerned  in giving rise
 to it.  If the inflammation from which
it resulted was caused by  mechanical
irritation,  the irritants  should, at once,
be removed.  If decayed, dead or loose
teeth be suspected  as having  had any
 agency  in its production,  they should
 be immediately extracted,  but  so long
 as any  portions of decayed or necrosed
 bone remains, it is needless to say, the
 ulcerations or fistulous openings in the
 soft parts  cannot be healed. These, as
 soon as they have become sufficiently
 exfoliated, should  be detached  and re-
 moved, but in doing this it may be ne-
 cessary to increase the  size of  the ex-
 ternal opening.  During the process of
 exfoliation, the mouth  should be fre-
 quently gargled with  astringent and
 detergent  lotions,  for  the  purpose of
 neutralizing the odor of the offensive
 matter which is being continually dis-
 charged.
   Suitable  constitutional  remedies
 should, at  the  same  time,  be  pre-
 scribed.   As in  the case of tumors, if
 the patient be laboring under  a scor-
 butic, scrofulous  or venereal diathesis
 of the general system, the indications
 should be  properly fulfilled.  But be-
 fore  instituting any general treatment,
 the  physician should be well  assured
 that his diagnosis is correct.   A vene-
 real vice is sometimes suspected when
 none exists, as is shown by the follow-
 ing brief summary of the  history of a
 case related by Jourdain.
   The  subject of this case was a man
 who had  a swelling  which  occupied
 the whole of the left side  of the vault
 of the  palate, from  which there had
 been a fistulous opening for a long time.
 The edges  were hard  and indurated.
 Venereal  vice was  suspected as the
 cause, and for which disease, treatment
 was proposed, but the patient not being
 willing  to  submit, Jourdain was con-
 sulted, who advised the removal of the
 roots of three or four  teeth in the vi-
 cinity of the disease.  This operation
 was performed, and  the fistulous open-
 ing at the same time enlarged, when
 the bone was found  to be  in a carious
 condition, but with  little  other treat-
 ment a complete cure was  soon effect-
ed.*
  That the effects resulting from dental
irritation may extend to the palate, is
shown by  the following particulars of
 a case taken from the history of one
given by the last named author.
  A man called  upon Jourdain for ad-
vice, in  relation to a tumor  of the vault
of his palate.   Upon examination,  a
 sensible fluctuation was perceived ; on
 being pressed, fetid pus  escaped from
 a small  fistulous opening between the
 right lateral incisor and canine tooth,
 and also from the socket of the second
 bicuspis, which had been  extracted  a
 short time before.  The opening from
 the  alveolus of this  tooth communi-
 cated with  the  first mentioned fistula
 and the  disease in the palate. Notwith-
 standing these two  outlets for the es-
 cape of the matter, it increased in the
 palate.  Various  means  were  resorted
 to for the cure of the disease, but with-
 out success.  The nasal fossae, by the
 accumulation of matter, were  partially
 closed, the alveoli of  the lateral incisor,
 cuspidatus  and  first  bicuspis  became
  • Vide  Traite des Maladies, Chirurgicale
 de la Bouche, tom. 1, p. 406. 
PAL
571
PAL
necrosed, and the teeth loosened, which
were extracted.  The alveoli exfoliated,
the tumor  of the palate was opened,
when the bones of the palate and max-
iUary alveolar borders were found in a
necrosed and partially exfoliated state.
These were  removed without much
difficulty, and left an opening through
to the pituitary membrane which lined
the floor of  the  nasal  fossae.  These
portions of bone having  been removed,
the parts soon healed.*
   In  the last case, it is  probable that
the second bicuspis of the affected side,
was not extracted untU an abscess had
formed at the extremity of its root, and
that the matter, instead of escaping ex-
ternaUy, had effected a passage through
the  inner Avail of  the   alveolus and
thence between the palate plate of the
superior maxiUary and mucous mem-
brane to near the median line, where
it had accumulated, produced the tu-
mor mentioned by Jourdain, and ulti-
mately  made a passage for its escape
between the lateral  incisor  and cus-
pidatus.
   But when favored by  a  cachectic
habit of body, or  venereal vice, the ef-
fects  are often  more destructive,  and
require  constitutional as weU as local
treatment.
   Ulceration of  the palatine mucous
membrane,  may occur  without caries
of the superjacent bone; it may result
as a consequence  of ulceration or other
disease of the velum or  uvula, or from
some mechanical  injury inflicted upon
the parts.   When it is of a simple na-
ture, cooling and astringent gargles,
preceded by mild aperients, wiU gen-
erally suffice for  its  cure.  If it is de-
pendent upon a specific constitutional
tendency or  vice, appropriate general
remedies should  be  employed.   But
with regard to  the treatment of ulcers
of the palate, we shall have occasion to
speak Avhen we come to treat of the dis-
eases of the velum and uvula.
  •Vide Traite des Maladies Chirurgicale
dela Bouche, tom. 1, p. 397.
Inflammation and Ulceration of the Ve-
          lum and  Uvulum.
  The velum  palati and uvula  some-
times become the seat of inflammation,
accompanied by pain, increased red-
ness, difficult deglutition  and  articula-
tion of speech.  Most frequently it ter-
minates in resolution, but sometimes in
ulceration, and at other times in gan-
grene.  Where  resolution  is  the ter-
mination, it gradually subsides, after
having continued for a greater or less
length of time.  When by ulceration,
one or more vvhite or ash colored spots
appear  upon  the velum and uvula,
after it has continued for a certain pe-
riod, and when by a gangrene, the part
after having assumed a dark purple or
almost black color,  sloughs off.  This
latter termination,  fortunately,  rarely
happens.
  As a consequence of the  inflamma-
tion, the uvula sometimes becomes tu-
mefied and elongated; at other times it
becomes elongated  when there  is no
apparent  tumefaction.   In the  latter
case, it is vulgarly  termed  a "faUing
of the palate."  Most frequently Avhen
it is  elongated,  its  thickness  is at the
same time increased. There is then an
increase of redness, but when there is
elongation, without an increase of size,
resulting simply from relaxation of the
part, its color, instead of being height-
ened, is often diminished,  presenting
a whitish or semi-transparent appear-
ance.  This description  of elongation
is termed serious tumefaction  of the
uvula.  It is  seldom accompanied by
pain.
  When  the uvula  becomes so much
elongated as to rest upon the tongue, it
causes  irritation, difficult  deglutition,
oftentimes a sense  of suffocation, the
frequent expulsion of mucus from the
throat, and sometimes  a disagreeable
cough.
  Ulcer3  of various kinds  sometimes
attack these parts, though they are less
subject to them than are other parts of 
PAL
572
PAL
the  mouth, the  fauces  and  tonsils.
Sometimes the ulcers  are of a simple
nature,  at  other  times they are  aph-
thous, scrofulous, scorbutic,  venereal
or cancerous, according to the specific
poison or  diathesis  which  has given
rise to them.  When the ulcer is not
dependent  upon  constitutional causes,
it is termed a simple  ulcer, and is noth-
ing more than a granulating sore which
secretes healthy purulent matter.
   Aphthous ulcers  at  first appear in
the form of whitish or transparent vesi-
cles, which break, and are  ultimately
transformed into  ulcers, either  sur-
rounded by a slightly elevated edge of
a  reddish  color,  or  spread  and unite
with each other.  The former are term-
ed dkcrete, and  the latter  confluent
aphthae.  But ulcers of this kind gene-
rally appear in other parts of the mouth
and fauces before they attack the velum
and uvula of the  palate.
   The velum  and uvula are, perhaps,
more subject to venereal  than to any
other kind of ulcers.   The characteris-
tics of these are, sometimes, very simi-
lar to ulcers which  result from some
other specific  constitutional vice, and
their  character can only be positively
determined by ascertaining all the other
circumstances  connected with the his-
tory of the case.   They are generally
preceded by  ulceration of the throat,
dull heavy pain, especiaUy at night, in-
creased  redness of the parts,  swelling
of the uvula, and difficult deglutition.
They generally  have a whitish, dirty
gray, or ash colored  appearance,  with
slightly elevated and  irregular margins,
and secrete a thin ichorous matter, hav-
ing a very fetid odor.   The surrounding
parts  are preternaturally red, and some-
times present an almost purple appear-
ance.  At other times the ulcers appear
in the form of aphthous specks, foUowed
by sloughing of the surrounding parts.
Sometimes the ulcers attack the poste-
rior side of the velum and uvula first,
where they commit  extensive ravages
before they appear  anteriorly.  From
 these  parts they  often  extend to  the
 vault of the palate, but more frequent-
 ly when they  appear here, the perios-
 teal tissue and bones are diseased before
 ulceration shows itself in  the  mucous
 membrane.
   Ulcers ofthe velum and uvula some-
 times result as a consequence of a pro-
 tracted and immoderate use of mercury.
 When they result from this cause, they
 are preceded by a  copperish taste in the
 mouth ; increased flow and viscidity of
 the  saliva; tumefaction and increased
 sensibility of  the  gums,  looseness of
 the  teeth;  a  peculiarly  disagreeable
 odor of the breath, general debility  and
 emaciation, and  sometimes diarrhoea.
 The gums, edges  of the tongue, mu-
 cous membrane about the angles of the
 jaws, inner surface of the cheeks,  and
 throat,  ulcerate before  the  velum and
 uvula are  attacked.
   The velum  and uvula are sometimes
 the  seat of other  bad  conditioned  ul-
 cers, such as the cancerous, scrofulous,
 &c, which it is not deemed neces-
 sary to describe.
   Inflammation of the velum and uvula
 most frequently  result from  irregular
 exposure to cold and moisture, though
 it may  sometimes  be  produced by local
 irritation, as mechanical injury, acidity
 of the  gastric and buccal fluids.   Ul-
 ceration of the parts  may result from
 the  same  causes, but  the character
 which the ulcer assumes is determined
 by the  habit of body, or peculiar dia-
 thesis of the general  system.   Elonga-
 tion of the uvula  is  caused either by
 inflammation  and  general enlargement,
 a relaxation of the parts, or serous in-
 filtration of its apex.
   For  simple  inflammation of the  ve-
 lum and  uvula,  unaccompanied  by
 fever or other general constitutional ef-
 fects, little else wiU be required than
 gargling the throat with an infusion of
 capsicum, sweetened  with honey.—
 When  the inflammation is severe, and
 the  vessels have  the  appearance of
I being  distended, advantage may  be de- 
PAL
573
PAL
 rived from scarifying the parts, or the
 application of leeches.
   But  when the uvula is  so much
 elongated as  to rest upon the tongue
 and cause a sensation of suffocation or
 a troublesome cough,  if  it does  not
 yield to exciting and astringent gargles,
 it may  become advisable to  remove a
 portion of it.
   For this operation, though an exceed-
 ingly simple  one, a variety  of instru-
 ments have been invented.  The best,
 however, which  the author  has seen,
 is the one invented a few years ago by
 Dr. S.  P. Hulhhen, of Wheeling, Va.
 This instrument, although very simple
 in  its construction,  is an  exceedingly
 useful pne, for, at the same time it cuts
 the  uvula,  it secures the  excised  ex-
 tremity, and prevents it from falling.
   For a simple ulcer of the  velum or
 uvula no other treatment will  be re-
 quired than to gargle the throat occa-
 sionaUy with  some  gently stimulating
 and astringent lotion; the one recom-
 mended for  inflammation of these parts,
 may generaUy be employed with  ad-
 vantage.
  In the treatment  of venereal or  sy-
 philitic  ulcers  of the  velum and uvula,
 little advantage will  be  obtained from
 local remedies.   They  can  only  be
 cured  by   appropriate  constitutional
 treatment,  such  as  is  prescribed in
 works on general medicine and surgery.
 To these, therefore, the reader is referred
 for information upon this subject.
  In cases of mercurial ulcers, it is  de-
 sirable that two or three liquid evacua-
 tions from the bowels should be pro-
 cured daily.  For this  purpose, sul-
 phate of magnesia or sublimed sulphur
 should be administered night and morn-
 ing.  The mouth should, at the same
 time, be gargled six or eight times a
 day  with  some gently  astringent  lo-
 tions. A weak solution of the sulphate
 of zinc, or  alumina, sweetened with
 honey,  may sometimes  be  advanta-
geously  employed,  but  more  benefit
perhaps will be derived from the use of
 a solution of  the  chloride of lime.—
 When the pain is  so severe as to pre-
 vent rest, opium should be prescribed.
 The diet of the  patient, for the most
 part, should consist of farinaceous sub-
 stances, and  after the ulcers have be-
 gan to  heal, milk, light  soups,  &c,
 may be recommended.
   In the treatment of  scirrhous and
 other  ill-conditioned ulcers of the ve-
 lum and uvula, dependent upon a ca-
 chectic habit  of body,  it is necessary
 that  the   constitutional   indications
 should be properly fulfilled, and that
 the vitiated action of the disease should
 be changed by the application of local
 irritants, such as caustics.   The appli-
 cation of the actual cautery has been
 found to be more efficient in changing
 the condition of ulcers of this sort and
 exciting a healthy action in them, than
 any other means which have been em-
 ployed.
   For cancerous ulcers, it has been
 found necessary to remove  a greater or
 less  portion of the  velum  and uvula,
 and  even  this operation   has  seldom
 proved successful,  for the disease, af-
 ter a greater or less  length of time, has
 reappeared in some of the  neighboring
 parts.
  PALATO-PHARYNGEUS. A mus-
 cle occupying the posterior lateral half
 arches of the palate, extending from the
 soft palate behind, near the uvula, as its
 origin, and is inserted into the pharynx,
 between the middle  and lower constric-
 tors, and into the thyroid cartilage.   Its
 use is to draw down the velum,  and
 raise the pharynx.
   PALATUM.  The palate.
   Palatum Durum.  The hard palate.
   Palatum Molle.  The soft palate.
   PALDAMUS.  Dissertation  on the
 Diseases of the Teeth, by.  Halle, 1799.
   PALLADIUM.  A metal which re-
 sembles  platinum in color, and lustre,
 but is harder.   It is  ductile and mallea-
ble, and has been used by some dentists
for bases for artificial teeth.
  PALLIAL.  From pallium, a cloak. 
PAL
574
PAN
Pertaining to the mantle or cloak of the
moUusca.
  PALLIATIVE.  Pattiativus; from
pallio, to dissemble.  In Medicine, any
thing which relieves a disease, but can-
not effect a cure.
  PAL'LOR.   Frompalleo, to be pale.
Paleness.
  Pallor Virginum.  Chlorosis.
  PALM.  Palma. The inside of  the
hand.
  PALMA.  The  palm  of the hand.
Also, a palm tree.
  Palma  Christi.   The  castor oil
plant.
  PALMAR.   Palmark ; from palma,
the  palm of the hand.  Belonging, or
relating, to the palm of the hand.
   Palmar Aponeuro'sis.   A strong
expansion formed by  the tendon of the
palmaris brevis, and the  anterior annu-
lar ligament of  the carpus, and cover-
ing the palm of the hand.
   Palmar Arches.  Two arches form-
 ed in the palm of the hand—one by the
 radial artery, which is called the deep-
seated, and the  other  by the ulnar arte-
 ry, which is called the superficial palmar
 arch.
   PALMARIS BREVIS.    A small
 flexor muscle of the hand, situated be-
 tAveen the wrist and little finger.
   Palmaris  Longus.  A small mus-
 cle of the forearm which arises from the
 inner condyle of the os  humeri, and is
 inserted into the  annular ligament  of
 the carpus and palmar fascia.
    PALMATE.   Palmatus.   Shaped
 like a hand.
    PALMOS.  Palmus.   Palpitation of
 the heart.
    PALMULA.  A date.
    PALO  DE VACA.  The milk tree
 of South America.
    PALPATION.   From palper,  to
 feel.  The sense of touch.  Also, man-
 ual exploration of disease.
    PALPEBRA.  From palpitare, to
 palpitate, from  its  frequent  motion.
 The eyelid.
    PALPEBRARUM   APERDZNS
RECTUS.  Levator palpebrae supe-
rioris.
  PAL'PEBRAL.   Belonging, or  re-
lating, to the palpebra.
  Palpebral Arteries.  The arteries
distributed to the eyelids.
  Palpebral Nerves.  The nerves of
the eyelids.
  PALPEBRALIS.  The orbicularis
palpebrarum.
  PALPITATION.  Palpitatio; from
palpito, to  beat, leap, or throb.  Preter-
naturaUy strong or frequent pulsation
of the heart.
  PA L'PUS.  Palpitation of the heart.
  PALSY.  Paralysis.
  Palsy, Lead.  Paralysis of the hands
caused by  lead poison.
  Palsy,  Mercurial. Mercurial ere-
thrismus.
  PALUS  SANCTUS.   Guaiacum
wood.
  PALUSTRIS.  Palustrine.  Belong-
ing, or relating, to  a marsh, swamp, or
lake.
  PAMPINIFORM. Pampiniformis;
from pampinus, a tendrti, and forma,  a
likeness. Having the form of, or resemb-
ling, a tendril.  In Anatomy, apphed to
the spermatic cord.
   PAMPLE'GIA.   Panplegia; from
ftav, all, and nxriya, I strike.  Paralysis
ofthe whole body.
   PANACEA.   From *av, all, and
axeouai, I  cure.   A pretended universal
 remedy.
   Panacea  Dulcis Holsatia.  Sul-
 phate of potash.
   Panacea  Lapsorum.  Arnica mon-
 tana.
   Panacea Mercurialis. Calomel.
   Panacea  Vegetabilis.   Saffron.
   PANA'DA.   Bread boiled  in water
 to the consistence of pap.
   PANARIS.   Paronychia.
   PANARY.   Pertaining to bread.
   PA'NAX.  The name of a genus of
 plants.
   Panax Qxinciuefo'lium.   Ginseng.
    PANCHYMAGO'GUS. From*a*,
 all, *vfM>s, juice, and ayw, to expel. An 
PAN
575
PAP
epithet applied, by the ancients, to a
medicine which they supposed capable
of purging aU the humors.
  PANCREAS.  From Hav, all, and
xptaj, flesh. A glandular organ situated
in the epigastric region of the abdomen
under the stomach.
  PANCREATIC.   Pancreatkus.—
Belonging, or relating, to the pancreas.
  Pancreatic Duct.  A smaU, white
duct, passing through the pancreas to
the duodenum, into which it discharges
its contents.
  Pancreatic Juice. A fluid secreted
by the pancreas, resembling the saliva,
and conveyed by the pancreatic duct to
the duodenum, to be mixed  with the
chyle.
  Pancreatic Sarcoma. A tumor oc-
curring in lymphatic glands and in the
cellular substance, of the color and con-
sistence ofthe pancreas.
  PANCREATITIS.  Inflammation
of the pancreas.
  PAN'CREATOID. Resembling the
pancreas.
  PANCRENE.  The pancreas.
  PANDALITIUM.  A whitlow.
  PANDEM'IC.   From xav, all, and
Seuos, people.  An  epidemic which at-
tacks the whole population of a place.
  PANDICULATION. Pandicubtio;
from pandere, to stretch out.  Stretch-
ing, such as  occurs at the  commence-
ment of certain paroxysms of fever.
  PAN'ICUM.  The name of a  genus
of grasses.
  Panicum  Ital'icum.  Italian  panic
grass.  Indian millet.
  Panicum Milia'ceum.  The  com-
mon millet.
  PANIS.  Bread.
  Panis Cuculi.   Wood-sorrel.
  Panis Porcinus.  Sow bread.
  PANNICULUS.   From pannus,
cloth.  A term, in Anatomy, applied to
adipose membrane, and to subcutane-
ous muscles  of quadrupeds and birds.
  PAN'NUS.  A  piece of  cloth. In
Surgery, a tent  for a  wound.  Also,
pterygium, and it is sometimes applied,
to an irregular naevus or mark upon the
skin.
  Pannus Hepaticus.  Diffused ephe-
lis, foUowed by  disquamation  of the
skin.
  Pannus Lenticularis.  Ephefis len-
ticularis.
  PANO'CHIA.  Bubo.
  PANOPHO'BIA.   From nav, the
god Pan, a Greek deity, and $>offo$, fear.
Melancholy, characterized by idle fears.
  PANOPHTHALMITIS. From *av,
all, and ophthalmitk, inflammation  of
the eye.  Inflammation  of the whole
eye.
  PANSY.  Viola tricolor.
  PANT'ING.  Dyspncea; difficulty
of breathing.
  PANUS.  A weaver's  roll.  Also, a
glandular sweUing.
  PAPA'VER.   The name of a genus
of plants.
   Papaver Album.  Papaver somnife-
rum.  The white poppy.
  Papaver Nigrum.  The white pop-
py, with black seeds.
   Papaver Officinale.  Papaver som-
niferum.
   Papaver Rhosas.   Papaver errati-
cum.  The red poppy.
   Papaver Somnif'erum.  The white
poppy, from which opium is obtained.
   PAPAW.  The carica papaya.
   PAPILLA.   From pappus, down.
The nipple of the breast.  The term pa-
pilloz, is also apphed to the fine termi-
nations of a nerve, and to small promi-
nent eminences on the surface of certain
parts, as the skin and mucous membrane.
   PAPILLAE CALYCIFORMES.—
The lenticular papillae of the tongue.
See Tongue,
   Papilla, Dental. The small coni-
cal eminences at the bottom of the  den-
tal groove, which constitute the germs
of the teeth in the earliest perceptible
stage of their formation.  See Teeth,
development of pulps and sacs of.
   Papilla Medullares.  SmaU emi-
nences on the medulla oblongata.
   Papilla  of  the Kidney.    The 
               PAR

smaU projections of the apices of the
cones of the  tubular substance of the
kidney, into the pelvis of this organ.
   Papilla  of  the  Tongue.   See
Tongue.
   PAPILLO'SUS.  Pimpled.
   PAP'PUS.  The hair  on the middle
ofthe chin.  Also, seed-down.
   PAP'ULA. A pimple;  a smaU acu-
minated  elevation of the cuticle, with
an inflamed  base,  but containing  no
fluid, nor tending to suppuration.
   PAPULAE.  Pimples; the  first or-
der of cutaneous diseases in Dr.  Wil-
lan's arrangement.
   PAPYRA'CEOUS.  From rtartvpos,
paper.  Of the consistency of paper.
   PAR.  A pair.
   Par Vagum.  The eighth  pair of
nerves.
   PARA-.  Ilapa, near, about.  Used
asaprefix, and signifying,resemblance,
diminution, or defective.
   PARACENTE'SIS.   From rfopo-
xevtea, I pierce  through.   The opera-
tion of tapping  in ascites  and ovarial
dropsy, for the evacuation of the water.
   PARACME. Decline.
   PARACOE.  Dullness of hearing.
   PARA'COPE.  A  slight delirium,
such as sometimes occurs in febrile dis-
eases.
   PARACUSIS.  From rtapa, wrong,
and axova,  to hear.  Confused or im-
perfect audition; depraved hearing.
   Paracusis  Acris.   Painfully acute
hearing.
   Paracusis  Imagina'ria.  Hearing
imaginary sounds.
   Paracusis Imperfecta.  Deafness.
   PARACYNAN'CHE.  Cynanche.
   PARAGEU'SIS.  From *apa, bad-
ly, and ytvw, gustum prozbeo. Depraved
taste.
   PARAGLOS'SA.   A swelling,  or
prolapsus of the tongue.
   PARALY'SIS.  From rcapaxva, I re-
lax.   Palsy.  A loss or diminution of
the power of voluntary motion, in one
or more parts of the body.  Four spe-
cies of paralysis are enumerated by Dr.
6              PAR

CuUen ;  1. Paralysis partialis, or par-
tial palsy.  2. Paralysis hemipkgica, or
palsy affecting one side of the body lon-
gitudinally.  3. Paralysisparaplegica, or
palsy of one half of  the body, taken
transversely.    4.  Paralysis venenata,
when produced by the sedative effects
of poison.
   Paralysis  Agitans.  Shaking pal-
sy.
   Paralysis, Bell's.   Palsy of  the
face arising from a lesion of the portio
dura of the seventh pair of nerves.
   Paralysis Rachialgia.   Colica pic-
tonum.
   Paralysis Spinalis.  Paralysis para-
plegica.
  PARALYTIC  STROKE.   A sud-
den attack of paralysis.
  PARAME'NIA.  From *apa, badly,
and u*iv, the menses.  Disordered men-
struation.
  PARAME'RIA.  The inner part of
the thigh.
  PARAME'SOS.  The annular fin-
ger.
  PARAPHIMOSIS.    From *apa,
about, and $iuoa, I bridle.  Contraction
of the  prepuce behind the  corona, in
such a way as to prevent its return over
the glans.
  PARAPHO'NIA.    From  rtapa,
wrong, and ^avrj, sound.  Change  of
voice;  impaired articulation  of sounds.
  PARA'PHORA.  Slight  delirium.
  PARAPHRENE'SIS.  .  Dehrium;
also, paraphrenitis.
   PARAPHRENIAS.  From *opa,
near, and ppeves, the diaphragm.  Dia-
phragmatitis.
  PARAPHRO'NIA.  Delirium.
  PARAPHRO'SYNE.    Dehrium;
mania.
  Paraphrosyne Temulenta. Delir-
ium tremens.
  PARAPLE'GIA.   Paralysis of the
loAver half of the body.
  PARAPLEURITIS.   Pleurodynia.
  PARAP'OPLEXY.  Parapopkxia;
from rtapa, diminution, and  artoTtXeiux,
apoplexy. False, or slight apoplexy.
5 
PAR
577
PAR
   PARAPSIS.  From *apa, defective,
 and arttouai, I touch.   A  vitiated or
 impaired sense of touch.   A generic
 term, employed by Dr. Good, for dis-
 orders of the sense of touch.
   PARARTHREMA.  A partial lux-
 ation.
   PARASITE. Parasitus ; from *a-
 pa, near, and aitos, corn, food.  A plant
 or animal that is parasitical.
   PARASITICAL. Parasiticus; from
 tapaaitos,  a parasite.  A term applied
 to animals which live  in, or on, the
 bodies  of  other  animals,  as worms,
 polypi,  &c. also, to  plants that derive
 their nourishment from other plants, as
 the mistletoe.
   PARASPA'DIA.  From jtapa, near,
 and urfaw, I draAv.  An opening of the
 urethra at the side of the penis.
   PARASTATES.   From rtapiatyui,
 to stand near.  Situated near together.
 Formerly applied to the epididymis, to
 the prostrate gland, and to the commen ce-
 ment of the vas deferens.
   PARASTATITIS.   Inflammation
 of the epididymis.
   PARASTREM'MA.  From rtapaa-
 tpe$a, I distort or pervert.  Convulsive
 distortion of the face or mouth.
   PARATH'ENAR. From *apa, near,
 and ^wip, the sole of the foot Applied,
 by Winslow, to a portion of the abduc-
 tor of the little  toe, and to the flexor
 brevis of the same.   The first he called
 parathenar major, and the other, parathe-
 nar minor.
   PARATROPHIA. Imperfect nutri-
 tion.
   PAREGORIC.  Paregm-icus;  from
 rtopoyop«w, to mitigate.  An anodyne.
   Paregoric Elixir.  A camphorat-
 ed, aromatic tincture of opium.
   PAREIA.  The cheek.
   PAREPRA BRAVA   A plant, na-
 tive of South America and the West In-
 dies,  having a sweetish, slightly rough
 and bitter taste.
  PARENCEPHALIS.   The cere-
bellum.
  PAREN'CHYMA. From rtapfy™w,
        49
  to suffuse. The texture of glandular or-
  gans, as  that of the liver,  kidney, &c.
  and the spongy tissue which connects
  parts together.   Also, the pulp, which
  forms  the base of the  soft parts of
  plants.
   PAR'ESIS.  A slight paralysis.
   PARPETAL.    Parictalis;   from
 paries, a wall.  A name given to two of
  the bones of the cranium.
   Parietal Bones.  Two flat qudran-
 gular bones, concave below, and con-
 vex above, forming the sides and upper
 part of the cranium.
   PARIETA'RIA.  The name of a
 genus of plants.
   Parietaria Officina'lis. The wall
 pellitory.
   PARI'ETES.  The plural of paries,
 a wall.  Applied to parts which form
 enclosures.
   PARIS. The name of a genus of
 plants.
   Paris Q,uadrifo'lia.   The  herb
 paris, or true love.
   PARISTH'MIA. From  *apa, and
 io9uos, the throat.   The  parts  form-
 ing  the  fauces ;  also, inflammation of
 the fauces.
   PARKHURST,  JABEZ.   Jabez
 Parkhurst, late surgeon dentist, of New
 York, was  born in Newark, New Jersey,
 October 4,  1764.  After receiving a tho-
 rough classical education, he was vari-
 ously employed as a school teacher, mer-
 chant, dentist, and legislator, until 1807,
 when, after having attended lectures  on
 anatomy and surgery and read the best
 works that  were at that time to be had on
 the diseases ofthe mouth, he commenc-
 ed the practice of dental surgery in New
 York,where he soon established the repu-
 tation of a skilful operator, which he en-
 joyed to the day of his death. His amiable
 and winning manners and high literary
 attainments secured for  him the friend-
 ship of all who knew him.  He died  of
 typhus fever, August 29, 1829.
  PARODONTIDES.   From  *apa,
near, and ohovs, a tooth.  Parutis.  See
Javvs, morbid growths of. 
PAR
578
PAR
  PARONIR'IA.   From *apa,  near,
and oveipov, a dream.  Disturbed dream-
ing, and sleep.
  PARONY'CHIA. From *aPa, near,
and ow%, the nail.  A whitlow, or felon,
of the finger.
  PAROP'SIS.    From rtapa, badly,
and o\is, sight.   A generic term, em-
ployed by Dr.  Good, for disorders of
vision.
  Paropsis  Illusoria.  False sight;
perverted  vision.
  Paropsis Lateralis.  Lateral vision;
skew-sigh tedn ess.
  PARORCHID'IUM.  From  Hapa,
near, and  opxihiov, a testicle.   Malposi-
tion of one or both testicles.
  PAROR'CHIDO-ENTEROCELE.
Intestinal  hernia with  displacement of
the testicle.
  PAROS'MIA.  Perverted smell.
  PAROSTIA.   Imperfect  ossifica-
tion.
  PAROTIDE'US. The parotid gland.
  PAROTID GLAND. Glandulapa-
rotidea ; parotis. The largest of the sal-
ivary glands, situated near the ear.  It
is of an irregular form and  fills all that
space between the ramus of the inferior
maxilla and the mastoid process  of the
temporal  bone, and  as  deep back, and
even behind the styloid  process  of the
same bone.  Its  extent of surface  is
from the zygoma above, the angle of the
lower jaw below, and from the mastoid
process and meatus externus behind, to
the masseter muscle in front, overlap-
ping its posterior portion.
   This gland is one of the conglomer-
ate order, and consists of numerous
small granular bodies connected togeth-
er  by cellular tissue, and each of which
may be considered  a  small gland  in
miniature, as each is supplied with an
artery, vein and secretory duct.
   The gland thus formed presents on its
external surface a pale,  flat, and some-
what convex appearance.
   It is covered by a dense strong fascia
extending from the neck,  attached  to
the meatus externus of the ear,  and
sends countless  processes into every
part ofthe gland, separating its lobules.
and conducting the vessels through its
substance.
  The use of this gland is to secrete or
separate from the blood the greater part
of the saliva furnished the mouth.  As
the parotid is, however, on  the outside
and  at some little  distance from the
mouth, it is furnished with  a duct to
convey its fluid  into this cavity—this
duct is called the duct  of steno, or the
parotid duct.
  It is formed of the excretory ducts of
all the granules composing this gland,
which successively uniting together, at
last form  one common duct.
  The duct of Steno commences at the
anterior part of the gland, and passes
over the  masseter muscle,  on a line
drawn from  the lobe of the ear to the
middle part of the upper lip, then pass-
es through a quantity  of soft adipose
matter, and finally enters the mouth by
passing through the buccinator muscle
and  mucous membrane  opposite the
second molaris of the upper jaw.
  PARMENTIER'S ASTRINGENT
GARGLE.  Take oak bark, § i;  river
water, fti;  sulph. alum, 5i; honey
of roses,  3 i.
  PARMLY, ELEAZAR.  An Es-
say on the Disorders and Treatment of
the Teeth, by. London and New York,
1822. The above work contains much
useful information.—Addresses to the
Graduating  Class of the Baltimore Col-
lege of Dental Surgery, at the seventh
and  eighth  Annual Commencements.
Baltimore, 1847  and 1848. Dr. Parmly
is also the author of several  addresses,
delivered before  the American Society
of Dental Surgeons,  and of Notes  to
Brown's Dentologia, and of Notes to an
edition of Hunter's Treatise on the Nat-
ural History and  Diseases ofthe Human
Teeth, published in the Library part of
the first volume ofthe American Journal
of Dental Science, as well as of a Paper
on the use of Amalgam, published in the
New York Medical and Surgical Jour- 
PAR               579                PAS
nal,  in  which he opposes the use  of
this  article.  Besides the above, Dr.  P.
is the author of several other well Avrit-
ten articles upon the same subject.
  PARMLY, LEVI S.  A Practical
Guide to the Management of the Teeth,
5k,c, by. Philadelphia, 1819 —Lectures
on the Natural History  and Manage-
ment of the Teeth; the Cause of their
Decay, &c, by.   New York, 1821.—
Dissertation on the Management of the
Mouth  and  Teeth,  read  before  the
American Society of Dental Surgeons,
August, 1841, and published in Ameri-
can Journal of Dental Science, volume
second.  This last paper is chiefly de-
voted to dental hygiene, and contains
much valuable information upon the
subject.
  PAROTIDON'CUS. From rtap^tis,
the  parotid, and oyxos, a tumor.    A
swelling of the parotid gland.
  PAROTIS.  Inflammation and swell-
ing  of the parotid gland.   Also, the
gland itself.
  PAROTITIS.  From parotis, the
parotid  gland, and itk, inflammation.
Cynanche parotidea;  the mumps.
  PAROXYSM.  Paroxysmus;  from
rtapot-wa, 1 irritate.  The occurrence at
regular or irregular intervals of an ob-
vious increase in  the symptoms of a dis-
ease. Also, a periodical attack  or fit  of
a disease, as in intermittent fevers, neu-
ralgia, &c.
  PAROXYS'MAL.   Applied  to  a
disease attended with paroxysms.
  PARSLEY.   Apium petroselinum.
  Parsley, Stone. Amomum verum.
  PARSNIP.  Pastinacasativa.
  PARTHENTUS.  From rtap9evos,a
virgin.  A disease of a young female.
Also, chlorosis.
  PARTRIDGE-BERRY.  Gaulthe-
ria.
  PARTURITION.  The expulsion  of
the fetus and its appendages.
  PARULIS.   From *apa, near, and
ovslov, the gum. Inflammation, swelling
or abscess  in the gum.  See  Alveolar
Abscess.                            i
   PARU'RIA.  From *apa, defective-
 ly, and oupsco, I pass urine.   A morbid
 secretion or discharge of urine.
   PASCH.  Treatise from Surgery on
 the Teeth, by.  Vienna, 1767.
   PAS'MA.  A dry  powder employed
 by the ancients to sprinkle over the
 body, and on ulcers.
   PASSIFLO'RA.   The name  of a
 genus  of plants.
   Passiflora Laurifo'lia.  The bay-
 leaved passion-flower.
   Passiflora  Malifor'mis.   Apple-
 shaped granadilla.
   PASSIO.  Applied,  in Medicine, to
 a disease or affection.
   Passio Hysterica.  Hysteria.
   Passio Ileaca.  Ileac passion.
   PASSION.  Passio;  from potior, to
 suffer.  An affection of the  mind, as
 desire, hope, fear, joy, grief, anger,
 love, hatred, &c.
   PASS'IVE.  Passivus. A term ap-
 plied to disease in which there is no
 apparent reaction, or which seems to
 be dependent on a diminution of the
 vital energy.
   PAS'SUM.  Raisin wine.
   PASTA. A lozenge.
   PASTE.  A  soft  compound medi-
 cine. In Dental Surgery, a term applied
 to a number of preparations, employed
 in a soft state, for filling teeth.
   Paste  for  Easing  Pains  of  the
 Teeth, Bourdet's.  1$.—Opium, grs.
 iij; cloves in powder; gall-nuts, in
 poAvder, a a, grs. x; red earth, grs. xv;
 camphor, grs. x, and as  much anodyne
 drops as may be necessary to make into
 a thick paste.   It is directed to be ap-
 plied to the cavity of  the aching tooth.
  Paste  for  the  Teeth and Gums,
 Fauchard's.    1$.—Red coral, § iij ;
 dragon's-blood,  in  tears, § i;  seeds of
 mother of pearl and  cuttle-fish bone,
 a a, § ss;  crab's-eyes, bole, armenian,
 red earth, calcined hemalite, pumice-
stone,  a a, | iij ; calcined alum, 3 i.—
Reduce to an impalpable powder, in-
corporate with a sufficient quantity of
clarified honey to make a paste of soft 
PAT
580
PEC
consistence; add four  or five drops of
the oti of cinnamon, and as much oil of
cloves.  It is directed to be used on a
fine sponge, with which the teeth are
to be rubbed up and down, outside and
inside, once  or twice a  week.  Two
other  and very similar formulae are
given by the  same author,  but  Ave do
not think it necessary to copy them.
   Paste, Mineral. See Amalgam.
   PASTILLUM.  From pasta, a loz-
enge.  A compound medicine, composed
of sugar and mucilage, Avith  essential
oil, or some other ingredient.
   PASTINA'CA.  The parsnip. Also,
the name of a genus of plants.
   Pastinaca Opop'anax.   The plant
which produces the opopanax.
   Pastinaca Sati'va. The garden pars-
nip.
   PATELLA.  Diminutive of patina,
a dish.  The knee-pan. A small flat
bone  situated at the fore  part  of the
knee joint.
   PATHE'MA.  Emotion; affection;
disease.
   Pathema Animi.  The passions of
the mind.
   PATHET'ICUS.   Pathetic;  from
7ta9os, an affection. Pertaining to the
passions.
   PATHETIC NERVE.  The fourth
pair of nerves.
   PATHOG'ENY. Pathogenia; from
7ta9os, a disease, and yeveais, generation.
That part of pathology which relates to
the origin and development of disease.
   PATHOGNOMONIC.   Pathogno-
monicus;  from 7ta9os,  a  disease, and
yivaaxa, I know.   Applied to the signs
 which characterize a disease.
   PATHOLOGY.  Pathologia; from
 xados, a disease, and xoyos, a discourse.
That branch of medical science Avhich
 treats of the nature of disease. It is
 divided into general and special. The
former regards  diseases in general, and
the latter, individual diseases.
   PATHOLOGICAL  ANATOMY.
The anatomy of diseased structures.
   PATHOMA'NIA.   A morbid per-
version of the natural feelings,  habits,
disposition and affections.
  PATHOS.  An affection; a disease.
  PATOR NA'RIUM.   The cavities
of the nose.
  PAULI.   Dissertation  on the Pain
of the Teeth, by.  Haffnia, 1570.
  PAULLIN'IA.  The name af a ge-
nus  of sapindaceous plants.  Also, a
medicine recently introduced into Eu-
rope from Brazil, and prepared from
the seed of the paullinia sorbilk.
  Paullinia Sorbilis. The name of a
South American plant
  PAVILION OF THE  EAR.  The
expanding portion of the ear.
  PAVO CRISTATUS.  The  pea-
fowl.
  PEA.  Pisum sativum.
  PEACH.   Amygdalus  persica.
  PEAR.  Pyrus communis.
  PEARL.   A small  calcareous con-
cretion, of a bright silvery Avhite color,
found in the shell of the avicula marga-
ritifera.
   Pearl Ash.  The  potash of com-
merce.
  Pearl Barley. Hordeum perlatum.
  PEASE,  W. A.  Author of a Re-
port of a Case of Molar and Maxillary
Absorption;   published   in the New
York Dental Recorder.
   PECCANT  HUMORS.  Diseased
fluids or secretions.
   PECHED'ION.  The perineum.
   PECHYAGRA.   From rt^uj, the
elbow, and aypa, a seizure. Gout in the
elbow.
   PE'CHYS.  The elbow.
   PECTIN.  A principle which forms
the basis of  vegetable jelly.
   PECTINALIS.  From pecten, the
pubes. A small muscle, extending from
the  pubes to a little below  the lesser
trochanter of the os femoris.
   PECTINATE.  Pectinatus;  from
pecten, a comb. Comb-like; applied to
the  facicular  texture  observed in the
 right auricle of the heart.
   PECTIM'BRANCHIATA. From
pectin, a comb, and bronchia, gills. The 
PED
581
PEL
order of gasteropods, in which the gills
are shaped hke a comb.
  PECTINOUS.   Belonging, or rela-
ting, to pectine.
  PECTORAL. Pectoralis ; from pec-
tus, the breast. Belonging, or relating,
to the breast.
   Pectoral Moss.  Lichen pulmona-
rius.
   PECTORALIS MAJOR.  A broad,
thick muscle of the breast.
   Pectoralis Minor.  A small  mus-
cle occupying the anterior and upper
part of the chest.
   PECTORILOQUY.  From pectus,
the breast, and loquor, to speak. Speech
coming, as it were, from the chest.  A
morbid phenomenon, consisting in the
direct issue of the voice, distinctly ar-
ticulated, from the point of the chest on
which the ear or stethescope is placed,
indicating the existence of ulcerated
cavities in the substance of the lungs.
   PECTUS.  The breast.
   PEDE'SIS. Pulsation.
   PEDTCLE. A smaU stalk.
   PEDICULA'RIS.  The name of a
genus of plants; lousewort, so called,
from the supposition that it engenders
lice in the animals that feed upon it.
   PEDICULUS. The louse.  A genus
of parasitic insects.   Three species in-
fest the  human  body; namely, the
body-buse; the head-buse, and the pubic
or crab-louse.
   PEDICUS. The extensor brevis di-
gitorum pedis.
   PEDIFORM.  From pes,  a foot.
Shaped like a foot.
   PEDILU'VIUM.  From pedes, the
feet, and lavo, I wash. A foot-bath.
   PEDION.  The sole of the foot.
   PEDORA. The sordes of the eyes,
ears and feet.
   PEDUN'CLE.  Pedunculus;  from
pes, the foot.  In Botany, the  flower-
stalk.  In  Anatomy, a slender  process
or prolongation of medullary substance
which connects parts.
   Peduncle of a Dental Sac.   See
Gubernaculum Dentis.
         49*
  Peduncles  of the  Brain.   The
crura cerebri.
  Peduncles  of the  Cerebellum.
Crura posteriora medullae oblongata;.
  Peduncles  of the Medulla Ob-
longata.  The corpora restiformia.
  PEGANEL^E'ON. Oil of rue.
  PEGA'NUM.  The name of a genus
of plants.
  Peganum Har'mala. The Assyrian
Avild rue.
  PELICAN.   An instrument  used
by the older dentists for the extraction of
teeth, and although iUy  calculated for
the purpose, is said to be stiU used in
the north of Europe.  It consists of a
handle, made  of wood,  ivory, iron or
steel, flattened on two sides,  with  a
blunt, rounded, and  serrated extremi-
ty, to serve as a  fulcrum. The other
end,  intended to be  received in the
hand, is round or oval.  To the middle,
a long hook is screwed,  bearing some
resemblance to the beak of a pelican,
and hence the name which the instru-
ment has received. This hook passes in
front of the fulcrum extremity of the
handle sufficiently, to admit the tooth to
be extracted, between them.  As  with
the key instrument, several hooks, va-
rying in size, are required.  An engrav-
ing of this instrument is given by  Fau-
chard, and  several other  French au-
thors.  There is  also in the museum of
the Baltimore College of Dental Surge-
ry,  an instrument of this description,
though of a somewhat  more  modern
date.
   PELIO'MA. From ttexo$,black. An
echymosis of a livid color.
   PEL'LAGRA.  Pelagra.  Elephan-
tiasis Italica.   A species of scaly ery-
sipelas of the hands, which sometimes
extends to the feet and face.
   PELLI'CLE.  Pellicula ; from pellis,
the  skin.   The delicate  membrane
which lines the sheU of an egg, or in-
vests the seed of plants.   In  Medicine,
a   delicate  membranous  production.
Also, the film which sometimes forms
on the surface of urine. 
              PEN               5£

  PELLITORY. Xanthoxylumfrax-
ineum.
  Pellitory, Bastard. Achillea ptar-
mica.
  Pellitory of Spain. Anthemis py-
rethrum.
  PEL'VIC. Pelvicus. Belonging, or
relating, to the pelvis.
  Pelvic Aponeurosis  A tendinous
expansion attached to  the brim of the
pelvis.
  PELVI-TROCHANTE'RIC. That
which relates to the pelvis and greater
trochanter.
  PELVIS.   From rteXvs, a basin. An
irregular bony cavity, of  a conoidal
shape, formed by the  two ossa  inno-
minata, the os sacrum, and os coccygis,
open above and below, and containing
the rectum and urinary bladder and the
internal organs of generation.
  Pelvis Auris.  The cochlea of the
ear.
  Pelvis Cerebri.  The infundibu-
lum of the brain.
  Pelvis of the Kidney.   A mem-
branous cavity situated in the posterior
part  of the fissure of the kidney, be-
tween the principal branches of the re-
nal artery and vein, and at the superior
part of the ureter, with Avhich it is con-
tinuous.
  PENTA'CRINITE.   From nevte,
five, and xpivov,  lily.  A pedunculated
star-fish, with five rays.   Most of the
species are extinct.
  PEMTHIGUS.  From  rteu&Z,   a
bubble.   A   cutaneous disease,  con-
sisting of vesicles, fiUed with a trans-
parent,  peUucid  fluid,  scattered  over
the body.   The  vesicles, after some
days' duration, break and terminate in a
scab, though frequently they ulcerate.
  PEMPHIX.   A bubble or vesicle.
  PEN2E'A.  The name of a genus of
plants.
  Penaa Mucrona'ta.    See Sarco-
colla.
  Penaa Sarcocolla. See Sarcocolla.
  PENCILLIFORM.   Having  the
form or shape of a pencil.
52               PEP

   PENICILLUS.  Penkillum; dimi-
 nutive of pcniculum, a brush.  In .Sur-
 gery, a tent or  pledget.  In Anatomy,
 the secreting extremities of the vena
 portae are called penkilli.
   PEN'DULOUS.   Pendant;  hang-
 ing down.
   PEN'ETRATING.   Penetrans;—
 from penetrare, to pierce, or enter into.
 Applied to  medicines  which are sup
 posed to  pass through the pores of  the
 skin,  and stimulate.  Also, to wounds,
 which penetrate the splanchnic cavities.
   PENIS.   A  tail; from  pendere, to
 hang  down.   Membrun virile.   An
 erectile,  cylindrical  organ, belonging
 exclusively  to  the  male sex, situated
 before and beneath the symphises pubis.
   Penis Cerebri.  The pineal gland.
   Penis Muilie'bris.  The clitoris.
   PEN'NIFORM. Penniformis; from
 penna, a pen.  Having the form of a
 pen or feather.
   PENNYROYAL.   Mentha  pule-
 gium; hedeoma pulegioides.
   Pennyroyal, Hart's.  Mentha  cer-
 vina.
   PENTAN'DRI A.  Pentandrous ;—
 from Ttevte, five, and ar^p, a husband.
 Applied to plants which have hermaph-
 rodite flowers,  and five male organs
 or stamens.
   PENTAPHAR'MACON.    From
 rtevte, five, and $apuaxov, remedy. Any
 medicine consisting of five ingredients.
   PEONY.  Paeonia officinalis.
   PEPO.  From rtento, to ripen.  The
 common pumpkin.
   PEPPER. Piper.
   Pepper, Black.  Piper nigrum.
   Pepper,  Cayenne.  Capsicum  an-
 nuum.
   Pepper, Jamaica.  Myrtus pimenta.
   Pepper, Poor Man's.  Polygonum
 hydropiper.
   Pepper, Wall.  Sedum acre.
   Pepperidge Bush. Berberis vulgaris.
   PEPPERMINT.  Mentha piperita.
   PEPPERWORT.  Lepidium iberis.
   PEP'SIN. Pepsine; from rtertta, to
 digest.  A peculiar substance, which,
5 
PER
583
PER
in combination Avith the gastric acids,
is supposed to constitute the proper di-
gestive solvent.  It acts like a ferment.
  PEPTIC.   Peptkus.  Digestive.
  PERCEPTION.   Pcrceptio.   The
act of receiving the knowledge of exter-
nal impressions made on the organs of
sense.
  PERCHLORIC ACID. Hyperchlo-
ric acid.
  PERCOLATION.  From pcrcolare,
to strain through. In Pliarmacy, the act
of straining or filtering.
  PERCUS'SION.  From pcrculio, to
strike.  The act of  striking one body
against another.  In  diseases of  the
chest, it is used as a means of diagno-
sis, and, also, sometimes in  diseases of
the teeth.
  PERCUTEUR A MARTEAU.—
The name of an instrument employed
by Baron Heurteloup, in the operation
of lithotrity.
  PEREN'NIAL. Perennk; from^er,
and annus, a year. Applied, in Botany,
to plants which continue more  than
two years.
  Perennial Worm-Grass. Thespi-
gelia marilandica.
  PERFOLIATE.   A term  designa-
tive of leaves which surround the stem
at their base.
  PER'FORANS.   From perforore,
to bore  through. A term  applied, in
Anatomy,  to muscles  whose tendons
pass through openings in the tendons of
other muscles.
  Perforans Casserii Nervus.  The
external cutaneous nerve.
  Perforans Profundus.  Flexor lon-
gus digitorum pedis profundusperforans.
  Perforans  Vulgo  Profundus.—
Flexor profundus perforans.
  PERFORATION. Perforatio; from
perforore,  to pierce.  An  opening in
the continuity of the parietes of  a hol-
Ioav organ.
  PERFORATOR.  An obstetrical
instrument.
  PERFORATUS.  Applied to mus-
cles or tendons which  have an opening
through their fibres for other parts to
pass through them.
  PERGAMEN'EOUS.   From per-
gamen, parchment.  Having the tex-
ture of parchment.
  PERI-. A prefix, from rtepi, around,
on  all sides, signifying,  enveloping,
round about, as the dental periosteum,
8tc.
  PERLE'RESIS. From *fpt, about,
and aipea, I take aAvay.  A circular in-
cision about  a tumor.
  PERIBLEP'SIS. From rtepi, around,
and fixetta, I look.  The wild look ob-
served in persons laboring under deli-
rium.
  PERIBRO'SIS.  From Ttepi, around,
and fipaaxa, I eat.  Ulceration of the
corners of the eyelids.
  PERICARDITIS.   From Ttepixap-
Siov, the pericardium, and itis,  inflam-
mation.  Inflammation of the pericar-
dium.
  PERICAR'DIUM. From Hepi,about,
and xapSta,  the heart  The membra-
nous sac which envelops the heart.
  PERICARP.  From rtepi, about, and
xaprtoj,  a seed.  The covering of the
seed of plants; the seed vessel.
  PERICHONDRIUM.  From jtepi,
about, and  ^oj/Spoj, a cartilage.  The
fibrous  membrane  which  covers the
non-articular cartilages.
  PERICNE'MIA.   From  rt*pt, a-
round, and xvyuq, the tibia. The parts
surrounding the tibia.
  PERICRA'NIUM.     From  **pt,
around, and xpoi/tov, the cranium. The
external periosteum ofthe cranium.
  PERIDIASTOLE. The almost im-
perceptible period or interval which suc-
ceeds to the diastole of the heart.
  PERIGLOTTIS.  The  epiglottic
gland.
  PERIG/RAPHE. The linccc trans-
versa; of the rectus abdominis muscle.
  PERIMYSIUM. The cellular mem-
brane that covers a muscle or its faci-
culi.
  PERIN.  From rtrjpa, a sac or pouch.
This  word  has  various significations. 
PER
584
PER
 It is used by some to designate the testi-
 cle, by others the scrotum, and by others
 again, the perineum.
   PERINEOCELE.  Hernia in the
 perineum.
   PERINiEUS TRANSVERSUS.—
 The transversus perinaei.
   PERINE'AL.   Belonging, or relat-
 ing, to the perineum.
   PERINEUM.   The space between
 the  anus and genital organs.
   PERINEU'RION.   The  neurilem-
 ma.
   PERIOD.   Periodus;  from  rtepi,
 about, and oSoj, way.   A stated time;
 the time of the exacerbation and remis-
 sion, or of the paroxysm and intermis-
 sion of a disease.  The different phases
 of a disease are caUed periods, as the
 invasion, augmentation, height, decline,
 and  termination.
   PERIODICITY.  The tendency of
 certain phenomena to occur after longer
 or shorter intervals.
   PERIODONTITIS.   From rtepi,
 about,  oSovs, a tooth, and itis, inflam-
 mation.  Inflammation of the alveolo-
 dental periosteal tissue.  See Odontalgia.
   PERIODYNTA. From rtepi, around,
 andoSwt], pain.  An acute circumscrib-
 ed pain.
  PERIORBITA. From rtepi, around,
 and orbita, the orbit.  The  periosteum
 of the orbit.
  PERIOSTEUM. Perwsteon; from
 itepi, around, and oateov, a bone.   A
 white,  fibrous membrane, which sur-
 rounds all the bones of the body, ex-
 cept the crowns of the teeth.
  Periosteum Dentium.  The perios-
 teum of the teeth.
  PERIOSTITIS.  Inflammation  of
 the periosteum.
  PERIOSTO'SIS.  A tumor of the
 periosteum.
  PERIOSTRACUM.   From nepi,
 around, oatpaxov, sheU.  The membra-
nous covering of shells, which is analo-
gous to scarf skin.
  PERIPH'ERY.  From rtepi, around,
and $fp«,  to bear.  The  circumfer-
 ence of a circle; the outside ofthe body,
 or of any object.
   PERIPH'IMOSIS.  Paraphimosis.
   PERIPLEUMO'NIA.     Peripneu-
 monia.
   PERIPLYSIS.   Profiuvium.   An
 excessive discharge.
   PERIPNEUMONIA   From  rtepi,
 around, and mevuav, the lung. Inflam-
 mation of the lungs.
   PERIPYE'MA.   From rtfPi, about,
 and rtvov, pus.  Suppuration around an
 organ.  This frequently occurs around
 a tooth.
   PERIRRHffiA.  From rtspi, about,
 and p«w, I flow. An afflux or determina
 tion of fluids towards an organ.  Also,
 enuresis.
  PER1SPHALSIS.   From  nepi,
 about, and  afyaxxa, I  move.  Circum-
 duction ; a motion given to a luxated
 bone for the purpose of reducing it.
  PERISTALTIC.   Perktaltkus ;—
 from nepiateXXa, to involve.  The ver-
 micular motion of the intestines,  by
 which they contract and force the chyle
 downward to the mouths of the lacteals
 and the feces to the anus.
  PERISTAPHYLI'NUS EXTER-
 NUS.  The circumflexus palati.
  Peristaphylinus Internus.  The
 lavator palati.
  PERISTAPHYLO-PHARYNGE-
 US.  The  upper part of the palato-
 pharyngeus muscle.
  PERISTE'RIUM.   Verbena offici-
 nalis.
  PERISTER'NA.  From rtepi, about,
 and atepvov, the sternum.  The lateral
 portions of the thorax.
  PERISTOLE.  From nepi, around,
 and atexxa, I contract, I close.  The
 peristaltic motion of the intestines.
  PERISTRO'MA.  Peristoma;  from
 rtepi, around, and at pawvui, to spread.
 The inner or mucous coat of the intes-
 tines.
  PERISYSTOLE. From rtepi, about,
and avatoxr;, a contraction.   The pause
or interval between the contraction and
dilation of the heart 
PER              585               PES
  PERITOM'E.  Circumcision.
  PERITONE'UM. From tepi, around,
and teiva, I stretch.   The serous mem-
brane which surrounds all the abdomi-
nal viscera, and hnes the cavity of the
abdomen.
  PERITONITIS.   Inflammation  of
the peritoneum.
  Peritonitis Typhoha'mic.  Puer-
peral fever.
  PERITRE'MA.  From rtepi, around,
and tprma, hole.  The raised margin
Avhich surrounds the breathing holes of
scorpions.
  PERITYPHLITIS.   From rtepi,
around, and typhlitk, inflammation of
the caecum. Inflammation of the cel-
lular tissue Avhich surrounds the caecum.
  PERIWINKLE.  Vinca minor.
  PERIZO'MA. A  bandage; a gir-
dle ; also, a truss.
  PERLA.  A  pearl.
  PERMANENT.    Persistent;  last-
ing ; remaining in the same state.
  PERMEABILITY. From permeo,
to pass through.  Applied to membra-
nous and cellular tissues which  permit
gases and fluids  to pass through them.
   PERNIO.  A chilblain.
  PEROMELIA.  From rtepos, want-
ing, and uexos,  a  limb.   Congenital
want of a limb.
  PERONEAL.   Peronozus;  from
rtepovv, the fibula.  Belonging, or relat-
ing, to the fibula.
  Peroneal Artery.  The fibular ar-
tery.
  Peroneal  Muscles.   These  are
three in number. 1. The peroneus bre-
vis.  2. The peroneus  longus.   3. The
peroneus tertius.
  Peroneal  Nerve.   The external
popliteal nerve.
  PERONE'US.   Belonging  to the
fibula.
  Peroneus Brevis.  A muscle situ-
ated beneath the peroneus longus.
  Peroneus Longus.  A  long, thick
muscle situated at the outer part of the
leg.
  Peroneus Tertius.  A muscle situ-
ated at the anterior, outer, and inferior
part of the leg.
  PEROX'YD.   The combination of
a simple body with the largest portion
of oxygen it is capable of absorbing.
  PEROSPLANCH'NICA.     From
rt?7poj,wanting, and artxayxvov, a viscus.
Congenital misconstruction or want of
a portion ofthe viscera.
  PERSIM'MON. Diospyrosvirginia-
na.
  PERSISTENT.   Persistens.   Per-
manent,  lasting.   Mr. Thomas Bell
applies this term to three of the mem-
branes of the teeth.   1. The internal
periosteum; 2. The investing perioste-
um of the root, and 3. The periosteum
of the alveolus.   The other membranes
of the teeth, which are the two lamel-
lae of the  sac, he regards as deciduous.
  PERSONATA.  Arctium lappa.
  PERSPIRATION.  Perspiratio ;—
from  per,  through,   and  spirare, to
breathe, exhale.  The insensible trans-
piration  of the fluids of the body con-
tinually carried on at  the surface  of the
skin.  When this fluid is  condensed
into sensible moisture, it is called sweat.
Also, the matter perspired.
  PERSULPHATE.   Persulphas.—
The sulphate of a peroxyd.
  PERTURBATION. From pertur-
bo, to disturb.   Disturbance of the nat-
ural course of a disease, by the employ-
ment of very active therapeutic agents.
  PERTUS'SIS.  From per, much,
and tussis, cough.  The hooping cough.
  PERUVIAN  BALSAM.  A resin-
ous  substance of a fragrant odor, ob-
tained from  the  myroxylon  peruife-
rum.
  PERUVIAN  BARK.  Cinchona.
  PERVER'SION.   From per,  and
vertere, to turn.  A morbid change.—
Also, a diseased state of the humors.
  PURVIGILIUM.  From per-, much,
and vigilo, to watch.  Want of  sleep;
watching.
  PES.  The foot.
  Pes Alexandrinus.  The  Spanish
chamomile, or pellitory of Spain. 
PET
586
PHA
  Pes  Anseri'nus.     The  radiated
branches of the portio dura on the side
of the face.
  Pes  Colombi'nus.   Geranium  ro-
tundifolium.
  Pes Equinus.   Club-foot."
  PESSARY.  Pessarium; from rtea-
oos, a  small  stone.    An  instrument,
made of wood, ivory, or caoutchouc,
and introduced into the vagina to sus-
tain the uterus in cases of prolapsus of
this organ.
  PESSULUS.   A pessary.
  PEST'ILENCE.   Pestilentia ; from
pestis, plague. The  plague ; any epi-
demic, contagious or infectious disease
of a fatal character.
  PESTILENTIAL.  Pestilentialis;
from pestk, plague.   Relating  to  the
plague; applied to diseases which  are
of an epidemic and malignant character.
  PESTIS.  From  perdo, to destroy.
The plague; a malignant and  conta-
gious typhoid fever.
  Pestis Bellica.   Typhus gravior.
   Pestis Nigra.  The black plague of
Asia which- occurred in the fourteenth
century.
   PESTORFF.  Dissertation on Diffi-
cult Dentition, by.  Ultr, 1699.
   PETAL.  Petolum ; from rtetaa, to
expand. A flower leaf.
   PET A SITES. Tussilago petasites.
   PETE'CHIA. Peticula.  A  small
spot upon the skin,  of a red or  purple
color,  resembling a  flea-bite, and  oc-
curring" in the progress  of mahgnant
fevers.
   Petechia  Sine  Febre.   Purpura
simplex.
   PETECHIAL.  Affected with, or
resembling, petechias.
   Petechial Scurvy.  Scorbutus.
   PET'IOLAR.  Petioloris.  Pertain-
ing to, or proceeding from, a petiole, or
leaf-stalk.
   PET'IOLATE.  Having  a petiole,
or leaf-stalk.
   PETI'OLUS.  From petolum, a leaf.
The leaf-stalk of a plant.
   PETROLEUM.  Petrelozum; from
rtetpa, a rock, and oleum, oil.  A brown
liquid bituminous substance.
  Petroleum  Barbadense.  Burba-
does tar.
  PETRO-OCCIPITAL.   Belonging
to the petrous portion of the temporal,
and to the occipital bone.
  Petro-Pharyngaus.  The constric-
tor pharyngis superior.
  Petro-Salpingo-Paryngeus.   The
levator palati mollis.
  Petro-Salpingo-Staphylinus. The
levator palati.
  Petro-Sphenoidal  Suture.     A
small suture between the anterior edge
of the petrous  portion of the temporal
bone and the  posterior edge of  the
sphenoid.
  PETROSUM, OS.  From rtetpa, a
rock. The petrosus, one of the portions
of the temporal bone is so  called from
its great hardness.
  PETROUS GANGLION. The pe-
trosal ganglion.   A ganglion of  the
glosso-pharyngeal  nerve, formed soon
after it escapes from the jugular fossa.
  PETUM.  Nicotiana tabacum.
  PEUCEDANUM.  The name of a
genus of  plants.
  Peucedanum Officina'le.   Hog's
fennel.    ,
  Peucedanum  Sil'aus.    MeadoAV
saxifrage.
  PEWTER.  An  alloy of antimony
and tin, Avith a little  copper.
  PEYER'S GLANDS.  Peyeri glan-
dules.  The small clusters of glands  or
follicles beneath the  villous coat of the
intestines.
  PEZIZA.  The name of a genus of
fungi.
  Peziza Auric'ula.   Jew's  ears;
an  astringent membranaceous fungus,
so called  from its resemblance  to the
human ear.
  PHACI.  Ephelides.
  PHACITIS.  From $>axoj, a lens,
and itk,  inflammation.  Inflammation
of the crystalline lens.
  PHACOHYMENITIS.   From <pa-
xos, a lens, vuijv, a membrane, and itis, 
PHA
587
PHA
inflammation.   Inflammation of the
capsule of the crystalline lens.
  PHAGEDENA.  From  ibaya, I
eat.  A rapidly spreading ulcer. Also,
a canine appetite.
  Phagedana Gangrenosa.  Hospital
gangrene.
  PHAGEDENIC.  A term applied
to a corroding and rapidly spreading
ulcer.  Also, an escharotic.
  PHALACRO'SIS.  Baldness.
  PHALANGO'SIS.  An affection of
the eyelids in which the lashes  are  ar-
ranged in tAvo roAvs.
  PHALANX.  From <j>a7iay|, a row
of soldiers.   In Anatomy, the small
bones of the fingers  and toes are called
phalanges, because  they are arranged
along side of each other tike a phalanx.
  PHALARIS.  The name  of a ge-
nus of plants.
  Phalaris  Canarien'sis.    Canary
grass.
  PHALLOCARCINO'MA.    From
qaxxos, the male  organ, and xapxn/«^a,
cancer.  Cancer of the penis.
  PHALLUS.  The penis.
  PHANEROGAMOUS.   Phanero-
gamia; from favepos, distinct, and  ya-
uos, marriage.  A term used, in Botany,
to designate plants which  have visible
fioAvers, containing stamens  and pis-
tiles.
  PHANTAS'MA.  Phantasm; from
$avta£a, I make appear.   A morbid
phenomenon, consisting in the percep-
tion of imaginary objects.
  PHARMACEUTIC.    Pharmaceu-
tkus; from  fyapuaxov, a medicine. Per-
taining to pharmacy.
  PHARMACIEN.  An apothecary.
  PHARMACOCHYM'IA.    From
tyapuaxov, a medicine, and xrjueia, chem-
istry.  Pharmaceutical chemistry.
  PHARMACOGNO'SIA. From<j>ap-
uaxov, a  medicine,  ywooxw,  I  knoAV.
That part of pharmacy which  treats of
simple medicines.
  PHARMACOL'OGY.  Plmrmacol-
ogia;  from tyapuaxov,  a  medicine, and
a.oyo$,  a discourse.  A treatise on, or
the doctrine of, medicinal agents.  Ma-
teria medica.
  PHARMACOPOEIA.  From «j>ap-
uaxov, a medicine, and rtoiea, I make.
Literally, the art of preparing medicines.
A book containing a coUection of medi-
cinal formulae, Avith a description ofthe
process for the preparation of each.  A
dispensatory.
  PHARMACOP'OLIST.   A drug-
gist.
  PHARMACOPOLI'UM. From^ap-
uaxov,  a medicine, and rtuXea, I sell.
The shop of the druggist; a drug store.
  PHARMACOPO'SIA.    A  liquid
medicine.
  PHARMACOTHE'CA.   A medi-
cine case, or chest.
  PHAR'MACY.  Pliarmacia; from
fyapuaxov, a medicine.  The art of select-
ing, preserving and preparing therapeu-
tical agents.
  PHARYNGEAL.    Pharyngeus;
from <3>apuy!, the pharynx.  Pertaining
to, or implicating, the pharynx.
  Pharyngeal Arteries.  These are
two in number, the superior, and infe-
rior.  The superior is a branch of the
internal maxiUary, and sends a branch
through the pterygo-palatine foramen
to supply  the arch of the  palate and
contiguous parts.   The inferior is  a
branch ofthe external carotid, and sends
off several branches,  in  its course up-
wards toAvards the basis ofthe cranium,
to the  pharynx and contiguous deep-
seated parts.
  Pharyngeal Nerve. This nerve is a
branch of the pneumogastric, and is dis-
tributed to the pharynx.   It  communi-
cates with the glosso-pharyngeal, divides
into a number of branches, which unite
with branches of other nerves, forming
a network of filaments Avhich constitute
the pharyngeal plexus.
  PHARYNGITIS.  Inflammation of
the pharynx.
  Pharyngitis, Diphtheric.    Diph-
theric inflammation of the pharynx, or
inflammation accompanied by the  for-
mation of false membranes. 
PHA               588              PHL
  Pharyngitis, Follic'ular. Inflam-
mation and enlargement of the follicles
ofthe pharynx, extending sometimes to
the larynx.
  PHARYNGOCELE.   From  $o-
pvyi, the pharynx, and xrfKri,  a  tumor.
A morbid enlargement of the  pharynx
and gullet.
  PHARYNGO-GLOSSAL. Pertain-
ing to the pharynx and tongue.
  PHARYNGOPLE'GIA.  From^a
puyl, the pharynx, and rtxrjaaa, I strike.
Paralysis of the pharynx.
   PHARYNGO-STAPHYLINUS.—
The palato-pharyngeus muscle.
   PHARYNGOT'OME.   Pharyngo-
tomus ; from ^apuyl, the pharynx, and
teuva, I cut An instrument for scarify-
ing the tonsils.
   PHARYNGOTOMY.  Pharyngo-
tomia.  The operation of cutting into
the pharynx.  Also, of scarifying  the
tonsils.
   PHARYNX.  The musculo-mem-
branous  sac  at  the back part of the
mouth, which terminates  in  the oeso-
phagus.  It is invested with a strong
fascia, which serves to connect it to the
basilar process of the occipital, and the
petrous portions of the temporal bones.
There are seven foramina which open
into it; namely, the two posterior nares,
the two  eustachian tubes, the  mouth,
larynx, and oesophagus.
   PHASE'OLUS.   The  name of  a
genus of plants.
   Phaseolus Vulga'ris.   The kidney
 beau.
   PHASIANUS COLCHICUS. The
pheasant.
   Phasianus Gallus.  The domestic
fowl.
   PHATNION.  few. The socket
 of a tooth.
   PHAUSIN'GES.  A pustule caused
by heat.
   PHATNORRHA'GIA. From <pat-
viav, an alveolus,  and prjyvvui, I break
 forth.  Hemorrhage from the socket of
 a tooth.  See Hemorrhage after the Ex-
 traction of Teeth.
  PHELLAN'DRIUM.  The name of
a genus of plants.
  Phellandrium Aquat'icum. Water
fennel.
  PHENIG'MUS.   From tot?& red.
A cutaneous disease  characterized by
redness ofthe skin, without fever.
  PHENOMENON. From fpaivouai, I
appear.   A remarkable  and unusual
appearance.  In Medicine,  any appre-
ciable change in an organ or function.
The  phenomena of a disease are its
symptoms.
  PHIAL A.   A small bottle or phial.
  PHILIATROS.  From $>a*w, I love,
and latpixri, medicine.   An amateur
student of medicine.
  PHILOSOPHER'S STONE. Lapis
philosophorum.
  PHILTRUM.  From ipiXea, I  love.
A medicine supposed  to be capable of
exciting love.   In Anatomy, the verti-
cal depression between the nose and up-
per lip.
  PHIMOS'ICUS.   Relating to phi-
mosis.
  PHIMO'SIS.  From  (piuoa, I bind
up.  A construction of the opening of
the prepuce, which prevents it  from
being carried back  behind  the corona
glandis.
  PHLAS'MA.  A contusion.
  PHLEB'ION. A vein.
  PHLEBITIS.  From <pXe^, a  vein,
and itis, a terminal, denoting inflamma-
tion.  Inflammation of a  vein.
  Phlebitis, Crural.   Phlegmasia
dolens.
  Phlebitis   Uterine.    Puerperal
fever.
  PHLEB'OLITE.     Phlebolithus;
from $Xe^, a vein, and Xi9os, a stone.—
A calculous concretion in a vein.
  PHLEBORRHA'GIA.  From <pxe),
a vein, and  priywui, I break out.  A
rupture of a vein.
  PHLEBOTOME.   An instrument
employed in phlebotomy;  a thumb or
spring lancet.
  PHLEBOT'OMY.    Phlebotomia;
from $ta4<, a  vein, and tepva,  I  cut. 
PHL
589
PHO
 The operation of opening a vein.  Ven-
 esection.
   PHLEGM.  Phlegma.  One of the
 four primary humors of the ancients.
 Also, the viscid mucus expectorated,
 or expelled by vomiting.
   PHLEG'MAGOGUE.  From <pxey-
 ua, phlegm, and aya, I expel.   An ex-
 pectorant medicine.
   PHLEGMA'SIA.   From $tey«,  I
 burn.  Inflammation.
   Phlegmasia  Dolens.   Phlegmasia
 lactea;  phlegmasia alba; crural phle-
 bitk;  milk-leg.  A disease occurring
 in women soon after delivery, attended
 by fever, pain, swelling of the thigh,
 and other symptoms of a  more or less
 severe character.
   PHLEGMASLE.  Inflammations.
 An order in the class pyrexia:,  of Dr.
 Cullen.
   PHLEGMATOPYRA.    Adeno-
 meningeal fever.
   PHLEGMATORRHA'GIA. From
 $%eyua, phlegm, and  pea, I flow.  A
 discharge of a thin, limpid mucus from
 the nose, unaccompanied by inflamma-
 tion.
   PHLEGMON. From <pxeya,  I burn.
 Inflammation of the cellular tissue, ac-
 companied by increased heat, pain and
 circumscribed  swelling, usually ter-
 minating in suppuration, or abscess.
   PHLEGMONO'DES.    Phlegmo-
 nous.
   PHLEG'MONOUS. Phlegmonodes;
 from fyxeyuovq, a phlegmon, and eiSos,
 resemblance.  Belonging, or relating, to
 a phlegmon.
  Phlegmonous Inflammation. In-
 flammation of the cellular tissue, tend-
 ing to suppuration.
  PHLEPS.  A vein.
  PHLOGISTIC. Phlogisticus ; from
 $Xoyi£a,  to burn.   In  Chemistry, in-
 flammatory. See Phlogiston. In Medi-
 cine, preternatural vital energy.  In-
creased action of the heart and arteries.
  PHLOGISTON.  From (pxoyitia, to
burn. The principle of inflammability;
a name given  by Stahl to a hypotheti-
     50^
 cal element, supposed to be pure fire,
 fixed in combustible bodies.
   PHLOGISTICATED AIR.   Ni-
 trogen gas.
   PHLOGO'SIS.  Inflammation.
   PHLOGOT'IC.  Inflammatory.
   PHLOR'IDZINE.    From  ipxoios,
 bark, and  pi£a,  a root.  A crystalline
 substance, of a  bitter,  astringent taste,
 obtained from the  bark  of the root of
 the apple, pear and some other trees.
   PHLYCTiE'NA.   From 4>m£»,  I
 boil.   A vesicle containing a limpid,
 serous fluid.
   PHLYCTENOID.     Resembling
 phlyctaena.
   PHLYCTID'IUM.  A pustule, en-
 circled by an inflamed  ring or zone, as
 the small-pox pustule.
   PHLY'SIS. A subcutaneous, ulcer-
 ative tumor.  Also, phlyctaena.
   PHOBODIP'SON.   Hydrophobia.
   PHCENI'CIUS MORBUS.  Tuber-
 cular elephantiasis.
   PHCENIG'MUS.  A red cutaneous
 eruption, without fever.  Also, a rube-
 facient.
   PHOZ'NIX.   The name of a genus
 of plants.
   Phoenix Dactylif'era.   The  date
 tree.
   PHONE.  The voice.
   PHO'NICUS. From pavrj, the voice.
 Relating to the voice.
   PHO'NICA.  Diseases affecting the
 organs of voice.   An order in the class
pneumatica, of Dr. Good.
   PHORA.  Gestation.
   PHOS.  Light.
   PHOS'PHATE.  PhospJias.  A  salt
resulting from the combination of phos-
phoric acid with  a salifiable base.
   PHOSPHAT'IC.  Relating  to  the
phosphates.
   Phosphatic Diathesis.  A habit of
body favoring the formation of calculi
of the phosphates.
   PHOSPHORESCENCE.    Phos-
phorcscentia. The luminous appearance
exhibited by phosphorescent bodies.
   PHOSPHORIC  ACID.   Acidum 
PHR               590               PHT
phosphoricum.  An  acid  composed  of
phosphorus and oxygen.
  PHOS'PHORUS.  From «j>WJ, light,
and <j>sp«, I carry.   An undecomposed
substance, of a yellowish color, semi-
transparent, and  burning in  common
air, with great rapidity.   In the dark it
exhibits  a luminous or phosphorescent
appearance, and emits a white smoke
in the air.
  PHOS'PHURET.    Phosphuretum.
A combination of phosphorus with a
metal.
  PHOTOGE'NIC.  From <pas, light,
and  yewaa, to generate.  Producing
light.  Applied to  draAvings  made  by
the  action of light on  a chemically
prepared ground.
  PHOTOG'RAPHY.    From  *w$,
light, and ypa^^, a  painting.  The art
of painting or fixing images of the
camera obscura,  on plates of copper
covered Avith silver.
  PHOTOM'ETER, From $as, light,
and  uetpov,  measure.  An instrument
for ascertaining the  intensity of light
  PHOTOMA'NIA.  Delirium produ-
ced by the action  of intense light.
  PHOTOPHO'BIA. From^j, light,
and  q>a6ea,  to  dread.   Intolerance  of
light.
  PHOTOP'SIA.   From  $>«j,  light,
and o^i$, vision.   Lucid vision, or per-
ception of sparks, flashes of fire, &c.
  PHOTURIA.    From  $M$,  light,
and ovpov, urine.  Luminous urine.
   PHRAG'MOCONE.  From <ppa7ua,
a partition, and  xovos, a  cone.  The
chambered cone  of the shell  of the
belemnite.
   PHRAG'MOS.  From <ppaaaa, I en-
close.   A row of teeth.
  PHRA'SIS.  Articulated voice.
   PHRE'NES.   The forepart of the
thorax.  Also, the diaphragm.
  PHRENE'SIS.   Phrenitis.
   PHRENTC. Phrenicus. Diaphrag-
matic.   Relating, or belonging, to the
diaphragm.
   Phrenic Arteries.  The  diaphrag-
 matic arteries.
  Phrenic Nerve. The diaphragmatic
nerve.
  PHREN'ICA. From <ppt]v,the mind.
Diseases affecting the mind ; an order
in the class neurotica, of Dr. Good.
  PHRENITIS.  From  <bpVv,  the
mind, and itis, inflammation.  Inflam-
mation of the brain.
  PHRENOLOGY.    Phrenobgia;
from typrjv, the mind, and fcoyoj, a  dis-
course.  A treatise on the mind  as de-
duced from the external configuration
and volume  of the brain.
  PHRENSY.  Phrenitis.
  PHRICE. <£ptx»7.  Shuddering; the
chill of the cold fit of an ague; a shud-
dering from terror.
  PHRICO'DES FEBRIS.  A fever
in which the chill  is very severe  and
prolonged.
  PHTHAR'MA CALIGO. Caligo.
  Phtharma Catarac'ta. Cataract.
  Phtharma Glauco'ma.  Glaucoma.
  PHTHIRI'ASIS.    From <p9eip, a
louse.  Morbus pediculosus.  A disease
favoring the  generation of lice.
  PHTHIS'ICUS. Belonging to phthi-
sis.
  PHTHISIOL'OGY. Phthisiobgia;
from $9i.ois, consumption, and a.oyo5, a
discourse. A treatise on phthisis.
  PHTHISI-PNEUM0N1A. Phthisis
pulmonalis.
  PHTHI'SIS. From $9ia, I consume.
Consumption; progressive emaciation
of the body,  from whatever cause pro-
duced, but usually restricted  to phthisis
pulmonalk.
  Phthisis,  Cancerous.   Cancer of
the lungs.
  Phthisis Dorsalis.  Tabes dorsalis.
  Phthisis Larynge'a. Chronic laryn-
gitis—a species of  consumption result-
ing from ulceration of the  larynx.
  Phthisis Mesenteric a.  Tabes me-
senterica.
  Phthisis  Pulmonalis.  PlUhisis tu-
berculosa. Pulmonary consumption.
  Phthisis Trachealis.   Chronic in-
flammation  of  the trachea,  accompa-
nied by ulceration and emaciation. 
PHY
591
PHY
   PHTHISU'RIA.  Diabetes.
   PHTHOE.  Phthisis.
   PHYGETH'LON.  From ibvya,  I
  broil.  Inflammation  of the superficial
  lymphatic glands.
   PHYLACT'RY.   An amulet;  a
  prophylactic.
   PHYLLITIS.  Scolopendrium vul-
  gare.
   PHY'MA.  From $va, to produce.
  A tubercle or phlegmon.  A genus of
  diseases in Good's Nosology, including
  hordeolum,  furunculus,  sycosis, and
  anthrax.
   PHYMATO'SIS.  An excrescence.
   PHYMOSIS.  Phimosis.
   PHY'SALIS. The name of a genus
  of plants.
   Physalis Alkeken'gi.  The winter
  cherry.
   PHYS'CIA ISLANDICA. Iceland
  moss.
   PHYSCO'NIA.  From ^vaxn, a blad-
  der.  Any tumor developed in the ab-
  domen which is neither sonorous nor
  fluctuating.   Eight species  are  enu-
  merated :  1. Physconia hepatica, en-
  larged  liver.  2. Physconia peritonei,
  tumefied peritoneum.   3.  Physconia
  splenica, enlarged spleen.  4. Physconia
  omentaUs, enlarged omentum. 5. Phys-
  conia renaZis,enlarged kidney. 6. Physco-
  nia uterina, enlargement of the uterus
  and its  appendages.  7.  Physconia me-
 senterka, enlargement of the mesentery,
 and 8. Physconia intestinalk,  laxity of
 the intestinal canal,  occasioning en-
 largement of the abdomen, or physco-
 nia.
   PHYSE'MA. Physesis; from $vaaa,
 I inflate.  A tumor caused by an accu-
 mulation of air in  the cellular texture.
 Also, tympanitis.
   PHYSETER   MECROCEPH'A-
 LUS. The spermaceti whale.
   PHYSIC.  The  art of heahng  dis-
 eases ', medicine.
  Physic, Indian.  GiUenia trifoliata.
  Physic-Nuts.  The nuts of the jatro-
pha curcas.
  PHYSICAL. Pertaining to the tan-'
 gible  properties  or effects of material
 things.
   PHYSPCIAN.   One who  has  re-
 ceived the degree of doctor of medicine
 from  a  regularly  incorporated institu-
 tion.  In  France,  a professor or stu-
 dent of natural philosophy.
   PHYSICS.  From $vois, nature.—
 The science of nature; but in the usual
 and more restricted acceptation of the
 term,  the  movements, pressure, and
 sensible properties of things.  Natural
 philosophy.
   PHYSIOG'NOMY. Physiognomia;
 from fvais, nature, and yivaoxa, I know.
 The art  of judging of  the character
 and dispositions of men by their coun-
 tenances, gestures and external appear-
 ance.
   PHYSIOL'OGY. Physiobgia; from
 fyvais, nature, and Xoyos, a discourse. By
 the ancients this term was used  in the
 same  sense as that of physics, but  at
 present  it  is  limited to the science
 which treats of the laws of  life and the
 functions of living beings.   Physiology
 is divided into human and comparative.
 The former relates to man, and the lat-
 ter to animals and vegetables.  It is,
 also, divided into general and special—
 the one relating to the general laws  of
 life, and the other to the  functions  of
 particular or individual organs.
   PHYSIS. Nature; life.
   PHYSOCELE. Pneumatocele, an
 emphysematous  tumor  of the  scro-
 tum.
   PHYSOMETRA.  From ipvaaa, I
 inflate, and urjtpa, the womb. Infiatio
 uteri.  Windy swelling of the uterus.
   PHYSON.  Flatulence.
   PHYSON'CUS.  A windy tumor.
   PHYSOTHO'RAX.   Pneumotho-
 rax.
   PHYTOG'RAPHY. Phytographia;
 from fvtov, a plant, and ypatyrj, descrip-
 tion. A description of plants.
  PHYTOLACCA.  The name of  a
genus of plants.
  Phytolacca Decandra. Poke-weed.
  PHYTOL'OGY. Phytobgia; from 
PIL
592
PIL
$vtov, a plant, and xoyos,  a discourse.
A treatise on plants. Botany.
  PHYTOT'OMY.  The anatomy of
plants.
  PHYTO'PHAGOUS.  From <pvtov,
a plant, and <foyw, I eat.   Plant eating
animals.
  PIA MATER.  The highly vascu-
lar membrane which immediately in-
vests the convolutions of the cerebrum,
cerebellum,  meduUa oblongata,  and
medulla spinalis.
  PI AN.  Framboesia.
  PIAR.  Fat.
  PIARHtE'MIA.  From rt^ap, fat,
and aiua, blood. Fat in the blood.
  PI'CA.  Depraved appetite,
  PICHURIM CORTEX.  An aro-
matic bark,  obtained from a species of
laurus pichurim.
  PICHURIS.  Faba pichurim.
  PICRIA.  Bitterness.
  PICRIC ACID.  A substance  pro-
duced by the action of nitric acid on in-
digo, silk, aloes, &.c.
  PICRIS.  The name of a genus of
plants.
  Picris Echoides. The common ox-
tongue.
 ' PICROTOXTN.  Picrotoxina; pi-
crotoxine; from rtixpos, bitter, and  to%i-
vov, poison.  A vegetable alkali, which
crystallizes  in  white,  brilhant, four-
sided,  transparent  prisms.  It is this
principle which gives to the cocculus
indicus its poisonous properties.
  PIEDMONT TRUFFLE.  Lyco-
perdon tuber.
  PIG-NUT.   The ground-nut.
  PIGMENTUM.   From pingo, to
paint.  A pigment or paint.  An epi-
thet  applied, in Anatomy, to a  black
mucous substance found  in the  eye;
namely, the pigment of the irk, called
the uvea; and the pigment ofthe choroid
membrane,  called the pigmentum ni-
grum.
  Pigmentum Indicum.  Indigo.
  PILA HYSTRICIS.  The  bezoar
hystricis.
  P1LARE MALUM.  Trichiasis.
  PILATIO.  From pilus, a hair.  A
hair-like fracture of the skull.
  PI'LEOUS. Relating to the hair.
  PILES.  Haemorrhoids.
  PILE-WORT.  Ranunculus ficaria.
  PILL.  Pilula.
  Pill, Blue.  Pilulae hydrargyri.
  Pill, Mercurial.  Pilulae hydrar-
gyri-
  PILO'SUS.  Hairy.
  PILU'LA.   Diminutive of pib, a
ball. A simple or compound medicine,
of a firm consistence,  spherical shape,
and rarely exceeding five  or six grains
in weight.
  PILULE ALOES.   Aloetic pills.
  Pilula Aloes  Composita.  Com-
pound pills of aloes.
  Pilula  Aloes et Asafojtida.—
Pills of aloes and asafetida.
  Pilula Aloes  et  Ferri. PUls of
aloes and iron.
  Pilula Aloes et Myrrha.   Pills
of aloes and myrrh.
  Pilula  Asafostida.   Asafetida
pills.
  Pilula Calomelanos  Composita.
Compound calomel pills.
  Pilula  Calomelanos et Opii.—
Pills of calomel and opium.
  Pilula  Cambogia Composita.—
Compound pills of gamboge.
  Pilula  Cathartica   Composita.
Compound cathartic pills.
  Pilula  Colocynthidis Compos-
ita. Compound pills of colocynth.
  Pilula  Calocynthidis et Hyos-
cyami.  Pills of colocynth and henbane.
  Pilula  Conii  Composita.  Com-
pound  pills of hemlock.
  Pilula Copaiba.  Pills of copaiba.
  Pilula Cupri Ammoniati.  Pills of
ammoniated copper.
  Pilula Digitalis et Scilla. Pills
of digitalis and squill.
  Pilula Ferri Carbonatis. PiUs of
carbonate of iron.
  Pilula Ferri Sulphatis.  Pills of
sulphate of iron.
  Pilula Galbani Composita.  Com
pound  pills of galbanum. 
PIM
593
PIN
  Pilula Gambogia Composita.—
 Compound pills of gamboge.
  Pilula Hydrar'gyri.   Mercurial
 pills.  Blue pills.
  Pilula  Hydrargyri   Chloridi
 Composita.  Compound pills of chlo-
 ride of mercury.
  Pilula Hydrargyri Iodidi.  Pills
 of iodide of mercury.
  Pilula Ipecacuanha  Composita.
 Compound pills of ipecacuanha.
  Pilula Ipecacuanha et Opii. PUls
 of ipecacuanha and opium.
  Pilula Opii.  Pills of opium.
  Pilula Plumbi Opiata.   Opiate
 pills of lead.
  Pilula Q,uinia Sulphatis.  PiUs of
 sulphate of quinine.
  Pilula Rhei. Pills of rhubarb.
  Pilula Rhei Composita.   Com-
 pound pills of rhubarb.
  Pilula Rhei et  Ferri.  PUls of
 rhubarb and iron.
  Pilula Sagapeni Composita. Com-
 pound piUs of sagapenum.
  Pilula Saponis Composita.  Com-
 pound pills of soap.
  Pilula Saponis Cum Opio.  Com-
 pound pills of soap.
  Pilula Scilla Composita.  Com-
 pound pills of squill.
  Pilula Styracis Composita. Com-
 pound pills of storax.
  Pilula Thebaic a.  PiUs of opium.
  PI'LUS.  The short hair on the sur-
 face of the body.
  PIM ELE. Fat.
  PIMELITIS. From rtiuexn, fat, and
 itis, denoting inflammation. Inflamma-
 tion of the adipose tissue.
  PIMELO'SIS. From Hi^eXrj, fat. The
 conversion of any texture into fat.
  Pimelosis Hepatica.  The degenera-
 tion of the liver into fat
  PIMENTA.  Pimento.  Myrtus pi-
 menta.
  PIMPER'NEL.  Scarlet pimpernel.
  PIMPINELLA. The name of a ge-
 nus of plants.
  Pimpinella  Ani'sum.   The anise
plant.
        50*
  Pimpinella Saxi'fraga.   Burnet
saxifrage.
  PIMPLE.  Papula.
  PIN.  A small instrument, pointed
at one extremity, made of brass, iron,
silver, or gold, and used, in Surgery, to
to fix dressings, and  sometimes in  su-
tures.
  PINCERS. Forceps; volsella.
  PINCHBECK.  Dutch gold; an al-
loy of copper and zinc.
  PINE.  Pinus.
  Pine-Apple.  Bromelia ananas.
  Pine  Thistle.  Atractylis gummi-
fera.
  PINE A.  Pinus pinea.
  PINEAL.   Pinealis ; from pinus, a
pine. Resembling the pine-apple.
  Pineal  Gland.   Glandula pinealk.
A smaU gland, about the size of a pea,
of a conical shape, situated between  the
fornix and tubercula quadrigemina in
the brain.
  PINEUS   PURGANS.    Jatropha
curcas.
  PINGUE'DO.   From pinguis,  fat.
Fat.
  PINGUICULA.  The name of a
genus of plants.
  Pinguicula Vulga'ris. Butterwort.
  PINK, CAROLINA. Spigelia ma-
rilandica.
  PINNACULUM.    A summit  or
pinacle.
  PINNATE. From pinna, a feather,
or fin.  A species of compound leaf,
where a single petiole has  several leaf-
lets attached to each side of it
  PIN'NULA.  A branchlet of a pin-
nate leaf.
  PINT.  The eighth  of a gallon,  or
sixteen fluid ounces.
  PINUS.  The name of a genus  of
gymnospermous plants.
  Pinus Abies.  The Norway spruce-
fir, Avhich affords  the Burgundy pitch,
and the common frankincense.
  Pinus  Australis.  The  long leaved
southern pine.
  Pinus  Balsame'a.  The tree which
affords the  Canada balsam. 
PIS
594
PIT
  Pinus Canaden'sis.  The hemlock
spruce.
  Pinus Cedrus.  The cedar tree.
  Pinus Cembra.  The tree which af-
fords the Carpathian balsam.
  Pinus Larix.  The larch tree, which
yields the larch agaric, and Venice tur-
pentine.
  Pinus Mughos.  The  mountain  or
mugho pine.
  Pinus Picea.   The European stiver
fir tree.
  Pinus Pinaster.   The cluster pine
which yields Bordeaux turpentine.
  Pinus Pinea.  The stone pine tree.
  Pinus Pumilio.  Pinus mughos.
  Pinus Rigid a.  The  barren  pine,
which yields a large quantity of turpen-
tine and tar.
  Pinus Sylvestris.  The Scotch fir.
  PIPER.   Pepper.  The name of a
genus of plants.
  Piper Album.  White pepper,  or
the black, freed from its cuticle.
  Piper Angustifo'lium. Thematico
plant.
  Piper Brasilianum.  Capsicum an-
nuum.
   Piper Caryophyl'latum.  Myrtus
pimenta.
   Piper Cauda'tum.  Piper cubeba.
   Piper Cubeba.  Cubeb pepper. The
plant which yields cubebs.
   Piper Decorticatum.  White pep-
per.
   Piper Favasci. The clove berry-tree.
   Piper Guineense.   Capsicum an-
 nuum.
   Piper Jamaicense.  Myrtus pimen-
 ta.
   Piper Longum.  Long pepper.
   Piper Lusitanicum.  Capsicum an-
 nuum.
   Piper Murale.   Sedum acre.
   Piper Nigrum.  Black pepper.
   PIPERI'NA. Piperine.  A white,
 resinoid substance, obtained from black
 pepper, and containing the  active prin-
 ciple of pepper.
   PISCID'IA  ERYTHRI'NA.   Ja-
 maica dogwood.
  PISCES.  A division of vertebra-
ta, including fishes which respire  in
water.
  PIS'IFORM.  Pkiformis;  from pi-
sum, a pea, and forma, shape.  Pea-
shaped.
  Pisiform Os.  The  fourth bone of
the first row of the carpus.
  PISMIRE.  Formica rufa.
  PISO.   A mortar.
  PISSEL^ELI'UM.  Petroleum.
  PISTA'CIA.  The name of a genus
of plants.
  Pistacia Lentis'cus.  The mastich
tree.
  Pistacia Tereein'thus.  The tur-
pentine tree.   The tree which yields
the cyprus, and chio turpentine.
  Pistacia Vera.  The tree which af-
fords the pistachio nut.
  PISTACHIO NUT.  The fruit of
the pktacia vera.
  PISTIL. Pistillum.  The female sex-
ual organ of all phenogamous plants.
  PISTILLIF'EROUS.  A term ap-
plied to plants, the flowers of which
contain  one or more  pistils, without
stamens.
   PISTOLO'CHIA.  Birthwort.
   PISUM SATIVUM.  The common
pea.
The
  PIT  OF  THE STOMACH.
epigastrium.
  PITAYA BARK.  One of the false
barks obtained from  the mountain of
Pitaya.
  PITCH.  Inspissated tar.
  Pitch, Burgundy. A concrete resi-
nous exudation from the pinus abks.
  Pitch, Jeav's.   Bitumen judaicum.
  PITTA'CIUM.  A pitch plaster.
  PITTOTA.   Medicines in  which
pitch is an ingredient.
  PITUITA.  Phlegm; viscid mucus.
  PITU'ITARY.  Pituitarius; from
pituito, phlegm.   A  name applied  to
parts which are supposed to be connect-
ed Avith the secretion of phlegm or mu-
cus.
   Pituitary Fossa.   The depression
in  the sphenoid bone (sella turcica) 
PIV                595                PIV
 which gives  lodgment to the pituitary
 gland.
   Pituitary Gland.  Glandula pitui-
 taria.  A smaU body, situated  in the
 sella turcica.   It is  composed  of two
 lobes,  an anterior and posterior. The
 anterior is of a yellowish-gray color, and
 the posterior, grayish-white.
   Pituitary  Membrane.   Membra-
 na pituitaria.  The mucous membrane
 that lines the nostrils and the sinuses
 which communicate with them.
   PITYRIASIS. From mtvpov, bran.
 A genus of scaiy diseases, characterized
 by irregular  patches of smaU  scales,
 which repeatedly  exfoliate  and recur,
 but never form crusts.  It occurs under
 several varieties of form.  1. Pityriasis
 capitk, dandriff.   2. Pityriasis  rubra,
 which consists in the cuticle becoming,
 first red, then scurfy, and exfoliating,
 which process is  frequently repeated.
 3. Pityriasis  versi-color, which is prin-
 cipally confined to the arms, chest and
 abdomen, and consists of exfoliations of
 scurfy cuticle, irregularly diffused  and
 of a brown color.
   PIVOT-BORER, ELLIOT'S.  An
 instrument invented  by Dr.  W.  H.
 Elliot, of Montreal, for forcing out wood
 pivots  which have been  broken in the
 fang;  it resembles a very fine  twisted
 gimblet,  without the screw  upon the
 point.
  Pivots, Elliot's Hollow.  An im-
 provement, consisting in making the
 metallic pivot in  the form of a tube, so
 that matter may  escape through the
 centre  of the artificial tooth.
  Pivot Extractor, Elliot's. An in-
 strument  invented by Dr.   Elliot, of
 Montreal, for removing  a pivot from
 the root of a tooth after the crown has
 been displaced.
  Pivot Gauge.   An instrument con-
 structed by Mr. G. F. J. Colburn for
 determining the proper size and  length
 of the projecting portion of a pivot in
 an artificial tooth, previously to  its in-
troduction into the canal of  the root to
which it is to  be applied.
   Pivot Tooth.   An artificial  tooth
 designed to be applied to the root of a
 natural tooth, by means of what is usu-
 ally termed a pivot, but more properly
 a dowel, or tenon.  Also, a  tooth thus
 applied.
   Pivot Tooth, Manner of  Insert-
 ing.  The first thing to  be attended to
 in the insertion of a  pivot tooth,  sup-
 posing the other parts of the mouth to
 be in a healthy condition, is  to remove
 such portion of the crown of the natural
 tooth to be replaced, as may not have
 been previously destroyed by caries,
 with an oval or half round file.
   The usual method of performing this
 part ofthe operation, consists in cutting
 the tooth about half off with  a file, and
 then to complete it with a pair of excis-
 ing forceps.  But these should not  be
 applied until the  tooth  has  been cut
 with a file on every side, nearly to the
 pulp cavity, and even then they should
 be used with great care to prevent jar-
 ring, or otherwise injuring  the  root.
 When too large a portion ofthe crown
 is broken off suddenly with the common
 excising forceps, the concussion is often
 so great as to  excite inflammation  in
 the socket of the tooth, and sometimes
 to shatter the root.  The crown  of a
 tooth may,  however, be  excised by
 means of a very ingeniously  construct-
 ed instrument, invented  by Dr. Elliot,
 of Montreal, without causing much con-
 cussion.
  When  excising  forceps are used,
 they should be strong,  so  as not  to
 spring under the pressure of  the hand
 of the operator, and their cutting edges
 about an eighth of an inch Avide.   The
 instrument above alluded to,  however,
 will be found preferable  to forceps  of
 this kind.
  After the removal  of  the remaining
 portion of the croAvn, the nerve, if still
 alive, should be immediately destroyed,
 by introducing a silver or iron wire, or
 some other small sharp-pointed instru-
ment, as far up, at least, into  the canal
of the root, as it may be  desirable for 
               PIV

the pivot to  extend,  giving  it, at  the
same time, a quick rotary motion.  It
is important that the instrument used
for this purpose, ifitbeof metal, should
be soft and yielding, otherwise any sud-
den motion of the head  of the patient
might break it off in the tooth.
  Some  recommend  destroying  the
nerve with the actual cautery by the in-
troduction  of  a hot wire into the canal
of the  root, but as this is very liable to
produce  irritation in the surrounding
tissues, the other method is far prefera-
ble.
  The nerve  having  been destroyed,
the balance of the operation will be  un-
attended  with pain.  The root should
now be filed  off up to the gum and a
little above its  free  edge, with  a  file
such as we have  described in  another
article.*  The exposed extremity of the
root after having been thus filed, will
present a slightly arched  appearance,
corresponding with the festooned shape
ofthe anterior margin ofthe gum.
  After having completed the operation
of filing,  the  natural  canal in the root
should be slightly enlarged with a burr-
drill, or a broach prepared  for the pur-
pose.  The canal thus formed in  the
root for the pivot should never  exceed
the sixteenth part of  an inch or  a  line
in diameter,  and a  quarter  or three-
eighths of an inch in length.
  If from any peculiar susceptibility of
the patient, there should be reason to
apprehend inflammation of the alveolo-
dental  membrane, the tooth should  not
be  immediately inserted.   Dr.  Fitch
recommends  filling the  cavity  in  the
root with lead, for the reason,  as he be-
lieves, that this metal has a tendency to
assuage, or rather to prevent the inflam-
mation which might otherwise arise
from the operation of filing.   With re-
gard to the value of this recommenda-

  * The file employed for this purpose should
be of the best quality, and it should be double
or cross-cut and rather coarse than other-
wise.   Stub's  should be preferred to  any
other manufacturer's.
)6                PIV

 tion, we cannot speak with certainty,not
 having adopted the practice but in one
 or two cases.   In subjects of a nervous
 temperament,  or of a highly irritable
 habit of body, it may be well to recom-
 mend the use of saline aperients every
 other day, for a week,  previously  to
 preparing the  root.   Much advantage
 may sometimes be derived from the ob-
 servance of this precaution.
 . But when the nerve in the root  is
 destroyed, in the manner first described,
 it very rarely happens that inflamma-
 tion supervenes, but if a  root is  em-
 ployed in which the  lining membrane
 has been previously destroyed, it is al-
 most certain to follow the  operation,
 unless an outlet is  made, by cutting a
 groove  on the side of the pivot, or  in
 some other way, for  the escape of the
 matter that is almost always formed, at
 the apex of a dead root.  Dr. Maynard
 believes that the  irritation in most ca-
 ses, results from an accumulation  of
 acrid matter in the upper part of the
 root, and  that by filling  the natural
 canal above the terminus of the pivot,
 up to the extremity of the fang, it  may
 generaUy be  prevented.   In healthy
 living roots from which, in the extirpa-
 tion of the nerve, he has removed it
 throughout the whole  extent of their
 canal, the author has frequently adopt-
 ed this practice, and in most cases with
 success.
  After having prepared the  root in the
 manner as just described, an artificial
 crown  of the  right shape, color  and
 size, should be accurately fitted to  it.
 It should touch every part of the  filed
 extremity of the root, and  made to rest
 firmly upon it, and at. the same time  be
 in an exact line  with the  circle of the
 other teeth.  The practice  of fitting the
 crown  to the root anteriorly, and leav-
 ing  an opening posteriorly, as is often
 done, should be  carefully avoided, for
 the  reason, that any opening here, af-
 fords a lodgment  for foreign matter,
 which  soon  becomes putrid and offen-
 sive, and besides, the tooth itself is ren-
5 
PIV
597
PIV
dered  less  secure.   The  new tooth
should also be so fitted, as not to press
against the adjoining teeth, or strike its
antagonist before the other teeth come
together.  In the former case, it would
give rise to inflammation of the socket
of the root, and  in the latter, it would
soon be displaced.
  The canal in the root, and that in the
artificial  crown  should be directly op-
posite to  each other.  When the crown
of a natural tooth is used, the proper
place for the  pivot hole is indicated by
the pulp  cavity,  but when a porcelain
tooth is employed, if great care has not
been taken in its manufacture, consid-
erable difficulty will be experienced in
its insertion.
  If a porcelain tooth is to be used, one
should be selected of the proper length,
width and thickness.  It should be as
nearly as possible the shade  of the ad-
joining teeth, and it would be prefera-
ble to have it even a little darker than
any lighter, as in the former case the
contrast would be less perceptible than
in the latter.  If it is necessary to make
any change in the shape of the tooth, it
may  be readily effected  on  a small
grindstone or emery wheel.  A great
number  of grinding  apparatuses have
been invented for this purpose.  Some
are very  simple  in  their construction,
consisting of a  single wheel, turned
with a crank, others are more complex
in  their  arrangement; but  the object
may easily and readily be accomplished
with  any now in use.  Those of the
simpler construction  are kept by most
instrument makers, from  whom they
can be procured.
  When the  crown of a natural tooth
is employed, any change which it may
be necessary to  make  in  its shape,
should be effected with a file.   To ob-
viate  the difficulty  sometimes expe-
rienced in making a  perfect joint be-
tween the  root  and crown,  Dr. E.
Townsend, of  Philadelphia,  has re-
cently invented two very ingenious in-
struments,  consisting of an oval  and
hollow  file—the former fitting exactly
into the latter.   With the first he files
the root, and with the other, the base or
part of the crown to be fitted to it, thus
making a perfect joint.
  The artificial crown  may  be secured
to the root by means of a pivot made of
wood or metal, and Avhen the latter is
employed,  gold or platina  should  be
preferred, inasmuch as silver or any
baser metal is liable to  be  oxydized by
the fluids of the mouth.  If wood be
used, it should be of the best quality of
weU seasoned  white hickory, as this
possesses greater strength and elasticity
than any other that can be procured in
this country.  After being  reduced to
near the size of the orifice of the cavity
in the artificial tooth, it should be forced
through a smooth hole, of the size of
that in the root, in a piece of ivory, bone,
steel, or some other hard substance, for
the purpose of compressing its fibres as
closely together as possible.  Thus pre-
pared, one end should be forced into the
cavity in the artificial crown, and  the
projecting part cut off about a quarter
or  three-eighths  of an  inch from  the
tooth, and this, after being fitted to the
size of the orifice in the root, should be
inserted in it; pressure should now be
applied with the thumb  and finger of
the operator, to the tooth, and  the pivot
forced  up into  the canal in  the root
until the two come together.   The part
of the pivot going into the root, should
never be so large as to require any other
pressure than can  be applied in this
way for forcing it into it;  as the swell-
ing of the wood will soon render it suf-
ficiently tight to  hold  it  firmly in its
place.   The  practice of driving  up a
pivot with a hammer, as  is often done,
is a bad  one.  It is often followed by
inflammation and suppuration of the
soft tissues about the apex of the root.
  It sometimes  becomes  necessary to
remove  the artificial crown,  and in
doing this, the  pivot often  remains in
the  root.  For the removal of  this, Dr.
W. H.  Elliot has  invented a pair of 
PIV                598                 PIV
forceps  which the author  has found
very valuable.
  When a metallic pivot  is used, the
end going into the artificial crown may
be fastened in either  of the following
ways,  namely:   first,  by  cutting a
screw on it, either with  a file, or by
passing it through a screw-plate;  the
cavity  in the crown should  next be
fiUed with a wooden tube, and this then
screwed into it  Second, by filling the
cavity  in the crown  with  pulverized
borax, moistened  with water, inserting
the end  of  the pivot into it, which
should be large enough to fiU the cavity,
placing several small pieces of solder
around  it, and applying  heat to  the
tooth  by  means  of a blow-pipe  and
lamp  until  it fuses and  flows down
around  it into the tooth.   The solder
by adapting itself, when  in a  state of
fusion, to the rough walls of the cavity
in the crown of the tooth, wiU  prevent
the pivot from loosening or coming out.
The latter method we consider preferable
to the former. The projecting part of
the pivot should be about half an inch
in length, square  and pointed.  The
cavity in the root  of the tooth, which
requires to be deeper for a  metalhc than
for a wood pivot,  should be fiUed with
wood, with  a smaU hole through the
centre.   Into  this, the end of the pivot
should be introduced and  forced up, in
the manner as before described, until the
tooth and root come firmly together.
   But when a metallic pivot is used, a
plate-tooth is preferable to those which
are made expressly  for  pivots.  The
manner of attaching a pivot to one of
the former, is as follows:  the  root
should be first prepared in the  manner
as  before described; after  which, an
impression should be taken in wax,
from this a plaster cast should be taken,
and from the latter metaUic casts. This
done, a piece of gold plate large enough
to cover the root, should be  swaged up
between  the  metallic  casts,  a plate-
tooth  of the proper size,  shape  and
color,  should then be fitted to the root,
backed with gold, and soldered  to the
plate  previously  fitted  to  the root,
and to the  upper or  convex surface of
this last, and  immediately beneath the
canal in the root, a gold pivot  should
be attached.  But, for the  manner of
conducting these various  processes, see
Mounting Porcelain Teeth upon  a Me-
tallic  Base.
  The author has been in the habit, for
a number  of years,  of-using a  pivot,
consisting  of gold encased  in a thin
layer of wood.   It is made  in the fol-
lowing manner: the gold is  first made
into wire of the proper size, and passed
through a screAV-plate.  A hole is then
drilled lengthwise into a  piece of well
seasoned hickory as far as  is required
for the length of the  pivot.   Into this
the wire  is screwed, and then cut off
close up to the wood, which is reduced
with a file or knife, to the  size  of the
orifice in the artificial crown, and  firmly
forced into it.  The projecting part of
the wood, to the termination  of the
wire, is trimmed down to the size of the
cavity in the root, and cut off,  when
the tooth is ready for insertion.
  This kind of pivot, he conceives to
be, in many respects,  preferable to
either of the others.  The  wood pre-
vents the gold from enlarging the  cavity
of the root, or that of the artificial  tooth;
and, at the same time, by the sweUing
of the wood,  the pivot is  firmly re-
tained in both.   The gold keeps the ar-
tificial tooth from being  moved,  as of-
ten happens, when a wood  pivot alone
is used, after it becomes  saturated and
softened with the juices of  the mouth.
  The gold employed for pivots should
be eighteen carats fine, and the wood
which we have found best suited to the
purpose,  is  firm,  close-grained, and
well seasoned hickory.  The cavity in
the root should be cleansed from  all ex-
traneous matter, previous to the inser-
tion of the tooth.
  The artificial crown should be first
fitted to  the  root with a  temporary
pivot of soft wood, in order the more 
              PIV                59

readily to ascertain in what manner the
permanent one should be  shaped, so as
to make the tooth fit, and also to avoid
the necessity of removing it after it has
been firmly inserted.
  There is some diversity of opinion
with regard to the  kind of pivots that
should be used.   Some prefer those
made of wood, others  those of metal.
Dr. Fitch, on this subject,  observes:
"The metallic pivots are far better than
any other; and their only objection is,
that they are apt to wear the  tooth that
is placed upon them, and the stump in
which they are inserted ;  and so much
so do they have this effect, that we are
induced to use pivots  of wood.   This
last has the advantage, if perfectly sea-
soned, of SAvelling in the stump, by the
moisture which they  absorb; and, in
this  way, become very firm.   The ad-
vantages and disadvantages of the two
kinds, are, perhaps, nearly balanced."
  To the use of wood  pivots, however,
Dr.  Koecker is decidedly opposed.—
"The pivots," says  he,  "should  be
made only of fine gold or  platina;
every other metal, such as brass, cop-
per, silver, and even inferior gold, are
highly objectionable, being more or less
liable to corrode, and thus become  in-
jurious to the other teeth and the general
health.  There is, hoAvever, a practice,
which is still  more improper,  namely,
the use of pivots made of wood: these
pivots, after insertion,  considerably ex-
pand, from the moisture of the mouth,
and consequently remain perfectly firm
in the roots  for several  years, which
deceive not only the  patient, but the
dentist also, and induces them to con-
sider  the  case very successful,  until
they at last find that the root  is either
spht by the SAvelling  of the pivot, or
nearly destroyed by the rapid decay of
the wood  in the cavity,  which by its
chemical and  mechanical irritation, is
very apt to produce very serious  in-
flammation, and other affections of the
gums and sockets; and, not the  least
objection,  the  disagreeable   breath,
                 PIV

which must  be an  unavoidably con-
comitant of this practice."
  Again, on the insertion  of pivoted
teeth, Dr.  K., in  another place, adds:
"I have made it  an universal rule to
insert the tooth in such a manner, that
the patient should be capable, after  re-
ceiving the necessary  instructions, to
remove it, and replace it, at pleasure ;
for this purpose, I have found it best,
and  most  effectual, to  wind a little
cotton round the pivot,  which should
be filed somewhat rough previous to its
insertion into the fang."
  The description here given of the ef-
fects arising from the use of a pivot of
wood, is perhaps, somewhat exagger-
ated.   If it  be inserted  with proper
care and judgment, it is no more liable
to produce irritation and to  effect the
breath, than a gold one, wrapped with
cotton, or one made of any other metal.
The fact that wood pivots remain firmly
in the  root  for several  years,  ought
rather to be considered as  a  recom-
mendation, than an objection; and with
us, we must confess, it would go far to-
wards determining  our  preference in
their favor; for observation has taught
us, that  the frequent removing and re-
placing of a pivoted tooth, greatly tends
to hasten the destruction of the root,
and to effect the surrounding parts with
disease.   But  a wood  pivot  should
never be so large as to spht the root by
swelling.
   As a general rule, not more than two
roots should be prepared at one sitting,
though sometimes four or even six may
be, without incurring any risk.
  The walls of the canal in the root,
when an artificial tooth is applied Avith
any of the pivots which have as yet
been described, is, of necessity, exposed
to the action of the fluids of the mouth,
and, consequently, are gradually soft-
ened and broken  down, so that  in the
course  of a  few  years, a larger  pivot
will be  required,  and this,  too, after
awhile, will have to be  replaced with
one still larger, until, finaUy, the root is
9 
PIV                600                PIV
destroyed.   This  destructive  process
proceeds much more  rapidly in some
cases than in others, according as the
root is hard  or soft, and as the secre-
tions of the mouth are in  a healthy or
vitiated condition.
  But the  action of the fluids of the
mouth  upon  the  walls of the canal
may  be prevented  by introducing  a
hoUow gold screw for  the  reception of
the pivot.  This effectually protects the
walls of the canal in the root against
the action of all corrosive agents, and
a root thus  prepared,  will support an
artificial crown more  than twice  as
long as when  prepared in the ordinary
way. The operation, however, is more
tedious and expensive, but it  is by far
more valuable.  When a tooth is  ap-
plied to  a  root thus prepared, a gold
pivot of the exact size of the hollow of
the screw should always be employed.
  For the preparation of a root in this
manner, the following is the method of
procedure adopted by the author: first,
the crown  of the natural  tooth is re-
moved,  the nerve,  if alive, destroyed,
and the canal in the root  enlarged in
the manner as before directed.   Second,
a screw-tap  slightly  larger than  the
canal in the root is then introduced for
the purpose of cutting  a  screw on its
inner walls.   Third, a screw  should
then be cut on a piece  of hollow  gold
wire of  the size of the screw-tap by
passing it  through a screw-plate,  but
during this process the hollow in the
wire should be filled with another wire
to prevent injury.  This done, it should
be screwed into the root about a quarter
of an inch, the wire on the inside of it
then withdrawn, and the lower or pro-
truding extremity  filed off even  with
the root with a very fine file.   Fourth,
an  artificial tooth should  now be se-
lected of the right size, shape and color,
and fitted  to  the  root, after  which  a
gold pivot should be fixed  in it in the
manner as before directed,  of the exact
size of the hoUow in the screw, and to
the length of which, it should also cor-
respond.  Having proceeded thus far,
the operation is completed by applying
the tooth to the root.  The pivot being
of the size of the hollow in the cylin-
drical screw, but little  pressure is  re-
quired to force the one into the other.
  The stability of a  tooth, inserted in
this manner, is as great, if the pivot be
of the proper size, as one inserted  by
any of the other methods, and  it may
be  removed, cleansed and replaced at
the pleasure of the  patient.   When
the walls of the canal are so much en-
larged by  decay as to have formed a
large conical shaped cavity in the lower
extremity of the  root, the upper end
of the hollow or cylindrical screw will
only take effect.  In this case the space
between  the  lower extremity and the
walls  of the root, should be thoroughly
filled with gold before the  wire on the
inside is withdrawn; after which the
tube and extruding portions of the gold
should be filed off even  with  the  root,
and polished before the artificial crown
is applied.
  The hollow  wire is made by wrap-
ping a piece of thin gold plate round a
wire of the size of that to  be used for
the pivots. It is then drawn through a
hole in a Avire plate.   The inner wire is
then  removed, and  the seam in the
other  soldered.  But  hollow wire may
be procured of the proper size at much
less expense than it can  be made by a
dentist,  and  every practitioner, there-
fore, should be supplied Avith it.
  It sometimes happens that  the natu-
ral  root, instead of occupying a vertical
position in the jaw, passes up obliquely,
so that if the pivot connecting the arti-
ficial  tooth to it be straight, the latter
will either  overlap one  of the  adjoin-
ing teeth or project forwards or point
towards the interior of the mouth.  To
obviate this, an angle should be given
to the pivot, immediately at the point
of junction between the tooth  and the
root.  A little practice  will enable the
operator  readily  to  overcome  a  diffi-
culty  of this  description. 
PLA
601
PLA
   Again,  it sometimes happens that
  cases are  met with  presenting a still
  more formidable difficulty; as for ex-
  ample, when the root is  situated be-
  hind the  circle of the other teeth, and
  to obviate which, a different kind  of
  tooth, and  an entirely  different course
  of procedure, is necessary.  In a case
  of this sort, after having prepared the
  root in the manner as before described,
  an  impression of the parts should be
  taken with wax, from which a plaster
  model  should be  obtained, and  from
  this two metaUic casts.  Between  these
  last  a  gold plate  extending  just far
  enough back to cover the root  and suf-
  ficiently forward to form a line with the
  outer circle of the teeth. To the  supe-
  rior part of the plate covering the root,
  and directly beneath the cavity in it,  a
  gold pivot, about three-eighths  of an
  inch long, should be soldered, and to
  the anterior part a plate  tooth of the
  right size,  6hape and  shade, should be
  attached.   A piece of hollow wood, or
  a hollow gold screw, as before describ-
  ed, should now be introduced into the
  root for the reception of the gold pivot.
   PITYRON.  Bran.
   PIX.  Pitch.
   Pix Abietis.  Burgundy pitch.
   Pix Arida. Pix nigra.
   Pix Burgundica.   Burgundy pitch.
   Pix Canadensis.  Canada pitch.
   Pix Liquida.  Tar.
   Pix Nigra.  Black pitch.
   PLACE'BO.  I will please.  A  term
 applied to a medicine intended rather to
 please than benefit.
   PLACENTA.  The after birth.
   Placenta Febrilis. The ague cake.
   Placenta, Vegetable.   The cellu-
 lar substance in  the carpels of plants
 from which the ovules originate.
  PLADARO'SIS.  Pladarotes; from
 rtxahapos, soft.  A soft tumor within the
 eyelid.
  PLAGUE.  Pestis.
  Plague, Black.   Pestis nigra.
  Plague Cold.  A  congestive fever
occurring  in the  southern  states in
        51
 which there is little or  no reaction.
 Bilious pneumonia.
   PLAGULA.  A compress, pledget,
 or splint
   PLAITED.  Plicate.
   PLANARIA LATRUSCU'LA.—
 Distoma hepatica.
   PLANE.  From planum, flat.  A
 surface without elevation or depression.
   PLANER.   Dissertation  on Odon-
 talgia, by.  Tal., 1695.
   PLANT. An  organized  body,  be-
 longing to the vegetable kingdom.
   PLANTA.  A plant.
   PLANTA'GO.     Plantago major;
 also, the name of a genus of plants.
   Plantago Coron'opus.  The buck's- >
 horn plantain.
   Plantago  Latifo'lia.    Plantago
 major.
   Plantago Major.   The broad-leav-
 ed plantain.
   Plantago Psyl'lium. The branch-
 ing plantain.
   PLANTAIN.  Plantago major.
   Plantain-Tree.  Musa sapientum.
   Plantain, Water. Alisma plantago.
   PLANTAR. Pbntaris; from plan-
 ta, the sole of the foot.  Belonging, or
 relating, to the sole ofthe foot
   Plantar Aponeurosis.  The thick,
 dense aponeurosis, situated  under the
 integuments of the sole of the foot.
   Plantar Arteries.  Two arteries,
 an external, and internal, arising from
 the extremity ofthe posterior tibial.
   Plantar Ligaments. The inferior
 ligaments of the tarsus and metatarsus.
   Plantar Muscles.  The extensor
 tarsi minor.  Plantaris.
   Plantar Nerves.  Two nerves, an
 internal and external, proceeding from
 the posterior tibial; the internal to the
 first three toes, and the external,  to the
 outer side of the fourth and fifth, and to
 the muscles situated on the outer side of
 the foot.
   PLANTA'RIS. The plantar muscle.
   PLANUM,  OS.  A name formerly
given to the orbitar plate of the ethmoid
bone. 
PLA
602
PLE
  PLASMA.  From rtxaaaa, I  form.
The liquor sanguinis.  The fluid part of
the blood in which the corpuscles float.
  PLASTER.   See Emplastrum.
  Plaster of Paris.  See Gypsum.
  PLASTIC.  Plastkus; from rtxaaaa,
I form.   That which forms.
  Plastic Element. That from which
growth takes place.
  Plastic   Force.   The  formative
power of organized bodies.
  PLASTRON.  The  under part of
the shell ofthe tortoise.
  PLATA.  The scapula.
  PLATINUM.  Platina; fwmplata,
silver.  A metal  nearly  of the color of
silver, very malleable and ductile, harder
than iron, resisting the action of acids
and alkalies, and  fusible only at a very
high  temperature.  In  France, it  has
been extensively  used as a base for ar-
tificial teeth, and, also, for  filling teeth,
but its employment in the United States
for  tltese purposes is very limited.
  Platinum, Spongy.  Porous plati-
num, obtained by  heating the chloride
of this metal and ammonium to redness.
   Platinum, Black.  A black powder,
obtained by decomposing a weak solu-
tion of the chloride of platinum by  gal-
vanism.
   PLANTOU,  A.  A. Plantou,  late
dentist, of Philadelphia, but a native of
St. Bartholomew department of Lot and
 Garonne, France, was  born  1774, and
graduated  in  the Royal  Academy of
 Medicine and Surgery at Paris, in 1805;
 in  which place, after  an  absence of
 seven years, he practiced the profession
 of dental surgery until  1817, when he
 came to Phtiadelphia.   It is to  Dr. P.,
 so far as the author has  been able to
 ascertain, that we are indebted for the
 introduction of  mineral  teeth in  the
 United  States, and also for many  im-
 provements made in their fabrication,
 as is shown by a certificate of approba-
 tion granted him by the Medical Socie-
 ty  of Philadelphia, in 1822.   He  died
 March 16th,  1837, in  the 63d year of
 his age.
  PLATYS'MA MYOIDES.  A thin
muscle situated on the side of the neck.
  PLECTRUM.  The styloid process
of the temporal bone;  also, the uvula.
  PLEDGET.   A small  compress of
of lint, to be applied to wounds, ulcers,
8tc.
  PLENCK, J. J.   Doctrine of the
Diseases of the Teeth and  Gums, by.
Vienna, 1778, Nap., 1781.
  Plenck's Odontalgic Lotion, ty.—
Rad. pyrethrium, 3ij; muriate of am-
monia, 3 i; extract of opium, gr. ij;
distilled lavender water, § ij; distilled
vinegar,  §  ij ; mix—digest for  several
days and filter.
  PLERO'SIS.  Plethora.
  PLETHO'RA.  From rtXtj9a, I fill.
Excessive fullness of the blood-vessels.
  PLEUMO'NIA.  Pneumonia.
  PLEU'RA.  Iltovpa, the side, or a
rib.  The serous membrane which lines
each cavity of the chest, and is reflected
upon each lung.
  PLEURAL'GIA.  From rtxevpa, the
side, and aXyos, pain.   Pleurodynia.
  PLEURENCHY'MA.  The woody
tissue of plants.
  PLEURISY.  Pleuritis.
  Pleurisy, False.   Pleurodynia.
  Pleurisy Root. Asclepias tuberosa.
  Pleurisy, Rheumatic   Pleurody-
nia.
  PLEURITIS.   From rtxevpa, the
pleura, and itis, a terminal, denoting in-
flammation.  Inflammation of the pleu-
ra.   Pleurisy.
  Pleuritis Bronchialis.  Bronchi-
tis.
  Pleuritis Spuria.  Pleurisy, false.
  PLEUROCE'LE.   Hernia of the
pleura.
  PLEURO-COLLE'SIS. From rtxev-
pa, the pleura, and xoxxaw, I glue.  Ad-
hesion of the pleura.
  PLEURODYNIA.  From rtxevpa,
the pleura, and oSvvj?, pain.  Rheumat-
ic pain over the intercostal muscles.
  PLEUROPATHI'A.  Fromrt^vpo,
the pleura, and rta6os, a disease.  A dis-
ease of the pleura. 
PLI
603
PLU
  PLEUROPERIPNEU'MONIA. In-
 flammation of the pleura and lungs at
 the same time.        ,
   PLEURORTHOPNiEA.    From
 nxtvpa, the pleura,  opfloj,  upright, and
 rtȣw, I respire.  A pleurisy in which
 the patient cannot breathe, except in an
 upright position.
   PLEUROTHOT'ONOS.     From
 n\evpo9ev, laterally, and tovos, tension.
 A form of tetanus in which the body is
 drawn to one side.
   PLEXIM'ETER.    From  rtxrfcis,
 percussion, and uetpov, a measure.  An
 ivory plate used in percussion.
   PLEX'US.  From plecto, I inter-
 twine, I interlace.   A network of blood-
 vessels, or nerves.
   Plexus Cardiacus.    The cardiac
 plexus formed by a union of the eighth
 pair of nerves Avith the great sympa-
 thetic.
   Plexus Choroides.  The choroid
 plexus.
   Plexus Glandulosi Peyeri.  Pey-
 er's  glands.
   Plexus Median.  The coeliac, or
 solar plexus.
   Plexus Pulmonicus.   The pulmo-
 nic plexus.
   Plexus Reticula'ris. The network
 of vessels under the fornix.
   Plexus Retiformis.   The  corpus
 cavemosum vaginae.
   Plexus, Solar.  A plexus formed
 by numerous nervous filaments from the
 semilunar ganglia of the  great sympa-
 thetic nerve.
  PLI'CA.  From plkari, to  be knit
 together.   A disease characterized by a
 matting, interlacing and  agglutination
 of the hair.
  Plica Polonica.  Plaited hair.
  Plica Semilunaris.  A slight fold-
 ing ofthe conjunctive membrane on the
 outer side of the caruncle.
  PLICARIA.  The club moss.
  PLICATIO.  Plica.
  PLICE. From plica, a fold. Folds
of membrane.
  PLI'ERS.   A kind of pincers for
 seizing, holding, or binding  any small
 body.  Those used in the laboratory of
 the dentist, and by jewellers, have long
 slim jaws, the inner surfaces of which
 are rough  like a file, and  meet each
 other when  closed.  Some have round
 jaws.
   PLISSON.  Observations on a new
 method of  Curing certain Pains of the
 Teeth, by. Lyons, 1788.—Observations
 on an Extraordinary Disease of the
 Gums, by.   Lyons, 1791.
   PLOUCaUET. Dissertation. Does
 the Pain proceed from Inflammation of
 the Nerves ofthe Tooth itself? by. Tub.
 1794.
   PLOUGH, A. L.  General Observa-
 tions upon the Importance of the Teeth,
 by. New Orleans, 1836.
   PLUG'GING.  In  Surgery, the in-
 troduction of lint or pieces of rag into a
 wound, the socket of a recently extract-
 ed tooth, vagina, &.c, to  arrest hemor-
 rhage, and sustain  the parts.  In*Den-
 tal Surgery,  an operation to arrest  the
 progress of caries of the teeth.
   Plugging  Teeth.   See  Filling
 Teeth.
   PLUM.  Prunus domestica.
   PLUMBA'GO.  One of the purest
 native forms of carbon, with the excep-
 tion of the diamond.  In popular lan-
 guage, black lead.  Also, the name of
 a genus of plants.
  Plumbago Europaa.  Tooth/wort.
  PLUMBI  ACETAS.   Acetate  of
 lead.  Sugar of lead.
  Plumbi Carbonas. Carbonate of lead.
  Plumbi Chloridum.   Chloride  of
 lead.
  Plumbi Diacetatis Solutio.  So-
 lution of subacetate of lead.
  Plumbi Iodidum. Iodide of lead.
  Plumbi Nitras.  Nitrate of lead.
  Plumbi Oxydum Rubrum. Red oxyd
 oflead.
  Plumbi Oxydum Semivitreum.—
 Semivitrified oxyd of lead.
  Plumbi Oxydum Hydra'tum. Hy-
drated oxyd of lead.
  Plumbi  Subacetatis Liquor Com- 
PNE
604
POD
positus.  Diluted solution of subacetate
of lead.   Lead water.
  PLUMBUM.  Lead.
  Plumbum Candidum.  Tin.
  Plumbum Cinereum.   Bismuth.
  Plumbum Nigrum.  Plumbago.
  Plumbum Ustum.   Burnt lead.
  PLUMO'SE. Plumosus.  Feathered.
  PLUMULA.   A small feather.
  PLUVIOMETER.  A rain gauge.
  PNEUMARTHRO'SIS. From rtvev-
ua, air, and ap9pov, a joint.   A collec-
tion of air in an articular cavity.
  PNEUMATIC. Pneumatkus; from
rtvevua, air.  Of, or belonging to, air, or
gas.
  Pneumatic Trough. A vessel made
of wood or metal, and used for the pur-
pose of making experiments with gases.
  PNEUMAT'ICA.  Diseases of the
air  passages.
  PNEUMATICS.  From  rtvevua, air.
The science Avhich treats of the physi-
cal properties  of elastic  fluids, and es-
pecially of atmospheric air.
  PNEUMATOCELE.  From  rtvev-
ua, air, and xtjx^, a tumor.  Physocele.
  PNEUMATOM'ETER.  An instru-
ment by Avhich the quantity of inspired
air can be ascertained.
   PNEUMATOM'PHALUS.  From
rtvevua, air, and outyaXos, the umbilicus.
An umbilical hernia containing air.
   PNEUMATOSIS.  From  rtvevua-
 toa, to inflate.  Distention ofthe abdo-
 men Avith flatus.   Emphysema.  Four
 species are mentioned.  1. Pneumatosis
 spontanea, Avithout any obvious or appa-
 rent cause.  2. Pneumatosis traumatica,
 from a  Avound.   3. Pneumatosis vene-
 nata,  from  poison.  4.  Pneumatosis
 hysterica, from hysteria.
    Pneumatosis  Abdominis.  Tympa-
 nitis.
    Pneumatosis Enterica.  Flatulence.
    PNEUMATOTHO'RAX. Pneuma-
 thorax.
    PNEUMOGASTRIC  NERVE—
 From rtvevuav, the lung, and yaattip,
 the stomach. The eighth pair of nerves,
 par vagum, has been so named, because
it is distributed to  the organs contained
in the thorax and abdomen.
  PNEUMOGRAPHY. Pneumogi-a-
phia; from rtvevuav, the lung, and ypn^,
a description.   A description of the
lungs.
   PNEUMO'HiEMORRH A GI'C A.
Hemorrhage from the lungs.
  PNEUMOL'OGY.    Pneumobgia;
from rtvevuav, the lung, and a.oyo$, a dis-
course.  A treatise on the lungs.
  PNEUMON.  The lungs.
  PNEUMO'NIA.  Pneumonitis.
  Pneumonia, Typhoid.   Inflamma-
tion of the lungs,  accompanied by gas-
tric fever and typhoid symptoms; bili-
ous pneumonia.
  PNEUMONTCA.   Disease affect-
ing the lungs—the second order in the
class pneumatica, in Good's Nosology.
  PNEUMONIT'IC.    Belonging, or
relating, to pneumonitis.
  PNEUMONITIS.  From  rtvevuav,
the lungs, and itis, a terminal, denoting
inflammation.    Inflammation of the
lungs.
  PNEUMONO'SIS.  Diseases of the
lungs.
  PNEUMOPERICARDIUM. Pneu-
mo-perkarditis;  from rtvevua, air,  and
rtepixapSiov, pericardium.  Effusion of
air into the cavity of the  pericardium.
   PNEUMO-PLEURIT1S.  Pleuritis.
   PNEUMORRHAG'IA.    Haemop-
tysis.
   PNEUMOTHO'RAX.   From rtvev-
ua,  air,  and 0<opa|, the  thorax.  Effu-
sion of air in the cavity of the pleura.
   PNEUMOT'OMY.   Pneumotomia;
 from rtvevuav, the lung, and  tepva, I
 cut.  Dissection of the lungs.
   PNEUS1S.  Respiration.
   PNIGOPHOBIA.  Incubus.
   PNIX.  Strangulation.
   PODAGRA.   From rtovs, the foot,
 and aypa, seizure.  Pain in the feet.
 Gout in the feet.
   PODARTHROCACE.  Caries in
 the articulations ofthe foot.
   PODONIPTRUM.  A  footbath.
   PODOPHTHALMA.   From  rtovs, 
POI               605               POl
a foot, and o$9aXuos, an eye.   The tribe
of Crustacea in which the eyes are sup-
ported upon stalks.
  PODOPHYLLUM.  The  name of
a genus of plants.
  Podophyllum Pelta'tum.   Man-
drake ; may-apple.
  Podophyllum  Monta'num.  The
mountain may-apple, or mandrake.
  PODOTHE'CA.   An  anatomical
preparation of the foot.
  POGON.  Beard.
  POGONIASIS.    Pogonia;  from
rtayav, the beard. Female beard.
  POISON.  Venenum; toxicum. Any
agent, which, when introduced into the
body, or applied externaUy,  uniformly
exerts a  noxious or dangerous effect.
Such agents exist in  the animal, vege-
table and mineral kingdoms.  Orfila ar-
ranges them into four classes :  1. Irri-
tant. 2. Narcotic. 3. Narcotico-acrid.
4. Septic. Christison reduces them into
three classes:  1. Irritant.  2. Narcotic,
and 3. Narcotico-acrid,  which  are thus
arranged:
         1. Irritant Poisons.
  The mineral acids.
  Phosphorus.
  Sulphur.
  Chlorine.
  Iodine.
  Hydriodate of potash.
  Bromine.
  Oxalic acid.
  The fixed alkalies.
  Nitre.
  Alkaline and earthy chlorides.
  Lime.
  Ammonia and its salts.
  Alkaline sulphurets.
  The compounds of  arsenic.
  The compounds of  mercury.
  The compounds of  copper.
  Trollius.
  Mezereon.
 Arum.
 Gamboge.
 Daffodil.
 Jalap.
       51*
   Savin.
   The compounds of antimony.
   The compounds of tin,  silver, gold,
  iatinum, bismuth, chrome and zinc.
   The compounds of lead and baryta.
   Euphorbia.
   Castor oil seeds.
   Physic nut.
   Bitter cassada.
   Manchineel.
   Croton oil.
   Bryony.
   Colocynth.
   Elaterium.
   Ranunculus.
   Anemone.
  Caltha.
  Clematis.
  Cantharides.
  Poisonous fish.
  Venomous serpents and insects.
  Diseased and decayed animal matter.
  Mechanical irritants.

        2. Narcotic Poisons.
  Opium.
  Hyoscyamus.
  Lactuca.
  Solanum.
  Hydrocyanic acid.
  The vegetable substances which con-
tain hydrocyanic  acid,  are, bitter  al-
monds, cherry-laurel,  peach, cluster-
cherry, mountain-ash.
  Nitric oxyd gas.
  Chlorine gas.
  Ammoniacal gas.
  Muriatic acid gas.
  Sulphureted hydrogen.
  Carbureted hydrogen.
  Carbonic acid.
  Carbonic oxyd.
  Nitrous oxyd.
  Cyanogen.
  Oxygen.
     3. Narcotic Acrid Poisons.
  Nightshade.
  Thorn-apple.
  Tobacco.
  Lobelia. 
POL
606
POL
  Hemlock.
  Water hemlock.
  Hemlock dropAvort.
  Fool's parsley.
  Monk's-hood.
  Black hellebore.
  Ipecacuanha.
  SquiU.
  White heUebore.
  Meadow saffron.
  Foxglove.
  Strychnia.
  Nux vomica.
  St. Ignatius' bean.
  False angustura.
  Camphor.
  Cocculus indicus.
  Upas antiar.
  Coriaria myrtifolia.
  Poisonous fungi.
  Poisonous mosses.
  Secale cornutum.
  Mouldy bread.
  Darnel grass.
  Seeds of lathyrus cicera.
  Seeds ofthe bitter vetch.
  Seeds of the common laburnum.
  Alcohol.
  Ether.
  Some empyreumatic oils.
  Poison Berry. The melia azedarac.
  Poison Fangs. Thehollow teeth in the
upper jaws of vipers, rattlesnakes, &c,
through which the poison is discharged.
  Poison Nut.  Strychnos nux vomica.
  Poison Oak.  Rhus toxicodendron.
  Poison Vine. Rhus radicans.
  POKE, INDIAN. Veratrum viride.
  Poke Weed.  Phytolacca decandra.
  POLAR Relating to polesorpolarity.
  POLAR'ITY. That property of bod-
ies in consequence of which, when free,
they tend or point to certain determinate
directions, as  the magnetic needle.
  POLARIZATION. The state of a
body which causes  it to exhibit polari-
ty ; act of polarizing, or  of giving po-
larity  to a body:   thus,  tight when
changed by the action of certain media,
by which it is caused to exhibit the ap-
pearance  of  having  polarity, or poles
possessing  different properties, is said
to be polarized.
  POLEMONTUM.  The name of a
genus of plants.
  Polemonium  Caru'leum.    The
Greek valerian; Jacob's-ladder.
  POLES. In Astronomy, the extremi-
ties of the axis on which a sphere re-
volves.  In Electricity and Galvanism,
the poles, or parts of a magnet, which
exhibit the phenomena of attraction.
  POLH.   Dissertation   on  Difficult
Dentition of Infants, by.  Leipsic, 1776.
  POLIATER.  From rtoxis, a town,
and latpos, a  physician.   A physician
practicing in a town  by  authority of
government.
  POLIO'SIS. Hair prematurely gray
or hoary.
  POLISHING BRUSH. An instru-
ment employed in the laboratory of the
dentist for  polishing the  metallic por-
tions of any appliance or piece of me-
chanism intended to be placed in the
mouth.   It sometimes  consists  of a
simple brush,  like that used for clean-
ing the teeth,  except that it is longer
and a little  wider, and at other times,
of a brush-wheel.
  Polishing Rouge.  Jewelkr's rouge.
A polishing  powder,  made  by  dis-
solving  copperas in  water,  filtering
the solution, and adding  a filtered so-
lution of pearlash, or sub-carbonate of
soda,  as  long  as any sediment  falls.
The liquor is  then  filtered again, and
the sediment left on the filter, washed
by running clean water through it, and
then calcined  until it is  of  a scarlet
color.   This,  in  finishing a  piece of
dental mechanism, may be very advan-
tageously employed.   It gives to metal,
capable of receiving  a  high polish,
when rubbed  on it, a beautiful  finish.
  Polishing Wheel.  A small wheel
with  the  peripheral  surface covered
with buckskin or other soft leather, and
made to revolve on the  mandrel of a
lathe.
  POLIUM CRETICUM. Teucrium
creticum. 
POL
607
POL
  Polium Montanum. Teucrium mon-
tanum.
  POLLEN.   From pollk, fine flour.
The  meal-like  fecundating  dust con-
tained in the anther of flowers,  and
dispersed on the stigma for impregna-
tion. Also, farina.
  Pollen Tube. The delicate tubular
extension of the  poUen grain after  it
reaches the stigma.
  POLLEX. The thumb; also the great
toe.
  POLLUTION. Pollutio; from pol-
luo, I profane.  The  emission of semen
at other times than  during coition;
when  involuntary,  at night, .during
sleep, it is  caUed nocturnal pollution.
When excited by a voluntary act, it is
caUed masturbation, or self-pollution.
  POLY-.  A  prefix, signifying many.
  POLYADELPHIA.  Polydelphous;
from rtoxvs, many, and  aSeXtyos, a broth-
 er. Plants with hermaphrodite flowers,
in which several stamens are united by
filaments into  several  packets or bun-
dles.
  POLYjE'MIA. Plethora.
  POLYAN'DRIA.  Polyandrous ;—
from rtoXvs, many, and ai^p, a husband.
Hermaphrodite  plants having more
than  twenty stamens, inserted  in the
receptacle.
  POLYCHO'LIA. From*oju>j,much,
and xoty, bile.  Excess of bile.
  POLYCHRESTUS.   From *o*vj,
many,  and  xp^tos, useful.  Having
many virtues or uses: formerly applied
to medicines which  were supposed to
be useful in many diseases.
   POLYDACTYLUS.  From rtoxvs,
many, and SaxtvXos, a finger. One who
has one or more supemumerary^fingers,
or toes.
  POLYDIPSIA.  From rtoxvs, much,
and Sity, thirst.  Excessive thirst.
  POLYGALA. The name of a ge-
nus of plants.
  Polygala Amara.  Bitter milkwort.
  Polygala Paucifo'lia. Dwarf milk-
wort.
  Polygala  Sen'ega.   Rattlesnake
milkwort.   The bark is the active part
of the root.
  Polygala Virginiana. Polygala sen-
ega.
  POLYGA'MIA.  Plants  with her-
maphrodite flowers, and male or female
flowers, or both.
  POLYGASTRIA.   From  rtoxvs,
many, and yaatep, a stomach.  A class
of infusorial animalcules  which have
many stomachs.
  POLYGONA'CEiE.   The   buck-
wheat tribe of dicotyledonous plants.
  POLYGONATUM. Convallaria po-
lygonatum.
  POLYG'ONUM. The name of a ge-
nus of plants.
  Polygonum Avicula're.  The knot-
grass.
  Polygonum Bistor'ta. The officinal
bistort.  Great bistort or snakeweed.
  Polygonum Divarica'tum.    The
eastern buckwheat plant.
  Polygonum Fagop'yrum. The buck-
wheat plant.
  Polygonum Hydropiper. The poor-
man's pepper.; biting arsesmart; water
pepper.
  Polygonum Persica'ria.   Pcrsica-
ria.   Arsesmart.
  POLYLYMPH'IA. Anasarca.
  POLYMERIS'MUS.  From ttoXvs,
much, and (jiepos, a part. A monstrosity,
in which there is an  excess or multi-
plicity of organs or parts of the body.
  POLYOPSIA.  From rtoXvs, much,
and o4-is,  sight.  Vision, in which  a
person sees more objects than are pre-
sent.
   POLYPE'RIA. From mokvs, much,
and rtrjpos, mutilated.   Congenital mis-
construction.
   POLYPETALOUS. Many-petaled.
   POLYOREX'I A. FromrtoTivf, much,
 and oue£is, appetite. Excessive hunger.
   POLYPHA'GIA. FromrtoM^much,
 and $aya, I eat.  Voracity. See Pica.
   POLYPI.   From rtoXvs, many, and
rtovs, a foot.  A  class of radiated ani-
mals with many prehensile organs ra-
diating from around the mouth. 
POM              608               POP
    POLYPHYLLOUS.   Applied to
  plants which bear many leaves.
    POLYPO'DIUM.  The name of a
  genus of plants.
    Polypodium Aculeat'um.  Spear-
  pointed fern.
    Polypodium Filix Mas.  Aspidium
  filex mas. Male polypody, or fern.
    Polypodium Vulga're.   Common
  polypody. Fern root; rock brake.
    POLYPODY,  MALE.  Aspidium
  filex mas.
    POLYPODY OF THE OAK. Po-
  lypodium vulgare.
    POLYPOID.  Shaped like,  or  re-
  sembling, a polypus.
    POLYPO'SIA. From rtoXvs, much,
  and  rtoais, drink.  Great thirst.
    POLYPUS.   From rtoxvs, many,
  and rtovs, foot.    In Zoology, a class of
  zoophytes. In  Surgery, a morbid ex-
  cressence developed from mucous mem-
  brane, as in the nasal fossa, uterus, &c.
    Polypus Bronchialis.   A  mem-
  branous  secretion  in the  bronchial
 tubes of a diphtheritic character.
   POLYSAR'CIA. From *(*«*, much,
 and ffapi, flesh. Excessive corpulency;
 fatness.
   POLYSTOMA. From *oto,j, many,
 and atoua, a mouth.   The name  of a
 genus of Avorms.
   Polystoma Pinguicola.  A species
 of Avorm found in a fatty tumor cover-
 ing the ovary of a female.
  POLYT'RICHUM.  Polytrycon.—
 The name of a genus of mosses.
   Polytrichum Commune. The gold-
 en maiden-hair.
  POLYTROPH'IA.    From rtoxvs,
 much, and tpe$a, I nourish. Excessive
 nutrition.
  POLYURIA.  Diabetes.
  POMA'CE^E.   From  pomum, an
 apple. That division of the natural or-
 der of rosaceaz, to  which the apple,
 pear, quince, and medlar belong.
  POMA'CEUM. Cider.
  POMATUM.  A fragrant ointment.
  POMEGRANATE. Punica grana-
tum.
     POMADE D'ALYON.  Ointment
  of nitric acid.
     Pomade  D'Autenrieth.   Tartar
  emetic ointment.
    Pomade  de Gondret.  Vesicating
  pomatum of ammonia.
    POMPH'OLYX.  From nou^os, a
  bladder. A small vesicle. An eruption
  of bullae, without  fever, and without
  inflammation around them.
    POMPHOS. A  blister; a bubble.
    PO'MUM.    An  apple.  Also,  a
  fleshy, pulpy pericarp, containing  a
  membranous capsule in it with several
  seeds.
    Pomum Adami.  Adam's-apple; the
  projection formed on the anterior part
  of the neck by the thyroid cartilage.
   Pomum Amoris.  The love-apple, or
  tomato plant.
   PONDERABLE.   From pondus,
  weight. That which has weight.
   PONDO.  A pound weight
   PONS.  Abridge.
   Pons Hepatis.   A name given to a
 bridge  crossing  the passage for the
 roung ligament of  the liver from the
 lobulus anonymus.
   Pons Ta'rini. The layer of grayish
 substance between the corpora albucan-
 tia, which forms the locus perforatus of
 the floor of the third ventricle of the
 brain.
   Pons Varo'lii.  An eminence at the
 upper  part of the medulla oblongata,
 formed by the union  of the crura cere-
 bri and crura cerebelli. Varolius' bridge.
   POOR-MAN'S  PEPPER.  Polyg-
 onum hydropiper.
  POPLAR, AMERICAN. Lirioden-
 dron tulipiferum.
  POPLES.   The  back  part ofthe
 knee joint.
  POPLITEAL.  Popliteus;  from po-
ples, the ham.  Belonging, or relating, to
 the ham.
  Popliteal Aneurism. An aneurism
 ofthe popliteal artery.
  Popliteal Artery. The continua-
 tion of  the femoral artery in the hollow
ofthe ham. 
POR             609               POR
  Popliteal  Nerves.    The   two
branches formed by the bifurcation of
the sciatic in the popliteal space.
  POPLITE'US.  A  long, flat, trian-
gular muscle situated in the popliteal re-
gion.
  POPPY.  See Papaver.
  Poppy, Red Corn. Papaver rhoeas.
  Poppy, White.   Papaver  somnife-
rum.
  POP'ULUS.  Populus nigra. Also,
the name of a genus of trees.
   Populus Balsamife'ra.  One of the
trees supposed to yield the tacamahaca,
a resinous substance having a delight-
fully fragrant smeU.
   Populus Nigra.  The black poplar.
   Populus Tremu'la. The European
aspen.
   Populus Tremuloides. The Amer-
can aspen.
   PORCELAIN.  Decomposed feld-
 spar, of which the finest species  of
earthenware is made.
   Porcelain Teeth.  Mineral teeth ;
incorruptible teeth; silkious terro-jmetal-
lic teeth ; vitrescent teeth.  Dental substi-
tutes, resembling,  more or less closely,
the shape and color ofthe natural teeth,
so  constructed that they may be  se-
 curely fixed to the various attachments
employed  for their  adjustment  and
maintenance in the mouth, composed
 of feldspar,  silex  and   other mineral
 substances.
   Porcelain, like human teeth, consist
 of two portions, an internal and exter-
 nal.  The internal, called the body or
base, is more or  less opaque—the ex-
ternal, called the enamel, is semi-trans-
parent, and  has a smooth glossy sur-
face.  The base or body of porcelain
teeth is composed principally of kaolin,
and the> enamel or covering of feldspar
and sikx. Besides these, various metal-
lic oxyds or metals,  reduced to a state
of minute division  are employed for im-
parting to the teeth the necessary  color.
               Kaolin.
   This is the Chinese name for porce-
bin clay, Avhich is evidently a result of
the decomposition of feldspar, and, gen-
eraUy, consists of nearly equal propor-
tions  of alumina and silica.   When
pure, it is  infusible  in the porcelain
kiln, is of a yellowish, or reddish-white
color, and is found in the United States,
at Fairmount, near Philadelphia;  on
the Columbia rail-road ; near Wilming-
ton, Del.;  in  Missouri; at  Montonk,
Vt, and at Washington, Conn.
   As kaolin can always  be procured at
porcelain manufactories, ready for use,
a description of the manner of prepar-
ing it is not deemed necessary.

              Feldspar.
   This  mineral is of a white, gray, red,
brown,  or bluish color, and occurs in a
crystalhzed state, in the  form  of ob-
lique rhomboidal prisms,  but the only
kind suitable for use,  is  pure white, or
that  which is nearly  so. According to
Rose, it consists  of silica, 66.75; alu-
mina, 17.50;  potash, 12; lime, 1.25,
and oxyd of iron, 0.75.
   The  common  feldspar is found in
various parts of the United States, and
the finer kinds,  near Baltimore, Md.;
at Ticonderoga, N. Y.; near Fairmount,
Philadelphia; at Conestoga Creek, Pa ;
at Southampton, Oakham  and West
Springfield, Mass.; and at Hadom and
Lyme, Conn.
   Previously to being used, feldspar is
put upon a fire and heated to a red heat,
then thrown into cold water. It should
 now be broken into small pieces, and
 after removing the impurities,  be  re-
 duced, in a mortar or on a slab, to fine
 powder.   This  is  easily fused,  and
 when united with kaolin, diffuses itself,
 in baking, throughout the mass, giving
 to it a beautiful semi-transparent  ap-
 pearance.

                Silex.
   This occurs in nearly a pure state, in
 flint, quartz and white sand, but  for
 use, the crystalline form should be  se-
lected.   The rock crystal, or pure.silex, 
POR
610
POR
 is found  in great  abundance in Fred-
 erick county, Md.; at Lake George, N.
 Y.; at Abington and Plainfield, Mass.;
 Grafton,  Vt; West Hartford, Conn.;
 St. Lawrence co. N. Y.; Newbury, S.
 C. White  Mountains, N.  H., and in
 several counties in Virginia and  Ken-
 tucky.  The manner of  preparing  it
 for use, consists in  first heating it to
 a red heat, and then  plunging  it in
 water, when it should be reduced to a
 fine powder.
                 Lime.
   The carbonate of lime or  chalk, is
 the form which is used in the manufac-
 ture of porcelain teeth.

 Materials for Cobring Porcebin Teeth.
   The materials employed for coloring
 porcelain teeth,  are metals in  a  state
 of minute division, or metallic  oxyds,
 mixed in  certain proportions  with the
 body, or enamel, or with both.  Teeth
 are  frequently  colored  by  painting
 them, after they  have  been  burnt.
 The process is as follows: take  of tita-
 nium four  parts, glass one part, mix
 with  oil of  turpentine, and grind fine
 on a glass  slab, then apply  it to the
 teeth with a camel's-hair pencti.  When
 thoroughly   dry, place  them, for  the
 third time, in the furnace, and let them
 remain there until the enamel and color
 fuse and blend together.   But in color-
 ing in this manner, it is important that
 the titanium shall have  no  iron in it,
 as in that case the teeth wiU discolor
 under the blow-pipe.
   The only  metals  and oxyds that can
be relied upon  for coloring teeth,  are
 the following:
  Materials used.           Color given.
Gold in filings and its oxyds, Bright rose red.
Purple powder of Cassius,   Rose purple.
Platina sponge or filings,    Grayish blue.
 Oxyd titanium,           Bright yellow.
 Oxyd uranium,            Greenish  '<
Oxyd cobalt,              Bright blue.
   Gold, in  filings  or  gold-leaf, when
used thus, may be  ground fine upon a
 slab  Avith a muller, by  adding  some
 pulverized spar.
           Peroxyd of Gold.  .
   Dissolve gold foil  or  pure gold in
 aqua regia, composed of one  part mu-
 riatic acid, and two parts of nitric acid,
 precipitate the solution with ammonia,
 being careful not to add too much am-
 monia, then pour off the acid and Avash
 the precipitate Avith warm water several
 times, or until there is no acid left, then
 dry it over a gentle fire.
    The Purple Powder of  Cassius.
   The following are the rules  adopted
 by Thenard :
   "Make an aqua regia of  one part of
 muriatic or chloro-hydric acid, and two
 parts of  nitric,  to dissolve the  gold.
 When  it is  dissolved, dilute it with
 water and filter it, then make it very
 dilute by  the addition of a large quan-
 tity of water, make also an  aqua  regia
 to dissolve the tin, of one part of nitric
 acid, and two parts of pure water, to
 which is to be added one  hundred and
 thirty grains of muriate of soda, or com-
 mon salt, to each pint of the dilute acid.
 The tin should be very pure, and must
 be added to the acid, a small piece at a
 time.  When the first piece is dissolved,
 add a second, and so on, untU the acid
 is saturated.  The solution should be of
 a yellow color, and the operation  car-
 ried on very slowly, and in a cool place.
 When it is finished, filter the liquid and
 dilute it by  the  addition of about one
 hundred times its volume  of water.
  "Now place the dilute solution of gold
in a glass vessel, and add  the solution
of tin, drop by  drop, stirring  with a
glass  rod  incessantly,  until the liquid
takes the color of port wine, suffer it  to
stand,  and large  flocks of  the purple
will fall to  the  bottom of the vessel,
decant the solution, wash and  dry the
precipitate, which wiU be of the  most
splendid purple color."*
  Platina Sponge.—The sponge of pla-

        * Goddard on the Teeth. 
POR
611
POR
 tina is prepared by dissolving the metal
 in filings in nitro-muriatic acid, that is, a
 mixture of one part nitric acid, to two
 parts muriatic acid, to  this solution is
 then added a solution of sal-ammoniac,
 Avhen  a yellow precipitate is formed,
 Avhich precipitate, on being exposed to
 a red heat in a crucible, leaves fine pla-
 tinum in the form of a dark lead colored
 spongy mass.
   Titanium.—The principal ores  of
 titanium are sphene, common and foli-
 ated, rutik, kerine,  menachanite, and
 octahedrite, or pyramidal titanium ore.*
 It  is found  in the  United States,  in
 Lancaster,  Bucks and Montgomery
 counties, Pa.; London Grove, Chester
 county, Pa.; near Richmond, Va.; also,
 in the counties of Bedford and Amherst,
 Va.; near Baltimore, Md.; near  West
 Point and  King's Bridge,  N. Y.; near
 New Haven and Litchfield, Conn.; and
 Windsor, Mass.
   Uranium.—This oxyd is used gen-
 eraUy as formed in nature.  The pre-
 pared article, as sold by  chemists, con-
 tains about two parts of the metal and
 three of the oxyd, in the form of a yel-
 low powder.  It is found  in  Saxony,
 Europe; near Baltimore, Md., United
 States.
   Cobalt.—This metal, being difficult
 to reduce from its ores, is therefore very
 little known, and has not hitherto been
 employed in its simple state in any  of
 the arts, but its oxyd  has been exten-
 sively used on account of the rich blue
 color which it imparts to glass, and the
 glaze of porcelain  ware.  The princi-
 pal ores of cobalt are those designated
 by  mineralogists  under  the names of
 arsenkal cobalt and gray  cobalt.f  The
 first contains, in  addition  to  cobalt,
 some arsenic, iron, nickel, and  occa-
 sionally silver, &c.  The  other is  a
 compound of cobalt with iron, arsenic,
 sulphur and nickel.
  As the  proper  preparation of the
oxyd is attended  with  much trouble,
  * Ure's Dictionary of the Arts, &c.
  t Ure's Dictionary of the Arts, &c.
 and the quantity used in  the manufac-
 ture  of teeth,  being  very minute, we
 deem it unnecessary to give the pro-
 cess here, as it can be obtained of most
 chemists.

               Recipes.
   The  following recipes, are not copied
 from any work, but have been  proved
 to  be good by some of the  best man-
 ufacturers of block teeth:
   Body, No.  1.—Spar, six oz ; silex,
 three;  kaolin,  one.
   Enamel, No. 1.—Spar; same as used
 in body.
   Body,  No.  2.—Wissahicon   spar,
 three oz;  Wilmington spar, one ; silex,
 one; Baltimore clay, three dwts.
   Enamel,  No.  2.—Wissahicon spar,
 two oz.; Wilmington spar, two; silex,
 one; porter bottle glass, ten dwts.
   Body, No. 3.—Spar, four oz.;  silex,
 two; glass, three dwts.; calcined mag-
 nesia, ten grs.
   Enamel, No. 3.—No. 3 body, two oz.;
 spar, twelve; glass, one.
   Body, No. 4.—Spar, six  oz.;  silex,
 five dwts.; clay, three dwts.
   Enamel, No. 4.—Spar, two oz.; flint-
 glass, sixteen  grs.
   The  following recipes  for the body
 and enamel of teeth,  are quoted from
 Dr. S. Spooner's excellent Essay on the
 Manufacture of Porcelain Teeth.
  Ambler's true  recipe.—Body.—Spar,
 ten parts; South Carolina clay, twelve;
 chalk, fifteen;  silex, five ; kaolin, ten.
  The South Carolina  clay is obtained
 from  Columbia.
  Enamel.—Spar, four drachms; S. C.
 clay, one; porter bottle glass, two scru-
 ples;  yellow mixture, ten, twenty, to
 thirty grains;  blue smalt, two, five, to
 seven grains.
  Recipes of  Mr.  Harrison,  of New
 York:
  Body.—No.  1, feldspar, thirty parts;
kaolin, four; silex, two.
  Enamel.—Spar, thirty ; silex, three.
Body, No. 2.—Spar thirty; kaolin, six ;
South Carolina clay, two; silex, iavo. 
POR
612
roR
  Enamel.—Spar, thirty ; kaolin, one ;
S. C. clay, five ; glass, six ;  silex, two.
Body.—No.  3,  spar,  thirty; kaolin,
five; silex, two; sugar-house clay, one.
  Enamel.—As No. 2. For this purpose,
says Dr. Spooner, "he uses the folloAV-
ing frits, ground with an equal weight
of raw enamel:"
  Frit.—No.  1, raw enamel,  one hun-
dred grs.;  titanium,  four;  terre  de
Sienna, four;  oxyd of gold,  one-eighth.
  Frit.—No. 2, raw enamel, one hundred
grs.; titanium, two; terre  de Sienna,
four; oxyd of gold, one-eighth.
  Frit.—No. 3, raw enamel,  one hun-
dred grs.; black oxyd  of cobalt, one;
oxyd of platina, one-half.
  Put  the materials in a smaU crucible,
washed with silex,  to prevent the frit
from adhering to  it when fused; fuse
in a muffle,  and pour  the mass into
cold water;  grind for  use.   Terre  de
Sienna gives a muddy brown color. Mr.
Harrison considers   it an  acquisition
to our  coloring materials, and it may be
obtained  at  any  paint-shop  or drug
store."
  Dr.  Fillers1 Vilrescent Composition.
Body.—Cornish composition,  four drs.;
feldspar, four; rock crystal, eight.
  Enamel.—Vitrescent composition one
dr.;  feldspar, three.
  The following is his  cornish compo-
sition :' feldspar, one and a half ounces;
silex, two;  kaolin, one half.
   The following recipes, furnished  by
Mr. Parker, surgeon dentist, of Phila-
delphia, are taken from Dr. Goddard's
Work on the Teeth:
   Bodies for  Bbcks.—No.  1, feldspar,
three  parts;  clay,   (Baltimore,) one.
No. 2, feldspar, four ; kaolin, one.  No.
3, feldspar, twenty-four; silex, twelve;
clay, six. No. 4, feldspar, twenty-four;
 silex,  twelve; kaolin, six.
   Bodks for  singk  teeth.—No. 5, feld-
 spar,  eighteen parts; disintegrated feld-
 spar, six; kaolin, two; flint, twelve.  No.
 6, feldspar, thirty-six; kaolin, three; si-
 lex, two.  No. 7, feldspar, seventy-two ;
 disintegrated feldspar,forty-eight; sUex,
twenty-four; kaolin, six.  No. 8, feld-
spar,  one hundred;  disintegrated feld-
spar,  fifty ; silex, twenty-four; kaolin,
twelve.
  Enamek.—No. 1,  disintegrated feld-
spar,   twenty-four  parts;   flint-glass,
twelve; feldspar, six. No. 2, disintegrat-
ed feldspar, twenty-four;  pulv.  blue
Canton porcelain,ten; flint-glass, three;
borax, four.   No. 3, feldspar, thirty-six;
disintegrated feldspar,  eighteen; clay,
twelve.
  The following is the recipe for frit en-
amel, as given by Dr. Goddard_:
  "First  enamel.—Disintegrated  feld-
spar, twenty-eight parts; kaolin, four-
teen;  borax, twelve; flint-glass, eight;
potash, three; nitre,  three.
  "After fusing the above in crucibles
well luted in a furnace  for about three
hours, and allowing  it  to cool, the en-
amel must be removed from  the cruci-
bles  by breaking them from it; it is
then  to be  finely  pulverized,  after
which, add half a part of Canton porce-
lain and half a part of feldspar.  Mix
and grind the whole  finely together."
  In quoting the foregoing recipes, the
author has selected such as he conceiv-
ed to be the best, though he has doubt-
less omitted many very excellent ones.
From any of the enamel recipes, gum
enamel may be made by adding  one
grain of peroxyd of gold to every twelve
or fifteen  parts of  enamel,  according
to the tint which may be required.
  In coloring, much will depend upon
the degree of fineness to which the ma-
terials are reduced, and the  amount  of
heat used in baking and fusing the enam-
el.  To specify the quantity of coloring
materials would, therefore, seem super-
fluous.  We will, hoAvever, give a few
of the proportions, which will compass
the whole range from the least quantity
to the greatest.

   Grades of Cobrfor Body or Enamel.
   Yellow tints (titanium) from one to
six grs. to the oz.  of material. Blue
tints, platina, from half gr. to four grs. 
PIV
613
PIV
 to the oz. of material.  Bright blue tints,
 cobalt, from half gr. to six to the oz. of
 material.  Bluish-yellow tints, titanium
 from half agr. to four grs., and from half
 gr.  to three grs. platina to the oz. of ma-
 terial.
     Preparation ofthe Materials.
  This part of the process requires the
 greatest care and most assiduous atten-
 tion,  but fortunately the manufacturer
 of porcelain teeth, may avoid the  labor
 and trouble of it, by procuring his ma-
 terials ready prepared  from a porcelain
 manufactory, which, we believe, is gen-
 erally done.  In mixing the  various in-
 gredients ofthe body, the proper propor-
 tion of each should be carefuUy weigh-
 ed  out,  moistened  with  water,  and
 ground in a mortar, or on a wedgewood
 or porphyry slab, until they are reduced
 to an unctuous paste.  It should then be
 suffered to dry until it attains the con-
 sistence of thick dough, when, after be-
 ing thoroughly beaten with  a wooden
 maUet, or repeatedly and forcibly thrown
 upon  the slab, it may be put away in
 jars tightly closed,  so  as to  prevent it
 from  drying, to be used as occasion
 may require.
  The enamel  is  prepared  in pretty
 much the same manner, requiring if pos-
 sible,  more care in its  preparation.   It
 should be reducced as nearly to an im-
 palpable  powder as possible, carefully
 excluding every particle of dust, nor
 should it be  handled with any metallic
 instrument.  The coloring matter should
 be thoroughly incorporated, in order to
 secure a tint or  shade uniformly diffus-
 ed,  and  it  should be preserved  in a
 state as nearly  of the consistence  of
 cream as possible.  If  it be  suffered to
 dry, it will require to be reground.
          Moulds for Teeth.
  The moulds employed for  this  pur-
pose are sometimes made in plaster of
paris,  and sometimes in metal or porous
stone.   Metal moulds  are the most du-
rable and produce better  teeth.  For
pivot teeth, the moulds invented by Dr.
    52
 Spooner, are equal to any in use.  The
 manner of preparing them is as follows:
 "In the first place," says Dr. S., "I pre-
 pare the teeth Avhich the moulds are to
 represent, with the pivot properly fixed,
 the direction of Avhich should be through
 the centre  of the fang to  the cutting
 edge  of the tooth.   I  next prepare a
 box two and  a  half  inches long, one
 and a half Avide, and three-fourths of
 an inch thick.  The teeth are next set-
 tled just  half into  the  bottom piece,
 with the external surface  up, the cut-
 ting edges towards each other, and one
 half inch asunder.  This being  done,
 the box is filled with stucco," (plaster
 of paris) "which of course, forms half
 the mould.  The bottom piece is  next
 removed, and holes  or notches being
 cut on either side of the teeth, to keep
 the top piece in its place, and the mould
 oiled to prevent the plaster from adher-
 ing together, another  box like the for-
 mer, less one and a half inches in length,
 is placed  over the teeth, and also filled
 with plaster, which completes the mould.
 The top piece is  to be  pared off even
 with the base of the teeth.   The groove
 formed in the bottom piece, by the pivot
 in the tooth, serves as a perfect guide
 to the wire, in making the pivot hole in
 the mineral teeth." * *
   For plate teeth, Dr. S.  makes  his
 moulds as follows :  "I first take front
 natural teeth, of different  shapes and
 sizes, and imbed the external surface in
 soft wax.  These being removed, plas-
 ter is run into the beds, and thus with
 little trouble, I get  any number of half
 teeth, in sets, that I may desire.  I next
 cut a  notch in  a  board, one foot  in
 length,  one inch  wide, and  one-fourth
 of an  inch deep, or more,  according
 to the  thickness of the teeth.   This
 notch is cut on the edge of the board.
 Another board being placed  beside this,
forms a long narrow box.  The stucco
teeth are next glued in sets to the notch-
ed board,  the external surface up, and
the base against  the  bottom, and well
dried.  The object ofthe glue is to pre- 
                PIV

vent the melted tin from displacing the
teeth.  This being done, and  the box
adjusted, melted tin is cast into it, which
at once gives you perfect moulds."
  Brass  moulds are  more  substantial
and  better  than tin,  but in the one
which forms the back of the teeth, small
holes should be formed for the reception
of the platina rivets.  If plaster moulds
be employed, they should be saturated
with wax before they are used.  This
may be done by holding them to a fire,
until they  become hot enough  to  melt
the wax before it is applied.
  We should not omit to say that the
moulds should  be about one-fifth larger
than the teeth,  as the  paste  shrinks
about this much in baking.  For this
reason moulds  formed  from  natural
teeth, will generally be found too small.
The teeth,  therefore, used in  making
moulds, should be artificial, and carved
from ivory,  or  white  wax, which will
answer.
           Moulding Teeth.
  The paste for the body, before being
put into  the moulds, should be well
worked, in order to force out any con-
fined air which  may be diffused through
it, and to consolidate it as much as pos-
sible previously to its being used.  This
done, the moulds should be oiled with
a camel's-hair brush and  olive  oil, and
small  pieces of the  prepared  paste
pressed into each, and the top or back
piece of the  mould put on and squeezed
up in a vice until it is in contact with
the other, and the redundancy of paste
in the  moulds  forced  out between the
two.   In  moulding  pivot  teeth,  the
pivot wire should be  forced  in imme-
diately after the two parts ofthe mould
are put together, while the paste is soft.
For  this purpose,  a  copper or silver
wire may be employed, Avith the depth
of the hole  marked  on it, which is ne-
cessary to secure a uniform  length  to
it.  It  is important that the pivot hole
should be in the centre of the base  of
the tooth.
14                PIV

   In moulding plate teeth, the  platina
 pins or rivets, should be cut Avith an in-
 strument made for the purpose,  and in-
 serted in the holes in the back of the
 moulds.  The extremities  Avhich enter
 the  teeth should, however, be first flat-
 tened, split or headed, so  as  to prevent
 the  liability of their being draAvn out.
 It is also important that  they  should
 penetrate the tooth as far  as possible
 without becoming visible on the exter-
 nal  surface.  Having inserted the pla-
 tina rivets, the teeth may  be moulded
 as before directed.  When the teeth are
 dry, the moulds should be  separated,
 and if  they do  not readily  drop out,
 they may be made to do so by slightly
 tapping the mould.  It is often  neces-
 sary to scrape or trim the sides  of the
 teeth a little where the  paste has been
 forced out between the moulds.
             Bbck Teeth.
   Although single teeth with artificial
 gums are preferable  to block teeth, it
 may be well to describe  very  briefly
 the  manner of  making the  latter.  A
 plate of the proper form is first to be
 struck  up to serve  as a base for the
 block, and upon this a sufficient quan-
 tity  of the paste  for the body is  rudely
 modeled, and, platina  rivets inserted
 opposite to the back of each tooth.  Af-
 ter it has dried  sufficiently, it must be
 carved  with a knife so  as to represent
 as nearly as  possible the  shape of the
 natural teeth. This part of the process
 must be conducted with  great  care to
 prevent crumbling the body. The block
 is now  removed  from the  metalhc base
 or plate, and placed upon  plaster of
 paris, permitting only the surface which
 is to rest upon the plate to come in con-
 tact  with the plaster.
  In making blocks for an entire den-
 tal circle, the usual  method is to make
 three pieces; one with the incisores and
 cuspidati, and each of the  others, with
 two  bicuspides and two molares. The
 front piece  is carved and baked first,
 then the two side blocks.
6 
PIV
61
5
PIV
       Baking and Enameling.
  This part  of the process is so  fully
 and  accurately described by  Dr.  God-
 dard, that the author cannot  do better
 than quote what he says upon the sub-
 ject  The teeth being moulded or carv-
 ed in the manner as already described,
 "must now be placed in a crucible hav-
 ing a little dry kaolin at the bottom, and
 subjected to  a bright red heat, in a  char-
 coal fire.  This degree of heat will not
 vitrify them, but agglutinates and ren-
 ders them hard enough to  receive the
 enamel. The body in this state is called
 biscuit, and the process, biscuiting por-
 celain.
  '•When the biscuit is cool, the enamel
 must be applied to it, a process which
 requires much care.  Having a quan-
 tity of the enamel prepared of the con-
 sistence of cream, and  in  several par-
 cels of different tints of color, it is to be
 apphed to the face  of the tooth, pre-
 viously well cleaned, with a camel's-hair
 pencil, in a regular uniform coat, which
 should extend beyond the cutting edge
 of the tooth, so as to give that part of it
 its appropriate  transparency.   If the
 tooth is  of a uniform  color, it is only
 necessary to make it  regular and  even
 by means of a needle  set  into a little
 handle after  it has dried.   It most gen-
 erally happens, however, that the  oper-
 ator Avishes to color the tooth of three dif-
 ferent tints, and in the  case of  blocks,
 to color the artificial gums.  To do this,
 several parcels, of enamel of the proper
 tints must be mixed,   *  *  and  each
 put on to its  appropriate place.   Great
 care  must be taken  not to  let the rosy
 gum enamel get on to the tooth, a well
 shaped edge  being formed around each.
 The  tints  on the crown of the  tooth
 must be incorporated  carefully,  so as to
 blend or shade off into the other enamel,
 whilst the gum forms a sharp well de-
 fined edge.  To do this well, the  colored
enamels should be placed on the tooth
and covered  by a  thin layer of enamel,
mixed with  an increased quantity of
water so as to render it fluid." He then
says,
  "It is usual to color the part  of the
crown next to the neck of the tooth of a
yellow, and the tip,  of a blue.  If the
predominate color of the teeth to be im-
itated is yellow, the thin coat may  be of
yellow  enamel, and on the contrary, if
they are blue, this layer may be put on
Avith the blue enamel.
  "The body ofthe tooth should always
be colored to harmonize  with the en-
amel, or the effect is not good.
  "When perfectly dry, they are ready
to go into the furnace," see Furnace for
baking Porcelain Teeth.  The slides or
tiles on which teeth are placed should
be "grooved for the platina pins which
project  from the  teeth, and  to  enable
them to be laid in such a way that their
cutting edges may be free, and not come
in contact with any thing capable of al-
tering their shape.   Before putting the
teeth on the slide it must be pretty thick-
ly covered with kaolin, mixed up with
water, or  a layer of  powdered silex,
to keep the teeth from  sticking to it.
*  *  *  When pivot teeth are baked.
they should be so placed in one of the
grooves on the slide, that their edge  may
project and not become deformed.  For
this purpose the grooves should be made
transverse, which is  usually done  on a
separate slide."  •
              Firing.
  "The fire must be kindled with small
pieces of charcoal,  as it produces but
little ashes.  Over this must be placed
a quantity of anthracite, (of a kind that
is hard and produces white ashes,)
broken into pieces about  the  size of  a
walnut.  To prevent chilling  the muf-
fle, the anthracite must  be  added  in
small quantities until the furnace is full.
When this  is fully kindled, and  the
charcoal wholly burned away, the fur-
nace is to be filled up until  it is  two
inches deep over the top  of the muffle
with the anthracite, and  the  stopper
put into the upper  opening  and  well 
PIV
616
PIV
luted.  The coal should before this last
filling be Avell shook down under the
muffle, as the greatest heat is required
at that point.
  "The teeth having well biscuited, and
the enamel  put on them, are to be laid
as directed  on the  slide.   The muffle
being in its place, the slide is to be care-
fully placed in  it, and  the door  luted
into the end of the muffle with fire clay.
Care must be taken not  to shake or stir
the fire after this.
  "The test-piece, which consists of a
platina wire projecting from the end of
a plug made to fit the hole in the cover
last mentioned, is now to have one ofthe
same batch  attached to the end of it, so
as to judge ofthe progress of the baking,
and introduced  into  its place.   The
second cover is then placed over it and
tightly luted.
   "Some prefer a door with three holes,
in each of which a test-piece is intro-
duced.  The advantage of this is that
the operator can withdraw one test, and
if it indicates an insufficient baking, he
can go on, knowing that the remaining
tests have not been  exposed to the cool-
ing process whilst being  examined.
This plan is very  advantageous to be-
ginners, but after  some  practice, the
state of the baking can  be judged of
without cooling the test-piece too much.
Some use no test-piece, but open the
muffle  and withdraw  the slide parti-
ally when  they  think  that they are
sufficiently  baked.  Iftheyarenot fin-
ished it is quickly  returned and allow-
ed to remain some  time longer, when
it may be  again examined.  As soon
as  the test-piece, on examination, has
indicated that  the  teeth  are   suffi-
ciently  baked, which is known by the
enamel being perfectly  fused and pol-
ished over  its whole surface, the plug
must be removed from  the upper door,
and the  stopper put into the lower and
luted tight. The  furnace  must then
stand until the combustion has ceased
and the  whole become cool. -By this
means the teeth Avill be very gradually
brought down from an intense heat to
the ordinary  temperature, and the par-
ticles or  molecules of which  they are
composed, wiU have had time to arrange
themselves in the most compact and
best manner.  This is usually  termed
the annealing process, and the teeth are
said to be either well or badly annealed.
When they are well annealed they will
stand sudden changes of temperature
without  injury, whereas, on  the con-
trary, if  badly annealed, they will cer-
tainly crack under the bloAV-pipe, and
thus be rendered useless."
  In every part of the process of the
manufacture  of porcelain, the greatest
precision and accuracy of procedure is
necessary to secure any thing like satis-
factory  results,  and this can only be
done by much practice.
  Having now presented a brief des-
cription  of  the American method  of
manufacturing mineral teeth, the author
will proceed  to give a condensed  sum-
mary of  the manner in which  they are
fabricated in France.   The French por-
celain teeth,  though not as beautiful as
the  American, are much stronger and
more durable.
  As Desirabode  is the  last French
writer who  has given a  description of
the method of manufacturing porcelain
teeth, the author will quote so much of
Avhat he says upon the subject as may
be necessary  to its proper  comprehen-
sion.

French Method of Manufacturing Por-
             celain Teeth.
  Recipes given by Desirabode :
  First   Shade.—Yellow-gray,   wine
yellow,  yellow-gray-blue,  in accord-
ance with the  degree of heat in burn-
ing.
  Paste.—Kaolin, six lbs.;  tungstate of
iron, two oz.; per-oxyd of manganese
three oz.; oxyd of gold, one gr.
  Enamel.—Petunse, (feldspar,)  three
lbs.; oxyd titanium, one oz.
  The oxyd of gold should be prepared
I as  foUoAvs:  dissolve four  grains of 
PIV                617                 PIV
cold in a compound of four parts mu-
riatic to one part nitric acid, and evap-
orate.
        Second Shade.—Yellow.
   Paste.—Kaolin, six lbs.; earth of van-
vres, two lbs.; earth d'ombre, four grs.
   Enamel—Petunse,  three lbs.; tung-
stic oxyd, twelve grs.
     Third Shade.—Yellow-gray.
   Paste —Same as the preceding.
   Enamel.—Petunse,  three lbs.; tung-
stic oxyd, one oz.
     Fourth Shade.—Yellow-blue.
   Paste.—Kaolin, six lbs.; oxyd of co-
 balt, four grs.
   Enamel.—Petunse,  three lbs.;  oxyd
of manganese, twelve grs.
       Fifth Sliade.—Pure Gray.
   Paste.—Kaolin, six lbs.; tungstate of
iron, two oz.; oxyd of manganese, two
oz.;  oxyd of gold, one gr.
   Enamel.—Petunse, three lbs.;  oxyd
of platinum, thirty-six grs.
       Preparation of the Paste.
   Whatever may be used for the com-
position of the base, we  take a certain
quantity of the paste mentioned above,
mixed, sometimes, Avith a small quan-
tity of covering  or  enamel, to  give it
transparency and to shade it more easily,
to which we add such  oxyds as  are
judged necessary, in the  proportion of
thirty  grains to  the  pound;  these  are
mixed  with care, keeping the mass con-
stantly wetted upon a porcelain table,
with a muller of the same substance ;
for this purpose  glass should never be
used.  This is  now dried as much as
possible, and made into oblong squares,
about  a line and a half in thickness,
three or four in  width, and five or six
in length;  these various  dimensions
will always be a little  reduced by con-
traction.
  At this stage of the process,  hori-
zontal or vertical, and sometimes in the
form of a cross,  are to  be made on the
back face of these little squares, which
     52*
are  still  soft, and  rounded  on their
lateral edges; instead of making  the
paste into these squares it is better, as
we shall hereafter describe, to  mould it
in forms or matrices of copper, made as
nearly as possible  in the form of  the
teeth.  The groove  is  destined to  re-
ceive the little curved  platina clamps
which are to form one or  more projec-
tions above  the  plane of the  teeth, to
which are  afterwards  to be  soldered,
the gold or platina shaft, which serves
to mount the tooth.
   As the strength of the artificial  set
depends upon the solidity ofthe clamps,
their implantation is a part of the pro-
cess which is quite important, and their
preparation requires care.  They  are
made  in  several ways;  sometimes a
platina wire  of ordinary thickness is
taken, passed through a draw-plate,
flattened and cut into proper  lengths;
sometimes the wire  is simply passed
through  a flattener, and when it is di-
vided, the  extremity which  is  to  be
fixed in the paste, is cut off with a pair
of cutting  forceps.    Again,  this  ex-
tremity is divided, and the  two  parts
turned in contrary directions."
   But to avoid the  necessity of solder-
ing backings on the teeth, M. Desirabode
says, "he fixes  in  the  paste, before
burning,  not  simply  clamps, but a
piece of  metal,  forming at once  the
clamps and  the tenon or shaft by which
the  tooth is to be fixed to the plate.
This fixture is composed of a central
shaft, from each side of which go  off,
in  the form  of  wings,  little clamps
which pass into the paste and disappear
in it.  Fastened in this manner, there
is no danger  of the  fixture becoming
defective by the injury of one  of  these
clamps, all being attached to and  mak-
ing one with the principal piece." * * *
 Mineral  Teeth with a Talon (Pivot.)
   The implantation  of the  clamps in
the posterior faces of mineral  teeth, is
intended  for those, only, Avhich  have
their  posterior or  internal face flat- 
PIV
618
PIV
 tened, and  which form rather simple
facades of teeth, than entire  teeth; but
 mineral teeth are often made to resem-
 ble, in all points, at least of the crown,
 the natural teeth; that is, they are fur-
 nished behind or interiorly with a talon
 or heel.  This is formed in three Avays;
 either by making it continuous with the
 crown before burning, adding with it a
 substance of the  same nature after it
 is burnt;  or,  finally, making it Avith a
 metallic substance soldered to the clamp
 of those teeth of Avhich we have just
 spoken, as being most  commonly em-
 ployed.
  "The first method is simply to con-
 struct a tooth precisely like a natural
 tooth, (an incisor or canine,) in form,
 and, in the thickness of the  projection
 backward, upon the middle of the up-
 per surface,  to  make  a vertical hole;
 in this hole are  fixed the clamps, des-
 tined to be soldered to the shaft or pivot
 Avhich is to fill this  hole, or to a little
 metallic tube to  receive the shaft.  The
 greater part of the  transparent or  Eng-
 lish teeth  are made in  this way.  The
 force of adaptation which holds  these
 tubes united to the paste, after burning,
 is another  proof  that the  objection
 which  has  been  urged against  our
 clamps is not  well founded, for this
 tube, in  consequence  of its  form,  is
 more liable to dilate by the action of the
 fire, and crack the substance in which
 it is placed, than a little simple piece of
 metal; yet, from this  cause, the  teeth
 are never cracked.
   By the second method the pivot is
 first  soldered to the clamps of  the com-
 mon plate tooth ;  after this is done, the
 projection, which gives it the form of a
 perfect tooth is  added: the substance of
 which this  is made,  is  composed ac-
 cording to the formula of M. Delabarre,
 as   follows:  porcelain  paste,  seven
 parts;  calcined  gypsum,  one  part;
 white sand, one-twentieth  part of the
 whole mass; such oxyd as may be de-
 sired, four ounces six grains, to the two
 pounds.   As the addition of gypsum
greatly augments the fusibility  of this
paste, it is entirely unnecessary  to re-
sort  to  the furnace  of  the porcelain
manufacturer, a  simple  air-furnace is
generally  sufficient.   We regard this
method as very defective, first, because
the paste added is united  with difficulty
to the first, from  which it is separated
by a piece of platinum, then, not being
as weU burnt as the tooth itself, it will
be less able to support  the  shocks to
which it is subject.   It is, therefore, a
much more simple and certain process,
when these teeth  are required, to make
them at once  of  the  desired shape, or
to make  the  projection  of platinum,
and solder the pivot to it."

        Molar Mineral  Teeth.
  "All that we have said of the proper
form to be given to mineral  teeth, and
the various methods of attaching them,
has relation to the canine and incisor
teeth  only;  but  molar teeth are also
made, the  form of which vary according
as they are  to be mounted in front of
the exterior border of the  plate, or base,
destined  to  receive  them,  or   imme-
diately upon  this plate.  In the first
case the artificial tooth is formed pre-
cisely like the natural one, except the
lingual  side,  which  is  left  flattened.
This side  is furnished with clamps ex-
actly similar to those intended  to re-
place the  incisores.  In the second case
they  are  made in all points like the
natural teeth.  The question now arises,
how  are  these teeth  to be attached to
the plate 1  In several ways :
   "1. In  each of the sides ofthe tooth,
corresponding to  the  dental interstices,
depression  is  made, into  which  the
clamps are  fixed.  2. A vertical hole
is made which passes nearly up to the
surface of the crown ; into  this  passes
a pivot fixed to the plate, and through
the upper part of this pivot a pin is in-
troduced  horizontaUy through  a little
hole previously made for this purpose.
3. The tooth is pierced with a horizon-
tal hole, near the top, through which  a 
PIV                619                 PIV
platina  \vire  is passed,  bent  down to
the plate on  each side  and  soldered.
4. A  vertical  hole  is  made  entirely
through, larger toward the crown than
at the base; a pivot is fixed to the plate
and passed through the hole, the top of
the pivot is  capped,  and the  whole
soldered together, thus fixing the tooth.
This last method is  recommended by
M. Lefoulon, and is certainly  the most
defective of all, because it has the great
objection of leaving upon the grinding
surface a large and very visible spot.
It will be replied to this  objection  that
the same is the case Avhen a  decayed
tooth is  plugged on the grinding  sur-
face; but in  this case,  no  choice of
means is left with the artificial teeth.
   Sometimes  a piece comprising  two
or three-molar teeth is made.  In such
case  a   hole  is  pierced through  the
middle one, destined to  receive a pivot
soldered to the plate ; in the two others
a groove is made into which pivots
pass to  keep the Avhole  piece in place,
unless it is preferred to make the grooves
on the lingual or internal side and solder
it, hke the incisor teeth.

Preparation and Manner of Using the
              Enamel.
   "To make  enamel, as much of the
mass already described, as is desired, is
taken, and to  it is added, such metallic
oxyds, or such a combination of them,
as is necessary  to obtain the desired
shade; in quantities of about an ounce
at a time, grinding the whole, perfectly,
upon a porcelain  table, in  order to dis-
tribute equally the coloring matter.  In
order to  obtain a  color  more homoge-
neous to the enamel, we may use, with
advantage, a paste made of an  enamel
already  burned, and  broken  up in a
mortar.   This may be  regarded as a
color already well formed.
  "The enamel paste should be ground
with more care than that of the base;
the more perfectly  this is  done,  the
more free will be the surface of the
tooth from spots, and the more uniform
avUI  it appear.   It may be preserved
in water, if the precaution be  taken to
remove it from time to time, and it used
at about the consistence of a thick paste;
and in order that it should attach itself
to the  earthy base, it should be diluted
with water, in which some gum arabic
has been dissolved; finally, it is ap-
plied  in  a thin layer,  if the base is
colored, and in a thicker one if the con-
trary is the case.
  "This application ofthe enamel to the
paste is made in two ways :  either by
first putting the enamel in the mould,
and then the paste, making the groove
and fixing the clamps after this is done ;
or,  on the contrary, the tooth is  first
moulded, the groove made, the clamps
fixed, and then the  enamel applied.
The first plan which  has been longest
in use is defective  in this, that the
paste, placed  upon the  soft enamel,
buries itself always more or less by its
own weight, and by the  pressure ne-
cessarily  occasioned  by  making the
groove and fixing the clamps; the in-
evitable result is, that the layer of enam-
el is  very unequally  spread over the
surface of the  tooth.   This may be
proved by  grinding  half away  two
teeth enameled  by these two plans, in
one the paste will be seen to describe  a
regular curved line, whilst in the other
it will be irregular.  The second plan,
although  less varied,  easy,  and,  per-
haps, a little more certain in the fire, is,
however, always preferable; it is the
one we always adopt, and which is re-
commended by those who  are  most
versed in the  manufacture of mineral
teeth."
  We omit  the  description  of  the
manner of baking the teeth, as that  is
so similar to the  one which has already
been given, that it would be but a mere
repetition of what has  already  been
said upon the subject.  We have also
left out  many other unimportant de-
tails, as the author did not wish to ex-
tend,  unnecessarily, the length of this
article. 
POR
620
POR
  PORCELLA'NEOUS.   Pertaining
to, or resembling, porcelain.
  PORCEL'LIO. The name of a genus
of apterous insects.
  PORCUPINE  DISEASE.    The
fish-skin disease.
  POR'CUS.  A hog.
  PORE. Porus;  interstice.  In Anat-
omy, the orifices of the absorbing and
exhahng vessels.
  PORI BILIARII.  The ducts which
receive the bile from the penicilli of the
liver.
  POROCE'LE.  A  scirrhous tumor
of the testicle or scrotum.
  POROM'PHALON.  From rtapos,
hard, and outyaxos, the navel.  A hard
tumor of the navel.
  POROS'lTY.  From porus, a  pas-
sage.   The state of having pores or
interspaces, a quality of bodies by which
they transmit fluids through their pores.
  POROT'IC.  Poriticus ; from rtapos,
callus.   A medicine supposed to be ca-
pable of assisting the  formation of
callus.
  PORPHYRA  HEMORRHAGI-
CA.  Land scurvy.
  POR'PHYRY.  A species of hard
granite stone or rock.
  PORRA'CEOUS.   From porrum, a
leek.  A term applied to the excretions
of the body Avhen they exhibit a green
color.
  PORRI'GO.   Scurf on the  head;
Scald head.  An eruption  of the pus-
tules, called favi and  achores, without
fever.
  Porrigo Decal'vans.    A  disease
characterized by patches  of baldness
of a more or less circular form, without
change of color in the surrounding hair.
  Porrigo Favo'sa.   An  eruption of
large, soft, flat, straw-colored pustules,
called  favi, with  an irregular edge,
surrounded by slight inflammation, and
occurring  on aU parts of the  body,
though  sometimes  confined  to  the
scalp, face, trunk or extremities.
  Porrigo Fur'furans.  An eruption
of small achores, the fluid of which
soon dries up and separates in numer-
ous scale-like exfoliations, reappearing
and  disappearing at irregular periods,
and with more or less itching and sore-
ness.
  Porrigo Larvalis.   Crusta  bctea.
A disease almost exclusively  confined
to infancy,  and characterized  by the
appearance of an eruption of numer-
ous  small  achores, on  the forehead
and cheeks, which after awhile  break,
discharging a viscid fluid, and become
incrusted in thin yellowish, or grayish
scabs.    These spread until  the face
sometimes becomes, as it were, envel-
oped in a scab.
  Porrigo Lupino'sa.  An eruption of
minute pustules in small  patches, gen-
erally commencing on the scalp, which
terminates in scabs resembling the seeds
of the lupin.
  Porrigo Scutula'ta. Ringworm of
the scalp.  Scald-head.   An eruption
of an irregular circular  form, upon the
scalp, forehead and neck.
  POR'RUM.  Porrus.  The leek.
  PORTA.  A door or gate.  The part
of the liver  where  the vessels  enter.
Also, the vulva.
  PORTiE  VENA.  Vena portae.
  PORTAL.  From porta, a gate. Re-
lating to the porta of the liver.
  Portal Blood.  The blood  of the
portal veins.
  Portal Circulation.  The circula-
tion of the venous blood from the  chylo-
poietic viscera into the liver.
  PORTE-AIGUILLE.   Acutenacu-
lum.   A needle-holder.
  PORTER. A malt-liquor of a dark-
brown color, and bitterish taste.
  PORTER, D. H.  Author of a Pa-
per on Artificial Teeth on the Principle
of Atmospheric Pressure; published in
the New  York Dental Recorder, vol.
second.
  PORTIO.  A term signifying, a por-
tion  or  branch,  and  apphed to two
nerves.
  Portio Dura.  The facial  nerve, a
branch of the seventh pair, and so caU- 
POS
621
POT
 ed from its firm  consistence.  See Fa-
 cial Nerve.
   Portio Mollis. The auditory nerve.
   PORTONA'RIUM.    The pyloric
 orifice of the stomach.
   PORTULA'CA.   Pwtubca alera-
 cea; purslane.
   PORUS.  A pore or duct.
   POSCA.  A mixture of vinegar and
 water.
   POSE. Catarrh.
   POSERVITZ. Semiology of idiopa-
 thic and symptomatic apthae, by. Viteb.
 1790.
   POSOL'OGY.   Posologia;   from
 rtoaos,  quantity, and  Xoyos, a discourse.
 That part of therapeutics which treats
 of the indications of the doses in which
 different medicines  should  be pre-
 scribed.
   POSSET. Possetum. Milk curdled
 with wine, treacle, or any acid.
   POSTE'RIOR ANNULARIS. An
 external interosseal muscle of the hand.
   Posterior Auris.  The retrahens
 auris.
   Posterior In'dicis Manus.   An in-
 ternal interosseal muscle of the hand.
   Posterior Indicis Pedis.   An ex-
 ternal interosseal muscle of the foot.
   POSTERIOJR. MEDII  DlG'lTI  MaNUS.
 An external interosseal muscle of the
 hand.
   Posterior Medii Dig'itI Pedis. An
 external interosseal muscle of  the foot.
   Posterior Tertii  Digiti.   The ad-
 ductor tertii digitii muscle.
   POSTHE.  The prepuce.
   POSTHIOPLASTY.  Posthioplas-
 tkus; from  rtos9iot,  the prepuce, and
 rtxaaaa, I form.   An  operation for the
 restoration of the prepuce.
   POSTHITIS. Inflammation of the
 prepuce.
  POSTHON'CUS.  AsweUingofthe
 prepuce.
  POSTI'CUS. Situated behind.
  POST-MORTEM.  After death; ap-
plied to an examination ofthe body after
death, for the detection of the changes
of structure produced by disease.     '
   POTABLE. Potabilis.  Drinkable.
 Fit to be drank.
   POTASH.  Vegetable alkali; potas-
 sa ; kali.
   Potash of Commerce. Potasozs car-
 bonas impurus.   Impure carbonate  of
 potassa; pearlash.
   POTASSA.   Potash.  Potassa caus-
 tica.
   Potassa Cum Calce.  Potassa with
 lime, mechanically mixed.
   Potassa Caustica. Caustic potassa.
   Potassa Impura.   Potash of com-
 merce.
   POTASS^  ACUTA EFFERVES-
 CENS.  Effervescing solution of po-
 tassa.
   Potassje Acetas. Acetate of potassa.
   Potassje Bicarbonas.   Bicarbonate
 of potassa.
   Potassje Bisulphas.  Bisulphate of
 potassa.
   Potass^: Bitartras.   Bitartrate  of
 potassa.
   Potassje Carbonas.  Carbonate  of
 potassa.
   Potassa Careonas Impurus.   Im-
 pure carbonate  of  potassa.  Potash  of
 commerce.
   Potassje Carbonas  Purus.   Pure
 carbonate of potassa.   Carbonate  of
 potassa from  crystals of tartar. Salt  of
 tartar.
   Potassje Carbonatis  Aqua. Solu-
 tion of carbonate of potassa.
   Potasse Caustics Aqua.   Solution
 of potassa.
   Potassje Chloras. Chlorate of po-
 tassa.
   Potassje et Sodje Tartras. Tartrate
 of potassa and soda.  Tartarized soda.
 RocheUe salt.
   Potassje Hydras.   Hydrate of po-
 tassa.  Caustic potash.
   Potass^  Hydriodas.  Iodide of po-
 tassium.  Hydriodate of potassa.
   Potassje Nitras. Nitrate of potassa.
  Potass^ Nitras  Purificatum.  Pu-
rified nitrate of potassa.
  Potasse Sulphas.   Sulphate of po-
tassa. 
POT
622
PRA
  Potasse  Sulphas Cum Sulphure.
Sulphate of potassa with sulphur.
  Potasse  Sulphuretum.  Sulphuret
of potassium.  Sulphuret of potassa.
  Potassje  Supertartras.   Supertar-
trate of potassa.
  Potass.e  Tartras.   Tartrate of po-
tassa.
  POTASSII BROMIDUM. Bromide
of potassium.
  Potassii  Chloridum. Chloride of
potassium.  Muriate of potassa.
  Potassii Cyanuretum. Cyanuret of
potassium.  Hydrocyanate of potassa.
  Potassii Ferrocyanuretum.  Fer-
rocyanuret of potassium.
  Potassii  Iodidum.  Iodide of potas-
sium. Hydriodate of potassa.
  Potassii Iodidi Liquor Compositus.
Compound  solution of iodide of potas-
sium.
   Potassii  Sulphuret'um. Sulphuret
of potassium.  Liver of sulphur.
   POTAS'SIUM. The  metallic base
of potassa.
   POTATO.  Solanum tuberosum.
   Potato Fly. Lytta vittata.
   Potato, Spanish. Convolvulus bata-
tas.
   Potato,  Wild. Convolvulus pan-
duratus.
   POTENTIAL.  Potentialk; from
potens, able.  Opposed to actual.  See
Cautery.
   POTENTIL'LA  ANSERI'NA.—
Silver-weed; wild tansey.
   Potentilla Reptans. The common
cinquefoil or five-leaved grass.
   POTERTUM.  The name of a ge-
nus of plants.
   Poterium Sanguisorba. Burnet sax-
ifrage.
   POTIO CALCIS CARBONATIS.
Chalk mixture.
   POTION. Potw; from ^o,I drink.
A liquid compound; the same as mix-
ture.
   POTT'S DISEASE.  Caries of the
bodies of the  vertebrae, and  angular
curvature of the spine forward.
   POTUS.  Drink.
  POUCH.  A small bag;  in Patholo-
gy, a morbid dilation  of any part of a
canal.
  POULTICE.  A cataplasm.
  POUNCE.  Pulverized gum sanda-
rach.
  POUND.  A  weight consisting of
twelve ounces of  troy,  and  sixteen
avoirdupois.  See Weights and  Mea-
sures.
  POUPART'S LIGAMENT. Liga-
mentum Poupartii.
  POWDER.  See Pulvis.
  Powder, Antimonial.  Pulvis anti-
monii compositus.
  Powder of Burnt Hartshorn with
Opium.  Pulvis cornu usti cum opio.
  Poavder, Compound, of Chalk.—
Pulvis cretae compositus.
  Poavder,  Compound, of   Chalk,
avith  Opium. Pulvis cretae compositus
cum opio.
  Poavder for the Teeth, Baume's.
Le Maire gives  the  following as M.
Baume's formula for a powder for the
teeth:   take prepared  pumice-stone,
prepared red earth, prepared red coral,
each,  | i; dragon's-blood, cream of tar-
tar, each § ss; cinnamon, 3 ij; cloves,
 £) i.   Mix and reduce to a fine powder.
  Poavder for the Teeth, Bourdet's.
Take  § vi of pumice-stone, well cal-
cined  and reduced to powder.  This
powder is passed on the porphyry stone,
moistened from time to time with rose
water, or  that  of myrtle, it is dried, re-
duced to  an impalpable  powder, and
the following ingredients added:  plate
lac, dragon's-blood, dried bone, bole ar-
menic, of each § iii; cinnamon, cloves,
Florentine  iris,  rock alum, calcined,
of each 3 i.  The whole to be mixed
and reduced to a fine powder.
   Powder of Faynard.  A  styptic
powder, supposed to consist ofthe char-
coal of beech wood.
   POX.   Syphilis.
   Pox, Chicken. Varicella.
   Pox,  Small.  Variola.
   PRACTICE OF PHYSIC.   Th*-
treatment of disease. See Therapeutics. 
PRE
623
PRE
   PRACTITIONER, GENERAL.—
 One  who  exercises  the  duties of the
 several branches of the  curative  art.
 Surgeon-apothecary.
   PtLECOR'DIA. From p-ce, before,
 and cor, the heart. The forepart of the
 thoracic region.
   PRAS'IUM.  Common hoarhound.
   PRAS'UM.   The leek.
   PRAX'IS.    From npaaaa,  to  per-
 form. Action, the practice of any thing,
 as of medicine, or any of  its branches.
   PRECIPITATE,  RED.   Hydrar-
 gyri nitrico-oxydum.
   Precipitate,  White.   Hydrargy-
 rum  precipitatum album.   Ammoni-
 ated mercury.
   PRECIPITATION.   Prazcipitatio;
 from prozcipito, to cast down.   The act
 by which  any body separates from a
 liquid, in  which it is held in solution,
 and falls to the bottom of the vessel.
   PRECOCITY. Premature develop-
 ment of any faculty.
   PRECUR'SORY.  Prazcursorius ;—
 from  proz,  before, and curro,  to run,
 that which precedes.
   Precursory Symptoms. The symp-
 toms which indicate  the  approach of
 disease.
  PREDISPOSITION. Prazdkpositio;
 from proz, before, and  dkponere, to dis-
 pose.   That constitution or condition of
 body  which  disposes it to take  on a
 certain form or kind of diseased action.
  PREGNANCY.'  Utero-gestatio.—
 The state of a female  from the moment
 of fecundation to  parturition.
  PREHEN'SILE.  Adapted to seize
 or grasp, as the hand or teeth.
  PREHEN'SIO.    Catalepsy;  epi-
 lepsy.
  PREHEN'SION. From prehendere,
 to lay  hold of.  The act of seizing, or
 taking hold.
  PRELUM'BAR.   Prazlumbark ;—
from proz, before, and lumbi, the loins.
Before the loins.
  PREMONITORY.  Precursory.
  PRENTICE, NATHANIEL P. S.
Dr. Nathaniel P.  S. Prentice, late sur-
 geon dentist of New York, was born in,
 or near Portland, Me, and studied medi-
 cine and graduated at the Ohio Medi-
 cal College in Cincinnati.  He studied
 dental surgery in Boston, with Dr. Flagg,
 and went to New York  about the year
 1826; soon after he became associated in
 practice  with  Dr.  Eleazar  Parmly,
 which connection was continued about
 tAvo years,  when, in consequence of
 being affected with phthisis pulmonalis,
 he was  compelled to relinquish the
 duties of his profession,  and by the ad-
 vice of his  friends, removed to Boston,
 where, at about the age  of thirty,  he
 died.
   The above facts, in relation to Dr.
 Prentice were derived from Dr. Parmly,
 who, in speaking of  Dr. P., says,  he
 possessed a degree of intellectual cul-
 ture and professional cleverness, rare-
 ly met with  in any profession.  By his
 death, the profession were deprived of
 one of the most  exemplary and  pure
 minded  men, as  well as one of  the
 brightest ornaments that has ever been
 enrolled among its members.
   PREPARATION.  Prazparatio.—
 That which is prepared by  some pro-
 cess, as a pharmaceutical, or anatomi-
 cal preparation.
   PREPUCE.  Prazputium. The in-
 teguments that cover the glans penis.
   PRESBYO'PIA.    From  rtpeaSvs,
 old, and  a^, the eye.  Long sighted-
 ness.  A defect of vision, common  in
 old persons,  by which objects near by
 are seen  confusedly whilst at remoter
 distances, they are seen distinctly.
   PRESBYTIA.  Presbyopia.
   PRESCRIPTION.  Prazscriptio ;—
 from proz, before,  and scribere, to write.
 The formula of a  physician for the
 composition of medicine.  A compound
 prescription   is divided into,  1. The
 bask, or  active ingredient; 2. The ad-
juvans,  which assist the operation of
 the former;  3. The corrigens, which
 is to correct  any thing injurious in the
 operation of the active ingredient, and,
 4. The constituens, or mixture Avhich is 
               pri               a

 intended to give to the whole a conve-
 nient and agreeable form. But, ordinari-
 ly, prescriptions are more simple.
   The following is the usual mode of
 making  a prescription:  1$.,—Potas-
 sae nitratis, 3 ij ; mellis  rosae f. 3 iv;
 infusi rosae f. § vss.  Misce.
   PRESPPNAL.  Prozspinalk; from
proz, before, and spina, the spine.  The
 anterior surface of the spine.
   PRETIB'IAL.    Praztibialk; from
proz, before, and tibia, the tibia.  Be-
fore or in front of the tibia.
   PRIAPEIA.  Green tobacco.
  %PRIAPIS'CUS.  From rtpiartos, the
penis.  A tent or bougie, shaped  hke
the penis.
   PRIA'PISM.   Priapismus.   Con-
stant, and painful erection of the  penis,
occasioned by morbific causes.
   PRIA'PUS.  The penis.
   PRICKLY ASH.  Aralia spinosa
and  xanthoxylum fraxineum;   tooth-
ache tree.
   Prickly Heat.  Lichen tropicus.
   PRIDE OF CHINA.  Pride of In-
dia.  Melia azedarach.
   PRIM^E VLE.  The first  passages.
The stomach and intestinal canal.
   PRI'MARY.  Primarius.  First in
order of time.  A term applied, in  Pa-
thobgy, to the first symptoms, causes,
&c. of disease.
   Primary Teeth.  The teeth of first
dentition.
   PRIMINE.  The outermost cover-
ing of the ovule of plants.
   PRIMIP ARA.  From primus, first,
and parere, to bring forth.   A  female
who brings forth for the first time.
   PRIMROSE, EVENING.   Oeno-
thera biennis.
   PRIM'ULA.  The name of a genus
of plants.
   Primula Verus.  The cowslip.
   Primula Vulgaris.  The  primrose.
   PRINOS   VERTICILLATUS.—
Black alder.
   PRION. A saw.
   PRIONO'DES. From rtpiav, a saw,
and tibos, shape.  Serrated.  A term ap-
!4              PRO

 plied, in Anatomy, to the sutures ofthe
 cranium.
   PRPOR.  The first.
   Prior Annula'ris.  An internal in-
 terosseal muscle ofthe hand.
   Prior Indicis.   An internal interos-
 seal muscle ofthe hand.
   Prior Medii.  An external interos-
 seal muscle of the hand.
   PRISIS.  Stridor dentium.
   PRISM. A solid contained by planes
 of which the two that are opposite are
 equal, similar, and parallel,  and  the
 others parallelograms.
   PRISMATIC.  Prism-shaped; ap-
 plied, also, to the  colors resulting from
 the action of a transparent prism or the
 solar beam.
   PRISMOS.  Stridor dentium.
   PRO-.  Before; a prefix signifying
 in front, or in advance of.
   Pro re Nata. A term employed, in
 Prescriptions,  signifying, occasionaUy,
 as circumstances may demand.
   PROBANG.  A small rod of whale-
 bone, with a piece of sponge or ivory at
 one of its extremities, used to  push ex-
 traneous bodies, which have lodged in
 the oesophagus,  down  into the  stom-
 ach.
   PROBE.  From probo,  to  try.  A
 long slender instrument employed by
 surgeons to explore  and ascertain the
 depth of wounds.
   PROBO'SCIS.  A snout or trunk.
   PROCAR'DIUM.  The pit of the
 stomach.
   PROCESS.  Processus; from pro-
 cedo, to  go before.  Applied, in Anato-
 my, to parts which  are prolonged be-
 yond others with which they  are con-
 nected ;  in  Chemistry, the series of op-
 erations necessary for the obtainment of
 any given result.
   PROCES'SUS.  A process.
   Processus Anconeus.  The olecra-
 non.
   Processus Annularis.  The pons
 varolii.
   Processus Caudatus.  The lobulus
 caudatus of the liver.
61 
PRO               625               PRO
  Processus Ciliares.  The ciliary
processes.
  Processus Cuneiformis Ossis Occi-
pitis.  The basilary process.
  Processus Falciformis  Cerebel-
li.  The falx cerebelli.
  Processus Falciformis Durje Ma-
tris.  The falx cerebri.
  Processus Mamillares.  The bulbs
ofthe olfactory nerves.
  Processus Uvifer.  The uvula.
  PROCIDENTIA.   From procido,
to fall down.  A prolapsus, or falling
down of any part.
  PROCON'DYLUS.  From rtpo, be-
fore, and xovbvxos, a knot   The first
joint ofthe finger next the metacarpus.
  PROCTALGIA.    From  rtpaxtos,
the anus, and  aXyos, pain.  Pain in the
anus.
  PROCTATRE'SIA. From rtpaxtos,
the anus,  and atpriaia, imperforation.
Imperforate anus.
  PROCTICA.   From  rtpaxtos, the
anus.   Diseases of the anus without
primary inflammation.  In Good's JVb-
sology, a genus in the class cwliaca, or-
der enterka.
  PROCTITIS.   Inflammation of the
anus.
  PROCTOCELE. From rtpaxtos, the
anus, and xrfxrj, hernia. Prolapsus ani.
  PROCTORRHA'GIA. From rtpax-
tos, the anus, and priywui, to burst out.
Hemorrhoidal flux.
  PROCTORRHCEA.  From rtpax-
tos, the anus, and pea, I flow.  The dis-
charge of mucus from the anus.
  PROCTOS. The anus.
  PROCTOSIS. Proctocele.
  PROCUM'BENT.   Procumbcns.—
Lying down on the face.  In Botany,
trading, unable to support itself.
  PRO'DUCT.  From produco, I pro-
duce.  The tangible result of a chemi-
cal or pharmaceutical operation.
  PRODUCTIO.  An apophysis.
  PRODUCTION.  A prolongation;
a  process;  that which is produced.
  PROELIUM.   A press;  a tourni-
quet.
        53
  PR030TIA.   Premature develop-
ment of the sexual organs.
  PROFLU'VIA. A term applied to
all morbid discharges or fluxes.
  PR.OFLUV1UM.  From profluo, I
run down.  A discharge or flux.
  PROFUN'DUS.  Deep-seated; al-
so, the flexor profundus perforans.
  PROFU'SIO.   A flow of fluids, as
that of blood, without fever.
  PROGLOS'SIS. From rtpo, before,
and yXaaaa, the tongue.   The tip of the
tongue.
  PROGNO'SIS.   From *po, before,
and yivuaxw, I know.  The art of fore-
telling the future progress and termina-
tion of a disease from the symptoms.
  PROGNOSTIC. The prediction of
the termination of a disease.
  PROLA'BIUM. The extreme pro-
jecting part of the lips.
  PROLAPSUS.  From prolabar,  I
slip down.  The falling down of a part
of a viscus from its natural position.
  Prolapsus Ani. The inversion and
faUing down of the lower part of the
rectum.
  Prolapsus Iridis.  Protrusion of the
iris through a wound in the cornea.
  Prolapsus Uteri.  A falling  down
of the uterus from relaxation.
  Prolapsus Uvulje.  Relaxtion and
elongation of the uvula.  Staphylcede-
ma.
  Prolapsus Vagi'nje.   Protrusion of
the upper part  of the vagina into the
lower.
  PRO'LEGS.   In Entomology, the
wart-like tubercles which assist the
various larvae  in  walking and  other
motions.  In caterpillars, they are gen-
erally found on the hinder segment.
  PROLEPTICUS.  Anticipating.
  PROLICIDE.   From proles, off-
spring, and cozdere, to  kill. The de-
struction of one's offspring.
  PROLIFIC.  Prolificus; from pro-
les,  offspring, and facio, I make.  A
term applied  to  man  and animals,
which possess the  faculty of procreat-
ing their species. 
PRO                626               PRO
  PROLIG'EROUS.    From  proles,
offspring,  and gero,  I carry.   That
which is connected with bearing the
offspring.
  PROMINENT.  Prominens.  Pro-
jecting.
  PROMINENTIA.  A protuberance.
  PROM'ONTORY.   Promontmium.
A small projection of the inner ear.
  PRONATION.   Pronatio;  from
pronus, inclined fonvards.   The turn-
ing ofthe palm ofthe hand downwards.
  PRONATOR.   That which pro-
duces  pronation;  a name  applied to
two muscles of the forearm and hand.
  Pronator Radii Quadratus.   A
small  fleshy muscle  situated  at  the
lower and inner part of the forearm.
  Pronator Radii Teres.  A muscle
situated at the upper and anterior part
of the forearm.
  PRONERVATIO.   An aponeuro-
sis or tendon.
  PROPHYLACTIC.   Prophylacti-
cus.  A preservative;  a preventive.
  PROPHYLAXIS.  Preventive treat-
ment.
  PROPTO'SIS.  A prolapsus or fall-
ing down of any part.
  PRO'RA.  The occiput.
  PROSECTOR.  From  proscco, to
cut.  One  who dissects a  subject for
anatomical demonstration.
  PROSOPALGIA.  Neuralgia faciei.
  PRO'SOPON.  The face.
  PROS'PHYSIS.    Adhesion;  ap-
plied, in a limited sense, to adhesion of
the eyelids.
  PROSTAS1S.   Abundance  of ex-
crementitious humors.
  PROSTATE.  Proslatus; from npo,
before, and lat-^ui, I stand.  Standing
before; jutting out.
  Prostate Gland.  A glandular, cor-
diform body, situated  before the neck
of the bladder and behind  the bulb of
the urethra.
  PROSTATIC.  Pertaining to the
prostate gland.
  Prostatic  Concretions.   Calculi
of the prostate gland.
  Prostatic Urethra.  That portion
ofthe urethra occupied by the prostate
gland.
  PROSTATICUS SUPERIOR. The
compressor prostatas.
  PROSTATITIS.   Inflammation of
the prostate gland.
  PROSTATON'CUS.  From npoata-
ta, the prostate, and oyxos, a tumor.
Swelling of the prostate gland.
  PROSTHESIS.   In  Surgery, the
replacement  of a last organ or part
with an artificial substitute.  In Medi-
cine, an over-lapping, as of one febrile
paroxysm upon another.
  Prosthesis, Dental.  The replace-
ment ofthe loss of one or more teeth with
an artificial substitute.   See  Artificial
Teeth.
  PROSTRATION.  Prostratw. De-
pression of strength, and loss of volun-
tary power over the muscles.
  PROTEINE.  From  rtputeva,  I
take the first rank.  A product of the
decomposition of albumen, by potassa.
It is the basis of animal and vegetable
albumen, fibrin, casein, and gluten.
  PROTEINOUS. Proteinaceous; of,
or belonging to, proteine.
  PROTOPATH'IC.  Protopathkus;
from rtpatos, first, and na9os, a disease.
Idiopathic; primary disease.
  PROTHO'RAX.   From  rtpo, be-
fore, and ^upa|, a shield.  In Entomo-
logy, the first segment of the thorax in
insects.
  PROTOXYD. From rtpwtos, first,
and oxyd.  The  first or  lowest degree
of oxydation of a body capable of com-
bining with oxygen in several different
proportions.
  PROTRACTOR.  An instrument
for the removal of extraneous bodies
from wounds.
  PROTUBERANTIA. A protuber-
ance ; an  eminence, also, an apophy-
sis.
   Protuberantia  Annularis.  The
pons varolii.
   Protuberantia Cylindrica.  The
cornu ammonis. 
PRU
627
PSE
   PROX'IMAL.  Proximate.
   PROXIMATE.  Proximus.   Near-
 est ; next in order.
   Proximate Cause.  That which im-
 mediately precedes  and produces the
 effect.
   Proximate  Principle.   The  dis-
 tinct compounds  which  exist  ready
 formed in animals and vegetables, as
 albumen, fat, &c.
   PRU'NA.  An  anthrax.
   PRUNE.  Prunum. The prunus do-
 mestica.
   PRUNEL'LA.  The name of a ge-
 nus of plants.
   Prunella  Vulgaris.    Self-heal;
 heal-all.
   PRUNUM.  A plumb;  a prune.
   Prunum  Gallicum.  Prunus  do-
 mestica.
   Prunum  Sylvestre.  Prunus spi-
 nosa.
   PRUNUS.  The name of a genus of
 plants.
   Prunus Armeniaca. The apricot.
   Prunus Avium.   The black cherry
 tree.
   Prunus Cer'asus.   The red cherry
 tree.
   Prunus Domes'tica. The plumb or
 damson tree.
   Prunus Invi'tia. The bullace plumb
 tree.
   Prunus Lauro-Cer'asus.  The poi-
 son laurel, cherry laurel, bay  laurel, and
 Alexandrian laurel.
   Prunus Padus.  The wild cluster, or
 bird cherry tree.
   Prunus Spino'sa.   The sloe tree.
   Prunus  Virginia'na.    The  wild
 cherry tree.
   PRURI'GO.  Pmrilus ;  from pru-
 rio, I itch.  A term employed by Wil-
 lan and Bateman to designate a  genus
 of cutaneous diseases, characterized by
 a troublesome itching, and accompani-
 ed by an eruption of  papulae of nearly
 the same color as the adjoining cuticle,
comprehending three species.  1. Pru-
rigo mitis, which effects young persons,
and is characterized by soft and smooth
elevations of the cuticle, but without
redness or  much inflammation, ex-
cept from violent friction, and attended
with an itching sensation.  When the
papulae are broken or their tops rubbed
off, a clear fluid oozes out and black
scabs are  formed.  When neglected it
terminates in the itch.  2. Prurigo for-
micans, usually affects adults, and the
papulae are sometimes larger and some-
times not so distinct as the first species,
but attended with incessant and intoler-
able itching.  The eruption is diffused
over  the whole body, except the face,
feet and palms of the  hands, and some-
times terminates in  a non-contagious
pustular eruption.  3. Prurigo  senilis,
a disease somewhat similar to the second
species of prurigo, though generally of
a  more  permanent and  aggravated
form.
  PRURITUS. Itching; prurigo.
  PRUSSIAN BLUE.   Ferri ferro-
sesquicyanidum.   Ferro-prussiate of
iron.
  PRUS'SIATE.  A cyanide or ferro-
cyanide.
  Prus'siate of Iron.  Prussian blue.
  PRUS'SIC  ACID.   Hydrocyanic
acid.
  PRUS'SINE.  Cyanogen.
  PSALTERIUM.   Lyra.
  PSELLIS'MUS.   From  ^exxi^a, I
stutter. Imperfect articulation of speech.
In Good's  Nosology, a  genus  in the
class pneumatica, order phonica.
  PSEUDO.  False.
  PSEUD^ESTHE'SIA.   From +«-
fys, false, and aio9avouai, I feel.  De-
praved feeling.
  PSEUDARTHRO'SIS.    A  false
joint
  PSEUDOBLEP'SIS.  From ^evSrjs,
false, and fixers, sight.  Perverted vis-
ion.
  PSEUDO-CROUP.   Laryngismus
stridulus.
  Pseudo-Membrane.  A false mem-
brane, consisting of an organized layer
of effused lymph.
  Pseudo-Phthisis. Emaciation result- 
PSO                623               PSY
ing from other causes than tubercles of
the lungs.
  Pseudo-Pleuritis.  Pleurodynia.
  Pseudo-Pyre'thrum. Achillaea ptar-
mica.
  PSEUDOREX'IA.   False or per-
verted appetite.
  PSEUD Y'MEN.  False membrane.
  PSID'IUM.  The name of a  genus
of plants.
  Psidium Pomif'erum.   The  apple
guava.
  PSILO'THRA. Depilatory applica-
tions.
  PSO^E. The loins; also, the  name
of two pair of muscles.
  PSOAS.  From ^.oai, the loins. Be-
longing to the loins.
  Psoas Abscess.   Lumbar abscess.
  Psoas Magnus.   A long, thick mus-
cle, situated on the  anterior  and  lateral
parts ofthe lumbar vertebrae.
   Psoas Parvus.   A muscle situated
anterior to the psoas magnus.
   PSOITIS.    Inflammation of  the
psoae muscles.
   PSOLON'CUS.   Swelling  of the
penis, or glans penis.
   PSORA.  Scabies;  itch.
   Psora Leprosa.   Psoriasis.
   PSORA'LEA.  The name of a genus
of plants.
   Psoralea Glandulo'sa.  A Chilian
shrub.
   Psoralea Pentaphylla. The Mex-
ican contrayerva.
   PSORIASIS.  From +<oPa, the itch.
A  cutaneous  eruption, consisting of
patches  of  rough  amophous   scales,
sometimes continuous,  and sometimes
in separate patches, varying in size; of
an irregular figure, and attended with
chaps in the skin.  It has, according to
Dr. Willan, the following varieties :  1.
Psoriasis guttata, Avhich consists of ir-
regular patches of laminated scales Avith
little or no  inflammation.  2. Psoriasis
diffusa, consists of large irregularly cir-
cumscribed,  reddish patches, upon the
skin,  Avhich  is rough, fissured, with
 scales  interspersed, and Avrinkled.   It
appears most frequently, on the cheeks
temples,  upper eyelids, corners ofthe
eyes, neck, chin, external ear, the back
of the forearm, and  hand and fingers,
sometimes  causing  the nails  to crack
and exfoliate, and the fleshy part of the
lower extremities.   3. Psoriasis gyrata,
is characterized  by slight  cutaneous
scales, distributed in narrow patches, of
a circular, or semicular form, with ver-
miform appendages.  4.  Psoriasis pal-
maria, is an obstinate species of tetter,
mostly confined  to the  palms  ofthe
hands.  5. Psoriask labialis, is charac-
terized by scaliness ofthe skin, inter-
mixed with fissures, and chaps, and is
often wholly confined to the lip. 6.
Psoriask scrotalis, consists of scaliness
ofthe scrotium, attended Avith  heat, red-
ness, tension and itching.  7. Psoriasis
infantilis, is characterized  by  scaly
patches of various sizes, on the cheeks,
chin, breast, back, nates and thighs, oc-
curring between the ages of two  weeks
and two months.   8. Psoriask invete-
rata,  consists of scaliness ofthe  skin
generally, which becomes harsh, dry,
thickened, red and deeply furrowed.
  PSORI'CUS.   Pertaining to psora.
  PSOROPHTHAL'MIA.  From +w-
pa,  the itch, and o$9aXuos,  the  eye.
Ophthalmia tarsi.  Inflammation ofthe
eyelids, attended with  itching and ul-
ceration.
  PSYCHAGO'GUES.  From ^vxi>
life,  soul, and ayw, 1 move.  Medicines
which resuscitate, as  in  cases of syn-
cope.
  PSYCHE.   The mind or soul.
  PSY'CHICAL.   Relating to the
mind, or mental endowments.   Also,
sometimes applied  to analogous  phe-
nomena in the lower animals.
  PSYCHOL'OGY.  Psychobgia ;—
from tyx*}, tire mind,  and Xoyoj,  a dis-
course.  A treatise  on the moral or in-
tellectual faculties.    Mental phUoso-
phy.
  PSYCHOTRIA EMETICA.  lpe
cacuanha.
  PSYCHROLU'SIA.     Psychrolu-
i 
PTE
629
PTI
trum; from  4^£po$, cold, and fcouu,  I
wash.  A cold bath.
  PSYDRA'CIUM.    From *v*poj,
cold.  A small irregularly circumscrib-
ed pustule, which terminates in a lam-
inated scab.
  PTAR'MICA.  Achillea ptarmica.
  PTAR'MICUS.  From rttaipa,  to
sneeze.  An  errhine ;  a sternutatory.
  PTERIS.  The name of a genus of
ferns.
  Pteris Aquili'na.    The  common
brake, or female fern.
  PTEROCAR'PUS.   The  name  of
a genus of plants.
  Pterocarpus Draco.  One of the
species which yields dragon's-blood.
  Pterocarpus Erina'ceus.  The tree
which is supposed to yield the African
kino.
  Pterocarpus  Santali'nus.   The
red sanders tree.
  PTERODACTYLE. Pterodactylus;
from ntepov, a  wing,  and haxtvXo$, a
digit.  The name of a genus of extinct
reptiles, the second digit of the hand of
which is very long, and is supposed to
have had a wing-like expansion of the
skin.
  PTEROPODA.  Pteropods;  from
rttepov, a wing, and rtovs, a foot.   The
class of mollusks in which the organs
of motion are shaped like wings.
  PTERYGIUM.  Pterygion; from
rttepvt, a wing.  An excrescence, of a
triangular shape, occurring at the inner
canthus of the eye, and from thence ex-
tending over the cornea.
  PTERYGO-PALATINE.  Belong-
ing, or relating, to the pterygoid process
and palate.
  Pterygo-Pharyngeus.   The  con-
strictor pharyngeus superior.
  PTERYGOID. Pterygoides; ptery-
goideus; from   ittepv%, a wing,  and
«fioj, resemblance.    Resembling  the
wing of a bird.
  Pterygoid Artery.  The superior
pharyngeal artery; also,  the  branches
furnished to the pterygoid muscle.
  Pterygoid Bone. The sphenoid bone.
        z>3*
  Pterygoid  Canal.   The  narrow
channel which traverses the base of the
pterygoid process.
  Pterygoid Fossa.  The  depression
betAveen the alae  of the pterygoid pro-
cess.
  Pterygoid  Nerves.   The  vidian
nerve; also the branches of the inferior
maxillary, distributed to the  pterygoid
muscles.
  Pterygoid  Processes.    The de-
scending processes of the sphenoid bone.
  Pterygoideus Externus.  A muscle
arising from the outer surface ofthe ex-
ternal plate of the pterygoid  process of
the sphenoid bone, from the  tuberosity
of the superior maxilla; also, from the
ridge on the sphenoid  bone, separating
the zygomatic from the pterygoid fossa,
and is inserted into the inner side of the
neck of the lower jaAV.
  Pterygoideus Internus.  A  mus-
cle, arising tendinous  and fleshy from
the internal surface of the  pterygoid
plate—fills up the greater part of the
pterygoid  fossa,  and is inserted tendi-
nous and fleshy in the inner face of the
angle of the lower jaw and capsular lig-
aments of the articulation.
  The pterygoideus externus, and inter-
nus, are the great agents which are con-
cerned in producing the grinding motion
of the jaws, and this they do, by acting
alternately.
  The external one is triangular, hav-
ing its base at the  pterygoid  process
and running  outwards and backwards
to the neck of the condyle.  When the
pair  act together,   the lower  jaAV  is
thrown forwards. The internal is strong
and thick,  placed on  the inside of the
ramus of the jaw, and running doAvn-
wards and  backwards  to  the angle.
When it and its fellow act together, the
jaw is drawn forwards and closed.
  PTERYX. A wing;  ala.
  PTILO'SIS.    From  rttiXos, bald.
Madarosis.
  PTERYGOMA.  A  wing;  a pen-
dulous body.
  PTI'SANA.  From rttioaa, to decor- 
PUE               630              PUL
ticate, bruise, or pound.  A ptisan.  A
decoction  of decorticated  barley, and
other vegetable matters.
  PTO'SIS.  From rtirtta, to fall Pro-
lapsus, or faUing of the upper eyelids.
  Ptosis Iridis. A prolapsus of the iris
through a wound of the cornea.
  PTYA'LAGOGUE.  A sialagogue.
  PTY'ALISM.   Ptyalismus;  from
tttvaxioa,  to  spit.  Salivation; an in-
creased secretion of saliva.
  Ptyalism,  Mercurial.   Mercurial
salivation.
  PTYSMAGOGUE.   Expectorant;
sialagogue.
  PUBERTY.   The period  of life
when an individual becomes capable of
propagation.
  PU'BES.   The lower part of the
hypogastric region, Avhich after the age
of puberty is covered with hair.
  PUBES'CENT.  Covered Avith soft
wool or hair.
  PUBIC. Pubiozus.   Belonging to,
or concerning, the pubis.
  PUBIS OS.  The anterior part ofthe
os innominatum.
  PUCCOON.  Sanguinaria canaden-
sis.
  PUD'DING STONE.  A conglom-
erate  of rounded pebbles united by si-
licious paste.   Polished  sections are
sometimes used for ornamental  pur-
poses.
  PUDENDA. The genital organs.
  PUDEND'AGRA.    Pain or any
disease in the genital parts.
  PUDEN'DUM.  Pudenda; from pu-
dere, to be ashamed.   The parts of gen-
eration.
  Pudendum  Muliebre.   The  fe-
male parts of generation; the vulva.
  PU'DIC.   Pudicus.   That which
causes shame.   Belonging  to  the pu-
denda.
  Pudic Arteries.   The  arteries dis-
tributed  to the parts of generation.
  Pudic  Nerve.  A  branch  derived
fiom the sacral plexus, and distributed
to the genital organs.
  PUERILE.   Puerilis; frompuer,a
child.  A term applied to loud respira-
tion when heard through the stethes-
cope, as in healthy children.
  PUER'PERA.  From puer, a child,
and parere, to bring forth.  A lying-in
Avoman; one recently delivered.
  PUERTERAL  CONVULSIONS.
Convulsions of parturient women.
  Puerperal Fever.  Any fever oc-
curring during the puerperal state, but
generally restricted to a malignant form
of peritonites.
  PUFF-BALL. Lycoperdon bovista.
  PUF'FINESS.  Inflation of  the in-
teguments, caused by an effusion of air,
extravasation of blood, or accumulation
of serum.
  PUGIL'LUS.   From pugnus, the
fist.  The eighth part of a handful.
  PUKING.  Vomiting.
  PULE'GIUM.  Mentha pulegiura.
  Pulegium   Cervi'num.   Mentha
cervina.
  PULEX IRRITANS. A small in-
sect ; the flea.
  Pulex Penetrans.  A smaU tick;
the chigre, or chigoe.
  PULICA'RIS.  A cutaneous erup-
tion  resembling gnat-bites; apphed,
also, to diseases  attended by such erup-
tions.
  PULMO.  The lung.
  PUL'MOGRADES.   Pulmograda;
from pulmo,  a lung, and gradior, I ad-
vance.   The name of the tribe medusa;,
which SAvim by the  contraction of  the
vascular margin of the respiratory disc.
  PULMONARIA.  The name of  a
genus of plants.  Lung-wort
  Pulmonaria Arborea. Lichen pul-
monarius.
  Pulmonaria   Officina'lis.    The
spotted  lung-wort;  Jerusalem  cow's-
hp.
  PUL'MONARY.  Pulmonalk.  Be-
longing, or relating, to the lungs.
  Pulmonary  Artery.  The  artery
which  carries the blood from the right
ventricle of the  heart to the lungs.
  Pulmonary Consumption.  Phthisis
pulmonalis. 
PUL
631
PUL
  Pulmonary Plexus. The bronchial
plexus.
  Pulmonary Transpiration.   The
aqueous  vapor thrown out in expira-
tion.
  Pulmonary Veins. The veins which
receive the blood  from the minute ex-
tremities ofthe pulmonary artery, unite
into four trunks and empty themselves
into the left auricle of the  heart.
  PUL'MONATA.  Pulmonates. The
order of gastropodous moUusks  which
breathe by lungs.
  PULMONIC.  Belonging, or relat-
ing, to the lungs.
  PULMONITIS.  Pneumonitis.
  PULP.  Pulpa.   The soft,  succu-
lent parts of plants and fruits.
  Pulp, Dental.  See  Dental Pulp;
also, Teeth, pulps and sacs of.
  PULPA DENTIS. A dental pulp.
  PULPAMEN. A pulp.
  PULPO'SUS.  Pulpy, soft.
  PULSATION. Pulsatio. The beat-
ing of the heart and arteries; also, the
beating of an inflamed part.
  PULSE.  Pulsus;  frompulso, I beat.
The beating of the arteries, but  gener-
aUy felt at the  wrist by pressing the
fingers upon the radial artery. A great
number of characters of pulse have been
enumerated, as a strong  pulse,  a  liard
pulse, a soft pulse, a wirypube, a weak
pulse, with  numerous  other  varie-
ties.
   PULSIMANTIA.   Prognosis  by
the pulse.
  PULSUS CORDIS. The impulse of
the heart.
  PULTA'CEOUS. Macerated, near-
ly fluid, having the consistence of por-
 rage.
  PULTICE.  A poultice.
  PULVERIZATION. Pulverizatio.
The operation of reducing hard sub-
stances to powder.
  PULVER'ULENT.  In the state of
 a powder.
  PUL'VIS.  A powder;  a substance
 reduced, by pulverization, into a pow-
 der.
  Pulvis Aloes Compositus.  Com-
pound powder of aloes.
  Pulvis Aloes Et Canella.  Pow-
der of aloes and canella.
  Pulvis Aluminis Compositus. Com-
pound powder of alum.
  Pulvis Antimonialis.  Antimonial
powder.
  Pulvis Antimonii Compositus.—
Compound powder of antimony.
  Pulvis Aromaticus. Aromatic pow-
der.
  Pulvis Asari Compositus.  Com-
pound powder of asarabacca.
  Pulvis Capucinorum.   Powdered
cevadilla.
  Pulvis Cinnamoni Compositus. Ar-
omatic powder.
  Pulvis Comitissje. Cinchona pow-
der.
  Pulvis Cornu Cervini Usti. Burnt
hartshorn.
  Pula'is Cretje Compositus.  Com-
pound powder of chalk.
   Pulvis Cretje  Compositus Cum
Opio.   Compound  powder of chalk
with opium.
   Pulvis Cretje Opiatus. Compound
powder of chalk with opium.
   Pulvis Ipecacuanhje  Compositus.
Powder  of  ipecacuanha and  opium.
Dover's powder.
   Pulvis Ipecacuanhje Et Opii.  Do-
ver's powder.
   Pulvis Jalapje Compositus.  Com-
 pound powder of jalap.
   Pulvis Kino  Compositus.  Com-
 pound poAvder of kino.
   Pulvis Pro Cataplasmate. Pow-
 der for a cataplasm.
   Pulvis Rhei  Compositus.  Com-
 pound powder of rhubarb.
   Pulvis Salinus Compositus. Com-
 pound sahne powder.
   Pulvis Scammonii Compositus.—
 Compound powder of scammony.
   Pulvis  Spongije Ustje.    Burnt
 sponge.
   Pulvis Stanni.  Powder of tin.
   Pulvis Tragacanthje Compositus.
' Compound powder of tragacanth. 
PUN
632
PUR
   PUMEX.  Pumice.
   PUMICE.  A porous volcanic sub-
 stance. It is sometimes used in a finely
 pulverized state,  in  connection with
 other ingredients, as a dentifrice.  It is
 also used  by  some, in  the process of
 finishing pieces  of mechanical den-
 tistry.
   PUMILIO.  Pumilus.  A dwarf.
   PUNCH.    Rhizagra;  from pun-
 gere, to prick.  An instrument some-
 times  employed  in the extraction of
 teeth, on the right side  of the mouth.
 This  instrument is  called  by   the
 French,  pied-de-biche,  (hind's foot.)
 It consists of  a  steel  shaft, fixed in a
 bulbous  handle, parallel to its length;
 the extremity bent a little  downwards,
 bifurcated  and grooved  upon its up-
 per  surface.    Also,  a  steel  instru-
 ment,  with a small,  hardened  point,
 used for making  holes through thin
 plates of softer metal, as the backings
 of mineral teeth, for the  platina  rivets.
 See  Extraction of Roots of Teeth.
  Punch Forceps.   In Mechanical
 Dentistry, an instrument resembhng a
 pair of forceps,  employed for punch-
 ing  holes through  the metallic back-
 ings for the  rivets of  mineral plate
 teeth.
  Puncta  Ossificationis.   Points of
 ossification.
  PUNCTATE.   Dotted.
  PUNCTICUL^E.  Petechia;.
  PUNCTUM.  From pungo, to prick.
 A point.
  Punctum Au'reum. Punctura aurea.
 The name of an operation formerly
 performed for the reduction of intestinal
 hernia.
  Punctum Sa'liens.  The first point
 developed after the fecundation of the
 germ.
  PUNCTURA.   A  puncture; also,
 paracentesis.
  Punctured  Wound.    A wound
made by a long, pointed  instrument,
penetrating to a considerable depth.
  PUNGENT.  Sharp ;  stinging; bi-
ting; acrid.
   PU'NICA.  The name of a genus
 of plants.
   Punica  Grana'tum.   The  pome-
 granate.
   PUPA.   Ptipe.  An  insect  in  the
 third, or last state but one, of its  ex-
 istence.
   PUPIP'AROUS.    Insects  which
 produce their young in a pupa state,
 as the  hippobosca equina, or  forest-fly.
   PUPIL.  Pupilb.  The opening of
 the  iris, through which  the rays of
 light pass.
   Pupil,  Artificial.   An opening
 formed through the iris after it is closed.
   Pupil, Closure of the. Synezesis.
   PUPIL'LARIS.  From pupilla, the
 pupil.  Belonging to the pupil.
   Pupillaris Membrana.  The pupil-
 lary membrane.
   PURBLINDNESS.  Myopia.
   PURGAMENTUM.  A purge.
   PURGATION. Purgatio.  Cathar-
 sis ;  the action of purgative medicine.
   PURGATIONES.   The menses.
   PURGATIVE. From  purgare,  to
 cleanse.  A medicine  which increases
 very  considerably the alvine evacua-
 tions.
   PURGE.  A purgative.
   PURGE ROOT.    Euphorbia co-
 rollata.
   PURGING-NUT.    Jatropha cur-
 cas.
   PU'RIFORM.   Puriformk,  from
pus,  and forma,  resemblance.   That
which resembles  or has the character
of pus.
   PURLAND.    Practical Directions
for Preserving the Teeth; Advice  to
Parents; Growth  and Structure of the
Teeth;  with an Account of the Most
Approved Methods of Supplying their
loss ; Description of, and remarks upon,
every operation   connected with the
Teeth;  and Strictures upon the  Prac-
tice;of Pretenders to Dental Surgery; in-
cluding Crockery Teeth,Transplanting,
Excision, &c, by.  London,  1834.—
Dental Hemorrhage, London Forceps,
volume first. 
PUT
633
PYO
   PURPLE  POWDER  OF CAS-
 SIUS.   Aurum stanno paratum.
   PURPLES.   Purpura  haemorrha-
 gica.
   PUR'PURA. A purple color.  Livid
 spots upon  the skin, occasioned by  an
 extravasation of blood, and  attended by
 debility and pains in the limbs.   Pur-
 pura is  divided into five  species; 1.
 Purpura  simplex,  which  consists  of
 petechia?, without  much constitutional
 disturbance.  2.  Purpura  hazmorrha-
 gka, or land scurvy.  3. Purpura urti-
 cans, consisting of circular elevations
 of the cuticle that gradually dilate, and
 in a short time subside, and assume a
 darker and  ultimately a livid appear-
 ance.   4. Purpura senilis, affects  el-
 derly women, and is  characterized  by
 the appearance of purple spots  of  an
 irregular form, and varying in size  on
 the outside  of the forearm.   5.  Pur-
 pura contagiosa, is the occurrence  of
 petechia; in  typhoid fevers.
   Purpura  Alba.     Miliary  fever,
 when the pustules  are white, is some-
 times so termed, and  purpura rubra,
 when they are red.
   Purpura  Nautica.   Sea scurvy.
   PURPU'REUS.  Purple.
   PURSLANE.  Portulaca oleracea.
   PURULENT.   Purulentus;  from
 pus.  A term  applied to all collections
 of matter Avhich consists  of  pus, and
 to diseases characterized by its forma-
 tion.
   PUS.  Matter.  The product of sup-
 puration  consequent on inflammation
 of the cellular tissue.  When of a good
 quality,  it  is  of  a  yellowish-white
 color, inodorous, heavier than water,
 and of a creamy consistence.
  PUSILLATUM.  Pusulatum; from
pusillus, small.  A coarse powder.
  PUSTULA  ORIS.   Aphtha.
  PUSTULE.  Pustula;  from  pus,
matter.  An elevation  of the cuticle,
sometimes of a globate, and  sometimes
of a .conical  form,  with  an inflamed
base, containing pus or lymph.
  PUTNAM, JAMES  H.  James H.
 Putnam, late surgeon  dentist of Npav
 Orleans, was born, we believe, in  Vir-
 ginia,  and commenced the study  of
 dental surgery in 1819, under the tui-
 tion of Dr. R. Somerby, in Fredericks-
 burg, and during the same  year, ac-
 companied his preceptor to Kentucky.
 He remained  there, however,  but  a
 short time, and  soon after  located  in
 Nashville, Tenn., where he practiced his
 profession until 1832, when he moved  to
 NeAV Orleans, which place he had sev-
 eral times before  visited.  Mr. Putnam
 applied himself to the study  and prac-
 tice of his profession with untiring en-
 ergy, and for a  number of years  pre-
 viously  to his death, enjoyed a high
 reputation as a practitioner.  He  died
 at Vicksburg, Mississippi, in  1842.
   PUTRE'DO.   Hospital gangrene;
 putrefaction.
   PUTREFACTION.   Putrefactio ;
 from putrefacio, to  make rotten.  The
 decomposition of organized matter, at-
 tended with a fetid  exhalation.  Putre-
 factive fermentation.
   PUTRID.   An epithet applied to
 some affections, as typhus fever, which
 exhibit the characters of putridity.
 .  PYELITIS.   From  nveXos,  pelvis,
 and itis, signifying inflammation.  In-
 flammation of the pelvis and calyces of
 the kidney.
   PYESIS.  Suppuration.
   PY'RIFORM.  Pear-shaped.
   PYLEMPHRAX'IS.  From  rtvxn,
 porta, and eu$po£i,s, obstruction.   Ob-
 struction of the vena portae.
   PYLOR'IC.  Pyloricus.  Belonging,
 or relating, to the pylorus.
   Pyloric Artery.  A branch of the
 hepatic, distributed to the pylorus  and
 lesser curvature of the stomach.
  PYLO'RUS.   From  rtvXrj, an  en-
 trance, and apea,  to guard.  The lower
 orifice of the stomach, is  so called  be-
 cause it closes the entrance into the in-
 testinal canal.
  PYODES.  Purulent.
  PYOGEN'IA.  From rtvov, pus, and
yeveais, generation.  The elaboration of 
PYR              634               PYR
pus; the theory of the manner of its
formation.
  PYOGENIC.   Pyogenkus.   Con-
nected Avith the formation of pus.
  PYOH^E'MIA.   From  rtvov, pus,
and aiua, blood. Alteration of the blood
by pus.
  PYON.  Pus.
  PYOPTYSIS.    From  rtvov, pus,
and rttva, I spit.  Spitting of pus.
  PYORRHOEA.   From  rtvov, pus,
and p*co, I flow.  A discharge of puru-
lent matter.
  PYOSIS.  Suppuration.
  PYOTURIA. Pyuria.
  PYR'AMID.  Pyramis;  in Anato-
my, a small bony  protuberance in the
cavity of the tympanum.
  PYRAMIDAL.  Having the  form
of a pyramid.
  PYRAMIDA'LE  OS.   The cuni-
form bone.
  PYRAMIDALIS  ABDOMINIS.
A small muscle  of pyramidal shape,
situated in front of the abdomen.
  Pyramidalis Faciei.  Levator labii
superioris alaeque nasi.
  Pyramidalis Nasi.   A thin triangu-
lar portion of the occipito-frontalis, sit-
uated over the nose.
  PYRECTICA.  From rtvpetos, fe-
ver.  Fevers.  The first order in the
class hozmatka of  Dr. Good.
  PYRETHRUM.  Anthemis pyre-
thrum.
  PYRETIC. Pyreticus;  from rtvp,
fire. Pertaining to fever.
  PYRETOL'OGY.    Pyretobgia;
from rtvpetos, fever,  and Xoyos, a dis-
course.  A treatise on fevers.
  PYRETOS.  Fever.
  PYREX'IA. From rtvp, fire. Fever.
  PYREXIA.   Febrile  diseases.—
The first class of CuUen's Nosology.
  PYREX'IAL.   Pyrexialis. Febrile.
  PYR'IFORM.    Pyriformk;  from
pyrum, a pear, and forma, resemblance.
Pear-shaped.
  PYRIFORMIS.   A small muscle
of the pelvis, situated under the glu-
taeus maximus.
  PYRITES.  Minerals presenting a
whitish or yellowish metallic lustre, and
consisting of a combination of sulphur
with iron, copper, cobalt, or nickel.
  PYR'OLA.  Round-leaved av inter-
green.
  Pyrola Macula'ta. Spotted pipsis-
sewa;  ground holly.
  Pyrola Umbella'ta.  Chimaphila;
pipsissewa;  Avintergreen.  It has tonic
and diuretic properties.
  PYROLIG'NEOUS ACID.  Acetic
acid obtained by distillation from wood,
coal, &c.
  Pyroligneous  Ether.   Methylic
ether.
  Pyroligneous  Spirit.   Pyroxylic
spirit.
  PYROMALIC ACID.  Malic acid.
  PYROM'ETER.   An instrument
for ascertaining higher degrees of tem-
perature than the thermometer is capa-
ble of indicating.
  PYRO'SIS.  From rtvpoa, to burn.
Water-brash.  A  burning sensation in
the  stomach, with eructations of an
acrid, burning liquid.
  PYROTECH'NE.  From rtt,P,fire,
and  texvrj, art.   The  art of making
fire-works.    A term which formerly
signified chemistry.
  PYROTICA.   Caustics.
  PYROTHONIDE.  Empyreumatic
oil obtained by the combustion of paper
or rags.
  PYROTICUS.  Pyrotica.
  PYRUS.  The name of a genus of
plants.
  Pyrus Ancupa'ria.  The mountain
ash.
  Pyrus Commu'nis.   The pear tree.
  Pyrus Cydo'nia.   The quince tree.
  Pyrus Malus.  The apple tree.
  PYULCUIX.   From  rtvov, pus, and
eXxa, I extract.  An instrument for ex-
tracting pus from  any sinuous ulcer.
  PYURIA.   From rtvov, pus,  and
oupoj/, urine.  Purulent urine, occurring
in renal calculi.
  PYXIS.  A box ;  a piU-box ; also,
the acetabulum. 
QUA
635
QUI
   Q. P.  An abbreviation for quantum
placet.
   QUACK.  An empiric; a charla-
tan ; an ignorant pretender to medical
skill.
   QUADRAN'GULAR. Quadrangu-
hris. Four-sided.  Having four angles.
   QUAD'RANS.  A quarter.
   QUADRATES. Depressor labii in-
ferioris.
   QUADRATUS.   From quadra, a
square.   Having  a  square  shape;
square-figured.
   Quadratus Fem'oris.  A muscle of
the thigh.
   Quadratus Genje.   The platysma
myoides.
   Quadratus Lumborum.   A muscle
situated at the side of the lower part of
the spine.
   QUADRIDENTATUS.     Four-
toothed.
   QUADRIFID.  Cleft in four parts.
   QUADRIGEMINA TUBER'CU-
LA.   The four  meduUary  tubercles,
situated at the posterior surface of the
tuber annulare, called the corpora quad-
rigemina,  or nates and testes of the
brain.
   QUADRIGEM'INUS PRIMUS.—
The pyrimidalis muscle.
   QUADRILOBATE. Four-lobed.
   QUADRILOCULAR. Four-celled.
   QUADRIPARTITE. Having four
divisions.
   QUADRIVALVE.   Having  four
valves.
   QUADRU'MANA.  Four-handed.
Mammiferous animals which have four
hands, as monkeys.
   QUAD'RUPID.  Four-footed;  ani-
mals which have four feet.
  QUADRUPLICI.  Fourfold.
  QUAIL.  Tetrao coturnix.
  QUARANTINE.  From (Italian,)
quarantine; which  is from quaranta,
forty; because forty days is its Usual
 duration.   The  period during which
 travellers or goods coming from coun-
 tries where the plague, or other infec-
 tious disease  prevails, are required to
 remain on ship-board, or in a laza-
 retto.
   QUARTAN.  A term applied to in-
 termittent  fever,  the  paroxysms  of
 which recur every fourth day.
   QUARTARIUS. An ancient meas-
 ure, equal to the fourth part of a gallon.
   QUAS'SIA.  The bitter wood of the
 quassia excelsa.   Also, the name of a
 genus of plants.
   Quassia Amara.    The Surinam
 quassia tree.
   Quassia Excelsa.  The Jamaica or
 West Indian quassia.
   QUASSIN.  The bitter principle of
 quassia.
   QUATERNARY.   Having  four
 parts or elements.
   QUATRIO.   The astragalus.
   QUER'CUS.  Oak.  Also, the name
 of a genus of trees.
   Quercus Alba.  The Avhite  oak.
 The bark is powerfully  astringent and
 tonic.
   Quercus Infecto'ria. The gall oak.
   Quercus Marina. Sea oak.
   Quercus Phellos.   The willoAv-
 leaved oak.
   Quercus Rubra Monta'na.  The
 red oak, or Spanish oak.
   Quercus Suber. The cork tree.
   Quercus Tincto'ria. The black oak.
   QUICK'ENING.   The  period  of
 gestation when the motion of the fetus
 first becomes perceptible to the mother.
   QUICKLIME.  Lime freshly burn-
 ed.
   QUICKSILVER.   Hydrargyrum j
 mercury.
  QUI'NA.  Quinine.  Quinia. An al-
kali obtained from the bark of the dif-
ferent species of cinchona.
  QUINiE DISULPHAS.    Disvl- 
RAD              636             .RAD
pliate of quina. The commercial  sul-
phate of quinine.
  Quinje  Sulphas. Sulphate of quina.
  QUINCE.  Pyrus cydonia.
  QUINSY.  Cynanche tonsillaris.
  QUINIA.  Quinina.
  QUININE,  SULPHATE  OF.—
Quinae disulphas.
  QUINQUEFOL'IUM.   Potentilla
reptans.
  1$.  Recipe; take.
  RABBIT. Lepus cuniculus.
  RABID. From rabies,  canine mad-
ness.  Pertaining  to  hydrophobia,  as
rabid virus, &c.
  RABIES CANINA. Hydrophobia.
  RACE'MUS. From ramus, a branch.
A raceme, or cluster.
  RACHIAL'GIA. Rhachialgia.
  RACHID'IAN. Emanating from, or
distributed on, the spine.
  Rachidian Arteries.  The arteries
of the spine.
  Rachidian Canal. The vertebral ca-
nal.
  RACHIS.  Rhachis.
  RACHITIS. From pa*ij, the spine,
and itk, denoting inflammation. Liter-
ally, inflammation of the spine. Rick-
ets.
  RACO'SIS.  A relaxation of  the
scrotum.
  RA'DIAL.  Radialk; from radius, a
bone of the forearm.  Belonging, or re-
lating, to the radius.
  Radial Artery.  A branch of the
brachial artery, descending by the side
of the radius.
  Radial  Nerve.  A nerve derived
from the four inferior branches of the
brachial plexus.  It is distributed to the
muscles of the forearm and hand.
  QUINQUINA.  Cinchona.
  Quinquina, Mexican.   Iva  frutes-
cens.
  QUINTA  ESSENTIA.  Quintes-
sence.
  QUINTAN.  A  fever in which the
paroxysms recur every fifth day.
  QUOTIDIAN. An intermittent, the
paroxysms of which recur every day.
  QUINTU'PLICI.  Fivefold.
  Radial Veins. The veins which fol-
low the course of the radial artery.
  RADIALIS EXTER'NUS BRE -
VIOR.   The extensor carpi  radialis
brevior.
  Radialis Externus Longior.  The
extensor carpi radialis longior.
  Radialis Internus. The flexor car-
pi radialis.
  RADIATA. Radiaries; from radius,
a ray. The lowest primary division of
the animal kingdom.
  RADIATED.  Radiatus.  Arranged
in rays, diverging from one common
centre.
  RADIATION. From radius, a ray.
The emission ofthe rays of light, heat,
&c. from a centre.
  RADICAL.  RadicaUs; from radix,
a root.   Pertaining to, or  springing
from, the root.
  RADTCANT. Radicans. Producing
roots, as a stem which clings to another
body for support by means of root-like
processes.
  RADIO-CARPAL.  Belonging, or
relating, to the radius and carpus.
  RADISH. Raphanus hortensis.
  Radish, Garden. Raphanus sativus.
  Radish, Horse. Cochlearia armora-
cia.
  RADIUS. A spoke, so called, from
R. 
RAM
637
RAN
   its shape.   In Anatomy, the  exterior
   bone of the forearm.  In Botany,  the
   circumference of a radiated flower.   In
   Geometry,  a  straight line  extending
   from the centre to the periphery of a
   circle.
     RA'DIX.  A root.  In Botany, that
   part of a plant which imbibes its nour-
   ishment.   In  Anatomy,  parts  inserted
   into other parts, as the root of a tooth.
     Radix Brasilliensis.   Callicocca
   ipecacuanha.
     Radix Dulcis.  Glycyrrhiza glabra.
     Radix Rosea.  Rhodiola rosea.
     Radix Rubra.  Rubia tinctorium.
     RAD'ULA.  A wooden spatula or
   scraper.
     RADZYGE.   Norwegian leprosy.
     RAER.  Author of a Dissertation on
   the  Generation   and Rising  of  the
   Teeth. Lyons, 1694.
     RAIA.  The name of a genus of
   fishes.
     Raia Batis.  The skate.
     Raia Clavata.  The thorn back.
     Raia Oxyrin'chus.   The sharp-
   nosed ray.
     Raia Torpe'do.   The torpedo  or
   electric ray.
     RAISED  PLATE,   OR  BASE
   FOR  ARTIFICIAL TEETH.   In
   preparing a metalhc plate or base  for
   artificial teeth, in those cases where the
   alveolar border is wanting, it sometimes
   becomes  necessary,  and, especially,
   where gum teeth are not employed, to
   thicken the plate, by soldering to it a
   box, or air-tight chamber, to compensate
   for the loss of substance which the parts
   have sustained.   A base  thus  con-
   structed, is usually termed, by dentists,
•   a raised plate.  See Metallic  Base  for
   Artificial Teeth.
    RAISIN.  The fruit ofthe vine. See
   Vitis Vinifera.
    RAMALIS VENA.   Vena porta:.
    RAMENTA. Filings, as those  of
  iron, zinc, &c.
    RAMEX.  A rupture, or hernia.
    RAMIFICATION. Ramificatio.—
  The division  into branches of blood-
         54
 vessels and nerves. Also, the branches
 themselves.
   RAMOLLISSEMENT. Atermused
 by the French to designate a morbid
 softening of the texture of an organ.
   RAMOSE.    Rameus; ramosus.—
 Branched.  Divided into branches.
   RAMUS. In Anatomy, the division
 of an artery, vein or nerve. In Botany,
 the division of the stem of a plant.
   RAMUS'CULUS.   A division of a
 branch or ramus.
   RANA.  The name of a genus of
 animals.  The frog.
   Rana Esculen'ta.   The edible frog.
   RANCID.  Rancidus; from rancere,
 to  be stale.  A term  applied to fatty
 substances which have become acrid
 from age and exposure to air.
   RANDALL, JOHN. John Randall,
 M. D.,late practitioner of medicine and
 dental surgery, Boston,  was born  in
 Stow, Middlesex  county,  Massachu-
 setts, 1773, and graduated at Harvard
 University, in the class of 1802—a class
 celebrated for  the  eminent talent  of
 many of its members, and  the high
 place they have since attained in the
 hberal professions.
   Dr. Randall, says Dr.  N. C. Keep,
 the gentleman to whom  the author is
 indebted for the following biography,
 studied  medicine with the celebrated
 Dr. John Jeffries of Boston, and com-
 menced practice about the year 1805.
 This was an early period in the history
 of dental surgery in our country.
  I learned from Dr. Randall, that the
 foUowing was the incident which turn-
 ed the energies  of his  active mind to-
 wards dental surgery.  During  his col-
 legiate course he found his own teeth
 had begun to decay. He was naturally
 alarmed, and sought relief ofthe best, if
 not the only, dentist of that day within
 his reach.   That practitioner frankly
 told him that his business was to put in
 new teeth, and dechned performing any
operation for the preservation of the
natural teeth.
  Dr. R. immediately  sought for such 
RAN              638                RAN
light as could  be procured from  the
very few authors who had then written
on the subject; supphed himself with
such instruments  as  could then be ob-
tained ; and in the full belief that where
there is a disease there must be a  reme-
dy, he matured  his plans,  and com-
menced his first dental operation upon
himself.
   While  a pupil  in medicine,  Dr.
Randall performed many operations for
his friends and class-mates for the pre-
servation of their teeth; and so well did
he succeed, and so grateful were they
for benefits conferred, that soon after he
commenced the practice of medicine, he
secured the  confidence of the  whole
community in this department.  So far
as I can ascertain, he never advertised
either branch of his profession:  his
modest  announcement to  the  world
was—<Dr. John  Randall.'  His works
gave him celebrity.
   I  have  already stated that Dr.  R.
was made a dentist by circumstances.
It is well  known  that he considered the
practice of medicine his calling.   Den-
tistry, therefore, received only a portion
of his attention.   He dechned all large
operations for many years,  as they in-
terfered  too  much  with his general
professional  business as  a physician,
 and  from the increased  attention de-
 voted to  dentistry,  there were others
 qualified  for the business, whom he
 could, conscientiously, and did, cheer-
 fully, recommend to  the numerous ap-
 plicants who sought for his aid.  In-
 deed, his readiness  to assure those to
 whom he could  not attend, that some
 other person could do it better than he,
 and the  generous  and  disinterested
 commendations  he bestowed on those
 whom he knew to  possess merit, are
 worthy  of being preserved as gems of
 professional courtesy.
    Dr.  Randall  was  eminently  suc-
 cessful and  popular in extracting teeth.
 He used the key with great sktil, also
 the  forceps, long  before  they  were
 known  as an article of merchandize.
He practiced himself and taught his
pupils,  that the fulcrum  of the  key
should always be placed on the tooth
as high as practicable, and the hook as
low as possible on the other side of the
tooth to be extracted.  This could not
be done by the keys then in fashion ; as
the distance between the fulcrum and
the point of the hook, when placed as
described, would not admit a common
sized tooth; but by having the fulcrum
short, and the hook less curved, the in-
strument could be applied as described,
the gum would not be touched  by the
fulcrum, and the danger  of breaking
the  tooth  would  be less than in any
other mode, as the line from the point
of the hook to the point  where the ful-
crum takes effect is diagonaUy across
[ the tooth.
   Dr. Randall was scrupulously con-
 scientious.  No prospect of a fee would
 induce him to  recommend or perform
 an operation, which would not, in his
 opinion, benefit the patient.
   He Avas decidedly  conservative  in
 his theory and practice of dental surge-
 ry.  He well knew the value of a good
 healthy fang, upon Avhich a new crown
 could be engrafted; and  lamented the
 irreparable injury which confiding per-
 sons  frequently  suffered  by.  having
 these valuable supports  removed  by
 practitioners culpably ignorant, or wick-
 ed enough to maim, without scruple, a
 fellow being for the sake of a fee.
   Dr.  Randall's success in engrafting
 teeth was very great.    He   Avas ex-
 tremely careful not to jar  the root; to
 make a close fit,  to see that it articu-
 lated  accurately  with  the  opposing
 tooth; also, to finish the operation in
 as  short  a time as possible,   thereby
 greatly lessening the danger of inflam-
 mation.  I am confident that while I
 was his pupil the proportion  of cases
 where  inflammation  and  suppuration
 followed this  operation was not one in
 twenty.
    He considered ten years the average
 I time for a good root to last and support a 
              RAP               6

 new crown: though many of the teeth
 engrafted by him have done good ser-
 vice from twelve  to  fifteen, and some
 twenty years.
   For nearly  forty  years  he was  a
 useful and honorable member of socie-
 ty ; during which time, though he be-
 stowed much upon the poor, he accu-
 mulated ample provision for his family.
   He died in  1843, in the  seventieth
 year of his age.
   RANIFORM.   From ren, a kidney.
 Kidney-shaped.
   RANINE'.  Ranina; from rana,  a
 frog. The  name of an artery,  called
 arteiia ranina.   The sublingual artery.
   RAN'ULA.  From rana,  a  frog, so
 called from its fancied resemblance. A
 small, soft, transparent tumor, which
 forms under the tongue.
   RANUNCULUS. The name of  a
 genus of plants.  Also, the ranunculus
 bulbosus.
   Ranunculus Abortivus.  Ranuncu-
 lus acrk;  ranunculus pratensk.   The
 meadow crowfoot.
   Ranunculus Bulbosus.  Bulbous-
 rooted crowfoot.
   Ranunculus Ficaria.  Ranunculus
 vernus. The pilewort.
  Ranunculus Flammula. The smaU-
 er water crowfoot.
   Ranunculus  Scelera'tus.   The
 marsh crowfoot.
   RAPE.   Carnal connection with  a
 Avoman by force, and against her will.
   RAPHA'NIA.  Convulsio raphania.
 A genus of diseases  in the  class neu-
 roses, and order spasmi, of Cullen, char-
 acterized by  spasmodic contraction of
 the joints, severe pain, chills, lassitude,
 pain in the head and anxiety about the
 praecordia.
  RAPH'ANUS. The radish.  Also,
 the name of a genus of plants.
  Raphanus Horten'sis.   Raphanus
 sativus ; raphanus niger.  The radish.
  Raphanus Sylvestris.   Lepidium
 sativum.
  RAPHE.  A  seam;  a suture. A
term applied, in Anatomy, to seam-like
>39               RAT

 lines, or to parts which  appear as  if
 they had been sewed together.
   Raphe  Cerebri.  The longitudinal
 eminence of the corpus callosum of the
 brain.
   Raphe Scroti.  Raphperinei.  The
 eminence  Avhich  divides  the scrotum,
 as it were, in two equal halves.
   RAPHIANKISTRON.  From Pa-
 <Jhoi/, a needle, and ayxiotpov, a hook.
 An instrument  used  in  the formation
 of an artificial pupih
   RAPHION.  A needle.
   RAPTUS.   From rapio,  to  seize
 violently. A sudden and violent seizure.
   RAPUM. The turnip.
   RAREFA'CIENS.    From  rarus,
 rare, and facere,  to make. Medicines
 were so caUed which were supposed to
 give more bulk to the blood or d*ther
 fluids.
   RASH FEVER. Scarlatina.
   Rash, Nettle.  Urticaria.
   Rash, Rose.  Roseola.
   Rash, Summer.  Lichen tropicus.
   Rash, Tooth.  Strophulus.
   RASPATO'RIUM.  From radere, to
 scrape.   An instrument for  rasping
 bones.
   RASPBERRY. Rubus idaeus.
   RASU'RA. From radere, to scrape.
 A  rasure, scratch, or erosion.  Also,
 the  rasping or  shaving  of any  sub-
 stance.
   RATANHY.  Krameria ratanhia.
   RATIO. Proportion.  Also,  reason
 or explanation.
   RATIONAL. Rationale. Conform-
 able to reason.   In Medicine, the treat-
 ment of disease according to reason and
 ratiocination, and not by routine, or in
 accordance with  experience, which is
 empirical.
   RATREE, JOHN.   John  Ratree,
 late surgeon dentist, of Lexington, Ky.,
 was born, as nearly as the author has
 been able  to ascertain, in Maryland,
 about the  year  1798,  and about the
 year 1819 he commenced  the  study of
 dental  surgery,   in  Alexandria,  Va.
 In 1822 he commenced the practice of
39 
REA               640               REC
his profession in Cincinnati, Ohio, but
feeling the importance of a knowledge
of general medicine, he attended  a
course of lectures  in the Medical  Col-
lege of Ohio, and some two  or three
years later he attended a course in the
medical department  of the Transylva-
nia University at Lexington, Kentucky,
where he graduated.
  Dr. Ratree being possessed of great
energy  of character, and ambitious to
excel in his profession, he soon acquired
a justly deserved  high  reputation for
skill as  an operator,  and in the treat-
ment of the diseases of the mouth.  He
practiced in  Lexington and the neigh-
boring towns until 1830, when from ill
health,  he was  induced  to visit  the
southern  states,  but soon  returned,
and' died in 1832.  His memory is still
warmly  cherished by many  who re-
ceived the benefit of his professional
skill.
  RATSBANE.  Arsenious acid.
  RATTLE. Noise produced by the
air  in  passing through  the mucus, of
which the lungs and air  passages are
unable to free themselves. It is often
heard in persons who are in the act of
death.
  RATTLESNAKE.   Crotalus  hor-
ridus.
  Rattlesnake-Root.  Polygala sen-
ega.
  RAUCE'DO. Raucitas; from raucus,
hoarse.  Hoarseness*
  RAY.  A  line of light; a  straight
line supposed to be described by a  par-
ticle of light.  In Botany, the margin of
the disk of a compound flower.
  REACTION.   Reactio; from re,
again, and agere, actum,  to act.  The
effort made in resisting other action or
power.  In Medicine, the  vital action
which follows depression, from what-
ever cause produced.
  REA'GENT.   In  Chemktry, a  test.
  REAL'GAR.    Protosulphuret   of
arsenic.
  REASON.  The faculty of the mind
which distinguishes truth from false-
hood, good from evil, and which de-
duces influences from facts.
  RECEIVER.   A chemical vessel
for the reception of the product of dis-
tillation.
  RECEPTACULUM.  Receptacle;
from  recipio, to  receive.  In Anatomy,
a part of the thoracic duct.  In Botany,
that part of the interior of the pericarp
to which the seed is attached.
  Recepticulum  Chyli.   A  dilata-
tion of the thoracic duct in front ofthe
third lumbar vertebra.
  RECIPE.   f$.  Take.
  RECLINATION. Reclinatio ; from
reclinare, to bend back.  A name given
to one of the operations for cataract.
  RECREMENT.  Recrementum. A
term applied to those secretions, which,
after having been separated from the
blood are again employed in the opera-
tions of the economy, as the saliva, bile,
and gastric juice.  Such secretions are
called recremental humors.
  RECRUDES'CENCE.   Recrudes-
centia. The aggravation of a  disease
after a temporary remission.
  RECTIFICATION.   Rectificatw;
from rectus,  right, and fio, to be made.
An operation for the purification of cer-
tain liquids.
  RECTO-VAGINAL.   Belonging,
or relating, to the rectum and vagina.
  RECTUM.   So  called,  because it
was thought to be straight.  The third
and last portion of the large intestines.
  RECTUS.  Straight.  A term, ap-
plied in Anatomy, to certain muscles,
from their  direction.
  Rectus  Abdominis.  A long, flat
muscle situated at the anterior  part of
the  abdomen,  and  separated from its
fellow by the linea alba.
  Rectus Abducens Oculi.  Rectus
externus oculi.
  Rectus Adducens Oculi.  Rectus
internus oculi.
  Rectus Anterior Brevis.  Rectus
capitis internus minor.
  Rectus Anterior Longus.  Rectus
capitis internus major. 
REF
641
REL
  Rectus Attollens Oculi.  Rectus
superior oculi.
  Rectus  Capitis  Internus Major.
A muscle situated at the anterior and
lateral part of the neck.
  Rectus  Capitis  Internus Minor.
A muscle of the neck, situated  deeper
than the rectus major.
  Rectus Capitis Lateralis. A mus-
cle situated immediately behind the in-
ternal jugular vein  as it emerges from
the cranium.
  Rectus Capitis Posticus Major. A
muscle situated between  the  occiput
and second cervical vertebra.
  Rectus Capitis Posticus Minor. A
muscle situated beneath the last.
  Rectus   Externus Oculi.   The
outer muscle of the eye.
  Rectus Femoris.  A muscle situated
at the forepart of the thigh.
  Rectus  Inferior Oculi. The in-
ferior muscle of the eye.
  Rectus  Internu3  Femoris.  Gra-
cilis.
  Rectus  Internus  Oculi.  The in-
ternal muscle of the eye.
  Rectus Superior Oculi.  The up-
per muscle of the eye.
  RECUR'RENT.   Recurrent; from
recurrere, to run back.  Running back.
A name given to branches  of arteries
and nerves which re-ascend towards the
origin of the  trunk from  which  they
emanated.
  Recurrent Arteries.  Several ar-
teries of the forearm and one of the leg
are so called.
  Recurrent Nerve. A branch given
off by the parvagum on each side of the
cavity of the thorax.
  RED GUM.  See Strophulus.
  Red  Precipitate.  Hydrargyri oxy-
dum rubrum.
  Red  Sanders.  Pterocarpus santa-
linus.
  REDUCTION.  Reductio.   A sur-
gical operation for the restoration of a
dislocated or luxated bone to its original
situation.
  REFLECTION.   From rcfkcto, to
    54*
bend back.  In Anatomy, a duplicature,
or fold.
  REFLEX ACTION.  The propa-
gation of an  impression  made on the
extreme of one nerve, to the extremity,
through the intervention ofthe nervous
centres.
  REFLECTED.  Bent backwards.
  REFRACTION.   From refractus,
broken back.   The change of direction
which a ray of light experiences in pass-
ing from a dense to a rare medium, or
the reverse, or by passing  obliquely
from one medium into another of differ-
ent density.
  REFRIGERANT.    Refrigerans;
from refrigero, to cool.  A medicine
which has the property of reducing the
heat of the body.
  REGENERATION. Reproduction
of a part ofthe body.
  REG'IMEN.   From regere, to gov-
ern. The regulation ofthe diet and hab-
its of an individual with  a view to the
preservation of health, and the cure of
disease.
   RE'GION.  Regio.  In Anatomy, a
certain space of the surface of the body,
relatively to the neighboring parts.
   REGIUS. From rex, a king. Royal.
Applied, in  Chemistry,  to  the  noble
metals, especially gold, and aqua  regia,
which has the power of dissolving it.
   REGNART.   Author of a Memoir
upon a new method of  Plugging the
Teeth. Paris, 1818.
  RE'GULUS.   A  term,  applied  to
several ofthe inferior metals when freed
from their impurities, and obtained in a
metallic state.
   REGURGITATION.   Regurgita-
tio.  The act by  which a canal, or res-
ervoir of the body, frees itself from sub-
stances accumulated in it.
   RELAPSE.  The  return of a dis-
ease soon after convalescence.
   RELATION  OF  THE  TEETH
OF THE UPPER JAW TO THOSE
OF THE LOWER,  WHEN THE
MOUTH IS CLOSED.  The crowns
ofthe teeth of the upper jaw, generally 
REL
612
REN
 describe a rather larger arch than those
 of the lower.  The upper incisores and
 cuspidati, usually shut over and in front
 of the lower, but, sometimes they strike
 plumb upon them,  and at other times,
 though rarely, they strike on the inside.
 The outer tubercles of the upper bicus-
 pides and molares, generally strike out-
 side of those of the corresponding lower
 teeth.   By this beautiful  adaptation of
 the tubercles of the teeth of one  jaw to
 the depressions  of those of the other,
 every part of the grinding surfaces  of
 the  organs are brought  in  immediate
 contact in the act of  mastication, and
 which operation of the teeth, in conse-
 quence, is rendered more perfect than it
 would be if the teeth  came together in
 any other manner.
  The incisores and  cuspidati  of the
upper jaw are broader than the corres-
ponding teeth in the  lower;  in  conse-
quence of this difference  in the lateral
diameter of  the teeth of the two jaws,
the central incisores ofthe upper, cover
the centrals and about half of the late-
 rals in the lower, while  the  superior
 laterals  cover the remaining half of the
inferior and the anterior half of the ad-
joining cuspidati.  Continuing this pe-
 culiar relationship, the upper cuspidati
 closes over the remaining half  of the
 lower,  and the anterior  half of the
 first inferior bicuspides, while the first
 superior bicuspides cover the remaining
 half of the first inferior and the anterior
 half of the second.   In hke manner, the
 second  bicuspides of the upper jaw,
 closes  over the posterior half of the
 second  in the lower, and the anterior
 third of the first molares.  The first su-
 perior molares cover the remaining two-
 thirds of the first inferior  and the ante-
 rior third of the second, while the un-
 covered two-thirds of this last and ante-
 rior third ofthe lower dentes sapientiae,
 are covered  by the second  upper mo-
 lares.   The dentes  sapientiae  of the
 superior maxiUary being  usuaUy about
 one-third less in their anterio-posterior
 diameter, cover  the  remaining two-
thirds of the corresponding teeth in the
inferior.
  Thus, from this arrangement of the
teeth, it wtil be  seen, that when the
mouth is closed, that each tooth is op-
posed to two, and, hence, in biting hard
substances, and, in mastication, by ex-
tending this mutual aid, a power of re-
sistance is given to these organs which
they would not otherwise possess. More-
over, as a late English writer, Mr. Tomes,
very justly observes, if one, or even two,
adjoining  teeth should be lost, the cor-
responding teeth in the other jaw would,
to some extent, still act against the con-
tiguous organs, and thus, in some de-
gree, counteract a process, first  noticed
by that eminent dentist, Dr. L. Koecker,
which nature sets up for the expulsion
of such teeth as have lost their antago-
nists.
  RELAXATION.    In Pathobgy,
looseness or diminution of the natural
tone of parts.
  REMEDY.  Remedium. A medi-
cine employed for the prevention, alle-
viation or  cure of a disease.
  REMIS'SION.  Remksio.  A  tem-
porary cessation of the  symptoms of a
disease.
  REMITTENS ICTERODES.  Yel-
low fever.
  REMITTENT.   Remittens; from
remitto, to assuage or lessen. Any dis-
ease, the symptoms of which diminish,
but return again without leaving the
person free from disease, untU it ceases,
or changes its character.
  Remittent Fever.   A fever which
increases  and diminishes, but  Avithout
intermission,  as the bilious fever of the
United States.
  REMOTE.  In Pathobgy, the more
distant causes of disease.
  REN.  The kidney.
  RENAL.   Renalk; from  ren, the
kidney.  Pertaining to the kidney.
  Renal  Artery.   An artery sent off
by the abdominal aorta to  the  kidney.
See Emulgent.
  Renal  Vein.  A large vein, the root 
RES
643
RES
 of which follows the same course as
 the artery in the  substance of the kid-
 ney.
  RENCHUS.  Snoring; stertor.
  RENES SUCCENTURIATI. The
 renal capsules.
  REN'IFORM.  Reniformk.   Kid-
 ney-shaped.
  REN'NET.   Runnet; from (G.)
 gerinnen,  to  coagulate.    The  dried,
 salted stomach of a sucking calf.  It is
 used for coagulating milk.
  REPEL'LENTS.  Repellens; from
 re, and pellere, to drive.   Applications
 which,  when applied to  an inflamed
 part, causes the fluids, as it were, to
 recede from it.
  REPERCUS'SION. The disappear-
 ance of a tumor, abscess, or  eruption,
 in consequence of the application of a
 repeUent.
  REPLETION. Repletio. Plethora;
 superabundant fulness.
  REPLICATE. Replicatus. Folded,
 or plaited, so as to form a groove.
  REPRODUCTION.  From  repro-
 ducere, to produce again. The function
 by which living bodies perpetuate their
 species.  Generation.
  REPTILES.  Reptilia; from repo,
 to creep.  A  class of vertebrated ani-
 mals,  comprehending  the  snakes,
 lizards, frogs, &c.
  REPULSION. Repulsio; from  re-
 pello, to repel.  In Physics, that power
 by  which  bodies, or the  particles of
 matter are caused to recede from each
 other.  Also, the effect resulting from
 the operation of this power.
  RESECTION.     Resectio;  from
 resecare, to  cut off.  An operation  for
 the removal of the carious extremities
 of long bones, or false joints.
  RESE'DA.  The name of a  genus
 of plants.
  Reseda Luteola.  The dyer's weed.
  RESIN.  Resina.  A brittle,  semi-
translucent, inflammable vegetable pro-
duct, of a  bright fracture, and soluble
in alcohol and oils.
  Resin of Bile.  Biliary resin.
  Resin of Copper. Protochloride of
copper.
  Resin, Elastic.  Caoutchouc.
  Resin, White.  Resina alba.
  Resin, Yelloav.  Resina flava.
  RESINA ALBA.  The inspissated
juice of the pinus sylvestris, &c.
  Resina Flava.  Yellow resin.  Re-
sin.  The resin which remains in the
stiU after distilling oil of  turpentine
mixed with water.
  Resina Nigra.   The most common
resin which remains in the retort after
distilling oil of turpentine from  com-
mon turpentine.
  Resina Novi Belgii.   Botany Bay
gum.
  RESINATUM VINUM.    Wine
impregnated with resin.
  Resolu'tio Nervorum.  Paralysis.
  RESOLUTION.  Resolutio;  from
resolvere, to loosen.  A  termination of
inflammation without suppuration, or
mortification.
  RESOL'VENT. Resolvens.  A term
applied to substances which have the
power  of dispersing inflammation and
preventing suppuration.   A discutient.
  RES'ONANCE.  From re, again,
and sono, I sound. A return, or rever-
beration of sound. A peculiar thrilling
of the  voice, or the  existence  of it in
a part where it is  not heard in  health,
as discovered by auscultation.
  RESORPTION.  Resorptio;  from
resorbere,  to absorb afresh.   The ab-
sorption of a fluid, as of pus, serum or
other fluid which  has previously  been
poured out, or collected, in any part of
the body.
  RES'PIRABLE. Respirabilis. Ca-
pable of being respired without danger.
  RESPIRATION.  Respiratio; from
respiro, I take breath.  The inhalation
and expiration of air; the act of breath-
ing.
  RESPIRATOR. An instrument to
be adjusted before the mouth, to warm
the inspired air, and  intended for per-
sons subject to bronchitis and pulmo-
nary affections. 
RET              644               REV
  RES'PIRATORY.   Pertaining to
respiration.
  Respiratory  Murmur.   A sound
heard by auscultation in a healthy adult
during inspiration and expiration, and
occasioned by the passage  of the  air
into, and from the cells of the lungs.
  Respiratory  Tract.  The middle
column of the spinal marrow.
■' RESUSCITATION.   Resuscitatio;
from resuscitare, to move up, to stir up
anew.   The restoration of persons, ap-
parently dead, to fife.
  RETCHING.  Ineffectual efforts to
vomit.
  RETE.  A net.  A term applied in
Anatomy,  to cellular membrane, and to
the interlacing of nerves, blood vessels,
&,c, when they farm a sort of network.
  Rete Malpighi.  The rete muco-
sum.
  Rete Mirabile.  The anastomoses
of the internal carotid and vertebral ar-
teries at the base of the brain.
  Rete Mucosum.  A term applied to
the mucous substance situated between
the cuticle and true skin.
  Rete Vasculosum. Plenus retiformis.
  Rete Vasculosum Testis.   The
netAvork formed  by  the vasa recta at
the upper  and back part of the testicle.
  RETENTION.    Retentio ;  from
retinere, to hold back. The accumulation
of a solid or liquid substance, in a canal
or cavity,  intended to contain it only
for  a short time.
  Retention of the Menses.  Ame-
norrhcea.
  Retention of  Urine.  Accumula-
tion of urine in the bladder  from ina-
bility to expel it.
  RETICULAR.  Reticulark;  from
rete, a net.  A term applied in Anato-
my, to  structures  which have the ap-
pearance of a net, or web.
  Reticular Substance.   The ceUu-
lar  tissue.
  RETICULATUS.  Reticular.
  RETICULUM. Diminutive of rete,
a net.  A  small net or web.
  RET'IFORM.   Reticular.
  RETINA.  From rete, a net. Two
almost inseparable layers of membrane,
extending from the optic nerve to the
crystalline lens, embracing the vitreous
humor,  and lining the choroid  coat
without adhering to either. It is formed
by an expansion  of the optic nerve,
and constitutes the true organ of vision.
  RETINACULUM.  An old instru-
ment used in the operations  of hernia
and castration, to keep the intestines in
place.
  RETINITIS.    From   retina,  the
name  of the part, and itis, a terminal,
denoting inflammation.  Inflammation
of the retina.
  RETORT.  A  chemical vessel em-
ployed in distillation.
  RETRACTION.  Retractio; from
retrahere, to draw back.   The state of
a part when drawn towards the centre
of the body or backwards;  also,  the
state of being drawn up.
  RETRACTOR ANGULI ORIS.—
The buccinator muscle.
  RET'RAHENS  AURIS.    Two
small bundles of muscular fibres situa-
ted behind the ear.
  RETROCE'DENT.   A  term  ap-
plied in  Pathology  to a disease which
moves from one part of the body to
another, as sometimes happens in cases
of gout.
  RETROCES'SION.   The act of
going back.   The transfer of a disease
from the surface to the interior.
  RETROVER'SION.   Retroversio.
Turning back; applied to  the  uterus,
and other organs.
  REVEL'LENT.    Derivative;  ap-
plied to that which draws inflammation
or other diseased action from a part.
  REVERBERATORY FURNACE.
A furnace in which the flame is made
to play over an arched surface.
  REVERY, OR REVERIE. Irreg-
ular  train of  thoughts, occurring in
musing  or  meditation, voluntary inac-
tivity of the whole  or  the greater part
of the external senses, during wakeful-
ness. 
              RHE               6<

  REVIVIFICATION.    Resuscita-
 tion.
  REVULSION. Revulsio;  fromre-
 vellere, to pluck.  The act of  drawing
 a disease from the organ in which it
 appears to have taken its seat.
  REVULSIVE. Derivative.
  RHACHIAL'GIA.   Rachialgitk;
 from pa^tj, the spine,  and aXyos, pain.
 Spinal irritation; pain in the spine.
  RHACHIPARALY'SIS.  Paraple-
 gia.
  RHACHIPHY'MA.   A tumor  of
 the spine.
  RHACHIRRHEU'MA.  Lumbago.
  RHA'CHIS.  The  spine, or verte-
 bral column.
  RHACHISAGRA.   From 9aXis,
 the spine, and aypa, a seizure.  Sud-
 den seizure of the spine, with pain.
 A gouty or  rheumatic affection of the
 spine.
  RHACHITJE. The muscles ofthe
 spine.
  RHACHITIS.  Rachitis.
  RHA'GAS.   A fissure, chap,  or
 cleft.
  RHAGOI'DES.  The uvea.
  RHAMNA'CEiE.  The buckthorn
 tribe of dicotyledonous plants.
  RHAM'NUS.  The buckthorn. Al-
 so, the name of a genus of plants.
  Rhamnus Catharticus. Buckthorn.
 Purging  buckthorn.
  Rhamnus Frangula.   The  black
 alder.
  Rhamnus  Zizyphus.    The  tree'
 which affords the jujube.
  RHAPONTICUM. Rhapontic rhu-
 barb.
  Rhaponticum Vulgare  Officina-
 rum.  Centaurea centaurium.
  RHATANY. Rhatania. Krameria
 triandra.
  RHEG'MA.  A laceration.
  RHEOMETER.   From  pea,  to
 flow, and uetpov, a measure.  An in-
 strument for arresting and re-establish-
ing the electrical current of an electro-
magnetic machine.
 RHEUM.  Rheuma.
45              RHE

   Rheum, Salt.  A popular name for
 several cutaneous affections.
   Rhe'um.   The name of a genus of
 plants; also, rhubarb.
   Rheum Rhapon'ticum.  Rhapontic
 rhubarb.
   RHEU'MA.   From pea, to flow.
 The discharge from the nostrils and air
 passages.  It is also applied to any mu-
 cous discharge.
   RHEUMATAL'GIA. Chronic rheu-
 matism.
   RHEUMAT'IC. Rheumaticus.  Be-
 longing, or relating, to rheumatism.
   RHEU'MATISM.   From pevua,  a
 defluxion, catarrh. A more or less pain-
 ful affection occupying the muscles sur-
 rounding the joints, and sometimes the
 textures of  the joints themselves.  It
 is  sometimes  acute, and  sometimes
 chronic.
   Rheumatism, Acute.    A  disease
 usuaUy ushered in by fever, excruciat-
 ing pain in different parts of the body,
 but more  particularly in  the  larger
 joints, which soon  become red and
 swoUen.  Several joints are usually af-
 fected at the same time, and the pain
 shifts from one to another.
   Rheumatism, Arthritic.   Acute
 rheumatism.
   Rheumatism, Cap'sular.  Rheuma-
 tism affecting the lining membrane of
 the joints and bursae of the tendons.
   Rheumatism, Chronic   Pain   in
 one or more of  the joints, unaccom-
 panied by  inflammation,  redness  or
 fever.
   Rheumatism, Gouty. Arthritis; in-
 flammation  of the synovial membrane.
   Rheumatism,   Prjeabdom'inal.—
 Rheumatism of the muscles of  the an-
 terior and lateral parts of the abdomen.
   RHEUMATISMUS   CANCRO-
 SUS.  Tic  douloureux; neuralgia fa-
 ciei.
   RHEUMATOPHY'RA.    Acute
 rheumatism.
   RHEUMATO'SIS.  Rheumatism.
   RHEXTS. A rupture of any part.
 A spontaneous opening of an abscess.
15 
RHO
646
RIC
  RHIN. The nose.
  RHINAL'GIA.  From piv, the nose,
and akyoj, pain.  Pain in the nose.
  RHINEN'CHYSIS.   From pMr, the
nose, ev, in, and xva, I  pour.  An in-
jection into the nostrils, made with a
syringe.
  RHINENCHY'TES.  A nose  sy-
ringe.
  RHINOPHO'NIA.  Nasal voice.
  RHINOPLASTY.  From pw, the
nose, and rtxaaaa,  I form.  A  surgical
operation for forming a new nose.
  RHINORRHA'GIA.  Epistaxis.
  RHINOR'RHAPHY.   Rhinorrha-
phia; from pu/, the nose, and pa^rj, a
suture.  An operation for the removal
of epicanthus, or a portion of the skin
of the nose.
  RHIZA. A root.
  RHI'ZAGRA.   A punch; an  in-
strument much used by ancient den-
tists in the extraction of roots of teeth,
and it is occasionaUy employed at  the
present day for this purpose.
  RHIZO'MA.   Rhizome.   A  root-
stock.
  RHIZOPH'ORA.  The name of a
genus of plants.
  Rhizophora Gymnorhi'za.   The
mangrove.
  RHODI'OLA. The name of a genus
of plants.
  Rhodiola Rosea.  Rosewort.
  RHO'DIUM.  A hard, white metal,
found in crude platina.
  Rhodium Lignum.  Rosewood.
  RHODODEN'DRON.  The  name
of a genus of plants.
  Rhododen'dron Chrysan'themum.
Oleander; rose bay; yeUow rhododen-
dron.
  RHODO'MELI.  Honey of roses.
  RHODOME'NIA.  The name of a
genus of seaweeds.
  Rhodomenia Palma'ta. Fucus sac-
charatus.
  RHCE'AS.   The red poppy.
  RHOMBOHE'DRON. A solid hav-
ing six equal rhombic planes, or sides.
  RHOMB. Rhombus. From p^j3w, to
turn or whirl round, to wander.  Liter-
ally, a deviating  square.  An oblique-
angled, equilateral parallelogram, or a
quadrilateral figure whose planes are
equal, and  the opposite ones parallel,
with unequal angles, two being obtuse
and two acute.
  RHOMBOID.  Rhomboidal.  A fig-
ure having the form of  a  rhomb, with
sides  and angles equal, but which is
neither equilateral nor equiangular.
  RHOMBOIDE'US.  A muscle of
the scapula, which is  sometimes de-
scribed as two muscles, the rhomboi-
deus major and rhomboideus minor.
  RHON'CHUS.  A ratthng  sound;
stertor; snoring.
  RHOPALO'SIS.  Plica.
  RHUBARB.   Rheum.
  RHUS.  The name  of a genus  of
plants.
  Rhus Coriaria.   Italian sumach.
Eim-leaved  sumach.
  Rhus Glabrum.  The  common in-
digenous sumach.
  Rhus Toxiconden'dron.   Poison
oak, or sumach.
  Rhus Vernix.  SAvamp sumach.
  RHYAS.  A decrease  or defect of
the lachrymal caruncle ofthe eye.
  RHYN'CHOLITHES.  From pw-
#o$, a  beak, and XiOos,  a  stone.  The
fossil  extremities of the mandibles  of
cephalopods.  Beak-shaped fossils.
  RHYTHM.  From pvOuos, regular
movement.  Applied, in Medicine,  to
the pulsations of the heart and the pulse,
which, when equal in  force, are said to
be in rhythm.
  RHYTIDO'SIS. Rutidosis.
  RIB.  Costa.
  RIBES.  The  name  of a genus of
plants.
  Ribes Nigrum.  The black currant.
  Ribes Rubrum.  The red currant.
  RICCI.    Author  of Principles  of
Odontechny, or Reflections on the Pre-
servation ofthe Teeth and Gums. Paris,
1790.   Also, of a  Memoir upon Raci-
form  Teeth, Paris, 1816; and upon
Keeping in the Teeth and Gums,  with a 
              RIN                6

liquor for their diseases, and other af-
fections.  Paris, 1816.
  RICE.  Oryza sativa.
  RICHARDSO'NIA.   The name of
a genus of rubiaceous  plants; several
ofthe species of which afford the white
ipecacuanha.
  RICI'NUS.   The castor oil plant.
Also, the name of a genus of plants.
  Ricinus Commu'nis.  The castor oil
plant.
  Ricinus Major.   Jatropha curcas.
  RICKETS.  Rhachitis.
  RICTUS.    From  ringo, to grin.
The grinning mouth,  or opening be-
tween  the two lips of the ringent flow-
er.
  RIGID.  Rigidus. Hard; stiff; not
pliant.
  RI'GOR.  From piyea, to shiver.  A
sensation of  cold,  with  involuntary
shivering.
  Rigor Mortis.  The rigidity which
takes place after death.
  Rigor Nervosus. Tetanus.
  RIMA.  A fissure, cleft, or opening.
  Rima Glot'tidis.  The  opening  of
the glottis.
  RIMO'SUS.  Full of cracks.
  RIMULA.  A small fissure or crack.
  RING.  Annulus.
  Ring,  Femoral.  An  opening be-
tween  Poupart's  ligament  and the
pubes.
  Ring, External Abdominal.  An
opening formed by the separation ofthe
fibres of the aponeurosis of the obliquis
externus.
  Ring,  Internal  Abdominal.  An
opening a tittle above Poupart's liga-
ment, in the fascia transversalis.
  Ring-Worm. Herpes  circinatus.
  Ring-Worm of the Scalp.  Por-
rigo scutulata.
  RINGELMANN, C.  J.   On the
Diseases of  the  Bones, and of  Caries,
especiaUy that ofthe Teeth, by. Arnst.
1805.
  RINIERE.  Author of a paper en-
titled,  Instructions for  Preserving the
Teeth.  Paris, 1811.
                ROC

  RIPOGONIUM PARVIFLORUM.
The sarsaparilla of New Zealand.
  RISUS.   From  ridere,  risum, to
laugh.  Laughter.
  Risus Caninus.  Canine laugh.
  Risus  Sardonicus.    A  sardonic
laugh.  A convulsive grin.
  ROASTING.  In  Chemistry, a pro-
cess employed for the separation of
mineral substances, consisting in the
volatilization of some of their principles,
and in changing others so as to prepare
them for other operations.
  ROBIN'IA.  The name of a genus
of trees.
  Robinia  Amara.   The name of a
tree of Cochin China.
  Robinia Pseudo-aca'cia. The com-
mon locust tree.
  ROBERTSON, W.   Author of a
Practical Treatise on the Human Teeth.
London, 1839.
  ROBINSON, JAMES.  The Surgi-
cal, Mechanical, and  Medical Treat-
ment of the  Teeth;  including  Dental
Mechanics, by. London and  Philadel-
phia,  1846.  Few Avorks of the size of
the above,  which contains 320 pages,
upon the subjects on which  it treats,
embodies as much correct and valuable
information.  Dr. Robinson is also au-
thor of a number of interesting papers
published in the  London Forceps, and
also of a number of articles on the Im-
portance of  Medical  and  Surgical
Knowledge to  the  Dentist, published
in volumes 7 and 8 of the American
Journal of Dental Science, in which
he proves, very conclusively, the cor-
rectness of the position he  assumes.
Besides the  above,  Dr. R. has con-
tributed several papers  to the  Dental
Intelligencer.
  ROB'ORANT.  Corroborant.
  ROBORANTIA.   Tonics.
  ROCCELLA.  Canary archel.
  ROCHE ALUM.  Native alum.
  Rochelle Salt.   Soda tartarizata.
  ROCK OIL.   Petroleum.
  ROCKET. Garden rocket.  Roman
rocket.
47 
ROG              648               ROS
   RODENTIA. From rodo, to gnaw.
 An order of mammaha, having two in-
 cisor teeth in each jaw, with an empty
 space between them and the molares,
 comprehending the  rat and  mouse, the
 squirrel, rabbit, musk-rat, beaver and
 gnawing animals.
   ROLFINCK.  Author of a Disser-
 tation on Odontalgia.  Jena, 1669.
   RODRIGUES, B. A.   Author of
 a report of a case of Exostosis of the
 Upper Jaw, published in the American
 Journal of Medical  Science.  The ex-
 ostosis  originated  in  the   maxiUary
 sinus.   It was removed by Dr. R., and
 the patient recovered.   Dr.  R. is  also
 author of a  Report  of a Case of De-
 formity of the Inferior MaxiUary suc-
 cessfully treated, and of a paper on the
 Treatment of Caries of the Teeth, with
 Remarks on the Anatomy  and Physi-
 ology of these Organs, both published
 in the  first  volume of the  American
 Journal of Dental Science.
  ROGERS, M.  Author of an article
 on Dental Nerve Ktiling, published in
 first volume  of the Dental  Register of
 the West.   Address  delivered before
 the Cincinnati Association  of Dental
 Surgeons,  published  in the fourth vol-
 ume of the American Journal of Den-
 tal Science.
  ROGERS, WILLIAM.   Encyclo-
 pedia of Dentistry, or  General Reposi-
 tory of  all  the Medico-Chirurgical
 Knowledge upon the Anatomy and Pa-
 thology ofthe Teeth.—The Two Den-
titions, with Advice  to Mothers, Nurs-
 es, and people generaUy, on the Care
 of the Mouth, and the Means of Pre-
 serving the Teeth in  Health and Beau-
 ty, preceded by the History of Dentistry
 among the Ancients, and accompanied
by a complete  Treatise on  Artificial
Teeth, and particularly upon Osanores,
by. Paris,  1845.—Dictionary of Den-
tal  Science or General Repository of
ail the  Knowledge  necessary  to  the
Dentist, by.  Paris,  1847.—Manual of
 Dental Hygiene for aU Classes and
 Professions, by. Paris, 1846.
   ROLLER.   A long, narrow ban-
 dage.
   Rolling Mill.  An  apparatus for
 reducing metal to thin plates or lamina .
 consisting of two  iron roUers, mounted
 in a strong iron frame, so adjusted as to
 be separated or brought  near  together
 by means of two screws, and made to
 revolve by  means of a crank.  It is
 used in the laboratories  of dentists for
 for reducing gold and stiver into plates
 to serve as attachments for  artificial
 teeth.
   ROMAN VITRIOL.   Sulphate of
 copper.
   ROOT.  Radix.
   ROS.   Dew.
   Ros Calabrinus. Calabrian manna.
   Ros Solis.  The sun-dew.
   ROSA.  The name of a genus of *
 plants.  Also, erysipelas.
   Rosa Alba.  The white rose.
   Rosa Canina.  Rosa sylvestrk.  The
 dog-rose, or wild brier.
  Rosa Centifolia.   The  damask,
 cabbage, or hundred-leaved rose.
  Rosa Gallica.  The red or French
 rose.
  ROSACEA.  The rose tribe of di-
 cotyledonous plants.
  ROSA'CEUS.  Rose-like.
  ROSALIA.   Scarlatina.
  ROSE.  Rosa.   Also, erysipelas.
  Rose, Christmas. Helleborus nigre.
  Rose Drill, Elliot's  Improved.
This improvement consists in bending
the shank of a rose-drill  into the form
of a hook, which, says  the author of
the improvement, enables the operator
to driU a cavity in the posterior  surface
of a back tooth.
  Rose-Rash .   Roseola.
  Rose-Root.   Rosewort
  ROSEMARY.    Rosmarinus  offi-
cinalis.
  ROSE'OLA.    From  rosa,  a rose.
An efflorescence of a rose color,  ap-
pearing in patches, of various  shapes,
without papulae, alternately deepening
and fading, and usually occurring  as a
symptom  of dentition, dyspepsia, and 
ROS
649
RUB
often in connection with different feb-
rile affections.  The folloAving  are the
principal varieties: 1. Roseola ozstiva,
which generally occurs in the summer,
first appearing  on the face and  neck,
but   afterwards distributed  over the
body, accompanied by an itching and
tingling sensation. 2. Roseola autumnalis.
This appears on children in the autumn,
in the form of circular or oval  patches,
Avhich gradually  increase in size, and
assume the hue of a dark damask rose.
3. Roseob annulata, appears  in  rose-
colored rings, on almost every part of
the body.  4. Roseola infantilis, occurs
in infants, as a symptom of the  irrita-
tion of dentition, in fevers, &c. 5. Ro-
seob variolosa, appears previously  to
the eruption of small-pox, whether oc-
curring in the natural way, or  from in-
noculation, though seldom before the
former.   6.  Roseola vaccina, occurs
generally in small patches, about the
ninth or  tenth day  after vaccination.
7. Roseola miliaris,  frequently occurs
during the eruption of miliary  vesicles.
  ROSE US.  Of a rose-red color.
  ROSEWOOD. Rhodium lignum.
  ROSEWORT. Rhodiola rosea.
  ROSIN.   The residuum  after the
distiUation of the volatile oil  from the
turpentine pines.  Colophony.
  ROSMARI'NUS.  Rosemary.  Also,
the name of a genus of plants.
  Rosmarinus Officina'lis.  Rosma-
rinus hortensk. The common rosemary.
  Rosmarinus Sylvestris.   Ledum
palustre.
  ROSS, W. B.  Author of an article
on the Vitality of the  Teeth ; published
in the first volume of the Dental Regis-
ter of the West.
  ROSSET.  Author of an Inaugural
Dissertation on Dentition.  Paris, an.
xii.
  ROSTRATE.  Rostratus. Having a
beak or bill.
  ROSTRUM.   A  beak.   A  name
given to several old forceps  from their
resemblance to the beaks of  different
birds.
        55
  Rostrum Leporinum.  The flesh be-
tween the divisions of double hare-lip.
  ROTA'CEOUS.  Wheel-like.
  ROTATION. Rotatio.  A revolving
motion, as that of a limb around its
joint.
  ROTATOR. From rota, a  Avheel.
A name  given  to several muscles, the
office of Avhich is,  to rotate the parts
upon which they act.
  ROTIF'ERA. A term applied to an
order of  infusory  animals  furnished
with vibratile cilia, arranged in circles
in the vicinity of the mouth.
  ROTULA.   The patella.
  ROTUN'DUS.  Round.
  ROUGE, POLISHING.  See  Pol-
ishing Rouge.
  ROUND.  Rotundus.   Applied, in
Anatomy, to foramina, and parts Avhich
have this figure, as the foramen rotun-
dum, and ligamenta rotunda, &c.
  ROUSSEAU, EM.    Dissertation
upon First and Second Dentitions, by.
Paris,  1820.—Comparative  Anatomy
of the Dental System in  Various Ani-
mals and Man, by.  Paris, 1827.  This
last is  one of the  best works  on the
comparative anatomy of the teeth that
has been published.
  ROUX, PH. JOS. Memoir on Sta-
phyloraphy,  or Suture  of the Veil of
the Palate, by.  Paris, 1825.
  ROYAL MINERAL  SUCCEDA-
NEUM.  A name given, by the Craw-
cours, to amalgam, which see.
  RUBBER, INDIAN.  Caoutchouc.
  RUBE'DO.  Redness; from  rubere,
to be red.  A  redness, uniformly dif-
fused, on any part of the skin, as that
arising from blushing.
  RUBEFA'CIENT.    Rubefaciens;
from rubens, red, and facio, I make. A
term applied  to  substances,   which,
when  placed  upon  the  skin,   cause
redness.
  RUBE'OLA.  From  rubere, to be
red. Measles.
  RUBER.  Red.
  RU'BIA. The name of a genus of
plants. 
RUM              650               RUS
  Rubia  Tincto'rum.   The madder
plant.
  RUBIACE'.E.  The cinchona tribe
of dicotyledons.
  RUBICKI. Author of a Dissertation
on Difficult Dentition.   Rigiom, 1803.
  RUBIGINOUS. Rubiginosus; from
rubigo, rust Of the color of rust.
  RUBIGO.  Rust. Also, the red rust
or mildew of grain.
  Rubigo Cupri.  The sub-acetate of
copper.   Verdigris.
  Rubigo Ferri. Sesquioxyd of iron.
  RUBPNUS  VERUS. Anthrax.
  RU'BRICA FABRPLIS. A heavy,
earthy matter, of a red color. Red chalk.
  Rubrica Sinop'ica. A heavy earth,
of a red color and compact texture.
  RUBRIN.  Haematosin.
  RU'BUS. The name of a genus of
plants.
  Rubus  Arc'ticus.   The  shrubby
strawberry.
  Rubus Cjesius. The dewberry plant.
  Rubus Chamjemo'rus.   The cloud-
berry tree.  Knotberry.
  Rubus Fructicosus. The common
bramble.  The blackberry.
  Rubus Idjeus. The raspberry.
  Rubus Trivia'lis.  The low black-
berry.  The American dewberry.
  Rubus Villo'sus.  The hedge black-
berry.
  RUC'TUS.  Eructation.
  RUE.   Ruta graveolens.
   Rue, Goat's.  Galega officinalis.
   Rue, Wall.  Asplenium murale.
   RU'GA. A wrinkle.
   RUM.  A spirituous  liquor, distilled
from molasses.
   RU'MEN.    The stomach  of rumi-
nants.
   RU'MEX.   The dock.  Also,  the
name of a genus of plants.
   Rumex  Aceto'sa.   The  common
sorrel. Sour-dock.
   Rumex Acu'tus. The sharp-pointed
wild-dock.
   Rumex Alpi'nus.  Monk's rhubarb.
  Rumex AQUAT'icus.Rumex hydrola-
pathum.
  Rumex  Hydrolap'athum.  Water-
dock.
  Rumex Obtusifo'lius. Blunt-leaved
dock.
  Rumex Patien'tia.  The garden pa-
tience.
  Rumex  Sanguin'eus.   The bloody
dock.
  Rumex Scuta'tus. French sorrel.
  RUMINANTIA. Ruminants. Ani-
mals which chew the  cud, as the ox,
deer, &c.
  RUMINATION.  Ruminatio.   A
function peculiar to  ruminating ani-
mals,  consisting  in chewing the food
they have swallowed, a second time.
  RUNNET. Rennet.
  RUNUN'CULA,  Raspatorium.
  RU'PIA.  From pvrtos, filth. A dis-
ease characterized by an  eruption  of
large flattish vesicles, with a slightly in-
flamed base, and containing a fluid, at
first serous, but afterwards puriform,
and often bloody, which concretes into
a hard crust.  The disease appears un-
der the following forms, viz. 1. Rupia
simplex, which consists of slight vesi-
cations, and after they pass away, leave
a surface of a livid or blackish color.
2. Rupia prominens, which is charac-
terized by  the  formation of elevated
conical scabs, upon the vesecated bases.
3. Rupia escharotica, which is confined
to infants and children of a  cachectic
habit; the vesicles occur  on the loins,
thighs and lower extremities.
  RUPTURE.   Ruptura.  Hernia.
  RUSCUS. Ruscus aculeatus. Also,
the name of a genus of plants.
  Ruscus  Aculeatus.     Butcher's
broom.  Knee-holly.
  Ruscus  Hypoglos'sum.   Uvularia
hypoglossum.
  RUSH, SWEET.  Acorus calamus;
juncus odoratus.
  RUSPINI, BARTH.  Author of a
Treatise on the Teeth, their Structure
and Various Diseases.  London, 1779.
  RUST.   The oxyd which forms on
metals, when exposed to the  air, espe-
cially iron. 
SAC
651
SAC
  RUT A.  The  name of a genus of
plants.  Common rue.
  Ruta Graveo'lens. , The common
rue.
  Ruta Muraria. Asplenium murale.
  RUTACEoE. The rue tribe of dico-
tyledonous plants.
  RUTA'CEUM. Vinegar of rue.
  RUTHENIUM. A metal resembling
iridium and rhodium, found in the ores
of platina.
  RUYSCHIA'NA  TU'NICA.  The
inner surface or coat of  the choroid
membrane.
  RYE.  Secale cereale.
  Rye,  Spurred.  Secale cornutum;
ergot; horned-rye.
  RYTIS.  A wrinkle.
S.
   S. A.  In Medical Prescriptions, the
 contraction of secundum artem.
   SABADILLA. Veratrum sabadilla.
   SABBATIA.   The American cen-
 taury.  Also, the name of a  genus of
 plants.
   Sabbatia Angularis.  A bitter herb,
 possessing properties similar  to gen-
 tian.
   SABINA. Juniperus sabina.
   SAB'ULOUS.   Sabulosus.   Gritty.
 The sandy deposit  sometimes seen in
 urine.
   SABUR'RA.  Sordes; filth;  coarse
 sand; but according to its common ac-
 ceptation, foulness of stomach.
   SACCATUS.  Saccated;  enclosed
 in a cyst, or bag.
   SACCHARUM.  Sugar.  Also, the
 name of a genus of plants.
   Saccharum Acer'num.  Maple su-
 gar.
   Saccharum Album. Refined sugar;
 white sugar; loaf sugar.
   Saccharum Aluminis. Alum mixed
 with dragon's-blood and dried.
  Saccharum Can'didum. Sugar can-
 dy.
  Saccharum Officinale. The cane
from which sugar is obtained.
  Saccharum  Saturni.   Acetate  of
lead. Sugar of  lead.
   SACCULUS. Diminutive of saccus,
 a bag.  A little sac, or bag.
   Sacculus  Chylife'rous.  The re-
 ceptaculum chyli.
   Sacculus  Chordis.   The pericar-
 dium.
   Sacculus Lachryma'lis. The lach-
 rymal sac.
   SACCUS. A bag.
   SACK.  An ancient wine, probably
 sherry.
   Sack.  Saccus.  A bag or pouch.
   SACRA HERBA.   Verbena  offi-
 cinalis.
   Sacra Tinctura.  Tincture of aloes,
 canella alba, and mountain wine.
   SACRAL.  Belonging, or  relating,
 to the sacrum.
   Sacral Arteries.  These are dis-
 tinguished into the anterior or middle
 sacral, and the lateral sacral arteries.
   Sacral Nerves.  The sacral nerves
 arise  from  the  termination  of the
 spinal marrow, and  are  six in num-
 ber.
  SACRO-COCCYG^E'US. A mus-
 cle arising from the sacrum, and in-
 serted into the coccygis.
  Sacro-Coxal'gia.  A  rheumatic af-
fection of the sacro-iliac symphisis.
  Sacro-Iluc. Relating to the sacrum
and ilium. 
SAL
652
SAL
  Sacro-Ischiatic   Relating to the
sacrum and ischium.
  Sacro-Lumbalis.   A  long  muscle
seated at the posterior part of the trunk,
arising from the sacrum and extending
to the lower part of the neck.
  Sacro-Sciatic.   Belonging to the
sacrum and ischium.
  Sacro-Sciatic  Ligaments.    Two
ligaments Avhich assist in  securing the
Sacro-iliac articulation.
  Sacro-Vertebral.   Belonging to
the sacrum and vertebra.
  SACRUM.  Os sacrum. From sacer,
sacred.  The  bone which  forms the
posterior part of the pelvis, which is a
continuation of the vertebral column.
  SAFFLOWER. Carthamus tincto-
rius.
  SAFFRON. Crocus sativus.
  Saffron of Steel. Red oxyd ofiron.
  SAGAPE'NUM. A gum resin, sup-
posed to be obtained  from  the ferub
persica.
  SAGE.   Salvia officinalis.
  SAGITTAL. Sagittalis; from sagit-
ta, an arroAV. Arrow-shaped.
  Sagittal Suture. The suture which
unites the two  parietal bones.
  SAGITTA'RIA.  The name  of a
genus of plants.
  Sagittaria Alexiphar'maca.  The
malacca plant, cultivated  in the West
Indies for its root.
  Sagittaria  Sagittifolia.    The
common arrow-head.
  SAGO.  The prepared fecula of the
pith of sagus rumphii.
  ST. ANTHONY'S FIRE.  Erysip-
elas.
  St. Charles' Root. Carlo sancto.
  St. Ignatius' Bean. Ignatia amara.
  St. James'Wort.  Seneciojacobaea.
  St. John's Wort.  Hypericum per-
foratum.
  St. Vitus' Dance. Chorea.
  SAL. Salt.  A compound of an acid
with an alkali, earth, or metallic oxyd.
  Sal Absinthii.   Carbonate  of po-
tassa.
  Sal^Egyptiacum. Nitrate of potassa.
   Sal Alkalinus Volatilis. Sesqui-
carbonate of ammonia.
   Sal Ammoniac  Muriate of ammo-
nia.
   Sal Ammoniacum Acetosum.   So-
lution of acetate of ammonia.
   Sal Ammoniacum Martiale. Ferri
ammonio-chloridum.
   Sal Ammoniacus Fixus. Chloride
of calcium.
   Sal Anglicum.  Epsom salts.
   Sal Antimonii.  Tartarized anti-
mony; tartar emetic.
   Sal Argenti.  Nitrate of silver.
  Sal Chalybis.  Sulphate ofiron.
  Sal Digestivus.  Chloride of potas-
sium.
  Sal Digestivus Svlvii.   Acetate of
potash.
  Sal Fontium.  Common salt.
  Sal Glauberi.  Sulphate of soda.
  Sal Martis.  Sulphate ofiron.
  Sal Perlatum. Phosphate of soda.
  Sal Prunellje.  Nitrate of potassa,
cast into flat cakes or round balls.
  Sal Saturni. Acetate of lead.
  Sal Succini.   Succinic acid.
  Sal Tartari.   Tartaric  acid.
  SALAAM CONVULSION.  Con-
vulsions attended  with bowings of the
head.
  SALICA'RIA.  Lithrum salicaria.
  SALICOR'NIA.   The  name of a
genus of  plants.
  Salicornia Europjea.  The jointed
glasswort
  SALIFPABLE.  Capable of com-
bining with an acid to form a salt.
  SALINE.  Salinus; from sal, salt.
Containing, or of  the nature of, a salt.
  SALINUCA. Valeriana  celtica.
  SALI'VA.   Sialon;  spittle.  The
fluid secreted  by the parotid, sub-max-
illary, and sublingual glands. It is ino-
dorous, transparent, insipid, and slight-
ly viscid.   Its use is to lubricate the
mouth, mix with the  alimentary bolus,
and assist in  the process of digestion.
From fourteen to twenty ounces are se-
creted  every  twenty-four  hours.   Its
chemical constituents,  according   to 
              SAL                6!

Berzelius, are, water, 992.2; a particu-
lar animal  matter,  soluble in water,
and insoluble in alcohol,  2.9;  mucus,
1.4;  chlorides of  potassium  and so-
dium, 1.7;  lactate of soda and animal
matter, 0.9; soda, 0.2. In certain states
of the general health, the  acetic, lactic,
oxalic, muriatic  and uric  acids  have
been detected in it, but  it is  not im-
probable  that  these  acids may  have
been derived from the mucous secre-
tions of the  mouth which  are  always
more or less abundantly mixed with it.
Donne, however, has detected acid in
the saliva of persons affected with gas-
tritis.
  Saliva,  Characteristics of The.
See Fluids  of the Mouth, character-
istics of.
  SALIVARY.   Of, or belonging to,
the saliva.
  Salivary Calculus.   Odontolithos;
odontia incrustans; tartar of the teeth.
Earthy  concretions  found  upon the
teeth and in the mouths of the salivary
ducts.   They sometimes  accumulate
upon the teeth in very large quantities,
giving to the  mouth an exceedingly
disagreeable appearance,  and,  some-
times,  imparting to the  breath an al-
most insufferably offensive odor.   Sali-
vary calculus is composed,  principally,
of phosphate of lime and animal mat-
ter, differing, however, in their relative
proportions, according as it is  hard or
soft, and hence scarcely any two analy-
ses furnish the same results.   Accord-
ing to  Mr. Peps, fifty parts yields,
  Phosphate of lime,          35.00
  Fibrina, or cartilage,          9.00
  Animal fat, or oil,            3.00
  Loss,                       3.00

                             50.00
  In an analysis made by Berzelius, one
hundred parts was found  to contain,
  Phosphate of lime and mag-
    nesia,                    79.00
  Sahvary mucus and salivine, 13.50
  Animal matter,              7.50

                            100.00
        55*
                 SAL

  The following is the  result of an
analysis made by Dr. DwineUe, a den-
tist of Cazenovia, New  York:
  Phosphate of lime,          60.00
  Carbonate of lime,           14.00
  Animal matter and mucus,   16.00
  Water and loss,             10.00

                            100.00
  Hard, dry tartar contains more earthy
and less animal matter, than soft humid
tartar, and hence the  differences in the
result of different analyses.
  With  regard  to  the  source  from
whence  salivary calculus is  derived,
there exists  some diversity of opinion.
  M. Mandl says, it is composed of in-
fusoria, and, that they are thickly dis-
tributed throughout its  substance, has
been satisfactorily proven, but it  is not
wholly composed of them, and  such as
are found in it, evidently have their ori-
gin in the  mucous secretions of  the
mouth which mixes  with it during its
deposition.  Hence, they are  more or
less numerous, as the tartar is hard or
soft, or in proportion to  the quantity of
mucus mixed with it*   English and
American writers on dental surgery con-
cur in the belief that salivary calculus
is a deposit  from the saliva.  Jourdain
believes it is secreted by certain glands
scattered over  the  dental periosteum.
Gariot contends  that it comes from the
gums, and  Serres  claims to have dis-
covered upon the mucous  membrane of
this structure, glands, the peculiar func-
tion of which, is to secrete  this sub-
stance, but the absurdity of this theory
has been fully exposed by M. Delabarre,
who says, in relation to  it, the small
glands may, perhaps,  belong  to the
mucous or salivary  system, for the  sa-
liva, as all physiologists know, is not
alone furnished by the parotid  glands,
but by a great number of calculus ken-

  * Dr. W. H. DwineUe has given a minute
description of tbe microscopic appearance of
the infusoria found in salivary  calculus, in the
first number ofthe fifth volume ofthe Ameri-
can Journal of Dental Science.
13 
SAL                654                SAL
nels, that are very  observable  in rumi-
nating animals, scattered  over various
parts of the mucous membrane of the
mouth. I, therefore, am of the opinion,
that this is a gratuitous supposition on
the part of this author, because children
of a very early age are not affected with
tartar, and it is on them that he believes
that he has discovered the glands which
produce it.  Did these really exist, they
would augment in size, instead of de-
creasing,  as age  advanced, and  their
functions becoming more  and  more es-
tablished, they would attain to a very
large size in old persons, and those most
subject to  tartar.   Noav, there is noth-
ing to lead us to suppose their existence
in these individuals.  Therefore, to sup-
pose that organs that have no functions
may be very perceptible, which, Avhen
they have them, cannot be discovered,
is contrary to sound philosophy.  Were
we to do so in this case, the dental gbnds
of the author, Avould be entirely different
from aU others, which are the more de-
cided, the more they are in action.  In-
admissible, then, as this  supposition is,
I do not believe in  the existence of these
glands, which I have patiently searched
for, but in vain."
   So  conclusively  has  M. Delabarre
refuted the opinion of Serres, that no
farther argument or proof is necessary
to prove  its  utter absurdity,  for  it is
evident that he has mistaken  the folli-
cles of the mucous membrane covering
the gums for glands.
   But, while M. Delabarre has exposed
one error in regard to the origin of this
substance, the author is of opinion that
he has fallen into another equally great.
He believes  that it  originates from an
exhalation of the mucous membrane of
the mouth.   Alluding to  what M. Du-
puy,  professor of  the veterinary estab-
lishment at Alfont, says, concerning the
formation of tubercular matter of a cal-
careous nature in soft tissues, where he
supposes there is no other fluid but mu-
cous, he tells us that it is 'tin  the same
manner that the exhalents of the gums
»
furnish tartar," and that "they give out
more or less of it according as the gums
are in a  healthy  or  inflamed state."
When diseased, he says, "they are cov-
ered with  a  whitish layer, Avhich is at
first soft," but gradually collecting upon
the teeth,  it  afterwards becomes hard;
and according to this  author, it is only
when the  gums are inflamed that it is
produced.
  It is in this way  that he aecounts for
its accumulation on the teeth of one side
of the mouth, while those of the other
have none of it on them, though they
are all bathed alike in  the saliva.  The
concretions of these terreous salts in the
salivary conduits, he  accounts for, by
supposing them to be furnished by the
exhalents  of the mucous  membrane
which lines them, and not by the fluid
they convey to the mouth.
  Analogous formations in other parts,
he accounts for in the same Avay.  The
calculous  incrustations  found upon a
sound, on its removal,  after having re-
mained in the bladder for a long time,
and from  subjects in whom no previous
disposition to gravel had existed,  he
supposes to  be the result of the irrita-
tion produced by the instrument, on the
mucous membrane of  this viscus.  In
replying to this part of his argument in
support of his theory that salivary cal-
culus is furnished  by the exhalents of
the mucous membrane of the mouth,
Mr. Bell  says, "The  previous non-ex-
istence of calculus in  the bladder can-
not be deemed any proof that the ele-
ments of  its composition had not been
held in solution in the urine, requiring
only the occurrence of any  extraneous
body in the bladder to serve as a nucleus
for its deposition.  This view  of the
subject is amply confirmed by the fact,
that depositions, both of  the lithic salts
and of the triple phosphate, the bases of
the usual varieties of urinary calculi,
are  constantly formed from the urine
after its expulsion from the bladder."
   It is  unfortunate for  M. Delabarre,
that he drew this  analogy,  for Mr. Bell 
SAL               655              SAL
has shoAvn  it to be conclusive against
the theory which he intended to estab-
lish by  it,  "and," says  this author,
"that salivary calculus, or tartar of the
mouth, is deposited in a similar manner
from the sahva, is, Ave think, directly
proved,  or at  least, supported  by the
highest degree of  probability by every
circumstance connected Avith its forma-
tion."   The fact, too, that it is always
found in largest quantity  on the  teeth
opposite the mouths of  the salivary
ducts, is a strong  argument of itself, in
favor of the theory that it is a salivary
production; but, still more conclusive, is
the fact of its formation Avithin the very
channels themselves  of these conduits.
   The theory of M. Delabarre is insuf-
ficient for the explanation of its deposi-
tion here, for, it is not at all presuma-
ble, that an inflammation would seize
upon a  single  point  of the mucous
membrane  of one of  these passages,
without affecting it to a considerable ex-
tent.  The most  probable cause  of its
formation in these conduits, therefore,
appears to me, to be the accidental pre-
cipitation of a particle of it from the sa-
liva on its passage through them, Avhich,
becoming entangled in the mucus, is
detained, and afterwards  serves as  a
nucleus for its deposition.
   Of the existence of the elements of
its composition in the  saliva there can
be no question.   Chemical  analyses of
this fluid,  direct  from the  glands that
secrete it, place aU doubt upon the sub-
ject  at  rest.   Turner,  in enumerating
its chemical  constituents, mentions as
one, bone earth,* and, Tiedemann, Gme-
lin,f and Scherer,J have detected phos-
phate of hme, as has  also Enderlin§
and other chemists who  have analysed
this fluid.   Thus it  is  seen that the
chief earthy constituent  which  enters
into the formation of this substance  is
contained in  the saliva.  It may  also

   * Turner's Chemistry, p. 756.
   t Muller's Physiology, vol. 1, p. 561.
   X French Lancet, April, 1845.
   § Liebig, Annalen, 1844, pp. 3 and 4.
exist in solution in the mucous fluid of
the mouth.
  The circumstance that the deposition
of this substance on the teeth is ahvays
accompanied  by inflammation of the
gums, M. Delabarre seems to rely upon
as conclusive in favor of the correctness
of his views of the manner of its forma-
tion.   But here again, he is equally un-
fortunate.  The inflammation of Avhich
he  speaks, is  the effect, and  not the
cause, as he supposes, of its deposition.
The soft white layer of tartar, of which
he  makes mention, as observable on the
gums, Avhen diseased, is nothing more
than thick, hardened mucus.   The au-
thor has repeatedly examined it, and is
therefore, well assured of the correct-
ness of the assertion.
   The deposition of tartar on the teeth
of  one side of the mouth, Avithout a
similar deposit on  the corresponding
teeth of the opposite  side, does not fur- .
nish  the least  shadow of  evidence in
support of  the doctrine  that this sub-
stance is an  exhalation from the san-
guineous capillaries ofthe mucous mem-
brane of the gums.  The mastication of
food, Avith most  persons, is principally
performed by the teeth on one side of
 the mouth, and, with the fact that this
function  prevents,   in a considerable
degree,  the  accumulation  of tartar on
 the  organs   immediately   concerned,
 every dental practitioner  is  familiar.
 Hence, its frequent collection on  the
 teeth  of one  side, and not on those of
 the other.  That this is so, is suscepti-
 ble of positive  proof.   If the tartar
 from the teeth of a person,  in whose
 mouth it had only collected on those of
 one side  be removed, and  mastication
 be afterwards  altogether performed on
 these, it will not re-accumulate on them,
 and  if the requisite  attention to  the
 cleanliness of the teeth of the other side
 be not properly observed, it will soon col-
 lect on them, although they had before
 remained freefrom it. We have frequent-
 ly requested our patients to do this, and
 such  has almost invariably been the re- 
SAL
656
SAL
 suit, which  would not have been the
 case, were  its formation dependent on
 inflammation ofthe gums.
   Again, it often happens that disease
 of a severe character, is  excited in the
 gums,  by the use of mercurial medi-
 cines and other  causes,  and yet, but
 a small quantity  of tartar collects  on
 the teeth; but,  that  any  condition  of
 the general system, or  of the mouth,
 tending to increase the  viscidity of the
 fluids of this cavity, promotes its forma-
 tion, is undeniable.  There are, how-
 ever, some  temperaments  much more
 favorable  to its production than  others,
 and, it is a fact, equally well establish-
 ed, that the mucous membrane of those
 in  whose mouths it  accumulates  in
 largest quantity, are the most irritable,
 and their buccal fluids  most  viscid.
 Again, if it were  deposited by the mu-
 cous fluids of the mouth, it would col-
 lect  in largest quantities on those teeth
 which are least  abundantly bathed  in
 the saliva, as for example, the anterior
 surfaces ofthe upper incisores and cus-
 pidati, while those  opposite  to the
 mouths of the ducts,  which  discharge
 this  fluid, would be less liable to depos-
 its of tartar than any of the other teeth.
   From all the light, therefore, that has
 been thrown upon this subject, the con-
 clusion that this substance is a salivary
 deposit, to us appears irresistible, and,
 the following seems to be the manner of
 its formation.                         I
  It is precipitated from the saliva, as
 this  fluid  enters the mouth, on the sur-
 faces of the teeth,  opposite the openings
 into  the ducts, from which it is poured.
 To these,  its  particles become aggluti-
 nated by a mucus that is always found,
in greater or less quantity, upon them.
 Particle after particle is  afterwards de-
 posited, until it sometimes accumulates
 in such quantities that  nearly  all the
 teeth are  almost  entirely enveloped in
 it.   It is  always, however,  found in
greatest abundance  on the outer surfa- J
ces of the superior molares, and the
inner surfaces of  the inferior incisores,
 and  it is opposite to these that  the
 mouths ofthe salivary ducts open.

 Effects of Salivary Calculus upon the
   Teeth,  Gums, and Alveolar Processes.
   The presence of salivary calculus up-
 on the teeth, is  always productive of
 injury, though sometimes more so than
 others.   An altered  condition  of  the
 fluids ofthe mouth, diseased gums, and
 not unfrequently the  gradual destruc-
 tion of the alveolar processes, and  the
 loosening  and loss of the  teeth,  are
 among the  consequences  that  result
 from it.   But besides  these, other ef-
 fects are  sometimes produced, among
 which  may  be  enumerated: tumors,
 and spongy excrescences of the gums;
 necrosis and exfoliation of the alveolar
 processes, and portions of the maxillary
 bones, hemorrhages of the gums, ano-
 rexia  and derangement of the  whole
 digestive apparatus; foul breath, catarrh,
 cough, diarrhea,  diseases  of various
 kinds in the maxillary antra and nose,
 pain in the ear, head-ache, melancholy,
 hypochondriasis, &c.   The  character
 of the effects,  hoAvever, both  local and
 constitutional, produced by it, depends
 upon the  quantity and  consistence of
 the  tartar, and the temperament and
 state of the general health of the indi-
 vidual, and the  two  former of  these,
 are determined by the  two  latter, and
 the attention that is paid  to the cleanli-
 ness of the teeth.  If this last be pro-
 perly attended to, salivary calculus,  no
 matter how great the constitutional ten-
 dency to  its   production may be, will
 not collect upon the teeth.  The impor-
 tance, therefore, of its  constant observ-
 ance,  cannot  be too strongly impress-
 ed upon the   mind, and especially of
 those in whom there exists tendency to
its deposition.
  When it is permitted to accumulate
 for any great length of time,  the gums
 become so morbidly  sensitive, that a
tooth-brush cannot be used,  without
producing  great  pain; consequently,
the cleanhness of the mouth  is  not at- 
SAL
657
SAL
 tempted,  and  thus, no means being
 taken to prevent its formation, it  accu-
 mulates with increased  rapidity, until
 the teeth,  one after another, and in
 quick succession, fall victims to its des-
 olating ravages.
   It sometimes not  only undermines
 the soundest constitutions, by occasion-
 ing discharges of fetid matter from the
 gums, and corrupting the juices of the
 mouth, but also renders  the breath ex-
 ceedingly  unpleasant   and  offensive.
 So nauseating and disagreeable  is the
 odor which some descriptions of tartar
 exhale, that the atmosphere  of a whole
 room is sometimes contaminated by  it
 in a feAV minutes.

 Removal of Salivary  Calculus from the
               Teeth.
   For the removal of tartar from the
 teeth, a variety of instruments are ne-
 cessary, which should be so construct-
 ed, that they may easily he  applied to
 all of the teeth to Avhich this substance
 adheres,and every dentist should be sup-
 plied with a sufficient quantity to en-
 able him to perform the  operation in
 the most perfect manner, for,  if any
 particles be suffered  to remain, they
 will irritate the gums, if  in contact
 Avith them, and serve as nuclei for its
 immediate reaccumulation.
   The adhesion of tartar to the teeth is
 sometimes  so  great,  that considerable
 force is required for  its  removal, even
 when the sharpest and  best tempered
 instruments are employed.  Considera-
 ble tact is ahvays necessary to  perform
 the operation   in  a  skilful  manner;
 more than most persons, from the sim-
 plicity of the  operation,  imagine.  It
 may be removed from  the  outer  and
 inner  surfaces of the  teeth  without
 much difficulty, but the  removal of it
from between  them,  is  more  trouble-
some, and can  only be  affected by
means  of very thin sharp pointed in-
struments.
  When it has accumulated in large
quantities, it should not all be taken away
at one time.  It should be removed first
from between  the  edges of the  gums
and the necks of the teeth, affording
opportunity between the respective sit-
tings of the patient, for the gums to
heal, and for any of the teeth,  that are
loosened, to become firm.   It would
also be advisable to wash the mouth,
four or five times a day, with some as-
tringent or detergent  lotion, such  as
dilut. tinct. myrrh and nut-galls.  More
particular  directions  on this  subject
have been  given in the  articles on the
Diseases ofthe Gums and Alveolar Pro-
cesses, which see.
   Solvents, such as the  mineral  acids,
especially  diluted muriatic,  are  some-
times  employed for its removal, and
though the  use of chemical agents, of
every description, for this purpose, is
condemned by almost every Avriter on
dental surgery, they are  still, occasion-
ally, resorted to.  It should be recollect-
ed, however, that  any  chemical agent
capable of decomposing  salivary calcu-
lus, will act, with equal facility, upon
the teeth.
   During the operation for the removal
of this substance, the  gums not unfre-
quently bleed very freely, and  to obvi-
ate the inconvenience resulting  from it,
it is better to remove it from the  lower
teeth first.   It often happens, too, that
the front teeth of the inferior maxillary
have become so much loosened as to ren-
der necessary the greatest care, to pre-
vent removing them in the operation.
   Salivary Calculus, Characteris-
tics of.  It has already been remarked
that salivary calculus is very variable
in its density, and its color and quantity
on the teeth of different individuals, is
equally so, and  these differences fur-
nish  diagnostics valuable both to the
general and dental practitioner.   They
are less equivocal than the appearances
of any of the other parts of the  mouth.
The relative proportions  of the  constit-
uents of tartar, as has been before stat-
ed, vary, according as it is hard  or soft,
or as the temperament of the persons 
SAL               658                SAL
from whose mouth it is taken, is favor-
able or unfavorable to health, and hence
it is, that no two analyses of it give the
same result.
  Black, dry tartar, found only on the
necks of the teeth of persons of  good
constitutions,  is  never  deposited  in
large quantity, and is dissolved with dif-
ficulty in muriatic acid, while the dry,
yellow tartar, as  is remarked by Dela-
barre, and found on the teeth of bilious
persons, dissolves  more readily in it;
but the soft, white tartar, found on the
teeth of individuals of mucous temper-
aments, he tells us, "is scarcely at all,
soluble  in the acids,"  but is  readily
dissolved in  the alkalies.    Both  the
chemical constituents and physical char-
acteristics of  this  substance,' are  ex-
ceedingly variable.   It  is, sometimes,
almost wholly composed of calcareous
ingredients; at other times, these  con-
stitute but one-half, or little more  than
one-half of its substance—the balance
being made up of animal matter.  Nor
is its color  more  uniform.   Sometimes
it is black, at other times, it is of a dark,
pale, or yellowish brown, and in some
instances it is nearly white.  There is
also  a difference  in its density.  In the
mouths of soms persons it has a solidity
of texture nearly  equal to that  of the
teeth  themselves, while  in  those  of
others,  it is so  soft that it can, with
ease,  be scraped from  the teeth with
the thumb or finger nail.  The black
kind is the hardest, the white the soft-
est, and its density is increased or di-
minished as  it approaches  the  one or
the other of these colors.
  Sahvary calculus collects in but  very
small quantities on the teeth of persons
possessed of the most perfect  constitu-
tions, and, even on these it is seldom
found, except on the inner surfaces of
the lower incisores next the gums.  It
is then black, or of a dark brown; very
dry, and almost as hard as the teeth, to
which it adheres with great tenacity.
  It rarely happens that any unpleasant
effects arise from the presence  of this
kind of tartar upon the teeth.  The gen-
eral health is never affected  by it, and
the only local injury that results from it,
is, a slight turgidity of the edges ofthe
gums in immediate contact with if.
  The indications, therefore, of this de-
scription of tartar  are favorable, both
with regard to the teeth, gums and or-
ganism generally.    The  teeth upon
which it  is found  are of an  excellent
quality and rarely affected with caries.
They are possessed of those character-
istics which have been  represented as
belonging to the best kind, and teeth of
this description  are only found among
persons of good innate constitutions.
  There is another kind of black tartar,
differing from that which has just been
described in  many particulars.  It  is
found in the  mouths of those,  who,
though their innate constitutions were
good, have, nevertheless, had their phy-
sical powers much enervated by priva-
tion  of the  necessary comforts of life,
or disease, or intemperance and debau-
chery, and most frequently by the last.
It is found  in large  quantities on the
teeth opposite the mouths ofthe salivary
ducts;  it  is exceedingly hard, and is
agglutinated so firmly to the organs in-
crusted in it, that it is  with the greatest
difficulty that it can be removed from
them; it is very black;  has a rough
and uneven surface;  and  is  covered
with a glairy, viscid, and almost insuf-
ferably offensive mucus.
  The presence of this kind of salivary
calculus is attended with very hurtful
consequences, not only to  the  gums,
alveolar processes and teeth, but also to
the general health.  It causes the gums
to inflame, swell, suppurate and recede
from the teeth—the alveoli to waste,
and the teeth to  loosen, and frequently
to drop out.   The secretions of the
mouth are also vitiated by it, and there-
by rendered unfit to be  taken  into the
stomach.  Hence, as long as it is per-
mitted to remain on the  teeth, neither
the skill of the physician, nor the best
regulated regimen,  though  they may 
SAL
659
SAL
 afford partial and temporary relief, will
 fuUy restore to  the  system its healthy
 functions.
   As this kind of tartar is seldom if ever
 met with except among persons who
 have  had excellent  constitutions, the
 teeth on which it is deposited are gener-
 aUy sound, and, in this condition, they
 are often caused, by the effects which
 it produces upon the gums and alveolar
 processes,  to   loosen  and  drop out.
 Whole sets of  the  best   constituted
 teeth, are in this Avay frequently destroy-
 ed.
   The dark brown tartar is not as hard
 as either of the descriptions of black.
 It sometimes collects in  tolerably  large
 quantities on the lower front teeth, and
 on the first and second superior molares;
 it is also often  found  on all the teeth,
 though not in as great abundance  as on
 these.  It does not adhere to the teeth
 with as much tenacity as either of the
 preceding kinds, and can,  therefore, be
 more easily detached from them.   It
 exhales a more  fetid odor than the first,
 but is less offensive than the second.
   The persons most subject to this kind
 of tartar, are of mixed temperaments—
 the sanguineous, however,  almost  al-
 ways predominating.   They may, per-
 haps, be denominated sanguino-serous
 andbUious. Their physical organization,
 though not the strongest and most per-
 fect, may,  nevertheless, be  considered
 very good.   But, being more suscepti-
 ble to morbid impressions, their general
 health is less uniform, and more  liable
 to impairment than those possessed  of
 the most perfect constitutions.
  The effects arising from  accumula-
 tions of this description of  salivary cal-
 culus  on the teeth, both local and con-
 stitutional,  are  less hurtful  than that
 last noticed, but like that, it  causes the
 gums to inflame, swell, suppurate, and
to retire from and expose the necks of
the teeth, the alveoli to waste, the teeth
to loosen  and sometimes to drop out.
A vitiated  state of the juices  of the
mouth, also  results from its presence,
or rather from the effects which it pro-
duces upon the gums and alveolar pro-
cesses.
   Salivary calculus that is of a pale or
yellow-brown color, is of a much softer
consistence than  that which is  dark,
and is seldom found upon the teeth of
persons, except those of bilious temper-
aments, or those  in whom this disposi-
tion predominates.   It has a rough, and
for the most part, a  dry  surface ; it is
found in large quantities on the teeth op-
posite the mouths of the salivary  ducts,
and it  sometimes happens that every
tooth in the  mouth is completely in-
crusted with  it.   It contains less of the
earthy salts and more of the fibrina and
animal  fat than that of any of the fore-
going descriptions, and from the  quan-
tity of vitiated mucus in it and adher-
ing to it,  has an  exceedingly offensive
smell.   It is, sometimes,  though not
always, so soft that it can be crumbled
between the thumb and finger.
   Inflammation,  turgescence  and sup-
puration of the gums, inflammation of
the alveolo-dental periosteum, the des-
truction of the sockets and loss of the
teeth, and an altered condition  of the
fluids  of  the mouth, are among the
local effects  that arise from the long-
continued presence of large collections
of  this kind of tartar on the teeth. The
constitutional effects are not  much less
pernicious.   Indigestion and general de-
rangement of all  the assimilative func-
tions, are among  the most common.  If
the deposition be not  large, inflamma-
tion and  sponginess of such parts of
the gums as  are  in  immediate contact
with it, and fetid  breath, are the prin-
cipal, of the  unpleasant, consequences
that are produced by it.
   While tartar rarely collects in very
large   quantities,  and though  most
abundant  on  the  outer surfaces of the
first and   second  superior   molares,
and the inner  surfaces of the lower
incisores,  it is nevertheless frequently
found on  all the  teeth.    Its  calca-
reous ingredients are less  abundant 
SAL
660
SAL
than those of any of the preceding de-
scriptions.  Fibrina, animal fat, and mu-
cus, constitute considerably more than
one-half its substance.   It is very soft,
seldom exceeding in consistence com-
mon cheese curd, and to which in ap-
pearance, it  bears  a considerable re-
semblance.   Although  it  exerts  but
little  mechanical irritation  upon  the
gums, it,  notwithstanding,  from its
acrid  qualities,  keeps  up  a constant
morbid excitement in them. Its effects,
however, upon  the  teeth, are  by far
more  deleterious than any other descrip-
tion of salivary  calculus.  It corrodes
their  enamels, and causes rapid  decay
of the organs. The fluids of the mouth
are also vitiated by it.
  It is only upon the teeth of persons
of mucous dispositions, or those who
have suffered from diseases of the mu-
cous  membranes, or those in whom
these  have been more or  less involved,
that this  kind of tartar accumulates.
  There is one other kind of tartar that
is  described  by  dental  writers.  It,
however, as we have on another  occa-
sion said, is of a dark green color, and
is seen more frequently on the anterior
surfaces of the upper teeth occupying
the front part of the mouth, than on
any of the others.   Its resemblance is
more  that  of a  stain on the  enamel
than salivary calculus.  Children and
young persons are more subject to it
than  adults, though it is occasionally
observed on the teeth of the latter. It
is exceedingly acrid, and has the  effect
of decomposing the enamel;  the mar-
gins of  the  gums  around the  teeth
having it on  them, are  inflamed, and
the sanguineous capillaries of  their
whole substance appear to be distended
and more than ordinarily languid.
  This  kind  of  discoloration of  the
enamel is indicative of an irritable con-
dition  of the  mucous membranes and
viscidity  of the  fluids of the mouth.
Sour  eructations, vomitings, diarrhea
and dysentery are not unfrequent with
those  whose teeth are thus affected.    '
   SALIVATION.   Salivatw; from
saliva, the spittle.  A preternatural se-
cretion of saliva, occasioned either by
the use of stimulating masticatories, or
some cause which acts upon the Avhole
economy.
   Salivation,  Mercurial.   Saliva-
tion resulting from the use of mercury.
   SALIX.  The name of a genus of
plants.
   Salix Alba.  Salix fragilis.
   Salix   Frag'ilis.    The common
crack wtilow.
   Salix  Latifo'lia. The broad-leaved
willow.
   Salix  Ca'prea.  The great round-
leaved willow.
   SAL'MO.  The name of a genus of
fishes. The salmon.
   SALPIANS.   The  order of  tuni-
cated  mollusks which float in the sea.
   SALPIN'GO-PHARYNGE'US. A
bundle of muscular fibres which assists
in dilating the mouth of  the eustachian
tube.
   SALPINX.  A tube.
   SALSO'LA.   The name of a genus
of plants.
   Salsola Kali.  Prickly saltwort. A
plant which produces the alkahne salt
called barilla.
  SALT.  Sal.
  Salt, Common.  Muriate of soda.
  SALTPETRE.  Nitrate of potassa.
   SALTWORT.  Salsola kali.
  SALUBRI'OUS. Salubritas.  Salu-
tary ;  healthy.
  SALU'BRITY. From salus, health.
Any thing which contributes to health.
   SALUTARY.  Favorable to health.
   SALVATEL'LA.  A vein situated
on the back of the  hand near its inner
margin.
   SALVE.  An ointment.
   SALVIA.  The name of a genus of
plants.  Sage.
   Salvia Hortensis Minor.    The
small  sage, or sage of virtue.
   Salvia Lyrata.  Cancer weed.
   Salvia Officinalis.   The  garden
sage. 
SAN               661                SAP
  Salvia Scla'rea. The garden clary.
  SAMBU'CUS. The name of a ge-
nus of plants.
  Sambucus  Eb'ulus.   Dwarf-elder,
or danewort.
  Sambucus  Nigra.    Sambucus vul-
garis; sambucus arborea. The elder tree.
° SAMI TERRA. Samian earth.  An
argillaceous earth found in Samos.
  SANABILIS.  Sanabile.  Curable.
  SANATIO.   Curation.
  SANATIVE.  From sano, to cure.
Curative.
  SAN'DARACH.  Sandaracha; gum
sandarach.   An  inodorous gum-resin.
  Sandarach Grjecorum.   Protosul-
phuret of arsenic.
  SANDERS, RED.  Pterocarpussan-
talinus.
  SANGUIFICATION.  Sanguifica-
tio; from sanguk, blood, and facio, to
make.  That function of the body by
which the chyle  is changed into blood.
Blood-making.
  SANGUIFLUX'US.  Hemorrhage.
  SANGUINA'LIS.   Knot-grass.
  SANGUINARIA.  The name of a
genus of plants.
  Sanguinaria Canadensis.   Blood-
root. Puccoon.
  SANGUINE.  Sanguineous.  Relat-
ing to, or containing, blood.
  SANGUIN'EOUS.   Sanguine.   In
Physiobgy, a temperament.
  SANGUINIS  MISSIO.  Blood-let-
ting.
  SANGUIN'OLENT.  Tinged with,
or of the color of, blood. Bloody.
  SANGUIS.  Blood.
  Sanguis Draconis.  Dragon's-blood.
  SANGUISOR'BA.   The name of a
genus of plants.
  Sanguisorba Officina'lis.    The
Italian pimpernel.
  SANGUISU'GA.   The leech.
  SANGUISUGUM.   Congestion of
blood in the heart.
  SANICULA. The name of a genus
of plants.
  Sanicula Eboracen'sis.   Pingui-
cula vulgaris.
        56
  Sanicula Europje'a.  The sanicle.
  SA'NIES. A thin, unhealthy, serous
discharge from a fistula  or ulcer, and
most commonly mixed with blood and
pus.
  SANITARIUM. Sanatorium; from
sanitas, health.  An institution for the
treatment of the  sick.  Also, a place,
selected on account of its  salubrity, for
valetudinarians.
  SAN'ITAS.  Health.
  SANTALUM.  The name of a ge-
nus of plants.
  Santalum Album.  The white and
yellow sanders.
  Santalum Rubrum.   The red San-
ders tree.
  SANTORPNI  FISSU'RiE.   The
fissures at the upper and back part of
the cartilaginous  portion of  the ex-
ternal ear.
  Santorini Tubercula.  The  carti-
laginous projections" on the top of the
arytenoid cartilages, which support the
ligaments of the glottis.
  SAP.   The ascending fluid of plants.
  SAPHE'NA.   From  aa^tjs,  mani-
fest, evident.   A name  given to the
two large veins of the leg.
  SAPID.  Having taste; not insipid.
  SAPIDITY.  Tastefulness; capa-
ble of affecting the organs of taste.
  SAPIN'DUS.  The name of a genus
of plants.  The soap tree.
  Sapindus Sapona'ria.  The name of
the plant which affords the soap-nuts.
  SAPO.  Soap.
  Sapo  Terebin'thinje.    Starkey's
soap, made of dried and warm subcar-
bonate of potash, and oil of turpentine.
  SAPONA'RIA.   The name of a
genus of plants.
  Saponaria Nu'cula. The soap-nut.
  Saponaria Officina'lis. Soapwort;
bruisewort
  SAPO'NEA.  A pectoral medicine,
composed of  an infusion of violets,
sugar and oil of sweet almonds.
  SAPONIFICATION.   Conversion
into soap; the process by which soap
is made. 
SAR
662
SAU
  SAPONULE.  The combination of
volatile or essential oils with different
bases.
  SAPROS.  Foul;  rancid.
  SAPROSTOMUS.  From  aartpos,
foul, of a bad odor, and atoua, mouth.
One who has a foul or offensive breath.
  SARCITES.  Anasarca.
  SAR'CIUM.   Sarcwn.   A caruncle,
or small fleshy excrescence.
  SARCO'CARP.     Sarcocarpium;
from oap|, flesh, and xaprtos, fruit. The
fleshy part of fruits.
  SARCOCE'LE.   From  <xap£, flesh,
and xriXrj, a tumor.  Scirrhus or cancer
of the testicle.
  SARCOCOLLA. From aap%, flesh,
and xoxxa, glue.  Flesh-glue; a semi-
transparent resinous substance, obtained
from an African shrub, the penoza sarco-
cotta, and other  species of penaea.
   SARCO-EPIPLOCE'LE.    From
<jap|, flesh, ertirtxoov,  the epiploon, and
xtiXy, a  tumor.  Epiplocele, compli-
cated with a flesh tumor.
   SARCOLEM'MA.     Sarcolcma;
from oopi, flesh, and xeuua,  a  coat.
The  sheath which envelops the  mus-
cular fibrillae; the myolemma.
   SARCOL'OGY.   Sarcologia;  from
(jop|, flesh, and  koyoj a discourse.  That
part  of anatomy which  treats of the
soft parts.
   SARCO'MA.  From tyapi, flesh.  A
fleshy tumor or excrescence.
   Sarcoma Scroti.  Sarcocele.
   SARCOMATOUS.  Belonging to,
or  exhibiting the characters of, sarco-
ma.
   SARCOM'PHALUS.    From aapl,
 flesh, and oufyaxos, the navel. A fleshy
 tumor about the navel.
   SARCOPHAGUS.  Flesh-devour-
ing; flesh-destroying.    That which
 eats flesh, or destroys excrescences.
   SARCOPHYI'A.  A  fleshy  tumor
 or excrescence.
   SARCOPTES.   The name  of a
 genus of very small insects.
   Sarcoptes Scabiei. Sarcoptes horn-
 ink.  The itch-tick.
  SARCO'SIS.    The formation of
flesh.   Also, a fleshy tumor.
  SARCOSTO'SIS.  Osteo-sarcoma.
  SARCOUS.   Of,  or belonging to,
flesh; fleshy.
  SARDONIC LAUGH.   Risus sar-
donicus.
  SARSAPARIL'LA.   The root of
several species of smilax.
  Sarsaparilla, False. Aralia nudi-
caulis.
  Sarsaparilla German'ica.  Carex
hirta.
  SARTO'RIUS.  From sartor, a tai-
lor, because it  is used in crossing the
legs.  A slender muscle situated at the
anterior part of the thigh.
  SARX.  Flesh.
  SARZA.  SarsapariUa.
  SAS'SAFRAS.  Laurus sassafras.
  Sassafras,Swamp. Magnoliaglauca.
  SAT'ELLITE VEINS.  The veins
which accompany  the  arteries are so
called..
  SATHE.   The penis.
  SATI'ETY.  Satietas.   Loathing,
from excess of gratification.
  SATURATION.  Saturatio; from
satk, enough.  In Chemistry and Phar-
macy, the union or impregnation of one
body  with another, until the receiving
body can contain no more.
  SATUREIA. The name of a genus
of plants.
  Satureia  Capita'ta.   The  ciliated
savory.
  Satureia  Horten'sis. Satureia sati-
va. The summer savory.
  SATUR'NUS.  Lead.
  SATYRIASIS.   From  aatvpos, a
satyr, because  the  satyrs are  said  to
have  been greatly addicted to  venery.
Irresistible desire in men for coition.
  SAUER-KRAUT.  A culinary pre-
paration,  consisting  of cabbage pre-
served in brine.
  SAUNDERS, EDWIN.  Advice on
the Care of the Teeth, by.  London,
1837.  This work contains some very
excellent rules for the management  of
the teeth.  Dr. Saunders is also author 
SCA
663
SCA
 of a  work,  entitled the Teeth a Test
 of Age,  considered with reference  to
 the  Factory Children;  addressed  to
 the members of both Houses of Parlia-
 ment. Besides the above, he is author
 of a series of Lectures on the Diseases
 and Operations  ofthe Teeth, published
 in the London Forceps.
   SAUNDERS.   White and yellow
 sanders.
   Saunders, Red.  Red sanders.
   SAURIA.  Saurians; from  aavpa,
 a lizard.   An order  of reptiles,  com-
 prehending  the lizard, crocodile,  alli-
 gator, 8cc.
   SAVINE. Savina. Juniperus sabina.
   Savine Ointment. Ceratum sabinae.
   SAVORY.   Satureia hortensis. Al-
 so, a  term applied to bodies Avhich have
 an agreeable taste or smell.
   SAW.  In Surgery, an  instrument
 used for dividing bones in amputation,
 and for the removal of exostoses.
   Saw, Hey's.  An instrument invent-
 ed by Mr. Hey, to be used in fractures
 of the cranium.
   SAXIF'RAGA.  The name  of  a
 genus of plants.
   Saxifraga Anglica.   Peucedanum
 silaus.
   Saxifraga Granula'ta.   Saxifraga
 alba.  White saxifrage.
   Saxifraga Rubra.   Spiraea filipen-
 dula.
   Saxifraga Vulgaris. Peucedanum
 silaus.
   SAXIFRAGE  Saxifraga.
   Saxifrage, Burnet.    Pimpinella
 saxifraga.
   Saxifrage, English.    Saxifrage,
 meadow.  Peucedanum silaus.
   Saxifrage, White.      Saxifraga
 granulata.
  SAXIFRAGUS.  Lithontriptic.
  Saxon-Blue. The sulphate of indigo.
  SAXON'ICUS PULVIS.  A powder,
formerly  supposed  to  possess  alexi-
pharmic properties.
  SCAB.    An incrustation formed
over a sore  by  the concretion of the
fluid discharged from it.
   SCA'BIES.  From scabo, to scratch.
 Psm-a.   The  itch.  Four species are
 described by Willan : 1. Scabies papu-
 liformis, consisting  of  an  extensive
 eruption of slightly inflamed,  itching
 vesicles,.resembling papulae, intermixed
 with, and containing a thick yellow pus.
 2. Scabies  lymphatica, Avhich  consists
 of  an  eruption of  intensely   itching
 transparent pustules, on the  wrists,
 backs of the hands, between the fingers,
 on the feet and toes, about the fossa of
 the nates, axillae, hams, and at the bend
 of  the elbows.  3. Scabies purulenta,
 consisting of elevated yellow pustules,
 inflamed around their bases, and which,
 in a short time,  suppurate, break, and
 then ulcerate.  4. Scabies cacheclica,
 exhibits all the appearances, on differ-
 ent parts of the body, of the three fore-
 going.
  SCABIO'SA.  The name of a genus
 of plants.
  Scabiosa Arven'sis.  Field scabious
  Scabiosa Succi'sa.  The  devil's-bit
 scabious.
  SCABIOUS.  The Philadelphia flea-
 bane.
  SCABRi'TIES. Lichen; roughness.
  SCA LA.  A ladder.  An  apparatus
 formerly employed for the reduction of
 dislocations of the humerus.
  Scala Tym'pani.  The superior spi-
 ral cavity of the cochlea of the ear.
  Scala Vestib'uli.  The inferior spi-
 ral cavity of the cochlea.
  SCALD-HEAD.   Porrigo favosa.
  SCALE.  Squama.  In Pathology,
 an opaque  and thickened lamina of the
 cuticle. In Natural History, the small
 laminae on  the surface  of fishes, ser-
 pents, &c.
  Scale, Dry.  Psoriasis.
  SCALY DISEASES.   An order of
 cutaneous diseases in WiUan and Bate-
 man's Arrangement.
  SCA LE'NUS.  Irregular or unequal.
 A muscle situated at the side ofthe neck,
of an irregular triangular shape, divid-
ed into three portions.
  SCALLOP.  Ostrea maxima. 
SCA               664               SCH
  SCALP.  The integuments  cover-
ing the head.
  SCAL'PEL.   Scalpellum;   from
scalpo, I rasp  or  cut.  An instrument
employed in surgical operations and in
dissections for dividing the soft parts.
  SCAL'PRUM.  A raspatory.
  SCAMMO'NIUM.   Scammony; a
resinous  substance,  used as a purga-
tive.
  SCAM'MONY. Convolvulus scam-
monia.
  SCAN'DIX.  The name of a genus
of plants.
  Scandix Cerefo'lium.   The offici-
nal chervil.
  Scandix Odora'ta.  Svveet cicely.
  SCA'PHA.   From axartta, I make
hollow.   The cavity ofthe external ear,
between the helix and anti-helix. Also,
a double-headed roller.
  SCA'PHOID.  Scaphoides;   from
axafyri, a  boat,  and eihos, resemblance.
Boat-like; in Anatomy, applied to sev-
eral parts.
  Scaphoid Fossa.  A  depression or
cavity in the internal ala of the  ptery-
goid process.
  Scaphoid Bone of the Wrist.—
The boat-like bone, os naviculare, ofthe
carpus.
  Scaphoid Bone of the Foot.   A
bone situated at the forepart of the as-
tragalus and inner part  of the foot, the
os naviculare.
  SCA'PHIUM  OCULARE.   The
shell employed for artificial eyes.
  SCAP'ULA.   The shoulder-blade;
an  irregular flat bone, of a triangular
shape, situated at the posterior part of
the shoulder.
  SCAP'ULAR.    Scapularis;  from
scapula, the shoulder-blade. Belonging,
or relating, to the scapula.
  SCAPU'LARY.  A bandage for the
shoulder.
  SCAPULO-HU'MERAL. Pertain-
ing to the scapula and humerus.
  SCA PUS.  In Botany, the stalk, or
scape, which proceeds from the  root
and bears the flowers and fruit.
  SCARDOVI.  Author of a Disserta-
tion on the Teeth.  Argent, 1645.
  SCARF-SKIN.  The epidermis.
  SCARIFICATION.   Scarificatio;
from  axapifaouai, to  make  a  slight
scratch.  A small,  superficial incision,
made with a lancet or scarificator.
  SCARIFICATOR. Scarificatoriwn.
An instrument containing ten or more
lancets, so contrived as to be made to
penetrate  to a greater or less depth, at
the option of the operator, and issue at
once from the  box in  which they are
contained, by means of a spring.
  SCARLATPNA.   From  scarbtto,
(Italian,) a deep red.  The scarlet fever.
There are two varieties of this disease :
1.  Scarlatina  simplex, or scarlatina be-
nigna, which is of a mild character, and,
2.  Scarlatina   anginosa,  or  scarlatina
cynanchica, which  is attended Avith ul-
cerated sore-throat. Scarlatina malig-
na  is regarded as  a stage of the last
mentioned variety.
  SCARLET FEVER.  Scarlatina.
  SCHANGE, J. M. A.  Author of a
Treatise on the Treatment of Irregular-
ity of the Teeth; published, Paris, 1842.
  SCHIERS.   Author of a Disserta-
tion on the Teeth.  Trageot, 1772.
  SCHELHAMMER.   Author of a
Dissertation on the Cure of Tooth-ache,
by Touching, &c. Jena, 1711.
  SCHERBET'.  A  drink  prepared
with sugar and the acid fruits.
  SCHERO'MA.  Dry inflammation
ofthe eye.
  SCHINDYLESIS.  An  immova-
ble articulation.
  SCHMIDT.   Art of Keeping the
Teeth  Good   from Infancy up, by. '
Gotha, 1801.—A Few Words to those
who wish to  keep their teeth in good
order, by.  Dessau and Leyd, 1801.—
Useful Instructions how  to  keep the
Teeth good, by.  Dessau, 1805—The-
ory and Experience on the Teeth, by.
Leipsic, 1807.
  SCHMEIDEL.  Author of a Dis-
sertation on Difficult Dentition.  Erl.,
1751. 
SCL               665                SCO
   SCHNEIDERIAN MEMBRANE.
 The pituitary membrane.
   SCIATIC.  Sciaticus; kchiatic ;—
 from iaxiov, the haunch.  Pertaining to
 the ischium.
   Sciatic Artery. The ischiadic ar-
 tery.
   Sciatic Nerve.  The sacro-sciatic
 nerve.
   Sciatic Notch.  A large notch at
 the posterior edge  of each os innomina-
 tum, but which is converted  into a fo-
 ramen by the sacrum, and sacro-sciatic
 ligament.
   SCIAT'ICA. Neuralgia ofthe sacro-
 sciatic nerve.
   SCIERO'PIA.  From oxupos, shady,
 and u4, the eye.   A defect of vision,
 in which all objects, assume a color
 darker than natural.
   SCIL'LA.  The squill, or sea-onion.
 Also, the name of a genus of plants.
   Scilla Hispanica.  Spanish squill.
   Scilla Marit'ima.   The  officinal
 squill.
   Scilla Nutans.  Bluebells.
   SCIN'CUS.  The Nile lizard.
   SCIRRHOMA.  Scirrhus.
   SCIRRHOUS SARCOMA. A hard,
 smooth, vascular tumor, of a glandular
 structure.
   SCIR'RHUS.  Scirrhoma, scirrhosk;
 from axippos, hard, indurated.  A hard
 tumor, generally  occurring in glandu-
 lar structures,  usuaUy preceding carci-
 noma, and of which it may be regarded
 as the first stage.
   SCIS'SORS.  An instrument, com-
 posed  of  two cutting blades which
 move upon an axis, and are variously
 shaped to suit the  purposes for which
 they are designed.   In Dental Surgery,
 they are used  principally for cutting
 gold.
  SCLA'REA. Salvia sclarea.
  SCLERECTOMIA.  An operation
 which consists in the removal of a por-
tion of the sclerotica to form an  artifi-
cial pupil.
  SCLERE'MUS.  Sckremia.  Indu-
ration of the ceUular tissue.
     56*
   SCLERENCEPHA'LIA.    From
 axXtjpos, hard, and eyxe$aKov, the brain.
 Induration of the brain.
   SCLERPASIS.   Sckroma;   from
 axXypos, hard.  A scirrhous induration,
 or hard tumor.
   SCLERO-. From crx^poj, hard.  A
 prefix, signifying hardness.
   SCLEROPHTHAL'MIA.    From
 axXripos,  hard, and  o$9aXuos,  the eye.
 Pain, swelhng and hardness ofthe eye
 and eyelids.
   SCLERO-SARCOMA.    A  hard
 fleshy tumor, or excrescence.
   SCLEROSIS.  Scleriasis.
   SCLEROTTC.   Sclerotica;   from
 axXripoa, I harden.  The dense, opaque,
 fibrous membrane, situated immediately
 under the conjunctiva,  and invests
 nearly four-fifths of the posterior part
 of the globe of the eye.
   SCLEROTICONYX'IS.  Sclerony-
 xis; from oxXqpos, hard, and mj£is, punc-
 turing.    Perforation  of  the  sclerotic
 coat ofthe eye in the operation for cata-
 ract by depression.
   SCLEROTIS.  Sclerotic.
   SCLEROTITIS.   Inflammation of
 the sclerotic coat of the eye.
   SCLERYS'MA.  Induration.
   SCOBS.   The  filings,  scales,  or
 shavings of any metal or wood.  Also,
 the scoria of any metal.
   SCOLIO'SIS.   From axoxios, crook-
 ed. A distortion of the spine.
  SCOLOPAX.  The name  of a ge-
 nus of birds.
  Scolopax Gallina'go.  The com-
 mon snipe.
  Scolopax Rusti'cola.  The wood-
 cock.
  SCOLOPEN'DRIA.   Spleenwort.
 Miltwaste.
  SCOLOPEN'DRIUM.   The  name
 of a genus of ferns.
  SCOLOPENDRIUM  VuLGARE.  Aspk-
nium  scolopendrium.  Heart's-tongue.
Spleenwort.
  SCO'LYMUS.  The artichoke.
  SCOM'BER.  The name of a genus
of fishes. 
SCR
666
SCR
  Scomber  Scomber. The common
mackerel.
  Scomber  Thynnus.    The  tunny
fish.
  SCOOP.   A  surgical instrument
shaped like a spoon, employed for the
removal of foreign bodies.
  SCOPULA.  A brush.
  SCORACRA'SIA.     Involuntary
evacuation ofthe feces.
  SCORBUTIC.   Scorbuticus.  Be-
longing,  or  relating,  to  scorbutus, or
scurvy.  Affected with scurvy.
  SCORBUTUS.  Scurvy.   A dis-
ease characterized by spongy gums, of-
fensive breath, livid spots  on the skin,
great general debility, and a pale, bloat-
ed countenance.  It constitutes a genus
in the first order of the fifth class of dis-
eases, of Pinel,  and pon-phyra of Dr.
Good.
  SCORIAE.  From axap, excrement.
The dross of purified  metals, or the re-
fuse of any substance.
  SCORODUM.  Garlic.
  SCORPION. From axoprtioa, I punc-
ture.  The name of a genus of articulat-
ed animals, having a  sting at the ex-
tremity ofthe tail; a wound from which
is very poisonous.
  SCORZONE'RA.   The name of a
genus of plants.
  Scorzonera Hispan'ica.   The es-
culent viper's-grass.
  Scorzonera Hu'milis.   The offi-
cinal viper's-grass.   Viper's-grass.—
Goat's-grass.
  SCOTODYN'IA.  Scotomia;  scotas-
ma;  scotosk;  from  axotos, darkness,
and Sivea,  I turn round.  Giddiness,
with impaired vision.
  SCOTO'MIA.  Scotodynia.
  SCOTO'SIS.  Scotodynia.
  SCOTT, J.   Art of Preventing the
Loss of the  Teeth, famitiarly explain-
ed,  by.  London,  1834.—Every Man
his own Dentist, by.   London, 1838.
  SCREW  ELEVATOR,  ELLI-
OT'S.  An instrument  invented  by
Dr. W. H.  Elliot, for removing fangs
of teeth by means of a screw which is
inserted into a universal joint upon the
end of the instrument.   This instru-
ment can be applied with equal facility
to the fangs of the molar, as to those of
the front teeth.
  Screw-Plate.    A  plate of steel,
pierced with two or more rows of holes,
gradually  decreasing in size from the
first to the last, with a  spiral thread
cut on the inner wall of each.  Accom-
panying  this plate  is a  tap, or steel
screw for each hole.  This instrument
is used in the laboratory of the dentist.
  SCROBIC'ULUS.   Diminutive of
scrobs, a ditch.  A small ditch, hollow,
furrow or pit.
  Scrobiculus Cordis.   The  pit of
the stomach.
  SCROFA.  The  sow.
  SCROF'ULA.  From scrofa, a sow,
because hogs were supposed to be af-
fected with it.   A disease characterized
by hard, glandular  tumors in various
parts of the body, but occurring most
commonly in the neck, behind the ears
and under the chin, suppurating slowly,
and discharge, instead of pus, a white,
curdled matter.  It is popularly termed
king's-evil.  Dr. CuUen mentions four
species of the disease:  1.  Scrofula vuU
gark, when it is not complicated with
other disorders,  is external, and perma-
nent.  2. Scrofub  mescnterka,  when
internal, and accompanied with  swell-
ing of the abdomen, pale countenance,
loss of appetite, and peculiar fetor of
the  feces.  3. Scrofula fugax, when it
is seated in the neck, which is the sim-
plest form of the disease.  4.  Scrofula
Americana, when complicated with the
yaws.
  SCROF'ULOUS.  Affected with, or
relating to, scrofula.
  SCROPHULA'RIA.   The name of
a genus of plants.
  Scrophularia  Aquat'ica.   Great
water figwort;  water-betony.
  Scrophularia Minor.   Pilewort
  Scrophularia Nodosa.  Figwort.
  Scrophularia Vulgaris. Common
figwort. 
SCY
667
SEC
  SCROPHULARIA'CE^E. The fig-
wort tribe of dicotyledonous plants.
  SCROPHULOSIS.   Scrofula.
  SCROPHULOSUS.  Scrofulous.
  SCROTAL.  Scrotalk.   Relating
to the scrotum.
  Scrotal Hernia.  A protrusion of
any ofthe contents of the abdomen into
the scrotum.
  SCROTOCE'LE.  Scrotal hernia.
  SCROTUM.   From scorteus, scor-
teum,  made of leather. The integu-
ments which cover the testicles.
  Scrotum Cordis. The pericardium.
  SCRUPLE.  A Aveight of twenty
grains.
  SCURF. Furfura.   Small exfolia-
tions of the cuticle.
  SCURVY.  Scorbutus.
  Scurvy Grass.  Cochlearia officina-
lis.
  Scurvy, Land.   Purpura haemor-
rhagica.
  Scurvy of the Alps.  Pellagra.
  Scurvy of the Gums.   See  Gums,
turgescence and  ulceration  of;  also,
Gums, preternatural prurient groAvth
of.
  SCUTIBRAN'CHIATA. Scutibran-
chians ; from scutum, a shield, and bran-
chia, gills.  An order of hermaphrodite
gastropodous  mollusks which  have
their gtils protected by a shield-shaped
shell.
  SCUTIFORM.  Scutiformk;  from
scutum, a shield, and forma, likeness.
Having  the form or resemblance of a
shield.
  Scutiform  Cartilage.   The thy-
roid cartilage.
  SCUTEL'LA.  A small cup.
  SCUTELLARIA.   The name of a
genus of plants.
  Scutellaria Galericula'ta. The
skuU-cap.
  SCUTILLARIA LaTERIFLo'rA.   Skull-
cap; madweed; hoodAVort.
  Scutellaria Integrifo'lia.  An-
other variety, and very bitter plant.
  SCYBALA.  Hard excrement, dis-
charged in round lumps, or balls.
  SCYPHUS  AUDITORIUS.  The
infundibulum of the cochlea.
  Scyphus Cerebri.  The infundibu-
lum of the brain.
  SCYTHICA RADIX.  Glycyrrhi-
za; liquorice root.
  SEA.  Mare.  A large body of wa-
ter nearly surrounded by land.
  Sea-Belts.  Fucus saccharinus.
  Sea-Green.  Glaucous.
  Sea-Holly. Eryngium maritimum.
  Sea-Moss.   Conferva  rupestris and
corallina officinalis.
  Sea-Oak. Fucus vesiculosus.
  Sea-Onion.  Scilla maritima.
  Sea-Salt.  Sodii chloridum.
  Sea-Sickness.   Nausea marina.
  SEAL, GOLDEN.  Hydrastis can-
adensis.
  Seal, Solomon's. Convallaria poly-
gonatum.
  SEARCHING.  Sounding;  the in-
troduction of a metallic instrument into
the bladder, for  the purpose of ascer-
taining whether there be a stone in it.
  SEBA'CEOUS.  From sebum, suet.
Of the nature of suet, or lard.
  Sebaceous  Glands.   Follicles  or
crypts, of a round or pyriform shape,
situated in the substance of the skin and
opening on its surface by small excre-
tory ducts.  Similar glands are situated
about the  prepuce  and labia  majora
which secrete sebaceous matter of  a
mucous or oily nature.
  SEBESTPNA.  Cordia myxa;  the
smooth-leaved cordia or Assyrian plum.
   SEBIZ, MELCH.   On the Teeth,
by, &c. Argent, 1664.—On the Teeth,
(Disp. iv,) by.  Argent, 1645.
  SECA'LE.  Rye.  Also, the name
of a genus of plants.
   Secale Cerea'le.  The rye plant.
   Secale  Cornutum.  Ergot; spur-
red rye.
  SECONDARY.  From secundus,
the  second.   Something  which acts
subordinately to another, as secondary
symptoms.
  SECRETION.   Secretio; from se-
cernere, to separate.  A function of the 
SEI
668
SEM
 animal economy, consisting in the sepa-
 ration of the materials of the blood at
 the extremities of the arteries, or of the
 vascular secretory system, and Avhich
 differs in each organ, and hence the for-
 mation of bile, urine, saliva, milk, &c.
 There are, according to Magendie, three
 sorts of  secretions,  exliaknt, follicular
 and glandular.
  SECTIO.  A section;  an incision.
  SEC'UNDINS.  All that remains in
 the uterus after birth,  as  the placenta,
 membranes of the ovum, &c.
  SECUN'DUM ARTEM. Accord-
 ing to art
  SEDATIVE. Sedativus; from scdo,
 I settle or assuage.  A medicine which
 depresses the vital forces, and allays ir-
 ritability  and irritation.
  SEDES.  The anus; the feces.
  SEDIMENT.  Sedimentum.  A de-
 posit of  substances held in solution or
 suspension by a liquid.
  SEDUM.   The name of a genus of
 plants.
  Sedum Acre.  Sedum minus. Wall-
 pepper.
  Sedum Majus.  Sempervivum  tec-
 torum.
  Sedum Telephium.  Telephium.
  SEED. Semen.
  Seed-Bud.  The germen.
  Seed-Lobe.  The cotyledon.
  Seed-Vessel.  The pericarp.
  SEE'ING.  Vision.  The percep-
 tion of external objects by  means ofthe
 organs of vision.
  SEG'MENT. Segmentum; from seco,
to cut off.  A part cut off or divided.
  SEGMENTATION.   The  act of
dividing into segments.
  SEGMOID VALVES.  The valves
of the pulmonary artery have been so
called from  their resemblance  to  the
segments of  a circle.
  SEIDLITZ POWDER.  A cooling,
effervescent and aperient draught, con-
sisting of a mixture of tartrate  and bi-
carbonate of  soda and tartaric acid.
  SEISSER.   Dissertation on  Tooth-
Ache, by. Ludg. Bat, 1675.
  SEIRIASIS.  The coup de soleil.
  SELAGO.  The upright club-moss.
  SELENE.  The moon.
  SELENIASIS.  Somnambulism.
  SELERY.  Apium graveolens.
  SELF-HEAL.  Prunella vulgaris.
  SELI'BRA.   Half a pound.
  SELLA TURCICA.  So called from
its supposed  resemblance to  a Turk-
ish saddle.  A cavity in  the sphenoid
bone, bounded anteriorly  and posterior-
ly by the clinoid processes,  containing
the pituitary gland.
  SEMBELLA.  Selibra.
  SEMECARPUS.  The name of a
genus of plants.
  Semecarpus  Anacardium.   The
marking-nut tree.
  SEMEIOL'OGY.  Semeiotics.
  SEMEIOT'IC.   Semeiotkus,  seny
eiosk.  Relating to the signs of disease.
  SEMEIOT'ICS.  Semiology.
  SEMEN.  From sero, to sow.  A
seed.  Also, the fecundating fluid, se-
creted by the testicles, and  carried  by
the vasa deferentia to the vesiculae sem-
inales, to be ejected into the vagina dur-
ing coition.
  Semen Adjowaen. A grateful, aro-
matic seed, the produce  of the amrni
copticum, brought from the East
  Semen Contra.  Artemisia santo-
nica.
  Semen Sanctum.  Artemisia santo-
nica.
  SEMI-.  Half.
  SEMICIRCULAR    CANALS.—
Three canals in the petros  portion of
the temporal bone which  open  into the
vestibule ofthe ear.
  SEMICU'PIUM.   A  half-bath,  or
one that receives only  the  lower ex-
tremities and hips.
  SEMILU'NAR.  From semi,  half,
and luna, the moon. Half moon-shaped.
  Semilunar Cartilages.  The two
falciform fibro-cartilages  between the
condyles ofthe os femoris and the articu-
lar surfaces of the tibia.
  Semilunar Ganglion. A ganglion
ofthe great sympathetic nerve, situated 
SEN
669
SEP
 in the abdomen, and behind the supra-
 renal capsules.
   Semilunar Valves.The three valves
 at the beginning of the  pulmonary ar-
 tery and aorta.
   SEMI-MEMBRANOSUS. A mus-
 cle of the thigh, situated at its posterior
 part
   SEMINAL. Belonging, or relating,
 to seed, or semen.
   SEMINERVOSUS.  Semi-tendino-
 sus.
   SEMIOL'OGY.  Semeiotics; from
 ar;ueiov, a symptom, and xoyos, a dis-
 course.  That part of medicine which
 treats of  the signs or symptoms of dis-
 ease.  Symptomatology.
   SEMI-ORBICULAR.  Semi-orbicu-
 bris. Of the shape of a half globe.
   Semi-Orbicularis Oris.  The or-
 bicularis oris.
   Semi-Spina'lis Colli.   A  muscle
 situated at  the  posterior part  of the
 neck.
   Semi-Spinalis Dorsi.  A muscle of
 the back.
   Semi-Tendinosus. A  muscle situated
 obliquely on the back part of the thigh.
   SEMOLPNA. The large hard grains
 retained in  the  bolting machine  after
 the flour has been passed through it.
   SEMPERVI'VUM.  The name of a
 genus of  plants.
   Sempervivum  Acre.  Sedum acre.
   Sempervivum   Tectorum.    The
 house-leek, or sengreen.
  SENE'CIO.  The name of a genus
 of plants.
  Senecio Jacobjea. St. James'-wort
 Ragwort.
  Senecio Madraspat'anus.  Senecio
pseudo-china.  Bastard china.
  Senecio Vulgaris.   Groundsel.
  SENECTUS. From senere, to be old.
Old age.
  Senectus Ultima. Decrepitude.
  SENEGA. Rattlesnake milkwort.
  SENEGAL GUM. Acacia vera.
  SENEKA. Polygala senega.
  SENGREEN.  Sempervivum tect
rum.
     SE'NILE.   Senilis.  Belonging,  or
   peculiar, to old age.
     SEN'NA.  The produce  of several
   plants of the genus cassia.
     SENSATION.  Sensatio; from sen-
   tire,  sensum, to feel.   An impression
   caused by external bodies on  the organs
   of the  senses,  and transmitted to the
   brain.
     SENSE.  The faculty whereby ani-
   mals receive impressions of the quali-
   ties of external bodies.  Man is endow-
   ed with five senses, namely, sight, hear-
   ing, smell,  taste and touch.
     SENSIBILITY.  Sensibilitas.  Sus-
   ceptibility of sensation, or faculty of re-
   ceiving impressions.
     SENSO'RIUM.  The  common seat,
   or centre, of sensations; the brain.
     SENSORY.  Sentient.
     SENTIENT.  Sentiens;  sensory.—
   Susceptibility of feeling, as the sentient
   extremities of the nerves.
     SEPAL. One of the divisions of the
   calyx of flowers.
     SEPARATO'RIUM.  From separo,
   I  separate.  An instrument for separat-
   ing the pericranium  from  the skull.
   Also, a pharmaceutical vessel for sepa-
   rating fluids  of different densities from
   each  other.
     SEPEDONOGEN'ESIS.    Sepedo-
   genesk; from ar;rteSav, putrescency, and
   and yeveais, generation.   A septic ten-
   dency,  as  in typhus fever and putrid
   diseases.
     SE'PIA. The name of a genus  of
   cephalopodous mollusca.
     Sepia Officina'lis. Cuttle-fish. The
   internal shell of this  animal is some-
   times employed as a dentifrice.
     SEPSIS. Putrefaction.
     SEPTENARY.  From septem, se-
   ven.  Consisting of seven; as, a sep-
   tenary number.
     SEPTIC.  Septkus ; from arjrta,  to
   putrefy.  Relating to, or producing,
   putrefaction.
     SEPTUM. From septo, to separate.
>-  A partition; a part separating two cav-
  ' ities. 
SER
670
SER
  Septum Auricularum.  The  parti-
tion between the auricles of the  heart.
  Septum Cerebelli.  The falx cere-
belli.
  Septum Cordis. Septum ventriculo-
sum.  The partition between the ven-
tricles of the heart.
  Septum  Encephali.  The  tento-
rium.
  Septum Lucidum.  Septum pelluci-
dum.  The thin portion of the brain
which separates the lateral ventricles
from each other.
  Septum Narium.  The partition be-
tween the nares.
  Septum Pectiniforme.  The pec-
tinated partition passing along the mid-
dle ofthe corpus cavernosum penis.
  Septum Thoracis.  The mediasti-
num.
  Septum  Transversum.  The dia-
phragm.
  SEGIUE'LA. From sequor, to  fol-
low.  Any secondary affection  foUow-
ing upon a disease.
  SEQ.UESTRUM.  From sequestro,
I separate.  A dead portion  of bone
separated from the living.
   SERICEOUS.  Silky.
   SERIC TERIA. The glands which
secrete the silk in the silk worm,
   SER'ICUM.  Silk which is used by
 surgeons and dentists for ligatures.  See
Silk, floss.  Also, the fine pubescence
 on plants.
   Sericum Anglicum. Court-plaster.
   SEROLIN.  From serum, whey. A
 fatty matter detected in the blood.
   SEROS'ITY.  Serum.
   SEROUS. Serosus,  watery.  Of the
 character, or nature  of serum; relating
 to the watery portion of animal fluids.
   Serous Membranes.   Thin trans-
 parent laminae, arranged in the form of
 a closed sac, and  moistened by a thin
 serous  fluid.  The plura, peritoneum,
 arachnoid, &c.  are of this kind.
   SERPENT.  Serpens; from serpo, I
 creep.  A snake.
   SERPENTA'RIA. Virginian snake-
 root
  Serpentaria Virginiana. Virginian
snake-root
  SERPIGINOUS.  From serpen, to
creep.  A term applied to certain affec-
tions which creep, as it were, from one
part to another, as a tetter or ulceration.
  SERPPGO.  From  serpo,  to creep.
A ringworm or tetter.
  SERPYL'LUM.  Wild thyme.
  Serpyllum-  Vulgare.   Common
thyme.
  SERRA.  A saw.
  SER'RATE.   Seratus.    Serrated.
Having teeth  on the  edge or margin
like those of a saw.
  SERRAT'ULA.   The name of a
genus of plants.
  Serratula  Amara.  A species of
saw-wort.
  Serratula  Arvensis.  The creep-
ing way-thistle.
  SERRATUS.  From serra, a saw.
Serrated.  In Botany, applied to leaves
which have notched edges like the teeth
of a saw. In Anatomy, applied to mus-
cles and other parts from their serrated
appearance.
  Serratus Anticus.  Pectoralis mi-
nor.
  Serratus Magnus.   Serratus major
anticus.  A broad, fleshy,  irregularly
quadrilateral muscle,  situated at  the
side of the thorax.
   Serratus Posti'cus Inferior.  A
broad thin muscle, situated at the lower
part of the back.
   Serratus Posticus Superior.  A
small, flat,  quadrilateral  muscle, situ-
ated at the upper part  of the back.
   SERRE, J. J.  J.  History of the
Tooth-ache  during   Pregnancy,  by.
 Vienna, 1778.—Treatise  on Rheuma-
 tism and  Inflammation  from  which
 Gum-boils proceed, 1791.—Besides the
 above,  Serre  is author of a Practical
 Treatise on the Teeth, of about  five
 hundred  pages; a  work containing
 much valuable information; pubhshed,
 Berlin, 1803.
   SERRES,  E. R. A.   Essay on the
' Anatomy and Physiology of the Teeth, 
SET
671
SHE
or New Theory of Dentition, by.  Paris,
1817.
  SERTULA CAMPANA. The offi-
cinal melilot.
  SE'RUM. The whey of milk. Also,
the yellowish, watery fluid which sep-
arates from the blood when cold.
  Serum Aluminosum.  Alum whey.
  Serum # Catharticum.    Purging
whey.
   Serum Lactis.  The serum of mtik.
Whey.
  Serum Sinapinum,  Mustard whey.
  SERVICE-TREE.   Sorbus aucu-
paria.
   SESAMOID.   Sesamoideus; from
erjaauT], a grain of sesamum, and ei8os,
hkeness.  Like the sesamum seed.
   Sesamoid Bones.   The small bones
at the  articulations of the  great toes,
sometimes at  the joints of the thumbs,
and, occasionally,  at the  condyles of
the os femoris, and at the extremity of
the fibula, under the os cuboides of the
tarsus.
   SESAMUM. The name of a genus
of plants.
   Sesamum Orienta'le. Benne.  Oily
grain.  Sesamum.  An African plant,
the seeds of which yield a bland oil.
   SESELI.  The  name of a genus of
plants.
   Seseli Cre'ticum.  Tordylum  offi-
cinale.
   Seseli Tortuo'sum.  Seseli  massi-
liense.  The hartwort of MarseiUes.
   SESaUI.  One  and  a  half.   This
word is frequently joined to  some num-
ber, weight, measure, &c, as  sesqui-
granum, signifying a grain and a half.
   SES'SILE.  Attached by a base.
   SETA.   A bristle, or long, stiff hair,
such as is found on the neck of a hog.
   Seta Equina.   A horse  hair.   The
hair-worm.  Helminthus gordii.
   SETA'CEUM.  A seton.
  SETIG'EROUS.  Bristly.
  SETON.   Setaceum.   A  strip of
linen,  or portion of  silk  or thread,
passed  through the skin and cellular
membrane to keep up a constant irrita-
tion and suppuration.  Also, the issue
itself.
  SETTERWORT.  HeUeborus foe-
tidus.
  SEVUM.   Suet.
  Sevum Ceti. Spermaceti.
  Sevum  Ovile.     Sevum  ovillum.
Mutton suet.
  Sevum  Prjeparatum.   Prepared
suet,  which  is done  by melting and
straining it through linen.
  SEX.   Sexus.   The  sexual differ-
ence  which exists between the male
and female of organized  beings.
'  SEXTANS.  Sextant.   The sixth
part of a pound.
  SEXTARIUS.   An  ancient mea-
sure equal to  a pint and a half.
  SEXTULA.  The sixth part of an
ounce.
  SEX'UAL.  Sexualis.   Pertaining
to,  or that which  characterizes, the
sexes.
  Sexual Functions.  The functions
by which the species are propagated.
  Sexual Intercourse.  Coition.
  Sexual Organs.  The organs of gen-
eration.
  SHAKING PALSY.    Synclonus
agitans.
  SHALLOT.   Allium ascalonicum.
  SHAMPOO'ING.  Kneading.   An
eastern custom, which consists  in press-
ing and  kneading  the muscles of the
body, and extending the jeints of the
bather.  It is regarded as a luxury, and
as exercising'a therapeutic effect.
  SHEDDING.  Caducus.
  SHEDDING TEETH.  The teeth
of first dentition.
  SHEEP LAUREL.   Kalmia  an-
gustifolia.
  SHELL.   The hard external cover-
ing of testaceous and  crustaceous ani-
mals and insects.
  Shell Lac.  A resinous substance
which exudes from punctures of sev-
eral East Indian trees.         ,
  SHERBET.  A cooling drink, pre-
pared with the juice  of fruits, water
and sugar, variously flavored. 
SIB
672
SIG
  SHEPHERD, S. M.  Author of a
small Treatise on the  Cardinal Points
of Dental  Science  and Practice, Pe-
tersburg, Va., 1847.—Also, of a  paper
on the Use of the Turn-Key, and of a
a Report of a Case of Alveolar Exos-
tosis, both published in the American
Journal of Dental Science.—Besides the
above, Dr. Shepherd has contributed a
paper on the Employment of Amalgam
for FiUing Teeth, in which he opposes
its use,  and of an article on Artificial
Teeth, published in the same periodical.
  SHERRY.   Sack.   A deep amber
colored  wine, having an aromatic fla-
vor and fragrancy, without acidity.
  SHIN.   The  anterior part of  the
tibia.
  SHINGLES.   Herpes zoster.
  SHORT-SIGHTEDNESS.  Myo-
pia.
  SHOULDER-BLADE.  The scap-
ula.
  SHOWER-BATH.   The falling of
water through apertures, from a greater
or less height, upon the head and body.
  SHRUB. A low, bushy tree.  Also,
a liquor composed  of  spirits, lemon
juice and sugar.
  SHUD'DERING. A peculiar sen-
sation, accompanied by an involuntary
spasmodic movement,  and  sometimes
by a sensation of cold.   It is sometimes
the precursor of shivering, and,  some-
times the. result of mental operations.
  SIAGON.  Ziayav.  The jaw  bone;
the maxiUary bone.
  SIAGO'NAGRA. From oiaywv, the
jaw, and aypa, a seizure.  Gout in the
jaw.
  SIALAGOGUE. Sialagogus ; from
aiaXoi, sahva, and oyw, I expel.  Medi-
cines which excite a preternatural flow
of saliva, as pyretiirum, mercurial pre-
parations, &.C.
   SIALIS'MA.   Salivation.
   SIALON.  The sahva.
   SIALORRH03A.  Salivation.
   SIB'BENS.   Sivvens. An infectious
 disease in  some of the Avestern coun-
 ties of Scotland.
  SICCANTIA. From siccare, to dry.
Drying medicines.
  SICCATION.  Skralio. Drying.
  SICCHASIA.    Disgust for food,
such as is peculiar to pregnant women.
  SICK. Laboring under disease;  af-
fected with nausea.
  SICKNESS.  A disease of any sort.
Also, nausea, retching, or vomiting.
  Sickness, Falling.  Epilepsy.
  SICULA.  The beet.
  SIDERATIO.   Syderalw;  from
sidus, a star, because it was thought to
be the result of the influence of  the
stars. Apoplexy.  Also, paralysis, and
gangrene.
  SIDERUM.  Phosphuretofiron.
  SIFFLE'MENT.    Whistling.  A
sound heard  on auscultation, at times,
hke the humming of certain insects.
  SIGHT.   Vision.
  Sight By  Day. Hemeralopia.
  Sight By  Night.  Nyctalopia.
  Sight, Dimness of.  Caligp.
  Sight, Lateral.   Dysopia.
  SIGIL'LUM. Diminutive of signum,
a sign. A seal or image.
  Sigillum  Hermeticum.  The her-
metic seal.
  Sigillum  Solomonis.   Solomon's
seal.
  SIG'MOID.  Sigmoides; from  the
Greek s, sigma, and eiSos, resemblance.
In Anatomy, apphed to several parts
from  their resemblance to the Greek
letter sigma.
  Sigmoid Flexure.  The fold of  the
colon where the rectum commences.
  Sigmoid Valves.  The valvular folds
of the aorta and pulmonary artery.
  SIGMOND.  A Practical and Do-
mestic Treatise on the Diseases and Ir-
regularities  of the Teeth  and Gums,
Avith  the Methods of Treatment,  by.
Bath, 1825.
  SIGN. In Pathology, every circum-
stance or phenomenon indicative ofthe
nature and seat of a disease.
  SIG'NATURES.  Certain marks on
the root, leaves, stem, &.c. of plants,
Avhich were supposed, until  the  last 
SIN               673                SIN
century, to indicate their medicinal vir-
tues.
  SIGNUM.  A sign.
  SILE'NE VIRGIN'ICA.  Ground
pink; wild pink; catch-fly.
  SILER.  Heartwort.
  SI'LEX.  Silica;  flint.
  SILICA.   Flint.   Silicic acid;  a
compound of silicon with three atoms
of oxygen.   It is  used in the manu-
facture of porcelain teeth, which see.
  SIL'ICATE.  A compound of silicic
 acid with a base.
  SILPCIOUS.  From silex,  flint-
Flinty.
  SILI'CIUM.  SUicon.
  SILICON. The basis of silicic acid.
  SILICULA.   A  pericarp,  or  pod,
divided interiorly by a septum, to which
the seed is attached,  and nearly as
broad as  it is long.
  SIL'IQJJA.  A dry, elongated  peri-
carp, pod, or seed vessel, having two
longitudinal sutures, and  an interior
partition  to which the seed is attached.
  SILICIUO'SUS.  Having  pods.
  SILK.  Sericum.
  Silk, Dentist's Floss.  Untwisted
filaments of fine silk, prepared express-
ly for the purpose of cleaning the ap-
proximal surfaces of  the teeth, and used
by some dentists for  finishing the sur-
face of fillings in the sides of teeth.  See
Dental Hygiene and Filling Teeth.
  Silk-Weed.  Asclepias syriaca.
  SILVER.  Argentum.
  Silver, Nitrate of.  Argenti ni-
tras.
  Silver Leaf.  Magnolia  marcro-
phylla.
  SIMAROU'BA.   The name  of  a
genus of plants.
  Simarouba Officina'lis.   Quassia
simarouba.  Mountain damson.
  SIMARUBA'CEiE.  The  quassia
tribe of dicotyledonous  plants.
  SIMPLES.  Medicinal herbs.
  SINAPE.  Sinapis nigra.
  SINAPEL/E'ON.    From   gtvarti,
mustard,  and akaioy, oil.  Oil of mus-
tard.
        57
  SINAPIS.  Sinapis nigra.   Also,
the name of a genus of plants.
  Sinapis Alba.  The white mustard
plant.
  Sinapis Nigra.  The common black
mustard.
  SIN'APISM. Sinapkmus; from oiv-
arti, mustard.  A mustard cataplasm.
  SINA'PIUM.   An infusion of mus-
tard seed.
  SIN'CIPUT.  The  top of the head.
Apphed by some to the forepart of the
head.
  SINEW. A tendon.
  SINGULTUS.  A spasmodic mo-
tion of the diaphragm and adjacent
parts.  The hiccough.
  SINUOSITAS.  A  sinus.
  SIN'UOUS.  From  simis, a bay or
curve. Tortuous.  A  term applied to
certain fistulous ulcers.
  SINUS.  A cavity, the interior of
which is larger than  the entrance or
outlet.  In Anatomy, certain cavities in
the bones of the head and face.  Also,
certain  venous canals into  which a
number of vessels empty themselves.
In  Surgery, a  long,  narrow,  hollow
track, communicating  with  some ab-
scess, diseased bone, &c.
  Sinus Arteriosus.  The left auricle
of the heart.
  Sinus Corona'rius. Sinus  circulark.
A  venous  canal  nearly  surrounding
the pituitary fossa and gland.
  Sinus Coxje.  The acetabulum.
  Sinus  Falciformis.  The longitu-
dinal sinus.
  Sinus, Longitudinal.  See  Longi-
tudinal Sinus.
  Sinus Maxillary.   See  MaxiUary
Sinus.
  Sinus Muliebris.  The vagina.
  Sinus Pocularis.   A small depres-
sion at the commencement of the caput
gallinaginis of the  urethra.
  Sinus Renum.  The pelvis  of the
kidney.
  Sinus Uteri.   The sinuses  of the
uterus are  the large  veins  contained
within its waUs. 
SIS
674
SLU
  Sinus  Venje Portarum.  The  en-
trance of the venae porta into the liver.
  Sinus Venosus.  The right  auricle
of the heart.
  SINUSES, FRONTAL. Two cavi-
ties in the os frontis, one over each or-
bit
  Sinuses of the Dura Mater.  The
veins of the dura mater.
  Sinuses of the Larynx.  The ven-
tricles of the larynx.
  Sinuses of Morgagni.  Small open-
ings in the mucous  membrane  of  the
urethra.
  Sinuses of  Valsava.   Three  de-
pressions in the aorta  and pulmonary
artery behind the semilunar valves.
  Sinuses, Pulmonary.  The depres-
sions behind the semilunar valves of
the pulmonary artery.
  Sinuses, Vertebral.   The  two
large veins extending from the occipi-
tal foramen to the end ofthe sacrum.
  SIPHITA PARVA.  Chorea.
  SIPHO. A syringe.
  SI'PHON.   Syphon.  A bent tube,
usually having one end longer than the
other, and used for conveying fluids
from one vessel to another.
  SIPHO'NOSTOMOUS.  From  au-
pav, a tube, and atoua, a mouth.  A
term applied to Crustacea, because they
are furnished with a mouth like a tube.
  SIPHUN'CULUS.  A syringe.
  SIRPASIS.  From atpos, the cavity
of the fontanella. Disease, especially
inflammation, of the brain, produced by
insolation, or exposure to the influence
of the solar rays.
  SI'SON.  The name of a genus of
plants.
   Sison Ammi.  The  plant which af-
fords the ammi verum.
  Sison Amomum.  The field honey-
wort.
  SISYMBRIUM.   The name of a
genus of plants.
  Sisymbrium Nastur'tium.  Nastur-
tium aquaticum; water-cress.
  Sisymbrium So'phia. The herb So-
phia.
  SITIS.   Thirst.
  SITOS.  Aliment.
  SIUM.   The  name  of  a genus of
plants.
  Sium Latifo'lium.  The  common
water-parsnip.
  Sium Ninsi.   The plant the root of
which is caUed radix ninsi, ninzin and
nindsin.
  Sium Nodiflo'rum.  The creeping
water-parsnip.
  Sium Sis'arum.   Skirret
  SIZE.  In the Arts, impure hydrated
gelatine.  In Medicine,  the buffy coat
of the blood.
  SKEL'ETON. Sceletos.  The bones
of the body preserved in their  natural
situation, divested of their soft parts.
  SKIN.   Cutis.
  Skin, Scarf.   The epidermis.
  Skin-Bound Disease.   Induration
of the subcutaneous cellular tissue.
  SKINNER.  A Treatise on the Hu-
man Teeth, concisely explaining their
structure and causes of Disease and
Decay, by.  New York, 1801.
  SKIRRET.  Sium sisarum.
  SKULL.  Cranium.
  Skull Cap. ScuteUaria galericulata.
Also, a name  sometimes applied to a
bandage invented by Mr.  Fox.  See
Fox's Bandage.
  SKUNK   CABBAGE.   Dracon-
tium foetidum.
  SLAVERING.  Driveling; invol-
untary flow of saliva.
  SLEEP.   Somnus.   A suspension
of the voluntary  exercise of the intel-
lectual faculties and the  powers of  the
body.
  SLEEP'LESSNESS.   Agrypnia;
insomnia.
  SLEEP-WALKING.  Somnambu-
lism.
  SLING. A bandage for sustaining the
forearm, suspended around the neck.
  SLOE TREE.  Prunus spinosa.
  SLOUGH.  The  dead part which
separates from the living in mortifica-
tion.
  SLUMBER.   Somnolency. 
SNA
67,
5
SOD
  SMALLAGE.  Apium graveolens.
  SMALL-POX.  Variola.
  SMALT.  The protoxyd of cobalt.
  SMEC'TICA.   Detergents.
  SMEG'MA.  Soap.
  SMELL.    Olfactus.   The  sense
 which perceives and appreciates odors.
 Also, the qualities of bodies  which af-
 fect  the olfactory nerves or  organs of
 smeU.
  SMELLING.  Olfaction.
  SMI'LAX. The name of a genus of
 plants.
  Smilax China. The China root tree.
  Smilax Sarsaparil'la.  One ofthe
 trees supposed to yield sarsapartila.
  SMI'LE.  A curved  bistoury, hav-
 ing tAvo sharp edges.
  SMITH, MAYO  G.  A Popular
 Treatise on the Teeth ;  containing a
 History of the Dental Art,  with ana-
 tomical descriptions of the mouth and
 its appendages, and accounts of chemi-
 cal and physiological experiments on
 the teeth, &c, by.  Boston, 1848.
  SMITH, H. R.  Author of a Paper
 on the Diseases of the Gums; publish-
 ed in volume first of Dental Register
 of the West.
  SMYR'NIUM.  The name  of a ge-
 nus of plants.
  Smyrnium  Olusa'trum.   Alexan-
 ders.  A plant formerly cultivated in
 gardens for culinary purposes.
  SNAIL.   Limax.  A slimy, slow-
 creeping animal, ofthe genus helix, and
 order of mollusca.
  SNAKE, RATTLE.  Crotalus hor-
 ridus.
  Snake-Killing Birthwort. Aris-
 tolochia anguicida.
  SNAKEROOT.   Aristolochia  ser-
 pentaria, and polygala senega.
  Snakeroot, Black.   Actaea  race-
 mosa.
  Snakeroot, Button.  Eryngium
 aquaticum.
  Snakeroot, Canada.   Asarum can-
adense.
  SNAKEWEED.   Polygonum  bis-
torta.
  SNAKEWOOD.   Colubrinum  lig-
num.
  SNEEZEWORT.   AchiUea ptar-
mica.
  SNEEZING.  Sternutatio.  A  con-
vulsive action of the expiratory mus-
cles, commonly occasioned by irritation
ofthe nasal fossae.
  SNELL, JAMES.  Practical Guide
to Operations on the Teeth, by.  Lon-
don, and Philadelphia, 1831. This work
contains many useful practical sugges-
tions.
  SNIPS.  A pair of very strong scis-
sors or shears used in the laboratory of
the dentist for shaping gold, silver, or
platina plate, for bases  for  artificial
teeth.
  SNIPE.  Scolopax gallinago.
  SNORING.   Stertm:   The  noise
made by the passage of air  through
the fauces and nasal fossae in respira-
tion, either in  sleep  or during certain
diseases, as in apoplexy.
  SNUFFLES.     Breathing  hard
through the nose.
  Snuffles, Morbid.  Coryza malig-
na.
  SOAP.  Sapo.  A compound of cer-
tain  oil-acids, with a salifiable base.
  SOAPWORT.  Saponaria  officina-
lis.
  SOB.  A  sudden  spasmodic inspira-
tion and expiration.
  SOCIA PAROTIDIS.  The acces-
sory gland of the parotid, or a lobe of
the parotid separated from the princi-
pal gland.
  SODA.   An Arabic  word.   The
mineral alkali, or protoxyd of sodium,
a  white,  caustic   powder,  obtained,
naturally, from Eygpt,  and, artificial-
ly,  in limited quantity, by the incin-
eration of marine plants, but principally
from the sulphate  of soda.
  Soda, Acetate of. Soda? acetas.
  Soda, Borate of.  Sodae biboras.
  Soda, Carbonate of.  Sodae. carbo-
nas.
  Soda, Caustic a.  The hydrated pro-
toxyd of soda.  Caustic soda. 
SOD
676
SOL
  Soda, Dried Carbonate of. Sodae
carbonas exsiccatus.
  Soda, Impura. Impure soda. Soda.
Barilla.  Soda obtained by the incinera-
tion of the sea-shore plants.
  Soda, Muriate of.  Sodae murias.
  Soda, Nitrate of.  Peruvian nitre.
A salt, having precisely the same quali-
ties as nitrate of potash.
  Soda  Phosphate of.  Sodae phos-
phas.
  Soda  Powders.  Two powders, one
consisting of half a drachm of carbo-
nate  of  soda, the other of twenty-five
grains of tartaric acid, which, when dis-
solved in  separate tumblers of water
and mixed, form  a refreshing, efferves-
cing, saline draught
  Soda, Subcarbonate of.   Sodae car-
bonas.
  Soda, Sulphate of.  Sodae sulphas.
  Soda, Tartrate of.  Sodae potas-
sio-tartras.
  Soda  Water.  A  refreshing effer-
vescing  draught, formed by dissolving
carbonate of soda in  water, and super-
saturating it  with carbonic acid.
  SOD^E ACETAS.  Acetate of so-
da.
  Sodje Biboras.  Sodoz boras.  Bibo-
rate  of soda.   Borate of soda.  Borax.
  Sodje Bicarbonas.  Bicarbonate  of
soda.
  Sodje Boras.  Sodae biboras.
  Sodje Carbonas. Carbonate of soda.
  Sodje Carbonas Exsiccatus. Dried
carbonate of soda.
  Sodje Chloras.   The  chlorate  of
soda.
  Sodje Chlorinatje Liq.uor.  Solu-
tion  of chlorinated soda.
  Sodje Hydriodas.   Sodii iodidum.
  Sodje Hypochloris.  Hypochlorite
of soda.
  Sodje Murias.  Muriate of  soda.
Sodii chloridum.
  Sodje Phosphas. Phosphate of soda.
  Sodje Potassio-Tartras.  Tartrate
of soda.
  Sodje Sesquicarbonas.   An imper-
fect  bicarbonate of soda.
  Sodje Subboras. Soda; biboras. Bo-
rax.
  Sodje Subcarbonas.   Carbonate of
soda.
  Sodje Sulphas.  Sulphate of soda.
  SODII   AURO-TERCHLORID-
UM.  Chloride of gold and sodium.
  Sodii Chloridum. Chloride of  so-
dium.  Muriate of soda.  Common salt.
  Sodii Iodidum.  Iodide of sodium.
Hydriodate of soda.
  SODIUM. The metalhc base of soda.
  Sodium, Chloride of.   Muriate of
soda.
  Sodium, Oxyd of.  Soda.
  SOFT PALATE.  The velum pen-
dulum palati.
  SOFTEN'ING.  Mollities.
  Softening of the Brain.  Ramollis-
sement of the brain.
  SOL.  The sun.  A  term, also ap-
plied, by the older chemists, to gold.
  SOLAMEN.    Consolation;  a car-
minate.
  SOLANA'CEiE.  The nightshade
tribe of dicotyledonous plants.
  SOL'ANOID.  Solanoides; from sol-
anum, the potato, and eiSos,resemblance.
Resembling a potato. A term, applied
to a form of cancer, from its resemblance
to a potato.
  SOLA'NUM.   The  bitter-sweet—
Also, the name  of a genus of plants.
  Solanum   Dulcama'ra.   Bitter-
sweet. Woody nightshade.
  Solanum Fostidum.  Dartura stra-
monium.
  Solanum Lethale.  Atropa  bella-
donna.
  Solanum Licoper'sicum. The love-
apple plant, or tomato.
  Solanum  Melon'gena.   The mad-
apple plant.  Egg plant.
  Solanum   Nigrum.   The garden
nightshade.
  Solanum  Racemosum.   American
nightshade.  Poke-Aveed.  Poke-berry.
  Solanum  Sanctum.   The palestine
nightshade.
  Solanum  Tuberos'um.  The potato
plant 
              SOL               6'

  Solanum Vesicarium.  The winter-
cherry.
  SOLAR.   Solaris;  from  sol, the
sun.  Pertaining to the sun.
  Solar Plexus.  Plexus Solaris. See
Plexus, solar.
  SOLDER.  An  alloy  eastiy fused,
employed to unite the surfaces of two
pieces of metal.
  Solder, Gold.   See Gold Solder.
  SOL'DERING.  A process  which
consists in uniting the surfaces of two
pieces of metal by melting a more fusi-
ble metal (an  alloy) between them,
which serves, by  chemical  attraction
and cohesive force,  to bind the pieces
together.  The pieces may be  of the
same or dissimilar metals, but the metal
or alloy, by which they are to be united,
must have an affinity for both.   Thus,
gold aUoyed with  silver  and copper,
melts more easily than the first  named
metal, and having an affinity for it, con-
stitutes a proper uniting medium.  See
Gold Solder.   The  surfaces, however,
of the pieces to be united, should be
bright, and in actual contact, to insure
a uniform effect of the solder upon them.
They should  also  be  covered  with a
mixture of borax and water, ofthe con-
sistence of cream.  After  this has been
apphed, which may be most convenient-
ly done with a small camel's-hair pen-
cil, a sufficient quantity of solder, cut
in small pieces,  should be  laid  along
the hne  of contact between the gold
pieces to be united, to effect the desired
strength of union.
  The pieces to be united, should be
prevented from separating, during the
application  of the  heat, either with
plaster of paris,  iron clamps,  or wire.
This precaution is  necessary to insure
a perfect union of the pieces.
  These preparatory steps having been
gone through with, the pieces  should
be placed, and made fast,  upon a piece
of charcoal, or pumice-stone,  to pre-
vent the too rapid escape of the  heat
during the actual prqcess of soldering.
  The most common method of obtain-
         57*
                SOL

ing the requisite amount of heat,  is,
from the flame  of  a spirit or oil lamp,
which is thrown upon the work with
a blow-pipe. When plasteris employed,
this should first be  heated to a red heat,
by throwing the whole of the flame of
the lamp in a flaring manner over it.
This done, it should be concentrated up-
on the point where it is wished that the
solder should take effect, and kept there
until it fuses and  flows between the
pieces  to be united.  Should it flow in
a wrong direction, from an improper
application ofthe heat, the concentrated
point of the flame should be moved to
the proper  place, when  the solder wiU
immediately return and take effect there.
  Considerable practice  is necessary to
accomplish the process with ease, and
prevent melting the pieces to be united.
The foregoing directions are intended to
apply to the soldering of gold, as it is
with this metal that the dentist has par-
ticularly to do ; they will, however, be
found applicable to the soldering of pla-
tina and silver.   See Mounting Porce-
lain Teeth upon a Metallic Base.
  For throAving the  flame upon  the
work, the  common blow-pipe is most
frequently employed, but Parmly's and
other self-acting blow-pipes  may -be
used with greater advantage.
  SOLDANEL'LA. Convolvulus sol-
danella.
  SOLE.  The under  surface of the
foot.
  SOLEN.  A tube or canal.  Also, a
cradle for a fractured hmb.
  SOLENA'RIUM.  From  aaxyv, a
canal.   A catheter.
  SOLE'US. Gastrocnemius internus.
A muscle situated  at the posterior part
of the leg.
  SOLID.   Solidus.  A body  whose
particles are  so united by cohesive at-
traction as to require some degree of
force  to separate them.  In Anatomy,
the bones,  muscles, ligaments, mem-
branes, nerves, vessels, cartilages, &c.
  SOLIDA'GO. The name of a genus
of plants.
7 
SOM
678
SOR
   Solidago  Odora.   Sweet-scented
 golden rod.
   Solidago Virgau'rea.  Golden rod.
   SOL'IDISM.   The doctrine which
 ascribes all diseases to alterations in the
 solid parts of the body.
   SOLIUM.  A species of tape-worm.
   SOLOMON'S  SEAL.  Convallaria
 polygonatum.
   SOLUBILITY.  Solubilitas;  from
 solvere, solutum, to disohe. Capable of
 dissolving in a menstruum.
   SOLUM.  The sole.
   SOLUTIO.  A solution.
   Solutio Arsenicalis.  Liquor ar-
 senicalis.
   Solutio Calcis.  Liquor calcis.
   Solutio Potassii  Iodidi Iodureta.
 Liquor iodini compositus.
   Solutio Sulpha'tis Cupri Compos'-
 ita.  Aqua cupri vitriolati composita.—
 Compound solution of sulphate of cop-
 per.         /
   SOLUTION.   Solutio.  In Chemis-
 try, an operation Avhich consists in dis-
 solving a solid, in a menstruum. Also,
 the product of such operation.   In  Sur-
 gery, the separation of parts previously
 united, which is called a solution of con-
 tinuity.
   SOL'UTIVE.  Solutivus; from solvo,
 to loosen.  A laxative.
   SOL'VENT.  From solvere, to dis-
 solve. A menstruum. Also, medicines
 supposed to possess the property of dis-
 solving or removing obstructions of ex-
 traneous substances.
   SOMA.  The body.
   SOMATTC. Somaticus; fromtjco^a,
 the body. That which  relates to, or
 concerns, the body.
   SOMATOL'OGY.    Somatologia;
from aaua, the body, and xoyos, a dis-
 course.  A treatise on the human body.
Anatomy.
  SOMNAM'BULISM.  Somnambula-
tio; from somnus, sleep, and ambubre, to
walk.  Sleep-walking.
  SOMNAM'BULIST. A sleep-walk-
er.
  SOMNIFEROUS. Somniferus; from
 somnus, sleep, and/ero, to bring.  That
 which induces sleep.
   SOMNILO'QOJIUM.  Somnibquk-
 mus; from somnus, sleep, and liquor, I
 speak.  Talking in one's sleep.
   SOM'NIUM.  Dreaming.
   SOM'NOLENCY.   Somnolentia.—
 Sleepiness; often  a symptom  of dis-
 ease.
   SOM'NUS. Sleep.
   SON'CHUS. The name of a genus
 of plants.
   Sonchus Arven'sis.  The greater
 hawkweed.
   Sonchus Oleraceus.   The sow-
 thistle.
   SOOT. Fuligo.
   Soot, Wood.  Fuligo ligni.
   SOPHISTICATION. Sophistkatio.
 Adulteration; counterfeiting; falsifica-
 tion.
   SOPHO'RA.  The name of a genus
 of plants.
   Sophora Heptaphylla.   A shrub,
 the roots and leaves of which are caUed
 antkhokrica.
   Sophora Tinctoria.   Baptisia tinc-
 toria.   Wild  indigo;  indigo  weed;
 horse-fly weed; yeUow broom; yeUow
 indigo.
   SOPHRONISTE'RES.  The dentes
 sapientiae.
   SO'PIENS. Soporific.
   SOPOR.  A profound sleep, from
 which the person  can  only be roused
 with difficulty. It occurs in many cere-
 bral diseases.
  SOPORIF'IC. Somniferous.
  SOR A.  The nettle-rash.
  SORBEFA'CIENT.   Sorbefaciens;
 from sorbere, to suck in, and facere, to
 make.  A  remedy that promotes  ab-
 sorption.
  SORBUS.  The name of a genus of
 plants.
  Sorbus Acupa'ria.   The wUd  ser-
vice tree.
  Sorbus Domes'tica.  The cultivated
service tree.  It has an astringent fruit,
which is sometimes used in  diarrhea.
  SOR'DES.   The fetid excrementi- 
SPA
679
SPE
tious matter which forms on  the teeth
during fever.  Also, dirty sanies, dis-
charged from ulcers.
  SORE.  An ulcer or excoriation.
  Sore, Bay.   An endemic  disease,
at the Bay of Honduras, thought by
Dr. Mosely to be true cancer.
  Sore Mouth.  Stomatitis.
  Sore  Mouth, Gangrenous.  Can-
crum oris.
  Sore Throat.  Cynanche.
  Sore Throat, Clergyman's.   Fol-
licular pharyngitis.
  Sore Throat, Ulcerous.  Cynan-
che maligna.
  SORE'NESS. Painful uneasiness or
tenderness of a part when touched.  It
is a symptom of  inflammation.
  SOR'REL.  Rumex acetosa.
  Sorrel, French. Rumex scutatus.
  Sorrel-Tree. Andromeda arborea.
  Sorrel Wood.   Oxalis acetosella.
  SOUND.  A  solid metallic instru-
ment, shaped  like a catheter, used by
surgeons for the purpose of  ascertain-
ing whether there  be  a stone in the
bladder.
  SOUND'ING.  Searching.
  SOUR DOCK.  Rumex acetosa.
  SOUTHERN WOOD.   Artemisia
abrotanum.
  SOW-BREAD.   Cyclamen  euro-
pasum.
  SPAG'IRISTS.  An ancient sect of
physicians, who pretended to account
for the changes that occur in health and
disease upon chemical principles.
  SPAGYRIA.  Chemistry.
  SPAIN, PELLITORY OF. Anthe-
mis pyrethrum.
  SPANH^E'MIA. From artavos, poor,
and aiua, blood.  Poverty of  the blood,
from a deficiency of fibrin and red cor-
puscules.
  SPANISH FLY. Cantharis.
  SPARADRA'PUM. Adhesive plas-
ter spread  on silk, linen, cotton or pa-
per.
  SPARGANO'SIS. From artapyaa, to
swell.  A swelling. Also, a milk  ab-
scess.
  SPAR'SUS.   Irregularly scattered;
dispersed.
  SPARTIUM. The name of a genus
of plants.
  Spartium Jun'ceum. Spanish broom.
  Spartium Scopa'rium.  The com-
mon broom. The tops and leaves have
diuretic properties.
  SPASM.   Spasmus; from artaa,  I
draw.  An involuntary  muscular con-
traction.  Spasms are distinguished into
tonic, which consists in complete rigid-
ity of the  muscles, as in lock-jaw, and
clonic, which consists in alternate con-
tractions and relaxations, as  in convul-
sions.
   SPASMA.   From  artaa,  I  draw.
Voluntary straining, and energetic con-
traction, or extension of the muscles,
as in running, riding, or bearing heavy
burdens.
   SPASMI.  Spasmodic diseases.  An
order in the class neurosis of Dr. Cullen,
characterized by a morbid contraction
of the muscular fibres.
   SPASMODIC.  Spasmodicus; spas-
moticus.   Relating to a spasm or con-
vulsion.
   Spasmodic  Croup.    Laryngismus
stridulus.
   SPASMOL'OGY.   Spasmologia ;—
from ortaouos, spasm, and xoyoj, a dis-
course. A treatise on convulsions.
   SPASMOT'ICUS.  Spasmodic.
   SPAS'MUS.  A spasm;  a convul-
sion.
   Spasmus Cynicus.   Risus  caninus ;
risus sardonicus.
   SPASTIC. Spasticus. Spasmodic.
   SPAT'ULA.  Diminutive of spatha,
 a broad  instrument.   An  instrument
 like a knife, used for  spreading plas-
 ters, &c.
   SPATULATE. Shaped like a spat-
 ula.
   SPEARWORT. Ranunculus flam-
 mula.
   SPE'CIES.   A group  of such indi-
 viduals as have  an essential identity re-
 sulting from their ultimate constitution
 or nature. Individuals, animals, plants, 
SPE               680                SPE
 and minerals agreeing in their appear-
 ance and composition.   When species
 differ in  circumstances from accident,
 they are termed varieties.  The circum-
 stances common to one or more species
 constitute a division or genus.  Spe-
 cies is also an old pharmaceutical term
 for powders.
   SPECIF'IC. Specifkus.  A medicine
 that cures some diseases upon a princi-
 ple peculiar to itself, and not common
 to two or more.  Also, a remedy that
 infallibly   cures a  particular  disease.
 The term is applied, too, to a medicine
 which  acts on some particular organ
 more than on others.
   Specific Gravity.  See  Gravity,
 specific.
   SPECIL'LUM.  From specio, I ex-
 amine. A probe.
   SPECTA'CLES. From spectare, to
 behold. An optical apparatus, consist-
 ing of two lenses, fixed in a metallic
 frame adapted to the eyes, and used to
 assist the sight.
   SPECTRUM.  An optical illusion;
 a spectre.   Also, an elongated figure  of
 the seven  prismatic colors, formed by a
 transparent prism.
   SPECULUM.   From specio, I see.
 A mirror.   Also, an instrument for di-
 lating cavities to facilitate their exam-
 ination.
   Speculum Ani.   An instrument for
 dilating the anus, while an operation  is
 being performed on the parts within.
   Speculum Metal.  An alloy for
 metallic mirrors, composed of two parts
 copper and one of tin.
   Speculum Oculi. An instrument for
 keeping the eyelids open,  and prevent-
 ing the eye from moving.
   Speculum Oris.  An instrument for
 distending the mouth.
  Speculum Oris, Elliot's.  An in-
 strument for distending the cheeks dur-
ing the removal of wax  impressions
from the mouth.
  Speculum Vaginje. An instrument
for dilating the vagina.
  Speculum Veneris. Yarrow.
    SPEECH.  Articulated voice.
    SPEECHLESSNESS.   Aphonia;
  mutitas.
    SPEEDWELL.  Veronica officina-
  lis.
    Speedwell, Female. Antirrhinum
  elatine.
    SPELTER. Spcltre; speltrum. Nat-
  ural, impure zinc, which contains cop-
  per, iron, lead, manganese, plumbago,
  and a little arsenic.
    SPENCER'S DENTAL DRILL.
  An instrument invented by  Mr. K.
  Spencer, dentist, of Georgia, for remov-
 ing caries from the teeth.   The drill is
 moved by an endless chain, enclosed in
 an octagonal steel case, worked with a
 handle and pistern.
   SPERM.  Sperma; from arteipa, I
 sow.  Spermatic fluid.  Seed.  Semen.
   SPERMACETI. Cetaceum.
   SPERMATHE'CA.  From artepua,
 seed, and ^rjxr], sheath.  A receptacle
 attached to the  oviducts of insects,
   SPERMAT'IC.  Spermatkus; from
 artepua, seed.  Belonging, or  relating, to
 the testicles and ovary.
   Spermatic Arteries.   Two arte-
 ries, one on each side, given off, most
 commonly, by the aorta, though some-
 times by the renal arteries, and distribu-
 ted, in man, to the  spermatic chord,
 testicle and epididymis, and in the  fe-
 male, to the ovarium,  fallopian  tube,
 and round ligament.
   Spermatic Chord.   The vascular
 and nervous chord by which the testicle
 is suspended.
   Spermatic Plexus.    A nervous
 plexus  on each side of the body, form-
 ed by filaments from the renal plexus.
   Spermatic Veins.  The veins which
 accompany the  spermatic arteries.
   SPERMATOCE'LE. From artepua,
 seed, and xtjXij,  a tumor.  A swelling
 of the testicle.
  SPERMATO'PHORA.     From
 artepua, seed,  and $epa,  I bear.  The
sheaths in the cephalopods which con-
vey the semen or sperm.
  SPERMATORRHOEA.      From 
SPH               681                SPH
artepua, sperm, and psa, I  flow.   An
involuntary emission of semen.
  SPERMATOZOA.  From artepua,
sperm, and £aov, animal.  Spermatic
animalcules.   Animalcules found  in
the semen.
  SPERM'ODERM.   The external
covering of a seed.
  SPHACELIS'MUS.   Gangrene.—
Also, an inflammation of the brain.
  SPHACELUS.   From o<paxa, to
destroy.    The  disorganized portion
thrown off in mortification.   Com-
plete mortification.
  SPHdENOIDES.  Sphenoides.
  SPHiERANTHUS  INDICUS.—
The adaca, a plant of Malabar.
  SPH^ERO'COCCUS CRISPUS.—
The fucus crispus.
  SPHAGE.  The throat.
  SPHENO-MAXILLARY.   Relat-
ing to the sphenoid and   maxiUary
bones.
  Spheno-Maxillary Fissure.  The
inferior orbitar  fissure.   Foramen lace-
rum inferius.
  Spheno-Maxillary  Fossa.  A de-
pression at the union of  the  spheno-
maxillary  and  pterygo-maxtilary  fis-
sures.
  SPHENO-PALATINE.   Relating
to the sphenoid and palate bones.
  Spheno-Palatine Artery.  The ter-
mination of the internal maxillary ar-
tery, which enters the back part of the
nose through the spheno-palatine fora-
men, to be distributed upon the pitui-
tary membrane.
  Spheno-Palatine Foramen.    A
foramen formed by the vertical portion
of the os palati, and sphenoid bone, es-
tabhshing  a communication  between
the nasal fossae  and the zygomatic fossa.
  Spheno-Palatine  Ganglion.    A
small  ganglion  situated  without the
spheno-palatine foramen, in the ptery-
go-maxillary fissure.
  Spheno-Palatine Nerves.    The
lateral nasal nerves, which arise from
the ganglion of Meckel, and enter  the
nose through the  spheno-palatine fora-
men, to be distributed to the outer and
inner parietes of the nasal fossae.
  SPHENOPARIETAL.    Belong-
ing, or relating, to the sphenoid and
parietal bones.
  SPHENO-STAPHYLINUS.  The
levator palati muscle.
  SPHENO-TEMPORAL.   Belong-
ing, or relating, to the sphenoid and
temporal  bones.
  SPHE'NOID.    Sphenoides; from
afyyv, a wedge, and eiSos, resemblance.
Wedge-like; applied to a bone of the
cranium.
  Sphenoid-Bone.   Sphenoides os.—
A bone situated in  the middle of the
base of the cranium, extending under-
neath  from  one temple to  the other,
and wedged in, as  it were, amid the
other bones.
  SPHENOPDAL. Sphenoidalis. Be-
longing,  or  relating, to the sphenoid
bone.
  Sphenoidal Spine.   A  projecting
crista at the lower surface of the sphe-
noid bone, which  articulates with the
vomer.
  SPHINCTER.    From oipvyya,  I
constrict.   A  name given  to  certain
muscles,  the office of which is, to close
openings around which they  are sit-
uated.
  Sphincter Ani.   A muscle situated
around the anus.
  Sphincter Ani Internus. The cir-
cular fibres of the muscular coat of the
rectum at its extremity.
  Sphincter Gulje.   The superior
constrictor pharyngis.
  Sphincter Labiorum.  The orbicu-
laris oris.
  Sphincter Oculi.  The obicularis
palpebrarum.
  Sphincter Oris.  The orbicularis
oris.
  Sphincter Vaginje.    A  muscle
situated on the side  of the vagina, near
its external orifice, opposite the nym-
phae, and covering the  corpus  caver-
nosum.
  Sphincter Visicje.   A name given 
SPI
OS:
o
SPI
by  some  anatomists to a  few  fibres
which surround the neck of the bladder.
  SPHYGMOL'OGY.    Sphygmolo-
gia ; from afvyuos, the pulse, and xoyos,
a discourse.  A treatise on the pulse.
  SPHYG'MOS. From a^v%ea, to leap
or rebound.  The pulse.
  SPHYXIS.  Pulsation.
  SPICA.   A  spike.   In  Botany, a
species  of inflorescence in which all
the flowers are sessUe along a common
axis.  In Surgery, a spiral bandage, the
turns of which cross each  other like
the letter V.
  Spica Brevis.  Alopecuris pratensis.
  Spica Celtica. Valeriana celtica.
  Spica Fcemina.  Common lavender.
  Spica Indica.  Nardus Indica.
  Spica Inguinalis.   A bandage for
inguinal ruptures.
  Spica Duplex.  A double spica or
spiral bandage.
  Spica Mas.   Broad-leaved lavender.
  Spica Nardi.  Nardus Indica.
  Spica Simplex.  A  common spica
bandage.
  SPICE-WOOD.   The laurus ben-
zoin.
  SPICES.  Agreeable, warm aromatic
drugs, such  as nutmeg, cinnamon, Sac.
  SPICULA.  In Pathobgy, pointed
pieces of bone.   In Botany, applied to
grasses.
  SPIGEL'IA.   The  Indian pink.—
Also, the name of a genus of plants.
  Spigelia  Marilan'dica.   The pe-
rennial worm-grass, or Indian pink.
  SPILANTHUS.   The name of a
genus of plants.
  Spilanthus Acmel'la.   The balm-
leaved spilanthus.
  Spilanthus Olera'ceus. The spear-
leaved spilanthus.
  SPILO'MA.   A  spot or stain. A
variety  of nozvus.
  SPI'LUS.  A spot  or discoloration
of the skin.
  SPINA.  A thorn.   In Anatomy, a
process  on the surface of a bone.
  Spina Acida.   The barberry.
  Spina ^Egyptiaca.   Acacia vera.
  Spina  Bifida.   A congenital mal-
formation or defect of the spinal co-
lumn.
  Spina Cervina.  Buckthorn.
  Spina  Hirci.    Astragalus traga-
cantha.
  Spina Ventosa.  A term of rather
indefinite signification.  By some it  is
defined to be a tumor arising from an
internal caries of  bone;  by others,  a
disease of the osseous system, in which
the bone  exhibits a distended  appear-
ance.
  Spina  Ventosa of the Teeth.—
Among the diseases which attack the
teeth, Mr.  Fox  mentions  spina ven-
tosa as one, which he thus describes:
"The seat of the malady  is in the cav-
ity of the tooth; the vessels ramifying
on  its  membrane, acquire a diseased
action, by  which the membrane be-
comes thickened, absorption of some
of the internal parts of the tooth takes
place, and the opening, at the extrem-
ity of the fang, also, becomes enlarged.
This disease  of  the membrane is at-
tended with the formation of matter, dis-
charging itself at the point of the fang,
into the alveolar  cavity, which, being
rendered more porous by the process of
absorption, affords an easy exit.  During
the progress  of the disease, the gum,
covering the alveolar process, becomes
inflamed, and acquires a spongy tex-
ture ; the matter, passing from  the
socket, makes its escape into the mouth
by several openings through the gum,
which is thus kept in a constant state
of disease."
  It will be perceived by the foregoing,
that there  is  little analogy between
spina ventosa, according  to the com-
mon acceptation of the term, and  the
disease described  by Mr. Fox.  The
latter is nothing more than alveolar ab-
scess, arising from inflammation  and
suppuration of the lining membrane.
But this affection, simply, bears no re-
semblance to  spina ventosa.   If  the
tooth be  previously or simultaneously
attacked by exostosis, and the  natural 
SPI
683
SPI
 canal enlarged by the corrosive action
 of  the  contained matter, the disease
 might, perhaps, be regarded, as identi-
 cal with spina ventosa, as it occurs in
 other bones.
  The  enlargement of the  opening at
 the extremity of the fang, is caused by
 the action of the confined matter, and
 not by  the  absorbents, as Mr  F. sup-
 poses, for before this enlargement takes
 place, the lining membrane is destroy-
 ed, and, consequently, the vitality of the
 internal parietes of the root, and hence,
 cannot be exposed to the action of  the
 absorbents.
  The proper  curative indication in a
 case of this sort, consists in the prompt
 removal of the tooth.
  SPINA'CIA.  The name of a genus
 of plants.
  Spinacia Olera'cea. Spinach.
  SPI'NAL.   Spinalk;  from spina,
 the spine.   Belonging,  or relating,  to
 the spinal column.
  Spinal  Arteries.    Two  arteries
 descending,  one  on the  anterior and
 one  on  the posterior surface  of  the
 spinal chord.
  Spinal  Chord.    Medulla spinalk.
 The spinal marrow, which is a contin-
 uation of the medulla oblongata.
  Spinal  Diseases.    The diseases
 which affect the spinal chord and its
 membranes.
  Spinal Irritation.   A term apphed
 to sub-inflammatory  affections of  the
 spinal chord and its membranes.
  Spinal Marrow. The spinal chord.
  Spinal Nerve.   The  accessory  of
 the pneumogastric, or accessory nerve
 of Willis.
  SPINALIS  CERVICIS.    Semi-
 spinalis  coUi.
  Spinalis Colli.  Semi-spinalis colli.
  Spinalis Dorsi.  A muscle situated
 on the lateral surfaces  of the spinous
processes of the  back, and the inner
side of the longissimus dorsi.
  SPINE.  The vertebral column.
  SPINES'CENT.  Spinescens.  Be-
coming hard and thorny.
   SPIN'NARET.    The articulated
 tubes of spiders, which they employ in
 making their webs.
   SPINOUS.  Spinosus. Having the
 shape of,  or beset with, spines  or
 thorns.
   Spinous Processes of the Verte-
 brje.  These processes are situated one
 on the back part of each vertebra.
   SPIRACULA.   Spiracules; from
 spiro, I breathe.   The breathing pores
 of insects. Apphed, also, to the pores of
 the skin.
   SPIRAEA. The spiraea tomentosa.
 Also,  the name of a genus of plants.
   Spirjea Africana.  Diosma crenata.
   Spirjea Filipendula.  The officinal
 dropwort.
   Spirjea  Tomen'tosa.   Hardback;
 red meadow-sweet.
   Spirjea Trifoliata.   Gillenia  tri-
 foliata.
   Spirjea Ulmaria.  Meadow-sweet.
 Queen of the meadows.
   SPI'RAL.  Spiralis;  from spira, a
 spire.   Winding  round  a cytinder or
 other round body, in  a circular form,
 and at the same time rising or advanc-
 ing forward ; winding like a screw.
   Spiral Bandage.   The  common
 bandage or roller, Avhich is wound spi-
 raUy round a limb.
   Spiral Springs.  In  Dental Pros-
 theses, the coiled wires employed for the
 retention of artificial teeth in the mouth.
 This description of spring was formerly
 always used in  the application of a
 substitute for the  teeth  of both jaws,
 but the perfection to which the atmos-
 pheric or suction principle of  applying
 bases for  artificial  teeth   has, within
 the last few years, been  brought, ren-
 ders their  employment  almost alto-
 gether unnecessary.  But when used,
 they should be made of wire no larger
 than is absolutely  necessary  to give to
 the springs the power required to keep
 the pieces in place.
  The simplest method of winding the
wire, is to secure it between two blocks
of Avood, held between the jaws of a 
SPI
684
SPI
   smaU  bench-vice.   Then, the upper
   end of the wire,  in  connection with a
   smaU spindle  or  steel-Avire, the size of
   a smaU knitting-needle, six or eight
   inches in length,  is grasped by a hand-
   vice or pair of sliding tongs ;  the spin-
   dle resting on the  blocks of wood is
   made to revolve by turning the hand-
   vice, or shding-tongs, according as the
   one or the other may be used.  In this
   way, the  wire is wound  firmly  and
   closely round the steel rod or spindle.
     A  machine has  recently  been in-
   vented  by Drs. HoAvcott and  David-
   son, of Memphis, Tenn., by  means of
   which, the wire may be wound  Avith
   much greater uniformity and accuracy,
   than in the manner as above described.
     SPIRATIO.  Respiration.
     SPIRIT.  Spiritus ; from spirare, to
   exhale.  This  term was formerly ap-
   plied to all volattie substances obtained
   by distillation.  They  were formerly
   distinguished  into inflammable or ar-
   dent  spirits,  acid spirits, and alkaline
   spirits, but at present, the  term is re-
   stricted to alcoholic liquors, and ether.
     Spirit,  Rectified.   Alcohol.
     Spirit of  Alum.  The  acid liquid
   distilled from alum.
     Spirit of Salt.  Hydrochloric acid.
     Spirit  of Tin.  Perchloride  of tin.
     Spirit of Turpentine.  Oil of tur-
   pentine.
     Spirit of  Wine  and Camphor.—
   Spiritus camphoraa.
*    SPIRITUS.  Spirit.  Also, breath.
     Spiritus .ZEtheris Aromaticus.—
   Aromatic spirit of ether.
     Spiritus iEiHERis Nit'rici.  Sweet
   spirit of nitre.  Spirit of nitric ether.
     Spiritus .ZEtheris  Sulphu'rici.—
   Spirit of sulphuric ether.  Sweet spirit
   of vitriol.
     Spiritus .ZEtherisSulphuriciCom-
   pos'itus.   Compound spirit of sulphu-
   ric ether.
     Spiritus Ammo'nije.  Spirit of  am-
   monia.
     Spiritus Ammonije Aromat'icus.—
   Aromatic spirit of ammonia.
  Spiritus Ammonije Fos'tidus.  Fe-
tid spirit of ammonia.
  Spiritus Ammonije Succina'tus.—
Succinated spirit of ammonia.
  Spiritus Anisi.  Spirit of aniseed.
  Spiritus Armora'cije Compos'itus.
Compound spirit of horseradish.
  Spiritus Camphorje.  Spirit of cam-
phor.
  Spiritus Carui.  Spirit of caraway.
  Spiritus Cinnamomi.  Spirit of cin-
namon.
  SpfRiTus Colchici Ammonia'tus.—
Ammoniated spirit of colchicum.
  Spiritus Cornu Cervi.  Subcarbo-
nate of ammonia.
  Spiritus Frumenti.    Spirits dis-
tilled from rye and corn,  as whiskey,
&c.
  Spiritus Gallicus.  French bran-
dy.
  Spiritus Juniperi  Compositus.—
Compound spirit of juniper.
  Spiritus Lavendulje. Spirit of lav-
ender.
  Spiritus Lavendulje Compositus.
Compound spirit of lavender.
  Spiritus Menthje Piperitje.  Spirit
of peppermint.
  Spiritus Menthje  Viridis.  Spirit
of spearmint.
  Spiritus Myris'ti cje . Spirit of nut-
meg.
  Spiritus Nitri Simplex.   DUute
nitrous acid.
  Spiritus Pimen'tje.  Spirit  of pi-
menta.
  Spiritus Pulegii.   Spirit of penny-
royal.
  Spiritus  Rectifica'tus   Alcohol.
Spirit of wine.
  Spiritus Rector.   The aroma of a
plant.
  Spiritus Rosmarini.  Spirit of rose-
mary.
  Spiritus Salis Ammoniaci Causti-
cus.  Aqua ammoniae.
  Spiritus Tenuior.  Dilute alcohol.
  Spiritus Vim  Gallici.   French
brandy.
  Spiritus Vitrioli.   Sulphuric acid. 
SPL
685
SPL
   SPIROID CANAL.  The aquseduc-
 tus Fallopii.
   SPIROPTERA  HOMINIS.    A
 small worm  sometimes found in the
 urine and kidneys.
   SPIROMETER.   From  spiro, I
 breathe, and petpov, a measure.  An in-
 strument for measuring the air inhaled.
   SPISSANTIA.  Incrassantia; that
 Avhich inspissates or thickens.
   SPIT.  Sputum.
   SPITTING OF BLOOD.  Haemop-
 tysis.
   SPITTLE.  Saliva.
   SPITTOON', DENTIST'S. A vase
 or other vessel used by  the dentist to
 receive the sahva or blood which comes
 from the mouth of his patient while he
 is operating.
   SPLANCHNA.  The entrails.
   SPLANCH'NIC.   Splanchnicus ;—
 from artxayxvov, an entrail. Relating to
 the entrails.
   Splanchnic Cavities.  The cavities
 of the abdomen, chest and head.
   Splanchnic Nerves.   These are
 two in number, the greater and lesser;
 the first  arises from the sixth, seventh,
 eighth, ninth, and sometimes the tenth
 thoracic ganglia; the second from the
 tenth and eleventh thoracic ganglia.
   SPLANCH'NICA.    The  second
 order of diseases, class  cozliaca of Dr.
 Good, comprehending those which af-
 fect the abdominal organs, without pri-
 mary inflammation.
  SPLANCHNOG'RAPHY. Splanch-
 nographia; from  artxayxvov,  a viscus,
 and ypa$a, to describe.  The anatomy
 of the viscera.
  SPLANCHNOL'OGY.    Splanch-
 nobgia ; from artxayxvov, a viscus, and
xoyos, a discourse.   A treatise on the
viscera.
  SPLANCH'NON. An intestine, vis-
cus or entrail.
  SPLANCHNOPATHY.  Splanch-
nopathia; from artXayxvov>a viscus, and
rtaOos, disease.  Disease of the intes-
tines.
  SPLANCHNOT'OMY.   Splanch-
        58
 notomia ; from artxayxvov, a viscus, and
 teuva, I cut.  Dissection of the viscera.
   SPLEEN. 'Zrtxriv. A spongy viscus,
 situated below the diaphragm in the
 left hypochondrium,  between the elev-
 enth and tAvelfth false ribs.   Also, hy-
 pochondriasis.
   SPLEENWORT.  Asplenium ce-
 terach.
   SPLENAL'GIA. From artxnv, the
 spleen,  and afcyoj, pain.  Pain in the
 spleen.
  SPLENEMPHRAXTS. FromMX^,
 the  spleen, and eutypaaoa, I obstruct.
 Obstruction of the spleen.
   SPLENETIC.  Spleneticus.    Be-
 longing, or relating, to the spleen.
   SPLENTC.  Relating to the spleen.
   Splenic Artery.  An artery dis-
 tributed to the spleen.
   Splenic Plexus.  A nervous net-
 work, accompanying the splenic ar-
 tery.
   Splenic Vein.   A vein having its
 origin in the spleen, and accompanying
 the splenic artery.
   SPLENITIS.   From ortxyv,  the
 spleen, and itk, a terminal denoting in-
 flammation. Inflammation ofthe spleen.
   SPLE'NIUM. Spleenwort. Also, a
 compress.                /
   SPLE'NIUS.   An oblong, broad,
 flat muscle, situated at the back part of
 the neck and upper part of the back.
   SPLENIZATION. A term applied
 to a morbid  change  of the  lung, in
 which its tissue resembles that of the
 spleen.
   SPLENOCE'LE.  Hernia of  the
 spleen.
   SPLENOG'RAPHY.  Splenogra-
phia;  from anXr\v,  the spleen, and ypa-
$a, a description.  The anatomy of the
 spleen.
  SPLENOHiE'MIA. - From anxnv,
the spleen, and at^ta, blood.   Conges-
tion of the spleen.
  SPLENOL'OGY. Splenologia; from
artxnv, the spleen, and xoyos, a discourse.
A treatise on the spleen.
  SPLENON'CUS. From oratjv, the 
SPO
686
SPO
spleen, and oyxos, a tumor.  Tumefac-1
tion of the spleen.  Ague cake.
  SPLENOT'OMY.  Splenotomia ;—
from artxrtv, the spleen, and teuva, I cut.
Dissection of the spleen.
  SPLINT.  A long piece of  wood,
pasteboard, sheet iron, or leather, em-
ployed in the treatment of fractures, to
keep  the broken  extremities of bones
from moving.
  Splint-Bone. The fibula.
  Splint-Cloth.   A bandage,  con-
sisting of a central portion,  with six or
eight tails.
  SPLINT'ER.  A term applied,  in
 Surgery, to a fragment that  separates
from a fractured or diseased bone. Also,
to a small portion of wood  which has
entered the skin.
   SPLITTING INSTRUMENT, EL-
 LIOT'S IMPROVED.  An  improve-
 ment consisting of bringing the  cutting
 edges of the instrument together at the
 point instead of above, so that the edges
 form the letter V.   By applying the
 force as deep between the roots  as pos-
 sible a perpendicular split is produced.
   SPOD'IUM. An old preparation of
 zinc and other substances.
   Spodium Abaisir.   Metallic oxyds,
 and a preparation of white lead  and oil.
   Spodium Album.  Bone earth.
   Spodium Arabum.  Burned ivory.
   Spodium Grjecorum.   The white
 dung of dogs.
   SPONDYLAL'GIA.   From  artov-
 SvXos, a  vertebra, ond akyos, pain.  Pain
 in the back.
   SPONDYLTUM.   Cow-parsnip.—
 All-heal.
   SPON'DYLUS.  A vertebra.
   SPON'GIA. Sponge. The name of
 a genus of marine zoophytes.
   Spongia  Prjeparata.    Prepared
 sponge.
   Spongia Usta.  Burned  sponge.
   SPON'GIOLE.   Spongiolum; from
 artoyytov, a sponge. A spongelet, or the
 soft  succulent extremity of the capil-
 lary roots in plants,  which absorbs or
 sucks up fluid.
  SPONGOID.  Spongy;  resembling
sponge.
  SPONGOS. The tonsil.
  SPONG'Y.  Spongiosus.  A term ap-
phed to textures resembhng sponge.
  SPONTANEOUS.  From  sponte,
voluntarily.   That which occurs of it-
self, or  Avithout  apparent external
agency or cause.
  SPOONER, JOHN R.   John  R.
Spooner, late surgeon dentist of Mon-
treal, was born in  Troy, N. Y., 1792,
and after having received a liberal edu-
cation, commenced the study of medi-
cine,  and graduated at the Vermont
Academy of Medicine.  His attention
was soon after turned to dental surgery,
and after having obtained all the infor-
mation that was at that time available
upon the subject, he commenced prac-
tice in Utica, New York; from thence
he  went to Buffalo,  and  soon  after to
Montreal, where he  soon  acquired a
justly  deserved  high reputation as a
skilful and scientific practitioner.  This
he  enjoyed, until he was compelled by
ill health to  seek a more genial clime.
   His health having failed him, he
went to the island of Barbadoes, where,
in March, 1839, he died of pulmonary
consumption.
   Dr. J. R. Spooner was the first per-
son to employ arsenious acid to destroy
the nerves of teeth; his object, at  first,
in using it, was to find a substance that
would  not  act  chemically  upon the
teeth.  Dr. Spooner was devotedly at-
tached  to his profession, and  contrib-
 uted much  to the elevation of its dig-
 nity.
   SPOONER,  S.  Author of Guide
 to  Sound Teeth, or a Popular Treatise
 on the Teeth. New York, 1836.  This
 is one of the best popular treatises upon
 the teeth extant.
   SPOONWOOD.  Kalmia latifolia.
   SPORADIC.   Sporadkus;   from
 arteipa, to sow.   A term applied to dis-
 eases which occur in every season and
 locality, from accidental causes.
    SPORE.   Sporule.  The reproduc- 
STA
687
STA
 tive corpuscles contained in the urn of
 the mosses, and aU the cryptogamia.
   SPORID'IUM.   The reproductive
 body of algaceous plants.
   SPORULE.  A spore.
   SPRAIN.  Subluxation; a straining
 or rupturing of the soft parts surround-
 ing a joint.
   SPRAT.  Clupea sprattus.
   SPRUCE.  A  species of fir;  the
 pinus  abies.  Also,  a drink prepared
 from spruce fir.
   SPUMA.  Froth.
   SPUMO'SUS. Frothy.
   SPUNK.   The agaric of the oak;
 touchAVOod boletus.
   SPURGE.  See Euphorbia.
   Spurge-Flax  Daphne gnidium.
   Spurge-Laurel.  Daphne laureola.
   Spurge-Olive. Daphne mezereum.
   SPURRED RYE.   Secale cornu-
 tum.
   SPUTUM. Sputamen;  from sputo,
 to spit.  The secretions ejected from the
 mouth by the act of spitting.  Also, the
 expectorated matter which comes from
 within the chest.
   SQUAMA.  A scale.
   SQUAM.ZE.   Scaly  diseases.  See
 Lepra, Psoriask, Ptyriasis, and Ichthyo-
 sis.
   SQUA'MOUS.   Squamosus;  from
 squama, a scale.  Scaly.
   Squamous  Suture.   The suture
 Avhich unites  the squamous portion of
 the temporal bone with the parietal.
  SQUARRO'SE. Squarrosus. Rough,
 scaly.
  SQUILL.  Squilla.  Scilla mariti-
 ma.
  SQUILLS, VINEGAR OF.   Ace-
 tum scilke.
  SQUINANCY.   Cynanche tonsil-
 laris.
  SQUINT'ING.  Strabismus.
  STACHYS. The name of a genus
 of plants.
  Stachys Fostida.  Ballota nigra.
  Stachys Palustris. Clown's wound-
wort.
  STAFF.    A grooved instrument,
 employed in the operation of lithotomy
 to guide the knife.
   STAGE.  The period or degree of a
 disease, as the  cold, hot, and sweating
 stages of an intermittent.
   STAG'MA.  From  ata^a, I distil.
 Any distilled liquor.
   STAGNATION.  Stagnatio; from
 stagnare, to form a pond.  A  conges-
 tion, or retardation of the fluids in any
 part of the body.
   STAHLIANS.  The followers of
 Stahl.
   STALAGMITIS.  The  name of a
 genus of plants.
   Stalagmitis Cambogioi'des. A spe-
 cies of stalagmitis Avhich yields a kind
 of gamboge.
   STALAGMOS.  Distillation.
   STALTICUS.   From oteXXa,  to
 contract. A  term formerly applied to
 medicines which were supposed to have
 the power of healing.
   STA'MEN.  The male organ of fruc-
 tification in plants, consisting of the an-
 ther and filament.
   STAM'INA.    A  term  applied in
 Physiology, to  the degree of strength
 and vigor in the constitution.
   STAM'MERING.  Stuttering;  im-
 pediment of speech; hesitation in  the
 utterance of words.
   STAN'GOS.  Tin.
   STANNI  MURIAS. Muriate  of
 tin.
   Stanni Pulvis.  Tin  finely divided.
   STAN'NIC ACID.  Peroxyd of tin.
   STANNIOLUM.   Tinfoil.
   STAN'NUM.  Tin.
   StannumFoliatum.  Tinfoil.
   STAPE'DIUS.  A muscle ofthe in-
 ternal ear.
  STAPES.  A  stirrup ; apphed to a
 bone ofthe internal ear.
  STAPHISAGRIA.  Stavesacre.
  STAPHYL^EMATO'MA.  A  tu-
 mor of the uvula formed by an effusion
of blood.
  STAPHYLE.  The uvula.
  STAPHYLI'NUS EXTERNUS.—
A muscle of the palate. 
               STA

  STAPHYLI'TIS.  Inflammation of
the uvula.
  STAPHYLO-PHARYNGEUS.—
The palato-pharyngeus.
  STAPHYLOEDE'MA.  Relaxation
ofthe uvula, either from inflammation
or infiltration.
  STAPHYLO'MA.  From ata^vXr;,
a grape.   A name given to various tu-
mors of the anterior surface of the ball
of the eye.
  Staphyloma Corneje.  Staphyloma
conicum.  A  disease  characterized by
opacity and projection of the cornea.
  Staphyloma of the Iris.  Prolap-
sus iridis.  Hernia of the iris.
  Staphyloma Scleroticje.  A pro-
jection of a portion of the eye on the
sclerotic coat.
  STAPHYLON'CUS. Tumefaction
of the uvula.
  STAPHYLOPLASTY.      From
atafvXt], the uvula, and  rtxaaaa, I form.
An operation for replacing the soft pal-
ate, or any portion of  it,  when lost.
When there only exists an opening in
the palate or velum, this operation may
often be performed with complete suc-
cess, but when the loss of substance is
very  considerable, the  result will be
more doubtful.   Dr.  Pancoast, in his
operative surgery, thus describes the
operation for  closing a hole  near the
centre of the hard palate, which form-
ed a communication between the mouth
and nose, as performed by himself.
  "Two  irregular  quadrilateral flaps
were raised from  the mucous covering
of the side of the roof  of the  mouth.
These were reversed upon the orifice
with  their mucous  surface upAvards,
attached to each other by two points of
interrupted suture, and forced firmly up
against the margin of the bony orifice,
which had previously been made raw
with the knife by  a curved hare-lip pin,
the convexity of  which presented up-
wards and corresponded with that of
the palatine  arch.   The  Avrapping of
the ligature round  the  pin carried the
flaps firmly up against the orifice, so as
8               STA

to facilitate  their adhesion to  the raw
margin of the latter.    The  mucous
membrane of the sides of the flaps was
partially shaved  with a  knife before
they were reflected upwards."
   STAPHYLOR'APHY. From <rra-
fyvXri, the uvula, and pa$»7, a suture. The
operation for  uniting a  cleft  palate,
which consists in paring the edges, pass-
ing  ligatures  through  and  bringing
them together.
   The idea  of this operation  was first
conceived by an ingenious French den-
tist, by the name of Le Monnier, who
attempted, and with success,  to per-
form it, as early as the year 1764.  But
for more than half a century afterwards,
it does not seem to have  attracted any
attention, or to have  been generally
known to the medical profession.  In
1819, however, M.  Roux, a celebrated
French surgeon, and author of an able
memoir upon the subject, published in
1825, performed the operation upon Dr.
Stephens a young American physician/
In 1820, it was performed for  the first
time in the United States, by Dr. J. C.
Warren, of Boston,  and in 1822 in
England, by Mr. Alcock.-)-   Now, it
is classed among the regular operations
of surgery.
   As the success  of  the operation de-
pends in a great  degree upon the con-
sent of the patient, he should, as a gene-
ral rule, have attained a sufficient age to
enable him to appreciate its importance,
before it is performed.  Dr. Hullihen,
however, a scientific dentist of Wheel-
ing, Va. says, he has performed the
operation with success on a child of nine

  * We are informed, however, by  Velpeau,
in his Elements of Operative Surgery, p. 428,
that M. Colombe performed the operation on
a dead snbject in 1813, and in 1815 endeavor.
ed to prevail on a patient to permit him to re-
peat it, but without success.  In  1817, loo,
M. Graefe published in Hufeland's Journal,
some details concerning it, but the subject
elicited no interest until M. Roux performed
the operation in 1819.
  f Vide Dr. Reese's Appendix to Cooper's
Surgical Dictionary.
66 
               STA                6*

 years of age, but the author is of the opin-
 ion, that it is generally better to defer it
 until after the fifteenth or sixteenth year,
 and the natural excitability of the parts
 should be, previously, as much lessen-
 ed as possible, by frequently touching
 and moving them about with the finger.
 This should be done several times a day
 for, at least, two weeks before the opera-
 tion is attempted, and during this time,
 the patient  should be  restricted to a
 spare diet.
   The  operation of staphyloraphy, or
 velosynthesis,  consists in removing the
 margins of  the divided velum with a
 pair of  curved scissors, as recommend-
 ed by M. Roux, or  a double-edged
 knife,  and holding the  raw  edges in
 contact with each other until a union
 takes place.
   A multiplicity  of ingeniously con-
 trived instruments have been invented
 for the performance  of  the  operation,
 but all that are reaUy necessary, are, a
 sharp hook, a double-edged knife, short
 curved needles, a needle-holder, (jporte-
 aiguilk,) strong waxed ligatures, a pair
 of long-handled  curved forceps,  and
 scissors; other instruments, may, in
 some cases, be required.  In  addition
 to the above, water, towels, and one or
 more assistants, will be needed.
   Thus prepared, the   patient, after
 having been previously submitted to the
 necessary preparatory treatment, should
 be placed in  a chair facing a  good
 light, with his head firmly supported
 by an  assistant, and his mouth open,
 the operation may be  commenced, by
 inserting the hook into the margin of
 the velum near its most dependent part,
 on the left side of the fissure. ,.Tlus in-
 strument, held by an assistant, should
 be depressed so as to make the margin
 slightly tense.  The point of the double-
edged knife should now be  placed be-
low  the most  dependent part  of the
velum, a httle  to  the left of where the
hook is  inserted,  and carried from be-
low upwards, until it has reached the
angle  of the fissure, removing about
        58*
19                STA

 one line of the  margin.  This opera-
 tion  may  be repeated on the oppo-
 site side of the fissure, or by changing
 the knife from  the  right  to  the left
 hand, and directing the assistant  hold-
 ing the hook to pass his hand  "across,
 and a little above, the face of the pa-
 tient," in the manner as described  by
 Dr. Mutter, so as to keep up a  constant
 traction upon  the  strip  of  mucous
 membrane removed  by the first cut,
 the right margin of the fissure may be
 made tense, and  the  knife  carried from
 above  downwards,  completing,  by a
 single incision, the Avhole of this part
 of the operation.
   Dr. S. P. Hulhhen, an eminent den-
 tist of Wheeling,  Va., who has per-
 formed the operation eleven times with
 success,  has  invented a  bistoury  for
 pairing the edges, which possesses de-
 cided advantages  over the  common
 double-edged knife.  It is  composed of
 two parts, which open like scissors, but
 when closed, forms a double-edge knife
 or bistoury. The  manner  of  using it,
 is  as follows:  after first seizing the
 cleft  edge of the velum at  the base of
 the uvula,  with  a pair of curved for-
 ceps, and putting it  on the stretch, the
 bistoury,  with its back towards and
 against the palate bone, should be push-
 ed through the  velum near its edge ;
 then, by opening  it, the edge wiU be
 paired  off in the most even and per-
 fect manner possible.
   Further  procedure  should  be sus-
 pended  until  the  hemorrhage, though
 seldom  very great, shall have  partially
 subsided.    A needle, armed  with a
 well waxed ligature, and held in a pair
 of suitable forceps,  should be passed
 from  before backwards through the
 most dependent part  of the left margin,
 about three  lines from the edge.  As
 soon as it is seen on  the opposite side,
 it should be grasped by the  assistant
 with a  pair of  long-handled  forceps,
 and as soon as the hold  of the porte-
 aiguille, is relaxed, drawn through, re-
 placed in the latter, and passed through
19 
STA
690
STA
 from behind forwards, the  right mar-
 gin of the velum opposite  to the liga-
 ture in the left.   After the patient  has
 rested a few minutes, a second, a third,
 and, when  necessary, a fourth ligature
 should be introduced.
   The ligature first introduced  should
 now be tied, bringing the edges of the
 velum close together, and,  afterwards,
 the  second and  third, cutting  off the
 ends of each.  After the first knot of
 the  ligature is  tied, some  precaution
 should be  used  to  prevent this from
 slipping, while the second is tied.  The
 method adopted by M. Roux for knot-
 ting the ligature is, to make the first
 fold of the knot with the fore-fingers of
 each hand  placed back to  back, and
 after this  has been  draAvn  sufficiently
 tight, it is seized  by  an assistant  with a
 pair of forceps, and  held until the sec-
 ond  and last turn of the knot is made.
   Some surgeons use two  needles for
 each ligature—one at each end, and in-
 troduce them from behind forwards—
 one  through each margin of the divid-
 ed velum,  instead  of  one, as  in  the
 method just described.
   The needle-holder,  or  "porte"  of
 SchAverdt, is thought to be as well adapt-
 ed to the.purpose as any instrument that
 can be employed.  Dr. Physic's forceps
 have also  been used, but Dr. Mutter
 thinks  Schwerdt's a preferable instru-
 ment.
  After the operation has  been per-
 formed, the patient  should be directed
 to keep his mouth closed, maintain per-
 fect quiet;  avoid  coughing,  sneezing,
 or even spitting, and the use  of all solid
 food.  Nor should he take but very lit-
 tle fluid aliment,  and this only at long
 intervals.  For appeasing the cravings
 of the hunger Avith which some suffer,
 Dr. Mutter recommends "thin calf's-foot
jelly, or what is known as cold custard
 slip," as the best  nourishment that can
 be used, but he thinks  neither should
 be given until after the second or third
 day after the operation has  been per-
 formed.
   In the performance of the operation
 of staphyloraphy,  however,  different
 surgeons employ different instruments,
 and adopt  different methods of proce-
 dure.  Professor N. R. Smith, of Balti-
 more, who has performed the operation
 five times, and in three  cases with per-
 fect success,  employs  a very simple
 needle, of a lance shape, mounted on a
 handle, and having a slit near its point,
 which opens at its posterior end.  The
 needle  is broader in front  of the  eye
 than behind it, which renders the pas-
 sage ofthe back part more easy. Arm-
 ed Avith a ligature,  the  curved  portion
 of the needle is carried  beyond the fis-
 sure, and its point  introduced "behind
 the middle of the uvula," and as soon
 as it has come through  far enough to
 expose the ligature in the slit, it "is
 taken hold of Avith a tenaculum, disen-
 gaged  from the slit or  eye  in the nee-
 dle," when "the  latter instrument is
 withdrawn." A second ligature, in like
 manner, is  introduced  "half an inch
 higher  up," and a third, if necessary,
 "at an equal distance from the second.
 With the ends of the ligature passed
 through the  uvula, this part is drawn
 fonvards," until the fissure in the soft
 palate shall assume nearly a "horizontal
 position,"  its  edges  are then  cut off
 with a "pair of scissors, either straight
 or curved, laterally," or with a bistoury
 and a pair of forceps. This done,  the
 ligatures are tied, and the ends then cut
 off-.*
   Dr. J. C. Warren, of Boston, who
 has performed the operation a number
 of times, uses a needle of bis own in-
 vention with a movable  point.  Dr. J.
 M. Warren, son of Dr. J. C, has also
 performed the  operation a  number of
 times,  and with very  great  success.
 When the fissure extends up  into the
 hard palate,  he dissects  the  mucous
 membrane from the bones on each side,
 carrying his  knife sufficiently forward

  * Vide Appendix to Cooper's Surgical Dic-
tionary, by Dr. Reese, p. 126. 
STA
691
STA
towards the alveolar border to form a
flap broad  enough to meet a like one
from the opposite side, along the me-
dian line.
  Dr. S. P. Hullihen has invented an
acutenaculum for this operation, which
the author believes possesses  decided
advantages over  every  other needle-
holder that has  been employed,  as it
enables the operator to hold the velum
with the point of the needle, as  with
a tenaculum, until he satisfies himself
where the  stitch  should be.  By this
means the stitches may always be in-
serted the  proper  distance from  the
edge of the velum and on both  sides
directly opposite to each other—a mat-
ter of great importance in the success-
ful  treatment  of  cleft-palate.  See
Acutenaculum, Hullihen's.
   When the fissure  is so  wide  as to
prevent the margins of the velum from
being brought together.  Dr. Mettauer,
of Virginia, recommends making sev-
eral lateral  incisions  through the mu-
cous membrane, Avith a view to increase
the extent of the velum, and  thus per-
mit their edges to b.e  brought  together.
Mr. Fergusson proposes, for the  more
easy  and perfect  accomplishment of
this  end, the division of the levator-
palati, the palato-pharyngeus, and the
palato-glossus muscles.  The motory
influence  of the  muscles, in an up-
ward, outward.,  and doAvnward direc-
tion, being thus, for a time, cut off, he
believes the motory power of the soft
palate will be  so much destroyed, that
the edges of the fissure may be brought
together.*
  For supplying a deficiency of struc-
ture, Dieffenbach recommends a longi-
tudinal  incision a short distance  from
the margin of the fissure, he has per-
formed  the operation in  two  cases,
with complete success.  Dr. Mutter, of
Philadelphia, who has  been very suc-
cessful in the operation, has also had

  * Vide Medico-Chirurgical  Transactions,
vol. 28.
recourse to these lateral longitudinal
incisions, with the  most  happy  re-
sults.*
  When the inflammation, which fol-
lows  the operation, is  very severe, it
should  be  combated  by general and
local  bleeding, and such  other anti-
phlogistic means as the nature of the
case may seem to demand.  When the
inflammation is accompanied by cough,
Dr. Mutter  recommends the adminis-
tration  of opiates.  The same  author
recommends, in case  sloughing of the
parts takes place, the application, with
a camel's-hair  pencil, of a solution of
nitrate  of  silver,  or  a  mixture  of
creasote and water, "three or four times
a day."
  It often happens, that an opening re-
mains in the palate after the velum has
been successfully united.   This may,
sometimes,  be closed by the  granula-
tion of the  edges of the cleft, which
may be  induced  by making them raw
by  the  application  of caustics or the
actual cautery.  Dieffenbach  has em-
ployed,  with  success,  a concentrated
tincture of cantharides,  applied several
times a day to the edges of the open-
ing.f  By  some, the actual cautery is
preferred, but  if  this latter be used, it
should  only be heated  sufficiently to
blister the parts.J  The nitrate of silver
and potassa pura have been used,  but
there is danger of causing a greater loss
of substance by the use of these pow-
erful caustics than can be gained by the
granulations which they induce.  The
actual cautery  is  preferable.
  STAPHYLOSIS. Staphyloma.
  STAR-ANISE.  Illicium anisatum.
  Star-Grass.  Star-biasing.   Aletris
farinosa.
  Star-Like.  Stellate.
  Star-Shoot.  Tremella nostoc.

  •Vide  Liston  and Mutter's Surgery, p.
204.
  fVide  British  and Foreign  Medical Re.
view, for April, 1846.
  fVide  Dr. Hullihen  on  Cleft Palate, in
Am. Jour, Dental Science, vol. 5, p. 473. 
STE
692
STE
  Star-Thistle.  Carlina acauhs.
  STARCH.  Amylum.
  STARKEY'S SOAP. Sapo terebin-
thinae.
  STA'SIS.  From ataa, I  stop.  In
Pathobgy, a nearly stagnant  condition
of the fluids.
  STAT'ICE.  The name of a genus
of plants.
  Statice Carolinia'na. Marsh rose-
mary.
  Statice  Limo'nium.   Red behen;
sea-thrift; sea-lavender.
  STATTCS. That part of physical
science which treats ofthe forces which
keep bodies at rest. It is the converse
of dynamics.
  STATION.  Statio ;  from stare, to
stand. In Physiology, the act of stand-
ing.   In Zoobgy, and Botany, the hab-
itation of animals and plants.
  STATIONARY. Stationarius; from
stare, to stand.  A name given by Sy-
denham, to certain diseases which pre-
vail in a place for a number of years.
  STATISTICS, MEDICAL.   Vital
statktics.  The detail of  facts connect-
ed with the  deaths,  births,  salubrity,
&,c, of different places.
  STATUS. A state or condition.
  Status Nervosus.   Nervous diathe-
ses.
  STAVESACRE.  Delphinum sta-
phisagria.
  STEAM.  The vapor of water at a
high temperature.
  STEAR.  Sevum; fat.
  STEARNS, CHARLES W.   Au-
thor of a Paper on Congenital Fissure
of the Palate, Articulation and Impedi-
ments of Speech; published in the Lon-
don  Lancet and  republished  in  the
seventh volume ofthe American Jour-
nal of Dental Science.   In this paper
Mr. Stearns describes a very ingenious-
ly contrived artificial palate and velum,
invented  by himself.    See  Artificial
Palate.
  STEATOCE'LE.  From ateap, fat,
and xrjXri, a tumor.  A fatty tumor.
  STEATO'MA.   From' ateap,  fat.
An encysted tumor, the  contents of
which are of a fatty nature.
  STEATOSIS  CORDIS.    Fatty
heart;  a preternatural deposition of fat
on  the heart, or fatty degeneration of
this organ.
  STEEL.  Chalybs.  Iron combined
with carbon.
  STEGNO'SIS.   From ateyvoa, I
constrict.  Constriction; constipation;
suppression ofthe evacuations.
  STELENGIS. Stridor dentium.
  STEL'LA.  A star.   Also, a band-
age crossing like an X.
  STELOCHITIS.  Osteocolla.
  STEM.  The body of a tree, shrub,
or plant.   Also, the peduncle  of the
fructification, or the pedicle of a flower;
that Avhich supports  the flower or fruit.
  STEM'MATA.   From stemma, a
stem.  A term applied to the minute
eyes of worms, and to those which are
added to the large compound eyes.
  STEM A. The penis.
  STENOTHORAX.   One  with a
narrow chest.
  STENTOROPHO'NUS.  One who
has a strong voice.
  STEPHANE.  Crown.
  STERA.  The uterus.
  STERCORA'CEOUS.  Stercorari-
us ; from stercus, dung.   Of the nature
of, or relating, to excrement.
  STERCUS.  Excrement.
  STERELMINTHA..    Sterelmin-
tluins; from atepeos, solid,  and eXuivs,
an intestinal worm.  A name applied to
intestinal worms which  have no true
abdominal cavity, but   composed of
parenchymatous substance, as the tape
Avorm.
  STEREOT'ICA.   From   atepeos,
hard.   Lesions  or  deformities  of the
hard parts; an order of diseases in the
class tychica, of Dr. Good.
  STERIL'ITY. Sterilitas;  from ste-
rilk, barren.  The condition of an ani-
mal, or plant, not capable of procreat-
ing its species, or producing fruit.
  STER'NAL.  Pertaining to the ster- 
STH               693                STI
  STERNAL'GIA.   Angina  pecto-
 ris.
  STERNO-CLAVIC'ULAR. Relat-
 ing to the sternum and clavicle.
  Sterno-Clavicular Articulation.
 The union ofthe sternum with the cla-
 vicle.
  Sterno-Cleido-Mastoideus.    A
 muscle  situated  on the anterior and
 lateral part of the neck.
  Sterno-Costales.   From  three to
 six muscles, situated at each side of the
 lower surface ofthe sternum.
  Sterno-Hyoideus.  A long flat mus-
 cle, situated at the anterior  part of the
 neck, between the sternum and os hyo-
 ides.
  Sterno-Tyroideus.  A  long, broad
 and flat muscle,  situated at the ante-
 rior part of the neck, between the ster-
 num and thyroid  cartilage.
  STERNODYNIA SYNCOPIALIS.
 Angina  pectoris.
  STER'NUM.   Sternon;  from atep-
 pos, solid.  Breast  bone.  An oblong,
 flat bone, situated at the fore part of the
 chest.
  STERNUTAMENTUM. Sneezing.
  STERNUTAMENTO'RIA.
 Sneeze-wort, or bastard pellitory.
  STERNUTATIO.  Sneezing.
  STERNUTATORY.   Sternutato-
 rius;  from sternutare, to  sneeze.   A
 substance which provokes sneezing.
  STERTOR. From stertere, to'snore.
 The deep  snoring which,  sometimes,
 accompanies respiration in disease, par-
 ticularly apoplexy.
  STETH'OSCOPE. Stethoscopium;
 from att}9os, the chest, and axortea, I ex-
 amine.  A hollow cylinder,  made  of
 fine-grained wood, as  cedar, or maple,
 invented by Laennec, to assist ausculta-
 tion.
  STHENI'A.  From oOevos, strength;
 power.  Excess  of rigidity of the ani-
 mal tissues ; excess of vital action.
  STHENIC.  Slhenicus.  Inflamma-
tory ;  active ; also, applied to diseases
which arise from  preternatural excita-
bility.
  STIBPALIS.   Pertaining to anti-
mony ;  antimonial.
  STIBII ESSENTIA.  Antimonial
wine.
  STIBIUM.  Antimony.
  STIG'MA. From  ati£a, to prick or
brand. In Pathology, a small red speck
on the skin.  Also, naevus  maturnus.
In Botany, the female organ,  situated
at the summit of the  ovary, or of the
style, where it exists.
  STIG'MATA.     From  otiyua, a
mark.  The breathing pores in  the bod-
ies of insects; the spiracles.
  STILBOMA.  A cosmetic.
  STILL.   A vessel,  or boiler, em-
ployed in the disttilation of liquors.
  STILLICID'IUM.   From stillare, to
drop.  Literally, a dropping;  applied,
in Pathology, to strangury, or  the dis-
charge of urine, drop by drop.
  STILLIN'GIA.    The  name of a
genus of plants.
  Stillin'gia Sylvat'ica.  Queen's-
root.
  STIMATO'SIS. Stymatosis.
  STIM'MI. Antimony.
  STIM'ULANT.    Stimulans ; from
stimulare, to goad.  A  medicine which
is capable of exciting the organic action
of the different systems of the econ-
omy.  Stimulants may be general,  or
local; diffusible, or permanent.   When
general, they affect the whole  system ;
when  local, only  a  particular part;
diffusible, are those which act promptly
but  temporarily ; the permanent, act
more slowly, and their effects continue
much longer.
  STIM'ULUS.   Any  thing  which
excites the  animal economy generaUy,
or the action of a part.
  STIPE.   The base  of a frond; a
species  of  stem  passing into  a leaf.
Also, the stem of a fungus.
  STI'PULE.  Slipub. A leafy  ap-
pendage  to  the proper  leaves,  or  to
their footstalks, but are usually at the
base of the latter.
  STI'PULAR.  Belonging to, or re-
sembling, stipules. 
STO              694               STR
  STITCH.   In  Pathobgy, a sharp
spasmodic pain in the side.
  STLENGIS. Stridor dentium.
  STOCKING, LACED.  A stocking
made of firm cloth in such  a  way as
to admit of being laced.
  STO'LON.  A runner or shoot, pro-
ceeding horizontally from a plant.
  STOLONIF'EROUS.  Putting forth
stolons.
  STOMA. The mouth.
  STOMAC'ACE.   From atoua, the
mouth, and xaxos, evil.  Cancrum oi-k.
Canker of the  mouth.  See Cancrum
Oris, and Gangrena Oris.
  STOMACH.    Stomachus;  from
otopa, the mouth, and x^, to pour. A
musculo-membranous receptacle,  con-
tinuous with the oesophagus, and sit-
uated in the epigastric region beneath
the diaphragm, between the liver and
spleen.
  Stomach Disease.  Limosis.
  Stomach Pump.  An instrument for
conveying water and bland nutritious
fluids to  the stomach in cases of im-
peded  deglutition, and for  removing
poisonous fluids from it.
  STOMACHIC. Stomachicus. That
which strengthens or gives tone to the
stomach.
  STOMACHUS. The stomach.
  STOMAL'GIA. From atfo^a, mouth,
and  aXyos, pain. Pain in the mouth.
  STOMAT'IC.  Stomaticus.   A me-
dicine  used in diseases of the mouth, as
a dentifrice, or masticatory.
  STOMATITIS.   From  atoua, the
mouth, and itk,  a  suffix,  denoting
inflammation.   Inflammation  of the
mouth.
  STOMATO-GASTRIC.  From ato-
ua, a mouth,  and yaatep,  a stomach.
A term applied to  the system of nerves
principally distributed upon the stom-
ach and intestines.
  STOMATOPA'NUS.  From atoua,
the mouth, and rtavos, a glandular tu-
mor.   Tumefaction of the glands of
the mouth.
  STOMATOPHY'MA.  From atoua,
the mouth,  and $vua, a sweUing.  A
swelling in the mouth.
  STOMATOPLASTY. Fromcr^a,
the mouth, and rtxaaaa, I  form.  The
operation of forming a  mouth, as in
cases Avhere the  aperture  is closed or
contracted.
  STOMATORRHAGIA.     From
atoua, the mouth, and prjywui, I break
out.  Hemorrhage from the mouth.
  STOMATO'SCOPE. From atoua,
the mouth, and  axortea, I view.   A
speculum oris; an instrument for keep-
ing the mouth open, so as to permit an
examination of the parts Avithin.
  STONE  IN THE BLADDER.-
Calculi, vesical.
  Stone Crop.  Sedum acre.
  Stone Pock.  Acne indurata.
  Stone  Root.    Collinsonia cana-
densis.
  STORAX.  Styrax.
  Storax Liquida.  Liquidambar sty-
raciflua.
  Storax Ruera Officina'lis.  Cas-
carilla bark.
  Storax, White. Peruvian balsam.
  STOREY'S WORM CAKES. An
empirical preparation, composed, prin-
cipally, of calomel and jalap.
  STORKBILL.   Geranium macu-
latum.
  STOUT, J. B. Author of a Lecture
on the  Physiology, Pathology and Nat-
ural History of the Teeth, dehvered be-
fore the New York Society of Dental
Surgeons, and of an article on the Teeth,
published in  the first  volume of the
Dental Intelligencer.
  STRABIS'MUS. From otpa8i£a, to
squint.   Squinting.   An  affection of
the eyes, characterized by  a defect of
parallelism in the axis of vision, occa-
sioned  by a shortness of  one  of the
muscles of the eye-ball.
  STRABOSITAS.  Strabismus.
  STRABOT'OMY. Strabotomia; from
otpafio$, one who squints, and tout, in-
cision.   The operation of  dividing the
muscle or muscles that distort the eye,
for the removal of strabismus. 
STR
695
STR
  STRAMO'NIUM.  Dartura stramo-
nium.
  STRANGA'LIS.  A hard  tumor in
the breast,  arising from obstruction of
the flow of milk.
  STRANGULATION.   Strangula-
tio.   Constriction;  obstruction of  the
air passages;  suffocation; contraction
of an opening  which has given passage
to a portion of intestine, so as to pre-
vent its return.
  Strangulation,  Uterine.  Hyste-
ria.
  STRAN'GURY. Stranguria; from
sfpayl,  a  drop, and  ovpov, urine.—
Difficulty, accompanied  by  heat  and
pain, in passing  the urine, which  es-
capes, drop by drop.
  STRASBURG.   Dissertation upon
Odontalgia, by.  Regiomonti,  1651.
  STRATUM.   A layer.
  STRAWBERRY.  Fragaria vesca
and Virginiana.
  STREITHEIN.    Dissertation  on
Dentition, by  Altd., 1638.—New  and
Secret  Experiments for Preserving the
Beauty of the Teeth, by.  Haye, 1706.
  STREM'MA. From atpefa, to turn.
A sprain.
  STRENGTH.  Vigor; a tonic state
of the tissues  of the body.
  STREPITO'SUS MORBUS. A dis-
ease of the Austrian  Alps,  in which
emphysematous tumors arise  on differ-
ent parts of the body, which  crepitate,
and are accompanied by a sonorous es-
cape of gas from the mouth and anus.
  STREPSIPTERA. Strepsipterans;
from atperttos,  twisted,  and rttepov, a
Aving.  An order of insects possessing
rudimental  elytera  in the form of spi-
rally twisted scales.
  STRIATE.    Striatus.    Scored;
grooved; marked with long lines.
  STRICTURE.   Strktura;  from
stringcre, stricilum, to tie hard.  A con-
tracted state  of some tube or duct of
the body, as  the urethra, oesophagus,
or intestines.
  STRIDOR  DENTIUM.   Grince-
mcnt des dents;  brygmus.   Grinding
of the  teeth; a common" symptom in
children affected with  worms  or gas-
tric derangement, during  sleep.  It is
also a symptom of some cerebral affec-
tions.
  STRIGIL.  Strigilus. A flesh brush.
  STROBELBERGER.    Disserta-
tion on Podagra and Tooth-Ache, by.
Leipsic, 1630.
  STROB'IL.  Strobilus.  An ament,
the carpels of which are  scale-like,
spread open and bear naked seeds, as
the fruit ofthe pines.
  STROBILIFORM.   Strobiliformk.
Shaped like a strobil, or cone.
  STRON'GYLUS  GIGAS.  A long
worm, with a flat,  obtuse  head, some-
times found in the human kidney.
  STRONTIA.  An earth  composed
of oxygen and a base called  strontium.
When dry, it is white and  resembles
baryta in many of its properties.
  STRONTIUM.  The metallic base
ofstrontia, and very similar to barium.
  STROPHOS.  Tormina.
   STROPHULUS.  Red gum or red
gown; white gum;  tooth-rash.   A dis-
ease peculiar to infants, and  character-
ized by a  cutaneous eruption of red,
and sometimes whitish, pimples, occur-
ring, most commonly,  about the  face,
neck and arms.  It  is distinguished by
Dr. Willan into  five species. 1. Stro-
phulus intertinctus, or  red gum, or red
gown ; 2.  Strophulus albidus, or white
gum;  3.  Strophidus confertus, denomi-
nated the tooth-rash, or rank  red gum ;
4. Strophulus volaticus, characterized by
clusters of papulae, appearing succes-
sively on  different parts  of the body,
and  of a deep  red color. 5.  Strojihulus
candidus,  consisting of large, shining
papula;, which appear  whiter than the
adjacent cuticle.
   STRUCTURE.  Structura;  from
struere, structum,  to build.   The ar-
rangement of the organic elements of
animals and plants.  Also, a texture.
   STRUMA.  In  Pathology, a term
generally applied  to scrofula.   Also,
bronchocele. 
STY
696
STY
  STRU'MCUS.  Stnimosus.  Scrofu-
lous.
  STRUTHIUM.  Masterwort.
  STRYCH'NIA. Strychnine.
  STRYCH'NINE.  Strychnina.  An
inodorous, bitter, solid, crystalline alka-
loid, obtained from strychnos nux vom-
ica.  It is exceedingly poisonous.
  STRYCHNOMAN'IA. Fromo-fpv*-
>/oj, nightshade and  j&oria,  madness.
Madness produced  by eating deadly
nightshade.
  STRYCH'NOS.   The name of a
genus of plants.
  Strychnos Columbrina.  A  tree of
the East Indies.  It yields the lignum
columbrinum, which contains strychnia.
  Strychnos Nux Vomica.  The tree
which  yields the poison nut; nux vo-
mica.
  Strychnos Sancti Ignatii. Ignatia
 amara.
  Strychnos Tieut'e. The tree  which
 produces the upas tkute, a strong Java
 poison.
  Strychnos Toxif'era.  This yields
the active agent of the ourari or woorari
 poison of Guayana.
  STUN'NED. Laboring under a con-
 cussion ofthe  brain.
  STUPE.  Stuppa.
  STUPEF A'CI ENT.  Slupcfaciens;
 from stupefacio, to stupefy. That Avhich
 stupefies; a narcotic.
   STU'POR.  From stupeo, to be sense-
 less.  Diminished sensibility to  exter-
 nal impressions,  often  amounting  to
 lethargy.
   STUP'PA.   A stupe; a piece  of
 cloth, or tow,  soaked  in a warm Uquid
 and applied to a part of the body.
   STUPRUM.  A rape.
   STURGEON.  Acipensor sturio.
   STUTTERING.  Defective speech;
 a high degree of stammering.
   STYE.  Hordeolum.            "*
   STYLIFORM.  Styliformk.  Style,
 or rod-shaped. A term applied, in An-
 atomy, to processes of bone.
    STYLO-CERATO-HYOIDEUS.
 Stylo-hyoideus.
  Stylo-Chondro-Hyoideus.  Stylo-
hyoideus.
  Stylo-Glossus.  A muscle situated
between the lower jaw and os hyoides,
at the anterior and upper  part of the
neck. Its use is to raise the tongue and
draw it backwards.
  Stylo-Hyoideus. A muscle situated
at the  anterior, lateral,  and superior
part of the neck.  Its use is to raise
the os hyoides  and carry it backwards
and to one side.
  Stylo-Mastoid Foramen.  A fora-
men between  the  styloid and mastoid
processes  of  the  temporal bone.   It
gives passage to the portia dura of the
auditory nerve, and to the stylo-mastoid
artery.
  Stylo-Pharyngeus.   A muscle sit-
uated at the anterior and lateral part of
the neck.  Its  use is to dilate and raise
the pharynx, and carry it backwards.
  STYLOID  PROCESS.   A long,
slender process of the temporal bone,
which gives  attachment to the stylo-
glossus, stylo-pharyngeus, and stylo-
hyoideus muscles.
  STYLUS.   A  style; a pencil.   In
Surgery, a probe.   In Botany, the shaft
of a flower.
  STYMATO'SIS.   From atva,  to
have a priapism.   Hemorrhage of the
penis, accompanied by erection.
  STYPSIS.  Constriction; constipa-
tion.
  STYPTERIA.  Alum.
   STYPTIC. Stypticus;  from atv$a,
to constringe.   A remedy which pos-
sesses the property of constringing the
animal  tissues, and  of arresting hem-
orrhage.
   STY'RAX. The name of a genus
 of  plants.
   Styrax Alba.  Myroxylon peruife-
 rum.
   Styrax Benzoin.  The tree which
 affords the gum benzoin.
   Styrax Calami'ta. Storax in  the
 cane.
   Styrax Colata. Strained storax.
   Styrax Lkiuida.  Liquidambar. 
SUB
697
SUB
   Styrax  Officinalis.   The tree
 which yields the solid storax.
   Styrax Rubra.  Red storax ; storax
 in the tear.
   STY'ROLE.  The essential  oil of
 storax.
   SUB-.  A prefix, signifying beneath.
   SUBARCHNOIDE'AN FLUID.—
 The serous fluid between the arachnoid
 membrane and pia mater.
   SUBCARBONAS  POTASSAE.—
 Carbonate of potash,
   SUBCAR'BONATE. Subcarbonas.
 A carbonate  capable  of neutralizing
 more acid, or one in  which the base
 predominates.
   SUBCHLORIDE  OF  MERCU-
 RY. Calomel.
   SUBCLA'VIAN.  Subclaviculus ;—
 from sub, under, and cbvicub, the clav-
 icle.  That which is  under the clavicle.
   Subclavian Arteries. The arteries
 which pass under the clavicle  to the
 axilla. There is one on each side. The
 right arises from the arteria innominata,
 and the left, from the arch of  the aorta.
   Subclavian Veins. These veins are
 two in number, one on each side; they
 are continuations  of the axtilary, and
 terminate in the vena cava superior.
   SUBCLA'VIUS.   A muscle on the
 anterior and superior part of the thorax.
   SUBCRUR^EI. Tavo small muscu-
 lar slips sometimes under the cruraeus.
   SUBCRUENTUS.  From sub, and
 cruentus, bloody.  Having somewhat
 the appearance of blood.  A term ap-
 plied to certain excretions which  are
 mixed with, or have the appearance of
 blood.
   SUBCUTA'NEOUS.   From  sub,
 under, and cutk, the skin. That which
 is  situated immediately under the skin.
   Subcutaneous Glands.   Gbnduloz
 subcutanece.  The sebaceous and  sudo-
 riparous glands,  the excretory ducts of
 which perforate the skin.
  SUBDIAPHRAGMATIC PLEX-
 US.  A plexus  formed by  the  solar
plexus; it distributes its branches to the
diaphragm.
        59
   SUBER.  The bark of the quercus
 suber, or cork tree.
   SUBINFLAMMATION.   A very
 mild degree of inflammation, or slight
 arterial excitation.  Broussais  defines
 it to be an augmentation of the vital
 phenomena of the lymphatic system.
  SUBINTRANTES FEBRIS. From
 sub, under, and intrare, to enter. Inter-
 mittents, the  paroxysms of which are
 so near together, that one begins before
 that which has preceded it,  has com-
 pleted its stages.
  SUBLIMAMENTUM.  Any sub-
 stance  which  hangs  or floats in the
 urine as it cools.
  SUBLIMATION. Sublimatio; from
 sublimo, I raise up.   The operation by
 which  solid matters  are volatilized by
 heat, and again condensed  into a solid
 form.
   SUBLI'MIS.  A  name given to cer-
 tain muscles,  from  their  being more
 superficially situated than their kindred
 muscles.
  SUBLIN'GUAL.   Sublingualis ;—
 from sub, under, and lingua, the tongue.
 Apphed to parts situated under  the
 tongue.
  Sublingual  Artery.   An  artery,
 sometimes  considered a branch of the
 lingual, traversing the anterior border of
 the hyo-glossus muscle, to  be distribut-
 ed to the sublingual gland and to the
 muscles of the tongue.  It also  sends a
 branch to the framum linguae.
  Sublingual Glands.  These are the
 smallest  of the  salivary glands;  are
 situated beneath the anterior and lateral
 parts of the  tongue,  resting on  the
 mylo-hyoid muscle, and covered by the
 mucous  membrane.   They consist of
 a granular structure,  with excretory
 ducts, which  enter  the cavity  of the
 mouth through the mucous membrane
 between the tongue and inferior cuspid
 and bicuspid  teeth,  by several open-
ings.
  SUBLUXATION.  Subluxatio.  A
sprain.
  SUBMAXILLARY. Suhnaxilbris; 
SUB               698               SUC
from sub, under, and maxilla, the jaw.
Situated beneath the jaw.
  Submaxillary Ganglion. A small
nervous ganghon, formed of the vidian
nerve, and situated at the posterior part
of the submaxiUary gland.
  Submaxillary Gland.  The max-
iUary gland.
  SUBMENTAL. Submentalk; from
sub, under, and mentum, the chin.  Sit-
uated under the chin.
  Submental Artery.  A small ar-
tery, given off by the facial, near the
base of the jaw.  It divides near the
median  line, and is  distributed  to the
muscles of the chin.
  Submental Vein.  The vein which
accompanies the submental artery.
  SUBMER'SION.   Submersio; from
sub,  under, and  mergere, mersum, to
plunge.   The act of plunging under
water; drowning.
  SUBMU'RIAS.   A submuriate; a
chloride.
  Submurias Hydrargyri.  Calomel.
  SUBOR'BITAR.    Infra-orbitar.—
From sub, under, and orbita, the orbit.
That  which  is situated beneath  the
orbit of the eye.
  Suborbitar Artery.  The infra-or-
bitar artery.
  Suborbitar  Foramen.  The infra-
orbitar foramen.
  Suborbitar  Nerve.   The infra-or-
bitar nerve; a branch of the fifth pair.
  SUBROTUND.  Nearly round.
  SUBSCAPULAR.  Subscapubris;
from  sub, under,   and  scapub,  the
shoulder blade.  That which is situa-
ted beneath the scapula.
  Subscapular Muscle.  A  muscle
situated under the scapula.
  SUBSIDENTIA.  Sediment.
  SUBSTANTIA.  A substance.
  Substantia Adamantina Dentium.
The enamel of the teeth.
  Substantia Ostoidea.    A  name
given by Purkinje and Frankel to the
crusta petrosa, or  cementum of  the
teeth.
  Substantia Filamentosa Dentium.
A  name  given by  Malpighi  to the
enamel of the teeth.
  Substantia  Ossea Dentium.   A
name given by Malpighi to tooth-bone.
  Substantia Vitrea Dentium. The
enamel of the teeth.
  SUBSULTUS   TEN'DINUM.—
Shght convulsive motions or twitchings
of the tendons.   It occurs  in extreme
debility, at  an  advanced stage of ner-
vous and  typhus fevers,  and is gen-
erally indicative of a fatal termination.
  SUBSURDITAS.  Deafness.
  SUBTEPID.  LukeAvarm.
  SUCCA'GO.  From succus,  juice.
The inspissated  juice of fruits.
  SUCCEDA'NEUM. From succedere,
to go under, to come in the place of
another. That which is used for some-
thing else;  a substitute.
  SUCCEDANEUM, ROYAL MlNERAL.—
The name given by  the Crawcours, to
amalgam, the use of which, for filling
teeth, they  introduced into  the United
States about the year 1833.
  SUCCINI RESINA. Artificial musk.
  SUCCINIC.   Succinkus; from suc-
cinum,  amber.  Of, or belonging to,
amber.
  Succinic Acid.   Acidum succini-
cum.  An acid which exists in amber,
and obtained from it by  distillation.  It
is also produced by the action of nitric
acid on margaric acid.
  SUC'CINUM     Amber;  a hard,
brittle,  resinous, tasteless  substance,
sometimes transparent, but oftener semi-
transparent  or opaque, of a pale, gold-
en  yeUow,  and  found  principally  in
Prussia.  It has a shining lustre, and
when rubbed, becomes electric.
  Succinum Cinereum. Ambergris.
  Succinum Griseum.  Ambergris.
  SUCCULENT. Succukns.  Juicy;
full of juice.
  SUCCUS.  Juice.   The fluid ob-
tained from plants by pressing them.
The term is  also  apphed to animal
fluids.
  Succus  Cyreniacus.  The juice of
laserwort. 
SUD               699              SUL
  Succus  Gastricus.    The  gastric
 juice.
  Succus Heliotropii.  Croton  tinc-
 torium.
  Succus  Indicus  Purgans.  Gam-
 boge.
  Succus  Liciuiritije.   Glycyrrhiza
 glabra.
  SUCCES'SION.   A  mode  of ex-
 ploring the chest for the purpose of as-
 certaining  if there  be a collection of
 Avater in it. It consists in shaking the
 body  of the patient, and listening to
 the sounds thus produced.
  SUCKER.  A stolon.
  SUCKING.    Drawing Avith the
 mouth or with an instrument.
  SUCKLING.  Lactation.
  SUCTION  POWER.  In Physiol-
 ogy, the force supposed to be  exerted
 on the veins by the dilatation of the
 heart.
  SUCTO'RIA.  Suctorii; from  sugo,
 I suck. A  term applied to animals pro-
 vided with mouths for sucking, and or-
 gans for adhesion, like the lamprey.
  SUDAM'INA.  From sudor, sweat.
 The small vesicles, resembling miUet
 seed, which appear  on  the skin,  espe-
 cially in the  summer, after  profuse
 sweating.
  SUDATIO.  From  sudor,  sweat.
 Sweating.
  SUDATORIA FEBRIS.   Sudor
 anglicus.
  SUDATO'RIUM. A sweating room.
  SUDOR. Sweat. A fluid resulting
 from  visible  cutaneous transpiration.
 See Perspiration.
  Sudor Anglicus.   Sweating  sick-
 ness.
  SUDORIFEROUS.   From sudor,
 SAveat, and fero, I  carry.  A term ap-
 plied, in Anatomy, to the ducts which
 carry sweat.
  SUDORIF'IC.  From sudor, sweat,
 and facio, I make.   A diaphoretic;
 a medicine which provokes sweating.
  SUDORIPAROUS  FOLLICLES.
The follicles which  secrete the perspi-
rable fluid.
  SUET.  Sevum.
  SUFFIMEN'TUM.  A perfume; a
fumigation.
  SUFFITUS.  A fumigation.
  SUFFOCATION.  Suffocatio; the
state of an animal, in which respiration
is arrested  or impeded, from whatever
cause produced.
  SUFFUMIGATION.    From sub,
under,  and fumigo, to smoke.   The
burning of odorous substances.
  SUFFUSIO AURIGINOSA. Jaun-
dice.
  Suffusio Nigra. Amaurosis.
  SUFFU'SION.   The act, or state,
of being overspread, as with a fluid.
In Pathology, an extravasation of some
humor, as the blood.   The term is
sometimes  applied to cataract, and to
amaurosis.
  SUGAR.  Saccharum.   The sweet
constituent of vegetable and  animal
products,  obtained  by  inspissating
the juice  of  the  plants  from which
it is usually obtained, as  that of the
cane, the mapk, the beet, &c, and  al-
lowing the sugar to crystallize.
  Sugar, Maple.   Acer saccharinum.
  Sugar of Lead. Plumbi acetas.
  Sugar of Milk. Lactin.
  SUGILLATION. Sugillatio ; from
sugillo, to bruise.   A bruise; an ecchy-
mosis.  Also, a spot made  by a leech-
bite or a cupping-glass.
  SU'ICIDE.  Suicidium;  from sui-
cozdes, murder of one's self.  Self-mur-
der.
  SUL'CATE.  Sulcatus.  Grooved;
furrowed.
  SUL'CUS.  A furrow;  a groove.
  SUL'PHAS.  A salt formed by the
union of sulphuric acid with a salifia-
ble base.
  Sulphas Antimonii.  Sulphate of
antimony.
  Sulphas Q,uinje.  Sulphate of qui-
nine.
  SULPHATE.   Sulphas.
  Sulphate of Lime.  Gypsum.
  SUL'PHIDE.  Sulphuret.
  SULPHIS.  Sulphite.  A salt form- 
SUL
700
SUP
ed by the union of sulphurous  acid
with a salifiable base.
  SULPHO-.  A prefix, signifying the
presence of sulphur or sulphuric acid.
  SULPHOCYANIDE. A compound
of sulpho-cyanogen.
  SULPHO-CYA'NOGEN.   Bisul-
phuret of cyanogen.
  Sulpho-Gly'ceric Acid.  A com-
pound of glycerine with sulphuric acid.
  Sulpho-Indigotic Acid.  The solu-
tion of indigo in sulphuric acid.
  Sulpho-Proteic Acid.   A com-
pound of sulphuric acid and proteine.
  Sulpho-Vin'ic  Acid.  Bisulphate
of ethyle.
  SULPHUR.  Brimstone.   A com-
bustible, brittle body, of a yellow color,
unpleasant odor when rubbed or heat-
ed, is rendered  electric by friction, vol-
atilizes when  heated,  and condenses
unchanged. It is a volcanic production,
and obtained in large quantities from
Solfatara in Italy.
  Sulphur  Antimonii  Prjecipi'ta-
tum.  Precipitated sulphuret of anti-
mony.
  Sulphur  Auratum  Antimonii.—
Golden sulphuret of antimony.
  Sulphur Lotum.  Washed sulphur.
  Sulphur Prjecipita'tum.  Milk of
sulphur.
  Sulphur Sublima'tum.   Sublimed
sulphur.   Flowers of sulphur.
  Sulphur Vivum. Native sulphur.
  Sulphur-Wort.  Peucedanum  of-
ficinale.
  SULPHU'REOUS.  Sulphureus.—
Of, or belonging to, sulphur.
  SULPHUROUS ACID.  A pun-
gent gaseous acid, obtained by burning
sulphur in air.
  SULPHURET.  A compound of
sulphur.
  Sulphuret of Carbon.  Bisulphu-
ret of carbon.
  SULPHURETED HYDROGEN.
A compound of sulphur and hydrogen,
an  extremely fetid and  inflammable
gas.
  SULPHURET'UM.   A  sulphuret.
A compound formed by the union  of
sulphur with an alkali, earth or metal.
  SULPHURETUM AMMONIJE.  Sulphu-
ret of ammonia.
  Sulphuretum Calcii.   Sulphuret
of calcium.
  Sulphuretum  Hydrargyri Nig-
rum.  Black sulphuret of mercury.
  Sulphuretum Sodii,  Sulphuret of
sodium.
  Sulphuretum Stibii  Nativum.—
Native sulphuret of antimony.
  SULPHU'RIC.  Sidphuricus.  Be-
longing to sulphur.
  Sulphuric Acid. Acidum sulphuri-
cum.  Acidum vitriolicum.   A fluid,
oily, colorless acid, of a very caustic na-
ture.
  SUMACH.  Rhus glabra.
  SUMBULROOT.  Musk root.
  SUMMER COMPLAINT.   Diar-
rhoea.
  Summer Rash.   Lichen tropicus.
  SUNBURN.  Ephelis.
  SUN-DEW.  Drosera rotundifolia.
  Sun-Stroke.  Coup de soleil.
  SUPER.  A common prefix, signify-
ing above.
  SUPERARSEN'IAS  POTASS^.
Superarseniate  of potash;   Macquer's
arsenical  salt.
  SUPERBUS.  The rectus  superior
oculi.
  SUPERCILTARY.  Superciliaris;
from super,  above, and cilium, the edge
of the eyelid.  Belonging, or relating,
to  the eyebrows, as the superciliary
arches.
  Superciliary Arches.  The prom-
inences on the frontal bone  above  the
orbits covered by the eyebrows.
  Superciliary Ridges.  The super-
ciliary arches.
  SUPERCILTUM. The  eyebrow.
  SUPERFICIAL.  From super, up-
on, and fades, the face.  Being on the
surface, not deep.
  SUPERFI'CIES. The surface; the
exterior part of a thing.
  SUPERFCETATION.   Superfuzta-
tio ; from super, upon, and failure, to 
SUP              701                SUS
 bring forth young.  The impregnation
 of a woman already pregnant.
  SUPERIMPREGNA'TION.   Su-
 perfetation.
  SUPERIOR AURIS.  Theattollens
 aurem.
  SUPERPURGATION.  Superpur-
 gatw.  Excessive evacuation by stool.
  SUPERSCAPULARIS.   The su-
 pra-spinatus, and infraspinatus  mus-
 cles, are so called.
  SUPERUS.  Above.
   SUPINATION.  Supinatio;  from
 mpinus, lying on the back.   Turning
 the palm of the hand upwards by rotat-
 ing the forearm.
  SUPINATOR.  A term applied to
 muscles which turn the hand upwards.
   Supinator Brevis.  Supinator radii
 brevis.
  Supinator Longus.  Supinator radii
 longus.
  Supinator Radii Brevis.  A smaU
 tendinous muscle situated at the upper
 part of the forearm.
  Supinator Radii Longus.   A long
 muscle, enveloped in a tendinous fascia,
 situated along the outer surface of the
 radius, immediately under the integu-
 ments.
  SUPPOSITO'RIUM UTERINUM.
 A pessary.
  SUPPOSITORY.   Suppositorium;
 from sub,  under, and ponere, to  put.
 A solid medicine intended to be intro-
 duced into the  rectum, either for the
 purpose of favoring an intestinal evacu-
 ation, or to act as an anodyne.
  SUPPRESSION.  From supprimo,
 to withhold.  In Pathology,  the  stop-
 page of a natural,  continued, period-
 ic, or of a critical evacuation, as a sup-
 pression of urine, &c.
  SUPPURANS.   Suppurative.
  SUPPURATION.   Suppuratio;—
 from suppuro, to suppurate.  The for-
 mation or secretion of pus.
  SUPPURATIVE. Suppurans.  That
 which promotes  suppuration.
  SUPRA-.   A common prefix, signi-
fying above.
        59*
  Supra-Costa'les.   The intercostal
muscles.
  Supra-Orbitar.  Supra-orbitalis.—
That which is situated above the orbit.
  Supra- Spinatus.  Above the spine.
Supra-scapularis.  A muscle of the arm.
  SURA.  The calf of the leg.   Also,
the fibula.
  SUR'CULUS.  The stem of mosses.
  SURDENT.   From supra, above,
and dens, a tooth.  A  temporary tooth
forced  to one side by  the eruption of
the tooth of replacement.
  SURDITAS.  Deafness.
  SUR'FEIT.   A  sense  of fulness,
oppression, nausea, and sickness, occa-
sioned  by eating to excess.
  SUR'GEON.   Chirurgeon.   From
#«p, the hand, and spyoy, work.   One
who practices surgery.
  Surgeon-Apoth'ecary.  One who
unites  the practice of surgery with that
pf an apothecary.
  Surgeon, Dental.  See Dental Sur-
geon.
  Surgeon-Dentist.  See Dental Sur-
geon.
  SUR'GERY.  Chirurgia. That part
of the  curative  art which has for its
object the treatment of external diseases,
injuries and malformations.
  Surgery, Dental.  See Dental Sur-
gery.
  SUR'GICAL. Chirurgicus. Belong-
ing, or relating, to surgery.
  SUS.  The name of a genus of ani-
mals.
  Sus  Scrofa.  The hog.
  SUSCEPTIBILITY.   Impressibil-
ity ; capability of receiving impressions;
great sensibility.
  SUSPEN'DED ANIMATION. As-
phyxia.
  SUSPEN'SION.  Hanging.  Also,
temporary cessation.
  SUSPENSO'RIUM.  From suspen-
do, to hang. A suspensory; that which
sustains, or suspends  any part, as a
bag, or bandage.
  Suspensorium Hepatis.  The broad
hgament of the liver. 
               SWE

  SUSPENSORIUS TESTIS.  The
rremaster muscle.
  SUSPEN'SORY.  Suspensorium.
  SUSPIR'IUM.  From  sus, under,
and spiro, I breathe.  Short breathing.
A sigh.
  SUSUR'RUS. Tinnitus aurium.
  SUTURE.   Sidura; from  suo, to
join together.  A union.  In Anatomy,
the union of bones by means of serra-
ted, or dentated, edges.  In Surgery, the
stitching of the lips of a wound for
the purpose  of procuring their union.
Several kinds of sutures have been re-
commended  by surgeons, but  the two
principal are, the interrupted and  the
twisted.  The interrupted suture consists
in passing a needle, armed Avith a liga-
ture, through the lips of a wound, pre-
viously brought together, and then tying
the extremities.  The twkted suture con-
sists in passing a needle or pin through
the lips of the wound, so as to keep them
accurately in contact, and then passing
a Avaxed ligature around it, from  one
side to the other, in the form of a  fig-
ure oo.  This latter suture is  chiefly
employed in  the  operation for hare-tip,
and to unite wounds of  the face.
  SWALLOW-WORT.    Asclepias
vincetoxicum.
  SWEAT.   Sensible  moisture upon
the  skin, excreted from it.  Sensible
perspiration.
  SWEATING   SICKNESS   OF
MALWAH.   A malignant  form of
cholera.
  SWEDIAUR'S  LiaUOR
AGAINST APTHiE.  1^.—Borax, in
powder, 3 ij; tinct. myrrh, § i; distiUed
rose  water,  § i;  honey of roses, § ij.
Mix.  To be applied to the apthse several
times a day.
  SWEEPINGS.  A term applied to
the dust and dirt swept from the floor of
the mechanical workshop or laboratory
of the dentist, jeweller, and gold-beater,
which, notwithstanding every precau-
tion and care to prevent the escapeof the
precious metal, will be found to contain
more or less of it.  These sweepings are
)2               SYM

 subjected to a process for the prepara-
 tion and collection of the  gold.  See
 Washing.
   SWEET-FLAG.   Acorus calamus.
   Saveet Marjoram. Origanum mar-
 jorana.
   Saveet Navew.  Brassica rapa.
   Sweet Rush.   Andropogon schs-
 nanthus.
   Sheet Sultan.   Centaurea  mos-
 chata.
   Sweet Willow.  Myricagale.
   SWELL'ING.  A morbid increase
 of the bulk of the whole or any part of
 the body.
   Swelling, White.  Hydarthrus.
   SWIETE'NIA.   The  name of a
 genus of plants.
   Swietenia  Febrif'uga.   The red
 dye-wood tree.
   Swietenia Mahag'oni. The mahog-
 any tree.
   SWIM'MING.  Natation.
   Swimming of the Head.  Vertigo.
   SWORD-SHAPED.    Lanceolate
 and ensiform.
   SWOON.  Syncope.
   SYCAMINOS.  Morus nigra.
   SYCAMORE.   Sycamorus;  from
 avxov, a fig, and /u.opoj>, a mulberry. The
 sycamore fig tree.
   SYCO'MA.  Sycosis.
   SYCON.  Syconus. A fruit like a fig.
   SYCO'SIS.  A tumor resembling,
 in shape, a fig.   Also, a fungous ulcer.
 Dr. Bateman describes it to be an erup-
 tion of inflamed, but not  very  hard
 tubercles, occurring on the bearded por-
 tion of the face, and scalp, in adults, in
 irregular patches or clusters.  The tu-
 bercles are  red and nearly the size of a
 pea.
   SYMBLEPH'ARUM.  Symblepha-
 rosk ; from aw, with, and |3a.£$apoj', the
 eyelid.   Adhesion of the eyelids, occa-
 sioned by concretion, ulcers of the cor-
 nea, scarification and burns.
   SYMBOLOGICA.  Symptomatol-
 ogy-
   SYMBOLS,  CHEMICAL.   See
 Equivalents, table of.
7i 
SYM
703
SYN
  SYM'METRY.  Symmetria; from
sw, Avith, and uetpov, a measure.  Cor-
respondence, in size  and shape, of the
several parts of the body, to each other.
  SYMPATHET'IC. Sympatlielicus;
from aw, with, and rtaOos,  suffering.
Depending on, or relating to,sympathy.
  Sympathetic Ink.  A coloring mat-
ter which is invisible when  cold,  and
colored when hot, or on the application
of an appropriate agent.   The chloride
of cobalt is thought to be the  best.
  Sympathetic Nerve.  The intercos-
tal nerve.
  SYM'PATHY.   Sympathia;  from
aw, with, and rta9os, affection. The re-
lation that exists between two or more
organs, or parts, contiguously, or remote-
ly, situated, whereby an action or affec-
tion in one, is participated in by the
others.
  SYMPHOREMA. Congestion.
  SYMPHYSEOT'OMY.   Symphy-
sotomy; from ovutyv ais, natural union, and
teuva, I cut.  The operation or section of
the symphysis pubis, caUed the Sigaul-
tian operation.  It is performed with a
view of increasing the diameter of the
pelvis, to factiitate delivery.
  SYMPHYS'IA.  A species of mal-
formation occasioned  by the union of
parts naturaUy divided.
  SYM'PHYSIS.   From avuipva,  to
grow together. The connection of bones
by means of intervening  cartilage  or
other texture.
  SYM'PHYTUM.  The name  of a
genus of plants.
  Symphytum  Maculosum.  Pulmo-
naria officinalis.
  Symphytum Minus.  PruneUa  vul-
garis.
  Symphytum Officina'le.  Comfrey.
  Symphytum Petrje'um. Coris mon-
spehensis.  MontpeUier  coris.
  SYMPTOM. Symptoma; fromavprt-
taua, a coincidence. A sign of dis-
ease ;  a perceptible change or alteration
in the appearance, or functions of one or
more of the organs of the body, during
the progress of disease.
  SYMPTOMATIC. Symptomaticus.
That which is a symptom of some other
affection.
  SYMPTOMATOLOGY.  Sympto-
matologia ; from avurttaua, a symptom,
and 7ioyoj, a discourse.    That part of
pathology which  treats  of the symp-
toms of disease.
  SYMPTO'SIS. Emaciation; atrophy.
  SYN-.  A prefix, signifying union,
similarity, &c.
  SYNARTHROSIS.   From awap-
9poa,  to  articulate.  That mode of ar-
ticulation which does not admit of mo-
tion.  There are three species, namely,
suture, harmony, and gomphosk.
  SYNCHONDRO'SIS.  From  aw,
with,  and ^ovSpoj,  a  cartilage.  The
union of bones  by  means of an inter-
vening cartilage.
  SYNCHONDROT'OMY.    Syn-
chondrotomia.  Symphyseotomy.
  SYN'CHRONOUS. From aw, with,
and x?°v°s>  time.   Occurring at  the
same time.
  SYN'CLONUS.   From aw, with,
and xXovos, agitation. A genus of dis-
ease in Dr.  Good's Nosology, com-
prehending those affections character-
ized by tremulous and clonic agitation
of the muscles,  particularly when ex-
cited by the will.
  Synclonus Ballismus.    Shaking
palsy.
  SYN'COPE.  From avyxortta, I fall
down.  Fainting; swooning.
  Syncope Angino'sa.   Angina pec-
toris.
  SYNDESMOL'OGY.   Syndesmo-
logia; from awSeeuos, a ligament, and
Xoyos, a discourse.  That part of Anat-
omy which treats of the ligaments.
  SYNDES'MO-PHARYNGE'US.—
The constrictor pharyngis medius.
  SYNDES'MOS.  A ligament.
  SYNECHIA.  From aw, Avith, and
extw, to have, or to hold.  Adhesion of
the iris with the cornea, or with the
capsule of the crystalline lens.
  SYNEZPZIS.  Synizesis; from aw,
with, and ^Evywav, to join.  Closure or 
SYN
704
SYR
  obliteration of the pupil of the eye.  It
  may be congenital or accidental; simpk
  or complkated, according to the time of
  its occurrence, or the  nature of the af-
  fection.
    SYN'OCHA.  From m^u, I con-
  tinue.  Inflammatory fever.
    SYN'OCHUS. From aweXa, I con-
  tinue.   Continued  fever, or  a  fever
  which  is  inflammatory at first, but
  which ultimately becomes typhoid.
    Synochus Putris.  Typhus gravior.
    SYNOSTEOL'OGY.    Synosteolo-
  gia;  from aw,  with, oateov, a bone,
  and xoyos, a discourse.  That  part of
  Anatomy, which treats on the joints.
    SYNOSTEOTOMY.   Synosteoto-
  mia; from aw, with, oateov, a bone, and
  teuveiv, to cut.   The dissection of the
 joints.
    SYNOVIA.  The unctuous and se-
 rous fluid, exhaled by the synovial mem-
 branes of the movable articulations.
   SYNO'VIAL.  Synovialk.  Belong-
 ing, or relating, to the synovia.
   Synovial Glands.  The fatty  fim-
 briae  found within  the synovial  cap-
 sules of some joints.
   Synovial Membrane. The mem-
 brane surrounding the movable articula-
 tions, and which  secretes the synovia.
   SYNTASIS.  Tension of parts.
   SYNTAXIS.  Articulation.
   SYNTENO'SIS.  From aw, with,
 and tevav, a tendon.  The articulation
 of bones by tendons.
   SYNTEX1S. Marasmus; consump-
 tion.
   SYNTHESIS. From avvti9nui, I
 compose.  In Chemktry, the combina-
 tion of several bodies for the formation
 of a new compound,  or the reunion of
 the elements of a compound, previously
 separated  by analysis.    In  Surgery,
 the reunion of parts which have been
 divided.
   SYNTHETIS'MUS. •  The  reduc-
 tion of a fracture,  and  maintaining it
reduced.
  SYNULOTICA.   Remedies which
promote the healing of a wound.      '
    SYNYMEN'SIS. Synimensk; from
  aw, with, and vurjv, a membrane.  The
  connection of bones by a membrane.
    SYPH'ILIS.  The  origin of this
  word is obscure.  Some derive it from
  oi$Xos,  filthy.   The  venereal disease,
  which consists  of certain morbid phe-
  nomena produced in various textures
  of the body by the action of a specific
  poison;  commencing  by  a  chancre,
  and foUowed by a bubo, ulcers in the
  throat,  copper-colored  blotches  on the
  skin, pains in the bones, nodes, &,c.
    Syphilis Indica.   Frambccsia.
    SYPHILOID.  Syphiloidcs;  from
  syphilk, and eiSos, resemblance.  Syphi-
  Ik pseudo-syphilis.  A term applied to
  ulcers  and other affections from their
  resemblance to syphilis.
   SYRIG'MUS. Tinnitus aurium.
   SYRINGA  A syringe.
   Syringa Vulgaris.  The common
  lilac.
   SYR'INGE.   An  instrument from
  which any liquid may be squirted.
   Syringe,  Tooth.   See Tooth-Sy-
 ringe.
   SYRINGOT'OMUM. A knife for-
 merly used in the operation for fistula
 in ano.
   SYRINX.   A fistula.   A syringe.
 A pipe.
   Syrinx Hiera. The spinal column.
   SYROP.  Syrup.
  SYR'UP.  Syrupus.
  Syrup, Hive.  Compound syrup of
 squill.
  SYRUPUS.   Sugar dissolved  in
 water, either with or without medicinal
 impregnation.
  Syrupus Simplex.   Simple syrup.
  Syrupus Aceti.  Syrup of vinegar.
  Syrupus Allii. Syrup of garlic.
  Syrupus Althje'je. Syrup of marsh
mallow.
  Syrupus Amygda'lje.   Syrup of
almonds.  Syrup of orgeat.
  Syrupus Antiscorbu'ticus.  Syrup
of horseradish.
  Syrupus Aurantii Corticis. Syrup
of orange-peel. 
SYS                705               SZY
  Syrupus Croci.  Syrup of saffron.
  Syrupus Ipecacuan'hje.   Syrup of
ipecacuanha.
  Syrupus  Krame'rije.     Syrup of
rhatany.
  Syrupus Limonis. Syrup of lemons.
  Syrupus Mori.  Syrup of mulber-
ries.
  Syrupus Papa'veris.  Syrup of pop-
pies.
  Syrupus Rhamni.  Syrup of buck-
thorn.
  Syrupus Rhei.  Syrup of rhubarb.
  Syrupus  Rhei Aromaticus.  Aro-
matic syrup of rhubarb.
  Syrupus  Rhcs'ados.   Syrup of red
poppy.
  Syrupus Rosje.  Syrup of roses.
  Syrupus  Rosje  Gal'licje.  Syrup
of red roses.
  Syrupus Sarsaparil'lje.  Syrup of
sarsaparilla.
  Syrupus  Sarsaparillje Composi-
tus.  Compound syrup of sarsaparilla.
  Syrupus Scillje.  Syrup of squill.
  Syrupus  Scillje  Compos'itus.—
Compound  syrup  of squtil.   Hive
syrup.
  Syrupus Senegje. Syrup of senega.
  Syrupus Sennje. Syrup of senna.
  Syrupus Toluta'ni.  Syrup of tolu.
  Syrupus Violje.   Syrup of violets.
  Syrupus Zingib'eris. Syrup of gin-
ger.
  SYSPA'SIA.  From ovartaa, I con-
tract. A genus of disease in Dr. Good's
Nosology, comprehending convulsions,
epUepsy, and hysteria.
  SYSSARCO'SIS.  From aw, with,
and oopi, flesh.  The union of bones
by means of muscles.
  SYSTAT'ICA.  From awiatnini,  I
associate.  Nervous diseases which af-
fect several  or all the sensorial powers
at the same time.  The fourth order, in
the class neurotica, of Dr. Good.
  SYSTEM.  Systema; from aw, with,
and latqui,  I  place.  In Anatomy, an
association  of organs which, as  the
bones, arteries,  veins, or nerves, are
destined to execute analogous functions,
and hence, the osseous, arterial, venous
and nervous systems.  In Physics, the
arrangement of bodies, as of the planets
around a common centre, exhibited in
the system ofthe universe. In Natural
History, the methodical arrangement of
beings, with a view of facilitating their
study.
  SYSTOLE.  From  avateXXa,  to
contract. The contraction of the heart,
to give impulse to the blood.
  SYSTOLTIC.   Pertaining to the
systole of the heart.
  SYSTREM'MA. The cramp.
  SZYMANSKI, JOHN ADRIAN.
John Adrian Szymanski, late surgeon
dentist, of  New York, was  of an an-
cient and distinguished family of War-
saw, Poland.  He was the second and
youngest son of Valentine Szymanski,
librarian for king Stanislaus;  was born
September  10th,  1793.   He lost his
father when only two years of age, but
he  received a liberal  education under
the  direction of  a  step-father.   The
profession  of surgery  having  been
chosen  for his future occupation, he
served a regular apprenticeship in War-
saw and Dantzic with a view  to ac-
complish himself for the duties of this
branch  of medicine, and, in  1814,  he
commenced practice in the last named
place, but soon after went to Sweden,
and obtained a situation  as  surgeon's
mate in the hospital of  Gottenburg.
But having an ardent desire to travel,
he left there in about eighteen months,
and went to England, where, the au-
thor believes, his attention was first di-
rected  to dental surgery.  In 1816, he
came to the United States,  and com-
menced practice  as  a dentist in  Phila-
delphia. But he  did not remain here
long, and  the four or five succeeding
years was spent  in  traveling over the
United  States, practicing in many of
the cities and towns with great success,
and acquiring reputation  wherever he
went.
  Added to a scientific knowledge of
his profession, Dr. S. possessed great 
               TAB

mechanical  tact  and  ingenuity.  In
1822, he married  an accomplished
young lady, Miss WaUer, in the neigh-
borhood  of Fredericksburg,  Va.  For
several years after, he spent most of his
time, during the winters, in Charles-
ton, S.  C,  Savannah,  and Augusta,
Ga., and the summers in Virginia. In
1828, he moved to New York, and en-
tered into co-partnership with the late
Mr. Charles NeAvton,  an eminent den-
  T BANDAGE.    A  bandage  so
named from its being  shaped like the
letter T.  It is used after the operation
for fistula in ano, and in diseases of the
perinagum,  anus, &c.
  TABACUM.   Necotiana tabacum.
  TABEL'LA.  A lozenge.
  TABES.  Marasmus tabes ; from ta-
bere,  to  consume.  Wasting  of the
whole  body, attended  by  languor, and
fever.
  Tabes Dorsalis.  A disease charac-
terized by great prostration of strength,
dyspeptic symptoms, pain  and weak-
ness in the back and loins, gleet and
impotence,  hectic fever,  and  general
emaciation.
  Tabes Mesenter'ica.  Tabes scrofu-
hsa; tabes  gbndubrk. Engorgement
and tubercular deposit of the mesen-
teric glands, accompanied with emacia-
tion, irritability and derangement of the
nutritive functions. It begins with loss
of appetite, languor,  pain in the back,
fuUness, followed by tenderness of the
abdomen, and chalky appearance ofthe
alvine  evacuations, which  are some-
times mixed with blood and mucus.
  Tabes  Pulmonalis.  Phthisis pul-
monalis.
  Tabes  Saturnina.   Wasting  from
lead poison.
06               TiE

 tist, but  was soon  after attacked by
 dropsy of the chest, which terminated
 his life on the 17th of January, 1829.
   Dr. Szymanski was a man of polish-
 ed manners and  accomplished educa-
 tion.  Besides his own, he spoke six
 different languages fluently,  namely,
 Latin, Greek, French, German, Span-
 ish and  English, and by his death the
 dental profession lost a valuable mem-
 ber.
  Tabes Urinalis.  Diabetis.
  TABID.  Tabidus.  Consumptive;
emaciated.
  TABLE.   Tabula.  An  extended
surface: applied, in  Anatomy, to  the
compact tissue, or layers forming the
bones of the cranium, of Avhich there
are two; one external, and one internal,
called the tabula vitrea.
  TABULA.  A table.
  TACAMAHACA. A resinous sub-
stance, of a brownish color, aromatic
taste, and fragrant smell, which exudes
from the fagara octandra tree.
  TACITUR'NITY.   Tacitumitas;
from tacere, to be silent. The condition
of a person who does not speak.  It is
often a symptom of nervous affections,
particularly of melancholy.
  TACT.   Tactus.  Passive sensation,
or the faculty by which the cutaneous
membrane is made sensible of the pres-
ence of a body without being able to
see it.
  TACTUS. Tact.
  TiE'NIA.   Tenia; from tama, a
fiUet, or ribbon.  Tape-worm.  A ge-
nus of intestinal worms, characterized
by a flat, long, and articulated body.
  Tjenia Hippocampi.  Corpora fim-
briata.
  Tjenia Semicircula'ris.  A semi-
7
T. 
              TAN              7C

transparent layer running in the groove
that separates  the thalamus opticus
from the corpus striatum in the lateral
ventricle of the brain.
  Tjenia Tarini. A band of a yeUowish
color passing over the corporis striata.
  TiENOID.  From  *ama, a ribbon,
and eiSos,  hke.  Ribbon-shaped,  like
the toznia, or tape-worm.
  TAFT, J. Author of a Paper on Ir-
regularity of the Teeth, and another on
Abrasion of the Teeth; both published
in eighth volume of American Journal
of Dental Science.
  TAIL.  Cauda.
  TALIACOTIAN OPERATION.—
An operation to restore lost or defective
parts, so called, because first introduced
by Caspar Taliacotius. This operation
is also called rhinoplastic, cheilopbstic,
&.c, according to the part restored.
  TALPA.  Talparia. A mole.  The
term has also been applied to a kind of
tumor  situated on the  head from its
seeming to burrow, like a mole, under
the scalp.
  TALIPES.  Club-foot.
  TALMA, A. F. Author of a Memoir
on the Preservation of the Teeth, and on
some Prejudices relative to the Dental
Art. Brussels, 1843.  This work has
been translated into Enghsh and repub-
lished in the London Forceps.
  TALUS.  From taxillus, a small die.
The astragalus, a bone of the ankle.
  TAMARIND.   The fruit ofthe tam-
arind tree.
  TAMARIN'DUS.  The  name of a
genus of plants.
  Tamarindus In'dica.  The tamarind
tree.
  TAMARIS'CUS.  The tamarix gal-
lica.
  TAMARIX. The name of a genus
of plants.
  Tamarix Gal'lica.  The tamarisk
tree.
  TAMPON.  A plug.
  TAMPONNEMENT.   Plugging.
  TANACETUM.   Tansy.   Also,
the name of a genus of plants.
              TAR

  Tanacetum Balsami'ta.  The offi-
cinal costmary, or alecost.
  Tanacetum Vulgare.  Common
tansy.
  TANASIA. Tanacetum.
  TANNIC ACID.  Tannin; a vege-
table acid  found in most  astringent
barks, especially  in the gall-nuts,  su-
mach, kino, and catechu.  It is a poAV-
erful astringent, and the use of it  has
been recommended for allaying the sen-
sibility of sensitive  teeth, preparatory
to their preparation for filling, and, also,
for  reducing  inflammation  of an ex-
posed dental pulp.
  TANNICUM PURUM.  Tannin.
  TANNIN.  Tannic acid.
  TANSY.  Tanacetum.
  Tansy, Maudlin. Achillea agera-
tum.
  Tansy, Wild.   Potentilla anserina.
  TAPETUM.   A shining  spot on
the outside of certain animals, which
is said  to add to the intensity of  vis-
ion.
  TAPE-WORM.  Taenia.
  TAPIOCA. Jatropha manihot
  TAPPING. Paracentesis.
  TAPSUS.  Black mullein.
  TAR.   The impure turpentine pro-
cured by  burning, from the wood of the
pinus palustris and other species of pi-
nus.
  Tar, Barbadoes.  Petroleum.
  Tar Water.   Water  impregnated
with tar.
  TARAGON.   Artemisia dracuncu-
lus.
  TARAXACUM.  Leontodon  tar-
axacum.
  TARAX'IS.  Tarache.   Slight in-
flammation of the eye.  Also, a disor-
der of the sight,  arising from a blow.
compression of the eye, or the action of
smoke, or other external cause.
  TARENTULA.   From tarentum,
a town of Italy where they abound.  A
species of spider.
  TARO.  Arum esculentum.
  TAR'SAL.   Tarseus.  Relating to
the tarsus.
17 
TAS
708
TAY
  Tarsal Articulations.  The union
of the tarsal bones.
  TARSEUS.  Tarsal.
  TAR'SUS.   The  instep, which  is
composed of seven bones, viz.  the as-
tragalus, os calcis, os naviculare, and
three ossa cuneiformia. Also, tAvo thin
cartilaginous layers situated in the sub-
stance of the edge of each eyelid.
  TARTAR.   Tartarum.   The depos-
it attached to the inside of wine casks.
Also, the earthy deposit which forms
on the teeth.  See Salivary  Calculus.
  Tartar, Cream of.  Supertartrate
of potash.
  Tartar Emetic.   Antimonium tar-
tarizatum.
  Tartar, Salt of.  Carbonate of pot-
ash.
  Tartar, Soluble.   Tartrate of pot-
ash.
  Tartar, Vitriolated.  Sulphate  of
potassa.
  TARTARIC ACID.  Acidum tar-
tarkum.  The vegetable acid existing
in cream of tartar, which,  after being
extracted, is a white  crystallized  solid,
in the form of irregular six-sided prisms,
having a strong acid taste.
  TARTARUM.  Tartar.
  Tartarum Emeticum. Antimonium
tartarizatum.
  Tartarum Regeneratum. Acetate
of potassa.
  TARTARUS AMMONLE. Tartras
ammoniae.
  Tartarus Dentium. Tartar of the
teeth.
  TARTRAS.  A tartrate, formed by
the union of tartaric  acid with  a salifi-
able base.
  Tartras  Ammonije.   Tartrate  of
ammonia.
  Tartras Potassje.   Tartrate of po-
tassa.
  Tartras Potassje Acidulus. Bitar-
trate of potassa.
  Tartras Sodje.  Potassio-tartrate of
soda.
  TASIS. Extension; tension.
  TASTE.  Gustus.  That sense,  by
aid of which, the flavor of sapid bodies
is perceived.  The tongue is the princi-
pal organ of taste.
  TAVEAU,  ORE.  Hygiene of the
Mouth, or Treatise on the Means neces-
sary  for the Preservation of the Teeth,
&c,  by.  Paris, 1833.
  Taveau's Elixirs for the Mouth.
1.  1$.—Tincture of  guaiac, vulnerary
spirits, a a  § vj ; essential oil of mint,
gtt. iv. M.  2. $.—Tincture of guaiac,
 §iv;  camphorated  brandy,  3i; es-
sence of mint, essence of scurvy-grass,
a a gtt. vj ; essence of rosemary, gtt.
x.  Mix.
  Taveau's Odontalgic Elixir. 1$..—
Cloves, opium,  cinnamon, a a  3 ij;
pyrethreum,  3 i; resin,  § ss; brandy
of  22 degrees,  § viij.  Mix.
  Taveau's Elixir for the Gums.
1$.—Vulnerary  water, § viij; spirit of
scurvy-grass, §i; essentialoilof cloves,
gtt. v.  Mix.
  Taveau's   Lozenges  for  the
Mouth.    1$.—Catechu,  3 ij; coral,
 3 iv;  sugar, 3 ij;  essence of cinna-
mon, gtt.  x.  Mix  and divide into lo-
zenges of ten grains each.  These are
recommended for the  purpose of cor-
recting fetor of the breath.
  Taveau's Powders for the Teeth.
1.  1$.—Prepared terrae sigillatae, |v;
cream of tartar,  § ij;  cloves, ^ i.  2.
1$.—Pumice stone, § vi; cream of tar-
tar,  § ij ; lac carmine, § i;  cinnamon,
 3 ij.   3. 1$.—Red coral,  § iv;  dragon's
blood,  § i; cinnamon,  3 ss; citron,
 3 ij  ; white sugar, § ss.  Mix.
  TAXIS.  From taaaa, I order, I ar-
range.  The replacement of parts which
have left their  natural situation, as in
the reduction of hernia, Avith the hand,
without the aid of instruments.
  TAXUS BACCATA.   The  yew
tree.
  TAYLOR,   EDWARD.   On the
Use  of Arsenic  in Destroying the Sen-
sibihty of Carious Teeth, preparatory
to Plugging; published in the A meri-
can Journal of Dental Science, volume
fifth.—On Filing Teeth; pubhshed in 
TEE               709                TEE
 the Dental Register of the West.   Dr.
 Taylor is also author of several other
 articles on the teeth,, published in the
 last named periodical.
   TAYLOR, JAMES.   Dissertation
 on the State of the Dental Profession,
 and Dental Empiricism, delivered be-
 fore the American Society of Dental Sur-
 geons, at the sixth annual meeting, by.—
 Address delivered before  the Missis-
 sippi Valley Association of Dental Sur-
 geons, by.  August, 1844.—Remarks on
 the Vascularity ofthe Teeth, read before
 the last named association, June, 1844,
 by.  The above were published in the
 fifth and sixth volumes American Jour-
 nal of Dental Science. Dr. Taylor is also
 author  of a Paper on the  Effects of
 Calomel on the Teeth; pubhshed in vol-
 ume first of the Dental Register of the
 West, a periodical of which he is one of
 the editors.
   TAYLOR, JOSEPH.  Author of a
 Paper on the Use of Letheon; publish-
 ed in the Dental Register of the West.
   TEA.  Thea.
   Tea Berry. Gaultheria.
   Tea, Mountain.  Gaultheria.
   Tea, Oil.  An oil expressed from
 the seeds of the camellia oleifera.
   TEAR.   Lachryma.   The Hmpid,
 saline, inodorous, and colorless humor
 secreted by the lachrymal gland, and
 poured  out between  the eyelids  and
 globe of the eye.
   TEAT.  The nipple.
   TEAZEL.   Eupatorium  perfolia-
 tum.
   TECNOCTONIA.  Infanticide.
   TECTIBRAN'CHIATE.   From te-
 go, I cover, and bronchia, giUs. An order
 of hermaphrodite gastropods  in which
 the gUls are covered by a process of the
 mantle.
   TEETH.  The  small bones which
 occupy  the alveolar  cavities of  the
 upper and lower jaws. They are the
 hardest  portions   of the  body  and
 the principal  organs of mastication.
 They are distinguished into milk, tem-
porary or deciduous teeth, and perma-
 nent or adult teeth.   The first division
 consists  of three classes,  namely:  1.
 Incisores,  2. Cuspidati, 3. Molares.—
 The  second division consists of four
 classes, namely:  1. Incisores, 2. Cuspi-
 dati, 3. Bicuspides, 4. Molares.
   The temporary teeth are twenty in
 number, ten in each jaw;  to wit, four
 incisores, two cuspidati, and four mo-
 lares.   There are  thirty-two in  the
 permanent  set,  sixteen  to  each jaAV,
 which are designated as follows : inci-
 sores, four; cuspidati,  two ;  bicuspi-
 des, four;  molares, six.  The third or
 last molar is sometimes caUed the dens
 sapientiae or wisdom tooth.   For a de-
 scription  of the  classes belonging  to
 each  division,  see  the articles respec-
 tively relating to them.
   In speaking on the teeth  in  general,
 Mr. Alexander  Nasmyth  says, they
 "may be regarded in the first  place as
 the armory of the mouth;  and in the
 second, as the instruments by which
 the process of assimilation is commenc-
 ed.   They  assist in seizing, dividing,
 tearing, and masticating the substances
 which the diversified  surface of the
 earth,  the  fathomless  depths of the
 ocean, and the boundless expanse of at-
 mosphere, afford, in infinite variety, as
 materials for building up the physical
 frame-work  of  animated   existence.
 They present themselves as appenda-
 ges of the skin, to the products of which
 in some of their modifications they bear
 a great resemblance, whtist in others
 they resemble true bone.  The varieties
 which they  present, throughout the
 range  of  the animal kingdom, corres-
 pond  to  the  infinite diversities in the
 functions they are required to perform;
 and wonderful are the minute and per-
 fect adaptations which they present in
 various animals to the  wants  and in-
 stincts of the latter.  Indeed, from their
 peculiar conformation, they indicate so
exactly the  type  of animal  to which
they belong, that they are found to fur-
nish the  best characteristic  marks by
which to classify  the members of the 
TEE
710
TEE
animal  kingdom.   Their importance,
therefore, in a scientific point of view,
is very great, the aid which they afford
to the naturalist being precise and defi-
nite ;  they have held a prominent place
in  all classifications of animals, and
Brisson adopted them exclusively as his
guide in this department of his labors.
Such is the beautiful harmony of na-
ture, that the information acquired by
means of these organs  puts us at once
in possession of a knowledge of many
of  the peculiarities and  distinguishing
habits of the animals to which they re-
spectively belong.   Moreover, the en-
during nature  of the  materials which
enter into  their structure cannot but
give them additional value in the eyes
 of  the geologist.
   "Cuvier, whose scientific research
 was at once remarkable for its elevation,
 and the grandeur and breadth of contem-
 plation which it displayed, has  widen-
 ed, by his profound labors, the field  of
 physical philosophy; he has lit torches
 in the  abyss  of time, to guide us  in
 our inquiries into the past, which, Avere
 they  zealously  prosecuted,  'man,  to
 whom  only  a momentary sojourn on
 earth has been accorded,  would  have
 the glory of unfolding the history of the
 thousands of centuries which have pre-
 ceded his existence, and of the mUIions
 of beings who were not his cotempo-
 raries.' "*
    Teeth, Artificial.  See Artificial
 Teeth,  MetaUic  Bases,  and Porcelain
  Teeth.
    Teeth, Abrasion of.  See Abrasion
  of the Teeth.
    Teeth,  Articulation  of.   The
  teeth are  united to the maxillary bones
  by a species of articulation called gom-
 phoses, which see.   Those  having but
  one root depend greatly  on their nice
  adaptation  to  the  alveoli,   for  the
  strength of their union.  Those having
  three or four, often receive support from
  their divergence.   But the  periosteum
    * Cuvier sur les Ossemens Fossiles. Discours.
  Prelim, p. cxl.
lining the alveolar cavities and  invest-
ing the roots, forms another band  of
union, as does also the vessels entering
the extremities of the fangs, as well  as
the gums around their necks.
  Teeth, Atrophy of.  See Atrophy
ofthe Teeth.
  Teeth,  Caries  of.  See Caries of
the Teeth.
  Teeth,  Characteristics of. The
teeth present marked and striking differ-
ences in their appearance.   They vary
in volume, color, length and arrange-
ment,  and  all of these are indicative of
the differences that exist in the suscep-
tibility of these organs to disease.
  Teeth in which the earthy salts  or
phosphate  of lime exists in great abun-
dance, are  generally  of a  dull, heavy
white, or light cream color, of a medium
size, short, with thick cutting edges;
those of each class of uniform  dimen-
sions, very hard, and after  the  middle
period of hfe, gradually assume  a faint
yellowish  appearance.  This  descrip-
tion of teeth  is most frequently  met
with in persons of a sanguinous tem-
perament, or at least, those in whom
this greatly predominates ;  they rarely
 decay, and are indicative, if not of per-
fect health, of a state that bordered very
 closely on it at the time of  their ossifi-
 cation.
   Such teeth are occasionally  possess-
 ed by persons of all nations and classes,
 but by far more generaUy, by  laboring
 people  in healthy  northern latitudes.
 Among the inhabitants of England, Ire-
 land, and  Scotland, and more especial-
 ly the middle  and poorer classes, they
 are very common.  They are also very
 frequently met with in  the northern
 parts of the United States, the Canadas,
 the mountainous districts of Mexico, and
 so far as the author has had an opportu-
 nity of informing  himself, in France,
 Russia, Prussia, and Switzerland. Those
 who  have them, generally enjoy excel-
 lent health, and are seldom troubled with
 dyspepsia or any of its  concomitants.
   It is this kind of teeth, which Lavater 
TEE                711                TEE
 says, he has never met with, except in
 "good, acute,  candid,  honest  men,"
 and of whose possessors, it has been re-
 marked, that their stomachs  are always
 wfiling to digest whatever  their  teeth
 are ready to masticate.
   But as it regards character or disposi-
 tion of mind, it is, perhaps, more than
 questionable, whether any thing can be
 learned from the physiognomical appear-
 ances  of  the teeth, further  than they
 may be influenced at the time of their
 ossification by  the  constitutional tem-
 perament or state of the general health,
 and though this may then be favorable
 to the production of such as  possess the
 characteristics we have  described, it
 may, afterwards, become so impaired as
 to retain but little of its original condition,
 whUe  these organs, by reason of their
 exemption from the  laws that  govern
 the functional operations of  other parts
 ofthe body, preserve-theirs through life.
 Those who possess the temperament,
 however,  necessary to the  production
 of such teeth, usually have all their or-
 gans weU developed, and  as  a very
 common  consequence,  have   open,
 frank and cheerful  dispositions.  It is
 probable,  therefore, that from  having
 very frequently observed them in the
 possession of  those who enjoy  these
 happy qualities of mind, that this cele-
 brated physiognomist was induced to re-
 gard them as an invariable accompani-
 ment.
  Teeth of this description are ossified at
 a time when all the operations of the body
 are performed in the most perfect manner.
 The influence ofthe state ofthe constitu-
 tional health upon these organs, at this
 period of life, is  exemplified in the early
 decay of a single class, or of a pair of
 teeth,  in  each  jaw,  which had  re-
 ceived  their calcareous ingredients at
 a time when the functional operations
 of the  body were disturbed, while all
 the rest, ossified under more favorable
 circumstances, and possessing as a con-
sequence, the  characteristics just de-
cribed,  will remain sound through life.
Thus, whenever it happens, that a child,
of an excellent constitution,  is affected
Avith any severe disease, the  teeth that
are at the time undergoing the process
of ossification, are found, on their erup-
tion, to differ from those  which have
received their earthy material at another
time, when the operations of the organ-
ism were healthily performed.  Instead
of being of a duU or  heavy white, and
having  a smooth uniform surface, they
have a sort  of chalky aspect,  or  are
faintly  tinged  with  blue, and  have
rougher  and less uniform   surfaces.
Teeth of this description, are very sus-
ceptible  to  the   action of  corrosive
agents,  and  as a  consequence, rarely
last long.
  But, not willing to rest the correctness
of these observations upon mere hypoth-
esis or vague conjecture, we have, in a
great number of instances, where  we
have met with teeth thus varying in their
physical condition and appearance, ta-
ken pains to inquire of those who had had
an opportunity of  knowing the state of
the general health of the  subjects, at
the  different periods of the ossification
of these organs, and in every case where
we have been able to procure the desired
information,  it has tended to the con-
firmation of the opinion which we have
here advanced. Nor have we neglected
to improve the many opportunities that
have presented, in the course of a some-
what extended professional career, for
making these observations.
  Although the operations of the econ-
omy are so secretely carried on, that it
is impossible to  comprehend their me-
chanism fully, it is well ascertained, that
the phenomenathatresult therefrom, are
influenced and modified by the manner
in which they are  performed.   If they
be deranged,  the blood, from which the
calcareous materials that form the basis
of all the osseous tissues are derived, is
deteriorated, and furnishes these earthy
salts in less abundance and of an infe-
rior  quality.  Hence, teeth that ossify
when the system is under the influence 
TEE
712
TEE
of disease, do not possess the character-
istics necessary to enable them to resist
the assaults of the corrosive agents, to
which all teeth are more or less exposed,
and that rarely affect those that receive
their ossific matter from pure blood.
  The  next  description of  the teeth
which we  propose to describe, possess
the following characteristics. They have
a bleached, or azure blue appearance;
they are most commonly long, the in-
cisores thin and narrow, the cuspidati
usually round and pointed, the bicuspi-
des and molares small in circumference
and deeply indented upon their grinding
surfaces.
  Teeth possessed  of these character-
istics are generaUy very sensitive, easy
to be acted upon by corrosive, agents,
and  to  the ravages of which,  unless
great attention be  paid  to their cleanli-
ness,  they usually fall early victims.
They are also frequently affected with
atrophy, or have upon their surfaces,
white, brown, or opaque spots, varying
in size and number. Several are some-
times found upon a single tooth, and,
in some instances,  every tooth in  the
mouth  is  more or  less marked with
them.
  But this is not the only description
of teeth liable to  be affected with this
disease.  These spots are occasionally
met with on  teeth of every  degree of
density, shape, shade  and size;  but
they are, probably, more frequently seen
on  such as  last described, than  any
other, and, besides, it often  happens
that they are affected with erosion on
emerging from the  gums, and some-
times so badly as to place both their
restoration  and  preservation  beyond
the reach of art.  This  species of ero-
sion, or that  which takes  place while
the teeth are in their matrices, is caused
by some morbid condition of the fluids
in which they are  there bathed, and
is denominated congenital.
  Teeth, like those under consideration,
are indicative of a weakly, innate con-
stitution—of  a temperament considera-
 bly removed from the sanguinous—and
 of blood altogether too serous to furnish
 materials, such as are necessary for the
 building  up of a strong and healthy
 organism.  They are more  common to
 females than males, though many of
 the latter have them.  They are met
 with among people of all countries, but
 by far more frequently among those
 who reside in sickly, southern latitudes,
 and whose  systems have become ener-
 vated  by luxurious  modes  of  living.
 Among the inhabitants of  Great Brit-
 ain, they are  more  rare than among
 those of the United States, and  those
 who  have  them, seldom attain to a
 great age.  Nevertheless, some, under
 the influence of a judicious  regimen,
 and a  salubrious  climate, though  in-
 nately  delicate, as has  been the case
 with most of those who have  this kind
 of teeth, do  acquire a good constitution,
 and  live to  a great age, while the den-
 tal apparatus, less fortunate, except the
 most rigid and constant attention has
 been  paid to the  use of  the means
 necessary for  its  preservation, gene-
 rally  soon falls an early victim to the
 ravages of disease.
   There is another description of teeth,
 though differing in many of their char-
 acteristics from those of which we have
just been speaking, that  are, neverthe-
 less, not unlike them in their texture
 and in their susceptibility to deleterious
 impressions.  The crowns of these are
 much larger than teeth of the ordinary
 size; their faces are  rough and irregu-
 lar, with protuberances, rising, not only
 from the grinding surfaces of the bicus-
 pides and molares, but also, not  unfre-
 quently, from their sides, with corres-
 pondingly deep indentations.   Their
 appearance is that of a muddy white.
 The  crowns of the  incisores of both
jaws are broad, long and thick.  The
 posterior or  palatine surfaces  of those
 of the superior  maxillary  are rough,
 and usually have a deep  indentation in
 them.   In the majority  of cases, their
 arrangement is tolerably regular, though 
TEE               713               TEE
they are  more or less inclined to pro-
ject.  The alveolar  ridges usually de-
scribe a  broad circle, and  evidence a
development, which, though large, is,
in many  respects faulty.  The excess
in size,  both here  and in  the teeth,
seems to consist more of gelatine than
calcareous phosphate.
   This description of teeth decay readi-
ly, and in some instances appear to set
at defiance the resources of the dentist.
They are liable to be attacked at almost
every point, but  more particularly in
their indentations and on their  sides
which come in contact with each other.
   Persons who  have teeth like those
now  under  consideration,  generally
have what Laforgue calls, lymphatico-
serous temperaments.  Their blood is
usually   pale, and  the fluids of the
mouth, while they  are poured out in
great abundance, are for the most  part
exceedingly viscid.   They do  not have
that white frothy appearance that  is
observable in those of healthy sanguin-
ous  individuals.
   Laforgue enumerates among the Eu-
ropeans,  three classes,  each  differing
from the others  in  the quality of the
materials that compose their respective
organisms, that  can be  distinguished
by their teeth. The first of these class-
es have pure blood, a good constitution,
and  as  a consequence, their  osseous
tissues are compact, their  flesh firm,
and all of their fluids of a healthy and
good quality.  The  second  class have
sanguino-serous temperaments, and the
third, lymphatico-serous.
   The first of these classes, he tells us,
have handsome  teeth, well enameled,
and of a  cream color.  The molares of
the first dentition, of the  second class,
and sometimes the secondary incisores
and cuspidati, are eroded, and the third
class, he  says, have teeth that are very
white, brittle, and that are easily affect-
ed by caries.
  The kind of teeth  which  he assigns
to the third  class,  though  frequently
possessed by  those  who belong to it,
     60*
are oftener met with among those of
the second.   It is among  those of this
class that the teeth which we last  de-
scribed are most frequently found.
  Continuing  the  subject,  he  says,
"there are in  each  constitution,  two
degrees that  are distinguished • by  the
quality of the materials that compose
the teeth.  The second degree of the
first class has not so much of the bony
structure, and their enamels are thinner
than in the first degree; neither is  the
flesh, the blood, or any of the fluids of
so good  a quality.   Persons  of  the
second class are not so healthy as  those
of the first.   There is nothing to dis-
tinguish them, except that the one con-
stitution is more perfect than the other.
  "In the second  constitution, erosion
is more  strongly  marked in the first
than in the second degree, and it has its
seat upon the incisores instead of the
large molares of the first dentition.  In
the third constitution, the second  de-
gree is marked by the softness of the
teeth, which are more subject to caries
than in the first degree.  The quality of
the blood, the  flesh, fluids, and  the
health and  strength  of subjects of the
second  and third  constitutions are al-
Avays in proportion to the density of the
osseous system."
  As teeth that are neither too large nor
too small, and that have a close compact
structure, and slightly tinged with yel-
low,  are  indicative  of a  constitution,
Avhatever it may be at the present time,
that Avas  innately good, so those that
are long, narrow,  and faintly tinged
with blue, as well as those that greatly
exceed  the ordinary size of these or-
gans, and that are irregular  in shape,
and that have a rough and muddy ap-
pearance, furnish assurance of a con-
stitution, that was, at least,  originally
bad.  The first of the latter descrip-
tions of teeth  are more frequently met
with among females than males, and
among  those  of  strumous  tempera-
ments, than those in whom this dia-
thesis does not exist.  There is another 
TEE
714
TEE
 kind of teeth that  resemble these in
 shape  and size, and  also  in  texture,
 that have been more universally regard-
 ed as denoting a  tendency to  phthisis
 pulmonalis, than  any other description
 that have  attracted  the attention  of
 writers  on  this  disease.   They are
 characterized by whiteness, and a pear-
 ly gloss of the enamel, and are thought
 by  many  to  be exceedingly durable,
 but we have observed that individuals
 who have this sort of teeth, when at-
 tacked by febrile or  any other  form of
 disease that had a tendency  to alter the
 fluids of the  body, were very subject
 to tooth-ache  and dental caries, and
 that when this condition of the general
 system was continued for a considera-
 ble length of time, that  their teeth, in
 rapid succession, crumbled to pieces.
   Persons  of sanguino-mucous  tem-
 peraments, who have suffered in early
 childhood, from general febrile  or in-
 flammatory diseases, often  have their
 teeth affected  with  what Duval calls
the decorticating process, or the denu-
 dation of their  enamel,  resulting, no
 doubt, from the destruction of the in-
termediary  substance, which  consti-
tutes the bond of union between it and
the bone.
   The teeth of persons who  have suf-
fered from small-pox, measles, or  other
severe  forms  of eruptive disease, or
malignant inflammatory  fever, during
the time of their enameling, often pre-
sent a very singular appearance, un-
like those that  are  affected with the or-
 dinary kind of erosion, where the edges
of the enamel  around the part affected
are  rough  and  brittle,  are smooth,
or comparatively so, while  the injury
is  confined to only  very small and reg-
ularly circumscribed spots, which ex-
tend in a direct  horizontal line across
such of the teeth as have been attacked
by it.   These pits  are  sometimes so
close to  each other that half a dozen or
more of them  are  united so as to  form
a sort of narroAV and irregular groove.
Two, and  sometimes  more, of these
 grooves  or rows of pits  extend across
 the same teeth, but this  happens only
 in those cases, in which the subjects
 have either had relapses, or been affect-
 ed, during the enameling process, Avith
 more than one of the diseases that gives
 rise to  their formation.
   There are many other  characteristics
 which the teeth  present in shape, size,
 density and color, and from which, val-
 uable inductions  might be made, both
 with regard to the innate constitution
 and the means necessary to their pre-
 servation; but  as the limits we have
 prescribed  to this  article,  will not
 admit of their consideration, we shall
 conclude by  observing,  that the ap-
 pearances of these organs vary almost
 to infinity.  Each is indicative of the
 state of the general health at the time
 of their formation,  and of  their own
 physical  condition and susceptibility to
 injury.
   Teeth,  Chemical Constituents
 of.  See Tooth-Bone.  Also, Enamel of
 the Teeth.
   Teeth, Denuding  of the.   See
 Denuding of the Teeth.
   Teeth, Development  of  Pulps
 and Sacs of.  In the development  of
 the pulps and sacs of the human teeth,
 is exhibited  one  of the most curious
 and interesting operations of the animal
 economy. From small mucous papilla,
 observable at a very early  period of in-
 tra-uterine existence, they, in obedience
 to certain developmental laws, gradually
 increase, until they attain the size ofthe
 crowns of the teeth they are respective-
 ly destined to form. They then begin  to
 ossify,  and this process,  commencing
 on the  cutting edges of the  incisores,
 the points of the  cusps of the cuspi-
.dati, bicuspides, and eminences of the
 molares, extends  over  the whole sur-
 face of  their crowns, until they are in-
 vested in a complete layer of bone, and
 so, layer after  layer  is  formed,  one
 within the other, until nothing remains
 but a small cavity in each tooth which
 contains the residuum of the pulp.  In 
TEE               715               TEE
the meantime, the enamel and roots of
the teeth begin to form.
  Eustachius, who wrote in 1563, was
the first to give any thing like a correct
description even of the position and ar-
rangement of the teeth in the jaws pre-
vious to their eruption.  Hemard, a
French anatomist, wrote about nineteen
years later, but did little more than re-
peat the description given  of the teeth
by Eustachius.   Nor did Albinus, au-
thor of several anatomical works,  pub-
lished  in the early part of the  eigh-
teenth  century, throw much  additional
fight upon the subject, and since his
time, the  manner of the formation of
the teeth has successively been a sub-
ject of inquiry by  Hunter, Jourdain,
Herbert, Blake, Fox, Cuvier, Serres,
Delabarre, and others, but the combined
researches of all these writers, have fail-
ed to furnish accurate information with
regard to the early stages of  the forma-
tion «f these organs. The best descrip-
tion which had been given of the pro-
gress  of the teeth, previously to the
year 1839, was by  Mr. Thomas  Bell,
but it was reserved for Mr. Goodsir to
trace the development of these organs,
almost from the moment of the appear-
ance of the  germs of the first set, as
simple mucous papiUae, until the com-
pletion of the second, and so minutely
and accurately has he  done this, that
 little seems to remain for future anato-
mists in this interesting field of physio-
 logical inquiry.   Relying upon the ac-
 curacy of his researches,  which  are
described in the Edinburg Medical and
 Surgical Journal, for January 1st, 1839,
 the author will here give a summary of
what he says upon the subject.
   At  about the sixth Aveek, in the up-
per jaw of  the human  embryo, a deep
groove, lined with mucous  membrane,
may be seen between the lip  and a
semi-circular lobe, (which is the primi-
tive condition of the palate>) which ter-
minates on each side, behind the form-
er.   This  groove  gradually  widens
from  behind forwards, and  a  ridge,
commencing  posteriorly and running
in the same  direction, rises  from its
floor, and divides it into  two others.
The inner one constitutes the primitive
dental groove, and the outer  is formed
by the outside of the alveolar process
and the  lip.   The inner  side of this
ridge, "after  being  cut  into  three
grooves," "of which the posterior is
the  deepest,  terminates in  a rounded
lobule, which is continuous with it an-
teriorly,  while externally,  internally,
and posteriorly, it is bounded by that
portion of the original groove which
was  situated behind the semi-circular
lobe."
   "At some period between the  sixth
and seventh week, a longitudinal por-
tion is cut off, from  the internal poste-
rior  edge  of the  semi-circular lobe,"
extending forwards to a middle bulging
of the lobe,  and  to a bulging  poste-
riorly which becomes isolated, and as-
sumes the appearance of an "ovoidal
papilla, the long diameter of which is
anterio-posterior."   This paptila is  the
germ of the  first temporary  or milk
molar, and the first  tooth-germ which
appears.  It is a simple, free granular
papilla,  at this  period.    About  the
 eighth week, another papiUa  of an
 ovoidal,  granular form,  appears  be-
 tween the middle and anterior curve of
 the  ridge, on the floor  of the  same
 groove, which is the rudiment  of the
 temporary cuspidatus or  canine  tooth.
 The germs ofthe incisores; the central
 first, and afterwards the  lateral, make
 their appearance   during  the  ninth
 week, in the form of mucous papillae.
 The sides of the groove on each side of
 the first  molar  papilla approach each
 other during  the tenth week, and pro-
 cesses,  before and  behind the  germ,
 from either side are sent off, which meet,
 unite, and enclose it  in  a follicle.  In
 the mean time a similar follicle is grad-
 ually forming round the germ  of the
 cuspidatus, and towards the end  of the
 tenth week, the  papilla of the  second
 temporary molar shows' itself  behind 
                TEE

the first,  at the side of the rounded
lobule, Avhich terminates the outer ridge
posteriorly, and from which it seems to
be a production.
  The incisores progress regularly dur-
ing the eleventh week, and septa pass
from  the  outer to the inner wall  be-
tween them,  so  that each  becomes
enclosed in  a  foUicle.  In the  mean-
time, the second molar papiUa gradu-
ally increases, and it, in turn, becomes
enclosed in  a  follicle, formed  by  the
gradual folding of the terminal  lobule
of  the outer ridge around it.   There
stiU remains a portion  of the  primitive
groove behind the follicle of the last
molar germ. The last molar foUicle is
completed during the  thirteenth week,
and the different papillae, instead of re-
maining  simple, rounded  masses   of
granular matter, assume the  shape  of
the future teeth they  are respectively
destined to  form.  During this  period
the papillae  grow faster than the folli-
cles, and, consequently, protrude from
them.  In the meantime, the mouths of
the foUicles are becoming more devel-
oped, "so as to form opercula, which
correspond  in some  measure with the
shape  of  the crowns  of  the  future
teeth."  The incisor follicles have two;
one anterior and one  posterior; the first
larger than the latter; the cuspidati fol-
licles have three—one external and tAvo
internal; the molar  foUicles, as  many
as there are protuberances upon their
grinding surface.
  By the fourteenth week,  the outer
and inner  lips  of the  primitive  dental
groove have increased so much as  to
meet or apply themselves together in a
"valvular manner, giving to the papil-
lae the appearance of having receded
back into their foUicles, so that they  are
almost completely hid  by their opercu-
la.  The development of the germs and
follicles of the teeth  of the lower jaw
is almost precisely similar to those of
the upper,  though rather  more tardy
in their appearance.
  At  the last  mentioned period, "the
16               TEE

primitive dental  groove,"  occupies  a
higher  level than  it did at first, and
"may be now denominated  the second-
ary dental groove," and it is at this
time that  provision  is  made for the
production of the ten anterior perma-
nent teeth.  It consists in the appear-
ance of crescent-shaped depressions be-
hind the inner opercula of  the foUi-
cles ; first, of the central incisores, then
of the laterals,  next  of the cuspidati,
and, lastly, of the first and second tem-
porary molares.  This occurs about the
fourteenth or fifteenth week, and  about
the same time, the opercula approach
each other and close the mouths of the
follicles, but without adhering, begin-
ning with the central  incisores, next
with the lateral, the  cuspidati, and
ending with the second molares. Com-
mencing from behind and proceeding
forwards, the lips and walls of the sec-
ondary groove now begin to adhere;
the  follicles  have become  sacsj the
paptilae,  the  pulps of the  temporary
teeth, and the crescent-shaped depres-
sions, "cavities of reserve," from which
the pulps and sacs of the teeth of re-
placement are produced. The primi-
tive dental groove, Avhich has now ex-
tended back beyond  the second  tem-
porary molar,  "retains here its original
appearance;"  it has a "grayish yeUow
color," and its edges continue  "smooth
for a fortnight or three  weeks longer,"
for  the  "development of the papiUa
and foUicle" of the first permanent mo-
laris.
  The cavities of reserve for the teeth of
replacement have, at  this time, the ap-
pearance of smaU "compressed  sacs,
with their sides in contact, and situated
between the  surface  of the gum,"
and the sacs of the milk teeth.  From
the  time the foUicles  of the temporary
teeth close, they "become gradually
moulded into   their  peculiar  human
shape.   The molar pulps begin  to be
perforated by three canals, Avhich, pro-
ceeding from  the surface to their cen-
tres, graduaUy   divide  their  primary
7 
TEE
717
TEE
 base into three secondary  bases, which
 become developed into the fangs of the
 future teeth."  The sacs, in the mean-
 time,  "grow  more  rapidly  than  the
 pulps," leaving  an intervening  space,
 "in which is deposited  a  gelatinous
 granular substance, at first  in small
 quantity, and adherent only  to   the
 proximal surfaces of the sacs, but, ulti-
 mately about the fifth month," becomes
 "closely and intimately attached to the
 whole interior of these organs, except
 for a small space of equal breadth, all
 around the base of the pulp, which
 space retains the original gray color of
 the inner membrane of the foUicle, and,
 as  the primary  base of the  pulp  be-
 comes perforated by the canals formerly
 mentioned,  the  granular  matter sends
 process into them, which adhering to the
 sac, reserve the narrow space, described
 above, between themselves and the sec-
 ondary bases.  These processes of gran-
 ular matter do not meet across the ca-
 nals, but disappear near their point of
 junction.    The  granular  matter is
 closely applied,  but does not adhere to
 the surface of the pulp," but is exactly
 moulded to aU of its eminences and de-
 pressions.
  At the  fundus  of  the  sac,  each
 branch  of  the dental  artery sends of
 smaU branches to the outer membrane
 of the  sac,  and the "true"  or inner
 membrane  is  supplied from arteries
 from the gums, after  having inoscu-
 lated with  the twigs  sent off by  the
 dental  artery, but none of these  are
 sent to the granular substance.   "The
 dental  branch, after giving off these
 saccular  twigs,  divides into a number
 of contorted ramifications between the
 base of the pulp and  the sac, which
from smaUer ramusculi are transmitted
into  the pulp itself.   In the case of the
molares, the main branches divide into
three secondary branches, one for each
of the  secondary bases.  From these"
the sacs and pulps  are supphed with
blood.
  During these changes in the sacs of I
 the temporary teeth, "the follicle of the
 first permanent molar closes, and gran-
 ular  matter  is deposited in its sac."
 Below the sac,  of this tooth, or  be-
 tween it and the gum, there is a cavity
 of reserve "of dehcate mucous mem-
 brane," formed  by the union  of the
 edges of the secondary groove, from
 which  the materials for the formation
 of the  second  and third  permanent
 molars are derived.
   But previous to this period a "raised
 border and zone-like  vascularity" has
 formed around the apices and eminences
 of the pulps of the temporary teeth, and
 almost simultaneously with which, the
 process of ossification commences. The
 inner surface of the granular matter is,
 at the same  time absorbed; and, ulti-
 mately, becomes so  thin as to render the
 subjacent vascularity apparent.  The
 absorption continues, and by the time
 the surface of the crown has become
 covered with a layer of bone,  no re-
 mains  of it  are perceivable.  As  yet
 tittle  change has taken place in  the
 cavities of reserve for the teeth of re-
 placement, or those for the  two poste-
 rior  molares.   The former, however,
 "have been  gradually  receding from
 the surface of the gum, so as to be pos-
 terior instead of  inferior, to the milk
 sacs. The two or four anterior, about the
 fifth month begin to dtiate at their dis-
 tal extremities, across  which a fold ap-
 pears, which is the germ of the future
 pulp, lying in the direction of the cut-
 ting edge of the  future  tooth; and at
 the proximal or  acute  extremities of
 the cavities, two other folds, an ante-
 rior and a posterior, appear."  These
 are analogous to the opercula of the
 follicles of the temporary teeth.  The
 bulgings at the distal extremities of the
 cavities of  reserve soon assume  the
 appearance of dental pulps, and  the
 mouths of  these cavities are gradually
 closed.
  "The cavities of  reserve  have now
become tooth-sacs, and under this form
they continue to recede from the sur- 
TEE
718
TEE
face of the gum, imbedding themselves
in the sebaceous cellular tissue, which
has all along constituted  the  external
layer of the milk-sacs, and in which the
larger saccular vessels ramify before
arriving at the true mucous membrane
of the sacs.  This implantation of the
permanent, in the walls of the tempo-
rary tooth-sacs, give  the former the ap-
pearance of being  produced by a gem-
miparous process, from the latter."   It
was this, says Mr. Goodsir, in a note,
that deceived Dr. Blake, and led him to
believe that the sacs of the teeth of re-
placement originated. from the tempo-
rary teeth-sacs;  an  error into which
most subsequent writers have fallen.
  By the sixth month, they have formed
across the alveolar groove, and nitches
are now formed on the "posterior waUs
of the alveoli" for the sacs of the per-
manent teeth.  Up  to the eighth, and
even the  ninth month, the sac of the
first permanent molaris, is imbedded in
the maxillary tuberosity.  At or little
before birth, the roots of the temporary
incisores begin to be formed, and "in the
 accomplishment  of  which," says Mr.
 Goodsir, "three cotemporaneous actions
 are employed, viz.  the lengthening of
 the pulp; the  deposition  of tooth-sub-
 stance upon it; and the adhesion to the
 latter of that portion of the inner sur-
 face of the sac which is opposite to it."
 By the time the central incisores begin
 to appear through the gum, the jaw has
 lengthened sufficiently for the first per-
 manent molaris to begin  to assume  its
 "proper  position, in the  posterior part
 of the alveolar arch."  During the ad-
 vance of the temporary teeth, the sacs
 of the  permanent continue to recede,
 and to "insinuate themselves" "between
 the sacs of the former," until  "they are
 only connected by  their proximal ex-
 tremities"  through  the  alveolo-dental
 foramina, or iternia dentium  of Dela-
 barre, to the gum.
    The passage of a tooth through the
 gum  having been  described  in  article
 Dentition, the author does not deem it
necessary to introduce here the descrip-
tion of Mr. Goodsir.
  The vessels which go to the sacs of
the permanent teeth are derived, first,
from the gums, but they ultimately re-
ceive vessels from" the sacs of the tem-
porary teeth,  which  uniting with the
others, eventually retire into the perma-
nent dental canals.
  About the  seventh or eighth month
after birth, the cavity of reserve behind
the first permanent molaris, "begins to
lengthen, to  bulge out, and  to curve
backwards and upwards at its posterior
extremity, under the form of a sac, into
the mass of the maxillary tuberosity;  a
papilla  soon  appears in  its  fundus,  a
process of contraction separates it from
the remainder of the cavity of reserve,
which still adheres to its proximal wall
by one extremity,  Avhile by the other it
is continued  into  the substance of the
gum  under the  anterior molar.  This
new sac, which is that of the second
permanent molar, now  occupies the
position in the  maxillary tuberosity,
which the first  permanent  did before
it"   As the jaw lengthens, it leaves
this position and drops downwards and
forwards on a level with the other teeth.
In the meantime, the remaining extrem-
ity of the cavity of reserve sends off the
papilla and sac of the third  molar, or
dens  sapientiae, and this, as the other
molares had done, takes a position in the
maxillary tuberosity, where it remains
untU the jaw lengthens sufficiently  for
it to  take its place  behind  the second
molar, which it does at from the seven-
teenth to the twentieth year.
   The development of the teeth in the
lower jaw commences, as in the upper,
 "in a deep narrow groove, situated be-
 tween the lip and a  semi-circular lobe,
 but which, instead of terminating in a
 simple curve posteriorly, as in the upper
jaw, becomes shaUow, and assumes a
 sigmoidal form upon the surface of the
 posterior bulbous  ovoidal portion of the
 lobe."  The lip, about  the  seventh
 week, "becomes very loose, and sepa- 
TEE
719
TEE
rates widely from the lobe,  between
which and the foftner a ridge appears,
growing from behind forwards, and di-
viding the original groove into two, an
outer one, the labial duplicature of the
mucous membrane;  and an inner, the
primitive dental groove.   This ridge,
which  as in the upper, does not yet
extend to the incisive portion of the
jaw, is flat, or on the same continuous
plane with  the bottom of the dental
groove, and its lip  is  turned out,  or
overhangs the labial mucous membrane.
The inner lip of the groove  is formed
by the  semi-circular lobe, which has
become  thin, and  arched   over  the
groove, particularly anteriorly, where
it is cut into four   festoons, two  on
each side of the median line; and pos-
teriorly, where it still  retains the  ap-
pearance of an oval lobe, from under
which the outer lip or  ridge appears to
proceed. The groove  curves inwards
between the two lips posteriorly, under
a form  which is  evidently a develop-
ment of the original sigmoidal groove.
   "Near the posterior extremity of the
groove, there is an elevation of a small
portion  of  its floor,  which speedily
becomes the  germ or papilla  of  the
 inferior anterior milk molar tooth—the
 second  tooth  which  appears  in  the
 primitive development of  the human
 body."  This elevation,  lengthened
 from  behind forwards,  and flattened
 transversely, becomes  a papilla during
 the eighth week, and  about  the same
 time the canine or cuspid papilla makes
 its appearance a tittle farther forward.
 The dental  groove, in  the  mean time,
 advances fonvard  to the median line,
 and during  the next week the papillae
 of the incisores, the centrals first, and
 afterwards the laterals make their  ap-
 pearance.   The  papilla?  of the eight
 anterior teeth continue to increase, and
 soon become enclosed in follicles.  The
 second temporary molar papilla makes
 its appearance  between  the eleventh
 and twelfth week, and the same provi-
 sion for the-production of the teeth of
replacement is made in the lower as in
the upper jaw.  As the jaw lengthens,
the papillae  of the permanent molares
are developed in the manner  as  before
described, "the coronoid process, acting
the part the maxillary tuberosity did
in the upper'jaw."
   For  a description of the manner of
the formation of the enamel, see Enam-
el of the Teeth.
   On the laws  regulating the develop-
ment of the pulps and  sacs, and the
period for the appearance of each of
the tooth germs, Mr. Goodsir says:  "In
the description which has been given
of the earlier  phenomena of dentition,
it avUI be perceived that many of them
range  themselves under  the laws re-
cognized by MM. G. St. Hillaire and
Serres, viz. the law of symmetry (loi
de symmetrie,) the law of conjunction
(loi de conjugaison,) the law of balanc-
ing or antagonism (le balancement des
organes,) and the law of eccentric de-
velopment  (loi du developpement ex-
 centrique.)
   "The primitive and secondary dental
 grooves, the  foUicles, the cavities  of
 reserve, the osseous alveoli of the milk
 teeth  and  their  septa, are all  formed
 originally of  two halves, which ulti-
 mately join according to  the laws of
 symmetry and conjunction.
   "The pulps of the milk teeth  with
 their notched  laminae are productions
 from  the external lip or  ridge of the
 groove.    The  inter-follicular  septa,
 and the osseous alveolar septa, are also
 developed from without inward, (loi du
 developpement excentrique.)
   "I have already pointed out the beau-
 tiful example of  antagonism which ex-
 ists'between the median and  lateral
 elements of the inter-maxillary system,
 and I may now point out,  from among
 the facts  formerly detailed, a few in-
 stances of the same kind, which  must
 be referred to the same general expres-
 sion, (loi de balancement.)
   1. "Before the tenth Aveek the upper
 lip is full  and  prominent, but at that 
TEE
720
TEE
time it begins to recede, and gradually
to disappear anteriorly, so as to expose
the foUicles  and papulae of  the incisor
teeth.  It afterwards begins to regain its
former position and size, and the four-
teenth or fifteenth  week it is as large
as the inferior, which from the first, has
not changed its appearance.
   "At the tenth week, when the lip be-
gins  to  recede, the maxiUary palate
advances its anterior extremity, so as
to conceal,  in some degree, the inter-
maxillary palate, (median  and lateral
lobules.)  When the middle of the lip
has disappeared, the maxillary has not
only encroached upon the inter-maxil-
lary,  but has also  thrown itself into  a
bundle of irregular folds at  its anterior
parts.   As the maxillary palate retires,
and the folds become regular crenated
rugae, the anterior part of the lip again
appears, and at the fifteenth or  six-
teenth week, it is fuU and  prominent,
when the maxiUary palate  has retired
to its proper position.
   2.  "When the outer hp of the primi-
tive dental groove sends off the laminae,
which  constitute  the greater part of
each of the interfolticular  septa,  and
the floor of the secondary groove, the
lip itself, almost disappears.
   "The inner Up, again, which contrib-
utes  a very smaU share towards the ac-
complishment of this process, becomes
so much enlarged as to cover the  whole
groove.
   3. "The external and internal  tips of
the  primitive  dental groove are, origi-
 nally, equally prominent.  The former,
 when it sends off the inter-folhcular
 septa, diminishes, while the latter in-
 creases.  When all the foUicles of the
 primitive groove have been completed,
 the external Up begins to increase, and
 the internal to diminish.  This increase
 of the external Up goes  on  after the
 closure of the secondary groove, until,
 at the  fifth month,  it becomes  very
 prominent, and is  divided  into an inci-
 sor, a canine and  molar portion,  each
 of which has  a  general similarity  in
shape to the acting portions of the cor-
responding divisions of the future tooth
ranges.  As long as it remains in this
condition, it is employed by  the infant
as a masticating organ.   During this
period the internal lip has  altogether
disappeared, except  a  small  portion
posteriorly; but a short time  before the
milk teeth appear, it again  increases,
and the raphe of the dental groove, in-
stead of being hid behind the base of
the external lip,  is situated on the ridge
of the dental arch, which noAV,  as at
first, is  composed of two equally de-
veloped portions.  The  raphe forms a
little border in  the situation  just men-
tioned, and is familiar to the eye of the
surgeon, who, by its disappearance at
any particular point, can satisfy himself
of  the  proximity of the mtik  tooth
under it."
Careful observation of the Whole Pro-
  cess of Dentition in Man leads to the
  following conclusions:
  "Milk Teeth.  1. The milk teeth are
formed  on both sides of either jaw, in
three divisions, a molar, a canine, and
an  incisor, in each of which dentition
proceeds in an independent manner.
  2. "The dentition  of  the whole arch
proceeds  from  behind  forwards—the
molar division  commencing  before the
canine—and the latter before  the in-
cisor.
   3. "The dentition of each of the divi-
sions proceeds in a contrary direction,
the anterior molar appearing before the
posterior, the central  incisor  before the
lateral.
   4. "Two of the subordinate phenom-
ena of  dentition also  obey this inverse
law, the foUicles closing by  commenc-
ing at the median line, and proceeding
backwards, and the* dental groove dis-
appearing in the same direction.
  5. "Dentition commences in the upper
jaw, and continues  in advance during
 the most important  period  of its pro-
 gress.  The first tooth germ which ap-
 pears, is   that  of the superior anterior 
               TEE              72

 molar, which precedes  that of the in-
ferior anterior molar.
  "The apparent exception to this law,
 in the case of the  inferior incisor, has
 already been explained.
  "Permanent Teeth.  6. The germs of
 the permanent teeth, with the exception
 of that of the anterior molar, appear in
 a direction from the median line back-
 wards.
   7. "The milk teeth originate,  or are
 developed, from the mucous membrane.
   8. "The permanent teeth, also origi-
 nating from mucous  membrane, are of
 independent origin, and have no con-
 nection with the milk teeth.
   9. "A tooth pulp and its sac must be
 referred to the same class of organs as
 the combined  papiUa and follicle from
 which a  hair  or feather is developed,
 viz. bulbs."
  Teeth,   Differences   Between
 Temporary  and   Permanent.—The
 temporary teeth differ from the per-
 manent in  many  particulars.   The
 former are smaller and of a less firm
 texture than the latter,  "and their gen-
 eral characteristic  forms  and  promi-
 nences,"  to use the language of Mr.
 Bell,  "much  less  strongly marked.
 The  incisores  and  cuspidata of  the
 lower jaw are ofthe same general form
 as the adult, though much smaller; the
 edges are more rounded, and they are
 not much more than  half the  length of
 the latter.  The molars of the child, on
 the contrary,  are  considerably  larger
 than  the  bicuspides which  succeed
 them, and  resemble, very nearly, the
 permanent molares.
  "The roots of these  teeth, the mo-
lares of the chtid, are similar in  num-
 ber to those of the adult molares, but
they are flatter and thinner in propor-
tion, more hoUowed on their inner sur-
faces, and diverge from the  neck at a
more  abrupt angle, forming a sort of
arch."
  Teeth, Differences in their Lia-
bility to Decay.   See Caries of the
Teeth.
     61
                TEE

  Teeth, Diseases of.  See Caries of
the Teeth.  Also, Atrophy ; Exostoses,
Necrosis; Denudation of;, Spina Ven-
tosa, &c.
   Teeth,  Displacement  of,  by  a
Deposit of Bone in their Sockets.
The teeth are sometimes  forced from
their sockets by a deposition of osseous
matter in the alveolar cavities.  This
occurs more frequently with the inci-
sores than with any  of the other teeth,
and it rarely happens that  more than
one is affected by it at  the same time.
Although the deposition generaUy com-
mences at the bottom of the cavity, it
sometimes  takes place on  one side,
forcing the tooth against the opposite
wall, Avhich suffers a corresponding loss
of  substance.  In  this way, one, and
sometimes two or more teeth, are forced
asunder, and caused to take an improper
position.  Sometimes the  central inci-
sores are thus forced apart a  quarter of
an inch; at other times they are forced
against each other and caused to over-
lap.  When  the deposition  of bone is
confined to  the bottom of the  socket,
the tooth is  forced  from  the alveolar
cavity, and  in  those cases  where the
upper and lower  teeth meet at each
occlusion of the jaws, it often occa-
sions great inconvenience.
  The cause of this affection is supposed
to  be  irritation  of the alveolo-dental
periosteum, and occasioned, most proba-
bly, in the majority of cases, by the pres-
sure against the tooth, and it is doubtless,
favored by some peculiar constitutional
diathesis.
  When a tooth is thus caused to pro-
trude  from its socket, it should, from
time <to time, be  filed off even with the
other teeth, but  in performing this op-
eration, great care should be  taken not
to jar the tooth.   Mr.  Bell,  hoAvever,
objects to this.  He says, that "instead
of remedying the evil, it increases it,
by exciting to a still greater degree, the
action of the vessels of the periosteum;
whilst it also shakes  and ultimately
loosens the affected tooth."   But this
1 
TEE
72:
'2
TEE
objection does not seem to be predicated
upon facts or sound reason.  The, con-
stant striking of a tooth  thus  circum-
stanced against its antagonist, must, of
necessity, jar it more than the action of a
file;  and we have usuaUy observed, that
teeth thus affected, when left to them-
selves, generally soon become loose,
and if  they  did  not, in a short time,
drop out, were rendered  entirely  use-
less.   On  the other hand, the author
has  known them, by  being  filed off
from time to time, to remain compara-
tively firm in their sockets for years.
   Teeth, Deviation in Growth and
Form of.  There are no organs of the
body which are subject to more re-
markable deviations  in their form and
growth than the teeth.  Albinus men-
tions a case where two teeth,  one on
the right and the other on the left  side,
were found "enclosed  in the  roots of
those processes which extend from the
maxillary bones  to  the eminences of
the nose."   He  says they  were large
and resembled  the canine teeth,  with
their points directed towards the eyes,
and convex posteriorly and concave an-
teriorly.  It would seem, from the de-
scription he has given, that the tempo-
rary canines were still present,  and that
from some cause, not easy of explana-
tion, a wrong direction  had been given
to the  growth  of the permanent ones,
which were found imbedded, as above
stated, in the substance of the maxtilary
bone.  Mr. John Hunter mentions  a
case of a somewhat similar character.
   The following is in the words of Mr.
G. Waite:   "While I was prosecuting
my anatomical  studies, I was struck
with the appearance  of a cuspidatus of
the upper jaw;  it was short,  and ap-
peared as if the body of  the tooth was
in the jaw, and that it was the tip of
the root that  presented  itself. Upon
further examination  I  found this  veri-
fied ; and after the cranium and lower
jaw  were  properly  macerated  and
cleansed.  I found one of the lower bi-
cuspides in the same manner."
  In the  anatomical cabinet of  the
Faculty of Medicine in  Paris, there is
an anatomical preparation, in which is
displayed tAvo inverted supernumerary
teeth in the base of the maxtilary bone,
and Maury mentions a case in which
the right central incisor pointed towards
the wing of the  nose.  Fully develop-
ed teeth have also been  found in  the
maxiUary sinus.   There  is in the upper
jaw of an adult, in the Museum ofthe
Baltimore College of Dental Surgery,
and between the central incisores, in
the substance of the  bone, a  supernu-
merary tooth, the croAvn of which points
upwards towards the crest of the nasal
plates of the two bones.  The whole
tooth is about one inch in length, and
the apex of the crown  is nearly on a
level with the floor ofthe nasal cavities.
  Mr.  J.  Pearson,  a dentist of New
Orleans, gives, in a letter to the author,
the following description of a cuspid
tooth.   He says, "the tooth is perfectly
sound, and has  two separate  and dis-
tinct roots; one is  greatly divergent
from the other and main root, with a
second crook, forming an angle of about
45°.  The parent (large) root is much
flattened internally, as though an effort
had been made to produce a third fang.
The periosteum had become diseased—
causing absorption of the alveolus ; in
addition to which, an abscess had form-
ed at  the  extremities  of the roots.
These combined circumstances greatly
facihtated the removal of the tooth, for
had no  absorption taken place, I think
it hardly possible to have  removed it
without fracturing the smaller root."
  Accompanying the above  descrip-
tion was a drawing of the tooth, which
exactly corresponds  with it, but this.
we must omit.
  Teeth sometimes deviate  as much in
form as in  growth.   Mr. Fox gives a
drawing of a tooth shaped hke the let-
ter S, and there  is a central incisor in
the Museum of the  Baltimore CoUeg<j
of Dental  Surgery which has its root
bent up upon the labial surface of the 
TEE
723
TEE
crown, and the author has two teeth in
his possession in which the roots, while
in a pulpy state, were reflected upon
the crowns, and in this state were ossi-
fied.   The teeth were presented to him
by his brother Dr. John Harris, who ex-
tracted them from the right  side of the
upper jaAV of a young man  about nine-
teen years of age.
  The incisores  and cuspidati some-
times, though very rarely, have two
roots, the bicuspides three, and the mo-
lares four, five  and occasionaUy  six.
Other varieties of  deviation, both  in
growth and form, might be  mentioned,
but the foregoing will suffice.
  Teeth, Eruption  of  the.   See
Teeth, development of the pulps  and
 sacs of, on dentition.
  Teeth, Exostosis of.  See Exosto-
sis ofthe Teeth.
  Teeth, Extraction of.  See  Ex-
traction of the Teeth.
  Teeth, Eye.   The cuspidati of the
upper jaAV.
  Teeth, Filling of.   See  Filling
Teeth.
  Teeth, Fractures of  the.   See
Fractures of the Teeth.
  Teeth, Formation of.  See Teeth,
development of pulps and sacs of.
  Teeth, Irregularity of.   See Ir-
regularity of the Teeth.
  Teeth, Malformation of.   See
Teeth, deviation in the growth and form
of.
  Teeth,  Milk.   The   temporary
teeth.
  Teeth, Molar. The last three teeth
 on each side, in each jaw.
  Teeth, Morbid  Effects of Diseas-
ed.  The morbid phenomena resulting
from the irritation of diseased teeth. See
the various articles on the diseases  of
the teeth.
  Te eth Moulds.  Matrices  in plas-
ter  of paris,  or  metal, employed  in
moulding porcelain teeth.  See Porce-
lain Teeth.
  Teeth, Neck of the.   Collum den-
tium.
  Teeth, Necrosis of.  See Necrosis
of the Teeth.
  Teeth, Osseous Union of.  Exam-
ples of osseous union of two or  more
teeth, though rare, are nevertheless oc-
casionally met with.  Mr. Fox has giv-
en drawings of four  examples, which
Mr. Bell says, are still to be seen in the
Museum of Guy's Hospital, London,
and in 1835, the author was consulted,
while on a visit to Richmond, Va., by
two  gentlemen  who furnished  simi-
lar  examples.   The crowns  of the
central incisores of the  upper  jaw of
one, were perfectly united, the  poste-
rior surface presenting the appearance
of one broad tooth, while  the anterior
had a vertical groove  in  the centre, in-
dicating the crowns of two teeth. In the
other case, the crowns ofthe right central
and  lateral incisores were  united ante-
riorly so as to exhibit the appearance of
but one tooth, but when viewed from
behind, a vertical groove was seen pass-
ing through the centre.  There are, also,
three examples of osseous union of the
crowns of deciduous teeth in the Muse-
um of the Baltimore CoUege of Dental
Surgery, besides two of a union of the
roots of different.  One ofthe latter con-
sists in the union  of the roots of two
superior molares, by exostosis, and the
other, of the union of three  molares,
also, by exostosis.  The first was pre-
sented to the author for the museum of
the above mentioned institution, by Dr.
Blandin,  of Columbia,  S. C. and the
other for the  same purpose,  by Dr.
HaAves of New York.
   Since writing the  above, two other
examples of osseous union of the roots
of molar teeth have been communicat-
ed to the author by letter, one by Dr.
 Elbridge  Bacon, of  Portland, Maine,
and the other by Mr. J. Parsons of New
 Orleans.
   Teeth, Permanent.   The  adult
 teeth.  The teeth of second dentition.
   Teeth, Premolar.  The bicuspides,
or as they are called by some French
writers, the small molares. 
TEE
724
TEE
  Teeth Set on Edge.  A peculiarly
disagreeable sensation  in  the teeth re-
sulting from the contact of acids.  Teeth
thus affected are sometimes so sensi-
tive that the slightest touch is  produc-
tive of pain, and they have, seemingly,
a roughness on their cutting edges and
grinding surfaces, which is not felt at
any other time.  Teeth which have suf-
fered considerable loss of substance from
mechanical abrasion are  more subject
to this affection than those Avhich  have
a perfect coating of enamel.  There is
one thing connected with it, which it is
not easy  to explain.  It is this.   Per-
sons who  have lost aU  their natural.
teeth and wear artificial substitutes, are
sometimes  troubled with  it.   Several
examples of the kind have fallen under
the observation of the author.
   Teeth, Supernumerary.  The pro-
duction of supernumerary teeth rarely
occurs in  the posterior  part of the
mouth, but usually happens in the an-
terior and more frequently in the upper
than  the lower jaw.   Productions  of
this sort are generally unsightly in their
appearance,  and  disfiguring  to  the
mouth, the teeth being generally round
and of a conical shape, and situated be-
tween the central incisores, or projecting
over them.  Sometimes, however, they
appear behind these teeth, and at  other
times come out between them and the
lateral incisores.   Mr. Fox  has  given
engravings of three remarkable cases.
"In one," to use  his own language,
"there were two  supernumerary teeth,
of the conical kind, which were placed
together, and had come behind and be-
tween the central incisores, which they
had thrust forwards.  The  lateral in-
cisores grew  in  a line even with the
supernumerary teeth, behind the central
incisores and cuspidati, and so formed a
second row.  This  was the most con-
spicuous deformity of the teeth I ever
saw, for the mouth could not be opened
to speak, without completely presenting
them to view. In the other two cases the
supernumerary teeth resembled bicuspi-
des of the  lower jaw;  they had large
crowns, with depressions at their bases,
and by  thrusting the other teeth into
very improper situations,  produced an
appearance of a double  row."
  The author once saw two right later-
al incisores  in  the  lower jaw  which
were so Avell formed and arranged that
it was impossible to determine which of
the two ought to be considered  as the
supernumerary.  He has also met with
several  other cases of  supernumerary
teeth in the lower jaw which so closely
resembled  the incisores  that it was im-
possible to discover any  difference in
them, and Mr. Bell mentions a case of a
like nature.
  It is generally believed that supernu-
merary cuspidati never  occur, and until
quite recently the author was of this
opinion;  but he has a plaster model of
the upper jaw,  presented  to him by
Dr. E.  Townsend, of Philadelphia, for
the museum of the  Baltimore College
of Dental  Surgery,  representing three
cuspidati so much alike that no differ-
ence in shape can be detected.  There
is, also, on this  same model, six well
developed bicuspides,  three on each
side.  Supernumerary bicuspides, how-
ever, are seldom more  than one-fourth
as large as the natural bicuspides; they
generally  have  oval crowns and  are
commonly situated on the outside of the
dental range, partly between the other
teeth.   Supernumerary  teeth,  when
situated farther back in the mouth are
usually small,  but  often resemble, in
shape, the dentes sapientiae.  The au-
thor has three supernumerary teeth in
his possession which came out behind
the dens sapientiae in the upper jaw.
   Teeth, Tartar  of.  See Sahvary
Calculus.
   Teeth, Temporary.  The teeth of
first dentition;  milk teeth;  deciduous
teeth.
   Teeth, Temporary,  Importance
of the Preservation of.  It  is sup-
posed by  some, that  inasmuch  as the
temporary teeth are designed  to sub- 
               TEE               7S

serve only the wants of childhood, it is
of httle consequence, whether they re-
main until they are removed by the op-
erations ofthe economy to give place to
a larger, stronger, and more numerous
set,  or are lost  a year  or  two earlier.
This is an error which has been pro-
ductive of great mischief, as it has led
to an almost total neglect of the means
for the preservation  of their health.
  Disease of the temporary teeth and
their sockets interferes with the healthy
formative process  of  the  permanent
teeth;  and their loss, before these  are
ready to come forward and take their
place, is foUowed by a  contraction of
the alveolar border,  and consequent ir-
regularity ofthe organs of replacement.
It also disturbs, according to its nature
and  extent, the functional operations of
the Avhole organism.  Their preserva-
tion, therefore, until they are  removed
by the operations of the economy, to
give place to more hardy successors is
an  object of no trifling  importance.
With a view to this, they should be sub-
jected to such hygienic, and, if necessary,
therapeutical treatment, as  Avill  secure
their preservation until, by the destruc-
tion  of their roots, they are  loosened
and  drop out, except their removal is
caUed for at an earlier period by  the
eruption of the permanent   teeth  in an
improper place,  or  by  disease in their
sockets, or pain Avhich cannot  other-
wise be relieved.  The  first consists in
keeping  the  teeth  constantly   clean,
which may be done Avith a small, soft
and  elastic  brush, waxed floss stik,
proper tooth powders,  and the argilla-
ceous tooth polisher, and the  latter, by
such treatment as may  be  indicated by
the nature of their diseases.  See FiU-
ing Teeth, and Filing Teeth.
  Teeth, Temporary, Shedding of.
See Second Dentition.
  Teeth, Transposition of.  It some-
times happens, that a central incisor is
situated between the lateral of the side
to which it belongs, and the cuspidatus,
or that a right central is situated in the
         61»
                TEM

place of the left, and the left in the
place ofthe right; or that  a  lateral in-
cisor is situated between the cuspidatus
and first bicuspis, and at other times  a
cuspidatus is found between the first and
second bicuspides.   This description of
aberration in the position of the teeth is
supposed to be the result of a transposi-
tion of the dental pulps.
  Teeth, Third Set.  See  Dentition,
third.
  Teeth, Vitreous Suestance of
the.  The enamel of the teeth.
  TEETHING.  Dentition.
  Teething, Difficult.  See Denti-
tion, morbid.
  TEG'MEN.  An integument.
  TEGUMEN. An integument.
  TEG'UMENT.  Tegumentum ; from
tego, to cover.  A cover or covering;
an integument. In Anatomy, by the
term  teguments, is  comprehended the
structures generally which  cover and
protect the animal body, as the cuticle,
rete  mucosum, skin and adipose  mem-
brane.
  TELA.  From texo, to weave.  Ap-
plied, in Anatomy, to the ceUular mem-
brane, from its resemblance to a web of
cloth.
  Tela Cellulosa.  The cellular tis-
sue.
  TELAMO'NES.  Bandages;  dress-
ings for Avounds.
  TELANGIECTASIS. From teXos,
far, ayyttov, vessel, and  sxtaais, dilata-
tion.  The dilatation of vessels, as in
naevus maternus, and aneurism.
  TELEPH'IUM.   Sedum telephium.
Also, a term applied by  the ancients to
an ulcer, difficult to  cure, because the
wound inflicted on Telephus by Achilles,
degenerated into an  ulcer of this kind.
  TELLU'RIUM.   A metal of a color
between  tin and  stiver,  inclining  to
steel-gray.
  TEM'PERAMENT.  From tempero,
I mix together.  The constitution, as
determined by the predominance of cer-
tain constituents of the body.  Among
the ancients it was  supposed that the
!5 
TEM               726               TEM
manifestations  of the  functions  were
tempered, or so determined by the pre-
dominance of any one  of the four hu-
mors, then recognized, namely : blood,
lymph, bile, and atrabilk or  black bile,
as to give rise to a sanguine, phlegmatic
or lympluttic,  choleric  or  bilious,  and
atrabilious or melancholic temperament.
At present five temperaments are  re-
cognized, namely :  1. The  sanguine,
or sanguineous ;  2. The bilious, or chol-
eric ;  3. The melancholic, or atrabilious;
4. The phlegmatic,  or  lymphatic;  and
5. The nervous temperament.
  TEM'PERANCE.  Habitual mod-
eration in the indulgence of the natural
appetites and passions.
  TEMPERANTS. Sedatives;  reme-
dies  which allay irritation and mode-
rate the activity ofthe vascular system.
.  TEM'PERATURE. The degree of
heat which exists in any  given  situa-
tion or body as  indicated by the ther-
mometer.
  TEMPERIES.  Temperament.
  TEM'PERING.   An operation for
rendering  steel or  iron more compact
and hard,  or soft  and pliant, according
to the purposes for  Avhich they are re-
quired.   Surgical and  dental  instru-
ments  require to be tempered in  the
most exact and best manner.  If they
are too hard or two  soft, they will not
answer the purposes for which they are
designed.   For  tempering  dental in-
struments, Dr. Elliot gives the foUow-
ing directions :  "The piece to be har-
dened should be heated evenly to a dark
cherry color by the light of the sun,
then plunged with  some rapidity into
the bath" (cold  Avater)  "and allowed to
to remain until  cold; it should then be
polished, and the  hardness of  the tem-
per reduced by heat."
  "Very feAv instruments require to be
as hard as the steel is found to be on re-
moving it from the bath; besides, in
this condition, it breaks almost as easily
as glass, but acquires on drawing the
temper, a remarkable toughness.
   "The several different tempers that
are obtained by heating steel after it has
been once hardened, are  indicated cor-
rectly by the color the metal takes on,
and these tempers are known by the
names of the colors  which  indicate
them; so that we say when speaking
of a spring, it was drawn to  a blue; or
of a lancet, it was drawn to  a  straw
color;  because these are the proper col-
ors that indicate the proper temper for
the spring and lancet respectively.
  "A piece of polished steel, when ex-
posed to heat, takes on the following
colors in succession, viz.  1st, a straw-
color ;  2d,  yelloAV ;  3d,  dark  yellow;
4th, copper color; 5th,  purple;  6th,
blue; 7th, whitish blue.   The first of
these tempers is  suitable for  a  gum-
lancet, the  second for broaches and
scaling instruments, the third for rose-
drills,  the fourth  for  excavators,  the
sixth for springs,  and the seventh for
filling instruments ; this last temper is
used merely  to give to the piece a great-
er degree of  firmness.
  "In  hardening  an  instrument, not
only the  cutting part, but as much of
the shank as  requires strengthening,
should be plunged into the bath; and
in drawing the temper the point should
first be partly  polished,  so that the
colors produced by heat,  may readily
be distinguished; and while the temper
of the  shank is being  reduced to a
whitish blue in the  flame  of a spirit
lamp, the point should be held between
the beaks of a  pair of large pliers, to
prevent it from being drawn too low,
and then it may be released from  the
pliers,  and  the heat allowed to run
down until the point assumes the re-
quired shade."
  TEM'PLE. From tempus, time, be-
cause the hair first begins to turn gray
here.   The  lateral parts   of the fore-
head covered hy the temporal muscles.
  TEM'PORA.  The temples.
  TEM'PORAL.  Temporalk. Belong-
ing, or relating, to  the temple.
  Temporal Aponeurosis.   A strong
aponeurosis  which is  attached to  the 
TEM
727
TEM
whole of the curved line of the tem-
poral bone, and the malar and zygo-
matic arch.
  Temporal Artery.   Arterea tem-
poralk.  A branch ofthe external caro-
tid, which passes up on the temple.
  Temporal Bone.   Os temporis.   A
bone situated on the lateral and inferior
part of the cranium, and is usually di-
vided into three parts. 1. The squamous;
2. The mastoid, and 3. The petrous por-
tion.
   Temporal Fossa. An excavation on
each  side  of the head  in which  the
temporal muscle is situated.
   Temporal Muscle.   A muscle sit-
uated on the temple, arising from the
semi-circular ridge commencing at the
external angular process of the os fron-
tis, and extending along this and the
parietal bones.  Also, from the surfaces
below this ridge formed  by the frontal
and squamous portion of the temporal
and sphenoid bones ; likewise from the
under surface of the temporal aponeu-
rosis, and is inserted,  after converging
and passing under the zygoma, into the
coronoid process of the lower  jaw,
which it surrounds on  every side by a
dense, strong  tendon.  The  office of
this muscle is to draw the  lower jaw
upward, as in  the cutting and rending
of food.
   Temporal Nerves. The nerves dis-
tributed  to the temporal region,  and
furnished  by   the  inferior  maxillary
branch of the  fifth pair.  The name
has also been given by  Sommering, to
the division of the seventh pair, dis-
tributed to the temporal region.
   TEMPORO-MAXILLARY  AR-
TICULATION.   The  articulation of
the lower jaw  on each side to the gle-
noid cavity of the temporal bone. This
cavity is situated  at the base of the
zygomatic process, is of an irregular
oval shape, and divided into two por-
tions—an anterior and posterior.  The
anterior,  which  is the articular,  is
smooth, and in the living subject, cov-
ered with  cartilage, but the posterior
does not enter into the formation of the
joint.  The two  are separated by the
fissure of Glasserius, (fissura Gbsseri,)
which gives passage to the chorda tym-
pani  nerve, the  laxitor tympani mus-
cle, and the  internal auditory vessels.
The depth of this  cavity is increased
by the  eminences which surround  it.
Its size is much greater than is  neces-
sary for the reception of the condyle of
the lower jaAV, but this disproportion
only  exists in  man and ruminating
animals.  This cavity  is placed nearly
transversely—the outer extremity comes
a  little more forward than the internal.
It is bounded on the inside by the spine
of the sphenoid bone, posteriorly by the
styloid  and vaginal processes, and an-
teriorly  by the  eminentia  articulark,
situated immediately at the-root of the
zygomatic process, which contributes,
in mastication, to modify the motions of
the jaw.
   For a description of the condyles of
 the lower jaw.  See Maxilla, inferior.
 They, however, as Avell as  the glenoid
 cavities are covered with a smooth lay-
 er of cartilage.
   There is interposed between the con-
 dyle and the cavity  an inter-articular
 cartilage, sometimes perforated in the
 centre, and so moulded as to fit the two
 articular surfaces.  Except where  it
 adheres to the external lateral ligament,
 and gives attachment to a few fibres of
 the  external pterygoid muscle, the cir-
 cumference  of this cartilage is free, a
 circumstance which greatly facilitates
 the  movements of the joint.
   The  union of this articulation  is
 maintained, 1. By the external lateral
 ligament, which  has a broad attachment
 to the tubercle situated  at the junction
 of the roots of the zygomatic process,
 extending from  thence to the neck of
 the  condyle, covering the whole of the
 outside of the articulation. Externally,
 it comes in contact with the skin, and,
 internally, with the inter-articular carti-
 lage, and synovial capsules.
   2. By the internal lateral or  spheno- 
TEM
728
TEM
  maxillary ligament,  extending from the
  spinous process of the sphenoid bone
  to the spine on the inside of the orifice
  of the inferior dental canal, forming
  an aponeurotic band, which protects
  the dental  vessels and nerves from the
  pressure of the internal pterygoid mus-
  cle.  This ligament cannot be regarded
  as  contributing to the strength of the
  articulation.
    3.  By  the stylo-maxilbry  ligament,
  which extends from the styloid process
  ofthe temporal bone to the inferiorangle
  of the lower jaw, but  has no other  use
  than to restrain the motions of the jaw,
  and to give attachment to the stylo-
  glossus muscle.
   Belonging to this articulation are two
  synovial capsules, one  on each side of
 the  inter-articular  cartilage,  which,
 sometimes, by an opening in the carti-
 lage communicate with each other.
    Temporo-Maxillary  Articula-
 tion,  Mechanism of  the.   The fol-
 lowing description of the mechanism of
 this joint  is quoted from Cruveilhier's
 Anatomy : "In  considering the action
 of this joint, the lower  maxilla may be
 regarded as  a hammer which strikes
 against the anvil represented by the up-
 per jaw; it is a double angular lever,
 the axis of its motion being represented
 by a horizontal line that would  pass
 through the middle of the rami.  This
 articulation,  which belongs  to the class
 of condyloid joints,  has been ranged
 among  the  angular  ginglymi, on ac-
 count of the great extent of its move-
 ments in two opposite directions, during
 its elevation and its depression, but it dif-
 fers from them in being so constructed
 as to admit of slight lateral movements.
 It can also be moved forward and back-
 ward.
   "1. Depression.—In this movement,
 each condyle roUs forward in its glenoid
 cavity, and then passes  upon the trans-
 verse root  of the zygoma, with a sud-
den jerk, which  may  be easily felt by
placing the finger on the condyle whUe
the mouth is being opened; at the same
  time  the  angle of the jaw  is moved
  backward.  The  condyle carries with
  it the inter-articular cartilage;  for the
  union of these  two parts is of such a
  nature that, even  in dislocation of the
  javv, they are never separated.  This
  depends not only  upon  the  compara-
  tive  tightness of the  lower synovial
  capsule, but also on the mode of inser-
  tion of the external pterygoid muscle,
  which, being attached both to the neck
  of the condyle  and the inter-articular
  cartilage,  acts  simultaneously  upon
  them. The other parts of the joint are
  effected in the following  manner: du-
  ring depression  of the lower jaw, the
  external  lateral  ligament  is stretched;
  the upper synovial capsule is distended
  behind, but  readily  yields on account
  of its  laxity.  The spheno-maxillary
  band, or internal lateral ligament, which
  is inserted at an almost  equal  distance
  from the condyle, which is carried  for-
  ward, and  from  the angle of  the jaw,
  which is carried backward, remains un-
 altered, being neither stretched nor re-
 laxed.
   "When the depression is  carried too
 far, either  from the  effect of a blow
 upon  the bone, or during a convulsive
 yawn, the condyle is dislocated into the
 zygomatic  fossae, tearing  the  superior
 synovial capsule, and carrying with it
 the inter-articular cartilage.*  This mode
 of displacement  is  impossible in  the
 infant; for, from the  obliquity of the
 ascending ramus  of the jaw, the upper
 part of the  condyle looks backward,
 and, in order to  be luxated forward,
 would  have to traverse  a much larger
 space than it does even Avhen the mouth
 is opened to the greatest possible extent.
  "2.  In  ekvation,  the  condyle rolls
 backward upon the transverse process,
 into the glenoid cavity.  The external

  * This luxation would be much more com-
 mon were it not for the inter-articular carti-
lage, which, by always accompanying  the
condyle, presents a smooth  surface, over
which the latter may glide in returning into
its proper cavity. 
TEM
729
TEN
lateral ligament is relaxed.  The obsta-
cles to too  great an elevation  are, 1.
The meeting ofthe dental arches. 2. The
presence  of the vaginal process,  and
the anterior wall of the auditory mea-
tus ; and it is very probable that the ex-
tensive movements of the jaw in the
old subject, when the teeth are lost, are
permitted by  the  size  of the  glenoid
cavities.  Without that portion of the
glenoid cavity, which is behind the fis-
sure of Glasserus, the toothless alveolar
edges ofthe aged could never be brought
in contact.
  "The forward motion is not, like the
preceding,  the motion of a lever in
which  the jaw  turns upon its axis;  it
is a horizontal movement in which the
condyle is brought under the transverse
root of the zygoma.    A preliminary
and  indispensable condition  to  this
movement is a slight depression of the
whole  of the lower maxiUa.  In this
movement all the ligaments are stretch-
ed ; if it were carried too far, the coro-
noid process would strike against the
bone in the zygomatic fossa, and this
circumstance  would prevent the possi-
bility of luxation of the condyle.
  "The backward motion requires no
special remark.
  "The bteral movements differ from the
preceding in the mechanism by which
they are effected.  In the first place, the
whole  bone does not move from its
place.  One of the condyles alone es-
capes from its socket, while  the  other
remains in the glenoid cavity.   The
bone, therefore, turns upon one of the
condyles as on a pivot.
  "The external lateral hgament of that
articulation in which the condyle moves
is much stretched.
  "The  lateral motions  would  have
been much more extensive had not the
two condyles  mutuaUy obstructed  each
other in all movements but that of de-
pression, by  reason of their opposite
directions.  This  may be  shown by
sawing a maxilla  through the  middle,
and moving each of the halves.  More-
over, the styloid and vaginal processes,
and the spine of the sphenoid, prevent
displacement inward."
  Temporo-Maxillary Nerves. The
divisions of the fascial nerve distributed
to the temporal and maxillary regions.
  TEMULENTIA.  Drunkenness.
  TENACITY.   Tenacitas;  from te-
no, I  hold.   That property  of bodies
which prevents them from parting with-
out considerable force.  Cohesiveness.
  TENACULA.   Bone-nippers.
  TENACULUM. From teno, I hold.
A firm, sharp pointed hook, attached
to a handle, used to seize and  draw out
the mouths of wounded arteries.
  Tenaculum, Assalini's.  A pair of
smaU forceps, invented by Assalini, fur-
nished  with  fine  bifurcated,  sharp
points, received into each other when
closed, and  held together by  a spring
between the handles.  It is  used for
seizing and holding smaU arteries while
a ligature is being applied.
  TENDO  ACHILLIS  The strong
tendon of the heel, formed by the junc-
tion of the  gastrocnemius  and soleus
muscles.
  TEN'DON.   Tendo, from  teiva, I
stretch. A white, fibrous chord, serving
for the attachment of a muscle, or mus-
cles, to bone.
  TENDONS,  TWITCHING   OF
THE.  Subsultus tendinum.
  TEN'DRIL. A filiform, spiral shoot
of a  plant that winds round another
body  for support.
  TENES'MUS. From teiva,I stretch.
Frequent desire to go to stool, without
a discharge, accompanied by straining
and pain.
  TENONT'AGRA.   From  tevav,
tendon, and aypa, a seizure.  Gout af-
fecting a tendon.
  TENOT'OMY.   Tenotomia;  from
tevav, tendon, and tour;, incision.  The
operation of dividing a tendon.
  TENSION.   Tenskt;  from tendere,
to stretch.  The state of a part when
extended or stretched.
  TEN'SOR.  A  term apphed to mus- 
TER
i
30
TER
cles, the office of which is, to extend
the parts to which they are  attached.
  TENSOR PALATI.   The circum-
flexus palati muscle.
  Tensor Tarsi.  A small muscle sit-
uated at the inner commissure of the
eyehds.
  Tensor Tym'pani.   A muscle of the
internal ear.
  Tensor Vaginje Femoris.  The fa-
cia lata  muscle, situated on the outside
of the thigh.
  TENT. A small roll of lint, or piece of
sponge, used for  dilating wounds, sinu-
ses, &.C., to prevent them from closing
before they are filled up at the bottom.
  TENTACULUM.    A feeler.  A
mobile appendage, belonging  to many
invertebratae, and serving as an organ
of touch, or the  means of attachment.
  TENTO'RIUM. The process of the
dura mater which separates the  cere-
brum from the cerebellum.
  TENT WORT. Asplenium ruta mu-
raria.
  TEPID.  Tepidus.  Slightly warm.
  TERAS.  A monster.
  TERATOL'OGY.  Teratobgia ;—
from tepas, a monster, and xoyos, a dis-
course.   A treatise on monsters.
  TEREBEL'LA.  A trepan.
  TEREBINTHINA.  From tepuiv-
Bos, the turpentine tree. A resinous sub-
stance of the consistence of honey, which
flows from pine and fir trees.  Turpen-
tine.
  Terebinthina   Argentoratensis.
Strasburg turpentine.
  Terebinthina Canadensis. Cana-
da balsam.
  Terebinthina  Chia.  The Chian
turpentine.
  Terebinthina Communis. Common
turpentine.
  Terebinthina Veneta. Venice tur-
pentine.
  Terebinthina Oleum.  Oil of tur-
pentine.
  TERES.  Round;  cylindrical; ap-
plied to  muscles and ligaments from
their shape.
  Teres  Ligamen'tum.   The round
ligament attached to the head of the os
femoris, and to the bottom of the coty-
loid cavity of the os innominatum.
  Teres  Major.  A muscle situated
along the inferior and posterior part of
the shoulder.
  Teres Minor. A thin, fleshy mus-
cle, situated at  the posterior and infe-
rior part of the  shoulder,  and partially
covered by the back part ofthe deltoides.
  TERGAL.  From tergum, the back.
Belonging to the back.
  TERGEMTNUS.  A term applied,
in Botany, to a leaf-stalk which has two
leaflets at the end of each  branch, and
two at the division of the fork.
  TER'GUM.   The back.
  TERMINALIS.   Terminal; form-
ing the end or extremity.
  TERMINOL'OGY. Terminobgia;
from  tepuav,  a term, and  Xoyos, a dis-
course.   A treatise on terms.  A cata-
logue or list of the more important and
usual terms in  a language, science, or
art, with their definitions.  A nomen-
clature.
  TERNARY. Ternarius. Consisting
of threes; pertaining to the number three.
  TERN'ATE.   Ternatus.  A term
applied, in Botany, to a leaf Avhich has
three  leaflets.
  TER'RA.  Earth.
  Terra Aesorbens.  An absorbent
earth.
  Terra Japonica.   Acacia catechu.
  Terra Lem'nia.   Lemnian earth.
  Terra Livon'ica.  Sealed earth from
Livonia.
  Terra Merita.  Turmeric root.
  TerraNoceria'na. A soft,whitish,
astringent earth.
  Terra Ponderosa.   Baryta.
  Terra  Ponderosa Salita.    The
chloride of barium.
  Terra Sigilla'ta.   Sealed earth.
See Bole.
  TERTIAN AGUE. Tertian fever.
An intermittent, whose paroxysms re-
turn every forty-eight  hours, or every
third day. 
TET               731               TEX
  TESSELLA'TUS.    From  tessera,
a square.  Tesselated;  checkered.
  TES'SERA. The cuboid bone.
  TEST.  In Chemistry, a substance
employed  to  discover  an unknoAvn
constituent of a compound, by causing
it to exhibit some known property.  In
Metallurgy, a cupel, or vessel, in which
metals  are melted for trial and refine-
ment ;  refining gold or silver by means
of lead, in a test, by the  vitrification,
scorification, &.c, of all foreign matter.
  Test Paper.   Paper stained  with
litmus, or any reagent.
  TESTA.  The sheU of a mollusca.
Also, the  smooth  and scaly covering
which  invests the exterior  of seeds.
  TESTA'CEOUS.   From  testa, a
sheU.    A powder  made  from burnt
shells.  Also, of the nature of,  or hav-
ing a shell.
  TESTAE PREPARAT.E.   Prepa-
red oyster shells.
  TESTES.  The testicles.
  TESTICLE.  From testk, a white-
ness, because the testes are evidences
of virility.  The testicles are two oval,
glandular organs,  situated within  the
scrotum, and covered by  the  tunica
albuginea.
  TESTIS FEMINEUS.   The ovary.
  TESTU'DO.  The turtle. Also, an
encysted tumor of the scalp.
  TETANIC.  Relating  to  tetanus.
Also, a medicine which increases  the
irritability  of the  muscular fibre, as
nux vomica,  strychnia, &c, and when
taken in large doses, produces convul-
sions.
  TETANUS.  From teiva, I stretch.
Spasms accompanied by rigidity.  A
disease characterized  by  general and
permanent spasmodic  rigidity of  the
muscles.   There  are four varieties:
1.  Trkmus, the  lock-jaw.  2.  Opktho-
tonos, in Avhich the  body is drawn
back.   3. Emprostlwtonos,  in Avhich it
is drawn fonvard, and 4. Pleurothoto-
nos, where it is drawn to one side.
  TETARTiE'US.  A quartan ague.
  TETRABRAN'CHIATE.    From
tetpa,  four, and  |3pay^ta, gills.   An
order of cephalopods with four gills.
  TETRAD YNAM'IA.     Tetrady-
namous;  from teaaapes, four, and Swa-
jus,  power.   In Botany, a  class of
plants  with six stamens, four longer
than the rest
  TETRAG'ONUS.  Quadrangular;
four-cornered.
  TETRAGYN'IA.  From  teaaapes,
four, and yvvrj, a wife.   In Botany, an
order of plants having four pistiles.
  TETRAN'DRIA.    Tetrandrous;
from tetpas, a quaternary, and avtip, a
husband.   A  class of hermaphrodite
plants having four stamens.
  TETRANTHE'RA   PICHURIM.
The plant from which the faba pichu-
rim is obtained.
  TETRAPHYL'LOUS. Four-leav-
ed.
  TETRASPER'MOUS.  Four-seed-
ed.
  TETTER.   Herpes.
  Tetter, Crusted.  Impetigo.
  Tetter, Milky.  Porrigo larvalis.
  Tetter, Scaly.  Psoriasis.
  TETTERWORT.     Chelidonium
majus.
  TEU'CRIUM.  The name of a ge-
nus  of plants.
  Teucrium Capitatum.  The poley-
mountain of Montpelier. '
  Teucrium Chamjedrys.  The com-
mon germander.
  Teucrium Chamjep'itys.  The com-
mon ground-pine.
  Teucrium Cret'icum.  The poley-
mountain of Candy.
  Teucrium Iva.   French  ground-
pine.
  Teucrium Marum.    The marum
germander.
  Teucrium Scordium.   The water
germander.
  TEUTHIDvE.  Teuthidans; from
tevBis, a calamary.  The  family of ce-
phalopods,  of which the calamary, ligo
vulgark, is  the type.
  TEXT'URE. Textura ; from texere,
to weave.   The arrangement of the 
THA
732
THE
several  parts of any  body with each
other.  In Anatomy,  the arrangement
of the tissues of an organ. The textures
of the body according to Wilson, are :
  1. Corpuscular tissue, found in  the
blood, lymph and chyle.
  2. Epidermoid tissue ; example, epi-
thelium, cuticle, hair,  nails.
  3. Pigmentary tissue, found in cho-
roid coat of the eye, lung.
  4. Adipose tissue, as fat.
  5. Cellular tissue.
  6. Fibrous tissue.
  7. Elastic  tissue,  ligamenta flava,
middle coat of the arteries.
  8. Cartilaginous  tissue,  including
fibro-cartilage.
  9. Osseous tissue.
  10. Muscular tissue.
  11. Nervous tissue.
  12. Vascular tissue, arteries, veins,
and lymphatics.
  13. Serous tissue, including synovial.
  14. Mucous tissue.
  15. Dermoid tissue.
  16. Glandular tissue.
  17. Refracting  tissue, lens of  eye,
cornea.
  18. Petrous tissue, enamel of teeth.
  TEXTUS.  A tissue.
  THALAMUS.   A room  or cham-
ber.  In Anatomy, the part of the brain
from which the optic  nerve originates.
  THACKSTON, W. W. H. Author
of an article  on the  Use of Forceps,
and the Key in the Extraction of Teeth,
published in volume first of the Amer-
ican Journal of Dental Science.—Also,
of a  Dissertation  on  the Diseases of
the Maxillary Sinus, published in same
periodical, and of a paper on the Mor-
bid Effects of Diseased Teeth.
  THALAMI NERVORUM OPTI-
CO'RUM.  Two  oblong bodies, hav-
ing a thin coating of white  substance
on their surface,  situated between the
corpora striata,  divided by  a  fissure,
which constitutes the  third ventricle of
the brain.   They  form the  principal
origin of the optic nerve,  a circum-
 stance  which gave rise to their name.
  THALICTRUM.  The name  of a
genus of plants.
  Thalictrum Flavum.   The poor
man's rhubarb.
  THANATOL'OGY.  Thanatobgia;
from Bavatos,  death, and Xoyos, a dis-
course.   A treatise  on the doctrine of
death.
  THANATOS.  Death.
  THAP'SIA. The name of a genus
of plants.
  Thapsia Ascle'pias.   The  deadly
carrot.
  THAP'SUS.  Verbascum thapsus.
  THE'A.  The dried leaves  of the
tea-shrub.
  Thea Germanica.  Veronica.
  Thea Nigra.  Black-tea; also called
bohea.
  Thea Viridis.  Green-tea.
  THE'CA.   From  tiBnui,  I  place.
A case or sheath.
  Theca Vertebralis.    The canal
of the vertebral column.
  THELASIS.   Lactation.
  THELE.  The nipple; a papilla.
  THELITIS. From Bnxn, the nipple,
and itis, a terminal, signifying inflam-
mation.  Inflammation of the nipple.
  THE'NAR.  From Beva,  I  strike.
The palm of the hand  and sole of the
foot.
  Thenar Eminence.   The  projec-
tion on  the superior and outer part of
the hand.
  THEOBRO'MA.  The name  of a
genus of plants.
  Theobroma Caca'o. The tree which
bears the cocoa.
  THEORETICAL.    Theoreticus;
from  §eapea,  I contemplate.  Pertain-
ing to  theory; depending  on  theory;
not practical;  speculative.
   THE'ORY.  Theoria;  from $eapea,
I  contemplate.   The speculative part
of a  science;  inferences  drawn  from
facts ; an exposition of the principles of
a science.  Also, science, distinguished
from art, as the theory and practice  of
dental  surgery, or  general medicine.
It  differs  from  hypothesis in  being 
THE
733
THO
 founded on inferences drawn from es-
 tablished facts, while a hypothesis at-
 tempts to explain certain phenomena,
 by  assuming  propositions  altogether
 speculative.
   Theory of  Medicine.  A  philoso-
 phical exposition of the phenomena of
 health and disease, embracing  physiol-
 ogy, pathology, hygiene,  and  thera-
 peutics.
   THERAPEUTICS. Therapeutice;
 from §epartevu, I wait on  the sick.  I
 alleviate, or  assuage.  That branch of
 medicine Avhich has, for its object, the
 treatment of  diseases, or which consid-
 ers the application of the remedies em-
 ployed for their prevention and cure.
   THERIACA. From ^p, a ferocious
 or venomous animal, an axeouai, I cure.
 An electuary, supposed by the ancients
 to be a potent antidote against the bite
 of venomous animals.  Also, a treacle
 of molasses.
   Theriaca  Androm'achi. The name
 of an ancient alexipharmic  electuary.
   Theriaca  Celestis.   Tincture of
 opium.
   Theriaca  Edinensis. Confection of
 opium.
   Theriaca  Germano'rum.   An ex-
 tract prepared from juniper berries.
   Theriaca  Londinensis.   A cata-
 plasm of cumin seed,  bay-berries, ger-
 mander, snake-root, cloves, and honey.
   THERIO'MA.  Therion.  A malig-
 nant ulcer.
   THER'MA.  A warm bath or spring.
   THER'MAL. Warm.
   THER'ME.   Heat.
   THERMO-ELECTRICITY.  Elec-
 tricity produced by heat.  It is effected
 by heating the junction of two metals
 of different conducting powers, which
 have been soldered together.  This, at
 once sets in motion, a current of elec-
 tricity, which passes along the wires.
  THERMOM'ETER.   Thermome-
 trum; from ^p^,  heat, and petpov, a
 measure. An instrument for measuring
the temperature of bodies, or the de-
grees of heat.
         62
   THER'MOSCOPE.  A thermom-
 eter.
   THE'SIS. A position or proposition;
 a dissertation on any subject.  In Med-
 ical and Dental Colleges, an essay com-
 posed by a student who is a candidate
 for graduation.
   THEVETIA A'HOVAL.  A Bra-
 zilian tree, Avhich produces a nut said
 to be a violent  poison.
   THIGH.  Femur.   That part of the
 lower limb situated between the  pelvis
 and leg.
   Thigh-Bone.  Os femoris.
   THIRST.  In Physiology, the sen-
 sation of a desire to drink,  or to intro-
 duce liquids into the stomach.
   THISTLE,  BLESSED.   Centau-
 rea benedicta.
   Thistle, Carline.  Carlina acaulis.
   Thistle, Creeping.   Serratula  ar-
 vensis.
   Thistle, Holy.  Centaurea  bene-
 dicta.
   Thistle, Ladies'. Milk thistle ; car-
 duus marianus.
   Thistle, Pine.  Carlina gummifera.
   THLA'SIS.   Thlasma.   A contu-
 sion.
   THLASPI.  The name of a genus
 of plants.
   Thlaspi Arvense. Treacle mustard.
   Thlaspi Campestre.    Mithridate
 mustard.
   THORACENTE'SIS. From £Mpaf,
 the thorax, and xevtqais, perforation.
 Tapping the thorax.
   THORACIC.    Thoracicus.   Be-
longing to the thorax.
   Thoracic Aorta.  That  portion of
 the aorta between the  heart and dia-
 phragm.
   Thoracic Artery, Inferior.  The
 external mammary artery.
   Thoracic Duct.  Ductus thoracicus.
The trunk of the absorbents or duct, in
Avhich  the lymphatics of the lower ex-
tremities, left side  of the head, neck,
and thorax terminate.  It commences
at the receptaculum  chyli, is  about the
size of a goose-quill, passes  up upon 
THU
734
THY
the dorsal  vertebrae, between the aorta
and vena azygos, sometimes divides into
two branches which afterwards unite,
and sometimes gives off a number of
branches which assume a plexiform ar-
rangement, passes up through the dia-
phragm, and to the union of the left
subclavian and jugular veins,into which
it empties  its contents.
  Thoracic Regions.   The different
regions of the chest.
   THORACYSTIS.   Encysted drop-
sy of the  thorax.
   THORACICI.   The name of an
order of fishes which have the ventral
fins under the pectoral.
   THORAX.  From  £opt«, to  leap,
because the heart leaps in it. That por-
tion of the  body  situated  between the
neck and abdomen.  It is one of the
 splanchnic  cavities, and  contains the
 pleura, lungs, heart, oesophagus, tho-
 racic  duct, thymus gland, arch of the
 aorta, part of the vena cava, the  vena
 azygos, the eighth pair of nerves, and
 part of the intercostal nerve.   It is
 bounded  anteriorly by the  sternum,
 posteriorly by the vertebrae, laterally  by
 the ribs and scapula, above by the clav-
 icle, and  below by the  diaphragm.
   THORN-APPLE.  Dartura stramo-
 nium.
   THOROUGHWORT.  Eupatorium
 perfoliatum.
   THRIX.  A hair.
   THROAT.   The  anterior part  of
 the neck; the fauces.
    THROBBING.  Beating;  pulsat
  ing, as of the heart or of an artery; pal-
  pitating.
    THROM'BUS.  From $pou6oa, to
  clot  A small  tumor formed  by an
  effusion  of blood into  the  ceUular sub-
  stance in the vicinity of a vein which
  has been opened.
    THRUSH.   Aphthae.
    THRYP'SIS.  Comminution.
    THUS. The resin of the pinus abies,
   and of the juniperus lycia.
    THUYA.  The name of a genus of
  plants.
  Thuya Occidenta'lis.   The arbor
vitae, or tree of life.
  THYM'BRA.  Satureia hortensis.
  Thymbra Hispanica. Thymus mas-
tichina.
  THYME.  Thymus.
  THYMIA'MA.    From $vua, an
odor.   Musk-wood.   Thus judaeorum.
A bark brought from Syria, which has
an agreeable odor and bitterish taste.
  THYMIOSIS.   Frambcesia.
  THYMITES.    Wine impregnated
with thyme.
  THYM'IUM.  A small wart upon
the skin, resembling thyme buds.
  THYMOXAL'ME.  A compound
medicine composed of thyme, vinegar
and salt.
  THY'MUS. The name of a genus
of plants.  Also, common thyme.
  Thymus Citra'tus.  Thymus serpyt-
 lum.   Wild thyme  ; mother of thyme.
   Thymus Creticus.   Satureia capi-
 tata.
   Thymus Mastichi'na.   The com-
 mon herb mastich.
   Thymus Serpyllum.  Wild  thyme.
   Thymus   Vulga'ris.      Common
 thyme.
   THYMUS GLAND.   A  conglom-
 erate gland in the fetus, composed of lo-
 bules and a central cavity, situated in a
 duplicature of the  mediastinum under
 the upper part of the sternum.
   THYRO-ARYTENOID.     Rela-
 ting to the thyroid  and arytenoid car-
 tilages.
    Thyro-Arytenoid  Ligaments.—
 The  inferior ligaments of the larynx.
  The vocal chords.
    Thyro-Arytenoid Muscle.   Thy-
  ro-arytoznoidcus.    A thin muscle sit-
  uated about the glottis.   It arises from
  the  lower part of the posterior surface
  of the thyroid carttiage, and is inserted
  into the outer part of the base of the
  arytenoid cartilage. Its use is to draw
  the arytenoid carttiage forward nearer
  to the thyroid, and as it does this, it re-
  laxes the hgaments of the larynx.
    Thyro-Epiglot'tic.   Thyro- epigbt- 
THY
735
TIL
tideus.   A name given  to  the  outer
portion of the thyro-arytenoid muscle.
  Thyro-Hyoideus.  Thyrohyoid.  A
muscle arising from the  thyroid carti-
lage, and  inserted into the inferior bor-
der of the cornu of the os hyoides.
  Thyro-Pharyngeus.   The constric-
tor pharyngis inferior.
  Thyro-Pharyngo-Staphylinus.---
The  palato-pharyngeus.
   THYROCE'LE. Bronchocele.
   THYROID.  Thyreoid.  Thijroides;
from ^vptoj, a shield, and  eiSos, resemb-
lance.  Resembling a shield.
   Thyroid  Cartilage.     Cartilago
scutiformk.   The largest carttiage  of
the  larynx.   It is composed of two
lateral  alae, which  unite  in front and
form a  projection called the pomum
adami.  Each of these alae, posteriorly,
terminate above in the superior cornu,
and below in the inferior coi-nu.  An
oblique ridge is observed on the side of
the alae which gives attachment to the
stemo-thyroid muscle, and origin to the
thyro-hyoid  and constrictor  muscles.
On the inner side near the union of the
alae, the epiglottis, the chordae vocales,
the thyro-arytenoid, and  the thyro-epi-
glottidean muscles are attached.   This
cartilage constitutes the anterior, supe-
rior, and largest part of the larynx.
   Thyroid  Gland.      Glandub thy-
roides.  A glandiform body consisting
of two lobes, situated, one on each side
of the  trachea,  upon the crycoid carti-
lage, and horns of the thyroid cartilage.
Its functions are unknown.
   THYROIDEAL.  Thyroidcus.  Re-
lating to the thyroid gland or cartilage.
   Thyroideal Arteries.  Two arte-
ries, distinguished  by  the names  of
superior  and inferior.   The  superior
arises from the external  carotid artery,
and  the  inferior from the subclavian,
and both, after giving off several branch-
es, are distributed to the thyroid gland.
   Thyroideal  Veins.   These veins
are distinguished into, 1. A superior, and
several middle  thyroideal veins, which
open into the internal jugular  vein.   2.
Two inferior, a right and a left, and
sometimes more.  The right opens into
the right vena  innominata, and the
left into the left vena innominata.
  THY'SANOURA.  From $vaavoi,
fringes, and  ovpa, a tail.  An order of
apterous insects with fringed tails.
  TIB'IA.   The large bone of the leg.
  TIBIAL.   Tibialis.    Pertaining to
to the tibia.
  Tibial Aponeuro'sis.   A  continua-
tion of the femoral aponeurosis over the
leg.
  Tibial Arteries. Arterioz tibialcs.
The two principal branches ofthe pop-
liteal.  They are called the anterior and
posterior tibial arteries.
  Tibial Nerves.   Two nerves, an
anterior  and posterior.   The anterior
commences  at the bifurcation of the
peroneal and descends with the  tibial
artery.   The posterior is a continuation
of the popliteal nerve,and passes down
the posterior part of the leg to the back
part of the inner ankle.
   Tibial Veins. Two veins, an ante-
rior and posterior, which have the same
arrangement as the  tibial arteries.
   TIBIALIS.  Tibial.
   Tibialis Anti'cus. A muscle situa-
ted on the anterior part of the leg.
   Tibialis Gracilis. The planter mus-
cle.
   Tibialis Posticus.  A muscle situa-
ted at the posterior  part of the leg.
   TIBIO-TARSAL.  Relating to the
tibia and tarsus.
   Tibio-Tarsal Articulation.  The
articulation of the foot with the leg.
   TIC  DOULOUREUX.   Neuralgia
of the face
   TICK.  See Acarus.
   TICKLING.  A peculiar sensation,
resulting from excitation of the cuta-
 neous nerves.
   TIL'IA.   The name of a genus  of
trees.
   Tilia Europos'a.  The  lime  tree.
Linden tree.  Basswood.
   TIL'MUS.   Picking  of the  bed-
clothes. 
TIN
736
TIN
  TLMAENS.  Author of a Treatise on
Tooth-ache;  published, London, 1769.
  TIMIDUS.  The rectus inferior oc-
uli muscle.
  TIN. Stannum. A whitish, brilliant
metal, of an intermediate hardness be-
tween gold and lead.  It is very mallea-
ble and is  readily beat into thin leaves
or foil, in which state, it is used for fill-
ing teeth,  and is, perhaps, for this pur-
pose, the  best substitute for gold that
has ever been employed.  See Filling
Teeth.  It possesses less tenacity and
ductility than most of the other malleable
metals. It is also used by dentists, both
for models and counter-models, and for
which purpose, in most cases, it answers
an excellent purpose.  It is extensively
employed in the arts,  and its filings are
sometimes used as a mechanical vermi-
fuge.  The chloride or butter of tin, is
a violent cathartic.
  Tin Foil.  Stannum foliatum.  See
Filling Teeth.
  Tin, Muriate of.  Chloride of tin.
Butter of tin.
  Tin, Sulphuret of.   Aurum musi-
vum.
  TINASMUS.  Tenesmus.
  TINCA. The tench.  The name of a
sub-genus of cyprinoid fishes.
  TINCE OS.  The mouth  of the
uterus is so called from its resemblance
to the mouth of the tench fish.
  TINCAL.  Crude borax.
  TINCTU'RA. From tingere, to dye.
A tincture or spirituous solution of the
active portions of any medicine.
  Tinctura Acetatis Ferri Cum Al-
cohol.  Tincture of acetate ofiron with
alcohol.
  Tinctura  Aconi'ti.   Tincture  of
aconite.
  Tinctura Al'oes. Tincture of aloes.
  TincturaAloesetMyrrhje. Tinc-
ture  of aloes and  myrrh.  Compound
tincture of aloes.
  Tinctura  Ammonije   Composita.
Compound tincture of ammonia.
  Tinctura Angusturje.   Tincture  of
angustura bark.
  Tinctura  Asafoztidje.   Tincture
of asafcetida.
  Tinctura  Aurantii.  Tincture of
orange peel.
  Tinctura BalsamiTolutani. Tinc-
ture of tolu.
  Tinctura Belladonnje.   Tincture
of belladonna.
  Tinctura  Benzoini  Composita.
Compound tincture of benzoin.
  Tinctura Buchu. Tincture of buchu.
  Tinctura  Calumbje.  Tincture of
columbo.
  Tinctura Camphorje.  Tincture of
camphor.
  Tinctura  Camphorje  Composita.
Camphorated  tincture of opium.  Pare-
goric elixir.
  Tinctura Cantharidis.  Tincture
of Spanish flies.
  Tinctura  Capsici.    Tincture  of
cayenne pepper.
  Tinctura Cardamomi.  Tincture of
cardamom.
  Tinctura  Cardamomi Composita.
Compound tincture of cardamom.
  Tinctura Cascarillje. Tincture of
cascarilla.
  Tinctura Cassije.  Tincture of cas-
sia.
  Tinctura Castorei.   Tincture  of
castor.
  Tinctura  Castorei  Ammoniata.
Ammoniated tincture of castor.
  Tinctura Catechu.    Tincture  of
catechu.
  Tinctura Cinchonje.  Tincture  of
Peruvian bark.
  Tinctura Cinchonje Composita.—
Compound tincture of Peruvian  bark.
  Tinctura Cinnamomi.  Tincture  of
cinnamon.
  Tinctura Cinnamomi  Composita.
Compound tincture of cinnamon.
  Tinctura Colchici  Composita.—
Compound tincture of colchicum.
  Tinctura Colchici Seminis. Tinc-
ture of colchicum seed.
  Tinctura Colombje.   Tincture  of
columbo.
  Tinctura Conii. Tincture of hemlock. 
              TIN               73

  Tinctura Croci.  Tincture of saf-
 fron.
  Tinctura Cubebje.    Tincture of
 cubebs.
  Tinctura Digitalis.   Tincture of
 fox-glove.
  Tinctura Ferri Ammonio-Chlo-
 ridi.  Tincture of ammonio-chloride of
 iron.
  Tinctura Ferri Chloridi. Tinc-
 ture of chloride of  iron.   Tincture of
 muriate of iron.
  Tinctura Galbani.    Tincture of
 galbanum.
  Tinctura Gallje. Tincture of gaUs.
  Tinctura Gentianje   Composita.
 Compound tincture of gentian.
  Tinctura Guaiaci.    Tincture of
 guaiac.
  Tinctura Guaiaci  Ammoniata.—
 Ammoniated tincture of guaiac.
  Tinctura Hellebori.  Tincture of
 black heUebore.
  Tlvctura Humuli. Tincture of hops.
  Tinctura Hyoscyami.  Tincture of
 henbane.
  Tinctura Iodini.  Tinctura of io-
 dine.
  Tinctura Iodini Composita. Corri-
 pound tincture  of iodine.
  Tinctura Jalapje. Tincture of jalap.
  Tinctura Kino.  Tincture of kino.
  Tinctura Kramerije.  Tincture of
 rhatany.
  Tinctura Lactucarii.  Tincture of
 lactucarium.
  Tinctura Lavandulje Composita.
 Compound spirit of lavender.
  Tinctura Lobelije.    Tinctura of
 lobelia.
  Tinctura Lobelije  ^Etherea.—
 Ethereal tincture of lobelia.
  Tinctura Lupulinje.   Tincture of
 lupulin.
  Tinctura Moschi.    Tincture of
 musk.
  Tinctura Myrrhje.   Tincture of
myrrh.
  Tinctura Nucis  Vomicje.  Tinc-
ture of nux vomica.
  Tinctura Olei Menthje Piperitje.
      62*
               TIN

Tincture of oil o'f peppermint.   Es-
sence of peppermint.
  Tinctura Olei Menthje Viridis.—
Tincture of oil of spearmint.  Essence
of spearmint.
  Tinctura Opii.  Tincture of opium.
Laudanum.
  Tinctura Opii Acetata.  Acetated
tincture of opium. _
  Tinctura Opii Ammoniata.  Am-
moniated tincture of opium.
  Tinctura Opii Camphorata. Cam-
phorated tincture of opium.  Paregoric
elixir.
  Tinctura Quassije.    Tincture of
quassia.
  Tinctura Q,uassije  Composita.—
Compound tincture of quassia.
  Tinctura Rhei.  Tincture  of rhu-
barb.
  Tinctura Rhei Composita.  Com-
pound tincture rhubarb.
  Tinctura Rhei et Aloes.  Tinc-
ture of rhubarb and aloes.
  Tinctura Rhei  et  Gentianje.—
Tincture of rhubarb and gentian.
  Tinctura Rhei et Sennje.  Tinc-
ture of rhubarb and senna.
  Tinctura Sanguinarije.  Tincture
of blood-root.
  Tinctura Saponis Camphorata.—
Camphorated tincture of soap.
  Tinctura  Scillje.    Tincture of
squill.
  Tinctura Sennje Composita. Com-
pound  tincture of senna.
  Tinctura Sennje et Jalapje. Tinc-
ture of senna and jalap.
  Tinctura Serpentarije.  Tincture
of Virginia snake-root.
  Tinctura Stramonii.  Tincture of
stramonium.
  Tinctura Thebaica.  Laudanum.
  Tinctura Tolutani.   Tincture of
tolu.
  Tinctura Vale rianje.  Tincture of
valerian.
  Tinctura Valerianje Ammoniata.
Ammoniated tincture of valerian.
  Tinctura  Zingib'eris.  Tincture of
ginger.
7 
TOC
738
TON
  TINCTURE.  Tinctura.
  TIN'EA.   Tinea capitk.  Porrigo.—
Scald-head.
  TINNITUS AURIUM.   Ringing
in the ears.
  TIORAC.  Author of an Inaugural
Dissertation upon the  Teeth; their in-
fluence upon health, physiognomy and
pronunciation.  Paris, 1823.
  TISANE.   A  mucilaginous  drink,
particularly a decoction of barley.
  TIS'SUE.   Textus. A French term,
applied, in Anatomy,  to  the textures
which form the different organs of the
body.
  Tissue, Accidental.  An organized
substance, foreign to the natural tissues
of the body, developed in the  interior
or at the surface of organs, as the mem-
brane of croup, fungous and cancerous
tumors, tubercles, &c
  Tissue, Areolar.   The cellular tis-
sue.
  TITA'NIUM.  A rare, very hard,
copper colored, and extremely infusible
metal.
  TITHON'IC. Pertaining to tithonic-
ity.
  TITHONICITY.  A term, applied
to a chemical effect produced by a pro-
perty of light,  supposed to be a distinct,
independent, imponderable agent.
  TITHONOGRA'PHY.  Photogra-
phy.
  TITIL'LICUM.  The arm-pit.
  TITUBATION.   Titubatio; from
titubare, to stagger.  Staggering; rest-
lessness.   The fidgets.
  TOAD-FLAX.   Antirrhinum tin-
aria.
  TOBACCO.   Nicotiana tabacum.
  Tobacco, English.  Nicotiana rus-
tica.
  Tobacco, Virginia.  Nicotiana  ta-
bacum.
  Tobacco, Indian.   Lobelia inflata.
  TOCETOS.  Parturition.
  TOCOL'OGY. From toxos, partu-
rition, and Xoyos, a discourse.  A trea-
tise on  parturition; the science of  ob-
stetrics.
  TOCOS.  Parturition.
  TOE.   Digitus pedis.
  TOLERANCE.   From  tolero, to
bear.   In Medicine, abtiity to bear any
medicine or agent.
  TOLU, BALSAM OF.  Toluifera
balsamum.
  TOLUIF'ERA. The name of a ge-
nus of plants.
  Toluifera Bal'samum.  The name
of the tree which affords the balsam of
tolu.  Balsamum tolutanum ;  balsam of
tolu.
  TOLVER, A.  Author of a Treatise
on  the  Teeth;  published,  London,
1752.
  TOMATUM.  Tomato.  Solanum
lycopersicum.
  TOMEI'UM.  Tomeion.  A knife.
  TOMENTO'SE.  Downy; woolly.
  TOMENTUM.   A flock of wool.
In Anatomy,  the small vessels on  the
surface ofthe brain are so called from
their  woolly appearance.  In Botany,
the down or hairs on leaves.
  TOMES,  JOHN.  Author of  Lec-
tures  on  Dental Physiology and Sur-
gery, published in the London Gazette,
and corrected for, and  republished in,
the American Journal  of Dental Sci-
ence,  volumes seven and eight.
  TONE.    Tonus;    from  teiva,  I
stretch.   The tension  proper  to  the
healthy condition of  each organic tis-
sue.
  TONGUE.  Lingua. The essential
organ of taste, situated in the mouth,
and extending from the os hyoides and
epiglottis to the incisor teeth. It  also
assists the performance of many other
functions, as sucking, mastication, deg-
lutition, speech,  &c, and is composed
of a great variety of parts.  It is ana-
tomically divided into its apex, body,
and root.  The  apex  is the free anteri-
or portion; the body occupies the cen-
tre, and is thick and broad; the root is
the posterior portion,  and is attached to
the os hyoides.   The tongue is covered
by a reflection of mucous membrane.
  The upper surface  of  the  tongue 
TON
739
TON
is rough and covered by numerous emi-
nences called the papiUae, which are dis-
tinguished into:  1. The lenticular;  2.
The/wngi/brm;  3.  The conical; and
4. The filiform papillae.
  The lenticular, which are the largest,
are nine or more in number, and situat-
ed near the root of the tongue.   They
are of a spherical shape, arranged in the
manner of the letter N, and  consist of
mucous follicles.  Behind them is a de-
pression, called the foramen cecum.
  The fungiform  papillae are more nu-
merous, and situated near the borders
of the tongue.   These are smaller than
the lenticular, and have a rounded head
supported on a thin pedicle.
  The conical are stiU more numerous
and scattered over the whole surface of
the tongue.   They are smaller than the
filiform and are of a conical shape.
  The  filiform,  are smaUer than the
last named papiUae, and occupy the in-
tervals between the others.
  AU of these papillae, except the lenti-
 cular, belong essentially to the function
 of taste.
   The greater portion of the substance
 of the tongue is composed of the stylo-
glossus,  hyo-gbssus,  genio-hyo-gbssus,
 and  lingualk muscles.   But  besides
 these, the digastricus, mylo-hyoideus, and
 geno-hyoideus, act more or less indirect-
 ly upon this organ.
   By the separate and combined action
 of these muscles the tongue is made to
 assume almost every variety of position.
 They elevate and depress it, move it to
 either side,  or  protrude  it  from  the
 mouth; draw it back  to the pharynx,
 make its dorsum or upper surface con-
 cave or convex, and turn its apex or tip
 upwards or downwards,  laterally  or
 backwards.
   Tongue, Characteristics  of the.
 The appearance of the tongue is sup-
 posed  to indicate more accurately the
 state of the general  health  than  any
 other part ofthe body, and hence, both
 in diagnosis and prognosis, it is always
 consulted.  But whether it reports more
correctly the state of the general health
than other parts of the buccal cavity,
the quality of  the  blood  and tempera-
ment of the individual,  are, certainly,
as clearly  indicated by the appearance
of the lips and gums as that  of this or-
gan.  The effects produced on the mu-
cous membrane of the tongue by  dis-
ease in other parts, are said  by profes-
sor Schill, to be analogous to those pro-
duced  on the general integument,  and
so are the changes of  its  color, consist-
ence, humidity, and temperature, simi-
lar to those of the skin.  The changes
of its coating are also said to  agree Avith
analogous changes of the perspiration,
and that these phenomena are more de-
cided in acute than chronic affections.
   The signs of the tongue are divided,
by professor Schill, into objective and
subjective.  To  the  first, belong  "the
changes of size, form, consistence, color,
temperature,  secretion,  and motion,"
and to the second, "the anomalous sen-
sations of taste."  With regard  to the
 pathognomic  signs  of the  tongue, he
 says  that hypertrophy, inflammation
 or congestion, may occasion its enlarge-
 ment, and that inflammatory sweUing,
 when arising from acute diseases,  such
 as "angina,  pulmonary •inflammation,
 measles, plague, or variola, yields an un-
 favorable prognosis.  Even  non-inflam-
 matory swelling of the tongue, is a dan-
 gerous phenomenon  in  acute diseases,
 especially cerebrals which are combin-
 ed with coma.  If it be the consequence
 of mercury, of the abuse of spirituous
 drinks, of gastric inflammation, of chlo-
 rosis, of  syphilis, or if it occur  in hys-
 teria or eptiepsy,  the prognosis is not
 dangerous; but the disease is always the
 more tedious where  the tongue sweUs
 than where it does not.  It is enlarged,
 also, by  degenerescence and cancer."
   "Diminution ofthe size of the tongue
 takes place where there is considerable
 emaciation.  In this case it continues
 soft and  movable.  If,  in  acute states,
  the tongue  becomes small, and  is,  at
  the  same time,  hard, retracted and 
TON
740
TON
 pointed, the irritation is very great, and
 the prognosis bad.   This sign occurs
 more especiaUy in typhus, in the orien-
 tal cholera, in inflammation ofthe lungs,
 and in acute cerebral affections. In hys-
 teria and eptiepsy, this phenomena has
 no unfavorable import."
   Internal diseases, he  says, seldom
 cause   the form  of the  tongue  to
 change, but chronic irritation of the
 stomach, dyspepsia, and  acute  exan-
 thems, are attended by an enlargement
 of its papillae.  In paralysis, and epi-
 lepsy, the  tongue becomes elongated,
 and in severe  protracted  dyspepsia, its
 edges sometimes crack.
  -Flaccidity of the tongue is an indica-
 tion of debility, but in acute diseases it
 is regarded as an unfavorable symptom.
 Dryness of the  tongue, says professor
 SchiU,  occurs in acute or violent in-
 flammations, and irritations, particular-
 ly when seated  in the intestinal  canal
 and respiratory organs, as in the case of
 diarrhoea,  typhus fever,  pneumonia,
 pleuritis, peritonitis, enteritis, gastritis,
 inflammation of the joints, &c. Among
 the  higher  degrees of dryness, which
 furnish  still more unfavorable indica-
 tions, he enumerates the rough, the fis-
 sured,  and  burnt tongue, and when
 these are not accompanied by thirst, he
 says, they prognosticate a fatal termina-
 tion.  The abatement and crisis of the
 disease  is indicated  by the tongue be-
 coming  moist.
   In a  note to professor SchiU's work
 on the tongue,  Dr. Bell, of Philadelphia,
 says, "a rough, and dry, and even furred
 tongue,  is seen in some dyspeptic per-
 sons, who sleep  with the mouth open;
 and although it indicates an irritation of
 the digestive organs, it is not of a bad
 augury."   The  same is true, to  some
 extent, with regard to persons of  a bil-
 ious temperament.
   Paleness of  the tongue is mentioned
by professor SchiU, as an indication of
a  serous condition  of the  blood,  of
 chlorosis, of a great  loss of blood, of
sinking  of the strength in acute dis-
 eases, or of their "assuming a nervous
 form, as typhus and scarlatinia maligna.
 It is also found," he says, "in enteritis
 and dysentery, when but little fever is
 present." This, he believes to be owing
 to a determination  of the fluids down-
 wards.  Lymphatic  persons,  as has
 been before  remarked, are peculiarly
 subject to it, but it is never observed in
 those who enjoy good health.
   A very red  tongue, he says, is in-
 dicative  of  "violent  inflammation,
 mostly of the intestinal canal, but also
 of the lungs and  of the  pharynx, and
 acute  exanthems."  He regards the
 prognosis as bad, when a furred tongue
 "in acute diseases of the  intestinal ca-
 nal becomes clean and very red," if the
 change be not accompanied with the
 return of the patient's strength.  "But,"
 he continues, "if the debility is not con-
 siderable, and the tongue becomes clean
 and very red, whilst other febrile symp-
 toms continue, a new  inflammation
 may be expected."  But, even in affec-
 tions hke these, the  redness of the
 tongue is always more considerable in
 sanguinous, than it is  in  lymphatic or
 lymphatico-serous subjects, so that in
 forming a prognosis from  this sign, the
 temperament of the individual should
 never be overlooked.
  Proceeding with the description of
 the signs of  this organ, he  says, "the
 tongue  becomes a blackish-red  and
 bluish-red in all serious  disturbances
 of the circulation and  respiration, as
 also  in severe  diseases  of  the lungs
 and  heart, as  catarrhs,  suffocations,
 asthma, extensive inflammations of the
 lungs, carditis,  Asiatic cholera, plague,
 confluent small-pox, and putrid fevers.
 It becomes black and livid in cases of
 vitiation of the  blood,  more especiaUy
 in scurvy, at the setting in of gangrene,
 and in phthisis, when death is near at
hand."
  The temperature of the tongue is in-
 creased by glossitis, internal inflamma-
 tion and fevers of a typhoid character,
and coldness is observed to take place 
TON
741
TON
  in Asiatic cholera, and at the approach
  of death.
    The indications  of the secretions of
  the  tongue are  thus  enumerated. ' A
  clean and  moist tongue  are favorable
  signs, but a clean, dry, and red tongue,
  as seen in  slow nervous fevers, acute
  exanthems and plague, are unfavorable.
  A furred or coated tongue is said to oc-
  cur, chiefly, in intestinal disorders, dis-
  eases of the lungs, skin,  and in rheu-
  matic affections.   The coating is said
  to vary in "color, thickness, adherence,
  and extent;" and the  secretions of the
  tongue is as variable in different diseases,
  as its coating.
    The occurrence of false membranes
  and pustules as resulting from pecuhar
  forms of mucous  secretion, are next
  mentioned.   The former appear either
  as smaU, white points, or cover a large
  surface, and, sometimes, they  are said
  to envelop  the whole tongue.  Their
  color, says professor SchiU, is  "some-
  times white, sometimes  yeUow, and,
  sometimes, red,"  and the greater the
  surface they cover, the more unfavora-
  ble the  prognosis.  "Pustules  on the
  tongue," says our author, are, some-
 times idiopathic,  but  in  most  cases
 symptomatic.  They are either distinct
 or confluent; the confluent are the
 worst.  Those which  are  hardish and
 dry,  and, also those which are  blue,
 and those of  a blackish appearance,
 Avhich sometimes  occur in acute dis-
 eases, are of an unfavorable import."
 On the other hand, those which have a
 whitish, soft, moist and semi-transpa-
 rent appearance are said to be less un-
 favorable, and when  the eruption or
 aphtha? is repeated, it portends a longer
 continuance of the  disease.  They are
 said to be  frequent accompaniments
 of gastritis, catarrhs, enteritis, metritis,
 dysentery,  cholera infantum,  perito-
 nitis,  intermittent, and  typhus  fevers,
 pleuritis, pneumonia, and the third stage
 of pulmonary  consumption.    Their
prognosis is said to  be favorable, when
"they appear with critical discharges
 after the seventh day," and unfavorable
 when  they  occur as a consequence of
 the prostration of the physical energies
 of the system.
   Other pathognomic  indications,  as
 furnished by the tongue, might be men-
 tioned, but the foregoing will suffice.
   Tongue, Black.  A term applied to
 a typhoid fever which prevailed in the
 western states in the winter of 1842-'3.
   Tongue-Holder.  An  instrument
 invented by  Mr. Lawrence, consisting
 of a curved  steel-spring, two and one-
 fourth  inches long, about three-eighths
 of an inch wide, Avith a silver plate a little
 larger  than  a twenty-five cent piece,
 and shaped like the anterior half of the
 tongue, upon which it  is intended to
 rest, attached to one end, and an oval
 pad at the other.  The manner of using
 this instrument is thus described by Dr.
 E. Townsend, of Philadelphia : "Fold
 a small napkin so that  it shall nearly
 fill the  space between the bicuspides,
 and extending posteriorly as  far as the
 middle of the tongue, pressing it down
 on the sublingual ducts as closely as pos-
 sible, then lay the  broad mouth plate
 upon the napkin, and passing the spring
 backwards, rest  the  pad in the roof of
. the mouth; the force of the spring will
 be sufficient  to keep the napkin in it's
 place, and to keep the mouth dry to the
 end of the operation, if aU the  steps
 have been carefully taken."
   The  object of this instrument is to
 confine the tongue to the floor of the
 mouth and keep  this cavity open and
 dry during the introduction of a filling
 into a tooth.
   Tongue-Scraper.  An  instrument
 invented by Dr. L. S. Parmly, to  re-
 move clammy and hardened mucous
 secretions from the upper surface of the
 tongue.  It consists of a thin  piece of
 whalebone  or steel,  about six  inches
long, and three-eighths  of an inch in
 width.  In using it,  the  two ends are
brought together, and the curved part in-
troduced into the back part ofthe mouth,
then by pressing the  lower edge upon 
TOO
742
TOO
the top. of the tongue and drawing it
forward, the clammy mucus and fur is
removed.
  Tongue-Shaped.  Lingulate.
  TONTC.  Tonicus.  In Pathology, a
continuous  spastic  muscular contrac-
tion, as in tetanus.
  Tonic Spasm.  A rigid contraction
of the muscles, lasting  for some time
without relaxation.
  TONICITY.  Tonicitas.  The fac-
ulty which determines the tone of the
solids.
  TON'ICS.  From tovoa, to strength-
en. A term applied to medicines, which,
when introduced into the system, im-
part tone and vigor  to the whole animal
economy.  They are obtained both from
the mineral and vegetable kingdoms.
   TONOS.  Tonic spasm.
   TON'SIL.   Tonsilla.   An   ovoid,
glandular  organ, about half an inch
long, situated on either  side within the
fauces, between the anterior and pos-
terior pillars of the soft palate.  It con-
sists of an assemblage of mucous folli-
 cles, which open  exteriorly.   When
 pressed, a viscid mucus oozes from the
 tonsils, which, by lubricating the isth-
 mus faucium, facilitates the deglutition
 of alimentary substances.
   TONSILLA'RUM GANGR.ENA.
 Cynanche maligna.
   TONSILLITIS.  Inflammation  of
 the tonsils.  Cynanche tonsiUaris.
   TOOTH.   Dens.  Odous. Dent.  A
 tooth is anatomically divided into three
 parts; namely, 1.  The crown or corona,
 which is the  part  situated without the
 alveolus, and covered by a hard vitreous
 substance called the enamel.   2. The
 cervix or neck, which is situated between
 the crown and alveolus, and surrounded
 by   the gum.  3. The root  or fang,
 which is the  part situated within the
 alveolus.   See Teeth.
    A tooth is composed of four  distinct
 parts; namely, 1. The pulp.   2. The
 bone or  dentine.  3. The  enamel, and
 4.  The crusta petrosa or cementum. For
 a description of these tissues, see name
of each.  A  tooth has  also a central
cavity  which encloses the  pulp.  See
Dental Cavity.
  Tooth-Ache.  Odontalgia.
  Tooth-Bone.  Dentine.   The  part
of a tooth situated between the enamel
and cementum, and  the pulp.   The
structure of tooth-bone, ivory  or  den-
tine,  according to professor Retzius,
of Stockholm,  is tubular.  The tubes
radiating from  the pulp, are "directed
perpendicularly to the  surface of the
tooth," and pursuing a waving course,
"each tube having three curves like the
Greek letter £.   Besides these primary
curves, the tubes when  examined  with
a" high "magnifying power, are  seen
to  present smaller secondary  undula-
tions, which  are less  perceptible in the
deciduous than in the permanent teeth,
and less marked at the external extrem-
ity of the  tubes than in the middle of
their course.  The undulations are  near-
ly parallel in  the different tubes, and
 thus give rise to the appearance of con-
 centric lines  around the cavity of the
 pulp in a section  of the ivory.  Their
 diameter  remains the same, (namely,
 j|t of a  French line, or about yj-s
 of an English line,) from their  com-
 mencement  at the cavity of the  pulp
 to the middle of the outer third of their
 course;  it then diminishes rapidly, un-
 til the terminal branches  cease  to be
 visible, or terminate in small irregu-
 larly round  cells."  With a magnify-
 ing power of 300 to 500 diameters, it
 can be seen  that the tubes are not sim-
 ple, but branch by a dichotomous divis-
 ion, and  in  their whole extent give off
 numerous side twigs, which again sub-
 divide and occupy the spaces between
 the principal tubes.   These minute lat-
 eral branches are seen most readily in
 the deciduous teeth ; those from  differ-
 ent tubes appeared  to Retzius not  to
 anastomose, except, perhaps, by their
  finest extremities.  The tubes have a
  more regular  arrangement, their  lateral
  branches are smaller, and the cells more
  minute and difficult to discover  in the 
TOO
743
TOO
human teeth than in those of any other
animals.
  "When the wall of the cavity of the
pulp of a tooth is regarded with a suf-
ficiently high magnifying power, it is
seen to be perforated by numerous small
orifices, separated by numerous narrow
interspaces; these  are the openings of
the dental tubes.  In sections also made
to the course  of the tubes, their lumen
can be seen, and they then appear  as
bright rings surrounding a spot, Avhich,
according to the variations of the light,
is dark or light, or in part dark and in
part light.  Some of the tubes are seen
to be cut obliquely.   The rings have
a different aspect from the substance in
which they  are  imbedded, and have
sometimes a yellowish color; hence, as
AveU as from the  observations of pro-
fessor  Miiller, it is  evident  that the
tubes have special parietes, and are not
mere excavations  in the substance of
the ivory.  Professor Retzius confirms
the  observation  of professor  Miiller,
that the tubes contain an organic earthy
matter in glandular masses, which dis-
appears  under  the  action of  dilute
muriatic  acid. The cells, and the small
tubes which radiate from  them, also
contain earthy matter, as in bone. They
are naturally Avhite and opaque; but,
after maceration in dilute muriatic acid,
become colorless and transparent.
   ••Examining  the  ivory in different
mammalia, reptiles, and fishes, Retzius
met with many varieties of structure;
the most important of which, are those
which show the great resemblance of
ivory  to  bone.  The cells or  corpus-
cules are in many mammalia in great-
est abundance at the superfices of the
ivory; but  in  others, they,  together
with fine tubes Avhich issue from them
or terminate  in  them, and which are
continuous with the larger dental tubes,
occupy in greater part all the interspa-
ces between the latter.  These cells of
the ivory contain  calcareous  matter,
and are evidently analogous to  the cor-
puscules discovered by Purkinje in bone,
which also have fine anastomosing tubes
radiating from them.   The part of the
ivory,  after the  teeth  have emerged
from the gum, namely, the extremity of
the fang, and  that  part Avhich  fills up
the cavity of the pulp, has  less regu-
larity of structure than the  ivory pre-
viously formed ; the tubes are less par-
allel, the cells larger, and the anastomo-
ses of the  small tubes terminating in
these more distinct;  all of which cir-
cumstances, give this  imperfectly form-
ed ivory a great resemblance  to true
bone.  But the  ivory in the teeth of
some   animals,  presents  characters
which assimilate it still more  remark-
ably to the structure of bone.  In the
teeth of man and most mammalia, the
ivory is formed  regularly in successive
layers on  the  surfaces of the  pulp,
which, in the body  of the teeth, under-
goes no other change than gradual dimi-
nution in  size.   In  other animals, how-
ever, as the sloth, (bradypus,) walrus,
(trichechus,) pike, (esox,)  ling, (ga-
dus  molva,)  and  wolf-fish, (anarrhi-
chas lupus,) the pulp, after forming the
most external layer of ivory, consisting
of closely set dental tubes perpendicular
to the surface, divides into a number of
processes, similar to, but more numer-
ous than, those Avhich form the fangs of
the human molares;  and around each
of these processes  or branches of the
pulp ivory is  formed in layers.  In
many  instances, as  in  the saw-fish,
(pristis,)  ling,  and wolf-fish,  the nu-
merous divisions of  the  pulp  anasto-
mose with each other, like  the medul-
lary canals of bone.   This form of ivory
presents in many animals, particularly
 in the walrus, the  most striking re-
semblance to bone; the divisions of the
pulp are seen surrounded with concen-
tric laminae, which,  like thejayers of
bone surrounding the medullary canals,
 contain rings of cells or corpuscules,
 and these laminae, again, are traversed
 by fine radiating tubes analogous  to the
 radiating  striae  in  bone, which  were
supposed by Deutsch to be tubes." 
TOO                744               TOO
   Professor Retzius ascribes to the den-
 tal tubes and ceUs, the office  of  distrib-
 uting to the tooth a nutritive fluid se-
 creted by the surface of the  pulp, and
 while he does not beheve that the den-
 tinal and cortical substances undergo any
 change, he is of the opinion that they
 are the seat of a vital process, consist-
 ing  in an interchange of the fluid of a
 tooth, which  operation he regards ne-
 cessary to preserve in them that pro-
 perty by which they are enabled  to en-
 dure constant pressure  without  injury
 or loss of substance.*   But that  the
 dentinal part of a tooth is vascular, and,
 under certain circumstances, capable of
 being injected with  red blood, is now
 well established.  The author has sev-
 eral preparations  of  tooth-bone,  in
 which, when examined under the  mi-
 croscope, vessels injected with red blood,
 are seen.
   The  researches of professor  Owen
 confirm most of  the observations of
 Retzius.   He says,  "The  prolonga-
 tion or persistence of cy hndrical canals of
 the pulp cavity in the dentinal  tissue,
 which is the essential character  of vas-
 cular dentine, manifests itself under a
 variety  of forms. In mammals and rep-
 tiles, these canals, which I have termed
 'medullary,'  from  their close analogy
 with the so  caUed canals of  bone,  are
 straight, and more or  less parallel with
 each other;  they  bifurcate,  though
 rarely;  and when they  anastomose, as
 in the megatherium, it is by a loop at,
 or near, the periphery  of the vascular
 dentine.  In  the  teeth of fishes, in
 which the distinction between the den-
tinal and osseous tissues is gradually ef-
faced, the medullary canals of the vas-
 cular dentine, though in some instances
 straight and parallel, and sparingly di-
vided or united, yet are generally more
 or less bent, frequently and successively
branched, and the subdivisions blended
together in so many parts of the tooth,
 as to form a rich reticulation.  The

  • Vide Appendix to Midler's Physiology.
 calcigerous tubes sent off into the in-
 terspaces of the net-work, partake  of
 the  irregular character of the canals
 from which they spring, and fill the
 meshes with a moss-like plexus."*
   The microscopical researches of Mr.
 Nasmyth  demonstrate  that tooth-bone
 is essentially  cellular in its structure.
 The fibres he  found  to  be interspersed
 and made up of different compartments,
 the shape  and size  of which  vary in
 different animals.  In the human tooth
 they are oval, their long axis corres-
 ponding Avith the course of the  fibre,
 and the extremity of each in apposition
 to the  adjoining one.  The cells con-
 stitute the frame-work in which the os-
 seous matter is deposited, and thus be-
 come the fibres of the bone ofthe tooth.
 See Dental Pulp.f
   The  researches  of   Leeuwenhosk,
 Fraenknel, Purkinje and Schwan, have
 also thrown much valuable light on the
 structural arrangement of tooth-bone.
   Tooth-Brush.  An instrument com-
 posed of small bundles of prepared
 hog's bristles,  secured in a long narrow
 piece of bone or ivory, by means of
 sealing-way, or  some other cement or
 wire, and employed for cleaning the
 teeth.  It is a  valuable dental hygienic
 agent, and the totiet of no one can be
 regarded as complete without it.  The
 size  of a tooth-brush should vary ac-
 cording  to the length of the crowns of
 the teeth of the individual.  For the
 deciduous teeth, a brush with three rows
 of bristles is large enough, but  for the
permanent teeth, from four to six  rows
 are required, and as a general rule, the
bristles should be about three-eighths of
 an inch  long.  The bristles should also
be so securely fixed in the handle as to
prevent  them from loosening and  com-
ing out.   This is a fault which most of
the brushes vended in the shops have.
 But it is not the only one. The bristles
of some are so stiff that they  cannot
  * Vide Odontography.
  f Vide  Three Memoirs on the Structure and
Development of the Teeth, $c. 
TOO
745
TOR
be used without lacerating or wound-
ing the gums, while others are too soft
to effect the object which it is necessary
to accomplish by their use, namely, the
removal  of clammy  mucus  and other
offensive matters from the teeth.
  The bristles  of a tooth-brush should
be moderately soft at their extremities,
but firmer near their insertion into the
handle, and have a sufficient degree of
elasticity to enable them to adapt them-
selves readily to  the various inequali-
ties of the teeth.  These qualities are
essential to a good brush.
  The English tooth-brushes, though
more  expensive, are better made, and
as a consequence, more durable than
the American.   The bristles of the best
quality of English brushes are secured
in the handle with silver wire.
  Although most of the tooth-brushes
brought from France are of a very in-
ferior quality,  very superior  ones are
manufactured there.
  Tooth-Pick.  A flexible and elastic
sharp-pointed instrument, employed for
the removal of extraneous matters from
between  the  teeth.   It is  made  of
metal, whalebone, wood, or  the  quill
of a goose or other fowl.  A tooth-pick
made from the quill of a goose, is better
than  either  a  metallic or wood pick.
Next to a brush and floss-silk, a tooth-
pick ranks among the  most important
dental hygienic agents.
  TOOTH-POLISHER, ARGILLACEOUS.--
An instrument invented  by Dr. L. S.
Parmly, for the removal of stains and
discolorations  from  the teeth.  It con-
sists  of  a cylindrical  piece  of baked
clay, about five inches long, and one-
fourth in diameter,  flattened  and bent
at each end to  an angle of nearly ninety
degrees.  In using  it, one of the flat-
tened extremities is first moistened in
water, and then rubbed upon the tooth
until  the stain or discoloration is re-
moved.   Dr. Parmly believes this to be
better than a steel instrument,  for the
reason that it inflicts less injury upon the
enamel, and leaves a smoother surface.
      63
  Tooth-Rash.   Strophulus.
  Tooth-Shape.  Dentate.
  Tooth-Syringe.  Odonenchytes.  A
small instrument, made of gold, silver,
or glass, in the form  of a pump,  with
a nozel about an inch long, curved so as
to form near a right angle, and used to
draw in  any fluid, which is  done by
means of a pistern, and  then  to expel
it into the cavity of a tooth.  It is used
principally for   cleansing cavities  in
teeth, preparatory to filling.
  TOPHA'CEOUS.  Gritty ; sandy ;
resembling a soft stone.
  TOPHUS.   A collection of calca-
reous matter in the joints. Also, gravel.
  TOPICAL.   Topicus ; from tortos,
a place.   Limited; local.  In Thera-
peutics, the application of a  remedy to
a particular part.
  TOPICUS.  Local.
  TOR'CULAR.  From  torqueo, to
twist.  A tourniquet. Also, a  press.
  Torcular Heroph'ili.   The  press
of Herophilus;  a smooth and  polished
cavity,  of irregular  shape, of  the dura
mater, called the fourth sinus.
  TORDYL'IUM  OFFICINALE.
Seseli creticum.
  TORMENTIL'LA.    Tormentilla
erecta.   Also, the name  of a  genus of
plants.
  Tormentilla Erecta. The upright
septfoil.
  TORMENTUM.  The ileac  pas-
sion; intussusceptio.
  TORMINA.  Severe colicky pains.
Dysentery.
  TORPE'DO.  The name of a fish
that inhabits the Mediterranean, the
touch of which is attended by an elec-
tric shock.  The raia torpedo.
  TOR'POR.    From  torpere,  to be
numbed.   Deficiency   of  sensation;
numbness; inactivity ; a sluggish con-
dition of a part or of the whole  body.
  Torpor Intestino'rum. Constipation.
  TOR'SION.  Torsio. Twisting. The
torsion of a divided artery is sometimes
resorted to for the purpose of  arresting
hemorrhage.    Some  French writers 
TRA
746
TRA
have  applied this term to a species of
malformation of the jaws, whereby the
upper teeth on one side ofthe mouth are
caused to shut on the outside of the teeth
of the lower jaw on the same side, from
the median line, and  on the other side
to fall on the inside of the lower teeth.
 TORTUO'SUS.  Twisted; tortuous.
 TORTU'RA ORIS. Risus sardonicus.
 TOUCH.   Tactus.    The sense by
which we are enabled to know the pal-
pable qualities  of  bodies  by feeling
them; one of the five senses.
  Touch-Me-Not.   Balsam weed.
  TOUCHARD. Author of a Descrip-
tion of a Tooth-plugger, with Remarks
upon Artificial Teeth. Paris, 1814.
  TOUCHWOOD. Boletus igniarius.
  TOUR'NIQJJET.   From  Fr.  tour-
ner, to turn. A surgical instrument, or
bandage, tightened  by  a screw, em-
ployed to suspend  the  circulation  of
blood in  a limb, by compressing  the
principal artery,  during the  perform-
ance of an operation involving the di-
vision of large arteries.
  TOUS-LES-MOIS.   A  variety  of
fecula obtained from  the root of the
canna coccinea.
  TOWNSEND,  E.   Author  of a
Paper on the Elevation of the Dental
Profession, read before  the  American
Society of Dental Surgeons, and pub-
lished in the American Journal of Den-
tal Science, volume sixth.
  TOXICODEN'DRUM. Poison oak.
  TOXICOHiE'MIA.  From to%ixov,
a poison,  and aiua, blood.   Poisoning
of the blood.
  TOXICOL'OGY.    Toxicologia ;—
from to%ixav, a poison, and xoyos,  a dis-
course.  A treatise on poisons.
  TOX'ICUM.  A poison.
  TRABECULA.Thethread-like pro-
cesses of the dura mater, and the me-
dullary fibres  of the brain, constituting
the commissures.
  TRACHEA.  From tpaxvs, rough.
The wind-pipe.   A cylindrical,  fibro-
cartilaginous, and membranous  tube,
through which the air  passes to the
lungs. Commencing with  the larynx.
it extends to  the fourth or  fifth dorsal
vertebra, where it divides into the right
and left  bronchial tubes, one going  to
each lung.  It is composed of cartilag-
inous rings, fibrous and mucous mem-
brane, muscular   fibres,  vessels  and
nerves.
  TRACHEAE.   The breathing tubes
of insects.
  TRA'CHEAL.    Trachealk.  Per-
taining to the trachea.
  TRACHEITIS. Cynanche trachealis.
  TRACHE'LAGRA.    Rheumatism
in the neck ; wry-neck; stiff-neck.
  TRACHELPPODS.  Trachelipoda;
from tpax^Xos, a neck, and rtovs, a foot.
An order of mollusks, which have the
locomotive foot attached  to the under
part of the head or neck.
  TRACHE'LIUM. The great throat-
wort.
  TRACHELOCE'LE. .Bronchocele.
  TRACHE'LO-DIAPHRAGMAT'-
IC  NERVES.    The fourth pair  of
cervical nerves.
  Trachelo-Mastoide'us. A muscle
of the neck.
  TRACHEOT'OMY. Tracheotomia;
from tpaxsia, the trachea, and teuva, to
cut. Bronchotomy.
  TRACHITIS.   From tpaXua, the
trache, and itk, a terminal, denoting in-
flammation.  Inflammation of the tra-
chea. Cynanche tracheahs.
  TRACHO'M A. From tpaXvs, rough.
A variety of opthalmia, characterized
by  roughness of the inner surface of
the eyelid, and severe pain whenever it
is moved.
  TRACTORS, METALLIC. A pre-
tended therapeutic  agent, consisting of
two metallic rods, each made of a dif-
ferent metal, employed by Dr. Ehsha
Perkins, of Norwich, Connecticut, near
the close of the last century. The man-
ner of applying these rods to the cure
of disease,  consisted in drawing their
pointed extremities over the affected or
other part of the body, which operation
was called tractoration. 
              TRA               7'

  TRACT'US.  From traho, to draw.
A drawing in length; a region; a tract,
or space.
  Tractus  Motorius.  The  motor
tract;  a prolongation  of the corpora
pyramidalia  through the pons varohi
into the crura cerebri.
  Tractus Respiratorius.  The res-
piratory tract.               '
  TRAGACANTHA.  Tragacanth;
the concrete juice ofthe astragalus trag-
acantha.
  TRAGTCUS.   A small flat muscle
of the ear which nearly covers the outer
surface of the tragus.
  TRAGOPO'GON.   The name of a
genus of plants.
  Tragopogon Praten'se.  The com-
mon goat's-beard.
  TRAGOSELI'NUM.   Pimpinella
saxifraga.
  TRAG'US. In Anatomy, a  small,
triangular eminence situated before the
meatus auditorius externus.
  TRA'MIS.  The perinaeum.
  TRANCE.  Catalepsy; ecstasy.
  TRANSFORMATION.  In Pathol-
ogy,  the conversion of the texture of a
part  into one natural to some other part.
  TRANSFUSION. Transfusio; from
transfundere,  to pour from  one vessel
into  another.   The transmission of the
blood of one animal into the veins of
that of another.
  TRANSLATION.   In  Pathology,
metastasis.
  TRANSPLANTATION.  In The-
rapeutics, a pretended method of curing
disease by making them pass from one
person to another.   In  Botany, the re-
moval of a plant to a different place for
growth.   In Dental Surgery,  the re-
moval  of a  sound and healthy tooth
from the  mouth  of one person,  and
placing it into an alveolus from which
a tooth has just been extracted, in the
mouth   of another.    The  celebrated
French surgeon, Ambrose  Pare, was
the first to describe this operation, but
it does  not seem to have been very fre-
quently practiced, until the time of that
                TRA

eminent  English anatomist and  sur-
geon, John Hunter, who is very gener-
ally regarded as the originator of it.
  Although Mr. Hunter regarded the
success of the operation as certain, in
the majority of cases, asserting that he
had known even dead  teeth to grow,
it is hardly necessary to say, that it soon
fell into disrepute, and has ceased alto-
gether to be performed.   That a man
of Mr. Hunter's acumen and physio-
logical knowledge  should have com-
mitted so  palpaple an error as to sup-
pose that a tooth after having become
deprived  of its vitality could again be
re-endowed  with a living principle by
being  placed into a fresh alveolus, can
only be  accounted for by  supposing
that his practical observations were not
sufficient to enable him to distinguish a
dead from a living tooth.  Not only  was
the operation a very  painful one, but it
was also  attended with  danger, as is
shown by a case reported  by Dr. Wat-
son in  the Medical  Transactions of
the College of Physicians, in which a
young lady feU a victim to it.
  TRANSPIRATION.     Transpira-
tio. The act of passing off through the
excretories of the skin; cutaneous ex-
halation ;  perspiration.
  TRANSPOSITION.  Transpositio;
from  trans, over, and ponere, to put.
Change of situation;  the state of being
reciprocally changed in place.    In
Anatomy, a congenital vice of conforma-
tion, consisting in the development of
one organ in the place of another, as
the heart on the right side, and the liver
on the left.
  Transposition of Teeth.    See
Teeth, transposition of the.
  TRANSUDATION.  Transudate;
from trans, through, and  sudare, sudat-
um, to sweat  The passage of a fluid
through the pores of any thing, or  the
tissue of any organ.  Exosmose.
  TRANSVERSA'LIS.  A term  ap-
plied,  in  Anatomy, to muscles, vessels,
&c. which have a transverse direction.
  Transversalis Abdominis.  A mus-
17 
TRA
748
TRE
cle situated on the lateral and anterior
parts of the abdomen.
  Transversalis Anticus Primus.—
Rectus capitis lateralis.
  Transversalis Colli. A muscle
situated on the back part of the neck.
  Transversalis Major Colli. Lon-
gissimus dorsi.
  Transversalis Nasi.   The  com-
pressor naris.
  TRANS'VERSE.   Transversus;—
from trans, over, and vertere, to turn.
Running across; having a cross direc-
tion.  In Anatomy, relating to the trans-
verse processes of the vertebras.
  Transverse Suture.  Sutura trans-
versalis.   The suture which crosses the
face, uniting the bones of the skull
to the bones of the face.
  TRANSVER'SUS.  Transverse.
  Transversus  Auris.  A muscle of
the external ear.
  Transversus Perinje'i.  A muscle
situated at the posterior part of the pe-
rinaeum.
  Transversus Perinjei Alter.  A
small muscle which sometimes accom-
panies the last.
  TRA'PA.  The name  of a genus of
plants.
  Trapa Natans. The plant  which
produces the nux aquatica.
  TRAPE'ZIUM, OS.  The first bone
of the second toav of the carpus, so
called from its shape.
  TRAPE'ZIUS.  From tparte£iov, a
geometrical figure. A muscle situated
at the posterior part of the neck  and
back.
  TRAPEZOI'DES OS. The second
bone of  the second row of the carpus.
  TRASTUS, TH.  Dissertation on
the Disappearance of the Teeth,  by.
Figuri, 1595..
  TRAUMA! A wound.
  TRAUMATTC.   Traumatica ;—
from tpavua, a wound.   Relating to a
wound.
  Traumatic Pleurisy.  Inflamma-
tion of the pleura produced by a wound,
such as of a fractured rib, &,c.
  TRAVELER'S  JOY.   Clematis
vitalba.
  TREACLE.  Molasses.
  Treacle,  Mustard.   Thlaspi ar-
vense.
  Treacle, Venice.  Mithridatium.
  TRECURTH.    Dissertation  on
Tooth-ache, by.  Halle, 1688.
  TREE,  LIVERWORT.   Lichen
olivarius.
  TREE OF LIFE.   Thuya occiden-
talis.
  TREFOIL.  Trifolium.
  TRE'MATODES.   Trcmatoda;—
from tprjua, a hole.  The order of ento-
zoa which  have the organs  of imbibi-
tion and adhesion in the  form of suck-
ers.
  TREM'BLES. Milk sickness.
  TREM'BLING.  Tremor.
  TRE'MOR.  From tremere, to trem-
ble.  Trembling; involunaty agitation
of the body or some part of it
  Tremor Cordis.  Palpitation of the
heart.
  TRENCHANT. Sharp-edged; cut-
ting.
  TRENOR, JOHN.  Author  of  a
paper on Tic Douloureux ; published,
New York, 1824.—Also, one on the
Structure, Organization and Nourish-
ment  of the Teeth;  published,  New
York, 1826.
  TREPAN'.   Trepanum;  from  tpv-
rtaa, I  perforate. An instrument re-
sembling a wimble, employed by  sur-
geons for the perforation  and removal
of depressed, fractured, or carious bone.
  TREPAN'NING.  The act  of  per-
forating with a trepan.
  TREPHINE.   A  cylindrical saw,
with a handle placed transversely, like
that of a gimblet, and a perforator in
the centre, Avhich serves as an  axis for
the saw to rotate upon until it has form-
ed a groove in the bone,  Avhen it may
be removed.  This is a more modern in-
strument than the trepan.
  Trephine, Elliot's Dental.  An
instrument  invented  by Dr.  Elliot, of
Montreal, for separating the inner fang 
TRI               749                TRI
ofthe upper molares from the outer ones,
when it is required, to render their re-
moval of the tooth less difficult.  This
instrument has its centre thrust out by a
spring, and the teeth occupy about one-
third of the circle. When in use, the
centre of the instrument is introduced
into the centre of the inner fang, and
then by a reciprocating motion this fang
may be separated from the others.
  TREPIDATION.    Trepidatio;—
from trepidare, to tremble. Involuntary
trembling, particularly from fear.
  TREPIDATIO. Tremor.
  Trepidatio Cordis. Tremor cordis.
  TREPONDO.  A weight of three
pounds.
  TRE'SIS.  From  tpea, I  bore.  A
perforation; a wound.
  TRIAN'DRIA.  Triandrous;  from
tpeis,  three,  and ai^p, a man.  Plants
which have  three male organs or sta-
mens.
  TRIAN'GULAR.  Triangularis.  A
term  apphed, in Anatomy, to  parts
which have a triangular figure.
  TRIANGULARIS ORIS.  The de-
pressor anguli oris.
  Triangularis Sterni. Stcrnocostales.
A muscle, of the shape of a lengthened
triangle, situated at the anterior part of
the chest,  behind  the cartilages of the
ribs.
  TRICAUDA'LIS.  Three-tailed.
  TRl'CEPS.  From Ires, three, and
caput, a head.  Three-headed.
  Triceps Adductor  Femoris.  An
appeUation comprehending three dis-
tinct muscles, namely, the adductor
brevk; adductor longus, and adductor
magnus.
  Triceps Auris. Retrahens auris.
  Triceps Cruris.   A name given to
the vastus externus and vastus internus
cruraeus.
  Triceps Extensor  Cubiti. A mus-
cle situated at the posterior part of the
os humeri.  It is described by Douglas,
as two distinct muscles, and by Win-
slow, as three.
  TRICHIA. Entropion.
         63*
  TRICHIASIS.   Trichioses;  from
^pi|, a hair.  Inversion of the eyelashes.
Also, a morbid affection of the kidney
in Avhich hair-like  filaments' are dis-
charged with the urine.  The term is
applied,  too,  to  a painful  swelling
of the  female breasts,  supposed by the
ancients  to be owing to the accidental
swallowing of a hair.
  TRICHI'NA SPIRALIS.  A spe-
cies of entozoon, found in the muscles
of voluntary motion.
  TRICHIS'M US.  From *p& a hair-
An almost imperceptible fracture which
appears hke a hair.
  TRICHOCEPH'ALUS.      From
^pi|, a hair, and xetyaXq, the head.   The
long thread-Avorm,  which  infests the
ccecum and colon ofthe human subject.
  TRICHO'MA.  From £pt|, a hair.
Plica polonica.
  TRICHOMO'NAS   VAGINALIS.
A name given to an animalcule found
by Donne in the mucus of  the vagina
during syphilis.
  TRICHO'SIS.  From $p£, a hair.  A
genus in Dr. Good's Nosology, compre-
hending most of the diseases of the hair.
  TRICHOTON.   The scalp.
  TRICHOT'OMOUS. 'Ti-ichotomus.
Divided into three parts ;  three-cleft.
  TRICHU'RIS.   Trichocephalus.
  TRICOCCOUS.  Three-seeded.
  TRICUS'PID.  Tricuspis; from tres,
three, and cuspk, a point.  Three point-
ed.
  Tricuspid Valve.   A valve of the
heart, situated between the auricle and
ventricle on the right side.
  TRICUSPIDATE.  Tricuspid.
   TRIDACTYLE.  Three-fingered.
  TRIFACIAL NERVE.  Trigemini.
  TRIFO'LIUM.   The name of a ge-
nus of plants.
   Trifolium Acetosum. Wood-sorrel.
  Trifolium Aquaticum.  The buck-
bean.
  Trifolium  Arvense.  The hair's-
foot trefoil.
  Trifolium  Aureum.  The hepati-
ca, or herb trinity. 
TRI
750
TRO
   Trifolium Melilo'tus Officina'-
 lis.  The officinal melilot.
   Trifolium Paludosum.  Trifolium
 aquaticum.
   TRIGASTRIC.  A term applid, in
 Anatomy, to muscles which have three
 bellies.
   TRIGEM'INI.   Trigeminus; from
 tres, three,  and geminus, double.  The
 fifth and largest pair  of the cranial
 nerves.  It is the great sensitive nerve
 of the head and face, and arises in front
 of the  floor of the fourth ventricle, be-
 hind the crura cerebelli, and at the Cas-
 serian  ganglion ; it divides into three
 branches, the opthalmic,  the  superior,
 and the inferior maxillm-y, which see.
   TRIGONEL'LA.  The name of a
 genus of plants.
   Trigonella Fcenum.   Foznum groz-
 cum.   The fenugreek.
   TRIGO'NUS.  Triangular.
   TRIGYN'IA.  Trigynous.  A term
 apphed,  in Botany,  to plants which
 have three pistils.
   TRILL'IUM   LATIFO'LIUM.—
 Broad-leaf belhroot;  rattlesnake root;
 Indian  balm.
  TRILOBATE.  Ttilobatus.  Hav-
ing three lobes.
  TRILOCULAR.  In Botany, three-
 celled ;  having three cells for seeds.
   TRIOSTEUM.   The name of a ge-
 nus of  plants.
   Triosteum  Perfolia'tum.  Bas-
 tard ipecacuanha; fever root.
  TRIPHAR'MACUM.  A medicine
 composed of three ingredients.
   TRIPSIS.   Trituration.
  TRiaUETRA  OSSICULI.  The
triangular bones found in the course of
the lambdoidal suture.
  TRiaUETRUM.  A triangle.
  TRIRADIATE. Consisting of three
rays or spokes.
  TRIS'MUS.  From tpi?a,  I gnash.
Literally, gnashing of the  teeth, but in
Pathobgy, a spasmodic contraction  of
the muscles of the jaw.   Locked jaw,
or lock-jaAV.
   Trismus  Nascentium.   Lock-jaw
 attacking infants during the two  first
 weeks from birth.
   Trismus Traumat'icus.   Lock-jaw
 originating from a wound.
   TRISPLANCH'NIC.   Trkpbnch-
 nkus ; from tpets, three, and artxayxrov,
 viscus.  That which relates to the three
 orders  of viscera.
   Trisplanchnic Nerve.  The great
 sympathetic nerve.
   TRIS'SAGO. The common german-
 der.
   TRIT'ICUM. The name of a genus
 of plants.
  Triticum Hybern'um.  Wheat.
  Triticum  Repens.   Dog's-grass;
 couch-grass.
  TRITORIUM.   A mortar.
  TRITURATION. Trituratio; from
 terere, tritum, to bruise.  The reduction
 of a solid body to a powder.
  TROCAR.  A perforator with a tri-
 angular-shaped point, partially enclosed
 in a canula, and employed for evacuat-
 ing fluids from cavities, particularly in
 dropsy.
  TROCHANTER.   From fpo^aw,
 I turn.   A name given to two process-
 es on the upper extremity of  the thigh
 bone. They are distinguished into great-
 er and lesser.
  TROCHANTE'RIAN.  Relating to
 the greater trochanter.
  TROCHANTIN'IAN.  Relating to
 the lesser trochanter.
  TROCHIS'CUS.    Diminutive  of
tpoxos,  a wheel.   A troch or round tab-
let  A solid medicine composed of
 powders incorporated with  glutinous
substances, and made into small cakes
and dried.
  TROCHIS'CI CRETiE.  Troches
of chalk.
  Trochisci Glycyrrhi'zje  et Opii.
Troches of liquorice and opium.
  Trochisci  Ipecacuanhje.  Troches
of ipecacuanha.
  Trochisci  Magnesije.   Troches of
magnesia.
  Trochisci  Menthje  Piperitje.—
Troches of peppermint. 
TUB
751
TUB
  Trochisci Nitra'tis Potas'sje. Tro- i
ches of nitras potassae.
  TROCH'LEA.   A  pulley;  from
tpexa, to run.   A kind of cartilaginous
pulley through Avhich the tendon ofthe
trochlearis muscle passes.
  TROCHLEA'RIS.  The obliquus
superior oculi.
  TROCHLEATOR.     The  nerve
which supplies the trochlearis muscle.
  TROCHOI'DES. From  tpoXos, a
wheel, and u5oj, a resemblace.  A term
applied, in Anatomy, to an articulation
in which one bone rotates upon another,
like a wheel upon its axle; as the atbs
upon the odontoid process of the den-
tata.
  TROP^'OLUM. The name of a
genus of plants.
  Tropjeolum Majus.   Indian  cress,
or nasturtium.
  TROPHE.   Food; aliment.
  TROPHI. From tpoxos, a nourisher.
The part of the mouth employed in in-
sects  in acquiring and preparing  the
food.
  TROPH'ICAL.  Pertaining to nour-
ishment or nutrition.
  TRUFFLE.  Tuber cibarium.
  TROUBAT.  Accidents  from Dif-
ficult and Laborious Dentition, with cer-
tain Means to Remedy it, by. Mayence,
1824.
  TRUNCATED. Truncatus.  Cut
off;  cut short, lopped; appearing as if
cut off.
  TRUNK.  Truncus.   In Anatomy,
that portion of the body to  which the
limbs are articulated.  It is  divided in-
to three parts, the thorax, abdomen, and
pelvk.
  TRUSS.  A term derived from  the
French word trousse, to tie up, and ap-
phed to a  hernial bandage, which at
the  present day, consists of a steel
spring with two pads, one to be applied
to the back as a point of support, and
the other over the hernia.
  TUBA.  From tubus, any  hollow
vessel.  A  tube.
  TUBE.  Tuba.  A term  applied, in
Anatomy, to some parts which are hol-
low.
  Tube, Eustachian.  A tube,  ex-
tending from the cavity of the tympa-
num  to  the posterior nares, between
which it forms a communication.
  Tube, Fallopian.  A canal on each
side of the uterus, extending from the
superior angle to near the ovarium.
  TUBER.  From tumere, to  swell,
or grow big.  A term applied, in Ana-
tomy, to  parts  which are rounded.  In
Surgery, a knot or swelling in any part.
In  Botany, a  subterranean stem, like
the potato.  Also, the name of a genus
of fungi.
  Tuber Annulare.  Pons varolii.—
An eminence of the medulla oblongata.
  Tuber  Cibarum.   The truffle,  a
tuberculated, subterranean fungus.
  Tuber Cinereum. A  grayish  tu-        4
bercle, forming part of the floor of the
 third ventricle of the brain.
   Tuber Ischii. The tuberosity ofthe
 ischium.
   TU'BERCLE.  Tuberculum; from
 tuber, a bunch. A term applied,  in
 Anatomy, to certain processes or projec-
 tions on the surfaces of parts, or in the
 structure of meduUary organs, as the tu-
 bercle of a human rib.  In Pathology, a
 pimple, or tumor.    The  term, how-
 ever, is applied to a species of degene-
 ration consisting of an opaque matter,
 of a whitish, yellowish,  or gray color,
 developed in  different textures  of the
 body, but most frequently  in the lungs
 and mesentery.
   TUBER'CULA.  An order of cuta-
 neous diseases in Willan,  consisting of
 smaU, hard, superficial, circumscribed
 and well defined tumors, which are per-
 manent, or suppurating  partially, com-
 prehending nine genera,  viz. phyma,
 verruca, molluscum, vitiligo, acne, syco-
 sis, lupus, elephantiasis, and frambozsea.
   Tubercula Arantii.   The  small
 eminences on  the semilunar valves of
 the aorta and pulmonary artery.
   Tubercula Q,uadrigem'ina.   Two
 oval eminences  situated on each side, 
TUM
752
TUN
at the posterior part of the third ventri-
cle of the brain.
   TUBERCULAR.   Tuberculous.—
Relating to, or having, tubercles.
   TUBER'CULATE.  Covered with
tubercles.
   TUBERCULO'SIS.     Tubercular
diathesis.
   TUBERCULOUS.  Tubercular.
   TUBERCULUM LOWER!.  An
eminence where  the two venae cavae
meet in the right auricle of the heart,
first described by Lower.
   TUBEROSITY.  From  tuber,  a
bunch.   A rough projection or process
on a bone which gives attachment to
muscles or ligaments.
   TU'BULAR.   Tubxdaris.  Having
the form of a tube.
   TUBULATED.  Furnished with a
tube, as a retort.
   TUBULI LACTIF'ERI. The ducts
in the nipple through which  the milk
passes.
   Tubuli Durje  Matris.  The sinu-
ses ofthe dura mater.
   Tubuli  Seminiferi.   The minute
tubes which constitute the parenchyma
of the testis.
   Tubuli Uriniferi.  The minute ex-
cretory ducts of the tubular substance
of the kidney.
   TU'BULOUS.  Tubular.
   TUBULUS.  A small tube.
   TULIP TREE.   Liriodendron tuli-
piferum.
   TULLER.   A Popular Essay  on
the Structure, Formation and  Manage-
ment of the Teeth; new edition with
an introduction by Downing, published,
London, 1815. The above is a work  of
considerable merit, and had the author's
life been spared a  feAV years, he would
have ranked among the most  scientific
English  practitioners of  dental sur-
gery.
  TUMEFACTION.  From tumcfa-
cio, to make tumid.  Act  of  swelling
into a tumor; a swelling.
  TUMOR.  Tumour; from  tumeo, I
sweU.  A morbid  enlargement of any
 part of the body; a permanent swell-
 ing.  Abernethy restricts the term tu-
 mor to such swellings as arise from new
 productions, including only the sarcoma-
 tous, which are of a firm  and fleshy
 consistence, and  the encysted, which
 are formed in a membranous sac.  The
 former he divides into, 1. The common
 vascular,  or organized  sarcoma.   2.
 Adipose sarcoma.  3. Pancreatic sarco-
 ma, from  its resemblance to the pan-
 creas.  4.  Mastoid, or  mammary sarco-
 ma, from its resemblance to  the struc-
 ture of the mammary gland.  5. Tuber-
 culaled sarcoma, Avhich  is composed of
 small,  ovoid tumors, varying  in  size
 and color, and connected by  cellular
 tissue.  6. Medullary sarcoma, from its
 resemblance to the medullary substance
 of the brain.  This variety is common-
 ly designated by  the name of fungus
 hozmatodes.  7.  The carcinomatus sarco-
 ma, constituting the  cancerous tumor.
 Encysted  tumors he  divides  into,  1.
 Steatomatous, which contain  fatty mat-
 ter.  2. Mclicerous,  the  substance of
 which bears some resemblance to honey.
 3. Atheromatous, which are of a paste-
 like consistence.
  The nature  and malignancy of a tu-
 mor is  determined  not only  by  the
 causes which give rise  to its develop-
 ment, but  also by its  seat and the state
 of the general health, and constitution-
 al diathesis ofthe individual.
  Tumors of the Gums and Alveo-
 lar Processes.  See Jaws, diseases of.
  TUNG'STATE.  A salt formed of
 tungstic acid and a base.
  TUNGSTEN.  A brittle metal, near-
 ly as hard as steel, of a grayish-white
 color, and  considerable lustre.
  TUNIC.  Tunica.  In Anatomy, a^
membrane, or covering to some part or
organ, as the tunics of the eye, &c.
  TUNICA ACINIFORMIS.  The
uvea.
  Tunica  Adnata.  The conjunctiva.
  Tunica   Albuginea  Oculi.  The
fibrous membrane of the eye, situated
immediately under the conjunctiva. 
TUR
753
TYL
  Tunica Albuginea  Testis.   The
albuginea testis.
  Tunica Arachnoidea.  The arach-
noid membrane.
  Tunica Choroides.  The choroid
membrane.
  Tunica Conjunctiva. The conjunc-
tiva.
  Tunica Cornea.   The cornea of the
eye.
  Tunica Elytroides.   The tunica
vaginalis.
  Tunica Erythroides.  The cremas-
ter.
  Tunica Retina.  The retina.
  Tunica Vasculosa Testis.  A deli-
cate membrane formed of minute ram-
ifications of the spermatic vessels, on
the inner surface of the tunica albugi-
nea,  enclosing the  substance of the
gland, and constituting the membrane of
the testis.
  Tunica Vasculosa  Retinje.   The
inner lamina of the retina.  It is of a
fibro-vascular structure, and supports
the outer medullary lamina.
  Tunica Villosa   The inner coat of
the intestines.
  Tunica Vitrea.   The hyaloid mem-
brane.
  TUNICATA.  From tunica, a tunic.
An order of acephalous moUusks which
are covered with a soft, elastic tunic.
  TURBINATED. Turbinatus; from
turbo, or turben, a top. Shaped  like a
top,  or inverted  cone.
  Turbinated Bones.  Very thin con-
voluted plates of bone, situated  in the
nasal fossae.  They are distinguished
into  the superior  and inferior.   The
spongy bones.
  TURGES'CENCE. Turgescentia;
from turgescere, to sweU.  A preternat-
ural accumulation of blood or other fluid
in a  part;  a state of distention.
  TURGESCENCE  OF  THE  GUMS.   A
swollen or distended condition of the
margins of the gums.  See Gums, tur-
gescence and ulceration of.
  TURGID.  Turgidus;  from turgere,
to swell or puff up.  SwoUen.
  TURGOR VITALIS.  Turgescence.
  TURMERIC.  Curcuma longa.
  TURNING   A term applied, in Ob-
stetrics,  to  the  operation of bringing
doAvn the feet of the child in utero, for
the purpose of facilitating delivery.
  TURNIP.  Brassica rapa.
  Turnip,Indian.  Aurumtriphyllum.
  TURPENTINE.   Terebinthina.—
The resinous juice of pine trees.
  TURPETH  MINERAL.  Hydrar-
gyrus vitriolatus.
  TURPETHUM.  The turbith plant.
  TURUN'DA.  A tent.
  TUSSILAGO. Thetussilagofarfara.
Also, the name of a  genus of plants.
  Tussilago Far'fara.  Colt's-foot.
  Tussilago Petasi'tes.  Butter-bur;
pestilent-vsrort.
  TUSSIS. A cough.
  Tussis Convulsiva. Hooping-cough.
  TUTAM'INA. Tutamen; a defence,
a protection.  A term applied, in Anat-
omy, to parts which seem to defend or
protect certain organs.
   Tutamina Cerebri.  The scalp and
bones of the skuU.
   TUTIA.  Tutty.  The gray incrus-
tation which forms on the chimneys of
furnaces, in which the ores of zinc are
smelted.  It is an impure oxyd of zinc.
   TWINKLING OF THE  EYE.—
Nictation.
   TWINS. Two children born at a
birth.
   TWITCH'ING.  In Pathology, short
spastic contractions.
   TYCHTCA.  From tvxn, accident.
Fortuitous lesions.
   TYLER, NATHANIEL S.  Na-
 thaniel S.  Tyler, late surgeon  dentist
 of Providence, R. I., was born in Barn-
 stable,  Massachusetts, in 1814.  His
 father  died while he was  young, and
 leaving but small means for the sup-
 port of a numerous  family, his educa-
 tional advantages were limited.  He
 studied dentistry under Dr.  AUen  of
 Deerfield,  Mass., a  gentleman, who
 united  this branch to the  practice  of
 medicine.   After leaving  Dr. A. he 
TYL               754               TYP
opened an office  in Springfield, Mass.,
where  he resided about three years.
He then removed to Providence, where
he remained until his death, which oc-
cured on the last day of December, 1847.
  In a letter to the author, Dr. N. A.
Fisher, says, as a dentist, Dr. T. had few
superiors.  The most eminent, at  home
and abroad,  have frequently testified to
his high merits.   He was a careful ob-
server, and strove to  make every day's
experience contribute something useful
to his stock of knowledge.  He possess-
ed  a sound judgment  and ready tact
that prepared  him for any  exigency,
and his mechanical ingenuity enabled
him to execute, as weU as design, much
to effect the end desired.
   He had that love, too, for his pro-
fession, which is indispensable for excel-
lence—a love that was not satisfied with
large gains,  but one that comprehended
its advancement and sought to enlarge
its usefulness.
   As a man,  Dr. T. possessed, in a
high degree, those excellent qualities
that gains the confidence and wins the
esteem of his feUow men.  His  integ-
rity, his generosity, his amiability, en-
deared  to  him  a numerous circle of
friends  who lamented his loss.
   He died of consumption, a tendency
to which disease he no^doubt inherited,
 but his too close application to the duties
of his profession, plainly contributed to
its development.
   TYLER, LEVI S.  Levi S. Ty-
ler, brother of Dr. Nathaniel S.,  and
some few years his junior, received his
professional education under his tuition,
 and died in May, 1847. For the folio wing
 detaUs of his life, the author is indebted
 to Dr.  Fisher.   He practiced his pro-
fession in Cabotville, near  Springfield,
 Mass.,  and very sucessfully, until his
 brother's health failed him, Avhenhe un-
 dertook to supply his place in his office.
 For this, however, he found himself in-
 capable.  In a few months  a dangerous
 hemorrhage of the lungs occurred while
 using the blow-pipe, and from this he
never recovered.  With his brother he
sought relief in a change of climate.
They went  to  Florida in December,
1846, but his disease made fearful pro-
gress, and leaving his brother,he hasten-
ed home to die.   He survived but a few
days after reaching his family.
  He was a  dentist of much  promise
and  a young man of  most estimable
character.
  TYLO'SIS.  Tyloma.  Induration o£
the margin of the eyetids.
  TYMPANITES. From tvunavov,
a drum, so caUed because the abdomen
is distended with wind, and sounds hke
a drum when struck. Distention ofthe
abdomen  arising from an accumulation
of air.   There  are  two  species,  1.
Tympanites intestinalk, consisting in  an
accumulation of gas in the intestines,
and 2.  Typanites abdominalk, when the
air is contained in the cavity of the peri-
toneum.
  Tympanites, Uterine.  A windy
SAvelling of the  uterus.
  TYMPANITIS.  From tvurtavov,
a drum, and itis, inflammation.  Inflam-
mation of the tympanum of the ear.
  TYM'PANUM.  • The drum of the
ear.
  TYM'PANY.  Tympanites.
  TYPE.   Typus.   From tvrtos, a
stamp, itself from the rootof tap, tvrttu,
I beat.  In Pathology, the order in which
the symptoms of a disease  occur and
succeed each other;  the character which
a disease assumes, especiaUy one of an
acute, or febrtie nature.
  TYPHA.  The name of a genus of
plants.
  Typha Aromatica.  Sweet-flag.
  Typha Latifolia. The broad-leaved
cat's-tail, or red mace.
  TYPHLO-ENTERITIS. Typhlitk;
from tvBxos, the ccecum, and enteritu,
inflammation of  the  intestines.   In-
flammation  of the ccecum.
   TYPHOHjEMIA.  A disorganized
state of the  blood.
   TYPHOID.  Typhoides. Typhodes.
 A low fever, resembling typhus. 
ULC               755              ULM
  TYPHOMA'NIA.    From tv$os,
stupor, and uavia, madness.  The  kind
of delirium which  accompanies ty-
phoid fevers.
  TYPHUS.  From tv$os, stupor.  A
fever characterized by extreme depres-
sion  of  strength;  small,  weak,  fre-
quent and unequal  pulse, and much
cerebral  derangement.   It  is distin-
guished  by most writers  into typhus
mitior, mild typhus or nervous fever,
and typhus gravior, a severe malignant
typhus.
  Typhus Car'cerum.  The jail fever.
  Typhus Castrensis.    The camp
fever.
  Typhus Gravior.   Malignant ty-
phus fever.
  Typhus Ictero'des.   The yeUow
fever.
  Typhus Mitior. Mtid typhus fever;
nervous fever.
  Typhus Petechia'lis. Typhus gra-
vior.
  TYREM'ESIS. Tyrotemeses; from
tvpos, cheese, and epeais, vomiting.   A
vomiting of curdy matter.
  TYRIA'SIS.  Tubercular elephan-
tiasis.
  TYROS.  Cheese.
  TYRO'MA.  A tumor of a cheese-
like structure.
u.
  ULA.  The gums.
  ULATROPHIA.   From oi>to$, the
gum, and atrophia ; atrophy.  A grad-
ual shrinking or recession of the gums
from the  necks of the teeth.  This af-
fection may be produced by an accumu-
lation of salivary calculus  upon -the
teeth, or by irregularity in the arrange-
ment, diminution, or complete  loss
of the vitality, of these organs.   See
Gums, diseases of the.
  ULCER.    Ulcus.  A  solution of
continuity in the soft parts, accompa-
nied by a discharge of purulent matter,
occasioned, and kept up by  some  local
or  constitutional  injury  or  defect.—
In popular language, a running sore.
Ulcers  are distinguished into,  1.   The
simpk  ulcer,  resulting  from a su-
perficial  wound.  2. The  sinuous, in
which the matter runs  under integu-
ments and escapes from a small, but
not callous,  orifice.   3. The fistubus,
a deep ulcer, with a small caUous ori-
fice. 4.  The fungous, where the sur-
face is covered with fungous flesh. 5.
The gangrenous.  6. The scorbutic, de-
pending upon a scorbutic diathesis of
the general system.  7. The venereal,
resulting from the venereal disease.  8.
The cancerous.    9.  The  carious,  de-
pending upon a carious bone. 10. The
inveterate, which is  of long  contin-
uance, and 11.  The scrofubus.
  Ulcer, Malignant. A putrid ulcer:
hospital gangrene.
  ULCERA  SERPENTIA ORIS.—
Aphthae.
  ULCERATION.  Ulceratio.  The
formation of an ulcer.
  Ulceration  of the  Gums.   See
Gums, turgescence and  ulceration of
the.
  UL'CEROUS.   Having the charac-
ter of an  ulcer.
  ULCUS.  An ulcer.
  UL1TIS. Inflammation ofthe gums.
See Gums, diseases of the.
  ULMA'RIA.  The meadow-sweet.
  UL'MUS.   The name of a genus of
trees.  Also, the common elm.
  Ulmus Campes'tris. The common
elm.
  Ulmus Fulva.  The slippery  elm. 
UMB
756
UNG
  ULNA.   The inner,  and largest
bone of the forearm.
  ULNAR.  Belonging to the ulna.
  Ulnar  Artery.   The branch of
the brachial artery which passes down
the inner side of the forearm.
  ULNARIS EXTERNUS.  The ex-
tensor carpi ulnaris.
  Ulnaris Internus.  The flexor car-
pi ulnaris.
  ULON'CUS.  From oitfior, the gum,
and oyxos, a tumor.  A  tumor of the
gums.  Epulis.  See Jaws, diseases of.
  ULORRHA'GIA.  From ovXov, the
gums, and prjywui, I break forth. Hemor-
rhage from the gums. This may occur
spontaneously, or  result from the me-
chanical division of some of the vessels of
the gums, but unless favored by a hem-
orrhagic diathesis,  it is never very con-
siderable.  But when thus favored, it
is often difficult  to control, and has, in
some instances, terminated  fatally.—
When spontaneous, the  blood gene-
eraUy escapes from a number of places,
but more  frequently from the apices
than any other part of the gums.   See
Hemorrhage from  the Gums, sponta-
neous.
  ULOTICA.   That  which contrib-
utes to the healing of ulcers and wounds.
  ULVA.  The name of a genus of
sea-weeds.
  Ulva Lactu'ca. Oyster-green laver.
  Ulva Umbilicalis.   Shield laver.
  UMBILICAL.   Umbilicalk;  from
umbilicus,  the naval.   Belonging, or
relating, to the naval.
  Umbilical Chord.   Funk umbili-
calk. The navel string.
  Umbilical Hernia.    Hernia um-
bilicalis.
   Umbilical Region.    The middle
portion of the abdomen about the na-
vel.  •
   Umbilical Ring.  A  fibrous ring
surrounding the aperture of the navel.
   UMBILI'CUS.  The navel.
   Umbilicus Mari'nus.  A sub-ma-
rine production found on rocks and the
sheUs of fishes.
  UMBRELLA TREE.   Magnolia
tripetala.
  UNCIA.  An ounce.
  UN'CIFORM.   Unciformis; from
uncus, a hook, and forma, shape. Hav-
ing the shape of a hook; hook-like.
  Unciform Bone.  The  fourth bone
of the second row of the carpus.
  Unciform Process.   The hamuiar
process of the os  sphenoides.
  UNCINATED.   Beset with bent
spines like hooks.
  UN'CUS.  A hook.
  UNDULATED.   Undubtus. Wa-
vy.
  UNDULATION. A fluctuation.
  UNGUENTUM.  From ungere, to
anoint.  An ointment;  a  topical ap-
plication  of about  the consistence of
lard.   An ointment is softer than a ce-
rate, although the terms are often used
indiscriminately.
  Unguentum Acidi Nitrici.   Oint-
ment of nitric acid.
  Unguentum  Acidi Sclphurici.—
Ointment of  sulphuric acid.
  Unguentum  Antimonii.  Antimo-
nial ointment; tartar emetic ointment.
  Unguentum  Aquje  Rosje.   Oint-
ment of rose water.
  Unguentum Cantharidis.   Oint-
ment of Spanish flies.
  Unguentum  Cetacei.  Spermaceti
ointment.
  Unguentum  Cocculi.  Ointment of
cocculus indicus.
  Unguentum  Conii.  Ointment of
hemlock.
  Unguentum  Creasoti.  Ointment of
creasote.
  Unguentum  Cupri   Subacetatis.
Ointment of  sub-acetate of copper.
   Unguentum Elemi.  Ointment of
elemi.
  Unguentum Gallje.   Ointment of
galls.
  Unguentum Gallje  Compositum.
Compound ointment of galls.
  Unguentum Hydrargyri.   Mercu-
rial ointment; strong mercurial oint-
ment. 
UNG
757
URA
    Unguentum  Hydrargyri  Ammo-
  niati.  Ointment of ammoniated mer-
  cury.  Ointment of white  precipitate.
    Unguentum  Hydrargyri Mitius.
  Mild mercurial ointment.
    Unguentum HvDRARGrRi Iodidi.—
  Ointment of iodide of mercury.
    Unguentum Hydrargyri Biniodi-
  di.  Ointment of biniodide of mercury.
    Unguentum Hydrargyri Nitratis.
  Ointment of nitrate of mercury; citrine
  ointment.
    Unguentum  Hydrargyri  Oxidi
  Rubri.  Ointment of red oxyd of  mer-
  cury.
    Unguentum  Iodini.  Ointment  of
  iodine.
    Unguentum Iodini Compositum.—
  Compound ointment of iodine.
    Unguentum Mezerei. Ointment of
  mezereon.
    Unguentum Picis Liq.uidje.   Tar
  ointment
    Unguentum Picis Nigrje.   Oint-
  ment of black  pitch.
   Unguentum Piperis Nigri. Oint-
 ment of black  pepper.
   Unguentum  Plumbi Acetatis.—
 Ointment of acetate of lead.
   Unguentum Plumbi Carbonatis.—
 Ointment of carbonate, of lead.
   Unguentum  Plumei Compositum.
 Compound ointment of lead.
   Unguentum Plumbi  Iodidi. Oint-
 ment of iodide  of lead.
   Unguentum Potassje Hydriodatis.
 Ointment of hydriodate of potassa.
   Unguentum  Sambuci.  Elder oint-
 ment.
   Unguentum  Scrophularije.  Oint-
 ment of figwort
   Unguentum  Simplex.  Simple oint-
 ment.
  Unguentum  Stramonii.   Ointment
 of stramonium.
  Unguentum  Sulphuris.   Sulphur
 ointment.
  Unguentum  Sulphuris   Composi-
tum.  Compound sulphur ointment.
  Unguentum  Tabaci.  Tobacco oint-
ment.                             I
        64
    Unguentum Veratri Albi.  Oint-
  ment of white hellebore.
    Unguentum  Zinci Oxidi.   Oint-
  ment of oxyd of zinc.
    UNGUIS.  From ovi|, a hook.  In
  Anatomy, the nail; a horny lamina at
  the extremity of each finger and each
  toe. In Surgery, a collection of pus
  between the laminae of the cornea of
  the eye.  Applied, in Botany, to  the
  thin inferior part of the petal of a poly-
  petalous corolla.
   Unguis Os.  The lachrymal bone of
  the orbit.
   UNGULATE.  Nail-shaped.
   UNICUS. Single.
   UNIO.   The  name of a genus of
 pearl-shells.  Margarita.
   UNION.  Act of uniting, or joining
 two or more things into one;  state of
 being united.
   Union by the First Intention.  In
  Surgery, the process by which the op-
 posite surfaces of  a recent  wound,
 when  kept  in contact, grow together,
 without suppuration or granulation.
   U'NIVALE.  From unus, one, and
 valva, a valve.  A shell composed  of
 one piece.
   UNOCULUS.    Unioculus.   One-
 eyed.
   UPAS.  A term applied, in Java, to
 several vegetable  poisons,  of which
 the bohun upas and upas tkute, are the
 most deadly.
   U'RACHUS.  From ovpov, urine.  A
 ligamentous chord extending from the
 base of the urinary bladder to the um-
 bilical chord, which, in the fetus of cer-
 tain animals, is holloAv, and conveys the
 urine to the allantoid membrane.
   URiE'MIA. From  urea, and aiua,
 blood.  A  term applied to diseases in
 which there is an excess of urea in the
 blood.
   URANISCOPLASTY.   Urankco-
pbstice ; from upai/ioxos, the roof of the
mouth, and rtxaaaa, to form.  An opera-
tion for the formation of the soft palate.
  URANTSCORRHA'PHY. Staphy-
loraphy. 
URE
758
URI
  URANTS'COS.   The palate.
  URA'NIUM.    A  rare  elementary
metal of a grayish color.
  URATE.   A  compound of urine
Avith a salifiable base.
  Urate of Soda.  The principal in-
gredient in arthretic calculi.
  UREA.   A white pearly substance,
forming an essential part of urine.
  UREC'CHYSIS. Fromoupoj/, urine,
and exxvais, effusion. Effusion of urine
into the cellular membrane.
  URE'DO.  From uro, to bum.  A
term  applied to a burning or  itching
sensation attending  many  diseases.
Also, urticaria.
  URE'SIS.   Uriask ; from ovpen/, to
void  urine.   The  act of voiding  the
urine.
  URETER.   From ovpov, urine.—
The membranous canal extending from
the pelvis of the kidney to the  urinary
bladder, which conveys the urine from
the former to the latter organ.
  URETERAL'GIA.  From ovpijtijp,
the ureter, and aXyos, pain. Pain along
the course of the ureter.
   URETERITIS.  From ovpvtrip, the
ureter, and itis, a  terminal denoting in-
 flammation. Inflammation of the ureter.
   URETHRA.   From  ovpov, urine.
 The  excretory duct of the urine in  both
 sexes in the higher animals, and of the
 semen in the male.
   URETHRAL'GIA.  From wpifipa,
 the urethra, and afcyoj, pain.   Pain  in
 the urethra; gonorrhoea.
   URETHRITIS.  From ovptjOpa, the
 urethra, and itk, inflammation.   In-
 flammation of the urethra.
   URETHROPHRAXTS. From ov-
 pij^po, the urethra, and  typaooa,  I ob-
 struct.   Obstruction of the urethra;
 stricture.
    URETHRORRHA'GIA.   From
 ovpri&pa, the urethra, and priywuv, I break
 out.   Hemorrhage from the urethra.
   URETHRORRHCE'A.   From  ov-
 pri9pa, the urethra, and p*«, I flow.  A
 mucous discharge from the urethra.
   URETHROTOMY.  Urelhrotomia.
An incision  of the urethra for the re-
moval of stricture.
  URETIC.    Ureticus.    Diuretic;
urinary.
  URIAS. The urethra.
  URIC.  Pertaining to urine.
  Uric Acid.  Acidum uricum;  lithic
acid. An acid which exists in the urine;
it  constitutes the greater  portion  of
urinary calculi.
  URINACULUM. Urachus;  urinal.
  U'RINAL. Urinatorium; fromurina,
urine.  A  vessel adapted to  the penis
for  the reception of the urine in cases
of incontinence.
  URINA'RIA.    The  dandelion  or
pissabed.
  U'RINARY. Urinarius; from uri-
na, urine. Pertaining to the urine.
  Urinary Bladder.  Vesica urinaria.
A musculo-membranous   pouch,  sit-
uated in the lower part of the abdomen
between the  symphysis pubis and  the
beginning of the rectum.  It serves for
the reception of the  urine  from  the
ureters, and  when a certain quantity
has accumulated, a desire for  its expul-
sion is experienced.
   Urinary  Calculi.    The  calculi
Avhich form in the bladder  and urinary
passages.
   URINE.   Oupoj/; from opowo, to rush
out.  The fluid secreted in  the kidneys,
and slowly  conveyed  by  the  ureters
into the urinary bladder. When voided
in a healthy  state, it is transparent, of
an amber, or  citron-yellow color, of a pe-
 culiar odor, and of a slightly  bitter, and
 saline, acid taste.
   Urine, Alkaline.  Urine containing
 an excess of earthy phosphates.
   Urine, Bloody.  Haematuria.
   Urine, Diabetic.  Urine containing
 sugar, analogous to that of the grape.
   Urine, Dropsical.  Urine contain-
 ing much albumen and little urea.
   Urine, Dyspeptic  This contains
 an excess of urates, and soon putrifies.
   Urine, Gouty.  This contains much
 phosphate of lime, and is often turbid
 at the time it is voided. 
URT               759               UVA
  Urine, Milky.  White and turbid
urine is so termed.
  Urine, Nervous.   This is  almost
colorless, limpid and abundant.
  Urine, Phosphatic  Urine contain-
ing an excess of earthy phosphates.
  Urine, Purpuric  Urine containing
purpuric acid and its salts.
  Urine, Purulent.   Urine contain-
ing pus.
  Urine, Retention of.  An accu-
mulation of urine in the bladder from
inability to void it;  ischuria.
  Urine, Suppression of. See ischuria.
  URINIF'EROUS.     From   ovpov,
urine, and  $epa, I carry.   Carrying
urine, as the tubuli uriniferi.
  Uriniferous Tubes.  A number of
small ducts converging from the  corti-
cal portion  of the kidney to the apices
of the papillae.
  URINOM'ETER.   An instrument
for determining the specific gravity of
the urine.
  U'RINOUS.   Having the character
of, or resembling urine.
  UROCRISTA.  From ovpov, urine,
and xpwo, I judge.  A judgment formed
of disease by inspecting the urine.
  URODIAL'YSIS. From ovpov, urine,
and SiaXvais, dissolution, loss of strength.
A suspension  of the function of  the
kidney.
   UROLITHT. Urinary calculi.
   UROLITHOL'OGY. Urolithobgb;
from ovpov,  urine, XiBos, a stone, and xo-
yos, a discourse. A discourse on urinary
calculi.
   UROMANTI'A. From ovpov,  urine,
and uavteia, divination.  The pretended
art of divining  diseases by inspecting
the urine.
   URON.  Urine.
   URONOL'OGY.  Uronobgia; from
ovpov, urine, and xoyos, a discourse.   A
treatise on  the urine.
   UROSCOPIA.  Uromantia.
  URO'SES.   Diseases of the urinary
organs.
  URTI'CA.  The name of a genus of
plants.
  Urtica Dioica. The common stink-
ing nettle.
  Urtica Mortua.  Dead nettle.
  Urtica Pilulif'era.  The pill-bear-
ing nettle.
  Urtica Urens.  The lesser nettle.
  URTICACE/E.  The nettle tribe of
dicotyledonous plants.
  URTICA'RIA. From urtica, a net-
tle.  The  nettle-rash; an eruption on
the skin resembling  that produced by
the stings of a nettle.  Six varieties are
described by Willan, namely,  1. Urti-
caria febrilk.   2.  Urticaria  evanida.
3. Urticaria persktans. 4. Urticaria con-
ferta. 5. Urticaria subcutanea. 6. Ur-
ticaria tuber osa.
  URTICATION.   Urticatio; from
urtica, a nettle.  Whipping a  part of
the body with nettles for the purpose of
producing  cutaneous excitement.
   USTILA'GO.  Ergot.
   USTION.  The act of applying the
 actual cautery.  Also, a burn.
   UTERINE.  Uterinus;  from uterus,
 the womb. Belonging, or relating, to
 the womb.
   Uterine Artery.  A branch of the
 hypogastric or internalpudic, distribut-
 ed over the uterus.
   UTERO-GESTATIO.  Pregnancy.
   UTEROMANIA.   Nymphomania.
   UTERUS.  The womb; a hollow
 organ of  the shape of a  compressed
 pear, situated in the cavity of the pelvis
 between the urinary bladder and rectum,
 and destined to lodge the fetus from the
 commencement of conception till birth.
   Uterus, Inversion of.  The uterus
 displaced  and  turned  inside   out,  as
 sometimes occurs in the careless or in-
 judicious removal of the placenta.
   Uterus, Irritable.  Neuralgia of
 the uterus.
   UTRIC'ULUS. The uterus. Also,
 a little bag, or hollow vesicle.
   UVA.  An  unripe grape.  Also, a tu-
 mor having the appearance of a grape.
   Uva Passa Major.  A raisin.
   Ua-a Passa Minor.  The dried cur-
 rant. 
VAC               760               VAG
  Uva Ursi.  Arbutus uva ursi.
  U'VEA. From uva, an unripe grape.
A term applied  by some anatomists to
the  choroid coat  of the eye,  and by
others to the black pigment on the pos-
terior surface of the iris.
  Uvea, Commissure of the.  The
ciliary  ligament.
  U'VULA.  A small, conical, fleshy
process hanging from the middle of the
inferior margin  of the soft palate, over
the root of the tongue.  It is composed
of mucous  membrane and the azygos
uvulae muscle.
  Uvula, Elongation of.   See Pala-
tine Organs, diseases of.
  Uvula, Excision  of.  See Palatine
Organs, diseases of.
  Uvula, Ulceration of.  See Pala-
tine Organs, diseases of.
V.
  VACCPNA.  From vacca,  coav.—
CoAV-pox; kine-pox; a pustular disease
of coav's teats, consisting of vesicles of
a blue color, and which, when intro-
duced into the human  body by innocu-
lation, preserves  him  from the conta-
gion of small pox.  For this valuable
discovery the world is indebted to Dr.
Jenner.
  VACCINATION.   Vaccinatio;—
from vacca, a cow.  Cow-pox innocu-
lation; the insertion of vaccine matter
under the cuticle to produce cow-pox.
  VACCINE MATTER.  The serous
fluid contained in the vesicle developed
on the body of one who has been vac-
cinated,  and which, when permitted to
remain  undisturbed,  concretes into a
hard scab or crust.
  VACCINTUM.  The name of a ge-
nus of plants.
  Vaccinium, Myrtil'lus. The myr-
tle-berry.
.  Uvula  Scissors,  Hullihen's.  A
 pair of scissors invented by Dr. S. P.
 Hullihen,  of Wheeling,  Va.,  in the
 early part  of 1843, for the removal of
 the uvula, which are so contrived, that
 at the instant it cuts the uvula, it se-
 cures the  divided part and prevents it
 from falling into  the fauces by means
 of a pair of supplementary blades, pro-
 vided with sharp teeth, beneath the cut-
 ting blades.
   Uvula Vesicje. A slight elevation of
 the mucous membrane at  the entrance
 of the urethra in the neck ofthe bladder.
   UVULA'RIA.  The ruscus hypo-
 glossum, a plant formerly used in cases
 of relaxation of the uvula.
   UVULITIS. From uvub, and itis,
 denoting inflammation.  Inflammation
 of the uvula.
  Vaccinium Oxycoc'cos.  The cran-
berry plant.
  Vaccinium Vitis Idje'a.   The  red
whortleberry.
  VACHER.    Dissertation  on  the
Accidents of the  Teeth, by.  Paris,
1764 and 1767.
  VACUUM.  An empty space.
  VAGI'NA.  A sheath.   In  Anato-
my, the canal which leads  from  the
vulva or external orifice of the female
pudendum to the uterus.
  VAGI'NAL.    Vaginalk.  Pertain-
ing to the vagina or a sheath.
  Vaginal Artery.  A branch of the
hypogastric,  uterine, or  internal pudic
artery, distributed to the vagina.
  VAGINALIS TUNICA.  The tu-
nica vaginalis testis.
  VAGINITIS,  Inflammation or ir-
ritation of the vagina.
  VAGPTUS.   Squalling.   The cry
of the  new-born child. 
              VAN               71

  VALENTINI. Dissertation on Loose-
ness, Loss and Reparation of the Teeth,
by. Jena, 1798.
  VALERIAN.   Wild valerian.  Va-
leriana officinalis.
  VALERIA'NA. The name of a ge-
nus of plants. Also, the officinal valerian.
  Valeriana Celt'ica.   Celtic nard.
  Valeriana Dentata.  Corn salad.
  Valeriana Officina'lis.   Wild va-
lerian ; officinal valerian.
  Valeriana Phu.  Garden valerian.
  VALERIANACE'^E.   The vale-
rian tribe of dicotyledonous plants.
  VALETUDINA'RIAN.    Sickly;
one who is in delicate health.
  VALETU'DINARY.   Valetudina-
rian.
  VAL'GUS.    Bandy-legged; one
having his  legs bent outward.  Also,
club-foot.
  VAL'LUM.  The eyebrows.
  VALVE.    Valvula;  from valvaz,
folding doors.  A  small door.  A term
applied,  in Anatomy, to membranous
folds, situated at the  orifice  or in the
course of certain  cavities and canals,
and which serve to prevent the regur-
gitation, and  direct the course of con-
tained fluids.  In Botany, the divisions
of the fruit.
  Valve of Fallopius.    Valve of
Bauhin.   The ileo-coecal valve.
  VALVES, SEMILUNAR    The
sigmoid  valves.
  VALVULA.   A small valve.
  Valvula Coll  The  valve of the
colon.
  Valvula  Eustachii.   A semilunar
membranous fold situated at the mouth
of the inferior vena cava.
  Valvula Mitralis. The mitral valve.
  Valvula Semilunaris.   The semi-
lunar valves.
  Valvula Triglochin.  The tricus-
pid valves.
  VALVULE  CONNIVENTES.—
Numerous semilunar folds of the mu-
cous coat of  the small intestines.
  VANA'DIUM.  A brittle  metal, of
a white color, found with lead and iron.
          64*
               VAR

  VANDERBELEN.    Dissertation
on Odontalgia, by. Lovan, 1782.
  VANDERMASSON.  On the Ne-
cessity of attending to  the Gums and
Teeth, by. Gotha, 1802.—The Dentist
for All Classes, by.  Leipsic, 1803.—
Hoav can Parents  facilitate the Denti-
tion of Children 1  by.  Pyrna, 1807.
  VANDERMONDE.   Whether in
the Dentition of Infants, attended with
convulsions or drowsiness, there should
be a repeated use of   cathartics,  by.
Paris, 1767.
  VANIL'LA.    Vanelloe.   Epiden-
drum  vanilla.
  VAPOR.   An elastic fluid rendered
asriform by heat, and capable  of being
brought back to a liquid state by cold.
  Va'por Bath.  A steam bath; the
application of vapor to the body  in  a
close place. Also, the place itself.
  VAPORA'RIUM.  A vapor bath.
  VAPORIZATION.  The evapori-
zation of a liquid, or the artificial for-
mation of vapor.
  VA'PORS.  Hypochondriasis; hys-
teria.
  VA'REC.  The askes of sea-weeds ;
kelp.
  VARICEL'LA. Diminutive of vario-
la, small-pox. Variola lymphatica. The
chicken-pox; an eruptive disease, con-
sisting of vesicles scattered over the body.
  VARICOBLEPHARON.    From
varix, dilatation of a vein, and j3x.s<}>apov,
eyelid.  A varicose tumor of the eyelid.
   VARICOCELE.  From varix, and
x-nXri, a tumor.  Cirsocele.  A varicose
enlargement of the  scrotum, or sper-
matic chord.
  VARICOMPH'ALUS. From varix,
and oufyaXos, the umbilicus. A varicose
tumor of the umbilicus.
  VARI'COSE.  Varicosus.  Belong-
ing to, or resembling, a varix.
  VARIC'ULA.  A varicose swelling
of the veins of the conjunctiva.
  VARI'OLA.   From varius, spotted,
or from vari, pimples.   The small-pox.
  Variola Spuria.  Varicella.
  VARIOLOID.   Varioloides;  from
1 
VAU               762                VEI
 variola,  small-pox, and eiSos, resemb-
 lance.   A disease  resembling  small-
 pox ; small-pox modified by previous
 vaccination or innoculation.
   VARIX.  A dilatation of a vein.
   VARUS. A term applied adjectively
 to one whose legs are bent inward, and
 substantively to  a small spot, speck, or
 pimple on the face.
   VAS.   A vessel.
   Vas Deferens.  An excretory duct
 of the testicle, situated along the pos-
 terior border of the spermatic chord.
   VASA LACTEA.  The chyliferous
 vessels.
   Vasa Deferentia Muliebra.  The
 Fallopian tubes.
  Vasa Vaso'rum.  Vasa nutritia. The
 small vessels which supply larger ones.
  Vasa  Vortico'sa.    The contorted
 vessels of the choroid coat of the eye.
  VAS'CULAR.    Vascularis;  from
vas, a vessel.   Belonging, or  pertain-
ing, to vessels, as the vascular system.
  Vascular System.  The aggregate
of the vessels, arteries, veins, and lym-
 phatics of the body.
  VAS'CULUM ABER'RANS.   A
 small convoluted duct,  generally con-
 nected Aviththe duct of the epididymis.
  VASE.  Is  Hemorrhage from  the
 Extraction of Teeth, owing  to  Care-
 lessness  on the part of the Operator 1
 by.  Paris, 1735.
   VATER.  Dissertation on Odontal-
 gia, by.  Wetteb, 1683.
   VASIFORM.  From vas,  a vessel.
 Shaped like a bloodvessel  or tube.
  VASTUS  That which is large and
 has a great extent. In Anatomy, a term
 applied to certain muscles.
  Vastus Externus.   A  large, thick
 muscle, situated on the outside  of the
thigh.
  Vastus Internus.    A  muscle sit-
 uated on  the inner side of the thigh.
  VAULT.  A term- applied, in Anat-
 omy,  to  parts  .which: are  rounded su-
periorly  and cdncave, and arched  in-
teriorly,  as the vault of the palate, Sec.
  VAUQUEL1N."   Report upon the
Tartar of the Teeth, made to  the Sec-
tion of Pharmacy of the Royal Acade-
my of Medicine, by. Paris, 1825.
  VECTIS.  A lever.
  VEGETABLE.  Vcgclabilk; from
vigcre, to groAV.  An organized body,
not endowed  with sense and  Arolunta-
ry motion, receiving  its  nourishment
through pores on its outer surface and
vessels, usually adhering to some other
body, as  the earth, and generally propa-
gating itself by  seeds.
  Vegetable Ivory.  A product of a
species of palm, the phytclephas nutr-
crocarpa ; it is very hard, and resembles
the finest grained ivory.
  Vegetable Kingdom.  The aggre-
gate of vegetables.
  Vegetable Physiology.  A treatise
on the functions of plants.
  VEGETATION.  Vegetatio. Vege-
tables in  general.  Also, the process of
grovving, as plants, by nourishment de-
rived from the earth, Avater, or  air.   In
Surgery,  a morbid growth resembling a
fungus.  In Chemistry, certain crystal-
line concretions formed  by salts, after
solution in water.
  VE'HICLE.  Vchkulum; from ve-
hcre, to carry. A term applied,  in Phar-
macy, to  the menstruum in which medi-
cines are suspended or dissolved.
  VEIN. The veins are membranous
canals which return the blood from the
arteries to the auricles of the heart.   A
vein,  like an  artery,  is  composed  of
three  coats, an external or  cellulo-
fibrous, a middle or fibrous, and an in-
ternal  or serous.   With  the excep-
tion of the pulmonary, the veins  con-
tain black blood, and are divided into
superficial, or those which  return the
blood from  the integument  and  su-
perficial  structures;  the deep, which
are  situated among the  deeper struc-
tures, and the sinuses, or channels  ex-
cavated in the structure of an organ, and
lined  by  the internal coat of the veins,
as the sinuses of the dura mater, &c.
  Most of the  veins of the body  are
enumerated in  the foUowing table, ar- 
VEI
763
VEI
ranged from   Wihorts  Anatomy, ac-
cording to the primary divisions of the
body.
          Table of the Veins.
  The veins of the exterior of the head
are,
  1. The facial.
  2. The internal maxillary.
  3. The temporal.
  4. The temporo-maxiUary.
  5. The posterior auricular.
  6. The occipital.
  The veins of the cerebrum and cere-
bellum are,
  1. The superficial cerebral.
  2. The superior cerebral.
  3. The deep or ventricular.
  4. The venoz Galeni, and
  5. The cerebelbr veins.
  The sinuses of the dura mater, sit-
uated at the upper and back  of the
skull are,
  1. The superior longitudinal.
  2. The inferior bngitudinal.
  3. The straight.
  4. The occipital, and
  5. The lateral.
  The sinuses of the base of the cran-
ium are,
   1. The cavernous.
  2. The inferior petrosal.
  3. The circular.
  4. The superior petrosal, and
  5. The transverse.
  The veins of the neck are,
   1. The external jugular.
  2. The anterior jugular.
  3. The internal jugular, and,
  4. The vertebral.
  The  veins  of  the upper  extremity
are  divided into deep  and superficial.
The former  accompany  the branches
and trunks of the arteries, and  consti-
tute their venaz comites.   At the bend of
the elboAv they terminate in the brachial
veins, Avhich  open  into  the axilbry.
The  axillary veins terminate  in the
subcbvian, which last  unites with the
internal jugular, to form the vena in-
nominata, and this,  again, unites with
its fellow to form the mperwv or de-
scending vena cava, which terminates
in the upper part of the right  auricle
of the heart.
  The superficial veins of the  forearm
are,
   1.  The anterior uhutr.
  2.  The posterior ulnar.
  3.  The basilic.
  4.  The radial.
  5.  The cephalic.
  6.  The median.
  7.  The median basilic, and,
  8.  The median cephalic.
  The  veins of  the  lower extremity
are the deep and  superficial. The for-
mer  accompany  the  arteries in pairs,
forming the venoz comites of the ante-
rior  and posterior tibial and peroneal
arteries. In the popliteal region, they
unite and form one large vein, the pop-
liteal, which, in its progress upwards,
becomes first,  the  femoral, and then
the external iliac  vein.   The  popliteal
vein receives several muscular  and ar-
ticular  branches, and the external sa-
phenous vein.  The femoral  receives
several muscular, the profunda and the
internal saphenous vein.
   The  superficial veins are the  exter-
nal,  or short saphenous, and the  inter-
nal,  called the  long saphenous vein.
The external receives  the  blood from
 the  foot  and  outer  side of  the leg,
 and joins the popliteal vein.   The in-
 ternal,  ascends on the inner side of the
 ankle,  leg and thigh,  receiving in  its
 course  the cutaneous veins, and enters
 the  femoral with the  profunda  about
 an  inch and  a  half below Poupart's
 ligament.
   The veins of the trunk are,
   1. The superior vena cava, as before
 noticed.
   2. The  inferior vena  cava,  with  its
 formative branches.
   3. The azygos veins.
   4. The vertebral and spinal.
   5. The cardiac.
   6. The portal, and,
   7. The pulmonary. 
VEI
764
VEN
  The formative branches of the infe-
rior or ascending vena cava are,
  1. The external iliac.
  2. The internal  iliac, which unites
with the external to form the common
iliac.
  3. The vesical and prostatic plexus.
  4. The uterine plexus.
  The right and kft common iliac  veins
unite between the fourth and fifth lum-
bar vertebrae, to form  the  ascending
cava, which receives in its course,
  1. The lumbar veins.
  2. The right spermatic.
  3. The renal.
  4. The supra-renal.
  5. The phrenic, and
  6. The hepatic.
  The inferior vena cava terminates at
the inferior and posterior part  of the
right auricle of the heart.
  The azygos  veins form a  system of
communication  betAveen the superior
and inferior vena cava, and consist of,
  1. The vena azygos major.
  2. The vena azygos minor, and
  3. The superior intercostal vein.
  The vertebral and spinal veins are ar-
ranged into three groups,
  1. The dorsi-spinal
 . 2. The maningo-rachidian, and,
  3. The medulli-spinal.
  The cardiac veins which return the
blood from the substance of the heart
are,
  1. The   great  cardiac, or coronary
vein.
  2. The posterior cardiac, or coronary
vein, and,
  3. The anterior cardiac.
  The posterior and  anterior cardiac
veins enter the great cardiac which ter-
minates in the right auricle of the heart.
  The portal system  consists  of four
large veins,  which convey  the blood
from the  chylopoietic  viscera.   They
are,
  1. The inferior mesenteric.
  2. The superior mesenteric.
  3. The splenic, and
  4. The gastric veins.
  These veins concur in the formation
of the vena portoz, which goes to the
liver.
  The pulmonary veins, four in num-
ber, unite  into two trunks, which open
into the left auricle of the heart.
  VEINS, CORONARY.   The car-
diac  veins.
  Veins,  Intra-Lobular.   The he-
patic veins.
  VE'LUM.  A veil.
  Velum  Pendulum  Palati.   The
soft palate. A  pendulous fold of mu-
cous membrane, situated  at the poste-
rior part of the mouth over the root of
the tongue, and continuous with  the
hard palate.  It is composed  of mu-
cous membrane  and muscles;  to the
centre of which the uvula is suspended.
On each  side of this, outwardly, are
the arches or piUars of the palate.  The
anterior passes downwards to the side
of the base of the tongue, and the pos-
terior extends downwards and back-
Avards into the  pharynx.  There is a
triangular  space between these pillars
below, in Avhich the tonsil is situated.
  VENA.  A vein.
  Vena Azygos.   The azygos vein.
  Vena Portje.  A large vein which
receives the blood  from the viscera of
the abdomen  and conveys  it into the
substance  of the liver.
  VEN.E LACTEA.  The lacteals.
  VENESECTION.     Venozsectio;
from vena, a vein, and scctio, a cutting.
Blood-letting;  phlebotomy; the open-
ing of a vein.
  VENE'NUM.  A poison ; venom.
  VENE'REAL.   Venereus;   from
Venus, the goddess of pleasure.  Per-
taining to, or connected  with, sexual
intercourse.
  Venereal  Disease.  Syphilis.
  VEN'ERY.   Sexual intercourse;
coition.
  VEN'OM.  A poison.
  VEN'OMOUS.  Poisonous.  A term
applied to animals which have a secre-
tion  of poisonous matter,  as  the rattle-
snake, viper, &.c. 
              VER              7i

  VENOUS.  Venosus.  Pertaining to
 veins or the blood of veins.
  VENTER.  The belly.
  VENTILATION. Ventilatio ; from
 ventus, wind.  The act of causing the
 air to pass through a place, or of renew-
 ing it for the purpose of dissipating any
 thing noxious.
  VENTRAL.  Pertaining to the infe-
 rior surface of the body.
  VENTRICLE.  Ventriculus.   Di-
 minutive of venter, the belly.  A term
 employed, in Anatomy, to designate cer-
 tain  cavities of the body,  as those of
 the brain and heart.
  Ventricle of Arantius.  A smaU
 cavity at the point ofthe calamus scrip-
 torius of the brain.
  Ventricles of  the Brain.   Five
 cavities in the  interior of that  organ.
 They are distinguished into the lateral
 ventricks, which are  two in number.
 The middle, the fourth, and the fifth
 ventricles.
  Ventricles of the Heart.   These
 are two in number, and distinguished
 into right and left.
  Ventricles  of the Larynx.  The
 two depressions  above the chordoz  vo-
 cales, are so termed by anatomists.
  VENTRICULUS.   The stomach;
 a ventricle.
  VentriculUs Pulmona'ris.    The
 right ventricle of the heart.
  Ventriculus  Succenturia'tus.—
 That part -of the duodenum which is
 surroundedvi>y the peritoneum.
  VENTRIL'OaUISM. Ventribquis-
 mus ; from venUr, and loquor to speak.
 The art of speaking in  such  a man-
 ner that the voice appears to  come
 from some distant place, intead of pro-
 ceeding from the person speaking.
  VE'NULA.  Diminutive  of vena, a
 vein.   A small vein.
  VE'NUS. Clitoris ; coition; copper.
  VERATRIA.   Veratrina:   Vera-
trine, a vegetable alkali found  in the
veratrum sabadilla and veratrum album.
  VERATRUM.  The name of a ge-
 nus of plants.
55               VER

   Veratrum Album.   White helle-
 bore.
   Veratrum Sabadil'la. Indian caus-
 tic barley.
   Veratrum Viride.  American hel-
 lebore.
   VERBAS'CUM.  The name of  a
 genus of plants.
   Verbascum Blatta'ria. Moth mul-
 lein.
   Verbascum Nigrum.  Black mul-
 lein.
   Verbascum Thapsus.  Yellow mul-
 lein.
   VERBE'NA.   The name of a genus
 of plants.
   Verbena Fjemina.  Stinking hedge-
 mustard.
   Verbena Officina'lis.  Verbenaca.
 Vervain.
   VERDIGRIS.  The subacetate of
 copper.
   VERJUICE.   An acid liquor  ob-
 tained from sour grapes or apples.
   VERMES. From vermk, a worm.
 Worms.
   VERMICULAR. Vermiform.
   VER'MIFORM.  Vermicular; ver-
 miformk;  from  vermis, a worm, and
 forma, form.  Having the shape or ap-
 pearance of a worm.
   Vermiform Process. Processus ver-
 miformis;  protuberantia vcrmiformk.
 The meduUary substance which unites
 the two hemispheres of the brain like a
 ring, and  forms a process or projection
 somewhat resembling an earth-worm.
   VER'MIFUGE. Vermifugus; from
 vermk,  a  worm, and fugo,  to drive
 away.  Anthelmintic.
   VERMILION.  Red  sulphuret of
 mercury;  cinnabar.
   VERMINATION.    Verminatio.—
 That diseased condition, in which  the
 skin is infested with vermin.
   VERMINOUS.  Caused by worms.
   VER'MIS.   A worm.  The term
 generally  employed to  designate  the
 parasitical anfeaals that infest  the ani-
 mal body.
   Vermis  Cerebri.   Brain-worm,  a
)5 
VER               766               VES
name applied to the Hungarian camp
fever.
  Vermis Mordicans.  A species of
cutaneous eruption.
  Vermis Terrestris.    The  earth-
worm.
  VERNATION.  From ver, spring.
In Botany, the arrangement of the na-
scent leaves within the bud; leafing.
  VER'NIX CASEOSA.   The seba-
ceous deposit found on the  fetus.
  VERO'NIA. The name of a genus
of plants.
  Veronia  Anthelmin'tica.   Cala-
girah, an East Indian plant.
  VERONPCA.  The name of a genus
of plants.
  Veronica  Aquatica.  Water pim-
pernel and brook-lime;  water speed-
well .
   Veronica Mas.  Veronica officina-
lis ;  veronica.
   VERRES. The boar.
   VERRU'CA.  A wart
   VERRUCA'RIA. HeUotropium eu-
ropaeum.
   VERS.   Worms.
   VERSION.  Turning.
   VERTEBRA.   From  vertere, to
turn.  One  of the bones of  the spinal
column. The vertebrae are divided into
 seven cervical, twelve dorsal and five
 lumbar.
   VERTEBRAL.   Vertebralk.  Per-
 taining to the vertebrae.
   Vertebral Artery.  A branch of
 the subclavian artery passing  through
 the foramina in the transverse processes
 ofthe vertebrae and entering the cranium
 where  it unites with its fellow to form
 the basilary artery.
   Vertebral Column.  The spine.
   Vertebral Disease.   Rachitis.
   Vertebral Ligaments.  The liga-
 ments of the vertebrae, distinguished in-
 to anterior, and posterior.
   VERTEBRATA. Animate famish-
 ed with a spine.
   VERTEX.   The top of the head.
   VERTICAL.   Verticalk.  Perpen-
 dicular.
  VERTI'GO.  From vertere, to turn.
Giddiness;   swimming of the  head,
with more or less confusion of mind.
  VERUMONTANUM.   An emi-
nence in the urethra of men before the
neck of the bladder, called  also, caput
gallinagink.
  VERSA'NIA.  Madness.
  VERSA'NLE.  An order in the class
Neurosis of Dr. Cullen, comprising dis-
eases in which the mind  is impaired,
without coma or fever.
  VERVAIN.  Verbena officinalis.
  VESICA. A bladder.
  Vesica Biliaria.  The gall-bladder.
  Vesica Natato'ria. The air bladder
of fishes.
  Vesica Urinaria.  The urinary blad-
der.
  VESICAL.  Veskalk ;  from vesica,
a bladder.   Belonging, or  relating, to
the urinary  bladder.
  Vesical  Arteries.  The arteries of
the urinary bladder.
  VES'ICANTS.   Substances which
cause vesication.
  VESICATORY.  Vesicatorius ;—
from vesica, a bladder.  Blistering ap-
plications, as the powder of the cantha-
ris, or blistering fly, &c.
  VES'ICLE.  Vesicula.  Diminutive
of vesica, a  bladder.  A smaU bladder.
  VES'ICO-VAG'INAL    Vesico-va-
ginalk.  Relating  to the bladder and
vagina.
  VESICULA.   A vesicle.  In  Pa-
thology, an elevation of the cuticle fill-
ed  with  lymph,  which  is sometimes
opaque.
  Vesicula Fellis. The gaU-bladder.
  Vesicula Umbilicalis.  An umbil-
ical vesicle about the size of a common
 pea, seen about the fifteenth day  after
 fecundation, which begins to disappear
 after the seventeenth week.
   VESICULJE.  The plural of vesicu-
 la.  An  order in  Bateman's classifica-
 tion of cutaneous diseases.
   Vesiculje Divje Barbarje.  Con-
 fluent small pox.
   Vesiculje Gingivarum.  Aphthae. 
VIB
767
VIN
  Vesiculje Nabothi.  Nabothi ghn-
dulcc.  The mucous follicles in the in-
terior of the neck of the uterus.
  Vesiculje Pulmonales.   The air
cells of the lungs.
  Vesiculje Seminales. Twolobated
receptacles, each formed by the convo-
lutions of a single tube, and situated at
the under surface  of the base of the
bladder.  Their  excretory ducts, called
the ejacubtory  ducts,  open into the
urethra.  Their  use is  to receive the
semen from the  vasa deferentia.
  VESICULAR.  Vesicularis.  Hav-
ing the appearance of, or pertaining to,
vesicles, smaU cells, or bladders.
  Vesicular Fever.  Pemphigus.
  VES'PA. The name of a  genus of
insects.
  Vespa Crabro.  The hornet.
  Vespa Vulgaris.  The wasp.
  VES'SEL.   Vas.  A term  applied,
in Anatomy, to an elastic, tubular canal,
and distinguished according to its gen-
eral arrangement, into artery, vein, lym-
phatic and  absorbent.
   VESTI. Dissertation on Odontalgia,
by. Erf., 1697.
   VESTIBULE.    Vestibulum.   A
term applied, in Anatomy, to the cavity
of the internal ear.  Also, a triangular
space between the nymphae.
   VESTITUS. Clothing.
   VETA.   An acute pain in the head,
attended with  prostration;  a disease
common in the elevated  districts of
South America.
   VET'ERINARY.   Veterinarius.—
Pertaining to beasts of burden; hence
veterinary surgery,  veterinary medicine,
 Sec.
   VIA.  A way or passage.
   VIABILITY.  Viable.
   VIABLE. A term apphed to a new-
born  child whose organs are so formed
 and developed  as  to admit of its con-
 tinued existence.
   VLE LACHRYMALES.   The
 lachrymal passages.
   VIAL.  Phial.
   VIBI'CES.  The large purple spots
which appear under the skin in certain
malignant fevers.
  Vl'BRATORY.  From vibrare, to
quiver.   Vibrating; having a quiver-
ing, or quick osctilating motion; some-
times apptied  to  neuralgia, in which
the pain seems to vibrate among the
nerves.
  VIBRIS'S^E.     The  hairs which
grow on the inside of the nostrils.
  VIC'IA.   The  name of a genus of
plants.
  Vicia Faba.  The  common garden
bean.
  VICTORIALIS LONGA.  Album
victoriale.
  VIDIAN CANAL.   The pterygoid
canal.
  VIDIAN  NERVE.  The  posterior
branch of the spheno-palatine ganglion,
which proceeds backwards through the
 vidian or pterygoid canal to  the fora-
 men lacerum in the basis cranii, where
 it divides into two branches.
   VIGER.   Tract on Catarrh, Rheu-
 matism and Defects of the Teeth, by.
 Geneva, 1620 and 1624.
   VIGILANCE.  Insomnia; contin-
 ued Avakefulness.
   VILLI.  Small processes hke the pile
 of velvet.
   VILLOUS.  Vilbsus; from  villus,
 a hair.   Nappy;   shaggy;  rough; ap-
 plied, in Anatomy, to membranes cover-
 ed with soft papiUae  or  vUli; or to a
 velvet-tike arrangement  of  vessels or
 fibres.
   Villous Membranes.   The mucous
 membranes.
   VILLUS.  The papillae on the sur-
 face of mucous  membranes.   Also, a
 species of hairy pubescence.
   VIN'CA.   The name  of a genus of
 plants.
   Vinca Minor.    The lesser  peri-
 winkle.
   VINE.  Vitis  vinifera.
   Vine, Grape.   Vitis vinifera.
   Vine, White. White bryony.
   VINEGAR.  Acetum.  Impure acetic
 acid, prepared by fermentation. 
VIP
768
VIS
    Vinegar, Aromatic  Acetum aro-
  maticum.
    Vinegar of Colchicum.   Acetum
  colchici.
    Vinegar, Distilled.   Acetum dis-
  tillatum.
    Vinegar of Opium.   Acetum opii.
  Black drop.
    Vinegar of Spanish Flies.  Ace-
  tum cantharidis.
    Vinegar  of  Squills.     Acetum
  sciUae.
    VINUM.  Wine.
    Vinum Album Hispanum.  Sherry.
    Vinum Aloes.  Wine of aloes.
   Vinum Antimonii.     Antimonial
  wine.
   Vinum Colchici Radicis.  Wine of
 colchicum root.
   Vinum Colchici Seminis.  Wine of
 colchicum seed.
   Vinum Ergotje.  Wine of  ergot
   Vinum Gentianje. Wine of gentian.
   Vinum Ipecacuanhje.  Wine of ipe-
 cacuanha.
   Vinum Medica'ta.     Medicated
 wines.   Wines holding in solution one
 or  more medicinal  substances.
   Vinum Opii.  Wine of opium.
   Vinum Rhei.  Wine of rhubarb.
  Vinum Tabaci.  Wine of tobacco.
  Vinum Veratri  Albi.  Wine of
 white heUebore.
  VPOLA.   The name of a genus of
 plants.
  Viola Cani'na.  The dog violet.
  Viola Ipecacuanha. A plant which
 yields a species of ipecacuanha root.
  Viola Lutea.   Cheiranthus cheiri.
  Viola Odora'ta.  Sweet violet.
  Viola Palustris.  Pinguicula pa-
 lustris.
  Viola Tricolor. Heart's-ease.
  VIOLA'CE^E.  The violet  tribe of
dicotyledonous plants.
  VIOLACEOUS.   A  deep bluish
purple or violet color.
  VIOLA'RIA.  Viola.
  VIPER.   Vipera.   The  coluber
berus.
  Viper, Egyptian.  Aspis.
Scorzonera.
   Virginian snake-
    Viper Grass.
    VIPERARIA
  root.
    VIRGA AUREA.  The golden rod.
    VIRGIN'S BOWER.  Clematis vi-
  talba.
    VIRGULA.  The penis.
    VIRILITY.  Adult age; manhood.
    VIRULENT.  Virukntus.  Poison-
  ous ; pertaining to a virus.
    VIRUS.  A  poison.  In Pathology,
  the product of a disease, and  capable
  of producing that disease, by innocula-
  tion  or absorption, in a healthy indi-
  vidual.
   VIS. Force. PoAver. A term apphed,
 in Physiology, to the vital force and its
 effects.
   Vis a Tergo.   Any moving power
 acting from behind.
   Vis Elastica. Elasticity.
   Vis Insi'ta. That power by which a
 muscle, when irritated, contracts, inde-
 pendently of the will of  the animal.
   Vis Medica'trix  Natu'rje.    Vis
 conservatrix.  The healing poAver in an
 animated body.
   Vis Mor'tua.  That power in a mus-
 cle by which it contracts after the death
 of the animal.
   Vis Plastica.  Plastic force.  For-
 mative energy.
   Vis Vitje.  Vital force or power.
   VIS'CERA.  Plural of viscus.  The
 contents of the abdomen, thorax and
 cranium.
   VIS'CERAL.   Pertaining  to  the
 viscera.
   VISCIDITY.    Viscosity; sticky;
 clammy.
   VISCOSITY.   Viscidity.
   VIS'CUM.  The name of a genus
 of parasitical plants.
   Visoum Album.  The mistletoe.
   VIS'CUS.  An entrail.  One  of  the
 contents of the  abdomen, thorax or
 cranium.
   VISE.  An instrument for  griping
and holding hard  bodies, provided with
two jaws, which are closed by means of a
screw. The small bench-vise is used 
VIT
/
69
VOC
 in  the  mechanical laboratory  of the
 dentist.
   VISION. Visus ; from videre, visum,
 10  see.   The function by  which the
 s.ze, color, distance, &c, of bodies are
 pei/ceived; sight.
   Vision, Double.  Diplopia.
  VvS'UAL.  Visualk.   Concerning,
 or be.j.^ging to, vision.
  Visual Angle.  The  angle under
 which an  object is  seen;  the angle
 formed in the eye by the  crossing of
 two rays,  coming from the opposite
 points of an object.
  VISUS.   Vision.
  Vis us Acrior.  Nyctalopia.
  Visus Coloratus.  Colored vision.
  Visus Debilitas.  Weak-sighted.
  Visus Dimidiatus.  Hemiopia.
  Visus Diurnus.  Hemeralopia.
  Visus Duplicatus. Diplopia.
  Visus Juvenum.   Near-sightedness.
  Visus Nocturnus.  Nyctalopia.
  Visus Senilis.  Long-sightedness.
  VITA.  From vivere, to live.  Life.
  VITAL  FORCE.  The formative
 force.
  Vital Principle.   That principle,
 which, Avhen applied to organized bod-
 ies, controls their manifestations  and
 properties.
  VITALBA.   The traveler's  joy.
  VITALITY.   Vitalitas; from vita,
 life. The vital principle.
  VITELLINE.    Vitellinus;  from
 vitellus, the yolk of an egg.  Pertaining
 to the yolk of an egg. Also, of a yel-
 low or orange color.
  Vitelline Pedicle.   The  pedicle
 which connects the umbilical vesicle to
 the embryo.
  VITELLUS.   The yolk of an egg.
  VITEX.  The name  of a genus of
 plants.
  Vitex Agnus Castus.  The chaste
tree.
  VITILIGO.   From  vitulus, a  calf.
 Veal skin.  A term apphed  by  Celsus
to three  varieties of lepra, and  by Dr.
Willan to a tubercular disease, charac-
terized by  smooth, Avhite, shining tu-
     65
 bercles on the skin, interspersed with
 shining papulae.
   VITIS.  The name of a genus  of
 plants. Also, the grape.
   Vitis Alba. White bryonia.
   Vitis Corinthiaca.  The small rai-
 sins called currants.
   Vitis Idjea.  The cranberry plant.
   Vitis Marina.  Sea lentil.
   Vitis Vinif'era.  The grape vine.
   VIT'REOUS. Vitreus; from vitrum,
 glass.  Glassy; transparent;  pertain-
 ing to, resembling, or containing glass.
   Vitreous Humor of the eye. The
 transparent body which fills the globe
of the eye back of the crystalline lens.
   VITRIFICATION.  The act of con-
 verting any substance, by  heat, into a
 substance  resembling glass, as enamel
 paste  on mineral teeth.
   VITRIOL.  Sulphate of iron.
   Vitriol, Blue.  Sulphate of copper.
   Vitriol, Green. Sulphate of iron.
   Vitriol, Oil of. Sulphuric acid.
   Vitriol, White.  Sulphate of zinc.
   VITRIOLUM.  Sulphate of iron.
   Vitriolum Album.    Sulphate  of
 zinc.
   Vitriolum Cosruleum.  Sulphate
 of copper.
   Vitriolum Viride.    Sulphate  of
 iron.
   VITRUM.  Glass.
   Vitrum Antimonii.  Glass of anti-
 mony.
   VITTATUS. Spotted.
   VI VER'RA.  The name of a genus
 of digitigradous quadrupeds.
   Viverra Civetta.  The ash-colored
 weazel.
   Viverra Zibetha.  The civet cat.
   VIVIPAROUS.  From vivus, alive,
 and pario, I bring forth.   A term ap-
 plied  to animals which bring forth their
 young alive.
   VIVISECTION.  Vivkectio; from
 vivus, alive, and secare,  sectum, to cut.
 The dissection or opening of living ani-
 mals.
   VOCAL CHORDS.    Two liga-
 ments ; the inferior thyro-arytenoid liga- 
VOL
770
VUL
ments, attached in front to the receding
angle of the thyroid, and behind to
the lower part of the anterior angle of
arytenoid cartilage.
  VOICE.  Vox.  The  sound produ-
ced by the  vibration  of the air, while
traversing the larynx, either in escaping
from, or entering the trachea. The la-
rynx is the essential organ concerned in
its production.
  Voice,  Articulated.  Speech, or
voice modified  by the action of the
tongue, lips, velum, teeth  and other
parts of the mouth.
  VOLATILE. Vobtilk; from volere,
to fly.  Substances which have a  ten-
dency to evaporate at ordinary tempera-
tures, as ether, ammonia, &c.
  Volatile Alkali. Ammonia.
  Volatile Salt.   Subcarbonate of
ammonia.
  VOLATILIZATION.    The con-
version of volatilizable substances into
gas or vapor by heat.
  Volger's Odontalgic  Remedy.—
1$.—Pulv. mastic, 3 ij and gr. vij; pulv.
sandarac, 3 ij and  gr. vij ; pulv. drag-
on's blood, £) iss; pulv. opium, § i;
volatile oil of rosemary, gtt. viij ;  spirit
of scurvy  grass, a  sufficient quantity
to form a soft mass,  in which state, a
portion of it of the size of a pea is ap-
plied to the gum of the aching tooth.
   VOLTAIC  PILE.   A  number of
pairs of zinc and copper, or zinc and
stiver  disks, separated  by  pieces of
moistened woollen cloth.
   VOLTAISM.  Galvanism.
   VOL'UBLE.   Volubilk.   Rolling;
twining; ready motion of the tongue.
   VOL'UME   Dimensions; space oc-
cupied.
   VOL'UNTARY.  Pertaining to the
wtil.  A term applied, in Anatomy, to
muscles, which are put in action in obe-
dience to the wiU, and to motions re-
sulting therefrom.
  VOL'VULUS.  Ileac passion.
  VO'MER.  A plough-share.   The
bone which separates the nostrils from
each other, is so called from its shape.
  VOMTCA.  From vomere, to vomit.
A term applied, in Pathology, to an ab-
scess in  the substance of the lungs, and
generally formed by the suppuration of
tubercles.
  VOM'ITING   Vomitio.  A forcible
ejection  of solids and liquids from the
stomach, through  the oesophagus and
mouth.
  Vomiting of Blood.     Haemate-
mesis.
  VOMITIO.  Vomiting.
  VOMITORIUM.  An emetic.
  VOMITURITION.   Ineffectual ef-
forts to vomit; retching.
  VOMITUS.  Vomiting.
  VORACIOUS  APPETITE.   Bu-
limia.
  VOX.  The voice.
  VUL'NERARY. Vulnerarius; from
vulnus, a wound.  A term formerly ap-
plied  to substances which  were sup-
posed to assist the healing of wounds.
It is still much used by French writers.
  Vulnerary Water.  See Water of
D'Arquebusade.
  VUL'NUS.  A wound.
  VULSELLA.   The name of an in-
strument employed by the  ancients for
the extraction of teeth.
  VULTUS. Theface; the countenance.
  VULVA.  The uterus.   Also, the
external parts of generation in  the fe-
male.   The term  is applied, too, to the
foramen commune anterius of the brain.
  VULVAR.  Relating to the vulva.
  VULVA'RIA.   The stinking orach.
  VULVO-UTERINE CANAL. The
vagina. 
WAS             771              WAT
    WAGNER.  Dissertation  on Diffi-
  cult Dentition, by.  Jena, 1798.
    WAISTCOAT, STRAIT.  A strong
  coat, made of wash-leather,  and em-
  ployed for restraining the motions  of
  maniacs, and those  laboring under vio-
  lent delirium.
    WAITE,  G.    Surgeon  Dentists'
  Manual, by. London,  1830.   This  is
  an excellent work, and is principaUy de-
  voted to a description of the anatomical
  structures of the mouth.—Mr. Waite
  is  also author of one of the best works
  upon the gums that has ever been pub-
  lished, which was issued from the press
  about 1831.
    WAKEFULNESS.     Insomnia;
 sleeplessness.
   WAKE-ROBIN.    Arum  macula-
 turn.
   WALKEY.  On the  Diseases of
 the Teeth—their Origin Explained, by.
 London, 1793.
   WALKING.  The act by  which a
 person moves from  place  to place by
 means of  a succession of steps.
   WALL-FLOWER.   Cheiranthus
 cheiri.
   WALL-PELLITORY.  Parietaria
 officinalis.
  WALL-PEPPER.  Sedum acre.
  WALL-RUE. Asplenium murale.
  WALL WORT.  Sambucus ebulus.
  WALNUT-TREE.  Juglans regia.
  WARDROPER,  W. Author of  a
 popular Treatise  on the Structure, Dis-
 eases and Treatment of the Teeth; pub-
 lished, London,1838.
  WARENIUS.    Dissertation on
 Catarrh, and Tooth-Ache produced by
 it, by. Geneva, 1727.
  WART. Verruca.
  WASH.  A lotion.
  WASHERWOMAN'S  SCALL—
 Psoriasis diffusa.
  WASHING.   A term used to desig-
nate the process employed for sepa-
 rating particles of gold and other val-
 uable metallic substances from the ashes
 and cinders  of the work-shop  of the
 dentist and jeweler.
   WASP.  Vespa; a genus of insects
 like the bee, armed with a sting.
   WASTING.   Atrophy;  diminish-
 ing by destruction.
   Wasting of the Alveolar  Pro-
 cesses.  The gradual destruction of the
 alveoli which  attends  inflammation,
 turgescence and ulceration of the gums,
 from whatever cause  produced.  It is
 supposed, by some writers, to occur in
 old persons, spontaneously, but the au-
 thor is of opinion that  it is always the
 result of the chemical  action of a mor-
 bid secretion excited by disease in the
 gums or alveolo-dental membrane. See
 Gums, diseases of.
   Wasting of the Teeth.  See Abra-
 sion of the Teeth, spontaneous.
   WATCHFULNESS.    Wakeful-
 ness; sleeplessness.
   WATER.  Aqua;  hydor; vSap. A
 transparent fluid without color, smell
 or  taste,  consisting of eight parts by
 weight of oxygen, and  one of hydrogen.
   WATER-BRASH.  Pyrosis.
   Water-Cress.  Sisymbrium nastur-
 tium.
   Water-Cure.  Hydropathy.
  Water  of  D'Arquebusade, Le
 Maire's.  J^.—Fresh  leaves of sage,
 angelica,  absinthium, sariette, fennel,
 mentastrum, hyssop, balm, basilic, rue,
 thyme, marjoram, rosemary, origanum,
 calamus, serpolet, lavender, a a,   § iv;
 rectified spirit of wine, ft viij.  These
 plants are cut in coarse pieces, then in-
 fused for ten  or twelve  hours in the
 spirit of wine, foUowed by distillation
 in a water bath, to draw off aU the
 spiritous liquor,  which is afterwards
 closely bottled for use.
  Water, Distilled.   Aqua distil-
lata. 
WAX
72
WAX
  Water-Dock.   Rumex  hydrolapa-
thum.
  Water-Flag, Yellow.  Iris pseu-
dacorus.
  Water-Germander.    Teucrium
scordium.
  Water-Hemp.  Eupatorium canna-
binum.
  Water in the Head.   Hydroceph-
alus.
  Water  in  the  Chest.    Hydro-
thorkx.
  Water-Lily, White.   Nymphaea
alba.
  Water-Lily, Yellow.  Nymphaea
lutea.
  Water, Mineral.   Water holding
in solution different saline and gaseous
substances,  or possessed of medicinal
properties.
  Water-Parsnip. Sium nodiflorum.
  Water-Pepper;    Polygonum hy-
dropiper.
  W a te r-Pl a ntain. Alisma plantago.
  Water-Pox.  Varicella.
  Water-Zizania. Water-rice; ziza-
nia aquatica.
  WAVED.  Undulated.
  WAX.  Cera.    See Wax, yellow,
and Wax, white.
  Wax-Holder.  A  term applied, in
Dental Surgery,  to an instrument for
holding softened wax  while taking an
impression of the whole or any portion
of the  alveolar border  of either jaAV, or
the vault of the palate.  It consists of a
tin, copper or silver case, large enough
to receive either alveolar  ridge, with a
handle in  front.  The common  wax
holder  is made by soldering  a flaring
rim, about half an inch in width, to the
outer and inner edge of a plate of tin
or other metal, of a semi-circular shape,
like the alveolar border, and about five-
eighths of an inch in width, and to the
outside, in the centre of this "semi-circu-
lar encasement,  a  handle is  soldered.
But, as the alveolar arch in different
individuals varies in size, it is necessary
that the dentist should  be provided with
several wax-holders, and  one of a dif-
 ferent shape is required for the lower
 jaw than that used for the upper.
   Without an  instrument of this sort
 it is impossible to take an accurate im-
 pression of either jaw, and  Avith the
 one usually  employed, it is  often at-
 tended Avith great difficulty.   In fact,
 there are some cases in Avhich  it can-
 not be done, and for the purpose of se-
 curing a correct impression, Dr. Elliot
 recommends  that the Avax-holder be
 formed by swadging  between a  model
'and counter-model, obtained  from the
 impression first taken, a plate of copper
 in the same way that a metallic base is
 fitted.  The author has had occasion to
 adopt this method of procedure, and
 always with the most satisfactory result.
   Wax-Holder, Colburn's.  An im-
 provement on the common wax-holder,
 by G. F. J. Colburn,  dentist,  of Mor-
 ristown, N. J., consisting of two rims
 instead of one on the outer margin of
 the plate.  The outer rim is intended to
 protect the  impression  against injury
 from the  corners of the mouth in re-
 moving it.
  Wax-Holders, Cleaveland's. Five
 wax-holders, three for the upper, and
 two for the lower jaw, invented by Dr.
 J. A. Cleaveland, of Charleston, S. C.
 The only difference in those for the up-
 per jaw is in size.  The upper ones are
 so constructed  as to form a  complete
 covering or encasement for the superior
 alveolar ridge and roof of the mouth,
 with a handle about two inches in
 length.  Those for the  lower have a
'joint in the centre so that the arch may
 be widened or narrowed. at pleasure to
 fit the jaw.  One is intended to take an
 impression of the lower jaw with five or
 six  of the  front teeth, the other, for
 taking an impression  after the  loss of
 all the teeth.  They  may  be  made of
 silver or copper plate, but when the lat-
 ter metal is used it should be plated
 with silver, or galvanized. These wax-
 holders are better adapted to the purpose
 of taking impressions of the jaws than
 any which the author has seen. 
WEI              773              WEI
   Wax Impressions.  See Impression
 of the Mouth in Wax.
   Wax, Myrtle.  A wax of a pale
 grayish-green color, obtained from the
 fruit of myrica cerifera.
   Wax, White.  Cera alba. Bleached
 yeUoAV wax.
   Wax, Yellow. Cera flava. A pro-
 duct of the common bee, the apk mellifi-
 ca.
   Waxing Kernels.   In popular lan-
 guage an enlargement of the lymphatic
 glands in the groins.
   WEAKSIGHTEDNESS.   Asthe-
 nopia.
   WEANTNG. The separation ofthe
 infant permanently from the breast.
   WEARING OF THE TEETH.—
 See Abrasion of the Teeth, mechanical.
   WEB.   Teb.  A  term apphed, in
 Anatomy,  to certain  structures  from
 their appearance, as ceUular tissue, &c.
   Web-Eye.  Caligo.
   Web-Mucous.   The cellular mem-
 brane.
   WEDIL. Dissertation on First Den-
 tition, by.   Geneva, 1668.
  WEDGE-SHAPED.  Cuneiform.
  WEIGHTS AND  MEASURES.—
 The division of weights and measures
adopted  by  apothecaries, is  different
from the standards.

      1. Apothecaries' Weight.
  1 pound, ft>, contains 12 ounces.
1 ounce,  §,
1 drachm, 3,
1 scruple, 9,
1 grain, gr.
Miltilitre,
Centilitre,
Decilitre,
Litre,
Decalitre,
Hectolitre,
Kilolitre,
Myrialitre,
  65»
 8 drachms.
 3 scruples.
20 grains.
          2.  Troy Weight.

1 pound, ft j contains 12 ounces.
1 ounce, oz.,    "   20 pennyweights.
1 pennyweight, dwt. 24 grains.
1 grain, gr.
         ft.   oz.   dwt.   grs.
      Or, 1=12 = 240 = 5760

        3. Avoirdupok Weight.

  1 pound,lb,.contains 16 ounces.
  1 ounce, oz.,   "    16 drachms.
  1 drachm, dr.
   ft   oz.  dr.  grs.
Or,  1 = 16 = 256 = 7000
        1=  16=  437.5
             grammes.
            = 453.25
            = 28.328
1 =  27.34375 =  1.7705
  4. Apothecaries' or Wine Measure.

1 gaUon, C, contains 8 pints.
1 pint,  O,   "   16 ounces.
1 ounce, f. |, "    8 fluid drachms.
1 fluid drachm, f. 3 ,60 minims.
1 minim, 115. equals  1 drop of water.
    C.  O. f. §.  f.3.  Cubic in.
Or,  1=8 = 128 = 1024 = 231
         1 _  16 =  128 =  28.875
                1=    8=   1.8047
                       1 =   0.2256

5. Imperial Measure,  adopted by the
  London  and Edinburgh  Pharmaco-
  pozias.
      C    O    f. I      f . 3
      1 = 8  = 160 =  1280
            1  =  20  =  160
                   1  =    8
French  Weights  and Measures
      1. Measures of Capacity.
    English cubic inches.
 =         .061028
 =         .610280
 =        6.102800
 =       61.028000
 =      610.280000
 —     6102.800000
 =    61028.000000
 =   610280.000000
  Wine measure.
16.2318 minims.
 2.7053 fluid drachms.
 3.3816 fluid ounces.
 2.1135 pints.
 2.6419 gaUons. 
WEL
774
WEL
			2. Measure of	Le	ngi	h.	
Millimetre,		=	.03937				
Centimetre,		=	.39371			English Measures.	
Decimetre,		=	3.93710			Mil. Fur.	Yds. Feet. Inches.
Metre,		=	39.37100			0 0	1 0 3.371
Decametre,		=	393.71000			0 0	10 2 9.7
Hecatometre,		=	3937.10000			0 0	109 1 1
KUometre,		=	39371.00000			0 4	213 1 10.2
Myriametre,			393710.00000 3. JVeig English grains.	hts.		6 1	156 0 6
Milligramme,	=		.0154				
Centigramme,	=		.1544				
Decigramme,	=		1.5444		Troy.		Avoirdupok.
Gramme,	=		15.4440	Lbs	02	. dwt. gi	Lbs. oz. dr.
Decagramme,	=		154.4402 =	0	0	6 10.3 =00 5.65	
Hectogramme,	=		1544.4023 =	0	3	4 7.4 = 0 3 8.5	
Kilogramme,	=		15444.0234 =	2	8	3 2	= 235
Myriagramme,	=	154440.2344 = 26			9	10 20	= 22 1 2
  WELD.-  The dyers' weed.
  WELDING.   The act or process of
uniting two pieces of metal at a high
heat.   It is  done by pressure or ham-
mering.  Iron is almost the  only metal
capable of being thus united.
  Welding Heat.  A white heat.
  WELLS, HORACE. Horace Wells
was born at Hartford, New Hampshire,
January 21st,  1815, but his father soon
after moved to Westminster, Vermont,
where the  early life  of Horace  was
spent  until he  left  for school.   His
father afforded him the means ofthe
best academical education within reach,
which opportunities were faithfuUy im-
proved.  To  a  quick  perception,  he
united  a patient inquiring  habit  of
thought—qualities, which, in his  sub-
sequent life, were more fully developed.
  He commenced the study of dental
surgery, in Boston, in  1834, where,
after  having completed his studentship,
he opened an office for practice, but not
meeting with  as  much  encouragement
as he anticipated, he moved  in  1836,
to Hartford, Connecticut.  Being pos-
sessed of a gentlemanly and winning
deportment, much mechanical ingenui-
ty, and  ambitious to excel  in his pro-
fession,  he soon  obtained  a large and
rapidly  increasing practice.  In 1838,
he published  a well written  popular
treatise  on the teeth.   The  style of
many of his instruments were originat-
ed by himself.
  As a practitioner, Mr. WeUs enjoyed
a high reputation, but his  unremitting
application to the duties of his profes-
sion, at length impaired his health, com-
pelling him to frequent absences on this
account.
  The discovery  of the means  for the
prevention of pain in surgical opera-
tions engaged his attention as early as
1844, and for this purpose, he employ-
ed, in November of the same year, the
nitrous  oxyd gas.  It is also claimed
that he discovered the apphcation of
"ether and other vapors" as a means of
accomplishing the same  end.* In De-
  * It is proper to state here that the merit
ofthe discovery of the practicability of pro-
ducing insensibility  by  the inhalation of the
vapor of ether has recently been awarded by
the trustees of the Massachusetts General
Hospital, and  also by a committee of tha
United States congress to Dr. Morton ot Bos-
ton. 
WES               775              WHI
cember, 1844, he went to Boston  for
the purpose of making known his dis-
covery, and  while  there he  addressed
the medical class of Dr. Warren on the
subject, and administered  the nitrous
oxyd gas to a person who wished to
have a tooth extracted, but not with en-
tire success.
  In the winter of 1846, he visited Lon-
don and Paris, where he was kindly re-
ceived, and returned in the  spring of
1847.  The  following summer he re-
ceived a vote of thanks from the Gener-
al Assembly of Connecticut  for his
discovery.  In January, 1848, he open-
ed an office for the practice of his pro-
fession in New York, but deeply inter-
ested in the apphcation of gas for the
prevention  of pain, he attended the
hospital in that  city, and administered
it, in different forms, with much  suc-
cess, during a number of severe surgi-
cal operations.   At the same time he
commenced a series of experiments up-
on his own person, of inhaling the vapor
of chloroform, then recently discovered,
and with the effects of which he seems
not to   have been fully  acquainted.
These, which continued for some days,
together Avith the  excitement incident
to the question, operating on his highly
excited nervous  system, destroyed his
reason, and ultimately led to the destruc-
tion of his life.
  WEN.   A circumscribed, indolent
tumor, without inflammation or change
of color of the skin.  It may occur on
almost any part of the body, and usual-
ly consists of sebaceous matter.
  WESTCOTT, AMOS.  Author of
a Dissertation on Dental Caries,  pub-
lished in the fourth volume ofthe Amer-
ican Journal of Dental Science.  In
this paper Dr. W. proves by a series of
very interesting experiments that caries
of the  teeth is produced  by external
chemical agents.   Among his  other
contributions to the literature of dental
surgery, are, 1. A Report on the Use of
Amalgam, for filhng teeth, showing that
this article cannot be used either bene-
ficiaUy or even with impunity.  2. The
Claims of Medical Science  upon the
Practitioner of Dental Surgery.  3. Pro-
trusion ofthe Lower Jaw.  4. Dentistry
and  Physic.  5. Duties and Privileges
of the Members of the American Socie-
ty of Dental Surgeons. 6. Observations
on the Use of Arsenic as a remedy for
Tooth-ache, or for destroying the Lin-
ing Membrane  of a  Tooth.  7. Intro-
ductory  Lecture, delivered before  the
Class of the Baltimore College  of Den-
tal Surgery, Baltimore, 1846-7. Vale-
dictory Address,  delivered before  the
graduating class of the same institution.
Baltimore, 1847.  Dr. Westcott is also
one of the editors of the American Jour-
nal of Dental Science, beginning with
volume fifth,  and to the pages of which
he has contributed very liberally.
  WEYLAND. Dissertation on Max-
tilary Fetor, complicated with Fistu-
lous Ulcer, near the inner angle of the
eye, by.  Argent, 1771.
  WHEAL. An elevation ofthe skin,
seen in some forms of nettle-rash, hke
that produced by the stroke of a whip.
  WHEAT.  Triticum.
  Wheat, Buck.   Polygonum fago-
pyrum.
  Wheat, Indian.  Zea  mays.
  WHEEZING.   Noisy  respiration
occasioned by obstruction of the air pas-
sages.
  WHELK.  A wrinkle; a protuber-
ance ; a pustule.
  WHELK'Y.  Protuberant; round-
ed.
  WHEY.  The serum of milk, sepa-
rated from the coagulable part.
  Whey, Rennet.  Serum lactis.
  WHIS'KY.    A spiritous liquor ob-
tained from  corn, rye, oats, potatoes,
&c. by distillation.
  WHITE  ARSENIC.    Arsenious
acid.
  White Gum.  Strophulus.
  White Leg.   Phlegmasia dolens.
  White, Spanish.   Subnitrate  of
bismuth.
  White Swelling.  Hydarthrus. 
WIN
776
WOO
   White  Weed.   Chrysanthemum
 leucanthemum.
   White Wood. Liriodendron tulipif-
 erum.
   WHITE, J. D.  Author of an Ad-
 dress on the Organization of the Teeth,
 and the Destruction of the Dental Pulp;
 delivered before, the  Pennsylvania As-
 sociation of Dental Surgeons, and pub-
 lished in the Dental Intelligencer,  vol-
 ume second.  Dr. White is also author
 of a Paper on Plugging Teeth, publish-
 ed in the Dental News Letter.
   WHITE, RICHARD.  Advice on
 the Management of the Teeth, by. Lon-
 don, 1844.
   WHITES.  Leucorrhoea.
   WHITNEY, B.  T.   Author of a
 Paper on Capping the Nerve of a Tooth,
 pubhshed in the Dental Register of the
 West.
   WHITING.  Gadus  merlangus.
   WHITLOW.  Paronychia.
   WHOOPING-COUGH.  Pertussis.
   WHORTLEBERRY, BEARS'.—
 Arbutus uva ursi.
   Whortleberry, Red.  Vaccinium.
 Oxycoccus.
   WIDOW-WAIL.   Daphne mez-
 ereum.
   WILD.  A term apphed to an ex-
 pression of countenance indicative of
 strong mental emotion, as a wild bok.
   Wild Carrot.  Daucus sylvestris.
   Wild Cherry.  Prunus virginiana.
   Wild Cucumber.  Momordica ela-
 terium.
   WILDFIRE RASH.  Strophulus
 volaticus.
   WILLOW. Safix.
   Willow Herb.  Lythrum salicaria.
   Willow Herb, Rosebay. Eptio-
 bium angustifotium.
   Willow-Leaved  Oak.   Quercus
 pheUos.
   Willow, Rose.  Cornus sericea.
   Willow, Sweet.  Myrica gale.
   WINDY.  Flatulent.
   WINE.  Vinum.   The fermented
juice of the grape.  The term is also
 applied by chemists to all Uquors which
 have  become  spiritous by fermenta-
 tion.
   Wine, Antimonial. Vinum antimo-
 nii.
   Wine, Madeira.  The strongest of
 the white wines.  It has a slightly acid
 taste, and when good and of a proper
 age, a rich, nutty, aromatic flavor.
   Wine Measure.  See Weights and
 Measures.
   Wine, Port. A wine of a deep-pur-
 ple color, and when new, is astringent,
 strong and  slightly sweet, but it loses,
 in a considerable degree,  these proper-
 ties, by age, and acquires more flavor.
   Wine, Sherry.  A deep-amber col-
 ored wine,  of a pleasant aromatic fla-
 vor and fragrancy, without acidity.
   Wine, Teneriffe.  A white wine,
 of a shghtly acid taste, and when good,
 of a pleasant aromatic flavor.
   Wine  Vinegar.  A vinegar about
 one-sixth stronger than pure malt vine-
 gar. There are two kinds;  the white
 wine vinegar, and the red wine vinegar.
  WING.  Ala.
  WINTER BERRY.  Black alder.
  Winter Cherry.  Physalis alkeken-
 gi-
  Winter  Green.  Chimaphtila um-
 bellata.  The gaultheria is also known
 in many parts of the  country by this
 name.
  WINTERA AROMATICA.  Win-
 ter's bark.
  WINTER'S BARK.  Wintera aro-
 matica.
  WITCH-HAZEL.  Hamamehsvir-
ginica.
  WOAD.  Isatis tinctoria.
  WOLFSBANE.    Aconitum  na-
 pellus.
  WOMB.  Uterus.
  Womb, Falling of the.  Prolap-
sus uteri.
  WOOD.  Lignum.
  Wood, Betony.  Betonica officinalis.
  Wood-Cock.  Scolopax rusticola.
  Wood-Louse.  Oniscus aseUus.
  Wood-Naphtha. Pyroacetic spirit.
  Wood-Sorrel.  Oxalis acetoseUa. 
WOO
777
wou
  Wood Spirit.   Pyroxylic spirit.
  WOODY NIGHTSHADE.  Bitter-
sweet.
  WOOFFENDALE,  ROBERT.—
surgeon dentist, was born in Sheffield,
Yorkshire,  England, 1742, where he
lived until he was twenty years of age,
when he went to London and served an
apprenticeship with Messrs White and
Gipps, druggist.   While  here  he be-
came acquainted  with Mr. Berdmore,
dentist to king George the Third, and
after completing his apprenticeship with
Messrs. White and  Gipps,  he placed
himself under  his   instruction, with
whom he remained until he was deem-
ed qualified to commence practice as a
dentist, when, after disposing of some
property left him by his father, he came
to New York, where he arrived, Octo-
ber 30th, 1766.  So  far as the author
has been able to learn, he was the first
regular  dentist in the  United States.
He practiced his profession in this coun-
try until March,  1768, when he return-
ed to England, but while here,  he con-
structed an entire set of artificial teeth
for William  Walton,  Esq., of New
York.
   On his return to England, Mr. Woof-
fendale commenced practice in Sheffield,
his native  place, but in  a short time
moved to Liverpool where he continued
to exercise  the duties of his profession
for fourteen years.  But about this time
Mr. Berdmore having died, he went  to
London where he soon succeeded in ob-
taining a large practice.  But  a short
time before, he wrote a small treatise on
the teeth, Avhich was published in 1783.
This work is entitled Practical Obser-
vations on the Human  Teeth,  and
wiU compare favorably with any trea-
tise, Avhich at that time, had been pub-
lished in England.
   Mr.  Wooffendale  remained  in Lon-
don untU 1795, when, after an absence
of tAventy-seven  years, he,returned  to
the United States and resumed his prac-
tice in New York, but at the expiration
of tAvo years, he retired with his family
to a farm on Long Island, leaving his
son John Wooffendale to take  charge
of his professional business.   He died
October 3d, 1828, in the eighty-seventh
year of his age.
  WORK  TABLE.   In Mechanical
Dentktry, the table on which the opera-
tor places the implements which he em-
ploys in the construction of  a piece of
dental mechanism, provided Avith one
or more smaU drawers, and a place for
receiving the clippings and filings of the
metal which he uses in its fabrication.
  WORM-BARK.  Andira inermis.
  Worm Diseases.  Helminthiasis.
  Worm Grass, Perennial. Spigelia
marUandica.
  Worm, Guinea. Dracunculus.
  WORMS. Vermes.  In Zoobgy,  a
term applied to the different divisions
of intervertebrata.  The term  vermes,
however, is generaUy restricted to intes-
tinal worms.
  WORMSEED.   The seeds of the
chenopodium anthelminticum.  Also, the
flowers, tops and seeds of the artemkia
santonica.
  Wormseed Oil.   The essential oil
of the chenopodium anthelminticum.
  WORMWOOD.  Absinthium.
  WORT.   An infusion of malt.
  Wort, St. John's.  Hypericum per-
foratum.
  WOUND.  Vulnus.  In Surgery, a
solution of continuity in any of the soft
tissues of the body, produced by exter-
nal violence.
  Wound, Contused.   A wound pro-
duced by a blunt instrument or body.
   Wound, Incised.  A wound inflict-
ed by a cutting instrument.
   Wound, Lacerated. When any of
the soft parts of the body are torn, it  is
termed a lacerated wound.
  Wound, Punctured.   A  wound
made with a pointed instrument.
  Wound,  Poisoned.   A wound  in
which some venomous substance  is  in-
troduced.
  Wound,  Gunshot.    A contused
wound. 
YAR
778
YEA
WRENCH.  A sprain.
WRINKLE.   A furrow in the skin.
WRIST.  Carpus.
WRYNECK.  Tortkollk.  A per-
manent inclination of the head to one
side, arising from a contraction of the
integuments  or the sterno-mastoid  or
platysma myoides muscle.
X.
  XALAPPA.  Jalap.
  XAN'THIUM.  The name of a ge-
nus of plants.
  Xanthium Strumarium. The lesser
burdock.
  Xanthochymus Ovaliformis.  One
of the trees yielding gamboge.
  XANTHOP'SIA. From %avBos, yel-
low, and otys, vision.  Yellow vision;
a defect of sight, as sometimes occurs
vi jaundice, in  which objects appear
yellow.
  XANTHORRHPZA.   The name
of a genus of plants.
  Xanthorrhiza Apiifolia.   Xan-
thorrhiza tinctoria. YeUow root.
  XANTHORRHOZ'A.   The name
of a genus of plants.
  Xanthorrhcea  Hasti'lis.   Xan-
thorrhaza arborea.  The grass tree of
New South Wales.
  XANTHOS.  Yellow. .
  XANTHOX YLUM.  The name of
a genus of trees.
  Xanthoxylum Fraxin'eum.   The
shrubby prickly ash; tooth-ache bush.
  XANTOLINA.  Artemisia santoni-
ca.
  XERA'SIA.   From  g^poj, dry.  A
disease of the hair characterized by
dryness and cessation of growth.
  XEROCOLLYR'IUM.  A dry col-
lyrium.
  XEROPHTHAL'MIA. From&jpoj,
dry, and o$9aX{iia, inflammation of the
eye. Dry inflammation of the eye.
  XI'PHOID. Xiphoides;  fromf-ujioj,
a sword, and eioos,  likeness.  A  term
applied, in  Anatomy, to an appendix
which terminates the lower part of the
sternum from  its  resemblance  to  a
sword.
  XIPHOSURA. From |^oj, a sword,
and ovpa, a tail. A tribe of crustaceans,
in which the body terminates posterior-
ly in a long, hard, sAvord-shaped ap-
pendage.
  XYLO-ALOES.  Aloes wood.
  XYLOBALSAMUM.   Balm  of
Gilead, or balsam of Mecca tree.
  XYLOSTROMA GIGANTEUM.
Oak-leather.
  YAM. An esculent root, principally
obtained from dwscorea; the abta, bul-
bifera, aind saliva.
  YARROW.   AchiUea miUefolium.
  YAWNING. Gaping; foUowed by
prolonged and sonorous expiration.
  YAWS.  See Frambccsia.
  YEAST.  Fermentum. 
ZIN              779               ZIN
  Yeast Cataplasm. A yeast poul-
tice.
  YELLOW ARSENIC. The yellow
sulphuret of arsenic.
  Yellow Berry. Podophyllum mon-
tanum.
  Yellow Fever. See Fever, yellow.
  Yellow Root.  Xanthorrhiza apti-
foha.
  Yellow  Sanders. Santalum al-
bum.
  Yellow Wash.   Corrosive subli-
mate and hme-water.
  ZAFFRAN.  The saffron plant.
  ZAFFRE. Impure oxyd of cobalt.
  ZAMIA  INTEGRIFOLIA.   The
Florida arrow-root is furnished by this
and other species of zamia.
  ZARSA.  Smilex sarsapartila.
  ZBONATREIT.  On Second Den-
tition, by.  Leipsic, 1738.
  ZEA.  The name of a genus  of
plants.
  Zea Mays. Indian corn.
  ZEDOA'RIA.  Zedoary;  kasmpfe-
ria rotunda.
  ZEIDLER.  Dissertation on Pain of
the Teeth, by.  Leipsic,  1631.
  ZEINE.  An albuminous body  of
corn.
  ZERNA.  An ulcerated tetter.
  ZERO.  A cypher; the commence-
ment of any scale marked 0. The point
from which a thermometer is graduat-
ed.  The zero of Fahr. is 32° below the
melting point of ice.
  ZERUM'BET.  The root stalk  of
curcuma zerumbet.
  ZIBETH'UM.  The civet.
  ZIG'ZAG.   Flexuosus; something
that has short angles.
  ZINC.  Zincum. A briUiant  metal
of a  bluish-white  color, harder  than
lead, but less malleable than either cop-
  YEWTREE. Taxus baccata.
  YOLK OF EGG. Vitellus.
  YOUTH.  Adolescence.
  YPSILOGLOSSUS. The hyo-glos-
sus muscle.
  YRIDES. Orpimint.
  YT'TRIA.   An  earth of a white
color.
  YTTRIUM.  The metallic basis of
yttria.
  YUCCA.  The name of a genus of
plants.
  Yucca Gloriosa.  Adam's needle.
per, tin or lead. It fuses at 700° Fahr.
It is much used in the arts, and for the
production of galvanism.  In Mechani-
cal Dentktry, it is used  for models in
striking up gold and other bases for ar-
tificial teeth. In ordinary  cases, it being
much harder  than lead  or  tin, it an-
swers as weU for this purpose as cop-
per or brass.
  Zinc, Butter of.  Chloride of zinc.
  ZINCHUM. Zincum.
  ZINCI ACETAS.  Acetate of zinc.
  Zinci Carbonas Impura.  Calamine.
Native impure carbonate of zinc.
  Zinci Carbonas Prjeparatus. Pre-
pared carbonate  of  zinc.   Prepared
calamine.
  Zinci Chloridum. Chloride of zinc.
Butter of zinc.
  Zinci, Cyanuretum.  Cyanuret of
zinc.
  Zinci Ferrocyanuretum.   Ferro-
cyanuret of zinc.
  Zinci Iodidum. Iodide of zinc.
  Zinci Oxioum. Oxyd  of zinc.
  Zinci Sulphas. Sulphate  of zinc.
  Zinci Valerianas.  Valerianate of
zinc.
  ZINCUM. Zinc.
  ZIN'GIBER. Zingibers.  The name
of a genus of plants.
Z. 
ZOO               7S0              ZYT
  Zingiber Album.  White ginger.
  Zingiber  Germanicum.   Aurum
maculatum.
  Zingiber Nigrum. Black ginger.
  Zingiber Officinale. The ginger
plant.
  ZINZIBER. Zingiber.
  ZIRGLER, FR.  On the Chief Dis-
eases in the Cavities of the Os Frontis,
and those of  the Upper and  Lower
JaAvs, by.  Rinteln, 1750.
  ZIZA'NIA.  The name of a genus
of plants.
  Zizania Aquat'ica. Water rice.
  ZOANTHRO'PIA. From fwov, an
animal, and avBpartos, a man. A  spe-
cies of melancholy in which the patient
believes himself transformed into an
animal.
  ZOE.  Life.
  ZONA. A  zone.
  Zona Ciliaris.  The ciliary ring of
the eye.
  Zona Herpetica.  Herpes zoster.
  Zona Pellu'cida.  A transparent
spot in the young ovum.
  Zona Tendino'sa.  A whitish circle
around the auriculo-ventricular orifice
of the heart.
  ZONE.  A girdle, or belt.
  ZONULA.  A little zone.
  ZOOCHY'MY.   Animal chemis-
try.
  ZOOG'ENY. Zoogenia;  from?«oi>,
an animal, and yeveais, generation.—
Zoogenesk. The doctrine of the devel-
opment and growth of animals.
  ZOOLOGY. Zoobgia;  from £aov,
an animal, and toyoj, a  discourse.  A
treatise on animals.
  ZOON. An animal.
  ZOONIC.   Relating to animal sub-
stances.
  ZOONOM'IA.  From Saov, an ani-
mal, and vouos, a law.  The laws of or-
ganic Ufe.
  ZO'OPHYTE.  Zoophyton;  from
£aov,  an animal, and $vtov, a plant.
The lowest class of animals, as the en-
tozoa, infusoria and sponges.
  ZOOSIS.  Animation.
  ZOOT'OMY. Zootomia ; from £wov,
an animal, and teuva, I cut.  The dis-
section of animals.  Comparative anat-
omy.
  ZOSTER. The shingles.
  ZOZAR.  Saccharum.
  ZUCHAR.  The  Arabic  name for
sugar.
  ZULAPIUM.  A  julep.
  ZYGO'MA. From fryos, a yoke. The
opening under  the zygomatic process
of the temporal bone and os malae.
  ZYGOMATIC. Zygomatkus. Per-
taining tothe zygoma.
  Zygomatic Process.   A process of
the temporal bone, which, by  its articu-
lation with the posterior angle of the
os malae, forms the zygomatic arch.
  Zygomatic Suture.  The articula-
tion of the zygomatic process with the
malar bone.
  ZYGOMATICUS MAJOR. A long,
narrow  muscle which  arises from the
malar bone near the  zygomatic suture,
and  is  inserted into the angle of the
mouth.
  Zygomaticus Minor.  This muscle
arises from the anterior part of the ma-
lar bone, and is inserted in  the upper
lip above the corner of the mouth.
  ZYGOPHYL'LACE^E.  The bean
caper tribe of dicotyledonous plants.
  ZYGOPHYL'LUM fabago. a
Syrian and mauritanic plant.
   ZYME.  Ferment
  ZYMO'SIS.  Fermentation.
   ZYMOT'IC. Zymotkus; from fruoa,
to ferment.  An epidemic, endemic, or
contagious affection.
   ZYTHOGALA.  Posset,  a mixture
 of beer and milk. 
 
 
 
1/
 :' "I'hrr'-^'V'i;':!.







 '.■•'■*■ :\p^'^i^
 .. ■Mr,.i;.:i::,..'' ;...«|rf-(
■•;. !t.-^^i>^V!'.Mir*
■ ' . .  . . it. ::L.'.'.'' . - ,*>'

iH

i

W

iiHS

i*cfi

PS


 .  ■  ••.•■.v.-'w.^j.



'  "•■■■■ '■'■'•. ;#'i'j

. .. .j-'.fi.j,..

.•v^s
:-.3lS!'

ififi